<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<rss version="2.0" xmlns:itunes="http://www.itunes.com/dtds/podcast-1.0.dtd" xmlns:googleplay="http://www.google.com/schemas/play-podcasts/1.0" xmlns:atom="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xmlns:media="http://search.yahoo.com/mrss/" xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/">
  <channel>
    <atom:link href="https://feeds.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5459175296" rel="self" type="application/rss+xml"/>
    <title>Launch Your Box Podcast with Sarah Williams | Start, Launch, and Grow Your Subscription Box</title>
    <link>https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</link>
    <language>en</language>
    <copyright>2021-2026 Sarah Williams</copyright>
    <description>8 years ago I had a dream to start a Subscription Box service full of goodies for women to treat themselves and nurture the importance of self care. It took me a full 18 months to make it happen! I was paralyzed by ‘all the things’ I had to figure out with no one to turn to for guidance. That is why I created Launch Your Box! Maybe you need some direction on how to begin, or you are ready to grow your subscriber base. Either way, it all starts with an idea that can turn into a constant reoccurring revenue, a raving fan base, and a business to love. I will help you... Take your first steps and know where to start. Figuring out the logistics: packing, shipping, boxes, oh my! Learn how to launch, from idea to sales. Scale that box to the next level, go big or go home!</description>
    <image>
      <url>https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c5b95026-b0bf-11ed-8010-5b7704a61708/image/7601025841be531ecefc49701676d358.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress</url>
      <title>Launch Your Box Podcast with Sarah Williams | Start, Launch, and Grow Your Subscription Box</title>
      <link>https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</link>
    </image>
    <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
    <itunes:type>episodic</itunes:type>
    <itunes:subtitle></itunes:subtitle>
    <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
    <itunes:summary>8 years ago I had a dream to start a Subscription Box service full of goodies for women to treat themselves and nurture the importance of self care. It took me a full 18 months to make it happen! I was paralyzed by ‘all the things’ I had to figure out with no one to turn to for guidance. That is why I created Launch Your Box! Maybe you need some direction on how to begin, or you are ready to grow your subscriber base. Either way, it all starts with an idea that can turn into a constant reoccurring revenue, a raving fan base, and a business to love. I will help you... Take your first steps and know where to start. Figuring out the logistics: packing, shipping, boxes, oh my! Learn how to launch, from idea to sales. Scale that box to the next level, go big or go home!</itunes:summary>
    <content:encoded>
      <![CDATA[<p>8 years ago I had a dream to start a Subscription Box service full of goodies for women to treat themselves and nurture the importance of self care. It took me a full 18 months to make it happen! I was paralyzed by ‘all the things’ I had to figure out with no one to turn to for guidance. That is why I created Launch Your Box! Maybe you need some direction on how to begin, or you are ready to grow your subscriber base. Either way, it all starts with an idea that can turn into a constant reoccurring revenue, a raving fan base, and a business to love. I will help you... Take your first steps and know where to start. Figuring out the logistics: packing, shipping, boxes, oh my! Learn how to launch, from idea to sales. Scale that box to the next level, go big or go home!</p>]]>
    </content:encoded>
    <itunes:owner>
      <itunes:name>Sarah Williams</itunes:name>
      <itunes:email>launchyourboxpodcast@gmail.com</itunes:email>
    </itunes:owner>
    <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c5b95026-b0bf-11ed-8010-5b7704a61708/image/7601025841be531ecefc49701676d358.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
    <itunes:category text="Business">
      <itunes:category text="Entrepreneurship"/>
    </itunes:category>
    <itunes:category text="Education">
      <itunes:category text="How To"/>
      <itunes:category text="Courses"/>
    </itunes:category>
    <itunes:new-feed-url>https://feeds.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5459175296</itunes:new-feed-url>
    <item>
      <title>250: How to Start a Subscription Box (8 Steps to Launch Successfully)</title>
      <description>If you’ve been sitting on a subscription box idea but feel overwhelmed about where to start, this episode is your roadmap.



  
“I have an idea, but I don’t know what to do next.”



  
“I feel stuck.”



  
“I don’t want to do it wrong.”





Most people aren’t stuck because they’re not capable. They’re stuck because they’re doing the steps out of order.



So in this episode, I’m walking you through the exact 8 steps to go from idea to shipping your first box with clarity and confidence.



Step 1: Start With the Person, Not the Product

Your subscription box is not about the products inside. It’s about the person you’re serving. Instead of asking, “What should I put in my box?” Start with:



  
Who is this for?



  
What problem am I solving?





Because even if it doesn’t feel like a “problem,” it is. People don’t buy products. They buy how those products make them feel: organized, relaxed, confident, seen. If you can clearly describe your ideal customer in one sentence and she immediately feels like, “That’s for me,” you’re on the right track.



Step 2: Build Your Audience Before You Launch

Don’t wait until your box is ready to find customers. You need people before you have something to sell. Your job right now isn’t to sell, it’s to invite people into the journey.



  
Share behind-the-scenes moments



  
Ask for input (polls, naming, product ideas)



  
Let people watch you build





And remember, it doesn’t have to be perfect. It just has to be real.



Step 3: Plan Your First 3–6 Months of Boxes

Before you buy anything, map out your themes and product ideas for the first few months. Planning ahead:


  
Makes sourcing easier



  
Simplifies your content



  
Creates a more consistent experience for your customers




It also keeps you from scrambling every single month. When you know what’s coming next, you make better decisions and you move with more confidence.



Step 4: Price for Profit (Not Just Sales)

This is a business, not a hobby. Once you’ve planned your boxes, then you start sourcing and you price with intention. A good starting goal is at least a 40% profit margin, with room to grow from there.



And don’t forget the hidden costs:


  
Shipping



  
Packaging



  
Fees



  
Replacements




Because making sales doesn’t always mean making money. This step is about building something sustainable that supports you long-term.



Step 5: Build a Warm, Ready-to-Buy Waitlist

Before you launch, you need people who are already excited to buy. That’s what your waitlist is for. Think of it as warming up the room before you make the offer. Use social media to grow your list, and email to nurture it:


  
Share your story



  
Show sneak peeks



  
Reveal themes



  
Take them behind the scenes




People don’t just buy the box, they buy into you and connection is what turns interest into action.



Step 6: Keep Packaging Simple (At First)

Packaging matters but not as much as you think in the beginning. Choose packaging based on what’s going inside the box, and keep it simple and cost-effective. You can always upgrade later.



In the early days, your customers care more about what’s inside than the box it came in. Let your product lead, and let your packaging grow with your business.



Step 7: Plan Your Launch Before Launch Day

A successful launch doesn’t start on launch day. It starts weeks before. Give yourself 2–4 weeks to build excitement:


  
Talk about your box consistently



  
Share sneak peeks and progress



  
Repeat your message (more than you think you need to)




Your energy and consistency are what build momentum.



Step 8: Pack and Ship Your First Box

This is the moment where it all becomes real. Your first shipment will likely be a mix of excitement, chaos, and pride. 



Keep things simple:


  
Batch your packing



  
Create a basic workflow



  
Do quality checks




And document everything. Photos, videos, behind-the-scenes moments all make up the kind of content that fuels your future marketing.



Most importantly, celebrate it. Because this is a big deal. Success comes from doing the steps in the right order. Not skipping ahead. Not rushing. Not trying to do everything at once. Just taking the next step.



So ask yourself, “What step am I skipping right now?” Because you don’t need everything figured out. You just need to move forward.



If you want help mapping out your first six months of boxes, I’d love for you to join me inside my 6 in 60 Workshop.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 29 Apr 2026 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Start a Subscription Box (8 Steps to Launch Successfully)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>3</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>250</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode, and let’s map out your next steps together so you can move from “I have an idea” to “I’m actually doing this” with clarity, confidence, and a plan that works. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you’ve been sitting on a subscription box idea but feel overwhelmed about where to start, this episode is your roadmap.



  
“I have an idea, but I don’t know what to do next.”



  
“I feel stuck.”



  
“I don’t want to do it wrong.”





Most people aren’t stuck because they’re not capable. They’re stuck because they’re doing the steps out of order.



So in this episode, I’m walking you through the exact 8 steps to go from idea to shipping your first box with clarity and confidence.



Step 1: Start With the Person, Not the Product

Your subscription box is not about the products inside. It’s about the person you’re serving. Instead of asking, “What should I put in my box?” Start with:



  
Who is this for?



  
What problem am I solving?





Because even if it doesn’t feel like a “problem,” it is. People don’t buy products. They buy how those products make them feel: organized, relaxed, confident, seen. If you can clearly describe your ideal customer in one sentence and she immediately feels like, “That’s for me,” you’re on the right track.



Step 2: Build Your Audience Before You Launch

Don’t wait until your box is ready to find customers. You need people before you have something to sell. Your job right now isn’t to sell, it’s to invite people into the journey.



  
Share behind-the-scenes moments



  
Ask for input (polls, naming, product ideas)



  
Let people watch you build





And remember, it doesn’t have to be perfect. It just has to be real.



Step 3: Plan Your First 3–6 Months of Boxes

Before you buy anything, map out your themes and product ideas for the first few months. Planning ahead:


  
Makes sourcing easier



  
Simplifies your content



  
Creates a more consistent experience for your customers




It also keeps you from scrambling every single month. When you know what’s coming next, you make better decisions and you move with more confidence.



Step 4: Price for Profit (Not Just Sales)

This is a business, not a hobby. Once you’ve planned your boxes, then you start sourcing and you price with intention. A good starting goal is at least a 40% profit margin, with room to grow from there.



And don’t forget the hidden costs:


  
Shipping



  
Packaging



  
Fees



  
Replacements




Because making sales doesn’t always mean making money. This step is about building something sustainable that supports you long-term.



Step 5: Build a Warm, Ready-to-Buy Waitlist

Before you launch, you need people who are already excited to buy. That’s what your waitlist is for. Think of it as warming up the room before you make the offer. Use social media to grow your list, and email to nurture it:


  
Share your story



  
Show sneak peeks



  
Reveal themes



  
Take them behind the scenes




People don’t just buy the box, they buy into you and connection is what turns interest into action.



Step 6: Keep Packaging Simple (At First)

Packaging matters but not as much as you think in the beginning. Choose packaging based on what’s going inside the box, and keep it simple and cost-effective. You can always upgrade later.



In the early days, your customers care more about what’s inside than the box it came in. Let your product lead, and let your packaging grow with your business.



Step 7: Plan Your Launch Before Launch Day

A successful launch doesn’t start on launch day. It starts weeks before. Give yourself 2–4 weeks to build excitement:


  
Talk about your box consistently



  
Share sneak peeks and progress



  
Repeat your message (more than you think you need to)




Your energy and consistency are what build momentum.



Step 8: Pack and Ship Your First Box

This is the moment where it all becomes real. Your first shipment will likely be a mix of excitement, chaos, and pride. 



Keep things simple:


  
Batch your packing



  
Create a basic workflow



  
Do quality checks




And document everything. Photos, videos, behind-the-scenes moments all make up the kind of content that fuels your future marketing.



Most importantly, celebrate it. Because this is a big deal. Success comes from doing the steps in the right order. Not skipping ahead. Not rushing. Not trying to do everything at once. Just taking the next step.



So ask yourself, “What step am I skipping right now?” Because you don’t need everything figured out. You just need to move forward.



If you want help mapping out your first six months of boxes, I’d love for you to join me inside my 6 in 60 Workshop.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you’ve been sitting on a subscription box idea but feel overwhelmed about where to start, this episode is your roadmap.</p>
<p><br></p>
  <li>
<p>“I have an idea, but I don’t know what to do next.”</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>“I feel stuck.”</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>“I don’t want to do it wrong.”</p>
<p><br></p>
</li>
<p>Most people aren’t stuck because they’re not capable. They’re stuck because they’re doing the steps out of order.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>So in this episode, I’m walking you through the exact 8 steps to go from idea to shipping your first box with clarity and confidence.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Step 1: Start With the Person, Not the Product</p>
<p>Your subscription box is not about the products inside. It’s about the person you’re serving. Instead of asking, “What should I put in my box?” Start with:</p>
<p><br></p>
  <li>
<p>Who is this for?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>What problem am I solving?</p>
<p><br></p>
</li>
<p>Because even if it doesn’t feel like a “problem,” it is. People don’t buy products. They buy how those products make them feel: organized, relaxed, confident, seen. If you can clearly describe your ideal customer in one sentence and she immediately feels like, “That’s for me,” you’re on the right track.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Step 2: Build Your Audience Before You Launch</p>
<p>Don’t wait until your box is ready to find customers. You need people before you have something to sell. Your job right now isn’t to sell, it’s to invite people into the journey.</p>
<p><br></p>
  <li>
<p>Share behind-the-scenes moments</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Ask for input (polls, naming, product ideas)</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Let people watch you build</p>
<p><br></p>
</li>
<p>And remember, it doesn’t have to be perfect. It just has to be real.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Step 3: Plan Your First 3–6 Months of Boxes</p>
<p>Before you buy anything, map out your themes and product ideas for the first few months. Planning ahead:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Makes sourcing easier</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Simplifies your content</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Creates a more consistent experience for your customers</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>It also keeps you from scrambling every single month. When you know what’s coming next, you make better decisions and you move with more confidence.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Step 4: Price for Profit (Not Just Sales)</p>
<p>This is a business, not a hobby. Once you’ve planned your boxes, then you start sourcing and you price with intention. A good starting goal is at least a 40% profit margin, with room to grow from there.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>And don’t forget the hidden costs:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Shipping</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Packaging</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Fees</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Replacements</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Because making sales doesn’t always mean making money. This step is about building something sustainable that supports you long-term.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Step 5: Build a Warm, Ready-to-Buy Waitlist</p>
<p>Before you launch, you need people who are already excited to buy. That’s what your waitlist is for. Think of it as warming up the room before you make the offer. Use social media to grow your list, and email to nurture it:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Share your story</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Show sneak peeks</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Reveal themes</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Take them behind the scenes</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>People don’t just buy the box, they buy into you and connection is what turns interest into action.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Step 6: Keep Packaging Simple (At First)</p>
<p>Packaging matters but not as much as you think in the beginning. Choose packaging based on what’s going inside the box, and keep it simple and cost-effective. You can always upgrade later.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In the early days, your customers care more about what’s inside than the box it came in. Let your product lead, and let your packaging grow with your business.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Step 7: Plan Your Launch Before Launch Day</p>
<p>A successful launch doesn’t start on launch day. It starts weeks before. Give yourself 2–4 weeks to build excitement:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Talk about your box consistently</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Share sneak peeks and progress</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Repeat your message (more than you think you need to)</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Your energy and consistency are what build momentum.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Step 8: Pack and Ship Your First Box</p>
<p>This is the moment where it all becomes real. Your first shipment will likely be a mix of excitement, chaos, and pride. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Keep things simple:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Batch your packing</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Create a basic workflow</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Do quality checks</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>And document everything. Photos, videos, behind-the-scenes moments all make up the kind of content that fuels your future marketing.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Most importantly, celebrate it. Because this is a big deal. Success comes from doing the steps in the right order. Not skipping ahead. Not rushing. Not trying to do everything at once. Just taking the next step.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>So ask yourself, “What step am I skipping right now?” Because you don’t need everything figured out. You just need to move forward.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you want help mapping out your first six months of boxes, I’d love for you to join me inside my <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e"><strong>6 in 60 Workshop</strong></a>.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1986</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f9cb3940-4272-11f1-9c45-ff0af8514cf6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3602770053.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>249: Being YOU Is Your Subscription Box Superpower</title>
      <description>If you’ve ever found yourself wondering…

“Am I different enough?”

“Is my idea good enough?”

“Is this niche too saturated?”“

Why would someone choose me?”



You’re not alone.



I hear these questions all the time, and today I want to shift the way you’re thinking about all of it.



Because the truth is:


  
You don’t need a better idea.



  
You don’t need a more unique niche.



  
You don’t need to be more like someone else.




You need to be more you. Because being you? That’s your superpower. And the best part is it’s free.



Here’s what I see happening behind the scenes. You’re building your subscription box, but you’re also watching everyone else. Their websites, their branding, their content. And instead of getting clarity, you start second-guessing yourself. You pull back and decide to play it safe. You start watering things down. And before you know it, your box starts to feel like it could belong to anyone. And if it could belong to anyone, it won’t stand out to anyone.



Subscription boxes aren’t just about products. They’re about experience.



People don’t stay subscribed month after month just because of what’s inside the box. They stay because of how it makes them feel and how it connects to their life.



And that experience comes from you.



When you try to remove yourself from your brand, you remove the very thing that makes it stand out.



Your niche isn’t just “self-care” or “books” or “gifts for moms.” That’s just the starting point. Your real niche is that category plus you.



There could be ten boxes in the same category, but they each feel completely different depending on the person behind them.



So when you think, “Someone is already doing this,” you’re right.



But they’re not doing it like you would. And that difference is exactly what your people are looking for.



Choose a niche you actually care about.If you’re not excited about it, it will show. And if you are? That will show too.



Let people see you. Show up on stories. Share your thoughts. Let your audience hear your voice. People don’t follow products, they follow people.



Use your real voice. You don’t need to sound polished or “professional,” you need to sound like you. That’s what creates connection.



Think beyond the product. Your box is an experience and that experience should feel like your energy, your style, your perspective.



What’s Really Holding You Back? It’s not strategy or time or lack of resources. It’s fear.


  
Fear of being seen.



  
Fear of being judged.



  
Fear of not being “enough.”




But you don’t need to be for everyone. You just need to be for the right people. Because the right people aren’t looking for the “best” box. They’re looking for the one that feels like it was made for them.



You don’t need to be louder or more polished. And you don’t need to be more like anyone else. You just need to be more you.



Because that’s what builds connection. That’s what makes your box stand out.  And that’s what keeps subscribers coming back month after month.



Join me for this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast as I break down why being YOU is your biggest advantage, how it shows up in your brand, and what to do this week to start leaning into it.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 22 Apr 2026 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Being YOU Is Your Subscription Box Superpower</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>3</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>249</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast as I break down why being YOU is your biggest advantage, how it shows up in your brand, and what to do this week to start leaning into it.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you’ve ever found yourself wondering…

“Am I different enough?”

“Is my idea good enough?”

“Is this niche too saturated?”“

Why would someone choose me?”



You’re not alone.



I hear these questions all the time, and today I want to shift the way you’re thinking about all of it.



Because the truth is:


  
You don’t need a better idea.



  
You don’t need a more unique niche.



  
You don’t need to be more like someone else.




You need to be more you. Because being you? That’s your superpower. And the best part is it’s free.



Here’s what I see happening behind the scenes. You’re building your subscription box, but you’re also watching everyone else. Their websites, their branding, their content. And instead of getting clarity, you start second-guessing yourself. You pull back and decide to play it safe. You start watering things down. And before you know it, your box starts to feel like it could belong to anyone. And if it could belong to anyone, it won’t stand out to anyone.



Subscription boxes aren’t just about products. They’re about experience.



People don’t stay subscribed month after month just because of what’s inside the box. They stay because of how it makes them feel and how it connects to their life.



And that experience comes from you.



When you try to remove yourself from your brand, you remove the very thing that makes it stand out.



Your niche isn’t just “self-care” or “books” or “gifts for moms.” That’s just the starting point. Your real niche is that category plus you.



There could be ten boxes in the same category, but they each feel completely different depending on the person behind them.



So when you think, “Someone is already doing this,” you’re right.



But they’re not doing it like you would. And that difference is exactly what your people are looking for.



Choose a niche you actually care about.If you’re not excited about it, it will show. And if you are? That will show too.



Let people see you. Show up on stories. Share your thoughts. Let your audience hear your voice. People don’t follow products, they follow people.



Use your real voice. You don’t need to sound polished or “professional,” you need to sound like you. That’s what creates connection.



Think beyond the product. Your box is an experience and that experience should feel like your energy, your style, your perspective.



What’s Really Holding You Back? It’s not strategy or time or lack of resources. It’s fear.


  
Fear of being seen.



  
Fear of being judged.



  
Fear of not being “enough.”




But you don’t need to be for everyone. You just need to be for the right people. Because the right people aren’t looking for the “best” box. They’re looking for the one that feels like it was made for them.



You don’t need to be louder or more polished. And you don’t need to be more like anyone else. You just need to be more you.



Because that’s what builds connection. That’s what makes your box stand out.  And that’s what keeps subscribers coming back month after month.



Join me for this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast as I break down why being YOU is your biggest advantage, how it shows up in your brand, and what to do this week to start leaning into it.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you’ve ever found yourself wondering…</p>
<p><em>“Am I different enough?”</em></p>
<p><em>“Is my idea good enough?”</em></p>
<p><em>“Is this niche too saturated?”“</em></p>
<p><em>Why would someone choose me?”</em></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You’re not alone.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>I hear these questions all the time, and today I want to shift the way you’re thinking about all of it.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Because the truth is:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>You don’t need a better idea.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>You don’t need a more unique niche.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>You don’t need to be more like someone else.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You need to be more <strong>you</strong>. Because being you? That’s your superpower. And the best part is it’s free.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Here’s what I see happening behind the scenes. You’re building your subscription box, but you’re also watching everyone else. Their websites, their branding, their content. And instead of getting clarity, you start second-guessing yourself. You pull back and decide to play it safe. You start watering things down. And before you know it, your box starts to feel like it could belong to anyone. And if it could belong to anyone, it won’t stand out to anyone.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Subscription boxes aren’t just about products. They’re about experience.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>People don’t stay subscribed month after month just because of what’s inside the box. They stay because of how it makes them feel and how it connects to their life.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>And that experience comes from you.</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>When you try to remove yourself from your brand, you remove the very thing that makes it stand out.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Your niche isn’t just “self-care” or “books” or “gifts for moms.” That’s just the starting point. <strong>Your real niche is that category plus you.</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>There could be ten boxes in the same category, but they each feel completely different depending on the person behind them.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>So when you think, <em>“Someone is already doing this,”</em> you’re right.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>But they’re not doing it like you would. And that difference is exactly what your people are looking for.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Choose a niche you actually care about.If you’re not excited about it, it will show. And if you are? That will show too.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Let people see you. Show up on stories. Share your thoughts. Let your audience hear your voice. People don’t follow products, they follow people.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Use your real voice. You don’t need to sound polished or “professional,” you need to sound like you. That’s what creates connection.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Think beyond the product. Your box is an experience and that experience should feel like your energy, your style, your perspective.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>What’s Really Holding You Back? It’s not strategy or time or lack of resources. It’s fear.</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Fear of being seen.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Fear of being judged.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Fear of not being “enough.”</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>But you don’t need to be for everyone. You just need to be for the right people. Because the right people aren’t looking for the “best” box. They’re looking for the one that feels like it was made for them.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You don’t need to be louder or more polished. And you don’t need to be more like anyone else. You just need to be more <strong>you</strong>.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Because that’s what builds connection. That’s what makes your box stand out.  And that’s what keeps subscribers coming back month after month.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Join me for this episode </strong>of the Launch Your Box Podcast as I break down why being YOU is your biggest advantage, how it shows up in your brand, and what to do this week to start leaning into it.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1172</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1b71ac58-3d02-11f1-9691-23f9248de848]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8662702323.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Spring Sales: How to Generate Extra Revenue with One-Time Boxes </title>
      <description>Spring is here, and it’s the perfect time to bring in some extra revenue—even if you don’t add any new subscribers. In this episode, I’m sharing two super simple, super effective ways you can generate quick cash flow this season by creating limited-time, one-time boxes your audience will love. These strategies work, whether you want to clear out inventory or make the most of gift-giving opportunities.



Spring is the perfect time to launch limited-time boxes to bring in extra revenue and keep your audience engaged. Two of my favorite spring offers are Mother’s Day Gift Boxes and Spring Cleaning Mystery Boxes. They’re easy to curate, fun to promote, and they provide an injection of cash into my business.



One-time boxes serve a specific purpose in your business, giving you a quick revenue boost without the need for new subscribers. 



One-time boxes are:


  Easy to market–seasonal urgency or limited quantities

  A great way to re-engage and re-energize your email list

  Perfect for testing new themes or audiences

  A low-commitment way for new customers to try your brand




One-time boxes require you to temporarily shift your focus from recurring subscriptions to creating hype and excitement around these one-time purchases.



Mother’s Day is like Christmas in May for your business. Make the most of this gift-giving holiday and create one-time boxes. Some examples that have worked great for me and members of Launch Your Box include: 


  Self-care for moms

  Mom’s Night In




“Treat Yourself” boxes for moms to buy for themselves (because yes, moms will buy for themselves)

Sarah’s One-Time Mother’s Day Box Pro tips:


  Start promoting in mid-late April

  Build a waitlist and create urgency

  Offer themed packaging and gift notes

  Ship in early May– make order deadlines clear

  Price one-time boxes similar to your subscription price or average order value (AOV)


Turn extra inventory into profit—without running a clearance sale. Mystery boxes:


  Create FOMO and excitement

  Let you surprise and delight customers

  Help clear shelves of inventory and bring a revenue boost to  your bottom line




Spring Mystery Boxes Pro Tips:


  Curate using past box items or extra stock

  Offer 1–2 price points

  Include at least one high-value item in each box

  Make value messaging very clear: e.g., “$100 worth of products for $50”


Marketing these seasonal boxes doesn’t need to be complicated. Keep it simple and show up.  


  
Go LIVE on social media to build excitement and show sneak peeks

  
Email your list—your list is your best sales tool

  
Social media content: unboxings, packing videos, behind-the-scenes

  
Paid ads to warm audiences for last-minute sales




Pick one of these seasonal box ideas and::


  Set a launch date

  Build a waitlist

  Start planning your promo schedule




Grab your notebook and join me on this episode as we talk through Mother’s Day Boxes, Spring Cleaning Mystery Boxes, and how to use both to re-engage your audience, boost sales, and build even more excitement around your subscription box business. 



Join me in all the places:  


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join the waitlist ⁠today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 15 Apr 2026 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>3</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Grab your notebook and join me on this episode as we talk through Mother’s Day Boxes, Spring Cleaning Mystery Boxes, and how to use both to re-engage your audience, boost sales, and build even more excitement around your subscription box business. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Spring is here, and it’s the perfect time to bring in some extra revenue—even if you don’t add any new subscribers. In this episode, I’m sharing two super simple, super effective ways you can generate quick cash flow this season by creating limited-time, one-time boxes your audience will love. These strategies work, whether you want to clear out inventory or make the most of gift-giving opportunities.



Spring is the perfect time to launch limited-time boxes to bring in extra revenue and keep your audience engaged. Two of my favorite spring offers are Mother’s Day Gift Boxes and Spring Cleaning Mystery Boxes. They’re easy to curate, fun to promote, and they provide an injection of cash into my business.



One-time boxes serve a specific purpose in your business, giving you a quick revenue boost without the need for new subscribers. 



One-time boxes are:


  Easy to market–seasonal urgency or limited quantities

  A great way to re-engage and re-energize your email list

  Perfect for testing new themes or audiences

  A low-commitment way for new customers to try your brand




One-time boxes require you to temporarily shift your focus from recurring subscriptions to creating hype and excitement around these one-time purchases.



Mother’s Day is like Christmas in May for your business. Make the most of this gift-giving holiday and create one-time boxes. Some examples that have worked great for me and members of Launch Your Box include: 


  Self-care for moms

  Mom’s Night In




“Treat Yourself” boxes for moms to buy for themselves (because yes, moms will buy for themselves)

Sarah’s One-Time Mother’s Day Box Pro tips:


  Start promoting in mid-late April

  Build a waitlist and create urgency

  Offer themed packaging and gift notes

  Ship in early May– make order deadlines clear

  Price one-time boxes similar to your subscription price or average order value (AOV)


Turn extra inventory into profit—without running a clearance sale. Mystery boxes:


  Create FOMO and excitement

  Let you surprise and delight customers

  Help clear shelves of inventory and bring a revenue boost to  your bottom line




Spring Mystery Boxes Pro Tips:


  Curate using past box items or extra stock

  Offer 1–2 price points

  Include at least one high-value item in each box

  Make value messaging very clear: e.g., “$100 worth of products for $50”


Marketing these seasonal boxes doesn’t need to be complicated. Keep it simple and show up.  


  
Go LIVE on social media to build excitement and show sneak peeks

  
Email your list—your list is your best sales tool

  
Social media content: unboxings, packing videos, behind-the-scenes

  
Paid ads to warm audiences for last-minute sales




Pick one of these seasonal box ideas and::


  Set a launch date

  Build a waitlist

  Start planning your promo schedule




Grab your notebook and join me on this episode as we talk through Mother’s Day Boxes, Spring Cleaning Mystery Boxes, and how to use both to re-engage your audience, boost sales, and build even more excitement around your subscription box business. 



Join me in all the places:  


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join the waitlist ⁠today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Spring is here, and it’s the perfect time to bring in some extra revenue—even if you don’t add any new subscribers. In this episode, I’m sharing two super simple, super effective ways you can generate quick cash flow this season by creating limited-time, one-time boxes your audience will love. These strategies work, whether you want to clear out inventory or make the most of gift-giving opportunities.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Spring is the perfect time to launch limited-time boxes to bring in extra revenue and keep your audience engaged. Two of my favorite spring offers are <strong>Mother’s Day Gift Boxes</strong> and<strong> Spring Cleaning Mystery Boxes</strong>. They’re easy to curate, fun to promote, and they provide an injection of cash into my business.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>One-time boxes serve a specific <em>purpose</em> in your business, giving you a quick revenue boost without the need for new subscribers. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>One-time boxes are:</p>
<ul>
  <li>Easy to market–seasonal urgency or limited quantities</li>
  <li>A great way to re-engage and re-energize your email list</li>
  <li>Perfect for testing new themes or audiences</li>
  <li>A low-commitment way for new customers to try your brand</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>One-time boxes require you to temporarily shift your focus from recurring subscriptions to creating hype and excitement around these one-time purchases.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Mother’s Day is like Christmas in May</strong> for your business. Make the most of this gift-giving holiday and create one-time boxes. Some examples that have worked great for me and members of Launch Your Box include: </p>
<ul>
  <li>Self-care for moms</li>
  <li>Mom’s Night In</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>“Treat Yourself” boxes for moms to buy for themselves (because yes, moms will buy for themselves)</p>
<p>Sarah’s One-Time Mother’s Day Box Pro tips:</p>
<ul>
  <li>Start promoting in mid-late April</li>
  <li>Build a waitlist and create urgency</li>
  <li>Offer themed packaging and gift notes</li>
  <li>Ship in early May– make order deadlines clear</li>
  <li>Price one-time boxes similar to your subscription price or average order value (AOV)</li>
</ul>
<p>Turn extra inventory into profit—<em>without</em> running a clearance sale. Mystery boxes:</p>
<ul>
  <li>Create FOMO and excitement</li>
  <li>Let you surprise and delight customers</li>
  <li>Help clear shelves of inventory and bring a revenue boost to  your bottom line</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Spring Mystery Boxes Pro Tips:</p>
<ul>
  <li>Curate using past box items or extra stock</li>
  <li>Offer 1–2 price points</li>
  <li>Include at least one high-value item in each box</li>
  <li>Make value messaging very clear: e.g., “$100 worth of products for $50”</li>
</ul>
<p>Marketing these seasonal boxes doesn’t need to be complicated. Keep it simple and show up.  </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<strong>Go LIVE</strong> on social media to build excitement and show sneak peeks</li>
  <li>
<strong>Email</strong> your list—your list is your best sales tool</li>
  <li>
<strong>Social media</strong> content: unboxings, packing videos, behind-the-scenes</li>
  <li>
<strong>Paid ads</strong> to warm audiences for last-minute sales</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Pick <em>one</em> of these seasonal box ideas and::</p>
<ul>
  <li>Set a launch date</li>
  <li>Build a waitlist</li>
  <li>Start planning your promo schedule</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Grab your notebook and join me on this episode as we talk through Mother’s Day Boxes, Spring Cleaning Mystery Boxes, and how to use both to re-engage your audience, boost sales, and build even more excitement around your subscription box business. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:  </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Join the waitlist ⁠</a>today! </p>
<p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1304</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c0f5df1a-36e9-11f1-8f66-d7e2669dd4e7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5978375251.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>248: I Almost Sold My Subscription Box… Until the Numbers Changed Everything with Ciara Stockeland</title>
      <description>In this episode, I’m taking you behind the scenes of my business. How I got to the point of wanting to sell, what changed, and how understanding my numbers completely shifted the direction I was headed.



I invited Ciara Stockeland, founder of Inventory Genius, onto the podcast and into my business to help me take a real look at my numbers. Ciara works with product-based business owners to help them understand inventory, cash flow, and profit in a way that actually makes sense.



If you haven’t heard my earlier conversation with Ciara, you can listen to that HERE. 



For years, my business looked successful.  And like a lot of entrepreneurs, I believed if there’s money in the bank, everything must be fine.

But I wasn’t paying close attention to profit margins, inventory value, or cash flow. I knew enough to run the business, but not enough to make strategic decisions about its future.



When Ciara and I started working together, we went straight into the numbers. (We joked about it feeling like she was digging through my “panty drawer,” but honestly, that’s exactly what it was.) And for the first time in a long time, I wasn’t guessing anymore.



One of the biggest shifts was finally understanding my profit margins.

Before this, I wasn’t consistently tracking cost of goods, product level profitability, or subscription box margins.



So we added cost of goods to every product in Shopify. We built a monthly subscription box profit spreadsheet. And here’s what surprised me: We didn’t start by raising prices.



We started by asking:


  
Where are we overspending?



  
Can we reduce packaging costs?



  
Can we make better buying decisions?






At one point, I had about $80,000 in inventory sitting on my shelves. That’s not just inventory. That’s cash, just not in the bank. 



So I made some big changes: I stopped overbuying inventory. I shifted to just-in-time inventory. I started selling what I already had. And my sales didn’t drop, but my margins improved.



When we separated out my revenue streams, something became very clear:


  
Subscription boxes = majority of revenue



  
One-time products = more work, less profit




And yet, I was spending most of my time on the part of the business that wasn’t driving the most return.



At one point, I thought, “I think I want to sell this business.” We cleaned up the financials, worked with a broker, and got multiple offers. It felt like the right next step. Until it didn’t.



During a pause in the selling process, I had space to think. And I realized I didn’t necessarily need to sell the business. I needed to change how it operated.



So I made a plan to move to a fulfillment center, simplify my operations, and focus on subscription-based revenue. And when I ran the numbers I discovered I could increase my profit significantly without growing sales.



A year ago, I didn’t have the information I needed to make that decision. Now I do. And that’s the difference.



If you’re feeling overwhelmed or unsure where to start, focus here:


  
Get a bookkeeper



  
Track your profit margins



  
Add cost of goods to every product



  
Reduce excess inventory



  
Make decisions based on real data




You don’t have to overhaul everything overnight. But small, intentional changes can completely shift your business.  Sometimes you just need to look at the numbers and let them show you a better way forward.



Where to find Ciara: 


  
Inventory Genius on Facebook



  
Inventory Genius on Instagram



  
Ciara Stockeland’s Website




Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 08 Apr 2026 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>I Almost Sold My Subscription Box… Until the Numbers Changed Everything with Ciara Stockeland</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>3</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>248</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as I take you behind the scenes of my business. How I almost sold it, what changed, and the simple shifts that made it more profitable, more sustainable, and a better fit for my life.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode, I’m taking you behind the scenes of my business. How I got to the point of wanting to sell, what changed, and how understanding my numbers completely shifted the direction I was headed.



I invited Ciara Stockeland, founder of Inventory Genius, onto the podcast and into my business to help me take a real look at my numbers. Ciara works with product-based business owners to help them understand inventory, cash flow, and profit in a way that actually makes sense.



If you haven’t heard my earlier conversation with Ciara, you can listen to that HERE. 



For years, my business looked successful.  And like a lot of entrepreneurs, I believed if there’s money in the bank, everything must be fine.

But I wasn’t paying close attention to profit margins, inventory value, or cash flow. I knew enough to run the business, but not enough to make strategic decisions about its future.



When Ciara and I started working together, we went straight into the numbers. (We joked about it feeling like she was digging through my “panty drawer,” but honestly, that’s exactly what it was.) And for the first time in a long time, I wasn’t guessing anymore.



One of the biggest shifts was finally understanding my profit margins.

Before this, I wasn’t consistently tracking cost of goods, product level profitability, or subscription box margins.



So we added cost of goods to every product in Shopify. We built a monthly subscription box profit spreadsheet. And here’s what surprised me: We didn’t start by raising prices.



We started by asking:


  
Where are we overspending?



  
Can we reduce packaging costs?



  
Can we make better buying decisions?






At one point, I had about $80,000 in inventory sitting on my shelves. That’s not just inventory. That’s cash, just not in the bank. 



So I made some big changes: I stopped overbuying inventory. I shifted to just-in-time inventory. I started selling what I already had. And my sales didn’t drop, but my margins improved.



When we separated out my revenue streams, something became very clear:


  
Subscription boxes = majority of revenue



  
One-time products = more work, less profit




And yet, I was spending most of my time on the part of the business that wasn’t driving the most return.



At one point, I thought, “I think I want to sell this business.” We cleaned up the financials, worked with a broker, and got multiple offers. It felt like the right next step. Until it didn’t.



During a pause in the selling process, I had space to think. And I realized I didn’t necessarily need to sell the business. I needed to change how it operated.



So I made a plan to move to a fulfillment center, simplify my operations, and focus on subscription-based revenue. And when I ran the numbers I discovered I could increase my profit significantly without growing sales.



A year ago, I didn’t have the information I needed to make that decision. Now I do. And that’s the difference.



If you’re feeling overwhelmed or unsure where to start, focus here:


  
Get a bookkeeper



  
Track your profit margins



  
Add cost of goods to every product



  
Reduce excess inventory



  
Make decisions based on real data




You don’t have to overhaul everything overnight. But small, intentional changes can completely shift your business.  Sometimes you just need to look at the numbers and let them show you a better way forward.



Where to find Ciara: 


  
Inventory Genius on Facebook



  
Inventory Genius on Instagram



  
Ciara Stockeland’s Website




Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode, I’m taking you behind the scenes of my business. How I got to the point of wanting to sell, what changed, and how understanding my numbers completely shifted the direction I was headed.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>I invited <strong>Ciara Stockeland</strong>, founder of Inventory Genius, onto the podcast and into my business to help me take a real look at my numbers. Ciara works with product-based business owners to help them understand inventory, cash flow, and profit in a way that actually makes sense.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you haven’t heard my earlier conversation with Ciara, you can <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/stop-worrying-about-sales-and-start-thinking-about-profitability-ep-153"><u>listen to that HERE</u></a>. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>For years, my business looked successful.  And like a lot of entrepreneurs, I believed if there’s money in the bank, everything must be fine.</p>
<p>But I wasn’t paying close attention to profit margins, inventory value, or cash flow. I knew enough to run the business, but not enough to make strategic decisions about its future.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>When Ciara and I started working together, we went straight into the numbers. (We joked about it feeling like she was digging through my “panty drawer,” but honestly, that’s exactly what it was.) And for the first time in a long time, I wasn’t guessing anymore.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>One of the biggest shifts was finally understanding my <strong>profit margins</strong>.</p>
<p>Before this, I wasn’t consistently tracking cost of goods, product level profitability, or subscription box margins.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>So we added cost of goods to every product in Shopify. We built a monthly subscription box profit spreadsheet. And here’s what surprised me: We didn’t start by raising prices.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>We started by asking:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Where are we overspending?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Can we reduce packaging costs?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Can we make better buying decisions?</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>At one point, I had about $80,000 in inventory sitting on my shelves. That’s not just inventory. That’s cash, just not in the bank. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>So I made some big changes: <strong>I stopped overbuying inventory</strong>. <strong>I shifted to just-in-time inventory. I started selling what I already had</strong>. And my sales didn’t drop, but my margins improved.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>When we separated out my revenue streams, something became very clear:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Subscription boxes = majority of revenue</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>One-time products = more work, less profit</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>And yet, I was spending most of my time on the part of the business that wasn’t driving the most return.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>At one point, I thought, “I think I want to sell this business.” We cleaned up the financials, worked with a broker, and got multiple offers. It felt like the right next step. Until it didn’t.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>During a pause in the selling process, I had space to think. <strong>And I realized I didn’t necessarily need to sell the business. I needed to change how it operated.</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>So I made a plan to move to a fulfillment center, simplify my operations, and focus on subscription-based revenue. And when I ran the numbers I discovered I could increase my profit significantly without growing sales.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>A year ago, I didn’t have the information I needed to make that decision. Now I do. And that’s the difference.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you’re feeling overwhelmed or unsure where to start, focus here:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Get a bookkeeper</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Track your profit margins</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Add cost of goods to every product</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Reduce excess inventory</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Make decisions based on real data</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>You don’t have to overhaul everything overnight. But small, intentional changes can completely shift your business.  </strong>Sometimes you just need to look at the numbers and let them show you a better way forward.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Where to find Ciara: </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/inventorygenius">Inventory Genius on Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/inventorygenius/">Inventory Genius on Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.ciarastockeland.com/?fbclid=IwY2xjawQ7QZdleHRuA2FlbQIxMABicmlkETEwSE5YTWxyZTVUZEtOVndic3J0YwZhcHBfaWQQMjIyMDM5MTc4ODIwMDg5MgABHjviPO8tpcjHf-ifNKQ42xBL1IxtGmSAw5WkWQgFdLJgZ6HIfTi3iCLq59jn_aem_Ioaqm-h1A2XvCvP2jSfr0Q">Ciara Stockeland’s Website</a></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3278</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2092a0ae-31de-11f1-beac-23500fc72cbf]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5687368108.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title> 5 Ways to Build Your Audience Consistently</title>
      <description>Audience building is the key to a successful subscription box launch. It’s also the key to the growth and sustainability of your subscription box business. In today’s episode, we’re talking about 5 ways to build an audience for each stage of the subscription box journey. 



A reality of a subscription box is that each month will also bring cancellations. They’re simply a part of doing business. And the only way to continue to grow your subscription box business is to continue to grow your audience, to get in front of new people and convert some of those people into subscribers. 



Focusing on these 5 things consistently is going to help you grow your audience – and you need to grow your audience to grow your business. 



5 Audience Building Steps for New Subscription Box Businesses

If you’re brand new and don’t have an audience yet, you need to spend time building an audience. I say it all the time. You can’t have a successful launch if you’re launching to no one! 



Building social media content - get your social pages going and build content on those pages. Get a minimum of 10 posts up right away. See ⁠10 Post Ideas When Starting Your Business⁠  Get super consistent. Post daily and work up to twice a day. 

Share on your personal profile - share from your business page onto your personal page. People in your personal network are part of the audience you’ve already built. Let them help you expand your reach. 

Set up a page like ad - these ads are simply an introduction to you and what you do. People simply click the thumbs up and then they’re following your business page. This pushes you in front of people you’d never get in front of. Launch Your Box members, find the training inside the “Building Your Audience” module. 

Video - short video and LIVEs - Let your audience get to know you.  Listen to ⁠episode 170⁠ to learn how Tracey Phillips built an amazing audience of over 100,000 people by consistently doing LIVE videos. 

Set up your email CRM - part of building your audience is building your email list. Our favorite email CRM is ⁠Klaviyo⁠. 



5 Audience Building Steps for Established Subscription Box Businesses

If you are selling products, actively building an audience, or already have a subscription box, these 5 steps are for you. Make these a habit. You should be doing them all year round.




  
Run a subscription giveaway - do one at least once a year. Launch Your Box members, find the training inside the “Building Your Audience” module.


  
Create a lead magnet for your ideal customer - build your email list with a lead magnet! This is typically a digital item you give away for free in exchange for someone’s email. Every business needs a lead magnet and should be running one year-round. ⁠Get ideas for email opt-in freebies⁠.  


  
Run ads - run three types of ads year-round: lead magnet ads, page like ads, product ads. Every legit business needs a marketing budget. You need to run ads. Ads are the best way to get in front of cold audiences. 

  
Go LIVE and connect with your audience regularly - get consistent and put it on your calendar so your audience knows when to find you and you are held accountable. 

  
Create a consistent social media plan - create a template for posts, a plan for video, and a schedule for switching out ads. 




⁠10 Post Ideas When Starting Your Business⁠⁠ ⁠

⁠Episode 170 of The Launch Your Box Podcast⁠

⁠Downloadable Email Opt-In Freebie Ideas⁠



* These show notes contain affiliate/referral links. I could make a commission at no charge to you if you purchase my recommended products.  ⁠Please read my disclosure and privacy policy HERE.⁠



Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!



Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join the waitlist ⁠today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 01 Apr 2026 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>3</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Audience building is the key to a successful subscription box launch. It’s also the key to the growth and sustainability of your subscription box business. In today’s episode, we’re talking about 5 ways to build an audience for each stage of the subscription box journey. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Audience building is the key to a successful subscription box launch. It’s also the key to the growth and sustainability of your subscription box business. In today’s episode, we’re talking about 5 ways to build an audience for each stage of the subscription box journey. 



A reality of a subscription box is that each month will also bring cancellations. They’re simply a part of doing business. And the only way to continue to grow your subscription box business is to continue to grow your audience, to get in front of new people and convert some of those people into subscribers. 



Focusing on these 5 things consistently is going to help you grow your audience – and you need to grow your audience to grow your business. 



5 Audience Building Steps for New Subscription Box Businesses

If you’re brand new and don’t have an audience yet, you need to spend time building an audience. I say it all the time. You can’t have a successful launch if you’re launching to no one! 



Building social media content - get your social pages going and build content on those pages. Get a minimum of 10 posts up right away. See ⁠10 Post Ideas When Starting Your Business⁠  Get super consistent. Post daily and work up to twice a day. 

Share on your personal profile - share from your business page onto your personal page. People in your personal network are part of the audience you’ve already built. Let them help you expand your reach. 

Set up a page like ad - these ads are simply an introduction to you and what you do. People simply click the thumbs up and then they’re following your business page. This pushes you in front of people you’d never get in front of. Launch Your Box members, find the training inside the “Building Your Audience” module. 

Video - short video and LIVEs - Let your audience get to know you.  Listen to ⁠episode 170⁠ to learn how Tracey Phillips built an amazing audience of over 100,000 people by consistently doing LIVE videos. 

Set up your email CRM - part of building your audience is building your email list. Our favorite email CRM is ⁠Klaviyo⁠. 



5 Audience Building Steps for Established Subscription Box Businesses

If you are selling products, actively building an audience, or already have a subscription box, these 5 steps are for you. Make these a habit. You should be doing them all year round.




  
Run a subscription giveaway - do one at least once a year. Launch Your Box members, find the training inside the “Building Your Audience” module.


  
Create a lead magnet for your ideal customer - build your email list with a lead magnet! This is typically a digital item you give away for free in exchange for someone’s email. Every business needs a lead magnet and should be running one year-round. ⁠Get ideas for email opt-in freebies⁠.  


  
Run ads - run three types of ads year-round: lead magnet ads, page like ads, product ads. Every legit business needs a marketing budget. You need to run ads. Ads are the best way to get in front of cold audiences. 

  
Go LIVE and connect with your audience regularly - get consistent and put it on your calendar so your audience knows when to find you and you are held accountable. 

  
Create a consistent social media plan - create a template for posts, a plan for video, and a schedule for switching out ads. 




⁠10 Post Ideas When Starting Your Business⁠⁠ ⁠

⁠Episode 170 of The Launch Your Box Podcast⁠

⁠Downloadable Email Opt-In Freebie Ideas⁠



* These show notes contain affiliate/referral links. I could make a commission at no charge to you if you purchase my recommended products.  ⁠Please read my disclosure and privacy policy HERE.⁠



Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!



Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join the waitlist ⁠today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Audience building is the key to a successful subscription box launch. It’s also the key to the growth and sustainability of your subscription box business. In today’s episode, we’re talking about 5 ways to build an audience for each stage of the subscription box journey. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>A reality of a subscription box is that each month will also bring cancellations. They’re simply a part of doing business. And the only way to continue to grow your subscription box business is to continue to grow your audience, to get in front of new people and convert some of those people into subscribers. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Focusing on these 5 things consistently is going to help you grow your audience – and you need to grow your audience to grow your business. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>5 Audience Building Steps for New Subscription Box Businesses</p>
<p>If you’re brand new and don’t have an audience yet, you need to spend time building an audience. I say it all the time. You can’t have a successful launch if you’re launching to no one! </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Building social media content</strong> - get your social pages going and build content on those pages. Get a minimum of 10 posts up right away. <em>See </em><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/10-post-ideas-when-starting-your-business">⁠<em>10 Post Ideas When Starting Your Business</em>⁠</a><em> </em> Get super consistent. Post daily and work up to twice a day. </p>
<p><strong>Share on your personal profile </strong>- share from your business page onto your personal page. People in your personal network are part of the audience you’ve already built. Let them help you expand your reach. </p>
<p><strong>Set up a page like ad </strong>- these ads are simply an introduction to you and what you do. People simply click the thumbs up and then they’re following your business page. This pushes you in front of people you’d never get in front of. <em>Launch Your Box members, find the training inside the “Building Your Audience” module. </em></p>
<p><strong>Video</strong> - short video and LIVEs - Let your audience get to know you.  <em>Listen to </em><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/from-subscription-box-week-to-subscription-box-owner-in-30-days-with-tracey-phillips-ep-170">⁠<em>episode 170</em>⁠</a><em> to learn how Tracey Phillips built an amazing audience of over 100,000 people by consistently doing LIVE videos. </em></p>
<p><strong>Set up your email CRM</strong> - part of building your audience is building your email list. Our favorite email CRM is <a href="https://www.klaviyo.com/partner/signup?utm_source=0010V00002Pzeze&amp;utm_medium=partner">⁠Klaviyo⁠</a>. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>5 Audience Building Steps for Established Subscription Box Businesses</p>
<p>If you are selling products, actively building an audience, or already have a subscription box, these 5 steps are for you. Make these a habit. You should be doing them all year round.</p>
<p><br></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<strong>Run a subscription giveaway </strong>- do one at least once a year. <em>Launch Your Box members, find the training inside the “Building Your Audience” module.</em>
</li>
  <li>
<strong>Create a lead magnet for your ideal customer </strong>- build your email list with a lead magnet! This is typically a digital item you give away for free in exchange for someone’s email. Every business needs a lead magnet and should be running one year-round. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/downloadable-email-opt-in-freebie-ideas">⁠<em>Get ideas for email opt-in freebies</em>⁠</a><em>.  </em>
</li>
  <li>
<strong>Run ads</strong> - run three types of ads year-round: lead magnet ads, page like ads, product ads. Every legit business needs a marketing budget. You need to run ads. Ads are the best way to get in front of cold audiences. </li>
  <li>
<strong>Go LIVE and connect with your audience regularly </strong>- get consistent and put it on your calendar so your audience knows when to find you and you are held accountable. </li>
  <li>
<strong>Create a consistent social media plan</strong> - create a template for posts, a plan for video, and a schedule for switching out ads. </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/10-post-ideas-when-starting-your-business">⁠10 Post Ideas When Starting Your Business⁠</a><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/10-post-ideas-when-starting-your-business">⁠ ⁠</a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/from-subscription-box-week-to-subscription-box-owner-in-30-days-with-tracey-phillips-ep-170">⁠Episode 170 of The Launch Your Box Podcast⁠</a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/downloadable-email-opt-in-freebie-ideas">⁠Downloadable Email Opt-In Freebie Ideas⁠</a></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><em>* These show notes contain affiliate/referral links. I could make a commission at no charge to you if you purchase my recommended products.  </em><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/disclaimer">⁠<em>Please read my disclosure and privacy policy HERE.</em>⁠</a></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Join the waitlist ⁠</a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1535</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[77cbf55c-2bc4-11f1-b968-7b87746f3d64]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9158892902.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Costs of Starting a Subscription Box</title>
      <description>Do you get excited thinking about starting a subscription box but worry about what it will cost to get started? A subscription box is an eCommerce business which means there are start-up costs involved just like with any other online business. These costs can vary depending on what you want to do. 

You can be profitable from month one, but you have to understand your costs. Understanding them helps you: 


  Price your subscription box

  Market your subscription box

  Stay on budget

  Stay profitable from 


What are these costs? 

There are five categories of costs you need to consider. 

1 - Product Costs -  Product cost is the actual expense of goods for each item you will put in your subscription box each month. Whether you make the items yourself, buy them wholesale, or source them from overseas, these costs will make up the highest percentage of your box costs. 

When calculating product costs, make sure to include the shipping costs to you. This can have a big impact on your overall product cost and needs to be tracked and planned for.

2 - Packaging Costs - There are so many variables when it comes to packaging costs. You can ship your subscription box in a basic box, custom box, or go without a box and use a poly mailer. 		

Packaging isn’t just about the outside of the box. You also need to consider the cost of stickers, shreds, tissue paper, inserts, tape, etc. - anything you use to get your boxes ready to ship.

3 - Fulfillment Costs - Your fulfillment costs are made up of packing and shipping costs. Both can be difficult to figure out when you’re first starting out. Packing costs include the labor it takes to package each subscription box. Third-party fulfillment companies pack and ship your boxes for you. 

Shipping makes up the other part of your fulfillment costs. Shipping can be VERY expensive and shipping costs vary widely depending on the destination.

4 - Tech Costs - A subscription box is an eCommerce business. In other words, you need tech in order to run your business. Before you can even get your subscription box up and running, there are several tech pieces you need to have in place.


  Website

  Payment Processor

  Shipping Software 

  Email CRM 


5 - Advertising Costs - I always want you to focus on generating organic traffic, but there comes a time when you’ll want to add paid advertising to your marketing plan. Advertising costs range from printed flyers to online ads. These costs need to be factored into your initial and ongoing costs for your subscription box business.

Start simple. Scale gradually. Manage your costs. You can start a subscription box and stay profitable… from the beginning. 

Wondering about the costs of starting a subscription box? Join me for this episode to learn about the 5 main categories so you can confidently price your box and be profitable in month one. 

⁠Episode 61 - What Can a Fulfillment Center Do for My Subscription Box Business?⁠



Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join ⁠today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 25 Mar 2026 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>3</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Wondering about the costs of starting a subscription box? Join me for this episode to learn about the 5 main categories so you can confidently price your box and be profitable in month one. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Do you get excited thinking about starting a subscription box but worry about what it will cost to get started? A subscription box is an eCommerce business which means there are start-up costs involved just like with any other online business. These costs can vary depending on what you want to do. 

You can be profitable from month one, but you have to understand your costs. Understanding them helps you: 


  Price your subscription box

  Market your subscription box

  Stay on budget

  Stay profitable from 


What are these costs? 

There are five categories of costs you need to consider. 

1 - Product Costs -  Product cost is the actual expense of goods for each item you will put in your subscription box each month. Whether you make the items yourself, buy them wholesale, or source them from overseas, these costs will make up the highest percentage of your box costs. 

When calculating product costs, make sure to include the shipping costs to you. This can have a big impact on your overall product cost and needs to be tracked and planned for.

2 - Packaging Costs - There are so many variables when it comes to packaging costs. You can ship your subscription box in a basic box, custom box, or go without a box and use a poly mailer. 		

Packaging isn’t just about the outside of the box. You also need to consider the cost of stickers, shreds, tissue paper, inserts, tape, etc. - anything you use to get your boxes ready to ship.

3 - Fulfillment Costs - Your fulfillment costs are made up of packing and shipping costs. Both can be difficult to figure out when you’re first starting out. Packing costs include the labor it takes to package each subscription box. Third-party fulfillment companies pack and ship your boxes for you. 

Shipping makes up the other part of your fulfillment costs. Shipping can be VERY expensive and shipping costs vary widely depending on the destination.

4 - Tech Costs - A subscription box is an eCommerce business. In other words, you need tech in order to run your business. Before you can even get your subscription box up and running, there are several tech pieces you need to have in place.


  Website

  Payment Processor

  Shipping Software 

  Email CRM 


5 - Advertising Costs - I always want you to focus on generating organic traffic, but there comes a time when you’ll want to add paid advertising to your marketing plan. Advertising costs range from printed flyers to online ads. These costs need to be factored into your initial and ongoing costs for your subscription box business.

Start simple. Scale gradually. Manage your costs. You can start a subscription box and stay profitable… from the beginning. 

Wondering about the costs of starting a subscription box? Join me for this episode to learn about the 5 main categories so you can confidently price your box and be profitable in month one. 

⁠Episode 61 - What Can a Fulfillment Center Do for My Subscription Box Business?⁠



Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join ⁠today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Do you get excited thinking about starting a subscription box but worry about what it will cost to get started? A subscription box is an eCommerce business which means there are start-up costs involved just like with any other online business. These costs can vary depending on what you want to do. </p>
<p>You can be profitable from month one, but you have to understand your costs. Understanding them helps you: </p>
<ul>
  <li>Price your subscription box</li>
  <li>Market your subscription box</li>
  <li>Stay on budget</li>
  <li>Stay profitable from </li>
</ul>
<p>What are these costs? </p>
<p>There are five categories of costs you need to consider. </p>
<p><strong>1 - Product Costs</strong> -  Product cost is the actual expense of goods for each item you will put in your subscription box each month. Whether you make the items yourself, buy them wholesale, or source them from overseas, these costs will make up the highest percentage of your box costs. </p>
<p>When calculating product costs, make sure to include the shipping costs to you. This can have a big impact on your overall product cost and needs to be tracked and planned for.</p>
<p><strong>2 - Packaging Costs</strong> - There are so many variables when it comes to packaging costs. You can ship your subscription box in a basic box, custom box, or go without a box and use a poly mailer. 		</p>
<p>Packaging isn’t just about the outside of the box. You also need to consider the cost of stickers, shreds, tissue paper, inserts, tape, etc. - anything you use to get your boxes ready to ship.</p>
<p><strong>3 - Fulfillment Costs </strong>- Your fulfillment costs are made up of packing and shipping costs. Both can be difficult to figure out when you’re first starting out. Packing costs include the labor it takes to package each subscription box. Third-party fulfillment companies pack and ship your boxes for you. </p>
<p>Shipping makes up the other part of your fulfillment costs. Shipping can be VERY expensive and shipping costs vary widely depending on the destination.</p>
<p><strong>4 - Tech Costs </strong>- A subscription box is an eCommerce business. In other words, you need tech in order to run your business. Before you can even get your subscription box up and running, there are several tech pieces you need to have in place.</p>
<ul>
  <li>Website</li>
  <li>Payment Processor</li>
  <li>Shipping Software </li>
  <li>Email CRM </li>
</ul>
<p><strong>5 - Advertising Costs </strong>- I always want you to focus on generating organic traffic, but there comes a time when you’ll want to add paid advertising to your marketing plan. Advertising costs range from printed flyers to online ads. These costs need to be factored into your initial and ongoing costs for your subscription box business.</p>
<p>Start simple. Scale gradually. Manage your costs. You can start a subscription box <em>and</em> stay profitable… from the beginning. </p>
<p>Wondering about the costs of starting a subscription box? Join me for this episode to learn about the 5 main categories so you can confidently price your box and be profitable in month one. </p>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-61-What-Can-a-Fulfillment-Center-Do-for-My-Subscription-Box-Business">⁠Episode 61 - What Can a Fulfillment Center Do for My Subscription Box Business?⁠</a></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Join ⁠</a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1548</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d3349a66-2642-11f1-8d18-cf69bc36ea71]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9714957225.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>247: What Changed Everything in Her Subscription Box Launch with The Crafty Brick</title>
      <description>What happens when a creative business owner stops trying to figure everything out alone, follows a proven plan, and finally gives herself permission to show up more boldly?



In this week’s episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I sat down with Courtney Brickner of The Crafty Brick to talk about the journey from one-off handmade products to recurring revenue through a subscription box. Courtney is a newer member of Launch Your Box, but in just a few short months, she has gone from exploring the idea of a subscription to launching one, gaining subscribers, and building real momentum.



Her story is fun, honest, and incredibly encouraging, especially if you’ve ever poured your heart into launching something that didn’t sell the way you hoped.



Courtney shares how she started her business while raising her family, how content creation unexpectedly opened new doors, and how her love of crafting and community eventually led her to create something subscribers wanted every month.



What makes this conversation so powerful is that it doesn’t skip over the hard parts. Courtney talks openly about failed launches, the fear of emailing too much, the discomfort of trying a new approach, and what changed when she stopped relying on guesswork and started following a real launch strategy.



Along the way, she built a subscription box experience around her audience’s love of creativity, connection, and a little bit of competition. What started as a one-time mystery craft project evolved into The Crafty Challenge Club, a subscription that gives members a monthly project, access to a private community, and a fun reason to keep coming back.



One of the biggest takeaways from this episode is that visibility matters more than most business owners think. Courtney realized that in previous launches, she wasn’t necessarily being rejected, many people simply didn’t know what she was offering because she wasn’t talking about it often enough. This time, she showed up consistently. And that consistency made all the difference.



She also shares what it looked like to launch with a goal of 40 subscribers, hit 37 in her first launch, and then grow to 50 by month two. More importantly, she talks about what those subscribers really represent: not one-time purchases, but recurring revenue and a business model that finally gives her room to breathe.



Courtney and I also dug into the behind-the-scenes shifts that often matter just as much as the sales. We talked about fulfillment systems, simplifying variations, planning content from one box in multiple ways, and learning to think about scalability earlier than most people do. 



If you’ve been wondering whether your idea could become a subscription, whether you’re talking about your offer enough, or whether it’s possible to recover from a disappointing launch, this conversation will give you both perspective and momentum.



In this episode, you’ll hear more about:


  
the role content creation played in growing her audience and visibility





  
how she used a waitlist, live video, and consistent content to build demand





  
the systems and fulfillment changes that are already helping her scale



  
why “do it scared” may be exactly the advice you need right now




Courtney’s story is proof that you do not need to have everything perfectly figured out before you begin. You need a solid idea, a willingness to stay visible, and the courage to keep going even when things feel messy.





Where to find Courtney: 


  
The Crafty Brick on Facebook



  
The Crafty Brick on Instagram



  
The Crafty Brick on YouTube



  
The Crafty Brick Website




Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 18 Mar 2026 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What Changed Everything in Her Subscription Box Launch with The Crafty Brick</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>247</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode to hear how Courtney built momentum, launched her subscription, and started creating the kind of stable, repeatable revenue so many product-based business owners are craving.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What happens when a creative business owner stops trying to figure everything out alone, follows a proven plan, and finally gives herself permission to show up more boldly?



In this week’s episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I sat down with Courtney Brickner of The Crafty Brick to talk about the journey from one-off handmade products to recurring revenue through a subscription box. Courtney is a newer member of Launch Your Box, but in just a few short months, she has gone from exploring the idea of a subscription to launching one, gaining subscribers, and building real momentum.



Her story is fun, honest, and incredibly encouraging, especially if you’ve ever poured your heart into launching something that didn’t sell the way you hoped.



Courtney shares how she started her business while raising her family, how content creation unexpectedly opened new doors, and how her love of crafting and community eventually led her to create something subscribers wanted every month.



What makes this conversation so powerful is that it doesn’t skip over the hard parts. Courtney talks openly about failed launches, the fear of emailing too much, the discomfort of trying a new approach, and what changed when she stopped relying on guesswork and started following a real launch strategy.



Along the way, she built a subscription box experience around her audience’s love of creativity, connection, and a little bit of competition. What started as a one-time mystery craft project evolved into The Crafty Challenge Club, a subscription that gives members a monthly project, access to a private community, and a fun reason to keep coming back.



One of the biggest takeaways from this episode is that visibility matters more than most business owners think. Courtney realized that in previous launches, she wasn’t necessarily being rejected, many people simply didn’t know what she was offering because she wasn’t talking about it often enough. This time, she showed up consistently. And that consistency made all the difference.



She also shares what it looked like to launch with a goal of 40 subscribers, hit 37 in her first launch, and then grow to 50 by month two. More importantly, she talks about what those subscribers really represent: not one-time purchases, but recurring revenue and a business model that finally gives her room to breathe.



Courtney and I also dug into the behind-the-scenes shifts that often matter just as much as the sales. We talked about fulfillment systems, simplifying variations, planning content from one box in multiple ways, and learning to think about scalability earlier than most people do. 



If you’ve been wondering whether your idea could become a subscription, whether you’re talking about your offer enough, or whether it’s possible to recover from a disappointing launch, this conversation will give you both perspective and momentum.



In this episode, you’ll hear more about:


  
the role content creation played in growing her audience and visibility





  
how she used a waitlist, live video, and consistent content to build demand





  
the systems and fulfillment changes that are already helping her scale



  
why “do it scared” may be exactly the advice you need right now




Courtney’s story is proof that you do not need to have everything perfectly figured out before you begin. You need a solid idea, a willingness to stay visible, and the courage to keep going even when things feel messy.





Where to find Courtney: 


  
The Crafty Brick on Facebook



  
The Crafty Brick on Instagram



  
The Crafty Brick on YouTube



  
The Crafty Brick Website




Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What happens when a creative business owner stops trying to figure everything out alone, follows a proven plan, and finally gives herself permission to show up more boldly?</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this week’s episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I sat down with Courtney Brickner of The Crafty Brick to talk about the journey from one-off handmade products to recurring revenue through a subscription box. Courtney is a newer member of Launch Your Box, but in just a few short months, she has gone from exploring the idea of a subscription to launching one, gaining subscribers, and building real momentum.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Her story is fun, honest, and incredibly encouraging, especially if you’ve ever poured your heart into launching something that didn’t sell the way you hoped.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Courtney shares how she started her business while raising her family, how content creation unexpectedly opened new doors, and how her love of crafting and community eventually led her to create something subscribers wanted every month.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>What makes this conversation so powerful is that it doesn’t skip over the hard parts. Courtney talks openly about failed launches, the fear of emailing too much, the discomfort of trying a new approach, and what changed when she stopped relying on guesswork and started following a real launch strategy.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Along the way, she built a subscription box experience around her audience’s love of creativity, connection, and a little bit of competition. What started as a one-time mystery craft project evolved into <strong>The Crafty Challenge Club</strong>, a subscription that gives members a monthly project, access to a private community, and a fun reason to keep coming back.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>One of the biggest takeaways from this episode is that<strong> visibility matters more than most business owners think.</strong> Courtney realized that in previous launches, she wasn’t necessarily being rejected, many people simply didn’t know what she was offering because she wasn’t talking about it often enough. This time, she showed up consistently. And that consistency made all the difference.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>She also shares what it looked like to launch with a goal of 40 subscribers, hit 37 in her first launch, and then grow to 50 by month two. More importantly, she talks about what those subscribers really represent: not one-time purchases, but recurring revenue and a business model that finally gives her room to breathe.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Courtney and I also dug into the behind-the-scenes shifts that often matter just as much as the sales. We talked about fulfillment systems, simplifying variations, planning content from one box in multiple ways, and learning to think about scalability earlier than most people do. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you’ve been wondering whether your idea could become a subscription, whether you’re talking about your offer enough, or whether it’s possible to recover from a disappointing launch, this conversation will give you both perspective and momentum.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this episode, you’ll hear more about:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>the role content creation played in growing her audience and visibility</p>
</li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>how she used a waitlist, live video, and consistent content to build demand</p>
</li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>the systems and fulfillment changes that are already helping her scale</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>why “do it scared” may be exactly the advice you need right now</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Courtney’s story is proof that you do not need to have everything perfectly figured out before you begin. You need a solid idea, a willingness to stay visible, and the courage to keep going even when things feel messy.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Where to find Courtney: </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/thecraftybrick">The Crafty Brick on Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/thecraftybrick/">The Crafty Brick on Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.youtube.com/@TheCraftyBrick">The Crafty Brick on YouTube</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="http://www.thecraftybrick.com/">The Crafty Brick Website</a></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2921</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d9827b36-20d9-11f1-97bf-9b91f87835f2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9486130713.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>5 Simple Steps to Adding a Subscription to Your Product-Based Business</title>
      <description>Do you have a product-based business? Are you selling products via an Etsy store, in a pop-up shop or a retail store? Are you selling one-off products online? Adding a subscription box to your existing business is a no-brainer and can offer you so many benefits! 

Adding a subscription box provides: 


  A stable, predictable revenue stream - recurring payments benefit your business in so many ways, including stabilizing your cash flow.  

  Customer loyalty - subscribers have committed to regularly purchasing products from you. 

  Increased lifetime value (LTV) - do you know the LTV of your customers? My subscribers stay for an average of 18 months, generating thousands of dollars of revenue each. 

  Opportunities for cross-selling and upselling - pair your box items with additional one-off items from your shop. 

  Scalability - packing and shipping 500 of the same thing is much more efficient than 500 different orders. 


Have I convinced you to add a subscription box to your business?  I have 5 simple steps to follow to make it happen. 


  Identify your best customers:

  Who are they? 

  How often do they shop with you? 

  Take a look at your top 20 customers and dial into who they are. 

  Identify your best-sellers:

  What categories are your best sellers? 

  What do people buy from you repeatedly? 

  What are people asking for more of? 

  Set your pricing structure:

  What is your average order value (AOV)?

  What is the AOV of your top 100 customers? 

  Price your subscription box in that range. 

  Create exclusivity and scarcity: 

  What are the benefits of being a subscriber? 

  Make items only available in the box. 

  Make them only available by subscription. 

  Create FOMO with your customer base - make them want to be part of something exclusive.  

  Create a great user experience: 

  Are your website and the checkout process clear and easy to follow?  

  Make it easy for people to update or cancel their subscriptions. 

  Provide a higher level of customer service - remember your subscribers are the VIPs of your business. 


A bonus piece of advice, which is really the best piece of advice, is to talk about your subscription box a LOT. If you want to create a business that is 75% recurring revenue instead of depending on one-off sales, you’ve got to make it the main thing in your business. And that means talking about it… a lot! 

Join me for this episode to learn how having a subscription box can change the game for your business. Predictable inventory, better cash flow, monthly recurring revenue, and more. Follow 5 simple steps to get started today! 



Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join ⁠today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 11 Mar 2026 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>3</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode to learn how having a subscription box can change the game for your business. Predictable inventory, better cash flow, monthly recurring revenue, and more. Follow 5 simple steps to get started today! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Do you have a product-based business? Are you selling products via an Etsy store, in a pop-up shop or a retail store? Are you selling one-off products online? Adding a subscription box to your existing business is a no-brainer and can offer you so many benefits! 

Adding a subscription box provides: 


  A stable, predictable revenue stream - recurring payments benefit your business in so many ways, including stabilizing your cash flow.  

  Customer loyalty - subscribers have committed to regularly purchasing products from you. 

  Increased lifetime value (LTV) - do you know the LTV of your customers? My subscribers stay for an average of 18 months, generating thousands of dollars of revenue each. 

  Opportunities for cross-selling and upselling - pair your box items with additional one-off items from your shop. 

  Scalability - packing and shipping 500 of the same thing is much more efficient than 500 different orders. 


Have I convinced you to add a subscription box to your business?  I have 5 simple steps to follow to make it happen. 


  Identify your best customers:

  Who are they? 

  How often do they shop with you? 

  Take a look at your top 20 customers and dial into who they are. 

  Identify your best-sellers:

  What categories are your best sellers? 

  What do people buy from you repeatedly? 

  What are people asking for more of? 

  Set your pricing structure:

  What is your average order value (AOV)?

  What is the AOV of your top 100 customers? 

  Price your subscription box in that range. 

  Create exclusivity and scarcity: 

  What are the benefits of being a subscriber? 

  Make items only available in the box. 

  Make them only available by subscription. 

  Create FOMO with your customer base - make them want to be part of something exclusive.  

  Create a great user experience: 

  Are your website and the checkout process clear and easy to follow?  

  Make it easy for people to update or cancel their subscriptions. 

  Provide a higher level of customer service - remember your subscribers are the VIPs of your business. 


A bonus piece of advice, which is really the best piece of advice, is to talk about your subscription box a LOT. If you want to create a business that is 75% recurring revenue instead of depending on one-off sales, you’ve got to make it the main thing in your business. And that means talking about it… a lot! 

Join me for this episode to learn how having a subscription box can change the game for your business. Predictable inventory, better cash flow, monthly recurring revenue, and more. Follow 5 simple steps to get started today! 



Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join ⁠today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Do you have a product-based business? Are you selling products via an Etsy store, in a pop-up shop or a retail store? Are you selling one-off products online? Adding a subscription box to your existing business is a no-brainer and can offer you so many benefits! </p>
<p>Adding a subscription box provides: </p>
<ul>
  <li>A stable, predictable revenue stream - recurring payments benefit your business in so many ways, including stabilizing your cash flow.  </li>
  <li>Customer loyalty - subscribers have committed to regularly purchasing products from you. </li>
  <li>Increased lifetime value (LTV) - do you know the LTV of your customers? My subscribers stay for an average of 18 months, generating thousands of dollars of revenue each. </li>
  <li>Opportunities for cross-selling and upselling - pair your box items with additional one-off items from your shop. </li>
  <li>Scalability - packing and shipping 500 of the same thing is much more efficient than 500 different orders. </li>
</ul>
<p>Have I convinced you to add a subscription box to your business?  I have 5 simple steps to follow to make it happen. </p>
<ul>
  <li>Identify your best customers:</li>
  <li>Who are they? </li>
  <li>How often do they shop with you? </li>
  <li>Take a look at your top 20 customers and dial into who they are. </li>
  <li>Identify your best-sellers:</li>
  <li>What categories are your best sellers? </li>
  <li>What do people buy from you repeatedly? </li>
  <li>What are people asking for more of? </li>
  <li>Set your pricing structure:</li>
  <li>What is your average order value (AOV)?</li>
  <li>What is the AOV of your top 100 customers? </li>
  <li>Price your subscription box in that range. </li>
  <li>Create exclusivity and scarcity: </li>
  <li>What are the benefits of being a subscriber? </li>
  <li>Make items only available in the box. </li>
  <li>Make them only available by subscription. </li>
  <li>Create FOMO with your customer base - make them want to be part of something exclusive.  </li>
  <li>Create a great user experience: </li>
  <li>Are your website and the checkout process clear and easy to follow?  </li>
  <li>Make it easy for people to update or cancel their subscriptions. </li>
  <li>Provide a higher level of customer service - remember your subscribers are the VIPs of your business. </li>
</ul>
<p>A bonus piece of advice, which is really the best piece of advice, is to talk about your subscription box a LOT. If you want to create a business that is 75% recurring revenue instead of depending on one-off sales, you’ve got to make it the main thing in your business. And that means talking about it… a lot! </p>
<p>Join me for this episode to learn how having a subscription box can change the game for your business. Predictable inventory, better cash flow, monthly recurring revenue, and more. Follow 5 simple steps to get started today! </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Join ⁠</a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1660</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[423ef7da-1b44-11f1-890a-4f0b987067e8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2375239246.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>246: 7 Reasons You Should Start a Subscription Box in 2026</title>
      <description>In today’s economy, subscription is still one of the smartest models you can build.



Social media reach is unpredictable. Algorithms shift constantly. Ad costs are higher than they were just a few years ago. Customers are more thoughtful with their spending. And if you rely on one-off sales, you know the pressure never really stops. You sell today, and tomorrow you have to start all over again. And that’s exactly why subscription makes so much sense right now.



In 2026, most people don’t want more choices. They want fewer decisions. They want someone they trust to curate and deliver something meaningful to them on a consistent basis.



That’s what a subscription box does.



1. Recurring Revenue Creates Stability

When you have recurring revenue, you’re not waking up every day wondering what needs to sell in order to cover expenses. You can forecast income. You can plan inventory more confidently. You can make decisions from a place of strategy instead of survival.



2. You Don’t Have to Constantly Sell

Customers opt into ongoing buying. They don’t have to re-decide every month whether they want to purchase again. That reduces decision fatigue for them and pressure for you.

It doesn’t eliminate marketing, but it does reduce the daily grind of chasing one-off transactions. And for many business owners, that shift alone is worth everything.



3. Community Is the Competitive Advantage

Subscription naturally creates shared experiences. Whether it’s a book club, a faith-based box, a hobby subscription, or a niche lifestyle brand, subscribers begin to feel like insiders. They anticipate what’s coming. They talk about it. They look forward to it.

When someone subscribes, they’re not just buying a product. They’re choosing to be part of something ongoing.



4. Inventory Risk Is Lower Than You Think

Instead of buying inventory and hoping it sells, you’re buying based on actual subscriber demand. 

You’re not guessing what might move off a shelf. You’re fulfilling commitments that have already been made.



5. The Tools Available Today Make It Easier

AI can help draft emails, product descriptions, landing pages, and ad copy. Subscription platforms automate billing and renewals. Customer service systems streamline communication.

You don’t need to know how to do everything manually. You need to understand how to leverage the tools available.

The barrier to entry is lower than it has ever been.



6. You Can Start Smaller Than You Think

Starting lean gives you feedback. It builds confidence. It allows you to grow intentionally instead of rushing to scale before you’re ready.



7. Subscription Builds Long-Term Wealth

Subscription increases customer lifetime value. It creates predictable cash flow. It builds repeat buying behavior. Over time, it turns your business into an asset instead of a collection of random transactions.

That means more stability, more flexibility, and more options for your future.



If you’ve been waiting for the “right” time to start a subscription box, I truly believe 2026 is one of the best environments we’ve seen for it.



Start researching. Build a waitlist. Validate your idea. Don’t let another six months pass wishing you had started sooner.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 04 Mar 2026 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>7 Reasons You Should Start a Subscription Box in 2026</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>3</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>246</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as I share why subscription is still one of the smartest and most stable models you can build in 2026 and what that could mean for you. If you’ve been thinking about starting a subscription box, this is your next step.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In today’s economy, subscription is still one of the smartest models you can build.



Social media reach is unpredictable. Algorithms shift constantly. Ad costs are higher than they were just a few years ago. Customers are more thoughtful with their spending. And if you rely on one-off sales, you know the pressure never really stops. You sell today, and tomorrow you have to start all over again. And that’s exactly why subscription makes so much sense right now.



In 2026, most people don’t want more choices. They want fewer decisions. They want someone they trust to curate and deliver something meaningful to them on a consistent basis.



That’s what a subscription box does.



1. Recurring Revenue Creates Stability

When you have recurring revenue, you’re not waking up every day wondering what needs to sell in order to cover expenses. You can forecast income. You can plan inventory more confidently. You can make decisions from a place of strategy instead of survival.



2. You Don’t Have to Constantly Sell

Customers opt into ongoing buying. They don’t have to re-decide every month whether they want to purchase again. That reduces decision fatigue for them and pressure for you.

It doesn’t eliminate marketing, but it does reduce the daily grind of chasing one-off transactions. And for many business owners, that shift alone is worth everything.



3. Community Is the Competitive Advantage

Subscription naturally creates shared experiences. Whether it’s a book club, a faith-based box, a hobby subscription, or a niche lifestyle brand, subscribers begin to feel like insiders. They anticipate what’s coming. They talk about it. They look forward to it.

When someone subscribes, they’re not just buying a product. They’re choosing to be part of something ongoing.



4. Inventory Risk Is Lower Than You Think

Instead of buying inventory and hoping it sells, you’re buying based on actual subscriber demand. 

You’re not guessing what might move off a shelf. You’re fulfilling commitments that have already been made.



5. The Tools Available Today Make It Easier

AI can help draft emails, product descriptions, landing pages, and ad copy. Subscription platforms automate billing and renewals. Customer service systems streamline communication.

You don’t need to know how to do everything manually. You need to understand how to leverage the tools available.

The barrier to entry is lower than it has ever been.



6. You Can Start Smaller Than You Think

Starting lean gives you feedback. It builds confidence. It allows you to grow intentionally instead of rushing to scale before you’re ready.



7. Subscription Builds Long-Term Wealth

Subscription increases customer lifetime value. It creates predictable cash flow. It builds repeat buying behavior. Over time, it turns your business into an asset instead of a collection of random transactions.

That means more stability, more flexibility, and more options for your future.



If you’ve been waiting for the “right” time to start a subscription box, I truly believe 2026 is one of the best environments we’ve seen for it.



Start researching. Build a waitlist. Validate your idea. Don’t let another six months pass wishing you had started sooner.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In today’s economy, subscription is still one of the smartest models you can build.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Social media reach is unpredictable. Algorithms shift constantly. Ad costs are higher than they were just a few years ago. Customers are more thoughtful with their spending. And if you rely on one-off sales, you know the pressure never really stops. You sell today, and tomorrow you have to start all over again. And that’s exactly why subscription makes so much sense right now.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In 2026, most people don’t want more choices. They want fewer decisions. They want someone they trust to curate and deliver something meaningful to them on a consistent basis.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>That’s what a subscription box does.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>1. Recurring Revenue Creates Stability</p>
<p>When you have recurring revenue, you’re not waking up every day wondering what needs to sell in order to cover expenses. You can forecast income. You can plan inventory more confidently. You can make decisions from a place of strategy instead of survival.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>2. You Don’t Have to Constantly Sell</p>
<p>Customers opt into ongoing buying. They don’t have to re-decide every month whether they want to purchase again. That reduces decision fatigue for them and pressure for you.</p>
<p>It doesn’t eliminate marketing, but it does reduce the daily grind of chasing one-off transactions. And for many business owners, that shift alone is worth everything.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>3. Community Is the Competitive Advantage</p>
<p>Subscription naturally creates shared experiences. Whether it’s a book club, a faith-based box, a hobby subscription, or a niche lifestyle brand, subscribers begin to feel like insiders. They anticipate what’s coming. They talk about it. They look forward to it.</p>
<p>When someone subscribes, they’re not just buying a product. They’re choosing to be part of something ongoing.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>4. Inventory Risk Is Lower Than You Think</p>
<p>Instead of buying inventory and hoping it sells, you’re buying based on actual subscriber demand. </p>
<p>You’re not guessing what might move off a shelf. You’re fulfilling commitments that have already been made.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>5. The Tools Available Today Make It Easier</p>
<p>AI can help draft emails, product descriptions, landing pages, and ad copy. Subscription platforms automate billing and renewals. Customer service systems streamline communication.</p>
<p>You don’t need to know how to do everything manually. You need to understand how to leverage the tools available.</p>
<p>The barrier to entry is lower than it has ever been.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>6. You Can Start Smaller Than You Think</p>
<p>Starting lean gives you feedback. It builds confidence. It allows you to grow intentionally instead of rushing to scale before you’re ready.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>7. Subscription Builds Long-Term Wealth</p>
<p>Subscription increases customer lifetime value. It creates predictable cash flow. It builds repeat buying behavior. Over time, it turns your business into an asset instead of a collection of random transactions.</p>
<p>That means more stability, more flexibility, and more options for your future.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you’ve been waiting for the “right” time to start a subscription box, I truly believe 2026 is one of the best environments we’ve seen for it.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Start researching. Build a waitlist. Validate your idea. Don’t let another six months pass wishing you had started sooner.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> <br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>
</li>
</ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1154</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[57e407e4-15bb-11f1-adc4-7b4e4da5400b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1247941565.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>245: From Guessing to Growing: The Shift That Doubled Her Subscribers with The Cheerful Baker</title>
      <description>In this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m welcoming back Lauren Jacobs of The Cheerful Baker. You might remember Lauren as the incredibly talented cookie decorator who leveraged her appearance on the Christmas Cookie Challenge on Food Network to launch a cookie cutter subscription box.



For years, she wondered whether her box was best suited for hobby bakers, business owners, or casual decorators. Instead of continuing to guess, she sent a short survey to her subscribers and gathered real feedback. Then she took that survey data, along with her subscriber list and demographic information, and uploaded it into ChatGPT to help her analyze it.



What she received back was surprisingly detailed. It identified patterns in age, location, business ownership, and behavior that she had never clearly articulated before. For the first time, she felt confident that she understood who she was actually serving.



The results didn’t explode overnight, but they built steadily. She monitored her campaigns inside Ads Manager, allowed them time to optimize, and then made adjustments based on performance. One variation - a chicken-themed design - began outperforming everything else. She turned off the weaker ads and allowed Facebook to allocate the budget toward the winning creative.



That single campaign brought in more than 80 new subscribers and nearly doubled her box.



What changed was her understanding of acquisition cost and lifetime value. Once she understood how much it cost her to acquire a subscriber and how long that subscriber typically stayed, she stopped viewing ad spend as loss and began seeing it as investment. That shift in mindset removed a tremendous amount of fear.



Then she exported four years of Shopify sales data and used ChatGPT to help her identify patterns in growth, seasonality, and subscriber behavior. The analysis revealed something powerful: her subscription had grown an average of 26% every year. It also showed clear seasonal trends in acquisition and cancellations.



With that information, she built a subscriber growth forecast for the year. She matched her strongest themes with historically strong acquisition months. She set realistic monthly goals instead of vague annual hopes.



And for the first time, she could see the year mapped out in front of her.



Lauren’s subscription box has paid for both of her sons’ college tuition and living expenses. Her oldest is graduating this year. Her youngest is halfway through.



Her goal was never to build a million-dollar business. It was to send her children into adulthood debt-free. And she has done exactly that.



She has also grown into a confident, data-informed business owner along the way.



What I love most about Lauren’s journey is that she did not start out organized or analytical. She started by being creative, hopeful, and willing. Over time, she layered in systems, strategy, and data. That progression is available to anyone who is willing to implement what they learn.



If you’ve been operating on instinct alone, this episode is your invitation to add structure to your creativity. The combination is powerful.



Join me for this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast and learn how Lauren used surveys, data, and ads to transform her business without losing the heart behind it.



Where to find Lauren: 


  
The Cheerful Baker on Facebook 



  
The Cheerful Baker on Instagram



  
The Cheerful Baker Website




Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 25 Feb 2026 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From Guessing to Growing: The Shift That Doubled Her Subscribers with The Cheerful Baker</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>3</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast and learn how Lauren used surveys, data, and ads to transform her business without losing the heart behind it.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m welcoming back Lauren Jacobs of The Cheerful Baker. You might remember Lauren as the incredibly talented cookie decorator who leveraged her appearance on the Christmas Cookie Challenge on Food Network to launch a cookie cutter subscription box.



For years, she wondered whether her box was best suited for hobby bakers, business owners, or casual decorators. Instead of continuing to guess, she sent a short survey to her subscribers and gathered real feedback. Then she took that survey data, along with her subscriber list and demographic information, and uploaded it into ChatGPT to help her analyze it.



What she received back was surprisingly detailed. It identified patterns in age, location, business ownership, and behavior that she had never clearly articulated before. For the first time, she felt confident that she understood who she was actually serving.



The results didn’t explode overnight, but they built steadily. She monitored her campaigns inside Ads Manager, allowed them time to optimize, and then made adjustments based on performance. One variation - a chicken-themed design - began outperforming everything else. She turned off the weaker ads and allowed Facebook to allocate the budget toward the winning creative.



That single campaign brought in more than 80 new subscribers and nearly doubled her box.



What changed was her understanding of acquisition cost and lifetime value. Once she understood how much it cost her to acquire a subscriber and how long that subscriber typically stayed, she stopped viewing ad spend as loss and began seeing it as investment. That shift in mindset removed a tremendous amount of fear.



Then she exported four years of Shopify sales data and used ChatGPT to help her identify patterns in growth, seasonality, and subscriber behavior. The analysis revealed something powerful: her subscription had grown an average of 26% every year. It also showed clear seasonal trends in acquisition and cancellations.



With that information, she built a subscriber growth forecast for the year. She matched her strongest themes with historically strong acquisition months. She set realistic monthly goals instead of vague annual hopes.



And for the first time, she could see the year mapped out in front of her.



Lauren’s subscription box has paid for both of her sons’ college tuition and living expenses. Her oldest is graduating this year. Her youngest is halfway through.



Her goal was never to build a million-dollar business. It was to send her children into adulthood debt-free. And she has done exactly that.



She has also grown into a confident, data-informed business owner along the way.



What I love most about Lauren’s journey is that she did not start out organized or analytical. She started by being creative, hopeful, and willing. Over time, she layered in systems, strategy, and data. That progression is available to anyone who is willing to implement what they learn.



If you’ve been operating on instinct alone, this episode is your invitation to add structure to your creativity. The combination is powerful.



Join me for this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast and learn how Lauren used surveys, data, and ads to transform her business without losing the heart behind it.



Where to find Lauren: 


  
The Cheerful Baker on Facebook 



  
The Cheerful Baker on Instagram



  
The Cheerful Baker Website




Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m welcoming back Lauren Jacobs of The Cheerful Baker. You might remember Lauren as the incredibly talented cookie decorator who leveraged her appearance on the Christmas Cookie Challenge on Food Network to launch a cookie cutter subscription box.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>For years, she wondered whether her box was best suited for hobby bakers, business owners, or casual decorators. Instead of continuing to guess, <strong>she sent a short survey to her subscribers and gathered real feedback.</strong> Then she took that survey data, along with her subscriber list and demographic information, and uploaded it into ChatGPT to help her analyze it.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>What she received back was surprisingly detailed. It identified patterns in age, location, business ownership, and behavior that she had never clearly articulated before. <strong>For the first time, she felt confident that she understood who she was actually serving.</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>The results didn’t explode overnight, but they built steadily. She monitored her campaigns inside Ads Manager, allowed them time to optimize, and then made adjustments based on performance. One variation - a chicken-themed design - began outperforming everything else. She turned off the weaker ads and allowed Facebook to allocate the budget toward the winning creative.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>That single campaign brought in more than 80 new subscribers and nearly doubled her box.</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>What changed was her understanding of acquisition cost and lifetime value. Once she understood how much it cost her to acquire a subscriber and how long that subscriber typically stayed, <strong>she stopped viewing ad spend as loss and began seeing it as investment.</strong> That shift in mindset removed a tremendous amount of fear.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Then she exported four years of Shopify sales data and used ChatGPT to help her<strong> identify patterns in growth, seasonality, and subscriber behavior.</strong> The analysis revealed something powerful: her subscription had grown an average of 26% every year. It also showed clear seasonal trends in acquisition and cancellations.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>With that information, she built a subscriber growth forecast for the year. She matched her strongest themes with historically strong acquisition months. She set realistic monthly goals instead of vague annual hopes.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>And for the first time, she could see the year mapped out in front of her.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Lauren’s subscription box has paid for both of her sons’ college tuition and living expenses. Her oldest is graduating this year. Her youngest is halfway through.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Her goal was never to build a million-dollar business. It was to send her children into adulthood debt-free. And she has done exactly that.</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>She has also grown into a confident, data-informed business owner along the way.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>What I love most about Lauren’s journey is that she did not start out organized or analytical. She started by being creative, hopeful, and willing. Over time, she layered in systems, strategy, and data. That progression is available to anyone who is willing to implement what they learn.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you’ve been operating on instinct alone, this episode is your invitation to add structure to your creativity. The combination is powerful.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Join me for this episode </strong>of the Launch Your Box Podcast and learn how Lauren used surveys, data, and ads to transform her business without losing the heart behind it.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Where to find Lauren: </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/cheerfulbaker">The Cheerful Baker on Facebook </a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/thecheerfulbaker/">The Cheerful Baker on Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://cheerfulbaker.com/?srsltid=AfmBOooDzVVmA4UqqIYCaWR6ZHgLyyzEHdctAkkoVaKIxj0rC-_mNmak">The Cheerful Baker Website</a></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1773</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d1fa012c-1139-11f1-bcd9-33725bc17a41]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8663378426.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Creating a One-Thing of the Month Subscription</title>
      <description>Have you considered starting with a one-thing of the month subscription? You should. Why do I say that? Well, my one-thing of the month subscription is easier to manage and more profitable than my fully curated subscription box. And my one-thing of the month subscription has almost double the number of subscribers as my larger, more expensive box. 

When people start thinking about starting a subscription box, they think about a fully curated box. They dream about the experience they’ll provide their subscribers with all the little touches and a box filled with items that complement each other. 

But soon, overwhelm sets in. Creating that fully curated experience with all the little touches takes a LOT of work. And all that work and all that overwhelm can turn into not making progress. 

Instead of starting with a fully curated box, think about starting with one thing. There are several benefits to starting a one-thing of the month subscription. A one-thing of the month subscription: 


  Has the lowest barrier to getting started.



  Fewer vendors to work with.



  Lower start-up funds.



  Packaging that is simple and the same each month! 



  Is easier to fulfill and ship. 



  Has the potential for higher profit margins. 


Brainstorm what your one item could be by asking yourself:  


  What is your best-selling item? 



  What do people repeatedly buy? 



  What do people constantly ask you for more of? 


Your one-thing of the month could be: 


  Something fun - a no-frills way for subscribers to treat themselves. 



  Something consumable - subscribers never run out!


So many Launch Your Box members have wildly successful one-thing of the month subscriptions. Some of the “one things” their happy subscribers receive include: 


  T-shirts



  Candles



  Pizzelles



  Nail polish



  Earrings



  Door hangers



  Washi tape


Start brainstorming what you can turn into a one-thing of the month subscription and move one step closer to launching your subscription.  



How does a subscription that’s easier to manage and more profitable sound? Join me for this episode to learn more about why you should consider starting a one-thing of the month subscription. 

 

Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠



  ⁠Instagram⁠



  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 


 

Are you ready for ⁠ Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠ Join the waitlist⁠ today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 18 Feb 2026 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>3</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>How does a subscription that’s easier to manage and more profitable sound? Join me for this episode to learn more about why you should consider starting a one-thing of the month subscription. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you considered starting with a one-thing of the month subscription? You should. Why do I say that? Well, my one-thing of the month subscription is easier to manage and more profitable than my fully curated subscription box. And my one-thing of the month subscription has almost double the number of subscribers as my larger, more expensive box. 

When people start thinking about starting a subscription box, they think about a fully curated box. They dream about the experience they’ll provide their subscribers with all the little touches and a box filled with items that complement each other. 

But soon, overwhelm sets in. Creating that fully curated experience with all the little touches takes a LOT of work. And all that work and all that overwhelm can turn into not making progress. 

Instead of starting with a fully curated box, think about starting with one thing. There are several benefits to starting a one-thing of the month subscription. A one-thing of the month subscription: 


  Has the lowest barrier to getting started.



  Fewer vendors to work with.



  Lower start-up funds.



  Packaging that is simple and the same each month! 



  Is easier to fulfill and ship. 



  Has the potential for higher profit margins. 


Brainstorm what your one item could be by asking yourself:  


  What is your best-selling item? 



  What do people repeatedly buy? 



  What do people constantly ask you for more of? 


Your one-thing of the month could be: 


  Something fun - a no-frills way for subscribers to treat themselves. 



  Something consumable - subscribers never run out!


So many Launch Your Box members have wildly successful one-thing of the month subscriptions. Some of the “one things” their happy subscribers receive include: 


  T-shirts



  Candles



  Pizzelles



  Nail polish



  Earrings



  Door hangers



  Washi tape


Start brainstorming what you can turn into a one-thing of the month subscription and move one step closer to launching your subscription.  



How does a subscription that’s easier to manage and more profitable sound? Join me for this episode to learn more about why you should consider starting a one-thing of the month subscription. 

 

Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠



  ⁠Instagram⁠



  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 


 

Are you ready for ⁠ Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠ Join the waitlist⁠ today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you considered starting with a one-thing of the month subscription? You should. Why do I say that? Well, my one-thing of the month subscription is easier to manage <em>and</em> more profitable than my fully curated subscription box. And my one-thing of the month subscription has almost double the number of subscribers as my larger, more expensive box. </p>
<p>When people start thinking about starting a subscription box, they think about a fully curated box. They dream about the experience they’ll provide their subscribers with all the little touches and a box filled with items that complement each other. </p>
<p>But soon, overwhelm sets in. Creating that fully curated experience with all the little touches takes a LOT of work. And all that work and all that overwhelm can turn into not making progress. </p>
<p>Instead of starting with a fully curated box, think about starting with one thing. There are several benefits to starting a one-thing of the month subscription. A one-thing of the month subscription: </p>
<ul>
  <li>Has the lowest barrier to getting started.</li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>Fewer vendors to work with.</li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>Lower start-up funds.</li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>Packaging that is simple and the same each month! </li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>Is easier to fulfill and ship. </li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>Has the potential for higher profit margins. </li>
</ul>
<p>Brainstorm what your one item could be by asking yourself:  </p>
<ul>
  <li>What is your best-selling item? </li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>What do people repeatedly buy? </li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>What do people constantly ask you for more of? </li>
</ul>
<p>Your one-thing of the month could be: </p>
<ul>
  <li>Something fun - a no-frills way for subscribers to treat themselves. </li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>Something consumable - subscribers never run out!</li>
</ul>
<p>So many Launch Your Box members have wildly successful one-thing of the month subscriptions. Some of the “one things” their happy subscribers receive include: </p>
<ul>
  <li>T-shirts</li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>Candles</li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>Pizzelles</li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>Nail polish</li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>Earrings</li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>Door hangers</li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>Washi tape</li>
</ul>
<p>Start brainstorming what you can turn into a one-thing of the month subscription and move one step closer to launching your subscription.  </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>How does a subscription that’s easier to manage <em>and</em> more profitable sound? Join me for this episode to learn more about why you should consider starting a one-thing of the month subscription. </p>
<p> </p>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </li>
</ul>
<p> </p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">⁠ Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">⁠ Join the waitlist⁠</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1231</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[28edbcd0-0bb3-11f1-b651-83682294f0f8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3870692450.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>244: Ask Sarah: What’s the Most Costly Mistake New Subscription Box Owners Make?</title>
      <description>In today’s Ask Sarah episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m answering two powerful questions from Launch Your Box member Tabitha Dragonberry, the founder of Funberry Kids. And these are questions I know a lot of you are asking, too.



Tabatha’s first question?

“What is the biggest mistake new subscription box owners make?”



It’s one I see all the time. And it’s one I made myself when I started.

Trying to be for everybody.



When you try to build a box that pleases everyone, you end up attracting no one. Your messaging gets muddy. Your products miss the mark. And instead of standing out, you blend in.



Tabatha and I talked about: 


  
Why choosing a narrow niche leads to faster growth



  
The specific ways a too-broad audience creates costly problems, especially with inventory



  
How to make decisions faster and more confidently by knowing who your box is for




Tabitha’s second question is just as important as the first. Maybe even more so.



She asked: “What should a first year in business really look like?”



And my honest answer? Probably not what Instagram is telling you.



Your first year isn’t supposed to be your biggest year.



It’s supposed to be the year where you learn how to be a business owner. Where you test things. Where you build systems. Where you figure out how to keep showing up, even when the numbers aren’t blowing you away.



We talked about:


  
The slow but meaningful signs of progress to look for in your first year



  
Why it’s okay to have small numbers at the start



  
How your mindset shapes your experience, especially in those early months



  
Why success in year one looks more like momentum than massive revenue




If you’re in your first year, or gearing up to start your subscription box, I hope this episode helps you stop putting pressure on yourself to get everything right, right away. Growth is possible. But first, you need a strong foundation.



Join me for this episode where I clear up the confusion about what to expect in your first year of business and share how to avoid the most common misstep I see new subscription box owners make.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 11 Feb 2026 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Ask Sarah: What’s the Most Costly Mistake New Subscription Box Owners Make?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>3</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>244</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In today’s Ask Sarah episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m answering two powerful questions from Launch Your Box member Tabitha Dragonberry, the founder of Funberry Kids. And these are questions I know a lot of you are asking, too.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In today’s Ask Sarah episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m answering two powerful questions from Launch Your Box member Tabitha Dragonberry, the founder of Funberry Kids. And these are questions I know a lot of you are asking, too.



Tabatha’s first question?

“What is the biggest mistake new subscription box owners make?”



It’s one I see all the time. And it’s one I made myself when I started.

Trying to be for everybody.



When you try to build a box that pleases everyone, you end up attracting no one. Your messaging gets muddy. Your products miss the mark. And instead of standing out, you blend in.



Tabatha and I talked about: 


  
Why choosing a narrow niche leads to faster growth



  
The specific ways a too-broad audience creates costly problems, especially with inventory



  
How to make decisions faster and more confidently by knowing who your box is for




Tabitha’s second question is just as important as the first. Maybe even more so.



She asked: “What should a first year in business really look like?”



And my honest answer? Probably not what Instagram is telling you.



Your first year isn’t supposed to be your biggest year.



It’s supposed to be the year where you learn how to be a business owner. Where you test things. Where you build systems. Where you figure out how to keep showing up, even when the numbers aren’t blowing you away.



We talked about:


  
The slow but meaningful signs of progress to look for in your first year



  
Why it’s okay to have small numbers at the start



  
How your mindset shapes your experience, especially in those early months



  
Why success in year one looks more like momentum than massive revenue




If you’re in your first year, or gearing up to start your subscription box, I hope this episode helps you stop putting pressure on yourself to get everything right, right away. Growth is possible. But first, you need a strong foundation.



Join me for this episode where I clear up the confusion about what to expect in your first year of business and share how to avoid the most common misstep I see new subscription box owners make.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In today’s Ask Sarah episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m answering two powerful questions from Launch Your Box member Tabitha Dragonberry, the founder of Funberry Kids. And these are questions I know a lot of you are asking, too.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Tabatha’s first question?</p>
<p><strong>“What is the biggest mistake new subscription box owners make?”</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>It’s one I see all the time. And it’s one I made myself when I started.</p>
<p><strong>Trying to be for everybody.</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>When you try to build a box that pleases everyone, you end up attracting no one. Your messaging gets muddy. Your products miss the mark. And instead of standing out, you blend in.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Tabatha and I talked about: </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Why choosing a narrow niche leads to faster growth</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>The specific ways a too-broad audience creates costly problems, especially with inventory</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>How to make decisions faster and more confidently by knowing <em>who</em> your box is for</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Tabitha’s second question is just as important as the first. Maybe even more so.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>She asked: <strong>“What should a first year in business really look like?”</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>And my honest answer? Probably not what Instagram is telling you.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Your first year isn’t supposed to be your biggest year.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>It’s supposed to be the year where you <strong>learn how to be a business owner. </strong>Where you test things. Where you build systems. Where you figure out how to keep showing up, even when the numbers aren’t blowing you away.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>We talked about:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>The slow but meaningful signs of progress to look for in your first year</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Why it’s okay to have small numbers at the start</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>How your mindset shapes your experience, especially in those early months</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Why success in year one looks more like momentum than massive revenue</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>If you’re in your first year, or gearing up to start your subscription box, I hope this episode helps you stop putting pressure on yourself to get everything right, right away. <strong>Growth is possible. But first, you need a strong foundation.</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Join me for this episode </strong>where I clear up the confusion about what to expect in your first year of business and share how to avoid the most common misstep I see new subscription box owners make.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! <br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1105</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c44b39b4-0528-11f1-ab83-8fd588900572]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2583687721.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>243: Ask Sarah: How Do I Grow on Social Media With No Budget?</title>
      <description>In this week’s Ask Sarah episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m answering a question I hear all the time from subscription box owners who are doing the work - posting consistently, showing up - but still feel like no one’s seeing it.



Staci asked:

“How else can I get followers on Facebook and Instagram? I’m currently posting on my Facebook page but haven’t done any ads yet because of my budget. What else can I do to get followers for free?”



If you’re growing on a tight budget (or no budget at all), this episode is for you.



First, Let’s Normalize Where You Are

I want you to know this upfront: if you’re showing up and posting but growth feels slow, you’re not doing anything wrong. Organic growth is slower, but it’s absolutely possible. And you are not alone in this stage.



Why the Right Followers Matter More Than More Followers

Before we talk tactics, I ground this conversation in something important:It’s not about big numbers. It’s about aligned followers. Those people who could actually become subscribers or customers. A small, engaged audience will always outperform a large, disconnected one.



5 Organic Ways to Grow (No Ads Required)

1. Start Conversations in Your ContentInstead of just showcasing your box, invite people to engage. Polls, this-or-that questions, and simple prompts work incredibly well.

Example: “Would you rather get Product A or Product B in your next box?”

Engagement helps your content get seen. And it’s free.



2. Show Up in Facebook Groups (Strategically)Join 2–3 groups where your ideal customer already hangs out. Don’t sell. Be helpful. When people see your value in comments, they naturally click through to learn more about you.



3. Share on Your Personal Profile (Gently)Your personal network already knows and trusts you so let them in on what you’re building. Share behind-the-scenes moments, your why, or sneak peeks, not just polished product posts.



4. Collaborate with Other Creators or Small BusinessesCollaboration is one of the fastest free growth strategies out there. Joint giveaways, co-hosted Lives, or simple cross-promotions introduce you to the right audience without spending a dollar.



5. Use Reels and Live Video (Keep It Simple)Both Facebook and Instagram prioritize video, especially Live video. Go LIVE while packing boxes, sharing a theme, or answering FAQs. It doesn’t have to be fancy.

Bonus: you can repurpose Lives into reels, clips, and stories for extra mileage.



You don’t need a huge audience to win. You need trust, consistency, and connection with the right people.



Organic growth takes time, but when you stay visible and intentional, you’re building a foundation that lasts.



Join me for this Ask Sarah episode where I break down exactly how to grow your audience organically, even with a limited budget and how to focus on growth that actually supports your business.



Where to find Staci: 


  
Meditation Money Mindset on Facebook 



  
Meditation Money Mindset on Instagram




Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 04 Feb 2026 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Ask Sarah: How Do I Grow on Social Media With No Budget?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>243</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this Ask Sarah episode where I break down exactly how to grow your audience organically, even with a limited budget and how to focus on growth that actually supports your business.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this week’s Ask Sarah episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m answering a question I hear all the time from subscription box owners who are doing the work - posting consistently, showing up - but still feel like no one’s seeing it.



Staci asked:

“How else can I get followers on Facebook and Instagram? I’m currently posting on my Facebook page but haven’t done any ads yet because of my budget. What else can I do to get followers for free?”



If you’re growing on a tight budget (or no budget at all), this episode is for you.



First, Let’s Normalize Where You Are

I want you to know this upfront: if you’re showing up and posting but growth feels slow, you’re not doing anything wrong. Organic growth is slower, but it’s absolutely possible. And you are not alone in this stage.



Why the Right Followers Matter More Than More Followers

Before we talk tactics, I ground this conversation in something important:It’s not about big numbers. It’s about aligned followers. Those people who could actually become subscribers or customers. A small, engaged audience will always outperform a large, disconnected one.



5 Organic Ways to Grow (No Ads Required)

1. Start Conversations in Your ContentInstead of just showcasing your box, invite people to engage. Polls, this-or-that questions, and simple prompts work incredibly well.

Example: “Would you rather get Product A or Product B in your next box?”

Engagement helps your content get seen. And it’s free.



2. Show Up in Facebook Groups (Strategically)Join 2–3 groups where your ideal customer already hangs out. Don’t sell. Be helpful. When people see your value in comments, they naturally click through to learn more about you.



3. Share on Your Personal Profile (Gently)Your personal network already knows and trusts you so let them in on what you’re building. Share behind-the-scenes moments, your why, or sneak peeks, not just polished product posts.



4. Collaborate with Other Creators or Small BusinessesCollaboration is one of the fastest free growth strategies out there. Joint giveaways, co-hosted Lives, or simple cross-promotions introduce you to the right audience without spending a dollar.



5. Use Reels and Live Video (Keep It Simple)Both Facebook and Instagram prioritize video, especially Live video. Go LIVE while packing boxes, sharing a theme, or answering FAQs. It doesn’t have to be fancy.

Bonus: you can repurpose Lives into reels, clips, and stories for extra mileage.



You don’t need a huge audience to win. You need trust, consistency, and connection with the right people.



Organic growth takes time, but when you stay visible and intentional, you’re building a foundation that lasts.



Join me for this Ask Sarah episode where I break down exactly how to grow your audience organically, even with a limited budget and how to focus on growth that actually supports your business.



Where to find Staci: 


  
Meditation Money Mindset on Facebook 



  
Meditation Money Mindset on Instagram




Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this week’s <strong>Ask Sarah</strong> episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m answering a question I hear <em>all the time</em> from subscription box owners who are doing the work - posting consistently, showing up - but still feel like no one’s seeing it.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Staci asked:</p>
<p><em>“How else can I get followers on Facebook and Instagram? I’m currently posting on my Facebook page but haven’t done any ads yet because of my budget. What else can I do to get followers for free?”</em></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you’re growing on a tight budget (or no budget at all), this episode is for you.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>First, Let’s Normalize Where You Are</p>
<p>I want you to know this upfront: if you’re showing up and posting but growth feels slow, you’re not doing anything wrong. Organic growth <em>is</em> slower, but it’s absolutely possible. And you are not alone in this stage.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Why the Right Followers Matter More Than More Followers</p>
<p>Before we talk tactics, I ground this conversation in something important:It’s not about big numbers. It’s about <em>aligned</em> followers. Those people who could actually become subscribers or customers. A small, engaged audience will always outperform a large, disconnected one.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>5 Organic Ways to Grow (No Ads Required)</p>
<p>1. Start Conversations in Your ContentInstead of just showcasing your box, invite people to engage. Polls, this-or-that questions, and simple prompts work incredibly well.</p>
<p><em>Example: </em>“Would you rather get Product A or Product B in your next box?”</p>
<p>Engagement helps your content get seen. And it’s free.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>2. Show Up in Facebook Groups (Strategically)Join 2–3 groups where your ideal customer already hangs out. Don’t sell. Be helpful. When people see your value in comments, they naturally click through to learn more about you.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>3. Share on Your Personal Profile (Gently)Your personal network already knows and trusts you so let them in on what you’re building. Share behind-the-scenes moments, your why, or sneak peeks, not just polished product posts.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>4. Collaborate with Other Creators or Small BusinessesCollaboration is one of the fastest free growth strategies out there. Joint giveaways, co-hosted Lives, or simple cross-promotions introduce you to the <em>right</em> audience without spending a dollar.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>5. Use Reels and Live Video (Keep It Simple)Both Facebook and Instagram prioritize video, especially Live video. Go LIVE while packing boxes, sharing a theme, or answering FAQs. It doesn’t have to be fancy.</p>
<p><em>Bonus: you can repurpose Lives into reels, clips, and stories for extra mileage.</em></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You don’t need a huge audience to win. You need trust, consistency, and connection with the right people.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Organic growth takes time, but when you stay visible and intentional, you’re building a foundation that lasts.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Join me for this Ask Sarah episode where I break down exactly how to grow your audience organically, even with a limited budget and how to focus on growth that actually supports your business.</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Where to find Staci: </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/meditationmoneymindset"><u>Meditation Money Mindset on Facebook </u></a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/meditationmoneymindset1/"><u>Meditation Money Mindset on Instagram</u></a></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1805</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2ef7ec88-ffc7-11f0-8b45-2367ccabee5a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9266521584.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>242: Ask Sarah: The Box Reveal Strategy Every Subscription Owner Needs</title>
      <description>In this Ask Sarah episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m joined by Katie of Katie’s Heart and Home. 



In this episode, I walk her through exactly how I approach LIVE box reveals, why they matter so much, and how I use one unboxing to create weeks (and sometimes months) of content for my business.



When you go LIVE to unbox a subscription box, think about three goals:


  
Connecting with your current subscribersSubscribers already have the box, but the LIVE gives you a chance to experience it together. Think of it like a book club. Everyone has the same thing, and you’re gathering to talk about it.



  
Creating excitement and FOMO for new customersIf you never show what’s inside the box, how does anyone know what they’re missing? Box reveals let people see the experience. And that’s what makes them want to join.



  
Creating content for the entire monthOne box reveal fuels emails, social posts, reels, blog content, and website SEO. It’s not “extra work,” It’s smart use of something you’re already doing.






I always wait until about 90% of boxes are delivered before going LIVE. Once I know most subscribers have their box, I schedule the LIVE and let people know it’s coming.



When you go LIVE:


  
Open with a strong hook right away



  
Share a little about your day to let people join



  
Ask questions early to encourage engagement



  
Start with the hero item and explain why you built the box around it



  
Walk through the box exactly how you curated it



  
Ask viewers to share their favorite item (even if no one is LIVE yet)




And yes, sometimes no one is watching LIVE. That’s okay. Still act like they are, because the replay matters just as much as the LIVE moment.



An unboxing is so much more than just showing products. Talk about:


  
Why you chose the theme



  
How each item connects to the others



  
What inspired the curation



  
How you wanted subscribers to feel when they opened the box






Before you end the LIVE, always tease the next box. Share colors, patterns, or a small sneak peek, but never everything. That curiosity keeps people watching and coming back.



From one live unboxing, you can create:


  
A replay post



  
At least two emails



  
A fast unboxing reel



  
Individual product posts



  
Lifestyle photos



  
Blog content



  
SEO-friendly website pages




If you have five to seven items in a box, you easily have a week or more of content. And for quarterly box owners, this is how you stretch one box across 90 days.



You don’t need anything fancy.


  
A sturdy overhead camera stand



  
A phone or camera



  
Simple lighting



  
Hands-only filming when you don’t want to be on camera




For reels, film a quick overhead unboxing, speed it up, add music and text. Quick and easy.



A Note for Quarterly Subscription Boxes: Quarterly boxes can feel harder because you don’t have something new every month. But that’s exactly why box reveals matter.



When you use one box intentionally, you can:


  
Keep talking about it without repeating yourself



  
Stay visible between shipments



  
Continue inviting people to join or get on the waitlist



  
Build momentum instead of going quiet




If you’re not doing box reveals, especially LIVE, you’re missing out on:


  
Deeper connections with your subscribers



  
Visibility for your business



  
Content you already have but aren’t using yet




Your subscription box is not just a product. It’s a content engine that supports growth, engagement, and consistent sales.



Where to find Katie: 


  
Katie’s Heart and Home on Facebook 



  
Katie’s Heart and Home on Instagram



  
Katie’s Heart and Home website 




Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 28 Jan 2026 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Ask Sarah: The Box Reveal Strategy Every Subscription Owner Needs</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>242</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>One box. One LIVE. Weeks of content. This  special Ask Sarah episode breaks down how to make it happen.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this Ask Sarah episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m joined by Katie of Katie’s Heart and Home. 



In this episode, I walk her through exactly how I approach LIVE box reveals, why they matter so much, and how I use one unboxing to create weeks (and sometimes months) of content for my business.



When you go LIVE to unbox a subscription box, think about three goals:


  
Connecting with your current subscribersSubscribers already have the box, but the LIVE gives you a chance to experience it together. Think of it like a book club. Everyone has the same thing, and you’re gathering to talk about it.



  
Creating excitement and FOMO for new customersIf you never show what’s inside the box, how does anyone know what they’re missing? Box reveals let people see the experience. And that’s what makes them want to join.



  
Creating content for the entire monthOne box reveal fuels emails, social posts, reels, blog content, and website SEO. It’s not “extra work,” It’s smart use of something you’re already doing.






I always wait until about 90% of boxes are delivered before going LIVE. Once I know most subscribers have their box, I schedule the LIVE and let people know it’s coming.



When you go LIVE:


  
Open with a strong hook right away



  
Share a little about your day to let people join



  
Ask questions early to encourage engagement



  
Start with the hero item and explain why you built the box around it



  
Walk through the box exactly how you curated it



  
Ask viewers to share their favorite item (even if no one is LIVE yet)




And yes, sometimes no one is watching LIVE. That’s okay. Still act like they are, because the replay matters just as much as the LIVE moment.



An unboxing is so much more than just showing products. Talk about:


  
Why you chose the theme



  
How each item connects to the others



  
What inspired the curation



  
How you wanted subscribers to feel when they opened the box






Before you end the LIVE, always tease the next box. Share colors, patterns, or a small sneak peek, but never everything. That curiosity keeps people watching and coming back.



From one live unboxing, you can create:


  
A replay post



  
At least two emails



  
A fast unboxing reel



  
Individual product posts



  
Lifestyle photos



  
Blog content



  
SEO-friendly website pages




If you have five to seven items in a box, you easily have a week or more of content. And for quarterly box owners, this is how you stretch one box across 90 days.



You don’t need anything fancy.


  
A sturdy overhead camera stand



  
A phone or camera



  
Simple lighting



  
Hands-only filming when you don’t want to be on camera




For reels, film a quick overhead unboxing, speed it up, add music and text. Quick and easy.



A Note for Quarterly Subscription Boxes: Quarterly boxes can feel harder because you don’t have something new every month. But that’s exactly why box reveals matter.



When you use one box intentionally, you can:


  
Keep talking about it without repeating yourself



  
Stay visible between shipments



  
Continue inviting people to join or get on the waitlist



  
Build momentum instead of going quiet




If you’re not doing box reveals, especially LIVE, you’re missing out on:


  
Deeper connections with your subscribers



  
Visibility for your business



  
Content you already have but aren’t using yet




Your subscription box is not just a product. It’s a content engine that supports growth, engagement, and consistent sales.



Where to find Katie: 


  
Katie’s Heart and Home on Facebook 



  
Katie’s Heart and Home on Instagram



  
Katie’s Heart and Home website 




Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this Ask Sarah episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m joined by Katie of Katie’s Heart and Home. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this episode, I walk her through <strong>exactly how I approach LIVE box reveals</strong>, why they matter so much, and how I use one unboxing to create weeks (and sometimes months) of content for my business.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>When you go LIVE to unbox a subscription box, think about three goals:</p>
<ol>
  <li>
<p><strong>Connecting with your current subscribers</strong>Subscribers already have the box, but the LIVE gives you a chance to experience it together. Think of it like a book club. Everyone has the same thing, and you’re gathering to talk about it.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Creating excitement and FOMO for new customers</strong>If you never show what’s inside the box, how does anyone know what they’re missing? Box reveals let people <em>see</em> the experience. And that’s what makes them want to join.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Creating content for the entire month</strong>One box reveal fuels emails, social posts, reels, blog content, and website SEO. It’s not “extra work,” It’s smart use of something you’re already doing.</p>
</li>
</ol>
<p><br></p>
<p>I always wait until about <strong>90% of boxes are delivered</strong> before going LIVE. Once I know most subscribers have their box, I schedule the LIVE and let people know it’s coming.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>When you go LIVE:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Open with a <strong>strong hook</strong> right away</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Share a little about your day to let people join</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Ask questions early to encourage engagement</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Start with the <strong>hero item</strong> and explain why you built the box around it</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Walk through the box exactly how you curated it</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Ask viewers to share their favorite item (even if no one is LIVE yet)</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>And yes, sometimes no one is watching LIVE. That’s okay. Still act like they are, because the replay matters just as much as the LIVE moment.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>An unboxing is so much more than just showing products. Talk about:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Why you chose the theme</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>How each item connects to the others</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>What inspired the curation</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>How you wanted subscribers to feel when they opened the box</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Before you end the LIVE, always <strong>tease the next box</strong>. Share colors, patterns, or a small sneak peek, but never everything. That curiosity keeps people watching and coming back.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>From one live unboxing, you can create:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>A replay post</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>At least two emails</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>A fast unboxing reel</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Individual product posts</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Lifestyle photos</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Blog content</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>SEO-friendly website pages</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>If you have five to seven items in a box, you easily have <strong>a week or more of content</strong>. And for quarterly box owners, this is how you stretch one box across 90 days.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You don’t need anything fancy.</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>A sturdy overhead camera stand</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>A phone or camera</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Simple lighting</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Hands-only filming when you don’t want to be on camera</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>For reels, film a quick overhead unboxing, speed it up, add music and text. Quick and easy.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>A Note for Quarterly Subscription Boxes: Quarterly boxes can feel harder because you don’t have something new every month. But that’s exactly why box reveals matter.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>When you use one box intentionally, you can:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Keep talking about it without repeating yourself</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Stay visible between shipments</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Continue inviting people to join or get on the waitlist</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Build momentum instead of going quiet</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>If you’re not doing box reveals, especially LIVE, you’re missing out on:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Deeper connections with your subscribers</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Visibility for your business</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Content you already have but aren’t using yet</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Your subscription box is not just a product. It’s a <strong>content engine</strong> that supports growth, engagement, and consistent sales.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Where to find Katie: </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/katiesheartandhome"><u>Katie’s Heart and Home on Facebook</u></a> </p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/katiesheartandhome/"><u>Katie’s Heart and Home on Instagram</u></a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.katiesheartandhome.com/"><u>Katie’s Heart and Home website</u></a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1312</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[97e3a318-fb12-11f0-a63c-9364d2056f80]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9986652547.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>241: Ask Sarah: How Do I Manage Cash Flow With a Quarterly Subscription Box?</title>
      <description>Growing a subscription box is exciting, but when all your revenue keeps going right back into growth, it can start to feel discouraging. Especially when you’re approaching the milestone you set for yourself to finally pay yourself.



In this week’s Ask Sarah episode, I coach Beth, Launch Your Box member and quarterly subscription box owner. She is nearing the two-year mark with her subscription box and feeling the cash flow squeeze that comes with scaling. Beth wants to know how she can build a sustainable business that supports her, not just the box.



Beth’s Question

“I’d love to hear Sarah talk more about cash flow, especially with a quarterly box. I’ve been growing and it’s been a struggle to pay myself because all my money is going into growth. I planned for it to take two years before I could make money and now I’m almost there.”



Overcoming Quarterly Subscription Box Challenges

1. Quarterly Boxes Are the Hardest

The truth is that quarterly subscription boxes are the hardest model to run.You’re stretching cash for 90 days at a time, trying to maintain momentum between shipments, and trying to keep subscribers engaged without a monthly touchpoint.

A successful quarterly box is not impossible, but it does require an intentional strategy.



2. Acknowledging the Long Game

Beth set a realistic two-year growth window. That kind of planning shows she isn’t chasing quick wins. Instead she has been building something meant to last.

Now that she’s nearing that mark, it’s time for a mindset shift. A truly successful business has to start supporting the owner, too.



3. Paying Yourself Is a Growth Strategy

I reminded Beth of something very important. Something all subscription box owners need to hear. Paying yourself isn’t selfish. It’s what keeps you in the game.

Burnout doesn’t grow subscription boxes. Sustainable owners do.



4. Four Practical Cash Flow Options for Quarterly Boxes

Option 1: Add One-Time Offers Between Subscription BoxesMystery boxes, seasonal drops, or exclusive add-ons can create a “bridge” between shipments.The key is to choose low-lift, high-margin offers that don’t add stress or inventory risk.

Option 2: Introduce a Small Monthly OfferThis could be a low-cost physical add-on or even a digital product that fits your brand.The goal is consistent cash flow without overwhelming fulfillment.

Option 3: Pay Yourself First (Even a Little)Create a recurring “pay myself” line in the budget, even if it’s just $100–$250 a month to start.The habit matters more than the amount.

Option 4: Consider Shifting to a Bi-Monthly ModelSometimes the subscription model itself needs to evolve. A bi-monthly box can offer more stable billing, easier marketing, and better cash flow, without the intensity of monthly fulfillment.



5. Navigating the Waitlist Challenge

If closing subscriptions feels necessary, keep your audience warm with intention, like a VIP email list that gets first access to one-time offers.That way, your waitlist doesn’t go cold while you protect your cash flow.

I reminded Beth that reaching the two-year mark she set for herself isn’t the finish line. It’s the beginning of building a business that finally gives back to her.



If you’re running a quarterly subscription box and wondering how to balance growth with sustainability, this episode is a must-listen.



Join me for this special Ask Sarah episode where we talk honestly about cash flow, quarterly subscriptions, and how to build a box that can finally start paying you.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 21 Jan 2026 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Ask Sarah: How Do I Manage Cash Flow With a Quarterly Subscription Box?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>241</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this special Ask Sarah episode where we talk honestly about cash flow, quarterly subscriptions, and how to build a box that can finally start paying you.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Growing a subscription box is exciting, but when all your revenue keeps going right back into growth, it can start to feel discouraging. Especially when you’re approaching the milestone you set for yourself to finally pay yourself.



In this week’s Ask Sarah episode, I coach Beth, Launch Your Box member and quarterly subscription box owner. She is nearing the two-year mark with her subscription box and feeling the cash flow squeeze that comes with scaling. Beth wants to know how she can build a sustainable business that supports her, not just the box.



Beth’s Question

“I’d love to hear Sarah talk more about cash flow, especially with a quarterly box. I’ve been growing and it’s been a struggle to pay myself because all my money is going into growth. I planned for it to take two years before I could make money and now I’m almost there.”



Overcoming Quarterly Subscription Box Challenges

1. Quarterly Boxes Are the Hardest

The truth is that quarterly subscription boxes are the hardest model to run.You’re stretching cash for 90 days at a time, trying to maintain momentum between shipments, and trying to keep subscribers engaged without a monthly touchpoint.

A successful quarterly box is not impossible, but it does require an intentional strategy.



2. Acknowledging the Long Game

Beth set a realistic two-year growth window. That kind of planning shows she isn’t chasing quick wins. Instead she has been building something meant to last.

Now that she’s nearing that mark, it’s time for a mindset shift. A truly successful business has to start supporting the owner, too.



3. Paying Yourself Is a Growth Strategy

I reminded Beth of something very important. Something all subscription box owners need to hear. Paying yourself isn’t selfish. It’s what keeps you in the game.

Burnout doesn’t grow subscription boxes. Sustainable owners do.



4. Four Practical Cash Flow Options for Quarterly Boxes

Option 1: Add One-Time Offers Between Subscription BoxesMystery boxes, seasonal drops, or exclusive add-ons can create a “bridge” between shipments.The key is to choose low-lift, high-margin offers that don’t add stress or inventory risk.

Option 2: Introduce a Small Monthly OfferThis could be a low-cost physical add-on or even a digital product that fits your brand.The goal is consistent cash flow without overwhelming fulfillment.

Option 3: Pay Yourself First (Even a Little)Create a recurring “pay myself” line in the budget, even if it’s just $100–$250 a month to start.The habit matters more than the amount.

Option 4: Consider Shifting to a Bi-Monthly ModelSometimes the subscription model itself needs to evolve. A bi-monthly box can offer more stable billing, easier marketing, and better cash flow, without the intensity of monthly fulfillment.



5. Navigating the Waitlist Challenge

If closing subscriptions feels necessary, keep your audience warm with intention, like a VIP email list that gets first access to one-time offers.That way, your waitlist doesn’t go cold while you protect your cash flow.

I reminded Beth that reaching the two-year mark she set for herself isn’t the finish line. It’s the beginning of building a business that finally gives back to her.



If you’re running a quarterly subscription box and wondering how to balance growth with sustainability, this episode is a must-listen.



Join me for this special Ask Sarah episode where we talk honestly about cash flow, quarterly subscriptions, and how to build a box that can finally start paying you.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Growing a subscription box is exciting, but when all your revenue keeps going right back into growth, it can start to feel discouraging. Especially when you’re approaching the milestone you set for yourself to finally pay yourself<em>.</em></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this week’s <strong>Ask Sarah</strong> episode, I coach Beth, Launch Your Box member and quarterly subscription box owner. She is nearing the two-year mark with her subscription box and feeling the cash flow squeeze that comes with scaling. Beth wants to know how she can build a sustainable business that supports her, not just the box.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Beth’s Question</p>
<p>“I’d love to hear Sarah talk more about cash flow, especially with a quarterly box. I’ve been growing and it’s been a struggle to pay myself because all my money is going into growth. I planned for it to take two years before I could make money and now I’m almost there.”</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Overcoming Quarterly Subscription Box Challenges</p>
<p>1. Quarterly Boxes Are the Hardest</p>
<p>The truth is that <strong>quarterly subscription boxes are the hardest model to run.</strong>You’re stretching cash for 90 days at a time, trying to maintain momentum between shipments, and trying to keep subscribers engaged without a monthly touchpoint.</p>
<p>A successful quarterly box is not impossible, but it does require an intentional strategy.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>2. Acknowledging the Long Game</p>
<p>Beth set a realistic two-year growth window. That kind of planning shows she isn’t chasing quick wins. Instead she has been building something meant to last.</p>
<p>Now that she’s nearing that mark, it’s time for a mindset shift. <strong>A truly successful</strong> <strong>business has to start supporting the owner, too.</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>3. Paying Yourself Is a Growth Strategy</p>
<p>I reminded Beth of something very important. Something all subscription box owners need to hear. <strong>Paying yourself isn’t selfish. It’s what keeps you in the game.</strong></p>
<p>Burnout doesn’t grow subscription boxes. Sustainable owners do.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>4. Four Practical Cash Flow Options for Quarterly Boxes</p>
<p><strong>Option 1: Add One-Time Offers Between Subscription Boxes</strong>Mystery boxes, seasonal drops, or exclusive add-ons can create a “bridge” between shipments.The key is to choose low-lift, high-margin offers that don’t add stress or inventory risk.</p>
<p><strong>Option 2: Introduce a Small Monthly Offer</strong>This could be a low-cost physical add-on or even a digital product that fits your brand.The goal is consistent cash flow without overwhelming fulfillment.</p>
<p><strong>Option 3: Pay Yourself First (Even a Little)</strong>Create a recurring “pay myself” line in the budget, even if it’s just $100–$250 a month to start.The habit matters more than the amount.</p>
<p><strong>Option 4: Consider Shifting to a Bi-Monthly Model</strong>Sometimes the subscription model itself needs to evolve. A bi-monthly box can offer more stable billing, easier marketing, and better cash flow, without the intensity of monthly fulfillment.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>5. Navigating the Waitlist Challenge</p>
<p>If closing subscriptions feels necessary, keep your audience warm with intention, like a VIP email list that gets first access to one-time offers.That way, your waitlist doesn’t go cold while you protect your cash flow.</p>
<p>I reminded Beth that reaching the two-year mark she set for herself isn’t the finish line. It’s the beginning of building a business that finally gives back to her<em>.</em></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you’re running a quarterly subscription box and wondering how to balance growth with sustainability, this episode is a must-listen.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Join me for this special Ask Sarah episode where</strong> we talk honestly about cash flow, quarterly subscriptions, and how to build a box that can finally start paying <em>you</em>.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> <br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>
</li>
</ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1263</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b8946654-f4bb-11f0-82eb-2b23019dd070]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1708501829.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>240: Ask Sarah: The 70% Rule for Subscription Box Content</title>
      <description>One of the biggest challenges subscription box owners face isn’t a lack of ideas. It’s knowing what to promote, when, and how to stay focused without feeling like you’re leaving money on the table.



In this first episode of our new Ask Sarah series, I’m joined by Launch Your Box member Jenn Klein, founder of The Woodland Hare. Jenn brought a question that so many box owners quietly wrestle with:



“Sometimes I feel torn between promoting the subscription box and promoting other items. When I post too many things in one day, they don’t seem to be seen. Should I mainly focus on the subscription?”



If you sell both a subscription and one-off products, this episode will bring instant clarity.



Why This Confusion Is So Common

I started by telling Jenn what I want you to hear too: you’re not doing anything wrong.



This tension shows up when you care deeply about your business and you’re trying to make smart decisions. But when everything gets promoted equally, the message can get muddy. And that’s when audiences scroll past instead of taking action.



Clarity isn’t about doing more. It’s about choosing a clear direction.



Your Subscription Is the Main Character

Here’s the core of the coaching I gave Jenn:

Your subscription box is your recurring revenue engine. It’s the offer that builds stability, momentum, and long-term growth, so most of your marketing should lead there.



That doesn’t mean your shop products don’t matter. It means all roads point back to the subscription.



I call this the 70% Rule:


  
About 70% of your content should lead to or support your subscription box.



  
The remaining 30% can spotlight shop items, behind-the-scenes moments, or lifestyle content, as long as it still connects back to the box when possible.






How to Promote Other Products Without Losing Focus

Instead of promoting everything separately, I encouraged Jenn to think about integration.



Your shop products can:


  
Tease what’s coming in a future box



  
Highlight past box favorites



  
Show how items pair together in real life



  
Reinforce the value of being a subscriber (“Subscribers saw this first!”)




This is exactly how I approach my own businesses. Even when I’m showing a one-time product, the direction of the post still leads people toward the subscription.



A Simple Weekly Content Rhythm

We also talked through how to simplify content planning so it feels supportive, not overwhelming.



A consistent rhythm might include:


  
Sneak peeks and theme teasers



  
Subscriber photos or unboxings



  
Short educational posts answering FAQs



  
Lifestyle shots showing products in use



  
Clear, confident CTAs to join or stay subscribed




The goal isn’t perfection. It’s focus.



Coaching Toward Simplicity (and Ease)

One of the most important reminders I shared with Jenn was this:

You don’t need to be everywhere, doing everything, all the time.



When you simplify your focus, your audience knows what to do. And you get to show up with more confidence and less pressure.



If You’re Feeling Torn Right Now…

Come back to this question: What do I want to grow long-term?



Let that answer guide your content, your energy, and your decisions.



Your other products aren’t going anywhere. They can support the big picture without stealing the spotlight.



Join me for this special “Ask Sarah” episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast and let’s simplify your content strategy so your subscription can grow with clarity and confidence.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 14 Jan 2026 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Ask Sarah: The 70% Rule for Subscription Box Content</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>240</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this special “Ask Sarah” episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast and let’s simplify your content strategy so your subscription can grow with clarity and confidence.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>One of the biggest challenges subscription box owners face isn’t a lack of ideas. It’s knowing what to promote, when, and how to stay focused without feeling like you’re leaving money on the table.



In this first episode of our new Ask Sarah series, I’m joined by Launch Your Box member Jenn Klein, founder of The Woodland Hare. Jenn brought a question that so many box owners quietly wrestle with:



“Sometimes I feel torn between promoting the subscription box and promoting other items. When I post too many things in one day, they don’t seem to be seen. Should I mainly focus on the subscription?”



If you sell both a subscription and one-off products, this episode will bring instant clarity.



Why This Confusion Is So Common

I started by telling Jenn what I want you to hear too: you’re not doing anything wrong.



This tension shows up when you care deeply about your business and you’re trying to make smart decisions. But when everything gets promoted equally, the message can get muddy. And that’s when audiences scroll past instead of taking action.



Clarity isn’t about doing more. It’s about choosing a clear direction.



Your Subscription Is the Main Character

Here’s the core of the coaching I gave Jenn:

Your subscription box is your recurring revenue engine. It’s the offer that builds stability, momentum, and long-term growth, so most of your marketing should lead there.



That doesn’t mean your shop products don’t matter. It means all roads point back to the subscription.



I call this the 70% Rule:


  
About 70% of your content should lead to or support your subscription box.



  
The remaining 30% can spotlight shop items, behind-the-scenes moments, or lifestyle content, as long as it still connects back to the box when possible.






How to Promote Other Products Without Losing Focus

Instead of promoting everything separately, I encouraged Jenn to think about integration.



Your shop products can:


  
Tease what’s coming in a future box



  
Highlight past box favorites



  
Show how items pair together in real life



  
Reinforce the value of being a subscriber (“Subscribers saw this first!”)




This is exactly how I approach my own businesses. Even when I’m showing a one-time product, the direction of the post still leads people toward the subscription.



A Simple Weekly Content Rhythm

We also talked through how to simplify content planning so it feels supportive, not overwhelming.



A consistent rhythm might include:


  
Sneak peeks and theme teasers



  
Subscriber photos or unboxings



  
Short educational posts answering FAQs



  
Lifestyle shots showing products in use



  
Clear, confident CTAs to join or stay subscribed




The goal isn’t perfection. It’s focus.



Coaching Toward Simplicity (and Ease)

One of the most important reminders I shared with Jenn was this:

You don’t need to be everywhere, doing everything, all the time.



When you simplify your focus, your audience knows what to do. And you get to show up with more confidence and less pressure.



If You’re Feeling Torn Right Now…

Come back to this question: What do I want to grow long-term?



Let that answer guide your content, your energy, and your decisions.



Your other products aren’t going anywhere. They can support the big picture without stealing the spotlight.



Join me for this special “Ask Sarah” episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast and let’s simplify your content strategy so your subscription can grow with clarity and confidence.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>One of the biggest challenges subscription box owners face isn’t a lack of ideas. It’s knowing what to promote, when, and how to stay focused without feeling like you’re leaving money on the table.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this first episode of our new <em>Ask Sarah</em> series, I’m joined by Launch Your Box member Jenn Klein, founder of <em>The Woodland Hare</em>. Jenn brought a question that so many box owners quietly wrestle with:</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><em>“Sometimes I feel torn between promoting the subscription box and promoting other items. When I post too many things in one day, they don’t seem to be seen. Should I mainly focus on the subscription?”</em></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you sell both a subscription and one-off products, this episode will bring instant clarity.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Why This Confusion Is So Common</p>
<p>I started by telling Jenn what I want you to hear too: you’re not doing anything wrong.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>This tension shows up when you care deeply about your business and you’re trying to make smart decisions. But when everything gets promoted equally, the message can get muddy. And that’s when audiences scroll past instead of taking action.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Clarity isn’t about doing <em>more</em>. It’s about choosing a clear direction.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Your Subscription Is the Main Character</p>
<p>Here’s the core of the coaching I gave Jenn:</p>
<p>Your subscription box is your <strong>recurring revenue engine</strong>. It’s the offer that builds stability, momentum, and long-term growth, so most of your marketing should lead there.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>That doesn’t mean your shop products don’t matter. It means <strong>all roads point back to the subscription</strong>.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>I call this the <strong>70% Rule</strong>:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>About <strong>70% of your content</strong> should lead to or support your subscription box.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>The remaining <strong>30%</strong> can spotlight shop items, behind-the-scenes moments, or lifestyle content, as long as it still connects back to the box when possible.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>How to Promote Other Products <em>Without</em> Losing Focus</p>
<p>Instead of promoting everything separately, I encouraged Jenn to think about <strong>integration</strong>.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Your shop products can:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Tease what’s coming in a future box</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Highlight past box favorites</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Show how items pair together in real life</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Reinforce the value of being a subscriber (“Subscribers saw this first!”)<br></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>This is exactly how I approach my own businesses. Even when I’m showing a one-time product, the direction of the post still leads people toward the subscription.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>A Simple Weekly Content Rhythm</p>
<p>We also talked through how to simplify content planning so it feels supportive, not overwhelming.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>A consistent rhythm might include:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Sneak peeks and theme teasers</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Subscriber photos or unboxings</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Short educational posts answering FAQs</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Lifestyle shots showing products in use</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Clear, confident CTAs to join or stay subscribed</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>The goal isn’t perfection. It’s focus.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Coaching Toward Simplicity (and Ease)</p>
<p>One of the most important reminders I shared with Jenn was this:</p>
<p><strong>You don’t need to be everywhere, doing everything, all the time.</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>When you simplify your focus, your audience knows what to do. And you get to show up with more confidence and less pressure.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If You’re Feeling Torn Right Now…</p>
<p>Come back to this question: <strong>What do I want to grow long-term?</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Let that answer guide your content, your energy, and your decisions.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Your other products aren’t going anywhere. They can support the big picture without stealing the spotlight.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Join me for this special “Ask Sarah” episode</strong> of the Launch Your Box Podcast and let’s simplify your content strategy so your subscription can grow with clarity and confidence.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>993</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a616188a-f036-11f0-8f6e-17572639e09c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4970824920.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>239: Inside My Subscription Box Business: Year-End Recap and 2026 Strategy</title>
      <description>I’m sharing a real look inside my own subscription box business. Not the highlight reel. The actual numbers, the launches that worked, the one that didn’t, and the decisions that shaped where we’re headed in 2026.



The numbers never tell the whole story. But they also never lie. Always start by looking at your numbers. 



I added 1,300 new subscribers in 2025. 



What surprised me most? Some of our biggest growth didn’t happen during launches at all.



What happened between launches mattered more than I expected.



May and September ended up being two of our strongest months. No cart open. No big push. Just momentum doing its job.



What made the difference? 


  
Staying visible instead of disappearing after launches



  
Treating email like a growth tool, not just a reminder



  
Paying close attention to who was already saying yes




That’s also why retention became such a big win this year:


  
I’m ending 2025 with a 94% retention rate



  
People weren’t just buying a box once, they were staying






One of my biggest - and somewhat unexpected wins - was my teacher tee subscription launch. My “baby subscription” doesn't always get a lot of attention. I ran a short, focused launch that doubled that subscription in just five days.



Revenue told one story. Profit told another.



After 8.5 years, I passed $6 million in subscription box sales. A huge milestone that felt great. But 2025 didn’t end up being a record year.


  
Revenue finished 4.8% down compared to the year before



  
Profit margins increased by 12%




That shift came from smarter buying, cleaner inventory, and fewer decisions made out of panic.



You can be down in revenue and still be building a healthier business.



Some things in 2025 were harder than they should’ve been.



We ran into backend issues that affected payments, cash flow, and retention. 



At the same time, social media visibility dropped hard. Content that used to perform just didn’t.



If you’ve ever felt like you’re doing everything right and still not seeing traction, you’re not imagining it. This was one of those years where pivoting mattered more than pushing.



Where I’m putting my energy in 2026.



I’m going all in on what’s already working.



That looks like:


  
Growing subscriptions earlier in the year instead of waiting



  
Putting more focus on email and paid ads between launches



  
Cutting tools, products, and offers that don’t earn their keep



  
Letting subscriptions lead instead of chasing one-off ideas




When I applied the 80/20 rule, the answer was obvious. Most of the revenue in my business comes from subscriptions. So that’s where the focus stays.



Before you plan anything, ask yourself this.



As you head into 2026, I want you thinking about three simple questions:


  
What worked - and how can you do more of it?



  
What didn’t - and what are you ready to let go of?



  
Where do you actually want to go in 2026 - and what needs to change to get there?




You don’t need more ideas. You need fewer, better decisions.



Join me for this episode for an honest look behind the scenes and a grounded way to think about what comes next in your own business.



And if you want support along the way, come join us inside Launch Your Box. You don’t have to figure this out alone.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 07 Jan 2026 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Inside My Subscription Box Business: Year-End Recap and 2026 Strategy</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>3</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>239</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode for an honest look behind the scenes and a grounded way to think about what comes next in your own business.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I’m sharing a real look inside my own subscription box business. Not the highlight reel. The actual numbers, the launches that worked, the one that didn’t, and the decisions that shaped where we’re headed in 2026.



The numbers never tell the whole story. But they also never lie. Always start by looking at your numbers. 



I added 1,300 new subscribers in 2025. 



What surprised me most? Some of our biggest growth didn’t happen during launches at all.



What happened between launches mattered more than I expected.



May and September ended up being two of our strongest months. No cart open. No big push. Just momentum doing its job.



What made the difference? 


  
Staying visible instead of disappearing after launches



  
Treating email like a growth tool, not just a reminder



  
Paying close attention to who was already saying yes




That’s also why retention became such a big win this year:


  
I’m ending 2025 with a 94% retention rate



  
People weren’t just buying a box once, they were staying






One of my biggest - and somewhat unexpected wins - was my teacher tee subscription launch. My “baby subscription” doesn't always get a lot of attention. I ran a short, focused launch that doubled that subscription in just five days.



Revenue told one story. Profit told another.



After 8.5 years, I passed $6 million in subscription box sales. A huge milestone that felt great. But 2025 didn’t end up being a record year.


  
Revenue finished 4.8% down compared to the year before



  
Profit margins increased by 12%




That shift came from smarter buying, cleaner inventory, and fewer decisions made out of panic.



You can be down in revenue and still be building a healthier business.



Some things in 2025 were harder than they should’ve been.



We ran into backend issues that affected payments, cash flow, and retention. 



At the same time, social media visibility dropped hard. Content that used to perform just didn’t.



If you’ve ever felt like you’re doing everything right and still not seeing traction, you’re not imagining it. This was one of those years where pivoting mattered more than pushing.



Where I’m putting my energy in 2026.



I’m going all in on what’s already working.



That looks like:


  
Growing subscriptions earlier in the year instead of waiting



  
Putting more focus on email and paid ads between launches



  
Cutting tools, products, and offers that don’t earn their keep



  
Letting subscriptions lead instead of chasing one-off ideas




When I applied the 80/20 rule, the answer was obvious. Most of the revenue in my business comes from subscriptions. So that’s where the focus stays.



Before you plan anything, ask yourself this.



As you head into 2026, I want you thinking about three simple questions:


  
What worked - and how can you do more of it?



  
What didn’t - and what are you ready to let go of?



  
Where do you actually want to go in 2026 - and what needs to change to get there?




You don’t need more ideas. You need fewer, better decisions.



Join me for this episode for an honest look behind the scenes and a grounded way to think about what comes next in your own business.



And if you want support along the way, come join us inside Launch Your Box. You don’t have to figure this out alone.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’m sharing a real look inside my own subscription box business. Not the highlight reel. The actual numbers, the launches that worked, the one that didn’t, and the decisions that shaped where we’re headed in 2026.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>The numbers never tell the whole story. But they also never lie. Always start by looking at your numbers. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>I added <strong>1,300 new subscribers</strong> in 2025. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>What surprised me most? Some of our biggest growth didn’t happen during launches at all.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>What happened between launches mattered more than I expected.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>May and September ended up being two of our strongest months. No cart open. No big push. Just momentum doing its job.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>What made the difference? </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Staying visible instead of disappearing after launches</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Treating email like a growth tool, not just a reminder</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Paying close attention to who was already saying yes</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>That’s also why retention became such a big win this year:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>I’m ending 2025 with a 94% retention rate</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>People weren’t just buying a box once, they were staying</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>One of my biggest - and somewhat unexpected wins - was my teacher tee subscription launch. My “baby subscription” doesn't always get a lot of attention. I ran a short, focused launch that doubled that subscription in just five days.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Revenue told one story. Profit told another.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>After 8.5 years, I passed $6 million in subscription box sales. A huge milestone that felt great. But 2025 didn’t end up being a record year.</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Revenue finished <strong>4.8% down</strong> compared to the year before</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Profit margins increased by <strong>12%</strong></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>That shift came from smarter buying, cleaner inventory, and fewer decisions made out of panic.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You can be down in revenue and still be building a healthier business.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Some things in 2025 were harder than they should’ve been.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>We ran into backend issues that affected payments, cash flow, and retention. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>At the same time, social media visibility dropped hard. Content that used to perform just didn’t.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you’ve ever felt like you’re doing everything right and still not seeing traction, you’re not imagining it. This was one of those years where pivoting mattered more than pushing.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Where I’m putting my energy in 2026.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>I’m going all in on what’s already working.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>That looks like:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Growing subscriptions earlier in the year instead of waiting</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Putting more focus on email and paid ads between launches</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Cutting tools, products, and offers that don’t earn their keep</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Letting subscriptions lead instead of chasing one-off ideas</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>When I applied the 80/20 rule, the answer was obvious. Most of the revenue in my business comes from subscriptions. So that’s where the focus stays.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Before you plan anything, ask yourself this.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>As you head into 2026, I want you thinking about three simple questions:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><strong>What worked </strong>- and how can you do more of it?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>What didn’t </strong>- and what are you ready to let go of?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Where do you actually want to go in 2026</strong> - and what needs to change to get there?</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You don’t need more ideas. You need fewer, better decisions.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Join me for this episode</strong> for an honest look behind the scenes and a grounded way to think about what comes next in your own business.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>And if you want support along the way, come join us inside <strong>Launch Your Box</strong>. You don’t have to figure this out alone.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1595</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[26e49fb6-e9ae-11f0-b24f-7733dd862ea9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2025571886.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Taking Your Side Hustle to a Full-time Gig</title>
      <description>Have you thought about taking your subscription box business from a side hustle to a full-time gig?

 

It’s absolutely possible. I did it and so have many members of Launch Your Box. 

 

But… 

 

Before you quit your full-time job or make any major changes to your business, you need to ask - and answer - some questions. And you need to get really comfortable with your financial details, business and personal. 

 

Take your time and get real about what your goals are. Are you currently working 40/50/60 hours a week and want to work less? Do you want to make more income than you have been? 

 

The truth is, you can get there. But you’ll need to make a plan and work that plan. Start by asking yourself these four questions: 




  What is the income you need to replace? 

  What is the survival income you need to cover your bare bones expenses every month? 

  What portion of that survival income can be covered by someone else (spouse, parents, roommates)? 

  What is the initial investment you’ll need for your business (products, supplies, packaging, tech)? 


 

Understand that your business will need to be profitable before you can pay yourself. That takes time. It took me 9 months before I was able to pay myself a regular paycheck. 8 ½ years later, I pay myself a very nice salary and also pay the salaries of more than 20 employees. 

 

Join me for this episode as I take you on my journey from tiny side hustle making $200 a month to where I am now, running two multi seven-figure businesses, answering those questions, knowing my numbers, and making careful decisions every step of the way.  

 

Important Links: 

Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠



  ⁠Instagram⁠



  
⁠ Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 


Are you ready for ⁠ Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠ Join the waitlist⁠ today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 31 Dec 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as I take you on my journey from tiny side hustle making $200 a month to where I am now, running two multi seven-figure businesses, answering those questions, knowing my numbers, and making careful decisions every step of the way.  </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you thought about taking your subscription box business from a side hustle to a full-time gig?

 

It’s absolutely possible. I did it and so have many members of Launch Your Box. 

 

But… 

 

Before you quit your full-time job or make any major changes to your business, you need to ask - and answer - some questions. And you need to get really comfortable with your financial details, business and personal. 

 

Take your time and get real about what your goals are. Are you currently working 40/50/60 hours a week and want to work less? Do you want to make more income than you have been? 

 

The truth is, you can get there. But you’ll need to make a plan and work that plan. Start by asking yourself these four questions: 




  What is the income you need to replace? 

  What is the survival income you need to cover your bare bones expenses every month? 

  What portion of that survival income can be covered by someone else (spouse, parents, roommates)? 

  What is the initial investment you’ll need for your business (products, supplies, packaging, tech)? 


 

Understand that your business will need to be profitable before you can pay yourself. That takes time. It took me 9 months before I was able to pay myself a regular paycheck. 8 ½ years later, I pay myself a very nice salary and also pay the salaries of more than 20 employees. 

 

Join me for this episode as I take you on my journey from tiny side hustle making $200 a month to where I am now, running two multi seven-figure businesses, answering those questions, knowing my numbers, and making careful decisions every step of the way.  

 

Important Links: 

Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠



  ⁠Instagram⁠



  
⁠ Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 


Are you ready for ⁠ Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠ Join the waitlist⁠ today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you thought about taking your subscription box business from a side hustle to a full-time gig?</p>
<p> </p>
<p>It’s absolutely possible. I did it and so have many members of Launch Your Box. </p>
<p> </p>
<p>But… </p>
<p> </p>
<p>Before you quit your full-time job or make any major changes to your business, you need to ask - and answer - some questions. And you need to get really comfortable with your financial details, business <em>and</em> personal. </p>
<p> </p>
<p>Take your time and get real about what your goals are. Are you currently working 40/50/60 hours a week and want to work less? Do you want to make more income than you have been? </p>
<p> </p>
<p>The truth is, you <em>can</em> get there. But you’ll need to make a plan and work that plan. Start by asking yourself these four questions: </p>
<p><br></p>
<ul>
  <li>What is the income you need to replace? </li>
  <li>What is the survival income you need to cover your bare bones expenses every month? </li>
  <li>What portion of that survival income can be covered by someone else (spouse, parents, roommates)? </li>
  <li>What is the initial investment you’ll need for your business (products, supplies, packaging, tech)? </li>
</ul>
<p> </p>
<p>Understand that your business will need to be profitable before you can pay yourself. That takes time. It took me 9 months before I was able to pay myself a regular paycheck. 8 ½ years later, I pay myself a very nice salary and also pay the salaries of more than 20 employees. </p>
<p> </p>
<p>Join me for this episode as I take you on my journey from tiny side hustle making $200 a month to where I am now, running two multi seven-figure businesses, answering those questions, knowing my numbers, and making careful decisions every step of the way.  </p>
<p> </p>
<p>Important Links: </p>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">⁠ Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </li>
</ul>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">⁠ Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">⁠ Join the waitlist⁠</a> today! </p>
<p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1600</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e819dda4-bdcb-11f0-b5e5-c3343f1201cd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3707751928.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>238: Turn Your Camera Roll into Sales This Weekend</title>
      <description>You don’t need a photoshoot.You don’t need new content.And you definitely don’t need to overthink it.



In this Friday Fuel episode, I’m sharing how to turn what’s already sitting in your camera roll into real sales this weekend using photos and videos you’ve already taken.



If you’ve been telling yourself you’ll show up “when things are more polished,” this episode is your permission slip to stop waiting and start posting.



Your phone is full of content that sells, you just haven’t used it yet. I walk you through exactly what to look for in your camera roll, including:


  
Packing boxes



  
Unboxing moments



  
Stacked shipments



  
Labels, inserts, and flat lays



  
Sneak peeks of inventory



  
Your hands assembling boxes



  
Your workspace mid-ship




Even the messy, in-progress moments count. Especially those.



Your audience isn’t just buying a box. They’re buying from you.



In this episode, I explain why everyday, non-business photos build trust. And how trust leads to sales. Things like:


  
Your morning coffee while prepping orders



  
A walk outside while thinking through next month’s box



  
Your dog hanging out in the office



  
A messy work table before launch



  
A quick post office run



  
Travel photos with a behind-the-scenes caption




These aren’t filler posts. They’re connection builders.



A Simple 3-Day Posting Plan (Friday–Sunday)

I break it down into a realistic, no-stress weekend posting plan using only what’s already on your phone.



Friday: Visibility &amp; Light CTA


  
Reel or short clip (packing, organizing, workspace setup)



  
Casual text like: “Packing this month’s box. Want one?”



  
Simple static post with a clear link-in-bio CTA






Saturday: Show Value + Build Connection


  
Carousel showing what’s inside the box



  
Stories with behind-the-scenes clips, product shots, polls, or countdowns



  
A quick “can’t wait for these to go out” talking clip if you want






Sunday: Urgency + Final Push


  
Reel or story of boxes stacked or ready to ship



  
Static post with a detail shot



  
Clear urgency: “This box ships tomorrow. Last chance to grab yours.”




You don’t need to overthink it

You just need to scroll through your phone and post

Take Action: 

Pick one photo from your camera roll right now, write a quick caption, and post it before the end of the day.



And remember: 


  
Real moments sell.



  
Personality sells.



  
Connection with your audience sells.




And your camera roll already has everything you need.



Join me for this episode, where I’ll show you how to scroll your camera roll, pick a few everyday photos, and turn them into connection, visibility, and real sales this weekend. No new content, no overthinking, just action.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 26 Dec 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Turn Your Camera Roll into Sales This Weekend</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>238</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode, where I’ll show you how to scroll your camera roll, pick a few everyday photos, and turn them into connection, visibility, and real sales this weekend. No new content, no overthinking, just action.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>You don’t need a photoshoot.You don’t need new content.And you definitely don’t need to overthink it.



In this Friday Fuel episode, I’m sharing how to turn what’s already sitting in your camera roll into real sales this weekend using photos and videos you’ve already taken.



If you’ve been telling yourself you’ll show up “when things are more polished,” this episode is your permission slip to stop waiting and start posting.



Your phone is full of content that sells, you just haven’t used it yet. I walk you through exactly what to look for in your camera roll, including:


  
Packing boxes



  
Unboxing moments



  
Stacked shipments



  
Labels, inserts, and flat lays



  
Sneak peeks of inventory



  
Your hands assembling boxes



  
Your workspace mid-ship




Even the messy, in-progress moments count. Especially those.



Your audience isn’t just buying a box. They’re buying from you.



In this episode, I explain why everyday, non-business photos build trust. And how trust leads to sales. Things like:


  
Your morning coffee while prepping orders



  
A walk outside while thinking through next month’s box



  
Your dog hanging out in the office



  
A messy work table before launch



  
A quick post office run



  
Travel photos with a behind-the-scenes caption




These aren’t filler posts. They’re connection builders.



A Simple 3-Day Posting Plan (Friday–Sunday)

I break it down into a realistic, no-stress weekend posting plan using only what’s already on your phone.



Friday: Visibility &amp; Light CTA


  
Reel or short clip (packing, organizing, workspace setup)



  
Casual text like: “Packing this month’s box. Want one?”



  
Simple static post with a clear link-in-bio CTA






Saturday: Show Value + Build Connection


  
Carousel showing what’s inside the box



  
Stories with behind-the-scenes clips, product shots, polls, or countdowns



  
A quick “can’t wait for these to go out” talking clip if you want






Sunday: Urgency + Final Push


  
Reel or story of boxes stacked or ready to ship



  
Static post with a detail shot



  
Clear urgency: “This box ships tomorrow. Last chance to grab yours.”




You don’t need to overthink it

You just need to scroll through your phone and post

Take Action: 

Pick one photo from your camera roll right now, write a quick caption, and post it before the end of the day.



And remember: 


  
Real moments sell.



  
Personality sells.



  
Connection with your audience sells.




And your camera roll already has everything you need.



Join me for this episode, where I’ll show you how to scroll your camera roll, pick a few everyday photos, and turn them into connection, visibility, and real sales this weekend. No new content, no overthinking, just action.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>You don’t need a photoshoot.You don’t need new content.And you definitely don’t need to overthink it.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this Friday Fuel episode, I’m sharing how to turn what’s already sitting in your camera roll into real sales this weekend using photos and videos you’ve <em>already taken</em>.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you’ve been telling yourself you’ll show up “when things are more polished,” this episode is your permission slip to stop waiting and start posting.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Your phone is full of content that sells, you just haven’t used it yet. I walk you through exactly what to look for in your camera roll, including:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Packing boxes</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Unboxing moments</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Stacked shipments</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Labels, inserts, and flat lays</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Sneak peeks of inventory</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Your hands assembling boxes</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Your workspace mid-ship</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Even the messy, in-progress moments count. Especially those.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Your audience isn’t just buying a box. They’re buying <em>from you</em>.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this episode, I explain why everyday, non-business photos build trust. And how trust leads to sales. Things like:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Your morning coffee while prepping orders</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>A walk outside while thinking through next month’s box</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Your dog hanging out in the office</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>A messy work table before launch</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>A quick post office run</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Travel photos with a behind-the-scenes caption</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>These aren’t filler posts. They’re connection builders.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>A Simple 3-Day Posting Plan (Friday–Sunday)</p>
<p>I break it down into a realistic, no-stress weekend posting plan using only what’s already on your phone.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Friday: Visibility &amp; Light CTA</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Reel or short clip (packing, organizing, workspace setup)</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Casual text like: <em>“Packing this month’s box. Want one?”</em></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Simple static post with a clear link-in-bio CTA</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Saturday: Show Value + Build Connection</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Carousel showing what’s inside the box</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Stories with behind-the-scenes clips, product shots, polls, or countdowns</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>A quick “can’t wait for these to go out” talking clip if you want</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Sunday: Urgency + Final Push</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Reel or story of boxes stacked or ready to ship</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Static post with a detail shot</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Clear urgency: <em>“This box ships tomorrow. Last chance to grab yours.”</em></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You don’t need to overthink it</p>
<p>You just need to scroll through your phone and post<br></p>
<p>Take Action: </p>
<p>Pick one photo from your camera roll right now, write a quick caption, and post it before the end of the day.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>And remember: </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Real moments sell.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Personality sells.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Connection with your audience sells.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>And your camera roll already has everything you need.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Join me for this episode</strong>, where I’ll show you how to scroll your camera roll, pick a few everyday photos, and turn them into connection, visibility, and real sales this weekend. No new content, no overthinking, just action.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>642</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6d9794ee-ded8-11f0-b655-67c700f46635]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7650317198.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>237: 5 Reasons you Should start a Subscription box in 2026</title>
      <description>If you’ve been sitting on a subscription box idea for way too long, this episode is for you.



In today’s episode, I’m breaking down 5 powerful reasons why 2026 is an incredible time to start a subscription box. Yes, even if you’ve been watching this space for years and wondering if it’s “too late.”

Spoiler alert: it’s not. Not even close.



We’ll talk about market opportunity, recurring revenue, loyal customers, and why subscription boxes continue to thrive. Especially for niche, well-positioned brands.



I get asked all the time: “Is it too late to start a subscription box?”The truth? The industry is still growing fast, and there is so much room for niche boxes done well.




  
The global subscription box market passed $37 billion in 2025



  
It’s projected to grow past $100 billion in the next few years



  
You don’t need a subscription box for everyone - just a box for your people. 






Reason #1: You Don’t Have to Constantly Sell

If you’ve ever felt stuck in the daily hustle of:


  
Posting



  
Emailing



  
Promoting



  
Starting over tomorrow




Subscription boxes allow you to sell once and get paid month after month, building revenue that compounds instead of resets.



In a world where:


  
Organic reach is down



  
Ads cost more



  
Attention is scattered




Recurring revenue brings stability and peace of mind.



Reason #2: You Build Loyal, Raving Fans


  
Subscribers open more emails and engage more deeply



  
Long-term subscribers turn into your best customers



  
Community is one of the biggest hidden benefits of a subscription box




(My average subscriber stays 17 months - and that relationship matters.)



Reason #3: The Product Is Already Sold

You’re buying inventory after customers have already said yes.


  
Less risk



  
Less waste



  
Easier planning



  
Better cash flow




And in 2026, customers want thoughtful, intentional products, not mass-produced clutter.



Reason #4: You Get to Create Something You Love

In a world full of:


  
Screens



  
Algorithms



  
AI-generated everything




A subscription box is different. It’s real. It’s tangible. It’s personal.



Whether your box is built around products, creativity, education, or connection, your passion becomes the experience, and your audience feels that.



Reason #5: Predictable, Consistent Revenue

Feast-and-famine sales cycles are exhausting.



Subscription boxes give you:


  
Stability



  
The ability to plan ahead



  
Freedom to hire help or take a break



  
Revenue that doesn’t disappear if one post flops




There is nothing like watching renewals hit your account month after month.



If you think it’s “too late,” here’s the shift to make:

The most successful subscription boxes aren’t broad. They’re specific.



People want to feel:


  
Seen



  
Connected



  
Part of something






If you’ve been waiting… This is your sign.



If you’re ready to move from thinking to planning, I want you to join me for my FREE 6 in 60 Workshop. In just 60 minutes, I’ll walk you through how to plan 6 months of subscription boxes that speak directly to your ideal customer. Whether you’re still brainstorming or ready to launch, this workshop will give you clarity and momentum.



Join me for this episode to hear why 2026 is a smart, strategic time to launch a subscription box. And how this business model can give you the stability, freedom, and momentum you’ve been craving.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Dec 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>5 Reasons you Should start a Subscription box in 2026</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>237</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In today’s episode, I’m breaking down 5 powerful reasons why 2026 is an incredible time to start a subscription box. Yes, even if you’ve been watching this space for years and wondering if it’s “too late.”</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you’ve been sitting on a subscription box idea for way too long, this episode is for you.



In today’s episode, I’m breaking down 5 powerful reasons why 2026 is an incredible time to start a subscription box. Yes, even if you’ve been watching this space for years and wondering if it’s “too late.”

Spoiler alert: it’s not. Not even close.



We’ll talk about market opportunity, recurring revenue, loyal customers, and why subscription boxes continue to thrive. Especially for niche, well-positioned brands.



I get asked all the time: “Is it too late to start a subscription box?”The truth? The industry is still growing fast, and there is so much room for niche boxes done well.




  
The global subscription box market passed $37 billion in 2025



  
It’s projected to grow past $100 billion in the next few years



  
You don’t need a subscription box for everyone - just a box for your people. 






Reason #1: You Don’t Have to Constantly Sell

If you’ve ever felt stuck in the daily hustle of:


  
Posting



  
Emailing



  
Promoting



  
Starting over tomorrow




Subscription boxes allow you to sell once and get paid month after month, building revenue that compounds instead of resets.



In a world where:


  
Organic reach is down



  
Ads cost more



  
Attention is scattered




Recurring revenue brings stability and peace of mind.



Reason #2: You Build Loyal, Raving Fans


  
Subscribers open more emails and engage more deeply



  
Long-term subscribers turn into your best customers



  
Community is one of the biggest hidden benefits of a subscription box




(My average subscriber stays 17 months - and that relationship matters.)



Reason #3: The Product Is Already Sold

You’re buying inventory after customers have already said yes.


  
Less risk



  
Less waste



  
Easier planning



  
Better cash flow




And in 2026, customers want thoughtful, intentional products, not mass-produced clutter.



Reason #4: You Get to Create Something You Love

In a world full of:


  
Screens



  
Algorithms



  
AI-generated everything




A subscription box is different. It’s real. It’s tangible. It’s personal.



Whether your box is built around products, creativity, education, or connection, your passion becomes the experience, and your audience feels that.



Reason #5: Predictable, Consistent Revenue

Feast-and-famine sales cycles are exhausting.



Subscription boxes give you:


  
Stability



  
The ability to plan ahead



  
Freedom to hire help or take a break



  
Revenue that doesn’t disappear if one post flops




There is nothing like watching renewals hit your account month after month.



If you think it’s “too late,” here’s the shift to make:

The most successful subscription boxes aren’t broad. They’re specific.



People want to feel:


  
Seen



  
Connected



  
Part of something






If you’ve been waiting… This is your sign.



If you’re ready to move from thinking to planning, I want you to join me for my FREE 6 in 60 Workshop. In just 60 minutes, I’ll walk you through how to plan 6 months of subscription boxes that speak directly to your ideal customer. Whether you’re still brainstorming or ready to launch, this workshop will give you clarity and momentum.



Join me for this episode to hear why 2026 is a smart, strategic time to launch a subscription box. And how this business model can give you the stability, freedom, and momentum you’ve been craving.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you’ve been sitting on a subscription box idea for <em>way too long</em>, this episode is for you.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In today’s episode, I’m breaking down <strong>5 powerful reasons why 2026 is an incredible time to start a subscription box. </strong>Yes, even if you’ve been watching this space for years and wondering if it’s “too late.”</p>
<p>Spoiler alert: it’s not. Not even close.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>We’ll talk about market opportunity, recurring revenue, loyal customers, and why subscription boxes continue to thrive. Especially for niche, well-positioned brands.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>I get asked all the time: “Is it too late to start a subscription box?”The truth? The industry is still growing fast, and there is <strong>so much room for niche boxes done well</strong>.</p>
<p><br></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>The global subscription box market passed <strong>$37 billion in 2025</strong></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>It’s projected to grow past <strong>$100 billion in the next few years</strong></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>You don’t need a subscription box for everyone - just a box for your people. </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Reason #1: You Don’t Have to Constantly Sell</p>
<p>If you’ve ever felt stuck in the daily hustle of:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Posting</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Emailing</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Promoting</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Starting over tomorrow</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Subscription boxes allow you to <strong>sell once and get paid month after month</strong>, building revenue that compounds instead of resets.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In a world where:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Organic reach is down</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Ads cost more</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Attention is scattered</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Recurring revenue brings stability and peace of mind.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Reason #2: You Build Loyal, Raving Fans</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Subscribers open more emails and engage more deeply</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Long-term subscribers turn into your best customers</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Community is one of the biggest hidden benefits of a subscription box</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>(My average subscriber stays <strong>17 months</strong> - and that relationship matters.)</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Reason #3: The Product Is Already Sold</p>
<p>You’re buying inventory <strong>after customers have already said yes</strong>.</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Less risk</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Less waste</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Easier planning</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Better cash flow</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>And in 2026, customers want thoughtful, intentional products, not mass-produced clutter.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Reason #4: You Get to Create Something You Love</p>
<p>In a world full of:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Screens</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Algorithms</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>AI-generated everything</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>A subscription box is different. It’s real. It’s tangible. It’s personal.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Whether your box is built around products, creativity, education, or connection, <strong>your passion becomes the experience</strong>, and your audience feels that.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Reason #5: Predictable, Consistent Revenue</p>
<p>Feast-and-famine sales cycles are exhausting.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Subscription boxes give you:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Stability</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>The ability to plan ahead</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Freedom to hire help or take a break</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Revenue that doesn’t disappear if one post flops</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>There is nothing like watching renewals hit your account month after month.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you think it’s “too late,” here’s the shift to make:</p>
<p>The most successful subscription boxes aren’t broad. They’re <strong>specific</strong>.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>People want to feel:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Seen</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Connected</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Part of something</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you’ve been waiting… This is your sign.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you’re ready to move from <em>thinking</em> to <em>planning</em>, I want you to join me for my FREE <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e"><strong>6 in 60 Workshop</strong></a><strong>. </strong>In just 60 minutes, I’ll walk you through how to plan <strong>6 months of subscription boxes</strong> that speak directly to your ideal customer. Whether you’re still brainstorming or ready to launch, this workshop will give you clarity and momentum.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Join me for this episode</strong> to hear why 2026 is a smart, strategic time to launch a subscription box. And how this business model can give you the stability, freedom, and momentum you’ve been craving.</p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>999</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[19d9205c-ded8-11f0-9bb0-53be75dd21f5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1553645062.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>236: Stop Trying to Be Everywhere: Do This Instead</title>
      <description>Feeling like you’re supposed to be everywhere online? Instagram. TikTok. Facebook. Pinterest. YouTube. Threads.

It’s exhausting. And for subscription box owners who are already sourcing products, packing boxes, fulfilling orders, and serving customers, it’s simply not realistic.

In this week’s Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, we’re talking about why trying to “be everywhere” is burning you out and how choosing two primary marketing channels plus email can simplify your strategy, free your time, and help you show up with more clarity and consistency.

The Mental Load of “Being Everywhere”

Most subscription box owners aren’t just creating content, they’re juggling every part of their business. When you’re told you must be on every platform, it adds guilt, pressure, and overwhelm.

Remember: You’re building a subscription box, not applying to be a full-time influencer.

Trying to chase every social media trend only spreads your energy thin and keeps you from showing up the way your audience needs you to.

Start with Momentum

Before you add anything new, look at what’s already working.


  
Are you consistently active on Instagram?



  
Does your Facebook group get good engagement?



  
Do your Pinterest pins get clicks?



  
Are your Stories getting replies?




You don’t need to reinvent the wheel. Build on what already has traction.Momentum is one of the most valuable assets in your business. Don’t ignore it to chase something shiny and new.

The 2 Channels plus Email Formula

Here’s your simple focus formula:


  
Choose 2 Primary Marketing Channels



  
Add Email Marketing Every Week




Pick your channels based on:


  
Where your audience already spends time



  
Where you can show up with consistency



  
What feels natural for you to maintain




Your mix might look like:


  
Instagram Reels &amp; Facebook Lives



  
Pinterest &amp; Blog posts



  
TikTok &amp; Instagram Stories




But no matter what you choose, email is non-negotiable.

Your email list is the only audience you own, and it drives launches, waitlist signups, and sales.

If a social post flops, nobody sees it.But when you send an email? It lands in inboxes. That’s powerful.

Build a Repeatable Routine First

Most subscription box owners don’t need more platforms. They need more consistency.

Before asking “Where else should I be?”, ask:


  
“Am I showing up consistently here?”



  
“Does my audience know when to expect me?”



  
“Have I built my content muscle yet?”




Nail your routine on two channels plus email first. Then you can repurpose or expand once it feels easy.

Action Steps


  
Audit your energy and results: What’s working? What’s draining you?



  
Choose your 2 primary channels and commit to them for the next 90 days.



  
Send a weekly email (even a short one). Build the habit.



  
Don’t add more until you’ve built consistency where you already are.




You don’t need to be everywhere. You just need to be where it matters consistently.

Join me for this episode and find out why doing less can actually help you grow more. Two channels. Plus email. That’s it. And I’ll show you how to make it work.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 19 Dec 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Stop Trying to Be Everywhere: Do This Instead</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>236</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode and find out why doing less can actually help you grow more. Two channels. Plus email. That’s it. And I’ll show you how to make it work.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Feeling like you’re supposed to be everywhere online? Instagram. TikTok. Facebook. Pinterest. YouTube. Threads.

It’s exhausting. And for subscription box owners who are already sourcing products, packing boxes, fulfilling orders, and serving customers, it’s simply not realistic.

In this week’s Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, we’re talking about why trying to “be everywhere” is burning you out and how choosing two primary marketing channels plus email can simplify your strategy, free your time, and help you show up with more clarity and consistency.

The Mental Load of “Being Everywhere”

Most subscription box owners aren’t just creating content, they’re juggling every part of their business. When you’re told you must be on every platform, it adds guilt, pressure, and overwhelm.

Remember: You’re building a subscription box, not applying to be a full-time influencer.

Trying to chase every social media trend only spreads your energy thin and keeps you from showing up the way your audience needs you to.

Start with Momentum

Before you add anything new, look at what’s already working.


  
Are you consistently active on Instagram?



  
Does your Facebook group get good engagement?



  
Do your Pinterest pins get clicks?



  
Are your Stories getting replies?




You don’t need to reinvent the wheel. Build on what already has traction.Momentum is one of the most valuable assets in your business. Don’t ignore it to chase something shiny and new.

The 2 Channels plus Email Formula

Here’s your simple focus formula:


  
Choose 2 Primary Marketing Channels



  
Add Email Marketing Every Week




Pick your channels based on:


  
Where your audience already spends time



  
Where you can show up with consistency



  
What feels natural for you to maintain




Your mix might look like:


  
Instagram Reels &amp; Facebook Lives



  
Pinterest &amp; Blog posts



  
TikTok &amp; Instagram Stories




But no matter what you choose, email is non-negotiable.

Your email list is the only audience you own, and it drives launches, waitlist signups, and sales.

If a social post flops, nobody sees it.But when you send an email? It lands in inboxes. That’s powerful.

Build a Repeatable Routine First

Most subscription box owners don’t need more platforms. They need more consistency.

Before asking “Where else should I be?”, ask:


  
“Am I showing up consistently here?”



  
“Does my audience know when to expect me?”



  
“Have I built my content muscle yet?”




Nail your routine on two channels plus email first. Then you can repurpose or expand once it feels easy.

Action Steps


  
Audit your energy and results: What’s working? What’s draining you?



  
Choose your 2 primary channels and commit to them for the next 90 days.



  
Send a weekly email (even a short one). Build the habit.



  
Don’t add more until you’ve built consistency where you already are.




You don’t need to be everywhere. You just need to be where it matters consistently.

Join me for this episode and find out why doing less can actually help you grow more. Two channels. Plus email. That’s it. And I’ll show you how to make it work.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>Feeling like you’re supposed to be everywhere online?</strong> Instagram. TikTok. Facebook. Pinterest. YouTube. Threads.</p>
<p>It’s exhausting. And for subscription box owners who are already sourcing products, packing boxes, fulfilling orders, and serving customers, it’s simply not realistic.</p>
<p>In this week’s Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, we’re talking about why trying to “be everywhere” is burning you out and how choosing two primary marketing channels plus email can <strong>simplify your strategy, free your time, and help you show up with more clarity and consistency.</strong></p>
<p>The Mental Load of “Being Everywhere”</p>
<p>Most subscription box owners aren’t just creating content, they’re juggling every part of their business. When you’re told you must be on every platform, it adds guilt, pressure, and overwhelm.</p>
<p>Remember: You’re building a subscription box, not applying to be a full-time influencer.</p>
<p>Trying to chase every social media trend only spreads your energy thin and keeps you from showing up the way your audience needs you to.</p>
<p>Start with Momentum</p>
<p>Before you add anything new, look at what’s already working.</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Are you consistently active on Instagram?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Does your Facebook group get good engagement?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Do your Pinterest pins get clicks?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Are your Stories getting replies?</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You don’t need to reinvent the wheel. <strong>Build on what already has traction.</strong>Momentum is one of the most valuable assets in your business. Don’t ignore it to chase something shiny and new.</p>
<p>The 2 Channels plus Email Formula</p>
<p>Here’s your simple focus formula:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><strong>Choose 2 Primary Marketing Channels</strong></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Add Email Marketing Every Week</strong></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Pick your channels based on:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Where your audience already spends time</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Where you can show up with consistency</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>What feels natural for you to maintain</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Your mix might look like:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Instagram Reels &amp; Facebook Lives</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Pinterest &amp; Blog posts</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>TikTok &amp; Instagram Stories</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>But no matter what you choose, <strong>email is non-negotiable</strong>.</p>
<p>Your email list is the only audience you own, and it drives launches, waitlist signups, and sales.</p>
<p>If a social post flops, nobody sees it.But when you send an email? It lands in inboxes. That’s powerful.</p>
<p>Build a Repeatable Routine First</p>
<p>Most subscription box owners don’t need more platforms. They need more consistency.</p>
<p>Before asking “Where else should I be?”, ask:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>“Am I showing up consistently here?”</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>“Does my audience know when to expect me?”</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>“Have I built my content muscle yet?”</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Nail your routine on <strong>two channels plus email</strong> first. Then you can repurpose or expand once it feels easy.</p>
<p>Action Steps</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Audit your energy and results: What’s working? What’s draining you?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Choose your <strong>2 primary channels</strong> and commit to them for the next 90 days.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Send a weekly email (even a short one). Build the habit.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><em>Don’t add more until you’ve built consistency where you already are.</em></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You don’t need to be everywhere. You just need to be where it matters consistently.</p>
<p><strong>Join me for this episode</strong> and find out why doing less can actually help you grow more. Two channels. Plus email. That’s it. And I’ll show you how to make it work.</p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>710</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[819f8efa-da06-11f0-b49b-17aeb23ac8b1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8941802330.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>235: Is Your Messaging Costing You Subscribers?</title>
      <description>For many subscription box owners, the silent killer of conversions isn’t a lack of traffic, it’s unclear messaging.

Your box might be beautifully curated and full of value, but if visitors can’t understand what it is, who it’s for, and why it matters in 10 seconds or less, they’re leaving.

In this episode, Sarah breaks down exactly what strong subscription box messaging looks like, where most subscription box owners go wrong, and how to improve your message across your entire customer journey.

Messaging isn’t just your homepage headline. It’s the story you’re telling everywhere: on your sales page, product listing, Instagram bio, emails, checkout page, even your cancellation flow.

You understand your subscription box because you live in it, but your customer doesn’t. Clarity must come first.

The 3 Core Elements Every Message Must Include


  
Who is it for? 



  
What do they get?



  
Why does it matter? 




10 Common Messaging Mistakes 

1.  Messaging That Is Too Vague or Generic

2. Only Listing Features, Not Benefits

3. Trying to Appeal to Everyone

4. Unclear or Missing Homepage Headline

5. Sales Page Lacks Structure or Detail

6. Misaligned Visuals

7. Weak CTA Language

8. Assuming People Already Know What Your Subscription Box Is

9. No Emotional Connection or Transformation

10. Inconsistent Messaging Across Platforms



Conduct an audit to evaluate your own message. Look at your:


  
Homepage (especially above the fold)



  
Sales page



  
Product page



  
Instagram bio



  
About page



  
Checkout flow



  
Emails - especially your welcome sequence



  
Subscription confirmation and cancellation flow




By the end, you’ll know exactly where your message is strong, and where it’s confusing your customer.

5 Action Steps to Improve Your Messaging This Week


  
Rewrite your homepage header



  
Add hooks to your sales page headings



  
Strengthen your product page with specifics and visuals



  
Create a simple voice guide for consistency



  
Get outside feedback from someone who isn’t familiar with your box




Great messaging isn’t about being clever. It’s about being clear. If your ideal customer can land on your page and instantly think, “Oh, this is for me,” you’ve done your job.

Listen to this episode to learn the 3 parts of strong messaging, the 10 mistakes that cost you subscribers, and the simple steps you can take this week to improve your conversions.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 17 Dec 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Is Your Messaging Costing You Subscribers?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>235</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, Sarah breaks down exactly what strong subscription box messaging looks like, where most subscription box owners go wrong, and how to improve your message across your entire customer journey.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>For many subscription box owners, the silent killer of conversions isn’t a lack of traffic, it’s unclear messaging.

Your box might be beautifully curated and full of value, but if visitors can’t understand what it is, who it’s for, and why it matters in 10 seconds or less, they’re leaving.

In this episode, Sarah breaks down exactly what strong subscription box messaging looks like, where most subscription box owners go wrong, and how to improve your message across your entire customer journey.

Messaging isn’t just your homepage headline. It’s the story you’re telling everywhere: on your sales page, product listing, Instagram bio, emails, checkout page, even your cancellation flow.

You understand your subscription box because you live in it, but your customer doesn’t. Clarity must come first.

The 3 Core Elements Every Message Must Include


  
Who is it for? 



  
What do they get?



  
Why does it matter? 




10 Common Messaging Mistakes 

1.  Messaging That Is Too Vague or Generic

2. Only Listing Features, Not Benefits

3. Trying to Appeal to Everyone

4. Unclear or Missing Homepage Headline

5. Sales Page Lacks Structure or Detail

6. Misaligned Visuals

7. Weak CTA Language

8. Assuming People Already Know What Your Subscription Box Is

9. No Emotional Connection or Transformation

10. Inconsistent Messaging Across Platforms



Conduct an audit to evaluate your own message. Look at your:


  
Homepage (especially above the fold)



  
Sales page



  
Product page



  
Instagram bio



  
About page



  
Checkout flow



  
Emails - especially your welcome sequence



  
Subscription confirmation and cancellation flow




By the end, you’ll know exactly where your message is strong, and where it’s confusing your customer.

5 Action Steps to Improve Your Messaging This Week


  
Rewrite your homepage header



  
Add hooks to your sales page headings



  
Strengthen your product page with specifics and visuals



  
Create a simple voice guide for consistency



  
Get outside feedback from someone who isn’t familiar with your box




Great messaging isn’t about being clever. It’s about being clear. If your ideal customer can land on your page and instantly think, “Oh, this is for me,” you’ve done your job.

Listen to this episode to learn the 3 parts of strong messaging, the 10 mistakes that cost you subscribers, and the simple steps you can take this week to improve your conversions.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>For many subscription box owners, the silent killer of conversions isn’t a lack of traffic, it’s unclear messaging.</p>
<p>Your box might be beautifully curated and full of value, but if visitors can’t understand <strong>what it is, who it’s for, and why it matters</strong> <strong>in 10 seconds or less</strong>, they’re leaving.</p>
<p>In this episode, Sarah breaks down exactly what strong subscription box messaging looks like, where most subscription box owners go wrong, and how to improve your message across your entire customer journey.</p>
<p>Messaging isn’t just your homepage headline. It’s the story you’re telling everywhere: on your sales page, product listing, Instagram bio, emails, checkout page, even your cancellation flow.</p>
<p>You understand your subscription box because you live in it, but your customer doesn’t. Clarity must come first.</p>
<p>The 3 Core Elements Every Message Must Include</p>
<ol>
  <li>
<p><strong>Who is it for? </strong></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>What do they get?</strong></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Why does it matter? </strong></p>
</li>
</ol>
<p>10 Common Messaging Mistakes </p>
<p>1.  Messaging That Is Too Vague or Generic</p>
<p>2. Only Listing Features, Not Benefits</p>
<p>3. Trying to Appeal to Everyone</p>
<p>4. Unclear or Missing Homepage Headline</p>
<p>5. Sales Page Lacks Structure or Detail</p>
<p>6. Misaligned Visuals</p>
<p>7. Weak CTA Language</p>
<p>8. Assuming People Already Know What Your Subscription Box Is</p>
<p>9. No Emotional Connection or Transformation</p>
<p>10. Inconsistent Messaging Across Platforms</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Conduct an audit to evaluate your own message. Look at your:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Homepage (especially above the fold)</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Sales page</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Product page</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Instagram bio</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>About page</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Checkout flow</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Emails - especially your welcome sequence</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Subscription confirmation and cancellation flow</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>By the end, you’ll know exactly where your message is strong, and where it’s confusing your customer.</p>
<p>5 Action Steps to Improve Your Messaging This Week</p>
<ol>
  <li>
<p>Rewrite your homepage header</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Add hooks to your sales page headings</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Strengthen your product page with specifics and visuals</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Create a simple voice guide for consistency</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Get outside feedback from someone who isn’t familiar with your box</p>
</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Great messaging isn’t about being clever. It’s about being clear. </strong>If your ideal customer can land on your page and instantly think, “Oh, this is for me,” you’ve done your job.</p>
<p><strong>Listen to this episode</strong> to learn the 3 parts of strong messaging, the 10 mistakes that cost you subscribers, and the simple steps you can take this week to improve your conversions.</p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1648</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[57226c60-da06-11f0-a398-fb7e439e6b28]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6438794380.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>What’s Really Holding You Back? (And Why You’re More Consistent Than You Think)</title>
      <description>Are you telling yourself you're "just not consistent"? That your schedule is the problem? That if life would just calm down for a minute, you’d finally make progress in your business?

I’m calling you out (with love)in this week’s Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast. Because I’ve been there, too. And what I’m sharing in this 10-minute mindset reset might be exactly what you need to break through.

It all started with a stat I heard at a conference. Only 1.9% of women-owned businesses ever reach a million dollars in revenue. That number stopped me in my tracks. And it got me thinking about why so many subscription box businesses stall out before they ever really start.

Inside this episode, I’m walking you through the four barriers that are actually holding you back, and the simple shift that can move you forward starting today.


  
Get honest about what’s actually distracting you.



  
Stop chasing new strategies and start following the roadmap you already have.



  
Take back control of your numbers, including your profit margin.



  
Rethink the story you’ve been telling yourself about consistency.




Here’s the truth: You’re already consistent. You just haven’t chosen to be consistent in your business. Yet.

And that changes now.

Ask yourself:


  
What’s distracting me from growing my business?



  
Which of the 4 barriers is holding me back?



  
What’s ONE thing I can do every day for the next 7 days to show up differently?




You don’t need a 10-step plan. You need one simple action, on repeat.

Listen now and let’s make that shift together. Because million-dollar momentum doesn’t start with a perfect plan.

It starts with showing up.

Join me in all the places:    


  
⁠Facebook⁠



  
⁠Instagram⁠



  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join the waitlist ⁠today! </description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 12 Dec 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What’s Really Holding You Back? (And Why You’re More Consistent Than You Think)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Inside this episode, I’m walking you through the four barriers that are actually holding you back, and the simple shift that can move you forward starting today.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Are you telling yourself you're "just not consistent"? That your schedule is the problem? That if life would just calm down for a minute, you’d finally make progress in your business?

I’m calling you out (with love)in this week’s Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast. Because I’ve been there, too. And what I’m sharing in this 10-minute mindset reset might be exactly what you need to break through.

It all started with a stat I heard at a conference. Only 1.9% of women-owned businesses ever reach a million dollars in revenue. That number stopped me in my tracks. And it got me thinking about why so many subscription box businesses stall out before they ever really start.

Inside this episode, I’m walking you through the four barriers that are actually holding you back, and the simple shift that can move you forward starting today.


  
Get honest about what’s actually distracting you.



  
Stop chasing new strategies and start following the roadmap you already have.



  
Take back control of your numbers, including your profit margin.



  
Rethink the story you’ve been telling yourself about consistency.




Here’s the truth: You’re already consistent. You just haven’t chosen to be consistent in your business. Yet.

And that changes now.

Ask yourself:


  
What’s distracting me from growing my business?



  
Which of the 4 barriers is holding me back?



  
What’s ONE thing I can do every day for the next 7 days to show up differently?




You don’t need a 10-step plan. You need one simple action, on repeat.

Listen now and let’s make that shift together. Because million-dollar momentum doesn’t start with a perfect plan.

It starts with showing up.

Join me in all the places:    


  
⁠Facebook⁠



  
⁠Instagram⁠



  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join the waitlist ⁠today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are you telling yourself you're "just not consistent"? That your schedule is the problem? That if life would just calm down for a minute, you’d finally make progress in your business?</p>
<p>I’m calling you out (with love)in this week’s <em>Friday Fuel </em>episode of <em>The Launch Your Box Podcast.</em> Because I’ve been there, too. And what I’m sharing in this 10-minute mindset reset might be exactly what you need to break through.</p>
<p>It all started with a stat I heard at a conference. Only <strong>1.9% of women-owned businesses</strong> ever reach a million dollars in revenue. That number stopped me in my tracks. And it got me thinking about why so many subscription box businesses stall out before they ever really start.</p>
<p>Inside this episode, I’m walking you through the <strong>four barriers that are actually holding you back, </strong>and the simple shift that can move you forward starting today.</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Get honest about what’s <em>actually</em> distracting you.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Stop chasing new strategies and start following the roadmap you already have.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Take back control of your numbers, including your profit margin.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Rethink the story you’ve been telling yourself about consistency.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Here’s the truth: <strong>You’re already consistent.</strong> You just haven’t <em>chosen</em> to be consistent in your business. Yet.</p>
<p>And that changes now.</p>
<p>Ask yourself:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>What’s distracting me from growing my business?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Which of the 4 barriers is holding me back?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>What’s ONE thing I can do every day for the next 7 days to show up differently?</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You don’t need a 10-step plan. You need one simple action, on repeat.</p>
<p><strong>Listen now and let’s make that shift together. </strong>Because million-dollar momentum doesn’t start with a perfect plan.</p>
<p>It starts with showing up.</p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Join the waitlist ⁠</a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>686</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f0fb88b4-d3f1-11f0-85cd-8b8098392048]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5382827788.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Using Mystery Boxes to Reduce Inventory Before Year End</title>
      <description>“Don’t bring that stale inventory into 2023!” - Sarah Williams 

Inventory is one of the biggest challenges product-based businesses face. Too much, not enough… and what happens if it doesn’t sell? Now, during this buying season, is the perfect time to liquidate any old or stale inventory you have sitting on your shelves. 

One of my favorite ways to move product and get old inventory off my shelves is by selling Mystery Boxes. They’re new, fresh, and fun for your customers and a GREAT way to reduce inventory without putting clearance tags all over everything. 

Whether you made a bad buy (been there), overbought for your subscription box (yep, been there, too), or you’ve just had a slower year than last year and need to move some product quickly, Mystery Boxes are a great strategy. 

The goal is to get your money back. Don’t focus on making a large profit or even a profit at all. Focus on getting the cash you spent on the items back in your bank account and getting space back on your shelves. 

The excitement of a Mystery Box is not knowing what’s inside! 


  

  Mix items from past subscription boxes with items never in boxes. 

  

  Make subscribers aware they might receive something they already have. 

  

  These are not curated experiences like your subscription box. They are filled with items at a great value.

  

  Create different price points. Choose different size boxes, fill them up, and price them. 

  


These Mystery Boxes won’t all be the same. If you have 20 of one item and 30 of another, you can still make 50 boxes. Just make sure the items you’re putting in the boxes have a similar size and value. 

Get excited about these Mystery Boxes and start teasing your audience about a week before you’ll start selling them. Go LIVE, let your audience see how excited you are, and show them one of the boxes and how FULL it is! Talk about the value! 

Do you have inventory you need to liquidate? It’s time to let go of old product and start fresh in the new year. Join me for this episode to learn how to create your own Mystery Boxes and start liquidating!

 

Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠



  ⁠Instagram⁠



  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 


 

Are you ready for ⁠ Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠ Join the waitlist⁠ today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 10 Dec 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Do you have inventory you need to liquidate? It’s time to let go of old product and start fresh in the new year. Join me for this episode to learn how to create your own Mystery Boxes and start liquidating!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Don’t bring that stale inventory into 2023!” - Sarah Williams 

Inventory is one of the biggest challenges product-based businesses face. Too much, not enough… and what happens if it doesn’t sell? Now, during this buying season, is the perfect time to liquidate any old or stale inventory you have sitting on your shelves. 

One of my favorite ways to move product and get old inventory off my shelves is by selling Mystery Boxes. They’re new, fresh, and fun for your customers and a GREAT way to reduce inventory without putting clearance tags all over everything. 

Whether you made a bad buy (been there), overbought for your subscription box (yep, been there, too), or you’ve just had a slower year than last year and need to move some product quickly, Mystery Boxes are a great strategy. 

The goal is to get your money back. Don’t focus on making a large profit or even a profit at all. Focus on getting the cash you spent on the items back in your bank account and getting space back on your shelves. 

The excitement of a Mystery Box is not knowing what’s inside! 


  

  Mix items from past subscription boxes with items never in boxes. 

  

  Make subscribers aware they might receive something they already have. 

  

  These are not curated experiences like your subscription box. They are filled with items at a great value.

  

  Create different price points. Choose different size boxes, fill them up, and price them. 

  


These Mystery Boxes won’t all be the same. If you have 20 of one item and 30 of another, you can still make 50 boxes. Just make sure the items you’re putting in the boxes have a similar size and value. 

Get excited about these Mystery Boxes and start teasing your audience about a week before you’ll start selling them. Go LIVE, let your audience see how excited you are, and show them one of the boxes and how FULL it is! Talk about the value! 

Do you have inventory you need to liquidate? It’s time to let go of old product and start fresh in the new year. Join me for this episode to learn how to create your own Mystery Boxes and start liquidating!

 

Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠



  ⁠Instagram⁠



  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 


 

Are you ready for ⁠ Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠ Join the waitlist⁠ today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“Don’t bring that stale inventory into 2023!” - Sarah Williams </p>
<p>Inventory is one of the biggest challenges product-based businesses face. Too much, not enough… and what happens if it doesn’t sell? Now, during this buying season, is the perfect time to liquidate any old or stale inventory you have sitting on your shelves. </p>
<p>One of my favorite ways to move product and get old inventory off my shelves is by selling Mystery Boxes. They’re new, fresh, and fun for your customers and a GREAT way to reduce inventory without putting clearance tags all over everything. </p>
<p>Whether you made a bad buy (been there), overbought for your subscription box (yep, been there, too), or you’ve just had a slower year than last year and need to move some product quickly, Mystery Boxes are a great strategy. </p>
<p>The goal is to get your money back. Don’t focus on making a large profit or even a profit at all. Focus on getting the cash you spent on the items back in your bank account and getting space back on your shelves. </p>
<p>The excitement of a Mystery Box is not knowing what’s inside! </p>
<ul>
  <li><br></li>
  <li>Mix items from past subscription boxes with items never in boxes. </li>
  <li><br></li>
  <li>Make subscribers aware they might receive something they already have. </li>
  <li><br></li>
  <li>These are not curated experiences like your subscription box. They are filled with items at a great value.</li>
  <li><br></li>
  <li>Create different price points. Choose different size boxes, fill them up, and price them. </li>
  <li><br></li>
</ul>
<p>These Mystery Boxes won’t all be the same. If you have 20 of one item and 30 of another, you can still make 50 boxes. Just make sure the items you’re putting in the boxes have a similar size and value. </p>
<p>Get excited about these Mystery Boxes and start teasing your audience about a week before you’ll start selling them. Go LIVE, let your audience see how excited you are, and show them one of the boxes and how FULL it is! Talk about the value! </p>
<p>Do you have inventory you need to liquidate? It’s time to let go of old product and start fresh in the new year. Join me for this episode to learn how to create your own Mystery Boxes and start liquidating!</p>
<p> </p>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </li>
</ul>
<p> </p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">⁠ Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">⁠ Join the waitlist⁠</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1395</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b8c4fb38-bdcb-11f0-92a6-93c2d91bb0e5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3427329037.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Too Many Ideas? Here's How to Pick ONE Box to Launch</title>
      <description>Have a million subscription box ideas, but no idea which one to launch?

You’re not alone. So many aspiring subscription box owners get stuck right here. Spinning in indecision. Afraid to choose the “wrong” idea. And waiting for clarity that never comes.

In this Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing a simple framework to help you move from overthinking to deciding.

Because the truth is, clarity doesn’t come from thinking harder. It comes from taking action.

If you’ve been stuck in idea overload, this is the mindset reset you need.

Instead of chasing the perfect idea:

1 – Acknowledge that “too many ideas” is a form of fear.Coming up with a long list of ideas feels productive. But really, it’s a sneaky way to stay safe. You can’t launch five boxes at once – and you don’t need to. You just need to pick one.

2 – Use the 3 C’s to filter your subscription box options.I walk you through a simple framework to help you evaluate your ideas and find the one with the clearest path forward. Choose the idea you can build momentum around now.

3 – Let go of the pressure to pick the perfect subscription box idea.Your first box doesn’t have to be your forever box. It just has to be the one you start with. And the faster you start, the faster you learn.

4 – Make the decision and move forward.Action builds confidence. Once you’ve chosen your direction, commit. Focus on progress, not perfection.



Your Friday Fuel Challenge:

Pick ONE idea and talk about it this week.

Share a post, send an email, or start building your waitlist around it.Because clarity follows action. And one focused idea is how you’ll finally launch your box.

Need help planning your first 6 boxes once you’ve picked your idea?Join my FREE 6 in 60 Workshop at⁠ 6in60workshop.com⁠

Join me in all the places:    


  
⁠Facebook⁠



  
⁠Instagram⁠



  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join the waitlist ⁠today!</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 05 Dec 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Have a million subscription box ideas, but no idea which one to launch?</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have a million subscription box ideas, but no idea which one to launch?

You’re not alone. So many aspiring subscription box owners get stuck right here. Spinning in indecision. Afraid to choose the “wrong” idea. And waiting for clarity that never comes.

In this Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing a simple framework to help you move from overthinking to deciding.

Because the truth is, clarity doesn’t come from thinking harder. It comes from taking action.

If you’ve been stuck in idea overload, this is the mindset reset you need.

Instead of chasing the perfect idea:

1 – Acknowledge that “too many ideas” is a form of fear.Coming up with a long list of ideas feels productive. But really, it’s a sneaky way to stay safe. You can’t launch five boxes at once – and you don’t need to. You just need to pick one.

2 – Use the 3 C’s to filter your subscription box options.I walk you through a simple framework to help you evaluate your ideas and find the one with the clearest path forward. Choose the idea you can build momentum around now.

3 – Let go of the pressure to pick the perfect subscription box idea.Your first box doesn’t have to be your forever box. It just has to be the one you start with. And the faster you start, the faster you learn.

4 – Make the decision and move forward.Action builds confidence. Once you’ve chosen your direction, commit. Focus on progress, not perfection.



Your Friday Fuel Challenge:

Pick ONE idea and talk about it this week.

Share a post, send an email, or start building your waitlist around it.Because clarity follows action. And one focused idea is how you’ll finally launch your box.

Need help planning your first 6 boxes once you’ve picked your idea?Join my FREE 6 in 60 Workshop at⁠ 6in60workshop.com⁠

Join me in all the places:    


  
⁠Facebook⁠



  
⁠Instagram⁠



  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join the waitlist ⁠today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have a million subscription box ideas, but no idea which one to launch?</p>
<p>You’re not alone. So many aspiring subscription box owners get stuck right here. Spinning in indecision. Afraid to choose the “wrong” idea. And waiting for clarity that never comes.</p>
<p>In this <em>Friday Fuel</em> episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing a simple framework to help you move from <em>overthinking</em> to <em>deciding.</em></p>
<p>Because the truth is, clarity doesn’t come from thinking harder. It comes from taking action.</p>
<p>If you’ve been stuck in idea overload, this is the mindset reset you need.</p>
<p>Instead of chasing the perfect idea:</p>
<p>1 – Acknowledge that “too many ideas” is a form of fear.Coming up with a long list of ideas <em>feels </em>productive. But really, it’s a sneaky way to stay safe. You can’t launch five boxes at once – and you don’t need to. You just need to pick <em>one.</em></p>
<p>2 – Use the 3 C’s to filter your subscription box options.I walk you through a simple framework to help you evaluate your ideas and find the one with the clearest path forward. Choose the idea you can build momentum around <em>now.</em></p>
<p>3 – Let go of the pressure to pick the perfect subscription box idea.Your first box doesn’t have to be your forever box. It just has to be the one you <em>start</em> with. And the faster you start, the faster you learn.</p>
<p>4 – Make the decision and move forward.Action builds confidence. Once you’ve chosen your direction, commit. Focus on progress, not perfection.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Your Friday Fuel Challenge:</p>
<p>Pick ONE idea and talk about it this week.</p>
<p>Share a post, send an email, or start building your waitlist around it.Because clarity follows action. And one focused idea is how you’ll <em>finally</em> <strong>launch your box</strong>.</p>
<p>Need help planning your first 6 boxes once you’ve picked your idea?Join my FREE <strong>6 in 60 Workshop</strong> at<a href="https://www.6in60workshop.com">⁠ <u>6in60workshop.com</u>⁠</a></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Join the waitlist ⁠</a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>622</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[85aee92a-bdcb-11f0-b863-330d03ffab79]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6764080067.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Over 500 Subscribers with a Super Simple Subscription Model with the Polka Dot Poodle </title>
      <description>Have you gotten stuck trying to decide what to include in your subscription box? You want to give your subscribers everything they could possibly want - but you know it’s not possible to do that and stay profitable. It is so easy for new subscription box owners to overthink everything and end up overwhelmed. One subscription box owner decided to keep things simple - really simple - and now has more than 500 monthly subscribers! 

Meet Launch Your Box member Emily Vincent of The Polka Dot Poodle. Emily is creative and fun and loves to give gifts. She doesn’t just “give” gifts, though - she presents them in a way that makes them seem personal and extra special. Emily is passionate about gift-giving and adding the special touches that take a gift and turn it into an experience for the recipient. 

When Emily first started her business, she was creating all the things. She and I share a love for monograms and she was creating and monogramming products for her many customers. But she quickly found that creating the same item over and over again didn’t bring her joy. When she examined what she loved about her business, she realized what she really loved was designing gift tags for people to give the items she made as gifts. 

So Emily decided to focus on just that. Gift tags. She started a digital subscription where subscribers receive a digital file with that month’s designs and print them themselves. How easy is that?! No printing, no packing, no shipping. Emily’s workload is the same whether she has 10 subscribers or hundreds. 

Emily soon realized that some of her subscribers wanted to receive the gift tags already printed and ready to go. They wanted her to make things even easier and more convenient for them. She was happy to oblige and started another version of her subscription. For these subscribers, Emilly prints the physical gift tags and ships them - just the tags - to her subscribers. Still simple and easy to fulfill. 

Because Emily likes to serve her audience, she recently added another subscription. This one is more custom, more personalized, and more labor-intensive. And yes, it involves monograms. But Emily loves it and so do her subscribers. And she is careful not to take on more subscribers than she can comfortably handle. 

When Emily started her first subscription, she had 37 subscribers. That number has grown to more than 500 subscribers. 500 people who receive gift tags designed by Emily every month. 

Gift tags. How simple is that? 

Emily’s advice to anyone thinking about starting a subscription box? Just start. Develop your idea, create a landing page, grow your email list and social media followers, and just start. She promises it will be worth it. 

Join me for this episode and learn how Emily found subscription box success by focusing on what she loves to do and keeping things simple.

Find and follow Emily: 


  ⁠The Polka Dot Poodle on Instagram⁠

  ⁠The Polka Dot Poodle on Facebook ⁠

  ⁠The Polka Dot Poodle Website⁠


Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join ⁠today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 03 Dec 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode and learn how Emily found subscription box success by focusing on what she loves to do and keeping things simple.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you gotten stuck trying to decide what to include in your subscription box? You want to give your subscribers everything they could possibly want - but you know it’s not possible to do that and stay profitable. It is so easy for new subscription box owners to overthink everything and end up overwhelmed. One subscription box owner decided to keep things simple - really simple - and now has more than 500 monthly subscribers! 

Meet Launch Your Box member Emily Vincent of The Polka Dot Poodle. Emily is creative and fun and loves to give gifts. She doesn’t just “give” gifts, though - she presents them in a way that makes them seem personal and extra special. Emily is passionate about gift-giving and adding the special touches that take a gift and turn it into an experience for the recipient. 

When Emily first started her business, she was creating all the things. She and I share a love for monograms and she was creating and monogramming products for her many customers. But she quickly found that creating the same item over and over again didn’t bring her joy. When she examined what she loved about her business, she realized what she really loved was designing gift tags for people to give the items she made as gifts. 

So Emily decided to focus on just that. Gift tags. She started a digital subscription where subscribers receive a digital file with that month’s designs and print them themselves. How easy is that?! No printing, no packing, no shipping. Emily’s workload is the same whether she has 10 subscribers or hundreds. 

Emily soon realized that some of her subscribers wanted to receive the gift tags already printed and ready to go. They wanted her to make things even easier and more convenient for them. She was happy to oblige and started another version of her subscription. For these subscribers, Emilly prints the physical gift tags and ships them - just the tags - to her subscribers. Still simple and easy to fulfill. 

Because Emily likes to serve her audience, she recently added another subscription. This one is more custom, more personalized, and more labor-intensive. And yes, it involves monograms. But Emily loves it and so do her subscribers. And she is careful not to take on more subscribers than she can comfortably handle. 

When Emily started her first subscription, she had 37 subscribers. That number has grown to more than 500 subscribers. 500 people who receive gift tags designed by Emily every month. 

Gift tags. How simple is that? 

Emily’s advice to anyone thinking about starting a subscription box? Just start. Develop your idea, create a landing page, grow your email list and social media followers, and just start. She promises it will be worth it. 

Join me for this episode and learn how Emily found subscription box success by focusing on what she loves to do and keeping things simple.

Find and follow Emily: 


  ⁠The Polka Dot Poodle on Instagram⁠

  ⁠The Polka Dot Poodle on Facebook ⁠

  ⁠The Polka Dot Poodle Website⁠


Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join ⁠today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you gotten stuck trying to decide what to include in your subscription box? You want to give your subscribers everything they could possibly want - but you know it’s not possible to do that and stay profitable. It is so easy for new subscription box owners to overthink everything and end up overwhelmed. One subscription box owner decided to keep things simple - really simple - and now has more than 500 monthly subscribers! </p>
<p>Meet Launch Your Box member Emily Vincent of The Polka Dot Poodle. Emily is creative and fun and loves to give gifts. She doesn’t just “give” gifts, though - she presents them in a way that makes them seem personal and extra special. Emily is passionate about gift-giving and adding the special touches that take a gift and turn it into an experience for the recipient. </p>
<p>When Emily first started her business, she was creating all the things. She and I share a love for monograms and she was creating and monogramming products for her many customers. But she quickly found that creating the same item over and over again didn’t bring her joy. When she examined what she loved about her business, she realized what she really loved was designing gift tags for people to give the items she made as gifts. </p>
<p>So Emily decided to focus on just that. Gift tags. She started a digital subscription where subscribers receive a digital file with that month’s designs and print them themselves. How easy is that?! No printing, no packing, no shipping. Emily’s workload is the same whether she has 10 subscribers or hundreds. </p>
<p>Emily soon realized that some of her subscribers wanted to receive the gift tags already printed and ready to go. They wanted her to make things even easier and more convenient for them. She was happy to oblige and started another version of her subscription. For these subscribers, Emilly prints the physical gift tags and ships them - just the tags - to her subscribers. Still simple and easy to fulfill. </p>
<p>Because Emily likes to serve her audience, she recently added another subscription. This one is more custom, more personalized, and more labor-intensive. And yes, it involves monograms. But Emily loves it and so do her subscribers. And she is careful not to take on more subscribers than she can comfortably handle. </p>
<p>When Emily started her first subscription, she had 37 subscribers. That number has grown to more than 500 subscribers. 500 people who receive gift tags designed by Emily every month. </p>
<p>Gift tags. How simple is that? </p>
<p>Emily’s advice to anyone thinking about starting a subscription box? Just start. Develop your idea, create a landing page, grow your email list and social media followers, and just start. She promises it will be worth it. </p>
<p>Join me for this episode and learn how Emily found subscription box success by focusing on what she loves to do and keeping things simple.</p>
<p>Find and follow Emily: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/thepolkadotpoodle/">⁠The Polka Dot Poodle on Instagram⁠</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/thepolkadotpoodle">⁠The Polka Dot Poodle on Facebook ⁠</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://thepolkadotpoodle.com/">⁠The Polka Dot Poodle Website⁠</a></li>
</ul>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Join ⁠</a>today!</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1587</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3eec820e-bdcb-11f0-9f67-efb9c6517f65]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2884204326.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>234: How to Use Your Existing Subscribers to Make More Sales This Week</title>
      <description>If you want to make more sales this week, but don’t want to chase new customers, run ads, or overhaul your whole marketing strategy, this episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast is for you.



One of the biggest mistakes subscription box owners make when looking to grow their business? Overlooking the people who already said yes.



Your current subscribers are your warmest audience. They love your brand, they open your boxes, and they already trust what you deliver every month.



Inside this Friday Fuel episode, I’m sharing three simple, practical ways to generate extra revenue using the subscribers you already have. No launch, no ad budget, and no extra overhead required.



1. Add a Simple Upsell Before Renewal



A few days before renewal, give your subscribers a chance to add something special to their next box. Keep it easy, keep it relevant, and make sure it fits inside the box they're already getting.



Some ideas:


  
A coordinating item



  
A seasonal exclusive



  
A “mystery upgrade”



  
A subscriber-only item pulled from your shop




Promote it with a quick email:


  
“Want to add this to your next box?”



  
“Just for subscribers. Add this before your box ships!”




Why does it work? They’re already expecting a charge. This simply gives them a fun, low-barrier way to get more of what they love while increasing your average revenue per subscriber.



2. Give Subscribers Access to Past Boxes



If you’ve been in business for a while, you likely have leftover past boxes. They’re valuable… but only if people know they exist.



Turn them into a subscriber-only vault.



What to include:


  
Boxes from recent months or seasons



  
Limited leftovers from special editions



  
Any extras you never publicly sold




How to promote it:


  
“Missed this one? Here’s your chance.”



  
“Subscriber exclusive: Shop past boxes before they’re gone.”




Why does it work? Subscribers know the value of your boxes. If they missed one - or want to gift one - this becomes an easy yes for them and fast revenue for you.



3. Offer a Subscriber-Only Promo or Perk



Subscribers love feeling like insiders. When you give them access no one else gets, they respond.



Offer them:


  
Early access to a new collection or seasonal drop



  
A subscriber-only limited-quantity item



  
A special discount code for the week (ex: 15% off shopwide)






Say things like:


  
“You get first dibs just for being a subscriber.”



  
“This week only: shop exclusive and save!”






Why does it work? Exclusive perks drive loyalty, encourage extra browsing, and often lead to bonus sales from people who are already your best buyers.



You don’t need a full blown launch to make more money. And you don’t need new customers. 



You just need to give your current subscribers more opportunities to say yes.



Join me for this Friday Fuel Episode and walk away with practical ideas you can use to make more sales this week - no launch or new audience required.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 28 Nov 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Use Your Existing Subscribers to Make More Sales This Week</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>234</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>If you want to make more sales this week, but don’t want to chase new customers, run ads, or overhaul your whole marketing strategy, this episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast is for you.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you want to make more sales this week, but don’t want to chase new customers, run ads, or overhaul your whole marketing strategy, this episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast is for you.



One of the biggest mistakes subscription box owners make when looking to grow their business? Overlooking the people who already said yes.



Your current subscribers are your warmest audience. They love your brand, they open your boxes, and they already trust what you deliver every month.



Inside this Friday Fuel episode, I’m sharing three simple, practical ways to generate extra revenue using the subscribers you already have. No launch, no ad budget, and no extra overhead required.



1. Add a Simple Upsell Before Renewal



A few days before renewal, give your subscribers a chance to add something special to their next box. Keep it easy, keep it relevant, and make sure it fits inside the box they're already getting.



Some ideas:


  
A coordinating item



  
A seasonal exclusive



  
A “mystery upgrade”



  
A subscriber-only item pulled from your shop




Promote it with a quick email:


  
“Want to add this to your next box?”



  
“Just for subscribers. Add this before your box ships!”




Why does it work? They’re already expecting a charge. This simply gives them a fun, low-barrier way to get more of what they love while increasing your average revenue per subscriber.



2. Give Subscribers Access to Past Boxes



If you’ve been in business for a while, you likely have leftover past boxes. They’re valuable… but only if people know they exist.



Turn them into a subscriber-only vault.



What to include:


  
Boxes from recent months or seasons



  
Limited leftovers from special editions



  
Any extras you never publicly sold




How to promote it:


  
“Missed this one? Here’s your chance.”



  
“Subscriber exclusive: Shop past boxes before they’re gone.”




Why does it work? Subscribers know the value of your boxes. If they missed one - or want to gift one - this becomes an easy yes for them and fast revenue for you.



3. Offer a Subscriber-Only Promo or Perk



Subscribers love feeling like insiders. When you give them access no one else gets, they respond.



Offer them:


  
Early access to a new collection or seasonal drop



  
A subscriber-only limited-quantity item



  
A special discount code for the week (ex: 15% off shopwide)






Say things like:


  
“You get first dibs just for being a subscriber.”



  
“This week only: shop exclusive and save!”






Why does it work? Exclusive perks drive loyalty, encourage extra browsing, and often lead to bonus sales from people who are already your best buyers.



You don’t need a full blown launch to make more money. And you don’t need new customers. 



You just need to give your current subscribers more opportunities to say yes.



Join me for this Friday Fuel Episode and walk away with practical ideas you can use to make more sales this week - no launch or new audience required.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you want to make more sales this week, but don’t want to chase new customers, run ads, or overhaul your whole marketing strategy, this episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast is for you.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>One of the biggest mistakes subscription box owners make when looking to grow their business? Overlooking the people who already said yes.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Your current subscribers are your warmest audience. </strong>They love your brand, they open your boxes, and they already trust what you deliver every month.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Inside this Friday Fuel episode, I’m sharing <strong>three simple, practical ways to generate extra revenue using the subscribers you already have. </strong>No launch, no ad budget, and no extra overhead required.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>1. Add a Simple Upsell Before Renewal</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>A few days before renewal, give your subscribers a chance to add something special to their next box. Keep it easy, keep it relevant, and make sure it fits inside the box they're already getting.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Some ideas:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>A coordinating item</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>A seasonal exclusive</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>A “mystery upgrade”</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>A subscriber-only item pulled from your shop</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Promote it with a quick email:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>“Want to add this to your next box?”</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>“Just for subscribers. Add this before your box ships!”</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Why does it work? </strong>They’re already expecting a charge. This simply gives them a fun, low-barrier way to get more of what they love while increasing your average revenue per subscriber.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>2. Give Subscribers Access to Past Boxes</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you’ve been in business for a while, you likely have leftover past boxes. They’re valuable… but only if people know they exist.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Turn them into a <strong>subscriber-only vault</strong>.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>What to include:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Boxes from recent months or seasons</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Limited leftovers from special editions</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Any extras you never publicly sold</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>How to promote it:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>“Missed this one? Here’s your chance.”</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>“Subscriber exclusive: Shop past boxes before they’re gone.”<br></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Why does it work? </strong>Subscribers know the value of your boxes. If they missed one - or want to gift one - this becomes an easy yes for them and fast revenue for you.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>3. Offer a Subscriber-Only Promo or Perk</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Subscribers love feeling like insiders. When you give them access no one else gets, they respond.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Offer them:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Early access to a new collection or seasonal drop</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>A subscriber-only limited-quantity item</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>A special discount code for the week (ex: 15% off shopwide)</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Say things like:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>“You get first dibs just for being a subscriber.”</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>“This week only: shop exclusive and save!”</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Why does it work?</strong> Exclusive perks drive loyalty, encourage extra browsing, and often lead to bonus sales from people who are already your best buyers.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You don’t need a full blown launch to make more money. And you don’t need new customers. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You just need to give your current subscribers more opportunities to say yes.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Join me for this Friday Fuel Episode </strong>and walk away with practical ideas you can use to make more sales this week - no launch or new audience required.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>570</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2a324936-c8f5-11f0-892f-cf3917f5cf41]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6075198183.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Why You Should Start A T-Shirt Subscription</title>
      <description>I have a t-shirt subscription. Actually, I have two successful (and very profitable) t-shirt subscriptions: my T-Shirt Club and Tees 4 Teachers. And I’m not the only one growing thriving t-shirt subscriptions. LOTS of members of Launch Your Box are finding huge success with their own t-shirt subscriptions. With all this t-shirt subscription talk, you might be wondering if starting a t-shirt subscription is right for you. 

In this episode, I’m sharing six reasons why you should consider starting a t-shirt subscription.  

1. A T-shirt subscription has low start-up costs compared to other products.


  T-shirts range from $2-$7. 

  Printing can be done in-house or outsourced. 

  There is no need for expensive boxes - t-shirts can be shipped in poly mailers. 


2. T-shirts are a wardrobe staple. 


  Everyone wears t-shirts. 

  T-shirts are consumable - they are used (worn) for a while and then replaced. 

  T-shirts can be dressed up or worn casually. 


3. T-shirt subscriptions can be seasonal/holiday/theme-based.  


  Any niche can have a t-shirt subscription. Launch Your Box member t-shirt subscriptions include: 

  Career-focused tees

  Inspirational/self-care tees

  Tees for artists/crafters

  Snarky tees

  Animal/pet-themed tees


4. T-shirt subscriptions provide recurring revenue and recurring brand exposure.  


  A t-shirt subscription is a consistent source of recurring revenue.  

  A t-shirt subscription can provide opportunities for recurring brand exposure. 

  Add your label or brand to every design. 

  Build customer loyalty and commitment by consistently delivering quality t-shirts and designs. 


5. T-shirt subscriptions foster a sense of community which can result in: 


  Increased loyalty

  Higher engagement

  Higher lifetime value (LTV) and retention rates


6. T-shirt subscriptions are more affordable and accessible than many other subscriptions. 



A t-shirt subscription can be a successful, standalone subscription. It can also be a complement to your existing subscription box. Mine started as a complement to my Monogram Box when my subscribers asked for more t-shirts! 

I’ve seen great success with my own t-shirt subscriptions and have helped SO MANY members of Launch Your Box build thriving t-shirt subscriptions. 

I’m well-known for my extensive knowledge of all things t-shirt. So much so that my students and peers have been asking for a standalone t-shirt subscription course for quite a while. My team and I have spent the last several months working on this course. ⁠How to Start a T-Shirt Subscription⁠ covers everything you need to know in 12 video lessons full of actionable steps, worksheets, and special bonuses. It’s the perfect way to get all your t-shirt subscription questions answered and get your t-shirt subscription started NOW! 

Learn more about⁠ How to Start a T-Shirt Subscription⁠. 

Join me for this episode as I share my own t-shirt subscription experience and all the reasons you should start a t-shirt subscription. 



Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join ⁠today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 26 Nov 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as I share my own t-shirt subscription experience and all the reasons you should start a t-shirt subscription. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I have a t-shirt subscription. Actually, I have two successful (and very profitable) t-shirt subscriptions: my T-Shirt Club and Tees 4 Teachers. And I’m not the only one growing thriving t-shirt subscriptions. LOTS of members of Launch Your Box are finding huge success with their own t-shirt subscriptions. With all this t-shirt subscription talk, you might be wondering if starting a t-shirt subscription is right for you. 

In this episode, I’m sharing six reasons why you should consider starting a t-shirt subscription.  

1. A T-shirt subscription has low start-up costs compared to other products.


  T-shirts range from $2-$7. 

  Printing can be done in-house or outsourced. 

  There is no need for expensive boxes - t-shirts can be shipped in poly mailers. 


2. T-shirts are a wardrobe staple. 


  Everyone wears t-shirts. 

  T-shirts are consumable - they are used (worn) for a while and then replaced. 

  T-shirts can be dressed up or worn casually. 


3. T-shirt subscriptions can be seasonal/holiday/theme-based.  


  Any niche can have a t-shirt subscription. Launch Your Box member t-shirt subscriptions include: 

  Career-focused tees

  Inspirational/self-care tees

  Tees for artists/crafters

  Snarky tees

  Animal/pet-themed tees


4. T-shirt subscriptions provide recurring revenue and recurring brand exposure.  


  A t-shirt subscription is a consistent source of recurring revenue.  

  A t-shirt subscription can provide opportunities for recurring brand exposure. 

  Add your label or brand to every design. 

  Build customer loyalty and commitment by consistently delivering quality t-shirts and designs. 


5. T-shirt subscriptions foster a sense of community which can result in: 


  Increased loyalty

  Higher engagement

  Higher lifetime value (LTV) and retention rates


6. T-shirt subscriptions are more affordable and accessible than many other subscriptions. 



A t-shirt subscription can be a successful, standalone subscription. It can also be a complement to your existing subscription box. Mine started as a complement to my Monogram Box when my subscribers asked for more t-shirts! 

I’ve seen great success with my own t-shirt subscriptions and have helped SO MANY members of Launch Your Box build thriving t-shirt subscriptions. 

I’m well-known for my extensive knowledge of all things t-shirt. So much so that my students and peers have been asking for a standalone t-shirt subscription course for quite a while. My team and I have spent the last several months working on this course. ⁠How to Start a T-Shirt Subscription⁠ covers everything you need to know in 12 video lessons full of actionable steps, worksheets, and special bonuses. It’s the perfect way to get all your t-shirt subscription questions answered and get your t-shirt subscription started NOW! 

Learn more about⁠ How to Start a T-Shirt Subscription⁠. 

Join me for this episode as I share my own t-shirt subscription experience and all the reasons you should start a t-shirt subscription. 



Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join ⁠today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I have a t-shirt subscription. Actually, I have two successful (and very profitable) t-shirt subscriptions: my T-Shirt Club and Tees 4 Teachers. And I’m not the only one growing thriving t-shirt subscriptions. LOTS of members of Launch Your Box are finding huge success with their own t-shirt subscriptions. With all this t-shirt subscription talk, you might be wondering if starting a t-shirt subscription is right for you. </p>
<p>In this episode, I’m sharing six reasons why you should consider starting a t-shirt subscription.  </p>
<p>1. A T-shirt subscription has low start-up costs compared to other products.</p>
<ul>
  <li>T-shirts range from $2-$7. </li>
  <li>Printing can be done in-house or outsourced. </li>
  <li>There is no need for expensive boxes - t-shirts can be shipped in poly mailers. </li>
</ul>
<p>2. T-shirts are a wardrobe staple. </p>
<ul>
  <li>Everyone wears t-shirts. </li>
  <li>T-shirts are consumable - they are used (worn) for a while and then replaced. </li>
  <li>T-shirts can be dressed up or worn casually. </li>
</ul>
<p>3. T-shirt subscriptions can be seasonal/holiday/theme-based.  </p>
<ul>
  <li>Any niche can have a t-shirt subscription. Launch Your Box member t-shirt subscriptions include: </li>
  <li>Career-focused tees</li>
  <li>Inspirational/self-care tees</li>
  <li>Tees for artists/crafters</li>
  <li>Snarky tees</li>
  <li>Animal/pet-themed tees</li>
</ul>
<p>4. T-shirt subscriptions provide recurring revenue and recurring brand exposure.  </p>
<ul>
  <li>A t-shirt subscription is a consistent source of recurring revenue.  </li>
  <li>A t-shirt subscription can provide opportunities for recurring brand exposure. </li>
  <li>Add your label or brand to every design. </li>
  <li>Build customer loyalty and commitment by consistently delivering quality t-shirts and designs. </li>
</ul>
<p>5. T-shirt subscriptions foster a sense of community which can result in: </p>
<ul>
  <li>Increased loyalty</li>
  <li>Higher engagement</li>
  <li>Higher lifetime value (LTV) and retention rates</li>
</ul>
<p>6. T-shirt subscriptions are more affordable and accessible than many other subscriptions. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>A t-shirt subscription can be a successful, standalone subscription. It can also be a complement to your existing subscription box. Mine started as a complement to my Monogram Box when my subscribers asked for more t-shirts! </p>
<p>I’ve seen great success with my own t-shirt subscriptions and have helped SO MANY members of Launch Your Box build thriving t-shirt subscriptions. </p>
<p>I’m well-known for my extensive knowledge of all things t-shirt. So much so that my students and peers have been asking for a standalone t-shirt subscription course for quite a while. My team and I have spent the last several months working on this course. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/tshirt-course-waitlist">⁠How to Start a T-Shirt Subscription⁠</a> covers everything you need to know in 12 video lessons full of actionable steps, worksheets, and special bonuses. It’s the perfect way to get all your t-shirt subscription questions answered and get your t-shirt subscription started NOW! </p>
<p>Learn more about<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/tshirt-course-waitlist">⁠ How to Start a T-Shirt Subscription⁠</a>. </p>
<p>Join me for this episode as I share my own t-shirt subscription experience and all the reasons you should start a t-shirt subscription. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Join ⁠</a>today!</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>852</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f9dfa3a8-bdca-11f0-8e42-976da3e8ea43]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9438641109.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>233: Last Minute Sales? Try These 3 Fast Cash Injection Ideas</title>
      <description>Need cash fast? You’re not alone. Whether sales have slowed, you’re sitting on extra inventory, or you just want to give your bank account a boost before the weekend, this episode is packed with three simple, scrappy ways to generate quick revenue, without overcomplicating a thing.



1 - Run a 24- to 48-hour Flash SaleCreate urgency around one irresistible offer. Think: past boxes, seasonal items, or customer favorites. 

Keep it simple: one offer, one deadline, and plenty of promotion.

2 - Offer a Gift with PurchaseInstead of discounting, add value. 

Use leftover inventory as a limited-time bonus. Frame it as a surprise treat for the first 25 orders or for anyone who subscribes this weekend.

3 - Bundle Up Your LeftoversTurn old inventory into a new product (and revenue). 

Combine 3-5 items into a mystery or “surprise goodie box.” Make it limited - “this weekend only” or “limited quantities available.” Price it to move and make it limited. You’ll clear space and make money fast.

Key takeaways


  
Keep the offer simple. 



  
Add urgency and deadlines.



  
Promote multiple times! 






Most importantly? Just do it. Set a timer. Pick an idea. And launch it today.



Fast cash comes from fast decisions. So stop overthinking and start selling.



Take Action

Pick one of these ideas and make it live today. Flash Sale, Gift with Purchase, or Bundle, whichever fits your business best. You don’t need a new product or a fancy campaign. You just need to start.



You’ve got products. You’ve got followers. Now it’s time to turn them into fast cash. Join me for this short Friday Fuel episode for three tried-and-true ways to boost revenue this weekend.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website </description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 21 Nov 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Last Minute Sales? Try These 3 Fast Cash Injection Ideas</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>233</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>You’ve got products. You’ve got followers. Now it’s time to turn them into fast cash. Join me for this short Friday Fuel episode for three tried-and-true ways to boost revenue this weekend.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Need cash fast? You’re not alone. Whether sales have slowed, you’re sitting on extra inventory, or you just want to give your bank account a boost before the weekend, this episode is packed with three simple, scrappy ways to generate quick revenue, without overcomplicating a thing.



1 - Run a 24- to 48-hour Flash SaleCreate urgency around one irresistible offer. Think: past boxes, seasonal items, or customer favorites. 

Keep it simple: one offer, one deadline, and plenty of promotion.

2 - Offer a Gift with PurchaseInstead of discounting, add value. 

Use leftover inventory as a limited-time bonus. Frame it as a surprise treat for the first 25 orders or for anyone who subscribes this weekend.

3 - Bundle Up Your LeftoversTurn old inventory into a new product (and revenue). 

Combine 3-5 items into a mystery or “surprise goodie box.” Make it limited - “this weekend only” or “limited quantities available.” Price it to move and make it limited. You’ll clear space and make money fast.

Key takeaways


  
Keep the offer simple. 



  
Add urgency and deadlines.



  
Promote multiple times! 






Most importantly? Just do it. Set a timer. Pick an idea. And launch it today.



Fast cash comes from fast decisions. So stop overthinking and start selling.



Take Action

Pick one of these ideas and make it live today. Flash Sale, Gift with Purchase, or Bundle, whichever fits your business best. You don’t need a new product or a fancy campaign. You just need to start.



You’ve got products. You’ve got followers. Now it’s time to turn them into fast cash. Join me for this short Friday Fuel episode for three tried-and-true ways to boost revenue this weekend.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Need cash fast? You’re not alone. Whether sales have slowed, you’re sitting on extra inventory, or you just want to give your bank account a boost before the weekend, this episode is packed with <strong>three simple, scrappy ways to generate quick revenue</strong>, without overcomplicating a thing.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>1 - Run a 24- to 48-hour Flash SaleCreate urgency around one irresistible offer. Think: past boxes, seasonal items, or customer favorites. </p>
<p>Keep it simple: one offer, one deadline, and plenty of promotion.<br></p>
<p>2 - Offer a Gift with PurchaseInstead of discounting, add value. </p>
<p>Use leftover inventory as a limited-time bonus. Frame it as a surprise treat for the first 25 orders or for anyone who subscribes this weekend.<br></p>
<p>3 - Bundle Up Your LeftoversTurn old inventory into a new product (and revenue). </p>
<p>Combine 3-5 items into a mystery or “surprise goodie box.” Make it limited - “this weekend only” or “limited quantities available.” Price it to move and make it limited. You’ll clear space and make money fast.<br></p>
<p>Key takeaways</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Keep the offer simple. </p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Add urgency and deadlines.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Promote multiple times! </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Most importantly? Just do it. Set a timer. Pick an idea. And launch it today.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Fast cash comes from <strong>fast decisions. </strong>So stop overthinking and start selling.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Take Action</p>
<p>Pick one of these ideas and make it live today. Flash Sale, Gift with Purchase, or Bundle, whichever fits your business best. You don’t need a new product or a fancy campaign. You just need to start.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You’ve got products. You’ve got followers. Now it’s time to turn them into fast cash. <strong>Join me for this short Friday Fuel episode</strong> for three tried-and-true ways to boost revenue this weekend.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> <br></p>
</li>
</ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>601</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f34666ae-c445-11f0-98a6-2b0f646a96c6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4631201837.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>5 Ways to Reduce Small Business Overwhelm</title>
      <description>If you’re a small business owner, you are probably experiencing some degree of overwhelm in your business or personal life. Probably both. Because when you’re a small business owner, business and personal overlap and intertwine. A lot. 

Overwhelm can become a major obstacle to success. It can affect your business growth and your personal growth. Personal overwhelm affects your business and business overwhelm affects your personal life. How many times have you been impatient or snippy or overreacted to something because of stress in another part of your life? 

So many business owners operate in a constant state of overwhelm. But it doesn’t have to be that way. In this episode, I’m walking you through five things you can do to help reduce your overwhelm so you can thrive instead of just surviving. 

1. Time Management - There will never be enough hours in the day to get everything done. How we manage our time is crucial to reducing overwhelm. Get more done by: 


  Identifying high-priority tasks.

  Time blocking those tasks.

  Removing distractions.

  Using a timer to stay focused. 


2. Hiring, Outsourcing, Delegating - you can’t keep doing business alone. This means knowing when it’s time to: 


  Hire

  Outsource

  Delegate


3. Setting Realistic Goals and Timelines - entrepreneurs are guilty of always thinking we can get more done in a set amount of time than we actually can. 


  Be honest with yourself. 

  Plan only ONE big rock per quarter. (detailed in my Strategic Yearly Planning Workshop - linked below)


4. Getting Support - feeling supported makes a huge difference to the amount of overwhelm you feel. 


  How can your team support you? 

  How can your spouse support you? 

  How can your children support you? 

  How can your friends and family support you? 

  Seek out other support - housekeeper, grocery deliveries, etc. 


5. Self-care - you need to take time for yourself. Don’t feel guilty about it. 


  Plan self-care time - put it on your calendar. 

  Make time to spend with friends and family. 


Start with one of these items and build it into your routine. Then layer in another. And another. Stop operating in fight or flight mode. Your health and the health of your business depend on it! 

Join me for this episode and learn five things you can do to tackle overwhelm in your subscription box business.



Take my ⁠Strategic Yearly Planning Workshop⁠. 



Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join ⁠today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 19 Nov 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode and learn five things you can do to tackle overwhelm in your subscription box business.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you’re a small business owner, you are probably experiencing some degree of overwhelm in your business or personal life. Probably both. Because when you’re a small business owner, business and personal overlap and intertwine. A lot. 

Overwhelm can become a major obstacle to success. It can affect your business growth and your personal growth. Personal overwhelm affects your business and business overwhelm affects your personal life. How many times have you been impatient or snippy or overreacted to something because of stress in another part of your life? 

So many business owners operate in a constant state of overwhelm. But it doesn’t have to be that way. In this episode, I’m walking you through five things you can do to help reduce your overwhelm so you can thrive instead of just surviving. 

1. Time Management - There will never be enough hours in the day to get everything done. How we manage our time is crucial to reducing overwhelm. Get more done by: 


  Identifying high-priority tasks.

  Time blocking those tasks.

  Removing distractions.

  Using a timer to stay focused. 


2. Hiring, Outsourcing, Delegating - you can’t keep doing business alone. This means knowing when it’s time to: 


  Hire

  Outsource

  Delegate


3. Setting Realistic Goals and Timelines - entrepreneurs are guilty of always thinking we can get more done in a set amount of time than we actually can. 


  Be honest with yourself. 

  Plan only ONE big rock per quarter. (detailed in my Strategic Yearly Planning Workshop - linked below)


4. Getting Support - feeling supported makes a huge difference to the amount of overwhelm you feel. 


  How can your team support you? 

  How can your spouse support you? 

  How can your children support you? 

  How can your friends and family support you? 

  Seek out other support - housekeeper, grocery deliveries, etc. 


5. Self-care - you need to take time for yourself. Don’t feel guilty about it. 


  Plan self-care time - put it on your calendar. 

  Make time to spend with friends and family. 


Start with one of these items and build it into your routine. Then layer in another. And another. Stop operating in fight or flight mode. Your health and the health of your business depend on it! 

Join me for this episode and learn five things you can do to tackle overwhelm in your subscription box business.



Take my ⁠Strategic Yearly Planning Workshop⁠. 



Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join ⁠today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you’re a small business owner, you are probably experiencing some degree of overwhelm in your business or personal life. Probably both. Because when you’re a small business owner, business and personal overlap and intertwine. A lot. </p>
<p>Overwhelm can become a major obstacle to success. It can affect your business growth <em>and </em>your personal growth. Personal overwhelm affects your business and business overwhelm affects your personal life. How many times have you been impatient or snippy or overreacted to something because of stress in another part of your life? </p>
<p>So many business owners operate in a constant state of overwhelm. But it doesn’t have to be that way. In this episode, I’m walking you through five things you can do to help reduce your overwhelm so you can thrive instead of just surviving. </p>
<p>1. Time Management - There will never be enough hours in the day to get everything done. How we manage our time is crucial to reducing overwhelm. Get more done by: </p>
<ul>
  <li>Identifying high-priority tasks.</li>
  <li>Time blocking those tasks.</li>
  <li>Removing distractions.</li>
  <li>Using a timer to stay focused. </li>
</ul>
<p>2. Hiring, Outsourcing, Delegating - you can’t keep doing business alone. This means knowing when it’s time to: </p>
<ul>
  <li>Hire</li>
  <li>Outsource</li>
  <li>Delegate</li>
</ul>
<p>3. Setting Realistic Goals and Timelines - entrepreneurs are guilty of always thinking we can get more done in a set amount of time than we actually can. </p>
<ul>
  <li>Be honest with yourself. </li>
  <li>Plan only ONE big rock per quarter. (detailed in my Strategic Yearly Planning Workshop - linked below)</li>
</ul>
<p>4. Getting Support - feeling supported makes a huge difference to the amount of overwhelm you feel. </p>
<ul>
  <li>How can your team support you? </li>
  <li>How can your spouse support you? </li>
  <li>How can your children support you? </li>
  <li>How can your friends and family support you? </li>
  <li>Seek out other support - housekeeper, grocery deliveries, etc. </li>
</ul>
<p>5. Self-care - you need to take time for yourself. Don’t feel guilty about it. </p>
<ul>
  <li>Plan self-care time - put it on your calendar. </li>
  <li>Make time to spend with friends and family. </li>
</ul>
<p>Start with one of these items and build it into your routine. Then layer in another. And another. Stop operating in fight or flight mode. Your health and the health of your business depend on it! </p>
<p>Join me for this episode and learn five things you can do to tackle overwhelm in your subscription box business.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Take my </strong><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/strategic-yearly-planning">⁠<strong>Strategic Yearly Planning Workshop</strong>⁠</a><strong>. </strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Join ⁠</a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1873</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c4a3e1d6-bdca-11f0-83b4-73fda804a1fe]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7437462926.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>232: Want to Show Up More Online? Steal My Weekly Live &amp; Email Plan</title>
      <description>Ever tell yourself, “I know I should show up online more…” and then somehow, the week slips away and you didn’t?

You’re not alone.

Showing up online doesn’t have to feel overwhelming or depend on daily bursts of inspiration. You just need a simple system you can repeat week after week.

In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m walking you through the exact rhythm I use to stay consistent across live video, email, and social media, without overthinking it. You can steal it, tweak it, or make it your own.

Step 1: Choose Your Weekly Anchor

Consistency starts with one non-negotiable: a set day and time for your LIVE.For me, it’s Thursday at 9 a.m. every single week.

That’s my anchor. It’s on the calendar, it never moves, and it keeps me accountable. My audience knows when to expect me, and I always know when I’m showing up.

If your plan is “I’ll go LIVE sometime this week,” chances are you won’t.Pick your day, pick your time, and treat it like an important appointment (because it is).

Step 2: Turn One LIVE into Days of Content

Right after your LIVE, before you clean up or move on, take a few quick photos of yourself with the products you featured. You’re already camera-ready and the setup is done.

Those images become instant marketing gold:


  
Add one to a same-day recap email linking to the replay,



  
Use another in a next-day email highlighting one or two featured products,



  
Sprinkle the rest across your social media posts for the next few days.




This rhythm means you’re never starting from scratch.

Step 3: Stretch It Over Three Days of Posts

We repurpose that Thursday LIVE for three more days of content:Day 1: Product flat-lay or styled shotDay 2: Reel or clip from the LIVEDay 3: Lifestyle photo or testimonial that ties in

Same message. Different formats. Maximum visibility.

When you build this kind of routine, you’ll never again wonder, “What should I post this week?” 

Step 4: Why This System Works

This weekly rhythm keeps you top of mind and builds trust.


  
The LIVE keeps you visible.



  
The emails deepen connection and drive sales.



  
The posts give your audience multiple chances to see, comment, and buy.




You’re no longer chasing content. Instead, you’re running a system.

Take Action

Start this week:


  
Pick your LIVE day + time.



  
Go LIVE.



  
Send a recap email.



  
Post follow-up content for three days.




That’s it. You’ll be amazed how quickly consistency turns into momentum.

Join me for this episode to discover how one weekly LIVE and two quick emails can create days of content, connection, and confidence.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 14 Nov 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Want to Show Up More Online? Steal My Weekly Live &amp; Email Plan</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>232</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode to discover how one weekly LIVE and two quick emails can create days of content, connection, and confidence.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Ever tell yourself, “I know I should show up online more…” and then somehow, the week slips away and you didn’t?

You’re not alone.

Showing up online doesn’t have to feel overwhelming or depend on daily bursts of inspiration. You just need a simple system you can repeat week after week.

In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m walking you through the exact rhythm I use to stay consistent across live video, email, and social media, without overthinking it. You can steal it, tweak it, or make it your own.

Step 1: Choose Your Weekly Anchor

Consistency starts with one non-negotiable: a set day and time for your LIVE.For me, it’s Thursday at 9 a.m. every single week.

That’s my anchor. It’s on the calendar, it never moves, and it keeps me accountable. My audience knows when to expect me, and I always know when I’m showing up.

If your plan is “I’ll go LIVE sometime this week,” chances are you won’t.Pick your day, pick your time, and treat it like an important appointment (because it is).

Step 2: Turn One LIVE into Days of Content

Right after your LIVE, before you clean up or move on, take a few quick photos of yourself with the products you featured. You’re already camera-ready and the setup is done.

Those images become instant marketing gold:


  
Add one to a same-day recap email linking to the replay,



  
Use another in a next-day email highlighting one or two featured products,



  
Sprinkle the rest across your social media posts for the next few days.




This rhythm means you’re never starting from scratch.

Step 3: Stretch It Over Three Days of Posts

We repurpose that Thursday LIVE for three more days of content:Day 1: Product flat-lay or styled shotDay 2: Reel or clip from the LIVEDay 3: Lifestyle photo or testimonial that ties in

Same message. Different formats. Maximum visibility.

When you build this kind of routine, you’ll never again wonder, “What should I post this week?” 

Step 4: Why This System Works

This weekly rhythm keeps you top of mind and builds trust.


  
The LIVE keeps you visible.



  
The emails deepen connection and drive sales.



  
The posts give your audience multiple chances to see, comment, and buy.




You’re no longer chasing content. Instead, you’re running a system.

Take Action

Start this week:


  
Pick your LIVE day + time.



  
Go LIVE.



  
Send a recap email.



  
Post follow-up content for three days.




That’s it. You’ll be amazed how quickly consistency turns into momentum.

Join me for this episode to discover how one weekly LIVE and two quick emails can create days of content, connection, and confidence.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ever tell yourself, “I know I should show up online more…” and then somehow, the week slips away and you didn’t?</p>
<p>You’re not alone.</p>
<p>Showing up online doesn’t have to feel overwhelming or depend on daily bursts of inspiration. You just need a simple system you can repeat week after week.</p>
<p>In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m walking you through the exact rhythm I use to stay consistent across live video, email, and social media, without overthinking it. You can steal it, tweak it, or make it your own.</p>
<p>Step 1: Choose Your Weekly Anchor</p>
<p>Consistency starts with one non-negotiable: a set day and time for your LIVE.For me, it’s Thursday at 9 a.m. every single week.</p>
<p>That’s my anchor. It’s on the calendar, it never moves, and it keeps me accountable. My audience knows when to expect me, and I always know when I’m showing up.</p>
<p>If your plan is “I’ll go LIVE sometime this week,” chances are you won’t.Pick your day, pick your time, and treat it like an important appointment (because it is).</p>
<p>Step 2: Turn One LIVE into Days of Content</p>
<p>Right after your LIVE, before you clean up or move on, take a few quick photos of yourself with the products you featured. You’re already camera-ready and the setup is done.</p>
<p>Those images become instant marketing gold:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Add one to a <strong>same-day recap email</strong> linking to the replay,</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Use another in a <strong>next-day email</strong> highlighting one or two featured products,</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Sprinkle the rest across your social media posts for the next few days.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>This rhythm means you’re never starting from scratch.</p>
<p>Step 3: Stretch It Over Three Days of Posts</p>
<p>We repurpose that Thursday LIVE for three more days of content:<strong>Day 1:</strong> Product flat-lay or styled shot<strong>Day 2:</strong> Reel or clip from the LIVE<strong>Day 3:</strong> Lifestyle photo or testimonial that ties in</p>
<p>Same message. Different formats. Maximum visibility.</p>
<p>When you build this kind of routine, you’ll never again wonder, <em>“</em>What should I post this week?” </p>
<p>Step 4: Why This System Works</p>
<p>This weekly rhythm keeps you top of mind and builds trust.</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>The <strong>LIVE</strong> keeps you visible.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>The <strong>emails</strong> deepen connection and drive sales.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>The <strong>posts</strong> give your audience multiple chances to see, comment, and buy.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You’re no longer chasing content. Instead, you’re running a system.</p>
<p>Take Action</p>
<p>Start this week:</p>
<ol>
  <li>
<p>Pick your LIVE day + time.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Go LIVE.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Send a recap email.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Post follow-up content for three days.</p>
</li>
</ol>
<p>That’s it. You’ll be amazed how quickly consistency turns into momentum.</p>
<p><strong>Join me for this episode </strong>to discover how one weekly LIVE and two quick emails can create days of content, connection, and confidence.</p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>731</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[901ac3c4-bdcc-11f0-837c-1fa92caa6a1f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8021805898.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Holiday Shipping Hacks: Surviving the 4th Quarter</title>
      <description>It’s the 4th quarter—also known as the busiest, craziest time of the year for product-based business owners! You've planned your 4th quarter promotions and products are arriving, but have you thought about the logistics of fulfilling and shipping all those orders? 

In this episode, I share shipping hacks and strategies to help subscription box owners and product-based businesses navigate our busiest quarter… and stay sane doing it! 



Prep Packing &amp; Shipping Supplies Early


  Audit your packing and shipping supplies now: tape, labels, boxes, poly mailers, filler. 

  Order enough to get you through December.

  Plan for the unexpected. 

  Establish a dedicated storage space for your extra supplies so your team knows exactly where to find what they need.




Optimize Fulfillment by Prepacking, Prepping, and Batch Packing 


  Pre-pack items that will be sold together, like holiday bundles or Black Friday specials.

  Reduce friction, eliminate unnecessary steps, and gain efficiency

  Implement batch packing by processing similar orders together for a smoother, faster workflow.


Research Shipping Carrier Cut-off Dates &amp; Have Options 


  Research carrier cut-off dates and set your own Christmas shipping cut-offs well in advance. 

  Overcommunicate! Post these cut-off dates visibly in your social media headers, on your website, and in emails.

  Stay flexible and ready to adjust by having multiple shipping options.

  Maintain open communication with your drivers to help manage any unexpected delays.


Be Prepared for Increased Customer Service Volume 


  Expect an increase in customer service inquiries and be transparent with customers about shipping timelines and potential delays.

  Have a contingency plan in place to deal with lost packages, including a policy for replacements or refunds.




The holiday rush can be chaotic, but with these tips, you’ll feel more prepared than ever to tackle Q4. 



Have a shipping manager or team? Have them listen to this episode to boost efficiency and reduce holiday chaos in your shop!



Join me for this episode where I share fulfillment &amp; shipping strategies to help subscription box owners and product-based businesses navigate the busiest, craziest time of year - the 4th quarter. Grab your coffee (or something stronger!) and let’s dive in!



Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!



Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 


﻿

Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join the waitlist ⁠today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Nov 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode where I share fulfillment &amp; shipping strategies to help subscription box owners and product-based businesses navigate the busiest, craziest time of year - the 4th quarter. Grab your coffee (or something stronger!) and let’s dive in!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>It’s the 4th quarter—also known as the busiest, craziest time of the year for product-based business owners! You've planned your 4th quarter promotions and products are arriving, but have you thought about the logistics of fulfilling and shipping all those orders? 

In this episode, I share shipping hacks and strategies to help subscription box owners and product-based businesses navigate our busiest quarter… and stay sane doing it! 



Prep Packing &amp; Shipping Supplies Early


  Audit your packing and shipping supplies now: tape, labels, boxes, poly mailers, filler. 

  Order enough to get you through December.

  Plan for the unexpected. 

  Establish a dedicated storage space for your extra supplies so your team knows exactly where to find what they need.




Optimize Fulfillment by Prepacking, Prepping, and Batch Packing 


  Pre-pack items that will be sold together, like holiday bundles or Black Friday specials.

  Reduce friction, eliminate unnecessary steps, and gain efficiency

  Implement batch packing by processing similar orders together for a smoother, faster workflow.


Research Shipping Carrier Cut-off Dates &amp; Have Options 


  Research carrier cut-off dates and set your own Christmas shipping cut-offs well in advance. 

  Overcommunicate! Post these cut-off dates visibly in your social media headers, on your website, and in emails.

  Stay flexible and ready to adjust by having multiple shipping options.

  Maintain open communication with your drivers to help manage any unexpected delays.


Be Prepared for Increased Customer Service Volume 


  Expect an increase in customer service inquiries and be transparent with customers about shipping timelines and potential delays.

  Have a contingency plan in place to deal with lost packages, including a policy for replacements or refunds.




The holiday rush can be chaotic, but with these tips, you’ll feel more prepared than ever to tackle Q4. 



Have a shipping manager or team? Have them listen to this episode to boost efficiency and reduce holiday chaos in your shop!



Join me for this episode where I share fulfillment &amp; shipping strategies to help subscription box owners and product-based businesses navigate the busiest, craziest time of year - the 4th quarter. Grab your coffee (or something stronger!) and let’s dive in!



Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!



Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 


﻿

Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join the waitlist ⁠today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>It’s the 4th quarter—also known as the busiest, craziest time of the year for product-based business owners! You've planned your 4th quarter promotions and products are arriving, but have you thought about the logistics of fulfilling and shipping all those orders? </p>
<p>In this episode, I share shipping hacks and strategies to help subscription box owners and product-based businesses navigate our busiest quarter… and stay sane doing it! </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Prep Packing &amp; Shipping Supplies Early</p>
<ul>
  <li>Audit your packing and shipping supplies now: tape, labels, boxes, poly mailers, filler. </li>
  <li>Order enough to get you through December.</li>
  <li>Plan for the unexpected. </li>
  <li>Establish a dedicated storage space for your extra supplies so your team knows exactly where to find what they need.</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Optimize Fulfillment by Prepacking, Prepping, and Batch Packing </p>
<ul>
  <li>Pre-pack items that will be sold together, like holiday bundles or Black Friday specials.</li>
  <li>Reduce friction, eliminate unnecessary steps, and gain efficiency</li>
  <li>Implement batch packing by processing similar orders together for a smoother, faster workflow.</li>
</ul>
<p>Research Shipping Carrier Cut-off Dates &amp; Have Options </p>
<ul>
  <li>Research carrier cut-off dates and set your own Christmas shipping cut-offs well in advance. </li>
  <li>Overcommunicate! Post these cut-off dates visibly in your social media headers, on your website, and in emails.</li>
  <li>Stay flexible and ready to adjust by having multiple shipping options.</li>
  <li>Maintain open communication with your drivers to help manage any unexpected delays.</li>
</ul>
<p>Be Prepared for Increased Customer Service Volume </p>
<ul>
  <li>Expect an increase in customer service inquiries and be transparent with customers about shipping timelines and potential delays.</li>
  <li>Have a contingency plan in place to deal with lost packages, including a policy for replacements or refunds.</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>The holiday rush can be chaotic, but with these tips, you’ll feel more prepared than ever to tackle Q4. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><em>Have a shipping manager or team? Have them listen to this episode to boost efficiency and reduce holiday chaos in your shop!</em></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me for this episode where I share fulfillment &amp; shipping strategies to help subscription box owners and product-based businesses navigate the busiest, craziest time of year - the 4th quarter. Grab your coffee (or something stronger!) and let’s dive in!</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </li>
</ul>
<p>﻿</p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Join the waitlist ⁠</a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1499</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4c124b9a-bdca-11f0-98b9-f7c04e86de68]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8557289968.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>231: 30 Days of Content From ONE Subscription Box</title>
      <description>Do you ever sit down, open Facebook or Instagram, and think, “I have no idea what to post today”?



You’re not alone. Every subscription box owner has those days. 



I have good news. If you’re shipping a box every month, your content is already in your hands. Literally.



One box = 30 days of content.



In this week’s Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m walking you through exactly how to turn a single subscription box into an entire month of posts, emails, and videos. And how to batch it all in a single day.



Shift Your Mindset: You Already Have the Content

Before we jump into ideas, let’s change the way you think about content.



Instead of asking: “What should I post today?”...



Start asking: “How can I talk about this one box in different ways that connect with my audience?”



You’ve already spent hours curating, packing, and presenting that box. Let it work harder for you. Content doesn’t have to be new. It does have to be useful and consistent.



The Breakdown: 30 Days of Content From One Subscription Box



Your monthly plan, no guesswork required.



Static Post Ideas (15 posts) 


  
Flat lays



  
Product spotlights



  
Behind-the-scenes photos



  
Testimonials



  
Theme graphics



  
Polls



  
Personal stories




These visuals help your followers connect the dots between your box and the value it delivers.



Email Ideas (1–2 per week)


  
Sneak peeks



  
Full reveals



  
How-to guides



  
“Last day to order” reminders 






Remember, your subscribers live busy lives. These emails keep your box top of mind and your waitlist full.



Live Video Topics


  
Unboxings



  
Packing parties



  
Styling demos



  
Q&amp;As. 




Go live, connect, and show off the passion behind your brand.



Long-Form Content Ideas

Blog posts like “5 Ways to Use This Month’s Box” or “Behind the Scenes: How We Chose This Theme” boost your SEO and give you evergreen content to repurpose later.



Create 30 Days of Content from ONE Subscription Box… All in One Day

You don’t need to create content every day. You just need one content day per month.



On your next packing or reveal day, block out 2–3 hours to capture:


  
Full-box flat lays and product close-ups



  
You holding or packing the box



  
Short video clips for Reels



  
Selfies or lifestyle shots with the products






From that one session, you’ll walk away with:


  
15+ social posts



  
4–6 Reels



  
Photos for emails and blogs



  
Visuals for stories and highlights




Smart marketing that respects your time? Yes, please.



Take Action

Your Friday Fuel Challenge: Grab your most recent shipped box and plan your next 30 days of content. Map out the ideas, schedule the shoot, and start posting.



Once you see how simple this process is, you’ll build momentum. And momentum brings in subscribers who stick around because you’re showing up consistently.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 07 Nov 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>30 Days of Content From ONE Subscription Box</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>231</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Turn one subscription box into 30 days of content! Join me for this  Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast and learn how to plan, batch, and post with ease.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Do you ever sit down, open Facebook or Instagram, and think, “I have no idea what to post today”?



You’re not alone. Every subscription box owner has those days. 



I have good news. If you’re shipping a box every month, your content is already in your hands. Literally.



One box = 30 days of content.



In this week’s Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m walking you through exactly how to turn a single subscription box into an entire month of posts, emails, and videos. And how to batch it all in a single day.



Shift Your Mindset: You Already Have the Content

Before we jump into ideas, let’s change the way you think about content.



Instead of asking: “What should I post today?”...



Start asking: “How can I talk about this one box in different ways that connect with my audience?”



You’ve already spent hours curating, packing, and presenting that box. Let it work harder for you. Content doesn’t have to be new. It does have to be useful and consistent.



The Breakdown: 30 Days of Content From One Subscription Box



Your monthly plan, no guesswork required.



Static Post Ideas (15 posts) 


  
Flat lays



  
Product spotlights



  
Behind-the-scenes photos



  
Testimonials



  
Theme graphics



  
Polls



  
Personal stories




These visuals help your followers connect the dots between your box and the value it delivers.



Email Ideas (1–2 per week)


  
Sneak peeks



  
Full reveals



  
How-to guides



  
“Last day to order” reminders 






Remember, your subscribers live busy lives. These emails keep your box top of mind and your waitlist full.



Live Video Topics


  
Unboxings



  
Packing parties



  
Styling demos



  
Q&amp;As. 




Go live, connect, and show off the passion behind your brand.



Long-Form Content Ideas

Blog posts like “5 Ways to Use This Month’s Box” or “Behind the Scenes: How We Chose This Theme” boost your SEO and give you evergreen content to repurpose later.



Create 30 Days of Content from ONE Subscription Box… All in One Day

You don’t need to create content every day. You just need one content day per month.



On your next packing or reveal day, block out 2–3 hours to capture:


  
Full-box flat lays and product close-ups



  
You holding or packing the box



  
Short video clips for Reels



  
Selfies or lifestyle shots with the products






From that one session, you’ll walk away with:


  
15+ social posts



  
4–6 Reels



  
Photos for emails and blogs



  
Visuals for stories and highlights




Smart marketing that respects your time? Yes, please.



Take Action

Your Friday Fuel Challenge: Grab your most recent shipped box and plan your next 30 days of content. Map out the ideas, schedule the shoot, and start posting.



Once you see how simple this process is, you’ll build momentum. And momentum brings in subscribers who stick around because you’re showing up consistently.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Do you ever sit down, open Facebook or Instagram, and think, “I have no idea what to post today”?</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You’re not alone. Every subscription box owner has those days. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>I have good news. If you’re shipping a box every month, your content is already in your hands. Literally.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>One box = 30 days of content.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this week’s <strong>Friday Fuel</strong> episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m walking you through exactly how to turn a single subscription box into an entire month of posts, emails, and videos. And how to batch it all in a single day.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Shift Your Mindset: You Already Have the Content</p>
<p>Before we jump into ideas, let’s change the way you think about content.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Instead of asking: “What should I post today?”...</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Start asking: “How can I talk about this one box in different ways that connect with my audience?”</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You’ve already spent hours curating, packing, and presenting that box. Let it work harder for you. <strong>Content doesn’t have to be new. It does have to be useful and consistent.</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>The Breakdown: 30 Days of Content From One Subscription Box</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Your monthly plan, no guesswork required.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Static Post Ideas (15 posts) </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Flat lays</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Product spotlights</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Behind-the-scenes photos</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Testimonials</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Theme graphics</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Polls</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Personal stories</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>These visuals help your followers connect the dots between your box and the value it delivers.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Email Ideas (1–2 per week)</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Sneak peeks</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Full reveals</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>How-to guides</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>“Last day to order” reminders </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Remember, your subscribers live busy lives. These emails keep your box top of mind and your waitlist full.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Live Video Topics</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Unboxings</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Packing parties</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Styling demos</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Q&amp;As. </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Go live, connect, and show off the passion behind your brand.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Long-Form Content Ideas</p>
<p>Blog posts like “5 Ways to Use This Month’s Box” or “Behind the Scenes: How We Chose This Theme” boost your SEO and give you evergreen content to repurpose later.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Create 30 Days of Content from ONE Subscription Box… All in One Day</p>
<p>You don’t need to create content every day. You just need one content day per month.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>On your next packing or reveal day, block out 2–3 hours to capture:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Full-box flat lays and product close-ups</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>You holding or packing the box</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Short video clips for Reels</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Selfies or lifestyle shots with the products</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>From that one session, you’ll walk away with:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>15+ social posts</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>4–6 Reels</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Photos for emails and blogs</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Visuals for stories and highlights</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Smart marketing that respects your time? Yes, please.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Take Action</p>
<p>Your <strong>Friday Fuel Challenge</strong>: Grab your most recent shipped box and plan your next 30 days of content. Map out the ideas, schedule the shoot, and start posting.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Once you see how simple this process is, you’ll build momentum. And momentum brings in subscribers who stick around because you’re showing up consistently.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>797</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1debded2-b845-11f0-8ce1-5b3db09c6c12]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5501139227.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>230: List Building Meets Storytelling: A No Fluff Email Strategy with Amy Porterfield</title>
      <description>If you’ve ever felt like your email list is too small to matter or wondered what to actually say to the people on it, this episode is about to change the way you think about email marketing.



I sat down with Amy Porterfield - yes, that Amy Porterfield - to talk about list building, storytelling, and staying consistent, especially when your list feels like it’s barely getting started.



Amy went from working in the corporate world for Tony Robbins to becoming one of the most trusted teachers in digital marketing. She’s the creator of Digital Course Academy, host of the Online Marketing Made Easy podcast, and one of the biggest advocates for growing your business through the power of your email list.



Your Email List Is Where the Magic Happens

As Amy says, social media is rented land. Your email list is the only platform you truly own. If you have even one subscriber, talk to that person like you’re writing just for them.



Your list will make you money over and over again, but you have to do the work to grow it. Amy’s simple steps:


  
Get clear on who you want to serve and how you want to serve them.



  
Create a freebie (lead magnet) that solves one small problem.



  
Set up your CRM and get that freebie out there.



  
Promote it often! Talk about your freebie on social media every single week.






Consistency Builds Trust

When I asked Amy how to keep showing up in email, her answer was simple: consistency.



She sends her newsletter every Tuesday morning, no matter what. Her formula:


  
Start with a story that connects back to the reader.



  
Share two pieces of valuable content from others.



  
Teach something simple and actionable.



  
End with a personal story (and add her podcast link in the P.S.)




People open emails from people they trust. And trust is built when your name keeps showing up in their inbox.



Storytelling That Sells (Without Feeling Salesy)

Amy shared that storytelling has become one of the most powerful tools in her emails. When people feel seen and understood, they stick around. And they buy.



She often shares stories between her email and social platforms. If a story performs well in one place, she uses it in the other. Stories make your audience feel connected, and connection builds conversion.



From Email Subscriber to Buyer

So how do you actually move people from your list to paying customers?


  
Keep showing up.



  
Tell stories that build trust.



  
Send more than one promo email - your audience needs to hear from you multiple times.



  
Let your personality shine through every message.






And if you don’t know where to start? Create a simple email template to guide you every week, and do a brain dump in a Google Doc of every story or lesson you could share.



Amy reminded me of something she learned from Tony Robbins — and something I’ve said many times myself. Growth comes from being uncomfortable.



You don’t need to be perfect. You just need to start. Do it scared. Do it messy. But do it.



If you’ve been waiting to “get your list ready,” this is your nudge. Start small. Share one story. Send one email. Stay consistent.



Your email list doesn’t have to be big, it just has to be active.





Where to find Amy: 


  
Amy Porterfield on Facebook



  
Amy Porterfield on Instagram



  
Amy Porterfield’s Website 






Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 05 Nov 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>List Building Meets Storytelling: A No Fluff Email Strategy with Amy Porterfield</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>230</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast with Amy Porterfield and learn how to grow your email list and turn those email subscribers into loyal, buying customers.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you’ve ever felt like your email list is too small to matter or wondered what to actually say to the people on it, this episode is about to change the way you think about email marketing.



I sat down with Amy Porterfield - yes, that Amy Porterfield - to talk about list building, storytelling, and staying consistent, especially when your list feels like it’s barely getting started.



Amy went from working in the corporate world for Tony Robbins to becoming one of the most trusted teachers in digital marketing. She’s the creator of Digital Course Academy, host of the Online Marketing Made Easy podcast, and one of the biggest advocates for growing your business through the power of your email list.



Your Email List Is Where the Magic Happens

As Amy says, social media is rented land. Your email list is the only platform you truly own. If you have even one subscriber, talk to that person like you’re writing just for them.



Your list will make you money over and over again, but you have to do the work to grow it. Amy’s simple steps:


  
Get clear on who you want to serve and how you want to serve them.



  
Create a freebie (lead magnet) that solves one small problem.



  
Set up your CRM and get that freebie out there.



  
Promote it often! Talk about your freebie on social media every single week.






Consistency Builds Trust

When I asked Amy how to keep showing up in email, her answer was simple: consistency.



She sends her newsletter every Tuesday morning, no matter what. Her formula:


  
Start with a story that connects back to the reader.



  
Share two pieces of valuable content from others.



  
Teach something simple and actionable.



  
End with a personal story (and add her podcast link in the P.S.)




People open emails from people they trust. And trust is built when your name keeps showing up in their inbox.



Storytelling That Sells (Without Feeling Salesy)

Amy shared that storytelling has become one of the most powerful tools in her emails. When people feel seen and understood, they stick around. And they buy.



She often shares stories between her email and social platforms. If a story performs well in one place, she uses it in the other. Stories make your audience feel connected, and connection builds conversion.



From Email Subscriber to Buyer

So how do you actually move people from your list to paying customers?


  
Keep showing up.



  
Tell stories that build trust.



  
Send more than one promo email - your audience needs to hear from you multiple times.



  
Let your personality shine through every message.






And if you don’t know where to start? Create a simple email template to guide you every week, and do a brain dump in a Google Doc of every story or lesson you could share.



Amy reminded me of something she learned from Tony Robbins — and something I’ve said many times myself. Growth comes from being uncomfortable.



You don’t need to be perfect. You just need to start. Do it scared. Do it messy. But do it.



If you’ve been waiting to “get your list ready,” this is your nudge. Start small. Share one story. Send one email. Stay consistent.



Your email list doesn’t have to be big, it just has to be active.





Where to find Amy: 


  
Amy Porterfield on Facebook



  
Amy Porterfield on Instagram



  
Amy Porterfield’s Website 






Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you’ve ever felt like your email list is too small to matter or wondered what to actually say to the people on it, this episode is about to change the way you think about email marketing.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>I sat down with <strong>Amy Porterfield</strong> - yes, <em>that</em> Amy Porterfield - to talk about list building, storytelling, and staying consistent, especially when your list feels like it’s barely getting started.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Amy went from working in the corporate world for Tony Robbins to becoming one of the most trusted teachers in digital marketing. She’s the creator of <em>Digital Course Academy</em>, host of the <em>Online Marketing Made Easy</em> podcast, and one of the biggest advocates for growing your business through the power of your email list.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Your Email List Is Where the Magic Happens</p>
<p>As Amy says, social media is rented land. Your email list is the only platform you truly own. If you have even one subscriber, talk to that person like you’re writing just for them.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Your list will make you money over and over again, but you have to do the work to grow it. Amy’s simple steps:</p>
<ol>
  <li>
<p><strong>Get clear</strong> on who you want to serve and how you want to serve them.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Create a freebie</strong> (lead magnet) that solves one small problem.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Set up your CRM</strong> and get that freebie out there.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Promote it</strong> often! Talk about your freebie on social media every single week.</p>
</li>
</ol>
<p><br></p>
<p>Consistency Builds Trust</p>
<p>When I asked Amy how to keep showing up in email, her answer was simple: consistency.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>She sends her newsletter every Tuesday morning, no matter what. Her formula:</p>
<ol>
  <li>
<p>Start with a story that connects back to the reader.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Share two pieces of valuable content from others.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Teach something simple and actionable.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>End with a personal story (and add her podcast link in the P.S.)</p>
</li>
</ol>
<p>People open emails from people they trust. And trust is built when your name keeps showing up in their inbox.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Storytelling That Sells (Without Feeling Salesy)</p>
<p>Amy shared that storytelling has become one of the most powerful tools in her emails. When people feel seen and understood, they stick around. And they buy.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>She often shares stories between her email and social platforms. If a story performs well in one place, she uses it in the other. Stories make your audience feel connected, and connection builds conversion.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>From Email Subscriber to Buyer</p>
<p>So how do you actually move people from your list to paying customers?</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Keep showing up.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Tell stories that build trust.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Send more than one promo email - your audience needs to hear from you multiple times.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Let your personality shine through every message.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>And if you don’t know where to start? Create a simple email template to guide you every week, and do a brain dump in a Google Doc of every story or lesson you could share.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Amy reminded me of something she learned from Tony Robbins — and something I’ve said many times myself. Growth comes from being uncomfortable.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You don’t need to be perfect. You just need to start. Do it scared. Do it messy. But do it.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you’ve been waiting to “get your list ready,” this is your nudge. Start small. Share one story. Send one email. Stay consistent.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Your email list doesn’t have to be big, it just has to be active.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Where to find Amy: </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/AmyPorterfield">Amy Porterfield on Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/amyporterfield/">Amy Porterfield on Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.amyporterfield.com/">Amy Porterfield’s Website<u> </u></a></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2323</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d3da5760-b844-11f0-b5fd-97378855e840]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5564906120.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>229: When Subscriber Growth Stalls, Let’s Reset</title>
      <description>Every subscription box owner hits a wall. Growth slows down. The excitement you once felt starts to fade. You check your numbers and realize things have stalled.



Stalling doesn’t mean you’ve failed. It just means it’s time for a reset.



Most of the time, growth slows because you’ve either tapped out your current audience or haven’t been visible enough lately. The good news? You don’t have to overhaul everything. You just need to re-energize a few key areas to spark fresh momentum.



In this quick Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m walking you through how to restart your momentum by focusing on three key areas that move the needle: growing your email list, showing up intentionally on social media, and running short, smart marketing bursts between launches.



Reset #1: Grow Your Email List (Again)

Your email list is your highest-converting asset, and when growth stalls, chances are your list has stalled, too.



Ask yourself: Am I actively growing my list this week?



If not, start here. Try a giveaway, launch a new lead magnet, or add a pop-up to your site. Promote your opt-in more often than feels comfortable. Remember, most people haven’t seen it yet!



Reset #2: Grow Your Following with Intention

People can’t buy from you if they don’t know you exist.



Audit your last six social media posts. Do they speak directly to your ideal subscriber? If not, shift your focus to connection:


  
Share behind-the-scenes peeks of product selection or packing days.



  
Spotlight subscriber stories or testimonials.



  
Create simple reels using B-roll and overlay text.



  
Share content that reflects your box’s niche or transformation.




Engagement comes first. Conversion follows.



Reset #3: Run Short-Burst Marketing Campaigns

You don’t need to wait for “launch week” to grow. Between launches, run small but mighty campaigns: 


  
3-day waitlist push



  
Flash freebie bonus



  
Subscriber referral challenge



  
Simple paid ad paired with a short funnel sequence.




Think of these as mini-launches that keep your energy and your subscriber list growing all year long.



Bonus Reset Tips

If you’re ready to dig deeper, try these quick wins:


  
Audit your list: scrub cold leads and segment by subscribers, leads, and past customers.



  
Update your website: make sure it’s clear who your box is for and why they need it.



  
Re-engage dormant leads: send a short, two-part reactivation sequence.



  
Ask your audience: use Instagram polls or a quick quiz to find out what’s holding them back from subscribing.






Take Action

Choose one of these resets and take action today.



Whether it’s creating a new lead magnet, sharing a behind-the-scenes post, or running a 3-day waitlist push, do something that moves you closer to your next subscriber.



Join me for this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, where we’ll hit the reset button together and get your subscriber growth moving again, one simple action at a time.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 31 Oct 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>When Subscriber Growth Stalls, Let’s Reset</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>229</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, where we’ll hit the reset button together and get your subscriber growth moving again, one simple action at a time.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Every subscription box owner hits a wall. Growth slows down. The excitement you once felt starts to fade. You check your numbers and realize things have stalled.



Stalling doesn’t mean you’ve failed. It just means it’s time for a reset.



Most of the time, growth slows because you’ve either tapped out your current audience or haven’t been visible enough lately. The good news? You don’t have to overhaul everything. You just need to re-energize a few key areas to spark fresh momentum.



In this quick Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m walking you through how to restart your momentum by focusing on three key areas that move the needle: growing your email list, showing up intentionally on social media, and running short, smart marketing bursts between launches.



Reset #1: Grow Your Email List (Again)

Your email list is your highest-converting asset, and when growth stalls, chances are your list has stalled, too.



Ask yourself: Am I actively growing my list this week?



If not, start here. Try a giveaway, launch a new lead magnet, or add a pop-up to your site. Promote your opt-in more often than feels comfortable. Remember, most people haven’t seen it yet!



Reset #2: Grow Your Following with Intention

People can’t buy from you if they don’t know you exist.



Audit your last six social media posts. Do they speak directly to your ideal subscriber? If not, shift your focus to connection:


  
Share behind-the-scenes peeks of product selection or packing days.



  
Spotlight subscriber stories or testimonials.



  
Create simple reels using B-roll and overlay text.



  
Share content that reflects your box’s niche or transformation.




Engagement comes first. Conversion follows.



Reset #3: Run Short-Burst Marketing Campaigns

You don’t need to wait for “launch week” to grow. Between launches, run small but mighty campaigns: 


  
3-day waitlist push



  
Flash freebie bonus



  
Subscriber referral challenge



  
Simple paid ad paired with a short funnel sequence.




Think of these as mini-launches that keep your energy and your subscriber list growing all year long.



Bonus Reset Tips

If you’re ready to dig deeper, try these quick wins:


  
Audit your list: scrub cold leads and segment by subscribers, leads, and past customers.



  
Update your website: make sure it’s clear who your box is for and why they need it.



  
Re-engage dormant leads: send a short, two-part reactivation sequence.



  
Ask your audience: use Instagram polls or a quick quiz to find out what’s holding them back from subscribing.






Take Action

Choose one of these resets and take action today.



Whether it’s creating a new lead magnet, sharing a behind-the-scenes post, or running a 3-day waitlist push, do something that moves you closer to your next subscriber.



Join me for this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, where we’ll hit the reset button together and get your subscriber growth moving again, one simple action at a time.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Every subscription box owner hits a wall. Growth slows down. The excitement you once felt starts to fade. You check your numbers and realize things have stalled.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Stalling doesn’t mean you’ve failed. It just means it’s time for a reset.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Most of the time, growth slows because you’ve either tapped out your current audience or haven’t been visible enough lately. The good news? You don’t have to overhaul everything. You just need to re-energize a few key areas to spark fresh momentum.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this quick Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m walking you through how to restart your momentum by focusing on <strong>three key areas that move the needle</strong>: growing your email list, showing up intentionally on social media, and running short, smart marketing bursts between launches.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Reset #1: Grow Your Email List (Again)</p>
<p>Your email list is your highest-converting asset, and when growth stalls, chances are your list has stalled, too.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Ask yourself: Am I actively growing my list this week?</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If not, start here. Try a giveaway, launch a new lead magnet, or add a pop-up to your site. Promote your opt-in more often than feels comfortable. Remember, most people haven’t seen it yet!</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Reset #2: Grow Your Following with Intention</p>
<p>People can’t buy from you if they don’t know you exist.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Audit your last six social media posts. Do they speak directly to your ideal subscriber? If not, shift your focus to connection:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Share behind-the-scenes peeks of product selection or packing days.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Spotlight subscriber stories or testimonials.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Create simple reels using B-roll and overlay text.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Share content that reflects your box’s niche or transformation.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Engagement comes first. Conversion follows.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Reset #3: Run Short-Burst Marketing Campaigns</p>
<p>You don’t need to wait for “launch week” to grow. Between launches, run small but mighty campaigns: </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>3-day waitlist push</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Flash freebie bonus</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Subscriber referral challenge</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Simple paid ad paired with a short funnel sequence.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Think of these as mini-launches that keep your energy and your subscriber list growing all year long.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Bonus Reset Tips</p>
<p>If you’re ready to dig deeper, try these quick wins:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><strong>Audit your list:</strong> scrub cold leads and segment by subscribers, leads, and past customers.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Update your website:</strong> make sure it’s clear who your box is for and why they need it.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Re-engage dormant leads:</strong> send a short, two-part reactivation sequence.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Ask your audience:</strong> use Instagram polls or a quick quiz to find out what’s holding them back from subscribing.</p>
<p><br></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Take Action</p>
<p>Choose one of these resets and take action today.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Whether it’s creating a new lead magnet, sharing a behind-the-scenes post, or running a 3-day waitlist push, do something that moves you closer to your next subscriber.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Join me for this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast</strong>, where we’ll hit the reset button together and get your subscriber growth moving again, one simple action at a time.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>783</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[18969332-b426-11f0-8723-ffbcbe6e3cf3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5115159522.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>228: 6 Habits of Highly Successful Subscription Boxes</title>
      <description>In this episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down six things thriving boxes all have in common, so you can see where you’re already strong and where you might need a little reset.



1. They Know Exactly Who Their Subscription Box Is For



The boxes that grow fastest have one thing in common - they know exactly who they’re serving.



“It’s not for everyone” is actually a good thing.



These business owners have defined who their box is for, why it matters to her, and how she feels when she opens it. Their branding, product choices, and social media posts all speak directly to that person.



Mini Challenge: Who is your box not for? Answering that might help you get clearer on who it is for.



2. They Built an Audience Before They Launched and Keep Building After



A launch without an audience is like throwing a dart in the dark.



The most successful subscription box owners don’t wait for launch day to start showing up. They build their audience through social media, email, freebies, quizzes, and waitlists. And they keep going long after launch day.



They treat audience building like brushing their teeth: it’s just part of doing business.



Mini Challenge: What are you doing this week to grow your audience?



3. They Retain Subscribers with Purpose



Getting someone to subscribe is the first win. Keeping them? That’s where the magic (and the profit) happens.



Successful subscription box owners know their subscriber journey from checkout to renewal. They create consistency in their packaging, emails, and experience, and they look for ways to surprise and delight along the way. Even a simple handwritten note goes a long way.



The average subscriber in my own subscription box business stays for 18 months. That’s 18 sales from one person!



Mini Challenge: Map out your subscriber experience after checkout. What happens next?



4. Their Subscription Box Website Converts



Your website isn’t a brochure, it’s a sales tool.



Within five seconds, someone should know:


  
What your box is



  
Who it’s for



  
Why they need it




Clear visuals, transparent pricing, and a simple checkout make all the difference. If people have to guess what they’re buying, they’ll move on.



Mini Challenge: Open your homepage and pretend you’ve never seen it before. Could you understand your subscription box in five seconds?



5. They Start Small and They’re OK with That



The smartest box owners don’t chase huge numbers. They build intentionally.



They’d rather sell out at 100 subscribers with a waitlist than stretch too fast and get stuck. Growth without cash flow isn’t sustainable - it’s stressful.



Mini Challenge: What’s your comfortable subscriber cap right now? Can you fulfill confidently at that level?



6. They Keep Showing Up (Even When It’s Not Perfect)



Consistency beats perfection every time.



The subscription box owners that last are the ones that keep showing up even when engagement dips or sales slow down. They test, tweak, and keep learning instead of quitting.



Don’t compare your beginning to someone else’s middle. That box with 1,000 subscribers? She once had 44, just like you.



Mini Challenge: What’s one way you can keep showing up this week, even if it’s not perfect?



Take a few minutes to audit your own subscription box using this list. Which one of these is your biggest strength? Which one is your next opportunity?



Join me for this episode to learn the six habits I see over and over again in successful subscription box owners and how you can start putting them into practice today.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 29 Oct 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>6 Habits of Highly Successful Subscription Boxes</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>228</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode to learn the six habits I see over and over again in successful subscription box owners and how you can start putting them into practice today.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down six things thriving boxes all have in common, so you can see where you’re already strong and where you might need a little reset.



1. They Know Exactly Who Their Subscription Box Is For



The boxes that grow fastest have one thing in common - they know exactly who they’re serving.



“It’s not for everyone” is actually a good thing.



These business owners have defined who their box is for, why it matters to her, and how she feels when she opens it. Their branding, product choices, and social media posts all speak directly to that person.



Mini Challenge: Who is your box not for? Answering that might help you get clearer on who it is for.



2. They Built an Audience Before They Launched and Keep Building After



A launch without an audience is like throwing a dart in the dark.



The most successful subscription box owners don’t wait for launch day to start showing up. They build their audience through social media, email, freebies, quizzes, and waitlists. And they keep going long after launch day.



They treat audience building like brushing their teeth: it’s just part of doing business.



Mini Challenge: What are you doing this week to grow your audience?



3. They Retain Subscribers with Purpose



Getting someone to subscribe is the first win. Keeping them? That’s where the magic (and the profit) happens.



Successful subscription box owners know their subscriber journey from checkout to renewal. They create consistency in their packaging, emails, and experience, and they look for ways to surprise and delight along the way. Even a simple handwritten note goes a long way.



The average subscriber in my own subscription box business stays for 18 months. That’s 18 sales from one person!



Mini Challenge: Map out your subscriber experience after checkout. What happens next?



4. Their Subscription Box Website Converts



Your website isn’t a brochure, it’s a sales tool.



Within five seconds, someone should know:


  
What your box is



  
Who it’s for



  
Why they need it




Clear visuals, transparent pricing, and a simple checkout make all the difference. If people have to guess what they’re buying, they’ll move on.



Mini Challenge: Open your homepage and pretend you’ve never seen it before. Could you understand your subscription box in five seconds?



5. They Start Small and They’re OK with That



The smartest box owners don’t chase huge numbers. They build intentionally.



They’d rather sell out at 100 subscribers with a waitlist than stretch too fast and get stuck. Growth without cash flow isn’t sustainable - it’s stressful.



Mini Challenge: What’s your comfortable subscriber cap right now? Can you fulfill confidently at that level?



6. They Keep Showing Up (Even When It’s Not Perfect)



Consistency beats perfection every time.



The subscription box owners that last are the ones that keep showing up even when engagement dips or sales slow down. They test, tweak, and keep learning instead of quitting.



Don’t compare your beginning to someone else’s middle. That box with 1,000 subscribers? She once had 44, just like you.



Mini Challenge: What’s one way you can keep showing up this week, even if it’s not perfect?



Take a few minutes to audit your own subscription box using this list. Which one of these is your biggest strength? Which one is your next opportunity?



Join me for this episode to learn the six habits I see over and over again in successful subscription box owners and how you can start putting them into practice today.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down six things thriving boxes all have in common, so you can see where you’re already strong and where you might need a little reset.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>1. They Know Exactly Who Their Subscription Box Is For</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>The boxes that grow fastest have one thing in common - they know exactly who they’re serving.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>“It’s not for everyone” is actually a good thing.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>These business owners have defined who their box is for, why it matters to her, and how she feels when she opens it. Their branding, product choices, and social media posts all speak directly to that person.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Mini Challenge:</strong> Who is your box <em>not</em> for? Answering that might help you get clearer on who it <em>is</em> for.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>2. They Built an Audience Before They Launched and Keep Building After</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>A launch without an audience is like throwing a dart in the dark.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>The most successful subscription box owners don’t wait for launch day to start showing up. They build their audience through social media, email, freebies, quizzes, and waitlists. And they keep going long after launch day.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>They treat audience building like brushing their teeth: it’s just part of doing business.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Mini Challenge:</strong> What are you doing this week to grow your audience?</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>3. They Retain Subscribers with Purpose</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Getting someone to subscribe is the first win. Keeping them? That’s where the magic (and the profit) happens.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Successful subscription box owners know their subscriber journey from checkout to renewal. They create consistency in their packaging, emails, and experience, and they look for ways to surprise and delight along the way. Even a simple handwritten note goes a long way.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>The average subscriber in my own subscription box business stays for <strong>18 months</strong>. That’s 18 sales from one person!</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Mini Challenge:</strong> Map out your subscriber experience after checkout. What happens next?</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>4. Their Subscription Box Website Converts</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Your website isn’t a brochure, it’s a sales tool.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Within five seconds, someone should know:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>What your box is</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Who it’s for</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Why they need it</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Clear visuals, transparent pricing, and a simple checkout make all the difference. If people have to guess what they’re buying, they’ll move on.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Mini Challenge:</strong> Open your homepage and pretend you’ve never seen it before. Could you understand your subscription box in five seconds?</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>5. They Start Small and They’re OK with That</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>The smartest box owners don’t chase huge numbers. They build intentionally.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>They’d rather sell out at 100 subscribers with a waitlist than stretch too fast and get stuck. Growth without cash flow isn’t sustainable - it’s stressful.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Mini Challenge:</strong> What’s your comfortable subscriber cap right now? Can you fulfill confidently at that level?</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>6. They Keep Showing Up (Even When It’s Not Perfect)</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Consistency beats perfection every time.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>The subscription box owners that last are the ones that keep showing up even when engagement dips or sales slow down. They test, tweak, and keep learning instead of quitting.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Don’t compare your beginning to someone else’s middle. That box with 1,000 subscribers? She once had 44, just like you.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Mini Challenge:</strong> What’s one way you can keep showing up this week, even if it’s not perfect?</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Take a few minutes to audit your own subscription box using this list. Which one of these is your biggest strength? Which one is your next opportunity?</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Join me for this episode </strong>to learn the six habits I see over and over again in successful subscription box owners and how you can start putting them into practice today.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1358</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[95e12286-b425-11f0-bf5e-37e168e2db3c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3466851306.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>227: What’s the Best Way to Source Products for Your Subscription Box?</title>
      <description>One of the biggest questions subscription box owners ask is: Where do I find products for my box?



There’s no single “right” answer because the best sourcing strategy depends on where you are in your business journey. 



In this quick Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down three key sourcing methods - wholesale, trade shows, and manufacturing - and showing you how each one fits a different stage of subscription box growth.



Stage 1: Just Getting Started. Start with Wholesale

If you’re still prepping for launch or working toward your first 50–100 subscribers, wholesale is your best friend. It’s flexible, affordable, and helps you learn what your audience loves without over-committing.



Why it works:


  
Low minimums let you order small quantities.



  
Fast turnaround means you can ship quickly.



  
It’s the easiest way to test different product types.






Challenges with wholesale:


  
Smaller profit margins.



  
Less exclusivity.



  
Limited branding options






Stage 2: You’ve Launched. Trade Shows &amp; Curated Finds

Once you’ve launched and built momentum, it’s time to elevate your box. Trade shows and curated wholesale marketplaces help you discover unique, small-batch, and boutique items that give your box that “wow” factor.



Why it works:


  
You’ll find more distinctive products.



  
Meeting vendors face-to-face often leads to better pricing or exclusivity.



  
You can start building your signature brand style.






Challenges with trade shows and curated marketplaces:


  
Travel costs and larger order requirements.



  
Longer lead times mean planning boxes further ahead.






Stage 3: Ready to Scale. Manufacturing

When your subscription is stable and you’re ready to increase margins or stand out even more, manufacturing can be a game-changer. But there are two levels to consider:



Option 1: Stock Product from Manufacturers

Buy from manufacturer catalogs and add your own branding or packaging. This is a great bridge between wholesale and full custom.



Pros: better margins, faster turnaround, and the ability to add your own brand touches.

Cons: limited product selection and minimal exclusivity.



Option 2: Full Custom Manufacturing

Design your own products from scratch for total control and differentiation.



Pros: complete customization, higher perceived value, stronger brand identity.

Cons: higher minimums, longer timelines, and bigger upfront costs.



Sourcing Is a Journey, Not a Jump

You’ll probably use all of these sourcing methods at some point:


  
Start with wholesale.



  
Grow into trade shows.



  
Add manufacturer stock for better margins.



  
Move to custom products when you’re ready.






Take Action

Identify your current sourcing stage and make one move this week that aligns with it:


  
New? Order your first wholesale products.



  
Growing? Research an upcoming trade show or apply for a wholesale marketplace account.



  
Scaling? Reach out to a manufacturer and ask about their minimums.






Every step forward brings you closer to the box and the brand you’re meant to build.



Join me for this episode, where I’ll help you figure out which sourcing strategy fits your stage of business and how to take the next step with confidence.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 24 Oct 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What’s the Best Way to Source Products for Your Subscription Box?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>227</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode, where I’ll help you figure out which sourcing strategy fits your stage of business and how to take the next step with confidence.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>One of the biggest questions subscription box owners ask is: Where do I find products for my box?



There’s no single “right” answer because the best sourcing strategy depends on where you are in your business journey. 



In this quick Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down three key sourcing methods - wholesale, trade shows, and manufacturing - and showing you how each one fits a different stage of subscription box growth.



Stage 1: Just Getting Started. Start with Wholesale

If you’re still prepping for launch or working toward your first 50–100 subscribers, wholesale is your best friend. It’s flexible, affordable, and helps you learn what your audience loves without over-committing.



Why it works:


  
Low minimums let you order small quantities.



  
Fast turnaround means you can ship quickly.



  
It’s the easiest way to test different product types.






Challenges with wholesale:


  
Smaller profit margins.



  
Less exclusivity.



  
Limited branding options






Stage 2: You’ve Launched. Trade Shows &amp; Curated Finds

Once you’ve launched and built momentum, it’s time to elevate your box. Trade shows and curated wholesale marketplaces help you discover unique, small-batch, and boutique items that give your box that “wow” factor.



Why it works:


  
You’ll find more distinctive products.



  
Meeting vendors face-to-face often leads to better pricing or exclusivity.



  
You can start building your signature brand style.






Challenges with trade shows and curated marketplaces:


  
Travel costs and larger order requirements.



  
Longer lead times mean planning boxes further ahead.






Stage 3: Ready to Scale. Manufacturing

When your subscription is stable and you’re ready to increase margins or stand out even more, manufacturing can be a game-changer. But there are two levels to consider:



Option 1: Stock Product from Manufacturers

Buy from manufacturer catalogs and add your own branding or packaging. This is a great bridge between wholesale and full custom.



Pros: better margins, faster turnaround, and the ability to add your own brand touches.

Cons: limited product selection and minimal exclusivity.



Option 2: Full Custom Manufacturing

Design your own products from scratch for total control and differentiation.



Pros: complete customization, higher perceived value, stronger brand identity.

Cons: higher minimums, longer timelines, and bigger upfront costs.



Sourcing Is a Journey, Not a Jump

You’ll probably use all of these sourcing methods at some point:


  
Start with wholesale.



  
Grow into trade shows.



  
Add manufacturer stock for better margins.



  
Move to custom products when you’re ready.






Take Action

Identify your current sourcing stage and make one move this week that aligns with it:


  
New? Order your first wholesale products.



  
Growing? Research an upcoming trade show or apply for a wholesale marketplace account.



  
Scaling? Reach out to a manufacturer and ask about their minimums.






Every step forward brings you closer to the box and the brand you’re meant to build.



Join me for this episode, where I’ll help you figure out which sourcing strategy fits your stage of business and how to take the next step with confidence.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>One of the biggest questions subscription box owners ask is: Where do I find products for my box?</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>There’s no single “right” answer because the best sourcing strategy depends on where you are in your business journey. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this quick Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast<em>,</em> I’m breaking down three key sourcing methods - <strong>wholesale, trade shows, and manufacturing</strong> - and showing you how each one fits a different stage of subscription box growth.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Stage 1: Just Getting Started. Start with Wholesale</p>
<p>If you’re still prepping for launch or working toward your first 50–100 subscribers, wholesale is your best friend. It’s flexible, affordable, and helps you learn what your audience loves without over-committing.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Why it works:</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Low minimums let you order small quantities.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Fast turnaround means you can ship quickly.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>It’s the easiest way to test different product types.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Challenges with wholesale:</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Smaller profit margins.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Less exclusivity.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Limited branding options</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Stage 2: You’ve Launched. Trade Shows &amp; Curated Finds</p>
<p>Once you’ve launched and built momentum, it’s time to elevate your box. Trade shows and curated wholesale marketplaces help you discover unique, small-batch, and boutique items that give your box that “wow” factor.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Why it works:</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>You’ll find more distinctive products.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Meeting vendors face-to-face often leads to better pricing or exclusivity.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>You can start building your signature brand style.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Challenges with trade shows and curated marketplaces:</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Travel costs and larger order requirements.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Longer lead times mean planning boxes further ahead.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Stage 3: Ready to Scale. Manufacturing</p>
<p>When your subscription is stable and you’re ready to increase margins or stand out even more, manufacturing can be a game-changer. But there are two levels to consider:</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Option 1: Stock Product from Manufacturers</p>
<p>Buy from manufacturer catalogs and add your own branding or packaging. This is a great bridge between wholesale and full custom.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Pros:</strong> better margins, faster turnaround, and the ability to add your own brand touches.</p>
<p><strong>Cons:</strong> limited product selection and minimal exclusivity.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Option 2: Full Custom Manufacturing</p>
<p>Design your own products from scratch for total control and differentiation.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Pros:</strong> complete customization, higher perceived value, stronger brand identity.</p>
<p><strong>Cons:</strong> higher minimums, longer timelines, and bigger upfront costs.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Sourcing Is a Journey, Not a Jump</p>
<p>You’ll probably use all of these sourcing methods at some point:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Start with wholesale.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Grow into trade shows.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Add manufacturer stock for better margins.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Move to custom products when you’re ready.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Take Action</p>
<p>Identify your current sourcing stage and make one move this week that aligns with it:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>New? Order your first wholesale products.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Growing? Research an upcoming trade show or apply for a wholesale marketplace account.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Scaling? Reach out to a manufacturer and ask about their minimums.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Every step forward brings you closer to the box and the brand you’re meant to build.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Join me for this episode</strong>, where I’ll help you figure out which sourcing strategy fits your stage of business and how to take the next step with confidence.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> <br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>
</li>
</ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>933</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[96436974-ad67-11f0-a6c7-7f80dd750601]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9956367894.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>226: The Secret to Growth? Building Community First with Ashley Alderson</title>
      <description>I’ve been part of The Boutique Hub for more than five years, and I was so excited to welcome its founder, Ashley Alderson, to the Launch Your Box Podcast. Ashley started The Boutique Hub in 2013 to give small business owners a place to connect, learn, and grow together. Today, the Hub supports more than 100,000 small businesses.



What Loyalty Really Looks Like

When I asked Ashley what customer loyalty actually looks like, she didn’t hesitate. It’s all about building community.



People want to buy from people. The more your customers feel connected to you and your brand, the more loyal they become.



Ashley shared her team’s approach to content creation, something she calls the VAVA Method.


  
Viral: Is it relatable enough that someone would click, like, share, or comment?



  
Authentic: Does it sound like a real person said it?



  
Value: Does it help your audience by saving them time, solving a problem, or making their day better?



  
Aspirational: Does it make them feel like they’re becoming a better version of themselves?






When you’re running a product-based business, you can’t just sell all the time. Ashley says that at any given moment, about 90% of your audience isn’t ready to buy, so you need to nurture them with community-building content. Ashley suggests ratio of two-thirds soft-sell, one-third direct-sell.



Sales Is a Noble Process

Ashley reminded us that selling is about serving. When you connect with your audience, help them solve problems, and make their lives a little better, that’s a noble thing.



As subscription box owners, we have to be attached to that outcome for our subscribers. We start by building community, then we serve that community, and then we sell to that community. That’s servant leadership in action.



How to Build Loyalty That Lasts

Ashley shared that true loyalty comes from creating an emotional reaction. Everything, from your community and marketing to post-purchase experiences, should make your customers feel something.



Your subscribers should always believe the value of your box is greater than its price. As Ashley likes to say, “Cheap ain’t loyal.”



Be the face of your brand. Let people see you. Because at the end of the day, people want to buy from people.



The Six Layers of a Sustainable Business

Ashley broke down the six layers every business needs to build a strong foundation:


  
Operations and Brand



  
Profits and Profitability



  
Team



  
Sales Strategy



  
Content Strategy



  
Social Media




Each layer works together to create a business that’s stable, scalable, and ready for long-term success.



The Future of Small Business

Ashley sees a shift happening, away from isolation and scrolling, and back toward real human connection. People are craving community, conversation, and relationships again. And that’s great news for subscription box owners, because community is what we do best.



Take Action

Spend time this week building connection with your audience. Share something that’s relatable, real, and valuable - something that reminds your followers there’s a person behind your brand.



Join me for this episode with Ashley Alderson of The Boutique Hub to learn how to build loyalty through community and content that connects.



Where to find Ashley: 


  
The Boutique Hub on Facebook



  
The Boutique Hub on Instagram



  
The Boutique Hub Website 






Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 22 Oct 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Secret to Growth? Building Community First with Ashley Alderson</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>226</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode with Ashley Alderson of The Boutique Hub to learn how to build loyalty through community and content that connects.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I’ve been part of The Boutique Hub for more than five years, and I was so excited to welcome its founder, Ashley Alderson, to the Launch Your Box Podcast. Ashley started The Boutique Hub in 2013 to give small business owners a place to connect, learn, and grow together. Today, the Hub supports more than 100,000 small businesses.



What Loyalty Really Looks Like

When I asked Ashley what customer loyalty actually looks like, she didn’t hesitate. It’s all about building community.



People want to buy from people. The more your customers feel connected to you and your brand, the more loyal they become.



Ashley shared her team’s approach to content creation, something she calls the VAVA Method.


  
Viral: Is it relatable enough that someone would click, like, share, or comment?



  
Authentic: Does it sound like a real person said it?



  
Value: Does it help your audience by saving them time, solving a problem, or making their day better?



  
Aspirational: Does it make them feel like they’re becoming a better version of themselves?






When you’re running a product-based business, you can’t just sell all the time. Ashley says that at any given moment, about 90% of your audience isn’t ready to buy, so you need to nurture them with community-building content. Ashley suggests ratio of two-thirds soft-sell, one-third direct-sell.



Sales Is a Noble Process

Ashley reminded us that selling is about serving. When you connect with your audience, help them solve problems, and make their lives a little better, that’s a noble thing.



As subscription box owners, we have to be attached to that outcome for our subscribers. We start by building community, then we serve that community, and then we sell to that community. That’s servant leadership in action.



How to Build Loyalty That Lasts

Ashley shared that true loyalty comes from creating an emotional reaction. Everything, from your community and marketing to post-purchase experiences, should make your customers feel something.



Your subscribers should always believe the value of your box is greater than its price. As Ashley likes to say, “Cheap ain’t loyal.”



Be the face of your brand. Let people see you. Because at the end of the day, people want to buy from people.



The Six Layers of a Sustainable Business

Ashley broke down the six layers every business needs to build a strong foundation:


  
Operations and Brand



  
Profits and Profitability



  
Team



  
Sales Strategy



  
Content Strategy



  
Social Media




Each layer works together to create a business that’s stable, scalable, and ready for long-term success.



The Future of Small Business

Ashley sees a shift happening, away from isolation and scrolling, and back toward real human connection. People are craving community, conversation, and relationships again. And that’s great news for subscription box owners, because community is what we do best.



Take Action

Spend time this week building connection with your audience. Share something that’s relatable, real, and valuable - something that reminds your followers there’s a person behind your brand.



Join me for this episode with Ashley Alderson of The Boutique Hub to learn how to build loyalty through community and content that connects.



Where to find Ashley: 


  
The Boutique Hub on Facebook



  
The Boutique Hub on Instagram



  
The Boutique Hub Website 






Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’ve been part of The Boutique Hub for more than five years, and I was so excited to welcome its founder, Ashley Alderson, to the Launch Your Box Podcast. Ashley started The Boutique Hub in 2013 to give small business owners a place to connect, learn, and grow together. Today, the Hub supports more than 100,000 small businesses.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>What Loyalty Really Looks Like</p>
<p>When I asked Ashley what customer loyalty actually looks like, she didn’t hesitate. It’s all about building community.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>People want to buy from people. The more your customers feel connected to you and your brand, the more loyal they become.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Ashley shared her team’s approach to content creation, something she calls the VAVA Method.</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><strong>Viral:</strong> Is it relatable enough that someone would click, like, share, or comment?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Authentic:</strong> Does it sound like a real<em> </em>person said it?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Value:</strong> Does it help your audience by saving them time, solving a problem, or making their day better?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Aspirational:</strong> Does it make them feel like they’re becoming a better version of themselves?</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>When you’re running a product-based business, you can’t just sell all the time. Ashley says that at any given moment, about 90% of your audience isn’t ready to buy, so you need to nurture them with community-building content. Ashley suggests ratio of two-thirds soft-sell, one-third direct-sell.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Sales Is a Noble Process</p>
<p>Ashley reminded us that selling is about serving. When you connect with your audience, help them solve problems, and make their lives a little better, that’s a noble thing.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>As subscription box owners, we have to be attached to that outcome for our subscribers. We start by building community, then we serve that community, and <em>then</em> we sell to that community. That’s servant leadership in action.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>How to Build Loyalty That Lasts</p>
<p>Ashley shared that true loyalty comes from creating an emotional reaction. Everything, from your community and marketing to post-purchase experiences, should make your customers feel something.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Your subscribers should always believe the value of your box is greater than its price. As Ashley likes to say, “Cheap ain’t loyal.”</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Be the face of your brand. Let people see <em>you</em>. Because at the end of the day, people want to buy from people.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>The Six Layers of a Sustainable Business</p>
<p>Ashley broke down the six layers every business needs to build a strong foundation:</p>
<ol>
  <li>
<p><strong>Operations and Brand</strong></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Profits and Profitability</strong></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Team</strong></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Sales Strategy</strong></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Content Strategy</strong></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Social Media</strong></p>
</li>
</ol>
<p>Each layer works together to create a business that’s stable, scalable, and ready for long-term success.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>The Future of Small Business</p>
<p>Ashley sees a shift happening, away from isolation and scrolling, and back toward real human connection. People are craving community, conversation, and relationships again. And that’s great news for subscription box owners, because community is what we do best.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Take Action</p>
<p>Spend time this week building connection with your audience. Share something that’s relatable, real, and valuable - something that reminds your followers there’s a person behind your brand.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me for this episode with Ashley Alderson of The Boutique Hub to learn how to build loyalty through community and content that connects.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Where to find Ashley: </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/boutiquehub">The Boutique Hub on Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/theboutiquehub/">The Boutique Hub on Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://theboutiquehub.com/">The Boutique Hub Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> <br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>
</li>
</ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1768</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[45f7336a-ad67-11f0-8eb6-073103f39da5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5007768507.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>225: The Tech Tools You Actually Need to Launch Your Box</title>
      <description>Launching your subscription box shouldn’t require a tech degree or a six-figure software stack. Yet too many new subscription box owners spend weeks stressing about tools. Or worse, skip setup until launch week.



Let’s fix that.



In this quick Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m walking you through the exact tech tools you actually need to launch your subscription box. Nothing fancy, nothing extra, just what works from Day 1.



The 4 Core Tools Every Subscription Box Business Needs

Before you launch your subscription box, you need four core systems in place:


  
Website Platform – Shopify or WooCommerce



  
Payment Processor – PayWhirl or Stripe



  
Shipping Software – Shopify Shipping or ShipStation



  
Email Marketing CRM – Klaviyo




Hire Out the Tech or DIY?

If setting up checkout flows and automations makes your eyes glaze over, you’re not alone.



You don’t get bonus points for doing it all yourself. You can hire someone for a few hundred dollars to get your tech stack up and running, or take it step-by-step yourself. 



The key is that everything works before you go live.



Test Like a Customer

Testing your tech isn’t optional. Walk through your own site like it’s your first visit:


  
Can you place a test order from start to finish?



  
Do your emails send automatically?



  
Are your shipping options correct?



  
Do recurring payments process properly?



  
Do your confirmation emails look professional?




Click every link. Test every flow. You’ve worked hard to get people to your site, don’t lose them because of a broken button or missing email.



A Bonus Tool for Staying Organized

Is your desk covered in sticky notes? It’s time for a free project-management tool like Trello, Asana, or ClickUp.



Use it to organize launch tasks, email prep, or even box curation. Each has a free version and will save you serious stress.



Take Action

Carve out an hour to audit your tech stack.


  
Set up your storefront, payment processor, and email CRM.



  
Run a full test order from start to finish.



  
Make sure every piece, from opt-in to order confirmation, works flawlessly.




You don’t need the fanciest tools. You just need tools that work. 



Keep it simple, get it tested, and be ready when subscribers start clicking “buy.”



Join me for this quick, practical episode and walk away with a clear, budget-friendly tech plan that’s ready for launch day.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 17 Oct 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Tech Tools You Actually Need to Launch Your Box</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>225</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this quick, practical episode and walk away with a clear, budget-friendly tech plan that’s ready for launch day.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Launching your subscription box shouldn’t require a tech degree or a six-figure software stack. Yet too many new subscription box owners spend weeks stressing about tools. Or worse, skip setup until launch week.



Let’s fix that.



In this quick Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m walking you through the exact tech tools you actually need to launch your subscription box. Nothing fancy, nothing extra, just what works from Day 1.



The 4 Core Tools Every Subscription Box Business Needs

Before you launch your subscription box, you need four core systems in place:


  
Website Platform – Shopify or WooCommerce



  
Payment Processor – PayWhirl or Stripe



  
Shipping Software – Shopify Shipping or ShipStation



  
Email Marketing CRM – Klaviyo




Hire Out the Tech or DIY?

If setting up checkout flows and automations makes your eyes glaze over, you’re not alone.



You don’t get bonus points for doing it all yourself. You can hire someone for a few hundred dollars to get your tech stack up and running, or take it step-by-step yourself. 



The key is that everything works before you go live.



Test Like a Customer

Testing your tech isn’t optional. Walk through your own site like it’s your first visit:


  
Can you place a test order from start to finish?



  
Do your emails send automatically?



  
Are your shipping options correct?



  
Do recurring payments process properly?



  
Do your confirmation emails look professional?




Click every link. Test every flow. You’ve worked hard to get people to your site, don’t lose them because of a broken button or missing email.



A Bonus Tool for Staying Organized

Is your desk covered in sticky notes? It’s time for a free project-management tool like Trello, Asana, or ClickUp.



Use it to organize launch tasks, email prep, or even box curation. Each has a free version and will save you serious stress.



Take Action

Carve out an hour to audit your tech stack.


  
Set up your storefront, payment processor, and email CRM.



  
Run a full test order from start to finish.



  
Make sure every piece, from opt-in to order confirmation, works flawlessly.




You don’t need the fanciest tools. You just need tools that work. 



Keep it simple, get it tested, and be ready when subscribers start clicking “buy.”



Join me for this quick, practical episode and walk away with a clear, budget-friendly tech plan that’s ready for launch day.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Launching your subscription box shouldn’t require a tech degree or a six-figure software stack. Yet too many new subscription box owners spend weeks stressing about tools. Or worse, skip setup until launch week.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Let’s fix that.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this quick <strong>Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast,</strong> I’m walking you through the exact tech tools you actually need to launch your subscription box. Nothing fancy, nothing extra, just what works from Day 1.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>The 4 Core Tools Every Subscription Box Business Needs</p>
<p>Before you launch your subscription box, you need four core systems in place:</p>
<ol>
  <li>
<p><strong>Website Platform – Shopify or WooCommerce</strong></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Payment Processor – PayWhirl or Stripe</strong></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Shipping Software – Shopify Shipping or ShipStation</strong></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Email Marketing CRM – Klaviyo</strong><br></p>
</li>
</ol>
<p>Hire Out the Tech or DIY?</p>
<p>If setting up checkout flows and automations makes your eyes glaze over, you’re not alone.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You don’t get bonus points for doing it all yourself. You can hire someone for a few hundred dollars to get your tech stack up and running, or take it step-by-step yourself. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>The key is that <strong>everything works</strong> before you go live.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Test Like a Customer</p>
<p>Testing your tech isn’t optional. Walk through your own site like it’s your first visit:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Can you place a test order from start to finish?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Do your emails send automatically?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Are your shipping options correct?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Do recurring payments process properly?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Do your confirmation emails look professional?</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Click every link. Test every flow. <strong>You’ve worked hard to get people to your site, don’t lose them because of a broken button or missing email.</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>A Bonus Tool for Staying Organized</p>
<p>Is your desk covered in sticky notes? It’s time for a free project-management tool like Trello, Asana<strong>,</strong> or ClickUp<strong>.</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Use it to organize launch tasks, email prep, or even box curation. Each has a free version and will save you serious stress.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Take Action</p>
<p><strong>Carve out an hour to audit your tech stack.</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Set up your storefront, payment processor, and email CRM.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Run a full test order from start to finish.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Make sure every piece, from opt-in to order confirmation, works flawlessly.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You don’t need the fanciest tools. You just need tools that work. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Keep it simple, get it tested, and be ready when subscribers start clicking “buy.”</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Join me for this quick, practical episode</strong> and walk away with a clear, budget-friendly tech plan that’s ready for launch day.<br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>957</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6fbf625e-a7d5-11f0-aced-934bb6048c19]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4052424468.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Give Q4 a Boost by Staying Focused on Revenue Generating Activities</title>
      <description>Ready or not, the 4th quarter is here. It’s time to sell! The 4th quarter is crucial for any small business. It can make or break your year and generate the momentum you need going into the next year. The 4th quarter matters. I’ve been through nine 4th quarters in my business and I’ve learned a LOT along the way. 

In this episode, we’re talking about four areas you need to focus on during this important time of the year in order to maximize your revenue before year-end.


  Building Your Q4 Sales Strategy 

  Inventory 

  Have it

  Manage it

  Create demand for it

  Holiday Promotions

  Gift Guides 

  Marketing &amp; Advertising 

  Email Marketing - the money is in your list! 

  A consistent plan is crucial.

  Segment your list and send targeted emails. 

  Have abandoned cart flows and browse abandonment flows set up! 

  Social Media Schedule - consistency is king! 

  Paid Ads - target specific demographics, interests, and behaviors.

  Prepping for Peak Sales Days  

  Customer Service 

  Make this a priority! 

  Schedule time for it!

  You’ll have a lot of first-time customers - make their experience a good one! 

  Social Media Response Time

  Answer questions &amp; respond to comments promptly. 

  Clearly Communicate Urgency &amp; Deadlines

  Banners on home page 

  Flash sales  

  Promotional codes

  Free shipping thresholds 

  Christmas shipping deadlines 

  Managing Logistics &amp; Fulfillment   

  Clearly outline shipping and processing timelines. 

  Make sure you have enough staff to handle the influx of orders. 

  Hire temporary staff for the holidays.

  Have current staff work extended days/hours.

  Conduct a supply inventory NOW! 

  Bags 

  Boxes

  Tape

  Shipping labels

  Etc. 

  Holiday Packaging

  How will you uplevel your customers’ experience this season? 


That sounds like a lot of extra work to do, doesn’t it? And it is. But it is all SO important. So it’s time to ask yourself, “What can I eliminate from my day-to-day so I can focus on these revenue-generating activities?” 

Now is not the time to start a blog or podcast. It’s not time to create a new ebook or opt-in. It’s not time to build a new website or plan for 2024. 

Now is the time to focus on SALES and the activities that generate those sales. 

The 4th quarter is here! Join me for this episode as I walk you through 4 areas of focus you need to jump into right now to make the most of your 4th quarter. 



Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join ⁠today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 15 Oct 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Give Q4 a Boost by Staying Focused on Revenue Generating Activities</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>The 4th quarter is here! Join me for this episode as I walk you through 4 areas of focus you need to jump into right now to make the most of your 4th quarter. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Ready or not, the 4th quarter is here. It’s time to sell! The 4th quarter is crucial for any small business. It can make or break your year and generate the momentum you need going into the next year. The 4th quarter matters. I’ve been through nine 4th quarters in my business and I’ve learned a LOT along the way. 

In this episode, we’re talking about four areas you need to focus on during this important time of the year in order to maximize your revenue before year-end.


  Building Your Q4 Sales Strategy 

  Inventory 

  Have it

  Manage it

  Create demand for it

  Holiday Promotions

  Gift Guides 

  Marketing &amp; Advertising 

  Email Marketing - the money is in your list! 

  A consistent plan is crucial.

  Segment your list and send targeted emails. 

  Have abandoned cart flows and browse abandonment flows set up! 

  Social Media Schedule - consistency is king! 

  Paid Ads - target specific demographics, interests, and behaviors.

  Prepping for Peak Sales Days  

  Customer Service 

  Make this a priority! 

  Schedule time for it!

  You’ll have a lot of first-time customers - make their experience a good one! 

  Social Media Response Time

  Answer questions &amp; respond to comments promptly. 

  Clearly Communicate Urgency &amp; Deadlines

  Banners on home page 

  Flash sales  

  Promotional codes

  Free shipping thresholds 

  Christmas shipping deadlines 

  Managing Logistics &amp; Fulfillment   

  Clearly outline shipping and processing timelines. 

  Make sure you have enough staff to handle the influx of orders. 

  Hire temporary staff for the holidays.

  Have current staff work extended days/hours.

  Conduct a supply inventory NOW! 

  Bags 

  Boxes

  Tape

  Shipping labels

  Etc. 

  Holiday Packaging

  How will you uplevel your customers’ experience this season? 


That sounds like a lot of extra work to do, doesn’t it? And it is. But it is all SO important. So it’s time to ask yourself, “What can I eliminate from my day-to-day so I can focus on these revenue-generating activities?” 

Now is not the time to start a blog or podcast. It’s not time to create a new ebook or opt-in. It’s not time to build a new website or plan for 2024. 

Now is the time to focus on SALES and the activities that generate those sales. 

The 4th quarter is here! Join me for this episode as I walk you through 4 areas of focus you need to jump into right now to make the most of your 4th quarter. 



Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join ⁠today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ready or not, the 4th quarter is here. It’s time to sell! The 4th quarter is crucial for any small business. It can make or break your year and generate the momentum you need going into the next year. The 4th quarter matters. I’ve been through nine 4th quarters in my business and I’ve learned a LOT along the way. </p>
<p>In this episode, we’re talking about four areas you need to focus on during this important time of the year in order to maximize your revenue <em>before</em> year-end.</p>
<ul>
  <li>Building Your Q4 Sales Strategy </li>
  <li>Inventory </li>
  <li>Have it</li>
  <li>Manage it</li>
  <li>Create demand for it</li>
  <li>Holiday Promotions</li>
  <li>Gift Guides </li>
  <li>Marketing &amp; Advertising </li>
  <li>Email Marketing - the money is in your list! </li>
  <li>A consistent plan is crucial.</li>
  <li>Segment your list and send targeted emails. </li>
  <li>Have abandoned cart flows and browse abandonment flows set up! </li>
  <li>Social Media Schedule - consistency is king! </li>
  <li>Paid Ads - target specific demographics, interests, and behaviors.</li>
  <li>Prepping for Peak Sales Days  </li>
  <li>Customer Service </li>
  <li>Make this a priority! </li>
  <li>Schedule time for it!</li>
  <li>You’ll have a lot of first-time customers - make their experience a good one! </li>
  <li>Social Media Response Time</li>
  <li>Answer questions &amp; respond to comments promptly. </li>
  <li>Clearly Communicate Urgency &amp; Deadlines</li>
  <li>Banners on home page </li>
  <li>Flash sales  </li>
  <li>Promotional codes</li>
  <li>Free shipping thresholds </li>
  <li>Christmas shipping deadlines </li>
  <li>Managing Logistics &amp; Fulfillment   </li>
  <li>Clearly outline shipping and processing timelines. </li>
  <li>Make sure you have enough staff to handle the influx of orders. </li>
  <li>Hire temporary staff for the holidays.</li>
  <li>Have current staff work extended days/hours.</li>
  <li>Conduct a supply inventory NOW! </li>
  <li>Bags </li>
  <li>Boxes</li>
  <li>Tape</li>
  <li>Shipping labels</li>
  <li>Etc. </li>
  <li>Holiday Packaging</li>
  <li>How will you uplevel your customers’ experience this season? </li>
</ul>
<p>That sounds like a lot of extra work to do, doesn’t it? And it is. But it is all SO important. So it’s time to ask yourself, “What can I eliminate from my day-to-day so I can focus on these revenue-generating activities?” </p>
<p>Now is not the time to start a blog or podcast. It’s not time to create a new ebook or opt-in. It’s not time to build a new website or plan for 2024. </p>
<p>Now is the time to focus on SALES and the activities that generate those sales. </p>
<p>The 4th quarter is here! Join me for this episode as I walk you through 4 areas of focus you need to jump into right now to make the most of your 4th quarter. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Join ⁠</a>today!</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1390</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1dd7993e-a7d5-11f0-8a06-4be854cb6432]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3272402799.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Worried No One Will Subscribe? Listen to This First</title>
      <description>Are you worried you’ll launch your subscription box and no one will subscribe?

You’re not alone. This fear shows up for nearly every subscription box owner at some point, especially in the early days.

In this Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing a mindset shift and some simple, strategic steps to help you move forward with clarity. Even if you’re starting from zero.

If fear or self-doubt has you feeling stuck, this is the pep talk you need.



Instead of worrying about launch day numbers:

1 - Know that this fear is normal.

The fear of “no subscribers” doesn’t mean you’re not cut out to be a subscription box owner. It means you care. Acknowledge the fear, but don’t let it call the shots.

2 - Don’t obsess over your launch date.

Setting a date can be helpful, but it’s not the most important thing. Focus on taking action and building momentum before the cart opens.

3 - Start building your waitlist now.

Your waitlist is your best launch asset. It gives you an audience of warm leads who are interested, engaged, and ready to buy when the time comes.

4 - Understand that clarity comes from action.

You don’t need all the answers to get started. Just take the next right step. Then the next. That’s how you build both confidence and progress.



Your Friday Fuel Challenge

You’re not behind. You’re just getting started.

The best way to start? Take one small action this week to build your waitlist.

Post a teaser, create a freebie, and talk about your box. Progress beats perfection. Every single time.



Join me in all the places:    


  
⁠Facebook⁠



  
⁠Instagram⁠



  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join the waitlist ⁠today!</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 10 Oct 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing a mindset shift and some simple, strategic steps to help you move forward with clarity. Even if you’re starting from zero.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Are you worried you’ll launch your subscription box and no one will subscribe?

You’re not alone. This fear shows up for nearly every subscription box owner at some point, especially in the early days.

In this Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing a mindset shift and some simple, strategic steps to help you move forward with clarity. Even if you’re starting from zero.

If fear or self-doubt has you feeling stuck, this is the pep talk you need.



Instead of worrying about launch day numbers:

1 - Know that this fear is normal.

The fear of “no subscribers” doesn’t mean you’re not cut out to be a subscription box owner. It means you care. Acknowledge the fear, but don’t let it call the shots.

2 - Don’t obsess over your launch date.

Setting a date can be helpful, but it’s not the most important thing. Focus on taking action and building momentum before the cart opens.

3 - Start building your waitlist now.

Your waitlist is your best launch asset. It gives you an audience of warm leads who are interested, engaged, and ready to buy when the time comes.

4 - Understand that clarity comes from action.

You don’t need all the answers to get started. Just take the next right step. Then the next. That’s how you build both confidence and progress.



Your Friday Fuel Challenge

You’re not behind. You’re just getting started.

The best way to start? Take one small action this week to build your waitlist.

Post a teaser, create a freebie, and talk about your box. Progress beats perfection. Every single time.



Join me in all the places:    


  
⁠Facebook⁠



  
⁠Instagram⁠



  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join the waitlist ⁠today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are you worried you’ll launch your subscription box and no one will subscribe?</p>
<p>You’re not alone. This fear shows up for nearly every subscription box owner at some point, especially in the early days.</p>
<p>In this Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing a mindset shift and some simple, strategic steps to help you move forward with clarity. Even if you’re starting from zero.</p>
<p>If fear or self-doubt has you feeling stuck, this is the pep talk you need.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Instead of worrying about launch day numbers:</p>
<p>1 - Know that this fear is normal.</p>
<p>The fear of “no subscribers” doesn’t mean you’re not cut out to be a subscription box owner. It means you care. Acknowledge the fear, but don’t let it call the shots.</p>
<p>2 - Don’t obsess over your launch date.</p>
<p>Setting a date can be helpful, but it’s not the most important thing. Focus on taking action and building momentum before the cart opens.</p>
<p>3 - Start building your waitlist now.</p>
<p>Your waitlist is your best launch asset. It gives you an audience of warm leads who are interested, engaged, and ready to buy when the time comes.</p>
<p>4 - Understand that clarity comes from action.</p>
<p>You don’t need all the answers to get started. Just take the next right step. Then the next. That’s how you build both confidence and progress.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Your Friday Fuel Challenge</strong></p>
<p>You’re not behind. You’re just getting started.</p>
<p>The best way to start? Take one small action <em>this week</em> to build your waitlist.</p>
<p>Post a teaser, create a freebie, and talk about your box. Progress beats perfection. Every single time.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Join me in all the places:    </strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Join the waitlist ⁠</a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>553</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[87a4090c-a315-11f0-af57-f774e72a6df0]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5123921397.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Pros &amp; Cons of a Quarterly Subscription Box</title>
      <description>“Is it better to have a monthly or quarterly subscription box?” 

This question comes up a lot inside Launch Your Box and on the How to Start a Subscription Box public Facebook page. The truth is, there is no one answer to this question. No right or wrong when it comes to choosing a monthly or quarterly box. There’s only the answer that’s right for you. 

Your answer to whether a monthly or quarterly box is right for you and your business depends on your goals for your business and what is most important to you as a business owner. 

Each model has its benefits and its drawbacks. It’s important to understand both before making a decision about the frequency of your subscription box. 

The pros and cons of a quarterly subscription box:

1. Revenue


  Con - a quarterly subscription model can cause financial strain during the “off” months. 

  Pro - you can typically charge more for a quarterly box, allowing for greater profit and more revenue.


2. Curation/Products  


  Pro - you only have to curate a box four times a year! 

  Pro - your subscriber only gets four boxes a year to consume. This can lead to greater subscriber satisfaction and less churn. 3


3. Frequency/Recency 


  Con - lack of engagement. The time between each box can cause a sense of disengagement for subscribers. They’re not getting the constant reminders of something new coming like they do with monthly boxes. 

  Con - not having enough content. It can be very challenging to stretch out the content from one box to last for three months until the next box comes out. Content can get stale. 


4. Time   


  Pro - the monthly grind of curation/fulfillment/customer service is a full-time commitment. A quarterly box allows you the space and freedom to do other things. 




Top cons of a quarterly subscription box:


  No monthly recurring revenue.

  Lack of engagement in your community.

  Lack of content to market and promote your box and brand consistently. 




Top pros of a quarterly subscription box: 


  Ability to charge more for a quarterly box, increasing the amount of revenue per box. 

  Only have to curate four boxes a year instead of 12. 

  Subscribers are less likely to cancel due to inability to consume the box. 

  You get a break from the curation/fulfillment/customer service cycle. 




We’ve talked about monthly and quarterly boxes and the pros and cons of each. But, there is one other option and it seems to be gaining in popularity: bi-monthly subscription boxes. Bi-monthly boxes are curated and fulfilled every other month. Some subscription box owners and subscribers find this to be just the right balance between a monthly box and a quarterly box. 



Join me for this episode as I talk about why there’s not an easy answer to the question, “Is it better to have a monthly or quarterly subscription box?” and walk you through the pros and cons of each. 



Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join ⁠today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 08 Oct 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as I talk about why there’s not an easy answer to the question, “Is it better to have a monthly or quarterly subscription box?” and walk you through the pros and cons of each. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Is it better to have a monthly or quarterly subscription box?” 

This question comes up a lot inside Launch Your Box and on the How to Start a Subscription Box public Facebook page. The truth is, there is no one answer to this question. No right or wrong when it comes to choosing a monthly or quarterly box. There’s only the answer that’s right for you. 

Your answer to whether a monthly or quarterly box is right for you and your business depends on your goals for your business and what is most important to you as a business owner. 

Each model has its benefits and its drawbacks. It’s important to understand both before making a decision about the frequency of your subscription box. 

The pros and cons of a quarterly subscription box:

1. Revenue


  Con - a quarterly subscription model can cause financial strain during the “off” months. 

  Pro - you can typically charge more for a quarterly box, allowing for greater profit and more revenue.


2. Curation/Products  


  Pro - you only have to curate a box four times a year! 

  Pro - your subscriber only gets four boxes a year to consume. This can lead to greater subscriber satisfaction and less churn. 3


3. Frequency/Recency 


  Con - lack of engagement. The time between each box can cause a sense of disengagement for subscribers. They’re not getting the constant reminders of something new coming like they do with monthly boxes. 

  Con - not having enough content. It can be very challenging to stretch out the content from one box to last for three months until the next box comes out. Content can get stale. 


4. Time   


  Pro - the monthly grind of curation/fulfillment/customer service is a full-time commitment. A quarterly box allows you the space and freedom to do other things. 




Top cons of a quarterly subscription box:


  No monthly recurring revenue.

  Lack of engagement in your community.

  Lack of content to market and promote your box and brand consistently. 




Top pros of a quarterly subscription box: 


  Ability to charge more for a quarterly box, increasing the amount of revenue per box. 

  Only have to curate four boxes a year instead of 12. 

  Subscribers are less likely to cancel due to inability to consume the box. 

  You get a break from the curation/fulfillment/customer service cycle. 




We’ve talked about monthly and quarterly boxes and the pros and cons of each. But, there is one other option and it seems to be gaining in popularity: bi-monthly subscription boxes. Bi-monthly boxes are curated and fulfilled every other month. Some subscription box owners and subscribers find this to be just the right balance between a monthly box and a quarterly box. 



Join me for this episode as I talk about why there’s not an easy answer to the question, “Is it better to have a monthly or quarterly subscription box?” and walk you through the pros and cons of each. 



Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join ⁠today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“Is it better to have a monthly or quarterly subscription box?” </p>
<p>This question comes up a lot inside Launch Your Box and on the How to Start a Subscription Box public Facebook page. The truth is, there is no one answer to this question. No right or wrong when it comes to choosing a monthly or quarterly box. There’s only the answer that’s right for you. </p>
<p>Your answer to whether a monthly or quarterly box is right for you and your business depends on your goals for your business and what is most important to you as a business owner. </p>
<p>Each model has its benefits and its drawbacks. It’s important to understand both before making a decision about the frequency of your subscription box. </p>
<p>The pros and cons of a quarterly subscription box:</p>
<p>1. Revenue</p>
<ul>
  <li>Con - a quarterly subscription model can cause financial strain during the “off” months. </li>
  <li>Pro - you can typically charge more for a quarterly box, allowing for greater profit and more revenue.</li>
</ul>
<p>2. Curation/Products  </p>
<ul>
  <li>Pro - you only have to curate a box four times a year! </li>
  <li>Pro - your subscriber only gets four boxes a year to consume. This can lead to greater subscriber satisfaction and less churn. 3</li>
</ul>
<p>3. Frequency/Recency </p>
<ul>
  <li>Con - lack of engagement. The time between each box can cause a sense of disengagement for subscribers. They’re not getting the constant reminders of something new coming like they do with monthly boxes. </li>
  <li>Con - not having enough content. It can be very challenging to stretch out the content from one box to last for three months until the next box comes out. Content can get stale. </li>
</ul>
<p>4. Time   </p>
<ul>
  <li>Pro - the monthly grind of curation/fulfillment/customer service is a full-time commitment. A quarterly box allows you the space and freedom to do other things. </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Top cons of a quarterly subscription box:</p>
<ol>
  <li>No monthly recurring revenue.</li>
  <li>Lack of engagement in your community.</li>
  <li>Lack of content to market and promote your box and brand consistently. </li>
</ol>
<p><br></p>
<p>Top pros of a quarterly subscription box: </p>
<ol>
  <li>Ability to charge more for a quarterly box, increasing the amount of revenue per box. </li>
  <li>Only have to curate four boxes a year instead of 12. </li>
  <li>Subscribers are less likely to cancel due to inability to consume the box. </li>
  <li>You get a break from the curation/fulfillment/customer service cycle. </li>
</ol>
<p><br></p>
<p>We’ve talked about monthly and quarterly boxes and the pros and cons of each. But, there is one other option and it seems to be gaining in popularity: bi-monthly subscription boxes. Bi-monthly boxes are curated and fulfilled every other month. Some subscription box owners and subscribers find this to be just the right balance between a monthly box and a quarterly box. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me for this episode as I talk about why there’s not an easy answer to the question, “Is it better to have a monthly or quarterly subscription box?” and walk you through the pros and cons of each. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Join ⁠</a>today!</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>912</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[601f7c54-a315-11f0-9f10-1bcd388478b7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8985353362.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>224: 5 Monthly Reset Habits for Subscription Box Owners</title>
      <description>Running a subscription box business can feel like a whirlwind. One month you’re celebrating new subscribers, and the next you’re carrying over tasks you didn’t finish and the stress that causes. That’s why a monthly reset is so powerful. It clears the clutter, refocuses your energy, and helps you move forward with intention.

In this week’s Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing five reset habits I use every month in my own business that will help you keep growing without the burnout.

1. Review Your Numbers

Your numbers tell the story of your business. Take 30 minutes each month to check new subscribers, churn, revenue, and follower &amp; list growth. Don’t overcomplicate it. Track these numbers in a simple spreadsheet and look for patterns that point the way forward.

2. Clear the “Rocks in Your Backpack”

Unfinished tasks weigh you down. At the start of the month, make a list of what’s still hanging over you. Then delete what no longer matters, delegate what you can, and finish the ones that truly move the needle.

3. Set One or Two Goals

Stop chasing everything. Choose one or two goals that actually grow your business this month, like growing your waitlist, setting up an ad campaign, or batching social content. 

Four weeks. One focus. Big progress.

4. Create a Roadmap

Once you know your goals, map them out in 3–5 action steps. Keep it visible  — in your planner, on a whiteboard, or even on your phone wallpaper — to stay focused all month long.

5. Build in Weekly Accountability

Check in with yourself every week. 

Ask: What’s my goal? What step am I on? Where am I stuck? Staying accountable keeps you from realizing at the end of the month that you’ve drifted off track.

Your Friday Fuel Challenge

Set aside one hour this weekend or Monday morning to walk through these five reset habits. Your future self — and your subscribers — will thank you.



Join me for this episode of Friday Fuel and discover the 5 reset habits that will keep your subscription box growing strong every month.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 03 Oct 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>5 Monthly Reset Habits for Subscription Box Owners</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>224</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode of Friday Fuel and discover the 5 reset habits that will keep your subscription box growing strong every month.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Running a subscription box business can feel like a whirlwind. One month you’re celebrating new subscribers, and the next you’re carrying over tasks you didn’t finish and the stress that causes. That’s why a monthly reset is so powerful. It clears the clutter, refocuses your energy, and helps you move forward with intention.

In this week’s Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing five reset habits I use every month in my own business that will help you keep growing without the burnout.

1. Review Your Numbers

Your numbers tell the story of your business. Take 30 minutes each month to check new subscribers, churn, revenue, and follower &amp; list growth. Don’t overcomplicate it. Track these numbers in a simple spreadsheet and look for patterns that point the way forward.

2. Clear the “Rocks in Your Backpack”

Unfinished tasks weigh you down. At the start of the month, make a list of what’s still hanging over you. Then delete what no longer matters, delegate what you can, and finish the ones that truly move the needle.

3. Set One or Two Goals

Stop chasing everything. Choose one or two goals that actually grow your business this month, like growing your waitlist, setting up an ad campaign, or batching social content. 

Four weeks. One focus. Big progress.

4. Create a Roadmap

Once you know your goals, map them out in 3–5 action steps. Keep it visible  — in your planner, on a whiteboard, or even on your phone wallpaper — to stay focused all month long.

5. Build in Weekly Accountability

Check in with yourself every week. 

Ask: What’s my goal? What step am I on? Where am I stuck? Staying accountable keeps you from realizing at the end of the month that you’ve drifted off track.

Your Friday Fuel Challenge

Set aside one hour this weekend or Monday morning to walk through these five reset habits. Your future self — and your subscribers — will thank you.



Join me for this episode of Friday Fuel and discover the 5 reset habits that will keep your subscription box growing strong every month.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Running a subscription box business can feel like a whirlwind. One month you’re celebrating new subscribers, and the next you’re carrying over tasks you didn’t finish and the stress that causes. That’s why a monthly reset is so powerful. It clears the clutter, refocuses your energy, and helps you move forward with intention.</p>
<p>In this week’s Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing five reset habits I use every month in my own business that will help you keep growing without the burnout.</p>
<p>1. Review Your Numbers</p>
<p>Your numbers tell the story of your business. Take 30 minutes each month to check new subscribers, churn, revenue, and follower &amp; list growth. Don’t overcomplicate it. Track these numbers in a simple spreadsheet and look for patterns that point the way forward.</p>
<p>2. Clear the “Rocks in Your Backpack”</p>
<p>Unfinished tasks weigh you down. At the start of the month, make a list of what’s still hanging over you. Then delete what no longer matters, delegate what you can, and finish the ones that truly move the needle.</p>
<p>3. Set One or Two Goals</p>
<p>Stop chasing everything. Choose one or two goals that actually grow your business this month, like growing your waitlist, setting up an ad campaign, or batching social content. </p>
<p>Four weeks. One focus. Big progress.</p>
<p>4. Create a Roadmap</p>
<p>Once you know your goals, map them out in 3–5 action steps. Keep it visible  — in your planner, on a whiteboard, or even on your phone wallpaper — to stay focused all month long.</p>
<p>5. Build in Weekly Accountability</p>
<p>Check in with yourself every week. </p>
<p>Ask: What’s my goal? What step am I on? Where am I stuck? Staying accountable keeps you from realizing at the end of the month that you’ve drifted off track.</p>
<p>Your Friday Fuel Challenge</p>
<p>Set aside one hour this weekend or Monday morning to walk through these five reset habits. Your future self — and your subscribers — will thank you.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me for this episode of Friday Fuel and discover the 5 reset habits that will keep your subscription box growing strong every month.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>
<p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>865</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d03c6632-9cc1-11f0-a927-ebe19f1e6929]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1504680975.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>10 Truth Bombs to Understand About Your Subscription Box Business</title>
      <description>Have you been struggling with your business this year? Maybe you’re not reaching your revenue goals or you haven’t launched that new idea, product, or subscription box yet. Many times, our businesses need one little tweak - a change in process, strategy, or just mindset - to change everything. 

In this episode, I’m sharing 10 truth bombs that will have you looking at your business differently. Take the time to sit with and think about each of these to see how they might apply to you and your business. 


  20% of your customer base generates 80% of your revenue! 

  Protect your peace and energy at all costs. 

  Fad marketing strategies are like fad diets. They will not last. 

  Companies that have heavily relied on paid traffic only will shift to more organic traffic. 

  Systems and processes will serve you. 

  Revenue does not mean profit. 

  Cheap is not creating value. 

  It’s more profitable to retain your subscribers than to constantly acquire new ones. 

  What gets you started may not get you to scale. 

  If you don’t challenge yourself, you won’t change yourself. 




We focused all of the training this year inside Launch Your Box on these 10 things. I’m here to help you understand these 10 things and make progress with each of them. 

Remember, you are on a subscription box journey. This journey never ends. It’s always a work in progress. Just keep making progress! 



Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join ⁠today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 01 Oct 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, I’m sharing 10 truth bombs that will have you looking at your business differently. Take the time to sit with and think about each of these to see how they might apply to you and your business. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you been struggling with your business this year? Maybe you’re not reaching your revenue goals or you haven’t launched that new idea, product, or subscription box yet. Many times, our businesses need one little tweak - a change in process, strategy, or just mindset - to change everything. 

In this episode, I’m sharing 10 truth bombs that will have you looking at your business differently. Take the time to sit with and think about each of these to see how they might apply to you and your business. 


  20% of your customer base generates 80% of your revenue! 

  Protect your peace and energy at all costs. 

  Fad marketing strategies are like fad diets. They will not last. 

  Companies that have heavily relied on paid traffic only will shift to more organic traffic. 

  Systems and processes will serve you. 

  Revenue does not mean profit. 

  Cheap is not creating value. 

  It’s more profitable to retain your subscribers than to constantly acquire new ones. 

  What gets you started may not get you to scale. 

  If you don’t challenge yourself, you won’t change yourself. 




We focused all of the training this year inside Launch Your Box on these 10 things. I’m here to help you understand these 10 things and make progress with each of them. 

Remember, you are on a subscription box journey. This journey never ends. It’s always a work in progress. Just keep making progress! 



Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join ⁠today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you been struggling with your business this year? Maybe you’re not reaching your revenue goals or you haven’t launched that new idea, product, or subscription box yet. Many times, our businesses need one little tweak - a change in process, strategy, or just mindset - to change everything. </p>
<p>In this episode, I’m sharing 10 truth bombs that will have you looking at your business differently. Take the time to sit with and think about each of these to see how they might apply to you and your business. </p>
<ol>
  <li>20% of your customer base generates 80% of your revenue! </li>
  <li>Protect your peace and energy at all costs. </li>
  <li>Fad marketing strategies are like fad diets. They will not last. </li>
  <li>Companies that have heavily relied on paid traffic only will shift to more organic traffic. </li>
  <li>Systems and processes will serve you. </li>
  <li>Revenue does not mean profit. </li>
  <li>Cheap is not creating value. </li>
  <li>It’s more profitable to retain your subscribers than to constantly acquire new ones. </li>
  <li>What gets you started may not get you to scale. </li>
  <li>If you don’t challenge yourself, you won’t change yourself. </li>
</ol>
<p><br></p>
<p>We focused all of the training this year inside Launch Your Box on these 10 things. I’m here to help you understand these 10 things and make progress with each of them. </p>
<p>Remember, you are on a subscription box journey. This journey never ends. It’s always a work in progress. Just keep making progress! </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Join ⁠</a>today!</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1644</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8f6d062a-9cc1-11f0-bc0c-672ae49d2609]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9675954301.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>223: The One Mindset Shift That Changed How I See Sales</title>
      <description>If sales make you feel awkward, pushy, or like it’s just not your thing, you’re not alone. For so many subscription box owners, especially women, selling can feel uncomfortable. We’d rather let our boxes speak for themselves than risk being “too salesy.”



I used to feel the same way. I’d spend hours curating the perfect box, but when it came time to ask for the sale? I’d shrink into the background. I believed selling meant convincing people to buy something they didn’t want – and that fear kept me quiet.



Then one mindset shift changed everything:

Sales isn’t about convincing. Sales is about serving.



When I started to see sales as service, everything clicked.



Why Sales = Service

Your box is so much more than a collection of items. It’s confidence. It’s joy. It’s permission to feel special again.

When subscribers tell me things like:


  
“I wore that kimono to my daughter’s graduation.”



  
“Your box is my one treat every month.”



  
“Opening your box is the moment I get to focus on myself.”




…it reminds me that NOT sharing my box is actually a disservice. By talking about it, I’m giving someone the chance to experience joy, relief, or encouragement they truly need.



How to Put This Shift into Practice

Here are three ways you can reframe sales as service in your own business:


  
Start with the problem you solve.Don’t just list what’s inside your box. Focus on the transformation. A teacher’s box isn’t just supplies; it’s a monthly reminder that she matters.



  
Talk about benefits, not just features.Features = “candle, sticker, bracelet.”Benefits = “a moment of calm at the end of a hard day.”People don’t buy things; they buy the way those things make them feel.



  
Stop overthinking how often you show up.You’re not bugging people. You’re being consistent. Each reminder might be the exact nudge someone needs to say yes to themselves.




Take Action

This week, I want you to practice this mindset shift:


  
Write one post or one email about your subscription box.



  
Instead of listing what’s inside, tell the story of how it makes someone’s life better.



  
Hit “publish” or “send” and remind yourself you’re serving, not selling.




Sales is service. The right people are waiting, but they can’t say yes if you don’t show up.



Ready to reframe how you think about selling? Join me for this Friday Fuel episode as I share the mindset shift that turned sales from something I dreaded into one of the most powerful ways I serve my audience. You’ll walk away with practical steps to show up with confidence and start sharing your box in a way that feels authentic – and effective.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 26 Sep 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The One Mindset Shift That Changed How I See Sales</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>223</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Ready to reframe how you think about selling? Join me for this Friday Fuel episode as I share the mindset shift that turned sales from something I dreaded into one of the most powerful ways I serve my audience. You’ll walk away with practical steps to show up with confidence and start sharing your box in a way that feels authentic – and effective.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If sales make you feel awkward, pushy, or like it’s just not your thing, you’re not alone. For so many subscription box owners, especially women, selling can feel uncomfortable. We’d rather let our boxes speak for themselves than risk being “too salesy.”



I used to feel the same way. I’d spend hours curating the perfect box, but when it came time to ask for the sale? I’d shrink into the background. I believed selling meant convincing people to buy something they didn’t want – and that fear kept me quiet.



Then one mindset shift changed everything:

Sales isn’t about convincing. Sales is about serving.



When I started to see sales as service, everything clicked.



Why Sales = Service

Your box is so much more than a collection of items. It’s confidence. It’s joy. It’s permission to feel special again.

When subscribers tell me things like:


  
“I wore that kimono to my daughter’s graduation.”



  
“Your box is my one treat every month.”



  
“Opening your box is the moment I get to focus on myself.”




…it reminds me that NOT sharing my box is actually a disservice. By talking about it, I’m giving someone the chance to experience joy, relief, or encouragement they truly need.



How to Put This Shift into Practice

Here are three ways you can reframe sales as service in your own business:


  
Start with the problem you solve.Don’t just list what’s inside your box. Focus on the transformation. A teacher’s box isn’t just supplies; it’s a monthly reminder that she matters.



  
Talk about benefits, not just features.Features = “candle, sticker, bracelet.”Benefits = “a moment of calm at the end of a hard day.”People don’t buy things; they buy the way those things make them feel.



  
Stop overthinking how often you show up.You’re not bugging people. You’re being consistent. Each reminder might be the exact nudge someone needs to say yes to themselves.




Take Action

This week, I want you to practice this mindset shift:


  
Write one post or one email about your subscription box.



  
Instead of listing what’s inside, tell the story of how it makes someone’s life better.



  
Hit “publish” or “send” and remind yourself you’re serving, not selling.




Sales is service. The right people are waiting, but they can’t say yes if you don’t show up.



Ready to reframe how you think about selling? Join me for this Friday Fuel episode as I share the mindset shift that turned sales from something I dreaded into one of the most powerful ways I serve my audience. You’ll walk away with practical steps to show up with confidence and start sharing your box in a way that feels authentic – and effective.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If sales make you feel awkward, pushy, or like it’s just <em>not your thing</em>, you’re not alone. For so many subscription box owners, especially women, selling can feel uncomfortable. We’d rather let our boxes speak for themselves than risk being “too salesy.”</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>I used to feel the same way. I’d spend hours curating the perfect box, but when it came time to ask for the sale? I’d shrink into the background. I believed selling meant convincing people to buy something they didn’t want – and that fear kept me quiet.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Then one mindset shift changed everything:</p>
<p><strong>Sales isn’t about convincing. Sales is about serving.</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>When I started to see sales as service, everything clicked.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Why Sales = Service</p>
<p>Your box is so much more than a collection of items. It’s confidence. It’s joy. It’s permission to feel special again.</p>
<p>When subscribers tell me things like:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>“I wore that kimono to my daughter’s graduation.”</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>“Your box is my one treat every month.”</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>“Opening your box is the moment I get to focus on myself.”</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>…it reminds me that NOT sharing my box is actually a disservice. By talking about it, I’m giving someone the chance to experience joy, relief, or encouragement they truly need.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>How to Put This Shift into Practice</p>
<p>Here are three ways you can reframe sales as service in your own business:</p>
<ol>
  <li>
<p><strong>Start with the problem you solve.</strong>Don’t just list what’s inside your box. Focus on the transformation. A teacher’s box isn’t just supplies; it’s a monthly reminder that she matters.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Talk about benefits, not just features.</strong>Features = “candle, sticker, bracelet.”Benefits = “a moment of calm at the end of a hard day.”People don’t buy things; they buy the way those things make them feel.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Stop overthinking how often you show up.</strong>You’re not bugging people. You’re being consistent. Each reminder might be the exact nudge someone needs to say yes to themselves.</p>
</li>
</ol>
<p>Take Action</p>
<p>This week, I want you to practice this mindset shift:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Write one post or one email about your subscription box.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Instead of listing what’s inside, tell the story of how it makes someone’s life better.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Hit “publish” or “send” and remind yourself you’re serving, not selling.<br></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Sales is service. The right people are waiting, but they can’t say yes if you don’t show up.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Ready to reframe how you think about selling? <strong>Join me for this Friday Fuel episode </strong>as I share the mindset shift that turned sales from something I dreaded into one of the most powerful ways I serve my audience. You’ll walk away with practical steps to show up with confidence and start sharing your box in a way that feels authentic – and effective.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>655</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[839dc4f0-983a-11f0-9b6b-7bc29bf7650c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2268656960.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>222: Complexity Kills: Why Simpler Subscription Boxes Sell Better</title>
      <description>If you’ve ever felt like you’re constantly having to explain your subscription box… or if browsers seem interested but rarely convert into subscribers… this episode is for you.

Inside the Launch Your Box community, I see the same challenge over and over again. And it’s something I struggled with myself in the early days. We want to give our customers “all the things.” 



But what actually happens when we do? Too many choices, vague messaging, and complicated pricing lead to friction that stops sales in their tracks.



The good news? You can fix it. And it starts with one powerful shift: simplicity sells.



How Subscription Box Owners Overcomplicate

I see this issue everywhere, from coaching calls to live website reviews:


  
Too many product types. Mixing categories (like books and skincare) confuses your customer and muddies your message.



  
Too many options. Five tiers, three payment plans, add-ons galore… decision fatigue kicks in, and carts get abandoned.



  
Complicated pricing. Multi-month discounts and perks sound helpful, but often paralyze buyers.



  
Vague or “cute” messaging. Phrases like “delightfully curated” don’t clearly explain what’s in the box or who it’s for — and unclear means no sale.






Why Complexity Creates Conversion Friction

When your subscription box feels confusing, it costs you sales in three big ways:


  
You’re constantly explaining. If people don’t “get it” instantly, you’ll spend time justifying instead of selling.



  
Confused people don’t buy. Life already brings decision overload. Your box should feel like relief, not another hard choice.



  
You lose people on your website. Extra clicks, unclear copy, or too many checkout options make it too easy to leave.






The Power of Simplicity

Here’s why simplicity wins:


  
Clear boxes convert. One offer, one customer, one problem solved = an easy yes.



  
Simple offers are easier to sell and scale. One price, one plan keeps tech, communication, and cancellations under control.



  
Simple messaging builds trust. When people instantly understand what your box is, they’re more likely to subscribe and stay subscribed.






How to Simplify Your Subscription Box

If you’re ready to cut through the clutter, start here:


  
Audit your offer. Can you explain your box in one sentence? Is it clear what customers are actually subscribing to?



  
Review your website. Is your call-to-action obvious? Are you forcing visitors to make too many decisions?



  
Simplify your messaging. In ten seconds, can a stranger tell: what your box is, who it’s for, and why they need it?



  
Focus on ONE box. Especially under 300 subscribers. Don’t split your energy. Go all in on one clear, strong offer.






Take Action

Complexity creates confusion, and confusion kills sales. 

Simplicity, on the other hand, builds clarity, trust, and momentum.



This week, I challenge you to audit your subscription box and website for simplicity. Ask yourself:


  
Where am I overcomplicating?



  
Can I make this easier to understand?



  
What’s one decision I can take off my customer’s plate today?






When you simplify, you not only make it easier for people to say yes, you make it easier for your business to grow.



Join me for this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast and get the clarity you need to simplify your subscription box offer and boost conversions.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 






Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Sep 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Complexity Kills: Why Simpler Subscription Boxes Sell Better</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>222</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast and get the clarity you need to simplify your subscription box offer and boost conversions.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you’ve ever felt like you’re constantly having to explain your subscription box… or if browsers seem interested but rarely convert into subscribers… this episode is for you.

Inside the Launch Your Box community, I see the same challenge over and over again. And it’s something I struggled with myself in the early days. We want to give our customers “all the things.” 



But what actually happens when we do? Too many choices, vague messaging, and complicated pricing lead to friction that stops sales in their tracks.



The good news? You can fix it. And it starts with one powerful shift: simplicity sells.



How Subscription Box Owners Overcomplicate

I see this issue everywhere, from coaching calls to live website reviews:


  
Too many product types. Mixing categories (like books and skincare) confuses your customer and muddies your message.



  
Too many options. Five tiers, three payment plans, add-ons galore… decision fatigue kicks in, and carts get abandoned.



  
Complicated pricing. Multi-month discounts and perks sound helpful, but often paralyze buyers.



  
Vague or “cute” messaging. Phrases like “delightfully curated” don’t clearly explain what’s in the box or who it’s for — and unclear means no sale.






Why Complexity Creates Conversion Friction

When your subscription box feels confusing, it costs you sales in three big ways:


  
You’re constantly explaining. If people don’t “get it” instantly, you’ll spend time justifying instead of selling.



  
Confused people don’t buy. Life already brings decision overload. Your box should feel like relief, not another hard choice.



  
You lose people on your website. Extra clicks, unclear copy, or too many checkout options make it too easy to leave.






The Power of Simplicity

Here’s why simplicity wins:


  
Clear boxes convert. One offer, one customer, one problem solved = an easy yes.



  
Simple offers are easier to sell and scale. One price, one plan keeps tech, communication, and cancellations under control.



  
Simple messaging builds trust. When people instantly understand what your box is, they’re more likely to subscribe and stay subscribed.






How to Simplify Your Subscription Box

If you’re ready to cut through the clutter, start here:


  
Audit your offer. Can you explain your box in one sentence? Is it clear what customers are actually subscribing to?



  
Review your website. Is your call-to-action obvious? Are you forcing visitors to make too many decisions?



  
Simplify your messaging. In ten seconds, can a stranger tell: what your box is, who it’s for, and why they need it?



  
Focus on ONE box. Especially under 300 subscribers. Don’t split your energy. Go all in on one clear, strong offer.






Take Action

Complexity creates confusion, and confusion kills sales. 

Simplicity, on the other hand, builds clarity, trust, and momentum.



This week, I challenge you to audit your subscription box and website for simplicity. Ask yourself:


  
Where am I overcomplicating?



  
Can I make this easier to understand?



  
What’s one decision I can take off my customer’s plate today?






When you simplify, you not only make it easier for people to say yes, you make it easier for your business to grow.



Join me for this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast and get the clarity you need to simplify your subscription box offer and boost conversions.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 






Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you’ve ever felt like you’re constantly having to explain your subscription box… or if browsers seem interested but rarely convert into subscribers… this episode is for you.</p>
<p>Inside the Launch Your Box community, I see the same challenge over and over again. And it’s something I struggled with myself in the early days. We want to give our customers “all the things.” </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>But what actually happens when we do? Too many choices, vague messaging, and complicated pricing lead to friction that stops sales in their tracks.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>The good news? You can fix it. And it starts with one powerful shift: <strong>simplicity sells.</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>How Subscription Box Owners Overcomplicate</p>
<p>I see this issue everywhere, from coaching calls to live website reviews:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><strong>Too many product types.</strong> Mixing categories (like books and skincare) confuses your customer and muddies your message.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Too many options.</strong> Five tiers, three payment plans, add-ons galore… decision fatigue kicks in, and carts get abandoned.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Complicated pricing.</strong> Multi-month discounts and perks sound helpful, but often paralyze buyers.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Vague or “cute” messaging.</strong> Phrases like “delightfully curated” don’t clearly explain what’s in the box or who it’s for — and unclear means no sale.</p>
<p><br></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Why Complexity Creates Conversion Friction</p>
<p>When your subscription box feels confusing, it costs you sales in three big ways:</p>
<ol>
  <li>
<p><strong>You’re constantly explaining.</strong> If people don’t “get it” instantly, you’ll spend time justifying instead of selling.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Confused people don’t buy.</strong> Life already brings decision overload. Your box should feel like relief, not another hard choice.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>You lose people on your website.</strong> Extra clicks, unclear copy, or too many checkout options make it too easy to leave.</p>
<p><br></p>
</li>
</ol>
<p>The Power of Simplicity</p>
<p>Here’s why simplicity wins:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><strong>Clear boxes convert.</strong> One offer, one customer, one problem solved = an easy yes.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Simple offers are easier to sell and scale.</strong> One price, one plan keeps tech, communication, and cancellations under control.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Simple messaging builds trust.</strong> When people instantly understand what your box is, they’re more likely to subscribe and stay subscribed.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>How to Simplify Your Subscription Box</p>
<p>If you’re ready to cut through the clutter, start here:</p>
<ol>
  <li>
<p><strong>Audit your offer.</strong> Can you explain your box in one sentence? Is it clear what customers are actually subscribing to?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Review your website.</strong> Is your call-to-action obvious? Are you forcing visitors to make too many decisions?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Simplify your messaging.</strong> In ten seconds, can a stranger tell: what your box is, who it’s for, and why they need it?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Focus on ONE box.</strong> Especially under 300 subscribers. Don’t split your energy. Go all in on one clear, strong offer.</p>
<p><br></p>
</li>
</ol>
<p>Take Action</p>
<p>Complexity creates confusion, and confusion kills sales. </p>
<p>Simplicity, on the other hand, builds clarity, trust, and momentum.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>This week, I challenge you to <strong>audit your subscription box and website for simplicity.</strong> Ask yourself:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Where am I overcomplicating?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Can I make this easier to understand?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>What’s one decision I can take off my customer’s plate today?</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>When you simplify, you not only make it easier for people to say yes, you make it easier for your business to grow.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me for this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast and get the clarity you need to simplify your subscription box offer and boost conversions.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
<p><br></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1259</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[466c69ca-974e-11f0-ae13-d7dd681afda4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8732426393.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>221: Start Before You’re Ready: 4 Simple Steps to Begin Your Subscription Box with What You Have</title>
      <description>Start Before You’re Ready: 4 Simple Steps to Begin Your Subscription Box with What You Have

What’s holding you back from launching your subscription box? Is it because your website isn’t perfect, your audience feels too small, or your idea still seems messy? 

You’re not alone. So many future subscription box owners stall out waiting for the “right” time.

The truth is there is no perfect time. You don’t need perfection, you need momentum.

In this week’s Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down four simple steps to help you start your subscription box with what you already have. 

No excuses. No waiting. Just real, imperfect action that builds clarity and confidence as you go.

Step 1: Pick One Person to Serve

Your box isn’t for everyone. Start by focusing on one specific person you want to serve. When you know exactly who your subscriber is, everything else – your content, your product choices, your messaging – becomes easier and more effective.

Step 2: Use a Waitlist Page (Not a Website)

You don’t need a full website to get started. A simple waitlist page can help you share who the box is for, what’s inside, and when it’s coming. You can set this up in hours, not weeks, and immediately start gathering interested people.

Step 3: Document &gt; Create

Stop overthinking and start sharing. Your audience doesn’t want perfect—they want connection. Share behind-the-scenes decisions, product picks, or packaging ideas. Let them vote, give input, and feel like they’re part of the journey. This builds trust and excitement long before you launch.

Step 4: Launch Messy

You are allowed to launch before it looks perfect. Some of the most successful subscription box owners I coach launched with no logo, just a waitlist, and 10 subscribers. What mattered wasn’t perfection—it was getting started.



Take Action

Your “homework” from this Friday Fuel is simple:


  
Pick your person.



  
Build a waitlist.



  
Share the behind-the-scenes.



  
Launch messy.




You are more ready than you think. But the only way forward is to take the next step. Not someday – today.

Join me for this Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, where I’ll walk you through four simple steps to start your subscription box now. Yep, even before you think you’re ready.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 19 Sep 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Start Before You’re Ready: 4 Simple Steps to Begin Your Subscription Box with What You Have</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>221</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, where I’ll walk you through four simple steps to start your subscription box now. Yep, even before you think you’re ready.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Start Before You’re Ready: 4 Simple Steps to Begin Your Subscription Box with What You Have

What’s holding you back from launching your subscription box? Is it because your website isn’t perfect, your audience feels too small, or your idea still seems messy? 

You’re not alone. So many future subscription box owners stall out waiting for the “right” time.

The truth is there is no perfect time. You don’t need perfection, you need momentum.

In this week’s Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down four simple steps to help you start your subscription box with what you already have. 

No excuses. No waiting. Just real, imperfect action that builds clarity and confidence as you go.

Step 1: Pick One Person to Serve

Your box isn’t for everyone. Start by focusing on one specific person you want to serve. When you know exactly who your subscriber is, everything else – your content, your product choices, your messaging – becomes easier and more effective.

Step 2: Use a Waitlist Page (Not a Website)

You don’t need a full website to get started. A simple waitlist page can help you share who the box is for, what’s inside, and when it’s coming. You can set this up in hours, not weeks, and immediately start gathering interested people.

Step 3: Document &gt; Create

Stop overthinking and start sharing. Your audience doesn’t want perfect—they want connection. Share behind-the-scenes decisions, product picks, or packaging ideas. Let them vote, give input, and feel like they’re part of the journey. This builds trust and excitement long before you launch.

Step 4: Launch Messy

You are allowed to launch before it looks perfect. Some of the most successful subscription box owners I coach launched with no logo, just a waitlist, and 10 subscribers. What mattered wasn’t perfection—it was getting started.



Take Action

Your “homework” from this Friday Fuel is simple:


  
Pick your person.



  
Build a waitlist.



  
Share the behind-the-scenes.



  
Launch messy.




You are more ready than you think. But the only way forward is to take the next step. Not someday – today.

Join me for this Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, where I’ll walk you through four simple steps to start your subscription box now. Yep, even before you think you’re ready.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Start Before You’re Ready: 4 Simple Steps to Begin Your Subscription Box with What You Have</p>
<p>What’s holding you back from launching your subscription box? Is it because your website isn’t perfect, your audience feels too small, or your idea still seems messy? </p>
<p>You’re not alone. So many future subscription box owners stall out waiting for the “right” time.</p>
<p>The truth is there is no perfect time. You don’t need perfection, you need momentum.</p>
<p>In this week’s Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down four simple steps to help you start your subscription box with what you already have. </p>
<p>No excuses. No waiting. Just real, imperfect action that builds clarity and confidence as you go.</p>
<p>Step 1: Pick One Person to Serve</p>
<p>Your box isn’t for everyone. Start by focusing on one specific person you want to serve. When you know exactly who your subscriber is, everything else – your content, your product choices, your messaging – becomes easier and more effective.</p>
<p>Step 2: Use a Waitlist Page (Not a Website)</p>
<p>You don’t need a full website to get started. A simple waitlist page can help you share who the box is for, what’s inside, and when it’s coming. You can set this up in hours, not weeks, and immediately start gathering interested people.</p>
<p>Step 3: Document &gt; Create</p>
<p>Stop overthinking and start sharing. Your audience doesn’t want perfect—they want connection. Share behind-the-scenes decisions, product picks, or packaging ideas. Let them vote, give input, and feel like they’re part of the journey. This builds trust and excitement long before you launch.</p>
<p>Step 4: Launch Messy</p>
<p>You are allowed to launch before it looks perfect. Some of the most successful subscription box owners I coach launched with no logo, just a waitlist, and 10 subscribers. What mattered wasn’t perfection—it was getting started.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Take Action</p>
<p>Your “homework” from this Friday Fuel is simple:</p>
<ol>
  <li>
<p>Pick your person.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Build a waitlist.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Share the behind-the-scenes.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Launch messy.</p>
</li>
</ol>
<p>You are more ready than you think. But the only way forward is to take the next step. Not someday – today.</p>
<p>Join me for this Friday Fuel episode of the <strong>Launch Your Box Podcast</strong>, where I’ll walk you through four simple steps to start your subscription box <em>now</em>. Yep, even before you think you’re ready.</p>
<p><br>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>581</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7024f16e-91d2-11f0-bac8-87abc154012b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9210412409.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>5 Reasons Why You Should Start a Subscription Box Right Now</title>
      <description>You can turn on the news and see what’s happening with our economy. Big box retailers are closing, small businesses are shutting their doors. Yet I’m here to tell you NOW is the right time to start a subscription box. Why? 

The answer is simple. 

People are buying. I see it every day in my own business. I saw it during my recent very successful launch. And I have the honor of working every day with subscription box owners who are launching and growing their subscription box businesses. 

Adding a recurring revenue stream to your business adds a layer of stability, predictability, and security that most businesses don’t have. 

The subscription box industry reached $22.7 billion by the end of 2021 and is expected to more than triple that number by 2027! Inside those numbers, the most popular types of subscriptions were replenishment subscriptions (think dog food or shaving supplies) and curation subscriptions (like my Monogram Box™).

In a recent Wall Street Journal article, I read that 25% of online shoppers have subscribed to one or more subscription services to receive products on a recurring basis. 25% of shoppers! The article cited niche markets as one of the biggest areas of opportunity and emphasized the importance of providing high-quality experiences to retain subscribers. 

To recap, this article showed me: 


  The subscription box market is still growing - rapidly. It’s time to get in! 

  ¼ of all online shippers have had a subscription - they understand this model. 

  It’s all about convenience and the experience - it’s not about the stuff. 

  The riches are in the niches. (I know you’ve heard me say that before!)


So, why should you start a subscription right now? 


  You don’t have to constantly sell. 

  If you have a physical shop and don’t open, you don’t make any income.

  You’re able to create raving fans. 

  Your subscribers will be your biggest fans, buying almost anything you sell. 

  The product you are investing in is already sold. 

  Relieve the stress and pressure of buying products you might have to mark down later. 

  You get to create a box and experience you are passionate about. 

  Being passionate about your business helps you show up. 

  You get to love what you do and treat people to a carefully curated experience. 

  You get consistent revenue hitting your bank account. 


It’s not too late to get in the game. Not by a long shot. Have you listened to episode 158 yet? In it, Launch Your Box member Bev of Bless-ed Be Boutique talks about how she retired, got bored, then six months later started her subscription box, selling out her first launch. Or episode 147 where you’ll meet Megan. She thought about starting a box for a long time. It wasn’t until she bought my book, One Box at a Time, and read it cover to cover in just a couple of days that she took action. Megan launched her subscription box three weeks later - and sold out! 

Your time is now. Stop waiting, stop wishing, and start building a business you can make an income from. 

Have you been sitting on your subscription box idea for too long? Join me for this episode for 5 reasons to get it started right now. It’s time to stop sitting on the sidelines and start taking action.  



⁠Episode 158 - It’s NEVER Too Late to Start⁠

⁠Episode 147 - From Idea to Sold-Out Launch in 3 Weeks⁠

⁠One Box at a Time⁠



Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join ⁠today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 17 Sep 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Have you been sitting on your subscription box idea for too long? Join me for this episode for 5 reasons to get it started right now. It’s time to stop sitting on the sidelines and start taking action.  </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>You can turn on the news and see what’s happening with our economy. Big box retailers are closing, small businesses are shutting their doors. Yet I’m here to tell you NOW is the right time to start a subscription box. Why? 

The answer is simple. 

People are buying. I see it every day in my own business. I saw it during my recent very successful launch. And I have the honor of working every day with subscription box owners who are launching and growing their subscription box businesses. 

Adding a recurring revenue stream to your business adds a layer of stability, predictability, and security that most businesses don’t have. 

The subscription box industry reached $22.7 billion by the end of 2021 and is expected to more than triple that number by 2027! Inside those numbers, the most popular types of subscriptions were replenishment subscriptions (think dog food or shaving supplies) and curation subscriptions (like my Monogram Box™).

In a recent Wall Street Journal article, I read that 25% of online shoppers have subscribed to one or more subscription services to receive products on a recurring basis. 25% of shoppers! The article cited niche markets as one of the biggest areas of opportunity and emphasized the importance of providing high-quality experiences to retain subscribers. 

To recap, this article showed me: 


  The subscription box market is still growing - rapidly. It’s time to get in! 

  ¼ of all online shippers have had a subscription - they understand this model. 

  It’s all about convenience and the experience - it’s not about the stuff. 

  The riches are in the niches. (I know you’ve heard me say that before!)


So, why should you start a subscription right now? 


  You don’t have to constantly sell. 

  If you have a physical shop and don’t open, you don’t make any income.

  You’re able to create raving fans. 

  Your subscribers will be your biggest fans, buying almost anything you sell. 

  The product you are investing in is already sold. 

  Relieve the stress and pressure of buying products you might have to mark down later. 

  You get to create a box and experience you are passionate about. 

  Being passionate about your business helps you show up. 

  You get to love what you do and treat people to a carefully curated experience. 

  You get consistent revenue hitting your bank account. 


It’s not too late to get in the game. Not by a long shot. Have you listened to episode 158 yet? In it, Launch Your Box member Bev of Bless-ed Be Boutique talks about how she retired, got bored, then six months later started her subscription box, selling out her first launch. Or episode 147 where you’ll meet Megan. She thought about starting a box for a long time. It wasn’t until she bought my book, One Box at a Time, and read it cover to cover in just a couple of days that she took action. Megan launched her subscription box three weeks later - and sold out! 

Your time is now. Stop waiting, stop wishing, and start building a business you can make an income from. 

Have you been sitting on your subscription box idea for too long? Join me for this episode for 5 reasons to get it started right now. It’s time to stop sitting on the sidelines and start taking action.  



⁠Episode 158 - It’s NEVER Too Late to Start⁠

⁠Episode 147 - From Idea to Sold-Out Launch in 3 Weeks⁠

⁠One Box at a Time⁠



Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join ⁠today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>You can turn on the news and see what’s happening with our economy. Big box retailers are closing, small businesses are shutting their doors. Yet I’m here to tell you NOW is the right time to start a subscription box. Why? </p>
<p>The answer is simple. </p>
<p>People are buying. I see it every day in my own business. I saw it during my recent very successful launch. And I have the honor of working every day with subscription box owners who are launching and growing their subscription box businesses. </p>
<p>Adding a recurring revenue stream to your business adds a layer of stability, predictability, and security that most businesses don’t have. </p>
<p>The subscription box industry reached $22.7 billion by the end of 2021 and is expected to more than triple that number by 2027! Inside those numbers, the most popular types of subscriptions were replenishment subscriptions (think dog food or shaving supplies) and curation subscriptions (like my Monogram Box™).</p>
<p>In a recent Wall Street Journal article, I read that 25% of online shoppers have subscribed to one or more subscription services to receive products on a recurring basis. 25% of shoppers! The article cited niche markets as one of the biggest areas of opportunity and emphasized the importance of providing high-quality experiences to retain subscribers. </p>
<p>To recap, this article showed me: </p>
<ul>
  <li>The subscription box market is still growing - rapidly. It’s time to get in! </li>
  <li>¼ of all online shippers have had a subscription - they understand this model. </li>
  <li>It’s all about convenience and the experience - it’s not about the stuff. </li>
  <li>The riches are in the niches. (I know you’ve heard me say that before!)</li>
</ul>
<p>So, why should you start a subscription right now? </p>
<ul>
  <li>You don’t have to constantly sell. </li>
  <li>If you have a physical shop and don’t open, you don’t make any income.</li>
  <li>You’re able to create raving fans. </li>
  <li>Your subscribers will be your biggest fans, buying almost anything you sell. </li>
  <li>The product you are investing in is already sold. </li>
  <li>Relieve the stress and pressure of buying products you might have to mark down later. </li>
  <li>You get to create a box and experience you are passionate about. </li>
  <li>Being passionate about your business helps you show up. </li>
  <li>You get to love what you do and treat people to a carefully curated experience. </li>
  <li>You get consistent revenue hitting your bank account. </li>
</ul>
<p>It’s not too late to get in the game. Not by a long shot. Have you listened to episode 158 yet? In it, Launch Your Box member Bev of Bless-ed Be Boutique talks about how she retired, got bored, then six months later started her subscription box, selling out her first launch. Or episode 147 where you’ll meet Megan. She thought about starting a box for a long time. It wasn’t until she bought my book, <em>One Box at a Time,</em> and read it cover to cover in just a couple of days that she took action. Megan launched her subscription box three weeks later - and sold out! </p>
<p>Your time is now. Stop waiting, stop wishing, and start building a business you can make an income from. </p>
<p>Have you been sitting on your subscription box idea for too long? Join me for this episode for 5 reasons to get it started right now. It’s time to stop sitting on the sidelines and start taking action.  </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/it-s-never-too-late-to-start-from-retirement-to-subscription-box-owner-ep-158">⁠Episode 158 - It’s NEVER Too Late to Start⁠</a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/from-idea-to-a-sold-out-launch-in-3-weeks-with-sweet-tea-living-ep-147">⁠Episode 147 - From Idea to Sold-Out Launch in 3 Weeks⁠</a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/one-box-at-a-time">⁠<em>One Box at a Time</em>⁠</a></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Join ⁠</a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1003</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[12351138-91d2-11f0-8eb2-7bc17464638b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4886746136.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>220: The 3 Most Important Habits for a New Product Business Owner</title>
      <description>Starting a product-based business, especially a subscription box, can feel overwhelming. There’s so much to learn, so much to do, and so many voices telling you the “right” way to start.

Building a strong, sustainable business doesn’t come down to fancy strategies or big investments. It comes down to the small, steady habits you create from the very beginning.

In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing the three habits I wish someone had told me about when I started my subscription box business. 

These habits don’t cost a dime, but they’ll help you build momentum, confidence, and subscribers.

Habit #1: Consistency Over Perfection

Perfection doesn’t get you paid. Consistency does.

Too many business owners wait until things are perfect before they show up. But your audience isn’t looking for perfect. They’re looking for YOU.

Consistency means:


  
Posting on social three times a week



  
Sending that weekly email (even if you’re not sure what to say)



  
Talking about your product, even if no one seems to be listening yet



  
Shipping your box on time, even if your insert card isn’t exactly what you wanted




When you show up consistently, people start paying attention. You learn faster. You build confidence. Done and shipped is always better than perfect and never launched.









Talking about your product looks like:


  
Behind-the-scenes footage while packing boxes



  
Sharing customer reviews or unboxing stories



  
Going live to show what’s inside this month’s box



  
Reminding your audience when the waitlist or doors are open




Take Action: Open your Instagram Stories and talk about your product today. Keep it casual. Keep it personal. It doesn’t need to be perfect.







Start by noticing:


  
Which Instagram posts get the most engagement



  
Which emails have the highest open or click rates



  
How many people click on your waitlist link when you post it




Tracking helps you stop wasting time on what’s not working, and it shows you what to double down on. Something as simple as jotting notes in a Google Doc can completely change the way you grow.

Take Action: Pick one thing to track this week. Maybe it’s DM responses to a story, or clicks on a post. Write it down.

You don’t need to wait until you have it all figured out to get started. Build these habits now, and your future self will thank you.

In this Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing three simple habits that will help you stop overthinking, start showing up with confidence, and build the foundation for a subscription box business that grows month after month.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 12 Sep 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The 3 Most Important Habits for a New Product Business Owner</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>220</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing three simple habits that will help you stop overthinking, start showing up with confidence, and build the foundation for a subscription box business that grows month after month.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Starting a product-based business, especially a subscription box, can feel overwhelming. There’s so much to learn, so much to do, and so many voices telling you the “right” way to start.

Building a strong, sustainable business doesn’t come down to fancy strategies or big investments. It comes down to the small, steady habits you create from the very beginning.

In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing the three habits I wish someone had told me about when I started my subscription box business. 

These habits don’t cost a dime, but they’ll help you build momentum, confidence, and subscribers.

Habit #1: Consistency Over Perfection

Perfection doesn’t get you paid. Consistency does.

Too many business owners wait until things are perfect before they show up. But your audience isn’t looking for perfect. They’re looking for YOU.

Consistency means:


  
Posting on social three times a week



  
Sending that weekly email (even if you’re not sure what to say)



  
Talking about your product, even if no one seems to be listening yet



  
Shipping your box on time, even if your insert card isn’t exactly what you wanted




When you show up consistently, people start paying attention. You learn faster. You build confidence. Done and shipped is always better than perfect and never launched.









Talking about your product looks like:


  
Behind-the-scenes footage while packing boxes



  
Sharing customer reviews or unboxing stories



  
Going live to show what’s inside this month’s box



  
Reminding your audience when the waitlist or doors are open




Take Action: Open your Instagram Stories and talk about your product today. Keep it casual. Keep it personal. It doesn’t need to be perfect.







Start by noticing:


  
Which Instagram posts get the most engagement



  
Which emails have the highest open or click rates



  
How many people click on your waitlist link when you post it




Tracking helps you stop wasting time on what’s not working, and it shows you what to double down on. Something as simple as jotting notes in a Google Doc can completely change the way you grow.

Take Action: Pick one thing to track this week. Maybe it’s DM responses to a story, or clicks on a post. Write it down.

You don’t need to wait until you have it all figured out to get started. Build these habits now, and your future self will thank you.

In this Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing three simple habits that will help you stop overthinking, start showing up with confidence, and build the foundation for a subscription box business that grows month after month.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Starting a product-based business, especially a subscription box, can feel overwhelming. There’s so much to learn, so much to do, and so many voices telling you the “right” way to start.</p>
<p>Building a strong, sustainable business doesn’t come down to fancy strategies or big investments. It comes down to the small, steady habits you create from the very beginning.</p>
<p>In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing the three habits I wish someone had told me about when I started my subscription box business. </p>
<p>These habits don’t cost a dime, but they’ll help you build momentum, confidence, and subscribers.</p>
<p>Habit #1: Consistency Over Perfection</p>
<p>Perfection doesn’t get you paid. Consistency does.</p>
<p>Too many business owners wait until things are perfect before they show up. But your audience isn’t looking for perfect. They’re looking for YOU.</p>
<p>Consistency means:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Posting on social three times a week</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Sending that weekly email (even if you’re not sure what to say)</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Talking about your product, even if no one seems to be listening yet</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Shipping your box on time, even if your insert card isn’t exactly what you wanted</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>When you show up consistently, people start paying attention. You learn faster. You build confidence. Done and shipped is always better than perfect and never launched.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Talking about your product looks like:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Behind-the-scenes footage while packing boxes</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Sharing customer reviews or unboxing stories</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Going live to show what’s inside this month’s box</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Reminding your audience when the waitlist or doors are open</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Take Action:</strong> Open your Instagram Stories and talk about your product today. Keep it casual. Keep it personal. It doesn’t need to be perfect.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Start by noticing:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Which Instagram posts get the most engagement</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Which emails have the highest open or click rates</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>How many people click on your waitlist link when you post it</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Tracking helps you stop wasting time on what’s not working, and it shows you what to double down on. Something as simple as jotting notes in a Google Doc can completely change the way you grow.</p>
<p><strong>Take Action:</strong> Pick one thing to track this week. Maybe it’s DM responses to a story, or clicks on a post. Write it down.</p>
<p>You don’t need to wait until you have it all figured out to get started. Build these habits now, and your future self will thank you.</p>
<p>In this Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing three simple habits that will help you stop overthinking, start showing up with confidence, and build the foundation for a subscription box business that grows month after month.</p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a></p>
</li>
</ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>808</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6d85fdb8-8d2c-11f0-9458-d340508cee6e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9181925551.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Give Yourself a Raise with a Subscription Box Side Hustle</title>
      <description>What would an extra $1000 every month mean to you and your family?  

Inflation. Waiting for a raise that might not happen. So many people are looking for ways to earn extra income right now. Today I’m talking about how a subscription box side hustle could bring an extra $1000 a month to your family - with only 50 subscribers. 

A subscription box business can be a full-time business. But it doesn’t have to be. Many members of Launch Your Box have full-time, 9-5 style jobs and successful subscription box side hustles. They are nurse practitioners, teachers, certified registered nurse anesthetists, hair stylists, realtors, dentists, and more. They’re also subscription box owners who bring in additional income with their side hustles. 

You can, too! Let’s do the math. If you have 50 subscribers and make $20 of profit per box, that’s an extra $1000 going into your bank account every month. 

Of course, it’s going to take time and effort to get there. But following these six steps will have you well on your way to a successful subscription box side hustle. 

 


  Identify what you like or have an interest in.


 


  

  Make sure it’s something you’re good at or have expertise in. 

  

  You have to be passionate about the subject matter or it won’t last! 

  

  Don’t try to be like anyone else - YOU will set your subscription box apart.  

  


 


  Ask yourself if there are other people around you with the same interest. 


 


  

  That’s the audience you need to build! 

  

  Where can you find more of those people? 

  

  Where do they hang out online? 

  


 


  Start a social media account(s) on the platforms where your people hang out.


 


  

  Start sharing videos, posts, etc. 

  

  Ask your friends to like your page and share it with their friends. 

  

  Make sure you’re speaking the language of the person you are trying to attract. Messaging matters! 

  


 


  Run a giveaway.


 


  

  Use Kingsumo (it’s FREE!) 

  

  The prize needs to be a box just like what you want to sell. 

  

  Capture emails for those who enter your giveaway and start building your email list. 

  


 


  Introduce the idea for the box to your audience.


 


  

  Get their feedback and have them help you make decisions.  

  

  You want their buy-in to validate your concept. 

  

  Niche down if needed. 

  


 


  Set a launch date and a goal. 


 


  

  Create excitement and generate buzz. 

  

  Get your new audience excited about the upcoming box! 

  


Engaging your audience is key at every stage of your subscription box journey, whether it’s your full-time gig or a side hustle. Continue to ask for feedback as you grow. Maintain an ongoing focus on audience building and keep serving your audience! 



Join me for this episode as I talk about why a subscription box side hustle might be right for you and the six steps you need to take in order to make yours a success. The kind of success that means significant additional income - every month! 

Important Links: 


  

  
⁠ 6 in 60 Workshop⁠ - Sarah’s Method for Curating 6 Subscription Boxes in 60 Minutes


Join me in all the places: 


  

  ⁠Facebook⁠

  

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  

  

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 

  


 

Are you ready for ⁠ Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠ Join the waitlist⁠ today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 10 Sep 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as I talk about why a subscription box side hustle might be right for you and the six steps you need to take in order to make yours a success. The kind of success that means significant additional income - every month! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What would an extra $1000 every month mean to you and your family?  

Inflation. Waiting for a raise that might not happen. So many people are looking for ways to earn extra income right now. Today I’m talking about how a subscription box side hustle could bring an extra $1000 a month to your family - with only 50 subscribers. 

A subscription box business can be a full-time business. But it doesn’t have to be. Many members of Launch Your Box have full-time, 9-5 style jobs and successful subscription box side hustles. They are nurse practitioners, teachers, certified registered nurse anesthetists, hair stylists, realtors, dentists, and more. They’re also subscription box owners who bring in additional income with their side hustles. 

You can, too! Let’s do the math. If you have 50 subscribers and make $20 of profit per box, that’s an extra $1000 going into your bank account every month. 

Of course, it’s going to take time and effort to get there. But following these six steps will have you well on your way to a successful subscription box side hustle. 

 


  Identify what you like or have an interest in.


 


  

  Make sure it’s something you’re good at or have expertise in. 

  

  You have to be passionate about the subject matter or it won’t last! 

  

  Don’t try to be like anyone else - YOU will set your subscription box apart.  

  


 


  Ask yourself if there are other people around you with the same interest. 


 


  

  That’s the audience you need to build! 

  

  Where can you find more of those people? 

  

  Where do they hang out online? 

  


 


  Start a social media account(s) on the platforms where your people hang out.


 


  

  Start sharing videos, posts, etc. 

  

  Ask your friends to like your page and share it with their friends. 

  

  Make sure you’re speaking the language of the person you are trying to attract. Messaging matters! 

  


 


  Run a giveaway.


 


  

  Use Kingsumo (it’s FREE!) 

  

  The prize needs to be a box just like what you want to sell. 

  

  Capture emails for those who enter your giveaway and start building your email list. 

  


 


  Introduce the idea for the box to your audience.


 


  

  Get their feedback and have them help you make decisions.  

  

  You want their buy-in to validate your concept. 

  

  Niche down if needed. 

  


 


  Set a launch date and a goal. 


 


  

  Create excitement and generate buzz. 

  

  Get your new audience excited about the upcoming box! 

  


Engaging your audience is key at every stage of your subscription box journey, whether it’s your full-time gig or a side hustle. Continue to ask for feedback as you grow. Maintain an ongoing focus on audience building and keep serving your audience! 



Join me for this episode as I talk about why a subscription box side hustle might be right for you and the six steps you need to take in order to make yours a success. The kind of success that means significant additional income - every month! 

Important Links: 


  

  
⁠ 6 in 60 Workshop⁠ - Sarah’s Method for Curating 6 Subscription Boxes in 60 Minutes


Join me in all the places: 


  

  ⁠Facebook⁠

  

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  

  

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 

  


 

Are you ready for ⁠ Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠ Join the waitlist⁠ today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What would an extra $1000 every month mean to you and your family?  </p>
<p>Inflation. Waiting for a raise that might not happen. So many people are looking for ways to earn extra income right now. Today I’m talking about how a subscription box side hustle could bring an extra $1000 a month to your family - with only 50 subscribers. </p>
<p>A subscription box business can be a full-time business. But it doesn’t have to be. Many members of Launch Your Box have full-time, 9-5 style jobs <em>and</em> successful subscription box side hustles. They are nurse practitioners, teachers, certified registered nurse anesthetists, hair stylists, realtors, dentists, and more. They’re also subscription box owners who bring in additional income with their side hustles. </p>
<p>You can, too! Let’s do the math. If you have 50 subscribers and make $20 of profit per box, that’s an extra $1000 going into your bank account <em>every month. </em></p>
<p>Of course, it’s going to take time and effort to get there. But following these six steps will have you well on your way to a successful subscription box side hustle. </p>
<p> </p>
<ul>
  <li>Identify what you like or have an interest in.</li>
</ul>
<p> </p>
<ul>
  <li><br></li>
  <li>Make sure it’s something you’re good at or have expertise in. </li>
  <li><br></li>
  <li>You have to be passionate about the subject matter or it won’t last! </li>
  <li><br></li>
  <li>Don’t try to be like anyone else - YOU will set your subscription box apart.  </li>
  <li><br></li>
</ul>
<p> </p>
<ul>
  <li>Ask yourself if there are other people around you with the same interest. </li>
</ul>
<p> </p>
<ul>
  <li><br></li>
  <li>That’s the audience you need to build! </li>
  <li><br></li>
  <li>Where can you find more of those people? </li>
  <li><br></li>
  <li>Where do they hang out online? </li>
  <li><br></li>
</ul>
<p> </p>
<ul>
  <li>Start a social media account(s) on the platforms where your people hang out.</li>
</ul>
<p> </p>
<ul>
  <li><br></li>
  <li>Start sharing videos, posts, etc. </li>
  <li><br></li>
  <li>Ask your friends to like your page and share it with their friends. </li>
  <li><br></li>
  <li>Make sure you’re speaking the language of the person you are trying to attract. Messaging matters! </li>
  <li><br></li>
</ul>
<p> </p>
<ul>
  <li>Run a giveaway.</li>
</ul>
<p> </p>
<ul>
  <li><br></li>
  <li>Use Kingsumo (it’s FREE!) </li>
  <li><br></li>
  <li>The prize needs to be a box just like what you want to sell. </li>
  <li><br></li>
  <li>Capture emails for those who enter your giveaway and start building your email list. </li>
  <li><br></li>
</ul>
<p> </p>
<ul>
  <li>Introduce the idea for the box to your audience.</li>
</ul>
<p> </p>
<ul>
  <li><br></li>
  <li>Get their feedback and have them help you make decisions.  </li>
  <li><br></li>
  <li>You want their buy-in to validate your concept. </li>
  <li><br></li>
  <li>Niche down if needed. </li>
  <li><br></li>
</ul>
<p> </p>
<ul>
  <li>Set a launch date and a goal. </li>
</ul>
<p> </p>
<ul>
  <li><br></li>
  <li>Create excitement and generate buzz. </li>
  <li><br></li>
  <li>Get your new audience excited about the upcoming box! </li>
  <li><br></li>
</ul>
<p>Engaging your audience is key at every stage of your subscription box journey, whether it’s your full-time gig or a side hustle. Continue to ask for feedback as you grow. Maintain an ongoing focus on audience building and keep serving your audience! </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me for this episode as I talk about why a subscription box side hustle might be right for you and the six steps you need to take in order to make yours a success. The kind of success that means significant additional income - every month! </p>
<p>Important Links: </p>
<ul>
  <li><br></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e">⁠ 6 in 60 Workshop⁠</a> - Sarah’s Method for Curating 6 Subscription Boxes in 60 Minutes</li>
</ul>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><br></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></li>
  <li><br></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></li>
  <li><br></li>
  <li><br></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </li>
  <li><br></li>
</ul>
<p> </p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">⁠ Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">⁠ Join the waitlist⁠</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1338</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ee0f44e0-8d2b-11f0-8db1-3b0061193319]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3765582393.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>219: You’re Sitting on Subscription Box Gold and Don’t Even Know It</title>
      <description>Have you been stuck in “idea mode” for too long? Waiting for the perfect time, the perfect audience, or the perfect setup before you launch your subscription box?



The truth is you already have what you need. You’re sitting on subscription box gold, and chances are, you don’t even realize it.



You Don’t Need “More” to Get Started



So many aspiring subscription box owners tell me:


  
“I don’t have a big enough audience.”



  
“I’m not good at tech.”



  
“I don’t have a warehouse.”



  
“I wouldn’t even know what to put in the box.”




But here’s what I want you to hear loud and clear: you already have enough to get started.














  
Products: Your bestsellers, your signature pieces, or items that reflect who you are can all go into your box.



  
Audience: A small, engaged community is the perfect place to launch.



  
Niche: Serving one person really well beats trying to serve everyone. Teachers, moms, nurses, faith-based buyers, busy women… your box can be their monthly solution.




A successful subscription box isn’t about inventing something brand new. It’s about packaging what already works.

A one-time sale resets you to zero the next day. A subscription sale happens again month after month. That’s recurring revenue. And it changes everything.



With recurring revenue, you can:


  
Plan ahead with confidence.



  
Order smarter.



  
Hire help.



  
Pay yourself consistently.




Inside Launch Your Box, I’ve watched entrepreneurs build six-figure businesses just by turning what they already had into a subscription model.

If you’ve been waiting until your follower count grows, your website is perfect, or you’ve got the “right” space… stop.



No one starts with all the things. Every successful subscription box owner I’ve worked with started small, messy, and unsure. The difference? They started.



You’re sitting on gold. The only question is will you use it?

It’s time to stop waiting and start building. Take a step forward this week:


  
Gather your best products.



  
Connect with the people who already follow you.



  
Name the one person you’re serving.




And if you want help turning your “gold” into real growth, come join me inside Launch Your Box. That’s where we take ideas and turn them into businesses that last.



Take action today. Your subscription box gold is waiting.

In this Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down how to stop waiting, start recognizing what you already have, and finally build the subscription box that can bring you the recurring revenue you’ve been dreaming about.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 05 Sep 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>You’re Sitting on Subscription Box Gold and Don’t Even Know It</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>219</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle> In this Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down how to stop waiting, start recognizing what you already have, and finally build the subscription box that can bring you the recurring revenue you’ve been dreaming about.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you been stuck in “idea mode” for too long? Waiting for the perfect time, the perfect audience, or the perfect setup before you launch your subscription box?



The truth is you already have what you need. You’re sitting on subscription box gold, and chances are, you don’t even realize it.



You Don’t Need “More” to Get Started



So many aspiring subscription box owners tell me:


  
“I don’t have a big enough audience.”



  
“I’m not good at tech.”



  
“I don’t have a warehouse.”



  
“I wouldn’t even know what to put in the box.”




But here’s what I want you to hear loud and clear: you already have enough to get started.














  
Products: Your bestsellers, your signature pieces, or items that reflect who you are can all go into your box.



  
Audience: A small, engaged community is the perfect place to launch.



  
Niche: Serving one person really well beats trying to serve everyone. Teachers, moms, nurses, faith-based buyers, busy women… your box can be their monthly solution.




A successful subscription box isn’t about inventing something brand new. It’s about packaging what already works.

A one-time sale resets you to zero the next day. A subscription sale happens again month after month. That’s recurring revenue. And it changes everything.



With recurring revenue, you can:


  
Plan ahead with confidence.



  
Order smarter.



  
Hire help.



  
Pay yourself consistently.




Inside Launch Your Box, I’ve watched entrepreneurs build six-figure businesses just by turning what they already had into a subscription model.

If you’ve been waiting until your follower count grows, your website is perfect, or you’ve got the “right” space… stop.



No one starts with all the things. Every successful subscription box owner I’ve worked with started small, messy, and unsure. The difference? They started.



You’re sitting on gold. The only question is will you use it?

It’s time to stop waiting and start building. Take a step forward this week:


  
Gather your best products.



  
Connect with the people who already follow you.



  
Name the one person you’re serving.




And if you want help turning your “gold” into real growth, come join me inside Launch Your Box. That’s where we take ideas and turn them into businesses that last.



Take action today. Your subscription box gold is waiting.

In this Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down how to stop waiting, start recognizing what you already have, and finally build the subscription box that can bring you the recurring revenue you’ve been dreaming about.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you been stuck in “idea mode” for too long? Waiting for the perfect time, the perfect audience, or the perfect setup before you launch your subscription box?</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>The truth is you already have what you need. You’re sitting on subscription box gold, and chances are, you don’t even realize it.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You Don’t Need “More” to Get Started</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>So many aspiring subscription box owners tell me:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>“I don’t have a big enough audience.”</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>“I’m not good at tech.”</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>“I don’t have a warehouse.”</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>“I wouldn’t even know what to put in the box.”</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>But here’s what I want you to hear loud and clear: <strong>you already have enough to get started.</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><strong>Products:</strong> Your bestsellers, your signature pieces, or items that reflect who you are can all go into your box.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Audience:</strong> A small, engaged community is the perfect place to launch.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Niche:</strong> Serving one person really well beats trying to serve everyone. Teachers, moms, nurses, faith-based buyers, busy women… your box can be their monthly solution.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>A successful subscription box isn’t about inventing something brand new. It’s about packaging what already works.</p>
<p><br>A one-time sale resets you to zero the next day. A subscription sale happens again month after month. That’s recurring revenue. And it changes everything.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>With recurring revenue, you can:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Plan ahead with confidence.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Order smarter.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Hire help.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Pay yourself consistently.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Inside Launch Your Box, I’ve watched entrepreneurs build six-figure businesses just by turning what they already had into a subscription model.</p>
<p><br>If you’ve been waiting until your follower count grows, your website is perfect, or you’ve got the “right” space… stop.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>No one starts with all the things. Every successful subscription box owner I’ve worked with started small, messy, and unsure. The difference? They started.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You’re sitting on gold. The only question is will you use it?</p>
<p><br>It’s time to stop waiting and start building. Take a step forward this week:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Gather your best products.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Connect with the people who already follow you.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Name the one person you’re serving.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>And if you want help turning your “gold” into real growth, come join me inside Launch Your Box. That’s where we take ideas and turn them into businesses that last.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Take action today. Your subscription box gold is waiting.</strong></p>
<p><br>In this Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down how to stop waiting, start recognizing what you already have, and finally build the subscription box that can bring you the recurring revenue you’ve been dreaming about.<br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! <br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>561</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[fe21fb7a-86e6-11f0-8aa2-3b6296879817]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7245248467.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>218: Are You Charging Enough for Your Subscription Box?</title>
      <description>You work hard to curate, pack, and ship your subscription box each month. But when you check your bank account, the numbers don’t add up. Sound familiar?



If you’ve been wondering why you’re selling more boxes but still struggling with cash flow or not paying yourself, it’s time to get serious about your pricing.



So many subscription box owners start out underpricing, and it’s not always intentional. You want to be affordable. You don’t want to scare people away. You tell yourself you’ll raise prices later.



Underpricing is costing you more than you think.



When you forget about packaging, shipping materials, transaction fees, your time, and even damages or reships, your “$10 profit” can quickly become $6… or nothing at all. Month after month, that tight margin leaves you stressed, resentful, and unable to grow.



Take Action: Audit your current price vs. your real total cost per box. Include everything: include tape, inserts, and your time.



Most box owners price from the bottom up. They add up products, tack on shipping, and call it good. But that strategy sets you up to struggle.



Instead, flip it around: start with your margin goals and build your box to fit.



If you charge $50 per box, that means your total cost (products, packaging, shipping, fees, fulfillment) should be no more than $20-$27.50. Once you know your limit, you can source and curate accordingly.



Take Action: Reverse-engineer your price. Decide your profit margin first, then set your product budget.

Even if your pricing looks solid, hidden costs can eat away at your profits. Things like:


  
Transaction fees (PayPal, Shopify, Stripe)



  
Shipping materials (not just postage)



  
Software and subscriptions (Klaviyo, Canva, Shopify)



  
Labor, including YOURS



  
Returns, damages, and inventory overages



  
“Small” surprises and freebies




These add up fast, especially as you grow. If you don’t account for them, your margin disappears.



Take Action: Do a hidden cost audit this week. Write down every recurring business expense and calculate what it costs you per box.

Realizing your price isn’t sustainable can feel scary. But raising prices doesn’t mean failure, it means leadership.


  
Be transparent with your subscribers about the reason for the increase.



  
Give them 30–45 days’ notice.



  
Decide if you’ll grandfather in current subscribers.



  
Consider a tiered option if needed.




Yes, you may lose a few subscribers. But the ones who stay will actually be profitable, and that’s how you build a business that lasts.



Profitable businesses don’t just change your life. They make it possible for you to keep serving your subscribers for years to come.



Take Action: Choose your new price based on margin goals, set an effective date, and start your communication plan.

You didn’t start your subscription box to break even. You started it to make an impact, create income, and build freedom. But that only happens if your pricing supports your profit. 



Download the free Box Budget Worksheet and run your numbers today. This tool makes it simple to plug in your costs, your price, and see exactly where you stand.



In this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m walking you through the real cost of underpricing, how to set profit margin goals that actually work, and what to do if you need to raise your prices. 



Download the Box Budget Worksheet here: https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/my-box-budget

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 03 Sep 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Are You Charging Enough for Your Subscription Box?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>218</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m walking you through the real cost of underpricing, how to set profit margin goals that actually work, and what to do if you need to raise your prices. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>You work hard to curate, pack, and ship your subscription box each month. But when you check your bank account, the numbers don’t add up. Sound familiar?



If you’ve been wondering why you’re selling more boxes but still struggling with cash flow or not paying yourself, it’s time to get serious about your pricing.



So many subscription box owners start out underpricing, and it’s not always intentional. You want to be affordable. You don’t want to scare people away. You tell yourself you’ll raise prices later.



Underpricing is costing you more than you think.



When you forget about packaging, shipping materials, transaction fees, your time, and even damages or reships, your “$10 profit” can quickly become $6… or nothing at all. Month after month, that tight margin leaves you stressed, resentful, and unable to grow.



Take Action: Audit your current price vs. your real total cost per box. Include everything: include tape, inserts, and your time.



Most box owners price from the bottom up. They add up products, tack on shipping, and call it good. But that strategy sets you up to struggle.



Instead, flip it around: start with your margin goals and build your box to fit.



If you charge $50 per box, that means your total cost (products, packaging, shipping, fees, fulfillment) should be no more than $20-$27.50. Once you know your limit, you can source and curate accordingly.



Take Action: Reverse-engineer your price. Decide your profit margin first, then set your product budget.

Even if your pricing looks solid, hidden costs can eat away at your profits. Things like:


  
Transaction fees (PayPal, Shopify, Stripe)



  
Shipping materials (not just postage)



  
Software and subscriptions (Klaviyo, Canva, Shopify)



  
Labor, including YOURS



  
Returns, damages, and inventory overages



  
“Small” surprises and freebies




These add up fast, especially as you grow. If you don’t account for them, your margin disappears.



Take Action: Do a hidden cost audit this week. Write down every recurring business expense and calculate what it costs you per box.

Realizing your price isn’t sustainable can feel scary. But raising prices doesn’t mean failure, it means leadership.


  
Be transparent with your subscribers about the reason for the increase.



  
Give them 30–45 days’ notice.



  
Decide if you’ll grandfather in current subscribers.



  
Consider a tiered option if needed.




Yes, you may lose a few subscribers. But the ones who stay will actually be profitable, and that’s how you build a business that lasts.



Profitable businesses don’t just change your life. They make it possible for you to keep serving your subscribers for years to come.



Take Action: Choose your new price based on margin goals, set an effective date, and start your communication plan.

You didn’t start your subscription box to break even. You started it to make an impact, create income, and build freedom. But that only happens if your pricing supports your profit. 



Download the free Box Budget Worksheet and run your numbers today. This tool makes it simple to plug in your costs, your price, and see exactly where you stand.



In this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m walking you through the real cost of underpricing, how to set profit margin goals that actually work, and what to do if you need to raise your prices. 



Download the Box Budget Worksheet here: https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/my-box-budget

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>You work hard to curate, pack, and ship your subscription box each month. But when you check your bank account, the numbers don’t add up. Sound familiar?</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you’ve been wondering why you’re selling more boxes but still struggling with cash flow or not paying yourself, it’s time to get serious about your pricing.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>So many subscription box owners start out underpricing, and it’s not always intentional. You want to be affordable. You don’t want to scare people away. You tell yourself you’ll raise prices later.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Underpricing is costing you more than you think.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>When you forget about packaging, shipping materials, transaction fees, your time, and even damages or reships, your “$10 profit” can quickly become $6… or nothing at all. Month after month, that tight margin leaves you stressed, resentful, and unable to grow.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Take Action:</strong> Audit your current price vs. your <em>real</em> total cost per box. Include everything: include tape, inserts, and your time.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Most box owners price from the bottom up. They add up products, tack on shipping, and call it good. But that strategy sets you up to struggle.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Instead, flip it around: <strong>start with your margin goals and build your box to fit.</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you charge $50 per box, that means your total cost (products, packaging, shipping, fees, fulfillment) should be no more than $20-$27.50. Once you know your limit, you can source and curate accordingly.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Take Action:</strong> Reverse-engineer your price. Decide your profit margin first, then set your product budget.</p>
<p><br>Even if your pricing looks solid, hidden costs can eat away at your profits. Things like:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Transaction fees (PayPal, Shopify, Stripe)</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Shipping materials (not just postage)</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Software and subscriptions (Klaviyo, Canva, Shopify)</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Labor, including YOURS</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Returns, damages, and inventory overages</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>“Small” surprises and freebies<br></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>These add up fast, especially as you grow. If you don’t account for them, your margin disappears.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Take Action:</strong> Do a hidden cost audit this week. Write down every recurring business expense and calculate what it costs you per box.</p>
<p><br>Realizing your price isn’t sustainable can feel scary. But raising prices doesn’t mean failure, it means leadership.</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Be transparent with your subscribers about the reason for the increase.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Give them 30–45 days’ notice.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Decide if you’ll grandfather in current subscribers.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Consider a tiered option if needed.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Yes, you may lose a few subscribers. But the ones who stay will actually be profitable, and that’s how you build a business that lasts.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Profitable businesses don’t just change your life. They make it possible for you to keep serving your subscribers for years to come.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Take Action:</strong> Choose your new price based on margin goals, set an effective date, and start your communication plan.</p>
<p><br>You didn’t start your subscription box to break even. You started it to make an impact, create income, and build freedom. But that only happens if your pricing supports your profit. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Download the free <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/my-box-budget"><strong>Box Budget Worksheet</strong><u> </u></a>and run your numbers today. This tool makes it simple to plug in your costs, your price, and see exactly where you stand.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m walking you through the real cost of underpricing, how to set profit margin goals that actually work, and what to do if you need to raise your prices. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/my-box-budget"><u>Download the Box Budget Worksheet here</u></a>: https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/my-box-budget</p>
<p><br>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! <br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2440</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[770414d4-86e6-11f0-b4c5-d30ff71ad3c4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8909203880.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>217: 5 Ways to Make Your Subscription Box More Consumable</title>
      <description>When a subscriber opens your box, do they instantly know what to do with what’s inside?

If the answer is “maybe” or “I’m not sure,” that’s a problem. Because when your box isn’t consumable, you’re leaving money – and retention – on the table.

In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down what it really means to create a consumable subscription box and why it matters so much for retention. Plus, I’ll share five practical ways you can make your box easier to use, more engaging, and more shareable.

What Does “Consumable” Really Mean?

When I say your box should be consumable, I don’t necessarily mean edible or disposable.

Consumable means your box invites action. Subscribers know exactly what to do with what’s inside. They can use it, style it, or enjoy it right away.


  
If it’s a craft box, can they see what the finished product should look like?



  
If it’s a self-care box, do they know how to use the items included?



  
If it’s a lifestyle box, can they imagine where the item fits into their daily life?




Without those cues, subscribers are left guessing—and unused items quickly become clutter.

Why Consumability Matters

Making your box consumable isn’t just a nice idea. It’s a proven retention tool that: 


  
Increases retention.When subscribers use what’s in your box, they don’t want to lose that experience by canceling.



  
Builds momentum.Engagement with this month’s box creates anticipation for the next one.



  
Sparks word-of-mouth.People love to share what they’re using – and loving.



  
Reduces “too much stuff” churn.Boxes don’t feel like clutter when everything inside is being used and enjoyed.




5 Ways to Make Your Box More Consumable

Make sure your subscription box gets used, not stuck on a shelf by: 


  
Including a visual outcome.Show the finished project, styled look, or end result—whether in your insert, your group, or on social media.



  
Offering a simple, actionable insert.A “Start Here” card or checklist keeps subscribers from feeling lost.



  
Tying each item to a moment.Suggest when or how to use it: “Style this for your next brunch date” or “Keep this at your desk for a mid-day boost.”



  
Removing friction.Label what needs labeling and explain anything that might cause confusion.



  
Being the influencer.Don’t just curate. Model the experience. Show up using your own products on social media, in your group, or in emails.




Before you send out your next box, run it through this quick audit:


  
If I gave this to a stranger, would they know what to do with it?



  
Can my subscriber use at least 70% of this box within 7 days?



  
Have I clearly shown or explained how to use each item?



  
Have I included visual or verbal cues that invite action?



  
Have I modeled the experience myself in photos, videos, or inserts?




If you can’t answer “yes” to at least four of those questions, you have an opportunity to level up before shipping day.

A consumable box is a retention strategy. If subscribers use the items in your box, they’ll want more. If they don’t, they’ll forget it.

Audit your next box by asking yourself these five questions and watch how much more your subscribers engage. Because the more they consume your box, the longer they’ll stick around.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




The 5-Question Consumability AuditYour Action StepAre you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 29 Aug 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>5 Ways to Make Your Subscription Box More Consumable</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>217</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down what it really means to create a consumable subscription box and why it matters so much for retention. Plus, I’ll share five practical ways you can make your box easier to use, more engaging, and more shareable.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>When a subscriber opens your box, do they instantly know what to do with what’s inside?

If the answer is “maybe” or “I’m not sure,” that’s a problem. Because when your box isn’t consumable, you’re leaving money – and retention – on the table.

In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down what it really means to create a consumable subscription box and why it matters so much for retention. Plus, I’ll share five practical ways you can make your box easier to use, more engaging, and more shareable.

What Does “Consumable” Really Mean?

When I say your box should be consumable, I don’t necessarily mean edible or disposable.

Consumable means your box invites action. Subscribers know exactly what to do with what’s inside. They can use it, style it, or enjoy it right away.


  
If it’s a craft box, can they see what the finished product should look like?



  
If it’s a self-care box, do they know how to use the items included?



  
If it’s a lifestyle box, can they imagine where the item fits into their daily life?




Without those cues, subscribers are left guessing—and unused items quickly become clutter.

Why Consumability Matters

Making your box consumable isn’t just a nice idea. It’s a proven retention tool that: 


  
Increases retention.When subscribers use what’s in your box, they don’t want to lose that experience by canceling.



  
Builds momentum.Engagement with this month’s box creates anticipation for the next one.



  
Sparks word-of-mouth.People love to share what they’re using – and loving.



  
Reduces “too much stuff” churn.Boxes don’t feel like clutter when everything inside is being used and enjoyed.




5 Ways to Make Your Box More Consumable

Make sure your subscription box gets used, not stuck on a shelf by: 


  
Including a visual outcome.Show the finished project, styled look, or end result—whether in your insert, your group, or on social media.



  
Offering a simple, actionable insert.A “Start Here” card or checklist keeps subscribers from feeling lost.



  
Tying each item to a moment.Suggest when or how to use it: “Style this for your next brunch date” or “Keep this at your desk for a mid-day boost.”



  
Removing friction.Label what needs labeling and explain anything that might cause confusion.



  
Being the influencer.Don’t just curate. Model the experience. Show up using your own products on social media, in your group, or in emails.




Before you send out your next box, run it through this quick audit:


  
If I gave this to a stranger, would they know what to do with it?



  
Can my subscriber use at least 70% of this box within 7 days?



  
Have I clearly shown or explained how to use each item?



  
Have I included visual or verbal cues that invite action?



  
Have I modeled the experience myself in photos, videos, or inserts?




If you can’t answer “yes” to at least four of those questions, you have an opportunity to level up before shipping day.

A consumable box is a retention strategy. If subscribers use the items in your box, they’ll want more. If they don’t, they’ll forget it.

Audit your next box by asking yourself these five questions and watch how much more your subscribers engage. Because the more they consume your box, the longer they’ll stick around.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




The 5-Question Consumability AuditYour Action StepAre you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>When a subscriber opens your box, do they instantly know what to do with what’s inside?</p>
<p>If the answer is “maybe” or “I’m not sure,” that’s a problem. Because when your box isn’t consumable, you’re leaving money – and retention – on the table.</p>
<p>In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down what it really means to create a consumable subscription box and why it matters so much for retention. Plus, I’ll share five practical ways you can make your box easier to use, more engaging, and more shareable.</p>
<p>What Does “Consumable” Really Mean?</p>
<p>When I say your box should be consumable, I don’t necessarily mean edible or disposable.</p>
<p>Consumable means your box invites action. Subscribers know exactly what to do with what’s inside. They can use it, style it, or enjoy it right away.</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>If it’s a craft box, can they see what the finished product should look like?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>If it’s a self-care box, do they know how to use the items included?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>If it’s a lifestyle box, can they imagine where the item fits into their daily life?</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Without those cues, subscribers are left guessing—and unused items quickly become clutter.</p>
<p>Why Consumability Matters</p>
<p>Making your box consumable isn’t just a nice idea. It’s a proven retention tool that: </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><strong>Increases retention.</strong>When subscribers use what’s in your box, they don’t want to lose that experience by canceling.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Builds momentum.</strong>Engagement with this month’s box creates anticipation for the next one.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Sparks word-of-mouth.</strong>People love to share what they’re using – and loving.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Reduces “too much stuff” churn.</strong>Boxes don’t feel like clutter when everything inside is being used and enjoyed.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>5 Ways to Make Your Box More Consumable</p>
<p>Make sure your subscription box gets used, not stuck on a shelf by: </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><strong>Including a visual outcome.</strong>Show the finished project, styled look, or end result—whether in your insert, your group, or on social media.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Offering a simple, actionable insert.</strong>A “Start Here” card or checklist keeps subscribers from feeling lost.<br></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Tying each item to a moment.</strong>Suggest when or how to use it: “Style this for your next brunch date” or “Keep this at your desk for a mid-day boost.”</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Removing friction.</strong>Label what needs labeling and explain anything that might cause confusion.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Being the influencer.</strong>Don’t just curate. Model the experience. Show up using your own products on social media, in your group, or in emails.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Before you send out your next box, run it through this quick audit:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>If I gave this to a stranger, would they know what to do with it?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Can my subscriber use at least 70% of this box within 7 days?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Have I clearly shown or explained how to use each item?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Have I included visual or verbal cues that invite action?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Have I modeled the experience myself in photos, videos, or inserts?</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>If you can’t answer “yes” to at least four of those questions, you have an opportunity to level up before shipping day.</p>
<p>A consumable box is a retention strategy. If subscribers use the items in your box, they’ll want more. If they don’t, they’ll forget it.</p>
<p>Audit your next box by asking yourself these five questions and watch how much more your subscribers engage. Because the more they consume your box, the longer they’ll stick around.</p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>The 5-Question Consumability AuditYour Action Step<br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>717</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[17d1ccce-8171-11f0-bad4-57d7a8b5ddc3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4256067419.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>216: Two Simple Strategies to Get Off the Sales Rollercoaster for Good</title>
      <description>If you’ve been in business for any length of time, you’ve probably felt it: the sales rollercoaster. One month you’re celebrating record sales, the next you’re staring at your numbers wondering how to make ends meet. It’s exhausting. And it’s not the way you want to run your business long term.



In this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m teaming up with Susan Bradley of the Social Sales Girls , an expert in brand collaborations, to share two powerful strategies that can help you finally step off that rollercoaster for good.



We’re talking about:


  
Why consistency matters when it comes to sales and cash flow.



  
Two proven pathways to consistency: growing your audience through collaborations and keeping customers buying through recurring revenue.



  
The biggest mistakes to avoid when starting with either strategy.



  
Simple, actionable tips you can take this week to start seeing results.






Why Consistency Matters



Most product-based business owners know the highs and lows all too well. Big spikes during launches or holidays, followed by long slow stretches. That’s stressful and unpredictable.



Consistency is what allows you to grow and scale. Consistent visibility brings in new customers, while recurring revenue keeps your cash flow steady month after month. You need both for a strong, sustainable business.



Pathway 1: Brand Collaborations 



When you collaborate, you don’t just expand your reach. You also build credibility by being introduced through someone your audience already trusts.



Take Action: Identify three businesses with a similar audience but a different product. Brainstorm a simple joint promotion to share with both audiences.



Pathway 2: Recurring Revenue with Subscription Boxes



Subscription boxes stabilize your revenue and keep customers coming back. A subscription box turns a one-time purchase into an ongoing relationship, giving your business the consistency you’ve been missing.



This strategy has transformed so many businesses, including mine. Predictable income means you can plan better, hire smarter, and focus on growth instead of chasing the next sale.



Take Action: Start with a product your customers already buy regularly and brainstorm how you could offer it in a subscription format.



Mistakes to Avoid



Even the best strategies can backfire if you approach them the wrong way.



Collaboration Mistakes:


  
Picking partners for their product instead of the audience they serve.



  
Not tracking and measuring results to see what’s really working.




Subscription Mistakes:


  
Overcomplicating your first box instead of starting simple.



  
Underpricing instead of building healthy profit margins from the start.




Ready to Go Deeper?



Susan is offering a Brand Collab Bootcamp where she’ll teach you how to find the right partners, pitch confidently, and create win-win promotions.



And if you’re ready to turn your products into predictable recurring revenue, join me for Subscription Box Coaching Week. I’ll help you outline what your subscription box could look like, how to position it, and how to create reliable monthly income. 



Offers mentioned:  

Brand Collab Bootcamp - starting September 8th 

Subscription Box Week - starting September 28th 



Where to find Susan: 


  
Brand Collab Bootcamp



  
Social Sales Girls on Facebook



  
The Social Sales Girls on Instagram



  
The Social Sales Girls Website 




Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 27 Aug 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Two Simple Strategies to Get Off the Sales Rollercoaster for Good</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>216</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We love seeing women entrepreneurs build businesses that bring freedom, stability, and joy. In this episode, you’ll hear simple, practical steps you can take right now to move off the sales rollercoaster and into consistent growth. Join me for this episode today and find out how collaborations and subscriptions can change the way you do business. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you’ve been in business for any length of time, you’ve probably felt it: the sales rollercoaster. One month you’re celebrating record sales, the next you’re staring at your numbers wondering how to make ends meet. It’s exhausting. And it’s not the way you want to run your business long term.



In this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m teaming up with Susan Bradley of the Social Sales Girls , an expert in brand collaborations, to share two powerful strategies that can help you finally step off that rollercoaster for good.



We’re talking about:


  
Why consistency matters when it comes to sales and cash flow.



  
Two proven pathways to consistency: growing your audience through collaborations and keeping customers buying through recurring revenue.



  
The biggest mistakes to avoid when starting with either strategy.



  
Simple, actionable tips you can take this week to start seeing results.






Why Consistency Matters



Most product-based business owners know the highs and lows all too well. Big spikes during launches or holidays, followed by long slow stretches. That’s stressful and unpredictable.



Consistency is what allows you to grow and scale. Consistent visibility brings in new customers, while recurring revenue keeps your cash flow steady month after month. You need both for a strong, sustainable business.



Pathway 1: Brand Collaborations 



When you collaborate, you don’t just expand your reach. You also build credibility by being introduced through someone your audience already trusts.



Take Action: Identify three businesses with a similar audience but a different product. Brainstorm a simple joint promotion to share with both audiences.



Pathway 2: Recurring Revenue with Subscription Boxes



Subscription boxes stabilize your revenue and keep customers coming back. A subscription box turns a one-time purchase into an ongoing relationship, giving your business the consistency you’ve been missing.



This strategy has transformed so many businesses, including mine. Predictable income means you can plan better, hire smarter, and focus on growth instead of chasing the next sale.



Take Action: Start with a product your customers already buy regularly and brainstorm how you could offer it in a subscription format.



Mistakes to Avoid



Even the best strategies can backfire if you approach them the wrong way.



Collaboration Mistakes:


  
Picking partners for their product instead of the audience they serve.



  
Not tracking and measuring results to see what’s really working.




Subscription Mistakes:


  
Overcomplicating your first box instead of starting simple.



  
Underpricing instead of building healthy profit margins from the start.




Ready to Go Deeper?



Susan is offering a Brand Collab Bootcamp where she’ll teach you how to find the right partners, pitch confidently, and create win-win promotions.



And if you’re ready to turn your products into predictable recurring revenue, join me for Subscription Box Coaching Week. I’ll help you outline what your subscription box could look like, how to position it, and how to create reliable monthly income. 



Offers mentioned:  

Brand Collab Bootcamp - starting September 8th 

Subscription Box Week - starting September 28th 



Where to find Susan: 


  
Brand Collab Bootcamp



  
Social Sales Girls on Facebook



  
The Social Sales Girls on Instagram



  
The Social Sales Girls Website 




Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you’ve been in business for any length of time, you’ve probably felt it: the sales rollercoaster. One month you’re celebrating record sales, the next you’re staring at your numbers wondering how to make ends meet. It’s exhausting. And it’s not the way you want to run your business long term.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m teaming up with Susan Bradley of the Social Sales Girls , an expert in brand collaborations, to share two powerful strategies that can help you finally step off that rollercoaster for good.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>We’re talking about:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><strong>Why consistency matters</strong> when it comes to sales and cash flow.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Two proven pathways to consistency</strong>: growing your audience through collaborations and keeping customers buying through recurring revenue.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>The biggest mistakes to avoid</strong> when starting with either strategy.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Simple, actionable tips</strong> you can take this week to start seeing results.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Why Consistency Matters</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Most product-based business owners know the highs and lows all too well. Big spikes during launches or holidays, followed by long slow stretches. That’s stressful and unpredictable.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Consistency is what allows you to grow and scale. Consistent visibility brings in new customers, while recurring revenue keeps your cash flow steady month after month. You need both for a strong, sustainable business.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Pathway 1: Brand Collaborations </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>When you collaborate, you don’t just expand your reach. You also build credibility by being introduced through someone your audience already trusts.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Take Action: Identify three businesses with a similar audience but a different product. Brainstorm a simple joint promotion to share with both audiences.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Pathway 2: Recurring Revenue with Subscription Boxes</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Subscription boxes stabilize your revenue and keep customers coming back. A subscription box turns a one-time purchase into an ongoing relationship, giving your business the consistency you’ve been missing.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>This strategy has transformed so many businesses, including mine. Predictable income means you can plan better, hire smarter, and focus on growth instead of chasing the next sale.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Take Action: Start with a product your customers already buy regularly and brainstorm how you could offer it in a subscription format.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Mistakes to Avoid</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Even the best strategies can backfire if you approach them the wrong way.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Collaboration Mistakes:</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Picking partners for their product instead of the audience they serve.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Not tracking and measuring results to see what’s really working.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Subscription Mistakes:</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Overcomplicating your first box instead of starting simple.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Underpricing instead of building healthy profit margins from the start.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Ready to Go Deeper?</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Susan is offering a <a href="https://thesocialsalesgirls.com/"><strong>Brand Collab Bootcamp</strong></a> where she’ll teach you how to find the right partners, pitch confidently, and create win-win promotions.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>And if you’re ready to turn your products into predictable recurring revenue, join me for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/subscription-box-week?utm_source=podcast&amp;utm_medium=organic"><strong>Subscription Box Coaching Week</strong></a><strong>.</strong> I’ll help you outline what your subscription box could look like, how to position it, and how to create reliable monthly income. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Offers mentioned:  </p>
<p><a href="https://thesocialsalesgirls.com/"><u>Brand Collab Bootcamp - starting September 8th </u></a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/subscription-box-week?utm_source=podcast&amp;utm_medium=organic"><u>Subscription Box Week - starting September 28th</u></a> </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Where to find Susan: </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://thesocialsalesgirls.com/">Brand Collab Bootcamp</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/thesocialsalesgirls">Social Sales Girls on Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/socialsalesgirls/">The Social Sales Girls on Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://thesocialsalesgirls.com/">The Social Sales Girls Website<u> </u></a></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2674</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c23ec06e-8170-11f0-b983-fb4bbfa9720b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9523774398.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>215: The One Thing Killing Your Reach (and It's Not the Algorithm)</title>
      <description>Stop Blaming the Algorithm – Your Content Might Be the Real Problem



If your social media posts are falling flat, it’s time for a wake-up call.



It’s not the platform. It’s not the algorithm. It’s you.



In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down why your content isn’t getting the engagement you want. And exactly how to fix it. 



This isn’t about posting more, checking boxes, or chasing trends. It’s about creating intentional, connection-driven content that actually gets noticed.



Why Consistency Isn’t Enough

I’ve been there. Cranking out three posts a day just to stay “consistent” and getting nothing but crickets. Social media isn’t a chore list. It’s your marketing. And lazy marketing gets lazy results.



I challenge you to take a hard look at your last 30–60 days of posts. Which ones actually got likes, comments, shares, or messages? What made them different? Were they personal? Behind the scenes? Did they have your face in them?



If you’re posting more “deadweight” content than connection-building content, you’re holding your own reach hostage.



Quality Over Quantity Wins Every Time

Three low-effort posts a day won’t grow your subscription box business. One thoughtful, engaging post will.



Here’s what to share instead:


  A great customer message

  A real, messy behind-the-scenes moment

  Something genuine about your product, your why, or your community


No more Canva flyers filling your feed. No more “Here’s what’s in the box” and disappearing until next month.



A Simple Engagement Hack

Don’t bulk reply to comments. 



Spread your responses out over a few days to push the post back into your followers’ feeds and extend its reach.



You’re not shadowbanned. Your audience isn’t broken. You just haven’t given them enough reason to engage. When you post with intention, people respond. And sales follow.



Your challenge this week: This week, post less. But post better. Audit your content, find your winners, and create one real post that makes your audience stop, feel something, and connect with you.



Join me for this episode to learn how to fix your social media content and start building the kind of engagement that leads to sales.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 22 Aug 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The One Thing Killing Your Reach (and It's Not the Algorithm)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>215</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down why your content isn’t getting the engagement you want. And exactly how to fix it. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Stop Blaming the Algorithm – Your Content Might Be the Real Problem



If your social media posts are falling flat, it’s time for a wake-up call.



It’s not the platform. It’s not the algorithm. It’s you.



In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down why your content isn’t getting the engagement you want. And exactly how to fix it. 



This isn’t about posting more, checking boxes, or chasing trends. It’s about creating intentional, connection-driven content that actually gets noticed.



Why Consistency Isn’t Enough

I’ve been there. Cranking out three posts a day just to stay “consistent” and getting nothing but crickets. Social media isn’t a chore list. It’s your marketing. And lazy marketing gets lazy results.



I challenge you to take a hard look at your last 30–60 days of posts. Which ones actually got likes, comments, shares, or messages? What made them different? Were they personal? Behind the scenes? Did they have your face in them?



If you’re posting more “deadweight” content than connection-building content, you’re holding your own reach hostage.



Quality Over Quantity Wins Every Time

Three low-effort posts a day won’t grow your subscription box business. One thoughtful, engaging post will.



Here’s what to share instead:


  A great customer message

  A real, messy behind-the-scenes moment

  Something genuine about your product, your why, or your community


No more Canva flyers filling your feed. No more “Here’s what’s in the box” and disappearing until next month.



A Simple Engagement Hack

Don’t bulk reply to comments. 



Spread your responses out over a few days to push the post back into your followers’ feeds and extend its reach.



You’re not shadowbanned. Your audience isn’t broken. You just haven’t given them enough reason to engage. When you post with intention, people respond. And sales follow.



Your challenge this week: This week, post less. But post better. Audit your content, find your winners, and create one real post that makes your audience stop, feel something, and connect with you.



Join me for this episode to learn how to fix your social media content and start building the kind of engagement that leads to sales.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Stop Blaming the Algorithm – Your Content Might Be the Real Problem</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If your social media posts are falling flat, it’s time for a wake-up call.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>It’s not the platform. It’s not the algorithm. It’s you.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down why your content isn’t getting the engagement you want. And exactly how to fix it. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>This isn’t about posting more, checking boxes, or chasing trends. It’s about creating intentional, connection-driven content that actually gets noticed.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Why Consistency Isn’t Enough</p>
<p>I’ve been there. Cranking out three posts a day just to stay “consistent” and getting nothing but crickets. Social media isn’t a chore list. It’s your marketing. And lazy marketing gets lazy results.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>I challenge you to take a hard look at your last 30–60 days of posts. Which ones actually got likes, comments, shares, or messages? What made them different? Were they personal? Behind the scenes? Did they have your face in them?</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you’re posting more “deadweight” content than connection-building content, you’re holding your own reach hostage.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Quality Over Quantity Wins Every Time</p>
<p>Three low-effort posts a day won’t grow your subscription box business. One thoughtful, engaging post will.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Here’s what to share instead:</p>
<ul>
  <li>A great customer message</li>
  <li>A real, messy behind-the-scenes moment</li>
  <li>Something genuine about your product, your why, or your community</li>
</ul>
<p>No more Canva flyers filling your feed. No more “Here’s what’s in the box” and disappearing until next month.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>A Simple Engagement Hack</p>
<p>Don’t bulk reply to comments. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Spread your responses out over a few days to push the post back into your followers’ feeds and extend its reach.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You’re not shadowbanned. Your audience isn’t broken. You just haven’t given them enough reason to engage. When you post with intention, people respond. And sales follow.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Your challenge this week: This week, post less. But post better. Audit your content, find your winners, and create one real post that makes your audience stop, feel something, and connect with you.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me for this episode to learn how to fix your social media content and start building the kind of engagement that leads to sales.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>537</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2c3238a4-7c79-11f0-b41b-d7ae663951a8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1483120718.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>214: Stop Researching. Start Selling Your Subscription Box. </title>
      <description>If you’ve been “almost ready” to launch your subscription box for months – or even years – this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast is for you.



I get it. I spent 18 months sitting on my own subscription box idea, watching others launch, endlessly researching, tweaking, and dreaming. I thought I was preparing. But when I finally launched, I learned more in that first month of taking action than I had in all those months of planning.



The truth? All that research, note-taking, and idea-tweaking feels productive… But it’s keeping you from what you really want: customers, sales, and momentum. In this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’ll help you break out of perpetual learning mode so you can finally start selling your subscription box. 

How to Tell If You’re Stuck in Perpetual Research Mode

Some of the biggest indicators include:


  
You’ve gathered endless information but haven’t acted on it.



  
Your launch date keeps moving.



  
You redesign your branding more than you talk to potential customers.



  
You’re constantly switching your box idea after seeing others’ boxes.



  
You’re waiting for the “perfect” product before you launch.




Staying in research mode feels safe. There’s no risk of rejection, no hard deadlines, and no uncomfortable decisions. But every week you stay there is a week without customers, feedback, or income.

The Hidden Reasons You Haven’t Launched Your Subscription Box

Being “not ready” is rarely about needing more time or more information. Often, what’s really keeping you stuck is one of these:


  
Fear of Failure – Worrying no one will buy or that people won’t like your box.



  
Fear of Success – Wondering how you’ll handle it if things actually take off.



  
Perfectionism – Believing everything must be flawless before you launch.



  
Comparison – Feeling behind because your box doesn’t look like someone else’s Year 5 version.



  
Comfort Zone + Lack of Clarity – Staying in familiar territory instead of testing your idea with real people.




In the episode, I share stories from my own business journey and why messy action is always better than perfect inaction.



















You can’t research your way into a successful subscription box business. You have to sell your way there. Imagine 30 days from now: your first boxes shipped, real customer feedback in hand, and a clear plan for month two. That only happens if you start now.



Stop waiting for perfect. Start building the business you’ve been dreaming about.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 20 Aug 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Stop Researching. Start Selling Your Subscription Box. </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>214</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode and learn how to recognize the signs you’re stuck, the real reasons you haven’t launched, and the step-by-step plan to take your first bold, imperfect action this week.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you’ve been “almost ready” to launch your subscription box for months – or even years – this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast is for you.



I get it. I spent 18 months sitting on my own subscription box idea, watching others launch, endlessly researching, tweaking, and dreaming. I thought I was preparing. But when I finally launched, I learned more in that first month of taking action than I had in all those months of planning.



The truth? All that research, note-taking, and idea-tweaking feels productive… But it’s keeping you from what you really want: customers, sales, and momentum. In this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’ll help you break out of perpetual learning mode so you can finally start selling your subscription box. 

How to Tell If You’re Stuck in Perpetual Research Mode

Some of the biggest indicators include:


  
You’ve gathered endless information but haven’t acted on it.



  
Your launch date keeps moving.



  
You redesign your branding more than you talk to potential customers.



  
You’re constantly switching your box idea after seeing others’ boxes.



  
You’re waiting for the “perfect” product before you launch.




Staying in research mode feels safe. There’s no risk of rejection, no hard deadlines, and no uncomfortable decisions. But every week you stay there is a week without customers, feedback, or income.

The Hidden Reasons You Haven’t Launched Your Subscription Box

Being “not ready” is rarely about needing more time or more information. Often, what’s really keeping you stuck is one of these:


  
Fear of Failure – Worrying no one will buy or that people won’t like your box.



  
Fear of Success – Wondering how you’ll handle it if things actually take off.



  
Perfectionism – Believing everything must be flawless before you launch.



  
Comparison – Feeling behind because your box doesn’t look like someone else’s Year 5 version.



  
Comfort Zone + Lack of Clarity – Staying in familiar territory instead of testing your idea with real people.




In the episode, I share stories from my own business journey and why messy action is always better than perfect inaction.



















You can’t research your way into a successful subscription box business. You have to sell your way there. Imagine 30 days from now: your first boxes shipped, real customer feedback in hand, and a clear plan for month two. That only happens if you start now.



Stop waiting for perfect. Start building the business you’ve been dreaming about.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you’ve been “almost ready” to launch your subscription box for months – or even years – this episode of the <em>Launch Your Box Podcast</em> is for you.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>I get it. I spent 18 months sitting on my own subscription box idea, watching others launch, endlessly researching, tweaking, and dreaming. I thought I was preparing. But when I finally launched, I learned more in that first month of taking action than I had in all those months of planning.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>The truth? All that research, note-taking, and idea-tweaking feels productive… But it’s keeping you from what you really want: customers, sales, and momentum. In this episode of the <em>Launch Your Box Podcast</em>, I’ll help you break out of perpetual learning mode so you can finally start selling your subscription box. </p>
<p><br>How to Tell If You’re Stuck in Perpetual Research Mode</p>
<p>Some of the biggest indicators include:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>You’ve gathered endless information but haven’t acted on it.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Your launch date keeps moving.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>You redesign your branding more than you talk to potential customers.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>You’re constantly switching your box idea after seeing others’ boxes.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>You’re waiting for the “perfect” product before you launch.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Staying in research mode feels safe. There’s no risk of rejection, no hard deadlines, and no uncomfortable decisions. But every week you stay there is a week without customers, feedback, or income.</p>
<p><br>The Hidden Reasons You Haven’t Launched Your Subscription Box</p>
<p>Being “not ready” is rarely about needing more time or more information. Often, what’s really keeping you stuck is one of these:</p>
<ol>
  <li>
<p><strong>Fear of Failure</strong> – Worrying no one will buy or that people won’t like your box.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Fear of Success</strong> – Wondering how you’ll handle it if things actually take off.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Perfectionism</strong> – Believing everything must be flawless before you launch.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Comparison</strong> – Feeling behind because your box doesn’t look like someone else’s Year 5 version.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Comfort Zone + Lack of Clarity</strong> – Staying in familiar territory instead of testing your idea with real people.</p>
</li>
</ol>
<p>In the episode, I share stories from my own business journey and why messy action is always better than perfect inaction.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br><a href="https://6in60workshop.com"><br></a></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You can’t research your way into a successful subscription box business. You have to <strong>sell your way there</strong>. Imagine 30 days from now: your first boxes shipped, real customer feedback in hand, and a clear plan for month two. That only happens if you start now.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Stop waiting for perfect. Start building the business you’ve been dreaming about.</p>
<p><br>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2262</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a3b2e6f4-7c78-11f0-963d-870f7e41acb3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1643231292.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>213: Why Your Subscription Box Needs a Clear Benefit – Not Just Cool Products</title>
      <description>Are you selling a product or a promise?



You’ve poured your heart into your subscription box. You’ve found the perfect items, created beautiful packaging, and started showing up consistently online.



But the subscribers aren’t coming. Or people buy once, but they don’t come back. Sound familiar?



Frustrated and wondering what you’re doing wrong? This might be the missing piece:



The problem isn’t that your product isn’t great. It’s that your audience doesn’t understand why they should subscribe.



In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down the difference between selling a one-time product and offering a subscription people actually want to stick with.



A subscription is a relationship, not a transaction



When someone buys a product, they’re saying, “This looks good.”



When someone subscribes, they’re saying, “I trust you to keep delivering value.”



That means your subscription box offer needs more than great items. It needs a clear, compelling reason to subscribe. And to stay subscribed.



Real Example: A Coloring Book Box That Transformed



Inside Launch Your Box, I worked with Chantal, who sells adult coloring books. She had custom designs, thoughtful themes, beautiful packaging… But she wasn’t getting the sales she wanted.



So I asked her one question:



“Why would someone subscribe to this rather than just buy a coloring book on Amazon when they feel like it?”



That one question changed everything.



Together, we identified ways to create value beyond the book:


  
Exclusive monthly themes



  
A private Facebook group for connection



  
Calming playlists and printable bonuses



  
Encouragement to make coloring a monthly habit






Suddenly, Chantal wasn’t just selling a product. She was offering stress relief, creative rhythm, and community. And her audience felt that difference.

This Week’s Action Step

Write down 3 reasons your box is better as a subscription. 

Ask yourself:


  
What do subscribers get that one-time buyers don’t?



  
How is a subscriber’s life better after 3 months?



  
What promise can I confidently deliver on?




Because when your benefit is clear, your offer becomes magnetic.

Your copy improves.Your conversions increase.Your subscribers stay longer.

Ready to rethink how you're positioning your box? This episode will walk you through real examples, simple shifts, and practical questions to help you clarify the benefit of your subscription – and make your offer irresistible.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 15 Aug 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why Your Subscription Box Needs a Clear Benefit – Not Just Cool Products</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>213</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down the difference between selling a one-time product and offering a subscription people actually want to stick with.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Are you selling a product or a promise?



You’ve poured your heart into your subscription box. You’ve found the perfect items, created beautiful packaging, and started showing up consistently online.



But the subscribers aren’t coming. Or people buy once, but they don’t come back. Sound familiar?



Frustrated and wondering what you’re doing wrong? This might be the missing piece:



The problem isn’t that your product isn’t great. It’s that your audience doesn’t understand why they should subscribe.



In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down the difference between selling a one-time product and offering a subscription people actually want to stick with.



A subscription is a relationship, not a transaction



When someone buys a product, they’re saying, “This looks good.”



When someone subscribes, they’re saying, “I trust you to keep delivering value.”



That means your subscription box offer needs more than great items. It needs a clear, compelling reason to subscribe. And to stay subscribed.



Real Example: A Coloring Book Box That Transformed



Inside Launch Your Box, I worked with Chantal, who sells adult coloring books. She had custom designs, thoughtful themes, beautiful packaging… But she wasn’t getting the sales she wanted.



So I asked her one question:



“Why would someone subscribe to this rather than just buy a coloring book on Amazon when they feel like it?”



That one question changed everything.



Together, we identified ways to create value beyond the book:


  
Exclusive monthly themes



  
A private Facebook group for connection



  
Calming playlists and printable bonuses



  
Encouragement to make coloring a monthly habit






Suddenly, Chantal wasn’t just selling a product. She was offering stress relief, creative rhythm, and community. And her audience felt that difference.

This Week’s Action Step

Write down 3 reasons your box is better as a subscription. 

Ask yourself:


  
What do subscribers get that one-time buyers don’t?



  
How is a subscriber’s life better after 3 months?



  
What promise can I confidently deliver on?




Because when your benefit is clear, your offer becomes magnetic.

Your copy improves.Your conversions increase.Your subscribers stay longer.

Ready to rethink how you're positioning your box? This episode will walk you through real examples, simple shifts, and practical questions to help you clarify the benefit of your subscription – and make your offer irresistible.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are you selling a product or a promise?</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You’ve poured your heart into your subscription box. You’ve found the perfect items, created beautiful packaging, and started showing up consistently online.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>But the subscribers aren’t coming. Or people buy once, but they don’t come back. Sound familiar?</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Frustrated and wondering what you’re doing wrong? This might be the missing piece:</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>The problem isn’t that your product isn’t great. It’s that your audience doesn’t understand why they should subscribe.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down the difference between selling a one-time product and offering a subscription people actually want to stick with.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>A subscription is a relationship, not a transaction</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>When someone buys a product, they’re saying, “This looks good.”</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>When someone subscribes, they’re saying, “I trust you to keep delivering value.”</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>That means your subscription box offer needs more than great items. It needs a clear, compelling reason to subscribe. And to stay subscribed.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Real Example: A Coloring Book Box That Transformed</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Inside Launch Your Box, I worked with Chantal, who sells adult coloring books. She had custom designs, thoughtful themes, beautiful packaging… But she wasn’t getting the sales she wanted.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>So I asked her one question:</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>“Why would someone subscribe to this rather than just buy a coloring book on Amazon when they feel like it?”</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>That one question changed everything.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Together, we identified ways to <strong>create value beyond the book</strong><em>:</em></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Exclusive monthly themes</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>A private Facebook group for connection</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Calming playlists and printable bonuses</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Encouragement to make coloring a monthly habit</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Suddenly, Chantal wasn’t just selling a product. She was offering stress relief, creative rhythm, and community. And her audience felt that difference.</p>
<p><br>This Week’s Action Step</p>
<p><strong>Write down 3 reasons your box is better as a subscription. </strong></p>
<p>Ask yourself:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>What do subscribers get that one-time buyers don’t?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>How is a subscriber’s life better after 3 months?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>What promise can I confidently deliver on?</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Because when your benefit is clear, <strong>your offer becomes magnetic.</strong></p>
<p>Your copy improves.Your conversions increase.Your subscribers stay longer.</p>
<p><strong>Ready to rethink how you're positioning your box? </strong>This episode will walk you through real examples, simple shifts, and practical questions to help you clarify the benefit of your subscription – and make your offer irresistible.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>642</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2ec0400c-7661-11f0-a27f-d3265b87ccf3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9651998097.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>212: What Can You Do Now to Prep for Q4?</title>
      <description>If you want a strong Q4, your work starts now.



Too many subscription box owners treat the 4th quarter like it starts in November. But if you want October sales to be strong – and if you want to ride that momentum straight through the holiday season – your prep needs to start in late summer.



In this episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m walking you through four things you can do right now to set yourself up for your best Q4 yet. Whether you’re running a subscription box, selling one-time products, or offering holiday gift subscriptions, these steps will help you plan, promote, and sell with confidence, instead of scrambling.



And because I know this can feel overwhelming, I’m also inviting you to join me inside my Ultimate Q4 Planning Workshop, where we’ll spend one focused day mapping out your entire quarter, together.



Q4 is the biggest sales quarter of the year. Some small business owners make half their annual revenue between October and December. But here’s the mistake most people make:

They think Q4 starts when they post their first Black Friday sale.



By that point, you’ve already missed valuable weeks of visibility and momentum. 



The truth? Q4 success starts at the end of Q3.



Before October arrives, you should already know:


  
Which promotions you’ll run and when



  
What products (and how much) you’ll need to make them happen



  
How you’ll market each offer




If you can’t answer those questions yet, you’re already behind.

Step 1: Plan Your Q4 Promotions Now

Start with the end in mind when you answer the question, “What are you going to sell?”

Step 2: Grow Your Following + Your Email List

You need both visibility and ownership heading into Q4.

Step 3: Warm Up Your Audience

Don’t wait until you’re ready to sell to show up. If someone joins your list in August and doesn’t hear from you until November, they’re not likely to buy.

Warm-up content builds trust and anticipation so that when you do make your offer, people are ready to say yes.



Step 4: Keep Your Plan Simple, But Real

You don’t need to create every caption, email, or ad today. But you do need to know what you’re promoting, when you’ll promote it, and how you’ll promote it.

That’s exactly what we’ll do together in my Ultimate Q4 Planning Workshop. In one day, we’ll:


  
Plan your promotions



  
Map your marketing calendar



  
Identify the emails and posts you’ll need



  
Forecast inventory and shipping timelines




You’ll walk away with a complete Q4 roadmap. Ready to execute, no scrambling required.



If Q4 usually feels like chaos, this episode will show you how to change that. Listen in for practical steps you can take this week to get ahead. And find out how to join me for the Ultimate Q4 Planning Workshop, so you can head into the busiest season of the year feeling confident and in control.



Join the Ultimate Q4 Planning Workshop: September 5, 2025 – Live on Zoom. 



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 13 Aug 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What Can You Do Now to Prep for Q4?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>212</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>If Q4 usually feels like chaos, this episode will show you how to change that. Listen in for practical steps you can take this week to get ahead. And find out how to join me for the Ultimate Q4 Planning Workshop, so you can head into the busiest season of the year feeling confident and in control.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you want a strong Q4, your work starts now.



Too many subscription box owners treat the 4th quarter like it starts in November. But if you want October sales to be strong – and if you want to ride that momentum straight through the holiday season – your prep needs to start in late summer.



In this episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m walking you through four things you can do right now to set yourself up for your best Q4 yet. Whether you’re running a subscription box, selling one-time products, or offering holiday gift subscriptions, these steps will help you plan, promote, and sell with confidence, instead of scrambling.



And because I know this can feel overwhelming, I’m also inviting you to join me inside my Ultimate Q4 Planning Workshop, where we’ll spend one focused day mapping out your entire quarter, together.



Q4 is the biggest sales quarter of the year. Some small business owners make half their annual revenue between October and December. But here’s the mistake most people make:

They think Q4 starts when they post their first Black Friday sale.



By that point, you’ve already missed valuable weeks of visibility and momentum. 



The truth? Q4 success starts at the end of Q3.



Before October arrives, you should already know:


  
Which promotions you’ll run and when



  
What products (and how much) you’ll need to make them happen



  
How you’ll market each offer




If you can’t answer those questions yet, you’re already behind.

Step 1: Plan Your Q4 Promotions Now

Start with the end in mind when you answer the question, “What are you going to sell?”

Step 2: Grow Your Following + Your Email List

You need both visibility and ownership heading into Q4.

Step 3: Warm Up Your Audience

Don’t wait until you’re ready to sell to show up. If someone joins your list in August and doesn’t hear from you until November, they’re not likely to buy.

Warm-up content builds trust and anticipation so that when you do make your offer, people are ready to say yes.



Step 4: Keep Your Plan Simple, But Real

You don’t need to create every caption, email, or ad today. But you do need to know what you’re promoting, when you’ll promote it, and how you’ll promote it.

That’s exactly what we’ll do together in my Ultimate Q4 Planning Workshop. In one day, we’ll:


  
Plan your promotions



  
Map your marketing calendar



  
Identify the emails and posts you’ll need



  
Forecast inventory and shipping timelines




You’ll walk away with a complete Q4 roadmap. Ready to execute, no scrambling required.



If Q4 usually feels like chaos, this episode will show you how to change that. Listen in for practical steps you can take this week to get ahead. And find out how to join me for the Ultimate Q4 Planning Workshop, so you can head into the busiest season of the year feeling confident and in control.



Join the Ultimate Q4 Planning Workshop: September 5, 2025 – Live on Zoom. 



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you want a strong Q4, your work starts now.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Too many subscription box owners treat the 4th quarter like it starts in November. But if you want October sales to be strong – and if you want to ride that momentum straight through the holiday season – your prep needs to start in late summer.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m walking you through <strong>four things you can do right now</strong> to set yourself up for your best Q4 yet. Whether you’re running a subscription box, selling one-time products, or offering holiday gift subscriptions, these steps will help you plan, promote, and sell with confidence, instead of scrambling.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>And because I know this can feel overwhelming, I’m also inviting you to join me inside my <strong>Ultimate Q4 Planning Workshop, </strong>where we’ll spend one focused day mapping out your entire quarter, together.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Q4 is the biggest sales quarter of the year. Some small business owners make <strong>half their annual revenue</strong> between October and December. But here’s the mistake most people make:</p>
<p><strong>They think Q4 starts when they post their first Black Friday sale.</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>By that point, you’ve already missed valuable weeks of visibility and momentum. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>The truth? <strong>Q4 success starts at the end of Q3</strong>.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Before October arrives, you should already know:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Which promotions you’ll run and when</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>What products (and how much) you’ll need to make them happen</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>How you’ll market each offer</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>If you can’t answer those questions yet, you’re already behind.</p>
<p><br>Step 1: Plan Your Q4 Promotions Now</p>
<p>Start with the end in mind when you answer the question, “What are you going to sell?”</p>
<p><br>Step 2: Grow Your Following + Your Email List</p>
<p>You need both visibility and ownership heading into Q4.</p>
<p><br>Step 3: Warm Up Your Audience</p>
<p>Don’t wait until you’re ready to sell to show up. If someone joins your list in August and doesn’t hear from you until November, they’re not likely to buy.</p>
<p><br>Warm-up content builds trust and anticipation so that when you do make your offer, people are ready to say yes.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Step 4: Keep Your Plan Simple, But Real</p>
<p>You don’t need to create every caption, email, or ad today. But you do need to know what you’re promoting, when you’ll promote it, and how you’ll promote it.</p>
<p><br>That’s exactly what we’ll do together in my <strong>Ultimate Q4 Planning Workshop</strong>. In one day, we’ll:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Plan your promotions</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Map your marketing calendar</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Identify the emails and posts you’ll need</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Forecast inventory and shipping timelines</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You’ll walk away with a complete Q4 roadmap. Ready to execute, no scrambling required.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If Q4 usually feels like chaos, this episode will show you how to change that. Listen in for practical steps you can take this week to get ahead. And find out how to join me for the Ultimate Q4 Planning Workshop, so you can head into the busiest season of the year feeling confident and in control.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/the-ultimate-q4-planning-workshop-for-product-sellers?utm_source=podcast&amp;utm_medium=organic"><strong>Join the Ultimate Q4 Planning Workshop</strong></a><strong>:</strong> September 5, 2025 – Live on Zoom. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! <br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1493</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a8a5d4a8-764e-11f0-8167-6b84db7b057a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2146619359.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>211: 3 Types of Facebook Ads Every Subscription Box Owner Should Be Running</title>
      <description>Think Facebook ads are too expensive, too complicated, or too risky? You’re not alone. I thought the same thing for a long time.



But 18 months ago, I made a decision: I was going to learn how to run ads myself. No more guessing, no more outsourcing without understanding. Just simple strategies I could test, tweak, and teach.



In this week’s Friday Fuel episode, I’m sharing the three types of ads every subscription box owner should be running. Yes, even if you’re brand new. You don’t need a big budget. You don’t need expert status. You just need to get started.



1 - Page Like Ads

Start here if you’re building your audience (and you should always be building your audience). Page Like Ads are low-cost, low-risk, and easy to run. I always have one of these running in the background.

What to include:


  
A photo of you and your product



  
Simple copy that introduces you to your ideal subscriber



  
Meta’s Advantage+ audience to find more people like your current followers




Set your budget at $5–$10/day and watch your page grow.



2. Opt-In Ads

If you’re not building your email list, it’s time to start. Opt-in ads help you grow a warm audience before launch day.

Need ideas? I’ve used downloadable phone wallpapers, checklists, and printables. Anything your audience would find valuable and fun can make an effective opt-in.

Make sure you have:


  
A clear landing page



  
A freebie that fits your niche



  
A message that invites them to grab their free gift




These subscribers are more likely to buy from you when launch time comes.

3. Sales Ads

These ads introduce your offer to the world. Whether you’re selling a one-time box or your monthly subscription, this is where you go all in. Your goal is to get the sale.

Use:


  
Behind-the-scenes packing videos



  
Customer unboxings



  
Short product demos or strong lifestyle photos




Start with $10/day and scale up as your results improve. I recommend running these alongside page like and opt-in ads for best results.

Tips for Effective Facebook Ads


  
Keep your captions short with ONE call to action



  
Use Canva for branded graphics



  
Don’t overthink targeting. Let Meta help



  
Give your ad 3–4 days before making changes



  
Use ChatGPT to help with hooks and headlines!




Your Action Step

Pick ONE ad and run it this week.


  
Want to build your audience? Try a Page Like ad



  
Want more email subscribers? Try an Opt-In ad



  
Ready to sell? Try a Sales ad




It’s not about being perfect. It’s about getting started. The only ad that doesn’t work? The one you never run.



Need help deciding which type of Facebook ad to try first? Tune in to the full episode for all the details.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 08 Aug 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>3 Types of Facebook Ads Every Subscription Box Owner Should Be Running</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>211</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this week’s Friday Fuel episode, I’m sharing the three types of ads every subscription box owner should be running. Yes, even if you’re brand new. You don’t need a big budget. You don’t need expert status. You just need to get started.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Think Facebook ads are too expensive, too complicated, or too risky? You’re not alone. I thought the same thing for a long time.



But 18 months ago, I made a decision: I was going to learn how to run ads myself. No more guessing, no more outsourcing without understanding. Just simple strategies I could test, tweak, and teach.



In this week’s Friday Fuel episode, I’m sharing the three types of ads every subscription box owner should be running. Yes, even if you’re brand new. You don’t need a big budget. You don’t need expert status. You just need to get started.



1 - Page Like Ads

Start here if you’re building your audience (and you should always be building your audience). Page Like Ads are low-cost, low-risk, and easy to run. I always have one of these running in the background.

What to include:


  
A photo of you and your product



  
Simple copy that introduces you to your ideal subscriber



  
Meta’s Advantage+ audience to find more people like your current followers




Set your budget at $5–$10/day and watch your page grow.



2. Opt-In Ads

If you’re not building your email list, it’s time to start. Opt-in ads help you grow a warm audience before launch day.

Need ideas? I’ve used downloadable phone wallpapers, checklists, and printables. Anything your audience would find valuable and fun can make an effective opt-in.

Make sure you have:


  
A clear landing page



  
A freebie that fits your niche



  
A message that invites them to grab their free gift




These subscribers are more likely to buy from you when launch time comes.

3. Sales Ads

These ads introduce your offer to the world. Whether you’re selling a one-time box or your monthly subscription, this is where you go all in. Your goal is to get the sale.

Use:


  
Behind-the-scenes packing videos



  
Customer unboxings



  
Short product demos or strong lifestyle photos




Start with $10/day and scale up as your results improve. I recommend running these alongside page like and opt-in ads for best results.

Tips for Effective Facebook Ads


  
Keep your captions short with ONE call to action



  
Use Canva for branded graphics



  
Don’t overthink targeting. Let Meta help



  
Give your ad 3–4 days before making changes



  
Use ChatGPT to help with hooks and headlines!




Your Action Step

Pick ONE ad and run it this week.


  
Want to build your audience? Try a Page Like ad



  
Want more email subscribers? Try an Opt-In ad



  
Ready to sell? Try a Sales ad




It’s not about being perfect. It’s about getting started. The only ad that doesn’t work? The one you never run.



Need help deciding which type of Facebook ad to try first? Tune in to the full episode for all the details.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Think Facebook ads are too expensive, too complicated, or too risky? You’re not alone. I thought the same thing for a long time.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>But 18 months ago, I made a decision: I was going to learn how to run ads myself. No more guessing, no more outsourcing without understanding. Just simple strategies I could test, tweak, and teach.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this week’s Friday Fuel episode, I’m sharing the three types of ads every subscription box owner should be running. Yes, <em>even if you’re brand new</em>. You don’t need a big budget. You don’t need expert status. You just need to get started.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>1 - Page Like Ads</p>
<p>Start here if you’re building your audience (and you should always be building your audience). Page Like Ads are low-cost, low-risk, and easy to run. I always have one of these running in the background.</p>
<p>What to include:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>A photo of <em>you</em> and your product</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Simple copy that introduces you to your ideal subscriber</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Meta’s Advantage+ audience to find more people like your current followers</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Set your budget at $5–$10/day and watch your page grow.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>2. Opt-In Ads</p>
<p>If you’re not building your email list, it’s time to start. Opt-in ads help you grow a warm audience before launch day.</p>
<p>Need ideas? I’ve used downloadable phone wallpapers, checklists, and printables. Anything your audience would find valuable and fun can make an effective opt-in.</p>
<p>Make sure you have:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>A clear landing page</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>A freebie that fits your niche</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>A message that invites them to grab their free gift</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>These subscribers are more likely to buy from you when launch time comes.</p>
<p><br>3. Sales Ads</p>
<p>These ads introduce your offer to the world. Whether you’re selling a one-time box or your monthly subscription, this is where you go all in. Your goal is to get the sale.</p>
<p>Use:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Behind-the-scenes packing videos</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Customer unboxings</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Short product demos or strong lifestyle photos<br></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Start with $10/day and scale up as your results improve. I recommend running these alongside page like and opt-in ads for best results.</p>
<p><br>Tips for Effective Facebook Ads</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Keep your captions short with ONE call to action</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Use Canva for branded graphics</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Don’t overthink targeting. Let Meta help</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Give your ad 3–4 days before making changes</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Use ChatGPT to help with hooks and headlines!</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Your Action Step</p>
<p>Pick ONE ad and run it this week.</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Want to build your audience? Try a <strong>Page Like</strong> ad</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Want more email subscribers? Try an <strong>Opt-In</strong> ad</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Ready to sell? Try a <strong>Sales</strong> ad</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>It’s not about being perfect. It’s about getting started. The only ad that doesn’t work? The one you never run.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Need help deciding which type of Facebook ad to try first? </strong>Tune in to the full episode for all the details.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>693</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6942b570-7102-11f0-a2b4-6bc9dd8dcbdb]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8214347835.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>From 0 to 500 Subscribers on the First Launch with Art Shattered</title>
      <description>I’m excited to bring you this interview with my good friend Cindy Manly of Art Shattered. Cindy has a successful membership with over 1200 members and has been selling one-time art supply kits for the past few years. If you’ve been selling one-time boxes and are wondering if a subscription is for you, you’re going to want to hear Cindy’s story! 

Cindy is an artist who specializes in glass and resin art. She makes beautiful, unique pieces of 3-D art that her followers LOVE. She also teaches her followers how to create their own art through her online membership. Cindy started her membership in 2018 and now has over 1200 members. 

When some of Cindy’s members started asking where to get the supplies they needed to create the pieces she was teaching - and others mentioned they were having a hard time finding the right supplies - she started selling one-off kits. Every time she offered up a kit for sale, she sold out. When she offered kits during her membership pre-launch, she sold 800 full kits and 500 partial kits. 

Cindy and I have been friends for several years and I’ve been telling her almost that long that she needed to start a subscription box. She resisted the idea for a long time. But after selling 1300 kits during her pre-launch, she was convinced. 

Armed with the launch plan she learned inside Launch Your Box and as a member of my Mastermind and backed by her audience of raving fans, Cindy launched her subscription box in June. 

The result? She sold out of all 500 available spots in her quarterly subscription! And she used four strategies to do it. 


  Urgency - Cindy opened the subscription only to her online membership for 48 hours. 

  Waitlist - Cindy then opened up to members of the waitlist she’d been growing for three weeks leading up to the launch. 

  Early Bird Bonus

  Engaging her audience - on her last LIVE, Cindy added names on post-it notes to her wall of subscribers. 


Cindy originally wanted to only plan for 200 boxes, but I convinced her she could absolutely do more. And she did! She’s also an absolute genius who packed her subscription boxes ahead of time and had them ready to ship BEFORE she launched! That meant when she was exhausted from her launch - and if you do it right, you will be exhausted - Cindy headed straight to the beach! 

500 subscribers means additional financial security for Cindy, the satisfaction of knowing she is serving her loyal audience in yet another way, and steady employment for her team. I can’t wait to watch Cindy’s subscription box continue to grow. 

Join me for this episode as Cindy walks us through her journey of moving from offering one-time boxes to launching a subscription box and welcoming 500 new subscribers.  

Find and follow Cindy: 


  ⁠Art Shattered on Instagram⁠

  ⁠Art Shattered on Facebook ⁠

  ⁠Art Shattered Website⁠


Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join ⁠today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 06 Aug 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as Cindy walks us through her journey of moving from offering one-time boxes to launching a subscription box and welcoming 500 new subscribers.  </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I’m excited to bring you this interview with my good friend Cindy Manly of Art Shattered. Cindy has a successful membership with over 1200 members and has been selling one-time art supply kits for the past few years. If you’ve been selling one-time boxes and are wondering if a subscription is for you, you’re going to want to hear Cindy’s story! 

Cindy is an artist who specializes in glass and resin art. She makes beautiful, unique pieces of 3-D art that her followers LOVE. She also teaches her followers how to create their own art through her online membership. Cindy started her membership in 2018 and now has over 1200 members. 

When some of Cindy’s members started asking where to get the supplies they needed to create the pieces she was teaching - and others mentioned they were having a hard time finding the right supplies - she started selling one-off kits. Every time she offered up a kit for sale, she sold out. When she offered kits during her membership pre-launch, she sold 800 full kits and 500 partial kits. 

Cindy and I have been friends for several years and I’ve been telling her almost that long that she needed to start a subscription box. She resisted the idea for a long time. But after selling 1300 kits during her pre-launch, she was convinced. 

Armed with the launch plan she learned inside Launch Your Box and as a member of my Mastermind and backed by her audience of raving fans, Cindy launched her subscription box in June. 

The result? She sold out of all 500 available spots in her quarterly subscription! And she used four strategies to do it. 


  Urgency - Cindy opened the subscription only to her online membership for 48 hours. 

  Waitlist - Cindy then opened up to members of the waitlist she’d been growing for three weeks leading up to the launch. 

  Early Bird Bonus

  Engaging her audience - on her last LIVE, Cindy added names on post-it notes to her wall of subscribers. 


Cindy originally wanted to only plan for 200 boxes, but I convinced her she could absolutely do more. And she did! She’s also an absolute genius who packed her subscription boxes ahead of time and had them ready to ship BEFORE she launched! That meant when she was exhausted from her launch - and if you do it right, you will be exhausted - Cindy headed straight to the beach! 

500 subscribers means additional financial security for Cindy, the satisfaction of knowing she is serving her loyal audience in yet another way, and steady employment for her team. I can’t wait to watch Cindy’s subscription box continue to grow. 

Join me for this episode as Cindy walks us through her journey of moving from offering one-time boxes to launching a subscription box and welcoming 500 new subscribers.  

Find and follow Cindy: 


  ⁠Art Shattered on Instagram⁠

  ⁠Art Shattered on Facebook ⁠

  ⁠Art Shattered Website⁠


Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join ⁠today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’m excited to bring you this interview with my good friend Cindy Manly of Art Shattered. Cindy has a successful membership with over 1200 members and has been selling one-time art supply kits for the past few years. If you’ve been selling one-time boxes and are wondering if a subscription is for you, you’re going to want to hear Cindy’s story! </p>
<p>Cindy is an artist who specializes in glass and resin art. She makes beautiful, unique pieces of 3-D art that her followers LOVE. She also teaches her followers how to create their own art through her online membership. Cindy started her membership in 2018 and now has over 1200 members. </p>
<p>When some of Cindy’s members started asking where to get the supplies they needed to create the pieces she was teaching - and others mentioned they were having a hard time finding the right supplies - she started selling one-off kits. Every time she offered up a kit for sale, she sold out. When she offered kits during her membership pre-launch, she sold 800 full kits and 500 partial kits. </p>
<p>Cindy and I have been friends for several years and I’ve been telling her almost that long that she needed to start a subscription box. She resisted the idea for a long time. But after selling 1300 kits during her pre-launch, she was convinced. </p>
<p>Armed with the launch plan she learned inside Launch Your Box and as a member of my Mastermind and backed by her audience of raving fans, Cindy launched her subscription box in June. </p>
<p>The result? She sold out of all 500 available spots in her quarterly subscription! And she used four strategies to do it. </p>
<ol>
  <li>Urgency - Cindy opened the subscription only to her online membership for 48 hours. </li>
  <li>Waitlist - Cindy then opened up to members of the waitlist she’d been growing for three weeks leading up to the launch. </li>
  <li>Early Bird Bonus</li>
  <li>Engaging her audience - on her last LIVE, Cindy added names on post-it notes to her wall of subscribers. </li>
</ol>
<p>Cindy originally wanted to only plan for 200 boxes, but I convinced her she could absolutely do more. And she did! She’s also an absolute genius who packed her subscription boxes ahead of time and had them ready to ship BEFORE she launched! That meant when she was exhausted from her launch - and if you do it right, you will be exhausted - Cindy headed straight to the beach! </p>
<p>500 subscribers means additional financial security for Cindy, the satisfaction of knowing she is serving her loyal audience in yet another way, and steady employment for her team. I can’t wait to watch Cindy’s subscription box continue to grow. </p>
<p>Join me for this episode as Cindy walks us through her journey of moving from offering one-time boxes to launching a subscription box and welcoming 500 new subscribers.  </p>
<p>Find and follow Cindy: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/cindymanly_artshattered/">⁠Art Shattered on Instagram⁠</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/ArtShattered">⁠Art Shattered on Facebook ⁠</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://artshattered.com/">⁠Art Shattered Website⁠</a></li>
</ul>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Join ⁠</a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2360</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[64cdd7c8-7101-11f0-a406-c3f8d86857f3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6444303798.mp3" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>210: Open Cart? Closed Cart? Here’s How to Launch Your Box Either Way</title>
      <description>Should your subscription box be available all the time or only during specific launch windows?



It’s one of the most common questions I get inside Launch Your Box. But here’s the truth…



It’s not about whether your cart is open or closed.



It’s about whether you’re giving people a reason to subscribe right now.



In this week’s Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down the difference between open cart and closed cart subscription models, the pros and cons of each, and what really moves the needle when it’s time to grow your subscriber count.



I also share a simple strategy that works with either model to create urgency and excitement: the launch bonus with examples you can use without spending a fortune.



Open Cart Subscription Model

Your subscription box is always live, and subscribers can join at any time.

It’s simple and steady, but it lacks urgency. You have to create your own momentum.



Closed Cart Subscription Model 

You open the cart for a limited window a few times a year. It builds buzz and urgency, but only if you show up and promote it well.



Both work. I’ve used both. But the most important thing?



YOU are the one who creates urgency.



It’s about how you talk about your box, how you show up, and whether or not you give people a reason to say yes this week.



When I launched my Monogram Box™ in April, I offered a free monogram tee to anyone who subscribed that week. That bonus helped me sell out 432 spots.



The bonus worked again during my July teacher launch, when I offered a personalized “Teacher” tee to new subscribers. That simple extra created urgency and excitement. And brought in results.



Whether your cart is open or closed, a bonus can help you say,

“This week matters. Here’s why.”



Try one of these subscriber-worthy extras:


  An exclusive item they can’t get anywhere else



  A personalized detail like a name or monogram



  A small gift that matches your box’s theme



  A digital download or printable



  Leftover inventory from a previous month




Your bonus doesn’t have to be expensive—it just has to be timely and thoughtful.



Your Friday Fuel Action Step

Map out your next launch bonus.



Ask yourself:


  What could I offer that feels special and simple?



  When will I offer it and when will it end?



  How will I promote it through email, social, and your website?




Write it down. Plug it into your calendar. And remember: when you’re excited, your audience will be, too.



Join me for this episode and find out why it’s not about whether your subscription box is open or closed – it’s about getting people to say yes.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 01 Aug 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Open Cart? Closed Cart? Here’s How to Launch Your Box Either Way</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>210</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this week’s Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down the difference between open cart and closed cart subscription models, the pros and cons of each, and what really moves the needle when it’s time to grow your subscriber count.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Should your subscription box be available all the time or only during specific launch windows?



It’s one of the most common questions I get inside Launch Your Box. But here’s the truth…



It’s not about whether your cart is open or closed.



It’s about whether you’re giving people a reason to subscribe right now.



In this week’s Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down the difference between open cart and closed cart subscription models, the pros and cons of each, and what really moves the needle when it’s time to grow your subscriber count.



I also share a simple strategy that works with either model to create urgency and excitement: the launch bonus with examples you can use without spending a fortune.



Open Cart Subscription Model

Your subscription box is always live, and subscribers can join at any time.

It’s simple and steady, but it lacks urgency. You have to create your own momentum.



Closed Cart Subscription Model 

You open the cart for a limited window a few times a year. It builds buzz and urgency, but only if you show up and promote it well.



Both work. I’ve used both. But the most important thing?



YOU are the one who creates urgency.



It’s about how you talk about your box, how you show up, and whether or not you give people a reason to say yes this week.



When I launched my Monogram Box™ in April, I offered a free monogram tee to anyone who subscribed that week. That bonus helped me sell out 432 spots.



The bonus worked again during my July teacher launch, when I offered a personalized “Teacher” tee to new subscribers. That simple extra created urgency and excitement. And brought in results.



Whether your cart is open or closed, a bonus can help you say,

“This week matters. Here’s why.”



Try one of these subscriber-worthy extras:


  An exclusive item they can’t get anywhere else



  A personalized detail like a name or monogram



  A small gift that matches your box’s theme



  A digital download or printable



  Leftover inventory from a previous month




Your bonus doesn’t have to be expensive—it just has to be timely and thoughtful.



Your Friday Fuel Action Step

Map out your next launch bonus.



Ask yourself:


  What could I offer that feels special and simple?



  When will I offer it and when will it end?



  How will I promote it through email, social, and your website?




Write it down. Plug it into your calendar. And remember: when you’re excited, your audience will be, too.



Join me for this episode and find out why it’s not about whether your subscription box is open or closed – it’s about getting people to say yes.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Should your subscription box be available all the time or only during specific launch windows?</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>It’s one of the most common questions I get inside Launch Your Box. But here’s the truth…</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>It’s not about whether your cart is open or closed.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>It’s about whether you’re giving people a reason to subscribe right now.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this week’s Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m breaking down the difference between open cart and closed cart subscription models, the pros and cons of each, and what really moves the needle when it’s time to grow your subscriber count.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>I also share a simple strategy that works with either model to create urgency and excitement: the launch bonus with examples you can use without spending a fortune.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Open Cart Subscription Model</p>
<p>Your subscription box is always live, and subscribers can join at any time.</p>
<p>It’s simple and steady, but it lacks urgency. You have to create your own momentum.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Closed Cart Subscription Model </p>
<p>You open the cart for a limited window a few times a year. It builds buzz and urgency, but only if you show up and promote it well.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Both work. I’ve used both. But the most important thing?</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>YOU are the one who creates urgency.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>It’s about how you talk about your box, how you show up, and whether or not you give people a reason to say yes this week.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>When I launched my Monogram Box™ in April, I offered a free monogram tee to anyone who subscribed that week. That bonus helped me sell out 432 spots.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>The bonus worked again during my July teacher launch, when I offered a personalized “Teacher” tee to new subscribers. That simple extra created urgency and excitement. And brought in results.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Whether your cart is open or closed, a bonus can help you say,</p>
<p>“This week matters. Here’s why.”</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Try one of these subscriber-worthy extras:</p>
<ul>
  <li>An exclusive item they can’t get anywhere else</li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>A personalized detail like a name or monogram</li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>A small gift that matches your box’s theme</li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>A digital download or printable</li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>Leftover inventory from a previous month</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Your bonus doesn’t have to be expensive—it just has to be timely and thoughtful.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Your Friday Fuel Action Step</p>
<p>Map out your next launch bonus.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Ask yourself:</p>
<ul>
  <li>What could I offer that feels special and simple?</li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>When will I offer it and when will it end?</li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>How will I promote it through email, social, and your website?</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Write it down. Plug it into your calendar. And remember: when you’re excited, your audience will be, too.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me for this episode and find out why it’s not about whether your subscription box is open or closed – it’s about getting people to say yes.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>781</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b861db96-6c01-11f0-a5ec-c75bec9c48cf]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4262034382.mp3?updated=1753937623" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Never Give Up - Break Through the Plateau with the Crafty Lady Boutique</title>
      <description>“Don’t give up. Just keep moving forward.” - Alexia Haubert

After making it to the top 1% of all Etsy sellers in the wedding category - the top 1%! - Lexie was on top of her game. Then came a global pandemic that shut down the wedding industry and Lexie’s business. 

Lexie had to pivot and struggled to grow her business for a long time before recently reaching a big milestone. In this episode, Lexie’s story will inspire you to keep going as you work toward your business goals. 

When the wedding industry slowly started coming back, Lexie introduced The Monogrammed Bride subscription box and started building her audience from scratch. She stayed consistent and continued to show up even though she saw very little in the way of results for a long time. 

When Lexie and I first talked, after a disappointing launch, I was surprised to see she had done everything I teach. She was doing all the things and she was doing them well. But she wasn’t seeing results. We brainstormed and strategized, and Lexie continued working hard. 

And just recently - after seeing consistently steady growth for the last six months - Lexie hit her long-standing goal of 100 subscribers! So what did she do differently these past six months?   


  
She built a community - giving her subscribers something to feel they were a part of. 

  
She posted stories on Instagram - consistently. 

  She created engaging posts featuring pictures of subscribers and their boxes.

  
She started going LIVE much more consistently and, when she did, started building an audience who showed up for her and engaged with her during the LIVEs. 

  She followed her subscribers back and engaged with their posts. 

  
She did tons of short video, finding cracks of time while sitting in her car waiting to pick her kids up from practices.  

  
She sent boxes to a small number of influencers from TikTok and Instagram - people with 1000-2000 followers who want to grow as influencers. 

  
She ran Facebook Ads - and has gotten really dialed in which drives the cost per engagement way down. Lexie analyzes her Ads every week and makes changes as needed. 


While we were talking, Lexie got subscriber #112! This growth in her business - this regular, recurring revenue - has lessened the financial stress Lexie has felt for the past couple of years. She is able to breathe and plan for even more subscribers as her business continues to grow. 

Lexie’s message for anyone who feels overwhelmed or discouraged by the challenges they’re facing in building their business? Don’t give up. Just keep moving forward. 

Join me for this episode and get inspired by Lexie’s determination to just keep going and never give up on her dream on her way to reaching and passing her goal of 100 subscribers. 

Find and follow Lexie: 


  ⁠Crafty Lady Boutique on Instagram⁠

  
⁠Crafty Lady Boutique on Facebook⁠ 

  ⁠Crafty Lady Boutique Website⁠


Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join ⁠today! 



﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: ⁠https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams⁠

 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at ⁠https://www.boxup.com/⁠ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 30 Jul 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode and get inspired by Lexie’s determination to just keep going and never give up on her dream on her way to reaching and passing her goal of 100 subscribers. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Don’t give up. Just keep moving forward.” - Alexia Haubert

After making it to the top 1% of all Etsy sellers in the wedding category - the top 1%! - Lexie was on top of her game. Then came a global pandemic that shut down the wedding industry and Lexie’s business. 

Lexie had to pivot and struggled to grow her business for a long time before recently reaching a big milestone. In this episode, Lexie’s story will inspire you to keep going as you work toward your business goals. 

When the wedding industry slowly started coming back, Lexie introduced The Monogrammed Bride subscription box and started building her audience from scratch. She stayed consistent and continued to show up even though she saw very little in the way of results for a long time. 

When Lexie and I first talked, after a disappointing launch, I was surprised to see she had done everything I teach. She was doing all the things and she was doing them well. But she wasn’t seeing results. We brainstormed and strategized, and Lexie continued working hard. 

And just recently - after seeing consistently steady growth for the last six months - Lexie hit her long-standing goal of 100 subscribers! So what did she do differently these past six months?   


  
She built a community - giving her subscribers something to feel they were a part of. 

  
She posted stories on Instagram - consistently. 

  She created engaging posts featuring pictures of subscribers and their boxes.

  
She started going LIVE much more consistently and, when she did, started building an audience who showed up for her and engaged with her during the LIVEs. 

  She followed her subscribers back and engaged with their posts. 

  
She did tons of short video, finding cracks of time while sitting in her car waiting to pick her kids up from practices.  

  
She sent boxes to a small number of influencers from TikTok and Instagram - people with 1000-2000 followers who want to grow as influencers. 

  
She ran Facebook Ads - and has gotten really dialed in which drives the cost per engagement way down. Lexie analyzes her Ads every week and makes changes as needed. 


While we were talking, Lexie got subscriber #112! This growth in her business - this regular, recurring revenue - has lessened the financial stress Lexie has felt for the past couple of years. She is able to breathe and plan for even more subscribers as her business continues to grow. 

Lexie’s message for anyone who feels overwhelmed or discouraged by the challenges they’re facing in building their business? Don’t give up. Just keep moving forward. 

Join me for this episode and get inspired by Lexie’s determination to just keep going and never give up on her dream on her way to reaching and passing her goal of 100 subscribers. 

Find and follow Lexie: 


  ⁠Crafty Lady Boutique on Instagram⁠

  
⁠Crafty Lady Boutique on Facebook⁠ 

  ⁠Crafty Lady Boutique Website⁠


Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join ⁠today! 



﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: ⁠https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams⁠

 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at ⁠https://www.boxup.com/⁠ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“Don’t give up. Just keep moving forward.” - Alexia Haubert</p>
<p>After making it to the top 1% of all Etsy sellers in the wedding category - the top 1%! - Lexie was on top of her game. Then came a global pandemic that shut down the wedding industry and Lexie’s business. </p>
<p>Lexie had to pivot and struggled to grow her business for a long time before recently reaching a big milestone. In this episode, Lexie’s story will inspire you to keep going as you work toward your business goals. </p>
<p>When the wedding industry slowly started coming back, Lexie introduced The Monogrammed Bride subscription box and started building her audience from scratch. She stayed consistent and continued to show up even though she saw very little in the way of results for a long time. </p>
<p>When Lexie and I first talked, after a disappointing launch, I was surprised to see she had done everything I teach. She was doing all the things and she was doing them well. But she wasn’t seeing results. We brainstormed and strategized, and Lexie continued working hard. </p>
<p>And just recently - after seeing consistently steady growth for the last six months - Lexie hit her long-standing goal of 100 subscribers! So what did she do differently these past six months?   </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<strong>She built a community </strong>- giving her subscribers something to feel they were a part of. </li>
  <li>
<strong>She posted stories on Instagram</strong> - consistently. </li>
  <li><strong>She created engaging posts featuring pictures of subscribers and their boxes.</strong></li>
  <li>
<strong>She started going LIVE much more consistently</strong> and, when she did, started building an audience who showed up for her and engaged with her during the LIVEs. </li>
  <li><strong>She followed her subscribers back and engaged with their posts. </strong></li>
  <li>
<strong>She did tons of short video</strong>, finding cracks of time while sitting in her car waiting to pick her kids up from practices.  </li>
  <li>
<strong>She sent boxes to a small number of influencers from TikTok and Instagram</strong> - people with 1000-2000 followers who want to grow as influencers. </li>
  <li>
<strong>She ran Facebook Ads</strong> - and has gotten really dialed in which drives the cost per engagement way down. Lexie analyzes her Ads every week and makes changes as needed. </li>
</ul>
<p>While we were talking, Lexie got subscriber #112! This growth in her business - this regular, recurring revenue - has lessened the financial stress Lexie has felt for the past couple of years. She is able to breathe and plan for even more subscribers as her business continues to grow. </p>
<p>Lexie’s message for anyone who feels overwhelmed or discouraged by the challenges they’re facing in building their business? Don’t give up. Just keep moving forward. </p>
<p>Join me for this episode and get inspired by Lexie’s determination to just keep going and never give up on her dream on her way to reaching and passing her goal of 100 subscribers. </p>
<p>Find and follow Lexie: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/craftyladyboutique/">⁠Crafty Lady Boutique on Instagram⁠</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/CraftyLadyBoutique">⁠Crafty Lady Boutique on Facebook⁠</a> </li>
  <li><a href="https://craftyladyboutique.com/">⁠Crafty Lady Boutique Website⁠</a></li>
</ul>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Join ⁠</a>today! </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams">⁠<strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong>⁠</a></p>
<p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/">⁠<strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong>⁠</a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1599</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f89b2028-6c01-11f0-be4f-733a9215267e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9401330121.mp3?updated=1753945543" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>209: Stop Winging It – Start Curating Your Subscription Box with a Plan</title>
      <description>If your subscription box planning feels chaotic, rushed, or downright stressful, this episode is for you.



I know what it’s like to be stuck in a cycle of packing this month’s box while still scrambling to figure out what’s going in next month’s. But it doesn’t have to be that way.



In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing how I went from winging it to planning six months of boxes in just one hour. And how you can do it too. You’ll hear the story behind my 6 in 60 Workshop, why this system works, and five simple habits that will help you plan ahead and curate with confidence.



Five actionable steps to help you plan and curate your subscription boxes:

• Theme First – Map out 6 clear themes or anchor ideas. 

• Product Partners – Make a running list of your favorite wholesalers, handmade makers, or past vendors. Revisit this list every time you plan.

• Budget Guardrails – Know what you can spend per box – product cost, shipping, packaging – so you’re not scrambling later.

• Lead Times Matter – Give yourself 8–12 weeks to order. Custom items take longer.

• Marketing  – Think about how you’ll tease the box. Each theme should have a built-in story you can share on social media.



Join me for this episode and learn how planning ahead makes everything feel easier – from sourcing products and teasing themes to delivering a box your subscribers can’t stop talking about.



Ready to plan your next 6 boxes in just 60 minutes?

Grab the free replay of the 6 in 60 Workshop and start curating with confidence: 6in60workshop.com



You don’t have to wing it anymore. Let’s plan with purpose.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 






Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 25 Jul 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Stop Winging It – Start Curating Your Subscription Box with a Plan</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>209</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing how I went from winging it to planning six months of boxes in just one hour. And how you can do it too. You’ll hear the story behind my 6 in 60 Workshop, why this system works, and five simple habits that will help you plan ahead and curate with confidence.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If your subscription box planning feels chaotic, rushed, or downright stressful, this episode is for you.



I know what it’s like to be stuck in a cycle of packing this month’s box while still scrambling to figure out what’s going in next month’s. But it doesn’t have to be that way.



In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing how I went from winging it to planning six months of boxes in just one hour. And how you can do it too. You’ll hear the story behind my 6 in 60 Workshop, why this system works, and five simple habits that will help you plan ahead and curate with confidence.



Five actionable steps to help you plan and curate your subscription boxes:

• Theme First – Map out 6 clear themes or anchor ideas. 

• Product Partners – Make a running list of your favorite wholesalers, handmade makers, or past vendors. Revisit this list every time you plan.

• Budget Guardrails – Know what you can spend per box – product cost, shipping, packaging – so you’re not scrambling later.

• Lead Times Matter – Give yourself 8–12 weeks to order. Custom items take longer.

• Marketing  – Think about how you’ll tease the box. Each theme should have a built-in story you can share on social media.



Join me for this episode and learn how planning ahead makes everything feel easier – from sourcing products and teasing themes to delivering a box your subscribers can’t stop talking about.



Ready to plan your next 6 boxes in just 60 minutes?

Grab the free replay of the 6 in 60 Workshop and start curating with confidence: 6in60workshop.com



You don’t have to wing it anymore. Let’s plan with purpose.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 






Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If your subscription box planning feels chaotic, rushed, or downright stressful, this episode is for you.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>I know what it’s like to be stuck in a cycle of packing this month’s box while still scrambling to figure out what’s going in next month’s. But it doesn’t have to be that way.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing how I went from winging it to planning six months of boxes in just one hour. And how you can do it too. You’ll hear the story behind my 6 in 60 Workshop, why this system works, and five simple habits that will help you plan ahead and curate with confidence.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Five actionable steps to help you plan and curate your subscription boxes:</p>
<p>• Theme First – Map out 6 clear themes or anchor ideas. </p>
<p>• Product Partners – Make a running list of your favorite wholesalers, handmade makers, or past vendors. Revisit this list every time you plan.</p>
<p>• Budget Guardrails – Know what you can spend per box – product cost, shipping, packaging – so you’re not scrambling later.</p>
<p>• Lead Times Matter – Give yourself 8–12 weeks to order. Custom items take longer.</p>
<p>• Marketing  – Think about how you’ll tease the box. Each theme should have a built-in story you can share on social media.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me for this episode and learn how planning ahead makes everything feel easier – from sourcing products and teasing themes to delivering a box your subscribers can’t stop talking about.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Ready to plan your next 6 boxes in just 60 minutes?</p>
<p>Grab the free replay of the <strong>6 in 60 Workshop</strong> and start curating with confidence:<a href="https://6in60workshop.com"> <u>6in60workshop.com</u></a></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You don’t have to wing it anymore. Let’s plan with purpose.</p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>654</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[66b9d9e6-65f4-11f0-97a1-23e753cd4df0]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2869525987.mp3?updated=1753928899" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>208: Show Up, Sell Less: How Consistency Builds a Loyal Buying Audience with Brooke Riley</title>
      <description>Have you ever felt stuck trying to get seen? Whether you’re just starting to build your audience so you can launch your subscription box or you’re deep into scaling your business, this episode is for you.



I sat down with Brooke Riley of Re-Fabbed with Brooke Riley and Re-Fabbed Boutique. She shared how she built two successful businesses and a thriving community by showing up authentically, consistently, and imperfectly.



Brooke started her business 10 years ago with a DIY blog and built a Facebook audience from scratch to send readers to her blog. When Facebook LIVE first rolled out, she jumped right in and discovered how powerful it was to connect with people in real time.



Her blog views skyrocketed. Her income grew. And when her audience started asking what she was wearing on her LIVEs and where they could get it, Brooke paid attention.



That question planted the seed for what would become the Re-fabbed Boutique, which she’s grown into a multi-million dollar business over the past 7 years.



More than just a boutique, Brooke has built a community. And she believes that connection – built by showing up as her true self and serving her audience – is what sets her apart.



We covered so much in this conversation, including:

• Why consistency is everything when building your audience, even when it feels like no one is watching.

• How showing up authentically helps your people connect with you.

• The danger of waiting for everything to be “perfect” before you start.

• How personal content builds trust and deepens relationships with your audience.

• Why your actions, not just your words, determine your success.



When I asked Brooke, coach-to-coach, about the biggest mistake business owners make, her answer was simple and powerful: They wait. They think everything has to be perfect before they take the first step. They stay stuck in a compulsive learning mode instead of doing.



If you’ve been holding back, Brooke and I challenge you to start today. Show up. Build trust. Be consistent. And get seen, organically.



Because if you want to launch your subscription box or grow your business, your audience needs to know you.



Brooke left us with one final thought. And in true Brooke Riley fashion, she didn’t sugarcoat it: If you want this, your actions need to show it. You either want it or you don’t. Do the work.



Your audience is waiting, but you have to put yourself out there to be found.



What You’ll Learn in This Episode

• Why consistency and authenticity matter more than perfection

• How to build trust and connection with your audience

•. What it really takes to launch and grow, even when it feels scary

• Why your audience will show up for you when you show up for them



Join me for this episode if you’re ready to stop hiding and start building the business you’ve been dreaming about. Come away inspired to take the first step and keep going.



Find and follow Brooke: 


  
Re-Fabbed on Facebook 



  
Re-Fabbed Boutique on Facebook



  
Re-Fabbed Website



  
Re-Fabbed Boutique Website




Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 23 Jul 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>208</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Have you ever felt stuck trying to get seen? Whether you’re just starting to build your audience so you can launch your subscription box or you’re deep into scaling your business, this episode is for you.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you ever felt stuck trying to get seen? Whether you’re just starting to build your audience so you can launch your subscription box or you’re deep into scaling your business, this episode is for you.



I sat down with Brooke Riley of Re-Fabbed with Brooke Riley and Re-Fabbed Boutique. She shared how she built two successful businesses and a thriving community by showing up authentically, consistently, and imperfectly.



Brooke started her business 10 years ago with a DIY blog and built a Facebook audience from scratch to send readers to her blog. When Facebook LIVE first rolled out, she jumped right in and discovered how powerful it was to connect with people in real time.



Her blog views skyrocketed. Her income grew. And when her audience started asking what she was wearing on her LIVEs and where they could get it, Brooke paid attention.



That question planted the seed for what would become the Re-fabbed Boutique, which she’s grown into a multi-million dollar business over the past 7 years.



More than just a boutique, Brooke has built a community. And she believes that connection – built by showing up as her true self and serving her audience – is what sets her apart.



We covered so much in this conversation, including:

• Why consistency is everything when building your audience, even when it feels like no one is watching.

• How showing up authentically helps your people connect with you.

• The danger of waiting for everything to be “perfect” before you start.

• How personal content builds trust and deepens relationships with your audience.

• Why your actions, not just your words, determine your success.



When I asked Brooke, coach-to-coach, about the biggest mistake business owners make, her answer was simple and powerful: They wait. They think everything has to be perfect before they take the first step. They stay stuck in a compulsive learning mode instead of doing.



If you’ve been holding back, Brooke and I challenge you to start today. Show up. Build trust. Be consistent. And get seen, organically.



Because if you want to launch your subscription box or grow your business, your audience needs to know you.



Brooke left us with one final thought. And in true Brooke Riley fashion, she didn’t sugarcoat it: If you want this, your actions need to show it. You either want it or you don’t. Do the work.



Your audience is waiting, but you have to put yourself out there to be found.



What You’ll Learn in This Episode

• Why consistency and authenticity matter more than perfection

• How to build trust and connection with your audience

•. What it really takes to launch and grow, even when it feels scary

• Why your audience will show up for you when you show up for them



Join me for this episode if you’re ready to stop hiding and start building the business you’ve been dreaming about. Come away inspired to take the first step and keep going.



Find and follow Brooke: 


  
Re-Fabbed on Facebook 



  
Re-Fabbed Boutique on Facebook



  
Re-Fabbed Website



  
Re-Fabbed Boutique Website




Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you ever felt stuck trying to get seen? Whether you’re just starting to build your audience so you can launch your subscription box or you’re deep into scaling your business, this episode is for you.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>I sat down with Brooke Riley of Re-Fabbed with Brooke Riley and Re-Fabbed Boutique. She shared how she built two successful businesses and a thriving community by showing up authentically, consistently, and imperfectly.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Brooke started her business 10 years ago with a DIY blog and built a Facebook audience from scratch to send readers to her blog. When Facebook LIVE first rolled out, she jumped right in and discovered how powerful it was to connect with people in real time.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Her blog views skyrocketed. Her income grew. And when her audience started asking what she was wearing on her LIVEs and where they could get it, Brooke paid attention.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>That question planted the seed for what would become the Re-fabbed Boutique, which she’s grown into a multi-million dollar business over the past 7 years.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>More than just a boutique, Brooke has built a community. And she believes that connection – built by showing up as her true self and serving her audience – is what sets her apart.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>We covered so much in this conversation, including:</p>
<p>• Why consistency is everything when building your audience, even when it feels like no one is watching.</p>
<p>• How showing up authentically helps your people connect with you.</p>
<p>• The danger of waiting for everything to be “perfect” before you start.</p>
<p>• How personal content builds trust and deepens relationships with your audience.</p>
<p>• Why your actions, not just your words, determine your success.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>When I asked Brooke, coach-to-coach, about the biggest mistake business owners make, her answer was simple and powerful: They wait. They think everything has to be perfect before they take the first step. They stay stuck in a compulsive learning mode instead of doing.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you’ve been holding back, Brooke and I challenge you to start today. Show up. Build trust. Be consistent. And get seen, organically.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Because if you want to launch your subscription box or grow your business, your audience needs to know you.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Brooke left us with one final thought. And in true Brooke Riley fashion, she didn’t sugarcoat it: If you want this, your actions need to show it. You either want it or you don’t. Do the work.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Your audience is waiting, but you have to put yourself out there to be found.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>What You’ll Learn in This Episode</p>
<p>• Why consistency and authenticity matter more than perfection</p>
<p>• How to build trust and connection with your audience</p>
<p>•. What it really takes to launch and grow, even when it feels scary</p>
<p>• Why your audience will show up for you when you show up for them</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me for this episode if you’re ready to stop hiding and start building the business you’ve been dreaming about. Come away inspired to take the first step and keep going.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Find and follow Brooke: </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/refabbedbybrooke">Re-Fabbed on Facebook</a> </p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/refabbedboutique">Re-Fabbed Boutique on Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.re-fabbed.com/">Re-Fabbed Website</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.re-fabbedboutique.com/?fbclid=IwY2xjawLnZO1leHRuA2FlbQIxMABicmlkETE0SVRaWnpGR3AxNmxEMVlLAR636LEFcBLY-S-GcJPrDS0vgOxy-jid8lrCiXykjJ_GoTqQ_FTACqSd4yvUEA_aem_UhRn6PEwWxUEynpnHgKdoA">Re-Fabbed Boutique Website</a></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>
<p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2773</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5339a7fc-65f4-11f0-87dd-1b81234ce96c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2892862854.mp3?updated=1753925782" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>207: A Launch Date Isn’t a Plan</title>
      <description>You picked a date to launch your subscription box. You told your audience. But are you actually ready to launch?



Here’s the hard truth: a launch date without a plan is just a number on the calendar. And hope is not a marketing strategy.



In this episode of Friday Fuel, I break down the biggest mistakes subscription box owners make when it comes to launching and what you need to do instead.



Because a successful launch is about so much more than just the day your cart opens. It’s about everything you do before that to warm up your audience, build momentum, and create excitement.



What you’ll learn in this episode:


  Why picking a date isn’t the same as planning a launch.

  The one month I always avoid launching in — and why.

  What a real launch runway includes (and when to start).

  Five signs you’re not ready to launch yet.

  How to check if your launch is on track – or if you need to delay with purpose.




Take Action

Don’t launch to crickets. This week, audit your launch plan and ask yourself:


  Do I have a waitlist?

  Is my audience warm and engaged?

  Is my sales page ready?

  Do I feel confident – or rushed?




If you’re missing pieces, take the time to fix them now. You only get one chance to make a strong first impression. Make sure you’re ready.



And if you want the full roadmap to launching your subscription box the right way? It’s all inside Launch Your Box. Join me, and let’s build your launch plan together.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 18 Jul 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>207</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode of Friday Fuel, I break down the biggest mistakes subscription box owners make when it comes to launching and what you need to do instead.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>You picked a date to launch your subscription box. You told your audience. But are you actually ready to launch?



Here’s the hard truth: a launch date without a plan is just a number on the calendar. And hope is not a marketing strategy.



In this episode of Friday Fuel, I break down the biggest mistakes subscription box owners make when it comes to launching and what you need to do instead.



Because a successful launch is about so much more than just the day your cart opens. It’s about everything you do before that to warm up your audience, build momentum, and create excitement.



What you’ll learn in this episode:


  Why picking a date isn’t the same as planning a launch.

  The one month I always avoid launching in — and why.

  What a real launch runway includes (and when to start).

  Five signs you’re not ready to launch yet.

  How to check if your launch is on track – or if you need to delay with purpose.




Take Action

Don’t launch to crickets. This week, audit your launch plan and ask yourself:


  Do I have a waitlist?

  Is my audience warm and engaged?

  Is my sales page ready?

  Do I feel confident – or rushed?




If you’re missing pieces, take the time to fix them now. You only get one chance to make a strong first impression. Make sure you’re ready.



And if you want the full roadmap to launching your subscription box the right way? It’s all inside Launch Your Box. Join me, and let’s build your launch plan together.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>You picked a date to launch your subscription box. You told your audience. But are you actually ready to launch?</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Here’s the hard truth: a launch date without a plan is just a number on the calendar. And hope is not a marketing strategy.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this episode of Friday Fuel, I break down the biggest mistakes subscription box owners make when it comes to launching and what you need to do instead.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Because a successful launch is about so much more than just the day your cart opens. It’s about everything you do before that to warm up your audience, build momentum, and create excitement.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>What you’ll learn in this episode:</p>
<ul>
  <li>Why picking a date isn’t the same as planning a launch.</li>
  <li>The one month I always avoid launching in — and why.</li>
  <li>What a real launch runway includes (and when to start).</li>
  <li>Five signs you’re not ready to launch yet.</li>
  <li>How to check if your launch is on track – or if you need to delay with purpose.</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Take Action</p>
<p>Don’t launch to crickets. This week, audit your launch plan and ask yourself:</p>
<ul>
  <li>Do I have a waitlist?</li>
  <li>Is my audience warm and engaged?</li>
  <li>Is my sales page ready?</li>
  <li>Do I feel confident – or rushed?</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you’re missing pieces, take the time to fix them now. You only get one chance to make a strong first impression. Make sure you’re ready.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>And if you want the full roadmap to launching your subscription box the right way? It’s all inside Launch Your Box. Join me, and let’s build your launch plan together.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>647</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[49084ac2-608b-11f0-96aa-732c8c4b6dbe]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3398560662.mp3?updated=1752481596" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>206: 100 Monthly Boxes Later: Lessons, Laughs, and What It Really Takes to Keep Showing Up Month After Month</title>
      <description>One hundred months of subscription boxes.



It feels almost unreal to say that out loud. That I’ve curated 100 different subscription boxes over the past 8 ½ years. And yet… here we are.



When I look back at where it started, I can still picture myself stressing over every tiny detail of that very first box. My “Lilly Pulitzer-inspired” box, packed in a plain brown craft box I stamped by hand. During the early days of my subscription box, more always felt better, so I just kept adding things, forgetting all about profit margins, and hoping my customers would be happy. 



Fast forward to today? My process, my confidence, and my profit margins look completely different.



That first year, I thought adding more products would make the box feel more valuable. But over time, I learned the magic is in the experience. The way the boxes make my subscribers feel. Instead of thinking that more is better, I choose one wow-worthy item and curate the rest of the box around it.



And the packaging? Let’s just say we’ve come a long way from those stamped boxes and logo tape. When I reached 100 subscribers, I finally ordered my first custom boxes in my signature turquoise. A few years later, we gave The Monogram Box™ packaging the full glow-up it deserved.



Out of those 100 boxes, some stand out more than others, for better and for worse.



There was the box where FedEx left their truck door open, and my boxes ended up all over a busy road in my town (yes, really).



The “Oh My Gourd” box that I thought was funny, but many of my subscribers didn’t. Lesson learned - give them what they want! 



And the custom-designed green Christmas sweatshirt that subscribers still talk about – and still wear – years later.



Every one of those moments taught me something. How to plan further ahead. How to problem solve and pivot. How to listen (really listen) to what my subscribers wanted, even when it wasn’t what I expected.



Today, we plan boxes 6–8 months in advance. I still start with one main item and build the rest of the box around it. And yes , I stopped packing boxes myself after about 45 of them when we moved into the Warehouse (the team kindly told me I was… in the way).



And my favorite hack? An automatic paper folder for packing slips. A little thing, but it saves so much time every month.



You’d think by our 100th box I could predict exactly what my subscribers will love. But they still surprise me. Sometimes it’s the smallest detail that gets the biggest reaction.



So what keeps them coming back month after month?


  The seasonality. Their style needs change, so the box does too.



  The surprise. That feeling of opening something unexpected every month.



  The connection. They know I care about their feedback and use it to make each box better.




If you’re sitting at box #3 or #33 right now and wondering if you’re on the right track, let me tell you: you are. And if you haven’t launched yet, this advice is for you, too! 



Consistency matters more than perfection. 



Growth happens when you keep showing up, even when no one’s cheering you on yet.



And more than anything, remember: building a sustainable subscription box business is a long game.



One box at a time, you’re building something bigger than you can see right now.



So keep going. Your 100th box is closer than you think.



Join me for this episode as I share the story of my first 100 subscription boxes and how the lessons they’ve taught me can help you reach your 100th box and beyond. 



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 16 Jul 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>100 Monthly Boxes Later: Lessons, Laughs, and What It Really Takes to Keep Showing Up Month After Month</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>206</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>One hundred months of subscription boxes.   It feels almost unreal to say that out loud. That I’ve curated 100 different subscription boxes over the past 8 ½ years. And yet… here we are.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>One hundred months of subscription boxes.



It feels almost unreal to say that out loud. That I’ve curated 100 different subscription boxes over the past 8 ½ years. And yet… here we are.



When I look back at where it started, I can still picture myself stressing over every tiny detail of that very first box. My “Lilly Pulitzer-inspired” box, packed in a plain brown craft box I stamped by hand. During the early days of my subscription box, more always felt better, so I just kept adding things, forgetting all about profit margins, and hoping my customers would be happy. 



Fast forward to today? My process, my confidence, and my profit margins look completely different.



That first year, I thought adding more products would make the box feel more valuable. But over time, I learned the magic is in the experience. The way the boxes make my subscribers feel. Instead of thinking that more is better, I choose one wow-worthy item and curate the rest of the box around it.



And the packaging? Let’s just say we’ve come a long way from those stamped boxes and logo tape. When I reached 100 subscribers, I finally ordered my first custom boxes in my signature turquoise. A few years later, we gave The Monogram Box™ packaging the full glow-up it deserved.



Out of those 100 boxes, some stand out more than others, for better and for worse.



There was the box where FedEx left their truck door open, and my boxes ended up all over a busy road in my town (yes, really).



The “Oh My Gourd” box that I thought was funny, but many of my subscribers didn’t. Lesson learned - give them what they want! 



And the custom-designed green Christmas sweatshirt that subscribers still talk about – and still wear – years later.



Every one of those moments taught me something. How to plan further ahead. How to problem solve and pivot. How to listen (really listen) to what my subscribers wanted, even when it wasn’t what I expected.



Today, we plan boxes 6–8 months in advance. I still start with one main item and build the rest of the box around it. And yes , I stopped packing boxes myself after about 45 of them when we moved into the Warehouse (the team kindly told me I was… in the way).



And my favorite hack? An automatic paper folder for packing slips. A little thing, but it saves so much time every month.



You’d think by our 100th box I could predict exactly what my subscribers will love. But they still surprise me. Sometimes it’s the smallest detail that gets the biggest reaction.



So what keeps them coming back month after month?


  The seasonality. Their style needs change, so the box does too.



  The surprise. That feeling of opening something unexpected every month.



  The connection. They know I care about their feedback and use it to make each box better.




If you’re sitting at box #3 or #33 right now and wondering if you’re on the right track, let me tell you: you are. And if you haven’t launched yet, this advice is for you, too! 



Consistency matters more than perfection. 



Growth happens when you keep showing up, even when no one’s cheering you on yet.



And more than anything, remember: building a sustainable subscription box business is a long game.



One box at a time, you’re building something bigger than you can see right now.



So keep going. Your 100th box is closer than you think.



Join me for this episode as I share the story of my first 100 subscription boxes and how the lessons they’ve taught me can help you reach your 100th box and beyond. 



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>One hundred months of subscription boxes.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>It feels almost unreal to say that out loud. That I’ve curated 100 different subscription boxes over the past 8 ½ years. And yet… here we are.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>When I look back at where it started, I can still picture myself stressing over every tiny detail of that very first box. My “Lilly Pulitzer-inspired” box, packed in a plain brown craft box I stamped by hand. During the early days of my subscription box, more always felt better, so I just kept adding things, forgetting all about profit margins, and hoping my customers would be happy. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Fast forward to today? My process, my confidence, and my profit margins look completely different.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>That first year, I thought adding more products would make the box feel more valuable. But over time, I learned the magic is in the experience. The way the boxes make my subscribers feel. Instead of thinking that more is better, I choose one wow-worthy item and curate the rest of the box around it.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>And the packaging? Let’s just say we’ve come a long way from those stamped boxes and logo tape. When I reached 100 subscribers, I finally ordered my first custom boxes in my signature turquoise. A few years later, we gave The Monogram Box™ packaging the full glow-up it deserved.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Out of those 100 boxes, some stand out more than others, for better and for worse.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>There was the box where FedEx left their truck door open, and my boxes ended up all over a busy road in my town (yes, really).</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>The “Oh My Gourd” box that I thought was funny, but many of my subscribers didn’t. Lesson learned - give them what they want! </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>And the custom-designed green Christmas sweatshirt that subscribers still talk about – and still wear – years later.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Every one of those moments taught me something. How to plan further ahead. How to problem solve and pivot. How to listen (really listen) to what my subscribers wanted, even when it wasn’t what I expected.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Today, we plan boxes 6–8 months in advance. I still start with one main item and build the rest of the box around it. And yes , I stopped packing boxes myself after about 45 of them when we moved into the Warehouse (the team kindly told me I was… in the way).</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>And my favorite hack? An automatic paper folder for packing slips. A little thing, but it saves so much time every month.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You’d think by our 100th box I could predict exactly what my subscribers will love. But they still surprise me. Sometimes it’s the smallest detail that gets the biggest reaction.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>So what keeps them coming back month after month?</p>
<ul>
  <li>The seasonality. Their style needs change, so the box does too.</li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>The surprise. That feeling of opening something unexpected every month.</li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>The connection. They know I care about their feedback and use it to make each box better.</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you’re sitting at box #3 or #33 right now and wondering if you’re on the right track, let me tell you: you are. And if you haven’t launched yet, this advice is for you, too! </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Consistency matters more than perfection. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Growth happens when you keep showing up, even when no one’s cheering you on yet.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>And more than anything, remember: building a sustainable subscription box business is a long game.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>One box at a time, you’re building something bigger than you can see right now.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>So keep going. Your 100th box is closer than you think.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me for this episode as I share the story of my first 100 subscription boxes and how the lessons they’ve taught me can help you reach your 100th box and beyond. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1690</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f11fe088-607e-11f0-bc3d-d3d6526be9dd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6261850495.mp3?updated=1752476334" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>205: You're Not Failing—You're Just Not Being Seen</title>
      <description>Feeling stuck in your subscription box business, even though you’re doing all the things? This episode is your wake-up call—and your pep talk.



Sarah breaks down why your lack of growth likely isn’t about your product or your effort… it’s about visibility. Most box owners aren’t failing—they’re just not being seen by enough of the right people.



She’ll walk you through the math behind your conversion rate, share a powerful example from a Launch Your Box member, and give you 5 clear steps to get out of the shadows and in front of the people who are ready to buy.



In this episode:


  
Why 1–3% conversion means you need a bigger audience



  
A behind-the-scenes story from a frustrated member—and what Sarah told her



  
What to do instead of launching to crickets



  
5 visibility actions you can take in the next 30 days




💡 If you’re ready to launch—or re-launch—with a full plan in place, join Launch Your Box. Inside, you'll get the step-by-step strategy and support you need to grow a subscription box business that lasts.</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 11 Jul 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>You're Not Failing—You're Just Not Being Seen</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>205</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Feeling stuck in your subscription box business, even though you’re doing all the things? This episode is your wake-up call—and your pep talk.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Feeling stuck in your subscription box business, even though you’re doing all the things? This episode is your wake-up call—and your pep talk.



Sarah breaks down why your lack of growth likely isn’t about your product or your effort… it’s about visibility. Most box owners aren’t failing—they’re just not being seen by enough of the right people.



She’ll walk you through the math behind your conversion rate, share a powerful example from a Launch Your Box member, and give you 5 clear steps to get out of the shadows and in front of the people who are ready to buy.



In this episode:


  
Why 1–3% conversion means you need a bigger audience



  
A behind-the-scenes story from a frustrated member—and what Sarah told her



  
What to do instead of launching to crickets



  
5 visibility actions you can take in the next 30 days




💡 If you’re ready to launch—or re-launch—with a full plan in place, join Launch Your Box. Inside, you'll get the step-by-step strategy and support you need to grow a subscription box business that lasts.</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Feeling stuck in your subscription box business, even though you’re doing all the things? This episode is your wake-up call—and your pep talk.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Sarah breaks down why your lack of growth likely isn’t about your product or your effort… it’s about <em>visibility</em>. Most box owners aren’t failing—they’re just not being seen by enough of the right people.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>She’ll walk you through the math behind your conversion rate, share a powerful example from a Launch Your Box member, and give you 5 clear steps to get out of the shadows and in front of the people who are ready to buy.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>In this episode:</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Why 1–3% conversion means you need a bigger audience<br></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>A behind-the-scenes story from a frustrated member—and what Sarah told her<br></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>What to do <em>instead</em> of launching to crickets<br></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>5 visibility actions you can take in the next 30 days<br></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>💡 <strong>If you’re ready to launch—or re-launch—with a full plan in place, join</strong><a href="https://launchyourboxwithsarah.com"><strong> Launch Your Box</strong></a>. Inside, you'll get the step-by-step strategy and support you need to grow a subscription box business that lasts.</p>
<p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>601</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8b16f67a-5af0-11f0-8d10-d73f6d84cf62]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2405543695.mp3?updated=1751865331" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>From 0 to 400 Subscribers: Turning One-Time Sales into Recurring Revenue</title>
      <description>“Start with what you have and build up to what you want.” 



Welcome to my first on-location podcast episode! Launch Your Box member Rachel Duguay joined me live onstage at SubSummit, the first and only conference exclusively for the subscription box industry. 



Rachel and I met at last year’s SubSummit and she quickly became a member of Launch Your Box. At that time, Rachel and her husband’s business, MicroPuzzles, sold miniature puzzles as one-time purchases. 



In business since 2018, MicroPuzzles took off in 2020 when the entire world turned to puzzles as a way to pass the time together. MicroPuzzles are 4”x6” when complete and are adorably packaged in test tubes. Demand for their puzzles went through the roof and customers clamored for more designs. 



Rachel decided adding a subscription box to the business was the answer to giving her customers what they wanted. They launched what Rachel calls the 1.0 version and continued to improve and grow. A year later, they have 425 monthly subscribers and both she and her husband have turned a part-time side hustle into a full-time career. 



Rachel doesn’t just put MicroPuzzles in her own subscription boxes, she partners with other subscription box owners, too. Many members of Launch Your Box have featured Rachel’s tiny puzzles in their own subscription boxes, customized to their themes and their audiences! 



Part of Rachel’s success is due to her creative marketing, including an emphasis on product seeding. You’ll rarely find her without a stash of tiny puzzles on hand to use as “business cards.” She also does a fantastic job of building genuine connections with her audience which has contributed to her success. 



Join me for this episode as Rachel and I talk about the importance of doing something before it’s perfect, the rapid growth of her subscription box, and what led to a cross-country move that included getting the keys to a 3,000-square-foot warehouse. Find out, too, what makes Brian in shipping their most talked about employee.    



Important Links: 

Find and follow Rachel: 


  ⁠MicroPuzzles on Facebook⁠



  ⁠MicroPuzzles on Instagram⁠



  ⁠MicroPuzzles Website⁠


 

Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠



  ⁠Instagram⁠



  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




 

Are you ready for ⁠ Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠ Join the waitlist⁠ today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 09 Jul 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as Rachel and I talk about the importance of doing something before it’s perfect, the rapid growth of her subscription box, and what led to a cross-country move that included getting the keys to a 3,000-square-foot warehouse. Find out, too, what makes Brian in shipping their most talked about employee.    </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Start with what you have and build up to what you want.” 



Welcome to my first on-location podcast episode! Launch Your Box member Rachel Duguay joined me live onstage at SubSummit, the first and only conference exclusively for the subscription box industry. 



Rachel and I met at last year’s SubSummit and she quickly became a member of Launch Your Box. At that time, Rachel and her husband’s business, MicroPuzzles, sold miniature puzzles as one-time purchases. 



In business since 2018, MicroPuzzles took off in 2020 when the entire world turned to puzzles as a way to pass the time together. MicroPuzzles are 4”x6” when complete and are adorably packaged in test tubes. Demand for their puzzles went through the roof and customers clamored for more designs. 



Rachel decided adding a subscription box to the business was the answer to giving her customers what they wanted. They launched what Rachel calls the 1.0 version and continued to improve and grow. A year later, they have 425 monthly subscribers and both she and her husband have turned a part-time side hustle into a full-time career. 



Rachel doesn’t just put MicroPuzzles in her own subscription boxes, she partners with other subscription box owners, too. Many members of Launch Your Box have featured Rachel’s tiny puzzles in their own subscription boxes, customized to their themes and their audiences! 



Part of Rachel’s success is due to her creative marketing, including an emphasis on product seeding. You’ll rarely find her without a stash of tiny puzzles on hand to use as “business cards.” She also does a fantastic job of building genuine connections with her audience which has contributed to her success. 



Join me for this episode as Rachel and I talk about the importance of doing something before it’s perfect, the rapid growth of her subscription box, and what led to a cross-country move that included getting the keys to a 3,000-square-foot warehouse. Find out, too, what makes Brian in shipping their most talked about employee.    



Important Links: 

Find and follow Rachel: 


  ⁠MicroPuzzles on Facebook⁠



  ⁠MicroPuzzles on Instagram⁠



  ⁠MicroPuzzles Website⁠


 

Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠



  ⁠Instagram⁠



  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




 

Are you ready for ⁠ Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠ Join the waitlist⁠ today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“Start with what you have and build up to what you want.” </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Welcome to my first on-location podcast episode! Launch Your Box member Rachel Duguay joined me live onstage at SubSummit, the first and only conference exclusively for the subscription box industry. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Rachel and I met at last year’s SubSummit and she quickly became a member of Launch Your Box. At that time, Rachel and her husband’s business, MicroPuzzles, sold miniature puzzles as one-time purchases. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In business since 2018, MicroPuzzles took off in 2020 when the entire world turned to puzzles as a way to pass the time together. MicroPuzzles are 4”x6” when complete and are adorably packaged in test tubes. Demand for their puzzles went through the roof and customers clamored for more designs. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Rachel decided adding a subscription box to the business was the answer to giving her customers what they wanted. They launched what Rachel calls the 1.0 version and continued to improve and grow. A year later, they have 425 monthly subscribers and both she and her husband have turned a part-time side hustle into a full-time career. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Rachel doesn’t just put MicroPuzzles in her own subscription boxes, she partners with other subscription box owners, too. Many members of Launch Your Box have featured Rachel’s tiny puzzles in their own subscription boxes, customized to their themes and their audiences! </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Part of Rachel’s success is due to her creative marketing, including an emphasis on product seeding. You’ll rarely find her without a stash of tiny puzzles on hand to use as “business cards.” She also does a fantastic job of building genuine connections with her audience which has contributed to her success. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me for this episode as Rachel and I talk about the importance of doing something <em>before</em> it’s perfect, the rapid growth of her subscription box, and what led to a cross-country move that included getting the keys to a 3,000-square-foot warehouse. Find out, too, what makes Brian in shipping their most talked about employee.    </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Important Links: </p>
<p>Find and follow Rachel: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/micropuzzles">⁠MicroPuzzles on Facebook⁠</a></li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/micropuzzles/">⁠MicroPuzzles on Instagram⁠</a></li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://micropuzzles.com/">⁠MicroPuzzles Website⁠</a></li>
</ul>
<p> </p>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p> </p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">⁠ Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">⁠ Join the waitlist⁠</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1334</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0211b83c-5af1-11f0-84bd-ff257662e5d1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9431559565.mp3?updated=1751865463" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>204: The Numbers That Matter: 5 Metrics Every Box Owner Must Track</title>
      <description>When was the last time you really looked at your numbers?



I’m not talking about follower count or how many likes your last reel got. I mean the real numbers in your business. The ones that actually tell you if your subscription box is healthy, sustainable, and built to grow.



If the idea of diving into your numbers makes you want to run and hide, this episode is for you! Because today, I’m walking you through the five most important metrics every subscription box owner needs to track. I’ll break down what they are and how to calculate them, and explain what they mean for your business and how to use them to make smarter decisions starting today.



Whether you’re brand new or scaling toward your next milestone, these numbers will give you clarity, confidence, and control.

Don’t feel like you have to track everything all at once.Pick one number and start there.



Maybe this month, you track your retention rate. Next month, add Customer Acquisition Cost. Then plug in your numbers for LTV.



In this Friday Fuel episode, I’m breaking down the 5 metrics that matter most and how to start tracking them (without the overwhelm). Don’t ignore your numbers because they feel confusing or overwhelming. Because clarity? That’s power.

Mentioned in This Episode:


  
Free Retention Rate Calculator



  
Box Budget Worksheet - https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/my-box-budget



  
Launch Your Box Training Library (members only)






Inside Launch Your Box, we take this even further, teaching you how to track, interpret, and use these numbers to scale your subscription box business. If you're ready to stop guessing and start making decisions based on data, we’re here to help.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 






Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 04 Jul 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Numbers That Matter: 5 Metrics Every Box Owner Must Track</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>204</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this Friday Fuel episode, I’m breaking down the 5 metrics that matter most and how to start tracking them (without the overwhelm). Don’t ignore your numbers because they feel confusing or overwhelming. Because clarity? That’s power.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>When was the last time you really looked at your numbers?



I’m not talking about follower count or how many likes your last reel got. I mean the real numbers in your business. The ones that actually tell you if your subscription box is healthy, sustainable, and built to grow.



If the idea of diving into your numbers makes you want to run and hide, this episode is for you! Because today, I’m walking you through the five most important metrics every subscription box owner needs to track. I’ll break down what they are and how to calculate them, and explain what they mean for your business and how to use them to make smarter decisions starting today.



Whether you’re brand new or scaling toward your next milestone, these numbers will give you clarity, confidence, and control.

Don’t feel like you have to track everything all at once.Pick one number and start there.



Maybe this month, you track your retention rate. Next month, add Customer Acquisition Cost. Then plug in your numbers for LTV.



In this Friday Fuel episode, I’m breaking down the 5 metrics that matter most and how to start tracking them (without the overwhelm). Don’t ignore your numbers because they feel confusing or overwhelming. Because clarity? That’s power.

Mentioned in This Episode:


  
Free Retention Rate Calculator



  
Box Budget Worksheet - https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/my-box-budget



  
Launch Your Box Training Library (members only)






Inside Launch Your Box, we take this even further, teaching you how to track, interpret, and use these numbers to scale your subscription box business. If you're ready to stop guessing and start making decisions based on data, we’re here to help.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 






Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>When was the last time you really looked at your numbers?</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>I’m not talking about follower count or how many likes your last reel got. I mean the real numbers in your business. <strong>The ones that actually tell you if your subscription box is healthy, sustainable, and built to grow.</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If the idea of diving into your numbers makes you want to run and hide, this episode is for you! Because today, <strong>I’m walking you through the five most important metrics every subscription box owner needs to track. </strong>I’ll break down what they are and how to calculate them, <em>and</em> explain what they mean for your business and how to use them to make smarter decisions starting today.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Whether you’re brand new or scaling toward your next milestone, these numbers will give you clarity, confidence, and control.</p>
<p><br>Don’t feel like you have to track everything all at once.Pick one number and start there.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Maybe this month, you track your <strong>retention rate</strong>. Next month, add <strong>Customer Acquisition Cost</strong>. Then plug in your numbers for <strong>LTV</strong>.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this Friday Fuel episode, I’m breaking down the 5 metrics that matter most and how to start tracking them (without the overwhelm). D<em>on’t ignore your numbers because they feel confusing or overwhelming. </em>Because clarity? That’s power.</p>
<p><br>Mentioned in This Episode:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Free Retention Rate Calculator</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Box Budget Worksheet - https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/my-box-budget</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Launch Your Box Training Library (members only)</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Inside <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"><strong>Launch Your Box</strong></a>, we take this even further, teaching you how to track, interpret, and <em>use</em> these numbers to scale your subscription box business. If you're ready to stop guessing and start making decisions based on data, we’re here to help.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>732</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c4a55d5c-5576-11f0-9b28-a7940eb4ed3a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1032626176.mp3?updated=1753741555" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>203: Growing on YouTube: What Finally Worked</title>
      <description>For 18 months, I posted regularly on YouTube. Livestreams every Monday. Audio-only versions of The Launch Your Box Podcast. A few Shorts every week. I saw some slow, steady growth, but it wasn’t what I’d hoped for.



Then I attended a conference this past February, and I kept hearing the same thing over and over again: “YouTube changed everything for my business.” 



But the thing was, it hadn’t changed everything for my business. It hadn’t really changed much of anything at that point. 



That’s when it hit me. I was treating YouTube like just another platform instead of the powerful growth tool it is. So I made a few simple, strategic changes… and everything shifted.



In this episode, I’m walking you through:


  
What I changed



  
Why those changes worked



  
And how you can start using YouTube to grow your business, especially if you sell a product or subscription box






There’s a reason every successful creator I met at that conference credited YouTube with playing a big role in their growth. It’s the second-largest search engine in the world. And unlike so many social media platforms, your YouTube content lasts.



Unlike Instagram or TikTok, where posts disappear in a flash, YouTube videos keep working for you for months (even years). This builds visibility, trust, and community, especially when you’re showing up with value.



If you’re making Reels or packing videos, you’re already halfway there. YouTube just gives it more reach and staying power.

If you want to go deeper, check out the YouTube course that helped me shift everything. It’s practical, doable, and honestly... it changed how I show up on the platform.



Click HERE to grab it now. Use code SARAH for $50 off. 



I went from 2,300 subscribers in February to more than 16,000 just a few months later. My goal? 50K subscribers by the end of 2025. I know it’s possible because of the systems I’ve put in place. 



Join me for this episode to learn how YouTube can work for you and your subscription box business. YouTube isn’t magic. But with the right strategy, it can grow your business.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 02 Jul 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Growing on YouTube: What Finally Worked</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>203</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode to learn how YouTube can work for you and your subscription box business. YouTube isn’t magic. But with the right strategy, it can grow your business.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>For 18 months, I posted regularly on YouTube. Livestreams every Monday. Audio-only versions of The Launch Your Box Podcast. A few Shorts every week. I saw some slow, steady growth, but it wasn’t what I’d hoped for.



Then I attended a conference this past February, and I kept hearing the same thing over and over again: “YouTube changed everything for my business.” 



But the thing was, it hadn’t changed everything for my business. It hadn’t really changed much of anything at that point. 



That’s when it hit me. I was treating YouTube like just another platform instead of the powerful growth tool it is. So I made a few simple, strategic changes… and everything shifted.



In this episode, I’m walking you through:


  
What I changed



  
Why those changes worked



  
And how you can start using YouTube to grow your business, especially if you sell a product or subscription box






There’s a reason every successful creator I met at that conference credited YouTube with playing a big role in their growth. It’s the second-largest search engine in the world. And unlike so many social media platforms, your YouTube content lasts.



Unlike Instagram or TikTok, where posts disappear in a flash, YouTube videos keep working for you for months (even years). This builds visibility, trust, and community, especially when you’re showing up with value.



If you’re making Reels or packing videos, you’re already halfway there. YouTube just gives it more reach and staying power.

If you want to go deeper, check out the YouTube course that helped me shift everything. It’s practical, doable, and honestly... it changed how I show up on the platform.



Click HERE to grab it now. Use code SARAH for $50 off. 



I went from 2,300 subscribers in February to more than 16,000 just a few months later. My goal? 50K subscribers by the end of 2025. I know it’s possible because of the systems I’ve put in place. 



Join me for this episode to learn how YouTube can work for you and your subscription box business. YouTube isn’t magic. But with the right strategy, it can grow your business.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>For 18 months, I posted regularly on YouTube. Livestreams every Monday. Audio-only versions of <em>The Launch Your Box Podcast</em>. A few Shorts every week. I saw some slow, steady growth, but it wasn’t what I’d hoped for.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Then I attended a conference this past February, and I kept hearing the same thing over and over again: “YouTube changed everything for my business.” </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>But the thing was, it hadn’t changed everything for my business. It hadn’t really changed much of anything at that point. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>That’s when it hit me. I was treating YouTube like just another platform instead of the powerful growth tool it is. So I made a few simple, strategic changes… and everything shifted.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this episode, I’m walking you through:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>What I changed</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Why those changes worked</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>And how you can start using YouTube to grow your business, especially if you sell a product or subscription box</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>There’s a reason every successful creator I met at that conference credited YouTube with playing a big role in their growth. It’s the second-largest search engine in the world. And unlike so many social media platforms, your YouTube content <em>lasts</em>.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Unlike Instagram or TikTok, where posts disappear in a flash, YouTube videos keep working for you for months (even years). This builds visibility, trust, and community, especially when you’re showing up with value.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you’re making Reels or packing videos, you’re already halfway there. YouTube just gives it more reach and staying power.</p>
<p><br>If you want to go deeper, check out the YouTube course that helped me shift everything. It’s practical, doable, and honestly... it changed how I show up on the platform.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://heidi-easley.clickfunnels.com/grow-your-first-100-subscribers-on-youtube"><u>Click HERE</u></a> to grab it now. Use code <strong>SARAH</strong> for $50 off. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>I went from 2,300 subscribers in February to more than 16,000 just a few months later. My goal? 50K subscribers by the end of 2025. I know it’s possible because of the systems I’ve put in place. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Join me for this episode</strong> to learn how YouTube can work for you and your subscription box business. YouTube isn’t magic. But with the right strategy, it can grow your business.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1408</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[17bcec18-5576-11f0-b54e-2bd197802dac]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8697469280.mp3?updated=1751262915" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>202: What’s Really Holding You Back? (And Why You’re More Consistent Than You Think)</title>
      <description>Are you telling yourself you're "just not consistent"? That your schedule is the problem? That if life would just calm down for a minute, you’d finally make progress in your business?

I’m calling you out (with love)in this week’s Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast. Because I’ve been there, too. And what I’m sharing in this 10-minute mindset reset might be exactly what you need to break through.

It all started with a stat I heard at a conference. Only 1.9% of women-owned businesses ever reach a million dollars in revenue. That number stopped me in my tracks. And it got me thinking about why so many subscription box businesses stall out before they ever really start.

Inside this episode, I’m walking you through the four barriers that are actually holding you back, and the simple shift that can move you forward starting today.


  
Get honest about what’s actually distracting you.



  
Stop chasing new strategies and start following the roadmap you already have.



  
Take back control of your numbers, including your profit margin.



  
Rethink the story you’ve been telling yourself about consistency.




Here’s the truth: You’re already consistent. You just haven’t chosen to be consistent in your business. Yet.

And that changes now.

Ask yourself:


  
What’s distracting me from growing my business?



  
Which of the 4 barriers is holding me back?



  
What’s ONE thing I can do every day for the next 7 days to show up differently?




You don’t need a 10-step plan. You need one simple action, on repeat.

Listen now and let’s make that shift together. Because million-dollar momentum doesn’t start with a perfect plan.

It starts with showing up.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! 

In this episode, I’ll challenge you to:Take Action This Week</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Jun 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What’s Really Holding You Back? (And Why You’re More Consistent Than You Think)</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>202</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I’m calling you out (with love)in this week’s Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast. Because I’ve been there, too. And what I’m sharing in this 10-minute mindset reset might be exactly what you need to break through.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Are you telling yourself you're "just not consistent"? That your schedule is the problem? That if life would just calm down for a minute, you’d finally make progress in your business?

I’m calling you out (with love)in this week’s Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast. Because I’ve been there, too. And what I’m sharing in this 10-minute mindset reset might be exactly what you need to break through.

It all started with a stat I heard at a conference. Only 1.9% of women-owned businesses ever reach a million dollars in revenue. That number stopped me in my tracks. And it got me thinking about why so many subscription box businesses stall out before they ever really start.

Inside this episode, I’m walking you through the four barriers that are actually holding you back, and the simple shift that can move you forward starting today.


  
Get honest about what’s actually distracting you.



  
Stop chasing new strategies and start following the roadmap you already have.



  
Take back control of your numbers, including your profit margin.



  
Rethink the story you’ve been telling yourself about consistency.




Here’s the truth: You’re already consistent. You just haven’t chosen to be consistent in your business. Yet.

And that changes now.

Ask yourself:


  
What’s distracting me from growing my business?



  
Which of the 4 barriers is holding me back?



  
What’s ONE thing I can do every day for the next 7 days to show up differently?




You don’t need a 10-step plan. You need one simple action, on repeat.

Listen now and let’s make that shift together. Because million-dollar momentum doesn’t start with a perfect plan.

It starts with showing up.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! 

In this episode, I’ll challenge you to:Take Action This Week</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are you telling yourself you're "just not consistent"? That your schedule is the problem? That if life would just calm down for a minute, you’d finally make progress in your business?</p>
<p>I’m calling you out (with love)in this week’s <em>Friday Fuel </em>episode of <em>The Launch Your Box Podcast.</em> Because I’ve been there, too. And what I’m sharing in this 10-minute mindset reset might be exactly what you need to break through.</p>
<p>It all started with a stat I heard at a conference. Only <strong>1.9% of women-owned businesses</strong> ever reach a million dollars in revenue. That number stopped me in my tracks. And it got me thinking about why so many subscription box businesses stall out before they ever really start.</p>
<p>Inside this episode, I’m walking you through the <strong>four barriers that are actually holding you back, </strong>and the simple shift that can move you forward starting today.</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Get honest about what’s <em>actually</em> distracting you.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Stop chasing new strategies and start following the roadmap you already have.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Take back control of your numbers, including your profit margin.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Rethink the story you’ve been telling yourself about consistency.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Here’s the truth: <strong>You’re already consistent.</strong> You just haven’t <em>chosen</em> to be consistent in your business. Yet.</p>
<p>And that changes now.</p>
<p>Ask yourself:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>What’s distracting me from growing my business?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Which of the 4 barriers is holding me back?</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>What’s ONE thing I can do every day for the next 7 days to show up differently?</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You don’t need a 10-step plan. You need one simple action, on repeat.</p>
<p><strong>Listen now and let’s make that shift together. </strong>Because million-dollar momentum doesn’t start with a perfect plan.</p>
<p>It starts with showing up.</p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>
<p>In this episode, I’ll challenge you to:Take Action This Week<br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>686</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6ee00516-51a2-11f0-be3f-9fda86b07d21]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2042661793.mp3?updated=1750842154" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>8 Ways to Find Products For Your Subscription Box</title>
      <description>One of the most important aspects of our subscription box is the products we put inside it. Whether you’re brand new to business or an experienced subscription box owner, finding the right products at the right prices can be challenging. Where do you start?  What about when you begin to grow?  How do you buy in bulk?



Before you start shopping, you will need your sales tax permit and resellers certificate. File for your sales tax permit first and then you’ll be able to get your resellers certificate. 



Where you head next depends on where you are in your business. I found in my own business that buying product for my growing subscription box was different from buying product for my brick-and-mortar shop or the early days of my subscription box. 



So how can you find the products you need? 



1 - When you’re brand new to business: 


  Local Shops/Brands

  Facebook Wholesale Groups




2 - Once you’ve established yourself and have some orders behind you:


  
Online Marketplaces such as Faire - You can shop thousands of vendors on one platform with low required minimum order quantities. 

  
Direct vendor wholesale site - Go directly to the websites and look for a wholesale link. See if you can apply for a wholesale account with them.

  
Markets or Trade shows -These are scheduled events that happen across the country where hundreds or thousands of vendors come to connect with buyers. You can walk through all their booths, see their products in person, meet with vendors, and place orders. 




I want you to go to a Market. They opened my mind to brands and vendors I never would have found or considered. I’ve met vendors at Market who have grown along with me and my business. 



3 - You’re growing and it’s time to start making bigger bulk purchases:

When you grow past a certain point, it’s time to buy bulk and consider working with overseas manufacturers. 


  
Global Marketplace - Alibaba, AliExpress, and IndiaMart are a great way to lower costs for items. I purchased small items first to get comfortable with product quality and shipping time. However, since the items are coming from overseas, you’ll need to give them more lead time when ordering. 

  White Label from an Existing Vendor - Vendors allow you to custom-make products under their supply chain and manufacturing process and put your label on it. 

  Sourcing Services - You can work with a sourcing agent who works with manufacturers on your behalf, getting products for you at really great prices. This sourcing agent handles all the communication and organization. 




My advice for you:


  
Use several different vendors - don’t put all your eggs in one basket.

  
Build relationships - get representatives and keep in touch with them. Relationships are so important in our business. 

  
Prices are negotiable - don’t be afraid to ask. Always ask for bulk pricing or discounts or free shipping or products. The bigger your business gets, the more buying power you have.




If you are working on a T-Shirt subscription, I’ve got a great FREE resource for you.  Check out ⁠my favorite t-shirt brands and styles pdf⁠.  There are SO many choices when it comes to t-shirts - this resource will help you find the best ones for you and your customers!  



Join me for this episode as I walk you through 8 ways to find products for your subscription box. Whether you’re just getting started or need more product options as you grow, get answers to your product sourcing questions! 



⁠Sarah’s Favorite T-Shirt Brands and Styles⁠⁠ ⁠

⁠FREE 6 in 60 Workshop⁠



Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join the waitlist ⁠today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 25 Jun 2025 08:54:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>One of the most important aspects of our subscription box is the products we put inside it. Whether you’re brand new to business or an experienced subscription box owner, finding the right products at the right prices can be challenging. Where do you start?  What about when you begin to grow?  How do you buy in bulk?</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>One of the most important aspects of our subscription box is the products we put inside it. Whether you’re brand new to business or an experienced subscription box owner, finding the right products at the right prices can be challenging. Where do you start?  What about when you begin to grow?  How do you buy in bulk?



Before you start shopping, you will need your sales tax permit and resellers certificate. File for your sales tax permit first and then you’ll be able to get your resellers certificate. 



Where you head next depends on where you are in your business. I found in my own business that buying product for my growing subscription box was different from buying product for my brick-and-mortar shop or the early days of my subscription box. 



So how can you find the products you need? 



1 - When you’re brand new to business: 


  Local Shops/Brands

  Facebook Wholesale Groups




2 - Once you’ve established yourself and have some orders behind you:


  
Online Marketplaces such as Faire - You can shop thousands of vendors on one platform with low required minimum order quantities. 

  
Direct vendor wholesale site - Go directly to the websites and look for a wholesale link. See if you can apply for a wholesale account with them.

  
Markets or Trade shows -These are scheduled events that happen across the country where hundreds or thousands of vendors come to connect with buyers. You can walk through all their booths, see their products in person, meet with vendors, and place orders. 




I want you to go to a Market. They opened my mind to brands and vendors I never would have found or considered. I’ve met vendors at Market who have grown along with me and my business. 



3 - You’re growing and it’s time to start making bigger bulk purchases:

When you grow past a certain point, it’s time to buy bulk and consider working with overseas manufacturers. 


  
Global Marketplace - Alibaba, AliExpress, and IndiaMart are a great way to lower costs for items. I purchased small items first to get comfortable with product quality and shipping time. However, since the items are coming from overseas, you’ll need to give them more lead time when ordering. 

  White Label from an Existing Vendor - Vendors allow you to custom-make products under their supply chain and manufacturing process and put your label on it. 

  Sourcing Services - You can work with a sourcing agent who works with manufacturers on your behalf, getting products for you at really great prices. This sourcing agent handles all the communication and organization. 




My advice for you:


  
Use several different vendors - don’t put all your eggs in one basket.

  
Build relationships - get representatives and keep in touch with them. Relationships are so important in our business. 

  
Prices are negotiable - don’t be afraid to ask. Always ask for bulk pricing or discounts or free shipping or products. The bigger your business gets, the more buying power you have.




If you are working on a T-Shirt subscription, I’ve got a great FREE resource for you.  Check out ⁠my favorite t-shirt brands and styles pdf⁠.  There are SO many choices when it comes to t-shirts - this resource will help you find the best ones for you and your customers!  



Join me for this episode as I walk you through 8 ways to find products for your subscription box. Whether you’re just getting started or need more product options as you grow, get answers to your product sourcing questions! 



⁠Sarah’s Favorite T-Shirt Brands and Styles⁠⁠ ⁠

⁠FREE 6 in 60 Workshop⁠



Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join the waitlist ⁠today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>One of the most important aspects of our subscription box is the products we put inside it. Whether you’re brand new to business or an experienced subscription box owner, finding the right products at the right prices can be challenging. Where do you start?  What about when you begin to grow?  How do you buy in bulk?</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><em>Before you start shopping, you will need your sales tax permit and resellers certificate. File for your sales tax permit first and then you’ll be able to get your resellers certificate. </em></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Where you head next depends on where you are in your business. I found in my own business that buying product for my growing subscription box was different from buying product for my brick-and-mortar shop or the early days of my subscription box. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>So how can you find the products you need? </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>1 - When you’re brand new to business:</strong> </p>
<ul>
  <li><strong>Local Shops/Brands</strong></li>
  <li><strong>Facebook Wholesale Groups</strong></li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>2 - Once you’ve established yourself and have some orders behind you:</strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<strong>Online Marketplaces such as Faire</strong> - You can shop thousands of vendors on one platform with low required minimum order quantities. </li>
  <li>
<strong>Direct vendor wholesale site</strong> - Go directly to the websites and look for a wholesale link. See if you can apply for a wholesale account with them.</li>
  <li>
<strong>Markets or Trade shows</strong> -These are scheduled events that happen across the country where hundreds or thousands of vendors come to connect with buyers. You can walk through all their booths, see their products in person, meet with vendors, and place orders. </li>
<p><br></p>
</ul>
<p>I want you to go to a Market. They opened my mind to brands and vendors I never would have found or considered. I’ve met vendors at Market who have grown along with me and my business. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>3 - You’re growing and it’s time to start making bigger bulk purchases:</strong></p>
<p>When you grow past a certain point, it’s time to buy bulk and consider working with overseas manufacturers. </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<strong>Global Marketplace</strong> - Alibaba, AliExpress, and IndiaMart are a great way to lower costs for items. I purchased small items first to get comfortable with product quality and shipping time. However, since the items are coming from overseas, you’ll need to give them more lead time when ordering. </li>
  <li><strong>White Label from an Existing Vendor - Vendors allow you to custom-make products under their supply chain and manufacturing process and put your label on it. </strong></li>
  <li><strong>Sourcing Services - You can work with a sourcing agent who works with manufacturers on your behalf, getting products for you at really great prices. This sourcing agent handles all the communication and organization. </strong></li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>My advice for you:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<strong>Use several different vendors</strong> - don’t put all your eggs in one basket.</li>
  <li>
<strong>Build relationships</strong> - get representatives and keep in touch with them. Relationships are so important in our business. </li>
  <li>
<strong>Prices are negotiable</strong> - don’t be afraid to ask. Always ask for bulk pricing or discounts or free shipping or products. The bigger your business gets, the more buying power you have.</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you are working on a T-Shirt subscription, I’ve got a great FREE resource for you.  Check out <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-favorite-tshirt-brands-and-styles">⁠my favorite t-shirt brands and styles pdf⁠</a>.  There are SO many choices when it comes to t-shirts - this resource will help you find the best ones for you and your customers!  </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me for this episode as I walk you through 8 ways to find products for your subscription box. Whether you’re just getting started or need more product options as you grow, get answers to your product sourcing questions! </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-favorite-tshirt-brands-and-styles">⁠Sarah’s Favorite T-Shirt Brands and Styles⁠</a><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-favorite-tshirt-brands-and-styles">⁠ ⁠</a></p>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e">⁠FREE 6 in 60 Workshop⁠</a></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">⁠Join the waitlist ⁠</a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1804</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1c48149c-51a2-11f0-a584-cf06f3b7ba08]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2096066458.mp3?updated=1750842016" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>201: How to Sell Your Subscription Box Without Shipping a Single Box</title>
      <description>In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing how I sold my first subscription boxes to local customers. And how setting up my tech from the beginning made it easier to grow later. If you’re just getting started, this simple approach will help you build momentum without feeling overwhelmed.



Starting local gives you faster feedback, lower risk, and fewer moving parts. But you still need a strong foundation.



Even with just a few subscribers, a professional setup builds trust and gives your box a sense of legitimacy, both for your customers and for you.



Your first subscribers may be closer than you think. 


  
Local events, vendor markets, and craft fairs



  
Neighborhood or niche Facebook groups



  
Friends, coworkers, school connections



  
Current retail or online customers




You don’t need a huge audience. You need a warm one that already knows, likes, and trusts you.



Keep the experience simple and seamless:


  
Share one link to your checkout page



  
Show what the box includes and how pickup or delivery works



  
Automate monthly payments




Then create a great first impression:


  
Add a welcome card and clear pickup instructions



  
Send a follow-up email with next steps



  
Stay consistent with communication




Even local subscribers deserve a polished, thoughtful experience.



Your local customers can become your most loyal subscribers.

To keep them engaged:


  
Add them to your email list



  
Share sneak peeks and reminders regularly



  
Celebrate them in your content if they post about their box



  
Offer simple loyalty bonuses or referral perks




Most importantly, keep showing up. The more consistently you communicate, the more likely they are to stick around and spread the word.

Your Friday Fuel Challenge


  
Set up your checkout page with recurring billing, even if you’re only selling to a few people.



  
Identify 5 local places or communities where your ideal subscriber already hangs out.



  
Map out your local delivery or pickup process so customers know exactly what to expect.



  
Create a simple follow-up email to thank new subscribers and build connection from day one.




You don’t need a massive audience or a complicated shipping setup to launch.

You just need a solid foundation—and a few boxes that build belief.

Start like you mean it. You’ve got this.



Ready to launch your subscription box without the stress of shipping? Join me for this Friday Fuel episode and learn how starting local can give you the momentum – and the systems – you need to grow.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 20 Jun 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Sell Your Subscription Box Without Shipping a Single Box</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>201</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing how I sold my first subscription boxes to local customers. And how setting up my tech from the beginning made it easier to grow later. If you’re just getting started, this simple approach will help you build momentum without feeling overwhelmed.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this Friday Fuel episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing how I sold my first subscription boxes to local customers. And how setting up my tech from the beginning made it easier to grow later. If you’re just getting started, this simple approach will help you build momentum without feeling overwhelmed.



Starting local gives you faster feedback, lower risk, and fewer moving parts. But you still need a strong foundation.



Even with just a few subscribers, a professional setup builds trust and gives your box a sense of legitimacy, both for your customers and for you.



Your first subscribers may be closer than you think. 


  
Local events, vendor markets, and craft fairs



  
Neighborhood or niche Facebook groups



  
Friends, coworkers, school connections



  
Current retail or online customers




You don’t need a huge audience. You need a warm one that already knows, likes, and trusts you.



Keep the experience simple and seamless:


  
Share one link to your checkout page



  
Show what the box includes and how pickup or delivery works



  
Automate monthly payments




Then create a great first impression:


  
Add a welcome card and clear pickup instructions



  
Send a follow-up email with next steps



  
Stay consistent with communication




Even local subscribers deserve a polished, thoughtful experience.



Your local customers can become your most loyal subscribers.

To keep them engaged:


  
Add them to your email list



  
Share sneak peeks and reminders regularly



  
Celebrate them in your content if they post about their box



  
Offer simple loyalty bonuses or referral perks




Most importantly, keep showing up. The more consistently you communicate, the more likely they are to stick around and spread the word.

Your Friday Fuel Challenge


  
Set up your checkout page with recurring billing, even if you’re only selling to a few people.



  
Identify 5 local places or communities where your ideal subscriber already hangs out.



  
Map out your local delivery or pickup process so customers know exactly what to expect.



  
Create a simple follow-up email to thank new subscribers and build connection from day one.




You don’t need a massive audience or a complicated shipping setup to launch.

You just need a solid foundation—and a few boxes that build belief.

Start like you mean it. You’ve got this.



Ready to launch your subscription box without the stress of shipping? Join me for this Friday Fuel episode and learn how starting local can give you the momentum – and the systems – you need to grow.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this <em>Friday Fuel </em>episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing how I sold my first subscription boxes to local customers. And how setting up my tech from the beginning made it easier to grow later. If you’re just getting started, this simple approach will help you build momentum without feeling overwhelmed.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Starting local gives you faster feedback, lower risk, and fewer moving parts. But you still need a strong foundation.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Even with just a few subscribers, a professional setup builds trust and gives your box a sense of legitimacy, both for your customers and for you.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Your first subscribers may be closer than you think. </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Local events, vendor markets, and craft fairs</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Neighborhood or niche Facebook groups</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Friends, coworkers, school connections</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Current retail or online customers</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You don’t need a huge audience. You need a warm one that already knows, likes, and trusts you.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Keep the experience simple and seamless:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Share one link to your checkout page</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Show what the box includes and how pickup or delivery works</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Automate monthly payments</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Then create a great first impression:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Add a welcome card and clear pickup instructions</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Send a follow-up email with next steps</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Stay consistent with communication</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Even local subscribers deserve a polished, thoughtful experience.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Your local customers can become your most loyal subscribers.</p>
<p>To keep them engaged:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Add them to your email list</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Share sneak peeks and reminders regularly</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Celebrate them in your content if they post about their box</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Offer simple loyalty bonuses or referral perks</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Most importantly, keep showing up. The more consistently you communicate, the more likely they are to stick around <em>and</em> spread the word.</p>
<p><br>Your Friday Fuel Challenge</p>
<ol>
  <li>
<p><strong>Set up your checkout page</strong> with recurring billing, even if you’re only selling to a few people.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Identify 5 local places or communities</strong> where your ideal subscriber already hangs out.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Map out your local delivery or pickup process</strong> so customers know exactly what to expect.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Create a simple follow-up email</strong> to thank new subscribers and build connection from day one.</p>
</li>
</ol>
<p>You don’t need a massive audience or a complicated shipping setup to launch.</p>
<p>You just need a solid foundation—and a few boxes that build belief.</p>
<p><strong>Start like you mean it. You’ve got this.</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Ready to launch your subscription box without the stress of shipping? Join me for this Friday Fuel episode and learn how starting local can give you the momentum – and the systems – you need to grow.</p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>646</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[33658ba8-4a79-11f0-9d83-eb7745a2c485]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4808100980.mp3?updated=1750054787" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>200: 200 Episodes Later: What We’ve Learned About Business, Friendship &amp; Showing Up</title>
      <description>Two. Hundred. Episodes. Can you believe it?

When I started the Launch Your Box Podcast, I had no idea just how many stories we’d tell, how many breakthroughs we’d celebrate, or how many times I’d get teary recording solo episodes in my office. 

This week, we’re throwing a little podcast party to celebrate. And, of course, you’re invited. 

For this special 200th episode, I sat down with five of my biz besties – women I’ve been walking alongside in life and business for more than seven years. These are the people who have seen it all, from messy middle moments to million-dollar wins.

We talked about…


  
How we met (and what that has to do with building your own business bestie crew inside Launch Your Box).



  
The moment they each decided to go for it in their businesses.



  
What life looked like before the business and how it’s changed.



  
The worst (and best!) advice they got when they were just starting out.



  
What no one sees behind the scenes, but totally drains their time and energy.



  
The mindset shifts, personal growth, and unexpected wins that changed everything.




This celebration is filled with laughter, heart, and the kind of real talk we all need to hear. Especially when we’re knee-deep in decisions, doubt, or feeling like duct tape holding is all that’s holding things together.

Whether you're still dreaming of starting or knee-deep in the hustle, this episode is your reminder that you're not alone and that success doesn’t happen overnight (or without people who “get it” in your corner).

Join me and my biz besties for this special episode as we celebrate, laugh (a lot), and hear the real stories behind the highlight reels.

Find and follow Tamara: 


  
Tamara on Instagram



  
Tamara on Facebook



  
Tamara’s Website




Find and follow Christie: 


  
Christie on Instagram



  
Christie on Facebook



  
Christie’s Website




Find and follow Cindy: 


  
Cindy on Instagram



  
Cindy on Facebook



  
Cindy’s Website




Find and follow Heidi: 


  
Heidi on Instagram



  
Heidi on Facebook



  
Heidi’s Website




Find and follow Kasey: 


  
Kasey on Instagram



  
Kasey on Facebook



  
Kasey’s Website




Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 18 Jun 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>200 Episodes Later: What We’ve Learned About Business, Friendship &amp; Showing Up</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>200</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>For this special 200th episode, I sat down with five of my biz besties – women I’ve been walking alongside in life and business for more than seven years. These are the people who have seen it all, from messy middle moments to million-dollar wins.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Two. Hundred. Episodes. Can you believe it?

When I started the Launch Your Box Podcast, I had no idea just how many stories we’d tell, how many breakthroughs we’d celebrate, or how many times I’d get teary recording solo episodes in my office. 

This week, we’re throwing a little podcast party to celebrate. And, of course, you’re invited. 

For this special 200th episode, I sat down with five of my biz besties – women I’ve been walking alongside in life and business for more than seven years. These are the people who have seen it all, from messy middle moments to million-dollar wins.

We talked about…


  
How we met (and what that has to do with building your own business bestie crew inside Launch Your Box).



  
The moment they each decided to go for it in their businesses.



  
What life looked like before the business and how it’s changed.



  
The worst (and best!) advice they got when they were just starting out.



  
What no one sees behind the scenes, but totally drains their time and energy.



  
The mindset shifts, personal growth, and unexpected wins that changed everything.




This celebration is filled with laughter, heart, and the kind of real talk we all need to hear. Especially when we’re knee-deep in decisions, doubt, or feeling like duct tape holding is all that’s holding things together.

Whether you're still dreaming of starting or knee-deep in the hustle, this episode is your reminder that you're not alone and that success doesn’t happen overnight (or without people who “get it” in your corner).

Join me and my biz besties for this special episode as we celebrate, laugh (a lot), and hear the real stories behind the highlight reels.

Find and follow Tamara: 


  
Tamara on Instagram



  
Tamara on Facebook



  
Tamara’s Website




Find and follow Christie: 


  
Christie on Instagram



  
Christie on Facebook



  
Christie’s Website




Find and follow Cindy: 


  
Cindy on Instagram



  
Cindy on Facebook



  
Cindy’s Website




Find and follow Heidi: 


  
Heidi on Instagram



  
Heidi on Facebook



  
Heidi’s Website




Find and follow Kasey: 


  
Kasey on Instagram



  
Kasey on Facebook



  
Kasey’s Website




Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Two. Hundred. Episodes. Can you believe it?</p>
<p>When I started the <em>Launch Your Box Podcast</em>, I had no idea just how many stories we’d tell, how many breakthroughs we’d celebrate, or how many times I’d get teary recording solo episodes in my office. </p>
<p>This week, we’re throwing a little podcast party to celebrate. And, of course, you’re invited. </p>
<p>For this special 200th episode, I sat down with five of my biz besties – women I’ve been walking alongside in life and business for more than seven years. These are the people who have seen it all, from messy middle moments to million-dollar wins.</p>
<p>We talked about…</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>How we met (and what that has to do with building your own business bestie crew inside <em>Launch Your Box</em>).</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>The moment they each decided to <em>go for it</em> in their businesses.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>What life looked like <em>before</em> the business and how it’s changed.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>The worst (and best!) advice they got when they were just starting out.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>What no one sees behind the scenes, but totally drains their time and energy.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>The mindset shifts, personal growth, and unexpected wins that changed everything.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>This celebration is filled with laughter, heart, and the kind of real talk we <em>all</em> need to hear. Especially when we’re knee-deep in decisions, doubt, or feeling like duct tape holding is all that’s holding things together.</p>
<p>Whether you're still dreaming of starting or knee-deep in the hustle, this episode is your reminder that you're not alone and that success doesn’t happen overnight (or without people who “get it” in your corner).</p>
<p>Join me and my biz besties for this special episode as we celebrate, laugh (a lot), and hear the real stories behind the highlight reels.</p>
<p>Find and follow Tamara: </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://l.facebook.com/l.php?u=https%3A%2F%2Fwww.instagram.com%2Fsouthern_adoornments_decor%3Ffbclid%3DIwZXh0bgNhZW0CMTAAYnJpZBExTDJ4WkpmN3lnS0JaYlVXQgEex2-jTFOCVcuruFz9xUfili_Rz_KpJqUXcMLUpfqxo8CSEn4woUIPz03j-9M_aem_OuHcPkEdlwoefPSAWE3gYg&amp;h=AT3LjsjbnXOtesDtl8j6L6QWgUd1HtEY-52HAqlDSBkqUTum7_2PshJgBh0blG39rfb4paQGLBX7Z-bKZnzXyaTreWXPnaloC-_bBP3OICHpd4RoR5eN6v8pBsUM92nSNMnhCNTeocCFDOFkqg">Tamara on Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/southernadoornments1">Tamara on Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://southernadoornmentsdecor.com/">Tamara’s Website</a></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Find and follow Christie: </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/thesocialeasel/">Christie on Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/TheSocialEasel">Christie on Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.thesocialeaselonlinepaintstudio.com/">Christie’s Website</a></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Find and follow Cindy: </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/cindymanly_artshattered/">Cindy on Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/ArtShattered">Cindy on Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://artshattered.com/">Cindy’s Website</a></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Find and follow Heidi: </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/texasartandsoul_/">Heidi on Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/texasartandsoul">Heidi on Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://texasartandsoul.com/">Heidi’s Website</a></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Find and follow Kasey: </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/kaseyhopeart/?hl=en">Kasey on Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/kaseyhopeart/?hl=en">Kasey on Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.pzazzonline.com/">Kasey’s Website</a></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3573</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c2b821c2-4a78-11f0-91a2-93912e938777]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7723979505.mp3?updated=1750054598" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>199: How to Add Value to Your Subscription Box without Adding Cost</title>
      <description>Do you think your subscription box has to be stuffed to feel valuable?



Let’s shift that mindset.



In this Friday Fuel episode, I’m giving you a reality check and a smarter way to think about value.



You’ll learn three simple ways to increase the perceived value of your subscription box without adding more products (or more cost). These tips came straight from recent member box openings inside Launch Your Box. And they’re the kind of small shifts that lead to BIG results.



Here’s what you’ll take away:


    

How to elevate your subscribers’ experience with a cohesive theme or story. 


    

How to make it easy for subscribers to consume the items inside your box.


    


How to simplify the extras and focus on the experience.  




Think about what really matters to your subscribers and whether what you’re doing delivers. The member boxes that delivered the most were the most thoughtful, the most cohesive, and the most clear about who they are for. 



Your Friday Fuel Challenge:

Do a mini audit of one of your past audits. Simplicity with intention is powerful. Make sure every element of your box matters. 

 

You don’t need to add more, you just need to make what’s already in your box feel more meaningful. If you’ve been trying to “add more” to make your box feel worth it, this episode is for you.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 13 Jun 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Add Value to Your Subscription Box without Adding Cost</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>199</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Do you think your subscription box has to be stuffed to feel valuable?   Let’s shift that mindset.   In this Friday Fuel episode, I’m giving you a reality check and a smarter way to think about value.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Do you think your subscription box has to be stuffed to feel valuable?



Let’s shift that mindset.



In this Friday Fuel episode, I’m giving you a reality check and a smarter way to think about value.



You’ll learn three simple ways to increase the perceived value of your subscription box without adding more products (or more cost). These tips came straight from recent member box openings inside Launch Your Box. And they’re the kind of small shifts that lead to BIG results.



Here’s what you’ll take away:


    

How to elevate your subscribers’ experience with a cohesive theme or story. 


    

How to make it easy for subscribers to consume the items inside your box.


    


How to simplify the extras and focus on the experience.  




Think about what really matters to your subscribers and whether what you’re doing delivers. The member boxes that delivered the most were the most thoughtful, the most cohesive, and the most clear about who they are for. 



Your Friday Fuel Challenge:

Do a mini audit of one of your past audits. Simplicity with intention is powerful. Make sure every element of your box matters. 

 

You don’t need to add more, you just need to make what’s already in your box feel more meaningful. If you’ve been trying to “add more” to make your box feel worth it, this episode is for you.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Do you think your subscription box has to be stuffed to feel valuable?</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Let’s shift that mindset.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this Friday Fuel episode, I’m giving you a reality check and a smarter way to think about value.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You’ll learn <strong>three simple ways to increase the perceived value</strong> of your subscription box without adding more products (or more cost). These tips came straight from recent member box openings inside Launch Your Box. And they’re the kind of small shifts that lead to BIG results.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Here’s what you’ll take away:</p>
<ul>
  <li>  </li>
<li><strong>How to elevate your subscribers’ experience with a cohesive theme or story. </strong></li>

  <li>  </li>
<li><strong>How to make it easy for subscribers to consume the items inside your box.</strong></li>

  <li>  </li>
<li>
<strong>How to simplify the extras and focus on the experience. </strong> <br>
</li>

</ul>
<p>Think about what really matters to your subscribers and whether what you’re doing delivers. The member boxes that delivered the most were the most thoughtful, the most cohesive, and the most clear about who they are for. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Your Friday Fuel Challenge:</strong></p>
<p>Do a mini audit of one of your past audits. Simplicity with intention is powerful. Make sure every element of your box matters. </p>
<p> </p>
<p>You don’t need to add more, you just need to make what’s already in your box feel more meaningful. If you’ve been trying to “add more” to make your box feel worth it, this episode is for you.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Join me in all the places:    </strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>662</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a5193656-4505-11f0-8ba8-ef734d86a6ee]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8758185490.mp3?updated=1749455400" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>198: 7 Steps to Turn Your Product Business Into a Subscription in 90 Days</title>
      <description>In this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m walking you through the 7-step roadmap to turn your product-based business into a subscription in 90 days or less. These are the same steps I used when I launched my first subscription. And the same steps I teach inside Launch Your Box.



Step 1: Simplify Your Subscription Box Tech



You need:


  
A way to sell online



  
A way to collect recurring payments






That’s it.

Step 2: Choose What Goes in Your Subscription Box



Start with what your customers already love. What are your top 3-4 best-selling items or categories? Those best sellers are the perfect foundation for your subscription. Think scalable, repeatable, and easy to ship. 



Always ask yourself: Can I source this monthly? Will it ship well? Does it deliver high perceived value?

Step 3: Price It Before You Plan It



Don’t plan your box and then figure out what to charge. Instead, set your price first, then curate around that number.



Use your average order value as a guide. Keep an eye on your profit every step of the way. 

Step 4: Map Out 6 Months of Boxes



Want to feel ahead in your business? Plan six months of boxes now.



You don’t need every detail figured out. Just sketch out your themes or categories using customer behavior patterns and seasonal trends.



For help doing this in just one hour, take my FREE 6 in 60 Workshop.

Step 5: Choose (and Commit to) Your Subscription Box Launch Date



Mark your launch date on the calendar. Ideally, 45–60 days out. That becomes your anchor point. It tells you when to:


  
Finalize tech



  
Order product



  
Build your waitlist



  
Start marketing






Tell someone your date. Accountability works.

Step 6: Build a Waitlist + Create Launch Momentum



Your waitlist isn’t just a place to collect emails. It’s your launch engine.



Build a simple opt-in page that shares:


  
Who your box is for



  
What’s inside



  
Why it’s special






Then nurture that list with weekly updates. Even a small waitlist can convert like crazy when you keep them engaged.

Step 7: Prep, Test, and Launch



Test your tech. Write your emails. Plan your social content. Then go LIVE and get that first box out into the world.

Take Action



You already have a business. You already have customers. Now it’s time to turn that into a recurring revenue stream you can count on.



You’ve got the plan. Now go launch the dang thing.



Want to turn your product business into recurring revenue? This episode gives you the action plan. Start listening now.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 






Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 11 Jun 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>7 Steps to Turn Your Product Business Into a Subscription in 90 Days</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>198</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m walking you through the 7-step roadmap to turn your product-based business into a subscription in 90 days or less. These are the same steps I used when I launched my first subscription. And the same steps I teach inside Launch Your Box.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m walking you through the 7-step roadmap to turn your product-based business into a subscription in 90 days or less. These are the same steps I used when I launched my first subscription. And the same steps I teach inside Launch Your Box.



Step 1: Simplify Your Subscription Box Tech



You need:


  
A way to sell online



  
A way to collect recurring payments






That’s it.

Step 2: Choose What Goes in Your Subscription Box



Start with what your customers already love. What are your top 3-4 best-selling items or categories? Those best sellers are the perfect foundation for your subscription. Think scalable, repeatable, and easy to ship. 



Always ask yourself: Can I source this monthly? Will it ship well? Does it deliver high perceived value?

Step 3: Price It Before You Plan It



Don’t plan your box and then figure out what to charge. Instead, set your price first, then curate around that number.



Use your average order value as a guide. Keep an eye on your profit every step of the way. 

Step 4: Map Out 6 Months of Boxes



Want to feel ahead in your business? Plan six months of boxes now.



You don’t need every detail figured out. Just sketch out your themes or categories using customer behavior patterns and seasonal trends.



For help doing this in just one hour, take my FREE 6 in 60 Workshop.

Step 5: Choose (and Commit to) Your Subscription Box Launch Date



Mark your launch date on the calendar. Ideally, 45–60 days out. That becomes your anchor point. It tells you when to:


  
Finalize tech



  
Order product



  
Build your waitlist



  
Start marketing






Tell someone your date. Accountability works.

Step 6: Build a Waitlist + Create Launch Momentum



Your waitlist isn’t just a place to collect emails. It’s your launch engine.



Build a simple opt-in page that shares:


  
Who your box is for



  
What’s inside



  
Why it’s special






Then nurture that list with weekly updates. Even a small waitlist can convert like crazy when you keep them engaged.

Step 7: Prep, Test, and Launch



Test your tech. Write your emails. Plan your social content. Then go LIVE and get that first box out into the world.

Take Action



You already have a business. You already have customers. Now it’s time to turn that into a recurring revenue stream you can count on.



You’ve got the plan. Now go launch the dang thing.



Want to turn your product business into recurring revenue? This episode gives you the action plan. Start listening now.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 






Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode of the <em>Launch Your Box</em> <em>Podcast</em>, I’m walking you through the 7-step roadmap to turn your product-based business into a subscription in 90 days or less. These are the same steps I used when I launched my first subscription. And the same steps I teach inside <strong>Launch Your Box</strong>.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Step 1: Simplify Your Subscription Box Tech</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You need:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>A way to sell online</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>A way to collect recurring payments</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>That’s it.</p>
<p><br><strong>Step 2: Choose What Goes in Your Subscription Box</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Start with what your customers already love. What are your top 3-4 best-selling items or categories? Those best sellers are the perfect foundation for your subscription. Think scalable, repeatable, and easy to ship. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p><em>Always ask yourself:</em> <em>Can I source this monthly? Will it ship well? Does it deliver high perceived value?</em></p>
<p><br><strong>Step 3: Price It Before You Plan It</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Don’t plan your box and then figure out what to charge. Instead, set your price first, then curate around that number.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Use your average order value as a guide. Keep an eye on your profit every step of the way. </p>
<p><br><strong>Step 4: Map Out 6 Months of Boxes</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Want to feel <em>ahead</em> in your business? Plan six months of boxes now.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You don’t need every detail figured out. Just sketch out your themes or categories using customer behavior patterns and seasonal trends.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>For help doing this in just one hour, take my FREE<a href="https://www.6in60workshop.com/"> <u>6 in 60 Workshop</u></a>.</p>
<p><br><strong>Step 5: Choose (and Commit to) Your Subscription Box Launch Date</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Mark your launch date on the calendar. Ideally, 45–60 days out. That becomes your anchor point. It tells you when to:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Finalize tech</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Order product</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Build your waitlist</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Start marketing</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Tell someone your date. Accountability works.</p>
<p><br><strong>Step 6: Build a Waitlist + Create Launch Momentum</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Your waitlist isn’t just a place to collect emails. It’s your launch engine.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Build a simple opt-in page that shares:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Who your box is for</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>What’s inside</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Why it’s special</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Then nurture that list with weekly updates. Even a small waitlist can convert like crazy when you keep them engaged.</p>
<p><br><strong>Step 7: Prep, Test, and Launch</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Test your tech. Write your emails. Plan your social content. Then go LIVE and get that first box out into the world.</p>
<p><br><strong>Take Action</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You already have a business. You already have customers. Now it’s time to turn that into a recurring revenue stream you can count on.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>You’ve got the plan. Now go launch the dang thing.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Want to turn your product business into recurring revenue? </strong>This episode gives you the action plan. Start listening now.</p>
<p><br>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1641</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3711466c-4505-11f0-b210-977a49e5a668]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2489483055.mp3?updated=1749455216" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>197: 4 Things That Will Get You to Your First 100 Subscribers</title>
      <description>Hitting 100 subscribers can feel like a huge milestone. And that’s because it is. It’s a sign of momentum, confidence, and real growth.



In this Friday Fuel episode, I’m breaking down the 4 things that helped me – and so many Launch Your Box members – reach that 100-subscriber mark faster.



If you’re stuck in the 20 to 30 subscriber zone and not sure what to focus on next, this episode is for you. These four areas are simple, powerful, and completely within your control.



Here’s what you’ll take away:


  
Why consistency means more than just posting regularly. It’s about delivering what you promise.

  
How to revise your messaging so your ideal subscriber says, “That’s for me!”What makes an offer irresistible. And what might be confusing your audience.

  
Why showing up is the non-negotiable that builds trust and drives sales.




Your Friday Fuel Challenge:

Listen to this quick, impactful, action-packed episode, then pick one of these areas to focus on—and go all in.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 06 Jun 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>4 Things That Will Get You to Your First 100 Subscribers</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>197</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this Friday Fuel episode, I’m breaking down the 4 things that helped me – and so many Launch Your Box members – reach that 100-subscriber mark faster.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hitting 100 subscribers can feel like a huge milestone. And that’s because it is. It’s a sign of momentum, confidence, and real growth.



In this Friday Fuel episode, I’m breaking down the 4 things that helped me – and so many Launch Your Box members – reach that 100-subscriber mark faster.



If you’re stuck in the 20 to 30 subscriber zone and not sure what to focus on next, this episode is for you. These four areas are simple, powerful, and completely within your control.



Here’s what you’ll take away:


  
Why consistency means more than just posting regularly. It’s about delivering what you promise.

  
How to revise your messaging so your ideal subscriber says, “That’s for me!”What makes an offer irresistible. And what might be confusing your audience.

  
Why showing up is the non-negotiable that builds trust and drives sales.




Your Friday Fuel Challenge:

Listen to this quick, impactful, action-packed episode, then pick one of these areas to focus on—and go all in.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hitting 100 subscribers can feel like a huge milestone. And that’s because it <em>is.</em> It’s a sign of momentum, confidence, and real growth.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this Friday Fuel episode, I’m breaking down the 4 things that helped me – and so many Launch Your Box members – reach that 100-subscriber mark faster.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>If you’re stuck in the 20 to 30 subscriber zone and not sure what to focus on next, this episode is for you. These four areas are simple, powerful, and completely within your control.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Here’s what you’ll take away:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<strong>Why consistency means more than just posting regularly. </strong>It’s about delivering what you promise.</li>
  <li>
<strong>How to revise your messaging</strong> so your ideal subscriber says, “That’s for me!”<strong>What makes an offer irresistible</strong>. And what might be confusing your audience.</li>
  <li>
<strong>Why showing up is the non-negotiable</strong> that builds trust and drives sales.</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Your Friday Fuel Challenge:</p>
<p>Listen to this quick, impactful, action-packed episode, then pick one of these areas to focus on—and go all in.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>733</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[528be1cc-3f74-11f0-b068-47ef7d631d0c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3833080268.mp3?updated=1748843229" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>196: What Smart Subscription Box Owners Do In The Slow Months</title>
      <description>If you’ve ever found yourself dreading the “J months” of January, June, and July, you’re not alone. A lot of subscription box owners and product-based business owners see these as slow, even sluggish seasons. But what if that mindset is the very thing holding you back?



In this episode of the Launch Your Box podcast, I’m sharing a mindset reset, practical list-building strategies, and five real sales ideas to help you beat the summer slump and build serious momentum heading into fall.



Because here’s the truth: you don’t have to coast through summer. Because your success this fall starts with what you’re doing right now.



The Real Reason the “J Months” Feel Slow

I recently heard a speaker say, “The J months are just bad for business.”And my first thought? That’s the problem right there. These months are not the problem. But how you show up for them might be. 



As subscription box owners, we often scale back our marketing, stop sending emails, and lower our energy during these months. And guess what? That creates the slowdown we feared.



The J months aren’t cursed. They’re just different. The key isn’t to disappear. It’s to show up differently.



Build Now to Launch Your Subscription Box Strong Later

When other business owners are quiet, you have a chance to stand out. This is the time to grow your following and build your list so your next subscription box launch is stronger than ever.



Here’s how to stay visible and connected all summer long:


  Share sneak peeks and behind-the-scenes content

  Reconnect with your “why” and invite your audience in

  Offer a summer opt-in like a checklist, quiz, or guide

  Run a giveaway to build your list

  Start or grow your waitlist

  Send 1–2 nurture emails per week




What you do now will directly impact your future sales and your next launch.



5 Sales Strategies to Beat the Summer Slump

If you want to drive revenue during the J months, try one (or more!) of these proven strategies:


  

  

  

  

  




This is your prep season, your brand-building season, your relationship-deepening season.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 04 Jun 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What Smart Subscription Box Owners Do In The Slow Months</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>196</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, I talk about why now is not the time to go quiet. Or pull back. Because your future subscribers are paying attention – even in the J months.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you’ve ever found yourself dreading the “J months” of January, June, and July, you’re not alone. A lot of subscription box owners and product-based business owners see these as slow, even sluggish seasons. But what if that mindset is the very thing holding you back?



In this episode of the Launch Your Box podcast, I’m sharing a mindset reset, practical list-building strategies, and five real sales ideas to help you beat the summer slump and build serious momentum heading into fall.



Because here’s the truth: you don’t have to coast through summer. Because your success this fall starts with what you’re doing right now.



The Real Reason the “J Months” Feel Slow

I recently heard a speaker say, “The J months are just bad for business.”And my first thought? That’s the problem right there. These months are not the problem. But how you show up for them might be. 



As subscription box owners, we often scale back our marketing, stop sending emails, and lower our energy during these months. And guess what? That creates the slowdown we feared.



The J months aren’t cursed. They’re just different. The key isn’t to disappear. It’s to show up differently.



Build Now to Launch Your Subscription Box Strong Later

When other business owners are quiet, you have a chance to stand out. This is the time to grow your following and build your list so your next subscription box launch is stronger than ever.



Here’s how to stay visible and connected all summer long:


  Share sneak peeks and behind-the-scenes content

  Reconnect with your “why” and invite your audience in

  Offer a summer opt-in like a checklist, quiz, or guide

  Run a giveaway to build your list

  Start or grow your waitlist

  Send 1–2 nurture emails per week




What you do now will directly impact your future sales and your next launch.



5 Sales Strategies to Beat the Summer Slump

If you want to drive revenue during the J months, try one (or more!) of these proven strategies:


  

  

  

  

  




This is your prep season, your brand-building season, your relationship-deepening season.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you’ve ever found yourself dreading the “J months” of January, June, and July, you’re not alone. A lot of subscription box owners and product-based business owners see these as slow, even sluggish seasons. But what if that mindset is the very thing holding you back?</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this episode of the Launch Your Box podcast, I’m sharing a mindset reset, practical list-building strategies, and five real sales ideas to help you beat the summer slump and build serious momentum heading into fall.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Because here’s the truth: <strong>you don’t have to coast through summer. </strong>Because your success this fall starts with what you’re doing <em>right now</em>.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><u><strong>The Real Reason the “J Months” Feel Slow</strong></u></p>
<p>I recently heard a speaker say, “The J months are just bad for business.”And my first thought? That’s the problem right there. <strong>These months are not the problem. But how you show up for them might be. </strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>As subscription box owners, we often scale back our marketing, stop sending emails, and lower our energy during these months. And guess what? That creates the slowdown we feared.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>The J months aren’t cursed. They’re just <em>different</em>. The key isn’t to disappear. It’s to <strong>show up differently</strong>.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><u><strong>Build Now to Launch Your Subscription Box Strong Later</strong></u></p>
<p>When other business owners are quiet, you have a chance to stand out. This is the time to <strong>grow your following and build your list</strong> so your next subscription box launch is stronger than ever.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Here’s how to stay visible and connected all summer long:</p>
<ul>
  <li>Share sneak peeks and behind-the-scenes content</li>
  <li>Reconnect with your “why” and invite your audience in</li>
  <li>Offer a summer opt-in like a checklist, quiz, or guide</li>
  <li>Run a giveaway to build your list</li>
  <li>Start or grow your waitlist</li>
  <li>Send 1–2 nurture emails per week</li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>What you do now will directly impact your future sales and your next launch.</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p><u><strong>5 Sales Strategies to Beat the Summer Slump</strong></u></p>
<p>If you want to drive revenue during the J months, try one (or more!) of these proven strategies:</p>
<ul>
  <li><br></li>
  <li><br></li>
  <li><br></li>
  <li><br></li>
  <li><br></li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>This is your <em>prep season</em>, your <em>brand-building season</em>, your <em>relationship-deepening season</em>.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1736</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f0843876-3f73-11f0-a3fe-a7b1f4302f8f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1001369034.mp3?updated=1748843064" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>195: Too Many Ideas? Here's How to Pick ONE Box to Launch</title>
      <description>Have a million subscription box ideas, but no idea which one to launch?

You’re not alone. So many aspiring subscription box owners get stuck right here. Spinning in indecision. Afraid to choose the “wrong” idea. And waiting for clarity that never comes.

In this Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing a simple framework to help you move from overthinking to deciding.

Because the truth is, clarity doesn’t come from thinking harder. It comes from taking action.

If you’ve been stuck in idea overload, this is the mindset reset you need.

Instead of chasing the perfect idea:

1 – Acknowledge that “too many ideas” is a form of fear.Coming up with a long list of ideas feels productive. But really, it’s a sneaky way to stay safe. You can’t launch five boxes at once – and you don’t need to. You just need to pick one.

2 – Use the 3 C’s to filter your subscription box options.I walk you through a simple framework to help you evaluate your ideas and find the one with the clearest path forward. Choose the idea you can build momentum around now.

3 – Let go of the pressure to pick the perfect subscription box idea.Your first box doesn’t have to be your forever box. It just has to be the one you start with. And the faster you start, the faster you learn.

4 – Make the decision and move forward.Action builds confidence. Once you’ve chosen your direction, commit. Focus on progress, not perfection.



Your Friday Fuel Challenge:

Pick ONE idea and talk about it this week.

Share a post, send an email, or start building your waitlist around it.Because clarity follows action. And one focused idea is how you’ll finally launch your box.

Need help planning your first 6 boxes once you’ve picked your idea?Join my FREE 6 in 60 Workshop at 6in60workshop.com

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 30 May 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Too Many Ideas? Here's How to Pick ONE Box to Launch</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>195</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Have a million subscription box ideas, but no idea which one to launch? If you’ve been stuck in idea overload, this is the mindset reset you need.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have a million subscription box ideas, but no idea which one to launch?

You’re not alone. So many aspiring subscription box owners get stuck right here. Spinning in indecision. Afraid to choose the “wrong” idea. And waiting for clarity that never comes.

In this Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing a simple framework to help you move from overthinking to deciding.

Because the truth is, clarity doesn’t come from thinking harder. It comes from taking action.

If you’ve been stuck in idea overload, this is the mindset reset you need.

Instead of chasing the perfect idea:

1 – Acknowledge that “too many ideas” is a form of fear.Coming up with a long list of ideas feels productive. But really, it’s a sneaky way to stay safe. You can’t launch five boxes at once – and you don’t need to. You just need to pick one.

2 – Use the 3 C’s to filter your subscription box options.I walk you through a simple framework to help you evaluate your ideas and find the one with the clearest path forward. Choose the idea you can build momentum around now.

3 – Let go of the pressure to pick the perfect subscription box idea.Your first box doesn’t have to be your forever box. It just has to be the one you start with. And the faster you start, the faster you learn.

4 – Make the decision and move forward.Action builds confidence. Once you’ve chosen your direction, commit. Focus on progress, not perfection.



Your Friday Fuel Challenge:

Pick ONE idea and talk about it this week.

Share a post, send an email, or start building your waitlist around it.Because clarity follows action. And one focused idea is how you’ll finally launch your box.

Need help planning your first 6 boxes once you’ve picked your idea?Join my FREE 6 in 60 Workshop at 6in60workshop.com

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have a million subscription box ideas, but no idea which one to launch?</p>
<p>You’re not alone. So many aspiring subscription box owners get stuck right here. Spinning in indecision. Afraid to choose the “wrong” idea. And waiting for clarity that never comes.</p>
<p>In this <em>Friday Fuel</em> episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing a simple framework to help you move from <em>overthinking</em> to <em>deciding.</em></p>
<p>Because the truth is, clarity doesn’t come from thinking harder. It comes from taking action.</p>
<p>If you’ve been stuck in idea overload, this is the mindset reset you need.</p>
<p>Instead of chasing the perfect idea:</p>
<p><br>1 – Acknowledge that “too many ideas” is a form of fear.Coming up with a long list of ideas <em>feels </em>productive. But really, it’s a sneaky way to stay safe. You can’t launch five boxes at once – and you don’t need to. You just need to pick <em>one.</em></p>
<p>2 – Use the 3 C’s to filter your subscription box options.I walk you through a simple framework to help you evaluate your ideas and find the one with the clearest path forward. Choose the idea you can build momentum around <em>now.</em></p>
<p>3 – Let go of the pressure to pick the perfect subscription box idea.Your first box doesn’t have to be your forever box. It just has to be the one you <em>start</em> with. And the faster you start, the faster you learn.</p>
<p>4 – Make the decision and move forward.Action builds confidence. Once you’ve chosen your direction, commit. Focus on progress, not perfection.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Your Friday Fuel Challenge:</p>
<p>Pick ONE idea and talk about it this week.</p>
<p>Share a post, send an email, or start building your waitlist around it.Because clarity follows action. And one focused idea is how you’ll <em>finally</em> <strong>launch your box</strong>.</p>
<p>Need help planning your first 6 boxes once you’ve picked your idea?Join my FREE <strong>6 in 60 Workshop</strong> at<a href="https://www.6in60workshop.com"> <u>6in60workshop.com</u></a></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>622</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[593eeb9c-39eb-11f0-b652-f3ac64e5cd5c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8796079052.mp3?updated=1748234643" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Raising Prices and Achieving Long-Term Sustainability</title>
      <description>“It takes money to grow.” - Sarah Williams

Is it time to raise your prices? After all, costs are up on absolutely everything. Your costs are up - on products, packaging, shipping, and more. Your costs going up means your profit margins are going down. 

If you don’t raise your prices, you’ll keep chipping away at your profit margin - and your business won’t be sustainable long term. It takes money to grow your business. A lower profit margin means less money to invest back into your business which means less growth. 

I recently had to do something about increased shipping costs in my business. My “free” shipping was costing me more and more of my profit on every order. I had to make a change. I went from free shipping on everything to a flat rate of $6.99 or free shipping on orders over $100. 

I worried about what would happen. Would my customers not buy without free shipping? Would my revenues go down? No. Instead: 


  My average order value increased by 38% - from $48 to $65. 

  Last month saw a 74% increase in sales year over year. 

  Not only are my customers still buying, they’re buying MORE to meet the free shipping threshold. 


When you decide it’s the right time to increase the price of your subscription, you have two options: 


  Raise the price across the board for everyone. 



  Understand and accept that you may have some attrition - but fewer subscribers at a higher price will make you more profitable in the long run. 

  Run a full marketing campaign notifying subscribers the price is going up and when the increase is effective. 

  Be transparent about the reasons for the increase. Your subscribers know the price of everything is going up. Make it clear that you want to be around to continue giving them great products in their subscription boxes.



  Grandfather in your existing subscribers at their current price and increase for any new subscriber.



  This makes for a GREAT launch campaign. “Get in now before prices go up.” 

  Older subscribers at the lower rate will go away over time. 


You have to raise your prices as your costs rise. You can not sustain your business long term without raising your prices.

Join me for this episode as we talk about profit margins, what the increased cost of absolutely everything means for your business, and the right way to increase the price of your subscription box. 



What’s the profit margin on your subscription box? 

Text “budget” to 940-204-0023 and I’ll send you my box budget calculator. 



Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join the waitlist⁠ today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 28 May 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Raising Prices and Achieving Long-Term Sustainability</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as we talk about profit margins, what the increased cost of absolutely everything means for your business, and the right way to increase the price of your subscription box. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“It takes money to grow.” - Sarah Williams

Is it time to raise your prices? After all, costs are up on absolutely everything. Your costs are up - on products, packaging, shipping, and more. Your costs going up means your profit margins are going down. 

If you don’t raise your prices, you’ll keep chipping away at your profit margin - and your business won’t be sustainable long term. It takes money to grow your business. A lower profit margin means less money to invest back into your business which means less growth. 

I recently had to do something about increased shipping costs in my business. My “free” shipping was costing me more and more of my profit on every order. I had to make a change. I went from free shipping on everything to a flat rate of $6.99 or free shipping on orders over $100. 

I worried about what would happen. Would my customers not buy without free shipping? Would my revenues go down? No. Instead: 


  My average order value increased by 38% - from $48 to $65. 

  Last month saw a 74% increase in sales year over year. 

  Not only are my customers still buying, they’re buying MORE to meet the free shipping threshold. 


When you decide it’s the right time to increase the price of your subscription, you have two options: 


  Raise the price across the board for everyone. 



  Understand and accept that you may have some attrition - but fewer subscribers at a higher price will make you more profitable in the long run. 

  Run a full marketing campaign notifying subscribers the price is going up and when the increase is effective. 

  Be transparent about the reasons for the increase. Your subscribers know the price of everything is going up. Make it clear that you want to be around to continue giving them great products in their subscription boxes.



  Grandfather in your existing subscribers at their current price and increase for any new subscriber.



  This makes for a GREAT launch campaign. “Get in now before prices go up.” 

  Older subscribers at the lower rate will go away over time. 


You have to raise your prices as your costs rise. You can not sustain your business long term without raising your prices.

Join me for this episode as we talk about profit margins, what the increased cost of absolutely everything means for your business, and the right way to increase the price of your subscription box. 



What’s the profit margin on your subscription box? 

Text “budget” to 940-204-0023 and I’ll send you my box budget calculator. 



Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠Join the waitlist⁠ today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“It takes money to grow.” - Sarah Williams</p>
<p>Is it time to raise your prices? After all, costs are up on absolutely everything. Your costs are up - on products, packaging, shipping, and more. Your costs going up means your profit margins are going down. </p>
<p>If you don’t raise your prices, you’ll keep chipping away at your profit margin - and your business won’t be sustainable long term. It takes money to grow your business. A lower profit margin means less money to invest back into your business which means less growth. </p>
<p>I recently had to do something about increased shipping costs in my business. My “free” shipping was costing me more and more of my profit on every order. I had to make a change. I went from free shipping on everything to a flat rate of $6.99 or free shipping on orders over $100. </p>
<p>I worried about what would happen. Would my customers not buy without free shipping? Would my revenues go down? No. Instead: </p>
<ul>
  <li>My average order value increased by 38% - from $48 to $65. </li>
  <li>Last month saw a 74% increase in sales year over year. </li>
  <li>Not only are my customers still buying, they’re buying MORE to meet the free shipping threshold. </li>
</ul>
<p>When you decide it’s the right time to increase the price of your subscription, you have two options: </p>
<ol>
  <li>Raise the price across the board for everyone. </li>
</ol>
<ul>
  <li>Understand and accept that you may have some attrition - but fewer subscribers at a higher price will make you more profitable in the long run. </li>
  <li>Run a full marketing campaign notifying subscribers the price is going up and when the increase is effective. </li>
  <li>Be transparent about the reasons for the increase. Your subscribers know the price of everything is going up. Make it clear that you want to be around to continue giving them great products in their subscription boxes.</li>
</ul>
<ol>
  <li>Grandfather in your existing subscribers at their current price and increase for any new subscriber.</li>
</ol>
<ul>
  <li>This makes for a GREAT launch campaign. “Get in now before prices go up.” </li>
  <li>Older subscribers at the lower rate will go away over time. </li>
</ul>
<p>You have to raise your prices as your costs rise. You can not sustain your business long term without raising your prices.</p>
<p>Join me for this episode as we talk about profit margins, what the increased cost of absolutely everything means for your business, and the right way to increase the price of your subscription box. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>What’s the profit margin on your subscription box? </p>
<p><strong>Text “budget” to 940-204-0023</strong> and I’ll send you my box budget calculator. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">⁠Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">⁠Join the waitlist⁠</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1841</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0b3dff8c-39eb-11f0-9ecc-d7a111831c42]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4247876847.mp3?updated=1748234512" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>194: Worried No One Will Subscribe? Listen to This First</title>
      <description>Are you worried you’ll launch your subscription box and no one will subscribe?

You’re not alone. This fear shows up for nearly every subscription box owner at some point, especially in the early days.

In this Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing a mindset shift and some simple, strategic steps to help you move forward with clarity. Even if you’re starting from zero.

If fear or self-doubt has you feeling stuck, this is the pep talk you need.



Instead of worrying about launch day numbers:

1 - Know that this fear is normal.

The fear of “no subscribers” doesn’t mean you’re not cut out to be a subscription box owner. It means you care. Acknowledge the fear, but don’t let it call the shots.

2 - Don’t obsess over your launch date.

Setting a date can be helpful, but it’s not the most important thing. Focus on taking action and building momentum before the cart opens.

3 - Start building your waitlist now.

Your waitlist is your best launch asset. It gives you an audience of warm leads who are interested, engaged, and ready to buy when the time comes.

4 - Understand that clarity comes from action.

You don’t need all the answers to get started. Just take the next right step. Then the next. That’s how you build both confidence and progress.



Your Friday Fuel Challenge

You’re not behind. You’re just getting started.

The best way to start? Take one small action this week to build your waitlist.

Post a teaser, create a freebie, and talk about your box. Progress beats perfection. Every single time.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 23 May 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Worried No One Will Subscribe? Listen to This First</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>194</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing a mindset shift and some simple, strategic steps to help you move forward with clarity. Even if you’re starting from zero.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Are you worried you’ll launch your subscription box and no one will subscribe?

You’re not alone. This fear shows up for nearly every subscription box owner at some point, especially in the early days.

In this Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing a mindset shift and some simple, strategic steps to help you move forward with clarity. Even if you’re starting from zero.

If fear or self-doubt has you feeling stuck, this is the pep talk you need.



Instead of worrying about launch day numbers:

1 - Know that this fear is normal.

The fear of “no subscribers” doesn’t mean you’re not cut out to be a subscription box owner. It means you care. Acknowledge the fear, but don’t let it call the shots.

2 - Don’t obsess over your launch date.

Setting a date can be helpful, but it’s not the most important thing. Focus on taking action and building momentum before the cart opens.

3 - Start building your waitlist now.

Your waitlist is your best launch asset. It gives you an audience of warm leads who are interested, engaged, and ready to buy when the time comes.

4 - Understand that clarity comes from action.

You don’t need all the answers to get started. Just take the next right step. Then the next. That’s how you build both confidence and progress.



Your Friday Fuel Challenge

You’re not behind. You’re just getting started.

The best way to start? Take one small action this week to build your waitlist.

Post a teaser, create a freebie, and talk about your box. Progress beats perfection. Every single time.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are you worried you’ll launch your subscription box and no one will subscribe?</p>
<p>You’re not alone. This fear shows up for nearly every subscription box owner at some point, especially in the early days.</p>
<p>In this Friday Fuel episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m sharing a mindset shift and some simple, strategic steps to help you move forward with clarity. Even if you’re starting from zero.</p>
<p>If fear or self-doubt has you feeling stuck, this is the pep talk you need.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Instead of worrying about launch day numbers:</p>
<p>1 - Know that this fear is normal.</p>
<p>The fear of “no subscribers” doesn’t mean you’re not cut out to be a subscription box owner. It means you care. Acknowledge the fear, but don’t let it call the shots.</p>
<p>2 - Don’t obsess over your launch date.</p>
<p>Setting a date can be helpful, but it’s not the most important thing. Focus on taking action and building momentum before the cart opens.</p>
<p>3 - Start building your waitlist now.</p>
<p>Your waitlist is your best launch asset. It gives you an audience of warm leads who are interested, engaged, and ready to buy when the time comes.</p>
<p>4 - Understand that clarity comes from action.</p>
<p>You don’t need all the answers to get started. Just take the next right step. Then the next. That’s how you build both confidence and progress.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Your Friday Fuel Challenge</strong></p>
<p>You’re not behind. You’re just getting started.</p>
<p>The best way to start? Take one small action <em>this week</em> to build your waitlist.</p>
<p>Post a teaser, create a freebie, and talk about your box. Progress beats perfection. Every single time.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Join me in all the places:    </strong></p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>553</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0c6a8e60-347e-11f0-8e11-0b0438266619]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6752992968.mp3?updated=1747637943" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Facebook Ads Won't Grow Your Subscription Box For You </title>
      <description>Your subscription box business isn’t growing like you want it to. You’re not gaining subscribers at the rate you’d planned for and hoped for and you’re not sure what to do. 

 

If you start looking around for advice, you’re likely to find people telling you the answer to your problem is Facebook Ads. I have a different opinion. 

 

Facebook Ads will NOT grow your subscription box for you. Yep, I said it. I know this might be an unpopular opinion, but it’s one I feel very strongly about. Let’s dig in and talk about why. 

 

It is rare in life that throwing money at a problem solves it. And it turns out, a subscription box business is a lot like life. 

 

Facebook Ads are ONE tool in your multi-channel marketing plan. They aren’t the main tool and shouldn’t be weighted more heavily than the rest of your tools. 

You have to have so many things dialed in with your business and your ideal customer BEFORE you start paying for Facebook Ads. If you don’t, you may bring people in by spending a lot of money on Facebook Ads, but they won’t stay. If you haven’t spent the time and effort building connections with your subscribers, building that incredibly important know/like/trust factor, they will not stay. They are not invested in you or in your business. 

 

Facebook Ads can be incredibly effective as PART of an overall marketing strategy – not as a standalone strategy. 

 

So, if it’s not Facebook Ads, what will make the biggest difference when it comes to growing your subscriber base? 


  Clearly defining your niche: consider whether you can niche down further. 

  Making sure your copy – all of it – is clear and conversational. 

  Making sure you have an effective way to capture people once they get to your website: do you have a high converting pop-up or opt-in? 


 

I also want you to think about other organic ways to drive traffic and get new subscribers. This is traffic you do not have to pay for! 


  Pinterest – start using this FREE search engine/social media platform that is my #2 source of traffic! 



  Blog on your website – write posts regularly (monthly, biweekly, weekly).



  YouTube



  TikTok


 

Are you counting on Facebook Ads alone to grow your subscriber base? In today’s episode, I talk about the negative sides of putting all your eggs in the Facebook Ads basket and what you need to do instead. Want to grow your subscription box? Come listen!

 

Important Links: 

Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠



  ⁠Instagram⁠



  
⁠ Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠ Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠ Join the waitlist⁠ today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 21 May 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Are you counting on Facebook Ads alone to grow your subscriber base? In today’s episode, I talk about the negative sides of putting all your eggs in the Facebook Ads basket and what you need to do instead. Want to grow your subscription box? Come listen!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Your subscription box business isn’t growing like you want it to. You’re not gaining subscribers at the rate you’d planned for and hoped for and you’re not sure what to do. 

 

If you start looking around for advice, you’re likely to find people telling you the answer to your problem is Facebook Ads. I have a different opinion. 

 

Facebook Ads will NOT grow your subscription box for you. Yep, I said it. I know this might be an unpopular opinion, but it’s one I feel very strongly about. Let’s dig in and talk about why. 

 

It is rare in life that throwing money at a problem solves it. And it turns out, a subscription box business is a lot like life. 

 

Facebook Ads are ONE tool in your multi-channel marketing plan. They aren’t the main tool and shouldn’t be weighted more heavily than the rest of your tools. 

You have to have so many things dialed in with your business and your ideal customer BEFORE you start paying for Facebook Ads. If you don’t, you may bring people in by spending a lot of money on Facebook Ads, but they won’t stay. If you haven’t spent the time and effort building connections with your subscribers, building that incredibly important know/like/trust factor, they will not stay. They are not invested in you or in your business. 

 

Facebook Ads can be incredibly effective as PART of an overall marketing strategy – not as a standalone strategy. 

 

So, if it’s not Facebook Ads, what will make the biggest difference when it comes to growing your subscriber base? 


  Clearly defining your niche: consider whether you can niche down further. 

  Making sure your copy – all of it – is clear and conversational. 

  Making sure you have an effective way to capture people once they get to your website: do you have a high converting pop-up or opt-in? 


 

I also want you to think about other organic ways to drive traffic and get new subscribers. This is traffic you do not have to pay for! 


  Pinterest – start using this FREE search engine/social media platform that is my #2 source of traffic! 



  Blog on your website – write posts regularly (monthly, biweekly, weekly).



  YouTube



  TikTok


 

Are you counting on Facebook Ads alone to grow your subscriber base? In today’s episode, I talk about the negative sides of putting all your eggs in the Facebook Ads basket and what you need to do instead. Want to grow your subscription box? Come listen!

 

Important Links: 

Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠



  ⁠Instagram⁠



  
⁠ Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 




Are you ready for ⁠ Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠ Join the waitlist⁠ today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Your subscription box business isn’t growing like you want it to. You’re not gaining subscribers at the rate you’d planned for and hoped for and you’re not sure what to do. </p>
<p> </p>
<p>If you start looking around for advice, you’re likely to find people telling you the answer to your problem is Facebook Ads. I have a different opinion. </p>
<p> </p>
<p>Facebook Ads will NOT grow your subscription box for you. Yep, I said it. I know this might be an unpopular opinion, but it’s one I feel very strongly about. Let’s dig in and talk about why. </p>
<p> </p>
<p>It is rare in life that throwing money at a problem solves it. And it turns out, a subscription box business is a lot like life. </p>
<p> </p>
<p>Facebook Ads are ONE tool in your multi-channel marketing plan. They aren’t the main tool and shouldn’t be weighted more heavily than the rest of your tools. </p>
<p>You have to have so many things dialed in with your business and your ideal customer BEFORE you start paying for Facebook Ads. If you don’t, you may bring people in by spending a lot of money on Facebook Ads, but they won’t stay. If you haven’t spent the time and effort building connections with your subscribers, building that incredibly important know/like/trust factor, they will not stay. They are not invested in you or in your business. </p>
<p> </p>
<p>Facebook Ads can be incredibly effective as PART of an overall marketing strategy – not as a standalone strategy. </p>
<p> </p>
<p>So, if it’s not Facebook Ads, what will make the biggest difference when it comes to growing your subscriber base? </p>
<ol>
  <li>Clearly defining your niche: consider whether you can niche down further. </li>
  <li>Making sure your copy – all of it – is clear and conversational. </li>
  <li>Making sure you have an effective way to capture people once they get to your website: do you have a high converting pop-up or opt-in? </li>
</ol>
<p> </p>
<p>I also want you to think about other organic ways to drive traffic and get new subscribers. This is traffic you do not have to pay for! </p>
<ul>
  <li>Pinterest – start using this FREE search engine/social media platform that is my #2 source of traffic! </li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>Blog on your website – write posts regularly (monthly, biweekly, weekly).</li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>YouTube</li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>TikTok</li>
</ul>
<p> </p>
<p>Are <em>you</em> counting on Facebook Ads alone to grow your subscriber base? In today’s episode, I talk about the negative sides of putting all your eggs in the Facebook Ads basket and what you need to do instead. Want to grow your subscription box? Come listen!</p>
<p> </p>
<p>Important Links: </p>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">⁠ Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">⁠ Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">⁠ Join the waitlist⁠</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1129</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[32d1bf5e-3534-11f0-bf33-bf29efabb27f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9169162308.mp3?updated=1747716176" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>193: 4 Ways to Grow Your Subscription Box Audience on YouTube</title>
      <description>Are you posting videos to YouTube but not seeing much traction?

You’re not alone—and you’re not doing anything wrong. But a few small shifts could make a big difference.

In this Friday Fuel episode, I’m breaking down four simple, strategic ways subscription box owners can grow their audience on YouTube—without expensive equipment, complicated editing, or hoping a video goes viral.

Whether you're just getting started or trying to revive a slow-growing channel, these tips will help you show up with purpose and turn casual viewers into loyal subscribers.

1 - Be consistent with what you post on your YouTube channel. 

Think of your channel like a favorite show. Your audience should know what kind of content to expect and when to expect it. 

Choose video types that work for your subscription box, including: 


  
Monthly unboxings 



  
Behind the scenes



  
Style guides



  
How tos/tutorials 



  
Subscriber stories



  
Q&amp;As 




2 - YouTube video titles and thumbnails “sell the click.” 

It doesn’t matter how good your video is if you can’t get people to click on it! 

Your goal is to grab your audience’s attention and tell them what the video is about. Clarity beats clever when it comes to titles! For thumbnails, faces matter! Use brand colors and faces to capture attention. 

3 - Win viewers over in the first 30 seconds.

The longer people watch your videos, the more YouTube’s algorithm rewards you by showing your videos to more people. 

Grab viewers' attention quickly and keep them watching by: 


  
Clearly stating what the video is about



  
Building curiosity



  
Showing energy and confidence 




4 - Tell your YouTube viewers what to do next. 

Every video needs a CTA (call to action). Tell viewers what you want them to do next: 


  
Subscribe to your channel



  
Join your waitlist



  
Drop a comment



  
Download a freebie




Your Friday Fuel Challenge

Building an audience for your subscription box on YouTube is all about showing up, standing out, and giving people a reason to stay connected. Your audience will grow, and your confidence will, too. Remember, you don’t need to be perfect—you just need to show up with intention.

Pick one of the four tips from today’s episode and use it in your very next video.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 16 May 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>4 Ways to Grow Your Subscription Box Audience on YouTube</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>193</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this Friday Fuel episode, I’m breaking down four simple, strategic ways subscription box owners can grow their audience on YouTube—without expensive equipment, complicated editing, or hoping a video goes viral.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Are you posting videos to YouTube but not seeing much traction?

You’re not alone—and you’re not doing anything wrong. But a few small shifts could make a big difference.

In this Friday Fuel episode, I’m breaking down four simple, strategic ways subscription box owners can grow their audience on YouTube—without expensive equipment, complicated editing, or hoping a video goes viral.

Whether you're just getting started or trying to revive a slow-growing channel, these tips will help you show up with purpose and turn casual viewers into loyal subscribers.

1 - Be consistent with what you post on your YouTube channel. 

Think of your channel like a favorite show. Your audience should know what kind of content to expect and when to expect it. 

Choose video types that work for your subscription box, including: 


  
Monthly unboxings 



  
Behind the scenes



  
Style guides



  
How tos/tutorials 



  
Subscriber stories



  
Q&amp;As 




2 - YouTube video titles and thumbnails “sell the click.” 

It doesn’t matter how good your video is if you can’t get people to click on it! 

Your goal is to grab your audience’s attention and tell them what the video is about. Clarity beats clever when it comes to titles! For thumbnails, faces matter! Use brand colors and faces to capture attention. 

3 - Win viewers over in the first 30 seconds.

The longer people watch your videos, the more YouTube’s algorithm rewards you by showing your videos to more people. 

Grab viewers' attention quickly and keep them watching by: 


  
Clearly stating what the video is about



  
Building curiosity



  
Showing energy and confidence 




4 - Tell your YouTube viewers what to do next. 

Every video needs a CTA (call to action). Tell viewers what you want them to do next: 


  
Subscribe to your channel



  
Join your waitlist



  
Drop a comment



  
Download a freebie




Your Friday Fuel Challenge

Building an audience for your subscription box on YouTube is all about showing up, standing out, and giving people a reason to stay connected. Your audience will grow, and your confidence will, too. Remember, you don’t need to be perfect—you just need to show up with intention.

Pick one of the four tips from today’s episode and use it in your very next video.

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are you posting videos to YouTube but not seeing much traction?</p>
<p>You’re not alone—and you’re not doing anything wrong. But a few small shifts could make a big difference.</p>
<p>In this Friday Fuel episode, I’m breaking down <strong>four simple, strategic ways subscription box owners can grow their audience on YouTube</strong>—without expensive equipment, complicated editing, or hoping a video goes viral.</p>
<p>Whether you're just getting started or trying to revive a slow-growing channel, these tips will help you <strong>show up with purpose and turn casual viewers into loyal subscribers</strong>.</p>
<p>1 - Be consistent with what you post on your YouTube channel. </p>
<p>Think of your channel like a favorite show. Your audience should know what kind of content to expect and when to expect it. </p>
<p>Choose video types that work for your subscription box, including: </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Monthly unboxings </p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Behind the scenes</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Style guides</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>How tos/tutorials </p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Subscriber stories</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Q&amp;As </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>2 - YouTube video titles and thumbnails “sell the click.” </p>
<p>It doesn’t matter how good your video is if you can’t get people to click on it! </p>
<p>Your goal is to grab your audience’s attention and tell them what the video is about. Clarity beats clever when it comes to titles! For thumbnails, faces matter! Use brand colors and faces to capture attention. </p>
<p>3 - Win viewers over in the first 30 seconds.</p>
<p>The longer people watch your videos, the more YouTube’s algorithm rewards you by showing your videos to more people. </p>
<p>Grab viewers' attention quickly and keep them watching by: </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Clearly stating what the video is about</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Building curiosity</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Showing energy and confidence </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>4 - Tell your YouTube viewers what to do next. </p>
<p>Every video needs a CTA (call to action). Tell viewers what you want them to do next: </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Subscribe to your channel</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Join your waitlist</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Drop a comment</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Download a freebie</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Your Friday Fuel Challenge</p>
<p>Building an audience for your subscription box on YouTube is all about <strong>showing up, standing out, and giving people a reason to stay connected</strong>. Your audience will grow, and your confidence will, too. Remember, you don’t need to be perfect—you just need to show up with intention.</p>
<p><strong>Pick one of the four tips from today’s episode and use it in your very next video.</strong></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>684</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5cca7d1e-2f0d-11f0-b668-9f149846447e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2050871139.mp3?updated=1747039795" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>192: The Subscriber Growth Strategy Nobody Talks About</title>
      <description>Most subscription box owners are focused on growing their subscriber count. And while getting new customers is exciting, it’s not where sustainable growth comes from.

If you want to build a thriving, profitable subscription business, there’s one strategy you can’t afford to ignore: retention.

In this episode, I’m breaking down the difference between chasing subscribers and keeping them — and why keeping them can make a bigger impact on your bottom line. From curating a subscriber experience that builds loyalty to planning and implementing a retention strategy that actually works, we’ll walk through the key shifts that can help you reduce churn and grow your business more predictably.

Acquiring new subscribers is 5–7 times more expensive than keeping the ones you already have. If new subscribers are simply replacing those who’ve canceled, you’re not really growing — you’re just treading water.

How to Create an Experience, Not Just a BoxProducts bring people in. Experiences make them stay. I share how community, surprise &amp; delight, and consistency can turn casual customers into long-term subscribers and loyal fans.

Building Connection through CommunicationIf subscribers only hear from you when their box ships, they’ll forget you. Learn how regular emails, engaging social content, and personal touches can keep your box top of mind and off the chopping block.

Retention Doesn’t Just Happen–You Need a PlanHigh retention isn’t luck — it’s strategy. I’ll show you how to build a simple 90-day plan that keeps subscribers engaged and excited to stay with you month after month.

Whether you're just starting out or are trying to scale an established subscription box, retention needs to be at the top of your list. Of course, you’ll always work to attract new subscribers — but keeping the ones who already said yes? That’s where your growth becomes sustainable.

Join me to learn how a focus on retention can make your subscription box more profitable, more stable, and more sustainable.

Download our free Retention Rate Calculator HERE and start measuring what matters: 

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! 

The real cost of acquisition vs. retention in your subscription box business</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 14 May 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Subscriber Growth Strategy Nobody Talks About</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>192</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, I’m breaking down the difference between chasing subscribers and keeping them — and why keeping them can make a bigger impact on your bottom line. From curating a subscriber experience that builds loyalty to planning and implementing a retention strategy that actually works, we’ll walk through the key shifts that can help you reduce churn and grow your business more predictably.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Most subscription box owners are focused on growing their subscriber count. And while getting new customers is exciting, it’s not where sustainable growth comes from.

If you want to build a thriving, profitable subscription business, there’s one strategy you can’t afford to ignore: retention.

In this episode, I’m breaking down the difference between chasing subscribers and keeping them — and why keeping them can make a bigger impact on your bottom line. From curating a subscriber experience that builds loyalty to planning and implementing a retention strategy that actually works, we’ll walk through the key shifts that can help you reduce churn and grow your business more predictably.

Acquiring new subscribers is 5–7 times more expensive than keeping the ones you already have. If new subscribers are simply replacing those who’ve canceled, you’re not really growing — you’re just treading water.

How to Create an Experience, Not Just a BoxProducts bring people in. Experiences make them stay. I share how community, surprise &amp; delight, and consistency can turn casual customers into long-term subscribers and loyal fans.

Building Connection through CommunicationIf subscribers only hear from you when their box ships, they’ll forget you. Learn how regular emails, engaging social content, and personal touches can keep your box top of mind and off the chopping block.

Retention Doesn’t Just Happen–You Need a PlanHigh retention isn’t luck — it’s strategy. I’ll show you how to build a simple 90-day plan that keeps subscribers engaged and excited to stay with you month after month.

Whether you're just starting out or are trying to scale an established subscription box, retention needs to be at the top of your list. Of course, you’ll always work to attract new subscribers — but keeping the ones who already said yes? That’s where your growth becomes sustainable.

Join me to learn how a focus on retention can make your subscription box more profitable, more stable, and more sustainable.

Download our free Retention Rate Calculator HERE and start measuring what matters: 

Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! 

The real cost of acquisition vs. retention in your subscription box business</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Most subscription box owners are focused on growing their subscriber count. And while getting new customers is exciting, it’s not where sustainable growth comes from.</p>
<p>If you want to build a thriving, profitable subscription business, there’s one strategy you can’t afford to ignore: <strong>retention.</strong></p>
<p>In this episode, I’m breaking down the difference between chasing subscribers and keeping them — and why keeping them can make a bigger impact on your bottom line. From curating a subscriber experience that builds loyalty to planning and implementing a retention strategy that actually works, we’ll walk through the key shifts that can help you reduce churn and grow your business more predictably.</p>
<p>Acquiring new subscribers is 5–7 times more expensive than keeping the ones you already have. If new subscribers are simply replacing those who’ve canceled, you’re not really growing — you’re just treading water.</p>
<p>How to Create an Experience, Not Just a BoxProducts bring people in. Experiences make them stay. I share how community, surprise &amp; delight, and consistency can turn casual customers into long-term subscribers and loyal fans.</p>
<p>Building Connection through CommunicationIf subscribers only hear from you when their box ships, they’ll forget you. Learn how regular emails, engaging social content, and personal touches can keep your box top of mind and off the chopping block.</p>
<p>Retention Doesn’t Just Happen–You Need a PlanHigh retention isn’t luck — it’s strategy. I’ll show you how to build a simple 90-day plan that keeps subscribers engaged and excited to stay with you month after month.</p>
<p>Whether you're just starting out or are trying to scale an established subscription box, retention needs to be at the top of your list. Of course, you’ll always work to attract new subscribers — but keeping the ones who already said yes? That’s where your growth becomes sustainable.</p>
<p>Join me to learn how a focus on retention can make your subscription box more profitable, more stable, and more sustainable.</p>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/retention-rate-calculator-freebie"><u>Download our free Retention Rate Calculator HERE</u></a> and start measuring what matters:<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/retention-rate-calculator-freebie"> </a></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>
<p>The real cost of acquisition vs. retention in your subscription box business<br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1897</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3d09ec74-2f0a-11f0-9cee-bb67e2d3da0e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8108203930.mp3?updated=1747038448" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>191: 5 Things I Wish Every Subscription Box Owner Knew Before Launching</title>
      <description>Starting your subscription box? Or maybe you’ve already launched—and now you’re realizing there’s a lot more to it than you expected?

You’re not alone.

In this quick, 10-minute Friday Fuel episode, I’m sharing five lessons I wish I could go back and tell myself before launching my own subscription box. These are the things that catch new box owners off guard—and if you know them early, they’ll save you stress, money, and momentum down the road.

This episode isn’t about perfection. It’s about being intentional—making smart choices that set your business up for long-term success instead of early burnout.

One of the biggest mindset shifts new subscription box owners need to make? Your box isn’t about you.

You might be curating products you love (and that’s great!), but your box has to be about your subscriber. What does she need? What makes her smile? What problem are you helping her solve?

When you build your subscription box with your customer in mind, everything else—from your messaging to your retention strategy—becomes so much easier.

A strong, engaged waitlist is what makes a successful launch possible. If you skip the relationship-building part and jump straight to selling, you’re likely to be disappointed.

Most new box owners focus almost entirely on getting subscribers—and forget about keeping them. But if you want your subscription box to be profitable, retention matters just as much as growth.

In this episode, I’m sharing a simple mindset shift that will help you boost retention without spending more on product. You’ll be surprised at how small touches can make a big impact.

It happens every time—new box owners underestimate how much that first box will cost. Between product, packaging, shipping, and all the little things (like tissue paper and filler!), the expenses add up fast.

That’s why it’s so important to budget with margin—and expect the unexpected.

The subscription box business isn’t a sprint. It’s a marathon. 

When you give yourself permission to grow steadily and build a strong foundation, you set yourself up for long-term success.

This week, I want you to take 10 quiet minutes and ask yourself:“Am I building my subscription box for me… or for my ideal customer?”

Look at your product selection, your messaging, and your social posts. Are they focused on you, or are they truly speaking to the person you want to serve?

Refocus your energy—and you’ll see a big difference.



Want to keep your subscribers longer?

Grab my free guide: 10 Ways to Surprise &amp; Delight Your Subscriber

Or just text SURPRISE to 940-204-0023



Grab your Box Budget Calculator! 



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 09 May 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>5 Things I Wish Every Subscription Box Owner Knew Before Launching</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>191</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this quick, 10-minute Friday Fuel episode, I’m sharing five lessons I wish I could go back and tell myself before launching my own subscription box. These are the things that catch new box owners off guard—and if you know them early, they’ll save you stress, money, and momentum down the road.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Starting your subscription box? Or maybe you’ve already launched—and now you’re realizing there’s a lot more to it than you expected?

You’re not alone.

In this quick, 10-minute Friday Fuel episode, I’m sharing five lessons I wish I could go back and tell myself before launching my own subscription box. These are the things that catch new box owners off guard—and if you know them early, they’ll save you stress, money, and momentum down the road.

This episode isn’t about perfection. It’s about being intentional—making smart choices that set your business up for long-term success instead of early burnout.

One of the biggest mindset shifts new subscription box owners need to make? Your box isn’t about you.

You might be curating products you love (and that’s great!), but your box has to be about your subscriber. What does she need? What makes her smile? What problem are you helping her solve?

When you build your subscription box with your customer in mind, everything else—from your messaging to your retention strategy—becomes so much easier.

A strong, engaged waitlist is what makes a successful launch possible. If you skip the relationship-building part and jump straight to selling, you’re likely to be disappointed.

Most new box owners focus almost entirely on getting subscribers—and forget about keeping them. But if you want your subscription box to be profitable, retention matters just as much as growth.

In this episode, I’m sharing a simple mindset shift that will help you boost retention without spending more on product. You’ll be surprised at how small touches can make a big impact.

It happens every time—new box owners underestimate how much that first box will cost. Between product, packaging, shipping, and all the little things (like tissue paper and filler!), the expenses add up fast.

That’s why it’s so important to budget with margin—and expect the unexpected.

The subscription box business isn’t a sprint. It’s a marathon. 

When you give yourself permission to grow steadily and build a strong foundation, you set yourself up for long-term success.

This week, I want you to take 10 quiet minutes and ask yourself:“Am I building my subscription box for me… or for my ideal customer?”

Look at your product selection, your messaging, and your social posts. Are they focused on you, or are they truly speaking to the person you want to serve?

Refocus your energy—and you’ll see a big difference.



Want to keep your subscribers longer?

Grab my free guide: 10 Ways to Surprise &amp; Delight Your Subscriber

Or just text SURPRISE to 940-204-0023



Grab your Box Budget Calculator! 



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Starting your subscription box? Or maybe you’ve already launched—and now you’re realizing there’s a <em>lot</em> more to it than you expected?</p>
<p>You’re not alone.</p>
<p>In this quick, 10-minute Friday Fuel episode, I’m sharing five lessons I wish I could go back and tell myself before launching my own subscription box. These are the things that catch new box owners off guard—and if you know them early, they’ll save you stress, money, and momentum down the road.</p>
<p>This episode isn’t about perfection. It’s about being <em>intentional</em>—making smart choices that set your business up for long-term success instead of early burnout.</p>
<p>One of the biggest mindset shifts new subscription box owners need to make? <strong>Your box isn’t about you.</strong></p>
<p>You might be curating products you love (and that’s great!), but your box has to be about <em>your subscriber</em>. What does she need? What makes her smile? What problem are you helping her solve?</p>
<p>When you build your subscription box with your customer in mind, everything else—from your messaging to your retention strategy—becomes so much easier.</p>
<p>A strong, engaged waitlist is what makes a successful launch possible. If you skip the relationship-building part and jump straight to selling, you’re likely to be disappointed.</p>
<p>Most new box owners focus almost entirely on <em>getting subscribers</em>—and forget about <em>keeping</em> them. But if you want your subscription box to be profitable, retention matters just as much as growth.</p>
<p>In this episode, I’m sharing a simple mindset shift that will help you boost retention <em>without</em> spending more on product. You’ll be surprised at how small touches can make a big impact.</p>
<p>It happens every time—new box owners underestimate how much that first box will cost. Between product, packaging, shipping, and all the little things (like tissue paper and filler!), the expenses add up fast.</p>
<p>That’s why it’s so important to budget with <em>margin</em>—and expect the unexpected.</p>
<p>The subscription box business isn’t a sprint. It’s a marathon. </p>
<p>When you give yourself permission to grow steadily and build a strong foundation, you set yourself up for long-term success.</p>
<p>This week, I want you to take 10 quiet minutes and ask yourself:“Am I building my subscription box <em>for me</em>… or <em>for my ideal customer</em>?”</p>
<p>Look at your product selection, your messaging, and your social posts. Are they focused on <em>you</em>, or are they truly speaking to the person you want to serve?</p>
<p>Refocus your energy—and you’ll see a big difference.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Want to keep your subscribers longer?</p>
<p>Grab my free guide: <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/10-ways-to-surprise-delight-your-subscriber"><strong>10 Ways to Surprise &amp; Delight Your Subscriber</strong></a></p>
<p>Or just text <strong>SURPRISE</strong> to <strong>940-204-0023</strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Grab your <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/my-box-budget"><u>Box Budget Calculator</u></a>! </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><br>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>715</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[77e6cca2-2b10-11f0-9910-572036dba6d4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3573242856.mp3?updated=1746601319" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>190: Not Growing on Instagram?  A 3-Step Strategy That Works</title>
      <description>Struggling to grow your subscription box on Instagram? You’re not alone.

In this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m joined by Instagram strategist Michelle Gifford to break down exactly how to grow on Instagram right now—even if you're starting from scratch or feeling stuck.

I first connected with Michelle after seeing my friend Heidi’s Instagram take off. When I asked what changed, Heidi said, “Just do what Michelle says.” So I invited her on the podcast to share her expertise with us.

Michelle shared that Instagram recently shifted from a follower-based algorithm to a content-based one—meaning quality content is what drives growth, not your follower count. That’s a huge win for subscription box owners trying to get more eyes on their offers.

The foundation of her Instagram strategy is what she calls the Attract, Nurture, Sell Method:


  
Attraction content (50%): reels, trending sounds, quick wins—content designed to reach non-followers and get shared



  
Nurture content (30%): carousels, Stories, Lives—more in-depth content that builds connection and trust



  
Selling content (20%): simple, direct posts that show up and sell your box




If you post 6 days a week, think: 3 attraction posts, 2 nurture posts, and 1 sales post. That’s your 3:2:1 formula.

Michelle’s advice:


  
Post attraction content that makes people think, “I know exactly who to send this to.”



  
Use nurture content to deepen the relationship—think saves, not shares.



  
Don’t skip the selling posts! They matter just as much as the rest.




We also talked about:


  
Why b-roll video is your best friend for attraction content.



  
How to repurpose one activity—like an unboxing—into multiple content types.



  
Why hashtags still matter (yes, really!)




Before we wrapped up, I asked Michelle to brainstorm with me one thing every subscription box owner could post today to boost their Instagram reach. Her answer was so simple and actionable:


  
Record a b-roll clip of you packing or unpacking your box.



  
Add a bold, shareable caption like: “Fashion advice I’d give you if I wasn’t afraid to hurt your feelings.”




That’s it. That’s attraction content.

Ready to grow your Instagram with confidence and strategy? This episode is packed with practical tips, simple frameworks, and the encouragement to just start.

Listen now and tag me @howtostartasubbox when you post your reel—I can’t wait to see it!

Find and follow Michelle: 


  
Michelle on Instagram



  
Michelle’s Podcast



  
Michelle’s Website




Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! 

Instagram Strategy That Works for Subscription Box OwnersWhat to Post on Instagram to Grow Your Subscription BoxA Quick Instagram Content Idea You Can Use Today</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 07 May 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Not Growing on Instagram?  A 3-Step Strategy That Works</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>190</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m joined by Instagram strategist Michelle Gifford to break down exactly how to grow on Instagram right now—even if you're starting from scratch or feeling stuck.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Struggling to grow your subscription box on Instagram? You’re not alone.

In this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m joined by Instagram strategist Michelle Gifford to break down exactly how to grow on Instagram right now—even if you're starting from scratch or feeling stuck.

I first connected with Michelle after seeing my friend Heidi’s Instagram take off. When I asked what changed, Heidi said, “Just do what Michelle says.” So I invited her on the podcast to share her expertise with us.

Michelle shared that Instagram recently shifted from a follower-based algorithm to a content-based one—meaning quality content is what drives growth, not your follower count. That’s a huge win for subscription box owners trying to get more eyes on their offers.

The foundation of her Instagram strategy is what she calls the Attract, Nurture, Sell Method:


  
Attraction content (50%): reels, trending sounds, quick wins—content designed to reach non-followers and get shared



  
Nurture content (30%): carousels, Stories, Lives—more in-depth content that builds connection and trust



  
Selling content (20%): simple, direct posts that show up and sell your box




If you post 6 days a week, think: 3 attraction posts, 2 nurture posts, and 1 sales post. That’s your 3:2:1 formula.

Michelle’s advice:


  
Post attraction content that makes people think, “I know exactly who to send this to.”



  
Use nurture content to deepen the relationship—think saves, not shares.



  
Don’t skip the selling posts! They matter just as much as the rest.




We also talked about:


  
Why b-roll video is your best friend for attraction content.



  
How to repurpose one activity—like an unboxing—into multiple content types.



  
Why hashtags still matter (yes, really!)




Before we wrapped up, I asked Michelle to brainstorm with me one thing every subscription box owner could post today to boost their Instagram reach. Her answer was so simple and actionable:


  
Record a b-roll clip of you packing or unpacking your box.



  
Add a bold, shareable caption like: “Fashion advice I’d give you if I wasn’t afraid to hurt your feelings.”




That’s it. That’s attraction content.

Ready to grow your Instagram with confidence and strategy? This episode is packed with practical tips, simple frameworks, and the encouragement to just start.

Listen now and tag me @howtostartasubbox when you post your reel—I can’t wait to see it!

Find and follow Michelle: 


  
Michelle on Instagram



  
Michelle’s Podcast



  
Michelle’s Website




Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! 

Instagram Strategy That Works for Subscription Box OwnersWhat to Post on Instagram to Grow Your Subscription BoxA Quick Instagram Content Idea You Can Use Today</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Struggling to grow your subscription box on Instagram? You’re not alone.</p>
<p>In this episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast, I’m joined by Instagram strategist <strong>Michelle Gifford</strong> to break down exactly how to grow on Instagram <em>right now</em>—even if you're starting from scratch or feeling stuck.</p>
<p>I first connected with Michelle after seeing my friend Heidi’s Instagram take off. When I asked what changed, Heidi said, “Just do what Michelle says.” So I invited her on the podcast to share her expertise with us.</p>
<p>Michelle shared that <strong>Instagram recently shifted</strong> from a follower-based algorithm to a content-based one—meaning <em>quality content</em> is what drives growth, not your follower count. That’s a huge win for subscription box owners trying to get more eyes on their offers.</p>
<p>The foundation of her Instagram strategy is what she calls the <strong>Attract, Nurture, Sell Method</strong>:</p>
<ol>
  <li>
<p><strong>Attraction content</strong> (50%): reels, trending sounds, quick wins—content designed to reach non-followers and get shared<br></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Nurture content</strong> (30%): carousels, Stories, Lives—more in-depth content that builds connection and trust<br></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><strong>Selling content</strong> (20%): simple, direct posts that show up and sell your box</p>
</li>
</ol>
<p>If you post 6 days a week, think: 3 attraction posts, 2 nurture posts, and 1 sales post. That’s your 3:2:1 formula.</p>
<p>Michelle’s advice:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Post attraction content that makes people think, <em>“I know exactly who to send this to.”</em></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Use nurture content to deepen the relationship—think saves, not shares.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Don’t skip the selling posts! They matter just as much as the rest.</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>We also talked about:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>Why <strong>b-roll video</strong> is your best friend for attraction content.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>How to repurpose one activity—like an unboxing—into multiple content types.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Why <strong>hashtags still matter</strong> (yes, really!)</p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Before we wrapped up, I asked Michelle to brainstorm with me one thing every subscription box owner could post <em>today</em> to boost their Instagram reach. Her answer was so simple and actionable:</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><strong>Record a b-roll clip</strong> of you packing or unpacking your box.</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Add a bold, shareable caption like: <em>“Fashion advice I’d give you if I wasn’t afraid to hurt your feelings.”</em></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>That’s it. That’s attraction content.</p>
<p>Ready to grow your Instagram with confidence and strategy? This episode is packed with practical tips, simple frameworks, and the encouragement to <em>just start</em>.</p>
<p><strong>Listen now and tag me @howtostartasubbox when you post your reel—I can’t wait to see it!</strong></p>
<p>Find and follow Michelle: </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/iammichellegifford/">Michelle on Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://iammichellegifford.com/podcast">Michelle’s Podcast</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://iammichellegifford.com/">Michelle’s Website</a></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>
<p>Instagram Strategy That Works for Subscription Box OwnersWhat to Post on Instagram to Grow Your Subscription BoxA Quick Instagram Content Idea You Can Use Today</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2261</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[dc25b014-2987-11f0-a7e6-0b7eb396be31]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5361323063.mp3?updated=1746432694" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>189: Is Your Website Costing You Sales? 5 Must-Fix Mistakes</title>
      <description>Welcome to Friday Fuel—a brand-new mini-episode series designed to give you quick, actionable insights to move your subscription box business forward. These episodes are short, sharp, and packed with practical takeaways—all in under 10 minutes.



In this very first Friday Fuel, I’m breaking down five common website mistakes I see subscription box owners and online product sellers make over and over again. Mistakes that might be costing you sales right now.



Whether your website is brand new or several years old, this episode will help you clean up your first impression and start turning more visitors into customers and subscribers.


  
What your homepage must include above the fold



  
How to use your visuals to sell, not just decorate



  
Why too many checkout options can scare buyers away



  
A smarter way to use pop-ups without driving people off



  
Where and how to add social proof that builds trust quickly




Your Action Step

Pick one of the five areas I shared and make a small update to your website.You don’t need to fix everything at once—just keep moving forward.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 02 May 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Is Your Website Costing You Sales? 5 Must-Fix Mistakes</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>2</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>189</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this very first Friday Fuel, I’m breaking down five common website mistakes I see subscription box owners and online product sellers make over and over again. Mistakes that might be costing you sales right now.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome to Friday Fuel—a brand-new mini-episode series designed to give you quick, actionable insights to move your subscription box business forward. These episodes are short, sharp, and packed with practical takeaways—all in under 10 minutes.



In this very first Friday Fuel, I’m breaking down five common website mistakes I see subscription box owners and online product sellers make over and over again. Mistakes that might be costing you sales right now.



Whether your website is brand new or several years old, this episode will help you clean up your first impression and start turning more visitors into customers and subscribers.


  
What your homepage must include above the fold



  
How to use your visuals to sell, not just decorate



  
Why too many checkout options can scare buyers away



  
A smarter way to use pop-ups without driving people off



  
Where and how to add social proof that builds trust quickly




Your Action Step

Pick one of the five areas I shared and make a small update to your website.You don’t need to fix everything at once—just keep moving forward.



Join me in all the places:    


  
Facebook



  
Instagram



  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome to <em>Friday Fuel</em>—a brand-new mini-episode series designed to give you quick, actionable insights to move your subscription box business forward. These episodes are short, sharp, and packed with practical takeaways—all in under 10 minutes.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>In this very first Friday Fuel, I’m breaking down <strong>five common website mistakes</strong> I see subscription box owners and online product sellers make over and over again. Mistakes that might be costing you sales right now.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Whether your website is brand new or several years old, this episode will help you clean up your first impression and start turning more visitors into customers and subscribers.</p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p>What your homepage <em>must</em> include above the fold</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>How to use your visuals to <em>sell</em>, not just decorate</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Why too many checkout options can scare buyers away</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>A smarter way to use pop-ups without driving people off</p>
</li>
  <li>
<p>Where and how to add social proof that builds trust quickly<br></p>
</li>
</ul>
<p><u><strong>Your Action Step</strong></u></p>
<p>Pick one of the five areas I shared and make a small update to your website.You don’t need to fix everything at once—just keep moving forward.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places:    </p>
<ul>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></p>
</li>
  <li>
<p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </p>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>750</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7579a3bc-23eb-11f0-824d-8f038c09cb07]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9004930753.mp3?updated=1745815765" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Sarah’s Strategies to 100 Subscribers and Beyond</title>
      <description>Have you launched your subscription box but found yourself struggling to grow? Launching your subscription box is a HUGE milestone. Celebrate that! The next HUGE milestone for so many of my members is reaching 100 subscribers. Some - those with large, engaged audiences - do this during their first launch. Most don’t. I didn’t. 

Growing your subscription box to 100 subscribers and beyond takes time. It’s important to give yourself grace and time to get there while still staying focused and holding yourself accountable.

Inside Launch Your Box, I walk my members through what it takes to get their subscription boxes launched. But the launch is not the end. There is more work to do to keep it going - and growing - each month. Which is why we talk about much more than just launching inside LYB. 


  It’s constant curation. Keeping up with trends and what your subscribers want. 

  It’s constant marketing. Getting yourself out there and in front of new people consistently. 

  It’s constant retention. So many subscription box owners make the mistake of focusing only on the acquisition of new subscribers, losing sight of the subscribers they already have. 


Focusing on these three things should drive your business and create long-term recurring revenue. 

So, what got me to my first 100 subscribers and what should you do to get to yours? 


  Don’t stop talking about your subscription box. 

  You think everyone has seen it. They haven’t. 

  You think you’re talking about it enough. You’re not. 

  Inside the Launch Your Box Training Library - in the Marketing Module - you’ll find a Subscription Box Social Media resource with posting ideas for EVERY day of the month! 

  Not an LYB member yet? Text LAUNCH to 940-204-0023 for a link to join! 



  Engage. Consistently. 



  Be social before and after the sale. 

  Retention is a HUGE part of growth - make sure you’re engaging with your subscribers, letting them know how much you appreciate them. 

  Your excitement is contagious. 

  Create FOMO for those not signed up! 

  Create connections with and for your subscribers. 

  I don’t recommend private Facebook groups for our subscriptions - you lose a valuable opportunity to create FOMO. 

  Create value - it’s not always about the stuff. 

  What makes you different and unique? 

  Why should someone buy from you and not a big box store? 

  Curate the experience your subscribers are looking for - the experience they can’t get from big box stores or even big box subscriptions. 


Everyone can do these simple things to grow their subscriptions. Your launch is only the beginning.

When you’re ready to take your subscription box to the next level, when you’re ready to go deeper… you’re ready for my ⁠Scale Your Box⁠ course. There’s so much to scaling your box - so many things you can do to grow your business in a manageable, profitable way. 

Join me for this episode where I talk you through what it takes to get you to your first 100 subscribers and beyond!

 

Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 


 

Are you ready for ⁠ Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠ Join the waitlist⁠ today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 30 Apr 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode where I talk you through what it takes to get you to your first 100 subscribers and beyond!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you launched your subscription box but found yourself struggling to grow? Launching your subscription box is a HUGE milestone. Celebrate that! The next HUGE milestone for so many of my members is reaching 100 subscribers. Some - those with large, engaged audiences - do this during their first launch. Most don’t. I didn’t. 

Growing your subscription box to 100 subscribers and beyond takes time. It’s important to give yourself grace and time to get there while still staying focused and holding yourself accountable.

Inside Launch Your Box, I walk my members through what it takes to get their subscription boxes launched. But the launch is not the end. There is more work to do to keep it going - and growing - each month. Which is why we talk about much more than just launching inside LYB. 


  It’s constant curation. Keeping up with trends and what your subscribers want. 

  It’s constant marketing. Getting yourself out there and in front of new people consistently. 

  It’s constant retention. So many subscription box owners make the mistake of focusing only on the acquisition of new subscribers, losing sight of the subscribers they already have. 


Focusing on these three things should drive your business and create long-term recurring revenue. 

So, what got me to my first 100 subscribers and what should you do to get to yours? 


  Don’t stop talking about your subscription box. 

  You think everyone has seen it. They haven’t. 

  You think you’re talking about it enough. You’re not. 

  Inside the Launch Your Box Training Library - in the Marketing Module - you’ll find a Subscription Box Social Media resource with posting ideas for EVERY day of the month! 

  Not an LYB member yet? Text LAUNCH to 940-204-0023 for a link to join! 



  Engage. Consistently. 



  Be social before and after the sale. 

  Retention is a HUGE part of growth - make sure you’re engaging with your subscribers, letting them know how much you appreciate them. 

  Your excitement is contagious. 

  Create FOMO for those not signed up! 

  Create connections with and for your subscribers. 

  I don’t recommend private Facebook groups for our subscriptions - you lose a valuable opportunity to create FOMO. 

  Create value - it’s not always about the stuff. 

  What makes you different and unique? 

  Why should someone buy from you and not a big box store? 

  Curate the experience your subscribers are looking for - the experience they can’t get from big box stores or even big box subscriptions. 


Everyone can do these simple things to grow their subscriptions. Your launch is only the beginning.

When you’re ready to take your subscription box to the next level, when you’re ready to go deeper… you’re ready for my ⁠Scale Your Box⁠ course. There’s so much to scaling your box - so many things you can do to grow your business in a manageable, profitable way. 

Join me for this episode where I talk you through what it takes to get you to your first 100 subscribers and beyond!

 

Join me in all the places: 


  ⁠Facebook⁠

  ⁠Instagram⁠

  
⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠ 


 

Are you ready for ⁠ Launch Your Box⁠? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. ⁠ Join the waitlist⁠ today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you launched your subscription box but found yourself struggling to grow? Launching your subscription box is a HUGE milestone. Celebrate that! The next HUGE milestone for so many of my members is reaching 100 subscribers. Some - those with large, engaged audiences - do this during their first launch. Most don’t. I didn’t. </p>
<p>Growing your subscription box to 100 subscribers and beyond takes time. It’s important to give yourself grace and time to get there while still staying focused and holding yourself accountable.</p>
<p>Inside Launch Your Box, I walk my members through what it takes to get their subscription boxes launched. But the launch is not the end. There is more work to do to keep it going - and growing - each month. Which is why we talk about much more than just launching inside LYB. </p>
<ul>
  <li>It’s constant curation. Keeping up with trends and what your subscribers want. </li>
  <li>It’s constant marketing. Getting yourself out there and in front of new people consistently. </li>
  <li>It’s constant retention. So many subscription box owners make the mistake of focusing only on the acquisition of new subscribers, losing sight of the subscribers they already have. </li>
</ul>
<p>Focusing on these three things should drive your business and create long-term recurring revenue. </p>
<p>So, what got me to my first 100 subscribers and what should you do to get to yours? </p>
<ul>
  <li>Don’t stop talking about your subscription box. </li>
  <li>You think everyone has seen it. They haven’t. </li>
  <li>You think you’re talking about it enough. You’re not. </li>
  <li>Inside the Launch Your Box Training Library - in the Marketing Module - you’ll find a Subscription Box Social Media resource with posting ideas for EVERY day of the month! </li>
  <li>Not an LYB member yet? Text LAUNCH to 940-204-0023 for a link to join! </li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>Engage. Consistently. </li>
</ul>
<ul>
  <li>Be social before and after the sale. </li>
  <li>Retention is a HUGE part of growth - make sure you’re engaging with your subscribers, letting them know how much you appreciate them. </li>
  <li>Your excitement is contagious. </li>
  <li>Create FOMO for those not signed up! </li>
  <li>Create connections with and for your subscribers. </li>
  <li>I don’t recommend private Facebook groups for our subscriptions - you lose a valuable opportunity to create FOMO. </li>
  <li>Create value - it’s not always about the stuff. </li>
  <li>What makes you different and unique? </li>
  <li>Why should someone buy from you and not a big box store? </li>
  <li>Curate the experience your subscribers are looking for - the experience they can’t get from big box stores or even big box subscriptions. </li>
</ul>
<p>Everyone can do these simple things to grow their subscriptions. Your launch is only the beginning.</p>
<p>When you’re ready to take your subscription box to the next level, when you’re ready to go deeper… you’re ready for my <a href="http://joinsyb.com">⁠Scale Your Box⁠</a> course. There’s so much to scaling your box - so many things you can do to grow your business in a manageable, profitable way. </p>
<p>Join me for this episode where I talk you through what it takes to get you to your first 100 subscribers and beyond!</p>
<p> </p>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">⁠Facebook⁠</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">⁠Instagram⁠</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">⁠Launch Your Box with Sarah Website⁠</a> </li>
</ul>
<p> </p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">⁠ Launch Your Box⁠</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">⁠ Join the waitlist⁠</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1287</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e6ce4a00-23ea-11f0-abd7-8b03aa0d6a5b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2973496574.mp3?updated=1745815526" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>188: Launching in 30 Days? Here’s Exactly What I Would Do</title>
      <description>Are you 30 days away from launching your subscription box?

Whether you’re launching for the very first time or opening up to new subscribers again, these steps will help you build momentum, stay focused, and launch with confidence.

Step 1: Set Your Launch Date (and Tell People About It)
When you commit to a specific date—and announce it to your audience—everything shifts.

You create urgency.

You focus your content.

You hold yourself accountable.

So go ahead—circle it on the calendar and tell your people what’s coming.

Step 2: Launches Happen in the Inbox
Email matters. Even if your list is small.

Building know/like/trust happens in the inbox.

Here’s what to do:


If you haven’t been emailing regularly - Start now. Send one email right away, then email once a week.


If you have been emailing regularly - It’s time to increase frequency. Start sending two emails per week.


And in every single email?

Make your call-to-action: Join the waitlist.

Haven’t started building your email list yet? Prioritize it now.

Step 3: Double Your Video Efforts
Video builds trust fast—and gives you a powerful tool for retargeting.

Go LIVE on Facebook. Post reels on Instagram. Share behind-the-scenes stories. Show packing day, talk about your why, or just let people see you.

You can repurpose what you’re emailing or posting and bring it to life through video. When people view even 3 seconds, you can retarget them with ads later. So the more you show up, the more your future customers get to know you.

And again—make your call-to-action: Join the waitlist.

Step 4: Drive People to Your Waitlist
Your waitlist is not just a page. It’s the heartbeat of your launch.

These are your warmest leads—your future VIPs. So treat it like the powerful tool it is.

Make it the one thing you're asking people to do every day.

And if you’re planning a bonus or early access offer? Use that to create urgency and get more people signed up.

Step 5: Nurture Your Waitlist with a Sequence
Getting people to join your waitlist is only step one. You’ve got to keep the energy going.

Send a short email sequence that makes your future subscribers feel seen, excited, and ready to buy when you open the doors.

Here’s a simple plan:

Welcome + Introduce Yourself

Share Your Why

Take Them Behind the Scenes

Give a Sneak Peek of What’s Coming


Step 6: Run Ads to Fuel Growth
Even with a small budget, running the right kinds of ads can help you grow faster.


Page Like Ads – grow your Facebook audience


Lead Magnet Ads – offer a freebie to build your email list


Waitlist Ads – drive warm leads straight to your waitlist


Ads aren’t just for launch week—they’re a great way to fill your funnel in the 30 days leading up to it.

Don’t Wait Until the Middle of Your Launch to Get Ready
These 30 days? They’re your prep time.

You’ll thank yourself when you’re in the middle of your launch and you’re not scrambling to “catch up.”

These six steps aren’t just for launch season—they’re what you should be doing year-round to build a thriving subscription box business.

Whether you're launching for the first time or re-opening your subscription, this episode will help you show up with confidence and a clear plan.

Join me in all the places:    

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 23 Apr 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Launching in 30 Days? Here’s Exactly What I Would Do</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>188</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode of Launch Your Box, I’m sharing exactly what I’d do if I were launching a subscription box 30 days from now. Whether you’re launching for the very first time or opening up to new subscribers again, these steps will help you build momentum, stay focused, and launch with confidence.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Are you 30 days away from launching your subscription box?

Whether you’re launching for the very first time or opening up to new subscribers again, these steps will help you build momentum, stay focused, and launch with confidence.

Step 1: Set Your Launch Date (and Tell People About It)
When you commit to a specific date—and announce it to your audience—everything shifts.

You create urgency.

You focus your content.

You hold yourself accountable.

So go ahead—circle it on the calendar and tell your people what’s coming.

Step 2: Launches Happen in the Inbox
Email matters. Even if your list is small.

Building know/like/trust happens in the inbox.

Here’s what to do:


If you haven’t been emailing regularly - Start now. Send one email right away, then email once a week.


If you have been emailing regularly - It’s time to increase frequency. Start sending two emails per week.


And in every single email?

Make your call-to-action: Join the waitlist.

Haven’t started building your email list yet? Prioritize it now.

Step 3: Double Your Video Efforts
Video builds trust fast—and gives you a powerful tool for retargeting.

Go LIVE on Facebook. Post reels on Instagram. Share behind-the-scenes stories. Show packing day, talk about your why, or just let people see you.

You can repurpose what you’re emailing or posting and bring it to life through video. When people view even 3 seconds, you can retarget them with ads later. So the more you show up, the more your future customers get to know you.

And again—make your call-to-action: Join the waitlist.

Step 4: Drive People to Your Waitlist
Your waitlist is not just a page. It’s the heartbeat of your launch.

These are your warmest leads—your future VIPs. So treat it like the powerful tool it is.

Make it the one thing you're asking people to do every day.

And if you’re planning a bonus or early access offer? Use that to create urgency and get more people signed up.

Step 5: Nurture Your Waitlist with a Sequence
Getting people to join your waitlist is only step one. You’ve got to keep the energy going.

Send a short email sequence that makes your future subscribers feel seen, excited, and ready to buy when you open the doors.

Here’s a simple plan:

Welcome + Introduce Yourself

Share Your Why

Take Them Behind the Scenes

Give a Sneak Peek of What’s Coming


Step 6: Run Ads to Fuel Growth
Even with a small budget, running the right kinds of ads can help you grow faster.


Page Like Ads – grow your Facebook audience


Lead Magnet Ads – offer a freebie to build your email list


Waitlist Ads – drive warm leads straight to your waitlist


Ads aren’t just for launch week—they’re a great way to fill your funnel in the 30 days leading up to it.

Don’t Wait Until the Middle of Your Launch to Get Ready
These 30 days? They’re your prep time.

You’ll thank yourself when you’re in the middle of your launch and you’re not scrambling to “catch up.”

These six steps aren’t just for launch season—they’re what you should be doing year-round to build a thriving subscription box business.

Whether you're launching for the first time or re-opening your subscription, this episode will help you show up with confidence and a clear plan.

Join me in all the places:    

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are you 30 days away from launching your subscription box?</p><p><br></p><p>Whether you’re launching for the very first time or opening up to new subscribers again, these steps will help you build momentum, stay focused, and launch with confidence.</p><h2><br></h2><h2>Step 1: Set Your Launch Date (and Tell People About It)</h2><p>When you commit to a specific date—and <em>announce it to your audience</em>—everything shifts.</p><p><br></p><p>You create urgency.</p><p><br></p><p>You focus your content.</p><p><br></p><p>You hold yourself accountable.</p><p><br></p><p>So go ahead—circle it on the calendar and tell your people what’s coming.</p><h2><br></h2><h2>Step 2: Launches Happen in the Inbox</h2><p>Email matters. Even if your list is small.</p><p><br></p><p>Building know/like/trust happens in the inbox.</p><p><br></p><p>Here’s what to do:</p><ul>
<li>
<strong>If you haven’t been emailing regularly -</strong> Start now. Send one email right away, then email once a week.</li>
<li>
<strong>If you <em>have</em> been emailing regularly -</strong> It’s time to increase frequency. Start sending two emails per week.</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>And in every single email?</p><p><br></p><p>Make your call-to-action: <strong>Join the waitlist.</strong></p><p><br></p><p>Haven’t started building your email list yet? Prioritize it now.</p><h2><br></h2><h2>Step 3: Double Your Video Efforts</h2><p>Video builds trust fast—and gives you a powerful tool for retargeting.</p><p><br></p><p>Go LIVE on Facebook. Post reels on Instagram. Share behind-the-scenes stories. Show packing day, talk about your why, or just let people see <em>you</em>.</p><p><br></p><p>You can repurpose what you’re emailing or posting and bring it to life through video. When people view even <em>3 seconds</em>, you can retarget them with ads later. So the more you show up, the more your future customers get to know you.</p><p><br></p><p>And again—make your call-to-action: <strong>Join the waitlist.</strong></p><h2><br></h2><h2>Step 4: Drive People to Your Waitlist</h2><p>Your waitlist is not just a page. It’s the heartbeat of your launch.</p><p><br></p><p>These are your warmest leads—your future VIPs. So treat it like the powerful tool it is.</p><p><br></p><p>Make it the one thing you're asking people to do every day.</p><p><br></p><p>And if you’re planning a bonus or early access offer? Use that to create urgency and get more people signed up.</p><h2><br></h2><h2>Step 5: Nurture Your Waitlist with a Sequence</h2><p>Getting people to join your waitlist is only step one. You’ve got to keep the energy going.</p><p><br></p><p>Send a short email sequence that makes your future subscribers feel seen, excited, and ready to buy when you open the doors.</p><p><br></p><p>Here’s a simple plan:</p><ol>
<li><strong>Welcome + Introduce Yourself</strong></li>
<li><strong>Share Your Why</strong></li>
<li><strong>Take Them Behind the Scenes</strong></li>
<li><strong>Give a Sneak Peek of What’s Coming</strong></li>
</ol><h2><br></h2><h2>Step 6: Run Ads to Fuel Growth</h2><p>Even with a small budget, running the right kinds of ads can help you grow faster.</p><ul>
<li>
<strong>Page Like Ads</strong> – grow your Facebook audience</li>
<li>
<strong>Lead Magnet Ads</strong> – offer a freebie to build your email list</li>
<li>
<strong>Waitlist Ads</strong> – drive warm leads straight to your waitlist</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Ads aren’t just for launch week—they’re a great way to fill your funnel in the 30 days leading up to it.</p><h2><br></h2><h2>Don’t Wait Until the Middle of Your Launch to Get Ready</h2><p>These 30 days? They’re your prep time.</p><p><br></p><p>You’ll thank yourself when you’re in the middle of your launch and you’re not scrambling to “catch up.”</p><p><br></p><p><em>These six steps aren’t just for launch season—they’re what you should be doing year-round to build a thriving subscription box business.</em></p><h2><br></h2><p>Whether you're launching for the first time or re-opening your subscription, this episode will help you show up with confidence and a clear plan.</p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places:    </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1497</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[03841dda-1e7f-11f0-b093-2fce720e7025]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9557016710.mp3?updated=1745219860" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>187: How Two Students Hit $1M in 12 Months by Doubling Down on Their Subscriptions</title>
      <description>Whether you’re just getting started or dreaming of your next big milestone, this conversation will encourage you, motivate you, and inspire you . We talk about how they built momentum, what they focused on (and what they let go of), and the mindset shifts that helped them scale without losing their sanity.

Kristy launched Kristy’s Craft Room in 2019 by simply doing what she loved — crafting and building community. She hosted in-person craft nights that quickly moved online just before the pandemic hit. When everyone was suddenly at home in spring 2020, Kristy’s classes exploded.

At first, she wasn’t selling anything. Her audience had to convince her to start offering craft kits — and when she did, they sold like crazy. After hearing me speak at an event, she realized she could turn this into something sustainable… and launched her subscription box.

In 2024, Kristy faced some real-life challenges — aging parents, kids leaving home, and a business that had started to take over her time. Instead of pushing harder, she pulled back. She paused one-off product launches and went deeper with her subscribers.

She offered behind-the-scenes content, created FOMO with unboxing videos, and focused on nurturing her core community. And guess what? She still hit $1 million — and had more time to spend with the people she loves most.

Stacey’s story starts even earlier — she began painting custom furniture in 2013. By 2017, she pivoted online, going LIVE with decorating tips and DIYs, and her audience grew quickly.

She launched her subscription in 2018 with just 20 subscribers. Today, 1,100+ members strong, her community is one of the most loyal I’ve ever seen.

But in 2024, Stacey hit a wall with growth. Getting new subscribers was tough. So instead of spending her time and energy chasing new subscribers, she focused on the people who already loved her.

She gave them exclusives, launched new offers just for them, and stopped trying to do all the things. She focused on growing her main thing — and it worked.

What I love most is that both Stacey and Kristy set this goal in 2023… and missed it.

But they didn’t give up. They came back in 2024 — a year full of challenges for both of them — and hit that milestone by staying focused and trusting the process.

This episode is full of those kinds of reminders — that you don’t have to do everything. That your subscribers are your most important customers. That leaning into what’s working beats chasing everything else.

Let this episode be your inspiration.

You can build a million-dollar business from home.

You can scale without burning out.

You can do it with focus, community, and a little courage to stay the course.

These two amazing women are proof. And I couldn’t be more proud of them.

Whether you're just getting started or dreaming of your next big milestone, this conversation will light a fire under you.  Grab your earbuds and come join us.

Past episodes featuring Kristy and Stacey: 

Generating Over $20K a Month with a Digital Subscription - episode 82

750 Pillow Subscriptions Sold in 5 Days with Wilshire Collections - episode 135

Streamline Your Subscription Box with a Fulfillment Center - episode 152

Journey from One-Time Boxes to a Thriving Monthly Subscription - episode 45

Find and follow Kristy: 


Kristy’s Craft Room on Facebook 

Kristy’s Craft Room on Instagram

Kristy’s Craft Room Website

Find and follow Stacey: 


Wilshire Collections on Facebook 

Wilshire Collections on Instagram

Wilshire Collections Website


Join me in all the places:    

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 16 Apr 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How Two Students Hit $1M in 12 Months by Doubling Down on Their Subscriptions</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>187</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Whether you’re just getting started or dreaming of your next big milestone, this conversation will encourage you, motivate you, and inspire you . We talk about how they built momentum, what they focused on (and what they let go of), and the mindset shifts that helped them scale without losing their sanity.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Whether you’re just getting started or dreaming of your next big milestone, this conversation will encourage you, motivate you, and inspire you . We talk about how they built momentum, what they focused on (and what they let go of), and the mindset shifts that helped them scale without losing their sanity.

Kristy launched Kristy’s Craft Room in 2019 by simply doing what she loved — crafting and building community. She hosted in-person craft nights that quickly moved online just before the pandemic hit. When everyone was suddenly at home in spring 2020, Kristy’s classes exploded.

At first, she wasn’t selling anything. Her audience had to convince her to start offering craft kits — and when she did, they sold like crazy. After hearing me speak at an event, she realized she could turn this into something sustainable… and launched her subscription box.

In 2024, Kristy faced some real-life challenges — aging parents, kids leaving home, and a business that had started to take over her time. Instead of pushing harder, she pulled back. She paused one-off product launches and went deeper with her subscribers.

She offered behind-the-scenes content, created FOMO with unboxing videos, and focused on nurturing her core community. And guess what? She still hit $1 million — and had more time to spend with the people she loves most.

Stacey’s story starts even earlier — she began painting custom furniture in 2013. By 2017, she pivoted online, going LIVE with decorating tips and DIYs, and her audience grew quickly.

She launched her subscription in 2018 with just 20 subscribers. Today, 1,100+ members strong, her community is one of the most loyal I’ve ever seen.

But in 2024, Stacey hit a wall with growth. Getting new subscribers was tough. So instead of spending her time and energy chasing new subscribers, she focused on the people who already loved her.

She gave them exclusives, launched new offers just for them, and stopped trying to do all the things. She focused on growing her main thing — and it worked.

What I love most is that both Stacey and Kristy set this goal in 2023… and missed it.

But they didn’t give up. They came back in 2024 — a year full of challenges for both of them — and hit that milestone by staying focused and trusting the process.

This episode is full of those kinds of reminders — that you don’t have to do everything. That your subscribers are your most important customers. That leaning into what’s working beats chasing everything else.

Let this episode be your inspiration.

You can build a million-dollar business from home.

You can scale without burning out.

You can do it with focus, community, and a little courage to stay the course.

These two amazing women are proof. And I couldn’t be more proud of them.

Whether you're just getting started or dreaming of your next big milestone, this conversation will light a fire under you.  Grab your earbuds and come join us.

Past episodes featuring Kristy and Stacey: 

Generating Over $20K a Month with a Digital Subscription - episode 82

750 Pillow Subscriptions Sold in 5 Days with Wilshire Collections - episode 135

Streamline Your Subscription Box with a Fulfillment Center - episode 152

Journey from One-Time Boxes to a Thriving Monthly Subscription - episode 45

Find and follow Kristy: 


Kristy’s Craft Room on Facebook 

Kristy’s Craft Room on Instagram

Kristy’s Craft Room Website

Find and follow Stacey: 


Wilshire Collections on Facebook 

Wilshire Collections on Instagram

Wilshire Collections Website


Join me in all the places:    

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Whether you’re just getting started or dreaming of your next big milestone, this conversation will <strong>encourage you, motivate you, and</strong> <strong>inspire you </strong>. We talk about how they built momentum, what they focused on (and what they <em>let go of</em>), and the mindset shifts that helped them scale without losing their sanity.</p><h2><br></h2><p>Kristy launched Kristy’s Craft Room in 2019 by simply doing what she loved — crafting and building community. She hosted in-person craft nights that quickly moved online just before the pandemic hit. When everyone was suddenly at home in spring 2020, Kristy’s classes exploded.</p><p><br></p><p>At first, she wasn’t selling anything. Her audience had to convince her to start offering craft kits — and when she did, they sold like crazy. After hearing me speak at an event, she realized she could turn this into something sustainable… and launched her subscription box.</p><p><br></p><p>In 2024, Kristy faced some real-life challenges — aging parents, kids leaving home, and a business that had started to take over her time. Instead of pushing harder, she <strong>pulled back</strong>. She paused one-off product launches and went deeper with her subscribers.</p><p><br></p><p>She offered behind-the-scenes content, created FOMO with unboxing videos, and focused on <em>nurturing her core community</em>. And guess what? She still hit $1 million — and had more time to spend with the people she loves most.</p><h2><br></h2><p>Stacey’s story starts even earlier — she began painting custom furniture in 2013. By 2017, she pivoted online, going LIVE with decorating tips and DIYs, and her audience grew quickly.</p><p><br></p><p>She launched her subscription in 2018 with just 20 subscribers. Today, <strong>1,100+ members strong</strong>, her community is one of the most loyal I’ve ever seen.</p><p><br></p><p>But in 2024, Stacey hit a wall with growth. Getting new subscribers was tough. So instead of spending her time and energy chasing new subscribers, she focused on the people who already loved her.</p><p><br></p><p>She gave them exclusives, launched new offers <em>just</em> for them, and stopped trying to do all the things. She focused on growing her <em>main thing</em> — and it worked.</p><h2><br></h2><p>What I love most is that <strong>both Stacey and Kristy set this goal in 2023… and missed it</strong>.</p><p><br></p><p>But they didn’t give up. They came back in 2024 — a year full of challenges for both of them — and hit that milestone by <strong>staying focused and trusting the process</strong>.</p><p><br></p><p>This episode is full of those kinds of reminders — that <strong>you don’t have to do everything</strong>. That <strong>your subscribers are your most important customers</strong>. That <strong>leaning into what’s working beats chasing everything else</strong>.</p><h2><br></h2><p>Let this episode be your inspiration.</p><ul>
<li>You <em>can</em> build a million-dollar business from home.</li>
<li>You <em>can</em> scale without burning out.</li>
<li>You <em>can</em> do it with focus, community, and a little courage to stay the course.</li>
</ul><p>These two amazing women are proof. And I couldn’t be more proud of them.</p><p><br></p><p>Whether you're just getting started or dreaming of your next big milestone, this conversation will light a fire under you.  Grab your earbuds and come join us.</p><p><br></p><p>Past episodes featuring Kristy and Stacey: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/generating-over-20k-a-month-with-a-digital-subscription-ep-82">Generating Over $20K a Month with a Digital Subscription - episode 82</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/750-pillow-subscriptions-sold-in-5-days-with-wilshire-collections-ep-135">750 Pillow Subscriptions Sold in 5 Days with Wilshire Collections - episode 135</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/streamline-your-subscription-box-with-a-fulfillment-center-ep-152">Streamline Your Subscription Box with a Fulfillment Center - episode 152</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-45">Journey from One-Time Boxes to a Thriving Monthly Subscription - episode 45</a></li>
</ul><p>Find and follow Kristy: </p><ul>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/KristysCraftRoom">Kristy’s Craft Room on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/kristyscraftroom_official/">Kristy’s Craft Room on Instagram</a></li>
<li><a href="https://kristyscraftroom.com/">Kristy’s Craft Room Website</a></li>
</ul><p>Find and follow Stacey: </p><ul>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/wilshirecollections">Wilshire Collections on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/wilshire_collections/">Wilshire Collections on Instagram</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.wilshirecollections.com/">Wilshire Collections Website</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places:    </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2500</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d49b3f14-18e6-11f0-a398-67c20e157cbc]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3052329100.mp3?updated=1744604314" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>3 Email Automations Every Subscription Box Owner Needs</title>
      <description>What if I told you writing six simple emails once could bring ongoing revenue into your subscription box business? 
 
There are three email automations (also called flows or sequences)every subscription box owner needs to have in place. Write these once and they’ll work for you for a long time. 
 
If you’ve listened to my podcast, seen me on social media, or read my blog, you know I like to keep things simple but effective. That’s why I recommend that each automation needs to be only two emails. 
 
The three types of email automations you need are: 

Waitlist flow. 

New subscriber flow. 

Abandoned cart flow. 

 
Each email has a purpose. Each email contains a call to action. Each email needs to connect with your audience, engage them, and encourage them to take action. 
 
These email automations - plus the bonus automation I tell you more about in this episode - account for a full 5% of my monthly revenue. 5%! That’s a lot of revenue coming into my business that requires no work from me. I wrote the emails once and they keep working for me… month after month. 
 
Join me for this episode as I share more details about each of the three types of email automations you need to put in place right now. Learn what to put in each email and how to write subject lines that get noticed. 

Important Links: 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 09 Apr 2025 08:30:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>3 Email Automations Every Subscription Box Owner Needs</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as I share more details about each of the three types of email automations you need to put in place right now. Learn what to put in each email and how to write subject lines that get noticed. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What if I told you writing six simple emails once could bring ongoing revenue into your subscription box business? 
 
There are three email automations (also called flows or sequences)every subscription box owner needs to have in place. Write these once and they’ll work for you for a long time. 
 
If you’ve listened to my podcast, seen me on social media, or read my blog, you know I like to keep things simple but effective. That’s why I recommend that each automation needs to be only two emails. 
 
The three types of email automations you need are: 

Waitlist flow. 

New subscriber flow. 

Abandoned cart flow. 

 
Each email has a purpose. Each email contains a call to action. Each email needs to connect with your audience, engage them, and encourage them to take action. 
 
These email automations - plus the bonus automation I tell you more about in this episode - account for a full 5% of my monthly revenue. 5%! That’s a lot of revenue coming into my business that requires no work from me. I wrote the emails once and they keep working for me… month after month. 
 
Join me for this episode as I share more details about each of the three types of email automations you need to put in place right now. Learn what to put in each email and how to write subject lines that get noticed. 

Important Links: 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What if I told you writing six simple emails once could bring ongoing revenue into your subscription box business? </p><p> </p><p>There are three email automations (also called flows or sequences)every subscription box owner needs to have in place. Write these once and they’ll work for you for a long time. </p><p> </p><p>If you’ve listened to my podcast, seen me on social media, or read my blog, you know I like to keep things simple but effective. That’s why I recommend that each automation needs to be only two emails. </p><p> </p><p>The three types of email automations you need are: </p><ol>
<li>Waitlist flow. </li>
<li>New subscriber flow. </li>
<li>Abandoned cart flow. </li>
</ol><p> </p><p>Each email has a purpose. Each email contains a call to action. Each email needs to connect with your audience, engage them, and encourage them to take action. </p><p> </p><p>These email automations - plus the bonus automation I tell you more about in this episode - account for a full 5% of my monthly revenue. 5%! That’s a lot of revenue coming into my business that requires no work from me. I wrote the emails once and they keep working for me… month after month. </p><p> </p><p>Join me for this episode as I share more details about each of the three types of email automations you need to put in place right now. Learn what to put in each email and how to write subject lines that get noticed. </p><p><br></p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1407</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5f0c55fa-14ac-11f0-80c1-0b6696870258]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9626973684.mp3?updated=1744139402" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>186: Spring Sales: How to Generate Extra Revenue with One-Time Boxes </title>
      <description>Spring is here, and it’s the perfect time to bring in some extra revenue—even if you don’t add any new subscribers. In this episode, I’m sharing two super simple, super effective ways you can generate quick cash flow this season by creating limited-time, one-time boxes your audience will love. These strategies work, whether you want to clear out inventory or make the most of gift-giving opportunities.

Spring is the perfect time to launch limited-time boxes to bring in extra revenue and keep your audience engaged. Two of my favorite spring offers are Mother’s Day Gift Boxes and Spring Cleaning Mystery Boxes. They’re easy to curate, fun to promote, and they provide an injection of cash into my business.

One-time boxes serve a specific purpose in your business, giving you a quick revenue boost without the need for new subscribers. 

One-time boxes are:

Easy to market–seasonal urgency or limited quantities

A great way to re-engage and re-energize your email list

Perfect for testing new themes or audiences

A low-commitment way for new customers to try your brand


One-time boxes require you to temporarily shift your focus from recurring subscriptions to creating hype and excitement around these one-time purchases.

Mother’s Day is like Christmas in May for your business. Make the most of this gift-giving holiday and create one-time boxes. Some examples that have worked great for me and members of Launch Your Box include: 

Self-care for moms

Mom’s Night In


“Treat Yourself” boxes for moms to buy for themselves (because yes, moms will buy for themselves)
Sarah’s One-Time Mother’s Day Box Pro tips:

Start promoting in mid-late April

Build a waitlist and create urgency

Offer themed packaging and gift notes

Ship in early May– make order deadlines clear

Price one-time boxes similar to your subscription price or average order value (AOV)


Turn extra inventory into profit—without running a clearance sale. Mystery boxes:

Create FOMO and excitement

Let you surprise and delight customers

Help clear shelves of inventory and bring a revenue boost to  your bottom line


Spring Mystery Boxes Pro Tips:

Curate using past box items or extra stock

Offer 1–2 price points

Include at least one high-value item in each box

Make value messaging very clear: e.g., “$100 worth of products for $50”


Marketing these seasonal boxes doesn’t need to be complicated. Keep it simple and show up.  


Go LIVE on social media to build excitement and show sneak peeks


Email your list—your list is your best sales tool


Social media content: unboxings, packing videos, behind-the-scenes


Paid ads to warm audiences for last-minute sales


Pick one of these seasonal box ideas and::

Set a launch date

Build a waitlist

Start planning your promo schedule


Grab your notebook and join me on this episode as we talk through Mother’s Day Boxes, Spring Cleaning Mystery Boxes, and how to use both to re-engage your audience, boost sales, and build even more excitement around your subscription box business. 

Join me in all the places:  

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 02 Apr 2025 08:09:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Spring Sales: How to Generate Extra Revenue with One-Time Boxes </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>186</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Grab your notebook and join me on this episode as we talk through Mother’s Day Boxes, Spring Cleaning Mystery Boxes, and how to use both to re-engage your audience, boost sales, and build even more excitement around your subscription box business. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Spring is here, and it’s the perfect time to bring in some extra revenue—even if you don’t add any new subscribers. In this episode, I’m sharing two super simple, super effective ways you can generate quick cash flow this season by creating limited-time, one-time boxes your audience will love. These strategies work, whether you want to clear out inventory or make the most of gift-giving opportunities.

Spring is the perfect time to launch limited-time boxes to bring in extra revenue and keep your audience engaged. Two of my favorite spring offers are Mother’s Day Gift Boxes and Spring Cleaning Mystery Boxes. They’re easy to curate, fun to promote, and they provide an injection of cash into my business.

One-time boxes serve a specific purpose in your business, giving you a quick revenue boost without the need for new subscribers. 

One-time boxes are:

Easy to market–seasonal urgency or limited quantities

A great way to re-engage and re-energize your email list

Perfect for testing new themes or audiences

A low-commitment way for new customers to try your brand


One-time boxes require you to temporarily shift your focus from recurring subscriptions to creating hype and excitement around these one-time purchases.

Mother’s Day is like Christmas in May for your business. Make the most of this gift-giving holiday and create one-time boxes. Some examples that have worked great for me and members of Launch Your Box include: 

Self-care for moms

Mom’s Night In


“Treat Yourself” boxes for moms to buy for themselves (because yes, moms will buy for themselves)
Sarah’s One-Time Mother’s Day Box Pro tips:

Start promoting in mid-late April

Build a waitlist and create urgency

Offer themed packaging and gift notes

Ship in early May– make order deadlines clear

Price one-time boxes similar to your subscription price or average order value (AOV)


Turn extra inventory into profit—without running a clearance sale. Mystery boxes:

Create FOMO and excitement

Let you surprise and delight customers

Help clear shelves of inventory and bring a revenue boost to  your bottom line


Spring Mystery Boxes Pro Tips:

Curate using past box items or extra stock

Offer 1–2 price points

Include at least one high-value item in each box

Make value messaging very clear: e.g., “$100 worth of products for $50”


Marketing these seasonal boxes doesn’t need to be complicated. Keep it simple and show up.  


Go LIVE on social media to build excitement and show sneak peeks


Email your list—your list is your best sales tool


Social media content: unboxings, packing videos, behind-the-scenes


Paid ads to warm audiences for last-minute sales


Pick one of these seasonal box ideas and::

Set a launch date

Build a waitlist

Start planning your promo schedule


Grab your notebook and join me on this episode as we talk through Mother’s Day Boxes, Spring Cleaning Mystery Boxes, and how to use both to re-engage your audience, boost sales, and build even more excitement around your subscription box business. 

Join me in all the places:  

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Spring is here, and it’s the perfect time to bring in some extra revenue—even if you don’t add any new subscribers. In this episode, I’m sharing two super simple, super effective ways you can generate quick cash flow this season by creating limited-time, one-time boxes your audience will love. These strategies work, whether you want to clear out inventory or make the most of gift-giving opportunities.</p><p><br></p><p>Spring is the perfect time to launch limited-time boxes to bring in extra revenue and keep your audience engaged. Two of my favorite spring offers are <strong>Mother’s Day Gift Boxes</strong> and<strong> Spring Cleaning Mystery Boxes</strong>. They’re easy to curate, fun to promote, and they provide an injection of cash into my business.</p><p><br></p><p>One-time boxes serve a specific <em>purpose</em> in your business, giving you a quick revenue boost without the need for new subscribers. </p><p><br></p><p>One-time boxes are:</p><ul>
<li>Easy to market–seasonal urgency or limited quantities</li>
<li>A great way to re-engage and re-energize your email list</li>
<li>Perfect for testing new themes or audiences</li>
<li>A low-commitment way for new customers to try your brand</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>One-time boxes require you to temporarily shift your focus from recurring subscriptions to creating hype and excitement around these one-time purchases.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Mother’s Day is like Christmas in May</strong> for your business. Make the most of this gift-giving holiday and create one-time boxes. Some examples that have worked great for me and members of Launch Your Box include: </p><ul>
<li>Self-care for moms</li>
<li>Mom’s Night In</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>“Treat Yourself” boxes for moms to buy for themselves (because yes, moms will buy for themselves)</p><p>Sarah’s One-Time Mother’s Day Box Pro tips:</p><ul>
<li>Start promoting in mid-late April</li>
<li>Build a waitlist and create urgency</li>
<li>Offer themed packaging and gift notes</li>
<li>Ship in early May– make order deadlines clear</li>
<li>Price one-time boxes similar to your subscription price or average order value (AOV)</li>
</ul><h2><br></h2><p>Turn extra inventory into profit—<em>without</em> running a clearance sale. Mystery boxes:</p><ul>
<li>Create FOMO and excitement</li>
<li>Let you surprise and delight customers</li>
<li>Help clear shelves of inventory and bring a revenue boost to  your bottom line</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Spring Mystery Boxes Pro Tips:</p><ul>
<li>Curate using past box items or extra stock</li>
<li>Offer 1–2 price points</li>
<li>Include at least one high-value item in each box</li>
<li>Make value messaging very clear: e.g., “$100 worth of products for $50”</li>
</ul><h2><br></h2><p>Marketing these seasonal boxes doesn’t need to be complicated. Keep it simple and show up.  </p><ul>
<li>
<strong>Go LIVE</strong> on social media to build excitement and show sneak peeks</li>
<li>
<strong>Email</strong> your list—your list is your best sales tool</li>
<li>
<strong>Social media</strong> content: unboxings, packing videos, behind-the-scenes</li>
<li>
<strong>Paid ads</strong> to warm audiences for last-minute sales</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Pick <em>one</em> of these seasonal box ideas and::</p><ul>
<li>Set a launch date</li>
<li>Build a waitlist</li>
<li>Start planning your promo schedule</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Grab your notebook and join me on this episode as we talk through Mother’s Day Boxes, Spring Cleaning Mystery Boxes, and how to use both to re-engage your audience, boost sales, and build even more excitement around your subscription box business. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places:  </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1304</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9daf0e30-0e15-11f0-9063-c788e28e03e4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9657056922.mp3?updated=1743452201" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>185: “It’s Never About the Money.”  Scaling past 1,000 subscribers with Jane’s Agenda</title>
      <description>When Jane Wild of Jane’s Agenda first joined me on the podcast in Episode 92, we were celebrating a huge milestone: 500 subscribers to her planner subscription. That was a big deal—and one that meant Jane had to start doing things differently in her business.

Now she’s back, and her numbers have more than doubled. With 1300 active subscribers and an 85% growth rate in 2024, Jane is sharing exactly how she got here—and what she’s doing to scale intentionally in 2025.

When the pandemic hit in 2020, Jane’s one-off planner sales dropped off. After all, no one had anything to plan. So Jane created a subscription box to give her customers something to look forward to—and some much-needed structure in uncertain times.

Reaching 500 subscribers was a major turning point. Jane had to shift from small-scale planning to:

Ordering in bulk

Sourcing from overseas

Hiring help and defining roles


Creating systems—because “everyone doing everything” no longer worked

Those changes laid the foundation for what came next.

The secret to Jane’s growth? Consistency and connection.

Jane committed to going LIVE 2–3 times a week, every week. Not just random LIVEs—she scheduled them in advance, gave each one a purpose, and showed up even when she felt nervous or unsure.

This consistent visibility:

Built her know/like/trust factor


Helped her audience get to know the real Jane

Made it easier for people to say yes when she opened the cart


Jane also ran a KingSumo giveaway, following the step-by-step training inside Launch Your Box. The result?

1,000 new email subscribers

300 new paying subscribers


Giveaways aren’t just about free stuff. When done right, they build your list, generate excitement, and drive conversions.

Jane uses a closed-cart model and leans hard into:

Urgency

Scarcity

Exclusivity


She keeps a waitlist and creates serious FOMO with high-value, wow-worthy products her audience doesn’t want to miss. And when her box hits its anniversary each September? She celebrates BIG—with a special edition box and a major sale in her online shop.

Jane’s success didn’t come without some hard lessons. She realized:

She needed to hire ahead of growth

Her team needed clear roles and responsibilities


Moving into a separate office space (away from the warehouse) helped her focus and lead more effectively



Now she’s building out SOPs, instituting team reviews, and cultivating a culture of "Why are we doing what we’re doing?" Oh—and she’s taking weekends off.

If you’re in that 300–500 subscriber range and feeling like you’re about to outgrow your systems, Jane has some advice:


Negotiate! Once you hit certain volume levels, use your buying power to get better pricing from vendors—including shipping.


Look at your marketing. If people aren’t buying, it’s not always about the price. It might be the photos, the messaging, or how you’re communicating the value.


Create content that connects. Show people why they need what you’re offering—and build the relationship that makes it easy to say yes.


Join me for this episode as I check in with a past guest whose subscription has grown from 500 to 1300 subscribers since our last interview. Find out what’s behind that growth and why canceling is “never about the money.”

Listen to Jane’s first interview on episode 92.  
Find and follow Jane: 


Jane’s Agenda on Facebook 

Jane’s Agenda on Instagram

Jane’s Agenda’s Website

Jane’s Agenda on YouTube


Join me in all the places:    

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 26 Mar 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>“It’s Never About the Money.”  Scaling past 1,000 subscribers with Jane’s Agenda</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>185</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as I check in with a past guest whose subscription has grown from 500 to 1300 subscribers since our last interview. Find out what’s behind that growth and why canceling is “never about the money.”</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>When Jane Wild of Jane’s Agenda first joined me on the podcast in Episode 92, we were celebrating a huge milestone: 500 subscribers to her planner subscription. That was a big deal—and one that meant Jane had to start doing things differently in her business.

Now she’s back, and her numbers have more than doubled. With 1300 active subscribers and an 85% growth rate in 2024, Jane is sharing exactly how she got here—and what she’s doing to scale intentionally in 2025.

When the pandemic hit in 2020, Jane’s one-off planner sales dropped off. After all, no one had anything to plan. So Jane created a subscription box to give her customers something to look forward to—and some much-needed structure in uncertain times.

Reaching 500 subscribers was a major turning point. Jane had to shift from small-scale planning to:

Ordering in bulk

Sourcing from overseas

Hiring help and defining roles


Creating systems—because “everyone doing everything” no longer worked

Those changes laid the foundation for what came next.

The secret to Jane’s growth? Consistency and connection.

Jane committed to going LIVE 2–3 times a week, every week. Not just random LIVEs—she scheduled them in advance, gave each one a purpose, and showed up even when she felt nervous or unsure.

This consistent visibility:

Built her know/like/trust factor


Helped her audience get to know the real Jane

Made it easier for people to say yes when she opened the cart


Jane also ran a KingSumo giveaway, following the step-by-step training inside Launch Your Box. The result?

1,000 new email subscribers

300 new paying subscribers


Giveaways aren’t just about free stuff. When done right, they build your list, generate excitement, and drive conversions.

Jane uses a closed-cart model and leans hard into:

Urgency

Scarcity

Exclusivity


She keeps a waitlist and creates serious FOMO with high-value, wow-worthy products her audience doesn’t want to miss. And when her box hits its anniversary each September? She celebrates BIG—with a special edition box and a major sale in her online shop.

Jane’s success didn’t come without some hard lessons. She realized:

She needed to hire ahead of growth

Her team needed clear roles and responsibilities


Moving into a separate office space (away from the warehouse) helped her focus and lead more effectively



Now she’s building out SOPs, instituting team reviews, and cultivating a culture of "Why are we doing what we’re doing?" Oh—and she’s taking weekends off.

If you’re in that 300–500 subscriber range and feeling like you’re about to outgrow your systems, Jane has some advice:


Negotiate! Once you hit certain volume levels, use your buying power to get better pricing from vendors—including shipping.


Look at your marketing. If people aren’t buying, it’s not always about the price. It might be the photos, the messaging, or how you’re communicating the value.


Create content that connects. Show people why they need what you’re offering—and build the relationship that makes it easy to say yes.


Join me for this episode as I check in with a past guest whose subscription has grown from 500 to 1300 subscribers since our last interview. Find out what’s behind that growth and why canceling is “never about the money.”

Listen to Jane’s first interview on episode 92.  
Find and follow Jane: 


Jane’s Agenda on Facebook 

Jane’s Agenda on Instagram

Jane’s Agenda’s Website

Jane’s Agenda on YouTube


Join me in all the places:    

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>When Jane Wild of <strong>Jane’s Agenda</strong> first joined me on the podcast in Episode 92, we were celebrating a huge milestone: 500 subscribers to her planner subscription. That was a big deal—and one that meant Jane had to start doing things differently in her business.</p><p><br></p><p>Now she’s back, and her numbers have more than doubled. With <strong>1300 active subscribers and an 85% growth rate in 2024</strong>, Jane is sharing exactly how she got here—and what she’s doing to scale intentionally in 2025.</p><p><br></p><p>When the pandemic hit in 2020, Jane’s one-off planner sales dropped off. After all, <strong>no one had anything to plan</strong>. So Jane created a subscription box to give her customers something to look forward to—and some much-needed structure in uncertain times.</p><p><br></p><p>Reaching 500 subscribers was a major turning point. Jane had to shift from small-scale planning to:</p><ul>
<li><strong>Ordering in bulk</strong></li>
<li><strong>Sourcing from overseas</strong></li>
<li><strong>Hiring help and defining roles</strong></li>
<li>
<strong>Creating systems</strong>—because “everyone doing everything” no longer worked</li>
</ul><p>Those changes laid the foundation for what came next.</p><p><br></p><p>The secret to Jane’s growth? <strong>Consistency and connection.</strong></p><p><br></p><p>Jane committed to going LIVE <strong>2–3 times a week</strong>, every week. Not just random LIVEs—she scheduled them in advance, gave each one a purpose, and showed up even when she felt nervous or unsure.</p><p><br></p><p>This consistent visibility:</p><ul>
<li>Built her <strong>know/like/trust factor</strong>
</li>
<li>Helped her audience get to know the <em>real</em> Jane</li>
<li>Made it easier for people to say <em>yes</em> when she opened the cart</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Jane also ran a <strong>KingSumo giveaway</strong>, following the step-by-step training inside <em>Launch Your Box</em>. The result?</p><ul>
<li><strong>1,000 new email subscribers</strong></li>
<li><strong>300 new paying subscribers</strong></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Giveaways aren’t just about free stuff. When done right, they build your list, generate excitement, and drive conversions.</p><p><br></p><p>Jane uses a <strong>closed-cart model</strong> and leans hard into:</p><ul>
<li><strong>Urgency</strong></li>
<li><strong>Scarcity</strong></li>
<li><strong>Exclusivity</strong></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>She keeps a waitlist and creates serious FOMO with high-value, wow-worthy products her audience <em>doesn’t</em> want to miss. And when her box hits its anniversary each September? She celebrates BIG—with a special edition box and a major sale in her online shop.</p><p><br></p><p>Jane’s success didn’t come without some hard lessons. She realized:</p><ul>
<li>She needed to <strong>hire ahead</strong> of growth</li>
<li>Her team needed <strong>clear roles and responsibilities</strong>
</li>
<li>Moving into a separate <strong>office space</strong> (away from the warehouse) helped her <strong>focus and lead more effectively</strong>
</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Now she’s building out SOPs, instituting team reviews, and cultivating a culture of <strong>"Why are we doing what we’re doing?"</strong> Oh—and she’s taking weekends off.</p><p><br></p><p>If you’re in that 300–500 subscriber range and feeling like you’re about to outgrow your systems, Jane has some advice:</p><ul>
<li>
<strong>Negotiate</strong>! Once you hit certain volume levels, use your buying power to get better pricing from vendors—including shipping.</li>
<li>
<strong>Look at your marketing</strong>. If people aren’t buying, it’s not always about the price. It might be the photos, the messaging, or how you’re communicating the value.</li>
<li>
<strong>Create content that connects</strong>. Show people why they need what you’re offering—and build the relationship that makes it easy to say yes.</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as I check in with a past guest whose subscription has grown from 500 to 1300 subscribers since our last interview. Find out what’s behind that growth and why canceling is “never about the money.”</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Listen to Jane’s first interview on </strong><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/one-change-doubled-their-subscription-income-ep-92"><strong>episode 92</strong></a><strong>.  </strong></p><p>Find and follow Jane: </p><ul>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/janesagenda">Jane’s Agenda on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/janesagenda/">Jane’s Agenda on Instagram</a></li>
<li><a href="https://janesagenda.com/">Jane’s Agenda’s Website</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.youtube.com/janesagenda">Jane’s Agenda on YouTube</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places:    </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1915</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c0764c52-088f-11f0-a1d2-23da695e6cbf]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1065120092.mp3?updated=1742807696" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Running a Giveaway to Build Your List</title>
      <description>Audience building should always be on your to-do list. Whether you already have a subscription box or you’re just getting started, consistently work to reach and engage new people. 
One audience building strategy I teach inside Launch Your Box is to run a giveaway on social media. I use a free, easy-to-use software called Kingsumo to run my giveaways a couple of times a year. My last giveaway added 1500 people to my email list!  
When you run a giveaway, follow four simple steps 
 

Determine your goal - why are you running a giveaway? 

To grow your following.

To build your email or text list.  

To gauge interest in your potential box. 

All of the above!

 

Determine your prize.

Your prize needs to be “worth it” - what would make you enter a contest? 

Consider offering a box or a 3-6 month subscription. 

 

Create your timeline.

Your giveaway should run for 7-14 days. 

Share, share, share!

Send an email to your list - remember, some of them may not follow you on social media yet. 

Social posts - videos, stories, etc. 

Keep talking about it throughout the 7-14 days to keep the excitement going. 


There are rules for running giveaways on social media. You need to be aware of these rules and follow them. 


The contest must be free to enter - it cannot be combined with a purchase. 

The winner must be chosen randomly. 

The winner must be announced publicly. 

You must state clearly (in posts and your contest rules) that your giveaway has no affiliation with the platform. 


Every week inside Launch Your Box, members are setting up and running giveaways. It’s one of the best things you can do to jump-start your audience building no matter where you are in your subscription box journey. 

Join me for this episode as I talk about why you should run a giveaway as part of your audience building strategy, the steps to follow to make it a success, and the important rules you need to follow! 

Important Links: 


 6 in 60 Workshop - Sarah’s Method for Curating 6 Subscription Boxes in 60 Minutes

Kingsumo


Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 19 Mar 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Running a Giveaway to Build Your List</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as I talk about why you should run a giveaway as part of your audience building strategy, the steps to follow to make it a success, and the important rules you need to follow! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Audience building should always be on your to-do list. Whether you already have a subscription box or you’re just getting started, consistently work to reach and engage new people. 
One audience building strategy I teach inside Launch Your Box is to run a giveaway on social media. I use a free, easy-to-use software called Kingsumo to run my giveaways a couple of times a year. My last giveaway added 1500 people to my email list!  
When you run a giveaway, follow four simple steps 
 

Determine your goal - why are you running a giveaway? 

To grow your following.

To build your email or text list.  

To gauge interest in your potential box. 

All of the above!

 

Determine your prize.

Your prize needs to be “worth it” - what would make you enter a contest? 

Consider offering a box or a 3-6 month subscription. 

 

Create your timeline.

Your giveaway should run for 7-14 days. 

Share, share, share!

Send an email to your list - remember, some of them may not follow you on social media yet. 

Social posts - videos, stories, etc. 

Keep talking about it throughout the 7-14 days to keep the excitement going. 


There are rules for running giveaways on social media. You need to be aware of these rules and follow them. 


The contest must be free to enter - it cannot be combined with a purchase. 

The winner must be chosen randomly. 

The winner must be announced publicly. 

You must state clearly (in posts and your contest rules) that your giveaway has no affiliation with the platform. 


Every week inside Launch Your Box, members are setting up and running giveaways. It’s one of the best things you can do to jump-start your audience building no matter where you are in your subscription box journey. 

Join me for this episode as I talk about why you should run a giveaway as part of your audience building strategy, the steps to follow to make it a success, and the important rules you need to follow! 

Important Links: 


 6 in 60 Workshop - Sarah’s Method for Curating 6 Subscription Boxes in 60 Minutes

Kingsumo


Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Audience building should always be on your to-do list. Whether you already have a subscription box or you’re just getting started, consistently work to reach and engage new people. </p><p>One audience building strategy I teach inside Launch Your Box is to run a giveaway on social media. I use a free, easy-to-use software called Kingsumo to run my giveaways a couple of times a year. My last giveaway added 1500 people to my email list!  </p><p>When you run a giveaway, follow four simple steps </p><p> </p><ul>
<li>Determine your goal - why are you running a giveaway? </li>
<li>To grow your following.</li>
<li>To build your email or text list.  </li>
<li>To gauge interest in your potential box. </li>
<li>All of the above!</li>
</ul><p> </p><ul>
<li>Determine your prize.</li>
<li>Your prize needs to be “worth it” - what would make you enter a contest? </li>
<li>Consider offering a box or a 3-6 month subscription. </li>
</ul><p> </p><ul>
<li>Create your timeline.</li>
<li>Your giveaway should run for 7-14 days. </li>
<li>Share, share, share!</li>
<li>Send an email to your list - remember, some of them may not follow you on social media yet. </li>
<li>Social posts - videos, stories, etc. </li>
<li>Keep talking about it throughout the 7-14 days to keep the excitement going. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>There are rules for running giveaways on social media. You need to be aware of these rules and follow them. </p><p><br></p><ul>
<li>The contest must be free to enter - it cannot be combined with a purchase. </li>
<li>The winner must be chosen randomly. </li>
<li>The winner must be announced publicly. </li>
<li>You must state clearly (in posts and your contest rules) that your giveaway has no affiliation with the platform. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Every week inside Launch Your Box, members are setting up and running giveaways. It’s one of the best things you can do to jump-start your audience building no matter where you are in your subscription box journey. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as I talk about why you should run a giveaway as part of your audience building strategy, the steps to follow to make it a success, and the important rules you need to follow! </p><p><br></p><p>Important Links: </p><ul>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e"> 6 in 60 Workshop</a> - Sarah’s Method for Curating 6 Subscription Boxes in 60 Minutes</li>
<li><a href="https://kingsumo.com/">Kingsumo</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1243</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[07f67364-03bc-11f0-b112-df6e485579bb]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5134579553.mp3?updated=1742276958" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>184: Hiring a Digital Marketing Assistant for Your Subscription Box Business</title>
      <description>As subscription box business owners, we wear all the hats—marketing, customer service, tech, fulfillment—you name it, we do it. But trying to do everything can hold you back from growing your business. That’s where hiring help–a Virtual Assistant (VA) or a Digital Marketing Assistant–comes in.

If you've been thinking about hiring help but aren’t sure where to start, this episode is for you!
I sat down with Emily Reagan, who specializes in training smart women to provide digital marketing services to online business owners. Inside her Digital Marketing Assistant School, Emily teaches the core marketing skills businesses need, from SEO and blogging to email marketing and funnels and so much more. She also runs the Digital Marketers Workgroup, where experienced freelancers continue honing their skills. Emily brings online business owners’ needs to her experienced freelance digital marketing assistants, often resulting in a match made in online business marketing heaven!
 
I turned to Emily to hire my first VA who is still on my team many years later and has grown far beyond her original VA title and role. 

What is a Digital Marketing Assistant?
You’ve probably heard the term Virtual Assistant (VA) before—it’s a general term for anyone working remotely to help a business. A Digital Marketing Assistant is a specialized VA who focuses specifically on marketing tasks that drive growth for online businesses.
A Digital Marketing Assistant can help with:

Email marketing

Social media management

Blogging &amp; SEO

Funnels &amp; automation

Affiliate marketing

Tech setup 


In short, they help you get more done in less time—so you can focus on growing your subscription box.

If you’re thinking: I’m not ready to hire someone yet, the truth is that by the time you feel ready, it’s already too late.

You don’t have to hire a full-time employee. Start small! My first VA worked just 10 hours a week, and she got SO much done in that time. These team members often work faster and take things off your plate—especially those tasks you keep putting off. (I’m looking at you, tech stuff!)
Instead of feeling overwhelmed and unproductive, focus on the things you love to do and those things that will move your business forward. And delegate the rest. 

Where do you even find a digital marketing assistant for your subscription box business? Emily makes it easy—just head to hireaunicorn.com and post a job. Up to 10 digital marketing assistants will reach out, and you can get on Zoom or Google Meets and have a conversation with the ones who seem to be the best fit.

Sarah’s tip: Personality matters. You want someone who’s not only skilled but also a great fit for you and your business.

Setting Your Digital Team Member Up for Success
Hiring a digital marketing assistant is just the first step—making it work is just as important. Give both of you the best chance of success by: :


Being clear about expectations 

Providing feedback


Vetting before hiring 


Onboarding properly 


Emily said it best: “No one successful does it alone.” And something I say inside Launch Your Box and Scale Your Box: Hire before you feel ready. Because if you wait until you finally feel ready, you’ll already be drowning in tasks that could have been delegated months ago. 

Find and follow Emily: 


Emily Reagan on Facebook 

Emily Reagan on Instagram

Emily Reagan’s Website

Emily Reagan’s Podcast

Hire from Emly’s Digital Workgroup


Join me in all the places:    

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Mar 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Hiring a Digital Marketing Assistant for Your Subscription Box Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>184</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, Emily Reagan shares why hiring a Digital Marketing Assistant can be a game-changer for your subscription box business. We talk about what a DMA does, how to find the right one, and how hiring help—even for just a few hours a week—can free you up to focus on growth.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>As subscription box business owners, we wear all the hats—marketing, customer service, tech, fulfillment—you name it, we do it. But trying to do everything can hold you back from growing your business. That’s where hiring help–a Virtual Assistant (VA) or a Digital Marketing Assistant–comes in.

If you've been thinking about hiring help but aren’t sure where to start, this episode is for you!
I sat down with Emily Reagan, who specializes in training smart women to provide digital marketing services to online business owners. Inside her Digital Marketing Assistant School, Emily teaches the core marketing skills businesses need, from SEO and blogging to email marketing and funnels and so much more. She also runs the Digital Marketers Workgroup, where experienced freelancers continue honing their skills. Emily brings online business owners’ needs to her experienced freelance digital marketing assistants, often resulting in a match made in online business marketing heaven!
 
I turned to Emily to hire my first VA who is still on my team many years later and has grown far beyond her original VA title and role. 

What is a Digital Marketing Assistant?
You’ve probably heard the term Virtual Assistant (VA) before—it’s a general term for anyone working remotely to help a business. A Digital Marketing Assistant is a specialized VA who focuses specifically on marketing tasks that drive growth for online businesses.
A Digital Marketing Assistant can help with:

Email marketing

Social media management

Blogging &amp; SEO

Funnels &amp; automation

Affiliate marketing

Tech setup 


In short, they help you get more done in less time—so you can focus on growing your subscription box.

If you’re thinking: I’m not ready to hire someone yet, the truth is that by the time you feel ready, it’s already too late.

You don’t have to hire a full-time employee. Start small! My first VA worked just 10 hours a week, and she got SO much done in that time. These team members often work faster and take things off your plate—especially those tasks you keep putting off. (I’m looking at you, tech stuff!)
Instead of feeling overwhelmed and unproductive, focus on the things you love to do and those things that will move your business forward. And delegate the rest. 

Where do you even find a digital marketing assistant for your subscription box business? Emily makes it easy—just head to hireaunicorn.com and post a job. Up to 10 digital marketing assistants will reach out, and you can get on Zoom or Google Meets and have a conversation with the ones who seem to be the best fit.

Sarah’s tip: Personality matters. You want someone who’s not only skilled but also a great fit for you and your business.

Setting Your Digital Team Member Up for Success
Hiring a digital marketing assistant is just the first step—making it work is just as important. Give both of you the best chance of success by: :


Being clear about expectations 

Providing feedback


Vetting before hiring 


Onboarding properly 


Emily said it best: “No one successful does it alone.” And something I say inside Launch Your Box and Scale Your Box: Hire before you feel ready. Because if you wait until you finally feel ready, you’ll already be drowning in tasks that could have been delegated months ago. 

Find and follow Emily: 


Emily Reagan on Facebook 

Emily Reagan on Instagram

Emily Reagan’s Website

Emily Reagan’s Podcast

Hire from Emly’s Digital Workgroup


Join me in all the places:    

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>As subscription box business owners, we wear all the hats—marketing, customer service, tech, fulfillment—you name it, we do it. But trying to do <em>everything</em> can hold you back from growing your business. That’s where hiring help–a Virtual Assistant (VA) or a <strong>Digital Marketing Assistant</strong>–comes in.</p><p><br></p><p>If you've been thinking about hiring help but aren’t sure where to start, this episode is for you!</p><p>I sat down with <strong>Emily Reagan</strong>, who specializes in training smart women to provide digital marketing services to online business owners. Inside her <strong>Digital Marketing Assistant School</strong>, Emily teaches the core marketing skills businesses need, from SEO and blogging to email marketing and funnels and so much more. She also runs the <strong>Digital Marketers Workgroup</strong>, where experienced freelancers continue honing their skills. Emily brings online business owners’ needs to her experienced freelance digital marketing assistants, often resulting in a match made in online business marketing heaven!</p><p> </p><p>I turned to Emily to hire my first VA who is still on my team many years later and has grown far beyond her original VA title and role. </p><p><br></p><h2>What is a Digital Marketing Assistant?</h2><p>You’ve probably heard the term <strong>Virtual Assistant (VA)</strong> before—it’s a general term for anyone working remotely to help a business. A <strong>Digital Marketing Assistant</strong> is a specialized VA who focuses specifically on marketing tasks that drive growth for online businesses.</p><p>A Digital Marketing Assistant can help with:</p><ul>
<li>Email marketing</li>
<li>Social media management</li>
<li>Blogging &amp; SEO</li>
<li>Funnels &amp; automation</li>
<li>Affiliate marketing</li>
<li>Tech setup </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>In short, they help you get <em>more</em> done in less time—so you can focus on growing your subscription box.</p><h2><br></h2><p>If you’re thinking: <em>I’m not ready to hire someone yet, </em>the truth is that <strong>by the time you feel ready, it’s already too late.</strong></p><p><br></p><p>You don’t have to hire a full-time employee. Start small! My first VA worked just <strong>10 hours a week</strong>, and she got SO much done in that time. These team members often work faster and take things off your plate—especially those tasks you keep putting off. (<em>I’m looking at you, tech stuff!</em>)</p><p>Instead of feeling overwhelmed and unproductive, focus on the things you love to do and those things that will move your business forward. And delegate the rest. </p><p><br></p><p>Where do you even find a digital marketing assistant for your subscription box business? Emily makes it easy—just head to<a href="https://hireaunicorn.com/"> </a><a href="https://hireaunicorn.com/"><strong>hireaunicorn.com</strong></a> and post a job. Up to <strong>10 digital marketing assistants</strong> will reach out, and you can get on Zoom or Google Meets and have a conversation with the ones who seem to be the best fit.</p><p><br></p><p><strong><em>Sarah’s tip:</em></strong><em> Personality matters. You want someone who’s not only skilled but also a great fit for you and your business.</em></p><p><br></p><h3>Setting Your Digital Team Member Up for Success</h3><p>Hiring a digital marketing assistant is just the first step—making it <em>work</em> is just as important. Give both of you the best chance of success by: :</p><ol>
<li>
<strong>Being clear about expectations</strong> </li>
<li><strong>Providing feedback</strong></li>
<li>
<strong>Vetting before hiring</strong> </li>
<li>
<strong>Onboarding properly</strong> </li>
</ol><p><br></p><p>Emily said it best: <strong>“No one successful does it alone.” </strong>And something I say inside Launch Your Box and Scale Your Box: <strong>Hire before you feel ready.</strong> Because if you wait until you finally <em>feel</em> ready, you’ll already be drowning in tasks that could have been delegated months ago. </p><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Emily: </p><ul>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/emilyreaganpr">Emily Reagan on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/emilyreaganpr/">Emily Reagan on Instagram</a></li>
<li><a href="https://emilyreaganpr.com/">Emily Reagan’s Website</a></li>
<li><a href="https://emilyreaganpr.com/podcast/">Emily Reagan’s Podcast</a></li>
<li><a href="https://emilyreaganpr.com/virtual-assistant/">Hire from Emly’s Digital Workgroup</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places:    </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2214</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[976b473e-fe50-11ef-834d-07a29332e180]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5507695647.mp3?updated=1741681057" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Bounced Payments &amp; Personal Follow-Up</title>
      <description>Are you relying solely on automations to recover failed payments? If so, you are losing money and experiencing unnecessary churn in your subscription box business. Business is personal. Recovering failed payments needs more than just automation - it needs a personal touch. Your personal touch. 

Think about how much time, energy, and money you spend getting new subscribers. How much time and energy are you willing to spend to keep them? In my subscription business, we use a combination of automations and personal outreach to follow up on failed payments. The result? Each month we recoup 98% of our bounced payments. 

Keep in mind, most failed payments are not due to subscribers wanting to cancel or intentionally not paying. Credit cards expire and need to be updated. Other things happen that unintentionally cause payments to fail. Assume subscribers want to stay with you and just need help updating their info. 

Every subscription box business should have a failed payment automation set up. You can do this directly in your subscription platform or CRM. The goal is to recover as many payments as possible through automation, reducing the time spent manually recouping payments via personal outreach. 
The automation process we use in my subscription box business is set up like this: 

Payment Run #1 - failed payment 

Email #1 sent - something like “There was an error processing your payment for XXX subscription. If you need to update your card, please do so at this link. Your payment will run again in 12 hours.” 

We aren’t accusing them of anything. We blame the error on ourselves and direct them to update the payment if they need to. 

We create urgency by letting them know the payment will run again in 12 hours. 

Payment Run #2 - failed payment 

Email #2 is very similar to Email #1 - they may not have seen the first email yet. 

Payment will retry in 24 hours. 

Payment #3 - failed payment 

Email #3 - 36 hours after initial payment has run. They’ve likely seen one of the first two emails. 

The first two emails are text only, this email includes an image. 

“Hi Subscriber. We are busy personalizing and packing all our subscriptions and want to make sure you get yours on time. If you need to update your card, please do so at this link. If you need help with that or have an issue, please hit reply and let us know how we can help.”

This email includes a picture of the team packing a box. 

Payment runs again in 48 hours - they have time to reach out to customer service before the payment runs again. 


At this point, we start working through the list of remaining failed payments with personal touch points. 

Personal email 

Personal text 


Now we’re ready to run one last automation. 

Email #4 - on day five of failed payment 

Last chance email “Boxes are shipping and we want to make sure you get a Monogram Box this month. Please let me know how I can help.” 


We follow this plan every month. And every month, we recoup 98% of our failed payments. 

Business is personal. Don’t forget the importance of a personal connection point when working to retain your customers. Business is also business. Don’t leave money on the table. Following up on bounced payments reduces involuntary churn and retains more recurring revenue. 

Join me for this episode as I talk you through the automations combined with personal touches process I use to recoup 98% of bounced payments every month.  

Important Links: 
6 in 60 Workshop 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join Launch Your Box today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 05 Mar 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Bounced Payments &amp; Personal Follow-Up</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as I talk you through the automations combined with personal touches process I use to recoup 98% of bounced payments every month.  </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Are you relying solely on automations to recover failed payments? If so, you are losing money and experiencing unnecessary churn in your subscription box business. Business is personal. Recovering failed payments needs more than just automation - it needs a personal touch. Your personal touch. 

Think about how much time, energy, and money you spend getting new subscribers. How much time and energy are you willing to spend to keep them? In my subscription business, we use a combination of automations and personal outreach to follow up on failed payments. The result? Each month we recoup 98% of our bounced payments. 

Keep in mind, most failed payments are not due to subscribers wanting to cancel or intentionally not paying. Credit cards expire and need to be updated. Other things happen that unintentionally cause payments to fail. Assume subscribers want to stay with you and just need help updating their info. 

Every subscription box business should have a failed payment automation set up. You can do this directly in your subscription platform or CRM. The goal is to recover as many payments as possible through automation, reducing the time spent manually recouping payments via personal outreach. 
The automation process we use in my subscription box business is set up like this: 

Payment Run #1 - failed payment 

Email #1 sent - something like “There was an error processing your payment for XXX subscription. If you need to update your card, please do so at this link. Your payment will run again in 12 hours.” 

We aren’t accusing them of anything. We blame the error on ourselves and direct them to update the payment if they need to. 

We create urgency by letting them know the payment will run again in 12 hours. 

Payment Run #2 - failed payment 

Email #2 is very similar to Email #1 - they may not have seen the first email yet. 

Payment will retry in 24 hours. 

Payment #3 - failed payment 

Email #3 - 36 hours after initial payment has run. They’ve likely seen one of the first two emails. 

The first two emails are text only, this email includes an image. 

“Hi Subscriber. We are busy personalizing and packing all our subscriptions and want to make sure you get yours on time. If you need to update your card, please do so at this link. If you need help with that or have an issue, please hit reply and let us know how we can help.”

This email includes a picture of the team packing a box. 

Payment runs again in 48 hours - they have time to reach out to customer service before the payment runs again. 


At this point, we start working through the list of remaining failed payments with personal touch points. 

Personal email 

Personal text 


Now we’re ready to run one last automation. 

Email #4 - on day five of failed payment 

Last chance email “Boxes are shipping and we want to make sure you get a Monogram Box this month. Please let me know how I can help.” 


We follow this plan every month. And every month, we recoup 98% of our failed payments. 

Business is personal. Don’t forget the importance of a personal connection point when working to retain your customers. Business is also business. Don’t leave money on the table. Following up on bounced payments reduces involuntary churn and retains more recurring revenue. 

Join me for this episode as I talk you through the automations combined with personal touches process I use to recoup 98% of bounced payments every month.  

Important Links: 
6 in 60 Workshop 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join Launch Your Box today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are you relying solely on automations to recover failed payments? If so, you are losing money and experiencing unnecessary churn in your subscription box business. Business is personal. Recovering failed payments needs more than just automation - it needs a personal touch. Your personal touch. </p><p><br></p><p>Think about how much time, energy, and money you spend getting new subscribers. How much time and energy are you willing to spend to keep them? In my subscription business, we use a combination of automations and personal outreach to follow up on failed payments. The result? Each month we recoup 98% of our bounced payments. </p><p><br></p><p>Keep in mind, most failed payments are not due to subscribers wanting to cancel or intentionally not paying. Credit cards expire and need to be updated. Other things happen that unintentionally cause payments to fail. Assume subscribers want to stay with you and just need help updating their info. </p><p><br></p><p>Every subscription box business should have a failed payment automation set up. You can do this directly in your subscription platform or CRM. The goal is to recover as many payments as possible through automation, reducing the time spent manually recouping payments via personal outreach. </p><p>The automation process we use in my subscription box business is set up like this: </p><ul>
<li>Payment Run #1 - failed payment </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Email #1 sent - something like “There was an error processing your payment for XXX subscription. If you need to update your card, please do so at this link. Your payment will run again in 12 hours.” </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">We aren’t accusing them of anything. We blame the error on ourselves and direct them to update the payment if they need to. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">We create urgency by letting them know the payment will run again in 12 hours. </li>
<li>Payment Run #2 - failed payment </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Email #2 is very similar to Email #1 - they may not have seen the first email yet. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Payment will retry in 24 hours. </li>
<li>Payment #3 - failed payment </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Email #3 - 36 hours after initial payment has run. They’ve likely seen one of the first two emails. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">The first two emails are text only, this email includes an image. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">“Hi Subscriber. We are busy personalizing and packing all our subscriptions and want to make sure you get yours on time. If you need to update your card, please do so at this link. If you need help with that or have an issue, please hit reply and let us know how we can help.”</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">This email includes a picture of the team packing a box. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Payment runs again in 48 hours - they have time to reach out to customer service before the payment runs again. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>At this point, we start working through the list of remaining failed payments with personal touch points. </p><ul>
<li>Personal email </li>
<li>Personal text </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Now we’re ready to run one last automation. </p><ul>
<li>Email #4 - on day five of failed payment </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Last chance email “Boxes are shipping and we want to make sure you get a Monogram Box this month. Please let me know how I can help.” </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>We follow this plan every month. And every month, we recoup 98% of our failed payments. </p><p><br></p><p>Business is personal. Don’t forget the importance of a personal connection point when working to retain your customers. Business is also business. Don’t leave money on the table. Following up on bounced payments reduces involuntary churn and retains more recurring revenue. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as I talk you through the automations combined with personal touches process I use to recoup 98% of bounced payments every month.  </p><p><br></p><p>Important Links: </p><ul><li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e">6 in 60 Workshop </a></li></ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join Launch Your Box</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1050</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e3200cbe-f8c9-11ef-9173-efd603a53274]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3787696631.mp3?updated=1741073446" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>183: Stu McLaren Reveals the Messaging Shift That Will Transform Your Sales</title>
      <description>When I first started my subscription box, I thought I was selling cute products.  I didn’t realize my audience wasn’t just buying things—they were buying transformation. They wanted to feel confident, stylish, and put-together, but my messaging wasn’t reflecting that. 

Making that shift—from selling products to selling a feeling—was one of the biggest game-changers in my business. And it can be the biggest game changer in your business, too. 
The person who helped me understand the need for this shift in messaging was my very special guest on this episode, my mentor Stu McLaren.

Stu McLaren is the go-to expert when it comes to creating and scaling profitable memberships. For the past 17 years, he’s helped business owners build recurring revenue models that provide stability, growth, and freedom–hello, recurring revenue! And now, he’s packed his best insights into a brand-new book, Predictable Profits. 

Before I took Stu’s course in 2018, I had about 300 subscribers in my subscription box business. I had hit a plateau and didn’t know how to break through it. Stu’s course showed me the biggest reason for my plateau. I was focusing on selling instead of serving.

People don’t subscribe to a box because of what’s inside. They buy it because of how it makes them feel. My audience wanted to feel stylish, confident, and put together without spending hours shopping or second-guessing their outfits. Once I shifted my messaging to reflect that transformation, my business took off.

How to Shift Your Messaging to Serve Instead of Sell
Want to make this shift in your own business? Here are three key takeaways from my conversation with Stu:
1. Understand Your Customer’s Journey
Instead of just thinking about what’s inside your subscription box, think about how it impacts your customer’s life. Ask yourself: What problem are you solving? What feeling are you creating?
2. Speak to Their “Before and After”
Stu shared a simple but powerful exercise. I did it with him and want you to do it, too. 
Draw a line down the middle of a piece of paper. On one side, write down all the frustrations and struggles your customers feel before they purchase. On the other side, write down how they feel after they’ve experienced your subscription box. Your messaging needs to focus on bridging that gap.
3. Focus on Transformation, Not Just Features
My customers don’t just want earrings, bags, or t-shirts—they want confidence, ease, and style. What does your audience want? Your messaging should highlight the outcome, not just the product itself.

I went from 300 subscribers to 750 in my next launch. And over time, I’ve built a seven-figure subscription business that gives me the stability and confidence to scale even further.

With predictable, stable income coming in each month, you can make smarter business decisions, invest in growth, and stop feeling like you’re constantly chasing sales. Recurring revenue is business and life-changing! 

And that’s why Stu’s book Predictable Profits is such an amazing resource—it walks you through exactly how to build and scale a business that runs with you, not just because of you.

If you’re ready to learn more from Stu, go grab your copy of Predictable Profits by Stu McLaren. You can find it at all major retailers, or head to Stu.me/book for links to order.

I’d love to hear your biggest takeaway from this episode! Screenshot it, share it on Instagram, and tag me @launchyourbox. And if you’re loving the podcast, hit subscribe and leave a review—it helps more subscription box business owners find us.


Find and follow Stu: 

Stu McLaren on Facebook 

Stu McLaren on Instagram

Stu McLaren Website


Join me in all the places:    

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 26 Feb 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Stu McLaren Reveals the Messaging Shift That Will Transform Your Sales</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>183</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, Stu and I dive deep into the power of messaging, the mindset shift that changed everything for me, and how you can apply the same principles to your own business.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>When I first started my subscription box, I thought I was selling cute products.  I didn’t realize my audience wasn’t just buying things—they were buying transformation. They wanted to feel confident, stylish, and put-together, but my messaging wasn’t reflecting that. 

Making that shift—from selling products to selling a feeling—was one of the biggest game-changers in my business. And it can be the biggest game changer in your business, too. 
The person who helped me understand the need for this shift in messaging was my very special guest on this episode, my mentor Stu McLaren.

Stu McLaren is the go-to expert when it comes to creating and scaling profitable memberships. For the past 17 years, he’s helped business owners build recurring revenue models that provide stability, growth, and freedom–hello, recurring revenue! And now, he’s packed his best insights into a brand-new book, Predictable Profits. 

Before I took Stu’s course in 2018, I had about 300 subscribers in my subscription box business. I had hit a plateau and didn’t know how to break through it. Stu’s course showed me the biggest reason for my plateau. I was focusing on selling instead of serving.

People don’t subscribe to a box because of what’s inside. They buy it because of how it makes them feel. My audience wanted to feel stylish, confident, and put together without spending hours shopping or second-guessing their outfits. Once I shifted my messaging to reflect that transformation, my business took off.

How to Shift Your Messaging to Serve Instead of Sell
Want to make this shift in your own business? Here are three key takeaways from my conversation with Stu:
1. Understand Your Customer’s Journey
Instead of just thinking about what’s inside your subscription box, think about how it impacts your customer’s life. Ask yourself: What problem are you solving? What feeling are you creating?
2. Speak to Their “Before and After”
Stu shared a simple but powerful exercise. I did it with him and want you to do it, too. 
Draw a line down the middle of a piece of paper. On one side, write down all the frustrations and struggles your customers feel before they purchase. On the other side, write down how they feel after they’ve experienced your subscription box. Your messaging needs to focus on bridging that gap.
3. Focus on Transformation, Not Just Features
My customers don’t just want earrings, bags, or t-shirts—they want confidence, ease, and style. What does your audience want? Your messaging should highlight the outcome, not just the product itself.

I went from 300 subscribers to 750 in my next launch. And over time, I’ve built a seven-figure subscription business that gives me the stability and confidence to scale even further.

With predictable, stable income coming in each month, you can make smarter business decisions, invest in growth, and stop feeling like you’re constantly chasing sales. Recurring revenue is business and life-changing! 

And that’s why Stu’s book Predictable Profits is such an amazing resource—it walks you through exactly how to build and scale a business that runs with you, not just because of you.

If you’re ready to learn more from Stu, go grab your copy of Predictable Profits by Stu McLaren. You can find it at all major retailers, or head to Stu.me/book for links to order.

I’d love to hear your biggest takeaway from this episode! Screenshot it, share it on Instagram, and tag me @launchyourbox. And if you’re loving the podcast, hit subscribe and leave a review—it helps more subscription box business owners find us.


Find and follow Stu: 

Stu McLaren on Facebook 

Stu McLaren on Instagram

Stu McLaren Website


Join me in all the places:    

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>When I first started my subscription box, I thought I was selling cute products.  I didn’t realize my audience wasn’t just buying <em>things</em>—they were buying <em>transformation</em>. They wanted to feel confident, stylish, and put-together, but my messaging wasn’t reflecting that. </p><p><br></p><p>Making that shift—from selling products to selling a feeling—was one of the biggest game-changers in my business. And it can be the biggest game changer in your business, too. </p><p>The person who helped me understand the need for this shift in messaging was my <em>very special </em>guest on this episode, my mentor Stu McLaren.</p><p><br></p><p>Stu McLaren is <em>the</em> go-to expert when it comes to creating and scaling profitable memberships. For the past 17 years, he’s helped business owners build recurring revenue models that provide stability, growth, and freedom–hello, recurring revenue! And now, he’s packed his best insights into a brand-new book, <em>Predictable Profits. </em></p><p><br></p><p>Before I took Stu’s course in 2018, I had about 300 subscribers in my subscription box business. I had hit a plateau and didn’t know how to break through it. Stu’s course showed me the biggest reason for my plateau. I was focusing on <em>selling</em> instead of <em>serving</em>.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>People don’t subscribe to a box because of what’s inside. They buy it because of how it makes them feel.</strong> My audience wanted to feel stylish, confident, and put together without spending hours shopping or second-guessing their outfits. <strong>Once I shifted my messaging to reflect that transformation, my business took off.</strong></p><p><br></p><h2>How to Shift Your Messaging to Serve Instead of Sell</h2><p>Want to make this shift in your own business? Here are three key takeaways from my conversation with Stu:</p><h3>1. Understand Your Customer’s Journey</h3><p>Instead of just thinking about what’s <em>inside</em> your subscription box, think about how it impacts your customer’s life. Ask yourself: <strong>What problem are you solving? What feeling are you creating?</strong></p><h3>2. Speak to Their “Before and After”</h3><p>Stu shared a simple but powerful exercise. I did it with him and want you to do it, too. </p><p>Draw a line down the middle of a piece of paper. On one side, write down all the frustrations and struggles your customers feel <em>before</em> they purchase. On the other side, write down how they feel <em>after</em> they’ve experienced your subscription box. <strong>Your messaging needs to focus on bridging that gap.</strong></p><h3>3. Focus on Transformation, Not Just Features</h3><p>My customers don’t just want earrings, bags, or t-shirts—they want confidence, ease, and style. What does <em>your</em> audience want? <strong>Your messaging should highlight the outcome, not just the product itself.</strong></p><p><br></p><p>I went from 300 subscribers to 750 in my next launch. And over time, I’ve built a seven-figure subscription business that gives me the stability and confidence to scale even further.</p><p><br></p><p>With predictable, stable income coming in each month, you can make smarter business decisions, invest in growth, and stop feeling like you’re constantly chasing sales. Recurring revenue is business and life-changing! </p><p><br></p><p>And that’s why Stu’s book <em>Predictable Profits</em> is such an amazing resource—it walks you through exactly how to build and scale a business that runs <em>with</em> you, not just <em>because</em> of you.</p><p><br></p><p>If you’re ready to learn more from Stu, go grab your copy of <em>Predictable Profits</em> by Stu McLaren. You can find it at all major retailers, or head to<a href="https://stu.me/book"> </a><a href="https://stu.me/book">Stu.me/book</a> for links to order.</p><p><br></p><p>I’d love to hear your biggest takeaway from this episode! Screenshot it, share it on Instagram, and tag me<a href="https://www.instagram.com/launchyourbox"> </a><a href="https://www.instagram.com/launchyourbox">@launchyourbox</a>. And if you’re loving the podcast, hit subscribe and leave a review—it helps more subscription box business owners find us.</p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Stu: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/myideaguy">Stu McLaren on Facebook </a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/stumclaren/">Stu McLaren on Instagram</a></li>
<li><a href="https://stu.me/">Stu McLaren Website</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places:    </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2099</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e98edbb0-f262-11ef-bd97-575a31aee596]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2893467655.mp3?updated=1740369512" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>5 Ways to Increase Perceived Value in Your Subscription Box without Blowing Your Budget</title>
      <description>Is your subscription box missing something that would increase its value in the eyes of your subscribers? Maybe things are feeling a little monotonous or routine. Or maybe some months you feel like you need “a little something extra” to make your subscription box feel like the complete experience you want it to be. But, how can you add value without blowing your budget? Remember, you need to stay profitable to stay in business. 

In today’s episode, we’re talking about increasing the perceived value of your box. Perceived value is simply a subscriber’s perception of the merit or desirability of a product. There are five things you can do to increase the perceived value of your subscription box for little or no cost. 


Customization

Style - i.e, home decor - farmhouse or modern.

Size - i.e., clothing or wearables.

Type - i.e., breed of dog. 

Teachers - i.e., grade level or type of school. 

YOU - Your Personal Connection

Remember, being “ME” is free marketing.

Include a handwritten note. 

Put a birthday card in their box the month of their birthday. 

Surprise &amp; Delight - include a gift in the box periodically (not every month)

Coupon to your store or “bonus bucks.” 

The “Golden Ticket” - a special gift included in only select boxes. 

Anniversary gifts - on the anniversary of them becoming a subscriber. 

Early bird bonuses during launches.

Exclusive Content or Collectibles

First access. 

Digital bonuses. 

Tutorial or training access. 

Exclusive meet-ups. 

Zoom parties. 

Bundle Items

One thing by itself can seem too small, but bundle two or three of an item and tie a ribbon around it or put it in an organza bag to make it look special. 

Hair clips

Chapstick

Sticker sheets

Dog treats 

Join me for this episode as I talk about five ways you can increase the perceived value of your subscription box and stay within your budget. 
Important Links: 
6 in 60 Workshop 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 19 Feb 2025 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>5 Ways to Increase Perceived Value in Your Subscription Box without Blowing Your Budget</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In today’s episode, we’re talking about increasing the perceived value of your box. Perceived value is simply a subscriber’s perception of the merit or desirability of a product. There are five things you can do to increase the perceived value of your subscription box for little or no cost. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Is your subscription box missing something that would increase its value in the eyes of your subscribers? Maybe things are feeling a little monotonous or routine. Or maybe some months you feel like you need “a little something extra” to make your subscription box feel like the complete experience you want it to be. But, how can you add value without blowing your budget? Remember, you need to stay profitable to stay in business. 

In today’s episode, we’re talking about increasing the perceived value of your box. Perceived value is simply a subscriber’s perception of the merit or desirability of a product. There are five things you can do to increase the perceived value of your subscription box for little or no cost. 


Customization

Style - i.e, home decor - farmhouse or modern.

Size - i.e., clothing or wearables.

Type - i.e., breed of dog. 

Teachers - i.e., grade level or type of school. 

YOU - Your Personal Connection

Remember, being “ME” is free marketing.

Include a handwritten note. 

Put a birthday card in their box the month of their birthday. 

Surprise &amp; Delight - include a gift in the box periodically (not every month)

Coupon to your store or “bonus bucks.” 

The “Golden Ticket” - a special gift included in only select boxes. 

Anniversary gifts - on the anniversary of them becoming a subscriber. 

Early bird bonuses during launches.

Exclusive Content or Collectibles

First access. 

Digital bonuses. 

Tutorial or training access. 

Exclusive meet-ups. 

Zoom parties. 

Bundle Items

One thing by itself can seem too small, but bundle two or three of an item and tie a ribbon around it or put it in an organza bag to make it look special. 

Hair clips

Chapstick

Sticker sheets

Dog treats 

Join me for this episode as I talk about five ways you can increase the perceived value of your subscription box and stay within your budget. 
Important Links: 
6 in 60 Workshop 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Is your subscription box missing something that would increase its value in the eyes of your subscribers? Maybe things are feeling a little monotonous or routine. Or maybe some months you feel like you need “a little something extra” to make your subscription box feel like the complete experience you want it to be. But, how can you add value without blowing your budget? Remember, you need to stay profitable to stay in business. </p><p><br></p><p>In today’s episode, we’re talking about increasing the perceived value of your box. Perceived value is simply a subscriber’s perception of the merit or desirability of a product. There are five things you can do to increase the perceived value of your subscription box for little or no cost. </p><p><br></p><ul>
<li>Customization</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Style - i.e, home decor - farmhouse or modern.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Size - i.e., clothing or wearables.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Type - i.e., breed of dog. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Teachers - i.e., grade level or type of school. </li>
<li>YOU - Your Personal Connection</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Remember, being “ME” is free marketing.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Include a handwritten note. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Put a birthday card in their box the month of their birthday. </li>
<li>Surprise &amp; Delight - include a gift in the box periodically (not every month)</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Coupon to your store or “bonus bucks.” </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">The “Golden Ticket” - a special gift included in only select boxes. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Anniversary gifts - on the anniversary of them becoming a subscriber. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Early bird bonuses during launches.</li>
<li>Exclusive Content or Collectibles</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">First access. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Digital bonuses. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Tutorial or training access. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Exclusive meet-ups. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Zoom parties. </li>
<li>Bundle Items</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">One thing by itself can seem too small, but bundle two or three of an item and tie a ribbon around it or put it in an organza bag to make it look special. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Hair clips</li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Chapstick</li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Sticker sheets</li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Dog treats </li>
</ul><p>Join me for this episode as I talk about five ways you can increase the perceived value of your subscription box <em>and</em> stay within your budget. </p><p>Important Links: </p><ul><li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e">6 in 60 Workshop </a></li></ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1978</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1dc68aee-ece7-11ef-ab3a-7b2ab551660e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4806666385.mp3?updated=1739766586" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>182: From 118 to 1800 Subscribers: 2-Year Update From B. Goods Lettering </title>
      <description>Betsy Goodman of B Goods Lettering is back on the podcast, and wow—what a difference two years makes! When I last interviewed Betsy in October 2022 on episode 93, she had 118 subscribers to her Lettering Box and was using Instagram brilliantly to grow her audience. Fast forward to today, and she’s running two thriving physical subscription boxes, a digital membership, and has grown her subscriber base to 1800! 

In this episode, Betsy shares the incredible journey of scaling her business, the lessons she learned along the way, and the strategies that helped her reach her goal of quitting her full-time job.

Finding a niche that thrives 
Betsy serves a very specific audience: people passionate about hand lettering and wax seals. By focusing on what they love, she’s created products they can’t wait to subscribe to.
The power of audience polling

Betsy didn’t just guess what her audience wanted next; she asked them! That’s how she discovered her followers were eager for a Wax Seal subscription.

Launching a second subscription successfully
Betsy took what she learned inside Launch Your Box and started The Wax Seal Club with 50 subscribers. Today, it has 1,200 subscribers!

Balancing physical &amp; digital offers 
Inspired by an episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast featuring my Mastermind members who hit $1M in annual revenue, Betsy realized she needed monthly recurring revenue to stabilize her income. That led to the launch of her digital membership, The Script &amp; Seal Society, where Betsy teaches exclusive hand lettering and wax seal projects LIVE three times a month.

Overcoming the challenges of growth
From fulfilling boxes out of her basement to hiring help and managing product delays, Betsy shares what it’s really like to scale a subscription business.

Hitting major milestones
Betsy recently quit her full-time job and is now focusing on growing her business even further—with a goal to move out of her basement and into a dedicated space in 2025!

Betsy’s Best Advice for Subscription Box Owners:
Think about your customer first. What else would help them? What else do they need?
Ask your audience! They’ll tell you exactly what they want—if you’re willing to listen.

Be willing to try something new. Don’t be afraid to try and don’t give up!

Betsy’s story is proof that when you take action, listen to your audience, and stay consistent, serious growth is possible. If you’re thinking about adding another revenue stream to your business—whether it’s a second subscription, a digital membership, or something else entirely—you won’t want to miss this episode!


Find and follow Betsy: 


B. Goods Lettering on Facebook 

B. Goods Lettering on Instagram

B. Goods Lettering Website


Join me in all the places:    

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Feb 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From 118 to 1800 Subscribers: 2-Year Update From B. Goods Lettering </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>182</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Have you considered adding another recurring revenue stream to your subscription box business? What if I told you your second box may grow faster than your first! Betsy’s did. And that’s not all. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Betsy Goodman of B Goods Lettering is back on the podcast, and wow—what a difference two years makes! When I last interviewed Betsy in October 2022 on episode 93, she had 118 subscribers to her Lettering Box and was using Instagram brilliantly to grow her audience. Fast forward to today, and she’s running two thriving physical subscription boxes, a digital membership, and has grown her subscriber base to 1800! 

In this episode, Betsy shares the incredible journey of scaling her business, the lessons she learned along the way, and the strategies that helped her reach her goal of quitting her full-time job.

Finding a niche that thrives 
Betsy serves a very specific audience: people passionate about hand lettering and wax seals. By focusing on what they love, she’s created products they can’t wait to subscribe to.
The power of audience polling

Betsy didn’t just guess what her audience wanted next; she asked them! That’s how she discovered her followers were eager for a Wax Seal subscription.

Launching a second subscription successfully
Betsy took what she learned inside Launch Your Box and started The Wax Seal Club with 50 subscribers. Today, it has 1,200 subscribers!

Balancing physical &amp; digital offers 
Inspired by an episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast featuring my Mastermind members who hit $1M in annual revenue, Betsy realized she needed monthly recurring revenue to stabilize her income. That led to the launch of her digital membership, The Script &amp; Seal Society, where Betsy teaches exclusive hand lettering and wax seal projects LIVE three times a month.

Overcoming the challenges of growth
From fulfilling boxes out of her basement to hiring help and managing product delays, Betsy shares what it’s really like to scale a subscription business.

Hitting major milestones
Betsy recently quit her full-time job and is now focusing on growing her business even further—with a goal to move out of her basement and into a dedicated space in 2025!

Betsy’s Best Advice for Subscription Box Owners:
Think about your customer first. What else would help them? What else do they need?
Ask your audience! They’ll tell you exactly what they want—if you’re willing to listen.

Be willing to try something new. Don’t be afraid to try and don’t give up!

Betsy’s story is proof that when you take action, listen to your audience, and stay consistent, serious growth is possible. If you’re thinking about adding another revenue stream to your business—whether it’s a second subscription, a digital membership, or something else entirely—you won’t want to miss this episode!


Find and follow Betsy: 


B. Goods Lettering on Facebook 

B. Goods Lettering on Instagram

B. Goods Lettering Website


Join me in all the places:    

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Betsy Goodman of B Goods Lettering is back on the podcast, and <em>wow</em>—what a difference two years makes! When I last interviewed Betsy in October 2022 on episode 93, she had 118 subscribers to her <em>Lettering Box</em> and was using Instagram brilliantly to grow her audience. Fast forward to today, and she’s running <strong>two thriving physical subscription boxes, a digital membership, and has grown her subscriber base to 1800! </strong></p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, Betsy shares the incredible journey of scaling her business, the lessons she learned along the way, and the strategies that helped her reach her goal of quitting her full-time job.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Finding a niche that thrives </strong></p><p>Betsy serves a very specific audience: people passionate about hand lettering and wax seals. By focusing on what they love, she’s created products they can’t wait to subscribe to.</p><p>The power of audience polling</p><p><br></p><p>Betsy didn’t just guess what her audience wanted next; she asked them! That’s how she discovered her followers were eager for a Wax Seal subscription.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Launching a second subscription successfully</strong></p><p>Betsy took what she learned inside Launch Your Box and started The Wax Seal Club with 50 subscribers. Today, it has 1,200 subscribers!</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Balancing physical &amp; digital offers </strong></p><p>Inspired by an episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast featuring my Mastermind members who hit $1M in annual revenue, Betsy realized she needed monthly recurring revenue to stabilize her income. That led to the launch of her digital membership, The Script &amp; Seal Society, where Betsy teaches exclusive hand lettering and wax seal projects LIVE three times a month.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Overcoming the challenges of growth</strong></p><p>From fulfilling boxes out of her basement to hiring help and managing product delays, Betsy shares what it’s really like to scale a subscription business.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Hitting major milestones</strong></p><p>Betsy recently quit her full-time job and is now focusing on growing her business even further—with a goal to move out of her basement and into a dedicated space in 2025!</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Betsy’s Best Advice for Subscription Box Owners:</strong></p><p>Think about your customer first. What else would help them? What else do they need?</p><p>Ask your audience! They’ll tell you exactly what they want—if you’re willing to listen.</p><p><br></p><p>Be willing to try something new. Don’t be afraid to try and don’t give up!</p><p><br></p><p>Betsy’s story is proof that when you take action, listen to your audience, and stay consistent, serious growth is possible. If you’re thinking about adding another revenue stream to your business—whether it’s a second subscription, a digital membership, or something else entirely—you won’t want to miss this episode!</p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Betsy: </p><ul>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/bgoods.lettering">B. Goods Lettering on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/bgoods.lettering/">B. Goods Lettering on Instagram</a></li>
<li><a href="https://bgoodslettering.com/pages/b-goods-links?fbclid=IwY2xjawITLsFleHRuA2FlbQIxMAABHaUOZ7Zo9XjAWKyLpmKdkEszrTbJ1FPcAX433gnv8Q1h4nic76-IXHWWiA_aem_IRq1AAJLXXTGq86jjFQEiQ">B. Goods Lettering Website</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places:    </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2118</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e34b5742-e777-11ef-a1dd-c3bd6aa0e1b8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1641131953.mp3?updated=1739169058" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>181: Scaling Your Subscription Box: The Path to True Growth</title>
      <description>Scaling your subscription box business isn’t just about making more money—it’s about building a business that works for you, instead of you working for it.

Are you stuck in the day-to-day grind, feeling like growth is just out of reach, or afraid that scaling will be overwhelming (or expensive!)? Then this episode is for you.

When I first launched my subscription box, my goal was 100 subscribers. That felt HUGE. I never imagined I’d be where I am today—packing thousands of boxes every month. 

But if you don’t plan for growth, you’ll eventually hit a ceiling. I learned this the hard way. At one point, I was packing boxes 10 hours a day, running two embroidery machines nonstop, and trying to juggle everything myself. That wasn’t sustainable. The business had grown, but I hadn’t scaled—yet.

Scaling is about more than just more subscribers and more revenue. It’s creating systems and processes that allow you to grow without burning out. 

Growth is not the same thing as scaling. 

Growth is adding resources (time, money, or effort) to increase revenue. 

Scaling focuses on increasing revenue significantly without a proportional increase in resources. 

Without scaling, it’s easy to reach a point in growth where your costs exceed your revenue. 


The benefits of scaling your subscription box 


Achieving financial freedom: scaling allows you to unlock higher profit margins.


Serving a larger audience: you’re able to reach more people who love what you do. 


Building a legacy: scaling can make your business more profitable and even potentially sellable in the future. 


The risks of not scaling your subscription box 


Burnout: trying to “do it all” can lead to burnout…fast! 

Plateauing: without scaling, your growth will reach a ceiling, limiting your income and your ability to reinvest in your business. 


The mindset shift needed to scale  
Fear holds us back. In order to scale, you need to shift your mindset away from, “What if I fail?” or “What if I can’t handle the growth?” Instead, your mindset needs to be, “Scaling is not about perfection. It’s about progress.” 

Investing in tools, people, or systems can feel risky. But those risks pay off. 

There will be challenges. There will be setbacks. Look at these as opportunities to learn and continue moving forward. 

Not everyone is ready to scale. But how can you know if you are ready? If you’re ready to scale, you have:  


Proof of concept: you’re selling regularly or have a steady subscriber base. 


Clear audience understanding: You know and understand what your customers love and are willing to pay for. 

Solid processes: You’ve systemized parts of your business (payments, packing, customer service, etc). 


If you’re not sure you’re ready to scale, take some time to reflect and ask yourself: 

Do you have a vision for where you want your business to go? 

Are you ready to let go of some control in order to gain freedom? 


Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

﻿
Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 05 Feb 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Scaling Your Subscription Box: The Path to True Growth</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>181</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Scaling isn’t just an option, it’s a must for long-term success. Scaling can transform your business and your life. Join me for this episode to learn what scaling could look like for you and how you can take the first step toward scaling your subscription box business!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Scaling your subscription box business isn’t just about making more money—it’s about building a business that works for you, instead of you working for it.

Are you stuck in the day-to-day grind, feeling like growth is just out of reach, or afraid that scaling will be overwhelming (or expensive!)? Then this episode is for you.

When I first launched my subscription box, my goal was 100 subscribers. That felt HUGE. I never imagined I’d be where I am today—packing thousands of boxes every month. 

But if you don’t plan for growth, you’ll eventually hit a ceiling. I learned this the hard way. At one point, I was packing boxes 10 hours a day, running two embroidery machines nonstop, and trying to juggle everything myself. That wasn’t sustainable. The business had grown, but I hadn’t scaled—yet.

Scaling is about more than just more subscribers and more revenue. It’s creating systems and processes that allow you to grow without burning out. 

Growth is not the same thing as scaling. 

Growth is adding resources (time, money, or effort) to increase revenue. 

Scaling focuses on increasing revenue significantly without a proportional increase in resources. 

Without scaling, it’s easy to reach a point in growth where your costs exceed your revenue. 


The benefits of scaling your subscription box 


Achieving financial freedom: scaling allows you to unlock higher profit margins.


Serving a larger audience: you’re able to reach more people who love what you do. 


Building a legacy: scaling can make your business more profitable and even potentially sellable in the future. 


The risks of not scaling your subscription box 


Burnout: trying to “do it all” can lead to burnout…fast! 

Plateauing: without scaling, your growth will reach a ceiling, limiting your income and your ability to reinvest in your business. 


The mindset shift needed to scale  
Fear holds us back. In order to scale, you need to shift your mindset away from, “What if I fail?” or “What if I can’t handle the growth?” Instead, your mindset needs to be, “Scaling is not about perfection. It’s about progress.” 

Investing in tools, people, or systems can feel risky. But those risks pay off. 

There will be challenges. There will be setbacks. Look at these as opportunities to learn and continue moving forward. 

Not everyone is ready to scale. But how can you know if you are ready? If you’re ready to scale, you have:  


Proof of concept: you’re selling regularly or have a steady subscriber base. 


Clear audience understanding: You know and understand what your customers love and are willing to pay for. 

Solid processes: You’ve systemized parts of your business (payments, packing, customer service, etc). 


If you’re not sure you’re ready to scale, take some time to reflect and ask yourself: 

Do you have a vision for where you want your business to go? 

Are you ready to let go of some control in order to gain freedom? 


Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

﻿
Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Scaling your subscription box business isn’t just about making more money—it’s about building a business that works for you, instead of you working for it.</p><p><br></p><p>Are you stuck in the day-to-day grind, feeling like growth is just out of reach, or afraid that scaling will be overwhelming (or expensive!)? Then this episode is for you.</p><p><br></p><p>When I first launched my subscription box, my goal was 100 subscribers. That felt HUGE. I never imagined I’d be where I am today—packing thousands of boxes every month. </p><p><br></p><p>But if you don’t plan for growth, you’ll eventually hit a ceiling. I learned this the hard way. At one point, I was packing boxes 10 hours a day, running two embroidery machines nonstop, and trying to juggle everything myself. That wasn’t sustainable. The business had grown, but I hadn’t scaled—yet.</p><p><br></p><p>Scaling is about more than just more subscribers and more revenue. It’s creating systems and processes that allow you to grow without burning out. </p><p><br></p><p>Growth is not the same thing as scaling. </p><ul>
<li>Growth is adding resources (time, money, or effort) to increase revenue. </li>
<li>Scaling focuses on increasing revenue <em>significantly </em>without a proportional increase in resources. </li>
<li>Without scaling, it’s easy to reach a point in growth where your costs exceed your revenue. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><h3>The benefits of scaling your subscription box </h3><ol>
<li>
<strong>Achieving financial freedom</strong>: scaling allows you to unlock higher profit margins.</li>
<li>
<strong>Serving a larger audience</strong>: you’re able to reach more people who love what you do. </li>
<li>
<strong>Building a legacy</strong>: scaling can make your business more profitable and even potentially sellable in the future. </li>
</ol><p><br></p><h3>The risks of <em>not</em> scaling your subscription box </h3><ul>
<li>
<strong>Burnout</strong>: trying to “do it all” can lead to burnout…fast! </li>
<li><strong>Plateauing: without scaling, your growth will reach a ceiling, limiting your income and your ability to reinvest in your business. </strong></li>
</ul><p><br></p><h3>The mindset shift needed to scale  </h3><p>Fear holds us back. In order to scale, you need to shift your mindset away from, “What if I fail?” or “What if I can’t handle the growth?” Instead, your mindset needs to be, “Scaling is not about perfection. It’s about progress.” </p><p><br></p><p>Investing in tools, people, or systems can feel risky. But those risks pay off. </p><p><br></p><p>There will be challenges. There will be setbacks. Look at these as opportunities to learn and continue moving forward. </p><p><br></p><p>Not everyone is ready to scale. But how can you know if <em>you</em> are ready? If you’re ready to scale, you have:  </p><ul>
<li>
<strong>Proof of concept</strong>: you’re selling regularly or have a steady subscriber base. </li>
<li>
<strong>Clear audience understanding</strong>: You know and understand what your customers love <em>and</em> are willing to pay for. </li>
<li><strong>Solid processes: You’ve systemized parts of your business (payments, packing, customer service, etc). </strong></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>If you’re not sure you’re ready to scale, take some time to reflect and ask yourself: </p><ul>
<li>Do you have a vision for where you want your business to go? </li>
<li>Are you ready to let go of some control in order to gain freedom? </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!</p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p>﻿</p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2004</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[fe7af032-e1f4-11ef-a52e-ff7617c15251]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2703581060.mp3?updated=1738563084" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title> 7 Ways to Market Your Subscription Box Cost Effectively</title>
      <description>Do you think growing your subscription means spending tons of money on ads? It doesn’t need to be that way! There are so many low and even no-cost ways to market and grow your subscription box business.  

The bottom line? You can’t rely on just one marketing channel or strategy. You need to build a multi-channel marketing plan, layering one type of marketing on top of another. Don’t worry - building this plan doesn’t have to be time-consuming or costly. 

I’m sharing seven cost-effective ways to market your subscription box business. But I don’t want you to try to implement all of them at the same time! If you’re just getting started, choose one, get consistent with it and then layer on another. If you’re already doing one or more of these, choose another one to add to your marketing plan. 


 Leverage social media. 

These accounts are FREE. 

Figure out where your ideal customer is and start there. 

Have FUN with it. Get social - serve and engage with your audience. 

Partner with micro-influencers in your space. 

Offering affiliate commissions is super cost-effective - you don’t pay them unless they sell something for you. 

Influencer or affiliate marketing. 

Very inexpensive. 

Still a very effective way to reach your audience. 

How will you get people onto your email list? 

How will you market to them once they’re on your list? 

Email marketing. 

Create valuable content to attract your ideal person. 

Blogs, videos, eBooks, etc. 

Content marketing.

Word of mouth is so powerful! 

Customer reviews.

Where does your ideal customer go? Farmers Markets, expos, shopping events, etc. 

In person events. 

It’s not about the stuff - it’s about the people. 

A strong community creates raving fans - the kind that market your subscription for you!

Build an online community. 


Take one of these ideas and build it into your routine. Get comfortable and consistent with it. Then layer in another strategy. Continue to grow your audience, reach more of the right people, and ultimately gain new subscribers. 

You can’t rely on one marketing channel or strategy. And you don’t need to spend a lot of money on ads to market effectively. Join me for this episode as I take you through seven cost-effective ways to market your subscription box. 
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 29 Jan 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title> 7 Ways to Market Your Subscription Box Cost Effectively</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I’m sharing seven cost-effective ways to market your subscription box business. But I don’t want you to try to implement all of them at the same time! If you’re just getting started, choose one, get consistent with it and then layer on another. If you’re already doing one or more of these, choose another one to add to your marketing plan. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Do you think growing your subscription means spending tons of money on ads? It doesn’t need to be that way! There are so many low and even no-cost ways to market and grow your subscription box business.  

The bottom line? You can’t rely on just one marketing channel or strategy. You need to build a multi-channel marketing plan, layering one type of marketing on top of another. Don’t worry - building this plan doesn’t have to be time-consuming or costly. 

I’m sharing seven cost-effective ways to market your subscription box business. But I don’t want you to try to implement all of them at the same time! If you’re just getting started, choose one, get consistent with it and then layer on another. If you’re already doing one or more of these, choose another one to add to your marketing plan. 


 Leverage social media. 

These accounts are FREE. 

Figure out where your ideal customer is and start there. 

Have FUN with it. Get social - serve and engage with your audience. 

Partner with micro-influencers in your space. 

Offering affiliate commissions is super cost-effective - you don’t pay them unless they sell something for you. 

Influencer or affiliate marketing. 

Very inexpensive. 

Still a very effective way to reach your audience. 

How will you get people onto your email list? 

How will you market to them once they’re on your list? 

Email marketing. 

Create valuable content to attract your ideal person. 

Blogs, videos, eBooks, etc. 

Content marketing.

Word of mouth is so powerful! 

Customer reviews.

Where does your ideal customer go? Farmers Markets, expos, shopping events, etc. 

In person events. 

It’s not about the stuff - it’s about the people. 

A strong community creates raving fans - the kind that market your subscription for you!

Build an online community. 


Take one of these ideas and build it into your routine. Get comfortable and consistent with it. Then layer in another strategy. Continue to grow your audience, reach more of the right people, and ultimately gain new subscribers. 

You can’t rely on one marketing channel or strategy. And you don’t need to spend a lot of money on ads to market effectively. Join me for this episode as I take you through seven cost-effective ways to market your subscription box. 
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Do you think growing your subscription means spending tons of money on ads? It doesn’t need to be that way! There are so many low and even no-cost ways to market and grow your subscription box business.  </p><p><br></p><p>The bottom line? You can’t rely on just one marketing channel or strategy. You need to build a multi-channel marketing plan, layering one type of marketing on top of another. Don’t worry - building this plan doesn’t have to be time-consuming or costly. </p><p><br></p><p>I’m sharing seven cost-effective ways to market your subscription box business. But I don’t want you to try to implement all of them at the same time! If you’re just getting started, choose one, get consistent with it and then layer on another. If you’re already doing one or more of these, choose another one to add to your marketing plan. </p><p><br></p><ul>
<li> Leverage social media. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">These accounts are FREE. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Figure out where your ideal customer is and start there. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Have FUN with it. Get social - serve and engage with your audience. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Partner with micro-influencers in your space. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Offering affiliate commissions is super cost-effective - you don’t pay them unless they sell something for you. </li>
<li>Influencer or affiliate marketing. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Very inexpensive. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Still a very effective way to reach your audience. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">How will you get people onto your email list? </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">How will you market to them once they’re on your list? </li>
<li>Email marketing. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Create valuable content to attract your ideal person. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Blogs, videos, eBooks, etc. </li>
<li>Content marketing.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Word of mouth is so powerful! </li>
<li>Customer reviews.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Where does your ideal customer go? Farmers Markets, expos, shopping events, etc. </li>
</ul><ol><li>In person events. </li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">It’s not about the stuff - it’s about the people. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">A strong community creates raving fans - the kind that market your subscription for you!</li>
<li>Build an online community. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Take one of these ideas and build it into your routine. Get comfortable and consistent with it. Then layer in another strategy. Continue to grow your audience, reach more of the right people, and ultimately gain new subscribers. </p><p><br></p><p>You can’t rely on one marketing channel or strategy. And you don’t need to spend a lot of money on ads to market effectively. Join me for this episode as I take you through seven cost-effective ways to market your subscription box. </p><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1105</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d3002c58-dd2e-11ef-a832-4b03e5892636]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7223313320.mp3?updated=1738038166" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>180: 4 Productivity Hacks for Subscription Box Owners</title>
      <description>In this episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, we’re diving into 4 productivity hacks that will help subscription box owners save time, reduce stress, and grow their businesses more efficiently. 

1 - Avoid Task Switching 
Set boundaries to allow you to focus on one task at a time. 

2 - Batch Your Work  
Focusing on a single task allows your brain to get into a flow. This improves concentration and efficiency. 

3 - Use Time Blocking   
Time blocking is all about intentionally planning your day or week, dedicating specific blocks of time to specific tasks (hello, batching work). 

Add these blocks to your calendar and treat them like appointments! Consider using a timer (I do) to stay focused and keep you from getting off track. 

3 - Use Project Management Tools    
Project Management tools like Asana, Trello, and others can help you keep track of tasks, deadlines, and team responsibilities. Trust me, they work a lot better than writing notes in multiple notebooks and on sticky notes! 

Each has its pros and cons. You can decide which works best for your time or, like we do, use both. If you’re not using a project management tool yet, start small. Choose one simple task and start managing it in Trello or Asana. You’ll be surprised at the difference it makes. Game changer! 

Make running your subscription box business more manageable. Join me for this episode and start implementing these 4 game-changing productivity hacks today!


Try Trello

Explore Asana


Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

﻿
Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 22 Jan 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>4 Productivity Hacks for Subscription Box Owners</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>180</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Feeling overwhelmed by the endless to-do list that comes with running a subscription box business? You’re not alone. Trust me. But that doesn’t mean you have to stay stuck in the chaos. In this episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, we’re diving into 4 productivity hacks that will help subscription box owners save time, reduce stress, and grow their businesses more efficiently. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, we’re diving into 4 productivity hacks that will help subscription box owners save time, reduce stress, and grow their businesses more efficiently. 

1 - Avoid Task Switching 
Set boundaries to allow you to focus on one task at a time. 

2 - Batch Your Work  
Focusing on a single task allows your brain to get into a flow. This improves concentration and efficiency. 

3 - Use Time Blocking   
Time blocking is all about intentionally planning your day or week, dedicating specific blocks of time to specific tasks (hello, batching work). 

Add these blocks to your calendar and treat them like appointments! Consider using a timer (I do) to stay focused and keep you from getting off track. 

3 - Use Project Management Tools    
Project Management tools like Asana, Trello, and others can help you keep track of tasks, deadlines, and team responsibilities. Trust me, they work a lot better than writing notes in multiple notebooks and on sticky notes! 

Each has its pros and cons. You can decide which works best for your time or, like we do, use both. If you’re not using a project management tool yet, start small. Choose one simple task and start managing it in Trello or Asana. You’ll be surprised at the difference it makes. Game changer! 

Make running your subscription box business more manageable. Join me for this episode and start implementing these 4 game-changing productivity hacks today!


Try Trello

Explore Asana


Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

﻿
Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode of The Launch Your Box Podcast, we’re diving into 4 productivity hacks that will help subscription box owners save time, reduce stress, and grow their businesses more efficiently. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>1 - Avoid Task Switching </strong></p><p>Set boundaries to allow you to focus on one task at a time. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>2 - Batch Your Work  </strong></p><p>Focusing on a single task allows your brain to get into a flow. This improves concentration and efficiency. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>3 - Use Time Blocking   </strong></p><p>Time blocking is all about intentionally planning your day or week, dedicating specific blocks of time to specific tasks (hello, batching work). </p><p><br></p><p>Add these blocks to your calendar and treat them like appointments! Consider using a timer (I do) to stay focused and keep you from getting off track. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>3 - Use Project Management Tools    </strong></p><p>Project Management tools like Asana, Trello, and others can help you keep track of tasks, deadlines, and team responsibilities. Trust me, they work a lot better than writing notes in multiple notebooks and on sticky notes! </p><p><br></p><p>Each has its pros and cons. You can decide which works best for your time or, like we do, use both. If you’re not using a project management tool yet, start small. Choose one simple task and start managing it in Trello or Asana. You’ll be surprised at the difference it makes. Game changer! </p><p><br></p><p>Make running your subscription box business more manageable. Join me for this episode and start implementing these 4 game-changing productivity hacks today!</p><p><br></p><ul>
<li><a href="https://trello.com/">Try Trello</a></li>
<li><a href="https://app.asana.com/-/login">Explore Asana</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!</p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p>﻿</p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1914</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0ef6e8dc-d776-11ef-aa6a-3b92bd38def7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8669168326.mp3?updated=1737409074" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>179: From Blogger to Subscription Box Owner with 1200 Subscribers in Less Than a Year</title>
      <description>On this episode of the Launch Your Box podcast, meet Jenny Finke of Love Me Gluten Free. Jenny didn’t just pivot from blogging to launching her subscription box—she sold out her first 125 boxes in just two hours and now has over 1,200 subscribers in less than a year! 

Learning and Sharing All Things Gluten-Free 
Jenny launched a blog where she shared recipes, stories, products, advice, and more. She ran the blog for over 10 years and had several million readers. Jenny wrote a book and amassed a sizable social media following. Her newsletter went out weekly to more than 24,000 readers. She made income through ads, sponsorships, and affiliate marketing. 

In 2023, everything changed. The algorithm that was so helpful in the past, directing people to Jenny’s content who needed it, changed. Many successful bloggers were throwing in the towel and returning to corporate jobs. Jenny knew she needed a new way to serve her community and save her business. 

Starting and Launching a Gluten-Free Subscription Box  
Jenny saw a need. Her audience wanted a subscription box but needed to know they could trust the safety of the items. And Jenny knew she could deliver. 

Jenny already had an audience, but needed to learn how to start and manage a subscription box business. She needed to build relationships with brands who would supply items for her box. 

Jenny joined Launch Your Box and jumped right in. She set a 90 day plan to launch her box with a launch date in April 2024. 

Selling Out - and Gaining 125 Subscribers - in Two Hours
Jenny crunched the numbers and decided to make up 125 boxes to offer during her subscription box launch. She sold all 125 in less than two hours! Jenny went back to her vendors and asked if they had 25 more of the items in the box. They did and she offered the additional 25 boxes to her audience. All were gone that first day. 150 subscribers in one day. 
An incredible result for a first launch. 

Jenny’s Love Me Gluten Free subscription box has continued to grow, adding subscribers every month. For the first several months, fulfillment took place in Jenny’s basement. That meant capping growth at 300 subscribers until they found a warehouse space. 

Jenny moved her business into the warehouse space which allowed her to add more subscribers. Nine months after launching they have 1200 subscribers and are already outgrowing this new space. 

Pivoting from Blogger to Subscription Box Owner
Jenny’s business didn’t just survive the changes to Google’s algorithm. It evolved and is thriving. All because Jenny wasn’t afraid to pivot. She knew she wanted to stay in the gluten-free industry. She knew she wanted to continue to serve her loyal audience. They needed her expertise. They trusted her. And now she provides them with products they can trust. 

Jenny’s advice for other bloggers who are struggling is to pivot and look to diversify their revenue streams. She believes many could benefit from starting a subscription box - just like she did. A subscription box is another way to serve an audience you’ve spent so much time nurturing, growing, and serving. 

Join me on this episode to hear Jenny’s inspiring journey, how she solved a problem her audience desperately needed a solution to, and her advice for anyone needing to pivot in their business. Don’t miss it!

Find and follow Jenny: 


Love Me Gluten Free on Facebook 

Love Me Gluten Free on Instagram

Love Me Gluten Free Website


Join me in all the places:  

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 15 Jan 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From Blogger to Subscription Box Owner with 1200 Subscribers in Less Than a Year</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>179</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>On this episode of the Launch Your Box podcast, meet Jenny Finke of Love Me Gluten Free. Jenny didn’t just pivot from blogging to launching her subscription box—she sold out her first 125 boxes in just two hours and now has over 1,200 subscribers in less than a year! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On this episode of the Launch Your Box podcast, meet Jenny Finke of Love Me Gluten Free. Jenny didn’t just pivot from blogging to launching her subscription box—she sold out her first 125 boxes in just two hours and now has over 1,200 subscribers in less than a year! 

Learning and Sharing All Things Gluten-Free 
Jenny launched a blog where she shared recipes, stories, products, advice, and more. She ran the blog for over 10 years and had several million readers. Jenny wrote a book and amassed a sizable social media following. Her newsletter went out weekly to more than 24,000 readers. She made income through ads, sponsorships, and affiliate marketing. 

In 2023, everything changed. The algorithm that was so helpful in the past, directing people to Jenny’s content who needed it, changed. Many successful bloggers were throwing in the towel and returning to corporate jobs. Jenny knew she needed a new way to serve her community and save her business. 

Starting and Launching a Gluten-Free Subscription Box  
Jenny saw a need. Her audience wanted a subscription box but needed to know they could trust the safety of the items. And Jenny knew she could deliver. 

Jenny already had an audience, but needed to learn how to start and manage a subscription box business. She needed to build relationships with brands who would supply items for her box. 

Jenny joined Launch Your Box and jumped right in. She set a 90 day plan to launch her box with a launch date in April 2024. 

Selling Out - and Gaining 125 Subscribers - in Two Hours
Jenny crunched the numbers and decided to make up 125 boxes to offer during her subscription box launch. She sold all 125 in less than two hours! Jenny went back to her vendors and asked if they had 25 more of the items in the box. They did and she offered the additional 25 boxes to her audience. All were gone that first day. 150 subscribers in one day. 
An incredible result for a first launch. 

Jenny’s Love Me Gluten Free subscription box has continued to grow, adding subscribers every month. For the first several months, fulfillment took place in Jenny’s basement. That meant capping growth at 300 subscribers until they found a warehouse space. 

Jenny moved her business into the warehouse space which allowed her to add more subscribers. Nine months after launching they have 1200 subscribers and are already outgrowing this new space. 

Pivoting from Blogger to Subscription Box Owner
Jenny’s business didn’t just survive the changes to Google’s algorithm. It evolved and is thriving. All because Jenny wasn’t afraid to pivot. She knew she wanted to stay in the gluten-free industry. She knew she wanted to continue to serve her loyal audience. They needed her expertise. They trusted her. And now she provides them with products they can trust. 

Jenny’s advice for other bloggers who are struggling is to pivot and look to diversify their revenue streams. She believes many could benefit from starting a subscription box - just like she did. A subscription box is another way to serve an audience you’ve spent so much time nurturing, growing, and serving. 

Join me on this episode to hear Jenny’s inspiring journey, how she solved a problem her audience desperately needed a solution to, and her advice for anyone needing to pivot in their business. Don’t miss it!

Find and follow Jenny: 


Love Me Gluten Free on Facebook 

Love Me Gluten Free on Instagram

Love Me Gluten Free Website


Join me in all the places:  

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On this episode of the Launch Your Box podcast, meet Jenny Finke of Love Me Gluten Free. Jenny didn’t just pivot from blogging to launching her subscription box—she sold out her first 125 boxes in just two hours and now has over 1,200 subscribers in less than a year! </p><p><br></p><h3>Learning and Sharing All Things Gluten-Free </h3><p>Jenny launched a blog where she shared recipes, stories, products, advice, and more. She ran the blog for over 10 years and had several million readers. Jenny wrote a book and amassed a sizable social media following. Her newsletter went out weekly to more than 24,000 readers. She made income through ads, sponsorships, and affiliate marketing. </p><p><br></p><p>In 2023, everything changed. The algorithm that was so helpful in the past, directing people to Jenny’s content who needed it, changed. Many successful bloggers were throwing in the towel and returning to corporate jobs. Jenny knew she needed a new way to serve her community and save her business. </p><p><br></p><h3>Starting and Launching a Gluten-Free Subscription Box  </h3><p>Jenny saw a need. Her audience wanted a subscription box but needed to know they could trust the safety of the items. And Jenny knew she could deliver. </p><p><br></p><p>Jenny already had an audience, but needed to learn how to start and manage a subscription box business. She needed to build relationships with brands who would supply items for her box. </p><p><br></p><p>Jenny joined Launch Your Box and jumped right in. She set a 90 day plan to launch her box with a launch date in April 2024. </p><p><br></p><h3>Selling Out - and Gaining 125 Subscribers - in Two Hours</h3><p>Jenny crunched the numbers and decided to make up 125 boxes to offer during her subscription box launch. She sold all 125 in less than two hours! Jenny went back to her vendors and asked if they had 25 more of the items in the box. They did and she offered the additional 25 boxes to her audience. All were gone that first day. 150 subscribers in one day. </p><p>An incredible result for a first launch. </p><p><br></p><p>Jenny’s Love Me Gluten Free subscription box has continued to grow, adding subscribers every month. For the first several months, fulfillment took place in Jenny’s basement. That meant capping growth at 300 subscribers until they found a warehouse space. </p><p><br></p><p>Jenny moved her business into the warehouse space which allowed her to add more subscribers. Nine months after launching they have 1200 subscribers and are already outgrowing this new space. </p><p><br></p><h3>Pivoting from Blogger to Subscription Box Owner</h3><p>Jenny’s business didn’t just survive the changes to Google’s algorithm. It evolved and is thriving. All because Jenny wasn’t afraid to pivot. She knew she wanted to stay in the gluten-free industry. She knew she wanted to continue to serve her loyal audience. They needed her expertise. They trusted her. And now she provides them with products they can trust. </p><p><br></p><p>Jenny’s advice for other bloggers who are struggling is to pivot and look to diversify their revenue streams. She believes many could benefit from starting a subscription box - just like she did. A subscription box is another way to serve an audience you’ve spent so much time nurturing, growing, and serving. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me on this episode to hear Jenny’s inspiring journey, how she solved a problem her audience desperately needed a solution to, and her advice for anyone needing to pivot in their business. Don’t miss it!</p><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Jenny: </p><ul>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/lovemeglutenfreebox">Love Me Gluten Free on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/lovemeglutenfree/">Love Me Gluten Free on Instagram</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.lovemeglutenfree.com/?fbclid=PAZXh0bgNhZW0CMTEAAaZKNFbLpS8td_EOL6PplFC0hHg602Jr15S4HbNE9ube8BmYL5kH--wKriA_aem_Ef_vE2Ge5fyTRfYbA-NBWw">Love Me Gluten Free Website</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places:  </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2119</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cc9e8aa0-d16a-11ef-a615-83aa2c7659e1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2642967758.mp3?updated=1736744511" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>10 Ways to Build Your List - Every Month</title>
      <description>What one thing can you do in your business every single day that would help you be the most successful? Work to build and grow your email list! 

If you’re not replenishing the pool of people you’re selling to, you won’t be able to grow your business the way you want to. Growing your email list gets new, fresh eyes on your stuff. It allows you to present your offer to new people. And that allows you to grow. 

One of my main goals for my business in 2023 was to double the size of my email list. I challenged the ladies in my Elevate Mastermind to make growing their lists one of their goals for 2023 and now I’m challenging you to do the same thing.  

List-building activities need to be at work in your business every day. I’m sharing ten different ways you can build your email list. And no, you don’t need to do all of them at once. 

Add a pop-up on your website - have a pop-up at work on your site at all times capturing email addresses. 

Create an opt-in on your website with a way to serve your audience - give them more information about something (box opening with a freebie or additional information like a style guide, a free printable to go with your home decor box, a checklist to go with a beach themed box, tips about caring for your pet for a pet box, etc.) Think about the industry you’re in and what you can provide to serve your audience. 

Run a giveaway - a great way to build your list when you’re new and as a quarterly list-building strategy for seasoned box owners. 

Post a lead magnet on social media and run ads to it - pulling people in and onto your list. (ebooks, checklists, gift with purchase, etc.)   

Add an email opt-in at checkout - capture people who buy from you but may not be on your list. 

Create a fun quiz that requires an email address to get results - make it something your audience will want to share!  

Offer a discount or free gift - use this carefully to prevent training people to only shop with you when there is a sale or a discount. 

Host an event or workshop - free or low-dollar offer. Works great for DIYers or crafters. 

Tease sneak peeks or exclusive behind the scenes content with opt-ins - early access gives feelings of fun and exclusivity. 

Get in front of new audiences - collaborate with other brands, businesses, and influences who have the same customer but sell different items for a joint giveaway or a way to serve each other’s audiences. 


Note: Make it clear to people that they will be receiving emails from you when they provide their email addresses. 

Pick one thing to work on right now. Get that going and then add in another strategy. The more of these you do, the more people you’ll reach and the more people you’ll add to your email list. 
Join me for this episode where I challenge you to grow your business by growing your email list this year and give you 10 simple ways to do it!  
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 08 Jan 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>10 Ways to Build Your List - Every Month</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>What one thing can you do in your business every single day that would help you be the most successful? Work to build and grow your email list! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What one thing can you do in your business every single day that would help you be the most successful? Work to build and grow your email list! 

If you’re not replenishing the pool of people you’re selling to, you won’t be able to grow your business the way you want to. Growing your email list gets new, fresh eyes on your stuff. It allows you to present your offer to new people. And that allows you to grow. 

One of my main goals for my business in 2023 was to double the size of my email list. I challenged the ladies in my Elevate Mastermind to make growing their lists one of their goals for 2023 and now I’m challenging you to do the same thing.  

List-building activities need to be at work in your business every day. I’m sharing ten different ways you can build your email list. And no, you don’t need to do all of them at once. 

Add a pop-up on your website - have a pop-up at work on your site at all times capturing email addresses. 

Create an opt-in on your website with a way to serve your audience - give them more information about something (box opening with a freebie or additional information like a style guide, a free printable to go with your home decor box, a checklist to go with a beach themed box, tips about caring for your pet for a pet box, etc.) Think about the industry you’re in and what you can provide to serve your audience. 

Run a giveaway - a great way to build your list when you’re new and as a quarterly list-building strategy for seasoned box owners. 

Post a lead magnet on social media and run ads to it - pulling people in and onto your list. (ebooks, checklists, gift with purchase, etc.)   

Add an email opt-in at checkout - capture people who buy from you but may not be on your list. 

Create a fun quiz that requires an email address to get results - make it something your audience will want to share!  

Offer a discount or free gift - use this carefully to prevent training people to only shop with you when there is a sale or a discount. 

Host an event or workshop - free or low-dollar offer. Works great for DIYers or crafters. 

Tease sneak peeks or exclusive behind the scenes content with opt-ins - early access gives feelings of fun and exclusivity. 

Get in front of new audiences - collaborate with other brands, businesses, and influences who have the same customer but sell different items for a joint giveaway or a way to serve each other’s audiences. 


Note: Make it clear to people that they will be receiving emails from you when they provide their email addresses. 

Pick one thing to work on right now. Get that going and then add in another strategy. The more of these you do, the more people you’ll reach and the more people you’ll add to your email list. 
Join me for this episode where I challenge you to grow your business by growing your email list this year and give you 10 simple ways to do it!  
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What one thing can you do in your business every single day that would help you be the most successful? Work to build and grow your email list! </p><p><br></p><p>If you’re not replenishing the pool of people you’re selling to, you won’t be able to grow your business the way you want to. Growing your email list gets new, fresh eyes on your stuff. It allows you to present your offer to new people. And that allows you to grow. </p><p><br></p><p>One of my main goals for my business in 2023 was to double the size of my email list. I challenged the ladies in my Elevate Mastermind to make growing their lists one of their goals for 2023 and now I’m challenging you to do the same thing.  </p><p><br></p><p>List-building activities need to be at work in your business every day. I’m sharing ten different ways you can build your email list. And no, you don’t need to do all of them at once. </p><ol>
<li>Add a pop-up on your website - have a pop-up at work on your site at all times capturing email addresses. </li>
<li>Create an opt-in on your website with a way to serve your audience - give them more information about something (box opening with a freebie or additional information like a style guide, a free printable to go with your home decor box, a checklist to go with a beach themed box, tips about caring for your pet for a pet box, etc.) Think about the industry you’re in and what you can provide to serve your audience. </li>
<li>Run a giveaway - a great way to build your list when you’re new and as a quarterly list-building strategy for seasoned box owners. </li>
<li>Post a lead magnet on social media and run ads to it - pulling people in and onto your list. (ebooks, checklists, gift with purchase, etc.)   </li>
<li>Add an email opt-in at checkout - capture people who buy from you but may not be on your list. </li>
<li>Create a fun quiz that requires an email address to get results - make it something your audience will want to share!  </li>
<li>Offer a discount or free gift - use this carefully to prevent training people to only shop with you when there is a sale or a discount. </li>
<li>Host an event or workshop - free or low-dollar offer. Works great for DIYers or crafters. </li>
<li>Tease sneak peeks or exclusive behind the scenes content with opt-ins - early access gives feelings of fun and exclusivity. </li>
<li>Get in front of new audiences - collaborate with other brands, businesses, and influences who have the same customer but sell different items for a joint giveaway or a way to serve each other’s audiences. </li>
</ol><p><br></p><p>Note: Make it clear to people that they will be receiving emails from you when they provide their email addresses. </p><p><br></p><p>Pick one thing to work on right now. Get that going and then add in another strategy. The more of these you do, the more people you’ll reach and the more people you’ll add to your email list. </p><p>Join me for this episode where I challenge you to grow your business by growing your email list this year and give you 10 simple ways to do it!  </p><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">Join the waitlist</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1762</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[91db00c8-cd56-11ef-af0a-37e1a869f6e8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8319264285.mp3?updated=1736296018" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>178: $0-$100k in 10 Months with The Crafty DIYer</title>
      <description>In this episode, we’re talking with Denise Parkes of The Crafty DIYer. Denise and I know each other well. She’s a member of Launch Your Box, Scale Your Box, and my Elevate Mastermind. As one of my Mastermind Ladies, I get to see Denise in person 3 times a year! Her strength and the story of the last year in her business inspire me and the other members of our Mastermind. It will inspire you, too. 

Denise is an artist and a crafter. She is passionate about teaching others to enjoy crafting. Denise serves mainly women over the age of 60 and, by going LIVE six days a week for a long time, had built up a devoted following. 

When Denise learned about me and my annual Subscription Box Week, she joined right away. During that week, Denise got to know me and my teaching style as well as what she could expect inside Launch Your Box.

Denise was convinced a subscription box was the right next step for her. She actually launched during Subscription Box Week (remember she already had a large audience) and got 120 subscribers! 

Denise’s subscription box grew quickly and soon she needed to rent warehouse space to handle inventory and fulfillment. But all was not well inside Denise’s business. Denise and her business reside in Canada where shipping costs are prohibitive. She simply couldn’t afford to ship to her largely US based subscribers, or even those in her own country. Shipping costs were eating up all of her profits. 

Denise was also dealing with health issues and found herself stressed and unhappy. Her business in its current form was no longer serving her. She knew she still needed to make an income, but couldn’t go on as she was.  

But Denise is someone who gets back up and figures things out. And during our September 2023 Mastermind Retreat, she did just that. There is power in being in a room with other smart, like-minded businesswomen who want the best for you. 

Denise realized the way forward was with printables – no shipping required! She’d had a super successful printable lead magnet in place to grow her list and further proved the viability of her idea by selling one-off printables. When she was able to get out of her warehouse lease, 

Denise felt able to start from scratch again… even though doing so was scary. 
Starting from scratch for Denise meant “doing everything Sarah teaches.” 

Building her list

Driving traffic to her website

Putting effective lead magnets out there 


The Digital Print Clubhouse launch was a big success – 150 subscribers big. And it has continued to grow. Denise now has more than 400 subscribers and celebrated hitting 6-figures only 10 months after making this major pivot. 

So what’s different now? 

Less stress

More joy 

Nothing to pack and ship

More time and energy to create 


Denise talks about the importance of being around women who support and understand her – like the ones found inside Launch Your Box. She also reminds us of the importance of not worrying about what anyone else thinks and resisting the urge to compare yourself to anyone else. 

Pivoting was necessary for Denise’s business to survive. And now she’s not only surviving, she’s thriving… and celebrating hitting six-figures in less than a year! 
Join me for this episode as Denise and I talk about realizing when it's time to pivot, working through the fear, and coming out stronger… oh, and reaching six-figures in revenue in less than a year! 

Find and follow Denise: 


Crafty DIYer on Facebook 

Crafty DIYer on Instagram

Crafty DIYer Website


Join me in all the places:  

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 01 Jan 2025 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>$0-$100k in 10 Months with The Crafty DIYer</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>178</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, we’re talking with Denise Parkes of The Crafty DIYer. Denise and I know each other well. She’s a member of Launch Your Box, Scale Your Box, and my Elevate Mastermind. As one of my Mastermind Ladies, I get to see Denise in person 3 times a year! Her strength and the story of the last year in her business inspire me and the other members of our Mastermind. It will inspire you, too. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode, we’re talking with Denise Parkes of The Crafty DIYer. Denise and I know each other well. She’s a member of Launch Your Box, Scale Your Box, and my Elevate Mastermind. As one of my Mastermind Ladies, I get to see Denise in person 3 times a year! Her strength and the story of the last year in her business inspire me and the other members of our Mastermind. It will inspire you, too. 

Denise is an artist and a crafter. She is passionate about teaching others to enjoy crafting. Denise serves mainly women over the age of 60 and, by going LIVE six days a week for a long time, had built up a devoted following. 

When Denise learned about me and my annual Subscription Box Week, she joined right away. During that week, Denise got to know me and my teaching style as well as what she could expect inside Launch Your Box.

Denise was convinced a subscription box was the right next step for her. She actually launched during Subscription Box Week (remember she already had a large audience) and got 120 subscribers! 

Denise’s subscription box grew quickly and soon she needed to rent warehouse space to handle inventory and fulfillment. But all was not well inside Denise’s business. Denise and her business reside in Canada where shipping costs are prohibitive. She simply couldn’t afford to ship to her largely US based subscribers, or even those in her own country. Shipping costs were eating up all of her profits. 

Denise was also dealing with health issues and found herself stressed and unhappy. Her business in its current form was no longer serving her. She knew she still needed to make an income, but couldn’t go on as she was.  

But Denise is someone who gets back up and figures things out. And during our September 2023 Mastermind Retreat, she did just that. There is power in being in a room with other smart, like-minded businesswomen who want the best for you. 

Denise realized the way forward was with printables – no shipping required! She’d had a super successful printable lead magnet in place to grow her list and further proved the viability of her idea by selling one-off printables. When she was able to get out of her warehouse lease, 

Denise felt able to start from scratch again… even though doing so was scary. 
Starting from scratch for Denise meant “doing everything Sarah teaches.” 

Building her list

Driving traffic to her website

Putting effective lead magnets out there 


The Digital Print Clubhouse launch was a big success – 150 subscribers big. And it has continued to grow. Denise now has more than 400 subscribers and celebrated hitting 6-figures only 10 months after making this major pivot. 

So what’s different now? 

Less stress

More joy 

Nothing to pack and ship

More time and energy to create 


Denise talks about the importance of being around women who support and understand her – like the ones found inside Launch Your Box. She also reminds us of the importance of not worrying about what anyone else thinks and resisting the urge to compare yourself to anyone else. 

Pivoting was necessary for Denise’s business to survive. And now she’s not only surviving, she’s thriving… and celebrating hitting six-figures in less than a year! 
Join me for this episode as Denise and I talk about realizing when it's time to pivot, working through the fear, and coming out stronger… oh, and reaching six-figures in revenue in less than a year! 

Find and follow Denise: 


Crafty DIYer on Facebook 

Crafty DIYer on Instagram

Crafty DIYer Website


Join me in all the places:  

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode, we’re talking with Denise Parkes of The Crafty DIYer. Denise and I know each other well. She’s a member of Launch Your Box, Scale Your Box, and my Elevate Mastermind. As one of my Mastermind Ladies, I get to see Denise in person 3 times a year! Her strength and the story of the last year in her business inspire me and the other members of our Mastermind. It will inspire you, too. </p><p><br></p><p>Denise is an artist and a crafter. She is passionate about teaching others to enjoy crafting. Denise serves mainly women over the age of 60 and, by going LIVE six days a week for a long time, had built up a devoted following. </p><p><br></p><p>When Denise learned about me and my annual <strong>Subscription Box Week</strong>, she joined right away. During that week, Denise got to know me and my teaching style as well as what she could expect inside Launch Your Box.</p><p><br></p><p>Denise was convinced a subscription box was the right next step for her. She actually launched during Subscription Box Week (remember she already had a large audience) and got 120 subscribers! </p><p><br></p><p>Denise’s subscription box grew quickly and soon she needed to rent warehouse space to handle inventory and fulfillment. But all was not well inside Denise’s business. Denise and her business reside in Canada where shipping costs are prohibitive. She simply couldn’t afford to ship to her largely US based subscribers, or even those in her own country. Shipping costs were eating up all of her profits. </p><p><br></p><p>Denise was also dealing with health issues and found herself stressed and unhappy. Her business in its current form was no longer serving her. She knew she still needed to make an income, but couldn’t go on as she was.  </p><p><br></p><p>But Denise is someone who gets back up and figures things out. And during our September 2023 Mastermind Retreat, she did just that. There is power in being in a room with other smart, like-minded businesswomen who want the best for you. </p><h3><br></h3><p>Denise realized the way forward was with printables – no shipping required! She’d had a super successful printable lead magnet in place to grow her list and further proved the viability of her idea by selling one-off printables. When she was able to get out of her warehouse lease, </p><p><br></p><p>Denise felt able to start from scratch again… even though doing so was scary. </p><p>Starting from scratch for Denise meant “doing everything Sarah teaches.” </p><ul>
<li>Building her list</li>
<li>Driving traffic to her website</li>
<li>Putting effective lead magnets out there </li>
</ul><h3><br></h3><p>The Digital Print Clubhouse launch was a big success – 150 subscribers big. And it has continued to grow. Denise now has more than 400 subscribers and celebrated hitting 6-figures only 10 months after making this major pivot. </p><p><br></p><p>So what’s different now? </p><ul>
<li>Less stress</li>
<li>More joy </li>
<li>Nothing to pack and ship</li>
<li>More time and energy to create </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Denise talks about the importance of being around women who support and understand her – like the ones found inside Launch Your Box. She also reminds us of the importance of not worrying about what anyone else thinks and resisting the urge to compare yourself to anyone else. </p><p><br></p><p>Pivoting was necessary for Denise’s business to survive. And now she’s not only surviving, she’s thriving… and celebrating hitting six-figures in less than a year! </p><p>Join me for this episode as Denise and I talk about realizing when it's time to pivot, working through the fear, and coming out stronger… oh, and reaching six-figures in revenue in less than a year! </p><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Denise: </p><ul>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/deniseparkesdiy">Crafty DIYer on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/deniseparkesdiy/">Crafty DIYer on Instagram</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.deniseparkesdiy.com/pages/the-digital-print-club?fbclid=IwZXh0bgNhZW0CMTAAAR1pjqDqSHY7dp61bHcb32VLvajmUR2kbYYcldqGrvvwafr5DtI1nf9LTdA_aem_LZ8cu6fu-6Fa6K5478bsYA">Crafty DIYer Website</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places:  </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1570</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d6f540ac-c742-11ef-9032-5bf987f28b5c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8501359903.mp3?updated=1735627838" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Taking Your Side Hustle to a Full-time Gig</title>
      <description>Have you thought about taking your subscription box business from a side hustle to a full-time gig?
 
It’s absolutely possible. I did it and so have many members of Launch Your Box. 
 
But… 
 
Before you quit your full-time job or make any major changes to your business, you need to ask - and answer - some questions. And you need to get really comfortable with your financial details, business and personal. 
 
Take your time and get real about what your goals are. Are you currently working 40/50/60 hours a week and want to work less? Do you want to make more income than you have been? 
 
The truth is, you can get there. But you’ll need to make a plan and work that plan. Start by asking yourself these four questions: 
What is the income you need to replace? 

What is the survival income you need to cover your bare bones expenses every month? 

What portion of that survival income can be covered by someone else (spouse, parents, roommates)? 

What is the initial investment you’ll need for your business (products, supplies, packaging, tech)? 

 
Understand that your business will need to be profitable before you can pay yourself. That takes time. It took me 9 months before I was able to pay myself a regular paycheck. 8 ½ years later, I pay myself a very nice salary and also pay the salaries of more than 20 employees. 
 
Join me for this episode as I take you on my journey from tiny side hustle making $200 a month to where I am now, running two multi seven-figure businesses, answering those questions, knowing my numbers, and making careful decisions every step of the way.  
 
Important Links: 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 25 Dec 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Taking Your Side Hustle to a Full-time Gig</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Before you quit your full-time job or make any major changes to your business, you need to ask - and answer - some questions. And you need to get really comfortable with your financial details, business and personal. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you thought about taking your subscription box business from a side hustle to a full-time gig?
 
It’s absolutely possible. I did it and so have many members of Launch Your Box. 
 
But… 
 
Before you quit your full-time job or make any major changes to your business, you need to ask - and answer - some questions. And you need to get really comfortable with your financial details, business and personal. 
 
Take your time and get real about what your goals are. Are you currently working 40/50/60 hours a week and want to work less? Do you want to make more income than you have been? 
 
The truth is, you can get there. But you’ll need to make a plan and work that plan. Start by asking yourself these four questions: 
What is the income you need to replace? 

What is the survival income you need to cover your bare bones expenses every month? 

What portion of that survival income can be covered by someone else (spouse, parents, roommates)? 

What is the initial investment you’ll need for your business (products, supplies, packaging, tech)? 

 
Understand that your business will need to be profitable before you can pay yourself. That takes time. It took me 9 months before I was able to pay myself a regular paycheck. 8 ½ years later, I pay myself a very nice salary and also pay the salaries of more than 20 employees. 
 
Join me for this episode as I take you on my journey from tiny side hustle making $200 a month to where I am now, running two multi seven-figure businesses, answering those questions, knowing my numbers, and making careful decisions every step of the way.  
 
Important Links: 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you thought about taking your subscription box business from a side hustle to a full-time gig?</p><p> </p><p>It’s absolutely possible. I did it and so have many members of Launch Your Box. </p><p> </p><p>But… </p><p> </p><p>Before you quit your full-time job or make any major changes to your business, you need to ask - and answer - some questions. And you need to get really comfortable with your financial details, business <em>and</em> personal. </p><p> </p><p>Take your time and get real about what your goals are. Are you currently working 40/50/60 hours a week and want to work less? Do you want to make more income than you have been? </p><p> </p><p>The truth is, you <em>can</em> get there. But you’ll need to make a plan and work that plan. Start by asking yourself these four questions: </p><ul><li>What is the income you need to replace? </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>What is the survival income you need to cover your bare bones expenses every month? </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>What portion of that survival income can be covered by someone else (spouse, parents, roommates)? </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>What is the initial investment you’ll need for your business (products, supplies, packaging, tech)? </li></ul><p><br></p><p> </p><p>Understand that your business will need to be profitable before you can pay yourself. That takes time. It took me 9 months before I was able to pay myself a regular paycheck. 8 ½ years later, I pay myself a very nice salary and also pay the salaries of more than 20 employees. </p><p> </p><p>Join me for this episode as I take you on my journey from tiny side hustle making $200 a month to where I am now, running two multi seven-figure businesses, answering those questions, knowing my numbers, and making careful decisions every step of the way.  </p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><p><br></p><ul><li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1600</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d554b91c-c18e-11ef-8cae-e7b49cdb249f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7151229756.mp3?updated=1735000769" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>177: Year-End Review of My Subscription Box Business</title>
      <description>This past year in my business was filled with wins, challenges, and hard-earned lessons. And that’s okay. Because being an entrepreneur, and especially a subscription box owner, isn’t as glamorous as the internet sometimes makes it seem. It’s more like a rollercoaster – holding on tight through the highs, the lows, and all the in-betweens. In this episode, I’m taking you behind the scenes of my business, sharing the good, the bad, and the downright frustrating moments.

Why share all of this with you? You know I believe in being transparent. And I want to inspire you to take a good look at your own business, reflect on your year, and use those insights to propel you into 2025, making it your best year yet! 

Why Reflecting on the Past Year in Your Business Matters
Looking back helps us see what worked, what didn’t, and how we can grow. As entrepreneurs, it’s easy to focus on where we fell short. I’m challenging you to shift your mindset to celebrate the progress you’ve made instead.

I started my subscription box business in 2017. To date, I’ve surpassed $10 million in revenue. That’s the gain I choose to focus on, even when things don’t go as planned. And there were definitely some times this year when things didn’t go to plan. 

The Highs – What Worked in 2024

Recurring Revenue – My three subscriptions—The Monogram Box™, T-Shirt Club, and Tees 4 Teachers—account for 75% of my revenue. Recurring income is the foundation of my business.

Successful Launch – My April launch, featuring low-cost bonuses, brought in over 400 new subscribers in just a few days.

Turning Inventory into Growth – Self-liquidating offers (SLOs) helped me clear out excess inventory while attracting new customers, and turning one-time buyers into subscribers.

The Lows – What Didn’t Work in 2024 

A Slow Start to the Year – Taking my eye off the numbers in January led to slower months and a revenue deficit I worked all year to recover from.

Campaigns that Fell Short – An "intro offer" flopped early in the year. But… Instead of giving up on the strategy, I revamped and relaunched it later with much better results.

2024 Had Its Surprises, Too 

Retention Challenges – My retention has always been high. Always. Like 94%+ high. Until it wasn’t. A payment failure issue in September caused my retention rate to drop to a never-before-seen 79%. This was a hard pill to swallow – and sent me for the wine and chocolate – but it taught me to stay resilient.


Key Takeaways for Your Business

Track Your Numbers – Every month. Don’t let busy months distract you from keeping an eye on your metrics. What happens today impacts the months ahead.

Embrace Launches –Launches breathe new life into your business, giving customers a reason to subscribe or make a purchase.

Experiment and Adjust – Not every campaign will succeed. But even those that don’t can teach you how to improve and grow.

Focus on the Gain –Instead of dwelling on where you want to be, celebrate how far you’ve come. Progress is worth celebrating. 


Entrepreneurship isn’t easy, but it’s worth it. By reflecting on your year, focusing on the gains, and staying intentional with your plans for 2025 you can set yourself up for success.

Join me for this episode where I take an honest look at my subscription box business—and challenge you to reflect on 2024 in your business. Tune in and let’s dive into the lessons of the year!

Resources Mentioned in This Episode:
The Ed Mylett Show (Podcast)
The Gap and The Gain by Dan Sullivan and Benjamin Hardy

Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

﻿
Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 18 Dec 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Year-End Review of My Subscription Box Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>177</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode where I take an honest look at my subscription box business—and challenge you to reflect on 2024 in your business. Tune in and let’s dive into the lessons of the year!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>This past year in my business was filled with wins, challenges, and hard-earned lessons. And that’s okay. Because being an entrepreneur, and especially a subscription box owner, isn’t as glamorous as the internet sometimes makes it seem. It’s more like a rollercoaster – holding on tight through the highs, the lows, and all the in-betweens. In this episode, I’m taking you behind the scenes of my business, sharing the good, the bad, and the downright frustrating moments.

Why share all of this with you? You know I believe in being transparent. And I want to inspire you to take a good look at your own business, reflect on your year, and use those insights to propel you into 2025, making it your best year yet! 

Why Reflecting on the Past Year in Your Business Matters
Looking back helps us see what worked, what didn’t, and how we can grow. As entrepreneurs, it’s easy to focus on where we fell short. I’m challenging you to shift your mindset to celebrate the progress you’ve made instead.

I started my subscription box business in 2017. To date, I’ve surpassed $10 million in revenue. That’s the gain I choose to focus on, even when things don’t go as planned. And there were definitely some times this year when things didn’t go to plan. 

The Highs – What Worked in 2024

Recurring Revenue – My three subscriptions—The Monogram Box™, T-Shirt Club, and Tees 4 Teachers—account for 75% of my revenue. Recurring income is the foundation of my business.

Successful Launch – My April launch, featuring low-cost bonuses, brought in over 400 new subscribers in just a few days.

Turning Inventory into Growth – Self-liquidating offers (SLOs) helped me clear out excess inventory while attracting new customers, and turning one-time buyers into subscribers.

The Lows – What Didn’t Work in 2024 

A Slow Start to the Year – Taking my eye off the numbers in January led to slower months and a revenue deficit I worked all year to recover from.

Campaigns that Fell Short – An "intro offer" flopped early in the year. But… Instead of giving up on the strategy, I revamped and relaunched it later with much better results.

2024 Had Its Surprises, Too 

Retention Challenges – My retention has always been high. Always. Like 94%+ high. Until it wasn’t. A payment failure issue in September caused my retention rate to drop to a never-before-seen 79%. This was a hard pill to swallow – and sent me for the wine and chocolate – but it taught me to stay resilient.


Key Takeaways for Your Business

Track Your Numbers – Every month. Don’t let busy months distract you from keeping an eye on your metrics. What happens today impacts the months ahead.

Embrace Launches –Launches breathe new life into your business, giving customers a reason to subscribe or make a purchase.

Experiment and Adjust – Not every campaign will succeed. But even those that don’t can teach you how to improve and grow.

Focus on the Gain –Instead of dwelling on where you want to be, celebrate how far you’ve come. Progress is worth celebrating. 


Entrepreneurship isn’t easy, but it’s worth it. By reflecting on your year, focusing on the gains, and staying intentional with your plans for 2025 you can set yourself up for success.

Join me for this episode where I take an honest look at my subscription box business—and challenge you to reflect on 2024 in your business. Tune in and let’s dive into the lessons of the year!

Resources Mentioned in This Episode:
The Ed Mylett Show (Podcast)
The Gap and The Gain by Dan Sullivan and Benjamin Hardy

Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

﻿
Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This past year in my business was filled with wins, challenges, and hard-earned lessons. And that’s okay. Because being an entrepreneur, and especially a subscription box owner, isn’t as glamorous as the internet sometimes makes it seem. It’s more like a rollercoaster – holding on tight through the highs, the lows, and all the in-betweens. In this episode, I’m taking you behind the scenes of my business, sharing the good, the bad, and the downright frustrating moments.</p><p><br></p><p>Why share all of this with you? You know I believe in being transparent. And I want to inspire you to take a good look at your own business, reflect on your year, and use those insights to propel you into 2025, making it your best year yet! </p><p><br></p><h3>Why Reflecting on the Past Year in Your Business Matters</h3><p>Looking back helps us see what worked, what didn’t, and how we can grow. As entrepreneurs, it’s easy to focus on where we fell short. I’m challenging you to shift your mindset to celebrate the progress you’ve made instead.</p><p><br></p><p>I started my subscription box business in 2017. To date, I’ve surpassed $10 million in revenue. That’s the gain I choose to focus on, even when things don’t go as planned. And there were definitely some times this year when things didn’t go to plan. </p><h2><br></h2><h2>The Highs – What Worked in 2024</h2><ul>
<li>Recurring Revenue – My three subscriptions—The Monogram Box™, T-Shirt Club, and Tees 4 Teachers—account for 75% of my revenue. Recurring income is the foundation of my business.</li>
<li>Successful Launch – My April launch, featuring low-cost bonuses, brought in over 400 new subscribers in just a few days.</li>
<li>Turning Inventory into Growth – Self-liquidating offers (SLOs) helped me clear out excess inventory while attracting new customers, and turning one-time buyers into subscribers.</li>
<li>The Lows – What Didn’t Work in 2024 </li>
<li>A Slow Start to the Year – Taking my eye off the numbers in January led to slower months and a revenue deficit I worked all year to recover from.</li>
<li>Campaigns that Fell Short – An "intro offer" flopped early in the year. But… Instead of giving up on the strategy, I revamped and relaunched it later with much better results.</li>
<li>2024 Had Its Surprises, Too </li>
<li>Retention Challenges – My retention has always been high. Always. Like 94%+ high. Until it wasn’t. A payment failure issue in September caused my retention rate to drop to a never-before-seen 79%. This was a hard pill to swallow – and sent me for the wine and chocolate – but it taught me to stay resilient.</li>
</ul><p><br></p><h2>Key Takeaways for Your Business</h2><ul>
<li>Track Your Numbers – Every month. Don’t let busy months distract you from keeping an eye on your metrics. What happens today impacts the months ahead.</li>
<li>Embrace Launches –Launches breathe new life into your business, giving customers a reason to subscribe or make a purchase.</li>
<li>Experiment and Adjust – Not every campaign will succeed. But even those that don’t can teach you how to improve and grow.</li>
<li>Focus on the Gain –Instead of dwelling on where you want to be, celebrate how far you’ve come. Progress is worth celebrating. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Entrepreneurship isn’t easy, but it’s worth it. By reflecting on your year, focusing on the gains, and staying intentional with your plans for 2025 you can set yourself up for success.</p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode where I take an honest look at my subscription box business—and challenge you to reflect on 2024 in your business. Tune in and let’s dive into the lessons of the year!</p><p><br></p><p>Resources Mentioned in This Episode:</p><p><em>The Ed Mylett Show</em> (Podcast)</p><p><em>The Gap and The Gain</em> by Dan Sullivan and Benjamin Hardy</p><p><br></p><p>Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!</p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p>﻿</p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1471</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[272795a8-bb76-11ef-888f-1faffd00dbe2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7057344678.mp3?updated=1734330461" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Build an Audience with a Niche Specific Podcast</title>
      <description>“If you’ve been thinking about starting a podcast, now is the perfect time.” - Sarah Heeter. 

My podcast producer, Sarah Heeter, joined me for today’s episode to talk about all things podcast. We talked about the benefits of podcasting and why starting a niche-specific podcast could be a valuable part of your audience-building strategy. Sarah knows a LOT about podcasts. After all, she helped me start this podcast and grow it to more than 200,000 downloads in 18 months and a ranking in the top 1.5% of podcasts globally. She’s also a member of Launch Your Box. 

If you’re wondering if podcasts can be a valuable part of an audience-building strategy for subscription box owners, the answer is yes! I mentioned I have more than 200,000 episode downloads in only 18 months. Compare that to my social media audience. It has taken me years to grow my Facebook and IG followers to a combined 20,000. And if you’re wondering if there’s room for another podcast - for your podcast - the answer is also yes. Studies show more than half of people over 12 listen to podcasts and, on average, each listens to 7 podcasts! 
There are several benefits to podcasts when it comes to connecting with your audience. 


Podcasts meet people where they are. They lend themselves to being interrupted - it’s easy to stop a podcast when needed and get right back to where you left off. 

Podcasts allow listeners to multitask. They listen while driving, cleaning, exercising, and more. 

A podcast mimics the intimacy of a phone call - you’re talking to your audience for 25-40 minutes per week. 

Unlike social media posts, reels, and videos, podcast episodes live forever! 


It can be daunting to think about what you would talk to your audience about each week. Many people worry they’ll run out of things to say. If you’re serving your niche, and know your audience well, that shouldn’t be a problem. Sarah suggests brainstorming a list of possible topics by asking yourself: 


What keeps my ideal customer up at night? 

What answers are they searching for on Google? 

What is their support system like? 

What is their value system? 

What are their highest priorities? 


Use what you learned about your ideal customer in my FREE 6 in 60 Workshop to help you get started. 

Join me for this episode as Sarah shares so much knowledge about why subscription box owners should consider starting a podcast, how to decide what to talk about, and why it’s very possible to DIY your podcast. 

Important Links: 
 6 in 60 Workshop

Find and follow Sarah Heeter: 

Sarah Heeter on Instagram

Sarah Heeter’s Website

 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 11 Dec 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Build an Audience with a Niche Specific Podcast</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>My podcast producer, Sarah Heeter, joined me for today’s episode to talk about all things podcast. We talked about the benefits of podcasting and why starting a niche-specific podcast could be a valuable part of your audience-building strategy. Sarah knows a LOT about podcasts. After all, she helped me start this podcast and grow it to more than 200,000 downloads in 18 months and a ranking in the top 1.5% of podcasts globally. She’s also a member of Launch Your Box. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“If you’ve been thinking about starting a podcast, now is the perfect time.” - Sarah Heeter. 

My podcast producer, Sarah Heeter, joined me for today’s episode to talk about all things podcast. We talked about the benefits of podcasting and why starting a niche-specific podcast could be a valuable part of your audience-building strategy. Sarah knows a LOT about podcasts. After all, she helped me start this podcast and grow it to more than 200,000 downloads in 18 months and a ranking in the top 1.5% of podcasts globally. She’s also a member of Launch Your Box. 

If you’re wondering if podcasts can be a valuable part of an audience-building strategy for subscription box owners, the answer is yes! I mentioned I have more than 200,000 episode downloads in only 18 months. Compare that to my social media audience. It has taken me years to grow my Facebook and IG followers to a combined 20,000. And if you’re wondering if there’s room for another podcast - for your podcast - the answer is also yes. Studies show more than half of people over 12 listen to podcasts and, on average, each listens to 7 podcasts! 
There are several benefits to podcasts when it comes to connecting with your audience. 


Podcasts meet people where they are. They lend themselves to being interrupted - it’s easy to stop a podcast when needed and get right back to where you left off. 

Podcasts allow listeners to multitask. They listen while driving, cleaning, exercising, and more. 

A podcast mimics the intimacy of a phone call - you’re talking to your audience for 25-40 minutes per week. 

Unlike social media posts, reels, and videos, podcast episodes live forever! 


It can be daunting to think about what you would talk to your audience about each week. Many people worry they’ll run out of things to say. If you’re serving your niche, and know your audience well, that shouldn’t be a problem. Sarah suggests brainstorming a list of possible topics by asking yourself: 


What keeps my ideal customer up at night? 

What answers are they searching for on Google? 

What is their support system like? 

What is their value system? 

What are their highest priorities? 


Use what you learned about your ideal customer in my FREE 6 in 60 Workshop to help you get started. 

Join me for this episode as Sarah shares so much knowledge about why subscription box owners should consider starting a podcast, how to decide what to talk about, and why it’s very possible to DIY your podcast. 

Important Links: 
 6 in 60 Workshop

Find and follow Sarah Heeter: 

Sarah Heeter on Instagram

Sarah Heeter’s Website

 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“If you’ve been thinking about starting a podcast, now is the perfect time.” - Sarah Heeter. </p><p><br></p><p>My podcast producer, Sarah Heeter, joined me for today’s episode to talk about all things podcast. We talked about the benefits of podcasting and why starting a niche-specific podcast could be a valuable part of your audience-building strategy. Sarah knows a LOT about podcasts. After all, she helped me start this podcast and grow it to more than 200,000 downloads in 18 months <em>and</em> a ranking in the top 1.5% of podcasts globally. She’s also a member of Launch Your Box. </p><p><br></p><p>If you’re wondering if podcasts can be a valuable part of an audience-building strategy for subscription box owners, the answer is yes! I mentioned I have more than 200,000 episode downloads in only 18 months. Compare that to my social media audience. It has taken me years to grow my Facebook and IG followers to a combined 20,000. And if you’re wondering if there’s room for another podcast - for your podcast - the answer is also yes. Studies show more than half of people over 12 listen to podcasts and, on average, each listens to 7 podcasts! </p><p>There are several benefits to podcasts when it comes to connecting with your audience. </p><p><br></p><ol>
<li>Podcasts meet people where they are. They lend themselves to being interrupted - it’s easy to stop a podcast when needed and get right back to where you left off. </li>
<li>Podcasts allow listeners to multitask. They listen while driving, cleaning, exercising, and more. </li>
<li>A podcast mimics the intimacy of a phone call - you’re talking to your audience for 25-40 minutes per week. </li>
<li>Unlike social media posts, reels, and videos, podcast episodes live forever! </li>
</ol><p><br></p><p>It can be daunting to think about what you would talk to your audience about each week. Many people worry they’ll run out of things to say. If you’re serving your niche, and know your audience well, that shouldn’t be a problem. Sarah suggests brainstorming a list of possible topics by asking yourself: </p><p><br></p><ul>
<li>What keeps my ideal customer up at night? </li>
<li>What answers are they searching for on Google? </li>
<li>What is their support system like? </li>
<li>What is their value system? </li>
<li>What are their highest priorities? </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Use what you learned about your ideal customer in my FREE 6 in 60 Workshop to help you get started. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as Sarah shares so much knowledge about why subscription box owners should consider starting a podcast, how to decide what to talk about, and why it’s very possible to DIY your podcast. </p><p><br></p><p>Important Links: </p><ul><li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e"> 6 in 60 Workshop</a></li></ul><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Sarah Heeter: </p><ul>
<li><a href="http://instagram.com/sarahkheeter">Sarah Heeter on Instagram</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.podfoxmedia.com/book-now">Sarah Heeter’s Website</a></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2908</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9493b034-b6aa-11ef-9de2-9ba6e494215c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7895520035.mp3?updated=1733866453" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>176: 4 Ways to Liquidate Inventory before Year-End</title>
      <description>Are you sitting on extra inventory as we near the end of the year? For most of you, sales are strong right now. You're filling holiday orders and managing all that comes with this busy season. But as the end of the year draws near, it’s time to liquidate leftover stock. 

Why is liquidating inventory important? 

Liquidating inventory frees up your cash flow, opens up room on your shelves, reduces taxable assets, and prepares you for a fresh start. 

In this episode, I’m sharing 4 strategies to liquidate products. Don’t sit on unnecessary inventory. Liquidate it before the end of the year and avoid dragging old stock into the new year.  

1 - Flash Sales 
Flash sales are quick, time-sensitive sales. They’re also one of the best ways to move product FAST. Create urgency, scarcity, and excitement! 

2 - Bundle Older Products 
We’ve been talking about product bundles for all of Q4. Continue selling these through the holidays and to the end of the year – they hold a lot of value and make great gifts. 

3 - Offer Mystery Boxes
You and your customers will have so much fun with this one! After all, who doesn’t love a good surprise? Mystery Boxes are more than just fun; they’re also an effective way to clear inventory. 

4 - Social Media Sales Events
 Put social media to work for you! Social media is your best friend when it comes to liquidating inventory quickly. Use it to host a sales event. 

Of course, you can’t just plan these events. You need to market them, too. Each event needs its own marketing campaign in order to be effective. 

Join me for this episode where I share 4 ways you can liquidate inventory before year-end. Let’s turn your inventory into cash and clear space for growth! 

Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 04 Dec 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>4 Ways to Liquidate Inventory before Year-End</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>176</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, I’m sharing 4 strategies to liquidate products. Don’t sit on unnecessary inventory. Liquidate it before the end of the year and avoid dragging old stock into the new year.  </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Are you sitting on extra inventory as we near the end of the year? For most of you, sales are strong right now. You're filling holiday orders and managing all that comes with this busy season. But as the end of the year draws near, it’s time to liquidate leftover stock. 

Why is liquidating inventory important? 

Liquidating inventory frees up your cash flow, opens up room on your shelves, reduces taxable assets, and prepares you for a fresh start. 

In this episode, I’m sharing 4 strategies to liquidate products. Don’t sit on unnecessary inventory. Liquidate it before the end of the year and avoid dragging old stock into the new year.  

1 - Flash Sales 
Flash sales are quick, time-sensitive sales. They’re also one of the best ways to move product FAST. Create urgency, scarcity, and excitement! 

2 - Bundle Older Products 
We’ve been talking about product bundles for all of Q4. Continue selling these through the holidays and to the end of the year – they hold a lot of value and make great gifts. 

3 - Offer Mystery Boxes
You and your customers will have so much fun with this one! After all, who doesn’t love a good surprise? Mystery Boxes are more than just fun; they’re also an effective way to clear inventory. 

4 - Social Media Sales Events
 Put social media to work for you! Social media is your best friend when it comes to liquidating inventory quickly. Use it to host a sales event. 

Of course, you can’t just plan these events. You need to market them, too. Each event needs its own marketing campaign in order to be effective. 

Join me for this episode where I share 4 ways you can liquidate inventory before year-end. Let’s turn your inventory into cash and clear space for growth! 

Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are you sitting on extra inventory as we near the end of the year? For most of you, sales are strong right now. You're filling holiday orders and managing all that comes with this busy season. But as the end of the year draws near, it’s time to liquidate leftover stock. </p><p><br></p><p>Why is liquidating inventory important? </p><p><br></p><p>Liquidating inventory frees up your cash flow, opens up room on your shelves, reduces taxable assets, and prepares you for a fresh start. </p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, I’m sharing 4 strategies to liquidate products. Don’t sit on unnecessary inventory. Liquidate it before the end of the year and avoid dragging old stock into the new year.  </p><p><br></p><h3>1 - Flash Sales </h3><p>Flash sales are quick, time-sensitive sales. They’re also one of the best ways to move product FAST. Create urgency, scarcity, and excitement! </p><p><br></p><h3>2 - Bundle Older Products </h3><p>We’ve been talking about product bundles for all of Q4. Continue selling these through the holidays and to the end of the year – they hold a lot of value and make great gifts. </p><p><br></p><p>3 - Offer Mystery Boxes</p><p>You and your customers will have so much fun with this one! After all, who doesn’t love a good surprise? Mystery Boxes are more than just fun; they’re also an effective way to clear inventory. </p><p><br></p><p>4 - Social Media Sales Events</p><p> Put social media to work for you! Social media is your best friend when it comes to liquidating inventory quickly. Use it to host a sales event. </p><p><br></p><p>Of course, you can’t just plan these events. You need to market them, too. Each event needs its own marketing campaign in order to be effective. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode where I share 4 ways you can liquidate inventory before year-end. Let’s turn your inventory into cash and clear space for growth! </p><p><br></p><p>Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!</p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>659</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[043d6d58-b043-11ef-b7f2-bff86b070366]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6867990174.mp3?updated=1733099036" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Using Mystery Boxes to Reduce Inventory Before Year End</title>
      <description>“Don’t bring that stale inventory into 2023!” - Sarah Williams 

Inventory is one of the biggest challenges product-based businesses face. Too much, not enough… and what happens if it doesn’t sell? Now, during this buying season, is the perfect time to liquidate any old or stale inventory you have sitting on your shelves. 

One of my favorite ways to move product and get old inventory off my shelves is by selling Mystery Boxes. They’re new, fresh, and fun for your customers and a GREAT way to reduce inventory without putting clearance tags all over everything. 

Whether you made a bad buy (been there), overbought for your subscription box (yep, been there, too), or you’ve just had a slower year than last year and need to move some product quickly, Mystery Boxes are a great strategy. 

The goal is to get your money back. Don’t focus on making a large profit or even a profit at all. Focus on getting the cash you spent on the items back in your bank account and getting space back on your shelves. 

The excitement of a Mystery Box is not knowing what’s inside! 

Mix items from past subscription boxes with items never in boxes. 

Make subscribers aware they might receive something they already have. 

These are not curated experiences like your subscription box. They are filled with items at a great value.

Create different price points. Choose different size boxes, fill them up, and price them. 


These Mystery Boxes won’t all be the same. If you have 20 of one item and 30 of another, you can still make 50 boxes. Just make sure the items you’re putting in the boxes have a similar size and value. 

Get excited about these Mystery Boxes and start teasing your audience about a week before you’ll start selling them. Go LIVE, let your audience see how excited you are, and show them one of the boxes and how FULL it is! Talk about the value! 

Do you have inventory you need to liquidate? It’s time to let go of old product and start fresh in the new year. Join me for this episode to learn how to create your own Mystery Boxes and start liquidating!
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 27 Nov 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Using Mystery Boxes to Reduce Inventory Before Year End</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Do you have inventory you need to liquidate? It’s time to let go of old product and start fresh in the new year. Join me for this episode to learn how to create your own Mystery Boxes and start liquidating!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Don’t bring that stale inventory into 2023!” - Sarah Williams 

Inventory is one of the biggest challenges product-based businesses face. Too much, not enough… and what happens if it doesn’t sell? Now, during this buying season, is the perfect time to liquidate any old or stale inventory you have sitting on your shelves. 

One of my favorite ways to move product and get old inventory off my shelves is by selling Mystery Boxes. They’re new, fresh, and fun for your customers and a GREAT way to reduce inventory without putting clearance tags all over everything. 

Whether you made a bad buy (been there), overbought for your subscription box (yep, been there, too), or you’ve just had a slower year than last year and need to move some product quickly, Mystery Boxes are a great strategy. 

The goal is to get your money back. Don’t focus on making a large profit or even a profit at all. Focus on getting the cash you spent on the items back in your bank account and getting space back on your shelves. 

The excitement of a Mystery Box is not knowing what’s inside! 

Mix items from past subscription boxes with items never in boxes. 

Make subscribers aware they might receive something they already have. 

These are not curated experiences like your subscription box. They are filled with items at a great value.

Create different price points. Choose different size boxes, fill them up, and price them. 


These Mystery Boxes won’t all be the same. If you have 20 of one item and 30 of another, you can still make 50 boxes. Just make sure the items you’re putting in the boxes have a similar size and value. 

Get excited about these Mystery Boxes and start teasing your audience about a week before you’ll start selling them. Go LIVE, let your audience see how excited you are, and show them one of the boxes and how FULL it is! Talk about the value! 

Do you have inventory you need to liquidate? It’s time to let go of old product and start fresh in the new year. Join me for this episode to learn how to create your own Mystery Boxes and start liquidating!
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“Don’t bring that stale inventory into 2023!” - Sarah Williams </p><p><br></p><p>Inventory is one of the biggest challenges product-based businesses face. Too much, not enough… and what happens if it doesn’t sell? Now, during this buying season, is the perfect time to liquidate any old or stale inventory you have sitting on your shelves. </p><p><br></p><p>One of my favorite ways to move product and get old inventory off my shelves is by selling Mystery Boxes. They’re new, fresh, and fun for your customers and a GREAT way to reduce inventory without putting clearance tags all over everything. </p><p><br></p><p>Whether you made a bad buy (been there), overbought for your subscription box (yep, been there, too), or you’ve just had a slower year than last year and need to move some product quickly, Mystery Boxes are a great strategy. </p><p><br></p><p>The goal is to get your money back. Don’t focus on making a large profit or even a profit at all. Focus on getting the cash you spent on the items back in your bank account and getting space back on your shelves. </p><p><br></p><p>The excitement of a Mystery Box is not knowing what’s inside! </p><ul>
<li>Mix items from past subscription boxes with items never in boxes. </li>
<li>Make subscribers aware they might receive something they already have. </li>
<li>These are not curated experiences like your subscription box. They are filled with items at a great value.</li>
<li>Create different price points. Choose different size boxes, fill them up, and price them. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>These Mystery Boxes won’t all be the same. If you have 20 of one item and 30 of another, you can still make 50 boxes. Just make sure the items you’re putting in the boxes have a similar size and value. </p><p><br></p><p>Get excited about these Mystery Boxes and start teasing your audience about a week before you’ll start selling them. Go LIVE, let your audience see how excited you are, and show them one of the boxes and how FULL it is! Talk about the value! </p><p><br></p><p>Do you have inventory you need to liquidate? It’s time to let go of old product and start fresh in the new year. Join me for this episode to learn how to create your own Mystery Boxes and start liquidating!</p><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1395</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f6d0ef9a-ac6f-11ef-8cd0-0b7967677d6d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5346103532.mp3?updated=1732678536" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>175: 10 Tips for Managing Overwhelm in Q4 and Year Round</title>
      <description>Entrepreneurial overwhelm is part being a small business owner, especially during the 4th quarter. But that doesn’t mean feeling overwhelmed is a fact of entrepreneurial life you can’t do anything about. 

Overwhelm leads to two things: burnout and bad decisions. Burnout is bad for your health – physically, mentally, and emotionally. And bad decisions can cost your business a LOT of money. 

I have 10 practical strategies you can use to reduce overwhelm and stay focused not only during Q4, but all year long. 

10 Ways to Manage Entrepreneurial Overwhelm
1 -  Early Planning
Start planning well in advance in order to stay ahead. Don’t have a plan for Q4 yet? Start now and plan for the rest of the year to ease last-minute pressure. Then start planning for next year. 

2 - Prioritize Self-Care
If you get burned out and overwhelmed, you won’t be able to give what you need to your business or your family. Prioritizing self-care doesn’t mean spending a day (or a weekend) at the spa. But when you can, do that, too! Instead, create simple, non-negotiable daily rituals like morning coffee or evening baths. Things that restore your energy and reduce the chance of burnout.
 
3 - Stay Hydrated and Rested
Yes, these are basic needs. But… When things get busy, especially during the 4th quarter, it’s easy to neglect basic needs. Your body knows what it needs – regular hydration and quality sleep are essential for productivity and mental clarity… even during busy seasons. 

4 - Dedicated Email Support Times 
Your inbox is a time suck. Avoid checking your emails constantly. Silence notifications and set aside specific times to handle emails. This simple switch allows you to avoid interruptions throughout your day.  

5 - Dedicated Social Media Times 
Have you ever lost track of time because you were scrolling on social media and got sucked in? Of course you have. We all have! Set aside times for social media, especially if it's a necessary part of your business operations. 

6 - Set Clear Boundaries 
Boundaries are necessary and healthy for everyone, including entrepreneurs. Define boundaries for yourself, your team, and your customers. This allows you to keep personal time sacred and avoid overwork. 

7 - Direct, Delegate, and Prioritize for Your Team 
As a leader, help your team manage their tasks by giving them a clear focus each day. This allows them to manage their own overwhelm and handle whatever the day brings calmly. 

8 - Batch Tasking Over Multitasking
Multitasking does not lead to greater efficiency. The opposite is actually true. Instead, focus on one type of task at a time, like emails or order processing. You’ll improve efficiency and reduce errors caused by frequent task-switching. 

9 - Learn to Say No
No is a complete sentence. If saying yes to a request adds undo stress, it’s okay to decline. Keeping a “no mindset” opens up time for self-care and focused priorities.  

10 - End-of-Day Wrap-Up Routine
How you end your day has a big effect on your stress level and feelings of overwhelm. Close each day by reviewing tasks, celebrating small wins, and moving unfinished tasks to the next day. An end-of-day routine creates closure, reduces stress, and helps you sleep better!  

Join me for this episode where I share 10 tips for managing entrepreneurial overwhelm during the 4th quarter and beyond. Grab your notebook… !

Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 20 Nov 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>10 Tips for Managing Overwhelm in Q4 and Year Round</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>175</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode where I share 10 tips for managing entrepreneurial overwhelm during the 4th quarter and beyond. Grab your notebook… !</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Entrepreneurial overwhelm is part being a small business owner, especially during the 4th quarter. But that doesn’t mean feeling overwhelmed is a fact of entrepreneurial life you can’t do anything about. 

Overwhelm leads to two things: burnout and bad decisions. Burnout is bad for your health – physically, mentally, and emotionally. And bad decisions can cost your business a LOT of money. 

I have 10 practical strategies you can use to reduce overwhelm and stay focused not only during Q4, but all year long. 

10 Ways to Manage Entrepreneurial Overwhelm
1 -  Early Planning
Start planning well in advance in order to stay ahead. Don’t have a plan for Q4 yet? Start now and plan for the rest of the year to ease last-minute pressure. Then start planning for next year. 

2 - Prioritize Self-Care
If you get burned out and overwhelmed, you won’t be able to give what you need to your business or your family. Prioritizing self-care doesn’t mean spending a day (or a weekend) at the spa. But when you can, do that, too! Instead, create simple, non-negotiable daily rituals like morning coffee or evening baths. Things that restore your energy and reduce the chance of burnout.
 
3 - Stay Hydrated and Rested
Yes, these are basic needs. But… When things get busy, especially during the 4th quarter, it’s easy to neglect basic needs. Your body knows what it needs – regular hydration and quality sleep are essential for productivity and mental clarity… even during busy seasons. 

4 - Dedicated Email Support Times 
Your inbox is a time suck. Avoid checking your emails constantly. Silence notifications and set aside specific times to handle emails. This simple switch allows you to avoid interruptions throughout your day.  

5 - Dedicated Social Media Times 
Have you ever lost track of time because you were scrolling on social media and got sucked in? Of course you have. We all have! Set aside times for social media, especially if it's a necessary part of your business operations. 

6 - Set Clear Boundaries 
Boundaries are necessary and healthy for everyone, including entrepreneurs. Define boundaries for yourself, your team, and your customers. This allows you to keep personal time sacred and avoid overwork. 

7 - Direct, Delegate, and Prioritize for Your Team 
As a leader, help your team manage their tasks by giving them a clear focus each day. This allows them to manage their own overwhelm and handle whatever the day brings calmly. 

8 - Batch Tasking Over Multitasking
Multitasking does not lead to greater efficiency. The opposite is actually true. Instead, focus on one type of task at a time, like emails or order processing. You’ll improve efficiency and reduce errors caused by frequent task-switching. 

9 - Learn to Say No
No is a complete sentence. If saying yes to a request adds undo stress, it’s okay to decline. Keeping a “no mindset” opens up time for self-care and focused priorities.  

10 - End-of-Day Wrap-Up Routine
How you end your day has a big effect on your stress level and feelings of overwhelm. Close each day by reviewing tasks, celebrating small wins, and moving unfinished tasks to the next day. An end-of-day routine creates closure, reduces stress, and helps you sleep better!  

Join me for this episode where I share 10 tips for managing entrepreneurial overwhelm during the 4th quarter and beyond. Grab your notebook… !

Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Entrepreneurial overwhelm is part being a small business owner, especially during the 4th quarter. But that doesn’t mean feeling overwhelmed is a fact of entrepreneurial life you can’t do anything about. </p><p><br></p><p>Overwhelm leads to two things: burnout and bad decisions. Burnout is bad for your health – physically, mentally, and emotionally. And bad decisions can cost your business a LOT of money. </p><p><br></p><p>I have 10 practical strategies you can use to reduce overwhelm and stay focused not only during Q4, but all year long. </p><p><br></p><h2>10 Ways to Manage Entrepreneurial Overwhelm</h2><h3>1 -  Early Planning</h3><p>Start planning well in advance in order to stay ahead. Don’t have a plan for Q4 yet? Start now and plan for the rest of the year to ease last-minute pressure. Then start planning for next year. </p><p><br></p><h3>2 - Prioritize Self-Care</h3>If you get burned out and overwhelmed, you won’t be able to give what you need to your business or your family. <p>Prioritizing self-care doesn’t mean spending a day (or a weekend) at the spa. But when you can, do that, too! Instead, create simple, non-negotiable daily rituals like morning coffee or evening baths. Things that restore your energy and reduce the chance of burnout.</p><p> </p><h3>3 - Stay Hydrated and Rested</h3><p>Yes, these are basic needs. But… When things get busy, especially during the 4th quarter, it’s easy to neglect basic needs. Your body knows what it needs – regular hydration and quality sleep are essential for productivity and mental clarity… even during busy seasons. </p><p><br></p><h3>4 - Dedicated Email Support Times </h3><p>Your inbox is a time suck. Avoid checking your emails constantly. Silence notifications and set aside specific times to handle emails. This simple switch allows you to avoid interruptions throughout your day.  </p><p><br></p><h3>5 - Dedicated Social Media Times </h3><p>Have you ever lost track of time because you were scrolling on social media and got sucked in? Of course you have. We all have! Set aside times for social media, especially if it's a necessary part of your business operations. </p><p><br></p><h3>6 - Set Clear Boundaries </h3><p>Boundaries are necessary and healthy for everyone, including entrepreneurs. Define boundaries for yourself, your team, and your customers. This allows you to keep personal time sacred and avoid overwork. </p><p><br></p><h3>7 - Direct, Delegate, and Prioritize for Your Team </h3><p>As a leader, help your team manage their tasks by giving them a clear focus each day. This allows them to manage their own overwhelm and handle whatever the day brings calmly. </p><p><br></p><h3>8 - Batch Tasking Over Multitasking</h3><p>Multitasking does not lead to greater efficiency. The opposite is actually true. Instead, focus on one type of task at a time, like emails or order processing. You’ll improve efficiency and reduce errors caused by frequent task-switching. </p><p><br></p><h3>9 - Learn to Say No</h3><p>No is a complete sentence. If saying yes to a request adds undo stress, it’s okay to decline. Keeping a “no mindset” opens up time for self-care and focused priorities.  </p><p><br></p><h3>10 - End-of-Day Wrap-Up Routine</h3><p>How you end your day has a big effect on your stress level and feelings of overwhelm. Close each day by reviewing tasks, celebrating small wins, and moving unfinished tasks to the next day. An end-of-day routine creates closure, reduces stress, and helps you sleep better!  </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode where I share 10 tips for managing entrepreneurial overwhelm during the 4th quarter and beyond. Grab your notebook… !</p><p><br></p><p>Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!</p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2327</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6364d320-a576-11ef-b9c8-7f654eced942]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5516114828.mp3?updated=1731911637" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Sourcing Tips on Alibaba with Marissa Sayers</title>
      <description>“Stand tall and own your buying power.” 

Is this going to be the year you find new sources for products? Have you been curious about how to order products from overseas manufacturers? Are you wondering what Alibaba is and why so many subscription box owners use it to order products at great prices? 

If any of those sound like you, this episode is for you. Marissa Sayers joined me to take us through the process of ordering products through Alibaba. 

Marissa has a lot of experience sourcing products overseas and actually handles sourcing for my business. She does an incredible job because she is very detail-oriented and knows this process backward and forward.  

Marissa gave us a detailed outline of the steps of sourcing products directly from a manufacturer. 

Search Alibaba.com for products

Narrow your search 

Further filter your search based on delivery options (find out why you should ONLY accept DDP shipping)

Talk to several manufacturer representatives

Order samples (they cost more than you think they should)

Place order

Receive shipment 


Realize this process takes time. Plan for 90-120 days to work through it from start to finish. In other words - Alibaba is not for panic buying! 

It’s important to remember that at the same time you’re vetting a manufacturer, they are vetting you. Coming to them from a place of knowledge will give you confidence. 

Marissa also talked about how you can work with her if you need help sourcing products. She has limited spots available to work with her and gives priority to my people. Make sure you let her know if you’re a podcast listener or member of Launch Your Box.   

As a subscription box owner, you order large quantities of products every month. When you decide to step into this world of overseas sourcing, stand tall and own your buying power! 

Join me for this episode as Marissa takes us through her process of sourcing products through Alibaba, step by step. You’ll learn what to look for, what to ask for, and what to never, ever compromise on. If you’re ready to source products from overseas, this is a can’t-miss episode. Grab a notebook and pen - you’re going to take a LOT of notes.   
 
Learn how to bypass the middlemen and wholesalers by sourcing on Alibaba! 
﻿Sourcing Courses 101 &amp; 201 - https://marissa-sayers.mykajabi.com/a/2147542513/F2huURQN

Important Links: 

Alibaba Website

Ali Express Website

 
Find and follow Marissa: 

Marissa Mae Sayers on Facebook

Marissa Mae Sayers on Instagram

Sayers Imports Website


Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 13 Nov 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Sourcing Tips on Alibaba with Marissa Sayers</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as Marissa takes us through her process of sourcing products through Alibaba, step by step. You’ll learn what to look for, what to ask for, and what to never, ever compromise on. If you’re ready to source products from overseas, this is a can’t-miss episode. Grab a notebook and pen - you’re going to take a LOT of notes.   </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Stand tall and own your buying power.” 

Is this going to be the year you find new sources for products? Have you been curious about how to order products from overseas manufacturers? Are you wondering what Alibaba is and why so many subscription box owners use it to order products at great prices? 

If any of those sound like you, this episode is for you. Marissa Sayers joined me to take us through the process of ordering products through Alibaba. 

Marissa has a lot of experience sourcing products overseas and actually handles sourcing for my business. She does an incredible job because she is very detail-oriented and knows this process backward and forward.  

Marissa gave us a detailed outline of the steps of sourcing products directly from a manufacturer. 

Search Alibaba.com for products

Narrow your search 

Further filter your search based on delivery options (find out why you should ONLY accept DDP shipping)

Talk to several manufacturer representatives

Order samples (they cost more than you think they should)

Place order

Receive shipment 


Realize this process takes time. Plan for 90-120 days to work through it from start to finish. In other words - Alibaba is not for panic buying! 

It’s important to remember that at the same time you’re vetting a manufacturer, they are vetting you. Coming to them from a place of knowledge will give you confidence. 

Marissa also talked about how you can work with her if you need help sourcing products. She has limited spots available to work with her and gives priority to my people. Make sure you let her know if you’re a podcast listener or member of Launch Your Box.   

As a subscription box owner, you order large quantities of products every month. When you decide to step into this world of overseas sourcing, stand tall and own your buying power! 

Join me for this episode as Marissa takes us through her process of sourcing products through Alibaba, step by step. You’ll learn what to look for, what to ask for, and what to never, ever compromise on. If you’re ready to source products from overseas, this is a can’t-miss episode. Grab a notebook and pen - you’re going to take a LOT of notes.   
 
Learn how to bypass the middlemen and wholesalers by sourcing on Alibaba! 
﻿Sourcing Courses 101 &amp; 201 - https://marissa-sayers.mykajabi.com/a/2147542513/F2huURQN

Important Links: 

Alibaba Website

Ali Express Website

 
Find and follow Marissa: 

Marissa Mae Sayers on Facebook

Marissa Mae Sayers on Instagram

Sayers Imports Website


Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><em>“Stand tall and own your buying power.” </em></p><p><br></p><p>Is this going to be the year you find new sources for products? Have you been curious about how to order products from overseas manufacturers? Are you wondering what Alibaba is and why so many subscription box owners use it to order products at great prices? </p><p><br></p><p>If any of those sound like you, this episode is for you. Marissa Sayers joined me to take us through the process of ordering products through Alibaba. </p><p><br></p><p>Marissa has a lot of experience sourcing products overseas and actually handles sourcing for my business. She does an incredible job because she is very detail-oriented and knows this process backward and forward.  </p><p><br></p><p>Marissa gave us a detailed outline of the steps of sourcing products directly from a manufacturer. </p><ol>
<li>Search Alibaba.com for products</li>
<li>Narrow your search </li>
<li>Further filter your search based on delivery options (find out why you should ONLY accept DDP shipping)</li>
<li>Talk to several manufacturer representatives</li>
<li>Order samples (they cost more than you think they should)</li>
<li>Place order</li>
<li>Receive shipment </li>
</ol><p><br></p><p>Realize this process takes time. Plan for 90-120 days to work through it from start to finish. In other words - Alibaba is not for panic buying! </p><p><br></p><p>It’s important to remember that at the same time you’re vetting a manufacturer, they are vetting you. Coming to them from a place of knowledge will give you confidence. </p><p><br></p><p>Marissa also talked about how you can work with her if you need help sourcing products. She has limited spots available to work with her and gives priority to my people. Make sure you let her know if you’re a podcast listener or member of Launch Your Box.   </p><p><br></p><p>As a subscription box owner, you order large quantities of products every month. When you decide to step into this world of overseas sourcing, stand tall and own your buying power! </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as Marissa takes us through her process of sourcing products through Alibaba, step by step. You’ll learn what to look for, what to ask for, and what to never, ever compromise on. If you’re ready to source products from overseas, this is a can’t-miss episode. Grab a notebook and pen - you’re going to take a LOT of notes.   </p><p> </p><p><strong>Learn how to bypass the middlemen and wholesalers by sourcing on Alibaba! </strong></p><p>﻿Sourcing Courses 101 &amp; 201 - <a href="https://marissa-sayers.mykajabi.com/a/2147542513/F2huURQN">https://marissa-sayers.mykajabi.com/a/2147542513/F2huURQN</a></p><p><br></p><p>Important Links: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.alibaba.com/">Alibaba Website</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.aliexpress.com/">Ali Express Website</a></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Find and follow Marissa: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/marissa.m.sayers">Marissa Mae Sayers on Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/marissamaesayers/">Marissa Mae Sayers on Instagram</a></li>
<li><a href="http://www.sayersimports.com/">Sayers Imports Website</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today!</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2195</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e0e6cbbe-a14d-11ef-bd7e-a34306fe1017]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4915838474.mp3?updated=1731454434" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>174: Holiday Shipping Hacks: Surviving the 4th Quarter</title>
      <description>It’s the 4th quarter—also known as the busiest, craziest time of the year for product-based business owners! You've planned your 4th quarter promotions and products are arriving, but have you thought about the logistics of fulfilling and shipping all those orders? 
In this episode, I share shipping hacks and strategies to help subscription box owners and product-based businesses navigate our busiest quarter… and stay sane doing it! 

Prep Packing &amp; Shipping Supplies Early

Audit your packing and shipping supplies now: tape, labels, boxes, poly mailers, filler. 

Order enough to get you through December.

Plan for the unexpected. 

Establish a dedicated storage space for your extra supplies so your team knows exactly where to find what they need.


Optimize Fulfillment by Prepacking, Prepping, and Batch Packing 

Pre-pack items that will be sold together, like holiday bundles or Black Friday specials.

Reduce friction, eliminate unnecessary steps, and gain efficiency

Implement batch packing by processing similar orders together for a smoother, faster workflow.

Research Shipping Carrier Cut-off Dates &amp; Have Options 

Research carrier cut-off dates and set your own Christmas shipping cut-offs well in advance. 

Overcommunicate! Post these cut-off dates visibly in your social media headers, on your website, and in emails.

Stay flexible and ready to adjust by having multiple shipping options.

Maintain open communication with your drivers to help manage any unexpected delays.

Be Prepared for Increased Customer Service Volume 

Expect an increase in customer service inquiries and be transparent with customers about shipping timelines and potential delays.

Have a contingency plan in place to deal with lost packages, including a policy for replacements or refunds.


The holiday rush can be chaotic, but with these tips, you’ll feel more prepared than ever to tackle Q4. 

Have a shipping manager or team? Have them listen to this episode to boost efficiency and reduce holiday chaos in your shop!

Join me for this episode where I share fulfillment &amp; shipping strategies to help subscription box owners and product-based businesses navigate the busiest, craziest time of year - the 4th quarter. Grab your coffee (or something stronger!) and let’s dive in!

Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

﻿
Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 06 Nov 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Holiday Shipping Hacks: Surviving the 4th Quarter</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>174</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode where I share fulfillment &amp; shipping strategies to help subscription box owners and product-based businesses navigate the busiest, craziest time of year - the 4th quarter. Grab your coffee (or something stronger!) and let’s dive in!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>It’s the 4th quarter—also known as the busiest, craziest time of the year for product-based business owners! You've planned your 4th quarter promotions and products are arriving, but have you thought about the logistics of fulfilling and shipping all those orders? 
In this episode, I share shipping hacks and strategies to help subscription box owners and product-based businesses navigate our busiest quarter… and stay sane doing it! 

Prep Packing &amp; Shipping Supplies Early

Audit your packing and shipping supplies now: tape, labels, boxes, poly mailers, filler. 

Order enough to get you through December.

Plan for the unexpected. 

Establish a dedicated storage space for your extra supplies so your team knows exactly where to find what they need.


Optimize Fulfillment by Prepacking, Prepping, and Batch Packing 

Pre-pack items that will be sold together, like holiday bundles or Black Friday specials.

Reduce friction, eliminate unnecessary steps, and gain efficiency

Implement batch packing by processing similar orders together for a smoother, faster workflow.

Research Shipping Carrier Cut-off Dates &amp; Have Options 

Research carrier cut-off dates and set your own Christmas shipping cut-offs well in advance. 

Overcommunicate! Post these cut-off dates visibly in your social media headers, on your website, and in emails.

Stay flexible and ready to adjust by having multiple shipping options.

Maintain open communication with your drivers to help manage any unexpected delays.

Be Prepared for Increased Customer Service Volume 

Expect an increase in customer service inquiries and be transparent with customers about shipping timelines and potential delays.

Have a contingency plan in place to deal with lost packages, including a policy for replacements or refunds.


The holiday rush can be chaotic, but with these tips, you’ll feel more prepared than ever to tackle Q4. 

Have a shipping manager or team? Have them listen to this episode to boost efficiency and reduce holiday chaos in your shop!

Join me for this episode where I share fulfillment &amp; shipping strategies to help subscription box owners and product-based businesses navigate the busiest, craziest time of year - the 4th quarter. Grab your coffee (or something stronger!) and let’s dive in!

Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

﻿
Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>It’s the 4th quarter—also known as the busiest, craziest time of the year for product-based business owners! You've planned your 4th quarter promotions and products are arriving, but have you thought about the logistics of fulfilling and shipping all those orders? </p><p>In this episode, I share shipping hacks and strategies to help subscription box owners and product-based businesses navigate our busiest quarter… and stay sane doing it! </p><p><br></p><h2>Prep Packing &amp; Shipping Supplies Early</h2><ul>
<li>Audit your packing and shipping supplies now: tape, labels, boxes, poly mailers, filler. </li>
<li>Order enough to get you through December.</li>
<li>Plan for the unexpected. </li>
<li>Establish a dedicated storage space for your extra supplies so your team knows exactly where to find what they need.</li>
</ul><p><br></p><h2>Optimize Fulfillment by Prepacking, Prepping, and Batch Packing </h2><ul>
<li>Pre-pack items that will be sold together, like holiday bundles or Black Friday specials.</li>
<li>Reduce friction, eliminate unnecessary steps, and gain efficiency</li>
<li>Implement batch packing by processing similar orders together for a smoother, faster workflow.</li>
</ul><p>Research Shipping Carrier Cut-off Dates &amp; Have Options </p><ul>
<li>Research carrier cut-off dates and set your own Christmas shipping cut-offs well in advance. </li>
<li>Overcommunicate! Post these cut-off dates visibly in your social media headers, on your website, and in emails.</li>
<li>Stay flexible and ready to adjust by having multiple shipping options.</li>
<li>Maintain open communication with your drivers to help manage any unexpected delays.</li>
</ul><h2>Be Prepared for Increased Customer Service Volume </h2><ul>
<li>Expect an increase in customer service inquiries and be transparent with customers about shipping timelines and potential delays.</li>
<li>Have a contingency plan in place to deal with lost packages, including a policy for replacements or refunds.</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>The holiday rush can be chaotic, but with these tips, you’ll feel more prepared than ever to tackle Q4. </p><p><br></p><p><em>Have a shipping manager or team? Have them listen to this episode to boost efficiency and reduce holiday chaos in your shop!</em></p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode where I share fulfillment &amp; shipping strategies to help subscription box owners and product-based businesses navigate the busiest, craziest time of year - the 4th quarter. Grab your coffee (or something stronger!) and let’s dive in!</p><p><br></p><p>Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!</p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p>﻿</p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1499</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ad436f5a-9a96-11ef-a1dd-3b0fbb9871f1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2110826516.mp3?updated=1730784224" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Leveraging Email Marketing to Make the Most out of Q4</title>
      <description>“More emails equals more sales!” - Sarah Williams 

We’re more than halfway through the 4th quarter. For product sellers, it’s the busiest time of the year. It’s also our best chance to make some serious revenue. You’re probably feeling tired and maybe even overwhelmed. I’m tired, too. Rest when you can and then get to work. There are some things you can do now that will give your 4th quarter sales a major boost.

We create different types of email content during the first three quarters of the year. Email opt-ins with welcome sequences, weekly newsletters, and emails to share blog posts or podcast episodes. We’re serving our audience by providing value. 

The 4th quarter is different. During the 4th quarter, we SERVE our audiences by SELLING. We help them shop. Your customers want to shop — it’s your job to get your products in front of them. 

How can you leverage that email list you’ve spent all year building? 

Increase the frequency of your emails. 

If you’ve been emailing once a week, send two or three each week. If once a month, send at least one email a week. 

Bestseller of the week

Top three gifts for teens, moms, dog lovers, etc. 

New items of the week

Restock alerts 

Facebook LIVE recaps (where you’ve promoted a product)

Make sure all of your emails are product focused. Serve your customers by solving their “what to get” problem by sharing: 

Eliminate decision fatigue. 

Make it easy for them to buy. 

Don’t give your customers too many options. 

Who is this product for? 

Take an everyday item and make it giftable 

Show an image of it folded neatly with a bow around it

Show an image of the product peeking out of a box with a gift tag

Create gift sets or bundles

Focus each email on its giftability.


The key to success is not to overthink it. These emails should be short on copy and get right to the point. Include great images and a clear call to action. Follow up your email with social media posts to match and send a text to your text list! 

Join me for this episode as I share four simple ways you can leverage email marketing to bring more revenue into your business during the 4th quarter. More emails equals more sales. It’s time to get to work! 
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 30 Oct 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Leveraging Email Marketing to Make the Most out of Q4</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as I share four simple ways you can leverage email marketing to bring more revenue into your business during the 4th quarter. More emails equals more sales. It’s time to get to work! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“More emails equals more sales!” - Sarah Williams 

We’re more than halfway through the 4th quarter. For product sellers, it’s the busiest time of the year. It’s also our best chance to make some serious revenue. You’re probably feeling tired and maybe even overwhelmed. I’m tired, too. Rest when you can and then get to work. There are some things you can do now that will give your 4th quarter sales a major boost.

We create different types of email content during the first three quarters of the year. Email opt-ins with welcome sequences, weekly newsletters, and emails to share blog posts or podcast episodes. We’re serving our audience by providing value. 

The 4th quarter is different. During the 4th quarter, we SERVE our audiences by SELLING. We help them shop. Your customers want to shop — it’s your job to get your products in front of them. 

How can you leverage that email list you’ve spent all year building? 

Increase the frequency of your emails. 

If you’ve been emailing once a week, send two or three each week. If once a month, send at least one email a week. 

Bestseller of the week

Top three gifts for teens, moms, dog lovers, etc. 

New items of the week

Restock alerts 

Facebook LIVE recaps (where you’ve promoted a product)

Make sure all of your emails are product focused. Serve your customers by solving their “what to get” problem by sharing: 

Eliminate decision fatigue. 

Make it easy for them to buy. 

Don’t give your customers too many options. 

Who is this product for? 

Take an everyday item and make it giftable 

Show an image of it folded neatly with a bow around it

Show an image of the product peeking out of a box with a gift tag

Create gift sets or bundles

Focus each email on its giftability.


The key to success is not to overthink it. These emails should be short on copy and get right to the point. Include great images and a clear call to action. Follow up your email with social media posts to match and send a text to your text list! 

Join me for this episode as I share four simple ways you can leverage email marketing to bring more revenue into your business during the 4th quarter. More emails equals more sales. It’s time to get to work! 
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“More emails equals more sales!” - Sarah Williams </p><p><br></p><p>We’re more than halfway through the 4th quarter. For product sellers, it’s the busiest time of the year. It’s also our best chance to make some serious revenue. You’re probably feeling tired and maybe even overwhelmed. I’m tired, too. Rest when you can and then get to work. There are some things you can do now that will give your 4th quarter sales a major boost.</p><p><br></p><p>We create different types of email content during the first three quarters of the year. Email opt-ins with welcome sequences, weekly newsletters, and emails to share blog posts or podcast episodes. We’re serving our audience by providing value. </p><p><br></p><p>The 4th quarter is different. During the 4th quarter, we SERVE our audiences by SELLING. We help them shop. Your customers want to shop — it’s your job to get your products in front of them. </p><p><br></p><p>How can you leverage that email list you’ve spent all year building? </p><ul>
<li>Increase the frequency of your emails. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">If you’ve been emailing once a week, send two or three each week. If once a month, send at least one email a week. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Bestseller of the week</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Top three gifts for teens, moms, dog lovers, etc. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">New items of the week</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Restock alerts </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Facebook LIVE recaps (where you’ve promoted a product)</li>
<li>Make sure all of your emails are product focused. Serve your customers by solving their “what to get” problem by sharing: </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Eliminate decision fatigue. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Make it easy for them to buy. </li>
<li>Don’t give your customers too many options. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Who is this product for? </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Take an everyday item and make it giftable </li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Show an image of it folded neatly with a bow around it</li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Show an image of the product peeking out of a box with a gift tag</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Create gift sets or bundles</li>
<li>Focus each email on its giftability.</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>The key to success is not to overthink it. These emails should be short on copy and get right to the point. Include great images and a clear call to action. Follow up your email with social media posts to match and send a text to your text list! </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as I share four simple ways you can leverage email marketing to bring more revenue into your business during the 4th quarter. More emails equals more sales. It’s time to get to work! </p><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1127</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a8110320-9637-11ef-a28e-2bcaa2ffdfb2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2046815679.mp3?updated=1730235427" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Maximize Your 4th Quarter Sales</title>
      <description>The 4th Quarter is here! It’s the busiest shopping season of the year and a can’t-miss opportunity to bring more revenue into your subscription box business. If you haven’t started preparing for your 4th quarter promotions, it’s time to start. 

This episode is all about maximizing your 4th quarter sales by tapping into your existing audience and subscriber base.

I’m sharing five promotions you can run this season. You’ll serve your audience by making gift-giving easy and bring more revenue into your business. 

1 - The Holiday Gift Box
The holiday gift box is not one of your regular subscription boxes. Instead, it’s a one-time box that your audience can buy for someone on their gift list… or even for themselves (we encourage this!) 

A holiday box is a great way to increase your subscriber base. Make it easy for a holiday box recipient to become a subscriber. 

Presale these boxes in October or early November to allow for as many sales as possible and to give you time to get inventory in, pack, and ship well before holiday shipping deadlines. 

I pre-sell holiday gift boxes every year. My audience knows to expect them and they sell out every year! 

2 - New Subscriber Launch – Special Promotion
Plan this launch in October or early November. Grab people’s attention before they get too far into the noise of holiday shopping for others – when they’re still shopping for themselves. 
Use this launch to generate FOMO about your upcoming boxes! Add a free bonus gift to get your audience excited and help you gain subscribers before the end of the year. 

3 - Gift Subscriptions
This is one of the easiest promotions you can run. I run a gift subscription promotion once a year – around Black Friday. 

I add excitement and fun by offering a free month for a 6-month subscription or 2 free months for a 12-month subscription! Gift subscriptions bring revenue in upfront and fulfillment doesn’t start until after the first of the year when the holiday craziness is over! 

4 - Curated Boxes
Having excess inventory is the nature of the beast when you’re a subscription box owner. Put that inventory to use by curating new one-time boxes. These boxes are perfect for gift-giving. Remember, this is your opportunity to serve your audience by making gift-giving easy! 

Give these boxes new names and get creative! Remember, you’re not ordering new items for these boxes, you’re simply curating a new experience using items you already have. 

5 - Mystery Boxes
Mystery boxes are a great way to get rid of excess inventory! Don’t worry about careful curation, these boxes are about packing them full of value and making it fun for your customers. They’re also about earning extra revenue and clearing out inventory that’s taking up extra space so you don’t carry it into the new year.  
 
If you haven’t run multiple 4th quarter promotions in the past, don’t try to do all five! Instead, choose 2-3 and start planning now. These promotions are a great way to maximize sales during this most important time of the year. 

Join me for this episode as I walk you through five promotions subscription box owners can run to maximize 4th quarter sales. 

Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 23 Oct 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Maximize Your 4th Quarter Sales</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>This episode is all about maximizing your 4th quarter sales by tapping into your existing audience and subscriber base.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>The 4th Quarter is here! It’s the busiest shopping season of the year and a can’t-miss opportunity to bring more revenue into your subscription box business. If you haven’t started preparing for your 4th quarter promotions, it’s time to start. 

This episode is all about maximizing your 4th quarter sales by tapping into your existing audience and subscriber base.

I’m sharing five promotions you can run this season. You’ll serve your audience by making gift-giving easy and bring more revenue into your business. 

1 - The Holiday Gift Box
The holiday gift box is not one of your regular subscription boxes. Instead, it’s a one-time box that your audience can buy for someone on their gift list… or even for themselves (we encourage this!) 

A holiday box is a great way to increase your subscriber base. Make it easy for a holiday box recipient to become a subscriber. 

Presale these boxes in October or early November to allow for as many sales as possible and to give you time to get inventory in, pack, and ship well before holiday shipping deadlines. 

I pre-sell holiday gift boxes every year. My audience knows to expect them and they sell out every year! 

2 - New Subscriber Launch – Special Promotion
Plan this launch in October or early November. Grab people’s attention before they get too far into the noise of holiday shopping for others – when they’re still shopping for themselves. 
Use this launch to generate FOMO about your upcoming boxes! Add a free bonus gift to get your audience excited and help you gain subscribers before the end of the year. 

3 - Gift Subscriptions
This is one of the easiest promotions you can run. I run a gift subscription promotion once a year – around Black Friday. 

I add excitement and fun by offering a free month for a 6-month subscription or 2 free months for a 12-month subscription! Gift subscriptions bring revenue in upfront and fulfillment doesn’t start until after the first of the year when the holiday craziness is over! 

4 - Curated Boxes
Having excess inventory is the nature of the beast when you’re a subscription box owner. Put that inventory to use by curating new one-time boxes. These boxes are perfect for gift-giving. Remember, this is your opportunity to serve your audience by making gift-giving easy! 

Give these boxes new names and get creative! Remember, you’re not ordering new items for these boxes, you’re simply curating a new experience using items you already have. 

5 - Mystery Boxes
Mystery boxes are a great way to get rid of excess inventory! Don’t worry about careful curation, these boxes are about packing them full of value and making it fun for your customers. They’re also about earning extra revenue and clearing out inventory that’s taking up extra space so you don’t carry it into the new year.  
 
If you haven’t run multiple 4th quarter promotions in the past, don’t try to do all five! Instead, choose 2-3 and start planning now. These promotions are a great way to maximize sales during this most important time of the year. 

Join me for this episode as I walk you through five promotions subscription box owners can run to maximize 4th quarter sales. 

Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The 4th Quarter is here! It’s the busiest shopping season of the year and a can’t-miss opportunity to bring more revenue into your subscription box business. If you haven’t started preparing for your 4th quarter promotions, it’s time to start. </p><p><br></p><p>This episode is all about maximizing your 4th quarter sales by tapping into your existing audience and subscriber base.</p><p><br></p><p>I’m sharing five promotions you can run this season. You’ll serve your audience by making gift-giving easy <em>and </em>bring more revenue into your business. </p><p><br></p><h2>1 - The Holiday Gift Box</h2><p>The holiday gift box is not one of your regular subscription boxes. Instead, it’s a one-time box that your audience can buy for someone on their gift list… or even for themselves (we encourage this!) </p><p><br></p><p>A holiday box is a great way to increase your subscriber base. Make it easy for a holiday box recipient to become a subscriber. </p><p><br></p><p>Presale these boxes in October or early November to allow for as many sales as possible and to give you time to get inventory in, pack, and ship well before holiday shipping deadlines. </p><p><br></p><p>I pre-sell holiday gift boxes every year. My audience knows to expect them and they sell out every year! </p><p><br></p><h2>2 - New Subscriber Launch – Special Promotion</h2><p>Plan this launch in October or early November. Grab people’s attention before they get too far into the noise of holiday shopping for others – when they’re still shopping for themselves. </p><p>Use this launch to generate FOMO about your upcoming boxes! Add a free bonus gift to get your audience excited and help you gain subscribers before the end of the year. </p><p><br></p><p>3 - Gift Subscriptions</p><p>This is one of the easiest promotions you can run. I run a gift subscription promotion once a year – around Black Friday. </p><p><br></p><p>I add excitement and fun by offering a free month for a 6-month subscription or 2 free months for a 12-month subscription! Gift subscriptions bring revenue in upfront and fulfillment doesn’t start until after the first of the year when the holiday craziness is over! </p><p><br></p><p>4 - Curated Boxes</p><p>Having excess inventory is the nature of the beast when you’re a subscription box owner. Put that inventory to use by curating new one-time boxes. These boxes are perfect for gift-giving. Remember, this is your opportunity to serve your audience by making gift-giving easy! </p><p><br></p><p>Give these boxes new names and get creative! Remember, you’re not ordering new items for these boxes, you’re simply curating a new experience using items you already have. </p><p><br></p><p>5 - Mystery Boxes</p><p>Mystery boxes are a great way to get rid of excess inventory! Don’t worry about careful curation, these boxes are about packing them full of value and making it fun for your customers. They’re also about earning extra revenue and clearing out inventory that’s taking up extra space so you don’t carry it into the new year.  </p><p> </p><p>If you haven’t run multiple 4th quarter promotions in the past, don’t try to do all five! Instead, choose 2-3 and start planning now. These promotions are a great way to maximize sales during this most important time of the year. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as I walk you through five promotions subscription box owners can run to maximize 4th quarter sales. </p><p><br></p><p>Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!</p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1665</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[61d3cfe0-8ff8-11ef-9101-130f4616a764]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2964218457.mp3?updated=1729548544" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>173: Is It Time for a Commercial Space?</title>
      <description>“If it doesn’t scare you, you’re not dreaming big enough.” - Sarah Williams

Most of us launch our subscription box businesses from a spare bedroom, the garage, or even the kitchen table. But when do you make the decision to move out of the house and into your own commercial space? 

In this episode, we’re talking with Cheryl Ham of Hypnotic Yarn. She’s been on the show in the past talking about challenges she faced at different stages of growth in her subscription box business. 

While still managing a full-time career in high-pressure sales, Cheryl started selling hand-dyed wool via an e-commerce store. She added a subscription box, Yarnable, and grew that side of her business slowly and steadily until she reached 300 subscribers. 

Launching the Launch Your Box Way &amp; Hitting 700 Subscribers 
Cheryl discovered Launch Your Box, joined, and jumped right in. When she launched again – following the launch plan I teach inside the group – something amazing happened. Cheryl more than doubled her subscribers, gaining 400 in less than 24 hours! 

Moving Her Subscription Box Out of Her Home
By this point, Cheryl’s subscription box had taken over her house. She moved into a new commercial space and hired some team members. Her subscription box business continued to grow, reaching 1600 subscribers through increased retention and quarterly launches. 

In less than two years, Cheryl had outgrown that commercial space. Again, she needed more space. The problem? Cheryl couldn’t find a commercial space to meet her needs. 

Bigger Space Leads to New Challenges
Cheryl finally found a new space. A space so big it scared her. She knew she needed a lot more space, but 8,000 square feet? She found herself terrified to make that jump until she had a realization. Scary doesn’t always mean bad. 

Cheryl talked about how every move has meant learning new processes. Inventory management and fulfillment look different in the new, bigger space than in the smaller commercial space or in her home. 

Hiring has also been a challenge this year. Cheryl lost 3 team members this past spring and struggled to backfill those positions until after summer. Once she sought out new avenues for hiring, she was able to hire 2 new team members. 

Continued Growth and Focus on Creating Experiences 
What’s next for Hypnotic Yarn, Yarnable, and Cheryl? They’re focused on growing the non-subscription side of the business using lessons learned from Yarnable. Cheryl knows the importance of creating an experience for her subscribers and uses that knowledge to create experiences for customers who purchase one-off kits. 

Focusing on non-subscription sales allows Cheryl to maximize off-hours and weeks when she and her team are not as busy with subscriptions. It is also a great way to convert non-subscribers! 


Episode 16 - Afraid of Having 700 Subscribers?
Episode 105 - Scaling Your Subscription Box Business

Find and follow Cheryl: 


Hypnotic Yarn on Facebook 

Hypnotic Yarn on Instagram

Hypnotic Yarn Website


Join me in all the places:  

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 16 Oct 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Is It Time for a Commercial Space?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>173</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as Cheryl and I talk about the challenges she faced as her subscription box business grew and why subscription box owners need to get comfortable with being uncomfortable.  </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“If it doesn’t scare you, you’re not dreaming big enough.” - Sarah Williams

Most of us launch our subscription box businesses from a spare bedroom, the garage, or even the kitchen table. But when do you make the decision to move out of the house and into your own commercial space? 

In this episode, we’re talking with Cheryl Ham of Hypnotic Yarn. She’s been on the show in the past talking about challenges she faced at different stages of growth in her subscription box business. 

While still managing a full-time career in high-pressure sales, Cheryl started selling hand-dyed wool via an e-commerce store. She added a subscription box, Yarnable, and grew that side of her business slowly and steadily until she reached 300 subscribers. 

Launching the Launch Your Box Way &amp; Hitting 700 Subscribers 
Cheryl discovered Launch Your Box, joined, and jumped right in. When she launched again – following the launch plan I teach inside the group – something amazing happened. Cheryl more than doubled her subscribers, gaining 400 in less than 24 hours! 

Moving Her Subscription Box Out of Her Home
By this point, Cheryl’s subscription box had taken over her house. She moved into a new commercial space and hired some team members. Her subscription box business continued to grow, reaching 1600 subscribers through increased retention and quarterly launches. 

In less than two years, Cheryl had outgrown that commercial space. Again, she needed more space. The problem? Cheryl couldn’t find a commercial space to meet her needs. 

Bigger Space Leads to New Challenges
Cheryl finally found a new space. A space so big it scared her. She knew she needed a lot more space, but 8,000 square feet? She found herself terrified to make that jump until she had a realization. Scary doesn’t always mean bad. 

Cheryl talked about how every move has meant learning new processes. Inventory management and fulfillment look different in the new, bigger space than in the smaller commercial space or in her home. 

Hiring has also been a challenge this year. Cheryl lost 3 team members this past spring and struggled to backfill those positions until after summer. Once she sought out new avenues for hiring, she was able to hire 2 new team members. 

Continued Growth and Focus on Creating Experiences 
What’s next for Hypnotic Yarn, Yarnable, and Cheryl? They’re focused on growing the non-subscription side of the business using lessons learned from Yarnable. Cheryl knows the importance of creating an experience for her subscribers and uses that knowledge to create experiences for customers who purchase one-off kits. 

Focusing on non-subscription sales allows Cheryl to maximize off-hours and weeks when she and her team are not as busy with subscriptions. It is also a great way to convert non-subscribers! 


Episode 16 - Afraid of Having 700 Subscribers?
Episode 105 - Scaling Your Subscription Box Business

Find and follow Cheryl: 


Hypnotic Yarn on Facebook 

Hypnotic Yarn on Instagram

Hypnotic Yarn Website


Join me in all the places:  

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“If it doesn’t scare you, you’re not dreaming big enough.” - Sarah Williams</p><p><br></p><p>Most of us launch our subscription box businesses from a spare bedroom, the garage, or even the kitchen table. But when do you make the decision to move out of the house and into your own commercial space? </p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, we’re talking with Cheryl Ham of Hypnotic Yarn. She’s been on the show in the past talking about challenges she faced at different stages of growth in her subscription box business. </p><p><br></p><p>While still managing a full-time career in high-pressure sales, Cheryl started selling hand-dyed wool via an e-commerce store. She added a subscription box, Yarnable, and grew that side of her business slowly and steadily until she reached 300 subscribers. </p><p><br></p><h3>Launching the Launch Your Box Way &amp; Hitting 700 Subscribers </h3><p>Cheryl discovered Launch Your Box, joined, and jumped right in. When she launched again – following the launch plan I teach inside the group – something amazing happened. Cheryl more than doubled her subscribers, gaining 400 in less than 24 hours! </p><p><br></p><h3>Moving Her Subscription Box Out of Her Home</h3><p>By this point, Cheryl’s subscription box had taken over her house. She moved into a new commercial space and hired some team members. Her subscription box business continued to grow, reaching 1600 subscribers through increased retention and quarterly launches. </p><p><br></p><p>In less than two years, Cheryl had outgrown that commercial space. Again, she needed more space. The problem? Cheryl couldn’t find a commercial space to meet her needs. </p><p><br></p><h3>Bigger Space Leads to New Challenges</h3><p>Cheryl finally found a new space. A space so big it scared her. She knew she needed a lot more space, but 8,000 square feet? She found herself terrified to make that jump until she had a realization. <em>Scary doesn’t always mean bad. </em></p><p><br></p><p>Cheryl talked about how every move has meant learning new processes. Inventory management and fulfillment look different in the new, bigger space than in the smaller commercial space or in her home. </p><p><br></p><p>Hiring has also been a challenge this year. Cheryl lost 3 team members this past spring and struggled to backfill those positions until after summer. Once she sought out new avenues for hiring, she was able to hire 2 new team members. </p><p><br></p><h3>Continued Growth and Focus on Creating Experiences </h3><p>What’s next for Hypnotic Yarn, Yarnable, and Cheryl? They’re focused on growing the non-subscription side of the business using lessons learned from Yarnable. Cheryl knows the importance of creating an experience for her subscribers and uses that knowledge to create experiences for customers who purchase one-off kits. </p><p><br></p><p>Focusing on non-subscription sales allows Cheryl to maximize off-hours and weeks when she and her team are not as busy with subscriptions. It is also a great way to convert non-subscribers! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-16">Episode 16 - Afraid of Having 700 Subscribers?</a></p><p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/scaling-your-subscription-box-business-ep-105">Episode 105 - Scaling Your Subscription Box Business</a></p><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Cheryl: </p><ul>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/HypnoticYarn">Hypnotic Yarn on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/hypnoticyarn/">Hypnotic Yarn on Instagram</a></li>
<li><a href="https://hypnoticyarn.com/">Hypnotic Yarn Website</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places:  </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1836</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1c707a62-89fd-11ef-bf8c-5f8cdb4ce7c6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3011563855.mp3?updated=1728890868" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How I Generated $20k in Extra Revenue with a Holiday Gift Box</title>
      <description>Every year for the last five years I’ve sold a Holiday Gift Box. This year was no different. What was different was that my Holiday Gift Box sold out in only four days! And it brought $20,000 in extra revenue into my business. 

Should you offer a Holiday Gift Box to your audience? Yes! If you already have a subscription box, you should absolutely offer a Holiday Gift Box. And if you have an audience but haven’t launched your subscription box yet, you should also offer a Holiday Gift Box. 

Many members of Launch Your Box have used a Holiday Gift Box for proof of concept before launching. Members like Nicole who launched a one-time holiday box for guinea pig owners. When it was a HUGE hit, she knew she could launch her subscription box with confidence. She now has hundreds and hundreds of monthly subscribers and won a major subscription box industry award earlier this year. 

My process for launching a one-time Holiday Gift Box was simple and it started before I had any idea what I was going to put in the box: 


I set up a waitlist page in September.

I set up a waitlist in my text app in September. 

I built up excitement that my Holiday Gift Box was coming and drove people to the waitlist. 

One day before the launch I sent one email to the waitlist and one text to the text waitlist offering them first dibs. 

Launch day started with a LIVE during which I generated feelings of: 

I started running ads on launch day. 

I sent one email to my entire email list. 

I sent one text to my entire text list. 

I posted twice on social media about the box. 

I changed my Facebook header. 


By the end of day one, I had sold over half the boxes. 

On day two, I resent the email to non openers and posted about the boxes on social media twice. 

By day three, I only had 100 boxes left. I sent a last chance email to any non openers who hadn’t purchased and posted on social media once. 

On day four - the last day of the launch - I mentioned the Holiday Gift Box on a LIVE and posted about it once. 


I sold out of all my Holiday Gift Boxes on day four! Oh, and I did all of this without having any product in hand. 

Join me for this episode as I share what a Holiday Gift Box can do for your business and walk you through my simple, four-day Holiday Gift Box launch plan. 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 09 Oct 2024 09:10:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How I Generated $20k in Extra Revenue with a Holiday Gift Box</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle></itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Every year for the last five years I’ve sold a Holiday Gift Box. This year was no different. What was different was that my Holiday Gift Box sold out in only four days! And it brought $20,000 in extra revenue into my business. 

Should you offer a Holiday Gift Box to your audience? Yes! If you already have a subscription box, you should absolutely offer a Holiday Gift Box. And if you have an audience but haven’t launched your subscription box yet, you should also offer a Holiday Gift Box. 

Many members of Launch Your Box have used a Holiday Gift Box for proof of concept before launching. Members like Nicole who launched a one-time holiday box for guinea pig owners. When it was a HUGE hit, she knew she could launch her subscription box with confidence. She now has hundreds and hundreds of monthly subscribers and won a major subscription box industry award earlier this year. 

My process for launching a one-time Holiday Gift Box was simple and it started before I had any idea what I was going to put in the box: 


I set up a waitlist page in September.

I set up a waitlist in my text app in September. 

I built up excitement that my Holiday Gift Box was coming and drove people to the waitlist. 

One day before the launch I sent one email to the waitlist and one text to the text waitlist offering them first dibs. 

Launch day started with a LIVE during which I generated feelings of: 

I started running ads on launch day. 

I sent one email to my entire email list. 

I sent one text to my entire text list. 

I posted twice on social media about the box. 

I changed my Facebook header. 


By the end of day one, I had sold over half the boxes. 

On day two, I resent the email to non openers and posted about the boxes on social media twice. 

By day three, I only had 100 boxes left. I sent a last chance email to any non openers who hadn’t purchased and posted on social media once. 

On day four - the last day of the launch - I mentioned the Holiday Gift Box on a LIVE and posted about it once. 


I sold out of all my Holiday Gift Boxes on day four! Oh, and I did all of this without having any product in hand. 

Join me for this episode as I share what a Holiday Gift Box can do for your business and walk you through my simple, four-day Holiday Gift Box launch plan. 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Every year for the last five years I’ve sold a Holiday Gift Box. This year was no different. What was different was that my Holiday Gift Box sold out in only four days! And it brought $20,000 in extra revenue into my business. </p><p><br></p><p>Should you offer a Holiday Gift Box to your audience? Yes! If you already have a subscription box, you should absolutely offer a Holiday Gift Box. And if you have an audience but haven’t launched your subscription box yet, you should also offer a Holiday Gift Box. </p><p><br></p><p>Many members of Launch Your Box have used a Holiday Gift Box for proof of concept before launching. Members like Nicole who launched a one-time holiday box for guinea pig owners. When it was a HUGE hit, she knew she could launch her subscription box with confidence. She now has hundreds and hundreds of monthly subscribers and won a major subscription box industry award earlier this year. </p><p><br></p><p>My process for launching a one-time Holiday Gift Box was simple and it started before I had any idea what I was going to put in the box: </p><p><br></p><ul>
<li>I set up a waitlist page in September.</li>
<li>I set up a waitlist in my text app in September. </li>
<li>I built up excitement that my Holiday Gift Box was coming and drove people to the waitlist. </li>
<li>One day before the launch I sent one email to the waitlist and one text to the text waitlist offering them first dibs. </li>
<li>Launch day started with a LIVE during which I generated feelings of: </li>
<li>I started running ads on launch day. </li>
<li>I sent one email to my entire email list. </li>
<li>I sent one text to my entire text list. </li>
<li>I posted twice on social media about the box. </li>
<li>I changed my Facebook header. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p><em>By the end of day one, I had sold over half the boxes.</em> </p><ul>
<li>On day two, I resent the email to non openers and posted about the boxes on social media twice. </li>
<li>By day three, I only had 100 boxes left. I sent a last chance email to any non openers who hadn’t purchased and posted on social media once. </li>
<li>On day four - the last day of the launch - I mentioned the Holiday Gift Box on a LIVE and posted about it once. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>I sold out of all my Holiday Gift Boxes on day four! Oh, and I did all of this without having any product in hand. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as I share what a Holiday Gift Box can do for your business and walk you through my simple, four-day Holiday Gift Box launch plan. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1733</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0e6a0086-85c6-11ef-ba35-b7434511f872]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1247445259.mp3?updated=1728427417" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>172: Promoting Your Holiday Box Using Facebook Ads with Josh Coffy</title>
      <description>Launching a one-time holiday box in the 4th quarter is good business. Doing it without running ads isn’t. That’s why I brought my friend and colleague Josh Coffy of The Ecommerce Alley to talk with us. 

Listen to episode 169 for more about why YOU should consider a one-time holiday box. 

Do you need to run Facebook Ads? 
You should always be building your audience organically. And you should get your audience excited about your one-time holiday boxes organically. But, if you want to maximize the sale of your one-time holiday boxes, you need to use ads. 

Josh is an expert on Ecommerce marketing and Meta ads. He says that whether it’s now or later, you HAVE to figure out advertising. In order to predictably attract new customers, you have to advertise. 

I shared my favorite ads analogy. Ads aren’t the base of your marketing strategy. Your base is all of the organic audience building you do. Consistently showing up on social media, engaging with your audience… And ads? They are likee lighter fluid. They take what you’ve already built and make it burn hotter and faster. 

Why run Facebook Ads in the 4th Quarter? 
In Q4, people are buying like no other time of the year. Take advantage of the momentum Q4 naturally gives you. 
Josh talked about the types of ads you can/should run: 

Facebook Ads Explained  
Josh had even more recommendations including running purchase-based campaigns and keeping it simple. Start slow and increase your ads budget as sales come in. 

Josh walked us through how he would build a campaign for a one-time holiday box no matter what your budget is. He explained “return on ad spend,” what is realistic to expect, and what you need to spend to get to the desired number of box sales. 

Subscription box owners must manage their expectations and remove emotion (which is hard). Josh reminded us that marketing is a mathematical equation, not an emotional decision. Ads require a great deal of mental fortitude. 

Josh also shared that “ad-dy ads” are working right now. Customers are responding to ads that look like ads. 

Getting in Front of More People 
As E-commerce business owners, our goal every day is to get in front of more people. As subscription box owners who face cancellations each month as a reality of doing business, growth depends on getting in front of more people. 

I asked Josh what advice he had for someone who has never run an ad. He said it might feel like Mt. Everest in front of you. After all, Meta ads can be confusing and expensive. But the only way to get to the top is to start climbing. It’s going to be scary but just do it. Start slow and small… but do it. 

Join me for this episode as Josh and I nerd out on all things Facebook Ads and how you can use them to maximize sales of your one-time holiday box! 

Episode 169 - A One-Time Holiday Box Can Validate Your Subscription Box Idea

Find and follow Josh: 

The Ecommerce Alley on Facebook


The Ecommerce Alley Podcast  

Josh Coffy on Instagram


Join me in all the places:  

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 02 Oct 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Promoting Your Holiday Box Using Facebook Ads with Josh Coffy</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>172</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Launching a one-time holiday box in the 4th quarter is good business. Doing it without running ads isn’t. That’s why I brought my friend and colleague Josh Coffy of The Ecommerce Alley to talk with us. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Launching a one-time holiday box in the 4th quarter is good business. Doing it without running ads isn’t. That’s why I brought my friend and colleague Josh Coffy of The Ecommerce Alley to talk with us. 

Listen to episode 169 for more about why YOU should consider a one-time holiday box. 

Do you need to run Facebook Ads? 
You should always be building your audience organically. And you should get your audience excited about your one-time holiday boxes organically. But, if you want to maximize the sale of your one-time holiday boxes, you need to use ads. 

Josh is an expert on Ecommerce marketing and Meta ads. He says that whether it’s now or later, you HAVE to figure out advertising. In order to predictably attract new customers, you have to advertise. 

I shared my favorite ads analogy. Ads aren’t the base of your marketing strategy. Your base is all of the organic audience building you do. Consistently showing up on social media, engaging with your audience… And ads? They are likee lighter fluid. They take what you’ve already built and make it burn hotter and faster. 

Why run Facebook Ads in the 4th Quarter? 
In Q4, people are buying like no other time of the year. Take advantage of the momentum Q4 naturally gives you. 
Josh talked about the types of ads you can/should run: 

Facebook Ads Explained  
Josh had even more recommendations including running purchase-based campaigns and keeping it simple. Start slow and increase your ads budget as sales come in. 

Josh walked us through how he would build a campaign for a one-time holiday box no matter what your budget is. He explained “return on ad spend,” what is realistic to expect, and what you need to spend to get to the desired number of box sales. 

Subscription box owners must manage their expectations and remove emotion (which is hard). Josh reminded us that marketing is a mathematical equation, not an emotional decision. Ads require a great deal of mental fortitude. 

Josh also shared that “ad-dy ads” are working right now. Customers are responding to ads that look like ads. 

Getting in Front of More People 
As E-commerce business owners, our goal every day is to get in front of more people. As subscription box owners who face cancellations each month as a reality of doing business, growth depends on getting in front of more people. 

I asked Josh what advice he had for someone who has never run an ad. He said it might feel like Mt. Everest in front of you. After all, Meta ads can be confusing and expensive. But the only way to get to the top is to start climbing. It’s going to be scary but just do it. Start slow and small… but do it. 

Join me for this episode as Josh and I nerd out on all things Facebook Ads and how you can use them to maximize sales of your one-time holiday box! 

Episode 169 - A One-Time Holiday Box Can Validate Your Subscription Box Idea

Find and follow Josh: 

The Ecommerce Alley on Facebook


The Ecommerce Alley Podcast  

Josh Coffy on Instagram


Join me in all the places:  

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Launching a one-time holiday box in the 4th quarter is good business. Doing it without running ads isn’t. That’s why I brought my friend and colleague Josh Coffy of The Ecommerce Alley to talk with us. </p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/how-a-one-time-holiday-box-can-validate-your-subscription-box-idea-ep-169"><em>Listen to episode 169</em></a><em> for more about why YOU should consider a one-time holiday box. </em></p><p><br></p><h3>Do you need to run Facebook Ads? </h3><p>You should always be building your audience organically. And you should get your audience excited about your one-time holiday boxes organically. But, if you want to maximize the sale of your one-time holiday boxes, you need to use ads. </p><p><br></p><p>Josh is an expert on Ecommerce marketing and Meta ads. He says that whether it’s now or later, you HAVE to figure out advertising. In order to predictably attract new customers, you have to advertise. </p><p><br></p><p>I shared my favorite ads analogy. Ads aren’t the base of your marketing strategy. Your base is all of the organic audience building you do. Consistently showing up on social media, engaging with your audience… And ads? They are likee lighter fluid. They take what you’ve already built and make it burn hotter and faster. </p><p><br></p><h3>Why run Facebook Ads in the 4th Quarter? </h3><p>In Q4, people are buying like no other time of the year. Take advantage of the momentum Q4 naturally gives you. </p><p>Josh talked about the types of ads you can/should run: </p><p><br></p><h3>Facebook Ads Explained  </h3><p>Josh had even more recommendations including running purchase-based campaigns and keeping it simple. Start slow and increase your ads budget as sales come in. </p><p><br></p><p>Josh walked us through how he would build a campaign for a one-time holiday box no matter what your budget is. He explained “return on ad spend,” what is realistic to expect, and what you need to spend to get to the desired number of box sales. </p><p><br></p><p>Subscription box owners must manage their expectations and remove emotion (which is hard). Josh reminded us that marketing is a mathematical equation, not an emotional decision. Ads require a great deal of mental fortitude. </p><p><br></p><p>Josh also shared that “ad-dy ads” are working right now. Customers are responding to ads that look like ads. </p><p><br></p><h3>Getting in Front of More People </h3><p>As E-commerce business owners, our goal every day is to get in front of more people. As subscription box owners who face cancellations each month as a reality of doing business, growth depends on getting in front of more people. </p><p><br></p><p>I asked Josh what advice he had for someone who has never run an ad. He said it might feel like Mt. Everest in front of you. After all, Meta ads can be confusing and expensive. But the only way to get to the top is to start climbing. It’s going to be scary but just do it. Start slow and small… but do it. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as Josh and I nerd out on all things Facebook Ads and how you can use them to maximize sales of your one-time holiday box! </p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/how-a-one-time-holiday-box-can-validate-your-subscription-box-idea-ep-169">Episode 169 - A One-Time Holiday Box Can Validate Your Subscription Box Idea</a></p><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Josh: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/groups/ecommercealley">The Ecommerce Alley on Facebook</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/the-ecommerce-alley/id1598918721">The Ecommerce Alley Podcast</a>  </li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/joshcoffy/">Josh Coffy on Instagram</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places:  </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2795</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f348f380-803d-11ef-95d0-cfd39dbb32ad]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7193352757.mp3?updated=1727819207" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>171: 5 Ways to Build Your Audience Consistently</title>
      <description>Audience building is the key to a successful subscription box launch. It’s also the key to the growth and sustainability of your subscription box business. In today’s episode, we’re talking about 5 ways to build an audience for each stage of the subscription box journey. 

A reality of a subscription box is that each month will also bring cancellations. They’re simply a part of doing business. And the only way to continue to grow your subscription box business is to continue to grow your audience, to get in front of new people and convert some of those people into subscribers. 

Focusing on these 5 things consistently is going to help you grow your audience – and you need to grow your audience to grow your business. 

5 Audience Building Steps for New Subscription Box Businesses
If you’re brand new and don’t have an audience yet, you need to spend time building an audience. I say it all the time. You can’t have a successful launch if you’re launching to no one! 

Building social media content - get your social pages going and build content on those pages. Get a minimum of 10 posts up right away. See 10 Post Ideas When Starting Your Business  Get super consistent. Post daily and work up to twice a day. 
Share on your personal profile - share from your business page onto your personal page. People in your personal network are part of the audience you’ve already built. Let them help you expand your reach. 
Set up a page like ad - these ads are simply an introduction to you and what you do. People simply click the thumbs up and then they’re following your business page. This pushes you in front of people you’d never get in front of. Launch Your Box members, find the training inside the “Building Your Audience” module. 
Video - short video and LIVEs - Let your audience get to know you.  Listen to episode 170 to learn how Tracey Phillips built an amazing audience of over 100,000 people by consistently doing LIVE videos. 
Set up your email CRM - part of building your audience is building your email list. Our favorite email CRM is Klaviyo. 

5 Audience Building Steps for Established Subscription Box Businesses
If you are selling products, actively building an audience, or already have a subscription box, these 5 steps are for you. Make these a habit. You should be doing them all year round.



Run a subscription giveaway - do one at least once a year. Launch Your Box members, find the training inside the “Building Your Audience” module.



Create a lead magnet for your ideal customer - build your email list with a lead magnet! This is typically a digital item you give away for free in exchange for someone’s email. Every business needs a lead magnet and should be running one year-round. Get ideas for email opt-in freebies.  



Run ads - run three types of ads year-round: lead magnet ads, page like ads, product ads. Every legit business needs a marketing budget. You need to run ads. Ads are the best way to get in front of cold audiences. 


Go LIVE and connect with your audience regularly - get consistent and put it on your calendar so your audience knows when to find you and you are held accountable. 


Create a consistent social media plan - create a template for posts, a plan for video, and a schedule for switching out ads. 


10 Post Ideas When Starting Your Business 
Episode 170 of The Launch Your Box Podcast
Downloadable Email Opt-In Freebie Ideas

* These show notes contain affiliate/referral links. I could make a commission at no charge to you if you purchase my recommended products.  Please read my disclosure and privacy policy HERE.

Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 25 Sep 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>5 Ways to Build Your Audience Consistently</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode to get a five-step audience-building plan you can implement whether you have a brand-new or established business!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Audience building is the key to a successful subscription box launch. It’s also the key to the growth and sustainability of your subscription box business. In today’s episode, we’re talking about 5 ways to build an audience for each stage of the subscription box journey. 

A reality of a subscription box is that each month will also bring cancellations. They’re simply a part of doing business. And the only way to continue to grow your subscription box business is to continue to grow your audience, to get in front of new people and convert some of those people into subscribers. 

Focusing on these 5 things consistently is going to help you grow your audience – and you need to grow your audience to grow your business. 

5 Audience Building Steps for New Subscription Box Businesses
If you’re brand new and don’t have an audience yet, you need to spend time building an audience. I say it all the time. You can’t have a successful launch if you’re launching to no one! 

Building social media content - get your social pages going and build content on those pages. Get a minimum of 10 posts up right away. See 10 Post Ideas When Starting Your Business  Get super consistent. Post daily and work up to twice a day. 
Share on your personal profile - share from your business page onto your personal page. People in your personal network are part of the audience you’ve already built. Let them help you expand your reach. 
Set up a page like ad - these ads are simply an introduction to you and what you do. People simply click the thumbs up and then they’re following your business page. This pushes you in front of people you’d never get in front of. Launch Your Box members, find the training inside the “Building Your Audience” module. 
Video - short video and LIVEs - Let your audience get to know you.  Listen to episode 170 to learn how Tracey Phillips built an amazing audience of over 100,000 people by consistently doing LIVE videos. 
Set up your email CRM - part of building your audience is building your email list. Our favorite email CRM is Klaviyo. 

5 Audience Building Steps for Established Subscription Box Businesses
If you are selling products, actively building an audience, or already have a subscription box, these 5 steps are for you. Make these a habit. You should be doing them all year round.



Run a subscription giveaway - do one at least once a year. Launch Your Box members, find the training inside the “Building Your Audience” module.



Create a lead magnet for your ideal customer - build your email list with a lead magnet! This is typically a digital item you give away for free in exchange for someone’s email. Every business needs a lead magnet and should be running one year-round. Get ideas for email opt-in freebies.  



Run ads - run three types of ads year-round: lead magnet ads, page like ads, product ads. Every legit business needs a marketing budget. You need to run ads. Ads are the best way to get in front of cold audiences. 


Go LIVE and connect with your audience regularly - get consistent and put it on your calendar so your audience knows when to find you and you are held accountable. 


Create a consistent social media plan - create a template for posts, a plan for video, and a schedule for switching out ads. 


10 Post Ideas When Starting Your Business 
Episode 170 of The Launch Your Box Podcast
Downloadable Email Opt-In Freebie Ideas

* These show notes contain affiliate/referral links. I could make a commission at no charge to you if you purchase my recommended products.  Please read my disclosure and privacy policy HERE.

Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Audience building is the key to a successful subscription box launch. It’s also the key to the growth and sustainability of your subscription box business. In today’s episode, we’re talking about 5 ways to build an audience for each stage of the subscription box journey. </p><p><br></p><p>A reality of a subscription box is that each month will also bring cancellations. They’re simply a part of doing business. And the only way to continue to grow your subscription box business is to continue to grow your audience, to get in front of new people and convert some of those people into subscribers. </p><p><br></p><p>Focusing on these 5 things consistently is going to help you grow your audience – and you need to grow your audience to grow your business. </p><p><br></p><h3>5 Audience Building Steps for New Subscription Box Businesses</h3><p>If you’re brand new and don’t have an audience yet, you need to spend time building an audience. I say it all the time. You can’t have a successful launch if you’re launching to no one! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Building social media content</strong> - get your social pages going and build content on those pages. Get a minimum of 10 posts up right away. <em>See </em><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/10-post-ideas-when-starting-your-business"><em>10 Post Ideas When Starting Your Business</em></a><em> </em> Get super consistent. Post daily and work up to twice a day. </p><p><strong>Share on your personal profile </strong>- share from your business page onto your personal page. People in your personal network are part of the audience you’ve already built. Let them help you expand your reach. </p><p><strong>Set up a page like ad </strong>- these ads are simply an introduction to you and what you do. People simply click the thumbs up and then they’re following your business page. This pushes you in front of people you’d never get in front of. <em>Launch Your Box members, find the training inside the “Building Your Audience” module. </em></p><p><strong>Video</strong> - short video and LIVEs - Let your audience get to know you.  <em>Listen to </em><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/from-subscription-box-week-to-subscription-box-owner-in-30-days-with-tracey-phillips-ep-170"><em>episode 170</em></a><em> to learn how Tracey Phillips built an amazing audience of over 100,000 people by consistently doing LIVE videos. </em></p><p><strong>Set up your email CRM</strong> - part of building your audience is building your email list. Our favorite email CRM is <a href="https://www.klaviyo.com/partner/signup?utm_source=0010V00002Pzeze&amp;utm_medium=partner">Klaviyo</a>. </p><p><br></p><h3>5 Audience Building Steps for Established Subscription Box Businesses</h3><p>If you are selling products, actively building an audience, or already have a subscription box, these 5 steps are for you. Make these a habit. You should be doing them all year round.</p><p><br></p><ul>
<li>
<strong>Run a subscription giveaway </strong>- do one at least once a year. <em>Launch Your Box members, find the training inside the “Building Your Audience” module.</em>
</li>
<li>
<strong>Create a lead magnet for your ideal customer </strong>- build your email list with a lead magnet! This is typically a digital item you give away for free in exchange for someone’s email. Every business needs a lead magnet and should be running one year-round. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/downloadable-email-opt-in-freebie-ideas"><em>Get ideas for email opt-in freebies</em></a><em>.  </em>
</li>
<li>
<strong>Run ads</strong> - run three types of ads year-round: lead magnet ads, page like ads, product ads. Every legit business needs a marketing budget. You need to run ads. Ads are the best way to get in front of cold audiences. </li>
<li>
<strong>Go LIVE and connect with your audience regularly </strong>- get consistent and put it on your calendar so your audience knows when to find you and you are held accountable. </li>
<li>
<strong>Create a consistent social media plan</strong> - create a template for posts, a plan for video, and a schedule for switching out ads. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/10-post-ideas-when-starting-your-business">10 Post Ideas When Starting Your Business</a><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/10-post-ideas-when-starting-your-business"> </a></p><p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/from-subscription-box-week-to-subscription-box-owner-in-30-days-with-tracey-phillips-ep-170">Episode 170 of The Launch Your Box Podcast</a></p><p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/downloadable-email-opt-in-freebie-ideas">Downloadable Email Opt-In Freebie Ideas</a></p><p><br></p><p><em>* These show notes contain affiliate/referral links. I could make a commission at no charge to you if you purchase my recommended products.  </em><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/disclaimer"><em>Please read my disclosure and privacy policy HERE.</em></a></p><p><br></p><p>Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!</p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1535</itunes:duration>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[61597bcc-7965-11ef-a7da-eb0a89c16113]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4033351232.mp3?updated=1727066481" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>170: From Subscription Box Week to Subscription Box Owner in 30 Days with Tracey Phillips</title>
      <description>Taking action. That’s something my guest today is great at. She joined my Subscription Box Week in June and within 30 days had launched her subscription (to more than 100 subscribers) and started generating recurring revenue.  She’s been inspiring members inside Launch Your Box and I know she’ll inspire you, too! 

Serving Before Selling
Tracey Phillips of Mindless Crafting started her business from a place of service. She’s a paper crafter and card maker who loves sharing her gifts with others. That love of crafts led her to start a YouTube channel where she simply crafted with her audience, teaching them and guiding them to create beautiful paper crafts and handmade cards. 

As Tracey’s audience grew, they started asking her to create her own products. She promised she would if she reached 100,000 YouTube subscribers. And she did! 

Tracey and her oh-so-supportive husband Bill figured out how to produce just one product – a stamp kit. They found a US-based manufacturer and worked with them to produce something they were proud to sell to their audience. 

They quickly and easily sold the 100 stamps they had made. Tracey realized they could have sold many more. They started adding holiday kits to their online shop for Christmas, Valentine’s Day, and more. As Tracey chose and designed items for the kit, she stayed true to what she knew worked. If she loved something and was excited about it, her audience would be, too. 

Tracey joins Subscription Box Week
Tracey joined Subscription Box Week and jumped in with both feet. She soaked up all the knowledge. 

At first, Tracey thought she wanted to start with a fully curated box. But when I talked about the ease of a one-thing-of-the-month subscription and how they could be a great place to start, Tracey knew that was the answer for her. 

Tracey Launches her Subscription Box 
Tracey launched to her community following the launch plan she learned in Launch Your Box.

At the end of the 1st night, Tracey had 50 subscribers – double her goal. And by the end of her launch, she and Bill were celebrating 109 subscribers! 

Tracey’s “Secret” to Subscription Box Launch Success 
What was Tracey’s secret? She went LIVE a lot. She understands the power of letting your audience see you and get to know you. It allows people to see your authenticity. To ask questions and get them answered. To catch the replay later and still get the information. 

Tracey has advice for anyone thinking about starting a subscription box. Don’t wait for things to be perfect – she didn’t. Understand that even if the answer to a challenge doesn’t come easily or right away, it will come. 

Most of all, Tracey wants you to connect with your audience, show up as you are, and “do what Sarah says!” 

Find and follow Tracey: 

Mindless Crafting on Facebook


Mindless Crafting on Instagram  

Mindless Crafting Website


Join me in all the places:  

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 18 Sep 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From Subscription Box Week to Subscription Box Owner in 30 Days with Tracey Phillips</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>170</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as Tracey and I talk about how her dedication to serving her audience and willingness to jump in and do it messy led to an amazing launch of over 100 subscribers only 30 days after getting started! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Taking action. That’s something my guest today is great at. She joined my Subscription Box Week in June and within 30 days had launched her subscription (to more than 100 subscribers) and started generating recurring revenue.  She’s been inspiring members inside Launch Your Box and I know she’ll inspire you, too! 

Serving Before Selling
Tracey Phillips of Mindless Crafting started her business from a place of service. She’s a paper crafter and card maker who loves sharing her gifts with others. That love of crafts led her to start a YouTube channel where she simply crafted with her audience, teaching them and guiding them to create beautiful paper crafts and handmade cards. 

As Tracey’s audience grew, they started asking her to create her own products. She promised she would if she reached 100,000 YouTube subscribers. And she did! 

Tracey and her oh-so-supportive husband Bill figured out how to produce just one product – a stamp kit. They found a US-based manufacturer and worked with them to produce something they were proud to sell to their audience. 

They quickly and easily sold the 100 stamps they had made. Tracey realized they could have sold many more. They started adding holiday kits to their online shop for Christmas, Valentine’s Day, and more. As Tracey chose and designed items for the kit, she stayed true to what she knew worked. If she loved something and was excited about it, her audience would be, too. 

Tracey joins Subscription Box Week
Tracey joined Subscription Box Week and jumped in with both feet. She soaked up all the knowledge. 

At first, Tracey thought she wanted to start with a fully curated box. But when I talked about the ease of a one-thing-of-the-month subscription and how they could be a great place to start, Tracey knew that was the answer for her. 

Tracey Launches her Subscription Box 
Tracey launched to her community following the launch plan she learned in Launch Your Box.

At the end of the 1st night, Tracey had 50 subscribers – double her goal. And by the end of her launch, she and Bill were celebrating 109 subscribers! 

Tracey’s “Secret” to Subscription Box Launch Success 
What was Tracey’s secret? She went LIVE a lot. She understands the power of letting your audience see you and get to know you. It allows people to see your authenticity. To ask questions and get them answered. To catch the replay later and still get the information. 

Tracey has advice for anyone thinking about starting a subscription box. Don’t wait for things to be perfect – she didn’t. Understand that even if the answer to a challenge doesn’t come easily or right away, it will come. 

Most of all, Tracey wants you to connect with your audience, show up as you are, and “do what Sarah says!” 

Find and follow Tracey: 

Mindless Crafting on Facebook


Mindless Crafting on Instagram  

Mindless Crafting Website


Join me in all the places:  

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Taking action. That’s something my guest today is great at. She joined my Subscription Box Week in June and within 30 days had launched her subscription (to more than 100 subscribers) and started generating recurring revenue.  She’s been inspiring members inside Launch Your Box and I know she’ll inspire you, too! </p><p><br></p><h3>Serving Before Selling</h3><p>Tracey Phillips of Mindless Crafting started her business from a place of service. She’s a paper crafter and card maker who loves sharing her gifts with others. That love of crafts led her to start a YouTube channel where she simply crafted with her audience, teaching them and guiding them to create beautiful paper crafts and handmade cards. </p><p><br></p><p>As Tracey’s audience grew, they started asking her to create her own products. She promised she would if she reached 100,000 YouTube subscribers. And she did! </p><p><br></p><p>Tracey and her oh-so-supportive husband Bill figured out how to produce just one product – a stamp kit. They found a US-based manufacturer and worked with them to produce something they were proud to sell to their audience. </p><p><br></p><p>They quickly and easily sold the 100 stamps they had made. Tracey realized they could have sold many more. They started adding holiday kits to their online shop for Christmas, Valentine’s Day, and more. As Tracey chose and designed items for the kit, she stayed true to what she knew worked. If she loved something and was excited about it, her audience would be, too. </p><p><br></p><h3>Tracey joins Subscription Box Week</h3><p>Tracey joined Subscription Box Week and jumped in with both feet. She soaked up all the knowledge. </p><p><br></p><p>At first, Tracey thought she wanted to start with a fully curated box. But when I talked about the ease of a one-thing-of-the-month subscription and how they could be a great place to start, Tracey knew that was the answer for her. </p><p><br></p><h3>Tracey Launches her Subscription Box </h3><p>Tracey launched to her community following the launch plan she learned in Launch Your Box.</p><p><br></p><p>At the end of the 1st night, Tracey had 50 subscribers – double her goal. And by the end of her launch, she and Bill were celebrating 109 subscribers! </p><p><br></p><h3>Tracey’s “Secret” to Subscription Box Launch Success </h3><p>What was Tracey’s secret? She went LIVE a lot. She understands the power of letting your audience see you and get to know you. It allows people to see your authenticity. To ask questions and get them answered. To catch the replay later and still get the information. </p><p><br></p><p>Tracey has advice for anyone thinking about starting a subscription box. Don’t wait for things to be perfect – she didn’t. Understand that even if the answer to a challenge doesn’t come easily or right away, it will come. </p><p><br></p><p>Most of all, Tracey wants you to connect with your audience, show up as you are, and “do what Sarah says!” </p><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Tracey: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/mindlesscrafting">Mindless Crafting on Facebook</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.instagram.com/mindlesscrafting/">Mindless Crafting on Instagram</a>  </li>
<li><a href="https://mindlesscrafting.com/?fbclid=IwY2xjawFRid9leHRuA2FlbQIxMAABHQCu8iW03LeuhuD_HmbDEZ251R2gDomDwx-OYG1VV-9-O0LN1u_EpyASxg_aem_kCCeZgCR8XqDOWQr_qeUCQ">Mindless Crafting Website</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places:  </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2507</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[baa1328a-74cc-11ef-bad9-6771cde0e996]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4852332484.mp3?updated=1726561114" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>5 Emails Subscription Box Owners Can Send Every Month</title>
      <description>“Email marketing needs to be part of your audience building strategy.” - Sarah Williams

You know social media is an important part of audience building. You’re showing up consistently, creating engaging posts and reels, connecting with your followers. But… How often are you sending emails to your email list? 

Just as important as your social media (and maybe even more important) is your email list. You own your email list. Unlike your social media accounts, you can’t get locked out or hacked. Your email list won’t suddenly disappear. 

It’s time to treat your email list like the valuable asset it is and talk to the people on it. They’ve opted in, they’ve told you they want to learn more about you and what you offer. Give them what they want! 

You should be emailing your list at least once a week. But what should you put in those emails? 

Don’t let not knowing what to say in those emails get in the way of connecting with and nurturing your email list. Here are FIVE types of emails all subscription box owners can send to their lists: 
 

Monthly Unboxing - connect with subscribers, create excitement for them and FOMO for non-subscribers! 

Subscriber Shares - create excitement and FOMO when you share pictures, messages, and comments from subscribers telling you how much they loved this month’s box. 

5 Ways to Use Your Box - encourage subscribers to consume the contents of the box. So important!

Sneak Peek - get your subscribers excited about the next box and let non-subscribers see what they’re missing out on - more FOMO! 

Behind the Scenes - your audience LOVES getting a peek behind the scenes of your business! Take them along as you design or make products or even pack boxes. 

 
Choose one of these emails to send to your email list each week. I’ve given you five - that means most months, you’ll even have a spare. Put your email list to work for you - connect with your audience and nurture them. 

Join me for this episode where I talk to you about the importance of emailing your list once a week and answer the question every subscription box owner asks, “But what do I put in those weekly emails?” 
 
Resources from this episode: 
Grab my swipe files of ALL five types of emails  HERE! 
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 11 Sep 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>5 Emails Subscription Box Owners Can Send Every Month</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode where I talk to you about the importance of emailing your list once a week and answer the question every subscription box owner asks, “But what do I put in those weekly emails?” </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Email marketing needs to be part of your audience building strategy.” - Sarah Williams

You know social media is an important part of audience building. You’re showing up consistently, creating engaging posts and reels, connecting with your followers. But… How often are you sending emails to your email list? 

Just as important as your social media (and maybe even more important) is your email list. You own your email list. Unlike your social media accounts, you can’t get locked out or hacked. Your email list won’t suddenly disappear. 

It’s time to treat your email list like the valuable asset it is and talk to the people on it. They’ve opted in, they’ve told you they want to learn more about you and what you offer. Give them what they want! 

You should be emailing your list at least once a week. But what should you put in those emails? 

Don’t let not knowing what to say in those emails get in the way of connecting with and nurturing your email list. Here are FIVE types of emails all subscription box owners can send to their lists: 
 

Monthly Unboxing - connect with subscribers, create excitement for them and FOMO for non-subscribers! 

Subscriber Shares - create excitement and FOMO when you share pictures, messages, and comments from subscribers telling you how much they loved this month’s box. 

5 Ways to Use Your Box - encourage subscribers to consume the contents of the box. So important!

Sneak Peek - get your subscribers excited about the next box and let non-subscribers see what they’re missing out on - more FOMO! 

Behind the Scenes - your audience LOVES getting a peek behind the scenes of your business! Take them along as you design or make products or even pack boxes. 

 
Choose one of these emails to send to your email list each week. I’ve given you five - that means most months, you’ll even have a spare. Put your email list to work for you - connect with your audience and nurture them. 

Join me for this episode where I talk to you about the importance of emailing your list once a week and answer the question every subscription box owner asks, “But what do I put in those weekly emails?” 
 
Resources from this episode: 
Grab my swipe files of ALL five types of emails  HERE! 
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“Email marketing needs to be part of your audience building strategy.” - Sarah Williams</p><p><br></p><p>You know social media is an important part of audience building. You’re showing up consistently, creating engaging posts and reels, connecting with your followers. But… How often are you sending emails to your email list? </p><p><br></p><p>Just as important as your social media (and maybe even more important) is your email list. You own your email list. Unlike your social media accounts, you can’t get locked out or hacked. Your email list won’t suddenly disappear. </p><p><br></p><p>It’s time to treat your email list like the valuable asset it is and talk to the people on it. They’ve opted in, they’ve told you they want to learn more about you and what you offer. Give them what they want! </p><p><br></p><p>You should be emailing your list at least once a week. But what should you put in those emails? </p><p><br></p><p>Don’t let not knowing what to say in those emails get in the way of connecting with and nurturing your email list. Here are FIVE types of emails all subscription box owners can send to their lists: </p><p> </p><ul>
<li>Monthly Unboxing - connect with subscribers, create excitement for them and FOMO for non-subscribers! </li>
<li>Subscriber Shares - create excitement and FOMO when you share pictures, messages, and comments from subscribers telling you how much they loved this month’s box. </li>
<li>5 Ways to Use Your Box - encourage subscribers to consume the contents of the box. So important!</li>
<li>Sneak Peek - get your subscribers excited about the next box and let non-subscribers see what they’re missing out on - more FOMO! </li>
<li>Behind the Scenes - your audience LOVES getting a peek behind the scenes of your business! Take them along as you design or make products or even pack boxes. </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Choose one of these emails to send to your email list each week. I’ve given you five - that means most months, you’ll even have a spare. Put your email list to work for you - connect with your audience and nurture them. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode where I talk to you about the importance of emailing your list once a week and answer the question every subscription box owner asks, “But what do I put in those weekly emails?” </p><p> </p><p>Resources from this episode: </p><p>Grab my swipe files of ALL five types of emails <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/5-emails-for-subscription-box-owners"> HERE</a>! </p><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1929</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[eab070b4-6ee4-11ef-845e-d7b61df32396]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2428743867.mp3?updated=1725911795" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>6 Ways to Keep a Subscriber</title>
      <description>As a subscription box owner, you spend so much time working to gain new subscribers. But how much time and energy do you put into retaining your current subscribers? 
Cancellations are a reality of the subscription box industry. No matter how amazing your subscription box is and no matter how much time and effort you put into creating an outstanding subscriber experience, some subscribers will cancel. 

That doesn’t mean there’s nothing you can do to reduce the number of cancellations and retain more subscribers. Even a small increase in retention rate can make a big difference. 
Let’s talk about six things you can do to retain more subscribers. 


Keep Things Trendy or Seasonal

How often do you change up the lineup of items in your box? I’m always researching new trends and thinking ahead to what holidays or seasons are coming up. Keep things fresh and fun to keep subscribers excited about what’s coming next month! 

Ask Your Subscribers What They Want

Simply including your audience in the decision-making process can make a huge difference. Send out questionnaires and surveys or poll them on social media. Getting their input creates buy-in and a greater feeling of community.  

Engage With Your Subscribers

During your monthly LIVE unboxing, engage directly with subscribers. Are you using SMS messaging? Text subscribers, asking what their favorite item was and asking for pics of them using or wearing something from the box. With their permission, use those pictures for social proof and to make subscribers feel even more a part of your community. People love to feel included!

Create Added Value

Your subscribers are the VIPs of your business. Make sure they feel that way. Send subscriber-only emails or surprise them with a coupon in their box good toward something in your shop. Need more ideas? Grab my resource - 10 Ways to Surprise and Delight Your Subscribers.  

Offer a Lower-Priced Tier in Your Subscription Box

The number one reason people cancel their subscriptions is financial. Offering a lower-priced tier at the point of cancellation is one way to retain them. Some subscribers will love this option and may even move back up to the higher tier when their budget allows. 

Billing and Follow Up

It’s not fun or exciting, but keeping track of billing issues and missed payments can make a huge difference in managing subscriber turnover. Payments are missed because of card changes or changes in addresses and sometimes subscribers forget to update their info. Reminders and personal follow-up can eliminate so much of that.

 
Track your retention rate every month. If it starts to slip and fall below 80%, you have an issue that needs to be addressed quickly. Put time and effort every day into retaining subscribers. 

Join me for this episode for quick tips on boosting subscriber retention. Simple changes can make a big difference—tune in now!

10 Ways to Surprise and Delight Your Subscribers.

Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 04 Sep 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>6 Ways to Keep a Subscriber</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode for quick tips on boosting subscriber retention. Simple changes can make a big difference—tune in now!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>As a subscription box owner, you spend so much time working to gain new subscribers. But how much time and energy do you put into retaining your current subscribers? 
Cancellations are a reality of the subscription box industry. No matter how amazing your subscription box is and no matter how much time and effort you put into creating an outstanding subscriber experience, some subscribers will cancel. 

That doesn’t mean there’s nothing you can do to reduce the number of cancellations and retain more subscribers. Even a small increase in retention rate can make a big difference. 
Let’s talk about six things you can do to retain more subscribers. 


Keep Things Trendy or Seasonal

How often do you change up the lineup of items in your box? I’m always researching new trends and thinking ahead to what holidays or seasons are coming up. Keep things fresh and fun to keep subscribers excited about what’s coming next month! 

Ask Your Subscribers What They Want

Simply including your audience in the decision-making process can make a huge difference. Send out questionnaires and surveys or poll them on social media. Getting their input creates buy-in and a greater feeling of community.  

Engage With Your Subscribers

During your monthly LIVE unboxing, engage directly with subscribers. Are you using SMS messaging? Text subscribers, asking what their favorite item was and asking for pics of them using or wearing something from the box. With their permission, use those pictures for social proof and to make subscribers feel even more a part of your community. People love to feel included!

Create Added Value

Your subscribers are the VIPs of your business. Make sure they feel that way. Send subscriber-only emails or surprise them with a coupon in their box good toward something in your shop. Need more ideas? Grab my resource - 10 Ways to Surprise and Delight Your Subscribers.  

Offer a Lower-Priced Tier in Your Subscription Box

The number one reason people cancel their subscriptions is financial. Offering a lower-priced tier at the point of cancellation is one way to retain them. Some subscribers will love this option and may even move back up to the higher tier when their budget allows. 

Billing and Follow Up

It’s not fun or exciting, but keeping track of billing issues and missed payments can make a huge difference in managing subscriber turnover. Payments are missed because of card changes or changes in addresses and sometimes subscribers forget to update their info. Reminders and personal follow-up can eliminate so much of that.

 
Track your retention rate every month. If it starts to slip and fall below 80%, you have an issue that needs to be addressed quickly. Put time and effort every day into retaining subscribers. 

Join me for this episode for quick tips on boosting subscriber retention. Simple changes can make a big difference—tune in now!

10 Ways to Surprise and Delight Your Subscribers.

Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>As a subscription box owner, you spend so much time working to gain new subscribers. But how much time and energy do you put into retaining your current subscribers? </p><p>Cancellations are a reality of the subscription box industry. No matter how amazing your subscription box is and no matter how much time and effort you put into creating an outstanding subscriber experience, some subscribers will cancel. </p><p><br></p><p>That doesn’t mean there’s nothing you can do to reduce the number of cancellations and retain more subscribers. Even a small increase in retention rate can make a big difference. </p><p>Let’s talk about six things you can do to retain more subscribers. </p><p><br></p><ul>
<li>Keep Things Trendy or Seasonal</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">How often do you change up the lineup of items in your box? I’m always researching new trends and thinking ahead to what holidays or seasons are coming up. Keep things fresh and fun to keep subscribers excited about what’s coming next month! </li>
<li>Ask Your Subscribers What They Want</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Simply including your audience in the decision-making process can make a huge difference. Send out questionnaires and surveys or poll them on social media. Getting their input creates buy-in and a greater feeling of community.  </li>
<li>Engage With Your Subscribers</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">During your monthly LIVE unboxing, engage directly with subscribers. Are you using SMS messaging? Text subscribers, asking what their favorite item was and asking for pics of them using or wearing something from the box. With their permission, use those pictures for social proof and to make subscribers feel even more a part of your community. People love to feel included!</li>
<li>Create Added Value</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Your subscribers are the VIPs of your business. Make sure they feel that way. Send subscriber-only emails or surprise them with a coupon in their box good toward something in your shop. Need more ideas? Grab my resource - 10 Ways to Surprise and Delight Your Subscribers.  </li>
<li>Offer a Lower-Priced Tier in Your Subscription Box</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">The number one reason people cancel their subscriptions is financial. Offering a lower-priced tier at the point of cancellation is one way to retain them. Some subscribers will love this option and may even move back up to the higher tier when their budget allows. </li>
<li>Billing and Follow Up</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">It’s not fun or exciting, but keeping track of billing issues and missed payments can make a huge difference in managing subscriber turnover. Payments are missed because of card changes or changes in addresses and sometimes subscribers forget to update their info. Reminders and personal follow-up can eliminate so much of that.</li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Track your retention rate every month. If it starts to slip and fall below 80%, you have an issue that needs to be addressed quickly. Put time and effort every day into retaining subscribers. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode for quick tips on boosting subscriber retention. Simple changes can make a big difference—tune in now!</p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/10-ways-to-surprise-delight-your-subscriber">10 Ways to Surprise and Delight Your Subscribers.</a></p><p><br></p><p>Subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast platform and leave a 5-star rating and a review!</p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1696</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[73ce5ec8-68e2-11ef-b812-b3d10365a156]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2905163481.mp3?updated=1725251029" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>169: How a One Time Holiday Box Can Validate Your Subscription Box Idea</title>
      <description>Have you been sitting on the sidelines, listening, watching, and waiting to launch your subscription box?  You have an idea, and you’ve taken some steps toward turning those dreams into reality, but something is holding you back. 

What if you could test your subscription box idea with your target audience without committing to a full-blown launch? Now is the perfect time to validate your subscription box concept with a carefully curated one-time box. 

Retail and e-commerce businesses will see high consumer spending over the next four months. Most will bring in 50% of their total year’s revenue during the next four months. That makes now the best time to test your idea. 

During the holidays people are more likely to spend on items for others. They’re looking for something fun and unique, something special that stands out from all the other gifts under the tree. 

Your one-time holiday box can be the perfect, thoughtful gift.

The ultimate goal is to start, launch, and grow a thriving subscription box business. And a one-time box can be the perfect first step. A one-time box has a lower commitment for customers. It allows you to bring them into your business and then nurture them into being a subscriber. 

Your one-time box should be similar to your subscription box idea, appealing to the same ideal customer. 

Think about whether the recipients will receive the box before the holidays or as a holiday gift. This determines whether it can be holiday-themed or needs to be an everyday theme. 

I do a one-time holiday box every year. My audience loves it, it sells out early every year, and it brings a nice punch of revenue into my business in the 4th quarter. Since it’s intended to be given as a holiday gift (although a lot of my customers buy it as a gift to themselves), the contents of my holiday box do not have a holiday theme. Instead, it contains items similar to those found in my Monogram Box. 

A one-time box is your opportunity to get it right. To put together a curated experience that will wow your ideal customer and give them a feel for what they could expect if they became a subscriber. 

Now that you’ve curated your one-time holiday box, it’s time to sell it. 

Continue the audience building you’ve already been working on.

Engage your audience in the process and get their buy-in with polls, behind-the-scenes, and other interactive content. 

Plan a launch following the Launch Strategy with socials, lives, emails, and ads. 

Go all in. To be successful, you need to market your one-time box with a launch. 

Create urgency, scarcity, and exclusivity by selling one-time boxes as pre-orders. 

Analyze what’s working and what isn’t and adapt. 


This process is great for new subscription box owners since you’ll go through a launch, curate a box, market the box, and fulfill the box. You’ll learn a ton about the launch process just by launching a one-time box and be ready to apply that knowledge to launch your subscription box. 

Many of my students shifted their entire businesses from successful one-time box offers to subscriptions….because they had proof of concept before turning it into a subscription box.

I’ve got a great, free new resource to help you curate a box experience for your subscribers.

Join me for this episode as I talk about validating your subscription box idea with a one-time holiday box. Now is the perfect time to get your subscription box dreams off the ground! 
Kristy’s Interview - Episode 45 - Journey from One-Time Boxes to a Thriving Monthly Subscription 
Nicole’s Interview - Episode 13 - A Passion for Animals Turns into 500 Monthly Subscribers

Curating a Box Experience for Your Subscribers 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 28 Aug 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How a One Time Holiday Box Can Validate Your Subscription Box Idea</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>169</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as I talk about validating your subscription box idea with a one-time holiday box. Now is the perfect time to get your subscription box dreams off the ground! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you been sitting on the sidelines, listening, watching, and waiting to launch your subscription box?  You have an idea, and you’ve taken some steps toward turning those dreams into reality, but something is holding you back. 

What if you could test your subscription box idea with your target audience without committing to a full-blown launch? Now is the perfect time to validate your subscription box concept with a carefully curated one-time box. 

Retail and e-commerce businesses will see high consumer spending over the next four months. Most will bring in 50% of their total year’s revenue during the next four months. That makes now the best time to test your idea. 

During the holidays people are more likely to spend on items for others. They’re looking for something fun and unique, something special that stands out from all the other gifts under the tree. 

Your one-time holiday box can be the perfect, thoughtful gift.

The ultimate goal is to start, launch, and grow a thriving subscription box business. And a one-time box can be the perfect first step. A one-time box has a lower commitment for customers. It allows you to bring them into your business and then nurture them into being a subscriber. 

Your one-time box should be similar to your subscription box idea, appealing to the same ideal customer. 

Think about whether the recipients will receive the box before the holidays or as a holiday gift. This determines whether it can be holiday-themed or needs to be an everyday theme. 

I do a one-time holiday box every year. My audience loves it, it sells out early every year, and it brings a nice punch of revenue into my business in the 4th quarter. Since it’s intended to be given as a holiday gift (although a lot of my customers buy it as a gift to themselves), the contents of my holiday box do not have a holiday theme. Instead, it contains items similar to those found in my Monogram Box. 

A one-time box is your opportunity to get it right. To put together a curated experience that will wow your ideal customer and give them a feel for what they could expect if they became a subscriber. 

Now that you’ve curated your one-time holiday box, it’s time to sell it. 

Continue the audience building you’ve already been working on.

Engage your audience in the process and get their buy-in with polls, behind-the-scenes, and other interactive content. 

Plan a launch following the Launch Strategy with socials, lives, emails, and ads. 

Go all in. To be successful, you need to market your one-time box with a launch. 

Create urgency, scarcity, and exclusivity by selling one-time boxes as pre-orders. 

Analyze what’s working and what isn’t and adapt. 


This process is great for new subscription box owners since you’ll go through a launch, curate a box, market the box, and fulfill the box. You’ll learn a ton about the launch process just by launching a one-time box and be ready to apply that knowledge to launch your subscription box. 

Many of my students shifted their entire businesses from successful one-time box offers to subscriptions….because they had proof of concept before turning it into a subscription box.

I’ve got a great, free new resource to help you curate a box experience for your subscribers.

Join me for this episode as I talk about validating your subscription box idea with a one-time holiday box. Now is the perfect time to get your subscription box dreams off the ground! 
Kristy’s Interview - Episode 45 - Journey from One-Time Boxes to a Thriving Monthly Subscription 
Nicole’s Interview - Episode 13 - A Passion for Animals Turns into 500 Monthly Subscribers

Curating a Box Experience for Your Subscribers 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you been sitting on the sidelines, listening, watching, and waiting to launch your subscription box?  You have an idea, and you’ve taken some steps toward turning those dreams into reality, but something is holding you back. </p><p><br></p><p>What if you could test your subscription box idea with your target audience without committing to a full-blown launch? Now is the perfect time to validate your subscription box concept with a carefully curated one-time box. </p><p><br></p><p>Retail and e-commerce businesses will see high consumer spending over the next four months. Most will bring in 50% of their total year’s revenue during the next four months. That makes now the best time to test your idea. </p><p><br></p><p>During the holidays people are more likely to spend on items for others. They’re looking for something fun and unique, something special that stands out from all the other gifts under the tree. </p><p><br></p><p>Your one-time holiday box can be the perfect, thoughtful gift.</p><p><br></p><p>The ultimate goal is to start, launch, and grow a thriving subscription box business. And a one-time box can be the perfect first step. A one-time box has a lower commitment for customers. It allows you to bring them into your business and then nurture them into being a subscriber. </p><p><br></p><p>Your one-time box should be similar to your subscription box idea, appealing to the same ideal customer. </p><p><br></p><p>Think about whether the recipients will receive the box before the holidays or as a holiday gift. This determines whether it can be holiday-themed or needs to be an everyday theme. </p><p><br></p><p>I do a one-time holiday box every year. My audience loves it, it sells out early every year, and it brings a nice punch of revenue into my business in the 4th quarter. Since it’s intended to be given as a holiday gift (although a lot of my customers buy it as a gift to themselves), the contents of my holiday box do not have a holiday theme. Instead, it contains items similar to those found in my Monogram Box. </p><p><br></p><p>A one-time box is your opportunity to get it right. To put together a curated experience that will wow your ideal customer and give them a feel for what they could expect if they became a subscriber. </p><p><br></p><p>Now that you’ve curated your one-time holiday box, it’s time to sell it. </p><ul>
<li>Continue the audience building you’ve already been working on.</li>
<li>Engage your audience in the process and get their buy-in with polls, behind-the-scenes, and other interactive content. </li>
<li>Plan a launch following the Launch Strategy with socials, lives, emails, and ads. </li>
<li>Go all in. To be successful, you need to market your one-time box with a launch. </li>
<li>Create urgency, scarcity, and exclusivity by selling one-time boxes as pre-orders. </li>
<li>Analyze what’s working and what isn’t and adapt. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>This process is great for new subscription box owners since you’ll go through a launch, curate a box, market the box, and fulfill the box. You’ll learn a ton about the launch process just by launching a one-time box and be ready to apply that knowledge to launch your subscription box. </p><p><br></p><p>Many of my students shifted their entire businesses from successful one-time box offers to subscriptions….because they had proof of concept before turning it into a subscription box.</p><p><br></p><p>I’ve got a great, <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/curating-a-box-experience-for-your-subscribers">free new resource</a> to help you curate a box experience for your subscribers.</p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as I talk about validating your subscription box idea with a one-time holiday box. Now is the perfect time to get your subscription box dreams off the ground! </p><p>Kristy’s Interview - <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-45">Episode 45 - Journey from One-Time Boxes to a Thriving Monthly Subscription</a> </p><p>Nicole’s Interview - <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-13">Episode 13 - A Passion for Animals Turns into 500 Monthly Subscribers</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/curating-a-box-experience-for-your-subscribers">Curating a Box Experience for Your Subscribers</a><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/curating-a-box-experience-for-your-subscribers"> </a></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1432</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[66174872-633c-11ef-a686-6b80e6b0eea1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1298459961.mp3?updated=1724629954" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>168: 0 to 6 Figures with a $300 Marketing Budget with Huckleberry Gems</title>
      <description>Katie did something I didn’t think was possible. She silenced a large group of creative women - subscription box entrepreneurs - with one statement. I posed a question to my SubSummit workshop attendees about ad spend. Katie’s drop the mic response was that she reached 6-figures in subscription box revenue with a $300 marketing budget. 

Katie Sager of Huckleberry Gems is a member of Launch Your Box, Scale Your Box, and my Mastermind. Katie set up shop in the back of her husband’s business. She made cutting boards and hosted paint parties. Katie differentiated herself from other crafters by producing craft kits that don’t require glue. Instead, customers assemble them using adhesive strips. (Genius!) 

Katie loved what she was doing, but knew she needed to grow the business. So she learned all she could about digital marketing. This led to diving deeply into Facebook Ads, learning how they work and how to understand and apply the data. 

Katie also realized she needed to bring recurring revenue into her business. One off sales weren’t enough. A tiered-tray subscription box was the answer. 

You have to spend money - and this includes having a marketing budget - in order to build a business. A business without a marketing budget is a hobby. Katie didn’t want a hobby. She wanted to build a business that would grow. 

So Katie ran her ads, analyzed the data, made changes when needed, and kept going. She launched with more than 40 subscribers and, within 7 months, hit six-figures in revenue. It took only 5 more months to double that number. 

Did all that growth come from Facebook Ads? 

No. Katie knew that building her email list was also important, so she turned her focus to that. She created a lead magnet and ran ads to it. She started a free Facebook Group for crafters and required their email addresses to join. 

Katie is a true entrepreneur and a super smart business owner. She knows there are a lot of puzzle pieces to starting and growing a successful business. She also knows how tempting it is to chase one shiny idea after another. Katie attributes her success to focusing on one puzzle piece at a time. For her, that meant ads first then email. 

Katie’s advice for anyone getting started is to get super focused on one thing to build your business and then, once you’ve mastered it, look to add something else. Build your following and build your list. 

Her focus for Huckleberry Gem going forward is all about community. Katie continues to create a community of women who have lost themselves in the busyness of parenting. Women who love to craft and connect. 

Join me for this episode as Katie and I talk through how she started her business and grew it to six figures in seven months with a marketing budget of only $300 a month. Get ready to be inspired! 

Find and follow Katie: 

Huckleberry Gems on Facebook


Huckleberry Gems on Instagram  

Huckleberry Gems Website


Join me in all the places:  

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 21 Aug 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>0 to 6 Figures with a $300 Marketing Budget with Huckleberry Gems</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>168</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as Katie and I talk through how she started her business and grew it to six figures in seven months with a marketing budget of only $300 a month. Get ready to be inspired! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Katie did something I didn’t think was possible. She silenced a large group of creative women - subscription box entrepreneurs - with one statement. I posed a question to my SubSummit workshop attendees about ad spend. Katie’s drop the mic response was that she reached 6-figures in subscription box revenue with a $300 marketing budget. 

Katie Sager of Huckleberry Gems is a member of Launch Your Box, Scale Your Box, and my Mastermind. Katie set up shop in the back of her husband’s business. She made cutting boards and hosted paint parties. Katie differentiated herself from other crafters by producing craft kits that don’t require glue. Instead, customers assemble them using adhesive strips. (Genius!) 

Katie loved what she was doing, but knew she needed to grow the business. So she learned all she could about digital marketing. This led to diving deeply into Facebook Ads, learning how they work and how to understand and apply the data. 

Katie also realized she needed to bring recurring revenue into her business. One off sales weren’t enough. A tiered-tray subscription box was the answer. 

You have to spend money - and this includes having a marketing budget - in order to build a business. A business without a marketing budget is a hobby. Katie didn’t want a hobby. She wanted to build a business that would grow. 

So Katie ran her ads, analyzed the data, made changes when needed, and kept going. She launched with more than 40 subscribers and, within 7 months, hit six-figures in revenue. It took only 5 more months to double that number. 

Did all that growth come from Facebook Ads? 

No. Katie knew that building her email list was also important, so she turned her focus to that. She created a lead magnet and ran ads to it. She started a free Facebook Group for crafters and required their email addresses to join. 

Katie is a true entrepreneur and a super smart business owner. She knows there are a lot of puzzle pieces to starting and growing a successful business. She also knows how tempting it is to chase one shiny idea after another. Katie attributes her success to focusing on one puzzle piece at a time. For her, that meant ads first then email. 

Katie’s advice for anyone getting started is to get super focused on one thing to build your business and then, once you’ve mastered it, look to add something else. Build your following and build your list. 

Her focus for Huckleberry Gem going forward is all about community. Katie continues to create a community of women who have lost themselves in the busyness of parenting. Women who love to craft and connect. 

Join me for this episode as Katie and I talk through how she started her business and grew it to six figures in seven months with a marketing budget of only $300 a month. Get ready to be inspired! 

Find and follow Katie: 

Huckleberry Gems on Facebook


Huckleberry Gems on Instagram  

Huckleberry Gems Website


Join me in all the places:  

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Katie did something I didn’t think was possible. She silenced a large group of creative women - subscription box entrepreneurs - with one statement. I posed a question to my SubSummit workshop attendees about ad spend. Katie’s drop the mic response was that she reached 6-figures in subscription box revenue with a $300 marketing budget. </p><p><br></p><p>Katie Sager of Huckleberry Gems is a member of Launch Your Box, Scale Your Box, and my Mastermind. Katie set up shop in the back of her husband’s business. She made cutting boards and hosted paint parties. Katie differentiated herself from other crafters by producing craft kits that don’t require glue. Instead, customers assemble them using adhesive strips. (Genius!) </p><p><br></p><p>Katie loved what she was doing, but knew she needed to grow the business. So she learned all she could about digital marketing. This led to diving deeply into Facebook Ads, learning how they work and how to understand and apply the data. </p><p><br></p><p>Katie also realized she needed to bring recurring revenue into her business. One off sales weren’t enough. A tiered-tray subscription box was the answer. </p><p><br></p><p>You have to spend money - and this includes having a marketing budget - in order to build a business. A business without a marketing budget is a hobby. Katie didn’t want a hobby. She wanted to build a business that would grow. </p><p><br></p><p>So Katie ran her ads, analyzed the data, made changes when needed, and kept going. She launched with more than 40 subscribers and, within 7 months, hit six-figures in revenue. It took only 5 more months to double that number. </p><p><br></p><p>Did all that growth come from Facebook Ads? </p><p><br></p><p>No. Katie knew that building her email list was also important, so she turned her focus to that. She created a lead magnet and ran ads to it. She started a free Facebook Group for crafters and required their email addresses to join. </p><p><br></p><p>Katie is a true entrepreneur and a super smart business owner. She knows there are a lot of puzzle pieces to starting and growing a successful business. She also knows how tempting it is to chase one shiny idea after another. Katie attributes her success to focusing on one puzzle piece at a time. For her, that meant ads first then email. </p><p><br></p><p>Katie’s advice for anyone getting started is to get super focused on one thing to build your business and then, once you’ve mastered it, look to add something else. Build your following and build your list. </p><p><br></p><p>Her focus for Huckleberry Gem going forward is all about community. Katie continues to create a community of women who have lost themselves in the busyness of parenting. Women who love to craft and connect. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as Katie and I talk through how she started her business and grew it to six figures in seven months with a marketing budget of only $300 a month. Get ready to be inspired! </p><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Katie: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/Huckleberrygems">Huckleberry Gems on Facebook</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.instagram.com/huckleberrygems/">Huckleberry Gems on Instagram</a>  </li>
<li><a href="https://www.huckleberrygems.com/">Huckleberry Gems Website</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places:  </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1776</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[27cb54ea-5dca-11ef-ae09-037317c2bf53]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3019736333.mp3?updated=1724031131" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>167: 8 Ways to Find Products For Your Subscription Box</title>
      <description>One of the most important aspects of our subscription box is the products we put inside it. Whether you’re brand new to business or an experienced subscription box owner, finding the right products at the right prices can be challenging. Where do you start?  What about when you begin to grow?  How do you buy in bulk?

Before you start shopping, you will need your sales tax permit and resellers certificate. File for your sales tax permit first and then you’ll be able to get your resellers certificate. 

Where you head next depends on where you are in your business. I found in my own business that buying product for my growing subscription box was different from buying product for my brick-and-mortar shop or the early days of my subscription box. 

So how can you find the products you need? 

1 - When you’re brand new to business: 

Local Shops/Brands

Facebook Wholesale Groups


2 - Once you’ve established yourself and have some orders behind you:
Many of these sources require a reference and/or other proof of business operation. 


Online Marketplaces such as Faire - You can shop thousands of vendors on one platform with low required minimum order quantities. 


Direct vendor wholesale site - Go directly to the websites and look for a wholesale link. See if you can apply for a wholesale account with them.


Markets or Trade shows -These are scheduled events that happen across the country where hundreds or thousands of vendors come to connect with buyers. You can walk through all their booths, see their products in person, meet with vendors, and place orders. 

NY Now

Dallas Market Center

Las Vegas Market

America's Mart


Market can be overwhelming - I recommend going with a friend! 

I want you to go to a Market. They opened my mind to brands and vendors I never would have found or considered. I’ve met vendors at Market who have grown along with me and my business. 

3 - You’re growing and it’s time to start making bigger bulk purchases:
When you grow past a certain point, it’s time to buy bulk and consider working with overseas manufacturers. 


Global Marketplace - Alibaba, AliExpress, and IndiaMart are a great way to lower costs for items. I purchased small items first to get comfortable with product quality and shipping time. However, since the items are coming from overseas, you’ll need to give them more lead time when ordering. 

White Label from an Existing Vendor - Vendors allow you to custom-make products under their supply chain and manufacturing process and put your label on it. 

Sourcing Services - You can work with a sourcing agent who works with manufacturers on your behalf, getting products for you at really great prices. This sourcing agent handles all the communication and organization. 


My advice for you:


Use several different vendors - don’t put all your eggs in one basket.


Build relationships - get representatives and keep in touch with them. Relationships are so important in our business. 


Prices are negotiable - don’t be afraid to ask. Always ask for bulk pricing or discounts or free shipping or products. The bigger your business gets, the more buying power you have.


If you are working on a T-Shirt subscription, I’ve got a great FREE resource for you.  Check out my favorite t-shirt brands and styles pdf.  There are SO many choices when it comes to t-shirts - this resource will help you find the best ones for you and your customers!  

Join me for this episode as I walk you through 8 ways to find products for your subscription box. Whether you’re just getting started or need more product options as you grow, get answers to your product sourcing questions! 

Sarah’s Favorite T-Shirt Brands and Styles 
FREE 6 in 60 Workshop

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 14 Aug 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>8 Ways to Find Products For Your Subscription Box</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>167</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as I walk you through 8 ways to find products for your subscription box. Whether you’re just getting started or need more product options as you grow, get answers to your product sourcing questions! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>One of the most important aspects of our subscription box is the products we put inside it. Whether you’re brand new to business or an experienced subscription box owner, finding the right products at the right prices can be challenging. Where do you start?  What about when you begin to grow?  How do you buy in bulk?

Before you start shopping, you will need your sales tax permit and resellers certificate. File for your sales tax permit first and then you’ll be able to get your resellers certificate. 

Where you head next depends on where you are in your business. I found in my own business that buying product for my growing subscription box was different from buying product for my brick-and-mortar shop or the early days of my subscription box. 

So how can you find the products you need? 

1 - When you’re brand new to business: 

Local Shops/Brands

Facebook Wholesale Groups


2 - Once you’ve established yourself and have some orders behind you:
Many of these sources require a reference and/or other proof of business operation. 


Online Marketplaces such as Faire - You can shop thousands of vendors on one platform with low required minimum order quantities. 


Direct vendor wholesale site - Go directly to the websites and look for a wholesale link. See if you can apply for a wholesale account with them.


Markets or Trade shows -These are scheduled events that happen across the country where hundreds or thousands of vendors come to connect with buyers. You can walk through all their booths, see their products in person, meet with vendors, and place orders. 

NY Now

Dallas Market Center

Las Vegas Market

America's Mart


Market can be overwhelming - I recommend going with a friend! 

I want you to go to a Market. They opened my mind to brands and vendors I never would have found or considered. I’ve met vendors at Market who have grown along with me and my business. 

3 - You’re growing and it’s time to start making bigger bulk purchases:
When you grow past a certain point, it’s time to buy bulk and consider working with overseas manufacturers. 


Global Marketplace - Alibaba, AliExpress, and IndiaMart are a great way to lower costs for items. I purchased small items first to get comfortable with product quality and shipping time. However, since the items are coming from overseas, you’ll need to give them more lead time when ordering. 

White Label from an Existing Vendor - Vendors allow you to custom-make products under their supply chain and manufacturing process and put your label on it. 

Sourcing Services - You can work with a sourcing agent who works with manufacturers on your behalf, getting products for you at really great prices. This sourcing agent handles all the communication and organization. 


My advice for you:


Use several different vendors - don’t put all your eggs in one basket.


Build relationships - get representatives and keep in touch with them. Relationships are so important in our business. 


Prices are negotiable - don’t be afraid to ask. Always ask for bulk pricing or discounts or free shipping or products. The bigger your business gets, the more buying power you have.


If you are working on a T-Shirt subscription, I’ve got a great FREE resource for you.  Check out my favorite t-shirt brands and styles pdf.  There are SO many choices when it comes to t-shirts - this resource will help you find the best ones for you and your customers!  

Join me for this episode as I walk you through 8 ways to find products for your subscription box. Whether you’re just getting started or need more product options as you grow, get answers to your product sourcing questions! 

Sarah’s Favorite T-Shirt Brands and Styles 
FREE 6 in 60 Workshop

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>One of the most important aspects of our subscription box is the products we put inside it. Whether you’re brand new to business or an experienced subscription box owner, finding the right products at the right prices can be challenging. Where do you start?  What about when you begin to grow?  How do you buy in bulk?</p><p><br></p><p><em>Before you start shopping, you will need your sales tax permit and resellers certificate. File for your sales tax permit first and then you’ll be able to get your resellers certificate. </em></p><p><br></p><p>Where you head next depends on where you are in your business. I found in my own business that buying product for my growing subscription box was different from buying product for my brick-and-mortar shop or the early days of my subscription box. </p><p><br></p><p>So how can you find the products you need? </p><p><br></p><p><strong>1 - When you’re brand new to business:</strong> </p><ul>
<li><strong>Local Shops/Brands</strong></li>
<li><strong>Facebook Wholesale Groups</strong></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p><strong>2 - Once you’ve established yourself and have some orders behind you:</strong></p><p>Many of these sources require a reference and/or other proof of business operation. </p><ul>
<li>
<strong>Online Marketplaces such as Faire</strong> - You can shop thousands of vendors on one platform with low required minimum order quantities. </li>
<li>
<strong>Direct vendor wholesale site</strong> - Go directly to the websites and look for a wholesale link. See if you can apply for a wholesale account with them.</li>
<li>
<strong>Markets or Trade shows</strong> -These are scheduled events that happen across the country where hundreds or thousands of vendors come to connect with buyers. You can walk through all their booths, see their products in person, meet with vendors, and place orders. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1"><a href="https://nynow.com/">NY Now</a></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1"><a href="https://dallasmarketcenter.com/">Dallas Market Center</a></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1"><a href="https://www.lasvegasmarket.com/">Las Vegas Market</a></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1"><a href="https://www.americasmart.com/">America's Mart</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p><em>Market can be overwhelming - I recommend going with a friend! </em></p><p><br></p><p>I want you to go to a Market. They opened my mind to brands and vendors I never would have found or considered. I’ve met vendors at Market who have grown along with me and my business. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>3 - You’re growing and it’s time to start making bigger bulk purchases:</strong></p><p>When you grow past a certain point, it’s time to buy bulk and consider working with overseas manufacturers. </p><ul>
<li>
<strong>Global Marketplace</strong> - Alibaba, AliExpress, and IndiaMart are a great way to lower costs for items. I purchased small items first to get comfortable with product quality and shipping time. However, since the items are coming from overseas, you’ll need to give them more lead time when ordering. </li>
<li><strong>White Label from an Existing Vendor - Vendors allow you to custom-make products under their supply chain and manufacturing process and put your label on it. </strong></li>
<li><strong>Sourcing Services - You can work with a sourcing agent who works with manufacturers on your behalf, getting products for you at really great prices. This sourcing agent handles all the communication and organization. </strong></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>My advice for you:</p><ul>
<li>
<strong>Use several different vendors</strong> - don’t put all your eggs in one basket.</li>
<li>
<strong>Build relationships</strong> - get representatives and keep in touch with them. Relationships are so important in our business. </li>
<li>
<strong>Prices are negotiable</strong> - don’t be afraid to ask. Always ask for bulk pricing or discounts or free shipping or products. The bigger your business gets, the more buying power you have.</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>If you are working on a T-Shirt subscription, I’ve got a great FREE resource for you.  Check out <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-favorite-tshirt-brands-and-styles">my favorite t-shirt brands and styles pdf</a>.  There are SO many choices when it comes to t-shirts - this resource will help you find the best ones for you and your customers!  </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as I walk you through 8 ways to find products for your subscription box. Whether you’re just getting started or need more product options as you grow, get answers to your product sourcing questions! </p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-favorite-tshirt-brands-and-styles">Sarah’s Favorite T-Shirt Brands and Styles</a><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-favorite-tshirt-brands-and-styles"> </a></p><p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e">FREE 6 in 60 Workshop</a></p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1804</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f5403c7a-586f-11ef-bbc7-637ee612a8cd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8654210242.mp3?updated=1723501562" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>166: Lessons Learned From My Last 3 Launches</title>
      <description>Three launches in three months to three different audiences. Yep, I did that. As always, there were lessons to be learned from each launch. What surprised me is that three of those lessons were the same for all three launches! 

That’s a lot of “3”s! So let me break it down. 

In late April and early May, I launched The Monogram Box™, my curated subscription box. 
In June, I launched Subscription Box Week, my SLO into my Launch Your Box membership. 
And in July, I launched my Tees 4 Teachers subscription, a monthly subscription of t-shirts designed especially for teachers. 

All three launches were successful (yay!) and I took similar lessons away from all three. Lessons you can apply to your own launches. 

Lesson 1 - People are buying! 


Yes, the economy is rough and yes, prices are high, but people are still buying. 

People buy what they are connected to from people and brands they feel connected to. 

Don’t use the economy as an excuse - people are buying. 


Lesson 2 - You need paid ads! 


When I started my business 11 years ago, organic growth was so much easier. 

Now, I need an ads budget… and so do you. 

Need proof? My three launches…

Monogram Box™ - 82% of traffic came directly from ads. 

Subscription Box Week - 75% of traffic came directly from ads. 

Tees 4 Teachers - 90% of traffic came directly from ads. 

And yes, that traffic converted! 

If you’ve never run ads, start small. I started with $10 a day. When I saw results, I increased my budget. 

You need paid ads now to build your audience and make connections - use page like ads and ads for lead magnets &amp; opt-ins. 


Lesson 3 - You’ve got to create exclusivity and scarcity. 

We’ve gotten into a bad habit of making everything available all the time. Offering too many options results in decision fatigue. 

Create exclusivity and scarcity around being a subscriber. 

I did this in my own business. The result? 421 new monthly Monogram Box™ subscribers! 

If you sell out, don’t buy more. Let it sell out - use that to create urgency for your next launch. 

Between launches, drive people to the waitlist. 

Don’t be afraid to close your cart. I decided to close Launch Your Box for the first time in a couple of years. What happened? I had the highest converting launch EVER for Launch Your Box! 


We give ourselves reasons why things aren’t working. But they’re not reasons, they are excuses. 

How will you do things differently in your next launch? 

I learned three lessons while launching three offers in the last three months! Join me for this episode as I break down my biggest takeaways and help you make the most out of your launch. It’s time to get out of your head! 

FREE 6 in 60 Workshop

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 07 Aug 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Lessons Learned From My Last 3 Launches</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>166</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I learned three lessons while launching three offers in the last three months! Join me for this episode as I break down my biggest takeaways and help you make the most out of your launch. It’s time to get out of your head! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Three launches in three months to three different audiences. Yep, I did that. As always, there were lessons to be learned from each launch. What surprised me is that three of those lessons were the same for all three launches! 

That’s a lot of “3”s! So let me break it down. 

In late April and early May, I launched The Monogram Box™, my curated subscription box. 
In June, I launched Subscription Box Week, my SLO into my Launch Your Box membership. 
And in July, I launched my Tees 4 Teachers subscription, a monthly subscription of t-shirts designed especially for teachers. 

All three launches were successful (yay!) and I took similar lessons away from all three. Lessons you can apply to your own launches. 

Lesson 1 - People are buying! 


Yes, the economy is rough and yes, prices are high, but people are still buying. 

People buy what they are connected to from people and brands they feel connected to. 

Don’t use the economy as an excuse - people are buying. 


Lesson 2 - You need paid ads! 


When I started my business 11 years ago, organic growth was so much easier. 

Now, I need an ads budget… and so do you. 

Need proof? My three launches…

Monogram Box™ - 82% of traffic came directly from ads. 

Subscription Box Week - 75% of traffic came directly from ads. 

Tees 4 Teachers - 90% of traffic came directly from ads. 

And yes, that traffic converted! 

If you’ve never run ads, start small. I started with $10 a day. When I saw results, I increased my budget. 

You need paid ads now to build your audience and make connections - use page like ads and ads for lead magnets &amp; opt-ins. 


Lesson 3 - You’ve got to create exclusivity and scarcity. 

We’ve gotten into a bad habit of making everything available all the time. Offering too many options results in decision fatigue. 

Create exclusivity and scarcity around being a subscriber. 

I did this in my own business. The result? 421 new monthly Monogram Box™ subscribers! 

If you sell out, don’t buy more. Let it sell out - use that to create urgency for your next launch. 

Between launches, drive people to the waitlist. 

Don’t be afraid to close your cart. I decided to close Launch Your Box for the first time in a couple of years. What happened? I had the highest converting launch EVER for Launch Your Box! 


We give ourselves reasons why things aren’t working. But they’re not reasons, they are excuses. 

How will you do things differently in your next launch? 

I learned three lessons while launching three offers in the last three months! Join me for this episode as I break down my biggest takeaways and help you make the most out of your launch. It’s time to get out of your head! 

FREE 6 in 60 Workshop

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Three launches in three months to three different audiences. Yep, I did that. As always, there were lessons to be learned from each launch. What surprised me is that three of those lessons were the same for all three launches! </p><p><br></p><p>That’s a lot of “3”s! So let me break it down. </p><p><br></p><p>In late April and early May, I launched The Monogram Box™, my curated subscription box. </p><p>In June, I launched Subscription Box Week, my SLO into my Launch Your Box membership. </p><p>And in July, I launched my Tees 4 Teachers subscription, a monthly subscription of t-shirts designed especially for teachers. </p><p><br></p><p>All three launches were successful (yay!) and I took similar lessons away from all three. Lessons you can apply to your own launches. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Lesson 1 - People are buying!</strong> </p><p><br></p><ul>
<li>Yes, the economy is rough and yes, prices are high, but people are still buying. </li>
<li>People buy what they are connected to from people and brands they feel connected to. </li>
<li>Don’t use the economy as an excuse - people are buying. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Lesson 2 - You need paid ads!</strong> </p><p><br></p><ul>
<li>When I started my business 11 years ago, organic growth was so much easier. </li>
<li>Now, I need an ads budget… and so do you. </li>
<li>Need proof? My three launches…</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Monogram Box™ - 82% of traffic came directly from ads. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Subscription Box Week - 75% of traffic came directly from ads. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Tees 4 Teachers - 90% of traffic came directly from ads. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">And yes, that traffic converted! </li>
<li>If you’ve never run ads, start small. I started with $10 a day. When I saw results, I increased my budget. </li>
<li>You need paid ads now to build your audience and make connections - use page like ads and ads for lead magnets &amp; opt-ins. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Lesson 3 - You’ve got to create exclusivity and scarcity. </strong></p><ul>
<li>We’ve gotten into a bad habit of making everything available all the time. Offering too many options results in decision fatigue. </li>
<li>Create exclusivity and scarcity around being a subscriber. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">I did this in my own business. The result? 421 new monthly Monogram Box™ subscribers! </li>
<li>If you sell out, don’t buy more. Let it sell out - use that to create urgency for your next launch. </li>
<li>Between launches, drive people to the waitlist. </li>
<li>Don’t be afraid to close your cart. I decided to close Launch Your Box for the first time in a couple of years. What happened? I had the highest converting launch EVER for Launch Your Box! </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>We give ourselves reasons why things aren’t working. But they’re not reasons, they are excuses. </p><p><br></p><p>How will you do things differently in your next launch? </p><p><br></p><p>I learned three lessons while launching three offers in the last three months! Join me for this episode as I break down my biggest takeaways and help you make the most out of <em>your </em>launch. It’s time to get out of your head! </p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e">FREE 6 in 60 Workshop</a></p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join the waitlist </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1657</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[75c3dd3a-5397-11ef-915d-33d0a2e86555]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3782574559.mp3?updated=1722909846" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>5 Ways to Do a Monthly Unboxing - Every Month</title>
      <description>How many different ways do you do an unboxing for your subscription box every month? Would it surprise you to learn there are FIVE different ways you can do an unboxing… every month? 

My box opening checklist makes it easy! 

Building connections. Creating excitement and FOMO. Growing your waitlist. Gaining new subscribers. There are so many reasons you need to make a monthly unboxing part of your subscription box marketing strategy. 

You know the why, let’s talk about the how. How can you do a monthly unboxing FIVE different ways every month? Simply follow this checklist. 



Live Unboxing - this is a MUST. Turn on the camera, invite your followers and subscribers, and take them through the box. Don’t overcomplicate it: 

Set the date

Set the stage

State your hook

Encourage engagement early

Tell the story of the box (your curation process)

Show each piece and how it ties to the next 

Give the audience a call to action (subscribe, join the waitlist, grab one of the extra pieces) 



Email Unboxing - using the same content you just created for the LIVE. 


Blog Unboxing - turn the email unboxing into a blog post. 



Short Video Unboxing - while taking pictures for social media, the blog, and the email, shoot a boxing or unboxing video

Use on Reels, TikTok, YouTube Shorts, Pinterest, etc. 



Story Slide Unboxing - create three-five slides to use in picture stories. 

If you’re not currently doing a monthly unboxing, don’t try to start doing all five. Instead, start with one or two - but the LIVE is a must do! If you are already doing a monthly LIVE unboxing, start layering in a couple more unboxings until you work your way up to doing all five. It’s not about being overwhelmed, it’s about making progress. 

And when you do these monthly unboxings, I have three tips for you to keep in mind: 


Always invite your subscribers - specifically to your LIVE unboxings. 

It’s a connection point. 

They provide instant social proof. 

They’ll love to show up with you and share their excitement! 



Always give a sneak peek of the next month’s box. 

Create excitement and anticipation. 

Give subscribers a reason to show up to the LIVE. 



Always have a call to action. 

Join now. 

Get on the waitlist. 


Join me for this episode as I walk you through five ways you can do a monthly unboxing - and connect with your audience - every month. 


Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 31 Jul 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>5 Ways to Do a Monthly Unboxing - Every Month</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle></itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>How many different ways do you do an unboxing for your subscription box every month? Would it surprise you to learn there are FIVE different ways you can do an unboxing… every month? 

My box opening checklist makes it easy! 

Building connections. Creating excitement and FOMO. Growing your waitlist. Gaining new subscribers. There are so many reasons you need to make a monthly unboxing part of your subscription box marketing strategy. 

You know the why, let’s talk about the how. How can you do a monthly unboxing FIVE different ways every month? Simply follow this checklist. 



Live Unboxing - this is a MUST. Turn on the camera, invite your followers and subscribers, and take them through the box. Don’t overcomplicate it: 

Set the date

Set the stage

State your hook

Encourage engagement early

Tell the story of the box (your curation process)

Show each piece and how it ties to the next 

Give the audience a call to action (subscribe, join the waitlist, grab one of the extra pieces) 



Email Unboxing - using the same content you just created for the LIVE. 


Blog Unboxing - turn the email unboxing into a blog post. 



Short Video Unboxing - while taking pictures for social media, the blog, and the email, shoot a boxing or unboxing video

Use on Reels, TikTok, YouTube Shorts, Pinterest, etc. 



Story Slide Unboxing - create three-five slides to use in picture stories. 

If you’re not currently doing a monthly unboxing, don’t try to start doing all five. Instead, start with one or two - but the LIVE is a must do! If you are already doing a monthly LIVE unboxing, start layering in a couple more unboxings until you work your way up to doing all five. It’s not about being overwhelmed, it’s about making progress. 

And when you do these monthly unboxings, I have three tips for you to keep in mind: 


Always invite your subscribers - specifically to your LIVE unboxings. 

It’s a connection point. 

They provide instant social proof. 

They’ll love to show up with you and share their excitement! 



Always give a sneak peek of the next month’s box. 

Create excitement and anticipation. 

Give subscribers a reason to show up to the LIVE. 



Always have a call to action. 

Join now. 

Get on the waitlist. 


Join me for this episode as I walk you through five ways you can do a monthly unboxing - and connect with your audience - every month. 


Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>How many different ways do you do an unboxing for your subscription box every month? Would it surprise you to learn there are FIVE different ways you can do an unboxing… every month? </p><p><br></p><p>My box opening checklist makes it easy! </p><p><br></p><p>Building connections. Creating excitement and FOMO. Growing your waitlist. Gaining new subscribers. There are so many reasons you need to make a monthly unboxing part of your subscription box marketing strategy. </p><p><br></p><p>You know the why, let’s talk about the how. How can you do a monthly unboxing FIVE different ways every month? Simply follow this checklist. </p><p><br></p><ul>
<li>
<strong>Live Unboxing </strong>- this is a MUST. Turn on the camera, invite your followers and subscribers, and take them through the box. Don’t overcomplicate it: </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Set the date</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Set the stage</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">State your hook</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Encourage engagement early</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Tell the story of the box (your curation process)</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Show each piece and how it ties to the next </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Give the audience a call to action (subscribe, join the waitlist, grab one of the extra pieces) </li>
</ul><p><br></p><ul><li>
<strong>Email Unboxing</strong> - using the same content you just created for the LIVE. </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>
<strong>Blog Unboxing</strong> - turn the email unboxing into a blog post. </li></ul><p><br></p><ul>
<li>
<strong>Short Video Unboxing</strong> - while taking pictures for social media, the blog, and the email, shoot a boxing or unboxing video</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Use on Reels, TikTok, YouTube Shorts, Pinterest, etc. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><ul><li>
<strong>Story Slide Unboxing</strong> - create three-five slides to use in picture stories. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>If you’re not currently doing a monthly unboxing, don’t try to start doing all five. Instead, start with one or two - but the LIVE is a must do! If you are already doing a monthly LIVE unboxing, start layering in a couple more unboxings until you work your way up to doing all five. It’s not about being overwhelmed, it’s about making progress. </p><p><br></p><p>And when you do these monthly unboxings, I have three tips for you to keep in mind: </p><p><br></p><ul>
<li>Always invite your subscribers - specifically to your LIVE unboxings. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">It’s a connection point. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">They provide instant social proof. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">They’ll love to show up with you and share their excitement! </li>
</ul><p><br></p><ul>
<li>Always give a sneak peek of the next month’s box. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Create excitement and anticipation. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Give subscribers a reason to show up to the LIVE. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><ul>
<li>Always have a call to action. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Join now. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Get on the waitlist. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as I walk you through five ways you can do a monthly unboxing - and connect with your audience - every month. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1803</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[979929b2-4ed1-11ef-bcd4-23358652d098]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5669343351.mp3?updated=1722385078" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Niching Down Your Ideal Customer Can Improve Your Visibility</title>
      <description>“20% of your customer base generates 80% of your revenue.” - Sarah Williams

Identifying your ideal customer is not something you do once. It’s something you need to tweak and get clearer about in your business on a daily basis. In this episode, I’m talking about how to figure out who the 20% of your customers are who are responsible for 80% of your revenue and why you should focus all of your efforts on them. Oh… and one other thing. Stop trying to please everyone!  

When you try to please everyone, you dilute your focus. Instead of spending your time and energy on what you know works for your most loyal customers - the ones who buy from you every day - you spend time, energy, and money trying to satisfy one-off requests from customers who are not your ideal person. 

If you’re just getting started and even if you’ve been in business for a while, you might have an idea of who your ideal customer is, but you’re probably not sure. Start by asking yourself questions about your ideal customer and get as specific as possible with your answers. 

Who is your ideal customer? Start with the basics. 

Where does your ideal customer live? 

What are your ideal customer’s interests? 

What are your ideal customer’s challenges or pain points? 


Nail down the basics and then get more specific. Is your ideal customer “a mom” or “a mom of preschoolers who works outside the home and wants to provide quick, easy, and healthy meals to her family?” It is much easier for me to speak to “a mom” when I know who she is and what her pain points are! 

Once you get a good picture of who your ideal customer is, it’s time to talk about how to get them into your world and build the know-like-trust factor that makes them want to buy from you. 

Get to know your ideal customer and let them get to know you by:

Hanging out in common Facebook groups offering advice and engaging in conversations. 

Speak their language in your posts, videos, and emails. 

Target their interests in your social media advertising. 

Serve before you sell. This is SO important. Provide value without asking for money. 


This month inside Launch Your Box, we’re talking all about SEO and how it can help your subscription box business grow. The purpose of SEO is to help the right people find you online. The more we can niche down, the more completely we define who our ideal customer is, the better we can be at messaging, copy, and SEO. 

Join me for this episode as I talk about how and why niching down your ideal customer can improve your visibility and increase your revenue! 
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Jul 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Niching Down Your Ideal Customer Can Improve Your Visibility</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as I talk about how and why niching down your ideal customer can improve your visibility and increase your revenue! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“20% of your customer base generates 80% of your revenue.” - Sarah Williams

Identifying your ideal customer is not something you do once. It’s something you need to tweak and get clearer about in your business on a daily basis. In this episode, I’m talking about how to figure out who the 20% of your customers are who are responsible for 80% of your revenue and why you should focus all of your efforts on them. Oh… and one other thing. Stop trying to please everyone!  

When you try to please everyone, you dilute your focus. Instead of spending your time and energy on what you know works for your most loyal customers - the ones who buy from you every day - you spend time, energy, and money trying to satisfy one-off requests from customers who are not your ideal person. 

If you’re just getting started and even if you’ve been in business for a while, you might have an idea of who your ideal customer is, but you’re probably not sure. Start by asking yourself questions about your ideal customer and get as specific as possible with your answers. 

Who is your ideal customer? Start with the basics. 

Where does your ideal customer live? 

What are your ideal customer’s interests? 

What are your ideal customer’s challenges or pain points? 


Nail down the basics and then get more specific. Is your ideal customer “a mom” or “a mom of preschoolers who works outside the home and wants to provide quick, easy, and healthy meals to her family?” It is much easier for me to speak to “a mom” when I know who she is and what her pain points are! 

Once you get a good picture of who your ideal customer is, it’s time to talk about how to get them into your world and build the know-like-trust factor that makes them want to buy from you. 

Get to know your ideal customer and let them get to know you by:

Hanging out in common Facebook groups offering advice and engaging in conversations. 

Speak their language in your posts, videos, and emails. 

Target their interests in your social media advertising. 

Serve before you sell. This is SO important. Provide value without asking for money. 


This month inside Launch Your Box, we’re talking all about SEO and how it can help your subscription box business grow. The purpose of SEO is to help the right people find you online. The more we can niche down, the more completely we define who our ideal customer is, the better we can be at messaging, copy, and SEO. 

Join me for this episode as I talk about how and why niching down your ideal customer can improve your visibility and increase your revenue! 
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><em>“20% of your customer base generates 80% of your revenue.”</em> - Sarah Williams</p><p><br></p><p>Identifying your ideal customer is not something you do once. It’s something you need to tweak and get clearer about in your business on a daily basis. In this episode, I’m talking about how to figure out who the 20% of your customers are who are responsible for 80% of your revenue and why you should focus all of your efforts on them. Oh… and one other thing. Stop trying to please everyone!  </p><p><br></p><p>When you try to please everyone, you dilute your focus. Instead of spending your time and energy on what you know works for your most loyal customers - the ones who buy from you every day - you spend time, energy, and money trying to satisfy one-off requests from customers who are not your ideal person. </p><p><br></p><p>If you’re just getting started and even if you’ve been in business for a while, you might have an idea of who your ideal customer is, but you’re probably not sure. Start by asking yourself questions about your ideal customer and get as specific as possible with your answers. </p><ol>
<li>Who is your ideal customer? Start with the basics. </li>
<li>Where does your ideal customer live? </li>
<li>What are your ideal customer’s interests? </li>
<li>What are your ideal customer’s challenges or pain points? </li>
</ol><p><br></p><p>Nail down the basics and then get more specific. Is your ideal customer “a mom” or “a mom of preschoolers who works outside the home and wants to provide quick, easy, and healthy meals to her family?” It is much easier for me to speak to “a mom” when I know who she is and what her pain points are! </p><p><br></p><p>Once you get a good picture of who your ideal customer is, it’s time to talk about how to get them into your world and build the know-like-trust factor that makes them want to buy from you. </p><p><br></p><p>Get to know your ideal customer and let them get to know you by:</p><ul>
<li>Hanging out in common Facebook groups offering advice and engaging in conversations. </li>
<li>Speak their language in your posts, videos, and emails. </li>
<li>Target their interests in your social media advertising. </li>
<li>Serve before you sell. This is SO important. Provide value without asking for money. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>This month inside Launch Your Box, we’re talking all about SEO and how it can help your subscription box business grow. The purpose of SEO is to help the right people find you online. The more we can niche down, the more completely we define who our ideal customer is, the better we can be at messaging, copy, and SEO. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as I talk about how and why niching down your ideal customer can improve your visibility and increase your revenue! </p><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1726</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5edd316e-4304-11ef-991c-13b60954a6ae]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7035323995.mp3?updated=1721087453" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Building a Lead Magnet Funnel</title>
      <description>In this episode, I’m going deeper into lead magnets and showing you how to build a lead magnet funnel. 

Top of the funnel -this is the largest part of the funnel. Your goal is to collect as many leads as possible. Start with a free offer, giving your audience something of value. 

Freebie or low-dollar lead magnet.

Ads to targeted interests going to cold and warm audiences.

Make sure your lead magnet is niched down so you don’t waste time and money on unqualified leads.  

The goal is to capture leads and get them on your email list. 


Opt-in -the lead has given you their email and now they move to the middle of the funnel. 

When someone submits their email address, they are sent to a thank you page. Include an upsell offer along with the link to get their freebie. 

This upsell should be an inexpensive offer that gives them even more value than the freebie. 

The goal at this stage in the funnel is to get them to make a purchase. 


Once someone has reached the middle of your funnel, they’ve received value from you, they’ve made a small purchase, and now the goal shifts to getting them to purchase your main offer. For subscription box owners, this means our recurring revenue product, our subscription boxes. 

Now it’s time to put email marketing to work for you. Set up an email automation that is kicked off when someone opts in. Keep it simple or more detailed - the choice is yours. 

Simple sequence - everyone gets the same sequence with all roads leading to becoming a subscriber. 

Detailed sequence - create two sequences - one for those who purchased the upsell and one for those who did not. 


Let’s walk through a simple email sequence. 

Email #1 - deliver the freebie and introduce your subscription box.

Email #2 - remind them to download the freebie and share the “why” behind your box with them.

Email #3 - is all about the box. Share social proof and pictures of past boxes. 


You can extend this sequence to five emails by including an email that offers a low dollar offer and adding an email with an additional offer to join at the end. 
If someone subscribes at any point during this email flow, the sequence stops and they’ll continue to get nurtured in your weekly email campaigns. 

You need to do FIVE things to create an effective lead magnet funnel. 

Create the lead magnet.

Create images for social media and ads. 

Create two landing pages - one for the opt-in and one for the thank you/upsell page. 

Create an embed form for the opt-in. 

Write your emails and set up the sequences. 


Join me for this episode as I talk about the importance of having lead magnets continuously bringing leads into your business and the steps you need to take to build out a lead magnet funnel.  
Important Links: 
6 in 60 Workshop 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join Launch Your Box today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 17 Jul 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Building a Lead Magnet Funnel</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as I talk about the importance of having lead magnets continuously bringing leads into your business and the steps you need to take to build out a lead magnet funnel.  </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode, I’m going deeper into lead magnets and showing you how to build a lead magnet funnel. 

Top of the funnel -this is the largest part of the funnel. Your goal is to collect as many leads as possible. Start with a free offer, giving your audience something of value. 

Freebie or low-dollar lead magnet.

Ads to targeted interests going to cold and warm audiences.

Make sure your lead magnet is niched down so you don’t waste time and money on unqualified leads.  

The goal is to capture leads and get them on your email list. 


Opt-in -the lead has given you their email and now they move to the middle of the funnel. 

When someone submits their email address, they are sent to a thank you page. Include an upsell offer along with the link to get their freebie. 

This upsell should be an inexpensive offer that gives them even more value than the freebie. 

The goal at this stage in the funnel is to get them to make a purchase. 


Once someone has reached the middle of your funnel, they’ve received value from you, they’ve made a small purchase, and now the goal shifts to getting them to purchase your main offer. For subscription box owners, this means our recurring revenue product, our subscription boxes. 

Now it’s time to put email marketing to work for you. Set up an email automation that is kicked off when someone opts in. Keep it simple or more detailed - the choice is yours. 

Simple sequence - everyone gets the same sequence with all roads leading to becoming a subscriber. 

Detailed sequence - create two sequences - one for those who purchased the upsell and one for those who did not. 


Let’s walk through a simple email sequence. 

Email #1 - deliver the freebie and introduce your subscription box.

Email #2 - remind them to download the freebie and share the “why” behind your box with them.

Email #3 - is all about the box. Share social proof and pictures of past boxes. 


You can extend this sequence to five emails by including an email that offers a low dollar offer and adding an email with an additional offer to join at the end. 
If someone subscribes at any point during this email flow, the sequence stops and they’ll continue to get nurtured in your weekly email campaigns. 

You need to do FIVE things to create an effective lead magnet funnel. 

Create the lead magnet.

Create images for social media and ads. 

Create two landing pages - one for the opt-in and one for the thank you/upsell page. 

Create an embed form for the opt-in. 

Write your emails and set up the sequences. 


Join me for this episode as I talk about the importance of having lead magnets continuously bringing leads into your business and the steps you need to take to build out a lead magnet funnel.  
Important Links: 
6 in 60 Workshop 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join Launch Your Box today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode, I’m going deeper into lead magnets and showing you how to build a lead magnet funnel. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Top of the funnel </strong>-this is the largest part of the funnel. Your goal is to collect as many leads as possible. Start with a free offer, giving your audience something of value. </p><ul>
<li>Freebie or low-dollar lead magnet.</li>
<li>Ads to targeted interests going to cold and warm audiences.</li>
<li>Make sure your lead magnet is niched down so you don’t waste time and money on unqualified leads.  </li>
<li>The goal is to capture leads and get them on your email list. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Opt-in </strong>-the lead has given you their email and now they move to the middle of the funnel. </p><ul>
<li>When someone submits their email address, they are sent to a thank you page. Include an upsell offer along with the link to get their freebie. </li>
<li>This upsell should be an inexpensive offer that gives them even more value than the freebie. </li>
<li>The goal at this stage in the funnel is to get them to make a purchase. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Once someone has reached the middle of your funnel, they’ve received value from you, they’ve made a small purchase, and now the goal shifts to getting them to purchase your main offer. For subscription box owners, this means our recurring revenue product, our subscription boxes. </p><p><br></p><p>Now it’s time to put email marketing to work for you. Set up an email automation that is kicked off when someone opts in. Keep it simple or more detailed - the choice is yours. </p><ul>
<li>Simple sequence - everyone gets the same sequence with all roads leading to becoming a subscriber. </li>
<li>Detailed sequence - create two sequences - one for those who purchased the upsell and one for those who did not. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Let’s walk through a simple email sequence. </p><ul>
<li>Email #1 - deliver the freebie and introduce your subscription box.</li>
<li>Email #2 - remind them to download the freebie and share the “why” behind your box with them.</li>
<li>Email #3 - is all about the box. Share social proof and pictures of past boxes. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>You can extend this sequence to five emails by including an email that offers a low dollar offer and adding an email with an additional offer to join at the end. </p><p>If someone subscribes at any point during this email flow, the sequence stops and they’ll continue to get nurtured in your weekly email campaigns. </p><p><br></p><p>You need to do FIVE things to create an effective lead magnet funnel. </p><ol>
<li>Create the lead magnet.</li>
<li>Create images for social media and ads. </li>
<li>Create two landing pages - one for the opt-in and one for the thank you/upsell page. </li>
<li>Create an embed form for the opt-in. </li>
<li>Write your emails and set up the sequences. </li>
</ol><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as I talk about the importance of having lead magnets continuously bringing leads into your business and the steps you need to take to build out a lead magnet funnel.  </p><p>Important Links: </p><ul><li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e">6 in 60 Workshop </a></li></ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join Launch Your Box</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1591</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[007fbc2c-4304-11ef-af57-ab0af0257f48]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2975649418.mp3?updated=1721087295" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>165: Quit Being Extreme &amp; Start Being Consistent with Cotton Chaos</title>
      <description>Two busy moms with six kids between them became best friends, bought a Cricut machine to start making custom t-shirts, and now have more than 800 monthly subscribers to their T-Shirt Club. Of course, there’s a little more to the story than that! If you’re feeling stuck in your subscription box journey, this episode will inspire you. 

Andrea and Whitney became friends in 2018, decided they needed a hobby and bought that Cricut machine, and in 2019, Cotton Chaos was born. The business was a side hustle as both women were still working full-time jobs and doing all the things moms of three busy kids do. There were a LOT of late nights. 

Whitney and Andrea saw an opportunity to take things to the next level when a local screen printing company became available. They bought the company and started selling to local and online customers.  

Before long, they decided to start a subscription box, launching in January of 2021. Their goal for the launch was 30 subscribers and they actually got 50! This launch was before they found me and Launch Your Box and, in their words, they “did it all wrong.” 

When Andrea and Whitney joined Launch Your Box, they also joined Scale Your Box, my higher-level membership for subscription box owners who want to scale. Their goal was to get to 100 subscribers. 

By following what they learned inside Scale Your Box, they quickly reached 100 subscribers. Their next milestone was 300 subscribers which they reached during their next launch. The next year brought another goal and another launch - 500 subscribers. 
How did they do it? How did they grow so quickly? 


They followed the plan. 

They implemented what they learned as they went. 

They stayed consistent. 


This rapid growth did come with challenges. Namely cash flow. When you grow really quickly and need to buy more and more product, there can come a point where you need to slow down to let your profit catch up.  

Andrea and Whitney decided to take this time to focus on their current subscribers. I call it “loving on them.” They deepened connections with their subscribers, turning them into loyal, raving fans. They found that those current subscribers started buying more one-off products - every week! So even though they weren’t launching to gain more subscribers, they were seeing growth in non-subscription sales from that same group! 

They also implemented even more of what they learned in Scale Your Box. They focused on using lead magnets to build their email list and running ads consistently. 

This past spring, Andrea and Whitney were ready to launch again. And all their audience-building efforts meant they had new people to launch to! They followed the 5-day launch plan I teach inside Launch Your Box and they brought in new affiliates. 

So how did the launch go? It was their biggest one yet, bringing them over the 800 subscriber mark! And they know that by following the launch plan the way they did, they have everything they need to rinse and repeat for the next launch! 

You don’t need to know what your business will look like in 5 years. Just concentrate on what’s the next thing and what’s one step you can take to make it happen. That’s what Andrea and Whitney have done and continue to do. And it’s how you’ll make progress toward reaching - and surpassing - your subscription box goals.  

Join me for this episode and learn how this duo went from 50 to more than 800 subscribers by being themselves, creating a plan, and never giving up… even when things got hard. Get ready to be inspired! 

Find and follow Cotton Chaos: 

Cotton Chaos on Facebook


Cotton Chaos on Instagram  

Cotton Chaos Website


Join me in all the places:  

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 10 Jul 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Quit Being Extreme &amp; Start Being Consistent with Cotton Chaos</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>165</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode and learn how this duo went from 50 to more than 800 subscribers by being themselves, creating a plan, and never giving up… even when things got hard. Get ready to be inspired! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Two busy moms with six kids between them became best friends, bought a Cricut machine to start making custom t-shirts, and now have more than 800 monthly subscribers to their T-Shirt Club. Of course, there’s a little more to the story than that! If you’re feeling stuck in your subscription box journey, this episode will inspire you. 

Andrea and Whitney became friends in 2018, decided they needed a hobby and bought that Cricut machine, and in 2019, Cotton Chaos was born. The business was a side hustle as both women were still working full-time jobs and doing all the things moms of three busy kids do. There were a LOT of late nights. 

Whitney and Andrea saw an opportunity to take things to the next level when a local screen printing company became available. They bought the company and started selling to local and online customers.  

Before long, they decided to start a subscription box, launching in January of 2021. Their goal for the launch was 30 subscribers and they actually got 50! This launch was before they found me and Launch Your Box and, in their words, they “did it all wrong.” 

When Andrea and Whitney joined Launch Your Box, they also joined Scale Your Box, my higher-level membership for subscription box owners who want to scale. Their goal was to get to 100 subscribers. 

By following what they learned inside Scale Your Box, they quickly reached 100 subscribers. Their next milestone was 300 subscribers which they reached during their next launch. The next year brought another goal and another launch - 500 subscribers. 
How did they do it? How did they grow so quickly? 


They followed the plan. 

They implemented what they learned as they went. 

They stayed consistent. 


This rapid growth did come with challenges. Namely cash flow. When you grow really quickly and need to buy more and more product, there can come a point where you need to slow down to let your profit catch up.  

Andrea and Whitney decided to take this time to focus on their current subscribers. I call it “loving on them.” They deepened connections with their subscribers, turning them into loyal, raving fans. They found that those current subscribers started buying more one-off products - every week! So even though they weren’t launching to gain more subscribers, they were seeing growth in non-subscription sales from that same group! 

They also implemented even more of what they learned in Scale Your Box. They focused on using lead magnets to build their email list and running ads consistently. 

This past spring, Andrea and Whitney were ready to launch again. And all their audience-building efforts meant they had new people to launch to! They followed the 5-day launch plan I teach inside Launch Your Box and they brought in new affiliates. 

So how did the launch go? It was their biggest one yet, bringing them over the 800 subscriber mark! And they know that by following the launch plan the way they did, they have everything they need to rinse and repeat for the next launch! 

You don’t need to know what your business will look like in 5 years. Just concentrate on what’s the next thing and what’s one step you can take to make it happen. That’s what Andrea and Whitney have done and continue to do. And it’s how you’ll make progress toward reaching - and surpassing - your subscription box goals.  

Join me for this episode and learn how this duo went from 50 to more than 800 subscribers by being themselves, creating a plan, and never giving up… even when things got hard. Get ready to be inspired! 

Find and follow Cotton Chaos: 

Cotton Chaos on Facebook


Cotton Chaos on Instagram  

Cotton Chaos Website


Join me in all the places:  

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Two busy moms with six kids between them became best friends, bought a Cricut machine to start making custom t-shirts, and now have more than 800 monthly subscribers to their T-Shirt Club. Of course, there’s a little more to the story than that! If you’re feeling stuck in your subscription box journey, this episode will inspire you. </p><p><br></p><p>Andrea and Whitney became friends in 2018, decided they needed a hobby and bought that Cricut machine, and in 2019, Cotton Chaos was born. The business was a side hustle as both women were still working full-time jobs and doing all the things moms of three busy kids do. There were a LOT of late nights. </p><p><br></p><p>Whitney and Andrea saw an opportunity to take things to the next level when a local screen printing company became available. They bought the company and started selling to local and online customers.  </p><p><br></p><p>Before long, they decided to start a subscription box, launching in January of 2021. Their goal for the launch was 30 subscribers and they actually got 50! This launch was before they found me and Launch Your Box and, in their words, they “did it all wrong.” </p><p><br></p><p>When Andrea and Whitney joined Launch Your Box, they also joined Scale Your Box, my higher-level membership for subscription box owners who want to scale. Their goal was to get to 100 subscribers. </p><p><br></p><p>By following what they learned inside Scale Your Box, they quickly reached 100 subscribers. Their next milestone was 300 subscribers which they reached during their next launch. The next year brought another goal and another launch - 500 subscribers. </p><p>How did they do it? How did they grow so quickly? </p><p><br></p><ul>
<li>They followed the plan. </li>
<li>They implemented what they learned as they went. </li>
<li>They stayed consistent. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>This rapid growth did come with challenges. Namely cash flow. When you grow really quickly and need to buy more and more product, there can come a point where you need to slow down to let your profit catch up.  </p><p><br></p><p>Andrea and Whitney decided to take this time to focus on their current subscribers. I call it “loving on them.” They deepened connections with their subscribers, turning them into loyal, raving fans. They found that those current subscribers started buying more one-off products - every week! So even though they weren’t launching to gain more subscribers, they were seeing growth in non-subscription sales from that same group! </p><p><br></p><p>They also implemented even more of what they learned in Scale Your Box. They focused on using lead magnets to build their email list and running ads consistently. </p><p><br></p><p>This past spring, Andrea and Whitney were ready to launch again. And all their audience-building efforts meant they had new people to launch to! They followed the 5-day launch plan I teach inside Launch Your Box and they brought in new affiliates. </p><p><br></p><p>So how did the launch go? It was their biggest one yet, bringing them over the 800 subscriber mark! And they know that by following the launch plan the way they did, they have everything they need to rinse and repeat for the next launch! </p><p><br></p><p>You don’t need to know what your business will look like in 5 years. Just concentrate on what’s the next thing and what’s one step you can take to make it happen. That’s what Andrea and Whitney have done and continue to do. And it’s how you’ll make progress toward reaching - and surpassing - your subscription box goals.  </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode and learn how this duo went from 50 to more than 800 subscribers by being themselves, creating a plan, and never giving up… even when things got hard. Get ready to be inspired! </p><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Cotton Chaos: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/cottonchaos">Cotton Chaos on Facebook</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.instagram.com/cottonchaostees/">Cotton Chaos on Instagram</a>  </li>
<li><a href="https://cottonchaos.com/">Cotton Chaos Website</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places:  </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1353</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a901860c-3d71-11ef-a1b0-83532711e63d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3931853652.mp3?updated=1720474686" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>164: Baking Their Way to a Subscription Box Business</title>
      <description>Last week I hosted our annual Subscription Box Week and it was so so good!  Part of the week features interviews with subscription box owners who have various types and sizes of businesses. This year, I interviewed 4 subscription box owners at once - all of whom have some type of bakery box. Each serves a different niche and each followed a different journey. All are SO inspiring!  

Lauren is the “celebrity” of the group! You might have seen her on Food Network’s Christmas Cookie Challenge. Lauren went from being a mom and art teacher who loved to bake cookies to a full-time entrepreneur who designs and produces her own cookie cutters, an online and in-person cookie decorating instructor, and a successful subscription box owner. 

Lauren’s family is her why. She wanted to grow her business to help put her two sons through college. She was proud to tell us they will both be able to graduate debt-free, thanks in large part to Lauren’s subscription box business! 

Jonica owns a bakery and a successful subscription box business, and coaches people who want to open bakeries. In addition to serving lunch and baked goods to her local community, Jonica makes the MOST delicious treats and sends them across the country every month. 
Jonica has taken all the lessons she learned through her business journey - opening and closing two other bakeries - and poured them into doing things the right way. The way that serves both her customers and Jonica and her family. 

After leaving a successful bakery in North Carolina to move “back home” to Iowa after her husband’s military retirement, Kimberly started selling her baked goods again. She was inspired by how much her former customers missed her baked goods and got creative. 

Jenny is not a baker, but she is a passionate advocate for the gluten-free community and served them for many years through her blog, Good For You Gluten Free. When changes in the Google algorithm had a severely negative impact on her traffic - and her income - Jenny pivoted. She turned her love for finding new gluten-free products and vendors into a subscription box. 

Jenny launched earlier this year and she sold out the 125 slots she had available in hours. Jenny is growing as fast as she can manage, selling out every month, and looks forward to even more growth once she moves her business out of the basement and into a space of its own. 

These four amazing businesswomen shared advice with people who are thinking about starting a subscription box. Their message? Just start. It doesn’t have to be perfect. Serve your audience - give them what they need and what they want. 

Join me for this episode and get inspired by four women who turned their passion for food and serving others into successful subscription box businesses. 

Find and follow Jonica: 

Jonica’s Bakery on Facebook


Jonica’s Baker on Instagram  

Jonica’s Bakery Website

Episode 59 of the Launch Your Box Podcast

Find and follow Lauren: 

The Cheerful Baker on Facebook


The Cheerful Baker on Instagram  

The Cheerful Baker Website

Episode 103 of the Launch Your Box Podcast

Find and follow Kimberly: 

Frosted Cakery on Facebook


Frosted Cakery on Instagram  

Get Biscotti Website

Episode 122 of the Launch Your Box Podcast 

Find and follow Jenny: 

Love Me Gluten Free on Facebook


Love Me Gluten Free Instagram  

Love Me Gluten Free Website

Good for You Gluten Free Website


Join me in all the places:  

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. J</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 03 Jul 2024 08:50:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Baking Their Way to a Subscription Box Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>164</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode and get inspired by four women who turned their passion for food and serving others into successful subscription box businesses. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Last week I hosted our annual Subscription Box Week and it was so so good!  Part of the week features interviews with subscription box owners who have various types and sizes of businesses. This year, I interviewed 4 subscription box owners at once - all of whom have some type of bakery box. Each serves a different niche and each followed a different journey. All are SO inspiring!  

Lauren is the “celebrity” of the group! You might have seen her on Food Network’s Christmas Cookie Challenge. Lauren went from being a mom and art teacher who loved to bake cookies to a full-time entrepreneur who designs and produces her own cookie cutters, an online and in-person cookie decorating instructor, and a successful subscription box owner. 

Lauren’s family is her why. She wanted to grow her business to help put her two sons through college. She was proud to tell us they will both be able to graduate debt-free, thanks in large part to Lauren’s subscription box business! 

Jonica owns a bakery and a successful subscription box business, and coaches people who want to open bakeries. In addition to serving lunch and baked goods to her local community, Jonica makes the MOST delicious treats and sends them across the country every month. 
Jonica has taken all the lessons she learned through her business journey - opening and closing two other bakeries - and poured them into doing things the right way. The way that serves both her customers and Jonica and her family. 

After leaving a successful bakery in North Carolina to move “back home” to Iowa after her husband’s military retirement, Kimberly started selling her baked goods again. She was inspired by how much her former customers missed her baked goods and got creative. 

Jenny is not a baker, but she is a passionate advocate for the gluten-free community and served them for many years through her blog, Good For You Gluten Free. When changes in the Google algorithm had a severely negative impact on her traffic - and her income - Jenny pivoted. She turned her love for finding new gluten-free products and vendors into a subscription box. 

Jenny launched earlier this year and she sold out the 125 slots she had available in hours. Jenny is growing as fast as she can manage, selling out every month, and looks forward to even more growth once she moves her business out of the basement and into a space of its own. 

These four amazing businesswomen shared advice with people who are thinking about starting a subscription box. Their message? Just start. It doesn’t have to be perfect. Serve your audience - give them what they need and what they want. 

Join me for this episode and get inspired by four women who turned their passion for food and serving others into successful subscription box businesses. 

Find and follow Jonica: 

Jonica’s Bakery on Facebook


Jonica’s Baker on Instagram  

Jonica’s Bakery Website

Episode 59 of the Launch Your Box Podcast

Find and follow Lauren: 

The Cheerful Baker on Facebook


The Cheerful Baker on Instagram  

The Cheerful Baker Website

Episode 103 of the Launch Your Box Podcast

Find and follow Kimberly: 

Frosted Cakery on Facebook


Frosted Cakery on Instagram  

Get Biscotti Website

Episode 122 of the Launch Your Box Podcast 

Find and follow Jenny: 

Love Me Gluten Free on Facebook


Love Me Gluten Free Instagram  

Love Me Gluten Free Website

Good for You Gluten Free Website


Join me in all the places:  

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. J</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Last week I hosted our annual Subscription Box Week and it was so so good!  Part of the week features interviews with subscription box owners who have various types and sizes of businesses. This year, I interviewed 4 subscription box owners at once - all of whom have some type of bakery box. Each serves a different niche and each followed a different journey. All are SO inspiring!  </p><p><br></p><p>Lauren is the “celebrity” of the group! You might have seen her on Food Network’s <em>Christmas Cookie Challenge</em>. Lauren went from being a mom and art teacher who loved to bake cookies to a full-time entrepreneur who designs and produces her own cookie cutters, an online and in-person cookie decorating instructor, and a successful subscription box owner. </p><p><br></p><p>Lauren’s family is her why. She wanted to grow her business to help put her two sons through college. She was proud to tell us they will both be able to graduate debt-free, thanks in large part to Lauren’s subscription box business! </p><p><br></p><p>Jonica owns a bakery and a successful subscription box business, and coaches people who want to open bakeries. In addition to serving lunch and baked goods to her local community, Jonica makes the MOST delicious treats and sends them across the country every month. </p><p>Jonica has taken all the lessons she learned through her business journey - opening and closing two other bakeries - and poured them into doing things the right way. The way that serves both her customers and Jonica and her family. </p><p><br></p><p>After leaving a successful bakery in North Carolina to move “back home” to Iowa after her husband’s military retirement, Kimberly started selling her baked goods again. She was inspired by how much her former customers missed her baked goods and got creative. </p><p><br></p><p>Jenny is not a baker, but she is a passionate advocate for the gluten-free community and served them for many years through her blog, <em>Good For You Gluten Free</em>. When changes in the Google algorithm had a severely negative impact on her traffic - and her income - Jenny pivoted. She turned her love for finding new gluten-free products and vendors into a subscription box. </p><p><br></p><p>Jenny launched earlier this year and she sold out the 125 slots she had available in hours. Jenny is growing as fast as she can manage, selling out every month, and looks forward to even more growth once she moves her business out of the basement and into a space of its own. </p><p><br></p><p>These four amazing businesswomen shared advice with people who are thinking about starting a subscription box. Their message? Just start. It doesn’t have to be perfect. Serve your audience - give them what they need and what they want. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode and get inspired by four women who turned their passion for food and serving others into successful subscription box businesses. </p><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Jonica: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/JonicasBakery">Jonica’s Bakery on Facebook</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.instagram.com/jonicasbakery/">Jonica’s Baker on Instagram</a>  </li>
<li><a href="https://jonicasbakery.com/">Jonica’s Bakery Website</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-59-bakery-subscription-box">Episode 59 of the Launch Your Box Podcast</a></li>
</ul><p>Find and follow Lauren: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/cheerfulbaker">The Cheerful Baker on Facebook</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.instagram.com/thecheerfulbaker/">The Cheerful Baker on Instagram</a>  </li>
<li><a href="https://cheerfulbaker.com/">The Cheerful Baker Website</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/from-the-food-network-to-starting-a-subscription-box-business-ep-103">Episode 103 of the Launch Your Box Podcast</a></li>
</ul><p>Find and follow Kimberly: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/frostediowa">Frosted Cakery on Facebook</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.instagram.com/frostediowa/">Frosted Cakery on Instagram </a> </li>
<li><a href="https://getbiscotti.com/">Get Biscotti Website</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/from-bakery-to-food-truck-to-subscription-box-owner-ep-122">Episode 122 of the Launch Your Box Podcast </a></li>
</ul><p>Find and follow Jenny: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/lovemeglutenfreebox">Love Me Gluten Free on Facebook</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.instagram.com/lovemeglutenfree/">Love Me Gluten Free Instagram</a>  </li>
<li><a href="https://www.lovemeglutenfree.com/">Love Me Gluten Free Website</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.goodforyouglutenfree.com/">Good for You Gluten Free Website</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places:  </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">J</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3575</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[87a7e2fa-3838-11ef-a10e-43256b3fd86d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2650269025.mp3?updated=1719900393" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Creating a One-Thing of the Month Subscription</title>
      <description>Have you considered starting with a one-thing of the month subscription? You should. Why do I say that? Well, my one-thing of the month subscription is easier to manage and more profitable than my fully curated subscription box. And my one-thing of the month subscription has almost double the number of subscribers as my larger, more expensive box. 
When people start thinking about starting a subscription box, they think about a fully curated box. They dream about the experience they’ll provide their subscribers with all the little touches and a box filled with items that complement each other. 
But soon, overwhelm sets in. Creating that fully curated experience with all the little touches takes a LOT of work. And all that work and all that overwhelm can turn into not making progress. 
Instead of starting with a fully curated box, think about starting with one thing. There are several benefits to starting a one-thing of the month subscription. A one-thing of the month subscription: 

Has the lowest barrier to getting started.

Fewer vendors to work with.

Lower start-up funds.

Packaging that is simple and the same each month! 

Is easier to fulfill and ship. 

Has the potential for higher profit margins. 


Brainstorm what your one item could be by asking yourself:  

What is your best-selling item? 

What do people repeatedly buy? 

What do people constantly ask you for more of? 


Your one-thing of the month could be: 

Something fun - a no-frills way for subscribers to treat themselves. 

Something consumable - subscribers never run out!


So many Launch Your Box members have wildly successful one-thing of the month subscriptions. Some of the “one things” their happy subscribers receive include: 

T-shirts

Candles

Pizzelles

Nail polish

Earrings

Door hangers

Washi tape


Start brainstorming what you can turn into a one-thing of the month subscription and move one step closer to launching your subscription.  
How does a subscription that’s easier to manage and more profitable sound? Join me for this episode to learn more about why you should consider starting a one-thing of the month subscription. 
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 26 Jun 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating a One-Thing of the Month Subscription</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>How does a subscription that’s easier to manage and more profitable sound? Join me for this episode to learn more about why you should consider starting a one-thing of the month subscription. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you considered starting with a one-thing of the month subscription? You should. Why do I say that? Well, my one-thing of the month subscription is easier to manage and more profitable than my fully curated subscription box. And my one-thing of the month subscription has almost double the number of subscribers as my larger, more expensive box. 
When people start thinking about starting a subscription box, they think about a fully curated box. They dream about the experience they’ll provide their subscribers with all the little touches and a box filled with items that complement each other. 
But soon, overwhelm sets in. Creating that fully curated experience with all the little touches takes a LOT of work. And all that work and all that overwhelm can turn into not making progress. 
Instead of starting with a fully curated box, think about starting with one thing. There are several benefits to starting a one-thing of the month subscription. A one-thing of the month subscription: 

Has the lowest barrier to getting started.

Fewer vendors to work with.

Lower start-up funds.

Packaging that is simple and the same each month! 

Is easier to fulfill and ship. 

Has the potential for higher profit margins. 


Brainstorm what your one item could be by asking yourself:  

What is your best-selling item? 

What do people repeatedly buy? 

What do people constantly ask you for more of? 


Your one-thing of the month could be: 

Something fun - a no-frills way for subscribers to treat themselves. 

Something consumable - subscribers never run out!


So many Launch Your Box members have wildly successful one-thing of the month subscriptions. Some of the “one things” their happy subscribers receive include: 

T-shirts

Candles

Pizzelles

Nail polish

Earrings

Door hangers

Washi tape


Start brainstorming what you can turn into a one-thing of the month subscription and move one step closer to launching your subscription.  
How does a subscription that’s easier to manage and more profitable sound? Join me for this episode to learn more about why you should consider starting a one-thing of the month subscription. 
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you considered starting with a one-thing of the month subscription? You should. Why do I say that? Well, my one-thing of the month subscription is easier to manage <em>and</em> more profitable than my fully curated subscription box. And my one-thing of the month subscription has almost double the number of subscribers as my larger, more expensive box. </p><p>When people start thinking about starting a subscription box, they think about a fully curated box. They dream about the experience they’ll provide their subscribers with all the little touches and a box filled with items that complement each other. </p><p>But soon, overwhelm sets in. Creating that fully curated experience with all the little touches takes a LOT of work. And all that work and all that overwhelm can turn into not making progress. </p><p>Instead of starting with a fully curated box, think about starting with one thing. There are several benefits to starting a one-thing of the month subscription. A one-thing of the month subscription: </p><ul>
<li>Has the lowest barrier to getting started.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Fewer vendors to work with.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Lower start-up funds.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Packaging that is simple and the same each month! </li>
<li>Is easier to fulfill and ship. </li>
<li>Has the potential for higher profit margins. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Brainstorm what your one item could be by asking yourself:  </p><ul>
<li>What is your best-selling item? </li>
<li>What do people repeatedly buy? </li>
<li>What do people constantly ask you for more of? </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Your one-thing of the month could be: </p><ul>
<li>Something fun - a no-frills way for subscribers to treat themselves. </li>
<li>Something consumable - subscribers never run out!</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>So many Launch Your Box members have wildly successful one-thing of the month subscriptions. Some of the “one things” their happy subscribers receive include: </p><ul>
<li>T-shirts</li>
<li>Candles</li>
<li>Pizzelles</li>
<li>Nail polish</li>
<li>Earrings</li>
<li>Door hangers</li>
<li>Washi tape</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Start brainstorming what you can turn into a one-thing of the month subscription and move one step closer to launching your subscription.  </p><p>How does a subscription that’s easier to manage <em>and</em> more profitable sound? Join me for this episode to learn more about why you should consider starting a one-thing of the month subscription. </p><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1231</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4f2f9136-3278-11ef-85d9-378a2fcccda1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7059699454.mp3?updated=1719268078" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Building an Audience in 90 Days and Selling out on Her First Launch with The AwayDay Box</title>
      <description>When you’re just getting started on your subscription box journey, it can be hard to imagine yourself successfully managing a thriving subscription. That’s when you need to seek inspiration from someone just a few steps ahead of you. Kathy Strahs from The Awayday Box is just that person.  
Kathy was inspired to provide moms like her - burnt out and depleted from all the past few years have thrown at them - with a truly special, self-care experience. She had no subscription box experience and no audience. What she did have was passion, determination, and - thanks to Launch Your Box - a roadmap to follow to get her where she wanted to be. 
Kathy dug into the training inside Launch Your Box and implemented what she learned. And when she ran into something that threatened to stop her progress - hello, tech - she got the help she needed and kept moving forward. 
After 90 days of building her audience and getting all the things ready behind the scenes, Kathy was ready to launch. She sold out on day one of her launch with 46 subscribers - an amazing result considering she truly started from scratch! 
Kathy didn’t have subscription box experience, but like all of us, she had a lot of other work and life experience. And as she started working toward launching her subscription box, she found out just how valuable all of that experience was. Kathy had: 

Retail experience - high school job at a Hallmark store. 

Business knowledge and experience - MBA from Stanford. 

Marketing - work in affiliate and partnership marketing. 

Social media and content creation - experience as a blogger and early adopter of social media platforms. 

Publishing - author of four cookbooks. 


Kathy drew from all of her work and life experiences to bring her subscription box to her subscribers. From a part-time high school job to business school to publishing cookbooks - it all applied. And Kathy is her own ideal customer - so everything about her life applied! 
What experiences do you have that you can bring to your subscription box business? Past jobs, educational experiences, life experiences… look for what you’ve learned that you can bring to your subscription box business. And get ready to be surprised by how much you already know! 
Join me for this episode as Kathy takes us through her journey from absolute subscription box newbie to selling out on day one of her launch! 

Find and follow Kathy: 

Awayday on Instagram


Awayday on Facebook 

Awayday Website

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 19 Jun 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Building an Audience in 90 Days and Selling out on Her First Launch with The AwayDay Box</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>When you’re just getting started on your subscription box journey, it can be hard to imagine yourself successfully managing a thriving subscription. That’s when you need to seek inspiration from someone just a few steps ahead of you. Kathy Strahs from The Awayday Box is just that person.  </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>When you’re just getting started on your subscription box journey, it can be hard to imagine yourself successfully managing a thriving subscription. That’s when you need to seek inspiration from someone just a few steps ahead of you. Kathy Strahs from The Awayday Box is just that person.  
Kathy was inspired to provide moms like her - burnt out and depleted from all the past few years have thrown at them - with a truly special, self-care experience. She had no subscription box experience and no audience. What she did have was passion, determination, and - thanks to Launch Your Box - a roadmap to follow to get her where she wanted to be. 
Kathy dug into the training inside Launch Your Box and implemented what she learned. And when she ran into something that threatened to stop her progress - hello, tech - she got the help she needed and kept moving forward. 
After 90 days of building her audience and getting all the things ready behind the scenes, Kathy was ready to launch. She sold out on day one of her launch with 46 subscribers - an amazing result considering she truly started from scratch! 
Kathy didn’t have subscription box experience, but like all of us, she had a lot of other work and life experience. And as she started working toward launching her subscription box, she found out just how valuable all of that experience was. Kathy had: 

Retail experience - high school job at a Hallmark store. 

Business knowledge and experience - MBA from Stanford. 

Marketing - work in affiliate and partnership marketing. 

Social media and content creation - experience as a blogger and early adopter of social media platforms. 

Publishing - author of four cookbooks. 


Kathy drew from all of her work and life experiences to bring her subscription box to her subscribers. From a part-time high school job to business school to publishing cookbooks - it all applied. And Kathy is her own ideal customer - so everything about her life applied! 
What experiences do you have that you can bring to your subscription box business? Past jobs, educational experiences, life experiences… look for what you’ve learned that you can bring to your subscription box business. And get ready to be surprised by how much you already know! 
Join me for this episode as Kathy takes us through her journey from absolute subscription box newbie to selling out on day one of her launch! 

Find and follow Kathy: 

Awayday on Instagram


Awayday on Facebook 

Awayday Website

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>When you’re just getting started on your subscription box journey, it can be hard to imagine yourself successfully managing a thriving subscription. That’s when you need to seek inspiration from someone just a few steps ahead of you. Kathy Strahs from The Awayday Box is just that person.  </p><p>Kathy was inspired to provide moms like her - burnt out and depleted from all the past few years have thrown at them - with a truly special, self-care experience. She had no subscription box experience and no audience. What she did have was passion, determination, and - thanks to Launch Your Box - a roadmap to follow to get her where she wanted to be. </p><p>Kathy dug into the training inside Launch Your Box and implemented what she learned. And when she ran into something that threatened to stop her progress - hello, tech - she got the help she needed and kept moving forward. </p><p>After 90 days of building her audience and getting all the things ready behind the scenes, Kathy was ready to launch. She sold out on day one of her launch with 46 subscribers - an amazing result considering she truly started from scratch! </p><p>Kathy didn’t have subscription box experience, but like all of us, she had a lot of other work and life experience. And as she started working toward launching her subscription box, she found out just how valuable all of that experience was. Kathy had: </p><ul>
<li>Retail experience - high school job at a Hallmark store. </li>
<li>Business knowledge and experience - MBA from Stanford. </li>
<li>Marketing - work in affiliate and partnership marketing. </li>
<li>Social media and content creation - experience as a blogger and early adopter of social media platforms. </li>
<li>Publishing - author of four cookbooks. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Kathy drew from all of her work and life experiences to bring her subscription box to her subscribers. From a part-time high school job to business school to publishing cookbooks - it all applied. And Kathy is her own ideal customer - so everything about her life applied! </p><p>What experiences do you have that you can bring to your subscription box business? Past jobs, educational experiences, life experiences… look for what you’ve learned that you can bring to your subscription box business. And get ready to be surprised by how much you already know! </p><p>Join me for this episode as Kathy takes us through her journey from absolute subscription box newbie to selling out on day one of her launch! </p><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Kathy: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/awaydaybox/">Awayday on Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/profile.php?id=100088037270869">Awayday on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><a href="https://awaydaybox.com/">Awayday Website</a></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2478</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ec9fa082-29ef-11ef-acb1-c34f741be921]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6214981648.mp3?updated=1718329892" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>163: Why a Subscription Box is a No-Brainer for Your Product-Based Business</title>
      <description>What if you could level out your revenue, create consistency, and put an end to the feast-and-famine cycle of one-time product sales? What if you could add stability to your business that allowed you to cover payroll and overhead expenses? What if you knew the inventory you were buying was already sold? 
Let’s talk about the life of a product-based business owner. Before I started my subscription box, this was my life, too. 

Spending a LOT of money ordering and manufacturing products. 

Waiting for products to come in. 

Creating content, going LIVE, sending emails. 

Hoping the products sell… 

Every day. One day you might make 20 sales. Another day, crickets. The uncertainty affects everything… your mood, energy, finances, and stress levels. 
But what if things could be different? Picture this… 

Spending a lot of money ordering or manufacturing product for your subscription box. 

Waiting for the product to come in. 

Payments hitting your back account automatically. 

Packing and shipping your subscription boxes. 

Creating content, going LIVE, sending emails. 

Gaining new subscribers each month. 

Rinsing and repeating. 

﻿
What’s missing? Uncertainty and stress! 
Adding a subscription box to your product-based business can reduce the stress of your business. 
A great way to go deeper with this and flesh out your ideas is to take my FREE 6 in 60 workshop. In it, I guide you through planning 6 months of boxes based on your ideal customer. Once you can visualize this for yourself, you’ll be ready to start taking action.
What would your business look like a year from now if you had 100 subscribers, 500 subscribers, or even 1000 subscribers?  Join me for this episode and learn why adding a subscription box to your product-based business could change everything!

FREE 6 in 60 Workshop
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Jun 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why a Subscription Box is a No-Brainer for Your Product-Based Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>163</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>What would your business look like a year from now if you had 100 subscribers, 500 subscribers, or even 1000 subscribers?  Join me for this episode and learn why adding a subscription box to your product-based business could change everything!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What if you could level out your revenue, create consistency, and put an end to the feast-and-famine cycle of one-time product sales? What if you could add stability to your business that allowed you to cover payroll and overhead expenses? What if you knew the inventory you were buying was already sold? 
Let’s talk about the life of a product-based business owner. Before I started my subscription box, this was my life, too. 

Spending a LOT of money ordering and manufacturing products. 

Waiting for products to come in. 

Creating content, going LIVE, sending emails. 

Hoping the products sell… 

Every day. One day you might make 20 sales. Another day, crickets. The uncertainty affects everything… your mood, energy, finances, and stress levels. 
But what if things could be different? Picture this… 

Spending a lot of money ordering or manufacturing product for your subscription box. 

Waiting for the product to come in. 

Payments hitting your back account automatically. 

Packing and shipping your subscription boxes. 

Creating content, going LIVE, sending emails. 

Gaining new subscribers each month. 

Rinsing and repeating. 

﻿
What’s missing? Uncertainty and stress! 
Adding a subscription box to your product-based business can reduce the stress of your business. 
A great way to go deeper with this and flesh out your ideas is to take my FREE 6 in 60 workshop. In it, I guide you through planning 6 months of boxes based on your ideal customer. Once you can visualize this for yourself, you’ll be ready to start taking action.
What would your business look like a year from now if you had 100 subscribers, 500 subscribers, or even 1000 subscribers?  Join me for this episode and learn why adding a subscription box to your product-based business could change everything!

FREE 6 in 60 Workshop
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What if you could level out your revenue, create consistency, and put an end to the feast-and-famine cycle of one-time product sales? What if you could add stability to your business that allowed you to cover payroll and overhead expenses? What if you knew the inventory you were buying was already sold? </p><p>Let’s talk about the life of a product-based business owner. Before I started my subscription box, this was my life, too. </p><ul>
<li>Spending a LOT of money ordering and manufacturing products. </li>
<li>Waiting for products to come in. </li>
<li>Creating content, going LIVE, sending emails. </li>
<li>Hoping the products sell… </li>
</ul><p>Every day. One day you might make 20 sales. Another day, crickets. The uncertainty affects everything… your mood, energy, finances, and stress levels. </p><p>But what if things could be different? Picture this… </p><ul>
<li>Spending a lot of money ordering or manufacturing product for your subscription box. </li>
<li>Waiting for the product to come in. </li>
<li>Payments hitting your back account automatically. </li>
<li>Packing and shipping your subscription boxes. </li>
<li>Creating content, going LIVE, sending emails. </li>
<li>Gaining new subscribers each month. </li>
<li>Rinsing and repeating. </li>
</ul><p>﻿</p><p>What’s missing? Uncertainty and stress! </p><p>Adding a subscription box to your product-based business can reduce the stress of your business. </p><p>A great way to go deeper with this and flesh out your ideas is to take my <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e">FREE 6 in 60 workshop</a>. In it, I guide you through planning 6 months of boxes based on your ideal customer. Once you can visualize this for yourself, you’ll be ready to start taking action.</p><p>What would your business look like a year from now if you had 100 subscribers, 500 subscribers, or even 1000 subscribers?  Join me for this episode and learn why adding a subscription box to your product-based business could change everything!</p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e">FREE 6 in 60 Workshop</a></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1260</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f2e12a86-2703-11ef-9329-97033054c46e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9149004365.mp3?updated=1718008639" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>162: What is Subscription Box Week? </title>
      <description>Once a year, thousands of people join me for a one-of-a-kind subscription box coaching experience. Subscription Box Week is coming soon… and I can’t wait!   
Several years ago, I had started my coaching membership Launch Your Box and it was growing. Slowly. I wanted to put some gas on it and grow more rapidly. A conversation with my mentor, Stu McLaren, led to the realization that letting people spend a week with me as a teacher and coach was the best way to show them what I offer and why it’s right for them. 
Subscription Box Coaching Week came out of that casual conversation. I launched it for the first time in the fall of 2020. Thousands of people signed up - which blew me away and kind of freaked me out. 🙂 The first night I went LIVE I had more than 1,000 people with me! 
That week was incredible. I showed up, served (overserved, actually), and engaged. At the end of that week, 43% of the people who joined me for Subscription Box Coaching Week signed up for Launch Your Box. 43%! 
I’ve been doing it ever since. Every year, thousands of people join me for Subscription Box Week (formerly called Coaching Week). It’s the best way to showcase who I am as a coach, the knowledge I have, and what it’s like inside my incredible Launch Your Box community. 
It’s happening again - in just a couple of weeks! And it’s FULL of so much great content, including: 

The Post-It Note Challenge - where you’ll plan six months of boxes. 

Brand New Training - How to Curate an Experience for Your Subscribers - because it’s not about the “stuff,” it’s about how you make your subscribers feel. 

Member Box Openings - where I open members’ subscription boxes for the first time and offer feedback. 

Special LIVE Q&amp;A - where you can get ALL your questions answered. 

A chance to be part of the subscription box community: 

Get to know my members who are at all stages and sizes of business. 

Get to know my team as they work around the clock to answer questions and provide resources. 

Interact with me LIVE every day. 

Understand what’s possible when I interview my students - get ready to be inspired! 

My team and I have packed a month’s worth of content into one week for this special event! 
For only $15, get this jam-packed week that’s all about subscription boxes! 

Are you brand new and thinking about starting a subscription box - this week is for you. 

Are you already selling products and ready to build recurring revenue into your business - this week is for you. 

Do you already have a subscription box but feel like you don’t know what you don’t know to grow your business - this week is for you. 

I do this every day - manage a multi-million dollar subscription box business. And I share it all with you during Subscription Box Week. 

If you’ve been thinking about starting a subscription box, but you’ve been putting it off or feeling stuck, this is your special invitation to join me at SubscriptionBoxWeek.com starting June 23rd for one amazing week! 
What if one week could change everything? Join me for this episode and learn all about Subscription Week. It’s one week filled with endless possibilities. 
SubscriptionBoxWeek.com 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 05 Jun 2024 08:50:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What is Subscription Box Week? </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>162</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>What if one week could change everything? Join me for this episode and learn all about Subscription Week. It’s one week filled with endless possibilities. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Once a year, thousands of people join me for a one-of-a-kind subscription box coaching experience. Subscription Box Week is coming soon… and I can’t wait!   
Several years ago, I had started my coaching membership Launch Your Box and it was growing. Slowly. I wanted to put some gas on it and grow more rapidly. A conversation with my mentor, Stu McLaren, led to the realization that letting people spend a week with me as a teacher and coach was the best way to show them what I offer and why it’s right for them. 
Subscription Box Coaching Week came out of that casual conversation. I launched it for the first time in the fall of 2020. Thousands of people signed up - which blew me away and kind of freaked me out. 🙂 The first night I went LIVE I had more than 1,000 people with me! 
That week was incredible. I showed up, served (overserved, actually), and engaged. At the end of that week, 43% of the people who joined me for Subscription Box Coaching Week signed up for Launch Your Box. 43%! 
I’ve been doing it ever since. Every year, thousands of people join me for Subscription Box Week (formerly called Coaching Week). It’s the best way to showcase who I am as a coach, the knowledge I have, and what it’s like inside my incredible Launch Your Box community. 
It’s happening again - in just a couple of weeks! And it’s FULL of so much great content, including: 

The Post-It Note Challenge - where you’ll plan six months of boxes. 

Brand New Training - How to Curate an Experience for Your Subscribers - because it’s not about the “stuff,” it’s about how you make your subscribers feel. 

Member Box Openings - where I open members’ subscription boxes for the first time and offer feedback. 

Special LIVE Q&amp;A - where you can get ALL your questions answered. 

A chance to be part of the subscription box community: 

Get to know my members who are at all stages and sizes of business. 

Get to know my team as they work around the clock to answer questions and provide resources. 

Interact with me LIVE every day. 

Understand what’s possible when I interview my students - get ready to be inspired! 

My team and I have packed a month’s worth of content into one week for this special event! 
For only $15, get this jam-packed week that’s all about subscription boxes! 

Are you brand new and thinking about starting a subscription box - this week is for you. 

Are you already selling products and ready to build recurring revenue into your business - this week is for you. 

Do you already have a subscription box but feel like you don’t know what you don’t know to grow your business - this week is for you. 

I do this every day - manage a multi-million dollar subscription box business. And I share it all with you during Subscription Box Week. 

If you’ve been thinking about starting a subscription box, but you’ve been putting it off or feeling stuck, this is your special invitation to join me at SubscriptionBoxWeek.com starting June 23rd for one amazing week! 
What if one week could change everything? Join me for this episode and learn all about Subscription Week. It’s one week filled with endless possibilities. 
SubscriptionBoxWeek.com 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Once a year, thousands of people join me for a one-of-a-kind subscription box coaching experience. Subscription Box Week is coming soon… and I can’t wait!   </p><p>Several years ago, I had started my coaching membership Launch Your Box and it was growing. Slowly. I wanted to put some gas on it and grow more rapidly. A conversation with my mentor, Stu McLaren, led to the realization that letting people spend a week with me as a teacher and coach was the best way to show them what I offer and why it’s right for them. </p><p>Subscription Box Coaching Week came out of that casual conversation. I launched it for the first time in the fall of 2020. Thousands of people signed up - which blew me away and kind of freaked me out. 🙂 The first night I went LIVE I had more than 1,000 people with me! </p><p>That week was incredible. I showed up, served (overserved, actually), and engaged. At the end of that week, 43% of the people who joined me for Subscription Box Coaching Week signed up for Launch Your Box. 43%! </p><p>I’ve been doing it ever since. Every year, thousands of people join me for Subscription Box Week (formerly called Coaching Week). It’s the best way to showcase who I am as a coach, the knowledge I have, and what it’s like inside my incredible Launch Your Box community. </p><p>It’s happening again - in just a couple of weeks! And it’s FULL of so much great content, including: </p><ul>
<li>The Post-It Note Challenge - where you’ll plan six months of boxes. </li>
<li>Brand New Training - How to Curate an Experience for Your Subscribers - because it’s not about the “stuff,” it’s about how you make your subscribers feel. </li>
<li>Member Box Openings - where I open members’ subscription boxes for the first time and offer feedback. </li>
<li>Special LIVE Q&amp;A - where you can get ALL your questions answered. </li>
<li>A chance to be part of the subscription box community: </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Get to know my members who are at all stages and sizes of business. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Get to know my team as they work around the clock to answer questions and provide resources. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Interact with me LIVE every day. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Understand what’s possible when I interview my students - get ready to be inspired! </li>
</ul><p>My team and I have packed a month’s worth of content into one week for this special event! </p><p>For only $15, get this jam-packed week that’s all about subscription boxes! </p><ul>
<li>Are you brand new and thinking about starting a subscription box - this week is for you. </li>
<li>Are you already selling products and ready to build recurring revenue into your business - this week is for you. </li>
<li>Do you already have a subscription box but feel like you don’t know what you don’t know to grow your business - this week is for you. </li>
</ul><p>I do this every day - manage a multi-million dollar subscription box business. And I share it all with you during Subscription Box Week. </p><p><br></p><p>If you’ve been thinking about starting a subscription box, but you’ve been putting it off or feeling stuck, this is your special invitation to join me at <a href="http://subscriptionboxweek.com">SubscriptionBoxWeek.com</a> starting June 23rd for one amazing week! </p><p>What if one week could change everything? Join me for this episode and learn all about Subscription Week. It’s one week filled with endless possibilities. </p><p><a href="http://subscriptionboxweek.com">SubscriptionBoxWeek.com</a> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1279</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[952474be-22b4-11ef-b95d-3f23b9babfa3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3593097008.mp3?updated=1717534747" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>161: The Costs of Starting a Subscription Box</title>
      <description>Do you get excited thinking about starting a subscription box but worry about what it will cost to get started? A subscription box is an eCommerce business which means there are start-up costs involved just like with any other online business. These costs can vary depending on what you want to do. 
You can be profitable from month one, but you have to understand your costs. Understanding them helps you: 

Price your subscription box

Market your subscription box

Stay on budget

Stay profitable from 

What are these costs? 
There are five categories of costs you need to consider. 
1 - Product Costs -  Product cost is the actual expense of goods for each item you will put in your subscription box each month. Whether you make the items yourself, buy them wholesale, or source them from overseas, these costs will make up the highest percentage of your box costs. 
When calculating product costs, make sure to include the shipping costs to you. This can have a big impact on your overall product cost and needs to be tracked and planned for.
2 - Packaging Costs - There are so many variables when it comes to packaging costs. You can ship your subscription box in a basic box, custom box, or go without a box and use a poly mailer. 		
Packaging isn’t just about the outside of the box. You also need to consider the cost of stickers, shreds, tissue paper, inserts, tape, etc. - anything you use to get your boxes ready to ship.
3 - Fulfillment Costs - Your fulfillment costs are made up of packing and shipping costs. Both can be difficult to figure out when you’re first starting out. Packing costs include the labor it takes to package each subscription box. Third-party fulfillment companies pack and ship your boxes for you. 
Shipping makes up the other part of your fulfillment costs. Shipping can be VERY expensive and shipping costs vary widely depending on the destination.
4 - Tech Costs - A subscription box is an eCommerce business. In other words, you need tech in order to run your business. Before you can even get your subscription box up and running, there are several tech pieces you need to have in place.

Website

Payment Processor

Shipping Software 

Email CRM 

5 - Advertising Costs - I always want you to focus on generating organic traffic, but there comes a time when you’ll want to add paid advertising to your marketing plan. Advertising costs range from printed flyers to online ads. These costs need to be factored into your initial and ongoing costs for your subscription box business.
Start simple. Scale gradually. Manage your costs. You can start a subscription box and stay profitable… from the beginning. 
Wondering about the costs of starting a subscription box? Join me for this episode to learn about the 5 main categories so you can confidently price your box and be profitable in month one. 
Episode 61 - What Can a Fulfillment Center Do for My Subscription Box Business?

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 29 May 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Costs of Starting a Subscription Box</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>161</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Wondering about the costs of starting a subscription box? Join me for this episode to learn about the 5 main categories so you can confidently price your box and be profitable in month one. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Do you get excited thinking about starting a subscription box but worry about what it will cost to get started? A subscription box is an eCommerce business which means there are start-up costs involved just like with any other online business. These costs can vary depending on what you want to do. 
You can be profitable from month one, but you have to understand your costs. Understanding them helps you: 

Price your subscription box

Market your subscription box

Stay on budget

Stay profitable from 

What are these costs? 
There are five categories of costs you need to consider. 
1 - Product Costs -  Product cost is the actual expense of goods for each item you will put in your subscription box each month. Whether you make the items yourself, buy them wholesale, or source them from overseas, these costs will make up the highest percentage of your box costs. 
When calculating product costs, make sure to include the shipping costs to you. This can have a big impact on your overall product cost and needs to be tracked and planned for.
2 - Packaging Costs - There are so many variables when it comes to packaging costs. You can ship your subscription box in a basic box, custom box, or go without a box and use a poly mailer. 		
Packaging isn’t just about the outside of the box. You also need to consider the cost of stickers, shreds, tissue paper, inserts, tape, etc. - anything you use to get your boxes ready to ship.
3 - Fulfillment Costs - Your fulfillment costs are made up of packing and shipping costs. Both can be difficult to figure out when you’re first starting out. Packing costs include the labor it takes to package each subscription box. Third-party fulfillment companies pack and ship your boxes for you. 
Shipping makes up the other part of your fulfillment costs. Shipping can be VERY expensive and shipping costs vary widely depending on the destination.
4 - Tech Costs - A subscription box is an eCommerce business. In other words, you need tech in order to run your business. Before you can even get your subscription box up and running, there are several tech pieces you need to have in place.

Website

Payment Processor

Shipping Software 

Email CRM 

5 - Advertising Costs - I always want you to focus on generating organic traffic, but there comes a time when you’ll want to add paid advertising to your marketing plan. Advertising costs range from printed flyers to online ads. These costs need to be factored into your initial and ongoing costs for your subscription box business.
Start simple. Scale gradually. Manage your costs. You can start a subscription box and stay profitable… from the beginning. 
Wondering about the costs of starting a subscription box? Join me for this episode to learn about the 5 main categories so you can confidently price your box and be profitable in month one. 
Episode 61 - What Can a Fulfillment Center Do for My Subscription Box Business?

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Do you get excited thinking about starting a subscription box but worry about what it will cost to get started? A subscription box is an eCommerce business which means there are start-up costs involved just like with any other online business. These costs can vary depending on what you want to do. </p><p>You can be profitable from month one, but you have to understand your costs. Understanding them helps you: </p><ul>
<li>Price your subscription box</li>
<li>Market your subscription box</li>
<li>Stay on budget</li>
<li>Stay profitable from </li>
</ul><p>What are these costs? </p><p>There are five categories of costs you need to consider. </p><p><strong>1 - Product Costs</strong> -  Product cost is the actual expense of goods for each item you will put in your subscription box each month. Whether you make the items yourself, buy them wholesale, or source them from overseas, these costs will make up the highest percentage of your box costs. </p><p>When calculating product costs, make sure to include the shipping costs to you. This can have a big impact on your overall product cost and needs to be tracked and planned for.</p><p><strong>2 - Packaging Costs</strong> - There are so many variables when it comes to packaging costs. You can ship your subscription box in a basic box, custom box, or go without a box and use a poly mailer. 		</p><p>Packaging isn’t just about the outside of the box. You also need to consider the cost of stickers, shreds, tissue paper, inserts, tape, etc. - anything you use to get your boxes ready to ship.</p><p><strong>3 - Fulfillment Costs </strong>- Your fulfillment costs are made up of packing and shipping costs. Both can be difficult to figure out when you’re first starting out. Packing costs include the labor it takes to package each subscription box. Third-party fulfillment companies pack and ship your boxes for you. </p><p>Shipping makes up the other part of your fulfillment costs. Shipping can be VERY expensive and shipping costs vary widely depending on the destination.</p><p><strong>4 - Tech Costs </strong>- A subscription box is an eCommerce business. In other words, you need tech in order to run your business. Before you can even get your subscription box up and running, there are several tech pieces you need to have in place.</p><ul>
<li>Website</li>
<li>Payment Processor</li>
<li>Shipping Software </li>
<li>Email CRM </li>
</ul><p><strong>5 - Advertising Costs </strong>- I always want you to focus on generating organic traffic, but there comes a time when you’ll want to add paid advertising to your marketing plan. Advertising costs range from printed flyers to online ads. These costs need to be factored into your initial and ongoing costs for your subscription box business.</p><p>Start simple. Scale gradually. Manage your costs. You can start a subscription box <em>and</em> stay profitable… from the beginning. </p><p>Wondering about the costs of starting a subscription box? Join me for this episode to learn about the 5 main categories so you can confidently price your box and be profitable in month one. </p><p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-61-What-Can-a-Fulfillment-Center-Do-for-My-Subscription-Box-Business">Episode 61 - What Can a Fulfillment Center Do for My Subscription Box Business?</a></p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1548</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[845b3bc0-1be5-11ef-a85a-0b70320c795c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5117617246.mp3?updated=1716786106" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>160: 5 Reasons Why You Should Start a Subscription Box Right Now</title>
      <description>You can turn on the news and see what’s happening with our economy. Big box retailers are closing, small businesses are shutting their doors. Yet I’m here to tell you NOW is the right time to start a subscription box. Why? 
The answer is simple. 
People are buying. I see it every day in my own business. I saw it during my recent very successful launch. And I have the honor of working every day with subscription box owners who are launching and growing their subscription box businesses. 
Adding a recurring revenue stream to your business adds a layer of stability, predictability, and security that most businesses don’t have. 
The subscription box industry reached $22.7 billion by the end of 2021 and is expected to more than triple that number by 2027! Inside those numbers, the most popular types of subscriptions were replenishment subscriptions (think dog food or shaving supplies) and curation subscriptions (like my Monogram Box™).
In a recent Wall Street Journal article, I read that 25% of online shoppers have subscribed to one or more subscription services to receive products on a recurring basis. 25% of shoppers! The article cited niche markets as one of the biggest areas of opportunity and emphasized the importance of providing high-quality experiences to retain subscribers. 
To recap, this article showed me: 

The subscription box market is still growing - rapidly. It’s time to get in! 

¼ of all online shippers have had a subscription - they understand this model. 

It’s all about convenience and the experience - it’s not about the stuff. 

The riches are in the niches. (I know you’ve heard me say that before!)

So, why should you start a subscription right now? 

You don’t have to constantly sell. 

If you have a physical shop and don’t open, you don’t make any income.

You’re able to create raving fans. 

Your subscribers will be your biggest fans, buying almost anything you sell. 

The product you are investing in is already sold. 

Relieve the stress and pressure of buying products you might have to mark down later. 

You get to create a box and experience you are passionate about. 

Being passionate about your business helps you show up. 

You get to love what you do and treat people to a carefully curated experience. 

You get consistent revenue hitting your bank account. 

It’s not too late to get in the game. Not by a long shot. Have you listened to episode 158 yet? In it, Launch Your Box member Bev of Bless-ed Be Boutique talks about how she retired, got bored, then six months later started her subscription box, selling out her first launch. Or episode 147 where you’ll meet Megan. She thought about starting a box for a long time. It wasn’t until she bought my book, One Box at a Time, and read it cover to cover in just a couple of days that she took action. Megan launched her subscription box three weeks later - and sold out! 
Your time is now. Stop waiting, stop wishing, and start building a business you can make an income from. 
Have you been sitting on your subscription box idea for too long? Join me for this episode for 5 reasons to get it started right now. It’s time to stop sitting on the sidelines and start taking action.  

Episode 158 - It’s NEVER Too Late to Start
Episode 147 - From Idea to Sold-Out Launch in 3 Weeks
One Box at a Time

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 22 May 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>5 Reasons Why You Should Start a Subscription Box Right Now</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>160</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Have you been sitting on your subscription box idea for too long? Join me for this episode for 5 reasons to get it started right now. It’s time to stop sitting on the sidelines and start taking action.  </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>You can turn on the news and see what’s happening with our economy. Big box retailers are closing, small businesses are shutting their doors. Yet I’m here to tell you NOW is the right time to start a subscription box. Why? 
The answer is simple. 
People are buying. I see it every day in my own business. I saw it during my recent very successful launch. And I have the honor of working every day with subscription box owners who are launching and growing their subscription box businesses. 
Adding a recurring revenue stream to your business adds a layer of stability, predictability, and security that most businesses don’t have. 
The subscription box industry reached $22.7 billion by the end of 2021 and is expected to more than triple that number by 2027! Inside those numbers, the most popular types of subscriptions were replenishment subscriptions (think dog food or shaving supplies) and curation subscriptions (like my Monogram Box™).
In a recent Wall Street Journal article, I read that 25% of online shoppers have subscribed to one or more subscription services to receive products on a recurring basis. 25% of shoppers! The article cited niche markets as one of the biggest areas of opportunity and emphasized the importance of providing high-quality experiences to retain subscribers. 
To recap, this article showed me: 

The subscription box market is still growing - rapidly. It’s time to get in! 

¼ of all online shippers have had a subscription - they understand this model. 

It’s all about convenience and the experience - it’s not about the stuff. 

The riches are in the niches. (I know you’ve heard me say that before!)

So, why should you start a subscription right now? 

You don’t have to constantly sell. 

If you have a physical shop and don’t open, you don’t make any income.

You’re able to create raving fans. 

Your subscribers will be your biggest fans, buying almost anything you sell. 

The product you are investing in is already sold. 

Relieve the stress and pressure of buying products you might have to mark down later. 

You get to create a box and experience you are passionate about. 

Being passionate about your business helps you show up. 

You get to love what you do and treat people to a carefully curated experience. 

You get consistent revenue hitting your bank account. 

It’s not too late to get in the game. Not by a long shot. Have you listened to episode 158 yet? In it, Launch Your Box member Bev of Bless-ed Be Boutique talks about how she retired, got bored, then six months later started her subscription box, selling out her first launch. Or episode 147 where you’ll meet Megan. She thought about starting a box for a long time. It wasn’t until she bought my book, One Box at a Time, and read it cover to cover in just a couple of days that she took action. Megan launched her subscription box three weeks later - and sold out! 
Your time is now. Stop waiting, stop wishing, and start building a business you can make an income from. 
Have you been sitting on your subscription box idea for too long? Join me for this episode for 5 reasons to get it started right now. It’s time to stop sitting on the sidelines and start taking action.  

Episode 158 - It’s NEVER Too Late to Start
Episode 147 - From Idea to Sold-Out Launch in 3 Weeks
One Box at a Time

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>You can turn on the news and see what’s happening with our economy. Big box retailers are closing, small businesses are shutting their doors. Yet I’m here to tell you NOW is the right time to start a subscription box. Why? </p><p>The answer is simple. </p><p>People are buying. I see it every day in my own business. I saw it during my recent very successful launch. And I have the honor of working every day with subscription box owners who are launching and growing their subscription box businesses. </p><p>Adding a recurring revenue stream to your business adds a layer of stability, predictability, and security that most businesses don’t have. </p><p>The subscription box industry reached $22.7 billion by the end of 2021 and is expected to more than triple that number by 2027! Inside those numbers, the most popular types of subscriptions were replenishment subscriptions (think dog food or shaving supplies) and curation subscriptions (like my Monogram Box™).</p><p>In a recent Wall Street Journal article, I read that 25% of online shoppers have subscribed to one or more subscription services to receive products on a recurring basis. 25% of shoppers! The article cited niche markets as one of the biggest areas of opportunity and emphasized the importance of providing high-quality experiences to retain subscribers. </p><p>To recap, this article showed me: </p><ul>
<li>The subscription box market is still growing - rapidly. It’s time to get in! </li>
<li>¼ of all online shippers have had a subscription - they understand this model. </li>
<li>It’s all about convenience and the experience - it’s not about the stuff. </li>
<li>The riches are in the niches. (I know you’ve heard me say that before!)</li>
</ul><p>So, why should you start a subscription right now? </p><ul>
<li>You don’t have to constantly sell. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">If you have a physical shop and don’t open, you don’t make any income.</li>
<li>You’re able to create raving fans. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Your subscribers will be your biggest fans, buying almost anything you sell. </li>
<li>The product you are investing in is already sold. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Relieve the stress and pressure of buying products you might have to mark down later. </li>
<li>You get to create a box and experience you are passionate about. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Being passionate about your business helps you show up. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">You get to love what you do and treat people to a carefully curated experience. </li>
<li>You get consistent revenue hitting your bank account. </li>
</ul><p>It’s not too late to get in the game. Not by a long shot. Have you listened to episode 158 yet? In it, Launch Your Box member Bev of Bless-ed Be Boutique talks about how she retired, got bored, then six months later started her subscription box, selling out her first launch. Or episode 147 where you’ll meet Megan. She thought about starting a box for a long time. It wasn’t until she bought my book, <em>One Box at a Time,</em> and read it cover to cover in just a couple of days that she took action. Megan launched her subscription box three weeks later - and sold out! </p><p>Your time is now. Stop waiting, stop wishing, and start building a business you can make an income from. </p><p>Have you been sitting on your subscription box idea for too long? Join me for this episode for 5 reasons to get it started right now. It’s time to stop sitting on the sidelines and start taking action.  </p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/it-s-never-too-late-to-start-from-retirement-to-subscription-box-owner-ep-158">Episode 158 - It’s NEVER Too Late to Start</a></p><p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/from-idea-to-a-sold-out-launch-in-3-weeks-with-sweet-tea-living-ep-147">Episode 147 - From Idea to Sold-Out Launch in 3 Weeks</a></p><p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/one-box-at-a-time"><em>One Box at a Time</em></a></p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1003</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a0027316-164f-11ef-a96f-6fd74173e166]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5231609829.mp3?updated=1716171972" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>159: 5 Simple Steps to Adding a Subscription to Your Product-Based Business</title>
      <description>Do you have a product-based business? Are you selling products via an Etsy store, in a pop-up shop or a retail store? Are you selling one-off products online? Adding a subscription box to your existing business is a no-brainer and can offer you so many benefits! 
Adding a subscription box provides: 

A stable, predictable revenue stream - recurring payments benefit your business in so many ways, including stabilizing your cash flow.  

Customer loyalty - subscribers have committed to regularly purchasing products from you. 

Increased lifetime value (LTV) - do you know the LTV of your customers? My subscribers stay for an average of 18 months, generating thousands of dollars of revenue each. 

Opportunities for cross-selling and upselling - pair your box items with additional one-off items from your shop. 

Scalability - packing and shipping 500 of the same thing is much more efficient than 500 different orders. 

Have I convinced you to add a subscription box to your business?  I have 5 simple steps to follow to make it happen. 

Identify your best customers:

Who are they? 

How often do they shop with you? 

Take a look at your top 20 customers and dial into who they are. 

Identify your best-sellers:

What categories are your best sellers? 

What do people buy from you repeatedly? 

What are people asking for more of? 

Set your pricing structure:

What is your average order value (AOV)?

What is the AOV of your top 100 customers? 

Price your subscription box in that range. 

Create exclusivity and scarcity: 

What are the benefits of being a subscriber? 

Make items only available in the box. 

Make them only available by subscription. 

Create FOMO with your customer base - make them want to be part of something exclusive.  

Create a great user experience: 

Are your website and the checkout process clear and easy to follow?  

Make it easy for people to update or cancel their subscriptions. 

Provide a higher level of customer service - remember your subscribers are the VIPs of your business. 

A bonus piece of advice, which is really the best piece of advice, is to talk about your subscription box a LOT. If you want to create a business that is 75% recurring revenue instead of depending on one-off sales, you’ve got to make it the main thing in your business. And that means talking about it… a lot! 
Join me for this episode to learn how having a subscription box can change the game for your business. Predictable inventory, better cash flow, monthly recurring revenue, and more. Follow 5 simple steps to get started today! 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 15 May 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>5 Simple Steps to Adding a Subscription to Your Product-Based Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>159</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Do you have a product-based business? Are you selling products via an Etsy store, in a pop-up shop or a retail store? Are you selling one-off products online? Adding a subscription box to your existing business is a no-brainer and can offer you so many benefits! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Do you have a product-based business? Are you selling products via an Etsy store, in a pop-up shop or a retail store? Are you selling one-off products online? Adding a subscription box to your existing business is a no-brainer and can offer you so many benefits! 
Adding a subscription box provides: 

A stable, predictable revenue stream - recurring payments benefit your business in so many ways, including stabilizing your cash flow.  

Customer loyalty - subscribers have committed to regularly purchasing products from you. 

Increased lifetime value (LTV) - do you know the LTV of your customers? My subscribers stay for an average of 18 months, generating thousands of dollars of revenue each. 

Opportunities for cross-selling and upselling - pair your box items with additional one-off items from your shop. 

Scalability - packing and shipping 500 of the same thing is much more efficient than 500 different orders. 

Have I convinced you to add a subscription box to your business?  I have 5 simple steps to follow to make it happen. 

Identify your best customers:

Who are they? 

How often do they shop with you? 

Take a look at your top 20 customers and dial into who they are. 

Identify your best-sellers:

What categories are your best sellers? 

What do people buy from you repeatedly? 

What are people asking for more of? 

Set your pricing structure:

What is your average order value (AOV)?

What is the AOV of your top 100 customers? 

Price your subscription box in that range. 

Create exclusivity and scarcity: 

What are the benefits of being a subscriber? 

Make items only available in the box. 

Make them only available by subscription. 

Create FOMO with your customer base - make them want to be part of something exclusive.  

Create a great user experience: 

Are your website and the checkout process clear and easy to follow?  

Make it easy for people to update or cancel their subscriptions. 

Provide a higher level of customer service - remember your subscribers are the VIPs of your business. 

A bonus piece of advice, which is really the best piece of advice, is to talk about your subscription box a LOT. If you want to create a business that is 75% recurring revenue instead of depending on one-off sales, you’ve got to make it the main thing in your business. And that means talking about it… a lot! 
Join me for this episode to learn how having a subscription box can change the game for your business. Predictable inventory, better cash flow, monthly recurring revenue, and more. Follow 5 simple steps to get started today! 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Do you have a product-based business? Are you selling products via an Etsy store, in a pop-up shop or a retail store? Are you selling one-off products online? Adding a subscription box to your existing business is a no-brainer and can offer you so many benefits! </p><p>Adding a subscription box provides: </p><ul>
<li>A stable, predictable revenue stream - recurring payments benefit your business in so many ways, including stabilizing your cash flow.  </li>
<li>Customer loyalty - subscribers have committed to regularly purchasing products from you. </li>
<li>Increased lifetime value (LTV) - do you know the LTV of your customers? My subscribers stay for an average of 18 months, generating thousands of dollars of revenue each. </li>
<li>Opportunities for cross-selling and upselling - pair your box items with additional one-off items from your shop. </li>
<li>Scalability - packing and shipping 500 of the same thing is much more efficient than 500 different orders. </li>
</ul><p>Have I convinced you to add a subscription box to your business?  I have 5 simple steps to follow to make it happen. </p><ul>
<li>Identify your best customers:</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Who are they? </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">How often do they shop with you? </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Take a look at your top 20 customers and dial into who they are. </li>
<li>Identify your best-sellers:</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">What categories are your best sellers? </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">What do people buy from you repeatedly? </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">What are people asking for more of? </li>
<li>Set your pricing structure:</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">What is your average order value (AOV)?</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">What is the AOV of your top 100 customers? </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Price your subscription box in that range. </li>
<li>Create exclusivity and scarcity: </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">What are the benefits of being a subscriber? </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Make items only available in the box. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Make them only available by subscription. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Create FOMO with your customer base - make them want to be part of something exclusive.  </li>
<li>Create a great user experience: </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Are your website and the checkout process clear and easy to follow?  </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Make it easy for people to update or cancel their subscriptions. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Provide a higher level of customer service - remember your subscribers are the VIPs of your business. </li>
</ul><p>A bonus piece of advice, which is really the best piece of advice, is to talk about your subscription box a LOT. If you want to create a business that is 75% recurring revenue instead of depending on one-off sales, you’ve got to make it the main thing in your business. And that means talking about it… a lot! </p><p>Join me for this episode to learn how having a subscription box can change the game for your business. Predictable inventory, better cash flow, monthly recurring revenue, and more. Follow 5 simple steps to get started today! </p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1660</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e3655796-1234-11ef-8ae7-63fa3c9c2faf]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3071213796.mp3?updated=1715720684" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>It’s Time to Start Your Box!</title>
      <description>Let’s start this year with a better plan, a plan to help you move forward because… It’s Time to Start Your Subscription Box! 
 
Now is the time to get started the right way. 
 
See, it’s hard to take steps forward with starting your subscription box if you can’t visualize who that box is for - your ideal customer. And if you already have a subscription box and you’re struggling with marketing, gaining subscribers, or retaining the subscribers you do have, take a closer look at your ideal customer. 
 
I want you to describe your ideal customer in 3-5 words. 

Are they a man or a woman? 

Are they an adult or a child? 

How old are they? 

Where do they live? 

Do they belong to a certain profession or faith group? 

Do they have a specific hobby or love for something? 

 
Answering these questions allows you to visualize that person. My ideal customer for my monogram box is a “Southern Busy Mom.” Can you picture her? I can! I curate subscription boxes for her every month. 
 
Ask yourself what your ideal customer is thinking, feeling, and doing each month of the year. It’s this knowledge that will help you plan themes for your boxes before you ever start looking for products. 
 
Once you’re able to visualize your ideal customer, it’s time to decide what kind of box to create. You have choices: 

Monthly

Quarterly

Bimonthly

One Thing of the Month

 
There are pros and cons to each type of box. Monthly boxes are easier to market and bring in regular, recurring revenue. They are also a LOT more work. Quarterly boxes can make marketing challenging but give you time to catch your breath between boxes and may allow you to curate a more expensive, luxurious box. 
 
A “One Thing of the Month” box is a great place to start! You’re simply providing one item each month. I have members inside Launch Your Box who have been very successful with their “one things.” T-shirts, candles, beef jerky, washi tape, door hangers, and more.
 
Once you’ve decided who your ideal customer is and the type of box you’re going to offer, it’s time to curate some boxes! Join me for my FREE  6 in 60 Workshop where we’ll plan six months’ worth of subscription boxes in only an hour! 
 
Join me for this episode as I talk about how now IS the time to start your subscription box and go over the first TWO steps forward, helping you discover who your box is for and what kind of subscription box is the best choice for your business. 
Important Links: 
 6 in 60 Workshop
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 08 May 2024 08:50:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>It’s Time to Start Your Box!</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Let’s start this year with a better plan, a plan to help you move forward because… It’s Time to Start Your Subscription Box!    Now is the time to get started the right way.    See, it’s hard to take steps forward with...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Let’s start this year with a better plan, a plan to help you move forward because… It’s Time to Start Your Subscription Box! 
 
Now is the time to get started the right way. 
 
See, it’s hard to take steps forward with starting your subscription box if you can’t visualize who that box is for - your ideal customer. And if you already have a subscription box and you’re struggling with marketing, gaining subscribers, or retaining the subscribers you do have, take a closer look at your ideal customer. 
 
I want you to describe your ideal customer in 3-5 words. 

Are they a man or a woman? 

Are they an adult or a child? 

How old are they? 

Where do they live? 

Do they belong to a certain profession or faith group? 

Do they have a specific hobby or love for something? 

 
Answering these questions allows you to visualize that person. My ideal customer for my monogram box is a “Southern Busy Mom.” Can you picture her? I can! I curate subscription boxes for her every month. 
 
Ask yourself what your ideal customer is thinking, feeling, and doing each month of the year. It’s this knowledge that will help you plan themes for your boxes before you ever start looking for products. 
 
Once you’re able to visualize your ideal customer, it’s time to decide what kind of box to create. You have choices: 

Monthly

Quarterly

Bimonthly

One Thing of the Month

 
There are pros and cons to each type of box. Monthly boxes are easier to market and bring in regular, recurring revenue. They are also a LOT more work. Quarterly boxes can make marketing challenging but give you time to catch your breath between boxes and may allow you to curate a more expensive, luxurious box. 
 
A “One Thing of the Month” box is a great place to start! You’re simply providing one item each month. I have members inside Launch Your Box who have been very successful with their “one things.” T-shirts, candles, beef jerky, washi tape, door hangers, and more.
 
Once you’ve decided who your ideal customer is and the type of box you’re going to offer, it’s time to curate some boxes! Join me for my FREE  6 in 60 Workshop where we’ll plan six months’ worth of subscription boxes in only an hour! 
 
Join me for this episode as I talk about how now IS the time to start your subscription box and go over the first TWO steps forward, helping you discover who your box is for and what kind of subscription box is the best choice for your business. 
Important Links: 
 6 in 60 Workshop
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Let’s start this year with a better plan, a plan to help you move forward because… It’s Time to Start Your Subscription Box! </p><p> </p><p>Now is the time to get started the right way. </p><p> </p><p>See, it’s hard to take steps forward with starting your subscription box if you can’t visualize who that box is for - your ideal customer. And if you already have a subscription box and you’re struggling with marketing, gaining subscribers, or retaining the subscribers you do have, take a closer look at your ideal customer. </p><p> </p><p>I want you to describe your ideal customer in 3-5 words. </p><ul>
<li>Are they a man or a woman? </li>
<li>Are they an adult or a child? </li>
<li>How old are they? </li>
<li>Where do they live? </li>
<li>Do they belong to a certain profession or faith group? </li>
<li>Do they have a specific hobby or love for something? </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Answering these questions allows you to visualize that person. My ideal customer for my monogram box is a “Southern Busy Mom.” Can you picture her? I can! I curate subscription boxes for her every month. </p><p> </p><p>Ask yourself what your ideal customer is thinking, feeling, and doing each month of the year. It’s this knowledge that will help you plan themes for your boxes <em>before</em> you ever start looking for products. </p><p> </p><p>Once you’re able to visualize your ideal customer, it’s time to decide what kind of box to create. You have choices: </p><ul>
<li>Monthly</li>
<li>Quarterly</li>
<li>Bimonthly</li>
<li>One Thing of the Month</li>
</ul><p> </p><p>There are pros and cons to each type of box. Monthly boxes are easier to market and bring in regular, recurring revenue. They are also a LOT more work. Quarterly boxes can make marketing challenging but give you time to catch your breath between boxes and may allow you to curate a more expensive, luxurious box. </p><p> </p><p>A “One Thing of the Month” box is a great place to start! You’re simply providing one item each month. I have members inside Launch Your Box who have been very successful with their “one things.” T-shirts, candles, beef jerky, washi tape, door hangers, and more.</p><p> </p><p>Once you’ve decided who your ideal customer is and the type of box you’re going to offer, it’s time to curate some boxes! Join me for my FREE <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e"> 6 in 60 Workshop</a> where we’ll plan six months’ worth of subscription boxes in only an hour! </p><p> </p><p>Join me for this episode as I talk about how now IS the time to start your subscription box and go over the first TWO steps forward, helping you discover who your box is for and what kind of subscription box is the best choice for your business. </p><p>Important Links: </p><ul><li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e"> 6 in 60 Workshop</a></li></ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1753</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[80a68f5c-0c04-11ef-bfe6-373380c674a8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4303932786.mp3?updated=1715040200" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>I Want to Start a Subscription Box Business - Where Do I Start?</title>
      <description>When you don’t know where to start, it’s easy to start in the wrong place. 
 
You have an idea. A dream. You want to start a subscription box. But you don’t know how. So you do what everyone does. You google. It. And you find out there are all kinds of people wanting to sell you all kinds of things to help you run your subscription box business. Software, packaging, marketing tools, and more. 
 
In the beginning, before you even get started, you don’t need any of those things. What you need is to Start The Right Way! 
 
If you’re just starting your subscription box journey, this episode is for you! Avoid the overwhelm and start where you need to start… the beginning. 
 
I call this first stage The Hopeful Entrepreneur because you’re full of hopes and dreams… and so many questions. There are things you need to do during this stage to start your subscription box journey off right. 
 

Complete the  6 in 60 Workshop (Post-It Note Challenge) - identify your ideal customer and plan out your first six boxes. 

Contact your local Small Business Adminstration Office - fulfill local requirements to legally set up your business. 

Establish social media pages for your business - focus audience building efforts on one platform to start. 

Secure a domain for your website - this will be your url. 

Explore options for your website - we recommend Shopify or WordPress/WooCommerce. 

 
Getting your subscription box business off the ground takes a lot of work. Following a step-by-step process helps you stay on track. 
 
Join me for this episode as I walk you through this first stage of your subscription box journey, sharing tips, strategies, and resources to help you get a strong start. Don’t miss my tips about naming your business - and your subscription box. It matters!   
Important Links: 

 Subscription Box Blueprint eBook 

 FREE 6 in 60 Workshop

 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 01 May 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>I Want to Start a Subscription Box Business - Where Do I Start?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as I walk you through this first stage of your subscription box journey, sharing tips, strategies, and resources to help you get a strong start. Don’t miss my tips about naming your business - and your subscription box. It matters!   </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>When you don’t know where to start, it’s easy to start in the wrong place. 
 
You have an idea. A dream. You want to start a subscription box. But you don’t know how. So you do what everyone does. You google. It. And you find out there are all kinds of people wanting to sell you all kinds of things to help you run your subscription box business. Software, packaging, marketing tools, and more. 
 
In the beginning, before you even get started, you don’t need any of those things. What you need is to Start The Right Way! 
 
If you’re just starting your subscription box journey, this episode is for you! Avoid the overwhelm and start where you need to start… the beginning. 
 
I call this first stage The Hopeful Entrepreneur because you’re full of hopes and dreams… and so many questions. There are things you need to do during this stage to start your subscription box journey off right. 
 

Complete the  6 in 60 Workshop (Post-It Note Challenge) - identify your ideal customer and plan out your first six boxes. 

Contact your local Small Business Adminstration Office - fulfill local requirements to legally set up your business. 

Establish social media pages for your business - focus audience building efforts on one platform to start. 

Secure a domain for your website - this will be your url. 

Explore options for your website - we recommend Shopify or WordPress/WooCommerce. 

 
Getting your subscription box business off the ground takes a lot of work. Following a step-by-step process helps you stay on track. 
 
Join me for this episode as I walk you through this first stage of your subscription box journey, sharing tips, strategies, and resources to help you get a strong start. Don’t miss my tips about naming your business - and your subscription box. It matters!   
Important Links: 

 Subscription Box Blueprint eBook 

 FREE 6 in 60 Workshop

 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><em>When you don’t know where to start, it’s easy to start in the wrong place. </em></p><p> </p><p>You have an idea. A dream. You want to start a subscription box. But you don’t know how. So you do what everyone does. You google. It. And you find out there are all kinds of people wanting to sell you all kinds of things to help you run your subscription box business. Software, packaging, marketing tools, and more. </p><p> </p><p>In the beginning, before you even get started, you don’t need any of those things. What you need is to Start The Right Way! </p><p> </p><p>If you’re just starting your subscription box journey, this episode is for you! Avoid the overwhelm and start where you need to start… the beginning. </p><p> </p><p>I call this first stage <em>The Hopeful Entrepreneur</em> because you’re full of hopes and dreams… and so many questions. There are things you need to do during this stage to start your subscription box journey off right. </p><p> </p><ul>
<li>Complete the <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e"> 6 in 60 Workshop</a> (Post-It Note Challenge) - identify your ideal customer and plan out your first six boxes. </li>
<li>Contact your local Small Business Adminstration Office - fulfill local requirements to legally set up your business. </li>
<li>Establish social media pages for your business - focus audience building efforts on one platform to start. </li>
<li>Secure a domain for your website - this will be your url. </li>
<li>Explore options for your website - we recommend Shopify or WordPress/WooCommerce. </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Getting your subscription box business off the ground takes a lot of work. Following a step-by-step process helps you stay on track. </p><p> </p><p>Join me for this episode as I walk you through this first stage of your subscription box journey, sharing tips, strategies, and resources to help you get a strong start. Don’t miss my tips about naming your business - and your subscription box. It matters!   </p><p>Important Links: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/offers/V3xNYtb9/checkout"> Subscription Box Blueprint eBook </a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e"> FREE 6 in 60 Workshop</a></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1617</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1909192c-06a1-11ef-8481-1bc8b1c49a72]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5348620729.mp3?updated=1714447746" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>158: It's NEVER Too Late to Start, from Retirement to Subscription Box Owner</title>
      <description>Do you think you’re too old to start a business? Do you worry it’s too late to pivot and do something you’re truly passionate about? Something that could make a huge difference in the lives of you and your family? 
It’s not too late. It’s never too late. I say it often, but sometimes it takes hearing it from somebody else before it really sinks in. 
Get ready to be inspired as I introduce you to Bev Schweigert, owner of Blessed Be Boutique and member of Launch Your Box. 
Bev “retired” more than six years ago and spent six months wondering what to do next. Her Christian faith is central to her life and part of living that for Bev was going on a mission trip to Peru. Bev needed to raise some money to fund that trip and ended up selling Christian jewelry to do so. Soon after, the pandemic hit and Bev’s online jewelry sales skyrocketed. But, once life started to get back to normal, sales started to slow way down. 
Bev knew that if she wanted to keep growing her business, she needed to find ways to bring more of her target customers into her world - that meant attracting more Christian women. Bev had been journaling and started a Facebook group for women to reflect on scripture and journal along with her. She went Live in the group 5 days a week and just spent time serving her audience. Soon they started asking her to sell the products she was using - her journal and journaling supplies. 
Bev did even more. She developed a creative devotional that includes crafts, poetry, songs to listen to, and more. She turned the idea of a devotional or journal into a true experience for Christian women. And it was a hit! 
Soon, Bev started creating one-time devotional boxes - the first was inspired by her memories of summer camp. It included crafts to go along with the devotionals and all the supplies her customers needed to complete them. These boxes sold very well, inspiring Bev to create additional one-time boxes for holidays. 
Before long, Bev started thinking about starting a subscription box. A friend and fellow business owner happened to be a member of Launch Your Box and encouraged Bev to join. 
The results? Bev sold out her first launch with 80 subscribers! And when she opened back up in time for the next box, she sold out again, adding 45 more subscribers for a total of 130. That’s right - Bev passed the 100 subscriber mark on only her second box! She’ll open back up for box number three very soon and hopes to add 45 more subscribers. 
There is so much about Bev’s story that inspired me and will inspire you. And part of that is her age. See, Bev is 61. She started her business when she was 55. A lot of people think they’re “too old” to start a subscription box business or any type of small business. If that sounds like you, Bev has a message for you. “It’s never too late to get started!” 
Bev has big goals for 2024. She wants to double what she did last year in sales, and she’s already off to a strong start. Bev is having so much fun with her business - including her subscription box - that she can’t imagine not working. Which is a good thing, since her husband hopes to retire soon thanks to the success of Blessed Be! 
It doesn’t matter if you are in your 30s, 40s, 50s, or beyond….it’s never too late to start your subscription box business.  This episode is going to inspire the heck out of you.  

Find and follow Bev: 

Blessed Be Boutique on Facebook

Blessed Intentions Facebook Group


Blessed Be Boutique on Instagram  

Blessed Be Boutique Website


Join me in all the places:  

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Apr 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>It's NEVER Too Late to Start, from Retirement to Subscription Box Owner</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>158</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>It doesn’t matter if you are in your 30s, 40s, 50s, or beyond….it’s never too late to start your subscription box business.  This episode is going to inspire the heck out of you.  </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Do you think you’re too old to start a business? Do you worry it’s too late to pivot and do something you’re truly passionate about? Something that could make a huge difference in the lives of you and your family? 
It’s not too late. It’s never too late. I say it often, but sometimes it takes hearing it from somebody else before it really sinks in. 
Get ready to be inspired as I introduce you to Bev Schweigert, owner of Blessed Be Boutique and member of Launch Your Box. 
Bev “retired” more than six years ago and spent six months wondering what to do next. Her Christian faith is central to her life and part of living that for Bev was going on a mission trip to Peru. Bev needed to raise some money to fund that trip and ended up selling Christian jewelry to do so. Soon after, the pandemic hit and Bev’s online jewelry sales skyrocketed. But, once life started to get back to normal, sales started to slow way down. 
Bev knew that if she wanted to keep growing her business, she needed to find ways to bring more of her target customers into her world - that meant attracting more Christian women. Bev had been journaling and started a Facebook group for women to reflect on scripture and journal along with her. She went Live in the group 5 days a week and just spent time serving her audience. Soon they started asking her to sell the products she was using - her journal and journaling supplies. 
Bev did even more. She developed a creative devotional that includes crafts, poetry, songs to listen to, and more. She turned the idea of a devotional or journal into a true experience for Christian women. And it was a hit! 
Soon, Bev started creating one-time devotional boxes - the first was inspired by her memories of summer camp. It included crafts to go along with the devotionals and all the supplies her customers needed to complete them. These boxes sold very well, inspiring Bev to create additional one-time boxes for holidays. 
Before long, Bev started thinking about starting a subscription box. A friend and fellow business owner happened to be a member of Launch Your Box and encouraged Bev to join. 
The results? Bev sold out her first launch with 80 subscribers! And when she opened back up in time for the next box, she sold out again, adding 45 more subscribers for a total of 130. That’s right - Bev passed the 100 subscriber mark on only her second box! She’ll open back up for box number three very soon and hopes to add 45 more subscribers. 
There is so much about Bev’s story that inspired me and will inspire you. And part of that is her age. See, Bev is 61. She started her business when she was 55. A lot of people think they’re “too old” to start a subscription box business or any type of small business. If that sounds like you, Bev has a message for you. “It’s never too late to get started!” 
Bev has big goals for 2024. She wants to double what she did last year in sales, and she’s already off to a strong start. Bev is having so much fun with her business - including her subscription box - that she can’t imagine not working. Which is a good thing, since her husband hopes to retire soon thanks to the success of Blessed Be! 
It doesn’t matter if you are in your 30s, 40s, 50s, or beyond….it’s never too late to start your subscription box business.  This episode is going to inspire the heck out of you.  

Find and follow Bev: 

Blessed Be Boutique on Facebook

Blessed Intentions Facebook Group


Blessed Be Boutique on Instagram  

Blessed Be Boutique Website


Join me in all the places:  

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Do you think you’re too old to start a business? Do you worry it’s too late to pivot and do something you’re truly passionate about? Something that could make a huge difference in the lives of you and your family? </p><p>It’s not too late. It’s never too late. I say it often, but sometimes it takes hearing it from somebody else before it really sinks in. </p><p>Get ready to be inspired as I introduce you to Bev Schweigert, owner of Blessed Be Boutique and member of Launch Your Box. </p><p>Bev “retired” more than six years ago and spent six months wondering what to do next. Her Christian faith is central to her life and part of living that for Bev was going on a mission trip to Peru. Bev needed to raise some money to fund that trip and ended up selling Christian jewelry to do so. Soon after, the pandemic hit and Bev’s online jewelry sales skyrocketed. But, once life started to get back to normal, sales started to slow way down. </p><p>Bev knew that if she wanted to keep growing her business, she needed to find ways to bring more of her target customers into her world - that meant attracting more Christian women. Bev had been journaling and started a Facebook group for women to reflect on scripture and journal along with her. She went Live in the group 5 days a week and just spent time serving her audience. Soon they started asking her to sell the products she was using - her journal and journaling supplies. </p><p>Bev did even more. She developed a creative devotional that includes crafts, poetry, songs to listen to, and more. She turned the idea of a devotional or journal into a true experience for Christian women. And it was a hit! </p><p>Soon, Bev started creating one-time devotional boxes - the first was inspired by her memories of summer camp. It included crafts to go along with the devotionals and all the supplies her customers needed to complete them. These boxes sold very well, inspiring Bev to create additional one-time boxes for holidays. </p><p>Before long, Bev started thinking about starting a subscription box. A friend and fellow business owner happened to be a member of Launch Your Box and encouraged Bev to join. </p><p>The results? Bev sold out her first launch with 80 subscribers! And when she opened back up in time for the next box, she sold out again, adding 45 more subscribers for a total of 130. That’s right - Bev passed the 100 subscriber mark on only her second box! She’ll open back up for box number three very soon and hopes to add 45 more subscribers. </p><p>There is so much about Bev’s story that inspired me and will inspire you. And part of that is her age. See, Bev is 61. She started her business when she was 55. A lot of people think they’re “too old” to start a subscription box business or any type of small business. If that sounds like you, Bev has a message for you. “It’s never too late to get started!” </p><p>Bev has big goals for 2024. She wants to double what she did last year in sales, and she’s already off to a strong start. Bev is having so much fun with her business - including her subscription box - that she can’t imagine not working. Which is a good thing, since her husband hopes to retire soon thanks to the success of Blessed Be! </p><p>It doesn’t matter if you are in your 30s, 40s, 50s, or beyond….it’s never too late to start your subscription box business.  This episode is going to inspire the heck out of you.  </p><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Bev: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/BlessedBeBoutiqueBev">Blessed Be Boutique on Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/groups/blessedintentions">Blessed Intentions Facebook Group</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.instagram.com/blessedbeboutique/">Blessed Be Boutique on Instagram</a>  </li>
<li><a href="https://blessedbeboutique.com/">Blessed Be Boutique Website</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places:  </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1820</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ce38aa00-005d-11ef-99b9-5b28d1193fb4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4872707069.mp3?updated=1714078511" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>157: Can Anyone Start a Subscription Box Business?</title>
      <description>Can anyone start a subscription box business? Yes. I truly believe this. 
I say it all of the time - I’m not special. And no, that doesn’t mean I don’t think I’m great or suffer from a lack of confidence. It just means I don’t have anything you don’t have. 
I’m an ordinary person who doesn’t give up. And it’s that “not giving up” piece that matters. That’s the thing you need to have if you’re going to not just start a subscription box, but launch and grow one into a successful, sustainable business. 
And we all have the ability to not give up. 
It’s about being consistent - in anything. You don’t have to be the best… you just have to be consistent. That’s what I’ve done, that’s what so many of my students have done, and - if a subscription box business is what you want - that’s what you need to do, too. 
My beginning looked like a lot of you: 

I was a solopreneur - and a mom - working from my kitchen table while my kids slept. 

I schlepped my products to craft shows and pop-up shops all over Texas (and Texas is BIG, y’all!) 

I found the courage to rent a tiny, 600-square-foot space and called it my first retail location. 

I dreamed of starting a subscription box for years. I didn’t know how I would do it, but I had a fire burning inside of me that meant I had to try. 
I want you to know it takes just one action. Just one that leads to another and another. Before you know it? You’re running a legit business that gives you a paycheck and freedom you’ve never felt. 
So, the answer to, “Can anyone do this? Can anyone start a subscription box?” is yes! 
Anyone can start a subscription box. 
It doesn’t matter if you’ve never sold products before. In episode 3 of this podcast, I talked with Anne Stuccio. Anne is a practicing dentist who had only ever purchased supplies for her office. It didn’t matter because Anne was also passionate about providing a subscription box experience for female dentists. So she figured it out. She took one action and then the next and the next. 
It doesn’t matter how old you are. Next week on the podcast, I’m talking with Bev Schweigert. Bev started her business when she was 55 after being retired for six months. And last year? She brought in a quarter of a million dollars in sales! 
It doesn’t matter if you’ve got kids at home. Stop waiting. In episode 29 of the podcast, I chat with Amy Green, mother of three including a son with special needs. This is her time to do something for herself and she’s thriving with her subscription box business - the business she built around her life and her son’s needs. 
I want you to understand that whatever reason you think you can’t doesn’t matter. We can all do this. 
I’ve been doing this for a long time and most days, I’m winging it. Today, during a LIVE, I tripped over my mannequin and my entire backdrop fell down! 
I’m not special. But I know anyone can rinse and repeat my success. So many of my students have done just that! 
The first step is to lay it out and visualize what this could look like for you. I have a free workshop that helps you do exactly that. It’s called the 6 in 60 workshop and you can find it at 6in60workshop.com. Grab a pen and some post-it notes and let’s lay it out together. Once you can see it, you’ll know it is possible for you. 
Join me for this episode and discover why I believe anyone can start a subscription box and how you can take the first steps toward making your subscription box dreams come true.  

Growing Your Community! with Sarah Williams &amp; Tony Durso
Episode 3 - How one LYB Member Hit $10K Monthly with Her Subscription Box Business 
Episode 129 - Getting Out of Your Own Way and Gaining 100 Subscribers
6 in 60 Workshop

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 17 Apr 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Can Anyone Start a Subscription Box Business?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>157</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode and discover why I believe anyone can start a subscription box and how you can take the first steps toward making your subscription box dreams come true.  </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Can anyone start a subscription box business? Yes. I truly believe this. 
I say it all of the time - I’m not special. And no, that doesn’t mean I don’t think I’m great or suffer from a lack of confidence. It just means I don’t have anything you don’t have. 
I’m an ordinary person who doesn’t give up. And it’s that “not giving up” piece that matters. That’s the thing you need to have if you’re going to not just start a subscription box, but launch and grow one into a successful, sustainable business. 
And we all have the ability to not give up. 
It’s about being consistent - in anything. You don’t have to be the best… you just have to be consistent. That’s what I’ve done, that’s what so many of my students have done, and - if a subscription box business is what you want - that’s what you need to do, too. 
My beginning looked like a lot of you: 

I was a solopreneur - and a mom - working from my kitchen table while my kids slept. 

I schlepped my products to craft shows and pop-up shops all over Texas (and Texas is BIG, y’all!) 

I found the courage to rent a tiny, 600-square-foot space and called it my first retail location. 

I dreamed of starting a subscription box for years. I didn’t know how I would do it, but I had a fire burning inside of me that meant I had to try. 
I want you to know it takes just one action. Just one that leads to another and another. Before you know it? You’re running a legit business that gives you a paycheck and freedom you’ve never felt. 
So, the answer to, “Can anyone do this? Can anyone start a subscription box?” is yes! 
Anyone can start a subscription box. 
It doesn’t matter if you’ve never sold products before. In episode 3 of this podcast, I talked with Anne Stuccio. Anne is a practicing dentist who had only ever purchased supplies for her office. It didn’t matter because Anne was also passionate about providing a subscription box experience for female dentists. So she figured it out. She took one action and then the next and the next. 
It doesn’t matter how old you are. Next week on the podcast, I’m talking with Bev Schweigert. Bev started her business when she was 55 after being retired for six months. And last year? She brought in a quarter of a million dollars in sales! 
It doesn’t matter if you’ve got kids at home. Stop waiting. In episode 29 of the podcast, I chat with Amy Green, mother of three including a son with special needs. This is her time to do something for herself and she’s thriving with her subscription box business - the business she built around her life and her son’s needs. 
I want you to understand that whatever reason you think you can’t doesn’t matter. We can all do this. 
I’ve been doing this for a long time and most days, I’m winging it. Today, during a LIVE, I tripped over my mannequin and my entire backdrop fell down! 
I’m not special. But I know anyone can rinse and repeat my success. So many of my students have done just that! 
The first step is to lay it out and visualize what this could look like for you. I have a free workshop that helps you do exactly that. It’s called the 6 in 60 workshop and you can find it at 6in60workshop.com. Grab a pen and some post-it notes and let’s lay it out together. Once you can see it, you’ll know it is possible for you. 
Join me for this episode and discover why I believe anyone can start a subscription box and how you can take the first steps toward making your subscription box dreams come true.  

Growing Your Community! with Sarah Williams &amp; Tony Durso
Episode 3 - How one LYB Member Hit $10K Monthly with Her Subscription Box Business 
Episode 129 - Getting Out of Your Own Way and Gaining 100 Subscribers
6 in 60 Workshop

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Can anyone start a subscription box business? Yes. I truly believe this. </p><p>I say it all of the time - I’m not special. And no, that doesn’t mean I don’t think I’m great or suffer from a lack of confidence. It just means I don’t have anything you don’t have. </p><p>I’m an ordinary person who doesn’t give up. And it’s that “not giving up” piece that matters. That’s the thing you need to have if you’re going to not just start a subscription box, but launch and grow one into a successful, sustainable business. </p><p>And we all have the ability to not give up. </p><p>It’s about being consistent - in anything. You don’t have to be the best… you just have to be consistent. That’s what I’ve done, that’s what so many of my students have done, and - if a subscription box business is what you want - that’s what you need to do, too. </p><p>My beginning looked like a lot of you: </p><ul>
<li>I was a solopreneur - and a mom - working from my kitchen table while my kids slept. </li>
<li>I schlepped my products to craft shows and pop-up shops all over Texas (and Texas is BIG, y’all!) </li>
<li>I found the courage to rent a tiny, 600-square-foot space and called it my first retail location. </li>
</ul><p>I dreamed of starting a subscription box for years. I didn’t know how I would do it, but I had a fire burning inside of me that meant I had to try. </p><p>I want you to know it takes just one action. Just one that leads to another and another. Before you know it? You’re running a legit business that gives you a paycheck and freedom you’ve never felt. </p><p>So, the answer to, “Can anyone do this? Can anyone start a subscription box?” is yes! </p><p>Anyone can start a subscription box. </p><p>It doesn’t matter if you’ve never sold products before. In <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-3">episode 3</a> of this podcast, I talked with Anne Stuccio. Anne is a practicing dentist who had only ever purchased supplies for her office. It didn’t matter because Anne was also passionate about providing a subscription box experience for female dentists. So she figured it out. She took one action and then the next and the next. </p><p>It doesn’t matter how old you are. Next week on the podcast, I’m talking with Bev Schweigert. Bev started her business when she was 55 after being retired for six months. And last year? She brought in a quarter of a million dollars in sales! </p><p>It doesn’t matter if you’ve got kids at home. Stop waiting. In <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/getting-out-of-your-own-way-and-gaining-100-subscribers-ep-129">episode 29</a> of the podcast, I chat with Amy Green, mother of three including a son with special needs. This is her time to do something for herself and she’s thriving with her subscription box business - the business she built around her life and her son’s needs. </p><p>I want you to understand that whatever reason you think you can’t doesn’t matter. We can all do this. </p><p>I’ve been doing this for a long time and most days, I’m winging it. Today, during a LIVE, I tripped over my mannequin and my entire backdrop fell down! </p><p>I’m not special. But I know anyone can rinse and repeat my success. So many of my students have done just that! </p><p>The first step is to lay it out and visualize what this could look like for you. I have a free workshop that helps you do exactly that. It’s called the 6 in 60 workshop and you can find it at <a href="http://6in60workshop.com">6in60workshop.com</a>. Grab a pen and some post-it notes and let’s lay it out together. Once you can see it, you’ll know it is possible for you. </p><p>Join me for this episode and discover why I believe anyone can start a subscription box and how you can take the first steps toward making your subscription box dreams come true.  </p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/growing-your-community-with-sarah-williams-tony-durso/id1251015712?i=1000645635285">Growing Your Community! with Sarah Williams &amp; Tony Durso</a></p><p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-3">Episode 3 - How one LYB Member Hit $10K Monthly with Her Subscription Box Business</a><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-3"> </a></p><p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/getting-out-of-your-own-way-and-gaining-100-subscribers-ep-129">Episode 129 - Getting Out of Your Own Way and Gaining 100 Subscribers</a></p><p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e">6 in 60 Workshop</a></p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>935</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8669d270-fb7c-11ee-8322-df4de8e4e46c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9055334421.mp3?updated=1713222576" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>156: Is Your Business Too Vulnerable?</title>
      <description>On March 5th at about 10:00 in the morning, Facebook went down. Instagram went down, too. The outage didn’t last long, but it had an impact on so many business owners, especially those who rely heavily on social media. That day, Meta was only down for a short while, but what if it was down for the day? The week? The month? What if it went away for good? 
Do you have systems in place to reach your audience outside of social media? 
Be ready for the next social media outage - and it’s a near certainty there will be one - by making sure you have three things in place. 

Diversified platforms

Are you only on Meta? Do you only engage with your audience on Facebook and Instagram?

You need to have a presence somewhere else - TikTok, YouTube, Twitter, Pinterest, etc. 

Actively engage and build your followings there. 

Email list

Email doesn’t depend on social media. You own your email list! 

It is SO EASY to send an email when you’ve been building your list all year.

Are you working to build your email list? 

Listen to episode 109 for 10 ways to build your email list. 

Add a pop-up on your website. 

Create an opt-in on your website with a way to serve your audience.

Run a giveaway.

Post a lead magnet on social media and run ads to it.

Add an email opt-in at checkout.

Create a fun quiz that requires an email address to get results.

Offer a discount or free gift.

Host an event or workshop.

Tease sneak peeks or exclusive behind-the-scenes content with opt-ins.

Get in front of new audiences.

Text/SMS 

Are you actively building your text list every month? When Meta went down, I was able to reach my students immediately! 

Klaviyo allows you to build your SMS list right alongside your email list. 

Things like Meta going down open our eyes to weaknesses in our businesses. It’s important to build your business to weather whatever storms that come our way! 
Join me for this episode and learn how to create strong, healthy marketing channels that sustain your business… no matter what. 

Episode 109 - 10 Ways to Build Your List - Every Month 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 10 Apr 2024 09:10:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Is Your Business Too Vulnerable?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>156</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode and learn how to create strong, healthy marketing channels that sustain your business… no matter what. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On March 5th at about 10:00 in the morning, Facebook went down. Instagram went down, too. The outage didn’t last long, but it had an impact on so many business owners, especially those who rely heavily on social media. That day, Meta was only down for a short while, but what if it was down for the day? The week? The month? What if it went away for good? 
Do you have systems in place to reach your audience outside of social media? 
Be ready for the next social media outage - and it’s a near certainty there will be one - by making sure you have three things in place. 

Diversified platforms

Are you only on Meta? Do you only engage with your audience on Facebook and Instagram?

You need to have a presence somewhere else - TikTok, YouTube, Twitter, Pinterest, etc. 

Actively engage and build your followings there. 

Email list

Email doesn’t depend on social media. You own your email list! 

It is SO EASY to send an email when you’ve been building your list all year.

Are you working to build your email list? 

Listen to episode 109 for 10 ways to build your email list. 

Add a pop-up on your website. 

Create an opt-in on your website with a way to serve your audience.

Run a giveaway.

Post a lead magnet on social media and run ads to it.

Add an email opt-in at checkout.

Create a fun quiz that requires an email address to get results.

Offer a discount or free gift.

Host an event or workshop.

Tease sneak peeks or exclusive behind-the-scenes content with opt-ins.

Get in front of new audiences.

Text/SMS 

Are you actively building your text list every month? When Meta went down, I was able to reach my students immediately! 

Klaviyo allows you to build your SMS list right alongside your email list. 

Things like Meta going down open our eyes to weaknesses in our businesses. It’s important to build your business to weather whatever storms that come our way! 
Join me for this episode and learn how to create strong, healthy marketing channels that sustain your business… no matter what. 

Episode 109 - 10 Ways to Build Your List - Every Month 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On March 5th at about 10:00 in the morning, Facebook went down. Instagram went down, too. The outage didn’t last long, but it had an impact on so many business owners, especially those who rely heavily on social media. That day, Meta was only down for a short while, but what if it was down for the day? The week? The month? What if it went away for good? </p><p>Do you have systems in place to reach your audience outside of social media? </p><p>Be ready for the next social media outage - and it’s a near certainty there will be one - by making sure you have three things in place. </p><ul>
<li>Diversified platforms</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Are you only on Meta? Do you only engage with your audience on Facebook and Instagram?</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">You need to have a presence somewhere else - TikTok, YouTube, Twitter, Pinterest, etc. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Actively engage and build your followings there. </li>
<li>Email list</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Email doesn’t depend on social media. You own your email list! </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">It is SO EASY to send an email when you’ve been building your list all year.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Are you working to build your email list? </li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Listen to episode 109 for 10 ways to build your email list. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-3">Add a pop-up on your website. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-3">Create an opt-in on your website with a way to serve your audience.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-3">Run a giveaway.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-3">Post a lead magnet on social media and run ads to it.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-3">Add an email opt-in at checkout.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-3">Create a fun quiz that requires an email address to get results.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-3">Offer a discount or free gift.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-3">Host an event or workshop.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-3">Tease sneak peeks or exclusive behind-the-scenes content with opt-ins.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-3">Get in front of new audiences.</li>
<li>Text/SMS </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Are you actively building your text list every month? When Meta went down, I was able to reach my students immediately! </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Klaviyo allows you to build your SMS list right alongside your email list. </li>
</ul><p>Things like Meta going down open our eyes to weaknesses in our businesses. It’s important to build your business to weather whatever storms that come our way! </p><p>Join me for this episode and learn how to create strong, healthy marketing channels that sustain your business… no matter what. </p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/10-ways-to-build-your-list-every-month-ep-109">Episode 109 - 10 Ways to Build Your List - Every Month</a><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/10-ways-to-build-your-list-every-month-ep-109"> </a></p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1097</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[50d95db8-f61a-11ee-9bf2-3377f68efc4c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7667505590.mp3?updated=1712630639" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Public Facing Content vs. Private Group Content: How to Share Content Publicly Without Giving Away Paid Content</title>
      <description>Today’s episode was inspired by a question from a member of Launch Your Box - and a former guest on the podcast. Betsy Goodman shared her sold-out launch story in episode 93. Betsy is a maker and a teacher - she teaches lettering and wax seal techniques. Her work is beautiful and her question is a common one among subscription box owners who make or teach as part of their subscription. 
Betsy’s question? How to balance what she gives away for free and what she reserves for her paid subscribers. If your subscription box includes any type of teaching component, you probably struggle with that same push and pull. You want to share enough content to create interest and excitement but don’t want to give away the valuable content your paying subscribers receive. 
The goal is to have balance. Give your audience a taste of what it’s like to be a subscriber, but provide value and exclusivity to your subscribers. 
These strategies can help you keep your public content engaging while still protecting your paid content. 

Share the what - not the how.

Publicly share the box opening and what your subscribers are receiving. This is also a great time to show what can be made from supplies in the box, but not how to do it. 

Potential subscribers can see the value.

They still need to join the subscription to learn how. 

Do this in a LIVE unboxing or an unboxing post, posts of finished products with supplies laying next to them. 

Give them “incomplete” information - they need/want to know more. 

Share small sections of the how, but don’t put it all together for them. 

Use sped-up videos so people can see the process but not the exact techniques and how-tos. 

Share smaller projects that can be made with the same supplies - acts as a bonus for subscribers, too! 

Connect, don’t teach. 

Go LIVE and use items from the box to create the projects. But… instead of teaching, simply talk to and connect with your audience as you create. 

As questions come up, explain what you’re doing and that subscribers have access to the instructional video that takes them through the project step-by-step. 

Your audience will see the value of your products, connect with you on a personal level, and see just how much they will get by subscribing. 

Find a balance. If you hide all your content behind closed doors, nobody other than your subscribers sees what you’re giving. You lose the opportunity to nurture your audience and show them what it’s like to be a subscriber. 
Doing more public-facing content creates more engagement from your subscribers - and drives more interest from those people who aren’t yet subscribers. 
Join me for this episode as I talk about why it’s so important to share content publicly and how to balance public-facing and subscriber-only content. 

Important Links: 

Launch Your Box Episode 93

6 in 60 Workshop 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join Launch Your Box today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 03 Apr 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Public Facing Content vs. Private Group Content: How to Share Content Publicly Without Giving Away Paid Content</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today’s episode was inspired by a question from a member of Launch Your Box - and a former guest on the podcast. Betsy Goodman shared her sold-out launch story in episode 93. Betsy is a maker and a teacher - she teaches lettering and wax seal techniques. Her work is beautiful and her question is a common one among subscription box owners who make or teach as part of their subscription. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today’s episode was inspired by a question from a member of Launch Your Box - and a former guest on the podcast. Betsy Goodman shared her sold-out launch story in episode 93. Betsy is a maker and a teacher - she teaches lettering and wax seal techniques. Her work is beautiful and her question is a common one among subscription box owners who make or teach as part of their subscription. 
Betsy’s question? How to balance what she gives away for free and what she reserves for her paid subscribers. If your subscription box includes any type of teaching component, you probably struggle with that same push and pull. You want to share enough content to create interest and excitement but don’t want to give away the valuable content your paying subscribers receive. 
The goal is to have balance. Give your audience a taste of what it’s like to be a subscriber, but provide value and exclusivity to your subscribers. 
These strategies can help you keep your public content engaging while still protecting your paid content. 

Share the what - not the how.

Publicly share the box opening and what your subscribers are receiving. This is also a great time to show what can be made from supplies in the box, but not how to do it. 

Potential subscribers can see the value.

They still need to join the subscription to learn how. 

Do this in a LIVE unboxing or an unboxing post, posts of finished products with supplies laying next to them. 

Give them “incomplete” information - they need/want to know more. 

Share small sections of the how, but don’t put it all together for them. 

Use sped-up videos so people can see the process but not the exact techniques and how-tos. 

Share smaller projects that can be made with the same supplies - acts as a bonus for subscribers, too! 

Connect, don’t teach. 

Go LIVE and use items from the box to create the projects. But… instead of teaching, simply talk to and connect with your audience as you create. 

As questions come up, explain what you’re doing and that subscribers have access to the instructional video that takes them through the project step-by-step. 

Your audience will see the value of your products, connect with you on a personal level, and see just how much they will get by subscribing. 

Find a balance. If you hide all your content behind closed doors, nobody other than your subscribers sees what you’re giving. You lose the opportunity to nurture your audience and show them what it’s like to be a subscriber. 
Doing more public-facing content creates more engagement from your subscribers - and drives more interest from those people who aren’t yet subscribers. 
Join me for this episode as I talk about why it’s so important to share content publicly and how to balance public-facing and subscriber-only content. 

Important Links: 

Launch Your Box Episode 93

6 in 60 Workshop 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join Launch Your Box today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today’s episode was inspired by a question from a member of Launch Your Box - and a former guest on the podcast. Betsy Goodman shared her sold-out launch story in episode 93. Betsy is a maker and a teacher - she teaches lettering and wax seal techniques. Her work is beautiful and her question is a common one among subscription box owners who make or teach as part of their subscription. </p><p>Betsy’s question? How to balance what she gives away for free and what she reserves for her paid subscribers. If your subscription box includes any type of teaching component, you probably struggle with that same push and pull. You want to share enough content to create interest and excitement but don’t want to give away the valuable content your paying subscribers receive. </p><p>The goal is to have balance. Give your audience a taste of what it’s like to be a subscriber, but provide value and exclusivity to your subscribers. </p><p>These strategies can help you keep your public content engaging while still protecting your paid content. </p><ul>
<li>Share the what - not the how.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Publicly share the box opening and what your subscribers are receiving. This is also a great time to show what can be made from supplies in the box, but not how to do it. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Potential subscribers can see the value.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">They still need to join the subscription to learn how. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Do this in a LIVE unboxing or an unboxing post, posts of finished products with supplies laying next to them. </li>
<li>Give them “incomplete” information - they need/want to know more. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Share small sections of the how, but don’t put it all together for them. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Use sped-up videos so people can see the process but not the exact techniques and how-tos. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Share smaller projects that can be made with the same supplies - acts as a bonus for subscribers, too! </li>
<li>Connect, don’t teach. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Go LIVE and use items from the box to create the projects. But… instead of teaching, simply talk to and connect with your audience as you create. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">As questions come up, explain what you’re doing and that subscribers have access to the instructional video that takes them through the project step-by-step. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Your audience will see the value of your products, connect with you on a personal level, and see just how much they will get by subscribing. </li>
</ul><p>Find a balance. If you hide all your content behind closed doors, nobody other than your subscribers sees what you’re giving. You lose the opportunity to nurture your audience and show them what it’s like to be a subscriber. </p><p>Doing more public-facing content creates more engagement from your subscribers - and drives more interest from those people who aren’t yet subscribers. </p><p>Join me for this episode as I talk about why it’s so important to share content publicly and how to balance public-facing and subscriber-only content. </p><p><br></p><p>Important Links: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/crushing-it-on-instagram-with-one-simple-strategy-ep-93">Launch Your Box Episode 93</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e">6 in 60 Workshop </a></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join Launch Your Box</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1142</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[02d813d0-efd4-11ee-a7ac-abc02a70476a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5873358436.mp3?updated=1711940737" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>155: Building Another Recurring Revenue Stream with Stu McLaren</title>
      <description>One of the biggest benefits of a subscription box business is recurring revenue. You can build ANOTHER recurring revenue stream in your business by adding a membership to your subscription box business. 
In episode 145 of this podcast, I interviewed three of my Mastermind students, all of whom hit $1 million in revenue last year! They have different businesses and followed different paths to where they are now, but one thing they have in common - they all have both a physical subscription and a digital membership.
When I knew I wanted to talk to you about memberships, there was one person who had to be part of the conversation - my long-time mentor and membership guru, Stu McLaren. 
Stu and I talked about 4 categories of memberships: 

Product-based memberships 

Ie., a subscription box

Service-based memberships

I.e., a massage therapist, blow-out bar, car wash

Knowledge or information-based membership

Solving an ongoing problem - i.e., dog training, relationship coach

Learning a skill - i.e., Launch Your Box

Convenience - i.e., teacher lesson plans, templates, social media scripts, checklists

Community-based memberships

A gathering place for people with shared interests

Can be a standalone or an add-on 

There are so many examples inside Launch Your Box of members who added memberships to fill a need their audience has. 
Ask yourself how you can use your expertise to create a membership. 

What questions are people asking you? 

What problems can you solve for your audience? 

Stu and I talked about membership ideas for some popular industries: 

Pet industry

Training

Dog spa business owner coaching 

Equestrian riding

Fashion and beauty

Styling tips &amp; tricks

Crafting

Lettering, sewing, crafting, etc. 

If you worry that your business doesn’t lend itself to a membership, Stu shares a story that might convince you otherwise. One of his students has a membership of thousands of people - all there to learn how to make balloon animals! Yes, you can create a membership! 
So… how can YOU use your expertise to serve your ideal customer with a membership? 
Stu is hosting a FREE 3-part workshop in April. 
Learn more about Stu McLaren’s FREE workshop HERE! 
Join me and Stu McLaren, my long-time mentor and membership expert, as we talk about why you should consider building a membership alongside your subscription box business.

Find and follow Stu: 

Stu McLaren on Facebook


Stu McLaren on Instagram  

The Membership Workshop Website

Join me in all the places:  

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 27 Mar 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Building Another Recurring Revenue Stream with Stu McLaren</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>155</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me and Stu McLaren, my long-time mentor and membership expert, as we talk about why you should consider building a membership alongside your subscription box business.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>One of the biggest benefits of a subscription box business is recurring revenue. You can build ANOTHER recurring revenue stream in your business by adding a membership to your subscription box business. 
In episode 145 of this podcast, I interviewed three of my Mastermind students, all of whom hit $1 million in revenue last year! They have different businesses and followed different paths to where they are now, but one thing they have in common - they all have both a physical subscription and a digital membership.
When I knew I wanted to talk to you about memberships, there was one person who had to be part of the conversation - my long-time mentor and membership guru, Stu McLaren. 
Stu and I talked about 4 categories of memberships: 

Product-based memberships 

Ie., a subscription box

Service-based memberships

I.e., a massage therapist, blow-out bar, car wash

Knowledge or information-based membership

Solving an ongoing problem - i.e., dog training, relationship coach

Learning a skill - i.e., Launch Your Box

Convenience - i.e., teacher lesson plans, templates, social media scripts, checklists

Community-based memberships

A gathering place for people with shared interests

Can be a standalone or an add-on 

There are so many examples inside Launch Your Box of members who added memberships to fill a need their audience has. 
Ask yourself how you can use your expertise to create a membership. 

What questions are people asking you? 

What problems can you solve for your audience? 

Stu and I talked about membership ideas for some popular industries: 

Pet industry

Training

Dog spa business owner coaching 

Equestrian riding

Fashion and beauty

Styling tips &amp; tricks

Crafting

Lettering, sewing, crafting, etc. 

If you worry that your business doesn’t lend itself to a membership, Stu shares a story that might convince you otherwise. One of his students has a membership of thousands of people - all there to learn how to make balloon animals! Yes, you can create a membership! 
So… how can YOU use your expertise to serve your ideal customer with a membership? 
Stu is hosting a FREE 3-part workshop in April. 
Learn more about Stu McLaren’s FREE workshop HERE! 
Join me and Stu McLaren, my long-time mentor and membership expert, as we talk about why you should consider building a membership alongside your subscription box business.

Find and follow Stu: 

Stu McLaren on Facebook


Stu McLaren on Instagram  

The Membership Workshop Website

Join me in all the places:  

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>One of the biggest benefits of a subscription box business is recurring revenue. You can build ANOTHER recurring revenue stream in your business by adding a membership to your subscription box business. </p><p>In episode 145 of this podcast, I interviewed three of my Mastermind students, all of whom hit $1 million in revenue last year! They have different businesses and followed different paths to where they are now, but one thing they have in common - they all have both a physical subscription <em>and</em> a digital membership.</p><p>When I knew I wanted to talk to you about memberships, there was one person who had to be part of the conversation - my long-time mentor and membership guru, Stu McLaren. </p><p>Stu and I talked about 4 categories of memberships: </p><ul>
<li>Product-based memberships </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Ie., a subscription box</li>
<li>Service-based memberships</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">I.e., a massage therapist, blow-out bar, car wash</li>
<li>Knowledge or information-based membership</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Solving an ongoing problem - i.e., dog training, relationship coach</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Learning a skill - i.e., Launch Your Box</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Convenience - i.e., teacher lesson plans, templates, social media scripts, checklists</li>
<li>Community-based memberships</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">A gathering place for people with shared interests</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Can be a standalone or an add-on </li>
</ul><p>There are so many examples inside Launch Your Box of members who added memberships to fill a need their audience has. </p><p>Ask yourself how you can use your expertise to create a membership. </p><ul>
<li>What questions are people asking you? </li>
<li>What problems can you solve for your audience? </li>
</ul><p>Stu and I talked about membership ideas for some popular industries: </p><ul>
<li>Pet industry</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Training</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Dog spa business owner coaching </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Equestrian riding</li>
<li>Fashion and beauty</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Styling tips &amp; tricks</li>
<li>Crafting</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Lettering, sewing, crafting, etc. </li>
</ul><p>If you worry that your business doesn’t lend itself to a membership, Stu shares a story that might convince you otherwise. One of his students has a membership of thousands of people - all there to learn how to make balloon animals! Yes, you can create a membership! </p><p>So… how can YOU use your expertise to serve your ideal customer with a membership? </p><p>Stu is hosting a FREE 3-part workshop in April. </p><p>Learn more about Stu McLaren’s FREE workshop <a href="https://membershipworkshop.com?ref=zw3cg">HERE</a>! </p><p>Join me and Stu McLaren, my long-time mentor and membership expert, as we talk about why you should consider building a membership alongside your subscription box business.</p><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Stu: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/stumclaren">Stu McLaren on Facebook</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.instagram.com/stumclaren?fbclid=IwAR29JNKHY05xP7pXAp8lMH7RIxn3TRFwews9GewOkKreaalalf04iDVB4kI">Stu McLaren on Instagram </a> </li>
<li><a href="https://membershipworkshop.com/?fbclid=IwAR0ZAM4_2i1-veQscLYlsxguyBFGYlc15Bfbqd8d8nT1XpvdggPZ3DHMCGM">The Membership Workshop Website</a></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places:  </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2384</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[df6fe77a-ebc2-11ee-831e-c358ea405c30]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5998780943.mp3?updated=1711493571" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>154: Four Simple Steps To Gain Your First 1000 Facebook Followers</title>
      <description>Starting a Facebook business page from scratch is hard. Even growing an existing page can feel hard. But it’s a critical part of audience building. You create great content your ideal customer will love. And you want your ideal customer - lots of your ideal customers - to see it. That means gaining more followers. 
When I started my page, How to Start a Subscription Box, in early 2020. I knew who my ideal customer was. What I didn’t know was how I was going to get them to like my page. I spent six months spinning my wheels and not gaining a ton of followers. At the end of those six months, I took a step back and took a close look at what I was doing. And what I wasn’t doing. Then I came up with an action plan to get to 1000 followers before the end of the year. 
Getting to 1000 followers is possible. In this episode, I’m sharing four things you can do to reach - and pass - that 1000 follower mark.
I called these “4 Simple Steps to Gain Your First 1000 Facebook Followers.” Nothing I’ve recommended is complicated or difficult. Following these 4 steps helped me reach 1000 followers on my business Facebook page. Continuing to follow them led to reaching - and passing - 10,000 followers in less than two years. Let Facebook work for you! 
Join me for this episode where I share a simple, 4-part action plan for gaining your first 1,000 Facebook followers. 

Starting an audience from scratch can feel intimidating. It doesn't need to! I created an amazing resource to help you build an audience filled with your ideal customers. Grab it HERE for only $10! 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 20 Mar 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Four Simple Steps To Gain Your First 1000 Facebook Followers</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>154</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode where I share a simple, 4-part action plan for gaining your first 1,000 Facebook followers. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Starting a Facebook business page from scratch is hard. Even growing an existing page can feel hard. But it’s a critical part of audience building. You create great content your ideal customer will love. And you want your ideal customer - lots of your ideal customers - to see it. That means gaining more followers. 
When I started my page, How to Start a Subscription Box, in early 2020. I knew who my ideal customer was. What I didn’t know was how I was going to get them to like my page. I spent six months spinning my wheels and not gaining a ton of followers. At the end of those six months, I took a step back and took a close look at what I was doing. And what I wasn’t doing. Then I came up with an action plan to get to 1000 followers before the end of the year. 
Getting to 1000 followers is possible. In this episode, I’m sharing four things you can do to reach - and pass - that 1000 follower mark.
I called these “4 Simple Steps to Gain Your First 1000 Facebook Followers.” Nothing I’ve recommended is complicated or difficult. Following these 4 steps helped me reach 1000 followers on my business Facebook page. Continuing to follow them led to reaching - and passing - 10,000 followers in less than two years. Let Facebook work for you! 
Join me for this episode where I share a simple, 4-part action plan for gaining your first 1,000 Facebook followers. 

Starting an audience from scratch can feel intimidating. It doesn't need to! I created an amazing resource to help you build an audience filled with your ideal customers. Grab it HERE for only $10! 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Starting a Facebook business page from scratch is hard. Even growing an existing page can feel hard. But it’s a critical part of audience building. You create great content your ideal customer will love. And you want your ideal customer - lots of your ideal customers - to see it. That means gaining more followers. </p><p>When I started my page, How to Start a Subscription Box, in early 2020. I knew who my ideal customer was. What I didn’t know was how I was going to get them to like my page. I spent six months spinning my wheels and not gaining a ton of followers. At the end of those six months, I took a step back and took a close look at what I was doing. And what I wasn’t doing. Then I came up with an action plan to get to 1000 followers before the end of the year. </p><p>Getting to 1000 followers is possible. In this episode, I’m sharing four things you can do to reach - and pass - that 1000 follower mark.</p><p>I called these “4 Simple Steps to Gain Your First 1000 Facebook Followers.” Nothing I’ve recommended is complicated or difficult. Following these 4 steps helped me reach 1000 followers on my business Facebook page. Continuing to follow them led to reaching - and passing - 10,000 followers in less than two years. Let Facebook work for you! </p><p>Join me for this episode where I share a simple, 4-part action plan for gaining your first 1,000 Facebook followers. </p><p><br></p><p>Starting an audience from scratch can feel intimidating. It doesn't need to! I created an amazing resource to help you build an audience filled with your ideal customers. Grab it <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/how-to-build-an-audience-from-scratch?utm_source=podcast&amp;utm_medium=organic">HERE</a> for only $10! </p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1594</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[432a3c84-e4e3-11ee-93d3-c33d816d80bc]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9977458746.mp3?updated=1711493653" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>153: Stop Worrying About Sales and Start Thinking About Profitability with Ciara Stockeland</title>
      <description>Does it feel like you are making good sales, but nothing is left in your bank account at the end of each month? Are you bringing in enough revenue to cover your overhead and pay your employees but can’t pay yourself? I’ve been there. If you’re a small business owner, you’ve been there, too. 
It’s time to change how we think about sales and profitability. And I’ve brought the perfect person to the podcast to help us do just that. In this episode, Ciara Stockeland, fractional CFO and inventory genius, joins me as we get to the simple truth about inventory, margins, and profitability.  
Ciara is a 3rd generation entrepreneur from North Dakota. She opened her first retail store in 2006 and built it into a franchise before selling it. She also started a subscription box for retailers, grew it, and sold that, too. It was Ciara’s love for all things numbers that led her to her current role where she works with business owners to identify and fix their inventory, cash flow, and profitability issues. 
Ciara has met so many inventory-based business owners who all ask the same questions: 

Where is all my money going? 

What do I do with all this debt? 

How much inventory should I really own? 


Ciara responded to a need and built her Inventory Genius course where she teaches business owners how to focus on the right things in order to create more profit and keep more cash. 
Set profit goals using Ciara’s framework - the same framework she uses regardless of the size of the business.
I want you to understand that subscription box businesses can be profitable from month one - but you have to be disciplined about operating expenses. 
If you don’t fix a problem with operating expenses, gaining more subscribers won’t solve the problem. The cost will grow right along with the subscriber numbers. 
When you get diligent about knowing your numbers, it gets easier. 
Get Ciara’s book Inventory Genius for an explanation of the numbers in your business. 

What is profit and loss? 

What is a balance sheet? 

How does inventory play into what’s happening with my cash? 


Problems with inventory, cash flow, and profitability will not solve themselves. But they ARE solvable! It starts with understanding the numbers in your business. 
Knowledge is power. The more you know, the better decision you can make. We want you to love your business and to make decisions from a place of certainty, not panic. 
Don’t forget to grab Ciara’s FREE eBook HERE! 
Join me and Ciara Stockeland, inventory genius, as we get to the simple truth about inventory, margins, and profitability.  Grab your earbuds and notebooks, and join us!

Find and follow Ciara: 

Inventory Genius on Facebook


Inventory Genius on Instagram  

Ciara’s FREE eBook

Ciara’s Website

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 13 Mar 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Stop Worrying About Sales and Start Thinking About Profitability with Ciara Stockeland</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>153</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me and Ciara Stockeland, inventory genius, as we get to the simple truth about inventory, margins, and profitability.  Grab your earbuds and notebooks, and join us!</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Does it feel like you are making good sales, but nothing is left in your bank account at the end of each month? Are you bringing in enough revenue to cover your overhead and pay your employees but can’t pay yourself? I’ve been there. If you’re a small business owner, you’ve been there, too. 
It’s time to change how we think about sales and profitability. And I’ve brought the perfect person to the podcast to help us do just that. In this episode, Ciara Stockeland, fractional CFO and inventory genius, joins me as we get to the simple truth about inventory, margins, and profitability.  
Ciara is a 3rd generation entrepreneur from North Dakota. She opened her first retail store in 2006 and built it into a franchise before selling it. She also started a subscription box for retailers, grew it, and sold that, too. It was Ciara’s love for all things numbers that led her to her current role where she works with business owners to identify and fix their inventory, cash flow, and profitability issues. 
Ciara has met so many inventory-based business owners who all ask the same questions: 

Where is all my money going? 

What do I do with all this debt? 

How much inventory should I really own? 


Ciara responded to a need and built her Inventory Genius course where she teaches business owners how to focus on the right things in order to create more profit and keep more cash. 
Set profit goals using Ciara’s framework - the same framework she uses regardless of the size of the business.
I want you to understand that subscription box businesses can be profitable from month one - but you have to be disciplined about operating expenses. 
If you don’t fix a problem with operating expenses, gaining more subscribers won’t solve the problem. The cost will grow right along with the subscriber numbers. 
When you get diligent about knowing your numbers, it gets easier. 
Get Ciara’s book Inventory Genius for an explanation of the numbers in your business. 

What is profit and loss? 

What is a balance sheet? 

How does inventory play into what’s happening with my cash? 


Problems with inventory, cash flow, and profitability will not solve themselves. But they ARE solvable! It starts with understanding the numbers in your business. 
Knowledge is power. The more you know, the better decision you can make. We want you to love your business and to make decisions from a place of certainty, not panic. 
Don’t forget to grab Ciara’s FREE eBook HERE! 
Join me and Ciara Stockeland, inventory genius, as we get to the simple truth about inventory, margins, and profitability.  Grab your earbuds and notebooks, and join us!

Find and follow Ciara: 

Inventory Genius on Facebook


Inventory Genius on Instagram  

Ciara’s FREE eBook

Ciara’s Website

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Does it feel like you are making good sales, but nothing is left in your bank account at the end of each month? Are you bringing in enough revenue to cover your overhead and pay your employees but can’t pay yourself? I’ve been there. If you’re a small business owner, you’ve been there, too. </p><p>It’s time to change how we think about sales and profitability. And I’ve brought the perfect person to the podcast to help us do just that. In this episode, Ciara Stockeland, fractional CFO and inventory genius, joins me as we get to the simple truth about inventory, margins, and profitability.  </p><p>Ciara is a 3rd generation entrepreneur from North Dakota. She opened her first retail store in 2006 and built it into a franchise before selling it. She also started a subscription box for retailers, grew it, and sold that, too. It was Ciara’s love for all things numbers that led her to her current role where she works with business owners to identify and fix their inventory, cash flow, and profitability issues. </p><p>Ciara has met so many inventory-based business owners who all ask the same questions: </p><ul>
<li>Where is all my money going? </li>
<li>What do I do with all this debt? </li>
<li>How much inventory should I really own? </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Ciara responded to a need and built her Inventory Genius course where she teaches business owners how to focus on the right things in order to create more profit and keep more cash. </p><p>Set profit goals using Ciara’s framework - the same framework she uses regardless of the size of the business.</p><p>I want you to understand that subscription box businesses can be profitable from month one - but you have to be disciplined about operating expenses. </p><p>If you don’t fix a problem with operating expenses, gaining more subscribers won’t solve the problem. The cost will grow right along with the subscriber numbers. </p><p>When you get diligent about knowing your numbers, it gets easier. </p><p>Get Ciara’s book Inventory Genius for an explanation of the numbers in your business. </p><ul>
<li>What is profit and loss? </li>
<li>What is a balance sheet? </li>
<li>How does inventory play into what’s happening with my cash? </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Problems with inventory, cash flow, and profitability will not solve themselves. But they ARE solvable! It starts with understanding the numbers in your business. </p><p>Knowledge is power. The more you know, the better decision you can make. We want you to love your business and to make decisions from a place of certainty, not panic. </p><p>Don’t forget to grab Ciara’s FREE eBook <a href="https://www.ciarastockeland.com/offers/24RB2v2X?coupon_code=EBOOK">HERE</a>! </p><p>Join me and Ciara Stockeland, inventory genius, as we get to the simple truth about inventory, margins, and profitability.  Grab your earbuds and notebooks, and join us!</p><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Ciara: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/inventorygenius">Inventory Genius on Facebook</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.instagram.com/inventorygenius?fbclid=IwAR1HxVZf630zg4qDqLgTNyz9_-R7OG8ngGD0nXDMriTtGpdZg8Nua-pABYY">Inventory Genius on Instagram</a>  </li>
<li><a href="https://www.ciarastockeland.com/offers/24RB2v2X?coupon_code=EBOOK">Ciara’s FREE eBook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.ciarastockeland.com/">Ciara’s Website</a></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2143</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[95f8e376-df4c-11ee-9f97-f757be0878ae]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1884318459.mp3?updated=1710293879" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>152: Streamline Your Subscription Box with a Fulfillment Center </title>
      <description>What if you never had to pack and ship your subscription boxes again? How would that change your business… and your life? 
Ryan Culver of Lessgistics joined me for this episode to talk all things subscription box fulfillment center. Not only does Ryan have more than 20 years of experience in supply chain, he’s also a former health &amp; wellness subscription box owner and the current owner of a charcuterie subscription box. He joined me to talk about how fulfillment centers can help subscription box businesses, especially as you grow and scale. 
Ryan started Lessgistics in 2020 to help other subscription box owners. Inside their 60,000-square-foot facility, Ryan and his team support subscription box owners with businesses ranging from 250 subscription boxes to over 5,000 subscription boxes. They also fulfill special projects and one-time boxes. 
Lessgistics especially enjoys partnering with start-up subscription box businesses that are starting to show growth and have 250-300 subscribers. Other fulfillment centers require subscription box businesses to have 1,000 or more subscribers. 
Ryan talked about how important it is that you have time and experience fulfilling your subscription boxes yourself before outsourcing to a fulfillment center like Lessgistics. This allows you to understand your needs, your process, and what you’ll require of a fulfillment center. 
There are many benefits to working with a fulfillment center, including: 

Taking advantage of the economies of scale a fulfillment center brings.

Getting your business out of your house. 

Getting access to better shipping rates - subscription box owners benefit from Lessgistics’s buying power with shipping companies. 

The volume discounts Lessgistics can get for its subscription box partners usually pay for the cost of the fulfillment center, making it a no brainer! 
Ryan recognizes that it can be difficult to let go of control and trust someone else to fulfill your subscription boxes. He understands and is dedicated to creating an experience that’s very subscription box owner-focused. As a subscription box owner himself, he understands the importance of providing an outstanding subscriber experience. 
Lessgistics can handle variations - size, color, quantities - with ease. They handle customer service issues promptly and stay in close contact with their subscription box owner partners. 
Ryan and I talked about one of my Mastermind students, Stacey Collins, and how Lessgistics has been such an important part of her latest subscription box’s success. 
If you’re in the hundreds of subscribers range, you need to be focused on growing and scaling - not on packing and shipping. It’s time to really think about what a 3rd party fulfillment center like Lessgistics could do for you. 
Contact Ryan to schedule a 30-minute call  - he’ll talk with you about your subscription box and your needs and provide you with a same-day quote. 

Join me and Ryan from Lessgistics for this episode to learn what a 3rd party fulfillment center can do for your subscription box business and how the money you’ll save on shipping costs can just about pay for the fulfillment services! 

Find and follow Lessgistics: 


Lessgistics on Facebook  

Lessgistics Website

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 06 Mar 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Streamline Your Subscription Box with a Fulfillment Center </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>152</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me and Ryan from Lessgistics for this episode to learn what a 3rd party fulfillment center can do for your subscription box business and how the money you’ll save on shipping costs can just about pay for the fulfillment services! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What if you never had to pack and ship your subscription boxes again? How would that change your business… and your life? 
Ryan Culver of Lessgistics joined me for this episode to talk all things subscription box fulfillment center. Not only does Ryan have more than 20 years of experience in supply chain, he’s also a former health &amp; wellness subscription box owner and the current owner of a charcuterie subscription box. He joined me to talk about how fulfillment centers can help subscription box businesses, especially as you grow and scale. 
Ryan started Lessgistics in 2020 to help other subscription box owners. Inside their 60,000-square-foot facility, Ryan and his team support subscription box owners with businesses ranging from 250 subscription boxes to over 5,000 subscription boxes. They also fulfill special projects and one-time boxes. 
Lessgistics especially enjoys partnering with start-up subscription box businesses that are starting to show growth and have 250-300 subscribers. Other fulfillment centers require subscription box businesses to have 1,000 or more subscribers. 
Ryan talked about how important it is that you have time and experience fulfilling your subscription boxes yourself before outsourcing to a fulfillment center like Lessgistics. This allows you to understand your needs, your process, and what you’ll require of a fulfillment center. 
There are many benefits to working with a fulfillment center, including: 

Taking advantage of the economies of scale a fulfillment center brings.

Getting your business out of your house. 

Getting access to better shipping rates - subscription box owners benefit from Lessgistics’s buying power with shipping companies. 

The volume discounts Lessgistics can get for its subscription box partners usually pay for the cost of the fulfillment center, making it a no brainer! 
Ryan recognizes that it can be difficult to let go of control and trust someone else to fulfill your subscription boxes. He understands and is dedicated to creating an experience that’s very subscription box owner-focused. As a subscription box owner himself, he understands the importance of providing an outstanding subscriber experience. 
Lessgistics can handle variations - size, color, quantities - with ease. They handle customer service issues promptly and stay in close contact with their subscription box owner partners. 
Ryan and I talked about one of my Mastermind students, Stacey Collins, and how Lessgistics has been such an important part of her latest subscription box’s success. 
If you’re in the hundreds of subscribers range, you need to be focused on growing and scaling - not on packing and shipping. It’s time to really think about what a 3rd party fulfillment center like Lessgistics could do for you. 
Contact Ryan to schedule a 30-minute call  - he’ll talk with you about your subscription box and your needs and provide you with a same-day quote. 

Join me and Ryan from Lessgistics for this episode to learn what a 3rd party fulfillment center can do for your subscription box business and how the money you’ll save on shipping costs can just about pay for the fulfillment services! 

Find and follow Lessgistics: 


Lessgistics on Facebook  

Lessgistics Website

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What if you never had to pack and ship your subscription boxes again? How would that change your business… and your life? </p><p>Ryan Culver of Lessgistics joined me for this episode to talk all things subscription box fulfillment center. Not only does Ryan have more than 20 years of experience in supply chain, he’s also a former health &amp; wellness subscription box owner and the current owner of a charcuterie subscription box. He joined me to talk about how fulfillment centers can help subscription box businesses, especially as you grow and scale. </p><p>Ryan started Lessgistics in 2020 to help other subscription box owners. Inside their 60,000-square-foot facility, Ryan and his team support subscription box owners with businesses ranging from 250 subscription boxes to over 5,000 subscription boxes. They also fulfill special projects and one-time boxes. </p><p>Lessgistics especially enjoys partnering with start-up subscription box businesses that are starting to show growth and have 250-300 subscribers. Other fulfillment centers require subscription box businesses to have 1,000 or more subscribers. </p><p>Ryan talked about how important it is that you have time and experience fulfilling your subscription boxes yourself before outsourcing to a fulfillment center like Lessgistics. This allows you to understand your needs, your process, and what you’ll require of a fulfillment center. </p><p>There are many benefits to working with a fulfillment center, including: </p><ul>
<li>Taking advantage of the economies of scale a fulfillment center brings.</li>
<li>Getting your business out of your house. </li>
<li>Getting access to better shipping rates - subscription box owners benefit from Lessgistics’s buying power with shipping companies. </li>
</ul><p><em>The volume discounts Lessgistics can get for its subscription box partners usually pay for the cost of the fulfillment center, making it a no brainer! </em></p><p>Ryan recognizes that it can be difficult to let go of control and trust someone else to fulfill your subscription boxes. He understands and is dedicated to creating an experience that’s very subscription box owner-focused. As a subscription box owner himself, he understands the importance of providing an outstanding subscriber experience. </p><p>Lessgistics can handle variations - size, color, quantities - with ease. They handle customer service issues promptly and stay in close contact with their subscription box owner partners. </p><p>Ryan and I talked about one of my Mastermind students, Stacey Collins, and how Lessgistics has been such an important part of her latest subscription box’s success. </p><p>If you’re in the hundreds of subscribers range, you need to be focused on growing and scaling - not on packing and shipping. It’s time to really think about what a 3rd party fulfillment center like Lessgistics could do for you. </p><p>Contact Ryan to <a href="https://lessgistics.com/same-day-quote/">schedule a 30-minute call </a> - he’ll talk with you about your subscription box and your needs and provide you with a same-day quote. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me and Ryan from Lessgistics for this episode to learn what a 3rd party fulfillment center can do for your subscription box business and how the money you’ll save on shipping costs can just about pay for the fulfillment services! </p><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Lessgistics: </p><ul>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/lessgistics">Lessgistics on Facebook</a>  </li>
<li><a href="https://lessgistics.com/">Lessgistics Website</a></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2521</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[610da660-da88-11ee-9dfa-ff18bdbecb06]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7408415427.mp3?updated=1709599281" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Free Shipping vs Charging for Shipping</title>
      <description>You’ve curated a beautiful subscription box. Your website is nearly ready. But there’s one decision holding you back from actually launching. And it’s all about shipping. Should you offer free shipping or charge for shipping? 
Of course, “free shipping” isn’t free. If you offer free shipping to your customers, you will adjust the prices of the items you sell to absorb those shipping costs and protect your profit margins. 
In this episode, I go deep on all things shipping. The truth is, there’s no easy answer to the free shipping or charging for shipping question. There is no one-size fits all strategy when it comes to shipping charges. There may even be more than one answer for your business. 
Think about your own buying behavior. What matters more to you when you’re shopping online? What matters to your customers? 


Shippo, a shipping software company, conducted a survey where they found:

49% of customers prefer to pay a lower price for items and pay for shipping. 

40% of customers want free shipping. 

11% of customers want their items fast and are willing to pay expedited shipping charges.  

Another report showed: 

People prefer paying for low-cost shipping when purchasing lower-priced items. 

93% of shoppers will add to their carts to reach a certain threshold to receive free shipping if it’s offered. 

For one-off online sales, offering free shipping once a customer reaches a purchase threshold is smart for a few reasons. 

It can increase your average order value. 

It incentivizes customers to order more items at once instead of placing multiple one-item orders, reducing your overall shipping charges. 

It allows for lower pricing of items because you don’t have to account for as much of the cost of shipping in the price of each item. 


Answering this question for your subscription box is more difficult. Do you only ship or do you offer local pickup as well? Does the perceived value of your subscription box allow you to include shipping in the cost of the box or would that make the price “too high?” Don’t be afraid to test options with your audience to help you make this decision. 
Join me for this episode as I talk about what you need to consider when deciding whether to charge for shipping or offer free shipping to your customers and why you may end up choosing one strategy for your one-off sales and the other for your subscription box. 
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 28 Feb 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Free Shipping vs Charging for Shipping</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, I go deep on all things shipping. The truth is, there’s no easy answer to the free shipping or charging for shipping question. There is no one-size fits all strategy when it comes to shipping charges. There may even be more than one answer for your business. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>You’ve curated a beautiful subscription box. Your website is nearly ready. But there’s one decision holding you back from actually launching. And it’s all about shipping. Should you offer free shipping or charge for shipping? 
Of course, “free shipping” isn’t free. If you offer free shipping to your customers, you will adjust the prices of the items you sell to absorb those shipping costs and protect your profit margins. 
In this episode, I go deep on all things shipping. The truth is, there’s no easy answer to the free shipping or charging for shipping question. There is no one-size fits all strategy when it comes to shipping charges. There may even be more than one answer for your business. 
Think about your own buying behavior. What matters more to you when you’re shopping online? What matters to your customers? 


Shippo, a shipping software company, conducted a survey where they found:

49% of customers prefer to pay a lower price for items and pay for shipping. 

40% of customers want free shipping. 

11% of customers want their items fast and are willing to pay expedited shipping charges.  

Another report showed: 

People prefer paying for low-cost shipping when purchasing lower-priced items. 

93% of shoppers will add to their carts to reach a certain threshold to receive free shipping if it’s offered. 

For one-off online sales, offering free shipping once a customer reaches a purchase threshold is smart for a few reasons. 

It can increase your average order value. 

It incentivizes customers to order more items at once instead of placing multiple one-item orders, reducing your overall shipping charges. 

It allows for lower pricing of items because you don’t have to account for as much of the cost of shipping in the price of each item. 


Answering this question for your subscription box is more difficult. Do you only ship or do you offer local pickup as well? Does the perceived value of your subscription box allow you to include shipping in the cost of the box or would that make the price “too high?” Don’t be afraid to test options with your audience to help you make this decision. 
Join me for this episode as I talk about what you need to consider when deciding whether to charge for shipping or offer free shipping to your customers and why you may end up choosing one strategy for your one-off sales and the other for your subscription box. 
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>You’ve curated a beautiful subscription box. Your website is nearly ready. But there’s one decision holding you back from actually launching. And it’s all about shipping. Should you offer free shipping or charge for shipping? </p><p>Of course, “free shipping” isn’t free. If you offer free shipping to your customers, you will adjust the prices of the items you sell to absorb those shipping costs and protect your profit margins. </p><p>In this episode, I go deep on all things shipping. The truth is, there’s no easy answer to the free shipping or charging for shipping question. There is no one-size fits all strategy when it comes to shipping charges. There may even be more than one answer for your business. </p><p>Think about your own buying behavior. What matters more to you when you’re shopping online? What matters to your customers? </p><p><br></p><ul>
<li>Shippo, a shipping software company, conducted a survey where they found:</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">49% of customers prefer to pay a lower price for items and pay for shipping. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">40% of customers want free shipping. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">11% of customers want their items fast and are willing to pay expedited shipping charges.  </li>
<li>Another report showed: </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">People prefer paying for low-cost shipping when purchasing lower-priced items. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">93% of shoppers will add to their carts to reach a certain threshold to receive free shipping if it’s offered. </li>
</ul><p>For one-off online sales, offering free shipping once a customer reaches a purchase threshold is smart for a few reasons. </p><ul>
<li>It can increase your average order value. </li>
<li>It incentivizes customers to order more items at once instead of placing multiple one-item orders, reducing your overall shipping charges. </li>
<li>It allows for lower pricing of items because you don’t have to account for as much of the cost of shipping in the price of each item. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Answering this question for your subscription box is more difficult. Do you only ship or do you offer local pickup as well? Does the perceived value of your subscription box allow you to include shipping in the cost of the box or would that make the price “too high?” Don’t be afraid to test options with your audience to help you make this decision. </p><p>Join me for this episode as I talk about what you need to consider when deciding whether to charge for shipping or offer free shipping to your customers and why you may end up choosing one strategy for your one-off sales and the other for your subscription box. </p><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1077</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[40a45574-d5d1-11ee-a381-171ee5791bcc]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9091159257.mp3?updated=1709080821" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>151: 3 Website Platforms for Your Subscription Box Business </title>
      <description>Is tech holding you back from launching your subscription box? There are so many decisions to make. One of the first is choosing the right platform for you and your business. There are hundreds to choose from. But not all of them are right for subscription box businesses. 
So many people get stuck here, overthinking and over-researching. Decision paralysis sets in and they fail to make any progress at all. But it doesn’t have to be that way - I’m here to help. 
In this episode, I break things down for you to make it as simple as possible. I talk you through my top three website platforms and the pros and cons of each. The truth is, no one platform is perfect for every subscription box business. But there is one that’s right for you! 
Option 1 - WordPress/Woocommerce 
WordPress is the platform and Woocommerce is the plug-in needed to sell products. Woocommerce Subscriptions is the plug-in needed to sell recurring products like a subscription box. 

Option 2 - Shopify
Shopify is an eCommerce platform that allows you to create an online store and sell products. It offers a wide range of tools and features specifically for product-based businesses. 

Find more in-depth information about all of these platforms and a deep dive into the Subscription Apps on Shopify inside the Launch Your Box Training Library. Not a member yet? Joinlyb.com!
Option 3 - Subbly
Subbly is an all-in-one subscription box platform that provides tools for managing and launching a subscription-based business. 

My tips for choosing a website platform: 

Don’t get overwhelmed by your options - go with one of these three. 

If you already have one of these sites, don’t change it. Build your subscription on it. 

Decide which features as most important to YOUR business. 

Evaluate the costs. 

Just. Get. Started. Don’t let tech stop you from moving forward. 


Join me for this episode where I share my top three website platforms for subscription box businesses and the pros and cons of each. Don’t let tech stop you from moving forward. 

Join me and our AMAZING community inside Launch Your Box! 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 21 Feb 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>3 Website Platforms for Your Subscription Box Business </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>151</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode where I share my top three website platforms for subscription box businesses and the pros and cons of each. Don’t let tech stop you from moving forward. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Is tech holding you back from launching your subscription box? There are so many decisions to make. One of the first is choosing the right platform for you and your business. There are hundreds to choose from. But not all of them are right for subscription box businesses. 
So many people get stuck here, overthinking and over-researching. Decision paralysis sets in and they fail to make any progress at all. But it doesn’t have to be that way - I’m here to help. 
In this episode, I break things down for you to make it as simple as possible. I talk you through my top three website platforms and the pros and cons of each. The truth is, no one platform is perfect for every subscription box business. But there is one that’s right for you! 
Option 1 - WordPress/Woocommerce 
WordPress is the platform and Woocommerce is the plug-in needed to sell products. Woocommerce Subscriptions is the plug-in needed to sell recurring products like a subscription box. 

Option 2 - Shopify
Shopify is an eCommerce platform that allows you to create an online store and sell products. It offers a wide range of tools and features specifically for product-based businesses. 

Find more in-depth information about all of these platforms and a deep dive into the Subscription Apps on Shopify inside the Launch Your Box Training Library. Not a member yet? Joinlyb.com!
Option 3 - Subbly
Subbly is an all-in-one subscription box platform that provides tools for managing and launching a subscription-based business. 

My tips for choosing a website platform: 

Don’t get overwhelmed by your options - go with one of these three. 

If you already have one of these sites, don’t change it. Build your subscription on it. 

Decide which features as most important to YOUR business. 

Evaluate the costs. 

Just. Get. Started. Don’t let tech stop you from moving forward. 


Join me for this episode where I share my top three website platforms for subscription box businesses and the pros and cons of each. Don’t let tech stop you from moving forward. 

Join me and our AMAZING community inside Launch Your Box! 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Is tech holding you back from launching your subscription box? There are so many decisions to make. One of the first is choosing the right platform for you and your business. There are hundreds to choose from. But not all of them are right for subscription box businesses. </p><p>So many people get stuck here, overthinking and over-researching. Decision paralysis sets in and they fail to make any progress at all. But it doesn’t have to be that way - I’m here to help. </p><p>In this episode, I break things down for you to make it as simple as possible. I talk you through my top three website platforms and the pros and cons of each. The truth is, no one platform is perfect for every subscription box business. But there is one that’s right for you! </p><p>Option 1 - WordPress/Woocommerce </p><ul><li>WordPress is the platform and Woocommerce is the plug-in needed to sell products. Woocommerce Subscriptions is the plug-in needed to sell recurring products like a subscription box. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Option 2 - Shopify</p><ul><li>Shopify is an eCommerce platform that allows you to create an online store and sell products. It offers a wide range of tools and features specifically for product-based businesses. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><em>Find more in-depth information about all of these platforms and a deep dive into the Subscription Apps on Shopify inside the Launch Your Box Training Library. Not a member yet? </em><a href="http://joinlyb.com"><strong><em>Joinlyb.com</em></strong></a><em>!</em></p><p>Option 3 - Subbly</p><ul><li>Subbly is an all-in-one subscription box platform that provides tools for managing and launching a subscription-based business. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>My tips for choosing a website platform: </p><ul>
<li>Don’t get overwhelmed by your options - go with one of these three. </li>
<li>If you already have one of these sites, don’t change it. Build your subscription on it. </li>
<li>Decide which features as most important to YOUR business. </li>
<li>Evaluate the costs. </li>
<li>Just. Get. Started. Don’t let tech stop you from moving forward. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode where I share my top three website platforms for subscription box businesses and the pros and cons of each. Don’t let tech stop you from moving forward. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me and our AMAZING community inside <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>! </p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1540</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[331871d6-cf6b-11ee-b7ee-c3107a05b5b4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2508224580.mp3?updated=1708377283" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Maximize the Value of Your Small Audience</title>
      <description>Building an audience of people who are interested in your subscription box is crucial. You can’t have a successful launch - and a successful business - without an audience. But you don’t need a huge following with tens of thousands of followers if you have a small audience filled with the RIGHT people. 
I’ve built two multi-million dollar businesses and neither one has a huge number of followers. I don’t need hundreds of thousands of followers because the followers I do have are the right people for each of my businesses. They’re engaged, they’re interested in me and what I offer, and most of them buy from me. 
The secret to finding subscription box success with a smaller audience is to maximize the value of your audience, no matter the size. 
Subscription box success - or success in any online business - doesn’t come from having a large number of followers who don’t engage with you and your business and don’t buy anything. Instead, success comes from having an engaged audience filled with your ideal customers. 
Finding and building an audience filled with your right people starts with remembering your why. What drove you to start a subscription box in the first place? Those people who you wanted to serve with your subscription box? Those are the people you need to attract. Those are the people who will engage with you and your business. 
I have some practical ways you can attract and engage an audience filled with your right people: 


Be known for something. What are you the expert at? What makes you happy?


Show up. Get in front of your audience and go LIVE consistently.


Serve before you sell. What value are you providing to your audience? 


You don’t have to be everywhere, but you do need to be consistent. Don’t try to do all the things! Pick a few that you are good at and can be consistent with.


Love on your people! Help your audience feel seen and heard, and they’ll keep coming back.

Join me for this episode as we talk about why a large following isn’t necessary for subscription box success and how you can maximize the value of your small audience. 

Join me and our AMAZING community inside Launch Your Box! 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 14 Feb 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Maximize the Value of Your Small Audience</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as we talk about why a large following isn’t necessary for subscription box success and how you can maximize the value of your small audience. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Building an audience of people who are interested in your subscription box is crucial. You can’t have a successful launch - and a successful business - without an audience. But you don’t need a huge following with tens of thousands of followers if you have a small audience filled with the RIGHT people. 
I’ve built two multi-million dollar businesses and neither one has a huge number of followers. I don’t need hundreds of thousands of followers because the followers I do have are the right people for each of my businesses. They’re engaged, they’re interested in me and what I offer, and most of them buy from me. 
The secret to finding subscription box success with a smaller audience is to maximize the value of your audience, no matter the size. 
Subscription box success - or success in any online business - doesn’t come from having a large number of followers who don’t engage with you and your business and don’t buy anything. Instead, success comes from having an engaged audience filled with your ideal customers. 
Finding and building an audience filled with your right people starts with remembering your why. What drove you to start a subscription box in the first place? Those people who you wanted to serve with your subscription box? Those are the people you need to attract. Those are the people who will engage with you and your business. 
I have some practical ways you can attract and engage an audience filled with your right people: 


Be known for something. What are you the expert at? What makes you happy?


Show up. Get in front of your audience and go LIVE consistently.


Serve before you sell. What value are you providing to your audience? 


You don’t have to be everywhere, but you do need to be consistent. Don’t try to do all the things! Pick a few that you are good at and can be consistent with.


Love on your people! Help your audience feel seen and heard, and they’ll keep coming back.

Join me for this episode as we talk about why a large following isn’t necessary for subscription box success and how you can maximize the value of your small audience. 

Join me and our AMAZING community inside Launch Your Box! 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Building an audience of people who are interested in your subscription box is crucial. You can’t have a successful launch - and a successful business - without an audience. But you don’t need a huge following with tens of thousands of followers if you have a small audience filled with the RIGHT people. </p><p>I’ve built two multi-million dollar businesses and neither one has a huge number of followers. I don’t need hundreds of thousands of followers because the followers I do have are the right people for each of my businesses. They’re engaged, they’re interested in me and what I offer, and most of them buy from me. </p><p>The secret to finding subscription box success with a smaller audience is to maximize the value of your audience, no matter the size. </p><p>Subscription box success - or success in any online business - doesn’t come from having a large number of followers who don’t engage with you and your business and don’t buy anything. Instead, success comes from having an engaged audience filled with your ideal customers. </p><p>Finding and building an audience filled with your right people starts with remembering your why. What drove you to start a subscription box in the first place? Those people who you wanted to serve with your subscription box? Those are the people you need to attract. Those are the people who will engage with you and your business. </p><p>I have some practical ways you can attract and engage an audience filled with your right people: </p><ul>
<li>
<strong>Be known for something.</strong> What are you the expert at? What makes you happy?</li>
<li>
<strong>Show up</strong>. Get in front of your audience and go LIVE consistently.</li>
<li>
<strong>Serve before you sell</strong>. What value are you providing to your audience? </li>
<li>
<strong>You don’t have to be everywhere, but you do need to be consistent. </strong>Don’t try to do all the things! Pick a few that you are good at and can be consistent with.</li>
<li>
<strong>Love on your people!</strong> Help your audience feel seen and heard, and they’ll keep coming back.</li>
</ul><p>Join me for this episode as we talk about why a large following isn’t necessary for subscription box success and how you can maximize the value of your small audience. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me and our AMAZING community inside <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>! </p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1568</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[94d3612c-c6fd-11ee-aa46-8b183df45f68]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7905611744.mp3?updated=1707690647" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>150: Are You Giving Your Business Enough Consistency? </title>
      <description>“Success isn’t always about greatness. It’s about consistency. Consistent hard work leads to success. Greatness will come.” - Dwayne Johnson
One of the healthiest habits we can build into our businesses is consistency. Consistency trumps everything else. You don’t have to be the best, you just have to be consistent. 
I talk about consistency a LOT because it’s just that important. You can be an expert, you can be the best at what you do, but without consistency, you won’t succeed.  Someone with less expertise who is consistent will succeed because consistency trumps expertise. 
A lot of business owners struggle when they try to do “all the things” and end up doing them inconsistently. Instead, do a few things and do them consistently. 
Look at your business and ask yourself if you’re being consistent enough in 5 key areas: 
1- Planning your boxes consistently
2- Go LIVE consistently
3- Email your list consistently
4- Post on social media consistently
5- Talk about your subscription box constantly
Talking about your subscription box creates buzz and generates excitement! 
How consistent are you? Can you improve? 
If you’re not consistent in any of these 5 areas, choose one to start with. Get consistent with that one and then add in another. 

Join me for this episode as we talk about why it’s so important to be consistent in your business and the five areas you need to be consistent in to build a successful subscription box business.

Resources:
YouTube video - Weekly Emails for Your Subscription Box Business 
FREE 6 in 60 Workshop - Curate 6 Subscription Boxes in 60 Minutes
Join me and our AMAZING community inside Launch Your Box! 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 07 Feb 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Are You Giving Your Business Enough Consistency? </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>150</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as we talk about why it’s so important to be consistent in your business and the five areas you need to be consistent in to build a successful subscription box business.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Success isn’t always about greatness. It’s about consistency. Consistent hard work leads to success. Greatness will come.” - Dwayne Johnson
One of the healthiest habits we can build into our businesses is consistency. Consistency trumps everything else. You don’t have to be the best, you just have to be consistent. 
I talk about consistency a LOT because it’s just that important. You can be an expert, you can be the best at what you do, but without consistency, you won’t succeed.  Someone with less expertise who is consistent will succeed because consistency trumps expertise. 
A lot of business owners struggle when they try to do “all the things” and end up doing them inconsistently. Instead, do a few things and do them consistently. 
Look at your business and ask yourself if you’re being consistent enough in 5 key areas: 
1- Planning your boxes consistently
2- Go LIVE consistently
3- Email your list consistently
4- Post on social media consistently
5- Talk about your subscription box constantly
Talking about your subscription box creates buzz and generates excitement! 
How consistent are you? Can you improve? 
If you’re not consistent in any of these 5 areas, choose one to start with. Get consistent with that one and then add in another. 

Join me for this episode as we talk about why it’s so important to be consistent in your business and the five areas you need to be consistent in to build a successful subscription box business.

Resources:
YouTube video - Weekly Emails for Your Subscription Box Business 
FREE 6 in 60 Workshop - Curate 6 Subscription Boxes in 60 Minutes
Join me and our AMAZING community inside Launch Your Box! 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“Success isn’t always about greatness. It’s about consistency. Consistent hard work leads to success. Greatness will come.” - Dwayne Johnson</p><p>One of the healthiest habits we can build into our businesses is consistency. Consistency trumps everything else. You don’t have to be the best, you just have to be consistent. </p><p>I talk about consistency a LOT because it’s just that important. You can be an expert, you can be the best at what you do, but without consistency, you won’t succeed.  Someone with less expertise who is consistent will succeed because consistency trumps expertise. </p><p>A lot of business owners struggle when they try to do “all the things” and end up doing them inconsistently. Instead, do a few things and do them consistently. </p><p>Look at your business and ask yourself if you’re being consistent enough in 5 key areas: </p><p>1- Planning your boxes consistently</p><p>2- Go LIVE consistently</p><p>3- Email your list consistently</p><p>4- Post on social media consistently</p><p>5- Talk about your subscription box constantly</p><p>Talking about your subscription box creates buzz and generates excitement! </p><p>How consistent are you? Can you improve? </p><p>If you’re not consistent in any of these 5 areas, choose one to start with. Get consistent with that one and then add in another. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as we talk about why it’s so important to be consistent in your business and the five areas you need to be consistent in to build a successful subscription box business.</p><p><br></p><p>Resources:</p><p>YouTube video - <a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=T_-HiZGm77s">Weekly Emails for Your Subscription Box Business</a> </p><p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e">FREE 6 in 60 Workshop</a> - Curate 6 Subscription Boxes in 60 Minutes</p><p>Join me and our AMAZING community inside <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>! </p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1110</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e6c9c9bc-c3e7-11ee-9140-3768479edf69]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3780272474.mp3?updated=1707111428" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>149: From Waitlist to Launch - Identifying Potential Subscribers &amp; Building Authority </title>
      <description>Finding people who are interested in your subscription box and collecting them on a waitlist is one of the most important things you can do to have a successful launch. But you can’t just collect them. What you do with that list leading up to your launch is just as important. The more work you do between the waitlist and the launch, the higher your conversion rates will be!  
Inside Launch Your Box, I teach that there are 5 stages in a beginner Subscription Box Marketing Plan. 

Audience Building - building a following and an email list.

Identifying Potential Subscribers - building a waitlist.

Pre-Launch Campaign - building authority &amp; expertise and nurturing your following and list.

The Launch - actively selling your subscription.

Post Launch Engagement - it’s a “feeling,” it’s not about the “stuff.” 

On this episode, we’re focusing on stages 2 and 3. 
A waitlist is an email opt-in form someone fills out to tell you they want to learn more about your subscription box. Filling out this form puts them on an email list that allows them to be the first to know when your subscription box launches, entitles them to early bird launch specials, and ensures they get an opportunity to subscribe before your boxes sell out!
The goal of the waitlist strategy is to build a large list of warm leads who are interested in becoming subscribers. Every time you talk about your subscription box, your CTA is to join the waitlist. 
Start building your waitlist 30-90 out from your launch. Any longer, you risk the list becoming cold. Any shorter, you won’t have enough time to build a healthy list. 
The time between the waitlist and the launch is crucial. You can’t simply get people onto your waitlist and then 90 days later hit them with the launch. Use this time to get them to buy into who you are and what your box is about.  
Send weekly or bi-weekly emails, depending on how far out you are from your launch. Each of these emails should fall into one of three categories: 

Building credibility &amp; your know, like, and trust factor. 

Talking about customer pain points and how your subscription box is a solution to these problems. 

Taking people behind the scenes of your subscription box. 

Bring your waitlist along on the process of starting your subscription box. These potential subscribers will feel like they’ve been part of the process all along, resulting in a much higher conversion rate when you do launch. 
Examples of 6 emails you can send between the waitlist and the launch: 

Introduce yourself and share your “why.” 

Take them behind the scenes - designing your logo, choosing packaging, etc. Get them involved. 

Talk about pain points and benefits. 

Take them behind the scenes - working on something for your subscription box. Connect you with the box. 

Talk about why they deserve to have your box. 

Build excitement - save the date, watch your email, exciting bonuses to come!  

Inside Launch Your Box we have FOUR brand new training lessons all about creating your waitlist, announcing your subscription box launch, driving traffic to your waitlist, and nurturing your waitlist before your launch. I’d love to have you join us. Just head over to joinLYB.com! 
Join me for this episode as we talk about what you need to do between building your waitlist and your launch to build your authority, nurture your prospective subscribers, and increase your conversion rate. 

Join me and our AMAZING community inside Launch Your Box! 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 31 Jan 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From Waitlist to Launch - Identifying Potential Subscribers &amp; Building Authority </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>149</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode as we talk about what you need to do between building your waitlist and your launch to build your authority, nurture your prospective subscribers, and increase your conversion rate. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Finding people who are interested in your subscription box and collecting them on a waitlist is one of the most important things you can do to have a successful launch. But you can’t just collect them. What you do with that list leading up to your launch is just as important. The more work you do between the waitlist and the launch, the higher your conversion rates will be!  
Inside Launch Your Box, I teach that there are 5 stages in a beginner Subscription Box Marketing Plan. 

Audience Building - building a following and an email list.

Identifying Potential Subscribers - building a waitlist.

Pre-Launch Campaign - building authority &amp; expertise and nurturing your following and list.

The Launch - actively selling your subscription.

Post Launch Engagement - it’s a “feeling,” it’s not about the “stuff.” 

On this episode, we’re focusing on stages 2 and 3. 
A waitlist is an email opt-in form someone fills out to tell you they want to learn more about your subscription box. Filling out this form puts them on an email list that allows them to be the first to know when your subscription box launches, entitles them to early bird launch specials, and ensures they get an opportunity to subscribe before your boxes sell out!
The goal of the waitlist strategy is to build a large list of warm leads who are interested in becoming subscribers. Every time you talk about your subscription box, your CTA is to join the waitlist. 
Start building your waitlist 30-90 out from your launch. Any longer, you risk the list becoming cold. Any shorter, you won’t have enough time to build a healthy list. 
The time between the waitlist and the launch is crucial. You can’t simply get people onto your waitlist and then 90 days later hit them with the launch. Use this time to get them to buy into who you are and what your box is about.  
Send weekly or bi-weekly emails, depending on how far out you are from your launch. Each of these emails should fall into one of three categories: 

Building credibility &amp; your know, like, and trust factor. 

Talking about customer pain points and how your subscription box is a solution to these problems. 

Taking people behind the scenes of your subscription box. 

Bring your waitlist along on the process of starting your subscription box. These potential subscribers will feel like they’ve been part of the process all along, resulting in a much higher conversion rate when you do launch. 
Examples of 6 emails you can send between the waitlist and the launch: 

Introduce yourself and share your “why.” 

Take them behind the scenes - designing your logo, choosing packaging, etc. Get them involved. 

Talk about pain points and benefits. 

Take them behind the scenes - working on something for your subscription box. Connect you with the box. 

Talk about why they deserve to have your box. 

Build excitement - save the date, watch your email, exciting bonuses to come!  

Inside Launch Your Box we have FOUR brand new training lessons all about creating your waitlist, announcing your subscription box launch, driving traffic to your waitlist, and nurturing your waitlist before your launch. I’d love to have you join us. Just head over to joinLYB.com! 
Join me for this episode as we talk about what you need to do between building your waitlist and your launch to build your authority, nurture your prospective subscribers, and increase your conversion rate. 

Join me and our AMAZING community inside Launch Your Box! 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Finding people who are interested in your subscription box and collecting them on a waitlist is one of the most important things you can do to have a successful launch. But you can’t just collect them. What you do with that list leading up to your launch is just as important. The more work you do between the waitlist and the launch, the higher your conversion rates will be!  </p><p>Inside Launch Your Box, I teach that there are 5 stages in a beginner Subscription Box Marketing Plan. </p><ul>
<li>Audience Building - building a following and an email list.</li>
<li>Identifying Potential Subscribers - building a waitlist.</li>
<li>Pre-Launch Campaign - building authority &amp; expertise and nurturing your following and list.</li>
<li>The Launch - actively selling your subscription.</li>
<li>Post Launch Engagement - it’s a “feeling,” it’s not about the “stuff.” </li>
</ul><p>On this episode, we’re focusing on stages 2 and 3. </p><p>A waitlist is an email opt-in form someone fills out to tell you they want to learn more about your subscription box. Filling out this form puts them on an email list that allows them to be the first to know when your subscription box launches, entitles them to early bird launch specials, and ensures they get an opportunity to subscribe before your boxes sell out!</p><p>The goal of the waitlist strategy is to build a large list of warm leads who are interested in becoming subscribers. Every time you talk about your subscription box, your CTA is to join the waitlist. </p><p>Start building your waitlist 30-90 out from your launch. Any longer, you risk the list becoming cold. Any shorter, you won’t have enough time to build a healthy list. </p><p>The time between the waitlist and the launch is crucial. You can’t simply get people onto your waitlist and then 90 days later hit them with the launch. Use this time to get them to buy into who you are and what your box is about.  </p><p>Send weekly or bi-weekly emails, depending on how far out you are from your launch. Each of these emails should fall into one of three categories: </p><ul>
<li>Building credibility &amp; your know, like, and trust factor. </li>
<li>Talking about customer pain points and how your subscription box is a solution to these problems. </li>
<li>Taking people behind the scenes of your subscription box. </li>
</ul><p>Bring your waitlist along on the process of starting your subscription box. These potential subscribers will feel like they’ve been part of the process all along, resulting in a much higher conversion rate when you do launch. </p><p>Examples of 6 emails you can send between the waitlist and the launch: </p><ul>
<li>Introduce yourself and share your “why.” </li>
<li>Take them behind the scenes - designing your logo, choosing packaging, etc. Get them involved. </li>
<li>Talk about pain points and benefits. </li>
<li>Take them behind the scenes - working on something for your subscription box. Connect <em>you</em> with the box. </li>
<li>Talk about why they deserve to have your box. </li>
<li>Build excitement - save the date, watch your email, exciting bonuses to come!  </li>
</ul><p>Inside Launch Your Box we have FOUR brand new training lessons all about creating your waitlist, announcing your subscription box launch, driving traffic to your waitlist, and nurturing your waitlist before your launch. I’d love to have you join us. Just head over to joinLYB.com! </p><p>Join me for this episode as we talk about what you need to do between building your waitlist and your launch to build your authority, nurture your prospective subscribers, and increase your conversion rate. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me and our AMAZING community inside <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>! </p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1699</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[706b5daa-bf3f-11ee-b0e6-8ffbc34f1798]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3341123123.mp3?updated=1706599270" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>148: From 15 to 200 Subscribers in a Year with the Maven Box</title>
      <description>Growing your subscription box business with paid traffic is great… Until it isn’t.  
One great way to choose a subscription box niche is to identify a gap in the market and fill it. An even better way is to identify a gap in a market you are passionate about. Launch Your Box member Bridget Young of Lunar Maven did both. And it paid off. She saw her subscription box grow from an initial launch of 15 subscribers to 200 subscribers in a little more than a year! 
The only problem was that growth was largely due to paid ads. And when the cost of paid ads continued to go up and subscriber numbers started to slip, Bridget needed a new strategy. 
Bridget’s Lunar Maven box is a monthly subscription box based on a subscriber’s zodiac sign. Bridget sent me a box to open during our Launch Your Box member box openings. It was customized for a Pisces - my sign. The care and attention that went into it was apparent in every detail - and my horoscope-loving heart LOVED it! 
Bridget’s subscription box journey started when she couldn’t find a subscription box that met her expectations of content and quality. Bridget has a passion for all things astrological and crystal. 
She also has a great deal of knowledge. She planned and curated a subscription box that is thoughtful, personalized, and filled with high-quality items. Items chosen based on what each sign will be experiencing during that month. 
Bridget focused on customer acquisition as her growth strategy, using paid Facebook Ads to get in front of the right people. The strategy worked well for the first year and Bridget’s subscription grew 5-15% per month, outpacing her monthly churn rates. 
Bridget was strategic with her ads. She spent time engaging in the comments, answering questions and adding value. 
In 2023, ads stopped performing as well for Bridget, and customer acquisition costs went way up. She had no choice but to scale back on her ad spend which had an immediate negative impact on her growth. 
Bridget needs a strategy to move forward and start gaining new subscribers again. I talked to her about the importance of a balanced strategy - one that counts on both paid and organic traffic. 
I recommended Bridget start running ads to a freebie opt-in. She has SO MUCH knowledge - creating a freebie for someone who wants to learn about crystals, zodiac signs, and more would be easy for her and valuable for her audience. Running ads to that freebie opt-in will get it in front of her ideal customer AND help her build her email list. And as you may have heard me say recently, your email is your ATM.
When Bridget restarts her ads, I recommend she do things a little differently. I want her to build a nurturing email flow and nurture those people on her list, knowing they are likely to buy from her eventually. 
Bridget shared her goals for 2024. She wants to get to 500 subscribers. This isn’t an arbitrary number - getting to 500 subscribers would allow her to move her business out of her basement and into a separate space. It would also mean being able to hire. Both would make a big difference in balancing work and family life! 
With her new plan to grow using a combination of paid and organic traffic and her commitment to start consistently going LIVE on social media, I am confident Bridget will reach that goal! 
Join me for this episode to learn how Bridget grew her subscription box from 15 to 200 subscribers in a year and what changes she needs to make to continue to grow despite rising ad costs. 

Find and follow Bridget: 


Lunar Maven on Facebook  

Lunar Maven on Instagram

Lunar Maven Website

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Jan 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From 15 to 200 Subscribers in a Year with the Maven Box</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>148</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode to learn how Bridget grew her subscription box from 15 to 200 subscribers in a year and what changes she needs to make to continue to grow despite rising ad costs. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Growing your subscription box business with paid traffic is great… Until it isn’t.  
One great way to choose a subscription box niche is to identify a gap in the market and fill it. An even better way is to identify a gap in a market you are passionate about. Launch Your Box member Bridget Young of Lunar Maven did both. And it paid off. She saw her subscription box grow from an initial launch of 15 subscribers to 200 subscribers in a little more than a year! 
The only problem was that growth was largely due to paid ads. And when the cost of paid ads continued to go up and subscriber numbers started to slip, Bridget needed a new strategy. 
Bridget’s Lunar Maven box is a monthly subscription box based on a subscriber’s zodiac sign. Bridget sent me a box to open during our Launch Your Box member box openings. It was customized for a Pisces - my sign. The care and attention that went into it was apparent in every detail - and my horoscope-loving heart LOVED it! 
Bridget’s subscription box journey started when she couldn’t find a subscription box that met her expectations of content and quality. Bridget has a passion for all things astrological and crystal. 
She also has a great deal of knowledge. She planned and curated a subscription box that is thoughtful, personalized, and filled with high-quality items. Items chosen based on what each sign will be experiencing during that month. 
Bridget focused on customer acquisition as her growth strategy, using paid Facebook Ads to get in front of the right people. The strategy worked well for the first year and Bridget’s subscription grew 5-15% per month, outpacing her monthly churn rates. 
Bridget was strategic with her ads. She spent time engaging in the comments, answering questions and adding value. 
In 2023, ads stopped performing as well for Bridget, and customer acquisition costs went way up. She had no choice but to scale back on her ad spend which had an immediate negative impact on her growth. 
Bridget needs a strategy to move forward and start gaining new subscribers again. I talked to her about the importance of a balanced strategy - one that counts on both paid and organic traffic. 
I recommended Bridget start running ads to a freebie opt-in. She has SO MUCH knowledge - creating a freebie for someone who wants to learn about crystals, zodiac signs, and more would be easy for her and valuable for her audience. Running ads to that freebie opt-in will get it in front of her ideal customer AND help her build her email list. And as you may have heard me say recently, your email is your ATM.
When Bridget restarts her ads, I recommend she do things a little differently. I want her to build a nurturing email flow and nurture those people on her list, knowing they are likely to buy from her eventually. 
Bridget shared her goals for 2024. She wants to get to 500 subscribers. This isn’t an arbitrary number - getting to 500 subscribers would allow her to move her business out of her basement and into a separate space. It would also mean being able to hire. Both would make a big difference in balancing work and family life! 
With her new plan to grow using a combination of paid and organic traffic and her commitment to start consistently going LIVE on social media, I am confident Bridget will reach that goal! 
Join me for this episode to learn how Bridget grew her subscription box from 15 to 200 subscribers in a year and what changes she needs to make to continue to grow despite rising ad costs. 

Find and follow Bridget: 


Lunar Maven on Facebook  

Lunar Maven on Instagram

Lunar Maven Website

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Growing your subscription box business with paid traffic is great… Until it isn’t.  </p><p>One great way to choose a subscription box niche is to identify a gap in the market and fill it. An even better way is to identify a gap in a market you are passionate about. Launch Your Box member Bridget Young of Lunar Maven did both. And it paid off. She saw her subscription box grow from an initial launch of 15 subscribers to 200 subscribers in a little more than a year! </p><p>The only problem was that growth was largely due to paid ads. And when the cost of paid ads continued to go up and subscriber numbers started to slip, Bridget needed a new strategy. </p><p>Bridget’s Lunar Maven box is a monthly subscription box based on a subscriber’s zodiac sign. Bridget sent me a box to open during our Launch Your Box member box openings. It was customized for a Pisces - my sign. The care and attention that went into it was apparent in every detail - and my horoscope-loving heart LOVED it! </p><p>Bridget’s subscription box journey started when she couldn’t find a subscription box that met her expectations of content and quality. Bridget has a passion for all things astrological and crystal. </p><p>She also has a great deal of knowledge. She planned and curated a subscription box that is thoughtful, personalized, and filled with high-quality items. Items chosen based on what each sign will be experiencing during that month. </p><p>Bridget focused on customer acquisition as her growth strategy, using paid Facebook Ads to get in front of the right people. The strategy worked well for the first year and Bridget’s subscription grew 5-15% per month, outpacing her monthly churn rates. </p><p>Bridget was strategic with her ads. She spent time engaging in the comments, answering questions and adding value. </p><p>In 2023, ads stopped performing as well for Bridget, and customer acquisition costs went way up. She had no choice but to scale back on her ad spend which had an immediate negative impact on her growth. </p><p>Bridget needs a strategy to move forward and start gaining new subscribers again. I talked to her about the importance of a balanced strategy - one that counts on both paid and organic traffic. </p><p>I recommended Bridget start running ads to a freebie opt-in. She has SO MUCH knowledge - creating a freebie for someone who wants to learn about crystals, zodiac signs, and more would be easy for her and valuable for her audience. Running ads to that freebie opt-in will get it in front of her ideal customer AND help her build her email list. And as you may have heard me say recently, your email is your ATM.</p><p>When Bridget restarts her ads, I recommend she do things a little differently. I want her to build a nurturing email flow and nurture those people on her list, knowing they are likely to buy from her eventually. </p><p>Bridget shared her goals for 2024. She wants to get to 500 subscribers. This isn’t an arbitrary number - getting to 500 subscribers would allow her to move her business out of her basement and into a separate space. It would also mean being able to hire. Both would make a big difference in balancing work and family life! </p><p>With her new plan to grow using a combination of paid and organic traffic and her commitment to start consistently going LIVE on social media, I am confident Bridget will reach that goal! </p><p>Join me for this episode to learn how Bridget grew her subscription box from 15 to 200 subscribers in a year and what changes she needs to make to continue to grow despite rising ad costs. </p><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Bridget: </p><ul>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/LunarMaven">Lunar Maven on Facebook</a>  </li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/lunar.maven/">Lunar Maven on Instagram</a></li>
<li><a href="https://lunarmaven.com/">Lunar Maven Website</a></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2463</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9fb6bac0-b8d0-11ee-b1d0-9323896fac03]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7309130618.mp3?updated=1706123925" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>147: From Idea to a Sold-Out Launch in 3 Weeks</title>
      <description>“Take that one next step.” - Megan Hoiosen
Have you ever read an entire book in one day? Has a book ever given you exactly what you needed exactly when you needed it? When Megan Hoiosen of Sweet Tea Living got her hands on my book, One Box at a Time, she took the day off and read it straight through. And three weeks later, she had a sold-out launch of her brand-new subscription box. 
A former teacher, Megan turned her love for home decor and vintage into a brick-and-mortar shop in Idaho called Sweet Tea Living. The name of Megan’s shop has almost nothing to do with tea (although she does sell it) and everything to do with creating a feeling of Southern hospitality. 
Megan thought about starting a subscription box for a long time. She even joined Launch Your Box a few months ago. And although she found all of the trainings - and the amazing community - a great source of knowledge, she struggled to find time to consume the information while working long days in her shop. 
When my book, One Box at a Time, came out late last year, Megan ordered a copy. And when it arrived, she had a feeling it might be just what she needed. She took the day off from work, sat down with a notebook, and read the book straight through. 
Three weeks later, Megan launched her subscription box. Oh, and she sold out! 
My goal when I wrote One Box at a Time was not only to tell my subscription box story but to provide readers with the knowledge and tactical action steps they need to actually launch their boxes. 
Megan launched and quickly hit 50 subscribers. Then 75 subscribers. And they just kept coming. She had her web designer shut things down when she hit 87 subscribers. She had sold out! 
Megan intended to follow the launch plan to a T but found herself overwhelmed. And that’s okay. 
I lay out a comprehensive launch plan inside my membership and in the chapters of One Box at a Time. That doesn’t mean you have to do all of the things every time. 
When you launch for the first time, take what you can and do what you can. Then the next time you launch, layer in more. Realize you can reuse the assets you built for that first launch - simply rinse and repeat. 
If you never start, you have nothing to build on. I give you the tools, it’s up to you to implement them. 
Megan has great advice for anyone dreaming about starting a subscription box inspired by the title of my book. She wants you to send the email, do the post, go LIVE, and they’ll come… One Box at a Time. 
When I asked Megan her goals for 2024, she said she was inspired by Episode 145 where I interviewed 3 of my Mastermind students who hit $1 million in revenue in 2023. Something tells me I’ll be doing a similar interview with Megan in the not-to-distant future. 

Join me for this episode to learn what can happen when you “take that one next step.” Spoiler alert - you just might end up with a sold-out subscription launch! 

One Box at a Time 

Find and follow Megan: 

Sweet Tea Living on Facebook

Sweet Tea Living on Instagram

Sweet Tea Living Website

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 



Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 17 Jan 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From Idea to a Sold-Out Launch in 3 Weeks</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>147</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, Megan takes us through her journey from teacher to brick-and-mortar shop owner to subscription box owner! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Take that one next step.” - Megan Hoiosen
Have you ever read an entire book in one day? Has a book ever given you exactly what you needed exactly when you needed it? When Megan Hoiosen of Sweet Tea Living got her hands on my book, One Box at a Time, she took the day off and read it straight through. And three weeks later, she had a sold-out launch of her brand-new subscription box. 
A former teacher, Megan turned her love for home decor and vintage into a brick-and-mortar shop in Idaho called Sweet Tea Living. The name of Megan’s shop has almost nothing to do with tea (although she does sell it) and everything to do with creating a feeling of Southern hospitality. 
Megan thought about starting a subscription box for a long time. She even joined Launch Your Box a few months ago. And although she found all of the trainings - and the amazing community - a great source of knowledge, she struggled to find time to consume the information while working long days in her shop. 
When my book, One Box at a Time, came out late last year, Megan ordered a copy. And when it arrived, she had a feeling it might be just what she needed. She took the day off from work, sat down with a notebook, and read the book straight through. 
Three weeks later, Megan launched her subscription box. Oh, and she sold out! 
My goal when I wrote One Box at a Time was not only to tell my subscription box story but to provide readers with the knowledge and tactical action steps they need to actually launch their boxes. 
Megan launched and quickly hit 50 subscribers. Then 75 subscribers. And they just kept coming. She had her web designer shut things down when she hit 87 subscribers. She had sold out! 
Megan intended to follow the launch plan to a T but found herself overwhelmed. And that’s okay. 
I lay out a comprehensive launch plan inside my membership and in the chapters of One Box at a Time. That doesn’t mean you have to do all of the things every time. 
When you launch for the first time, take what you can and do what you can. Then the next time you launch, layer in more. Realize you can reuse the assets you built for that first launch - simply rinse and repeat. 
If you never start, you have nothing to build on. I give you the tools, it’s up to you to implement them. 
Megan has great advice for anyone dreaming about starting a subscription box inspired by the title of my book. She wants you to send the email, do the post, go LIVE, and they’ll come… One Box at a Time. 
When I asked Megan her goals for 2024, she said she was inspired by Episode 145 where I interviewed 3 of my Mastermind students who hit $1 million in revenue in 2023. Something tells me I’ll be doing a similar interview with Megan in the not-to-distant future. 

Join me for this episode to learn what can happen when you “take that one next step.” Spoiler alert - you just might end up with a sold-out subscription launch! 

One Box at a Time 

Find and follow Megan: 

Sweet Tea Living on Facebook

Sweet Tea Living on Instagram

Sweet Tea Living Website

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 



Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“Take that one next step.” - Megan Hoiosen</p><p>Have you ever read an entire book in one day? Has a book ever given you exactly what you needed exactly when you needed it? When Megan Hoiosen of Sweet Tea Living got her hands on my book, <em>One Box at a Time, </em>she took the day off and read it straight through. And three weeks later, she had a sold-out launch of her brand-new subscription box. </p><p>A former teacher, Megan turned her love for home decor and vintage into a brick-and-mortar shop in Idaho called Sweet Tea Living. The name of Megan’s shop has almost nothing to do with tea (although she does sell it) and everything to do with creating a feeling of Southern hospitality. </p><p>Megan thought about starting a subscription box for a long time. She even joined Launch Your Box a few months ago. And although she found all of the trainings - and the amazing community - a great source of knowledge, she struggled to find time to consume the information while working long days in her shop. </p><p>When my book, <em>One Box at a Time, </em>came out late last year, Megan ordered a copy. And when it arrived, she had a feeling it might be just what she needed. She took the day off from work, sat down with a notebook, and read the book straight through. </p><p>Three weeks later, Megan launched her subscription box. Oh, and she sold out! </p><p>My goal when I wrote <em>One Box at a Time</em> was not only to tell my subscription box story but to provide readers with the knowledge and tactical action steps they need to actually launch their boxes. </p><p>Megan launched and quickly hit 50 subscribers. Then 75 subscribers. And they just kept coming. She had her web designer shut things down when she hit 87 subscribers. She had sold out! </p><p>Megan intended to follow the launch plan to a T but found herself overwhelmed. And that’s okay. </p><p>I lay out a comprehensive launch plan inside my membership and in the chapters of <em>One Box at a Time</em>. That doesn’t mean you have to do all of the things every time. </p><p>When you launch for the first time, take what you can and do what you can. Then the next time you launch, layer in more. Realize you can reuse the assets you built for that first launch - simply rinse and repeat. </p><p>If you never start, you have nothing to build on. I give you the tools, it’s up to you to implement them. </p><p>Megan has great advice for anyone dreaming about starting a subscription box inspired by the title of my book. She wants you to send the email, do the post, go LIVE, and they’ll come… One Box at a Time. </p><p>When I asked Megan her goals for 2024, she said she was inspired by Episode 145 where I interviewed 3 of my Mastermind students who hit $1 million in revenue in 2023. Something tells me I’ll be doing a similar interview with Megan in the not-to-distant future. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode to learn what can happen when you “take that one next step.” Spoiler alert - you just might end up with a sold-out subscription launch! </p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/one-box-at-a-time"><strong><em>One Box at a Time</em></strong></a><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/one-box-at-a-time"><strong><em> </em></strong></a></p><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Megan: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/sweettealiving">Sweet Tea Living on Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/sweettealiving/">Sweet Tea Living on Instagram</a></li>
<li><a href="https://sweetteaidaho.com/">Sweet Tea Living Website</a></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2333</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8da08048-b34c-11ee-b10a-5b4e5819f8cc]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5661738451.mp3?updated=1705285488" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Protecting Your Energy</title>
      <description>Being an entrepreneur is hard. It takes a lot of physical, mental, and emotional energy to start a business. It takes even more energy to continue to grow a successful business. And it seems every day brings challenges, obstacles, and issues that threaten to deplete that energy. Energy we need to keep moving forward. 
In this episode, we’re talking about things in your business that threaten your energy. As a subscription box owner, you’re going to deal with cancellations. Every subscription box owner does. You may even deal with negative feedback.
As entrepreneurs, our businesses are personal. We put our own blood, sweat, and tears into them. Managing these customer service issues can affect us. They can make us doubt ourselves and our businesses, draining us of the mental and emotional energy we need to run our businesses well. 
Protect your energy by puting these tips and strategies in place: 

Give customer service issues to someone else. If you have a VA you can delegate responses to, do so. Putting a buffer between yourself and customer service issues keeps it impersonal but still professional.

Reset yourself. Take a walk, run a bath, or do something that helps you disconnect from the stress of work. 

Remember it’s not about you, it’s about them. You never know what a person is dealing with, especially in these situations. Cancellations happen for any number of reasons, most of which have nothing to do with the box itself. Use that perspective to try not to take these issues personally.

Keep reminders of positive feedback visible. Keep positive comments and reviews where you can see them to help remind you what’s important: delivering a VIP experience to your subscribers.

Cancellations and negative feedback are a fact of life as a business owner, but they don’t need to be something that robs you of precious time and energy. The longer you’re in business, the more you’ll see that if you are professional in your responses and positive in your outlook, there is a good chance many of those subscribers will come back! 
Join me for this episode to learn why protecting your energy is so important, especially for entrepreneurs. I’ll share strategies and tips to help you protect the energy you have and gain more! 

Get my Retention Rate Calculator HERE.

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 10 Jan 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Protecting Your Energy</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle></itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Being an entrepreneur is hard. It takes a lot of physical, mental, and emotional energy to start a business. It takes even more energy to continue to grow a successful business. And it seems every day brings challenges, obstacles, and issues that threaten to deplete that energy. Energy we need to keep moving forward. 
In this episode, we’re talking about things in your business that threaten your energy. As a subscription box owner, you’re going to deal with cancellations. Every subscription box owner does. You may even deal with negative feedback.
As entrepreneurs, our businesses are personal. We put our own blood, sweat, and tears into them. Managing these customer service issues can affect us. They can make us doubt ourselves and our businesses, draining us of the mental and emotional energy we need to run our businesses well. 
Protect your energy by puting these tips and strategies in place: 

Give customer service issues to someone else. If you have a VA you can delegate responses to, do so. Putting a buffer between yourself and customer service issues keeps it impersonal but still professional.

Reset yourself. Take a walk, run a bath, or do something that helps you disconnect from the stress of work. 

Remember it’s not about you, it’s about them. You never know what a person is dealing with, especially in these situations. Cancellations happen for any number of reasons, most of which have nothing to do with the box itself. Use that perspective to try not to take these issues personally.

Keep reminders of positive feedback visible. Keep positive comments and reviews where you can see them to help remind you what’s important: delivering a VIP experience to your subscribers.

Cancellations and negative feedback are a fact of life as a business owner, but they don’t need to be something that robs you of precious time and energy. The longer you’re in business, the more you’ll see that if you are professional in your responses and positive in your outlook, there is a good chance many of those subscribers will come back! 
Join me for this episode to learn why protecting your energy is so important, especially for entrepreneurs. I’ll share strategies and tips to help you protect the energy you have and gain more! 

Get my Retention Rate Calculator HERE.

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Being an entrepreneur is hard. It takes a lot of physical, mental, and emotional energy to start a business. It takes even more energy to continue to grow a successful business. And it seems every day brings challenges, obstacles, and issues that threaten to deplete that energy. Energy we need to keep moving forward. </p><p>In this episode, we’re talking about things in your business that threaten your energy. As a subscription box owner, you’re going to deal with cancellations. Every subscription box owner does. You may even deal with negative feedback.</p><p>As entrepreneurs, our businesses are personal. We put our own blood, sweat, and tears into them. Managing these customer service issues can affect us. They can make us doubt ourselves and our businesses, draining us of the mental and emotional energy we need to run our businesses well. </p><p>Protect your energy by puting these tips and strategies in place: </p><ul>
<li>Give customer service issues to someone else. If you have a VA you can delegate responses to, do so. Putting a buffer between yourself and customer service issues keeps it impersonal but still professional.</li>
<li>Reset yourself. Take a walk, run a bath, or do something that helps you disconnect from the stress of work. </li>
<li>Remember it’s not about you, it’s about them. You never know what a person is dealing with, especially in these situations. Cancellations happen for any number of reasons, most of which have nothing to do with the box itself. Use that perspective to try not to take these issues personally.</li>
<li>Keep reminders of positive feedback visible. Keep positive comments and reviews where you can see them to help remind you what’s important: delivering a VIP experience to your subscribers.</li>
</ul><p>Cancellations and negative feedback are a fact of life as a business owner, but they don’t need to be something that robs you of precious time and energy. The longer you’re in business, the more you’ll see that if you are professional in your responses and positive in your outlook, there is a good chance many of those subscribers will come back! </p><p>Join me for this episode to learn why protecting your energy is so important, especially for entrepreneurs. I’ll share strategies and tips to help you protect the energy you have and gain more! </p><p><br></p><p>Get my Retention Rate Calculator <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/6-tips-to-navigate-cancellations-in-a-subscription-box-business%20">HERE</a>.</p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1234</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[93d2ff7c-ab63-11ee-bdf3-578ca22f6da9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1793136476.mp3?updated=1704505562" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>146: The Fall of Jane.com - The Danger of Using an Online Marketplace</title>
      <description>An online marketplace that connects buyers with sellers with a HUGE reach and the potential to sell a lot of products without having to spend time or money building your own audience? Sounds almost too good to be true, doesn’t it? And for thousands of sellers on Jane.com it ended up being exactly that. The collapse of Jane.com highlights important lessons all small business owners need to learn. 
How did Jane.com work and why was it so attractive to so many sellers? To sell on Jane.com, small businesses had to submit an application and meet certain requirements. 
Sellers set their own shipping prices and were expected to pack and deliver items to customers within six days of purchase. Jane.com collected payment from the customer, kept 20-25% of sales and distributed the remaining funds to the seller. 
Jane.com had tens of thousands of sellers. There was always a good variety of products available to customers. A big part of what made Jane.com so attractive to buyers was their flash sales. Every three days, they ran 72 hour flash sales. Jane.com promoted these sales through multiple channels including email. Sellers would sell hundreds to thousands of products in only 72 hours. 
Small business owners who sold their products on Jane.com didn’t have to build an audience - they used Jane.com’s audience. All they needed to do was provide product at a great price and deliver it quickly. This feels like a huge win to small business owners who know how hard it is to build an audience. 
So what happened? 
Had there been signs of trouble? 
The fall of Jane.com and what it means to these sellers shines a bright light on three things all small business owners MUST do to ensure something like this doesn’t happen to them. 
Can you benefit from a platform with a built-in audience? Absolutely. But, realize you cannot take shortcuts in business. You cannot skip the work of building your audience yourself. You have control of your business. For much more about what is working now to build your business, listen to episode 144. 
Join me for this episode to find out what led to the fall of Jane.com, what it means for tens of thousands of small business owners, and what you can do to ensure something like this won’t happen to your business. 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 03 Jan 2024 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Fall of Jane.com - The Danger of Using an Online Marketplace</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>146</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode to find out what led to the fall of Jane.com, what it means for tens of thousands of small business owners, and what you can do to ensure something like this won’t happen to your business. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>An online marketplace that connects buyers with sellers with a HUGE reach and the potential to sell a lot of products without having to spend time or money building your own audience? Sounds almost too good to be true, doesn’t it? And for thousands of sellers on Jane.com it ended up being exactly that. The collapse of Jane.com highlights important lessons all small business owners need to learn. 
How did Jane.com work and why was it so attractive to so many sellers? To sell on Jane.com, small businesses had to submit an application and meet certain requirements. 
Sellers set their own shipping prices and were expected to pack and deliver items to customers within six days of purchase. Jane.com collected payment from the customer, kept 20-25% of sales and distributed the remaining funds to the seller. 
Jane.com had tens of thousands of sellers. There was always a good variety of products available to customers. A big part of what made Jane.com so attractive to buyers was their flash sales. Every three days, they ran 72 hour flash sales. Jane.com promoted these sales through multiple channels including email. Sellers would sell hundreds to thousands of products in only 72 hours. 
Small business owners who sold their products on Jane.com didn’t have to build an audience - they used Jane.com’s audience. All they needed to do was provide product at a great price and deliver it quickly. This feels like a huge win to small business owners who know how hard it is to build an audience. 
So what happened? 
Had there been signs of trouble? 
The fall of Jane.com and what it means to these sellers shines a bright light on three things all small business owners MUST do to ensure something like this doesn’t happen to them. 
Can you benefit from a platform with a built-in audience? Absolutely. But, realize you cannot take shortcuts in business. You cannot skip the work of building your audience yourself. You have control of your business. For much more about what is working now to build your business, listen to episode 144. 
Join me for this episode to find out what led to the fall of Jane.com, what it means for tens of thousands of small business owners, and what you can do to ensure something like this won’t happen to your business. 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>An online marketplace that connects buyers with sellers with a HUGE reach and the potential to sell a lot of products without having to spend time or money building your own audience? Sounds almost too good to be true, doesn’t it? And for thousands of sellers on Jane.com it ended up being exactly that. The collapse of Jane.com highlights important lessons all small business owners need to learn. </p><p>How did Jane.com work and why was it so attractive to so many sellers? To sell on Jane.com, small businesses had to submit an application and meet certain requirements. </p><p>Sellers set their own shipping prices and were expected to pack and deliver items to customers within six days of purchase. Jane.com collected payment from the customer, kept 20-25% of sales and distributed the remaining funds to the seller. </p><p>Jane.com had tens of thousands of sellers. There was always a good variety of products available to customers. A big part of what made Jane.com so attractive to buyers was their flash sales. Every three days, they ran 72 hour flash sales. Jane.com promoted these sales through multiple channels including email. Sellers would sell hundreds to thousands of products in only 72 hours. </p><p>Small business owners who sold their products on Jane.com didn’t have to build an audience - they used Jane.com’s audience. All they needed to do was provide product at a great price and deliver it quickly. This feels like a huge win to small business owners who know how hard it is to build an audience. </p><p>So what happened? </p><p>Had there been signs of trouble? </p><p>The fall of Jane.com and what it means to these sellers shines a bright light on three things all small business owners MUST do to ensure something like this doesn’t happen to them. </p><p>Can you benefit from a platform with a built-in audience? Absolutely. But, realize you cannot take shortcuts in business. You cannot skip the work of building your audience yourself. You have control of your business. For much more about what is working now to build your business, listen to <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/what-s-working-now-in-e-commerce-ep-144">episode 144</a>. </p><p>Join me for this episode to find out what led to the fall of Jane.com, what it means for tens of thousands of small business owners, and what you can do to ensure something like this won’t happen to your business. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1575</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c7f7344e-a843-11ee-84c1-6388272c7dcf]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8119757840.mp3?updated=1704072257" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>145: Hitting $1 Million in Revenue This Year with 3 of My Mastermind Students  </title>
      <description>Can you imagine bringing in over $1 Million in revenue in one year? What if I told you anyone can do it? Anyone who is willing to work hard, to never give up. Anyone who is willing to get up every day, hustle, and implement. 
In this episode, I’m joined by three members of my Elevate Mastermind. All three have wildly successful businesses. And all three hit $1 Million in revenue this year! All three are past guests on this podcast, so you might be familiar with their stories. Tamara Bennett, Tracey Pounds, and Cindy Manly are here to share some of the “secrets” to their success and to inspire you to pursue your subscription box dreams. 
These successful business owners have several things in common. 

They’re all in the arts &amp; crafts space. 

They all have memberships and subscription boxes - multiple streams of income. 

They all have both physical and digital offerings. 


Learn from Tamara. Start with one thing, get super clear about it, and work out the kinks. Give it six or eight months or even a year. Don’t be in a rush to add something else. 
Learn from Tracy. Stay focused, be consistent, and pour into serving your audience. 
Learn from Cindy. Give your audience more of what they want. Use an SLO to fund Facebook Ads that bring new people into your world, people who will become customers of various offers. Cindy put strategies into play that resulted in a $300,000 month in October! 
Dreaming big is easy. Doing what it takes to make those big dreams come true takes work. It takes a willingness to expand. 

Expand your thinking

Expand audience building

Expand ad spend 

Wondering how much of these ladies’ total revenue is recurring revenue? The kind of recurring revenue that means not hustling to make sales every day. The kind of recurring revenue that brings stability to your business. 

Tracey - 57% 

Tamara - 75% (this is my number, too)

Cindy - 70%

One thing each of these ladies does so well is staying in their lane. They each have a niche - a sweet spot. Instead of trying to appeal to a wide range of people, they stay true to their perfect person. Their incredible growth has come from filling all the little gaps over the years, serving their perfect person’s needs, and creating multiple revenue streams. The riches truly are in the niches. 
I asked each of these million-dollar business owners to give listeners one piece of advice. Their advice - and mine - is to:  

Show up. 

Be consistent. 

Surround yourself with people who lift you up and support you. 

Give it time. It doesn’t happen overnight. 


Join me and three of my Mastermind students to find out how they hit $1 Million in sales this year, what they contributed their success to, and how you can take what they did and apply it to your own business. 

Find and follow Tracey 

Miss Tracey Creates on Facebook

Miss Tracey Creates on Instagram

Miss Tracey Creates Website

Find and follow Tamara 

Southern Adoornments Decor on Facebook

Southern Adoornments Decor on Instagram

Southern Adoornments Decor Website


Find and follow Cindy 

Art Shattered on Facebook

Art Shattered on Instagram

Art Shattered Website


Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 27 Dec 2023 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Hitting $1 Million in Revenue This Year with 3 of My Mastermind Students  </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>145</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me and three of my Mastermind students to find out how they hit $1 Million in sales this year, what they contributed their success to, and how you can take what they did and apply it to your own business. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Can you imagine bringing in over $1 Million in revenue in one year? What if I told you anyone can do it? Anyone who is willing to work hard, to never give up. Anyone who is willing to get up every day, hustle, and implement. 
In this episode, I’m joined by three members of my Elevate Mastermind. All three have wildly successful businesses. And all three hit $1 Million in revenue this year! All three are past guests on this podcast, so you might be familiar with their stories. Tamara Bennett, Tracey Pounds, and Cindy Manly are here to share some of the “secrets” to their success and to inspire you to pursue your subscription box dreams. 
These successful business owners have several things in common. 

They’re all in the arts &amp; crafts space. 

They all have memberships and subscription boxes - multiple streams of income. 

They all have both physical and digital offerings. 


Learn from Tamara. Start with one thing, get super clear about it, and work out the kinks. Give it six or eight months or even a year. Don’t be in a rush to add something else. 
Learn from Tracy. Stay focused, be consistent, and pour into serving your audience. 
Learn from Cindy. Give your audience more of what they want. Use an SLO to fund Facebook Ads that bring new people into your world, people who will become customers of various offers. Cindy put strategies into play that resulted in a $300,000 month in October! 
Dreaming big is easy. Doing what it takes to make those big dreams come true takes work. It takes a willingness to expand. 

Expand your thinking

Expand audience building

Expand ad spend 

Wondering how much of these ladies’ total revenue is recurring revenue? The kind of recurring revenue that means not hustling to make sales every day. The kind of recurring revenue that brings stability to your business. 

Tracey - 57% 

Tamara - 75% (this is my number, too)

Cindy - 70%

One thing each of these ladies does so well is staying in their lane. They each have a niche - a sweet spot. Instead of trying to appeal to a wide range of people, they stay true to their perfect person. Their incredible growth has come from filling all the little gaps over the years, serving their perfect person’s needs, and creating multiple revenue streams. The riches truly are in the niches. 
I asked each of these million-dollar business owners to give listeners one piece of advice. Their advice - and mine - is to:  

Show up. 

Be consistent. 

Surround yourself with people who lift you up and support you. 

Give it time. It doesn’t happen overnight. 


Join me and three of my Mastermind students to find out how they hit $1 Million in sales this year, what they contributed their success to, and how you can take what they did and apply it to your own business. 

Find and follow Tracey 

Miss Tracey Creates on Facebook

Miss Tracey Creates on Instagram

Miss Tracey Creates Website

Find and follow Tamara 

Southern Adoornments Decor on Facebook

Southern Adoornments Decor on Instagram

Southern Adoornments Decor Website


Find and follow Cindy 

Art Shattered on Facebook

Art Shattered on Instagram

Art Shattered Website


Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Can you imagine bringing in over $1 Million in revenue in one year? What if I told you anyone can do it? Anyone who is willing to work hard, to never give up. Anyone who is willing to get up every day, hustle, and implement. </p><p>In this episode, I’m joined by three members of my Elevate Mastermind. All three have wildly successful businesses. And all three hit $1 Million in revenue this year! All three are past guests on this podcast, so you might be familiar with their stories. Tamara Bennett, Tracey Pounds, and Cindy Manly are here to share some of the “secrets” to their success and to inspire you to pursue your subscription box dreams. </p><p>These successful business owners have several things in common. </p><ul>
<li>They’re all in the arts &amp; crafts space. </li>
<li>They all have memberships <em>and</em> subscription boxes - multiple streams of income. </li>
<li>They all have both physical and digital offerings. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Learn from Tamara. Start with one thing, get super clear about it, and work out the kinks. Give it six or eight months or even a year. Don’t be in a rush to add something else. </p><p>Learn from Tracy. Stay focused, be consistent, and pour into serving your audience. </p><p>Learn from Cindy. Give your audience more of what they want. Use an SLO to fund Facebook Ads that bring new people into your world, people who will become customers of various offers. Cindy put strategies into play that resulted in a $300,000 month in October! </p><p>Dreaming big is easy. Doing what it takes to make those big dreams come true takes work. It takes a willingness to expand. </p><ul>
<li>Expand your thinking</li>
<li>Expand audience building</li>
<li>Expand ad spend </li>
</ul><p>Wondering how much of these ladies’ total revenue is recurring revenue? The kind of recurring revenue that means not hustling to make sales every day. The kind of recurring revenue that brings stability to your business. </p><ul>
<li>Tracey - 57% </li>
<li>Tamara - 75% (this is my number, too)</li>
<li>Cindy - 70%</li>
</ul><p>One thing each of these ladies does so well is staying in their lane. They each have a niche - a sweet spot. Instead of trying to appeal to a wide range of people, they stay true to their perfect person. Their incredible growth has come from filling all the little gaps over the years, serving their perfect person’s needs, and creating multiple revenue streams. The riches truly are in the niches. </p><p>I asked each of these million-dollar business owners to give listeners one piece of advice. Their advice - and mine - is to:  </p><ol>
<li>Show up. </li>
<li>Be consistent. </li>
<li>Surround yourself with people who lift you up and support you. </li>
<li>Give it time. It doesn’t happen overnight. </li>
</ol><p><br></p><p>Join me and three of my Mastermind students to find out how they hit $1 Million in sales this year, what they contributed their success to, and how you can take what they did and apply it to your own business. </p><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Tracey </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/misstracycreates/">Miss Tracey Creates on Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/misstracycreates?fbclid=IwAR2YL5gFkb__WvwUswloiXMMjbmIkhgypFoEPSTBRgenso2iiY2ZwPgUozc">Miss Tracey Creates on Instagram</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/misstracycreates?fbclid=IwAR2YL5gFkb__WvwUswloiXMMjbmIkhgypFoEPSTBRgenso2iiY2ZwPgUozc">Miss Tracey Creates Website</a></li>
</ul><p>Find and follow Tamara </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/southernadoornmentsdecor">Southern Adoornments Decor on Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/southern_adoornments_decor/">Southern Adoornments Decor on Instagram</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.southernadoornmentsdecor.com/">Southern Adoornments Decor Website</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Cindy </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/ArtShattered">Art Shattered on Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/cindymanly_artshattered/">Art Shattered on Instagram</a></li>
<li><a href="https://artshattered.com/collections/glass-n-stuff?gclid=Cj0KCQiAm4WsBhCiARIsAEJIEzVjQnkNfxjxIxuPTqsza2yI7j03k_uOcM7QDSTxAsiiEivP6w_7K98aAtjxEALw_wcB">Art Shattered Website</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2986</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[501537f8-a1fb-11ee-a0df-c7624f8d20c3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5459674309.mp3?updated=1703381426" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>144: What’s Working Now in E-Commerce</title>
      <description>2023 has been a rollercoaster year for e-commerce businesses. Yes, there have been ups, but wow, have there ever been downs, too. And there were certainly times this year that left all of us scratching our heads and wondering, “What’s working now?” 
In this episode, I’m going to do my best to answer that question along with one of my biz besties, Susan Bradley of the E-Commerce Roadmap podcast. We each share the top 3 things working right now in e-Commerce. The best news? You can implement any one of them in your business starting right now. 
It’s important to understand you have way more control over your results than you think you do. Even if this year has been more downs than ups, there is always a way to come back and get what you want. 
My year had big jumps and dips. I took my eye off my business for personal and professional reasons and it showed. But there were three things I did to get sales back on track. And they all had to do with getting back to basics. 

I doubled up on LIVE selling.

I sent 2-3 additional emails each week. 

I realized my email list wasn’t growing and changed my opt-in. 


Go back to the basics, but be innovative within those basics. I started running page-like ads in the spring - remember, audience building never ends - after I realized my Facebook and Instagram audiences had grown stale. The result? Almost 7K new followers! 
What’s working for Susan now? 
Susan recommends doubling down on what’s working. Three things that have been working for her and her members: 

Building audiences using a brand video strategy. 

Susan Bradley’s Brand Video Bootcamp

Lead generation

Email automations


All the time you spend on these tried and true strategies allows you to maximize what you have. This pays off so much more than going off and finding new ways to accomplish the same goal. 
Take one or two of these ideas and implement them now. Then add more - get to where you’ve implemented all of them. They’re working for a LOT of people right now! 

Join me and my biz bestie Susan Bradley for this episode to learn what’s working in e-commerce now and how you can start implementing these strategies in your business today.

The Social Sales Girls Brand Video Bootcamp

Find and follow Susan: 

The Social Sales Girls on Facebook

The Social Sales Girls Website

The Ecommerce Roadmap Podcast

Brand Video Bootcamp

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

 Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 20 Dec 2023 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What’s Working Now in E-Commerce</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>144</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me and my biz bestie Susan Bradley for this episode to learn what’s working in e-commerce now and how you can start implementing these strategies in your business today.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>2023 has been a rollercoaster year for e-commerce businesses. Yes, there have been ups, but wow, have there ever been downs, too. And there were certainly times this year that left all of us scratching our heads and wondering, “What’s working now?” 
In this episode, I’m going to do my best to answer that question along with one of my biz besties, Susan Bradley of the E-Commerce Roadmap podcast. We each share the top 3 things working right now in e-Commerce. The best news? You can implement any one of them in your business starting right now. 
It’s important to understand you have way more control over your results than you think you do. Even if this year has been more downs than ups, there is always a way to come back and get what you want. 
My year had big jumps and dips. I took my eye off my business for personal and professional reasons and it showed. But there were three things I did to get sales back on track. And they all had to do with getting back to basics. 

I doubled up on LIVE selling.

I sent 2-3 additional emails each week. 

I realized my email list wasn’t growing and changed my opt-in. 


Go back to the basics, but be innovative within those basics. I started running page-like ads in the spring - remember, audience building never ends - after I realized my Facebook and Instagram audiences had grown stale. The result? Almost 7K new followers! 
What’s working for Susan now? 
Susan recommends doubling down on what’s working. Three things that have been working for her and her members: 

Building audiences using a brand video strategy. 

Susan Bradley’s Brand Video Bootcamp

Lead generation

Email automations


All the time you spend on these tried and true strategies allows you to maximize what you have. This pays off so much more than going off and finding new ways to accomplish the same goal. 
Take one or two of these ideas and implement them now. Then add more - get to where you’ve implemented all of them. They’re working for a LOT of people right now! 

Join me and my biz bestie Susan Bradley for this episode to learn what’s working in e-commerce now and how you can start implementing these strategies in your business today.

The Social Sales Girls Brand Video Bootcamp

Find and follow Susan: 

The Social Sales Girls on Facebook

The Social Sales Girls Website

The Ecommerce Roadmap Podcast

Brand Video Bootcamp

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

 Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>2023 has been a rollercoaster year for e-commerce businesses. Yes, there have been ups, but wow, have there ever been downs, too. And there were certainly times this year that left all of us scratching our heads and wondering, “What’s working now?” </p><p>In this episode, I’m going to do my best to answer that question along with one of my biz besties, Susan Bradley of the E-Commerce Roadmap podcast. We each share the top 3 things working right now in e-Commerce. The best news? You can implement any one of them in your business starting right now. </p><p>It’s important to understand you have way more control over your results than you think you do. Even if this year has been more downs than ups, there is always a way to come back and get what you want. </p><p>My year had big jumps and dips. I took my eye off my business for personal and professional reasons and it showed. But there were three things I did to get sales back on track. And they all had to do with getting back to basics. </p><ul>
<li>I doubled up on LIVE selling.</li>
<li>I sent 2-3 additional emails each week. </li>
<li>I realized my email list wasn’t growing and changed my opt-in. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Go back to the basics, but be innovative within those basics. I started running page-like ads in the spring - remember, audience building never ends - after I realized my Facebook and Instagram audiences had grown stale. The result? Almost 7K new followers! </p><p>What’s working for Susan now? </p><p>Susan recommends doubling down on what’s working. Three things that have been working for her and her members: </p><ul>
<li>Building audiences using a brand video strategy. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1"><a href="https://classroom.thesocialsalesgirls.com/a/2147750940/zgW6HoFL">Susan Bradley’s Brand Video Bootcamp</a></li>
<li>Lead generation</li>
<li>Email automations</li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>All the time you spend on these tried and true strategies allows you to maximize what you have. This pays off so much more than going off and finding new ways to accomplish the same goal. </p><p>Take one or two of these ideas and implement them now. Then add more - get to where you’ve implemented all of them. They’re working for a LOT of people right now! </p><p><br></p><p>Join me and my biz bestie Susan Bradley for this episode to learn what’s working in e-commerce now and how you can start implementing these strategies in your business today.</p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://classroom.thesocialsalesgirls.com/a/2147750940/zgW6HoFL"><strong>The Social Sales Girls Brand Video Bootcamp</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Susan: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/thesocialsalesgirls">The Social Sales Girls on Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://thesocialsalesgirls.com/">The Social Sales Girls Website</a></li>
<li><a href="https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/the-ecommerce-roadmap/id1518194256">The Ecommerce Roadmap Podcast</a></li>
<li><a href="https://classroom.thesocialsalesgirls.com/a/2147750940/zgW6HoFL">Brand Video Bootcamp</a></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong> Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2445</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6315670c-9dfe-11ee-976f-1f1e8e38ce99]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5721714928.mp3?updated=1702942941" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Sarah's Framework for a Live Unboxing Video</title>
      <description>Every month I do a LIVE unboxing video for my audience. It’s one of my favorite things to do and one of the best ways to engage with my audience, subscribers and non-subscribers. I teach members of Launch Your Box to do a LIVE unboxing every month as part of their marketing plan. It is SUCH a great way to connect with your subscribers and build community. It’s also an opportunity to create FOMO - showing potential subscribers what they’re missing out on and why they should join. 
In this episode, I walk you through my step-by-step LIVE unboxing process. Follow this process to take the stress and uncertainty out of doing your LIVE unboxing… every month. 
Doing the prep work makes your LIVE stress-free and more likely to reach a lot of people in your audience. 
1. Set a date for your Subscription Box Unboxing
Setting a firm time for your live session lets your audience know when to expect the event and allows you to set reminders to help build interest.
2. Set the stage, starting with an active background and good lighting.
3. Create a hook to pique your audience’s interest and stop the scroll. 
Tell your audience what the video is about and what to expect in the first 15 seconds.

During your LIVE unboxing video:
1. Encourage engagement with your audience.

As soon as you hit that live button and deliver your hook, start interacting with your audience (even if there’s nobody in your chat). 

Realize most of your views will come from the replay. Ask questions then come back and engage. 

2. Tell the story of your box.

Share the inspiration behind your subscription box and how you curated it. Help them see how it all fits together. 

Get your audience invested in the box before they see it.

3. Show off your highest-level subscription (if you have tiers).
Sharing your top-level box allows you to show off what you’re capable of and gets subscribers who might have gotten a lower-level box interested.
4. Include a Call to Action (subscribe, get on the waitlist, etc).
5. Thank your audience for being there and review the items in your box as you repack it. 

Your LIVE unboxing video should be at least 20 to 30 minutes long, but don’t be afraid to go a little longer if you have good engagement.
You’re not finished when the LIVE ends. Put that video into an email and send it to your mailing list. You’ll snag some of your audience that didn’t watch the LIVE session and get some more views and more people to follow your CTA. 
Don’t miss this chance to engage with your subscribers and show off the box you’ve put so much time into.
Join me for this episode as I walk you through the process of one of your most important marketing tools - a monthly  LIVE unboxing video. 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 13 Dec 2023 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Sarah's Framework for a Live Unboxing Video</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, I walk you through my step-by-step LIVE unboxing process. Follow this process to take the stress and uncertainty out of doing your LIVE unboxing… every month. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Every month I do a LIVE unboxing video for my audience. It’s one of my favorite things to do and one of the best ways to engage with my audience, subscribers and non-subscribers. I teach members of Launch Your Box to do a LIVE unboxing every month as part of their marketing plan. It is SUCH a great way to connect with your subscribers and build community. It’s also an opportunity to create FOMO - showing potential subscribers what they’re missing out on and why they should join. 
In this episode, I walk you through my step-by-step LIVE unboxing process. Follow this process to take the stress and uncertainty out of doing your LIVE unboxing… every month. 
Doing the prep work makes your LIVE stress-free and more likely to reach a lot of people in your audience. 
1. Set a date for your Subscription Box Unboxing
Setting a firm time for your live session lets your audience know when to expect the event and allows you to set reminders to help build interest.
2. Set the stage, starting with an active background and good lighting.
3. Create a hook to pique your audience’s interest and stop the scroll. 
Tell your audience what the video is about and what to expect in the first 15 seconds.

During your LIVE unboxing video:
1. Encourage engagement with your audience.

As soon as you hit that live button and deliver your hook, start interacting with your audience (even if there’s nobody in your chat). 

Realize most of your views will come from the replay. Ask questions then come back and engage. 

2. Tell the story of your box.

Share the inspiration behind your subscription box and how you curated it. Help them see how it all fits together. 

Get your audience invested in the box before they see it.

3. Show off your highest-level subscription (if you have tiers).
Sharing your top-level box allows you to show off what you’re capable of and gets subscribers who might have gotten a lower-level box interested.
4. Include a Call to Action (subscribe, get on the waitlist, etc).
5. Thank your audience for being there and review the items in your box as you repack it. 

Your LIVE unboxing video should be at least 20 to 30 minutes long, but don’t be afraid to go a little longer if you have good engagement.
You’re not finished when the LIVE ends. Put that video into an email and send it to your mailing list. You’ll snag some of your audience that didn’t watch the LIVE session and get some more views and more people to follow your CTA. 
Don’t miss this chance to engage with your subscribers and show off the box you’ve put so much time into.
Join me for this episode as I walk you through the process of one of your most important marketing tools - a monthly  LIVE unboxing video. 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Every month I do a LIVE unboxing video for my audience. It’s one of my favorite things to do and one of the best ways to engage with my audience, subscribers and non-subscribers. I teach members of Launch Your Box to do a LIVE unboxing every month as part of their marketing plan. It is SUCH a great way to connect with your subscribers and build community. It’s also an opportunity to create FOMO - showing potential subscribers what they’re missing out on and why they should join. </p><p>In this episode, I walk you through my step-by-step LIVE unboxing process. Follow this process to take the stress and uncertainty out of doing your LIVE unboxing… every month. </p><p>Doing the prep work makes your LIVE stress-free and more likely to reach a lot of people in your audience. </p><p>1. Set a date for your Subscription Box Unboxing</p><ul><li class="ql-indent-1">Setting a firm time for your live session lets your audience know when to expect the event and allows you to set reminders to help build interest.</li></ul><p>2. Set the stage, starting with an active background and good lighting.</p><p>3. Create a hook to pique your audience’s interest and stop the scroll. </p><ul><li class="ql-indent-1">Tell your audience what the video is about and what to expect in the first 15 seconds.</li></ul><p><br></p><p>During your LIVE unboxing video:</p><p>1. Encourage engagement with your audience.</p><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">As soon as you hit that live button and deliver your hook, start interacting with your audience (even if there’s nobody in your chat). </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Realize most of your views will come from the replay. Ask questions then come back and engage. </li>
</ul><p>2. Tell the story of your box.</p><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Share the inspiration behind your subscription box and how you curated it. Help them see how it all fits together. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Get your audience invested in the box before they see it.</li>
</ul><p>3. Show off your highest-level subscription (if you have tiers).</p><ul><li class="ql-indent-1">Sharing your top-level box allows you to show off what you’re capable of and gets subscribers who might have gotten a lower-level box interested.</li></ul><p>4. Include a Call to Action (subscribe, get on the waitlist, etc).</p><p>5. Thank your audience for being there and review the items in your box as you repack it. </p><p><br></p><p>Your LIVE unboxing video should be at least 20 to 30 minutes long, but don’t be afraid to go a little longer if you have good engagement.</p><p>You’re not finished when the LIVE ends. Put that video into an email and send it to your mailing list. You’ll snag some of your audience that didn’t watch the LIVE session and get some more views and more people to follow your CTA. </p><p>Don’t miss this chance to engage with your subscribers and show off the box you’ve put so much time into.</p><p>Join me for this episode as I walk you through the process of one of your most important marketing tools - a monthly  LIVE unboxing video. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1262</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6166d682-9937-11ee-a84a-f7bb73add6a7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1712186356.mp3?updated=1702417664" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Sarah’s Strategies to 100 Subscribers and Beyond</title>
      <description>Have you launched your subscription box but found yourself struggling to grow? Launching your subscription box is a HUGE milestone. Celebrate that! The next HUGE milestone for so many of my members is reaching 100 subscribers. Some - those with large, engaged audiences - do this during their first launch. Most don’t. I didn’t. 
Growing your subscription box to 100 subscribers and beyond takes time. It’s important to give yourself grace and time to get there while still staying focused and holding yourself accountable.
Inside Launch Your Box, I walk my members through what it takes to get their subscription boxes launched. But the launch is not the end. There is more work to do to keep it going - and growing - each month. Which is why we talk about much more than just launching inside LYB. 


It’s constant curation. Keeping up with trends and what your subscribers want. 

It’s constant marketing. Getting yourself out there and in front of new people consistently. 

It’s constant retention. So many subscription box owners make the mistake of focusing only on the acquisition of new subscribers, losing sight of the subscribers they already have. 


Focusing on these three things should drive your business and create long-term recurring revenue. 
So, what got me to my first 100 subscribers and what should you do to get to yours? 

Don’t stop talking about your subscription box. 

You think everyone has seen it. They haven’t. 

You think you’re talking about it enough. You’re not. 

Inside the Launch Your Box Training Library - in the Marketing Module - you’ll find a Subscription Box Social Media resource with posting ideas for EVERY day of the month! 

Not an LYB member yet? Text LAUNCH to 940-204-0023 for a link to join! 

 

Engage. Consistently. 

Be social before and after the sale. 

Retention is a HUGE part of growth - make sure you’re engaging with your subscribers, letting them know how much you appreciate them. 

Your excitement is contagious. 

Create FOMO for those not signed up! 

Create connections with and for your subscribers. 

I don’t recommend private Facebook groups for our subscriptions - you lose a valuable opportunity to create FOMO. 

Create value - it’s not always about the stuff. 

What makes you different and unique? 

Why should someone buy from you and not a big box store? 

Curate the experience your subscribers are looking for - the experience they can’t get from big box stores or even big box subscriptions. 


Everyone can do these simple things to grow their subscriptions. Your launch is only the beginning.
When you’re ready to take your subscription box to the next level, when you’re ready to go deeper… you’re ready for my Scale Your Box course. There’s so much to scaling your box - so many things you can do to grow your business in a manageable, profitable way. 
Join me for this episode where I talk you through what it takes to get you to your first 100 subscribers and beyond!
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 06 Dec 2023 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Sarah’s Strategies to 100 Subscribers and Beyond</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Have you launched your subscription box but found yourself struggling to grow? Launching your subscription box is a HUGE milestone. Celebrate that! The next HUGE milestone for so many of my members is reaching 100 subscribers. Some - those with large, engaged audiences - do this during their first launch. Most don’t. I didn’t.   Growing your subscription box to 100 subscribers and beyond takes time. It’s important to give yourself grace and time to get there while still staying focused and holding yourself accountable.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you launched your subscription box but found yourself struggling to grow? Launching your subscription box is a HUGE milestone. Celebrate that! The next HUGE milestone for so many of my members is reaching 100 subscribers. Some - those with large, engaged audiences - do this during their first launch. Most don’t. I didn’t. 
Growing your subscription box to 100 subscribers and beyond takes time. It’s important to give yourself grace and time to get there while still staying focused and holding yourself accountable.
Inside Launch Your Box, I walk my members through what it takes to get their subscription boxes launched. But the launch is not the end. There is more work to do to keep it going - and growing - each month. Which is why we talk about much more than just launching inside LYB. 


It’s constant curation. Keeping up with trends and what your subscribers want. 

It’s constant marketing. Getting yourself out there and in front of new people consistently. 

It’s constant retention. So many subscription box owners make the mistake of focusing only on the acquisition of new subscribers, losing sight of the subscribers they already have. 


Focusing on these three things should drive your business and create long-term recurring revenue. 
So, what got me to my first 100 subscribers and what should you do to get to yours? 

Don’t stop talking about your subscription box. 

You think everyone has seen it. They haven’t. 

You think you’re talking about it enough. You’re not. 

Inside the Launch Your Box Training Library - in the Marketing Module - you’ll find a Subscription Box Social Media resource with posting ideas for EVERY day of the month! 

Not an LYB member yet? Text LAUNCH to 940-204-0023 for a link to join! 

 

Engage. Consistently. 

Be social before and after the sale. 

Retention is a HUGE part of growth - make sure you’re engaging with your subscribers, letting them know how much you appreciate them. 

Your excitement is contagious. 

Create FOMO for those not signed up! 

Create connections with and for your subscribers. 

I don’t recommend private Facebook groups for our subscriptions - you lose a valuable opportunity to create FOMO. 

Create value - it’s not always about the stuff. 

What makes you different and unique? 

Why should someone buy from you and not a big box store? 

Curate the experience your subscribers are looking for - the experience they can’t get from big box stores or even big box subscriptions. 


Everyone can do these simple things to grow their subscriptions. Your launch is only the beginning.
When you’re ready to take your subscription box to the next level, when you’re ready to go deeper… you’re ready for my Scale Your Box course. There’s so much to scaling your box - so many things you can do to grow your business in a manageable, profitable way. 
Join me for this episode where I talk you through what it takes to get you to your first 100 subscribers and beyond!
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you launched your subscription box but found yourself struggling to grow? Launching your subscription box is a HUGE milestone. Celebrate that! The next HUGE milestone for so many of my members is reaching 100 subscribers. Some - those with large, engaged audiences - do this during their first launch. Most don’t. I didn’t. </p><p>Growing your subscription box to 100 subscribers and beyond takes time. It’s important to give yourself grace and time to get there while still staying focused and holding yourself accountable.</p><p>Inside Launch Your Box, I walk my members through what it takes to get their subscription boxes launched. But the launch is not the end. There is more work to do to keep it going - and growing - each month. Which is why we talk about much more than just launching inside LYB. </p><p><br></p><ul>
<li>It’s constant curation. Keeping up with trends and what your subscribers want. </li>
<li>It’s constant marketing. Getting yourself out there and in front of new people consistently. </li>
<li>It’s constant retention. So many subscription box owners make the mistake of focusing only on the acquisition of new subscribers, losing sight of the subscribers they already have. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Focusing on these three things should drive your business and create long-term recurring revenue. </p><p>So, what got me to my first 100 subscribers and what should you do to get to yours? </p><ul>
<li>Don’t stop talking about your subscription box. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">You think everyone has seen it. They haven’t. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">You think you’re talking about it enough. You’re not. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Inside the Launch Your Box Training Library - in the Marketing Module - you’ll find a Subscription Box Social Media resource with posting ideas for EVERY day of the month! </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Not an LYB member yet? Text LAUNCH to 940-204-0023 for a link to join! </li>
</ul><p> </p><ul>
<li>Engage. Consistently. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Be social before and after the sale. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Retention is a HUGE part of growth - make sure you’re engaging with your subscribers, letting them know how much you appreciate them. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Your excitement is contagious. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Create FOMO for those not signed up! </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Create connections with and for your subscribers. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">I don’t recommend private Facebook groups for our subscriptions - you lose a valuable opportunity to create FOMO. </li>
<li>Create value - it’s not always about the stuff. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">What makes you different and unique? </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Why should someone buy from you and not a big box store? </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Curate the experience your subscribers are looking for - the experience they can’t get from big box stores or even big box subscriptions. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Everyone can do these simple things to grow their subscriptions. Your launch is only the beginning.</p><p>When you’re ready to take your subscription box to the next level, when you’re ready to go deeper… you’re ready for my <a href="http://joinsyb.com/">Scale Your Box</a> course. There’s so much to scaling your box - so many things you can do to grow your business in a manageable, profitable way. </p><p>Join me for this episode where I talk you through what it takes to get you to your first 100 subscribers and beyond!</p><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1287</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6e04cd4a-7763-11ee-b502-ef8f9c656502]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7044069650.mp3?updated=1702417421" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Never Stop Audience Building</title>
      <description>“You can’t just put it out there and expect it to work.” - Pam Rogers 
 
This is a special episode. It’s a replay of our 50th episode! Thank you to all of you who’ve listened and shared - and special thanks for all your 5 Star Reviews! It means so much to me! 
 
I compiled the top ten episodes for the year and found something interesting. All ten of them had a common theme - audience building. 
 
Each of the top ten episodes - and so many others - shows us just how important audience building is. You can’t start your subscription box without an audience. And you can’t grow your subscription box business without continually growing your audience. 
 
On today’s episode, I revisit these top ten episodes and review 5 ways my guests built their audiences. 

Episode 3 - The Riches are in the Niches: Anne went specific when she created a subscription box for women dentists. She knew her ideal customer because she was her ideal customer. 

Episode 14 - 4 Ways to Build Your Audience: Tiffany ran a giveaway, posted on social media consistently, made connections, and partnered with an influencer to build her audience. 

Episode 31 - From an Audience of Zero to 100 Subscribers in 60 Days: Claudia posted consistently on Facebook and Instagram, created IG reels and stories, and added an early bird bonus. 

Episode 33 - Small Audience, No Problem! How Amanda Built 100+ Subscribers from an Audience of 600: Amanda went very specific and served her audience before she sold. 

Episode 38 - From Nurse Practitioner to Subscription Box Owner: Pam set up social media accounts, followed colleagues, and did some very creative in-person marketing when she attended a conference. 

 
Join me for this special episode as I revisit these top ten episodes and these wonderful subscription box owners. Each of these women shared her inspiring subscription box journey with us. Each of them also shared actionable tips and strategies - things they did to grow their audiences which in turn helped them grow their businesses. 
Important Links: 
Links to Top-Ten episodes: 


Episode 3 - The Riches are in the Niches - How one LYB Member Hit $10K Monthly with Her Subscription Box Business 

Episode 5 - Who Will Buy My Box and How Do I Find Them? - Subscription Box Strategies with Damon Oates

Episode 7 - Get Started Right Away with Fast and Messy Action

Episode 9 - Why am I Scared to Show Up Live? | Build an Audience for Your Subscription Box

Episode 14 - 4 Ways to Build Your Audience with Tiffany LeBaron

Episode 39 - Launch Tips with The Lettering Box

Episode 38 - From Nurse Practitioner to Subscription Box Owner

Episode 31 - From an Audience of Zero to 100 Subscribers in 60 Days

Episode 33 - Small Audience, No Problem! How Amanda Built 100+ Subscribers from an Audience of 600

Episode 42 - Consistency Pays Off with Jamie Shahan of CRNA Swag

 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

 Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 29 Nov 2023 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Never Stop Audience Building</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this special episode as I revisit these top ten episodes and these wonderful subscription box owners. Each of these women shared her inspiring subscription box journey with us. Each of them also shared actionable tips and strategies - things they did to grow their audiences which in turn helped them grow their businesses. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“You can’t just put it out there and expect it to work.” - Pam Rogers 
 
This is a special episode. It’s a replay of our 50th episode! Thank you to all of you who’ve listened and shared - and special thanks for all your 5 Star Reviews! It means so much to me! 
 
I compiled the top ten episodes for the year and found something interesting. All ten of them had a common theme - audience building. 
 
Each of the top ten episodes - and so many others - shows us just how important audience building is. You can’t start your subscription box without an audience. And you can’t grow your subscription box business without continually growing your audience. 
 
On today’s episode, I revisit these top ten episodes and review 5 ways my guests built their audiences. 

Episode 3 - The Riches are in the Niches: Anne went specific when she created a subscription box for women dentists. She knew her ideal customer because she was her ideal customer. 

Episode 14 - 4 Ways to Build Your Audience: Tiffany ran a giveaway, posted on social media consistently, made connections, and partnered with an influencer to build her audience. 

Episode 31 - From an Audience of Zero to 100 Subscribers in 60 Days: Claudia posted consistently on Facebook and Instagram, created IG reels and stories, and added an early bird bonus. 

Episode 33 - Small Audience, No Problem! How Amanda Built 100+ Subscribers from an Audience of 600: Amanda went very specific and served her audience before she sold. 

Episode 38 - From Nurse Practitioner to Subscription Box Owner: Pam set up social media accounts, followed colleagues, and did some very creative in-person marketing when she attended a conference. 

 
Join me for this special episode as I revisit these top ten episodes and these wonderful subscription box owners. Each of these women shared her inspiring subscription box journey with us. Each of them also shared actionable tips and strategies - things they did to grow their audiences which in turn helped them grow their businesses. 
Important Links: 
Links to Top-Ten episodes: 


Episode 3 - The Riches are in the Niches - How one LYB Member Hit $10K Monthly with Her Subscription Box Business 

Episode 5 - Who Will Buy My Box and How Do I Find Them? - Subscription Box Strategies with Damon Oates

Episode 7 - Get Started Right Away with Fast and Messy Action

Episode 9 - Why am I Scared to Show Up Live? | Build an Audience for Your Subscription Box

Episode 14 - 4 Ways to Build Your Audience with Tiffany LeBaron

Episode 39 - Launch Tips with The Lettering Box

Episode 38 - From Nurse Practitioner to Subscription Box Owner

Episode 31 - From an Audience of Zero to 100 Subscribers in 60 Days

Episode 33 - Small Audience, No Problem! How Amanda Built 100+ Subscribers from an Audience of 600

Episode 42 - Consistency Pays Off with Jamie Shahan of CRNA Swag

 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

 Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“You can’t just put it out there and expect it to work.” - Pam Rogers </p><p> </p><p>This is a special episode. It’s a replay of our 50th episode! Thank you to all of you who’ve listened and shared - and special thanks for all your 5 Star Reviews! It means so much to me! </p><p> </p><p>I compiled the top ten episodes for the year and found something interesting. All ten of them had a common theme - audience building. </p><p> </p><p>Each of the top ten episodes - and so many others - shows us just how important audience building is. You can’t start your subscription box without an audience. And you can’t grow your subscription box business without continually growing your audience. </p><p> </p><p>On today’s episode, I revisit these top ten episodes and review 5 ways my guests built their audiences. </p><ol>
<li>Episode 3 - The Riches are in the Niches: Anne went specific when she created a subscription box for women dentists. She knew her ideal customer because she <em>was</em> her ideal customer. </li>
<li>Episode 14 - 4 Ways to Build Your Audience: Tiffany ran a giveaway, posted on social media consistently, made connections, and partnered with an influencer to build her audience. </li>
<li>Episode 31 - From an Audience of Zero to 100 Subscribers in 60 Days: Claudia posted consistently on Facebook and Instagram, created IG reels and stories, and added an early bird bonus. </li>
<li>Episode 33 - Small Audience, No Problem! How Amanda Built 100+ Subscribers from an Audience of 600: Amanda went <em>very</em> specific and served her audience before she sold. </li>
<li>Episode 38 - From Nurse Practitioner to Subscription Box Owner: Pam set up social media accounts, followed colleagues, and did some very creative in-person marketing when she attended a conference. </li>
</ol><p> </p><p>Join me for this special episode as I revisit these top ten episodes and these wonderful subscription box owners. Each of these women shared her inspiring subscription box journey with us. Each of them also shared actionable tips and strategies - things they did to grow their audiences which in turn helped them grow their businesses. </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Links to Top-Ten episodes: </p><ol>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-3">Episode 3 - The Riches are in the Niches - How one LYB Member Hit $10K Monthly with Her Subscription Box Business</a> </li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-5">Episode 5 - Who Will Buy My Box and How Do I Find Them? - Subscription Box Strategies with Damon Oates</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-7">Episode 7 - Get Started Right Away with Fast and Messy Action</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-9">Episode 9 - Why am I Scared to Show Up Live? | Build an Audience for Your Subscription Box</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-14">Episode 14 - 4 Ways to Build Your Audience with Tiffany LeBaron</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-39">Episode 39 - Launch Tips with The Lettering Box</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-38">Episode 38 - From Nurse Practitioner to Subscription Box Owner</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-31">Episode 31 - From an Audience of Zero to 100 Subscribers in 60 Days</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-33">Episode 33 - Small Audience, No Problem! How Amanda Built 100+ Subscribers from an Audience of 600</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-42">Episode 42 - Consistency Pays Off with Jamie Shahan of CRNA Swag</a></li>
</ol><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong> Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1815</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[fddba656-7762-11ee-b73d-5ba7f349d732]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2135648647.mp3?updated=1699844247" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>143: Selling Out in 24 Hours Using the Waitlist Plan with Luxury Loops  </title>
      <description>“When you listen to your mentor, things will work.” - Cathy Schwartz
Collecting people, finding your hottest leads, building a foundation for your subscription box launch… It’s all part of the Waitlist Plan I teach inside Launch Your Box. And by following that Waitlist Plan, Cathy Schwartz of Decorator Crafts sold out the launch of her Luxury Loops subscription box in only 24 hours. 
Cathy’s subscription box journey started when she learned to make wreaths and work with ribbon as a way to deal with a stressful corporate job. She fell in love with ribbon, particularly high-end, designer ribbon. She soon realized she wasn’t alone in her love for luxury ribbon - there were a LOT of people who wanted to learn how to decorate with high-end ribbon. Soon, Cathy decided to take the passion and knowledge and launch a monthly subscription box. She also started a private Facebook Group where subscribers go to learn how to decorate with their ribbons and build community. 
Cathy is a member of Launch Your Box and Scale Your Box. She is a dream student who soaks up the training and implements it in her business. This includes the Waitlist Plan. 
The Waitlist Plan is all about consistently driving traffic to your subscription box waitlist. It’s a list of people who have said “Yes, I’m interested in what you’re selling.” They are your warmest leads. A waitlist is not only for your first launch. You need to consistently build your waitlist between launches as well. Just like Cathy does. 
Due to the quantities Cathy’s exclusive ribbons are available in, she adds new subscribers in groups of 48. When she recently launched to new subscribers, she of course started with her waitlist. Just like I teach inside Launch Your Box. But, unlike most subscription box owners, Cathy never had to move on to the next phase of her launch. She sold out her launch to her waitlist in only 24 hours! 
Cathy had a waitlist of 300 people when it was time to launch. 300 very warm leads. She grew that waitlist - and continues to grow it consistently.
Recently, Cathy posted a video of a Christmas Urn project. The response was beyond anything she could have imagined. She gained 6,000 Facebook followers in 72 hours and the video has more than 150,000 views on TikTok. Cathy realized she needed to capture all these people’s emails to bring them into her world. She quickly put together an opt-in for the project and has been busy driving people to her waitlist. 
Cathy serves her audience. She teaches them, she engages with them, and she builds excitement and FOMO with the help of her subscribers. She’s doing all the right things, especially when it comes to following the Waitlist Plan. 
I’m so proud of all Cathy has accomplished in her business. She now has over 500 subscribers and I know that number will continue to grow. 
Join me for this episode and be inspired as Cathy tells us what can happen when you get consistent, follow the plan, and curate an exclusive experience for your subscribers. 
Find and follow Cathy: 

Decorator Crafts on Instagram

Decorator Crafts on Facebook


Luxury Loops Subscription Box  

Decorator Crafts Website

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

﻿ Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 22 Nov 2023 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Selling Out in 24 Hours Using the Waitlist Plan with Luxury Loops  </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>143</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Collecting people, finding your hottest leads, building a foundation for your subscription box launch… It’s all part of the Waitlist Plan I teach inside Launch Your Box. And by following that Waitlist Plan, Cathy Schwartz of Decorator Crafts sold out the launch of her Luxury Loops subscription box in only 24 hours. Join me for this episode and be inspired as Cathy tells us what can happen when you get consistent, follow the plan, and curate an exclusive experience for your subscribers. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“When you listen to your mentor, things will work.” - Cathy Schwartz
Collecting people, finding your hottest leads, building a foundation for your subscription box launch… It’s all part of the Waitlist Plan I teach inside Launch Your Box. And by following that Waitlist Plan, Cathy Schwartz of Decorator Crafts sold out the launch of her Luxury Loops subscription box in only 24 hours. 
Cathy’s subscription box journey started when she learned to make wreaths and work with ribbon as a way to deal with a stressful corporate job. She fell in love with ribbon, particularly high-end, designer ribbon. She soon realized she wasn’t alone in her love for luxury ribbon - there were a LOT of people who wanted to learn how to decorate with high-end ribbon. Soon, Cathy decided to take the passion and knowledge and launch a monthly subscription box. She also started a private Facebook Group where subscribers go to learn how to decorate with their ribbons and build community. 
Cathy is a member of Launch Your Box and Scale Your Box. She is a dream student who soaks up the training and implements it in her business. This includes the Waitlist Plan. 
The Waitlist Plan is all about consistently driving traffic to your subscription box waitlist. It’s a list of people who have said “Yes, I’m interested in what you’re selling.” They are your warmest leads. A waitlist is not only for your first launch. You need to consistently build your waitlist between launches as well. Just like Cathy does. 
Due to the quantities Cathy’s exclusive ribbons are available in, she adds new subscribers in groups of 48. When she recently launched to new subscribers, she of course started with her waitlist. Just like I teach inside Launch Your Box. But, unlike most subscription box owners, Cathy never had to move on to the next phase of her launch. She sold out her launch to her waitlist in only 24 hours! 
Cathy had a waitlist of 300 people when it was time to launch. 300 very warm leads. She grew that waitlist - and continues to grow it consistently.
Recently, Cathy posted a video of a Christmas Urn project. The response was beyond anything she could have imagined. She gained 6,000 Facebook followers in 72 hours and the video has more than 150,000 views on TikTok. Cathy realized she needed to capture all these people’s emails to bring them into her world. She quickly put together an opt-in for the project and has been busy driving people to her waitlist. 
Cathy serves her audience. She teaches them, she engages with them, and she builds excitement and FOMO with the help of her subscribers. She’s doing all the right things, especially when it comes to following the Waitlist Plan. 
I’m so proud of all Cathy has accomplished in her business. She now has over 500 subscribers and I know that number will continue to grow. 
Join me for this episode and be inspired as Cathy tells us what can happen when you get consistent, follow the plan, and curate an exclusive experience for your subscribers. 
Find and follow Cathy: 

Decorator Crafts on Instagram

Decorator Crafts on Facebook


Luxury Loops Subscription Box  

Decorator Crafts Website

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

﻿ Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“When you listen to your mentor, things will work.” - Cathy Schwartz</p><p>Collecting people, finding your hottest leads, building a foundation for your subscription box launch… It’s all part of the Waitlist Plan I teach inside Launch Your Box. And by following that Waitlist Plan, Cathy Schwartz of Decorator Crafts sold out the launch of her Luxury Loops subscription box in only 24 hours. </p><p>Cathy’s subscription box journey started when she learned to make wreaths and work with ribbon as a way to deal with a stressful corporate job. She fell in love with ribbon, particularly high-end, designer ribbon. She soon realized she wasn’t alone in her love for luxury ribbon - there were a LOT of people who wanted to learn how to decorate with high-end ribbon. Soon, Cathy decided to take the passion and knowledge and launch a monthly subscription box. She also started a private Facebook Group where subscribers go to learn how to decorate with their ribbons and build community. </p><p>Cathy is a member of Launch Your Box and Scale Your Box. She is a dream student who soaks up the training and implements it in her business. This includes the Waitlist Plan. </p><p>The Waitlist Plan is all about consistently driving traffic to your subscription box waitlist. It’s a list of people who have said “Yes, I’m interested in what you’re selling.” They are your warmest leads. A waitlist is not only for your first launch. You need to consistently build your waitlist between launches as well. Just like Cathy does. </p><p>Due to the quantities Cathy’s exclusive ribbons are available in, she adds new subscribers in groups of 48. When she recently launched to new subscribers, she of course started with her waitlist. Just like I teach inside Launch Your Box. But, unlike most subscription box owners, Cathy never had to move on to the next phase of her launch. She sold out her launch to her waitlist in only 24 hours! </p><p>Cathy had a waitlist of 300 people when it was time to launch. 300 very warm leads. She grew that waitlist - and continues to grow it consistently.</p><p>Recently, Cathy posted a video of a Christmas Urn project. The response was beyond anything she could have imagined. She gained 6,000 Facebook followers in 72 hours and the video has more than 150,000 views on TikTok. Cathy realized she needed to capture all these people’s emails to bring them into her world. She quickly put together an opt-in for the project and has been busy driving people to her waitlist. </p><p>Cathy serves her audience. She teaches them, she engages with them, and she builds excitement and FOMO with the help of her subscribers. She’s doing all the right things, especially when it comes to following the Waitlist Plan. </p><p>I’m so proud of all Cathy has accomplished in her business. She now has over 500 subscribers and I know that number will continue to grow. </p><p>Join me for this episode and be inspired as Cathy tells us what can happen when you get consistent, follow the plan, and curate an exclusive experience for your subscribers. </p><p>Find and follow Cathy: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/decoratorcrafts/?hl=en&amp;utm_medium=social&amp;utm_source=linktree&amp;utm_campaign=follow%20us%20instagram">Decorator Crafts on Instagram</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/DecoratorCrafts">Decorator Crafts on Facebook</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://decoratorcrafts.com/pages/waitlist?utm_medium=social&amp;utm_source=linktree&amp;utm_campaign=luxury+loops+designer+ribbon+subscription+box">Luxury Loops Subscription Box </a> </li>
<li><a href="https://decoratorcrafts.com/?utm_medium=social&amp;utm_source=linktree&amp;utm_campaign=shop+online">Decorator Crafts Website</a></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿ Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2375</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7949cb7a-8739-11ee-b8df-efee36dc80b9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3663228092.mp3?updated=1700439442" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>142: 5 Ways to Reduce Small Business Overwhelm</title>
      <description>If you’re a small business owner, you are probably experiencing some degree of overwhelm in your business or personal life. Probably both. Because when you’re a small business owner, business and personal overlap and intertwine. A lot. 

Overwhelm can become a major obstacle to success. It can affect your business growth and your personal growth. Personal overwhelm affects your business and business overwhelm affects your personal life. How many times have you been impatient or snippy or overreacted to something because of stress in another part of your life? 

So many business owners operate in a constant state of overwhelm. But it doesn’t have to be that way. In this episode, I’m walking you through five things you can do to help reduce your overwhelm so you can thrive instead of just surviving. 

1. Time Management - There will never be enough hours in the day to get everything done. How we manage our time is crucial to reducing overwhelm. Get more done by: 


  Identifying high-priority tasks.

  Time blocking those tasks.

  Removing distractions.

  Using a timer to stay focused. 


2. Hiring, Outsourcing, Delegating - you can’t keep doing business alone. This means knowing when it’s time to: 


  Hire

  Outsource

  Delegate


3. Setting Realistic Goals and Timelines - entrepreneurs are guilty of always thinking we can get more done in a set amount of time than we actually can. 


  Be honest with yourself. 

  Plan only ONE big rock per quarter. (detailed in my Strategic Yearly Planning Workshop - linked below)


4. Getting Support - feeling supported makes a huge difference to the amount of overwhelm you feel. 


  How can your team support you? 

  How can your spouse support you? 

  How can your children support you? 

  How can your friends and family support you? 

  Seek out other support - housekeeper, grocery deliveries, etc. 


5. Self-care - you need to take time for yourself. Don’t feel guilty about it. 


  Plan self-care time - put it on your calendar. 

  Make time to spend with friends and family. 


Start with one of these items and build it into your routine. Then layer in another. And another. Stop operating in fight or flight mode. Your health and the health of your business depend on it! 

Join me for this episode and learn five things you can do to tackle overwhelm in your subscription box business.



Take my Strategic Yearly Planning Workshop. 



Join me in all the places: 


  Facebook

  Instagram

  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 15 Nov 2023 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>5 Ways to Reduce Small Business Overwhelm</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>142</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>So many business owners operate in a constant state of overwhelm. But it doesn’t have to be that way. In this episode, I’m walking you through five things you can do to help reduce your overwhelm so you can thrive instead of just surviving. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you’re a small business owner, you are probably experiencing some degree of overwhelm in your business or personal life. Probably both. Because when you’re a small business owner, business and personal overlap and intertwine. A lot. 

Overwhelm can become a major obstacle to success. It can affect your business growth and your personal growth. Personal overwhelm affects your business and business overwhelm affects your personal life. How many times have you been impatient or snippy or overreacted to something because of stress in another part of your life? 

So many business owners operate in a constant state of overwhelm. But it doesn’t have to be that way. In this episode, I’m walking you through five things you can do to help reduce your overwhelm so you can thrive instead of just surviving. 

1. Time Management - There will never be enough hours in the day to get everything done. How we manage our time is crucial to reducing overwhelm. Get more done by: 


  Identifying high-priority tasks.

  Time blocking those tasks.

  Removing distractions.

  Using a timer to stay focused. 


2. Hiring, Outsourcing, Delegating - you can’t keep doing business alone. This means knowing when it’s time to: 


  Hire

  Outsource

  Delegate


3. Setting Realistic Goals and Timelines - entrepreneurs are guilty of always thinking we can get more done in a set amount of time than we actually can. 


  Be honest with yourself. 

  Plan only ONE big rock per quarter. (detailed in my Strategic Yearly Planning Workshop - linked below)


4. Getting Support - feeling supported makes a huge difference to the amount of overwhelm you feel. 


  How can your team support you? 

  How can your spouse support you? 

  How can your children support you? 

  How can your friends and family support you? 

  Seek out other support - housekeeper, grocery deliveries, etc. 


5. Self-care - you need to take time for yourself. Don’t feel guilty about it. 


  Plan self-care time - put it on your calendar. 

  Make time to spend with friends and family. 


Start with one of these items and build it into your routine. Then layer in another. And another. Stop operating in fight or flight mode. Your health and the health of your business depend on it! 

Join me for this episode and learn five things you can do to tackle overwhelm in your subscription box business.



Take my Strategic Yearly Planning Workshop. 



Join me in all the places: 


  Facebook

  Instagram

  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you’re a small business owner, you are probably experiencing some degree of overwhelm in your business or personal life. Probably both. Because when you’re a small business owner, business and personal overlap and intertwine. A lot. </p>
<p>Overwhelm can become a major obstacle to success. It can affect your business growth <em>and </em>your personal growth. Personal overwhelm affects your business and business overwhelm affects your personal life. How many times have you been impatient or snippy or overreacted to something because of stress in another part of your life? </p>
<p>So many business owners operate in a constant state of overwhelm. But it doesn’t have to be that way. In this episode, I’m walking you through five things you can do to help reduce your overwhelm so you can thrive instead of just surviving. </p>
<p>1. Time Management - There will never be enough hours in the day to get everything done. How we manage our time is crucial to reducing overwhelm. Get more done by: </p>
<ul>
  <li>Identifying high-priority tasks.</li>
  <li>Time blocking those tasks.</li>
  <li>Removing distractions.</li>
  <li>Using a timer to stay focused. </li>
</ul>
<p>2. Hiring, Outsourcing, Delegating - you can’t keep doing business alone. This means knowing when it’s time to: </p>
<ul>
  <li>Hire</li>
  <li>Outsource</li>
  <li>Delegate</li>
</ul>
<p>3. Setting Realistic Goals and Timelines - entrepreneurs are guilty of always thinking we can get more done in a set amount of time than we actually can. </p>
<ul>
  <li>Be honest with yourself. </li>
  <li>Plan only ONE big rock per quarter. (detailed in my Strategic Yearly Planning Workshop - linked below)</li>
</ul>
<p>4. Getting Support - feeling supported makes a huge difference to the amount of overwhelm you feel. </p>
<ul>
  <li>How can your team support you? </li>
  <li>How can your spouse support you? </li>
  <li>How can your children support you? </li>
  <li>How can your friends and family support you? </li>
  <li>Seek out other support - housekeeper, grocery deliveries, etc. </li>
</ul>
<p>5. Self-care - you need to take time for yourself. Don’t feel guilty about it. </p>
<ul>
  <li>Plan self-care time - put it on your calendar. </li>
  <li>Make time to spend with friends and family. </li>
</ul>
<p>Start with one of these items and build it into your routine. Then layer in another. And another. Stop operating in fight or flight mode. Your health and the health of your business depend on it! </p>
<p>Join me for this episode and learn five things you can do to tackle overwhelm in your subscription box business.</p>
<p><br></p>
<p><strong>Take my </strong><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/strategic-yearly-planning"><strong>Strategic Yearly Planning Workshop</strong></a><strong>. </strong></p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1873</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[56ec44b6-834e-11ee-af22-ab451798f3a8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8890841697.mp3?updated=1700008599" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>141: Over 500 Subscribers with a Super Simple Subscription Model with the Polka Dot Poodle </title>
      <description>Have you gotten stuck trying to decide what to include in your subscription box? You want to give your subscribers everything they could possibly want - but you know it’s not possible to do that and stay profitable. It is so easy for new subscription box owners to overthink everything and end up overwhelmed. One subscription box owner decided to keep things simple - really simple - and now has more than 500 monthly subscribers! 

Meet Launch Your Box member Emily Vincent of The Polka Dot Poodle. Emily is creative and fun and loves to give gifts. She doesn’t just “give” gifts, though - she presents them in a way that makes them seem personal and extra special. Emily is passionate about gift-giving and adding the special touches that take a gift and turn it into an experience for the recipient. 

When Emily first started her business, she was creating all the things. She and I share a love for monograms and she was creating and monogramming products for her many customers. But she quickly found that creating the same item over and over again didn’t bring her joy. When she examined what she loved about her business, she realized what she really loved was designing gift tags for people to give the items she made as gifts. 

So Emily decided to focus on just that. Gift tags. She started a digital subscription where subscribers receive a digital file with that month’s designs and print them themselves. How easy is that?! No printing, no packing, no shipping. Emily’s workload is the same whether she has 10 subscribers or hundreds. 

Emily soon realized that some of her subscribers wanted to receive the gift tags already printed and ready to go. They wanted her to make things even easier and more convenient for them. She was happy to oblige and started another version of her subscription. For these subscribers, Emilly prints the physical gift tags and ships them - just the tags - to her subscribers. Still simple and easy to fulfill. 

Because Emily likes to serve her audience, she recently added another subscription. This one is more custom, more personalized, and more labor-intensive. And yes, it involves monograms. But Emily loves it and so do her subscribers. And she is careful not to take on more subscribers than she can comfortably handle. 

When Emily started her first subscription, she had 37 subscribers. That number has grown to more than 500 subscribers. 500 people who receive gift tags designed by Emily every month. 

Gift tags. How simple is that? 

Emily’s advice to anyone thinking about starting a subscription box? Just start. Develop your idea, create a landing page, grow your email list and social media followers, and just start. She promises it will be worth it. 

Join me for this episode and learn how Emily found subscription box success by focusing on what she loves to do and keeping things simple.

Find and follow Emily: 


  The Polka Dot Poodle on Instagram

  The Polka Dot Poodle on Facebook 

  The Polka Dot Poodle Website


Join me in all the places: 


  Facebook

  Instagram

  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 08 Nov 2023 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Over 500 Subscribers with a Super Simple Subscription Model with the Polka Dot Poodle </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>141</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Meet Launch Your Box member Emily Vincent of The Polka Dot Poodle. Emily is creative and fun and loves to give gifts. She doesn’t just “give” gifts, though - she presents them in a way that makes them seem personal and extra special. Emily is passionate about gift-giving and adding the special touches that take a gift and turn it into an experience for the recipient. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you gotten stuck trying to decide what to include in your subscription box? You want to give your subscribers everything they could possibly want - but you know it’s not possible to do that and stay profitable. It is so easy for new subscription box owners to overthink everything and end up overwhelmed. One subscription box owner decided to keep things simple - really simple - and now has more than 500 monthly subscribers! 

Meet Launch Your Box member Emily Vincent of The Polka Dot Poodle. Emily is creative and fun and loves to give gifts. She doesn’t just “give” gifts, though - she presents them in a way that makes them seem personal and extra special. Emily is passionate about gift-giving and adding the special touches that take a gift and turn it into an experience for the recipient. 

When Emily first started her business, she was creating all the things. She and I share a love for monograms and she was creating and monogramming products for her many customers. But she quickly found that creating the same item over and over again didn’t bring her joy. When she examined what she loved about her business, she realized what she really loved was designing gift tags for people to give the items she made as gifts. 

So Emily decided to focus on just that. Gift tags. She started a digital subscription where subscribers receive a digital file with that month’s designs and print them themselves. How easy is that?! No printing, no packing, no shipping. Emily’s workload is the same whether she has 10 subscribers or hundreds. 

Emily soon realized that some of her subscribers wanted to receive the gift tags already printed and ready to go. They wanted her to make things even easier and more convenient for them. She was happy to oblige and started another version of her subscription. For these subscribers, Emilly prints the physical gift tags and ships them - just the tags - to her subscribers. Still simple and easy to fulfill. 

Because Emily likes to serve her audience, she recently added another subscription. This one is more custom, more personalized, and more labor-intensive. And yes, it involves monograms. But Emily loves it and so do her subscribers. And she is careful not to take on more subscribers than she can comfortably handle. 

When Emily started her first subscription, she had 37 subscribers. That number has grown to more than 500 subscribers. 500 people who receive gift tags designed by Emily every month. 

Gift tags. How simple is that? 

Emily’s advice to anyone thinking about starting a subscription box? Just start. Develop your idea, create a landing page, grow your email list and social media followers, and just start. She promises it will be worth it. 

Join me for this episode and learn how Emily found subscription box success by focusing on what she loves to do and keeping things simple.

Find and follow Emily: 


  The Polka Dot Poodle on Instagram

  The Polka Dot Poodle on Facebook 

  The Polka Dot Poodle Website


Join me in all the places: 


  Facebook

  Instagram

  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you gotten stuck trying to decide what to include in your subscription box? You want to give your subscribers everything they could possibly want - but you know it’s not possible to do that and stay profitable. It is so easy for new subscription box owners to overthink everything and end up overwhelmed. One subscription box owner decided to keep things simple - really simple - and now has more than 500 monthly subscribers! </p>
<p>Meet Launch Your Box member Emily Vincent of The Polka Dot Poodle. Emily is creative and fun and loves to give gifts. She doesn’t just “give” gifts, though - she presents them in a way that makes them seem personal and extra special. Emily is passionate about gift-giving and adding the special touches that take a gift and turn it into an experience for the recipient. </p>
<p>When Emily first started her business, she was creating all the things. She and I share a love for monograms and she was creating and monogramming products for her many customers. But she quickly found that creating the same item over and over again didn’t bring her joy. When she examined what she loved about her business, she realized what she really loved was designing gift tags for people to give the items she made as gifts. </p>
<p>So Emily decided to focus on just that. Gift tags. She started a digital subscription where subscribers receive a digital file with that month’s designs and print them themselves. How easy is that?! No printing, no packing, no shipping. Emily’s workload is the same whether she has 10 subscribers or hundreds. </p>
<p>Emily soon realized that some of her subscribers wanted to receive the gift tags already printed and ready to go. They wanted her to make things even easier and more convenient for them. She was happy to oblige and started another version of her subscription. For these subscribers, Emilly prints the physical gift tags and ships them - just the tags - to her subscribers. Still simple and easy to fulfill. </p>
<p>Because Emily likes to serve her audience, she recently added another subscription. This one is more custom, more personalized, and more labor-intensive. And yes, it involves monograms. But Emily loves it and so do her subscribers. And she is careful not to take on more subscribers than she can comfortably handle. </p>
<p>When Emily started her first subscription, she had 37 subscribers. That number has grown to more than 500 subscribers. 500 people who receive gift tags designed by Emily every month. </p>
<p>Gift tags. How simple is that? </p>
<p>Emily’s advice to anyone thinking about starting a subscription box? Just start. Develop your idea, create a landing page, grow your email list and social media followers, and just start. She promises it will be worth it. </p>
<p>Join me for this episode and learn how Emily found subscription box success by focusing on what she loves to do and keeping things simple.</p>
<p>Find and follow Emily: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/thepolkadotpoodle/">The Polka Dot Poodle on Instagram</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/thepolkadotpoodle">The Polka Dot Poodle on Facebook </a></li>
  <li><a href="https://thepolkadotpoodle.com/">The Polka Dot Poodle Website</a></li>
</ul>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today!</p>
<p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1587</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[419127e8-76b6-11ee-9c78-8769cedc2ae5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8371757653.mp3?updated=1699911800" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>140: Scrub Your Email List and Improve Your Deliverability </title>
      <description>You spend time writing engaging, value-packed emails to send to your list. Emails that - when people read them - help you connect with your audience and generate sales are incredibly valuable to your subscription box business. But are your emails ending up in spam folders? How and why does this happen and how can you keep it from happening? 
One way to maintain a healthy email list is by scrubbing it. Email list scrubbing is the process of regularly cleaning your email list - removing inactive, invalid, or unengaged email addresses. With a scrubbed list, you’re sending your emails to a receptive audience which improves your email marketing performance. 
When you scrub your list, you’re getting rid of people who are weighing it down, costing you money, and bringing you no value. 
A clean list results in: 

Improved deliverability 

Higher open rates

Increased engagement 

Improved ROI 

Not scrubbing your list can result in “list decay,” the gradual decline in the quality of your email list over time. List decay can be caused by: 


Email bounces - occur when the recipient’s email address is invalid, no longer exists, or their mailbox is full.  


Inactive subscribers - people who subscribed to your list but have not engaged with your content or opened emails for an extended period of time. 


Spam traps - emails set up to identify senders with poor list hygiene practices. 


Unsubscribed contacts - continuing to send emails to people who have opted out or unsubscribed. Can also result in legal violations. 


The effects of list decay include reduced deliverability, lower engagement rates, and damage to your reputation as a sender. 
Scrubbing your list to increase its health is obviously beneficial. But… before you scrub your list, I want you to set up a Re-engagement Campaign. 
Reengaging your list is a LOT more cost-effective than growing your list, so make sure you’ve done all you can before removing them. 
Create a set of 2-3 emails that provide value and remind them why they should open and engage with your emails. The hook is VERY important here. Think about what makes you open an email from someone. 
Text me the words SUBJECT LINES to 940-204-0023 and I’ll send you 10 super-engaging subject lines! 
The goal of a re-engagement campaign is simple. Get them to OPEN the email and CLICK over to your website. This will re-engage them on your list. 
After your re-engagement campaign is complete, it’s time to scrub your list. I’m taking you through the steps in Klaviyo, the email CRM we teach inside Launch Your Box. 
First, set up a segment - “Unengaged Segment.” Set the parameters around this segment. Your time frame depends on how frequently you send emails. You can choose 90 days, 120 days, 180 days. I choose 90 days.
How do you know if your email list is healthy? Measure your performance. After you’ve scrubbed your list, look at open rates, click rates, and purchase conversions. The higher these stats are, the healthier your email list is. 
Join me for this episode and learn why the health of your email list matters and how scrubbing your email list regularly can improve your email health and deliverability. 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 


 Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 01 Nov 2023 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Scrub Your Email List and Improve Your Deliverability </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>140</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>You spend time writing engaging, value-packed emails to send to your list. Emails that - when people read them - help you connect with your audience and generate sales are incredibly valuable to your subscription box business. But are your emails ending up in spam folders? How and why does this happen and how can you keep it from happening? </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>You spend time writing engaging, value-packed emails to send to your list. Emails that - when people read them - help you connect with your audience and generate sales are incredibly valuable to your subscription box business. But are your emails ending up in spam folders? How and why does this happen and how can you keep it from happening? 
One way to maintain a healthy email list is by scrubbing it. Email list scrubbing is the process of regularly cleaning your email list - removing inactive, invalid, or unengaged email addresses. With a scrubbed list, you’re sending your emails to a receptive audience which improves your email marketing performance. 
When you scrub your list, you’re getting rid of people who are weighing it down, costing you money, and bringing you no value. 
A clean list results in: 

Improved deliverability 

Higher open rates

Increased engagement 

Improved ROI 

Not scrubbing your list can result in “list decay,” the gradual decline in the quality of your email list over time. List decay can be caused by: 


Email bounces - occur when the recipient’s email address is invalid, no longer exists, or their mailbox is full.  


Inactive subscribers - people who subscribed to your list but have not engaged with your content or opened emails for an extended period of time. 


Spam traps - emails set up to identify senders with poor list hygiene practices. 


Unsubscribed contacts - continuing to send emails to people who have opted out or unsubscribed. Can also result in legal violations. 


The effects of list decay include reduced deliverability, lower engagement rates, and damage to your reputation as a sender. 
Scrubbing your list to increase its health is obviously beneficial. But… before you scrub your list, I want you to set up a Re-engagement Campaign. 
Reengaging your list is a LOT more cost-effective than growing your list, so make sure you’ve done all you can before removing them. 
Create a set of 2-3 emails that provide value and remind them why they should open and engage with your emails. The hook is VERY important here. Think about what makes you open an email from someone. 
Text me the words SUBJECT LINES to 940-204-0023 and I’ll send you 10 super-engaging subject lines! 
The goal of a re-engagement campaign is simple. Get them to OPEN the email and CLICK over to your website. This will re-engage them on your list. 
After your re-engagement campaign is complete, it’s time to scrub your list. I’m taking you through the steps in Klaviyo, the email CRM we teach inside Launch Your Box. 
First, set up a segment - “Unengaged Segment.” Set the parameters around this segment. Your time frame depends on how frequently you send emails. You can choose 90 days, 120 days, 180 days. I choose 90 days.
How do you know if your email list is healthy? Measure your performance. After you’ve scrubbed your list, look at open rates, click rates, and purchase conversions. The higher these stats are, the healthier your email list is. 
Join me for this episode and learn why the health of your email list matters and how scrubbing your email list regularly can improve your email health and deliverability. 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 


 Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>You spend time writing engaging, value-packed emails to send to your list. Emails that - when people read them - help you connect with your audience and generate sales are incredibly valuable to your subscription box business. But are your emails ending up in spam folders? How and why does this happen and how can you keep it from happening? </p><p>One way to maintain a healthy email list is by scrubbing it. Email list scrubbing is the process of regularly cleaning your email list - removing inactive, invalid, or unengaged email addresses. With a scrubbed list, you’re sending your emails to a receptive audience which improves your email marketing performance. </p><p>When you scrub your list, you’re getting rid of people who are weighing it down, costing you money, and bringing you no value. </p><p>A clean list results in: </p><ul>
<li>Improved deliverability </li>
<li>Higher open rates</li>
<li>Increased engagement </li>
<li>Improved ROI </li>
</ul><p>Not scrubbing your list can result in “list decay,” the gradual decline in the quality of your email list over time. List decay can be caused by: </p><ul>
<li>
<strong>Email bounces</strong> - occur when the recipient’s email address is invalid, no longer exists, or their mailbox is full.  </li>
<li>
<strong>Inactive subscribers</strong> - people who subscribed to your list but have not engaged with your content or opened emails for an extended period of time. </li>
<li>
<strong>Spam traps</strong> - emails set up to identify senders with poor list hygiene practices. </li>
<li>
<strong>Unsubscribed contacts</strong> - continuing to send emails to people who have opted out or unsubscribed. <em>Can also result in legal violations. </em>
</li>
</ul><p>The effects of list decay include reduced deliverability, lower engagement rates, and damage to your reputation as a sender. </p><p>Scrubbing your list to increase its health is obviously beneficial. But… before you scrub your list, I want you to set up a<strong> Re-engagement Campaign.</strong> </p><p>Reengaging your list is a LOT more cost-effective than growing your list, so make sure you’ve done all you can before removing them. </p><p>Create a set of 2-3 emails that provide value and remind them why they should open and engage with your emails. The hook is VERY important here. Think about what makes you open an email from someone. </p><p><strong>Text me the words SUBJECT LINES to 940-204-0023 and I’ll send you 10 super-engaging subject lines! </strong></p><p>The goal of a re-engagement campaign is simple. Get them to OPEN the email and CLICK over to your website. This will re-engage them on your list. </p><p>After your re-engagement campaign is complete, it’s time to scrub your list. I’m taking you through the steps in Klaviyo, the email CRM we teach inside Launch Your Box. </p><p>First, set up a segment - “Unengaged Segment.” Set the parameters around this segment. Your time frame depends on how frequently you send emails. You can choose 90 days, 120 days, 180 days. I choose 90 days.</p><p>How do you know if your email list is healthy? Measure your performance. After you’ve scrubbed your list, look at open rates, click rates, and purchase conversions. The higher these stats are, the healthier your email list is. </p><p>Join me for this episode and learn why the health of your email list matters and how scrubbing your email list regularly can improve your email health and deliverability. </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong> Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1328</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6b699942-7535-11ee-849f-6b157bfd4cec]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9040688329.mp3?updated=1700253299" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>139: The Missing Piece to Starting Your Subscription Box with Tabitha Yount </title>
      <description>“Sarah was my missing piece.” - Tabitha Yount 
Do you have a degree in being an entrepreneur? Neither do I! There is SO MUCH to learn when it comes to starting and running your own online business and starting, launching, and growing a subscription box business. Tabitha of Elegant Homes &amp; Interiors discovered she was missing a piece when it came to making her subscription box a success. That piece turned out to be me! 
Tabitha started her professional life as a nurse. She started her marriage as a young bride whose elegant taste in homes and home furnishings was at odds with her budget. Tabitha and her husband’s creative solution was to buy a fixer-upper and turn it into a dream home together. This turned into a series of fixer-uppers - one every year - they bought, renovated, and redecorated then sold them for a profit. 
After doing this for many years and adding three daughters to the mix, Tabitha and her husband decided to make home reno and decorating a full-time career. At the same time, Tabitha started sharing their renovating and decorating journeys on social media. She quickly grew a following of more than 46,000 devoted fans, hungry for inspiration. Tabitha showed them the what but wasn’t yet showing them the how. 
Realizing her audience was ready for more, Tabitha started a paid community where she provided instruction to her audience - teaching them how to achieve the looks she was known for. Soon after, Tabitha was had a conversation with a friend within the online decor community who happens to be a member of Launch Your Box, Scale Your Box, and my Elevate Mastermind. 
This friend encouraged her to take her business a bit more seriously and go all in with a subscription. So Tabitha put the idea out there and was thrilled - and surprised - when 50 people subscribed to her quarterly home decor subscription box. The only problem? Tabitha didn’t know the ins and outs of running a subscription box, especially tech! Her lack of systems and processes quickly caused her to realize things needed to change. Tabitha received some bad advice from someone working for her and shut down her subscription box. 
Right about the time Tabitha realized she didn’t know what she didn’t know and that not knowing it would continue to prevent her from being successful with a subscription box she found me and Launch Your Box. After digging into the training with purpose, Tabitha quickly realized that I was - in her words - the missing piece! 
Tabitha consumed the training inside Launch Your Box - learning and implementing and then learning and implementing some more. She had so many a-ha moments and later relaunched with her systems and processes in place. 
How did that launch go? Well, Tabitha sold out all available spots in her subscription and is looking forward to continuing to learn and grow. 
Join me for this episode and learn how Tabitha nurtured and grew an audience of raving fans and how identifying the missing piece finally put her on the road to subscription box success.
Find and follow Tabitha: 

Elegant Homes &amp; Interiors on Instagram

Elegant Homes &amp; Interiors on Facebook 

Elegant Homes &amp; Interiors Website

Elegant Decor Box

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

 Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 25 Oct 2023 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Missing Piece to Starting Your Subscription Box with Tabitha Yount </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>139</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode and learn how Tabitha nurtured and grew an audience of raving fans and how identifying the missing piece finally put her on the road to subscription box success.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Sarah was my missing piece.” - Tabitha Yount 
Do you have a degree in being an entrepreneur? Neither do I! There is SO MUCH to learn when it comes to starting and running your own online business and starting, launching, and growing a subscription box business. Tabitha of Elegant Homes &amp; Interiors discovered she was missing a piece when it came to making her subscription box a success. That piece turned out to be me! 
Tabitha started her professional life as a nurse. She started her marriage as a young bride whose elegant taste in homes and home furnishings was at odds with her budget. Tabitha and her husband’s creative solution was to buy a fixer-upper and turn it into a dream home together. This turned into a series of fixer-uppers - one every year - they bought, renovated, and redecorated then sold them for a profit. 
After doing this for many years and adding three daughters to the mix, Tabitha and her husband decided to make home reno and decorating a full-time career. At the same time, Tabitha started sharing their renovating and decorating journeys on social media. She quickly grew a following of more than 46,000 devoted fans, hungry for inspiration. Tabitha showed them the what but wasn’t yet showing them the how. 
Realizing her audience was ready for more, Tabitha started a paid community where she provided instruction to her audience - teaching them how to achieve the looks she was known for. Soon after, Tabitha was had a conversation with a friend within the online decor community who happens to be a member of Launch Your Box, Scale Your Box, and my Elevate Mastermind. 
This friend encouraged her to take her business a bit more seriously and go all in with a subscription. So Tabitha put the idea out there and was thrilled - and surprised - when 50 people subscribed to her quarterly home decor subscription box. The only problem? Tabitha didn’t know the ins and outs of running a subscription box, especially tech! Her lack of systems and processes quickly caused her to realize things needed to change. Tabitha received some bad advice from someone working for her and shut down her subscription box. 
Right about the time Tabitha realized she didn’t know what she didn’t know and that not knowing it would continue to prevent her from being successful with a subscription box she found me and Launch Your Box. After digging into the training with purpose, Tabitha quickly realized that I was - in her words - the missing piece! 
Tabitha consumed the training inside Launch Your Box - learning and implementing and then learning and implementing some more. She had so many a-ha moments and later relaunched with her systems and processes in place. 
How did that launch go? Well, Tabitha sold out all available spots in her subscription and is looking forward to continuing to learn and grow. 
Join me for this episode and learn how Tabitha nurtured and grew an audience of raving fans and how identifying the missing piece finally put her on the road to subscription box success.
Find and follow Tabitha: 

Elegant Homes &amp; Interiors on Instagram

Elegant Homes &amp; Interiors on Facebook 

Elegant Homes &amp; Interiors Website

Elegant Decor Box

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

 Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“Sarah was my missing piece.” - Tabitha Yount </p><p>Do you have a degree in being an entrepreneur? Neither do I! There is SO MUCH to learn when it comes to starting and running your own online business and starting, launching, and growing a subscription box business. Tabitha of Elegant Homes &amp; Interiors discovered she was missing a piece when it came to making her subscription box a success. That piece turned out to be me! </p><p>Tabitha started her professional life as a nurse. She started her marriage as a young bride whose elegant taste in homes and home furnishings was at odds with her budget. Tabitha and her husband’s creative solution was to buy a fixer-upper and turn it into a dream home together. This turned into a series of fixer-uppers - one every year - they bought, renovated, and redecorated then sold them for a profit. </p><p>After doing this for many years and adding three daughters to the mix, Tabitha and her husband decided to make home reno and decorating a full-time career. At the same time, Tabitha started sharing their renovating and decorating journeys on social media. She quickly grew a following of more than 46,000 devoted fans, hungry for inspiration. Tabitha showed them the what but wasn’t yet showing them the how. </p><p>Realizing her audience was ready for more, Tabitha started a paid community where she provided instruction to her audience - teaching them how to achieve the looks she was known for. Soon after, Tabitha was had a conversation with a friend within the online decor community who happens to be a member of Launch Your Box, Scale Your Box, and my Elevate Mastermind. </p><p>This friend encouraged her to take her business a bit more seriously and go all in with a subscription. So Tabitha put the idea out there and was thrilled - and surprised - when 50 people subscribed to her quarterly home decor subscription box. The only problem? Tabitha didn’t know the ins and outs of running a subscription box, especially tech! Her lack of systems and processes quickly caused her to realize things needed to change. Tabitha received some bad advice from someone working for her and shut down her subscription box. </p><p>Right about the time Tabitha realized she didn’t know what she didn’t know and that not knowing it would continue to prevent her from being successful with a subscription box she found me and Launch Your Box. After digging into the training with purpose, Tabitha quickly realized that I was - in her words - the missing piece! </p><p>Tabitha consumed the training inside Launch Your Box - learning and implementing and then learning and implementing some more. She had so many a-ha moments and later relaunched with her systems and processes in place. </p><p>How did that launch go? Well, Tabitha sold out all available spots in her subscription and is looking forward to continuing to learn and grow. </p><p>Join me for this episode and learn how Tabitha nurtured and grew an audience of raving fans and how identifying the missing piece finally put her on the road to subscription box success.</p><p>Find and follow Tabitha: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/eleganthomesandinteriors/ornments_decor//">Elegant Homes &amp; Interiors on Instagram</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/elegantinteriorsbytabithayountdoornmentsdecor">Elegant Homes &amp; Interiors on Facebook </a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.tabithayount.com/?fbclid=IwAR1Sk5PE_ziR99Elc6LxbWvlJ_0w9FQPQEMzVQs0vh0ylOe85Wiixv-lgvU">Elegant Homes &amp; Interiors Website</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.tabithayount.com/copy-of-elegant-decor-box">Elegant Decor Box</a></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong> Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2210</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[216f0b76-71f0-11ee-aa18-2b33aa4d4449]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8879915063.mp3?updated=1699911988" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>138: Building $10K in Monthly Recurring Revenue with a Digital Subscription with Tamara Bennett </title>
      <description>Have you ever thought about starting a digital subscription? Can you imagine what $10,000 in monthly passive income could do for your business? One subscription box owner has done just that with her Template Club. 
I’m interviewing one of my biz besties on this episode. I’m so excited to have Tamara back on the podcast to share another way she has brought a LOT of revenue into her business by staying focused on serving her customers where they are. 
Tamara has a very successful home decor business, specializing in door hangers. She teaches thousands of women all over the country how to paint door hangers. She also creates custom door hanger designs and cuts those designs out of wood. Not so long ago, Tamara decided (with more than a little bit of urging from me) to start a subscription box. The Big Box of Blanks - her quarterly subscription - was born and quickly became a huge success. 
For today’s episode, I wanted to focus on another of Tamara’s offerings - her digital subscription, The Template Club. Tamara releases 5 new door hanger template designs every week. She noticed she had a LOT of customers who returned each week to purchase all of the new designs. In order to serve them better, she created a digital subscription - The Template Club. Members of The Template Club get all of the new designs each month for one low monthly cost. This is a win-win. Tamara’s customers save money and she benefits from recurring monthly revenue coming into her business. 
At its peak, The Template Club had over 600 members. Currently, there are 350 subscribers. The reason for the decrease in subscribers is simple - The Template Club hasn’t been the main thing. It hasn’t consistently gotten enough visibility among Tamara’s other offerings. Her goal is to put more focus on The Template Club and build it back up over the next year. 
One of the best things about Tamara’s digital subscription - and any digital subscription - is she creates the product one time and then sells as many as possible. Once the design has been created and released, the only thing left to do is automatically fulfill those orders. No packing, no shipping, no managing inventory. Digital subscriptions have a LOT of upsides. 
Tamara’s biggest challenge is producing a large number of original designs every month. She solves this challenge by planning ahead and working with a team of designers. She has also worked through tech fulfillment challenges that necessitated a change in platform. 
Tamara developed the door hanger template as a product in response to a problem her customers were having. Her desire to serve her customers and her willingness to create a solution to a problem led to a thriving product in her business creating and selling door-hanger templates. 
Join me for this episode and learn how Tamara brings more than $10,000 in monthly recurring revenue to her business by focusing on serving her customers’ needs. 
Find and follow Tamara: 

Southern Adoornments Decor on Instagram

Southern Adoornments Decor on Facebook 

Southern Adoornments Decor Website

The Template Club

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

 Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 18 Oct 2023 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Building $10K in Monthly Recurring Revenue with a Digital Subscription with Tamara Bennett </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>138</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I’m interviewing one of my biz besties on this episode. I’m so excited to have Tamara back on the podcast to share another way she has brought a LOT of revenue into her business by staying focused on serving her customers where they are. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you ever thought about starting a digital subscription? Can you imagine what $10,000 in monthly passive income could do for your business? One subscription box owner has done just that with her Template Club. 
I’m interviewing one of my biz besties on this episode. I’m so excited to have Tamara back on the podcast to share another way she has brought a LOT of revenue into her business by staying focused on serving her customers where they are. 
Tamara has a very successful home decor business, specializing in door hangers. She teaches thousands of women all over the country how to paint door hangers. She also creates custom door hanger designs and cuts those designs out of wood. Not so long ago, Tamara decided (with more than a little bit of urging from me) to start a subscription box. The Big Box of Blanks - her quarterly subscription - was born and quickly became a huge success. 
For today’s episode, I wanted to focus on another of Tamara’s offerings - her digital subscription, The Template Club. Tamara releases 5 new door hanger template designs every week. She noticed she had a LOT of customers who returned each week to purchase all of the new designs. In order to serve them better, she created a digital subscription - The Template Club. Members of The Template Club get all of the new designs each month for one low monthly cost. This is a win-win. Tamara’s customers save money and she benefits from recurring monthly revenue coming into her business. 
At its peak, The Template Club had over 600 members. Currently, there are 350 subscribers. The reason for the decrease in subscribers is simple - The Template Club hasn’t been the main thing. It hasn’t consistently gotten enough visibility among Tamara’s other offerings. Her goal is to put more focus on The Template Club and build it back up over the next year. 
One of the best things about Tamara’s digital subscription - and any digital subscription - is she creates the product one time and then sells as many as possible. Once the design has been created and released, the only thing left to do is automatically fulfill those orders. No packing, no shipping, no managing inventory. Digital subscriptions have a LOT of upsides. 
Tamara’s biggest challenge is producing a large number of original designs every month. She solves this challenge by planning ahead and working with a team of designers. She has also worked through tech fulfillment challenges that necessitated a change in platform. 
Tamara developed the door hanger template as a product in response to a problem her customers were having. Her desire to serve her customers and her willingness to create a solution to a problem led to a thriving product in her business creating and selling door-hanger templates. 
Join me for this episode and learn how Tamara brings more than $10,000 in monthly recurring revenue to her business by focusing on serving her customers’ needs. 
Find and follow Tamara: 

Southern Adoornments Decor on Instagram

Southern Adoornments Decor on Facebook 

Southern Adoornments Decor Website

The Template Club

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

 Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you ever thought about starting a digital subscription? Can you imagine what $10,000 in monthly passive income could do for your business? One subscription box owner has done just that with her Template Club. </p><p>I’m interviewing one of my biz besties on this episode. I’m so excited to have Tamara back on the podcast to share another way she has brought a LOT of revenue into her business by staying focused on serving her customers where they are. </p><p>Tamara has a very successful home decor business, specializing in door hangers. She teaches thousands of women all over the country how to paint door hangers. She also creates custom door hanger designs and cuts those designs out of wood. Not so long ago, Tamara decided (with more than a little bit of urging from me) to start a subscription box. The Big Box of Blanks - her quarterly subscription - was born and quickly became a huge success. </p><p>For today’s episode, I wanted to focus on another of Tamara’s offerings - her digital subscription, The Template Club. Tamara releases 5 new door hanger template designs every week. She noticed she had a LOT of customers who returned each week to purchase all of the new designs. In order to serve them better, she created a digital subscription - The Template Club. Members of The Template Club get all of the new designs each month for one low monthly cost. This is a win-win. Tamara’s customers save money and she benefits from recurring monthly revenue coming into her business. </p><p>At its peak, The Template Club had over 600 members. Currently, there are 350 subscribers. The reason for the decrease in subscribers is simple - The Template Club hasn’t been the main thing. It hasn’t consistently gotten enough visibility among Tamara’s other offerings. Her goal is to put more focus on The Template Club and build it back up over the next year. </p><p>One of the best things about Tamara’s digital subscription - and any digital subscription - is she creates the product one time and then sells as many as possible. Once the design has been created and released, the only thing left to do is automatically fulfill those orders. No packing, no shipping, no managing inventory. Digital subscriptions have a LOT of upsides. </p><p>Tamara’s biggest challenge is producing a large number of original designs every month. She solves this challenge by planning ahead and working with a team of designers. She has also worked through tech fulfillment challenges that necessitated a change in platform. </p><p>Tamara developed the door hanger template as a product in response to a problem her customers were having. Her desire to serve her customers and her willingness to create a solution to a problem led to a thriving product in her business creating and selling door-hanger templates. </p><p>Join me for this episode and learn how Tamara brings more than $10,000 in monthly recurring revenue to her business by focusing on serving her customers’ needs. </p><p>Find and follow Tamara: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/southern_adoornments_decor//">Southern Adoornments Decor on Instagram</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/southernadoornmentsdecor">Southern Adoornments Decor on Facebook </a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.southernadoornmentsdecor.com/wAR2l341RD4QjXzgR2KGw_MvIgm5BUlPFZ68KIXxco_1YxZMGrKK_irzpwBE">Southern Adoornments Decor Website</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.southernadoornmentsdecor.com/template-club/">The Template Club</a></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong> Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1545</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6104d1d6-6c90-11ee-a8d0-63c2fd61f82b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7006558435.mp3?updated=1699911978" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>137: Give Q4 a Boost by Staying Focused on Revenue Generating Activities</title>
      <description>Ready or not, the 4th quarter is here. It’s time to sell! The 4th quarter is crucial for any small business. It can make or break your year and generate the momentum you need going into the next year. The 4th quarter matters. I’ve been through nine 4th quarters in my business and I’ve learned a LOT along the way. 
In this episode, we’re talking about four areas you need to focus on during this important time of the year in order to maximize your revenue before year-end.

Building Your Q4 Sales Strategy 

Inventory 

Have it

Manage it

Create demand for it

Holiday Promotions

Gift Guides 

Marketing &amp; Advertising 

Email Marketing - the money is in your list! 

A consistent plan is crucial.

Segment your list and send targeted emails. 

Have abandoned cart flows and browse abandonment flows set up! 

Social Media Schedule - consistency is king! 

Paid Ads - target specific demographics, interests, and behaviors.

Prepping for Peak Sales Days  

Customer Service 

Make this a priority! 

Schedule time for it!

You’ll have a lot of first-time customers - make their experience a good one! 

Social Media Response Time

Answer questions &amp; respond to comments promptly. 

Clearly Communicate Urgency &amp; Deadlines

Banners on home page 

Flash sales  

Promotional codes

Free shipping thresholds 

Christmas shipping deadlines 

Managing Logistics &amp; Fulfillment   

Clearly outline shipping and processing timelines. 

Make sure you have enough staff to handle the influx of orders. 

Hire temporary staff for the holidays.

Have current staff work extended days/hours.

Conduct a supply inventory NOW! 

Bags 

Boxes

Tape

Shipping labels

Etc. 

Holiday Packaging

How will you uplevel your customers’ experience this season? 

That sounds like a lot of extra work to do, doesn’t it? And it is. But it is all SO important. So it’s time to ask yourself, “What can I eliminate from my day-to-day so I can focus on these revenue-generating activities?” 
Now is not the time to start a blog or podcast. It’s not time to create a new ebook or opt-in. It’s not time to build a new website or plan for 2024. 
Now is the time to focus on SALES and the activities that generate those sales. 
The 4th quarter is here! Join me for this episode as I walk you through 4 areas of focus you need to jump into right now to make the most of your 4th quarter. 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!

 Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 11 Oct 2023 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Give Q4 a Boost by Staying Focused on Revenue Generating Activities</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>137</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Ready or not, the 4th quarter is here. It’s time to sell! The 4th quarter is crucial for any small business. It can make or break your year and generate the momentum you need going into the next year. The 4th quarter matters. I’ve been through nine 4th quarters in my business and I’ve learned a LOT along the way. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Ready or not, the 4th quarter is here. It’s time to sell! The 4th quarter is crucial for any small business. It can make or break your year and generate the momentum you need going into the next year. The 4th quarter matters. I’ve been through nine 4th quarters in my business and I’ve learned a LOT along the way. 
In this episode, we’re talking about four areas you need to focus on during this important time of the year in order to maximize your revenue before year-end.

Building Your Q4 Sales Strategy 

Inventory 

Have it

Manage it

Create demand for it

Holiday Promotions

Gift Guides 

Marketing &amp; Advertising 

Email Marketing - the money is in your list! 

A consistent plan is crucial.

Segment your list and send targeted emails. 

Have abandoned cart flows and browse abandonment flows set up! 

Social Media Schedule - consistency is king! 

Paid Ads - target specific demographics, interests, and behaviors.

Prepping for Peak Sales Days  

Customer Service 

Make this a priority! 

Schedule time for it!

You’ll have a lot of first-time customers - make their experience a good one! 

Social Media Response Time

Answer questions &amp; respond to comments promptly. 

Clearly Communicate Urgency &amp; Deadlines

Banners on home page 

Flash sales  

Promotional codes

Free shipping thresholds 

Christmas shipping deadlines 

Managing Logistics &amp; Fulfillment   

Clearly outline shipping and processing timelines. 

Make sure you have enough staff to handle the influx of orders. 

Hire temporary staff for the holidays.

Have current staff work extended days/hours.

Conduct a supply inventory NOW! 

Bags 

Boxes

Tape

Shipping labels

Etc. 

Holiday Packaging

How will you uplevel your customers’ experience this season? 

That sounds like a lot of extra work to do, doesn’t it? And it is. But it is all SO important. So it’s time to ask yourself, “What can I eliminate from my day-to-day so I can focus on these revenue-generating activities?” 
Now is not the time to start a blog or podcast. It’s not time to create a new ebook or opt-in. It’s not time to build a new website or plan for 2024. 
Now is the time to focus on SALES and the activities that generate those sales. 
The 4th quarter is here! Join me for this episode as I walk you through 4 areas of focus you need to jump into right now to make the most of your 4th quarter. 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!

 Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ready or not, the 4th quarter is here. It’s time to sell! The 4th quarter is crucial for any small business. It can make or break your year and generate the momentum you need going into the next year. The 4th quarter matters. I’ve been through nine 4th quarters in my business and I’ve learned a LOT along the way. </p><p>In this episode, we’re talking about four areas you need to focus on during this important time of the year in order to maximize your revenue <em>before</em> year-end.</p><ul>
<li>Building Your Q4 Sales Strategy </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Inventory </li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Have it</li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Manage it</li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Create demand for it</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Holiday Promotions</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Gift Guides </li>
<li>Marketing &amp; Advertising </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Email Marketing - the money is in your list! </li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">A consistent plan is crucial.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Segment your list and send targeted emails. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Have abandoned cart flows and browse abandonment flows set up! </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Social Media Schedule - consistency is king! </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Paid Ads - target specific demographics, interests, and behaviors.</li>
<li>Prepping for Peak Sales Days  </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Customer Service </li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Make this a priority! </li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Schedule time for it!</li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">You’ll have a lot of first-time customers - make their experience a good one! </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Social Media Response Time</li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Answer questions &amp; respond to comments promptly. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Clearly Communicate Urgency &amp; Deadlines</li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Banners on home page </li>
<li class="ql-indent-3">Flash sales  </li>
<li class="ql-indent-3">Promotional codes</li>
<li class="ql-indent-3">Free shipping thresholds </li>
<li class="ql-indent-3">Christmas shipping deadlines </li>
<li>Managing Logistics &amp; Fulfillment   </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Clearly outline shipping and processing timelines. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Make sure you have enough staff to handle the influx of orders. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Hire temporary staff for the holidays.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Have current staff work extended days/hours.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Conduct a supply inventory NOW! </li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Bags </li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Boxes</li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Tape</li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Shipping labels</li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Etc. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Holiday Packaging</li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">How will you uplevel your customers’ experience this season? </li>
</ul><p>That sounds like a lot of extra work to do, doesn’t it? And it is. But it is all SO important. So it’s time to ask yourself, “What can I eliminate from my day-to-day so I can focus on these revenue-generating activities?” </p><p>Now is not the time to start a blog or podcast. It’s not time to create a new ebook or opt-in. It’s not time to build a new website or plan for 2024. </p><p>Now is the time to focus on SALES and the activities that generate those sales. </p><p>The 4th quarter is here! Join me for this episode as I walk you through 4 areas of focus you need to jump into right now to make the most of your 4th quarter. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today!</p><p><br></p><p><strong> Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1390</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b397c94c-67ba-11ee-b163-4f3ceed7d903]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7010903386.mp3?updated=1699911963" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>136: Pros &amp; Cons of a Quarterly Subscription Box</title>
      <description>“Is it better to have a monthly or quarterly subscription box?” 
This question comes up a lot inside Launch Your Box and on the How to Start a Subscription Box public Facebook page. The truth is, there is no one answer to this question. No right or wrong when it comes to choosing a monthly or quarterly box. There’s only the answer that’s right for you. 
Your answer to whether a monthly or quarterly box is right for you and your business depends on your goals for your business and what is most important to you as a business owner. 
Each model has its benefits and its drawbacks. It’s important to understand both before making a decision about the frequency of your subscription box. 
The pros and cons of a quarterly subscription box:
1. Revenue

Con - a quarterly subscription model can cause financial strain during the “off” months. 

Pro - you can typically charge more for a quarterly box, allowing for greater profit and more revenue.

2. Curation/Products  

Pro - you only have to curate a box four times a year! 

Pro - your subscriber only gets four boxes a year to consume. This can lead to greater subscriber satisfaction and less churn. 3

3. Frequency/Recency 

Con - lack of engagement. The time between each box can cause a sense of disengagement for subscribers. They’re not getting the constant reminders of something new coming like they do with monthly boxes. 

Con - not having enough content. It can be very challenging to stretch out the content from one box to last for three months until the next box comes out. Content can get stale. 

4. Time   
Pro - the monthly grind of curation/fulfillment/customer service is a full-time commitment. A quarterly box allows you the space and freedom to do other things. 

Top cons of a quarterly subscription box:

No monthly recurring revenue.

Lack of engagement in your community.

Lack of content to market and promote your box and brand consistently. 


Top pros of a quarterly subscription box: 

Ability to charge more for a quarterly box, increasing the amount of revenue per box. 

Only have to curate four boxes a year instead of 12. 

Subscribers are less likely to cancel due to inability to consume the box. 

You get a break from the curation/fulfillment/customer service cycle. 


We’ve talked about monthly and quarterly boxes and the pros and cons of each. But, there is one other option and it seems to be gaining in popularity: bi-monthly subscription boxes. Bi-monthly boxes are curated and fulfilled every other month. Some subscription box owners and subscribers find this to be just the right balance between a monthly box and a quarterly box. 

Join me for this episode as I talk about why there’s not an easy answer to the question, “Is it better to have a monthly or quarterly subscription box?” and walk you through the pros and cons of each. 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!

﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 04 Oct 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Pros &amp; Cons of a Quarterly Subscription Box</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>136</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>We’ve talked about monthly and quarterly boxes and the pros and cons of each. But, there is one other option and it seems to be gaining in popularity: bi-monthly subscription boxes. Bi-monthly boxes are curated and fulfilled every other month. Some subscription box owners and subscribers find this to be just the right balance between a monthly box and a quarterly box.     Join me for this episode as I talk about why there’s not an easy answer to the question, “Is it better to have a monthly or quarterly subscription box?” and walk you through the pros and cons of each. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Is it better to have a monthly or quarterly subscription box?” 
This question comes up a lot inside Launch Your Box and on the How to Start a Subscription Box public Facebook page. The truth is, there is no one answer to this question. No right or wrong when it comes to choosing a monthly or quarterly box. There’s only the answer that’s right for you. 
Your answer to whether a monthly or quarterly box is right for you and your business depends on your goals for your business and what is most important to you as a business owner. 
Each model has its benefits and its drawbacks. It’s important to understand both before making a decision about the frequency of your subscription box. 
The pros and cons of a quarterly subscription box:
1. Revenue

Con - a quarterly subscription model can cause financial strain during the “off” months. 

Pro - you can typically charge more for a quarterly box, allowing for greater profit and more revenue.

2. Curation/Products  

Pro - you only have to curate a box four times a year! 

Pro - your subscriber only gets four boxes a year to consume. This can lead to greater subscriber satisfaction and less churn. 3

3. Frequency/Recency 

Con - lack of engagement. The time between each box can cause a sense of disengagement for subscribers. They’re not getting the constant reminders of something new coming like they do with monthly boxes. 

Con - not having enough content. It can be very challenging to stretch out the content from one box to last for three months until the next box comes out. Content can get stale. 

4. Time   
Pro - the monthly grind of curation/fulfillment/customer service is a full-time commitment. A quarterly box allows you the space and freedom to do other things. 

Top cons of a quarterly subscription box:

No monthly recurring revenue.

Lack of engagement in your community.

Lack of content to market and promote your box and brand consistently. 


Top pros of a quarterly subscription box: 

Ability to charge more for a quarterly box, increasing the amount of revenue per box. 

Only have to curate four boxes a year instead of 12. 

Subscribers are less likely to cancel due to inability to consume the box. 

You get a break from the curation/fulfillment/customer service cycle. 


We’ve talked about monthly and quarterly boxes and the pros and cons of each. But, there is one other option and it seems to be gaining in popularity: bi-monthly subscription boxes. Bi-monthly boxes are curated and fulfilled every other month. Some subscription box owners and subscribers find this to be just the right balance between a monthly box and a quarterly box. 

Join me for this episode as I talk about why there’s not an easy answer to the question, “Is it better to have a monthly or quarterly subscription box?” and walk you through the pros and cons of each. 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!

﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“Is it better to have a monthly or quarterly subscription box?” </p><p>This question comes up a lot inside Launch Your Box and on the How to Start a Subscription Box public Facebook page. The truth is, there is no one answer to this question. No right or wrong when it comes to choosing a monthly or quarterly box. There’s only the answer that’s right for you. </p><p>Your answer to whether a monthly or quarterly box is right for you and your business depends on your goals for your business and what is most important to you as a business owner. </p><p>Each model has its benefits and its drawbacks. It’s important to understand both before making a decision about the frequency of your subscription box. </p><p>The pros and cons of a quarterly subscription box:</p><p>1. Revenue</p><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Con - a quarterly subscription model can cause financial strain during the “off” months. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Pro - you can typically charge more for a quarterly box, allowing for greater profit and more revenue.</li>
</ul><p>2. Curation/Products  </p><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Pro - you only have to curate a box four times a year! </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Pro - your subscriber only gets four boxes a year to consume. This can lead to greater subscriber satisfaction and less churn. 3</li>
</ul><p>3. Frequency/Recency </p><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Con - lack of engagement. The time between each box can cause a sense of disengagement for subscribers. They’re not getting the constant reminders of something new coming like they do with monthly boxes. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Con - not having enough content. It can be very challenging to stretch out the content from one box to last for three months until the next box comes out. Content can get stale. </li>
</ul><p>4. Time   </p><ul><li class="ql-indent-1">Pro - the monthly grind of curation/fulfillment/customer service is a full-time commitment. A quarterly box allows you the space and freedom to do other things. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Top cons of a quarterly subscription box:</p><ol>
<li>No monthly recurring revenue.</li>
<li>Lack of engagement in your community.</li>
<li>Lack of content to market and promote your box and brand consistently. </li>
</ol><p><br></p><p>Top pros of a quarterly subscription box: </p><ol>
<li>Ability to charge more for a quarterly box, increasing the amount of revenue per box. </li>
<li>Only have to curate four boxes a year instead of 12. </li>
<li>Subscribers are less likely to cancel due to inability to consume the box. </li>
<li>You get a break from the curation/fulfillment/customer service cycle. </li>
</ol><p><br></p><p>We’ve talked about monthly and quarterly boxes and the pros and cons of each. But, there is one other option and it seems to be gaining in popularity: bi-monthly subscription boxes. Bi-monthly boxes are curated and fulfilled every other month. Some subscription box owners and subscribers find this to be just the right balance between a monthly box and a quarterly box. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as I talk about why there’s not an easy answer to the question, “Is it better to have a monthly or quarterly subscription box?” and walk you through the pros and cons of each. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today!</p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>912</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9862fbd8-5f45-11ee-8fa6-1bfab0a18b40]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3469769586.mp3?updated=1699911952" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>135: 750 Pillow Subscriptions Sold in 5 Days with Wilshire Collections</title>
      <description>Generating excitement and creating FOMO are great ways to market your offer. Spending three months hyping up a new offer led to this subscription box owner’s dream of selling her own pillow designs coming true. And… It resulted in selling 750 pillow subscriptions in only five days. The best part? She doesn’t have to pack or ship a thing. 
I’m so excited to welcome Stacey Collins to the podcast again as my first-ever three-time guest! Stacey is also a member of Launch Your Box, Scale Your Box, and my Elevate Mastermind! She truly invests in herself and her business. 
Stacey’s subscription journey has some twists and turns - and a lot of successes. She started with a quarterly home decor box, which was a big hit. But when the demands of fulfilling a highly curated box started to outweigh the benefits, she changed gears. Stacey shut down that physical description but soon turned to a different type of description - a monthly digital subscription. Today, Stacey has more than 2,000 digital subscribers! 
Earlier this year, Stacey and I were talking about her business and she shared her long-held dream of selling her own decorative pillows. Stacey LOVES pillows. Her audience knows she loves pillows and so many of them do, too. What Stacey doesn’t love is packing and shipping large numbers of products. There was an easy solution to Stacey’s problem. Using a fulfillment company. I connected her with a fulfillment center I interviewed on episode 61 of this podcast. 
The fulfillment center was the perfect solution. Stacey designs the pillow covers and works closely with the manufacturer to make sure the design and quality of the pillow covers are exactly what she wants. Then the pillow covers are shipped directly to the fulfillment center where they are packed and shipped, again to Stacey’s specifications. 
Stacey initially set a launch goal of 500 subscriptions. I challenged her to increase that goal because I knew what a large, engaged audience she had. And I knew she was going to follow my 5-day launch plan to a tee. And she did. 
Stacey’s biggest challenge? Launching without having anything to show her audience. The pillow covers needed to be a surprise. She had a few sneak peeks to share but relied on the trust she’d built with her audience to convince them to take this leap with her. Stacey spent THREE MONTHS creating excitement around her big announcement. She got her already highly engaged audience excited, built anticipation, and created FOMO. 
And when Stacey did launch? She sold 750 pillow subscriptions in only 5 days! 
Join me for this episode and learn what drives Stacey to continue to find new ways to serve her audience and grow her subscription business, and find out how close she is to hitting her goal of 1000 pillow subscriptions. 
Find and follow Stacey: 

Wilshire Collections on Instagram


Wilshire Collections on Facebook 

Wilshire Collections Website

The Pillow Cover Club

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 



﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 27 Sep 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>750 Pillow Subscriptions Sold in 5 Days with Wilshire Collections</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>135</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode and learn what drives Stacey to continue to find new ways to serve her audience and grow her subscription business, and find out how close she is to hitting her goal of 1000 pillow subscriptions. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Generating excitement and creating FOMO are great ways to market your offer. Spending three months hyping up a new offer led to this subscription box owner’s dream of selling her own pillow designs coming true. And… It resulted in selling 750 pillow subscriptions in only five days. The best part? She doesn’t have to pack or ship a thing. 
I’m so excited to welcome Stacey Collins to the podcast again as my first-ever three-time guest! Stacey is also a member of Launch Your Box, Scale Your Box, and my Elevate Mastermind! She truly invests in herself and her business. 
Stacey’s subscription journey has some twists and turns - and a lot of successes. She started with a quarterly home decor box, which was a big hit. But when the demands of fulfilling a highly curated box started to outweigh the benefits, she changed gears. Stacey shut down that physical description but soon turned to a different type of description - a monthly digital subscription. Today, Stacey has more than 2,000 digital subscribers! 
Earlier this year, Stacey and I were talking about her business and she shared her long-held dream of selling her own decorative pillows. Stacey LOVES pillows. Her audience knows she loves pillows and so many of them do, too. What Stacey doesn’t love is packing and shipping large numbers of products. There was an easy solution to Stacey’s problem. Using a fulfillment company. I connected her with a fulfillment center I interviewed on episode 61 of this podcast. 
The fulfillment center was the perfect solution. Stacey designs the pillow covers and works closely with the manufacturer to make sure the design and quality of the pillow covers are exactly what she wants. Then the pillow covers are shipped directly to the fulfillment center where they are packed and shipped, again to Stacey’s specifications. 
Stacey initially set a launch goal of 500 subscriptions. I challenged her to increase that goal because I knew what a large, engaged audience she had. And I knew she was going to follow my 5-day launch plan to a tee. And she did. 
Stacey’s biggest challenge? Launching without having anything to show her audience. The pillow covers needed to be a surprise. She had a few sneak peeks to share but relied on the trust she’d built with her audience to convince them to take this leap with her. Stacey spent THREE MONTHS creating excitement around her big announcement. She got her already highly engaged audience excited, built anticipation, and created FOMO. 
And when Stacey did launch? She sold 750 pillow subscriptions in only 5 days! 
Join me for this episode and learn what drives Stacey to continue to find new ways to serve her audience and grow her subscription business, and find out how close she is to hitting her goal of 1000 pillow subscriptions. 
Find and follow Stacey: 

Wilshire Collections on Instagram


Wilshire Collections on Facebook 

Wilshire Collections Website

The Pillow Cover Club

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 



﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Generating excitement and creating FOMO are great ways to market your offer. Spending three months hyping up a new offer led to this subscription box owner’s dream of selling her own pillow designs coming true. And… It resulted in selling 750 pillow subscriptions in only five days. The best part? She doesn’t have to pack or ship a thing. </p><p>I’m so excited to welcome Stacey Collins to the podcast again as my first-ever three-time guest! Stacey is also a member of Launch Your Box, Scale Your Box, and my Elevate Mastermind! She truly invests in herself and her business. </p><p>Stacey’s subscription journey has some twists and turns - and a lot of successes. She started with a quarterly home decor box, which was a big hit. But when the demands of fulfilling a highly curated box started to outweigh the benefits, she changed gears. Stacey shut down that physical description but soon turned to a different type of description - a monthly digital subscription. Today, Stacey has more than 2,000 digital subscribers! </p><p>Earlier this year, Stacey and I were talking about her business and she shared her long-held dream of selling her own decorative pillows. Stacey LOVES pillows. Her audience knows she loves pillows and so many of them do, too. What Stacey doesn’t love is packing and shipping large numbers of products. There was an easy solution to Stacey’s problem. Using a fulfillment company. I connected her with a fulfillment center I interviewed on episode 61 of this podcast. </p><p>The fulfillment center was the perfect solution. Stacey designs the pillow covers and works closely with the manufacturer to make sure the design and quality of the pillow covers are exactly what she wants. Then the pillow covers are shipped directly to the fulfillment center where they are packed and shipped, again to Stacey’s specifications. </p><p>Stacey initially set a launch goal of 500 subscriptions. I challenged her to increase that goal because I knew what a large, engaged audience she had. And I knew she was going to follow my 5-day launch plan to a tee. And she did. </p><p>Stacey’s biggest challenge? Launching without having anything to show her audience. The pillow covers needed to be a surprise. She had a few sneak peeks to share but relied on the trust she’d built with her audience to convince them to take this leap with her. Stacey spent THREE MONTHS creating excitement around her big announcement. She got her already highly engaged audience excited, built anticipation, and created FOMO. </p><p>And when Stacey did launch? She sold 750 pillow subscriptions in only 5 days! </p><p>Join me for this episode and learn what drives Stacey to continue to find new ways to serve her audience and grow her subscription business, and find out how close she is to hitting her goal of 1000 pillow subscriptions. </p><p>Find and follow Stacey: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/wilshire_collections/">Wilshire Collections on Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/wilshirecollections">Wilshire Collections on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><a href="https://www.wilshirecollections.com/?fbclid=IwAR2l341RD4QjXzgR2KGw_MvIgm5BUlPFZ68KIXxco_1YxZMGrKK_irzpwBE">Wilshire Collections Website</a></li>
<li><a href="http://pillowcoverclub.com">The Pillow Cover Club</a></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1989</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c7803690-5b46-11ee-8eaf-efefbb4571b9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2367682744.mp3?updated=1699911943" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>134: Never Give Up - Break Through the Plateau with the Crafty Lady Boutique</title>
      <description>“Don’t give up. Just keep moving forward.” - Alexia Haubert
After making it to the top 1% of all Etsy sellers in the wedding category - the top 1%! - Lexie was on top of her game. Then came a global pandemic that shut down the wedding industry and Lexie’s business. 
Lexie had to pivot and struggled to grow her business for a long time before recently reaching a big milestone. In this episode, Lexie’s story will inspire you to keep going as you work toward your business goals. 
When the wedding industry slowly started coming back, Lexie introduced The Monogrammed Bride subscription box and started building her audience from scratch. She stayed consistent and continued to show up even though she saw very little in the way of results for a long time. 
When Lexie and I first talked, after a disappointing launch, I was surprised to see she had done everything I teach. She was doing all the things and she was doing them well. But she wasn’t seeing results. We brainstormed and strategized, and Lexie continued working hard. 
And just recently - after seeing consistently steady growth for the last six months - Lexie hit her long-standing goal of 100 subscribers! So what did she do differently these past six months?   


She built a community - giving her subscribers something to feel they were a part of. 


She posted stories on Instagram - consistently. 

She created engaging posts featuring pictures of subscribers and their boxes.


She started going LIVE much more consistently and, when she did, started building an audience who showed up for her and engaged with her during the LIVEs. 

She followed her subscribers back and engaged with their posts. 


She did tons of short video, finding cracks of time while sitting in her car waiting to pick her kids up from practices.  


She sent boxes to a small number of influencers from TikTok and Instagram - people with 1000-2000 followers who want to grow as influencers. 


She ran Facebook Ads - and has gotten really dialed in which drives the cost per engagement way down. Lexie analyzes her Ads every week and makes changes as needed. 

While we were talking, Lexie got subscriber #112! This growth in her business - this regular, recurring revenue - has lessened the financial stress Lexie has felt for the past couple of years. She is able to breathe and plan for even more subscribers as her business continues to grow. 
Lexie’s message for anyone who feels overwhelmed or discouraged by the challenges they’re facing in building their business? Don’t give up. Just keep moving forward. 
Join me for this episode and get inspired by Lexie’s determination to just keep going and never give up on her dream on her way to reaching and passing her goal of 100 subscribers. 
Find and follow Lexie: 

Crafty Lady Boutique on Instagram


Crafty Lady Boutique on Facebook 

Crafty Lady Boutique Website

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 20 Sep 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Never Give Up - Break Through the Plateau with the Crafty Lady Boutique</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>134</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Join me for this episode and get inspired by Lexie’s determination to just keep going and never give up on her dream on her way to reaching and passing her goal of 100 subscribers. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Don’t give up. Just keep moving forward.” - Alexia Haubert
After making it to the top 1% of all Etsy sellers in the wedding category - the top 1%! - Lexie was on top of her game. Then came a global pandemic that shut down the wedding industry and Lexie’s business. 
Lexie had to pivot and struggled to grow her business for a long time before recently reaching a big milestone. In this episode, Lexie’s story will inspire you to keep going as you work toward your business goals. 
When the wedding industry slowly started coming back, Lexie introduced The Monogrammed Bride subscription box and started building her audience from scratch. She stayed consistent and continued to show up even though she saw very little in the way of results for a long time. 
When Lexie and I first talked, after a disappointing launch, I was surprised to see she had done everything I teach. She was doing all the things and she was doing them well. But she wasn’t seeing results. We brainstormed and strategized, and Lexie continued working hard. 
And just recently - after seeing consistently steady growth for the last six months - Lexie hit her long-standing goal of 100 subscribers! So what did she do differently these past six months?   


She built a community - giving her subscribers something to feel they were a part of. 


She posted stories on Instagram - consistently. 

She created engaging posts featuring pictures of subscribers and their boxes.


She started going LIVE much more consistently and, when she did, started building an audience who showed up for her and engaged with her during the LIVEs. 

She followed her subscribers back and engaged with their posts. 


She did tons of short video, finding cracks of time while sitting in her car waiting to pick her kids up from practices.  


She sent boxes to a small number of influencers from TikTok and Instagram - people with 1000-2000 followers who want to grow as influencers. 


She ran Facebook Ads - and has gotten really dialed in which drives the cost per engagement way down. Lexie analyzes her Ads every week and makes changes as needed. 

While we were talking, Lexie got subscriber #112! This growth in her business - this regular, recurring revenue - has lessened the financial stress Lexie has felt for the past couple of years. She is able to breathe and plan for even more subscribers as her business continues to grow. 
Lexie’s message for anyone who feels overwhelmed or discouraged by the challenges they’re facing in building their business? Don’t give up. Just keep moving forward. 
Join me for this episode and get inspired by Lexie’s determination to just keep going and never give up on her dream on her way to reaching and passing her goal of 100 subscribers. 
Find and follow Lexie: 

Crafty Lady Boutique on Instagram


Crafty Lady Boutique on Facebook 

Crafty Lady Boutique Website

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“Don’t give up. Just keep moving forward.” - Alexia Haubert</p><p>After making it to the top 1% of all Etsy sellers in the wedding category - the top 1%! - Lexie was on top of her game. Then came a global pandemic that shut down the wedding industry and Lexie’s business. </p><p>Lexie had to pivot and struggled to grow her business for a long time before recently reaching a big milestone. In this episode, Lexie’s story will inspire you to keep going as you work toward your business goals. </p><p>When the wedding industry slowly started coming back, Lexie introduced The Monogrammed Bride subscription box and started building her audience from scratch. She stayed consistent and continued to show up even though she saw very little in the way of results for a long time. </p><p>When Lexie and I first talked, after a disappointing launch, I was surprised to see she had done everything I teach. She was doing all the things and she was doing them well. But she wasn’t seeing results. We brainstormed and strategized, and Lexie continued working hard. </p><p>And just recently - after seeing consistently steady growth for the last six months - Lexie hit her long-standing goal of 100 subscribers! So what did she do differently these past six months?   </p><ul>
<li>
<strong>She built a community </strong>- giving her subscribers something to feel they were a part of. </li>
<li>
<strong>She posted stories on Instagram</strong> - consistently. </li>
<li><strong>She created engaging posts featuring pictures of subscribers and their boxes.</strong></li>
<li>
<strong>She started going LIVE much more consistently</strong> and, when she did, started building an audience who showed up for her and engaged with her during the LIVEs. </li>
<li><strong>She followed her subscribers back and engaged with their posts. </strong></li>
<li>
<strong>She did tons of short video</strong>, finding cracks of time while sitting in her car waiting to pick her kids up from practices.  </li>
<li>
<strong>She sent boxes to a small number of influencers from TikTok and Instagram</strong> - people with 1000-2000 followers who want to grow as influencers. </li>
<li>
<strong>She ran Facebook Ads</strong> - and has gotten really dialed in which drives the cost per engagement way down. Lexie analyzes her Ads every week and makes changes as needed. </li>
</ul><p>While we were talking, Lexie got subscriber #112! This growth in her business - this regular, recurring revenue - has lessened the financial stress Lexie has felt for the past couple of years. She is able to breathe and plan for even more subscribers as her business continues to grow. </p><p>Lexie’s message for anyone who feels overwhelmed or discouraged by the challenges they’re facing in building their business? Don’t give up. Just keep moving forward. </p><p>Join me for this episode and get inspired by Lexie’s determination to just keep going and never give up on her dream on her way to reaching and passing her goal of 100 subscribers. </p><p>Find and follow Lexie: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/craftyladyboutique/">Crafty Lady Boutique on Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/CraftyLadyBoutique">Crafty Lady Boutique on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><a href="https://craftyladyboutique.com/">Crafty Lady Boutique Website</a></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1599</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[dfdc2f78-5420-11ee-aa4e-eb128994829e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3618887534.mp3?updated=1699911933" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>133: Why You Should Start A T-Shirt Subscription</title>
      <description>I have a t-shirt subscription. Actually, I have two successful (and very profitable) t-shirt subscriptions: my T-Shirt Club and Tees 4 Teachers. And I’m not the only one growing thriving t-shirt subscriptions. LOTS of members of Launch Your Box are finding huge success with their own t-shirt subscriptions. With all this t-shirt subscription talk, you might be wondering if starting a t-shirt subscription is right for you. 

In this episode, I’m sharing six reasons why you should consider starting a t-shirt subscription.  

1. A T-shirt subscription has low start-up costs compared to other products.


  T-shirts range from $2-$7. 

  Printing can be done in-house or outsourced. 

  There is no need for expensive boxes - t-shirts can be shipped in poly mailers. 


2. T-shirts are a wardrobe staple. 


  Everyone wears t-shirts. 

  T-shirts are consumable - they are used (worn) for a while and then replaced. 

  T-shirts can be dressed up or worn casually. 


3. T-shirt subscriptions can be seasonal/holiday/theme-based.  


  Any niche can have a t-shirt subscription. Launch Your Box member t-shirt subscriptions include: 

  Career-focused tees

  Inspirational/self-care tees

  Tees for artists/crafters

  Snarky tees

  Animal/pet-themed tees


4. T-shirt subscriptions provide recurring revenue and recurring brand exposure.  


  A t-shirt subscription is a consistent source of recurring revenue.  

  A t-shirt subscription can provide opportunities for recurring brand exposure. 

  Add your label or brand to every design. 

  Build customer loyalty and commitment by consistently delivering quality t-shirts and designs. 


5. T-shirt subscriptions foster a sense of community which can result in: 


  Increased loyalty

  Higher engagement

  Higher lifetime value (LTV) and retention rates


6. T-shirt subscriptions are more affordable and accessible than many other subscriptions. 



A t-shirt subscription can be a successful, standalone subscription. It can also be a complement to your existing subscription box. Mine started as a complement to my Monogram Box when my subscribers asked for more t-shirts! 

I’ve seen great success with my own t-shirt subscriptions and have helped SO MANY members of Launch Your Box build thriving t-shirt subscriptions. 

I’m well-known for my extensive knowledge of all things t-shirt. So much so that my students and peers have been asking for a standalone t-shirt subscription course for quite a while. My team and I have spent the last several months working on this course. How to Start a T-Shirt Subscription covers everything you need to know in 12 video lessons full of actionable steps, worksheets, and special bonuses. It’s the perfect way to get all your t-shirt subscription questions answered and get your t-shirt subscription started NOW! 

Learn more about How to Start a T-Shirt Subscription. 

Join me for this episode as I share my own t-shirt subscription experience and all the reasons you should start a t-shirt subscription. 



Join me in all the places: 


  Facebook

  Instagram

  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 13 Sep 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why You Should Start A T-Shirt Subscription</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>133</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I have a t-shirt subscription. Actually, I have two successful (and very profitable) t-shirt subscriptions: my T-Shirt Club and Tees 4 Teachers. And I’m not the only one growing thriving t-shirt subscriptions. LOTS of members of Launch Your Box are finding huge success with their own t-shirt subscriptions. With all this t-shirt subscription talk, you might be wondering if starting a t-shirt subscription is right for you. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I have a t-shirt subscription. Actually, I have two successful (and very profitable) t-shirt subscriptions: my T-Shirt Club and Tees 4 Teachers. And I’m not the only one growing thriving t-shirt subscriptions. LOTS of members of Launch Your Box are finding huge success with their own t-shirt subscriptions. With all this t-shirt subscription talk, you might be wondering if starting a t-shirt subscription is right for you. 

In this episode, I’m sharing six reasons why you should consider starting a t-shirt subscription.  

1. A T-shirt subscription has low start-up costs compared to other products.


  T-shirts range from $2-$7. 

  Printing can be done in-house or outsourced. 

  There is no need for expensive boxes - t-shirts can be shipped in poly mailers. 


2. T-shirts are a wardrobe staple. 


  Everyone wears t-shirts. 

  T-shirts are consumable - they are used (worn) for a while and then replaced. 

  T-shirts can be dressed up or worn casually. 


3. T-shirt subscriptions can be seasonal/holiday/theme-based.  


  Any niche can have a t-shirt subscription. Launch Your Box member t-shirt subscriptions include: 

  Career-focused tees

  Inspirational/self-care tees

  Tees for artists/crafters

  Snarky tees

  Animal/pet-themed tees


4. T-shirt subscriptions provide recurring revenue and recurring brand exposure.  


  A t-shirt subscription is a consistent source of recurring revenue.  

  A t-shirt subscription can provide opportunities for recurring brand exposure. 

  Add your label or brand to every design. 

  Build customer loyalty and commitment by consistently delivering quality t-shirts and designs. 


5. T-shirt subscriptions foster a sense of community which can result in: 


  Increased loyalty

  Higher engagement

  Higher lifetime value (LTV) and retention rates


6. T-shirt subscriptions are more affordable and accessible than many other subscriptions. 



A t-shirt subscription can be a successful, standalone subscription. It can also be a complement to your existing subscription box. Mine started as a complement to my Monogram Box when my subscribers asked for more t-shirts! 

I’ve seen great success with my own t-shirt subscriptions and have helped SO MANY members of Launch Your Box build thriving t-shirt subscriptions. 

I’m well-known for my extensive knowledge of all things t-shirt. So much so that my students and peers have been asking for a standalone t-shirt subscription course for quite a while. My team and I have spent the last several months working on this course. How to Start a T-Shirt Subscription covers everything you need to know in 12 video lessons full of actionable steps, worksheets, and special bonuses. It’s the perfect way to get all your t-shirt subscription questions answered and get your t-shirt subscription started NOW! 

Learn more about How to Start a T-Shirt Subscription. 

Join me for this episode as I share my own t-shirt subscription experience and all the reasons you should start a t-shirt subscription. 



Join me in all the places: 


  Facebook

  Instagram

  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I have a t-shirt subscription. Actually, I have two successful (and very profitable) t-shirt subscriptions: my T-Shirt Club and Tees 4 Teachers. And I’m not the only one growing thriving t-shirt subscriptions. LOTS of members of Launch Your Box are finding huge success with their own t-shirt subscriptions. With all this t-shirt subscription talk, you might be wondering if starting a t-shirt subscription is right for you. </p>
<p>In this episode, I’m sharing six reasons why you should consider starting a t-shirt subscription.  </p>
<p>1. A T-shirt subscription has low start-up costs compared to other products.</p>
<ul>
  <li>T-shirts range from $2-$7. </li>
  <li>Printing can be done in-house or outsourced. </li>
  <li>There is no need for expensive boxes - t-shirts can be shipped in poly mailers. </li>
</ul>
<p>2. T-shirts are a wardrobe staple. </p>
<ul>
  <li>Everyone wears t-shirts. </li>
  <li>T-shirts are consumable - they are used (worn) for a while and then replaced. </li>
  <li>T-shirts can be dressed up or worn casually. </li>
</ul>
<p>3. T-shirt subscriptions can be seasonal/holiday/theme-based.  </p>
<ul>
  <li>Any niche can have a t-shirt subscription. Launch Your Box member t-shirt subscriptions include: </li>
  <li>Career-focused tees</li>
  <li>Inspirational/self-care tees</li>
  <li>Tees for artists/crafters</li>
  <li>Snarky tees</li>
  <li>Animal/pet-themed tees</li>
</ul>
<p>4. T-shirt subscriptions provide recurring revenue and recurring brand exposure.  </p>
<ul>
  <li>A t-shirt subscription is a consistent source of recurring revenue.  </li>
  <li>A t-shirt subscription can provide opportunities for recurring brand exposure. </li>
  <li>Add your label or brand to every design. </li>
  <li>Build customer loyalty and commitment by consistently delivering quality t-shirts and designs. </li>
</ul>
<p>5. T-shirt subscriptions foster a sense of community which can result in: </p>
<ul>
  <li>Increased loyalty</li>
  <li>Higher engagement</li>
  <li>Higher lifetime value (LTV) and retention rates</li>
</ul>
<p>6. T-shirt subscriptions are more affordable and accessible than many other subscriptions. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>A t-shirt subscription can be a successful, standalone subscription. It can also be a complement to your existing subscription box. Mine started as a complement to my Monogram Box when my subscribers asked for more t-shirts! </p>
<p>I’ve seen great success with my own t-shirt subscriptions and have helped SO MANY members of Launch Your Box build thriving t-shirt subscriptions. </p>
<p>I’m well-known for my extensive knowledge of all things t-shirt. So much so that my students and peers have been asking for a standalone t-shirt subscription course for quite a while. My team and I have spent the last several months working on this course. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/tshirt-course-waitlist">How to Start a T-Shirt Subscription</a> covers everything you need to know in 12 video lessons full of actionable steps, worksheets, and special bonuses. It’s the perfect way to get all your t-shirt subscription questions answered and get your t-shirt subscription started NOW! </p>
<p>Learn more about<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/tshirt-course-waitlist"> How to Start a T-Shirt Subscription</a>. </p>
<p>Join me for this episode as I share my own t-shirt subscription experience and all the reasons you should start a t-shirt subscription. </p>
<p><br></p>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today!</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>852</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6b7a61d6-4561-11ee-8c7b-8b17d2e73f98]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6621761607.mp3?updated=1699911924" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Taking Your Side Hustle to a Full-time Gig</title>
      <description>Have you thought about taking your subscription box business from a side hustle to a full-time gig?
 
It’s absolutely possible. I did it and so have many members of Launch Your Box. 
 
But… 
 
Before you quit your full-time job or make any major changes to your business, you need to ask - and answer - some questions. And you need to get really comfortable with your financial details, business and personal. 
 
Take your time and get real about what your goals are. Are you currently working 40/50/60 hours a week and want to work less? Do you want to make more income than you have been? 
 
The truth is, you can get there. But you’ll need to make a plan and work that plan. Start by asking yourself these four questions: 

What is the income you need to replace? 

What is the survival income you need to cover your bare-bones expenses every month? 

What portion of that survival income can be covered by someone else (spouse, parents, roommates)? 

What is the initial investment you’ll need for your business (products, supplies, packaging, tech)? 

 
Understand that your business will need to be profitable before you can pay yourself. That takes time. It took me 9 months before I was able to pay myself a regular paycheck. 8 ½ years later, I pay myself a very nice salary and also pay the salaries of more than 20 employees. 
 
Join me for this episode as I take you on my journey from tiny side hustle making $200 a month to where I am now, running two multi seven-figure businesses, answering those questions, knowing my numbers, and making careful decisions every step of the way.  
 
Important Links: 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 06 Sep 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Taking Your Side Hustle to a Full-time Gig</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Before you quit your full-time job or make any major changes to your business, you need to ask - and answer - some questions. And you need to get really comfortable with your financial details, business and personal. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you thought about taking your subscription box business from a side hustle to a full-time gig?
 
It’s absolutely possible. I did it and so have many members of Launch Your Box. 
 
But… 
 
Before you quit your full-time job or make any major changes to your business, you need to ask - and answer - some questions. And you need to get really comfortable with your financial details, business and personal. 
 
Take your time and get real about what your goals are. Are you currently working 40/50/60 hours a week and want to work less? Do you want to make more income than you have been? 
 
The truth is, you can get there. But you’ll need to make a plan and work that plan. Start by asking yourself these four questions: 

What is the income you need to replace? 

What is the survival income you need to cover your bare-bones expenses every month? 

What portion of that survival income can be covered by someone else (spouse, parents, roommates)? 

What is the initial investment you’ll need for your business (products, supplies, packaging, tech)? 

 
Understand that your business will need to be profitable before you can pay yourself. That takes time. It took me 9 months before I was able to pay myself a regular paycheck. 8 ½ years later, I pay myself a very nice salary and also pay the salaries of more than 20 employees. 
 
Join me for this episode as I take you on my journey from tiny side hustle making $200 a month to where I am now, running two multi seven-figure businesses, answering those questions, knowing my numbers, and making careful decisions every step of the way.  
 
Important Links: 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you thought about taking your subscription box business from a side hustle to a full-time gig?</p><p> </p><p>It’s absolutely possible. I did it and so have many members of Launch Your Box. </p><p> </p><p>But… </p><p> </p><p>Before you quit your full-time job or make any major changes to your business, you need to ask - and answer - some questions. And you need to get really comfortable with your financial details, business <em>and</em> personal. </p><p> </p><p>Take your time and get real about what your goals are. Are you currently working 40/50/60 hours a week and want to work less? Do you want to make more income than you have been? </p><p> </p><p>The truth is, you <em>can</em> get there. But you’ll need to make a plan and work that plan. Start by asking yourself these four questions: </p><ol>
<li>What is the income you need to replace? </li>
<li>What is the survival income you need to cover your bare-bones expenses every month? </li>
<li>What portion of that survival income can be covered by someone else (spouse, parents, roommates)? </li>
<li>What is the initial investment you’ll need for your business (products, supplies, packaging, tech)? </li>
</ol><p> </p><p>Understand that your business will need to be profitable before you can pay yourself. That takes time. It took me 9 months before I was able to pay myself a regular paycheck. 8 ½ years later, I pay myself a very nice salary and also pay the salaries of more than 20 employees. </p><p> </p><p>Join me for this episode as I take you on my journey from tiny side hustle making $200 a month to where I am now, running two multi seven-figure businesses, answering those questions, knowing my numbers, and making careful decisions every step of the way.  </p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1600</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[99e035a2-45d7-11ee-baca-db492f536384]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7375252512.mp3?updated=1699911906" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>5 Ways to Scale Your Subscription Box Business</title>
      <description>You’ve launched your subscription box. Since that time, you’ve grown alongside your subscription box business. You’ve developed systems and processes and have built a firm foundation on which your business can continue to grow. But now you want to do more than just continue to grow slowly - now you want to scale your subscription box business. 
In this episode, I’m sharing 5 things you need to do to take your subscription box business to the next level - to scale your box. 
Develop a multi-channel marketing plan.

In order to keep growing, you need to get in front of more people. 

Expand to additional social media channels - meet your people where they are.  

Optimize your inventory. 

Work on a plan to get the most out of your inventory - make it work for you, not against you. 

Leverage your buying power and negotiate the best deals with your vendors, including things like payment terms and shipping discounts. 

Streamline fulfillment. 

Consider whether a fulfillment center is right for your business. 

Design a process - and space to support that process - that allows you to be as efficient as possible on packing days. 

Improve retention strategies. 

Don’t get so concerned about gaining new subscribers that you neglect the ones you already have! 

Identify one team member to focus on customer service and retention. 

Know your numbers - aim for a retention rate of at least 90%.

Create raving fans! 

Word of mouth is an important part of growing your business! 

Engage with your subscribers in post comments and during LIVES. 

Surprise and delight your subscribers. Text “SURPRISE” to me at 940-204-0023 to get my FREE resource “10 Ways to Surprise and Delight Your Customers.” 


Prepare for the next step in your subscription box journey by planning for growth and putting strategies and processes into place that will allow you to scale!
Join me for this episode as I share five things you can do to scale your subscription box business and take it to the next level. 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!

﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 30 Aug 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>5 Ways to Scale Your Subscription Box Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, I’m sharing 5 things you need to do to take your subscription box business to the next level - to scale your box. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>You’ve launched your subscription box. Since that time, you’ve grown alongside your subscription box business. You’ve developed systems and processes and have built a firm foundation on which your business can continue to grow. But now you want to do more than just continue to grow slowly - now you want to scale your subscription box business. 
In this episode, I’m sharing 5 things you need to do to take your subscription box business to the next level - to scale your box. 
Develop a multi-channel marketing plan.

In order to keep growing, you need to get in front of more people. 

Expand to additional social media channels - meet your people where they are.  

Optimize your inventory. 

Work on a plan to get the most out of your inventory - make it work for you, not against you. 

Leverage your buying power and negotiate the best deals with your vendors, including things like payment terms and shipping discounts. 

Streamline fulfillment. 

Consider whether a fulfillment center is right for your business. 

Design a process - and space to support that process - that allows you to be as efficient as possible on packing days. 

Improve retention strategies. 

Don’t get so concerned about gaining new subscribers that you neglect the ones you already have! 

Identify one team member to focus on customer service and retention. 

Know your numbers - aim for a retention rate of at least 90%.

Create raving fans! 

Word of mouth is an important part of growing your business! 

Engage with your subscribers in post comments and during LIVES. 

Surprise and delight your subscribers. Text “SURPRISE” to me at 940-204-0023 to get my FREE resource “10 Ways to Surprise and Delight Your Customers.” 


Prepare for the next step in your subscription box journey by planning for growth and putting strategies and processes into place that will allow you to scale!
Join me for this episode as I share five things you can do to scale your subscription box business and take it to the next level. 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!

﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>You’ve launched your subscription box. Since that time, you’ve grown alongside your subscription box business. You’ve developed systems and processes and have built a firm foundation on which your business can continue to grow. But now you want to do more than just continue to grow slowly - now you want to scale your subscription box business. </p><p>In this episode, I’m sharing 5 things you need to do to take your subscription box business to the next level - to scale your box. </p><ol><li>Develop a multi-channel marketing plan.</li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">In order to keep growing, you need to get in front of more people. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Expand to additional social media channels - meet your people where they are.  </li>
</ul><ol><li>Optimize your inventory. </li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Work on a plan to get the most out of your inventory - make it work for you, not against you. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Leverage your buying power and negotiate the best deals with your vendors, including things like payment terms and shipping discounts. </li>
</ul><ol><li>Streamline fulfillment. </li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Consider whether a fulfillment center is right for your business. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Design a process - and space to support that process - that allows you to be as efficient as possible on packing days. </li>
</ul><ol><li>Improve retention strategies. </li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Don’t get so concerned about gaining new subscribers that you neglect the ones you already have! </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Identify one team member to focus on customer service and retention. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Know your numbers - aim for a retention rate of at least 90%.</li>
</ul><ol><li>Create raving fans! </li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Word of mouth is an important part of growing your business! </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Engage with your subscribers in post comments and during LIVES. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Surprise and delight your subscribers. <strong>Text “SURPRISE” to me at 940-204-0023 to get my FREE resource “10 Ways to Surprise and Delight Your Customers.” </strong>
</li>
</ul><p>Prepare for the next step in your subscription box journey by planning for growth and putting strategies and processes into place that will allow you to scale!</p><p>Join me for this episode as I share five things you can do to scale your subscription box business and take it to the next level. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today!</p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1176</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[dc776e90-45d6-11ee-bbc2-1faf31b13dcb]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9364461376.mp3?updated=1699912065" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>132: 10 Truth Bombs to Understand About Your Subscription Box Business</title>
      <description>Have you been struggling with your business this year? Maybe you’re not reaching your revenue goals or you haven’t launched that new idea, product, or subscription box yet. Many times, our businesses need one little tweak - a change in process, strategy, or just mindset - to change everything. 
In this episode, I’m sharing 10 truth bombs that will have you looking at your business differently. Take the time to sit with and think about each of these to see how they might apply to you and your business. 

20% of your customer base generates 80% of your revenue! 

Protect your peace and energy at all costs. 

Fad marketing strategies are like fad diets. They will not last. 

Companies that have heavily relied on paid traffic only will shift to more organic traffic. 

Systems and processes will serve you. 

Revenue does not mean profit. 

Cheap is not creating value. 

It’s more profitable to retain your subscribers than to constantly acquire new ones. 

What gets you started may not get you to scale. 

If you don’t challenge yourself, you won’t change yourself. 


We focused all of the training this year inside Launch Your Box on these 10 things. I’m here to help you understand these 10 things and make progress with each of them. 
Remember, you are on a subscription box journey. This journey never ends. It’s always a work in progress. Just keep making progress! 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!

﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 23 Aug 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>10 Truth Bombs to Understand About Your Subscription Box Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>132</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, I’m sharing 10 truth bombs that will have you looking at your business differently. Take the time to sit with and think about each of these to see how they might apply to you and your business. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you been struggling with your business this year? Maybe you’re not reaching your revenue goals or you haven’t launched that new idea, product, or subscription box yet. Many times, our businesses need one little tweak - a change in process, strategy, or just mindset - to change everything. 
In this episode, I’m sharing 10 truth bombs that will have you looking at your business differently. Take the time to sit with and think about each of these to see how they might apply to you and your business. 

20% of your customer base generates 80% of your revenue! 

Protect your peace and energy at all costs. 

Fad marketing strategies are like fad diets. They will not last. 

Companies that have heavily relied on paid traffic only will shift to more organic traffic. 

Systems and processes will serve you. 

Revenue does not mean profit. 

Cheap is not creating value. 

It’s more profitable to retain your subscribers than to constantly acquire new ones. 

What gets you started may not get you to scale. 

If you don’t challenge yourself, you won’t change yourself. 


We focused all of the training this year inside Launch Your Box on these 10 things. I’m here to help you understand these 10 things and make progress with each of them. 
Remember, you are on a subscription box journey. This journey never ends. It’s always a work in progress. Just keep making progress! 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!

﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you been struggling with your business this year? Maybe you’re not reaching your revenue goals or you haven’t launched that new idea, product, or subscription box yet. Many times, our businesses need one little tweak - a change in process, strategy, or just mindset - to change everything. </p><p>In this episode, I’m sharing 10 truth bombs that will have you looking at your business differently. Take the time to sit with and think about each of these to see how they might apply to you and your business. </p><ol>
<li>20% of your customer base generates 80% of your revenue! </li>
<li>Protect your peace and energy at all costs. </li>
<li>Fad marketing strategies are like fad diets. They will not last. </li>
<li>Companies that have heavily relied on paid traffic only will shift to more organic traffic. </li>
<li>Systems and processes will serve you. </li>
<li>Revenue does not mean profit. </li>
<li>Cheap is not creating value. </li>
<li>It’s more profitable to retain your subscribers than to constantly acquire new ones. </li>
<li>What gets you started may not get you to scale. </li>
<li>If you don’t challenge yourself, you won’t change yourself. </li>
</ol><p><br></p><p>We focused all of the training this year inside Launch Your Box on these 10 things. I’m here to help you understand these 10 things and make progress with each of them. </p><p>Remember, you are on a subscription box journey. This journey never ends. It’s always a work in progress. Just keep making progress! </p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today!</p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1644</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[948d6d98-3d73-11ee-a621-0fe8b886c201]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6910562057.mp3?updated=1699912134" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>131: How My Lazy Launch Doubled My Subscribers</title>
      <description>Are your subscriber numbers dwindling? Do you need to do something to keep your numbers up but don’t have the capacity to do a full-blown launch? 
I found myself in this exact situation. My subscriber numbers for my “baby” subscription, Tees 4 Teachers, had been decreasing since the beginning of the year. I knew I needed to do something, but when I looked at my year, this is what I saw: 

April - Monogram Box Launch 

May - SubSummit 

June - Big Coaching Week Launch for Launch Your Box 

August - Launching a New Course

September - Launching a New Membership 


That left July. July is right before back to school, making it the perfect time to launch Tees 4 Teachers. I knew I did not have the bandwidth to show up in a launch the way I’d need to. But I didn’t want to not launch. 
What could I do? Was there a way I could launch and make it EASY and less taxing on me? 
I knew I could drive a lot of traffic and sales through paid ads. (Listen to episode 130 to hear about how paid ads helped me have my biggest launch ever earlier this year). If I could use ads effectively to sell my teacher tee subscription, that would eliminate the need to do a lot of LIVEs, send a ton of emails, and do all my usual launch activities. 
So, what exactly would this “lazy launch” look like? I needed a plan. 

Instead of an intense launch, I decided to run a two-week lazy launch. 

I created an Early Bird Bonus/Launch Bonus but made it good for the entire two weeks. 

Week One

Started ads and made an announcement post

Posted once a day. 

Week Two

Did 1 LIVE

Sent 2 emails

Posted for the last 4 days 

My results? I closed cart with 201 subscribers. I doubled my subscription with minimal effort! 
What did it take to double my subscriber count? 

Launch Bonus

New, Cute T-Shirt Design

Ad Spend - $2000


When I looked at the data - and you should ALWAYS look at the data, I discovered some interesting things: 

92% of the traffic I sent to the sales page came from Facebook Ads. 

78% of all my new subscribers came directly from Facebook Ads. 

For 82% of my subscribers, this was their first purchase from me. 


The biggest eye-opener for me? On average, I get 200-300 views on my Tees 4 Teachers sales page. When I ran paid ads for this “lazy launch,” I 10X’d those views and my conversion rate was the same - 3%. 

3% of 300 views is 9 new members. 

3% of 3000 views is 90 new members. 


My advice for you, especially if you’re facing a subscription with dwindling numbers?

When you NEED to launch, launch! 

Figure out what you have the capacity for and make it work. 

It doesn’t have to be perfect, but you do need to take action. 

Don’t just wing it - create a plan and work that plan! 


Join me for this episode as I walk you through how I doubled my dwindling subscription with a lazy launch! 
Want to learn more about paid ads? There is so much more inside Launch Your Box. We’ve got several different trainings, including a brand new training this month on how to set up a Page Like Ad so you can start growing your following. Look for it in the Training Library under Building Your Audience. I also cover my subscription box ads strategy in a brand new bonus lesson inside the Launch Your Box training library. You’ll go behind the scenes of my launch and see what I did, what I spent, and the actual ads I was running for that launch. Of course, I break down all my results in detail.
Are you ready to join Launch Your Box? Text me the word LAUNCH to 940-204-0023 and I’ll send you a special invitation! 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!

﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 16 Aug 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How My Lazy Launch Doubled My Subscribers</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>131</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I knew I did not have the bandwidth to show up in a launch the way I’d need to. But I didn’t want to not launch.   What could I do? Was there a way I could launch and make it EASY and less taxing on me? </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Are your subscriber numbers dwindling? Do you need to do something to keep your numbers up but don’t have the capacity to do a full-blown launch? 
I found myself in this exact situation. My subscriber numbers for my “baby” subscription, Tees 4 Teachers, had been decreasing since the beginning of the year. I knew I needed to do something, but when I looked at my year, this is what I saw: 

April - Monogram Box Launch 

May - SubSummit 

June - Big Coaching Week Launch for Launch Your Box 

August - Launching a New Course

September - Launching a New Membership 


That left July. July is right before back to school, making it the perfect time to launch Tees 4 Teachers. I knew I did not have the bandwidth to show up in a launch the way I’d need to. But I didn’t want to not launch. 
What could I do? Was there a way I could launch and make it EASY and less taxing on me? 
I knew I could drive a lot of traffic and sales through paid ads. (Listen to episode 130 to hear about how paid ads helped me have my biggest launch ever earlier this year). If I could use ads effectively to sell my teacher tee subscription, that would eliminate the need to do a lot of LIVEs, send a ton of emails, and do all my usual launch activities. 
So, what exactly would this “lazy launch” look like? I needed a plan. 

Instead of an intense launch, I decided to run a two-week lazy launch. 

I created an Early Bird Bonus/Launch Bonus but made it good for the entire two weeks. 

Week One

Started ads and made an announcement post

Posted once a day. 

Week Two

Did 1 LIVE

Sent 2 emails

Posted for the last 4 days 

My results? I closed cart with 201 subscribers. I doubled my subscription with minimal effort! 
What did it take to double my subscriber count? 

Launch Bonus

New, Cute T-Shirt Design

Ad Spend - $2000


When I looked at the data - and you should ALWAYS look at the data, I discovered some interesting things: 

92% of the traffic I sent to the sales page came from Facebook Ads. 

78% of all my new subscribers came directly from Facebook Ads. 

For 82% of my subscribers, this was their first purchase from me. 


The biggest eye-opener for me? On average, I get 200-300 views on my Tees 4 Teachers sales page. When I ran paid ads for this “lazy launch,” I 10X’d those views and my conversion rate was the same - 3%. 

3% of 300 views is 9 new members. 

3% of 3000 views is 90 new members. 


My advice for you, especially if you’re facing a subscription with dwindling numbers?

When you NEED to launch, launch! 

Figure out what you have the capacity for and make it work. 

It doesn’t have to be perfect, but you do need to take action. 

Don’t just wing it - create a plan and work that plan! 


Join me for this episode as I walk you through how I doubled my dwindling subscription with a lazy launch! 
Want to learn more about paid ads? There is so much more inside Launch Your Box. We’ve got several different trainings, including a brand new training this month on how to set up a Page Like Ad so you can start growing your following. Look for it in the Training Library under Building Your Audience. I also cover my subscription box ads strategy in a brand new bonus lesson inside the Launch Your Box training library. You’ll go behind the scenes of my launch and see what I did, what I spent, and the actual ads I was running for that launch. Of course, I break down all my results in detail.
Are you ready to join Launch Your Box? Text me the word LAUNCH to 940-204-0023 and I’ll send you a special invitation! 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!

﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are your subscriber numbers dwindling? Do you need to do something to keep your numbers up but don’t have the capacity to do a full-blown launch? </p><p>I found myself in this exact situation. My subscriber numbers for my “baby” subscription, Tees 4 Teachers, had been decreasing since the beginning of the year. I knew I needed to do something, but when I looked at my year, this is what I saw: </p><ul>
<li>April - Monogram Box Launch </li>
<li>May - SubSummit </li>
<li>June - Big Coaching Week Launch for Launch Your Box </li>
<li>August - Launching a New Course</li>
<li>September - Launching a New Membership </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>That left July. July is right before back to school, making it the perfect time to launch Tees 4 Teachers. I knew I did not have the bandwidth to show up in a launch the way I’d need to. But I didn’t want to not launch. </p><p>What could I do? Was there a way I could launch and make it EASY and less taxing on me? </p><p>I knew I could drive a lot of traffic and sales through paid ads. (<em>Listen to episode 130 to hear about how paid ads helped me have my biggest launch ever earlier this year</em>). If I could use ads effectively to sell my teacher tee subscription, that would eliminate the need to do a lot of LIVEs, send a ton of emails, and do all my usual launch activities. </p><p>So, what exactly would this “lazy launch” look like? I needed a plan. </p><ul>
<li>Instead of an intense launch, I decided to run a two-week lazy launch. </li>
<li>I created an Early Bird Bonus/Launch Bonus but made it good for the entire two weeks. </li>
<li>Week One</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Started ads and made an announcement post</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Posted once a day. </li>
<li>Week Two</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Did 1 LIVE</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Sent 2 emails</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Posted for the last 4 days </li>
</ul><p>My results? I closed cart with 201 subscribers. I doubled my subscription with minimal effort! </p><p>What did it take to double my subscriber count? </p><ol>
<li>Launch Bonus</li>
<li>New, Cute T-Shirt Design</li>
<li>Ad Spend - $2000</li>
</ol><p><br></p><p>When I looked at the data - and you should ALWAYS look at the data, I discovered some interesting things: </p><ul>
<li>92% of the traffic I sent to the sales page came from Facebook Ads. </li>
<li>78% of all my new subscribers came directly from Facebook Ads. </li>
<li>For 82% of my subscribers, this was their first purchase from me. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>The biggest eye-opener for me? On average, I get 200-300 views on my Tees 4 Teachers sales page. When I ran paid ads for this “lazy launch,” I 10X’d those views and my conversion rate was the same - 3%. </p><ul>
<li>3% of 300 views is 9 new members. </li>
<li>3% of 3000 views is 90 new members. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>My advice for you, especially if you’re facing a subscription with dwindling numbers?</p><ul>
<li>When you NEED to launch, launch! </li>
<li>Figure out what you have the capacity for and make it work. </li>
<li>It doesn’t have to be perfect, but you do need to take action. </li>
<li>Don’t just wing it - create a plan and work that plan! </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as I walk you through how I doubled my dwindling subscription with a lazy launch! </p><p>Want to learn more about paid ads? There is so much more inside Launch Your Box. We’ve got several different trainings, including <strong>a brand new training this month on how to set up a Page Like Ad </strong>so you can start growing your following. Look for it in the Training Library under Building Your Audience. I also cover <strong>my subscription box ads strategy in a brand new bonus lesson inside the Launch Your Box training library</strong>. You’ll go behind the scenes of my launch and see what I did, what I spent, and the actual ads I was running for that launch. Of course, I break down all my results in detail.</p><p>Are you ready to join Launch Your Box? <strong>Text me the word LAUNCH to 940-204-0023 and I’ll send you a special invitation! </strong></p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today!</p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1443</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[62a98274-3a5a-11ee-9d91-672e352d29c8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3393511032.mp3?updated=1699912233" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>130: Are Paid Ads Worth It? </title>
      <description>“If you don’t have an ads budget, you still have a hobby business.” - Sarah Williams
Are paid ads part of your subscription box marketing strategy? If not, why not? You might be wondering if paid ads are worth it. Or you might be where I was in the early days of my business, worried about where you’re spending money and not understanding the value of running paid ads. 
Subscription box owners - especially new subscription box owners - hesitate to use paid ads for many reasons. 

They don’t understand the ROI from paid ads. Successful ads don’t always result in sales. 

They lack the knowledge to set up and run an ad campaign. 

They’re focusing only on organic growth strategies like SEO, content, and word of mouth. 

They fear failure - they may be uncertain of their goals or not know how to measure results. 


I first used paid ads when I realized I needed to do something else to grow outside of my local area. Organic traffic wasn’t enough. I had a great local business and my subscription box had grown - to a point. But almost all of my business came from local customers. In order to grow, I needed to run ads. Within just six months, the 3,000 followers it had taken me 4-5 years to gain had grown to 7,000 and I was getting subscribers from all over the country. 
Paid ads are such an important part of launching and growing a subscription box business. If you want to grow, you need to continue to drive traffic - new traffic - to your content. 
I’m challenging you to consider running paid ads. And I’m sharing actual data from my three recent launches and paid ads strategy to help you understand why you need to run paid ads. 

It’s time to take action. 
1. Determine your budget.

No matter how small, you have to start somewhere!

If you’re currently selling products or services, use the 8-10% rule.  

If you’re not selling products and are on a limited budget, start with $150/month ($5/day) and increase it as you start selling products. 

2. Create an Ads Strategy

Drive traffic to your site? Convert to subscribers? Build your list? Build your following?

You should have a solid ad strategy for the different stages and seasons of business you are in.

3. Test and Try 

Join me for this episode as we talk all about paid ads. Are they worth it? Do they really make a difference? I answer those questions and share my paid ads results from my recent launches. There’s a lot to talk about in this episode. Grab your earbuds and come join me!

Want to learn more about paid ads? There is so much more inside Launch Your Box. We’ve got several different trainings, including a brand new training this month on how to set up a Page Like Ad so you can start growing your following. And I cover my subscription box ads strategy in a brand new bonus lesson inside the Launch Your Box training library. You’ll go behind the scenes of my launch and see what I did, what I spent, and the actual ads I was running for that launch. Of course, I break down all my results in detail.
Are you ready to join Launch Your Box? Text me the word LAUNCH to 940-204-0023 and I’ll send you a special invitation! 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 09 Aug 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Are Paid Ads Worth It? </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>130</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Are paid ads part of your subscription box marketing strategy? If not, why not? You might be wondering if paid ads are worth it. Or you might be where I was in the early days of my business, worried about where you’re spending money and not understanding the value of running paid ads. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“If you don’t have an ads budget, you still have a hobby business.” - Sarah Williams
Are paid ads part of your subscription box marketing strategy? If not, why not? You might be wondering if paid ads are worth it. Or you might be where I was in the early days of my business, worried about where you’re spending money and not understanding the value of running paid ads. 
Subscription box owners - especially new subscription box owners - hesitate to use paid ads for many reasons. 

They don’t understand the ROI from paid ads. Successful ads don’t always result in sales. 

They lack the knowledge to set up and run an ad campaign. 

They’re focusing only on organic growth strategies like SEO, content, and word of mouth. 

They fear failure - they may be uncertain of their goals or not know how to measure results. 


I first used paid ads when I realized I needed to do something else to grow outside of my local area. Organic traffic wasn’t enough. I had a great local business and my subscription box had grown - to a point. But almost all of my business came from local customers. In order to grow, I needed to run ads. Within just six months, the 3,000 followers it had taken me 4-5 years to gain had grown to 7,000 and I was getting subscribers from all over the country. 
Paid ads are such an important part of launching and growing a subscription box business. If you want to grow, you need to continue to drive traffic - new traffic - to your content. 
I’m challenging you to consider running paid ads. And I’m sharing actual data from my three recent launches and paid ads strategy to help you understand why you need to run paid ads. 

It’s time to take action. 
1. Determine your budget.

No matter how small, you have to start somewhere!

If you’re currently selling products or services, use the 8-10% rule.  

If you’re not selling products and are on a limited budget, start with $150/month ($5/day) and increase it as you start selling products. 

2. Create an Ads Strategy

Drive traffic to your site? Convert to subscribers? Build your list? Build your following?

You should have a solid ad strategy for the different stages and seasons of business you are in.

3. Test and Try 

Join me for this episode as we talk all about paid ads. Are they worth it? Do they really make a difference? I answer those questions and share my paid ads results from my recent launches. There’s a lot to talk about in this episode. Grab your earbuds and come join me!

Want to learn more about paid ads? There is so much more inside Launch Your Box. We’ve got several different trainings, including a brand new training this month on how to set up a Page Like Ad so you can start growing your following. And I cover my subscription box ads strategy in a brand new bonus lesson inside the Launch Your Box training library. You’ll go behind the scenes of my launch and see what I did, what I spent, and the actual ads I was running for that launch. Of course, I break down all my results in detail.
Are you ready to join Launch Your Box? Text me the word LAUNCH to 940-204-0023 and I’ll send you a special invitation! 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><em>“If you don’t have an ads budget, you still have a hobby business.”</em> - Sarah Williams</p><p>Are paid ads part of your subscription box marketing strategy? If not, why not? You might be wondering if paid ads are worth it. Or you might be where I was in the early days of my business, worried about where you’re spending money and not understanding the value of running paid ads. </p><p>Subscription box owners - especially new subscription box owners - hesitate to use paid ads for many reasons. </p><ul>
<li>They don’t understand the ROI from paid ads. Successful ads don’t always result in sales. </li>
<li>They lack the knowledge to set up and run an ad campaign. </li>
<li>They’re focusing only on organic growth strategies like SEO, content, and word of mouth. </li>
<li>They fear failure - they may be uncertain of their goals or not know how to measure results. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>I first used paid ads when I realized I needed to do something else to grow outside of my local area. Organic traffic wasn’t enough. I had a great local business and my subscription box had grown - to a point. But almost all of my business came from local customers. In order to grow, I needed to run ads. Within just six months, the 3,000 followers it had taken me 4-5 years to gain had grown to 7,000 and I was getting subscribers from all over the country. </p><p>Paid ads are such an important part of launching and growing a subscription box business. If you want to grow, you need to continue to drive traffic - new traffic - to your content. </p><p>I’m challenging you to consider running paid ads. And I’m sharing actual data from my three recent launches and paid ads strategy to help you understand why you need to run paid ads. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>It’s time to take action. </strong></p><p>1. Determine your budget.</p><ul>
<li>No matter how small, you have to start somewhere!</li>
<li>If you’re currently selling products or services, use the 8-10% rule.  </li>
<li>If you’re not selling products and are on a limited budget, start with $150/month ($5/day) and increase it as you start selling products. </li>
</ul><p>2. Create an Ads Strategy</p><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Drive traffic to your site? Convert to subscribers? Build your list? Build your following?</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">You should have a solid ad strategy for the different stages and seasons of business you are in.</li>
</ul><p>3. Test and Try </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as we talk all about paid ads. Are they worth it? Do they really make a difference? I answer those questions and share my paid ads results from my recent launches. There’s a lot to talk about in this episode. Grab your earbuds and come join me!</p><p><br></p><p>Want to learn more about paid ads? There is so much more inside Launch Your Box. We’ve got several different trainings, including a brand new training this month on how to set up a Page Like Ad so you can start growing your following. And I cover my subscription box ads strategy in a brand new bonus lesson inside the Launch Your Box training library. You’ll go behind the scenes of my launch and see what I did, what I spent, and the actual ads I was running for that launch. Of course, I break down all my results in detail.</p><p>Are you ready to join Launch Your Box? <strong>Text me the word LAUNCH to 940-204-0023 and I’ll send you a special invitation! </strong></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Join me in all the places: </strong></p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1854</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ef0c1e5a-33ef-11ee-ba12-fb7ae87ba4ca]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4318484436.mp3?updated=1699912257" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>129: Getting Out of Your Own Way and Gaining 100 Subscribers with Amy and Art Design</title>
      <description>“You have to have one subscriber before you can have ten.” - Amy Green
I’m excited to bring you this interview with a member of my Mastermind, Amy Green of Amy and Art. Amy’s journey to subscription box success has many twists and turns, wins and losses, and lessons learned. By never giving up, being open to trying new things, and finding the right coach and community to support her, Amy found the courage to do it her way.  
Amy Green is many things, among them a wife and special needs mom, a former teacher, and a lifelong entrepreneur. Amy’s past businesses included a seriously successful food blog with 190,000 social media followers and a dog-walking business with more than 400 clients! She also partnered with her husband to start a construction business. Amy knows how to get things done. 
Her oldest son’s special needs meant Amy needed to build a business that worked for her family. She turned to her love of art for the answer. Armed with a new laser cutter and an idea, Amy started a business creating wood cut-outs and tier tray decor. She sold them on Etsy until she realized Etsy didn’t let her do one very important thing - build her own email list. Amy had a large following from her days as a blogger. The problem? They weren’t the right followers for her new business. So, Amy moved her business over to Shopify and got serious about list building. 
When Amy decided to add a subscription box to her business, she found Launch Your Box and then also joined my Mastermind. She soaked in all the trainings and knew exactly how I teach my students to launch. There was only one problem… Amy simply didn’t have the capacity to do a launch exactly the way I teach it. Her family life didn’t allow for it. 
After we talked it through, Amy decided to launch anyway - to do what she could. What matters is getting it out there. Don’t wait for things to be perfect. Be willing to launch messy and then clean it up as you go. That’s what Amy did. That first launch she focused on sending emails and posting on social media. She wasn’t sure she could fit in going LIVE - but she did. Those LIVEs were short and sweet because that’s what she could do, but they allowed her to connect with her audience. 
That first launch - the one where Amy hoped for 10 subscribers - ended with 32 subscribers. The next time she launched, a few months later, Amy was able to put more of the launch pieces in place. That launch ended with 100 subscribers! 
Not only does Amy provide her subscribers with a curated DIY tier-tray box every month, she also provides them with a community to belong to. Amy’s community of subscribers allows them to feel seen, heard, and valued. It surprised Amy how much that means to them - and how much it has come to mean to her. 
Amy got out of her own way, launched her subscription box, and continues to grow. She did this by: 

Taking actionable, measurable steps

Finding support and accountability inside Launch Your Box &amp; my Mastermind

Focusing on list-building and audience-building efforts

Collaborating with other subscription box owners

Join me for this episode and let Amy’s story of doing things her way and building a true community of 100 subscribers inspire you to get out of your own way and take the next big step in your subscription box business journey. 
Find and follow Amy: 

Amy and Art on Instagram


Amy and Art on Facebook 

Amy and Art on TikTok

Amy and Art Website

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!

﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 02 Aug 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Getting Out of Your Own Way and Gaining 100 Subscribers with Amy and Art Design</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>129</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I’m excited to bring you this interview with a member of my Mastermind, Amy Green of Amy and Art. Amy’s journey to subscription box success has many twists and turns, wins and losses, and lessons learned. By never giving up, being open to trying new things, and finding the right coach and community to support her, Amy found the courage to do it her way.  </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“You have to have one subscriber before you can have ten.” - Amy Green
I’m excited to bring you this interview with a member of my Mastermind, Amy Green of Amy and Art. Amy’s journey to subscription box success has many twists and turns, wins and losses, and lessons learned. By never giving up, being open to trying new things, and finding the right coach and community to support her, Amy found the courage to do it her way.  
Amy Green is many things, among them a wife and special needs mom, a former teacher, and a lifelong entrepreneur. Amy’s past businesses included a seriously successful food blog with 190,000 social media followers and a dog-walking business with more than 400 clients! She also partnered with her husband to start a construction business. Amy knows how to get things done. 
Her oldest son’s special needs meant Amy needed to build a business that worked for her family. She turned to her love of art for the answer. Armed with a new laser cutter and an idea, Amy started a business creating wood cut-outs and tier tray decor. She sold them on Etsy until she realized Etsy didn’t let her do one very important thing - build her own email list. Amy had a large following from her days as a blogger. The problem? They weren’t the right followers for her new business. So, Amy moved her business over to Shopify and got serious about list building. 
When Amy decided to add a subscription box to her business, she found Launch Your Box and then also joined my Mastermind. She soaked in all the trainings and knew exactly how I teach my students to launch. There was only one problem… Amy simply didn’t have the capacity to do a launch exactly the way I teach it. Her family life didn’t allow for it. 
After we talked it through, Amy decided to launch anyway - to do what she could. What matters is getting it out there. Don’t wait for things to be perfect. Be willing to launch messy and then clean it up as you go. That’s what Amy did. That first launch she focused on sending emails and posting on social media. She wasn’t sure she could fit in going LIVE - but she did. Those LIVEs were short and sweet because that’s what she could do, but they allowed her to connect with her audience. 
That first launch - the one where Amy hoped for 10 subscribers - ended with 32 subscribers. The next time she launched, a few months later, Amy was able to put more of the launch pieces in place. That launch ended with 100 subscribers! 
Not only does Amy provide her subscribers with a curated DIY tier-tray box every month, she also provides them with a community to belong to. Amy’s community of subscribers allows them to feel seen, heard, and valued. It surprised Amy how much that means to them - and how much it has come to mean to her. 
Amy got out of her own way, launched her subscription box, and continues to grow. She did this by: 

Taking actionable, measurable steps

Finding support and accountability inside Launch Your Box &amp; my Mastermind

Focusing on list-building and audience-building efforts

Collaborating with other subscription box owners

Join me for this episode and let Amy’s story of doing things her way and building a true community of 100 subscribers inspire you to get out of your own way and take the next big step in your subscription box business journey. 
Find and follow Amy: 

Amy and Art on Instagram


Amy and Art on Facebook 

Amy and Art on TikTok

Amy and Art Website

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!

﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“You have to have one subscriber before you can have ten.” - Amy Green</p><p>I’m excited to bring you this interview with a member of my Mastermind, Amy Green of Amy and Art. Amy’s journey to subscription box success has many twists and turns, wins and losses, and lessons learned. By never giving up, being open to trying new things, and finding the right coach and community to support her, Amy found the courage to do it her way.  </p><p>Amy Green is many things, among them a wife and special needs mom, a former teacher, and a lifelong entrepreneur. Amy’s past businesses included a seriously successful food blog with 190,000 social media followers and a dog-walking business with more than 400 clients! She also partnered with her husband to start a construction business. Amy knows how to get things done. </p><p>Her oldest son’s special needs meant Amy needed to build a business that worked for her family. She turned to her love of art for the answer. Armed with a new laser cutter and an idea, Amy started a business creating wood cut-outs and tier tray decor. She sold them on Etsy until she realized Etsy didn’t let her do one very important thing - build her own email list. Amy had a large following from her days as a blogger. The problem? They weren’t the right followers for her new business. So, Amy moved her business over to Shopify and got serious about list building. </p><p>When Amy decided to add a subscription box to her business, she found Launch Your Box and then also joined my Mastermind. She soaked in all the trainings and knew exactly how I teach my students to launch. There was only one problem… Amy simply didn’t have the capacity to do a launch exactly the way I teach it. Her family life didn’t allow for it. </p><p>After we talked it through, Amy decided to launch anyway - to do what she could. What matters is getting it out there. Don’t wait for things to be perfect. Be willing to launch messy and then clean it up as you go. That’s what Amy did. That first launch she focused on sending emails and posting on social media. She wasn’t sure she could fit in going LIVE - but she did. Those LIVEs were short and sweet because that’s what she could do, but they allowed her to connect with her audience. </p><p>That first launch - the one where Amy hoped for 10 subscribers - ended with 32 subscribers. The next time she launched, a few months later, Amy was able to put more of the launch pieces in place. That launch ended with 100 subscribers! </p><p>Not only does Amy provide her subscribers with a curated DIY tier-tray box every month, she also provides them with a community to belong to. Amy’s community of subscribers allows them to feel seen, heard, and valued. It surprised Amy how much that means to them - and how much it has come to mean to her. </p><p>Amy got out of her own way, launched her subscription box, and continues to grow. She did this by: </p><ul>
<li>Taking actionable, measurable steps</li>
<li>Finding support and accountability inside Launch Your Box &amp; my Mastermind</li>
<li>Focusing on list-building and audience-building efforts</li>
<li>Collaborating with other subscription box owners</li>
</ul><p>Join me for this episode and let Amy’s story of doing things her way and building a true community of 100 subscribers inspire you to get out of your own way and take the next big step in your subscription box business journey. </p><p>Find and follow Amy: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/amyandartdesigns/?fbclid=IwAR2kAzDgg_KhLWMC5Wq1PyhulTy6EtwawEtZfrZ_gcloq9Pjl8BE6mpyn5E">Amy and Art on Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/amyandartdesigns/">Amy and Art on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><a href="https://www.tiktok.com/@amyandartdesigns?fbclid=IwAR2QmnMicHuKacjcQlB0q7q2K9-hPLjH91QSV-kD5fXT73ADQDJmdMnBxuU">Amy and Art on TikTok</a></li>
<li><a href="https://amyandart.com/?fbclid=IwAR12p5Eq24qWqr_DnWdmvT7qOpf0NkZuKjzio7IAuTVGe4C9CIdNZskEI6Y">Amy and Art Website</a></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today!</p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2483</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6498422e-2f3c-11ee-9b7c-d782a4d2a655]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1345280729.mp3?updated=1700253706" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>128: Affiliate Marketing for Your Subscription Box Business</title>
      <description>Have you thought about adding affiliate marketing to your subscription box business but you’re not sure where to start? Are you wondering where to find good affiliates and how to manage them on the back end? This episode is for you! 
Today we’re diving into all things affiliate marketing for your subscription box business. I’ll explain how affiliate marketing can significantly boost your revenue, expand your customer base, and strengthen your subscription box brand. 
Affiliate marketing is a performance-based marketing strategy where brands reward individuals (affiliates) for marketing or driving traffic and sales to their services or products, including subscription boxes. This type of marketing is a win/win for both the brand and the affiliate. 
Wondering how affiliate marketing works? 
A subscription box owner creates an incentive (one-time or recurring) and generates specific links or codes for each affiliate to allow for accurate tracking. Each affiliate promotes that subscription box owner’s box on their own platforms to their own audiences. For every action taken (i.e., subscribing) the affiliate is paid the incentive. 
To get started: 

Identify what makes a good affiliate for your brand

Clearly define your ideal customer and niche and use affiliates who have the same person in their audience. 

Make sure any potential affiliate aligns with your beliefs and morals. 

Finding potential affiliates

Start with your subscribers - do any of them already have a following? 

Look at influencers who have the same ideal customer - bloggers, YouTubers, TikTokers, other content creators. 

Follow them, like and comment on their content, start building a relationship before approaching them about being an affiliate. 

Build an affiliate program that is a win/win for both parties

Define your commission structure. Options include: 

Recurring revenue share - what % of your profit? 

One time payment upon sign up. 

Set up affiliate software - I use Affiliately - and set up a payment schedule. 

Create assets for affiliates - make it easy for them to promote!

Email swipe files

Graphics with different formats

Social media captions

Schedules and timelines

Send links regularly

Affiliate marketing is an important part of my subscription box marketing strategy. In fact, in my recent launch (which happens to be my biggest launch ever), 22% of all sales came from my 5 affiliates! 
Join me for this episode as I walk you through how to use affiliate marketing in your subscription box business. Whether you’re a new subscription box entrepreneur or a seasoned pro, I have actionable takeaways for you! 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!

﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 26 Jul 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Affiliate Marketing for Your Subscription Box Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>128</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Have you thought about adding affiliate marketing to your subscription box business but you’re not sure where to start? Are you wondering where to find good affiliates and how to manage them on the back end? This episode is for you! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you thought about adding affiliate marketing to your subscription box business but you’re not sure where to start? Are you wondering where to find good affiliates and how to manage them on the back end? This episode is for you! 
Today we’re diving into all things affiliate marketing for your subscription box business. I’ll explain how affiliate marketing can significantly boost your revenue, expand your customer base, and strengthen your subscription box brand. 
Affiliate marketing is a performance-based marketing strategy where brands reward individuals (affiliates) for marketing or driving traffic and sales to their services or products, including subscription boxes. This type of marketing is a win/win for both the brand and the affiliate. 
Wondering how affiliate marketing works? 
A subscription box owner creates an incentive (one-time or recurring) and generates specific links or codes for each affiliate to allow for accurate tracking. Each affiliate promotes that subscription box owner’s box on their own platforms to their own audiences. For every action taken (i.e., subscribing) the affiliate is paid the incentive. 
To get started: 

Identify what makes a good affiliate for your brand

Clearly define your ideal customer and niche and use affiliates who have the same person in their audience. 

Make sure any potential affiliate aligns with your beliefs and morals. 

Finding potential affiliates

Start with your subscribers - do any of them already have a following? 

Look at influencers who have the same ideal customer - bloggers, YouTubers, TikTokers, other content creators. 

Follow them, like and comment on their content, start building a relationship before approaching them about being an affiliate. 

Build an affiliate program that is a win/win for both parties

Define your commission structure. Options include: 

Recurring revenue share - what % of your profit? 

One time payment upon sign up. 

Set up affiliate software - I use Affiliately - and set up a payment schedule. 

Create assets for affiliates - make it easy for them to promote!

Email swipe files

Graphics with different formats

Social media captions

Schedules and timelines

Send links regularly

Affiliate marketing is an important part of my subscription box marketing strategy. In fact, in my recent launch (which happens to be my biggest launch ever), 22% of all sales came from my 5 affiliates! 
Join me for this episode as I walk you through how to use affiliate marketing in your subscription box business. Whether you’re a new subscription box entrepreneur or a seasoned pro, I have actionable takeaways for you! 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!

﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you thought about adding affiliate marketing to your subscription box business but you’re not sure where to start? Are you wondering where to find good affiliates and how to manage them on the back end? This episode is for you! </p><p>Today we’re diving into all things affiliate marketing for your subscription box business. I’ll explain how affiliate marketing can significantly boost your revenue, expand your customer base, and strengthen your subscription box brand. </p><p>Affiliate marketing is a performance-based marketing strategy where brands reward individuals (affiliates) for marketing or driving traffic and sales to their services or products, including subscription boxes. This type of marketing is a win/win for both the brand and the affiliate. </p><p>Wondering how affiliate marketing works? </p><p>A subscription box owner creates an incentive (one-time or recurring) and generates specific links or codes for each affiliate to allow for accurate tracking. Each affiliate promotes that subscription box owner’s box on their own platforms to their own audiences. For every action taken (i.e., subscribing) the affiliate is paid the incentive. </p><p>To get started: </p><ul>
<li>Identify what makes a good affiliate for your brand</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Clearly define your ideal customer and niche and use affiliates who have the same person in their audience. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Make sure any potential affiliate aligns with your beliefs and morals. </li>
<li>Finding potential affiliates</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Start with your subscribers - do any of them already have a following? </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Look at influencers who have the same ideal customer - bloggers, YouTubers, TikTokers, other content creators. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Follow them, like and comment on their content, start building a relationship before approaching them about being an affiliate. </li>
<li>Build an affiliate program that is a win/win for both parties</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Define your commission structure. Options include: </li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Recurring revenue share - what % of your profit? </li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">One time payment upon sign up. </li>
<li>Set up affiliate software - I use<a href="https://www.affiliatly.com/?aff=921"> Affiliately</a> - and set up a payment schedule. </li>
<li>Create assets for affiliates - make it easy for them to promote!</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Email swipe files</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Graphics with different formats</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Social media captions</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Schedules and timelines</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Send links regularly</li>
</ul><p>Affiliate marketing is an important part of my subscription box marketing strategy. In fact, in my recent launch (which happens to be my biggest launch ever), 22% of all sales came from my 5 affiliates! </p><p>Join me for this episode as I walk you through how to use affiliate marketing in your subscription box business. Whether you’re a new subscription box entrepreneur or a seasoned pro, I have actionable takeaways for you! </p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today!</p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1682</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[090970ca-29a3-11ee-a4ae-43becbfd429d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6021647498.mp3?updated=1699912283" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>127: From 0 to 500 Subscribers on the First Launch with Art Shattered</title>
      <description>I’m excited to bring you this interview with my good friend Cindy Manly of Art Shattered. Cindy has a successful membership with over 1200 members and has been selling one-time art supply kits for the past few years. If you’ve been selling one-time boxes and are wondering if a subscription is for you, you’re going to want to hear Cindy’s story! 

Cindy is an artist who specializes in glass and resin art. She makes beautiful, unique pieces of 3-D art that her followers LOVE. She also teaches her followers how to create their own art through her online membership. Cindy started her membership in 2018 and now has over 1200 members. 

When some of Cindy’s members started asking where to get the supplies they needed to create the pieces she was teaching - and others mentioned they were having a hard time finding the right supplies - she started selling one-off kits. Every time she offered up a kit for sale, she sold out. When she offered kits during her membership pre-launch, she sold 800 full kits and 500 partial kits. 

Cindy and I have been friends for several years and I’ve been telling her almost that long that she needed to start a subscription box. She resisted the idea for a long time. But after selling 1300 kits during her pre-launch, she was convinced. 

Armed with the launch plan she learned inside Launch Your Box and as a member of my Mastermind and backed by her audience of raving fans, Cindy launched her subscription box in June. 

The result? She sold out of all 500 available spots in her quarterly subscription! And she used four strategies to do it. 


  Urgency - Cindy opened the subscription only to her online membership for 48 hours. 

  Waitlist - Cindy then opened up to members of the waitlist she’d been growing for three weeks leading up to the launch. 

  Early Bird Bonus

  Engaging her audience - on her last LIVE, Cindy added names on post-it notes to her wall of subscribers. 


Cindy originally wanted to only plan for 200 boxes, but I convinced her she could absolutely do more. And she did! She’s also an absolute genius who packed her subscription boxes ahead of time and had them ready to ship BEFORE she launched! That meant when she was exhausted from her launch - and if you do it right, you will be exhausted - Cindy headed straight to the beach! 

500 subscribers means additional financial security for Cindy, the satisfaction of knowing she is serving her loyal audience in yet another way, and steady employment for her team. I can’t wait to watch Cindy’s subscription box continue to grow. 

Join me for this episode as Cindy walks us through her journey of moving from offering one-time boxes to launching a subscription box and welcoming 500 new subscribers.  

Find and follow Cindy: 


  Art Shattered on Instagram

  Art Shattered on Facebook 

  Art Shattered Website


Join me in all the places: 


  Facebook

  Instagram

  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 19 Jul 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From 0 to 500 Subscribers on the First Launch with Art Shattered</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>127</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I’m excited to bring you this interview with my good friend Cindy Manly of Art Shattered. Cindy has a successful membership with over 1200 members and has been selling one-time art supply kits for the past few years. If you’ve been selling one-time boxes and are wondering if a subscription is for you, you’re going to want to hear Cindy’s story! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I’m excited to bring you this interview with my good friend Cindy Manly of Art Shattered. Cindy has a successful membership with over 1200 members and has been selling one-time art supply kits for the past few years. If you’ve been selling one-time boxes and are wondering if a subscription is for you, you’re going to want to hear Cindy’s story! 

Cindy is an artist who specializes in glass and resin art. She makes beautiful, unique pieces of 3-D art that her followers LOVE. She also teaches her followers how to create their own art through her online membership. Cindy started her membership in 2018 and now has over 1200 members. 

When some of Cindy’s members started asking where to get the supplies they needed to create the pieces she was teaching - and others mentioned they were having a hard time finding the right supplies - she started selling one-off kits. Every time she offered up a kit for sale, she sold out. When she offered kits during her membership pre-launch, she sold 800 full kits and 500 partial kits. 

Cindy and I have been friends for several years and I’ve been telling her almost that long that she needed to start a subscription box. She resisted the idea for a long time. But after selling 1300 kits during her pre-launch, she was convinced. 

Armed with the launch plan she learned inside Launch Your Box and as a member of my Mastermind and backed by her audience of raving fans, Cindy launched her subscription box in June. 

The result? She sold out of all 500 available spots in her quarterly subscription! And she used four strategies to do it. 


  Urgency - Cindy opened the subscription only to her online membership for 48 hours. 

  Waitlist - Cindy then opened up to members of the waitlist she’d been growing for three weeks leading up to the launch. 

  Early Bird Bonus

  Engaging her audience - on her last LIVE, Cindy added names on post-it notes to her wall of subscribers. 


Cindy originally wanted to only plan for 200 boxes, but I convinced her she could absolutely do more. And she did! She’s also an absolute genius who packed her subscription boxes ahead of time and had them ready to ship BEFORE she launched! That meant when she was exhausted from her launch - and if you do it right, you will be exhausted - Cindy headed straight to the beach! 

500 subscribers means additional financial security for Cindy, the satisfaction of knowing she is serving her loyal audience in yet another way, and steady employment for her team. I can’t wait to watch Cindy’s subscription box continue to grow. 

Join me for this episode as Cindy walks us through her journey of moving from offering one-time boxes to launching a subscription box and welcoming 500 new subscribers.  

Find and follow Cindy: 


  Art Shattered on Instagram

  Art Shattered on Facebook 

  Art Shattered Website


Join me in all the places: 


  Facebook

  Instagram

  
Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 




Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’m excited to bring you this interview with my good friend Cindy Manly of Art Shattered. Cindy has a successful membership with over 1200 members and has been selling one-time art supply kits for the past few years. If you’ve been selling one-time boxes and are wondering if a subscription is for you, you’re going to want to hear Cindy’s story! </p>
<p>Cindy is an artist who specializes in glass and resin art. She makes beautiful, unique pieces of 3-D art that her followers LOVE. She also teaches her followers how to create their own art through her online membership. Cindy started her membership in 2018 and now has over 1200 members. </p>
<p>When some of Cindy’s members started asking where to get the supplies they needed to create the pieces she was teaching - and others mentioned they were having a hard time finding the right supplies - she started selling one-off kits. Every time she offered up a kit for sale, she sold out. When she offered kits during her membership pre-launch, she sold 800 full kits and 500 partial kits. </p>
<p>Cindy and I have been friends for several years and I’ve been telling her almost that long that she needed to start a subscription box. She resisted the idea for a long time. But after selling 1300 kits during her pre-launch, she was convinced. </p>
<p>Armed with the launch plan she learned inside Launch Your Box and as a member of my Mastermind and backed by her audience of raving fans, Cindy launched her subscription box in June. </p>
<p>The result? She sold out of all 500 available spots in her quarterly subscription! And she used four strategies to do it. </p>
<ol>
  <li>Urgency - Cindy opened the subscription only to her online membership for 48 hours. </li>
  <li>Waitlist - Cindy then opened up to members of the waitlist she’d been growing for three weeks leading up to the launch. </li>
  <li>Early Bird Bonus</li>
  <li>Engaging her audience - on her last LIVE, Cindy added names on post-it notes to her wall of subscribers. </li>
</ol>
<p>Cindy originally wanted to only plan for 200 boxes, but I convinced her she could absolutely do more. And she did! She’s also an absolute genius who packed her subscription boxes ahead of time and had them ready to ship BEFORE she launched! That meant when she was exhausted from her launch - and if you do it right, you will be exhausted - Cindy headed straight to the beach! </p>
<p>500 subscribers means additional financial security for Cindy, the satisfaction of knowing she is serving her loyal audience in yet another way, and steady employment for her team. I can’t wait to watch Cindy’s subscription box continue to grow. </p>
<p>Join me for this episode as Cindy walks us through her journey of moving from offering one-time boxes to launching a subscription box and welcoming 500 new subscribers.  </p>
<p>Find and follow Cindy: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/cindymanly_artshattered/">Art Shattered on Instagram</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/ArtShattered">Art Shattered on Facebook </a></li>
  <li><a href="https://artshattered.com/">Art Shattered Website</a></li>
</ul>
<p>Join me in all the places: </p>
<ul>
  <li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
  <li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
  <li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul>
<p><br></p>
<p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2360</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[de03cee8-243e-11ee-af4d-f75ce4a5e23a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3008930483.mp3?updated=1699912402" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>126: Getting a Book Deal &amp; Writing My Book</title>
      <description>Today’s episode is a little different. Instead of interviewing a subscription box owner from Launch Your Box or sharing tactics and strategies to help you make progress in your own subscription box business, I’m sharing a different kind of journey. The journey of becoming an author. 

I never dreamed of writing a book. It wasn’t something that was on my bucket list. It really wasn’t something I’d ever given any thought to. So imagine my surprise when I found myself in the middle of a conversation with high-level people in the online entrepreneur space and best-selling authors telling me I should write a book. And then being offered a book deal by the CEO of a major publishing company. 

I often tell my coaching students how important it is to put yourself in the room. To quiet self-doubt and believe they are worthy of opportunities. I still have to tell myself this. I did before walking into that room full of people more successful than I am. And I sure did have to tell myself this - over and over again - during the process of writing this book. 

Writing a book isn’t easy. It’s actually really, really hard. Starting with putting together a solid book proposal all the way through working with the publisher’s art department to design a book cover I loved. All of it was hard. 

This book isn’t about me. Not really. Instead, it’s a book about my business and my students. Because a book about starting a subscription box business wouldn’t be complete without the stories of my amazing students. 

Each chapter focuses on a certain aspect of starting, launching, or growing a subscription box business. And each chapter has three parts: 

My story 

An action you need to take 

One of my student’s stories 


I didn’t write this book alone. I had a team supporting me and guiding me through this totally new world. Writers, editors, artists. We all worked together to produce a book I am SO proud of. 

One Box at a Time is about building a business you can be proud of. And it’s scheduled to be published on November 14th. I can’t wait to share it with you soon. 

Join me for this episode as I walk you through all that went into writing my first book and why I’m so excited to share it with all of you. 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!

﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Jul 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Getting a Book Deal &amp; Writing My Book</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>126</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I never dreamed of writing a book. It wasn’t something that was on my bucket list. It really wasn’t something I’d ever given any thought to. So imagine my surprise when I found myself in the middle of a conversation with high-level people in the online entrepreneur space and best-selling authors telling me I should write a book. And then being offered a book deal by the CEO of a major publishing company. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today’s episode is a little different. Instead of interviewing a subscription box owner from Launch Your Box or sharing tactics and strategies to help you make progress in your own subscription box business, I’m sharing a different kind of journey. The journey of becoming an author. 

I never dreamed of writing a book. It wasn’t something that was on my bucket list. It really wasn’t something I’d ever given any thought to. So imagine my surprise when I found myself in the middle of a conversation with high-level people in the online entrepreneur space and best-selling authors telling me I should write a book. And then being offered a book deal by the CEO of a major publishing company. 

I often tell my coaching students how important it is to put yourself in the room. To quiet self-doubt and believe they are worthy of opportunities. I still have to tell myself this. I did before walking into that room full of people more successful than I am. And I sure did have to tell myself this - over and over again - during the process of writing this book. 

Writing a book isn’t easy. It’s actually really, really hard. Starting with putting together a solid book proposal all the way through working with the publisher’s art department to design a book cover I loved. All of it was hard. 

This book isn’t about me. Not really. Instead, it’s a book about my business and my students. Because a book about starting a subscription box business wouldn’t be complete without the stories of my amazing students. 

Each chapter focuses on a certain aspect of starting, launching, or growing a subscription box business. And each chapter has three parts: 

My story 

An action you need to take 

One of my student’s stories 


I didn’t write this book alone. I had a team supporting me and guiding me through this totally new world. Writers, editors, artists. We all worked together to produce a book I am SO proud of. 

One Box at a Time is about building a business you can be proud of. And it’s scheduled to be published on November 14th. I can’t wait to share it with you soon. 

Join me for this episode as I walk you through all that went into writing my first book and why I’m so excited to share it with all of you. 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!

﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today’s episode is a little different. Instead of interviewing a subscription box owner from Launch Your Box or sharing tactics and strategies to help you make progress in your own subscription box business, I’m sharing a different kind of journey. The journey of becoming an author. </p><p><br></p><p>I never dreamed of writing a book. It wasn’t something that was on my bucket list. It really wasn’t something I’d ever given any thought to. So imagine my surprise when I found myself in the middle of a conversation with high-level people in the online entrepreneur space and best-selling authors telling me <em>I </em>should write a book. And then being offered a book deal by the CEO of a major publishing company. </p><p><br></p><p>I often tell my coaching students how important it is to put yourself in the room. To quiet self-doubt and believe they are worthy of opportunities. I still have to tell myself this. I did before walking into that room full of people more successful than I am. And I sure did have to tell myself this - over and over again - during the process of writing this book. </p><p><br></p><p>Writing a book isn’t easy. It’s actually really, really hard. Starting with putting together a solid book proposal all the way through working with the publisher’s art department to design a book cover I loved. All of it was hard. </p><p><br></p><p>This book isn’t about me. Not really. Instead, it’s a book about my business and my students. Because a book about starting a subscription box business wouldn’t be complete without the stories of my amazing students. </p><p><br></p><p>Each chapter focuses on a certain aspect of starting, launching, or growing a subscription box business. And each chapter has three parts: </p><ul>
<li>My story </li>
<li>An action you need to take </li>
<li>One of my student’s stories </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>I didn’t write this book alone. I had a team supporting me and guiding me through this totally new world. Writers, editors, artists. We all worked together to produce a book I am SO proud of. </p><p><br></p><p><em>One Box at a Time</em> is about building a business you can be proud of. And it’s scheduled to be published on November 14th. I can’t wait to share it with you soon. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as I walk you through all that went into writing my first book and why I’m so excited to share it with all of you. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today!</p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1493</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d44dde9c-1620-11ee-a683-d372d5781e10]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4398625378.mp3?updated=1699912290" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>125: 5 Ways to Do a Monthly Unboxing - Every Month</title>
      <description>How many different ways do you do an unboxing for your subscription box every month? Would it surprise you to learn there are FIVE different ways you can do an unboxing… every month? My box opening checklist makes it easy! 
Building connections. Creating excitement and FOMO. Growing your waitlist. Gaining new subscribers. There are so many reasons you need to make a monthly unboxing part of your subscription box marketing strategy. 
You know the why, let’s talk about the how. How can you do a monthly unboxing FIVE different ways every month? Simply follow this checklist. 

Live Unboxing - this is a MUST. Turn on the camera, invite your followers and subscribers, and take them through the box. Don’t overcomplicate it: 

Set the date

Set the stage

State your hook

Encourage engagement early

Tell the story of the box (your curation process)

Show each piece and how it ties to the next 

Give the audience a call to action (subscribe, join the waitlist, grab one of the extra pieces) 



Email Unboxing - using the same content you just created for the LIVE. 


Blog Unboxing - turn the email unboxing into a blog post. 


Short Video Unboxing - while taking pictures for social media, the blog, and the email, shoot a boxing or unboxing video 

Use on Reels, TikTok, YouTube Shorts, Pinterest, etc. 

Story Slide Unboxing - create three-five slides to use in picture stories. 
If you’re not currently doing a monthly unboxing, don’t try to start doing all five. Instead, start with one or two - but the LIVE is a must do! If you are already doing a monthly LIVE unboxing, start layering in a couple more unboxings until you work your way up to doing all five. It’s not about being overwhelmed, it’s about making progress. 
And when you do these monthly unboxings, I have three tips for you to keep in mind: 
Always invite your subscribers - specifically to your LIVE unboxings. 

It’s a connection point. 

They provide instant social proof. 

They’ll love to show up with you and share their excitement! 

Always give a sneak peek of the next month’s box. 

Create excitement and anticipation. 

Give subscribers a reason to show up to the LIVE. 

Always have a call to action. 

Join now. 

Get on the waitlist. 

Join me for this episode as I walk you through five ways you can do a monthly unboxing - and connect with your audience - every month. 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
﻿ Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 05 Jul 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>5 Ways to Do a Monthly Unboxing - Every Month</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>125</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>How many different ways do you do an unboxing for your subscription box every month? Would it surprise you to learn there are FIVE different ways you can do an unboxing… every month? My box opening checklist makes it easy! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>How many different ways do you do an unboxing for your subscription box every month? Would it surprise you to learn there are FIVE different ways you can do an unboxing… every month? My box opening checklist makes it easy! 
Building connections. Creating excitement and FOMO. Growing your waitlist. Gaining new subscribers. There are so many reasons you need to make a monthly unboxing part of your subscription box marketing strategy. 
You know the why, let’s talk about the how. How can you do a monthly unboxing FIVE different ways every month? Simply follow this checklist. 

Live Unboxing - this is a MUST. Turn on the camera, invite your followers and subscribers, and take them through the box. Don’t overcomplicate it: 

Set the date

Set the stage

State your hook

Encourage engagement early

Tell the story of the box (your curation process)

Show each piece and how it ties to the next 

Give the audience a call to action (subscribe, join the waitlist, grab one of the extra pieces) 



Email Unboxing - using the same content you just created for the LIVE. 


Blog Unboxing - turn the email unboxing into a blog post. 


Short Video Unboxing - while taking pictures for social media, the blog, and the email, shoot a boxing or unboxing video 

Use on Reels, TikTok, YouTube Shorts, Pinterest, etc. 

Story Slide Unboxing - create three-five slides to use in picture stories. 
If you’re not currently doing a monthly unboxing, don’t try to start doing all five. Instead, start with one or two - but the LIVE is a must do! If you are already doing a monthly LIVE unboxing, start layering in a couple more unboxings until you work your way up to doing all five. It’s not about being overwhelmed, it’s about making progress. 
And when you do these monthly unboxings, I have three tips for you to keep in mind: 
Always invite your subscribers - specifically to your LIVE unboxings. 

It’s a connection point. 

They provide instant social proof. 

They’ll love to show up with you and share their excitement! 

Always give a sneak peek of the next month’s box. 

Create excitement and anticipation. 

Give subscribers a reason to show up to the LIVE. 

Always have a call to action. 

Join now. 

Get on the waitlist. 

Join me for this episode as I walk you through five ways you can do a monthly unboxing - and connect with your audience - every month. 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
﻿ Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>How many different ways do you do an unboxing for your subscription box every month? Would it surprise you to learn there are FIVE different ways you can do an unboxing… every month? My box opening checklist makes it easy! </p><p>Building connections. Creating excitement and FOMO. Growing your waitlist. Gaining new subscribers. There are so many reasons you need to make a monthly unboxing part of your subscription box marketing strategy. </p><p>You know the why, let’s talk about the how. How can you do a monthly unboxing FIVE different ways every month? Simply follow this checklist. </p><ol><li>
<strong>Live Unboxing </strong>- this is a MUST. Turn on the camera, invite your followers and subscribers, and take them through the box. Don’t overcomplicate it: </li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Set the date</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Set the stage</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">State your hook</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Encourage engagement early</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Tell the story of the box (your curation process)</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Show each piece and how it ties to the next </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Give the audience a call to action (subscribe, join the waitlist, grab one of the extra pieces) </li>
</ul><ol>
<li>
<strong>Email Unboxing</strong> - using the same content you just created for the LIVE. </li>
<li>
<strong>Blog Unboxing</strong> - turn the email unboxing into a blog post. </li>
<li>
<strong>Short Video Unboxing</strong> - while taking pictures for social media, the blog, and the email, shoot a boxing or unboxing video </li>
</ol><ul><li class="ql-indent-1">Use on Reels, TikTok, YouTube Shorts, Pinterest, etc. </li></ul><ol><li>
<strong>Story Slide Unboxing</strong> - create three-five slides to use in picture stories. </li></ol><p>If you’re not currently doing a monthly unboxing, don’t try to start doing all five. Instead, start with one or two - but the LIVE is a must do! If you are already doing a monthly LIVE unboxing, start layering in a couple more unboxings until you work your way up to doing all five. It’s not about being overwhelmed, it’s about making progress. </p><p>And when you do these monthly unboxings, I have three tips for you to keep in mind: </p><ol><li>Always invite your subscribers - specifically to your LIVE unboxings. </li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">It’s a connection point. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">They provide instant social proof. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">They’ll love to show up with you and share their excitement! </li>
</ul><ol><li>Always give a sneak peek of the next month’s box. </li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Create excitement and anticipation. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Give subscribers a reason to show up to the LIVE. </li>
</ul><ol><li>Always have a call to action. </li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Join now. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Get on the waitlist. </li>
</ul><p>Join me for this episode as I walk you through five ways you can do a monthly unboxing - and connect with your audience - every month. </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>﻿</strong> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1803</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9d9ba080-17c1-11ee-aa52-ef4c23153ce1]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9193727067.mp3?updated=1699912214" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>124: Turning Your Lifelong Career Into a Subscription Box with The Interpreter Box</title>
      <description>During this special episode, you’ll meet and be inspired by Launch Your Box member Michon Shaw. It’s not only her journey to starting and launching a subscription box that inspires, but her positive outlook and joy-filled dedication to her community. 
Michon has built a successful career around her passion for American Sign Language (ASL). She is an ASL interpreter herself as well as a professor who teaches ASL students to become interpreters. In addition to working a full-time corporate job, Michon also started a company dedicated to providing interpreting services and celebrating ASL interpreters: Interpret Educate Serve (IES). 
Michon has a special passion for increasing the number of underrepresented interpreters and celebrating Black and Brown ASL interpreters. This passion led to her designing her first t-shirt, which she brought to the National Black Deaf Advocates Conference. She sold out her stock in just five minutes. 
This experience opened Michon’s eyes to the fact that this niche was not being served. And that she could serve them by supporting and celebrating them. She added apparel and merchandise as the second part of her business. 
It was during Coaching Week of 2021 that Michon first saw the possibility of adding a subscription box to her business. She wanted to provide a special experience for ASL interpreters with items for them to use and wear to increase awareness of and celebrate their profession. 
Michon joined Launch Your Box, dug into the training, took what she learned, and implemented it. She launched with 12 subscribers and has slowly and steadily built her subscriber base. She added the TerpTee-shirt club and also offers a box specifically for interpreting students. 
Michon’s biggest challenge to growing her subscription box business is TIME. She is a seriously busy woman! But her passion for the community she serves means she makes the time. 
Join me for this episode to meet Michon and be inspired by her energy, passion, and positivity. Learn how she took her passion and turned it into a business and how you can, too. 
Find and follow Michon: 

The Interpreter Box on Instagram


The Interpreter Box on Facebook 

The Interpreter Box Website

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 28 Jun 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Turning Your Lifelong Career Into a Subscription Box with The Interpreter Box</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>124</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>During this special episode, you’ll meet and be inspired by Launch Your Box member Michon Shaw. It’s not only her journey to starting and launching a subscription box that inspires, but her positive outlook and joy-filled dedication to her community. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>During this special episode, you’ll meet and be inspired by Launch Your Box member Michon Shaw. It’s not only her journey to starting and launching a subscription box that inspires, but her positive outlook and joy-filled dedication to her community. 
Michon has built a successful career around her passion for American Sign Language (ASL). She is an ASL interpreter herself as well as a professor who teaches ASL students to become interpreters. In addition to working a full-time corporate job, Michon also started a company dedicated to providing interpreting services and celebrating ASL interpreters: Interpret Educate Serve (IES). 
Michon has a special passion for increasing the number of underrepresented interpreters and celebrating Black and Brown ASL interpreters. This passion led to her designing her first t-shirt, which she brought to the National Black Deaf Advocates Conference. She sold out her stock in just five minutes. 
This experience opened Michon’s eyes to the fact that this niche was not being served. And that she could serve them by supporting and celebrating them. She added apparel and merchandise as the second part of her business. 
It was during Coaching Week of 2021 that Michon first saw the possibility of adding a subscription box to her business. She wanted to provide a special experience for ASL interpreters with items for them to use and wear to increase awareness of and celebrate their profession. 
Michon joined Launch Your Box, dug into the training, took what she learned, and implemented it. She launched with 12 subscribers and has slowly and steadily built her subscriber base. She added the TerpTee-shirt club and also offers a box specifically for interpreting students. 
Michon’s biggest challenge to growing her subscription box business is TIME. She is a seriously busy woman! But her passion for the community she serves means she makes the time. 
Join me for this episode to meet Michon and be inspired by her energy, passion, and positivity. Learn how she took her passion and turned it into a business and how you can, too. 
Find and follow Michon: 

The Interpreter Box on Instagram


The Interpreter Box on Facebook 

The Interpreter Box Website

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today!

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>During this special episode, you’ll meet and be inspired by Launch Your Box member Michon Shaw. It’s not only her journey to starting and launching a subscription box that inspires, but her positive outlook and joy-filled dedication to her community. </p><p>Michon has built a successful career around her passion for American Sign Language (ASL). She is an ASL interpreter herself as well as a professor who teaches ASL students to become interpreters. In addition to working a full-time corporate job, Michon also started a company dedicated to providing interpreting services and celebrating ASL interpreters: Interpret Educate Serve (IES). </p><p>Michon has a special passion for increasing the number of underrepresented interpreters and celebrating Black and Brown ASL interpreters. This passion led to her designing her first t-shirt, which she brought to the National Black Deaf Advocates Conference. She sold out her stock in just five minutes. </p><p>This experience opened Michon’s eyes to the fact that this niche was not being served. And that she could serve them by supporting and celebrating them. She added apparel and merchandise as the second part of her business. </p><p>It was during Coaching Week of 2021 that Michon first saw the possibility of adding a subscription box to her business. She wanted to provide a special experience for ASL interpreters with items for them to use and wear to increase awareness of and celebrate their profession. </p><p>Michon joined Launch Your Box, dug into the training, took what she learned, and implemented it. She launched with 12 subscribers and has slowly and steadily built her subscriber base. She added the TerpTee-shirt club and also offers a box specifically for interpreting students. </p><p>Michon’s biggest challenge to growing her subscription box business is TIME. She is a seriously busy woman! But her passion for the community she serves means she makes the time. </p><p>Join me for this episode to meet Michon and be inspired by her energy, passion, and positivity. Learn how she took her passion and turned it into a business and how you can, too. </p><p>Find and follow Michon: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/interpreteducateserve/">The Interpreter Box on Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/interpreteducateserve">The Interpreter Box on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><a href="https://theinterpreterbox.com/">The Interpreter Box Website</a></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today!</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1730</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[de6df14a-118f-11ee-8cbf-8f26dd85fa5f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8835997040.mp3?updated=1699912207" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>123: From 300 to over 25,000 Subscribers with Beachly Brands</title>
      <description>I’m excited to bring you this interview with Kevin Tighe, co-founder and CEO of Beachly Brands recorded LIVE at SubSummit. Beachly Brands currently has three successful subscriptions, but I asked Kevin to take us back to the beginning of his subscription box journey.  
The first lesson Kevin wanted to share with you is that we all have failures. He did, I have, and you will. After Kevin experienced a failure, he spent some time in Hawaii reconnecting with what he loves - the beach and surfing. 
This love for the beach and outdoor life sparked what turned into an idea for a subscription box. Kevin’s first box was for men. The box went through some iterations as they refined their audience and the contents of the box. Over time, it grew into a successful subscription box. 
Then Kevin and his team decided to add another box, a beach apparel and accessories box for women. Kevin asked his friends to model the items and took the photos himself. It wasn’t perfect, but it was more than good enough. Kevin did what needed to be done to get that women’s box launched. The result? 1,000 subscribers in the first week! And today they have 25,000 subscribers! 
The third box came from a desire to add a lower-priced box that would not compete with the women’s box. A beauty product box featuring natural, cruelty-free products was the answer. 
Kevin and his team have learned a LOT through their subscription box journey. You don’t get to 25,000 subscribers without gaining knowledge, solving problems, and learning from failures. 
I asked Kevin to share some advice for subscription box owners, especially those in the early stages of business. His tips included: 


Understand the core functions of your business. You may hire team members to take over certain tasks, but you need to have that knowledge. 


Be strategic - look at where your time is best spent today. If you’re spending all of your time answering customer service emails or packing boxes, you don’t have the time to do the things that will make your business grow. 


Understand your numbers. When it comes to your business, you need to be a numbers person. 

Join me for this episode as Kevin and I talk about his journey from 300 to 25,000 subscribers, what’s next for Beachly Brands, and his advice for new subscription box owners. 
Find and follow Kevin: 

Beachly on Instagram


Beachly on Facebook 

Beachly Website

Kevin on Linked In

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 21 Jun 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From 300 to over 25,000 Subscribers with Beachly Brands</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>123</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>I’m excited to bring you this interview with Kevin Tighe, co-founder and CEO of Beachly Brands recorded LIVE at SubSummit. Beachly Brands currently has three successful subscriptions, but I asked Kevin to take us back to the beginning of his subscription box journey.  </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I’m excited to bring you this interview with Kevin Tighe, co-founder and CEO of Beachly Brands recorded LIVE at SubSummit. Beachly Brands currently has three successful subscriptions, but I asked Kevin to take us back to the beginning of his subscription box journey.  
The first lesson Kevin wanted to share with you is that we all have failures. He did, I have, and you will. After Kevin experienced a failure, he spent some time in Hawaii reconnecting with what he loves - the beach and surfing. 
This love for the beach and outdoor life sparked what turned into an idea for a subscription box. Kevin’s first box was for men. The box went through some iterations as they refined their audience and the contents of the box. Over time, it grew into a successful subscription box. 
Then Kevin and his team decided to add another box, a beach apparel and accessories box for women. Kevin asked his friends to model the items and took the photos himself. It wasn’t perfect, but it was more than good enough. Kevin did what needed to be done to get that women’s box launched. The result? 1,000 subscribers in the first week! And today they have 25,000 subscribers! 
The third box came from a desire to add a lower-priced box that would not compete with the women’s box. A beauty product box featuring natural, cruelty-free products was the answer. 
Kevin and his team have learned a LOT through their subscription box journey. You don’t get to 25,000 subscribers without gaining knowledge, solving problems, and learning from failures. 
I asked Kevin to share some advice for subscription box owners, especially those in the early stages of business. His tips included: 


Understand the core functions of your business. You may hire team members to take over certain tasks, but you need to have that knowledge. 


Be strategic - look at where your time is best spent today. If you’re spending all of your time answering customer service emails or packing boxes, you don’t have the time to do the things that will make your business grow. 


Understand your numbers. When it comes to your business, you need to be a numbers person. 

Join me for this episode as Kevin and I talk about his journey from 300 to 25,000 subscribers, what’s next for Beachly Brands, and his advice for new subscription box owners. 
Find and follow Kevin: 

Beachly on Instagram


Beachly on Facebook 

Beachly Website

Kevin on Linked In

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’m excited to bring you this interview with Kevin Tighe, co-founder and CEO of Beachly Brands recorded LIVE at SubSummit. Beachly Brands currently has three successful subscriptions, but I asked Kevin to take us back to the beginning of his subscription box journey.  </p><p>The first lesson Kevin wanted to share with you is that we all have failures. He did, I have, and you will. After Kevin experienced a failure, he spent some time in Hawaii reconnecting with what he loves - the beach and surfing. </p><p>This love for the beach and outdoor life sparked what turned into an idea for a subscription box. Kevin’s first box was for men. The box went through some iterations as they refined their audience and the contents of the box. Over time, it grew into a successful subscription box. </p><p>Then Kevin and his team decided to add another box, a beach apparel and accessories box for women. Kevin asked his friends to model the items and took the photos himself. It wasn’t perfect, but it was more than good enough. Kevin did what needed to be done to get that women’s box launched. The result? 1,000 subscribers in the first week! And today they have 25,000 subscribers! </p><p>The third box came from a desire to add a lower-priced box that would not compete with the women’s box. A beauty product box featuring natural, cruelty-free products was the answer. </p><p>Kevin and his team have learned a LOT through their subscription box journey. You don’t get to 25,000 subscribers without gaining knowledge, solving problems, and learning from failures. </p><p>I asked Kevin to share some advice for subscription box owners, especially those in the early stages of business. His tips included: </p><ul>
<li>
<strong>Understand the core functions of your business.</strong> You may hire team members to take over certain tasks, but you need to have that knowledge. </li>
<li>
<strong>Be strategic - look at where your time is best spent today.</strong> If you’re spending all of your time answering customer service emails or packing boxes, you don’t have the time to do the things that will make your business grow. </li>
<li>
<strong>Understand your numbers. </strong>When it comes to your business, you need to be a numbers person. </li>
</ul><p>Join me for this episode as Kevin and I talk about his journey from 300 to 25,000 subscribers, what’s next for Beachly Brands, and his advice for new subscription box owners. </p><p>Find and follow Kevin: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/beachly/">Beachly on Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/Beachly">Beachly on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><a href="https://beach.ly/">Beachly Website</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/kevinptighe/">Kevin on Linked In</a></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1838</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4f0e4a76-0e52-11ee-8d8b-674dbba8cc3f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7429235831.mp3?updated=1699912177" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>4 Focus Areas to Start Your Subscription Box</title>
      <description>“Whether you think you can, or you think you can't – you're right.” - Henry Ford.
 
You’ve dreamed about starting a subscription box and now you’re ready to take action and start making those dreams come true. So where should you start? 
 
It’s easy to get caught up in the fun parts - products and packaging. And you absolutely need those in place, but spending too much time designing custom boxes or sourcing products for future boxes takes time away from what you need to be doing right now. 
 
If you’re just getting started, make sure to go through my FREE 6 in 60 Workshop where you’ll curate six months' worth of boxes for your ideal customer. This workshop guides you through getting clear about who your ideal customer is and the type of experience you want to provide for them. 
 
Then it’s time to move on to the four areas where you need to focus your time and energy now.  
Audience building - soooo important. 

Start yesterday!

Serve before selling - Listen to episodes 33 and 45!!

Not easy, but necessary!

Create awareness of who you are and what you sell. 

Emails, texts, posts, stories, short videos, LIVES, paid Ads

Marketing

Website

Payment processor

Shipping software

CRM - email platform

Tech - you need four things in place. 

We tell ourselves we can’t do something more often than we tell ourselves we can. 

Believe in abundance. 

Embrace your imperfections. 

Operate with a glass-half-full mentality. 

Mindset - the MOST important!
 
Are you ready to get started on turning your subscription box dreams into reality? In today’s episode, I talk about the four areas you need to focus your time and energy FIRST. Now is the time to “think you can!” Come listen!
 
Important Links: 

 6 in 60 Workshop

 Launch Your Box Podcast Episode 33

 Launch Your Box Podcast Episode 45

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 14 Jun 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>4 Focus Areas to Start Your Subscription Box</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>“Whether you think you can, or you think you can't – you're right.” - Henry Ford.     You’ve dreamed about starting a subscription box and now you’re ready to take action and start making those dreams come true. So where should you start?    </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Whether you think you can, or you think you can't – you're right.” - Henry Ford.
 
You’ve dreamed about starting a subscription box and now you’re ready to take action and start making those dreams come true. So where should you start? 
 
It’s easy to get caught up in the fun parts - products and packaging. And you absolutely need those in place, but spending too much time designing custom boxes or sourcing products for future boxes takes time away from what you need to be doing right now. 
 
If you’re just getting started, make sure to go through my FREE 6 in 60 Workshop where you’ll curate six months' worth of boxes for your ideal customer. This workshop guides you through getting clear about who your ideal customer is and the type of experience you want to provide for them. 
 
Then it’s time to move on to the four areas where you need to focus your time and energy now.  
Audience building - soooo important. 

Start yesterday!

Serve before selling - Listen to episodes 33 and 45!!

Not easy, but necessary!

Create awareness of who you are and what you sell. 

Emails, texts, posts, stories, short videos, LIVES, paid Ads

Marketing

Website

Payment processor

Shipping software

CRM - email platform

Tech - you need four things in place. 

We tell ourselves we can’t do something more often than we tell ourselves we can. 

Believe in abundance. 

Embrace your imperfections. 

Operate with a glass-half-full mentality. 

Mindset - the MOST important!
 
Are you ready to get started on turning your subscription box dreams into reality? In today’s episode, I talk about the four areas you need to focus your time and energy FIRST. Now is the time to “think you can!” Come listen!
 
Important Links: 

 6 in 60 Workshop

 Launch Your Box Podcast Episode 33

 Launch Your Box Podcast Episode 45

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“Whether you think you can, or you think you can't – you're right.” - Henry Ford.</p><p> </p><p>You’ve dreamed about starting a subscription box and now you’re ready to take action and start making those dreams come true. So where should you start? </p><p> </p><p>It’s easy to get caught up in the fun parts - products and packaging. And you absolutely need those in place, but spending too much time designing custom boxes or sourcing products for future boxes takes time away from what you need to be doing <em>right now. </em></p><p> </p><p>If you’re just getting started, make sure to go through my FREE 6 in 60 Workshop where you’ll curate six months' worth of boxes for your ideal customer. This workshop guides you through getting clear about who your ideal customer is and the type of experience you want to provide for them. </p><p> </p><p>Then it’s time to move on to the four areas where you need to focus your time and energy now.  </p><ol><li>Audience building - soooo important. </li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Start yesterday!</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Serve before selling - Listen to episodes 33 and 45!!</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Not easy, but necessary!</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Create awareness of who you are and what you sell. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Emails, texts, posts, stories, short videos, LIVES, paid Ads</li>
</ul><ol><li>Marketing</li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Website</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Payment processor</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Shipping software</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">CRM - email platform</li>
</ul><ol><li>Tech - you need four things in place. </li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">We tell ourselves we can’t do something more often than we tell ourselves we can. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Believe in abundance. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Embrace your imperfections. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Operate with a glass-half-full mentality. </li>
</ul><ol><li>Mindset - the MOST important!</li></ol><p> </p><p>Are you ready to get started on turning your subscription box dreams into reality? In today’s episode, I talk about the four areas you need to focus your time and energy FIRST. Now is the time to “think you can!” Come listen!</p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e"> 6 in 60 Workshop</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-33"> Launch Your Box Podcast Episode 33</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-45"> Launch Your Box Podcast Episode 45</a></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1508</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cf54c800-ff33-11ed-9169-c7172db1b731]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5083784044.mp3?updated=1699912163" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Give Yourself a Raise with a Subscription Box Side Hustle</title>
      <description>What would an extra $1000 every month mean to you and your family?  
Inflation. Waiting for a raise that might not happen. So many people are looking for ways to earn extra income right now. Today I’m talking about how a subscription box side hustle could bring an extra $1000 a month to your family - with only 50 subscribers. 
A subscription box business can be a full-time business. But it doesn’t have to be. Many members of Launch Your Box have full-time, 9-5 style jobs and successful subscription box side hustles. They are nurse practitioners, teachers, certified registered nurse anesthetists, hair stylists, realtors, dentists, and more. They’re also subscription box owners who bring in additional income with their side hustles. 
You can, too! Let’s do the math. If you have 50 subscribers and make $20 of profit per box, that’s an extra $1000 going into your bank account every month. 
Of course, it’s going to take time and effort to get there. But following these six steps will have you well on your way to a successful subscription box side hustle. 
 
Identify what you like or have an interest in.
 

Make sure it’s something you’re good at or have expertise in. 

You have to be passionate about the subject matter or it won’t last! 

Don’t try to be like anyone else - YOU will set your subscription box apart.  

 
Ask yourself if there are other people around you with the same interest. 
 

That’s the audience you need to build! 

Where can you find more of those people? 

Where do they hang out online? 

 
Start a social media account(s) on the platforms where your people hang out.
 

Start sharing videos, posts, etc. 

Ask your friends to like your page and share it with their friends. 

Make sure you’re speaking the language of the person you are trying to attract. Messaging matters! 

 
Run a giveaway.
 

Use Kingsumo (it’s FREE!) 

The prize needs to be a box just like what you want to sell. 

Capture emails for those who enter your giveaway and start building your email list. 

 
Introduce the idea for the box to your audience.
 

Get their feedback and have them help you make decisions.  

You want their buy-in to validate your concept. 

Niche down if needed. 

 
Set a launch date and a goal. 
 

Create excitement and generate buzz. 

Get your new audience excited about the upcoming box! 

Engaging your audience is key at every stage of your subscription box journey, whether it’s your full-time gig or a side hustle. Continue to ask for feedback as you grow. Maintain an ongoing focus on audience building and keep serving your audience! 

Join me for this episode as I talk about why a subscription box side hustle might be right for you and the six steps you need to take in order to make yours a success. The kind of success that means significant additional income - every month! 
Important Links: 

 6 in 60 Workshop - Sarah’s Method for Curating 6 Subscription Boxes in 60 Minutes
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 07 Jun 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Give Yourself a Raise with a Subscription Box Side Hustle</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>What would an extra $1000 every month mean to you and your family?    Inflation. Waiting for a raise that might not happen. So many people are looking for ways to earn extra income right now. Today I’m talking about how a subscription box side hustle could bring an extra $1000 a month to your family - with only 50 subscribers. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What would an extra $1000 every month mean to you and your family?  
Inflation. Waiting for a raise that might not happen. So many people are looking for ways to earn extra income right now. Today I’m talking about how a subscription box side hustle could bring an extra $1000 a month to your family - with only 50 subscribers. 
A subscription box business can be a full-time business. But it doesn’t have to be. Many members of Launch Your Box have full-time, 9-5 style jobs and successful subscription box side hustles. They are nurse practitioners, teachers, certified registered nurse anesthetists, hair stylists, realtors, dentists, and more. They’re also subscription box owners who bring in additional income with their side hustles. 
You can, too! Let’s do the math. If you have 50 subscribers and make $20 of profit per box, that’s an extra $1000 going into your bank account every month. 
Of course, it’s going to take time and effort to get there. But following these six steps will have you well on your way to a successful subscription box side hustle. 
 
Identify what you like or have an interest in.
 

Make sure it’s something you’re good at or have expertise in. 

You have to be passionate about the subject matter or it won’t last! 

Don’t try to be like anyone else - YOU will set your subscription box apart.  

 
Ask yourself if there are other people around you with the same interest. 
 

That’s the audience you need to build! 

Where can you find more of those people? 

Where do they hang out online? 

 
Start a social media account(s) on the platforms where your people hang out.
 

Start sharing videos, posts, etc. 

Ask your friends to like your page and share it with their friends. 

Make sure you’re speaking the language of the person you are trying to attract. Messaging matters! 

 
Run a giveaway.
 

Use Kingsumo (it’s FREE!) 

The prize needs to be a box just like what you want to sell. 

Capture emails for those who enter your giveaway and start building your email list. 

 
Introduce the idea for the box to your audience.
 

Get their feedback and have them help you make decisions.  

You want their buy-in to validate your concept. 

Niche down if needed. 

 
Set a launch date and a goal. 
 

Create excitement and generate buzz. 

Get your new audience excited about the upcoming box! 

Engaging your audience is key at every stage of your subscription box journey, whether it’s your full-time gig or a side hustle. Continue to ask for feedback as you grow. Maintain an ongoing focus on audience building and keep serving your audience! 

Join me for this episode as I talk about why a subscription box side hustle might be right for you and the six steps you need to take in order to make yours a success. The kind of success that means significant additional income - every month! 
Important Links: 

 6 in 60 Workshop - Sarah’s Method for Curating 6 Subscription Boxes in 60 Minutes
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What would an extra $1000 every month mean to you and your family?  </p><p>Inflation. Waiting for a raise that might not happen. So many people are looking for ways to earn extra income right now. Today I’m talking about how a subscription box side hustle could bring an extra $1000 a month to your family - with only 50 subscribers. </p><p>A subscription box business can be a full-time business. But it doesn’t have to be. Many members of Launch Your Box have full-time, 9-5 style jobs <em>and</em> successful subscription box side hustles. They are nurse practitioners, teachers, certified registered nurse anesthetists, hair stylists, realtors, dentists, and more. They’re also subscription box owners who bring in additional income with their side hustles. </p><p>You can, too! Let’s do the math. If you have 50 subscribers and make $20 of profit per box, that’s an extra $1000 going into your bank account <em>every month. </em></p><p>Of course, it’s going to take time and effort to get there. But following these six steps will have you well on your way to a successful subscription box side hustle. </p><p> </p><ul><li>Identify what you like or have an interest in.</li></ul><p> </p><ul>
<li>Make sure it’s something you’re good at or have expertise in. </li>
<li>You have to be passionate about the subject matter or it won’t last! </li>
<li>Don’t try to be like anyone else - YOU will set your subscription box apart.  </li>
</ul><p> </p><ul><li>Ask yourself if there are other people around you with the same interest. </li></ul><p> </p><ul>
<li>That’s the audience you need to build! </li>
<li>Where can you find more of those people? </li>
<li>Where do they hang out online? </li>
</ul><p> </p><ul><li>Start a social media account(s) on the platforms where your people hang out.</li></ul><p> </p><ul>
<li>Start sharing videos, posts, etc. </li>
<li>Ask your friends to like your page and share it with their friends. </li>
<li>Make sure you’re speaking the language of the person you are trying to attract. Messaging matters! </li>
</ul><p> </p><ul><li>Run a giveaway.</li></ul><p> </p><ul>
<li>Use Kingsumo (it’s FREE!) </li>
<li>The prize needs to be a box just like what you want to sell. </li>
<li>Capture emails for those who enter your giveaway and start building your email list. </li>
</ul><p> </p><ul><li>Introduce the idea for the box to your audience.</li></ul><p> </p><ul>
<li>Get their feedback and have them help you make decisions.  </li>
<li>You want their buy-in to validate your concept. </li>
<li>Niche down if needed. </li>
</ul><p> </p><ul><li>Set a launch date and a goal. </li></ul><p> </p><ul>
<li>Create excitement and generate buzz. </li>
<li>Get your new audience excited about the upcoming box! </li>
</ul><p>Engaging your audience is key at every stage of your subscription box journey, whether it’s your full-time gig or a side hustle. Continue to ask for feedback as you grow. Maintain an ongoing focus on audience building and keep serving your audience! </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as I talk about why a subscription box side hustle might be right for you and the six steps you need to take in order to make yours a success. The kind of success that means significant additional income - every month! </p><p>Important Links: </p><ul><li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e"> 6 in 60 Workshop</a> - Sarah’s Method for Curating 6 Subscription Boxes in 60 Minutes</li></ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1318</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ab4d9f4a-ff33-11ed-8bb4-1fa2712be7b2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8386147528.mp3?updated=1699912111" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>122: From Bakery to Food Truck to Subscription Box Owner with The Frosted Cakery</title>
      <description>Launching a subscription box is only one piece of the puzzle. After you’ve launched, your focus shifts to growth. But what happens if months go by and you’re just not growing?  
That’s what happened to Kimberly of the Frosted Cakery. After growing up learning to bake from her grandmother, the OG Cake Lady, this Iowa farmgirl and military spouse started a home-based baking business that became famous within the military community. Kimberly tells stories of getting orders before she’d even had a chance to finish unpacking in a new city. 
Kimberly had a brick-and-mortar bakery for a time, but when it was forced to close due to COVID, she brought her baking back home. When her husband retired from the military, Kimberly thought about taking a break from baking, but the demand was still there. She started baking for her brother’s cafe as well as filling orders from home. Instead of a permanent location, Kimberly also fulfilled her dream of a small-scale food truck. She and her husband renovated the cutest vintage 10-foot camper. Kimberly takes it to local farmer’s markets - there are a LOT of farmer’s markets in Iowa - selling her delicious cupcakes. 
Kimberly realized time stood in the way of her being able to truly scale. There are only so many cupcakes, cakes, cookies, and bars one person can bake. She didn’t want to hire a team and she thought she didn’t want to do a subscription box either. Until she found me! 
Kimberly started listening to this very podcast and following me on social media. She quickly saw the possibilities of a subscription box for her business and decided a biscotti box was the way to go. 
Kimberly launched in the fall of 2022 and, despite last-minute packaging challenges, had a successful launch that resulted in 14 subscribers. She left her subscription open and continued to work to grow that number. But growth was very slow. 
When she learned about my 30 Days to Launch Masterclass, Kimberly saw an opportunity to re-launch her subscription and she jumped right in. Kimberly LOVED having a very specific plan to follow that included: 

What to post on social media

What emails to send

When to run a giveaway

After putting the 30 Days to Launch plan into practice, Kimberly doubled her number of subscribers! Kimberly was able to accomplish in 30 days what she hadn’t been able to in 4 months - growth! 
What’s next for Kimberly? She is now operating under a closed cart model while she gets a true sense of just how many subscribers she can handle. When she’s ready to launch again, she’ll follow the same process. 
Between now and her next launch, Kimberly needs to drive traffic to her waitlist. She’ll use it to fill any cancellations and build a list of people who will be ready and waiting to get in on the Biscotti Box! 
Join me for this episode as Kimberly and I talk about her journey from bakery to food truck to subscription box owner. Her story will inspire you - and probably make you hungry!  
Find and follow Kimberly: 

Frosted Cakery on Instagram


Frosted Cakery on Facebook 

Frosted Cakery Website

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 



Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 31 May 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From Bakery to Food Truck to Subscription Box Owner with The Frosted Cakery</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>122</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Launching a subscription box is only one piece of the puzzle. After you’ve launched, your focus shifts to growth. But what happens if months go by and you’re just not growing?  </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Launching a subscription box is only one piece of the puzzle. After you’ve launched, your focus shifts to growth. But what happens if months go by and you’re just not growing?  
That’s what happened to Kimberly of the Frosted Cakery. After growing up learning to bake from her grandmother, the OG Cake Lady, this Iowa farmgirl and military spouse started a home-based baking business that became famous within the military community. Kimberly tells stories of getting orders before she’d even had a chance to finish unpacking in a new city. 
Kimberly had a brick-and-mortar bakery for a time, but when it was forced to close due to COVID, she brought her baking back home. When her husband retired from the military, Kimberly thought about taking a break from baking, but the demand was still there. She started baking for her brother’s cafe as well as filling orders from home. Instead of a permanent location, Kimberly also fulfilled her dream of a small-scale food truck. She and her husband renovated the cutest vintage 10-foot camper. Kimberly takes it to local farmer’s markets - there are a LOT of farmer’s markets in Iowa - selling her delicious cupcakes. 
Kimberly realized time stood in the way of her being able to truly scale. There are only so many cupcakes, cakes, cookies, and bars one person can bake. She didn’t want to hire a team and she thought she didn’t want to do a subscription box either. Until she found me! 
Kimberly started listening to this very podcast and following me on social media. She quickly saw the possibilities of a subscription box for her business and decided a biscotti box was the way to go. 
Kimberly launched in the fall of 2022 and, despite last-minute packaging challenges, had a successful launch that resulted in 14 subscribers. She left her subscription open and continued to work to grow that number. But growth was very slow. 
When she learned about my 30 Days to Launch Masterclass, Kimberly saw an opportunity to re-launch her subscription and she jumped right in. Kimberly LOVED having a very specific plan to follow that included: 

What to post on social media

What emails to send

When to run a giveaway

After putting the 30 Days to Launch plan into practice, Kimberly doubled her number of subscribers! Kimberly was able to accomplish in 30 days what she hadn’t been able to in 4 months - growth! 
What’s next for Kimberly? She is now operating under a closed cart model while she gets a true sense of just how many subscribers she can handle. When she’s ready to launch again, she’ll follow the same process. 
Between now and her next launch, Kimberly needs to drive traffic to her waitlist. She’ll use it to fill any cancellations and build a list of people who will be ready and waiting to get in on the Biscotti Box! 
Join me for this episode as Kimberly and I talk about her journey from bakery to food truck to subscription box owner. Her story will inspire you - and probably make you hungry!  
Find and follow Kimberly: 

Frosted Cakery on Instagram


Frosted Cakery on Facebook 

Frosted Cakery Website

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 



Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Launching a subscription box is only one piece of the puzzle. After you’ve launched, your focus shifts to growth. But what happens if months go by and you’re just not growing?  </p><p>That’s what happened to Kimberly of the Frosted Cakery. After growing up learning to bake from her grandmother, the OG Cake Lady, this Iowa farmgirl and military spouse started a home-based baking business that became famous within the military community. Kimberly tells stories of getting orders before she’d even had a chance to finish unpacking in a new city. </p><p>Kimberly had a brick-and-mortar bakery for a time, but when it was forced to close due to COVID, she brought her baking back home. When her husband retired from the military, Kimberly thought about taking a break from baking, but the demand was still there. She started baking for her brother’s cafe as well as filling orders from home. Instead of a permanent location, Kimberly also fulfilled her dream of a small-scale food truck. She and her husband renovated the cutest vintage 10-foot camper. Kimberly takes it to local farmer’s markets - there are a LOT of farmer’s markets in Iowa - selling her delicious cupcakes. </p><p>Kimberly realized time stood in the way of her being able to truly scale. There are only so many cupcakes, cakes, cookies, and bars one person can bake. She didn’t want to hire a team and she thought she didn’t want to do a subscription box either. Until she found me! </p><p>Kimberly started listening to this very podcast and following me on social media. She quickly saw the possibilities of a subscription box for her business and decided a biscotti box was the way to go. </p><p>Kimberly launched in the fall of 2022 and, despite last-minute packaging challenges, had a successful launch that resulted in 14 subscribers. She left her subscription open and continued to work to grow that number. But growth was very slow. </p><p>When she learned about my 30 Days to Launch Masterclass, Kimberly saw an opportunity to re-launch her subscription and she jumped right in. Kimberly LOVED having a very specific plan to follow that included: </p><ul>
<li>What to post on social media</li>
<li>What emails to send</li>
<li>When to run a giveaway</li>
</ul><p>After putting the 30 Days to Launch plan into practice, Kimberly doubled her number of subscribers! Kimberly was able to accomplish in 30 days what she hadn’t been able to in 4 months - growth! </p><p>What’s next for Kimberly? She is now operating under a closed cart model while she gets a true sense of just how many subscribers she can handle. When she’s ready to launch again, she’ll follow the same process. </p><p>Between now and her next launch, Kimberly needs to drive traffic to her waitlist. She’ll use it to fill any cancellations and build a list of people who will be ready and waiting to get in on the Biscotti Box! </p><p>Join me for this episode as Kimberly and I talk about her journey from bakery to food truck to subscription box owner. Her story will inspire you - and probably make you hungry!  </p><p>Find and follow Kimberly: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/frostediowa/">Frosted Cakery on Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/frostediowa">Frosted Cakery on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><a href="https://frostediowa.com/">Frosted Cakery Website</a></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams%20"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1751</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a137c658-fda7-11ed-a8da-dff0b3e43e20]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4671979691.mp3?updated=1699912098" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>121: Adding An Upsell to Your Subscription Box Checkout</title>
      <description>Do you have extra subscription box product laying around? Product that you’d like to get rid of because it’s taking up space on your shelves and tying up your cash flow? Then this episode is for you! 
Last month, I was talking with my Mastermind Group on our Voxer channel. One of the many perks of my Mastermind is the members have daily access to me and to each other via this walkie-talkie-style app. We have SUCH great conversations - a ton of knowledge is shared and some seriously valuable relationships have been built. 
One of the Mastermind members, Lo Hixon of Passion &amp; Growth, shared her solution to this too much past box product problem so many of us have. She put a one-click upsell at checkout into place during a recent launch. And… more than 40% of the people who signed up for her subscription also bought a leftover box. More than 40%!! 
My mind was blown. With this one, simple addition to her checkout page, Lo increased her average order value (AOV) and reduced her inventory. Oh… and she sold these boxes at full price. These boxes were NOT discounted. 
Since I was planning my first launch in 3 ½ years when Lo shared this idea, I quickly got my team on board. We set the one-click upsell option up for both my Monogram Box™ subscription and my T-Shirt Club. 
The result? We sold 77 boxes! That’s 77 boxes that were laying around on our shelves. Selling them meant cash back in the bank and new subscribers who were super happy to receive a box so quickly! 
Setting up a one-click upsell option is simple: 

Build the product listing - I recommend making it a “surprise box.” 

Build a simple landing page to act as your thank you page. 

It’s important that the upsell offer appears AFTER they sign up for your subscription box. 

Connect this landing page/thank you page to trigger upon checkout. 

Set up an email automation in your email CRM to capture those who signed up for your subscription but did not purchase the upsell. 

Why does this work so well? People are signing up NOW. They’re excited - they want something NOW. Give them the chance to get one of your amazing past boxes while they wait for the next month’s box. 
Join me for this episode as I share a simple upsell strategy that will reduce inventory, put cash in your bank account, and make new subscribers happy! 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 



Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 May 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Adding An Upsell to Your Subscription Box Checkout</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>121</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Do you have extra subscription box product laying around? Product that you’d like to get rid of because it’s taking up space on your shelves and tying up your cash flow? Then this episode is for you! </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Do you have extra subscription box product laying around? Product that you’d like to get rid of because it’s taking up space on your shelves and tying up your cash flow? Then this episode is for you! 
Last month, I was talking with my Mastermind Group on our Voxer channel. One of the many perks of my Mastermind is the members have daily access to me and to each other via this walkie-talkie-style app. We have SUCH great conversations - a ton of knowledge is shared and some seriously valuable relationships have been built. 
One of the Mastermind members, Lo Hixon of Passion &amp; Growth, shared her solution to this too much past box product problem so many of us have. She put a one-click upsell at checkout into place during a recent launch. And… more than 40% of the people who signed up for her subscription also bought a leftover box. More than 40%!! 
My mind was blown. With this one, simple addition to her checkout page, Lo increased her average order value (AOV) and reduced her inventory. Oh… and she sold these boxes at full price. These boxes were NOT discounted. 
Since I was planning my first launch in 3 ½ years when Lo shared this idea, I quickly got my team on board. We set the one-click upsell option up for both my Monogram Box™ subscription and my T-Shirt Club. 
The result? We sold 77 boxes! That’s 77 boxes that were laying around on our shelves. Selling them meant cash back in the bank and new subscribers who were super happy to receive a box so quickly! 
Setting up a one-click upsell option is simple: 

Build the product listing - I recommend making it a “surprise box.” 

Build a simple landing page to act as your thank you page. 

It’s important that the upsell offer appears AFTER they sign up for your subscription box. 

Connect this landing page/thank you page to trigger upon checkout. 

Set up an email automation in your email CRM to capture those who signed up for your subscription but did not purchase the upsell. 

Why does this work so well? People are signing up NOW. They’re excited - they want something NOW. Give them the chance to get one of your amazing past boxes while they wait for the next month’s box. 
Join me for this episode as I share a simple upsell strategy that will reduce inventory, put cash in your bank account, and make new subscribers happy! 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 



Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Do you have extra subscription box product laying around? Product that you’d like to get rid of because it’s taking up space on your shelves and tying up your cash flow? Then this episode is for you! </p><p>Last month, I was talking with my Mastermind Group on our Voxer channel. One of the many perks of my Mastermind is the members have daily access to me and to each other via this walkie-talkie-style app. We have SUCH great conversations - a ton of knowledge is shared and some seriously valuable relationships have been built. </p><p>One of the Mastermind members, Lo Hixon of Passion &amp; Growth, shared her solution to this too much past box product problem so many of us have. She put a one-click upsell at checkout into place during a recent launch. And… more than 40% of the people who signed up for her subscription also bought a leftover box. More than 40%!! </p><p>My mind was blown. With this one, simple addition to her checkout page, Lo increased her average order value (AOV) and reduced her inventory. Oh… and she sold these boxes at full price. These boxes were NOT discounted. </p><p>Since I was planning my first launch in 3 ½ years when Lo shared this idea, I quickly got my team on board. We set the one-click upsell option up for both my Monogram Box™ subscription and my T-Shirt Club. </p><p>The result? We sold 77 boxes! That’s 77 boxes that were laying around on our shelves. Selling them meant cash back in the bank and new subscribers who were super happy to receive a box so quickly! </p><p>Setting up a one-click upsell option is simple: </p><ol>
<li>Build the product listing - I recommend making it a “surprise box.” </li>
<li>Build a simple landing page to act as your thank you page. </li>
</ol><ul><li class="ql-indent-1">It’s important that the upsell offer appears AFTER they sign up for your subscription box. </li></ul><ol>
<li>Connect this landing page/thank you page to trigger upon checkout. </li>
<li>Set up an email automation in your email CRM to capture those who signed up for your subscription but did not purchase the upsell. </li>
</ol><p>Why does this work so well? People are signing up NOW. They’re excited - they want something NOW. Give them the chance to get one of your amazing past boxes while they wait for the next month’s box. </p><p>Join me for this episode as I share a simple upsell strategy that will reduce inventory, put cash in your bank account, and make new subscribers happy! </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams%20"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>908</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d02b6796-f85f-11ed-9027-e7846fc84dda]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7191059651.mp3?updated=1699912087" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Are You Talking About Your Subscription Box Enough? </title>
      <description>Every month, I go LIVE inside my coaching membership, Launch Your Box, to open members’ subscription boxes and provide feedback. Last month, I opened some incredible boxes. I was so impressed with the creativity and care these members put into curating an experience for their subscribers, just like I taught them. What I wasn’t impressed with was how low their subscriber numbers were. With boxes that good, their numbers should have been much higher. 
 
It was time to dig into what was holding them back. So I asked a question. And it got my members squirming. It wasn’t a difficult question, but it was an important one. 
 
I asked them to look back at the past month and count how many times they’d talked about their subscription boxes on social media. Then, I gave them a grade based on their responses. The bad news? Many of them failed! 
 
I know you may feel like you’re talking about your subscription box all the time, but I’m willing to bet you’re not talking about it enough. I want you to talk about it at least 2-3 times a week – 4-5 times a week is even better. 
 
Does that sound like too much? It’s not. Trust me. Does this mean you’re posting the same post or sharing the same picture or saying the same thing 4-5 times a week? Of course not! 
 
Here are five different posts you can create to generate excitement about your box: 

Sneak Peek

Picture of the box with all the items inside

Individual picture of each item by itself (3-5 pics)

Individual picture of each item in a lifestyle image (used in its natural setting, i.e. desk, kitchen, closet, etc)

Benefits of your product, what problem does it solve

 
And we’re just getting started. I want to see you posting style guides, reviews &amp; testimonials, behind the scenes (your audience will love the chance to see what goes into getting a subscription box out the door), and past boxes (hello, FOMO!). 
 
Then there’s video – short videos and going LIVE. It all needs to be part of your monthly marketing plan to get the word out about your subscription. 
 
Are you talking about your subscription box enough? Odds are you aren’t. But how much is enough? In today’s episode, I walk you through how much you should be posting about your box and give you lots of examples to get you started. Come listen!
 
Important Links: 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 17 May 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Are You Talking About Your Subscription Box Enough? </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Every month, I go LIVE inside my coaching membership, Launch Your Box, to open members’ subscription boxes and provide feedback. Last month, I opened some incredible boxes. I was so impressed with the creativity and care these members put into curating an experience for their subscribers, just like I taught them. What I wasn’t impressed with was how low their subscriber numbers were. With boxes that good, their numbers should have been much higher. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Every month, I go LIVE inside my coaching membership, Launch Your Box, to open members’ subscription boxes and provide feedback. Last month, I opened some incredible boxes. I was so impressed with the creativity and care these members put into curating an experience for their subscribers, just like I taught them. What I wasn’t impressed with was how low their subscriber numbers were. With boxes that good, their numbers should have been much higher. 
 
It was time to dig into what was holding them back. So I asked a question. And it got my members squirming. It wasn’t a difficult question, but it was an important one. 
 
I asked them to look back at the past month and count how many times they’d talked about their subscription boxes on social media. Then, I gave them a grade based on their responses. The bad news? Many of them failed! 
 
I know you may feel like you’re talking about your subscription box all the time, but I’m willing to bet you’re not talking about it enough. I want you to talk about it at least 2-3 times a week – 4-5 times a week is even better. 
 
Does that sound like too much? It’s not. Trust me. Does this mean you’re posting the same post or sharing the same picture or saying the same thing 4-5 times a week? Of course not! 
 
Here are five different posts you can create to generate excitement about your box: 

Sneak Peek

Picture of the box with all the items inside

Individual picture of each item by itself (3-5 pics)

Individual picture of each item in a lifestyle image (used in its natural setting, i.e. desk, kitchen, closet, etc)

Benefits of your product, what problem does it solve

 
And we’re just getting started. I want to see you posting style guides, reviews &amp; testimonials, behind the scenes (your audience will love the chance to see what goes into getting a subscription box out the door), and past boxes (hello, FOMO!). 
 
Then there’s video – short videos and going LIVE. It all needs to be part of your monthly marketing plan to get the word out about your subscription. 
 
Are you talking about your subscription box enough? Odds are you aren’t. But how much is enough? In today’s episode, I walk you through how much you should be posting about your box and give you lots of examples to get you started. Come listen!
 
Important Links: 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Every month, I go LIVE inside my coaching membership, Launch Your Box, to open members’ subscription boxes and provide feedback. Last month, I opened some incredible boxes. I was so impressed with the creativity and care these members put into curating an experience for their subscribers, just like I taught them. What I wasn’t impressed with was how low their subscriber numbers were. With boxes that good, their numbers should have been much higher. </p><p> </p><p>It was time to dig into what was holding them back. So I asked a question. And it got my members squirming. It wasn’t a difficult question, but it was an important one. </p><p> </p><p>I asked them to look back at the past month and count how many times they’d talked about their subscription boxes on social media. Then, I gave them a grade based on their responses. The bad news? Many of them failed! </p><p> </p><p>I know you may feel like you’re talking about your subscription box all the time, but I’m willing to bet you’re not talking about it enough. I want you to talk about it at least 2-3 times a week – 4-5 times a week is even better. </p><p> </p><p>Does that sound like too much? It’s not. Trust me. Does this mean you’re posting the same post or sharing the same picture or saying the same thing 4-5 times a week? Of course not! </p><p> </p><p>Here are five different posts you can create to generate excitement about your box: </p><ul>
<li>Sneak Peek</li>
<li>Picture of the box with all the items inside</li>
<li>Individual picture of each item by itself (3-5 pics)</li>
<li>Individual picture of each item in a lifestyle image (used in its natural setting, i.e. desk, kitchen, closet, etc)</li>
<li>Benefits of your product, what problem does it solve</li>
</ul><p> </p><p>And we’re just getting started. I want to see you posting style guides, reviews &amp; testimonials, behind the scenes (your audience will love the chance to see what goes into getting a subscription box out the door), and past boxes (hello, FOMO!). </p><p> </p><p>Then there’s video – short videos and going LIVE. It all needs to be part of your monthly marketing plan to get the word out about your subscription. </p><p> </p><p>Are <em>you</em> talking about your subscription box enough? Odds are you aren’t. But how much is enough? In today’s episode, I walk you through how much you should be posting about your box and give you lots of examples to get you started. Come listen!</p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1892</itunes:duration>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[adc8f396-ed18-11ed-be58-6bbcdac7933b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1460867699.mp3?updated=1699913047" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Going Live on Social Media - Build an Audience for Your Subscription Box</title>
      <description>Do you go LIVE on social media to talk about your subscription box consistently? Or does the very idea of going LIVE fill you with dread? Almost every subscription box owner understands how important making regular, live connections with their audience is. But so many avoid connecting with their followers this way. Why? 
For a lot of people, going LIVE on social media brings up major feelings of anxiety. I get it. I used to feel exactly the same way. But here’s the thing. People need to know you to like you and trust you. And people need to know, like, and trust you in order to buy from you. There is no better way to connect with your audience than by going LIVE. 
There aren’t any secrets to feeling comfortable and confident when you go LIVE. But there are strategies that will help you feel prepared and let you make the most of those opportunities to connect and engage with your audience.  

Do something for yourself to help boost your confidence. Get new clothes, style your hair, or strike a power pose - whatever helps you feel ready! 

Have some friends join your LIVE to ask you some questions and get the conversation going.

Write out a list of talking points. This will help you stay on task and make sure you don’t forget to talk to your audience about something important.

Engage with your audience. Whether you’re LIVE with one person or one hundred people, get excited to talk with them. Ask questions and respond to their answers in the comments. Take that time to make a personal connection.  

Set a time and a date for your LIVE sessions and let your audience know when you’ll be LIVE. This will help you stick with it. Choose a time and place that is comfortable and convenient for you. 

Before long, going LIVE will become routine. Your audience will expect it and look forward to that time with you. And - just like it did with me - it will end up being one of your favorite ways to connect with them.
Join me for this episode as I talk about why going LIVE on social media is an essential part of your subscription box marketing strategy and five things you can do to feel more prepared and confident when you do. 
 
Important Links: 
6 in 60 Workshop 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join Launch Your Box today! 



Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 10 May 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Going Live on Social Media - Build an Audience for Your Subscription Box</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Do you go LIVE on social media to talk about your subscription box consistently? Or does the very idea of going LIVE fill you with dread? Almost every subscription box owner understands how important making regular, live connections with their audience is. But so many avoid connecting with their followers this way. Why? </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Do you go LIVE on social media to talk about your subscription box consistently? Or does the very idea of going LIVE fill you with dread? Almost every subscription box owner understands how important making regular, live connections with their audience is. But so many avoid connecting with their followers this way. Why? 
For a lot of people, going LIVE on social media brings up major feelings of anxiety. I get it. I used to feel exactly the same way. But here’s the thing. People need to know you to like you and trust you. And people need to know, like, and trust you in order to buy from you. There is no better way to connect with your audience than by going LIVE. 
There aren’t any secrets to feeling comfortable and confident when you go LIVE. But there are strategies that will help you feel prepared and let you make the most of those opportunities to connect and engage with your audience.  

Do something for yourself to help boost your confidence. Get new clothes, style your hair, or strike a power pose - whatever helps you feel ready! 

Have some friends join your LIVE to ask you some questions and get the conversation going.

Write out a list of talking points. This will help you stay on task and make sure you don’t forget to talk to your audience about something important.

Engage with your audience. Whether you’re LIVE with one person or one hundred people, get excited to talk with them. Ask questions and respond to their answers in the comments. Take that time to make a personal connection.  

Set a time and a date for your LIVE sessions and let your audience know when you’ll be LIVE. This will help you stick with it. Choose a time and place that is comfortable and convenient for you. 

Before long, going LIVE will become routine. Your audience will expect it and look forward to that time with you. And - just like it did with me - it will end up being one of your favorite ways to connect with them.
Join me for this episode as I talk about why going LIVE on social media is an essential part of your subscription box marketing strategy and five things you can do to feel more prepared and confident when you do. 
 
Important Links: 
6 in 60 Workshop 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join Launch Your Box today! 



Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Do you go LIVE on social media to talk about your subscription box consistently? Or does the very idea of going LIVE fill you with dread? Almost every subscription box owner understands how important making regular, live connections with their audience is. But so many avoid connecting with their followers this way. Why? </p><p>For a lot of people, going LIVE on social media brings up major feelings of anxiety. I get it. I used to feel exactly the same way. But here’s the thing. People need to know you to like you and trust you. And people need to know, like, <em>and</em> trust you in order to buy from you. There is no better way to connect with your audience than by going LIVE. </p><p>There aren’t any secrets to feeling comfortable and confident when you go LIVE. But there are strategies that will help you feel prepared and let you make the most of those opportunities to connect and engage with your audience.  </p><ol>
<li>Do something for yourself to help boost your confidence. Get new clothes, style your hair, or strike a power pose - whatever helps you feel ready! </li>
<li>Have some friends join your LIVE to ask you some questions and get the conversation going.</li>
<li>Write out a list of talking points. This will help you stay on task and make sure you don’t forget to talk to your audience about something important.</li>
<li>Engage with your audience. Whether you’re LIVE with one person or one hundred people, get excited to talk with them. Ask questions and respond to their answers in the comments. Take that time to make a personal connection.  </li>
<li>Set a time and a date for your LIVE sessions and let your audience know when you’ll be LIVE. This will help you stick with it. Choose a time and place that is comfortable and convenient for you. </li>
</ol><p>Before long, going LIVE will become routine. Your audience will expect it and look forward to that time with you. And - just like it did with me - it will end up being one of your favorite ways to connect with them.</p><p>Join me for this episode as I talk about why going LIVE on social media is an essential part of your subscription box marketing strategy and five things you can do to feel more prepared and confident when you do. </p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><ul><li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e">6 in 60 Workshop </a></li></ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join Launch Your Box</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams%20"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1307</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8bd0be68-ed18-11ed-b658-4f7ca14bd9b2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9098346958.mp3?updated=1699913036" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>120: Adding Value and Increasing LTV with Paul Chambers</title>
      <description>What are you doing to add value to your subscription box and increase the lifetime value of your subscribers? By thinking creatively and strategically - in other words, thinking outside of the box - you can uplevel your subscribers’ experience and bring more revenue and higher profit margins into your business. 
In this episode, I catch up with Paul Chamber, co-founder of the Gentleman’s Box, on ways they added value and increased LTV with their subscription box. Paul is also the co-founder of Subsummit and one of my favorite people to talk with about all things subscription box. 
Paul took us through the journey of The Gentleman’s Box and the decisions they made along the way - good and bad - that helped them increase the value of their subscribers by layering in more value. He also talks about the importance of choosing the right price and how a price that’s too low had a negative impact on one of their subscription options. 
We also talked about using price as a retention tactic. This is something I do with my subscriptions. When it’s time for a price increase, I grandfather in all current subscribers at the current price for the lifetime of their subscription. If they cancel and later want to come back, they’ll come back at the new, higher price. This is a very effective retention strategy. 
Other ways to add value and increase LTV:

Including a gift with purchase - i.e., Early Bird Bonus

Offering an “add-on” option to subscriptions. 

Layering in additional subscriptions. 

Adding a gift at the time when most cancellations happen.

Offering additional products that go with items in the box. 

Including a membership with or separate from your subscription. 

Giving subscribers the opportunity to choose which items come in their box.

Paul and I also talked about SubSummit and what attendees can expect this year. SubSummit launched in 2016 with the goal of bringing subscription box owners together to learn from and connect with one another. I’ve partnered with them for the past few years and can’t wait to see so many of my Launch Your Box members at SubSummit again this year. 
Launch Your Box members - check inside the group for a special LYB-only SubSummit link. 
Join me for this episode as Paul and I talk through ways you can add value to your subscription box and increase the lifetime value of your subscribers. We cover a LOT of topics during this interview. Come join us for a really fun episode!
Find and follow Paul: 

SubSummit on Instagram


SubSummit on Facebook 

SubSummit Website

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 03 May 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Adding Value and Increasing LTV with Paul Chambers</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>120</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>What are you doing to add value to your subscription box and increase the lifetime value of your subscribers? By thinking creatively and strategically - in other words, thinking outside of the box - you can uplevel your subscribers’ experience and bring more revenue and higher profit margins into your business. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What are you doing to add value to your subscription box and increase the lifetime value of your subscribers? By thinking creatively and strategically - in other words, thinking outside of the box - you can uplevel your subscribers’ experience and bring more revenue and higher profit margins into your business. 
In this episode, I catch up with Paul Chamber, co-founder of the Gentleman’s Box, on ways they added value and increased LTV with their subscription box. Paul is also the co-founder of Subsummit and one of my favorite people to talk with about all things subscription box. 
Paul took us through the journey of The Gentleman’s Box and the decisions they made along the way - good and bad - that helped them increase the value of their subscribers by layering in more value. He also talks about the importance of choosing the right price and how a price that’s too low had a negative impact on one of their subscription options. 
We also talked about using price as a retention tactic. This is something I do with my subscriptions. When it’s time for a price increase, I grandfather in all current subscribers at the current price for the lifetime of their subscription. If they cancel and later want to come back, they’ll come back at the new, higher price. This is a very effective retention strategy. 
Other ways to add value and increase LTV:

Including a gift with purchase - i.e., Early Bird Bonus

Offering an “add-on” option to subscriptions. 

Layering in additional subscriptions. 

Adding a gift at the time when most cancellations happen.

Offering additional products that go with items in the box. 

Including a membership with or separate from your subscription. 

Giving subscribers the opportunity to choose which items come in their box.

Paul and I also talked about SubSummit and what attendees can expect this year. SubSummit launched in 2016 with the goal of bringing subscription box owners together to learn from and connect with one another. I’ve partnered with them for the past few years and can’t wait to see so many of my Launch Your Box members at SubSummit again this year. 
Launch Your Box members - check inside the group for a special LYB-only SubSummit link. 
Join me for this episode as Paul and I talk through ways you can add value to your subscription box and increase the lifetime value of your subscribers. We cover a LOT of topics during this interview. Come join us for a really fun episode!
Find and follow Paul: 

SubSummit on Instagram


SubSummit on Facebook 

SubSummit Website

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What are you doing to add value to your subscription box and increase the lifetime value of your subscribers? By thinking creatively and strategically - in other words, thinking outside of the box - you can uplevel your subscribers’ experience and bring more revenue and higher profit margins into your business. </p><p>In this episode, I catch up with Paul Chamber, co-founder of the Gentleman’s Box, on ways they added value and increased LTV with their subscription box. Paul is also the co-founder of Subsummit and one of my favorite people to talk with about all things subscription box. </p><p>Paul took us through the journey of The Gentleman’s Box and the decisions they made along the way - good and bad - that helped them increase the value of their subscribers by layering in more value. He also talks about the importance of choosing the right price and how a price that’s too low had a negative impact on one of their subscription options. </p><p>We also talked about using price as a retention tactic. This is something I do with my subscriptions. When it’s time for a price increase, I grandfather in all current subscribers at the current price for the lifetime of their subscription. If they cancel and later want to come back, they’ll come back at the new, higher price. This is a very effective retention strategy. </p><p>Other ways to add value and increase LTV:</p><ul>
<li>Including a gift with purchase - i.e., Early Bird Bonus</li>
<li>Offering an “add-on” option to subscriptions. </li>
<li>Layering in additional subscriptions. </li>
<li>Adding a gift at the time when most cancellations happen.</li>
<li>Offering additional products that go with items in the box. </li>
<li>Including a membership with or separate from your subscription. </li>
<li>Giving subscribers the opportunity to choose which items come in their box.</li>
</ul><p>Paul and I also talked about SubSummit and what attendees can expect this year. SubSummit launched in 2016 with the goal of bringing subscription box owners together to learn from and connect with one another. I’ve partnered with them for the past few years and can’t wait to see so many of my Launch Your Box members at SubSummit again this year. </p><p><em>Launch Your Box members - check inside the group for a special LYB-only SubSummit link.</em> </p><p>Join me for this episode as Paul and I talk through ways you can add value to your subscription box and increase the lifetime value of your subscribers. We cover a LOT of topics during this interview. Come join us for a really fun episode!</p><p>Find and follow Paul: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/sub_summit/">SubSummit on Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/subscriptionsummit">SubSummit on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><a href="https://subsummit.com/">SubSummit Website</a></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams%20"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2722</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f1fefda4-e63c-11ed-a25d-5f9b78142285]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2982598641.mp3?updated=1699913012" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>119: Facebook Group Yay or Nay?</title>
      <description>This episode answers two questions I get asked a LOT. Should your subscription box be on a separate page from the rest of your business? Should you create a private Facebook Group for your subscribers? The answer to both questions is, “It depends.” 
Whether you need a separate page for your subscription box is determined by your answer to the question, “Is your subscription box for the same ideal customer as your regular business page?” 
If yes, there’s no need for a separate page. When you make your subscription box part of your main business page, you: 

Avoid doing double work. 

Don’t have to build an audience from scratch. 

Are able to sell multiple things to your audience - it’s not one thing or the other, it can be both. 

However, if your subscription box is for a completely different audience, you will need a separate page. 

The next question you might be asking yourself is whether or not to have a private Facebook Group for your subscribers. In order to determine this for your business, you need to answer two questions: 

Are you delivering content outside of the products in your box? 

Teaching 

Tutorials 

Book clubs

Accountability groups

Etc. 

Do you need a private community in order for your subscribers to feel comfortable sharing? This is particularly important for topic-focused subscriptions like: 

Health issues

Relationship issues

Marriage and/or kids

Other sensitive or highly personal topics 

If you answer yes to either of these questions, you may need to have a private Facebook Group. It is important to understand the pros and cons of managing a private Facebook Group. 
Pros: 

It allows you to create a sense of community and engagement that takes the experience beyond just the box. Subscribers feel more connected to you and each other.

Private groups are great for research and development. Get subscriber buy-in, get their help with processes, etc. 

It creates a sense of exclusivity. Subscribers feel special knowing they’re part of a select group. 

Cons: 

It’s time consuming. You will need to dedicate resources to moderating the group, creating engagement, responding to questions, and addressing any issues that come up. 

There is the potential for negative feedback. 

You may end up doing too much behind closed doors and not enough front facing. Front facing is necessary for audience building and you always need to be building your audience!  

Join me for this episode as I talk about how to decide whether a private Facebook Group is right for your subscription box business. 

Important Links: 
6 in 60 Workshop 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join Launch Your Box today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 26 Apr 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Facebook Group Yay or Nay?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>119</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>This episode answers two questions I get asked a LOT. Should your subscription box be on a separate page from the rest of your business? Should you create a private Facebook Group for your subscribers? The answer to both questions is, “It depends.” </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>This episode answers two questions I get asked a LOT. Should your subscription box be on a separate page from the rest of your business? Should you create a private Facebook Group for your subscribers? The answer to both questions is, “It depends.” 
Whether you need a separate page for your subscription box is determined by your answer to the question, “Is your subscription box for the same ideal customer as your regular business page?” 
If yes, there’s no need for a separate page. When you make your subscription box part of your main business page, you: 

Avoid doing double work. 

Don’t have to build an audience from scratch. 

Are able to sell multiple things to your audience - it’s not one thing or the other, it can be both. 

However, if your subscription box is for a completely different audience, you will need a separate page. 

The next question you might be asking yourself is whether or not to have a private Facebook Group for your subscribers. In order to determine this for your business, you need to answer two questions: 

Are you delivering content outside of the products in your box? 

Teaching 

Tutorials 

Book clubs

Accountability groups

Etc. 

Do you need a private community in order for your subscribers to feel comfortable sharing? This is particularly important for topic-focused subscriptions like: 

Health issues

Relationship issues

Marriage and/or kids

Other sensitive or highly personal topics 

If you answer yes to either of these questions, you may need to have a private Facebook Group. It is important to understand the pros and cons of managing a private Facebook Group. 
Pros: 

It allows you to create a sense of community and engagement that takes the experience beyond just the box. Subscribers feel more connected to you and each other.

Private groups are great for research and development. Get subscriber buy-in, get their help with processes, etc. 

It creates a sense of exclusivity. Subscribers feel special knowing they’re part of a select group. 

Cons: 

It’s time consuming. You will need to dedicate resources to moderating the group, creating engagement, responding to questions, and addressing any issues that come up. 

There is the potential for negative feedback. 

You may end up doing too much behind closed doors and not enough front facing. Front facing is necessary for audience building and you always need to be building your audience!  

Join me for this episode as I talk about how to decide whether a private Facebook Group is right for your subscription box business. 

Important Links: 
6 in 60 Workshop 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join Launch Your Box today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This episode answers two questions I get asked a LOT. Should your subscription box be on a separate page from the rest of your business? Should you create a private Facebook Group for your subscribers? The answer to both questions is, “It depends.” </p><p>Whether you need a separate page for your subscription box is determined by your answer to the question, “Is your subscription box for the same ideal customer as your regular business page?” </p><p>If yes, there’s no need for a separate page. When you make your subscription box part of your main business page, you: </p><ul>
<li>Avoid doing double work. </li>
<li>Don’t have to build an audience from scratch. </li>
<li>Are able to sell multiple things to your audience - it’s not one thing <em>or</em> the other, it can be both. </li>
</ul><p>However, if your subscription box is for a completely different audience, you will need a separate page. </p><p><br></p><p>The next question you might be asking yourself is whether or not to have a private Facebook Group for your subscribers. In order to determine this for your business, you need to answer two questions: </p><ul>
<li>Are you delivering content outside of the products in your box? </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Teaching </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Tutorials </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Book clubs</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Accountability groups</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Etc. </li>
<li>Do you need a private community in order for your subscribers to feel comfortable sharing? This is particularly important for topic-focused subscriptions like: </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Health issues</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Relationship issues</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Marriage and/or kids</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Other sensitive or highly personal topics </li>
</ul><p>If you answer yes to either of these questions, you may need to have a private Facebook Group. It is important to understand the pros and cons of managing a private Facebook Group. </p><p>Pros: </p><ul>
<li>It allows you to create a sense of community and engagement that takes the experience beyond just the box. Subscribers feel more connected to you and each other.</li>
<li>Private groups are great for research and development. Get subscriber buy-in, get their help with processes, etc. </li>
<li>It creates a sense of exclusivity. Subscribers feel special knowing they’re part of a select group. </li>
</ul><p>Cons: </p><ul>
<li>It’s time consuming. You will need to dedicate resources to moderating the group, creating engagement, responding to questions, and addressing any issues that come up. </li>
<li>There is the potential for negative feedback. </li>
<li>You may end up doing too much behind closed doors and not enough front facing. Front facing is necessary for audience building and you always need to be building your audience!  </li>
</ul><p>Join me for this episode as I talk about how to decide whether a private Facebook Group is right for your subscription box business. </p><p><br></p><p>Important Links: </p><ul><li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e">6 in 60 Workshop </a></li></ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join Launch Your Box</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams%20"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1398</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[6fae1994-e1a9-11ed-970f-878375729a5b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4434746939.mp3?updated=1699913004" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>118: Public Facing Content vs. Private Group Content: How to Share Content Publicly Without Giving Away Paid Content</title>
      <description>Today’s episode was inspired by a question from a member of Launch Your Box - and a former guest on the podcast. Betsy Goodman shared her sold-out launch story in episode 93. Betsy is a maker and a teacher - she teaches lettering and wax seal techniques. Her work is beautiful and her question is a common one among subscription box owners who make or teach as part of their subscription. 
Betsy’s question? How to balance what she gives away for free and what she reserves for her paid subscribers. If your subscription box includes any type of teaching component, you probably struggle with that same push and pull. You want to share enough content to create interest and excitement but don’t want to give away the valuable content your paying subscribers receive. 
The goal is to have balance. Give your audience a taste of what it’s like to be a subscriber, but provide value and exclusivity to your subscribers. 
These strategies can help you keep your public content engaging while still protecting your paid content. 
Share the what - not the how.

Publicly share the box opening and what your subscribers are receiving. This is also a great time to show what can be made from supplies in the box, but not how to do it. 

Potential subscribers can see the value.

They still need to join the subscription to learn how. 

Do this in a LIVE unboxing or an unboxing post, posts of finished products with supplies laying next to them. 

Give them “incomplete” information - they need/want to know more. 

Share small sections of the how, but don’t put it all together for them. 

Use sped-up videos so people can see the process but not the exact techniques and how-tos. 

Share smaller projects that can be made with the same supplies - acts as a bonus for subscribers, too! 

Connect, don’t teach. 

Go LIVE and use items from the box to create the projects. But… instead of teaching, simply talk to and connect with your audience as you create. 

As questions come up, explain what you’re doing and that subscribers have access to the instructional video that takes them through the project step-by-step. 

Your audience will see the value of your products, connect with you on a personal level, and see just how much they will get by subscribing. 

Find a balance. If you hide all your content behind closed doors, nobody other than your subscribers sees what you’re giving. You lose the opportunity to nurture your audience and show them what it’s like to be a subscriber. 
Doing more public-facing content creates more engagement from your subscribers - and drives more interest from those people who aren’t yet subscribers. 
Join me for this episode as I talk about why it’s so important to share content publicly and how to balance public-facing and subscriber-only content. 

Important Links: 

Launch Your Box Episode 93

6 in 60 Workshop 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join Launch Your Box today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 19 Apr 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Public Facing Content vs. Private Group Content: How to Share Content Publicly Without Giving Away Paid Content</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>118</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today’s episode was inspired by a question from a member of Launch Your Box - and a former guest on the podcast. Betsy Goodman shared her sold-out launch story in episode 93. Betsy is a maker and a teacher - she teaches lettering and wax seal techniques. Her work is beautiful and her question is a common one among subscription box owners who make or teach as part of their subscription. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today’s episode was inspired by a question from a member of Launch Your Box - and a former guest on the podcast. Betsy Goodman shared her sold-out launch story in episode 93. Betsy is a maker and a teacher - she teaches lettering and wax seal techniques. Her work is beautiful and her question is a common one among subscription box owners who make or teach as part of their subscription. 
Betsy’s question? How to balance what she gives away for free and what she reserves for her paid subscribers. If your subscription box includes any type of teaching component, you probably struggle with that same push and pull. You want to share enough content to create interest and excitement but don’t want to give away the valuable content your paying subscribers receive. 
The goal is to have balance. Give your audience a taste of what it’s like to be a subscriber, but provide value and exclusivity to your subscribers. 
These strategies can help you keep your public content engaging while still protecting your paid content. 
Share the what - not the how.

Publicly share the box opening and what your subscribers are receiving. This is also a great time to show what can be made from supplies in the box, but not how to do it. 

Potential subscribers can see the value.

They still need to join the subscription to learn how. 

Do this in a LIVE unboxing or an unboxing post, posts of finished products with supplies laying next to them. 

Give them “incomplete” information - they need/want to know more. 

Share small sections of the how, but don’t put it all together for them. 

Use sped-up videos so people can see the process but not the exact techniques and how-tos. 

Share smaller projects that can be made with the same supplies - acts as a bonus for subscribers, too! 

Connect, don’t teach. 

Go LIVE and use items from the box to create the projects. But… instead of teaching, simply talk to and connect with your audience as you create. 

As questions come up, explain what you’re doing and that subscribers have access to the instructional video that takes them through the project step-by-step. 

Your audience will see the value of your products, connect with you on a personal level, and see just how much they will get by subscribing. 

Find a balance. If you hide all your content behind closed doors, nobody other than your subscribers sees what you’re giving. You lose the opportunity to nurture your audience and show them what it’s like to be a subscriber. 
Doing more public-facing content creates more engagement from your subscribers - and drives more interest from those people who aren’t yet subscribers. 
Join me for this episode as I talk about why it’s so important to share content publicly and how to balance public-facing and subscriber-only content. 

Important Links: 

Launch Your Box Episode 93

6 in 60 Workshop 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join Launch Your Box today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today’s episode was inspired by a question from a member of Launch Your Box - and a former guest on the podcast. Betsy Goodman shared her sold-out launch story in episode 93. Betsy is a maker and a teacher - she teaches lettering and wax seal techniques. Her work is beautiful and her question is a common one among subscription box owners who make or teach as part of their subscription. </p><p>Betsy’s question? How to balance what she gives away for free and what she reserves for her paid subscribers. If your subscription box includes any type of teaching component, you probably struggle with that same push and pull. You want to share enough content to create interest and excitement but don’t want to give away the valuable content your paying subscribers receive. </p><p>The goal is to have balance. Give your audience a taste of what it’s like to be a subscriber, but provide value and exclusivity to your subscribers. </p><p>These strategies can help you keep your public content engaging while still protecting your paid content. </p><ol><li>Share the what - not the how.</li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Publicly share the box opening and what your subscribers are receiving. This is also a great time to show what can be made from supplies in the box, but not how to do it. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Potential subscribers can see the value.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">They still need to join the subscription to learn how. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Do this in a LIVE unboxing or an unboxing post, posts of finished products with supplies laying next to them. </li>
</ul><ol><li>Give them “incomplete” information - they need/want to know more. </li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Share small sections of the how, but don’t put it all together for them. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Use sped-up videos so people can see the process but not the exact techniques and how-tos. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Share smaller projects that can be made with the same supplies - acts as a bonus for subscribers, too! </li>
</ul><ol><li>Connect, don’t teach. </li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Go LIVE and use items from the box to create the projects. But… instead of teaching, simply talk to and connect with your audience as you create. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">As questions come up, explain what you’re doing and that subscribers have access to the instructional video that takes them through the project step-by-step. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Your audience will see the value of your products, connect with you on a personal level, and see just how much they will get by subscribing. </li>
</ul><p>Find a balance. If you hide all your content behind closed doors, nobody other than your subscribers sees what you’re giving. You lose the opportunity to nurture your audience and show them what it’s like to be a subscriber. </p><p>Doing more public-facing content creates more engagement from your subscribers - and drives more interest from those people who aren’t yet subscribers. </p><p>Join me for this episode as I talk about why it’s so important to share content publicly and how to balance public-facing and subscriber-only content. </p><p><br></p><p>Important Links: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/crushing-it-on-instagram-with-one-simple-strategy-ep-93">Launch Your Box Episode 93</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e">6 in 60 Workshop </a></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join Launch Your Box</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams%20"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1142</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cc1ec370-dd87-11ed-be72-f37910c22ba6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2643468506.mp3?updated=1699912973" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>117: Bounced Payments &amp; Personal Follow-Up</title>
      <description>Are you relying solely on automations to recover failed payments? If so, you are losing money and experiencing unnecessary churn in your subscription box business. Business is personal. Recovering failed payments needs more than just automation - it needs a personal touch. Your personal touch. 
Think about how much time, energy, and money you spend getting new subscribers. How much time and energy are you willing to spend to keep them? In my subscription business, we use a combination of automations and personal outreach to follow up on failed payments. The result? Each month we recoup 98% of our bounced payments. 
Keep in mind, most failed payments are not due to subscribers wanting to cancel or intentionally not paying. Credit cards expire and need to be updated. Other things happen that unintentionally cause payments to fail. Assume subscribers want to stay with you and just need help updating their info. 
Every subscription box business should have a failed payment automation set up. You can do this directly in your subscription platform or CRM. The goal is to recover as many payments as possible through automation, reducing the time spent manually recouping payments via personal outreach. 
The automation process we use in my subscription box business is set up like this: 

Payment Run #1 - failed payment 

Email #1 sent - something like “There was an error processing your payment for XXX subscription. If you need to update your card, please do so at this link. Your payment will run again in 12 hours.” 

We aren’t accusing them of anything. We blame the error on ourselves and direct them to update the payment if they need to. 

We create urgency by letting them know the payment will run again in 12 hours. 

Payment Run #2 - failed payment 

Email #2 is very similar to Email #1 - they may not have seen the first email yet. 

Payment will retry in 24 hours. 

Payment #3 - failed payment 

Email #3 - 36 hours after initial payment has run. They’ve likely seen one of the first two emails. 

The first two emails are text only, this email includes an image. 

“Hi Subscriber. We are busy personalizing and packing all our subscriptions and want to make sure you get yours on time. If you need to update your card, please do so at this link. If you need help with that or have an issue, please hit reply and let us know how we can help.”

This email includes a picture of the team packing a box. 

Payment runs again in 48 hours - they have time to reach out to customer service before the payment runs again. 

At this point, we start working through the list of remaining failed payments with personal touch points. 

Personal email 

Personal text 

Now we’re ready to run one last automation. 

Email #4 - on day five of failed payment 

Last chance email “Boxes are shipping and we want to make sure you get a Monogram Box this month. Please let me know how I can help.” 

We follow this plan every month. And every month, we recoup 98% of our failed payments. 
Business is personal. Don’t forget the importance of a personal connection point when working to retain your customers. Business is also business. Don’t leave money on the table. Following up on bounced payments reduces involuntary churn and retains more recurring revenue. 
Join me for this episode as I talk you through the automations combined with personal touches process I use to recoup 98% of bounced payments every month.  
Important Links: 
6 in 60 Workshop 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join Launch Your Box today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Apr 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Bounced Payments &amp; Personal Follow-Up</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>117</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Are you relying solely on automations to recover failed payments? If so, you are losing money and experiencing unnecessary churn in your subscription box business. Business is personal. Recovering failed payments needs more than just automation - it needs a personal touch. Your personal touch. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Are you relying solely on automations to recover failed payments? If so, you are losing money and experiencing unnecessary churn in your subscription box business. Business is personal. Recovering failed payments needs more than just automation - it needs a personal touch. Your personal touch. 
Think about how much time, energy, and money you spend getting new subscribers. How much time and energy are you willing to spend to keep them? In my subscription business, we use a combination of automations and personal outreach to follow up on failed payments. The result? Each month we recoup 98% of our bounced payments. 
Keep in mind, most failed payments are not due to subscribers wanting to cancel or intentionally not paying. Credit cards expire and need to be updated. Other things happen that unintentionally cause payments to fail. Assume subscribers want to stay with you and just need help updating their info. 
Every subscription box business should have a failed payment automation set up. You can do this directly in your subscription platform or CRM. The goal is to recover as many payments as possible through automation, reducing the time spent manually recouping payments via personal outreach. 
The automation process we use in my subscription box business is set up like this: 

Payment Run #1 - failed payment 

Email #1 sent - something like “There was an error processing your payment for XXX subscription. If you need to update your card, please do so at this link. Your payment will run again in 12 hours.” 

We aren’t accusing them of anything. We blame the error on ourselves and direct them to update the payment if they need to. 

We create urgency by letting them know the payment will run again in 12 hours. 

Payment Run #2 - failed payment 

Email #2 is very similar to Email #1 - they may not have seen the first email yet. 

Payment will retry in 24 hours. 

Payment #3 - failed payment 

Email #3 - 36 hours after initial payment has run. They’ve likely seen one of the first two emails. 

The first two emails are text only, this email includes an image. 

“Hi Subscriber. We are busy personalizing and packing all our subscriptions and want to make sure you get yours on time. If you need to update your card, please do so at this link. If you need help with that or have an issue, please hit reply and let us know how we can help.”

This email includes a picture of the team packing a box. 

Payment runs again in 48 hours - they have time to reach out to customer service before the payment runs again. 

At this point, we start working through the list of remaining failed payments with personal touch points. 

Personal email 

Personal text 

Now we’re ready to run one last automation. 

Email #4 - on day five of failed payment 

Last chance email “Boxes are shipping and we want to make sure you get a Monogram Box this month. Please let me know how I can help.” 

We follow this plan every month. And every month, we recoup 98% of our failed payments. 
Business is personal. Don’t forget the importance of a personal connection point when working to retain your customers. Business is also business. Don’t leave money on the table. Following up on bounced payments reduces involuntary churn and retains more recurring revenue. 
Join me for this episode as I talk you through the automations combined with personal touches process I use to recoup 98% of bounced payments every month.  
Important Links: 
6 in 60 Workshop 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join Launch Your Box today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are you relying solely on automations to recover failed payments? If so, you are losing money and experiencing unnecessary churn in your subscription box business. Business is personal. Recovering failed payments needs more than just automation - it needs a personal touch. Your personal touch. </p><p>Think about how much time, energy, and money you spend getting new subscribers. How much time and energy are you willing to spend to keep them? In my subscription business, we use a combination of automations and personal outreach to follow up on failed payments. The result? Each month we recoup 98% of our bounced payments. </p><p>Keep in mind, most failed payments are not due to subscribers wanting to cancel or intentionally not paying. Credit cards expire and need to be updated. Other things happen that unintentionally cause payments to fail. Assume subscribers want to stay with you and just need help updating their info. </p><p>Every subscription box business should have a failed payment automation set up. You can do this directly in your subscription platform or CRM. The goal is to recover as many payments as possible through automation, reducing the time spent manually recouping payments via personal outreach. </p><p>The automation process we use in my subscription box business is set up like this: </p><ul>
<li>Payment Run #1 - failed payment </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Email #1 sent - something like “There was an error processing your payment for XXX subscription. If you need to update your card, please do so at this link. Your payment will run again in 12 hours.” </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">We aren’t accusing them of anything. We blame the error on ourselves and direct them to update the payment if they need to. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">We create urgency by letting them know the payment will run again in 12 hours. </li>
<li>Payment Run #2 - failed payment </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Email #2 is very similar to Email #1 - they may not have seen the first email yet. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Payment will retry in 24 hours. </li>
<li>Payment #3 - failed payment </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Email #3 - 36 hours after initial payment has run. They’ve likely seen one of the first two emails. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">The first two emails are text only, this email includes an image. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">“Hi Subscriber. We are busy personalizing and packing all our subscriptions and want to make sure you get yours on time. If you need to update your card, please do so at this link. If you need help with that or have an issue, please hit reply and let us know how we can help.”</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">This email includes a picture of the team packing a box. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Payment runs again in 48 hours - they have time to reach out to customer service before the payment runs again. </li>
</ul><p>At this point, we start working through the list of remaining failed payments with personal touch points. </p><ul>
<li>Personal email </li>
<li>Personal text </li>
</ul><p>Now we’re ready to run one last automation. </p><ul>
<li>Email #4 - on day five of failed payment </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Last chance email “Boxes are shipping and we want to make sure you get a Monogram Box this month. Please let me know how I can help.” </li>
</ul><p>We follow this plan every month. And every month, we recoup 98% of our failed payments. </p><p>Business is personal. Don’t forget the importance of a personal connection point when working to retain your customers. Business is also business. Don’t leave money on the table. Following up on bounced payments reduces involuntary churn and retains more recurring revenue. </p><p>Join me for this episode as I talk you through the automations combined with personal touches process I use to recoup 98% of bounced payments every month.  </p><p>Important Links: </p><ul><li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e">6 in 60 Workshop </a></li></ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join Launch Your Box</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams%20"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1050</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a0c8f442-d748-11ed-b141-934fe3104699]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1527516127.mp3?updated=1699912982" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>116: 5 Ways to Increase Perceived Value in Your Subscription Box without Blowing Your Budget</title>
      <description>Is your subscription box missing something that would increase its value in the eyes of your subscribers? Maybe things are feeling a little monotonous or routine. Or maybe some months you feel like you need “a little something extra” to make your subscription box feel like the complete experience you want it to be. But, how can you add value without blowing your budget? Remember, you need to stay profitable to stay in business. 
In today’s episode, we’re talking about increasing the perceived value of your box. Perceived value is simply a subscriber’s perception of the merit or desirability of a product. There are five things you can do to increase the perceived value of your subscription box for little or no cost. 
Customization

Style - i.e, home decor - farmhouse or modern.

Size - i.e., clothing or wearables.

Type - i.e., breed of dog. 

Teachers - i.e., grade level or type of school. 

YOU - Your Personal Connection

Remember, being “ME” is free marketing.

Include a handwritten note. 

Put a birthday card in their box the month of their birthday. 

Surprise &amp; Delight - include a gift in the box periodically (not every month)

Coupon to your store or “bonus bucks.” 

The “Golden Ticket” - a special gift included in only select boxes. 

Anniversary gifts - on the anniversary of them becoming a subscriber. 

Early bird bonuses during launches.

Exclusive Content or Collectibles

First access. 

Digital bonuses. 

Tutorial or training access. 

Exclusive meet-ups. 

Zoom parties. 

Bundle Items

One thing by itself can seem too small, but bundle two or three of an item and tie a ribbon around it or put it in an organza bag to make it look special. 

Hair clips

Chapstick

Sticker sheets

Dog treats 

Join me for this episode as I talk about five ways you can increase the perceived value of your subscription box and stay within your budget. 
Important Links: 
6 in 60 Workshop 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 05 Apr 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>5 Ways to Increase Perceived Value in Your Subscription Box without Blowing Your Budget</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>116</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Is your subscription box missing something that would increase its value in the eyes of your subscribers? Maybe things are feeling a little monotonous or routine. Or maybe some months you feel like you need “a little something extra” to make your subscription box feel like the complete experience you want it to be. But, how can you add value without blowing your budget? Remember, you need to stay profitable to stay in business. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Is your subscription box missing something that would increase its value in the eyes of your subscribers? Maybe things are feeling a little monotonous or routine. Or maybe some months you feel like you need “a little something extra” to make your subscription box feel like the complete experience you want it to be. But, how can you add value without blowing your budget? Remember, you need to stay profitable to stay in business. 
In today’s episode, we’re talking about increasing the perceived value of your box. Perceived value is simply a subscriber’s perception of the merit or desirability of a product. There are five things you can do to increase the perceived value of your subscription box for little or no cost. 
Customization

Style - i.e, home decor - farmhouse or modern.

Size - i.e., clothing or wearables.

Type - i.e., breed of dog. 

Teachers - i.e., grade level or type of school. 

YOU - Your Personal Connection

Remember, being “ME” is free marketing.

Include a handwritten note. 

Put a birthday card in their box the month of their birthday. 

Surprise &amp; Delight - include a gift in the box periodically (not every month)

Coupon to your store or “bonus bucks.” 

The “Golden Ticket” - a special gift included in only select boxes. 

Anniversary gifts - on the anniversary of them becoming a subscriber. 

Early bird bonuses during launches.

Exclusive Content or Collectibles

First access. 

Digital bonuses. 

Tutorial or training access. 

Exclusive meet-ups. 

Zoom parties. 

Bundle Items

One thing by itself can seem too small, but bundle two or three of an item and tie a ribbon around it or put it in an organza bag to make it look special. 

Hair clips

Chapstick

Sticker sheets

Dog treats 

Join me for this episode as I talk about five ways you can increase the perceived value of your subscription box and stay within your budget. 
Important Links: 
6 in 60 Workshop 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Is your subscription box missing something that would increase its value in the eyes of your subscribers? Maybe things are feeling a little monotonous or routine. Or maybe some months you feel like you need “a little something extra” to make your subscription box feel like the complete experience you want it to be. But, how can you add value without blowing your budget? Remember, you need to stay profitable to stay in business. </p><p>In today’s episode, we’re talking about increasing the perceived value of your box. Perceived value is simply a subscriber’s perception of the merit or desirability of a product. There are five things you can do to increase the perceived value of your subscription box for little or no cost. </p><ol><li>Customization</li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Style - i.e, home decor - farmhouse or modern.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Size - i.e., clothing or wearables.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Type - i.e., breed of dog. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Teachers - i.e., grade level or type of school. </li>
</ul><ol><li>YOU - Your Personal Connection</li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Remember, being “ME” is free marketing.</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Include a handwritten note. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Put a birthday card in their box the month of their birthday. </li>
</ul><ol><li>Surprise &amp; Delight - include a gift in the box periodically (not every month)</li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Coupon to your store or “bonus bucks.” </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">The “Golden Ticket” - a special gift included in only select boxes. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Anniversary gifts - on the anniversary of them becoming a subscriber. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Early bird bonuses during launches.</li>
</ul><ol><li>Exclusive Content or Collectibles</li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">First access. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Digital bonuses. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Tutorial or training access. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Exclusive meet-ups. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Zoom parties. </li>
</ul><ol><li>Bundle Items</li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">One thing by itself can seem too small, but bundle two or three of an item and tie a ribbon around it or put it in an organza bag to make it look special. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Hair clips</li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Chapstick</li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Sticker sheets</li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Dog treats </li>
</ul><p>Join me for this episode as I talk about five ways you can increase the perceived value of your subscription box <em>and</em> stay within your budget. </p><p>Important Links: </p><ul><li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e">6 in 60 Workshop </a></li></ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams%20"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1978</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d057d22c-d1d1-11ed-bc0c-73b66bacf34a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3148730017.mp3?updated=1699912962" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>115: Building an Audience in 90 Days and Selling out on Her First Launch with The AwayDay Box</title>
      <description>When you’re just getting started on your subscription box journey, it can be hard to imagine yourself successfully managing a thriving subscription. That’s when you need to seek inspiration from someone just a few steps ahead of you. Kathy Strahs from The Awayday Box is just that person.  
Kathy was inspired to provide moms like her - burnt out and depleted from all the past few years have thrown at them - with a truly special, self-care experience. She had no subscription box experience and no audience. What she did have was passion, determination, and - thanks to Launch Your Box - a roadmap to follow to get her where she wanted to be. 
Kathy dug into the training inside Launch Your Box and implemented what she learned. And when she ran into something that threatened to stop her progress - hello, tech - she got the help she needed and kept moving forward. 
After 90 days of building her audience and getting all the things ready behind the scenes, Kathy was ready to launch. She sold out on day one of her launch with 46 subscribers - an amazing result considering she truly started from scratch! 
Kathy didn’t have subscription box experience, but like all of us, she had a lot of other work and life experience. And as she started working toward launching her subscription box, she found out just how valuable all of that experience was. Kathy had: 

Retail experience - high school job at a Hallmark store. 

Business knowledge and experience - MBA from Stanford. 

Marketing - work in affiliate and partnership marketing. 

Social media and content creation - experience as a blogger and early adopter of social media platforms. 

Publishing - author of four cookbooks. 


Kathy drew from all of her work and life experiences to bring her subscription box to her subscribers. From a part-time high school job to business school to publishing cookbooks - it all applied. And Kathy is her own ideal customer - so everything about her life applied! 
What experiences do you have that you can bring to your subscription box business? Past jobs, educational experiences, life experiences… look for what you’ve learned that you can bring to your subscription box business. And get ready to be surprised by how much you already know! 
Join me for this episode as Kathy takes us through her journey from absolute subscription box newbie to selling out on day one of her launch! 

Find and follow Kathy: 

Awayday on Instagram


Awayday on Facebook 

Awayday Website

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams 
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 29 Mar 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Building an Audience in 90 Days and Selling out on Her First Launch with The AwayDay Box</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>115</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>When you’re just getting started on your subscription box journey, it can be hard to imagine yourself successfully managing a thriving subscription. That’s when you need to seek inspiration from someone just a few steps ahead of you. Kathy Strahs from The Awayday Box is just that person.  </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>When you’re just getting started on your subscription box journey, it can be hard to imagine yourself successfully managing a thriving subscription. That’s when you need to seek inspiration from someone just a few steps ahead of you. Kathy Strahs from The Awayday Box is just that person.  
Kathy was inspired to provide moms like her - burnt out and depleted from all the past few years have thrown at them - with a truly special, self-care experience. She had no subscription box experience and no audience. What she did have was passion, determination, and - thanks to Launch Your Box - a roadmap to follow to get her where she wanted to be. 
Kathy dug into the training inside Launch Your Box and implemented what she learned. And when she ran into something that threatened to stop her progress - hello, tech - she got the help she needed and kept moving forward. 
After 90 days of building her audience and getting all the things ready behind the scenes, Kathy was ready to launch. She sold out on day one of her launch with 46 subscribers - an amazing result considering she truly started from scratch! 
Kathy didn’t have subscription box experience, but like all of us, she had a lot of other work and life experience. And as she started working toward launching her subscription box, she found out just how valuable all of that experience was. Kathy had: 

Retail experience - high school job at a Hallmark store. 

Business knowledge and experience - MBA from Stanford. 

Marketing - work in affiliate and partnership marketing. 

Social media and content creation - experience as a blogger and early adopter of social media platforms. 

Publishing - author of four cookbooks. 


Kathy drew from all of her work and life experiences to bring her subscription box to her subscribers. From a part-time high school job to business school to publishing cookbooks - it all applied. And Kathy is her own ideal customer - so everything about her life applied! 
What experiences do you have that you can bring to your subscription box business? Past jobs, educational experiences, life experiences… look for what you’ve learned that you can bring to your subscription box business. And get ready to be surprised by how much you already know! 
Join me for this episode as Kathy takes us through her journey from absolute subscription box newbie to selling out on day one of her launch! 

Find and follow Kathy: 

Awayday on Instagram


Awayday on Facebook 

Awayday Website

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams 
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>When you’re just getting started on your subscription box journey, it can be hard to imagine yourself successfully managing a thriving subscription. That’s when you need to seek inspiration from someone just a few steps ahead of you. Kathy Strahs from The Awayday Box is just that person.  </p><p>Kathy was inspired to provide moms like her - burnt out and depleted from all the past few years have thrown at them - with a truly special, self-care experience. She had no subscription box experience and no audience. What she did have was passion, determination, and - thanks to Launch Your Box - a roadmap to follow to get her where she wanted to be. </p><p>Kathy dug into the training inside Launch Your Box and implemented what she learned. And when she ran into something that threatened to stop her progress - hello, tech - she got the help she needed and kept moving forward. </p><p>After 90 days of building her audience and getting all the things ready behind the scenes, Kathy was ready to launch. She sold out on day one of her launch with 46 subscribers - an amazing result considering she truly started from scratch! </p><p>Kathy didn’t have subscription box experience, but like all of us, she had a lot of other work and life experience. And as she started working toward launching her subscription box, she found out just how valuable all of that experience was. Kathy had: </p><ul>
<li>Retail experience - high school job at a Hallmark store. </li>
<li>Business knowledge and experience - MBA from Stanford. </li>
<li>Marketing - work in affiliate and partnership marketing. </li>
<li>Social media and content creation - experience as a blogger and early adopter of social media platforms. </li>
<li>Publishing - author of four cookbooks. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Kathy drew from all of her work and life experiences to bring her subscription box to her subscribers. From a part-time high school job to business school to publishing cookbooks - it all applied. And Kathy is her own ideal customer - so everything about her life applied! </p><p>What experiences do you have that you can bring to your subscription box business? Past jobs, educational experiences, life experiences… look for what you’ve learned that you can bring to your subscription box business. And get ready to be surprised by how much you already know! </p><p>Join me for this episode as Kathy takes us through her journey from absolute subscription box newbie to selling out on day one of her launch! </p><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Kathy: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/awaydaybox/">Awayday on Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/profile.php?id=100088037270869">Awayday on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><a href="https://awaydaybox.com/">Awayday Website</a></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams%20"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a><strong> </strong></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2478</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0c41438e-cc25-11ed-a738-8326a5f4ebda]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1362152004.mp3?updated=1699912953" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>114: Building a Lead Magnet Funnel</title>
      <description>In this episode, I’m going deeper into lead magnets and showing you how to build a lead magnet funnel. 

Top of the funnel -this is the largest part of the funnel. Your goal is to collect as many leads as possible. Start with a free offer, giving your audience something of value. 

Freebie or low-dollar lead magnet.

Ads to targeted interests going to cold and warm audiences.

Make sure your lead magnet is niched down so you don’t waste time and money on unqualified leads.  

The goal is to capture leads and get them on your email list. 


Opt-in -the lead has given you their email and now they move to the middle of the funnel. 

When someone submits their email address, they are sent to a thank you page. Include an upsell offer along with the link to get their freebie. 

This upsell should be an inexpensive offer that gives them even more value than the freebie. 

The goal at this stage in the funnel is to get them to make a purchase. 


Once someone has reached the middle of your funnel, they’ve received value from you, they’ve made a small purchase, and now the goal shifts to getting them to purchase your main offer. For subscription box owners, this means our recurring revenue product, our subscription boxes. 

Now it’s time to put email marketing to work for you. Set up an email automation that is kicked off when someone opts in. Keep it simple or more detailed - the choice is yours. 

Simple sequence - everyone gets the same sequence with all roads leading to becoming a subscriber. 

Detailed sequence - create two sequences - one for those who purchased the upsell and one for those who did not. 


Let’s walk through a simple email sequence. 

Email #1 - deliver the freebie and introduce your subscription box.

Email #2 - remind them to download the freebie and share the “why” behind your box with them.

Email #3 - is all about the box. Share social proof and pictures of past boxes. 


You can extend this sequence to five emails by including an email that offers a low dollar offer and adding an email with an additional offer to join at the end. 
If someone subscribes at any point during this email flow, the sequence stops and they’ll continue to get nurtured in your weekly email campaigns. 

You need to do FIVE things to create an effective lead magnet funnel. 

Create the lead magnet.

Create images for social media and ads. 

Create two landing pages - one for the opt-in and one for the thank you/upsell page. 

Create an embed form for the opt-in. 

Write your emails and set up the sequences. 


Join me for this episode as I talk about the importance of having lead magnets continuously bringing leads into your business and the steps you need to take to build out a lead magnet funnel.  
Important Links: 
6 in 60 Workshop 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join Launch Your Box today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 22 Mar 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Building a Lead Magnet Funnel</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>114</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>It all starts with driving traffic and capturing leads. You can’t have a successful subscription box launch without traffic and leads. That’s why we made traffic and leads the focus inside Launch Your Box for the first quarter. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode, I’m going deeper into lead magnets and showing you how to build a lead magnet funnel. 

Top of the funnel -this is the largest part of the funnel. Your goal is to collect as many leads as possible. Start with a free offer, giving your audience something of value. 

Freebie or low-dollar lead magnet.

Ads to targeted interests going to cold and warm audiences.

Make sure your lead magnet is niched down so you don’t waste time and money on unqualified leads.  

The goal is to capture leads and get them on your email list. 


Opt-in -the lead has given you their email and now they move to the middle of the funnel. 

When someone submits their email address, they are sent to a thank you page. Include an upsell offer along with the link to get their freebie. 

This upsell should be an inexpensive offer that gives them even more value than the freebie. 

The goal at this stage in the funnel is to get them to make a purchase. 


Once someone has reached the middle of your funnel, they’ve received value from you, they’ve made a small purchase, and now the goal shifts to getting them to purchase your main offer. For subscription box owners, this means our recurring revenue product, our subscription boxes. 

Now it’s time to put email marketing to work for you. Set up an email automation that is kicked off when someone opts in. Keep it simple or more detailed - the choice is yours. 

Simple sequence - everyone gets the same sequence with all roads leading to becoming a subscriber. 

Detailed sequence - create two sequences - one for those who purchased the upsell and one for those who did not. 


Let’s walk through a simple email sequence. 

Email #1 - deliver the freebie and introduce your subscription box.

Email #2 - remind them to download the freebie and share the “why” behind your box with them.

Email #3 - is all about the box. Share social proof and pictures of past boxes. 


You can extend this sequence to five emails by including an email that offers a low dollar offer and adding an email with an additional offer to join at the end. 
If someone subscribes at any point during this email flow, the sequence stops and they’ll continue to get nurtured in your weekly email campaigns. 

You need to do FIVE things to create an effective lead magnet funnel. 

Create the lead magnet.

Create images for social media and ads. 

Create two landing pages - one for the opt-in and one for the thank you/upsell page. 

Create an embed form for the opt-in. 

Write your emails and set up the sequences. 


Join me for this episode as I talk about the importance of having lead magnets continuously bringing leads into your business and the steps you need to take to build out a lead magnet funnel.  
Important Links: 
6 in 60 Workshop 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join Launch Your Box today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode, I’m going deeper into lead magnets and showing you how to build a lead magnet funnel. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Top of the funnel </strong>-this is the largest part of the funnel. Your goal is to collect as many leads as possible. Start with a free offer, giving your audience something of value. </p><ul>
<li>Freebie or low-dollar lead magnet.</li>
<li>Ads to targeted interests going to cold and warm audiences.</li>
<li>Make sure your lead magnet is niched down so you don’t waste time and money on unqualified leads.  </li>
<li>The goal is to capture leads and get them on your email list. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Opt-in </strong>-the lead has given you their email and now they move to the middle of the funnel. </p><ul>
<li>When someone submits their email address, they are sent to a thank you page. Include an upsell offer along with the link to get their freebie. </li>
<li>This upsell should be an inexpensive offer that gives them even more value than the freebie. </li>
<li>The goal at this stage in the funnel is to get them to make a purchase. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Once someone has reached the middle of your funnel, they’ve received value from you, they’ve made a small purchase, and now the goal shifts to getting them to purchase your main offer. For subscription box owners, this means our recurring revenue product, our subscription boxes. </p><p><br></p><p>Now it’s time to put email marketing to work for you. Set up an email automation that is kicked off when someone opts in. Keep it simple or more detailed - the choice is yours. </p><ul>
<li>Simple sequence - everyone gets the same sequence with all roads leading to becoming a subscriber. </li>
<li>Detailed sequence - create two sequences - one for those who purchased the upsell and one for those who did not. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Let’s walk through a simple email sequence. </p><ul>
<li>Email #1 - deliver the freebie and introduce your subscription box.</li>
<li>Email #2 - remind them to download the freebie and share the “why” behind your box with them.</li>
<li>Email #3 - is all about the box. Share social proof and pictures of past boxes. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>You can extend this sequence to five emails by including an email that offers a low dollar offer and adding an email with an additional offer to join at the end. </p><p>If someone subscribes at any point during this email flow, the sequence stops and they’ll continue to get nurtured in your weekly email campaigns. </p><p><br></p><p>You need to do FIVE things to create an effective lead magnet funnel. </p><ol>
<li>Create the lead magnet.</li>
<li>Create images for social media and ads. </li>
<li>Create two landing pages - one for the opt-in and one for the thank you/upsell page. </li>
<li>Create an embed form for the opt-in. </li>
<li>Write your emails and set up the sequences. </li>
</ol><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as I talk about the importance of having lead magnets continuously bringing leads into your business and the steps you need to take to build out a lead magnet funnel.  </p><p>Important Links: </p><ul><li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e">6 in 60 Workshop </a></li></ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join Launch Your Box</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1591</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d0060042-c546-11ed-ac26-03c69453cb2b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5147380798.mp3?updated=1699912921" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>113: How Cotton Chaos 5X Their Subscribers with a Strategic Launch Plan</title>
      <description>Have you ever set a really big goal for your business? A goal that made you feel a little dizzy at the thought of trying to reach it, but you got brave and made it anyway? That’s what Whitney and Andrea, the dynamic duo behind Cotton Chaos did at the beginning of 2022. 
Cotton Chaos is a graphic t-shirt business that sells retail and wholesale tees. They also have a t-shirt subscription that launched in January 2021 with 35 subscribers. After that initial launch, they found Launch Your Box and launched again in what they call “Sarah’s Way,” and grew to 100 subscribers. But they weren’t done yet.  
That big goal? Whitney and Andrea decided that in 2022 they were going to reach the 500 subscriber mark. Yep, they made a goal to increase their subscriber count by 500%! 
Part of their plan to reach that goal included joining me inside my signature course, Scale Your Box. They were dream students, soaking up all the knowledge and implementing what they learned. 
By the end of 2022, they had done it. Their T-Shirt Club had hit 500 subscribers! So how did they do it? 

They ran a promotion for a free shirt for new subscribers (current members got one, too). 

They brought on affiliates for the club - people who sold other things but whose audiences contained Whitney and Andrea’s ideal customers.

After the first 2022 launch, they went to a closed cart model to create FOMO. 

Every month, they ran a 48-hour promo email series to their waitlist. 

They ran a “get in before the price increase” promo at the end of the year. 

Whitney and Andrea launched again in February of this year. They ran a four-day launch and gained 155 new subscribers!
The ladies of Cotton Chaos reached their BIG goal and I couldn’t be more proud! They’re back in Scale Your Box again and this time focusing on adding expansion revenue into their business as they continue to grow. 
Join me for this episode as Whitney and Andrea take us through their journey from 100 to 500 subscribers in just one year and all the lessons they put into practice to help get them there!  

Find and follow Cotton Chaos: 

Cotton Chaos on Instagram


Cotton Chaos on Facebook 

Cotton Chaos Website

Cotton Chaos on TikTok


Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 15 Mar 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How Cotton Chaos 5X Their Subscribers with a Strategic Launch Plan</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>113</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Have you ever set a really big goal for your business? A goal that made you feel a little dizzy at the thought of trying to reach it, but you got brave and made it anyway? That’s what Whitney and Andrea, the dynamic duo behind Cotton Chaos did at the beginning of 2022. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you ever set a really big goal for your business? A goal that made you feel a little dizzy at the thought of trying to reach it, but you got brave and made it anyway? That’s what Whitney and Andrea, the dynamic duo behind Cotton Chaos did at the beginning of 2022. 
Cotton Chaos is a graphic t-shirt business that sells retail and wholesale tees. They also have a t-shirt subscription that launched in January 2021 with 35 subscribers. After that initial launch, they found Launch Your Box and launched again in what they call “Sarah’s Way,” and grew to 100 subscribers. But they weren’t done yet.  
That big goal? Whitney and Andrea decided that in 2022 they were going to reach the 500 subscriber mark. Yep, they made a goal to increase their subscriber count by 500%! 
Part of their plan to reach that goal included joining me inside my signature course, Scale Your Box. They were dream students, soaking up all the knowledge and implementing what they learned. 
By the end of 2022, they had done it. Their T-Shirt Club had hit 500 subscribers! So how did they do it? 

They ran a promotion for a free shirt for new subscribers (current members got one, too). 

They brought on affiliates for the club - people who sold other things but whose audiences contained Whitney and Andrea’s ideal customers.

After the first 2022 launch, they went to a closed cart model to create FOMO. 

Every month, they ran a 48-hour promo email series to their waitlist. 

They ran a “get in before the price increase” promo at the end of the year. 

Whitney and Andrea launched again in February of this year. They ran a four-day launch and gained 155 new subscribers!
The ladies of Cotton Chaos reached their BIG goal and I couldn’t be more proud! They’re back in Scale Your Box again and this time focusing on adding expansion revenue into their business as they continue to grow. 
Join me for this episode as Whitney and Andrea take us through their journey from 100 to 500 subscribers in just one year and all the lessons they put into practice to help get them there!  

Find and follow Cotton Chaos: 

Cotton Chaos on Instagram


Cotton Chaos on Facebook 

Cotton Chaos Website

Cotton Chaos on TikTok


Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you ever set a really big goal for your business? A goal that made you feel a little dizzy at the thought of trying to reach it, but you got brave and made it anyway? That’s what Whitney and Andrea, the dynamic duo behind Cotton Chaos did at the beginning of 2022. </p><p>Cotton Chaos is a graphic t-shirt business that sells retail and wholesale tees. They also have a t-shirt subscription that launched in January 2021 with 35 subscribers. After that initial launch, they found Launch Your Box and launched again in what they call “Sarah’s Way,” and grew to 100 subscribers. But they weren’t done yet.  </p><p>That big goal? Whitney and Andrea decided that in 2022 they were going to reach the 500 subscriber mark. Yep, they made a goal to increase their subscriber count by 500%! </p><p>Part of their plan to reach that goal included joining me inside my signature course, Scale Your Box. They were dream students, soaking up all the knowledge and implementing what they learned. </p><p>By the end of 2022, they had done it. Their T-Shirt Club had hit 500 subscribers! So how did they do it? </p><ul>
<li>They ran a promotion for a free shirt for new subscribers (current members got one, too). </li>
<li>They brought on affiliates for the club - people who sold other things but whose audiences contained Whitney and Andrea’s ideal customers.</li>
<li>After the first 2022 launch, they went to a closed cart model to create FOMO. </li>
<li>Every month, they ran a 48-hour promo email series to their waitlist. </li>
<li>They ran a “get in before the price increase” promo at the end of the year. </li>
</ul><p>Whitney and Andrea launched again in February of this year. They ran a four-day launch and gained 155 new subscribers!</p><p>The ladies of Cotton Chaos reached their BIG goal and I couldn’t be more proud! They’re back in Scale Your Box again and this time focusing on adding expansion revenue into their business as they continue to grow. </p><p>Join me for this episode as Whitney and Andrea take us through their journey from 100 to 500 subscribers in just one year and all the lessons they put into practice to help get them there!  </p><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Cotton Chaos: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/cottonchaostees/">Cotton Chaos on Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/cottonchaos">Cotton Chaos on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><a href="https://cottonchaos.com/">Cotton Chaos Website</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.tiktok.com/@cottonchaostees">Cotton Chaos on TikTok</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join </a>today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2215</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[47e229be-c16f-11ed-9522-e77550e2fa78]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6794108815.mp3?updated=1699912930" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>112: How I Built My 2nd Business From Scratch to Over $100K MRR in One Year</title>
      <description>Are you struggling to build your audience or find the right people for your offer? Do you have a plan in place to get some traction and start making progress toward starting and growing a successful, sustainable subscription box business? 
Inside Launch Your Box, I work with thousands of subscription box owners. Many of them are starting their businesses from scratch. And so many of them come to me not knowing where or how to start. 
I know exactly how they feel. When I started my second business - Launch Your Box - I was starting from scratch. Sure, I had a successful product-based business, but this was a brand-new offer to a brand-new audience in a totally different industry. 
In the fall of 2019, I had a plan. I knew what the offer looked like, what I would deliver, what I would charge, all the things. What I didn’t have was customers or a following. I was starting from scratch. So I got to work. 

I DM-ed people who had reached out to me to ask questions about my subscription box business. 19 of those people became my beta group. 

I worked with my beta members for 2 months, seeing what worked and what could be improved to meet their needs better. 

I started my social media accounts and consistently produced content that created value. And yes, it grew very slowly. 

I created an eBook as my first lead magnet which became my first self-liquidating offer (SLO). Sales from that eBook funded paid ads designed to attract my ideal person. 

I added a freebie lead magnet. 

3-months later I opened cart again and tried out another paid lead magnet - Subscription Box Coaching Week. 


I had 1900 members when I didn’t even have 1900 followers on social media. What I did have was almost 15,000 people on my email list - and they’d gotten there because of 3 lead magnet funnels I created in the first year. 
How did I go from zero followers to 1900 members so quickly? 

I leveraged social media to build my email list to then build my monthly recurring revenue. 

I created lead magnets and offers that were niched down to attract exactly the right person for my offer. 

I knew it took money to make money and invested in paid ads. 

I placed the offer in front of my audience 30-45 days before my launch to keep it fresh in their minds. 

I nurtured my leads with content that served. 

I focused on what was working and went all in. 


What have you done to build your list before you launch? 

Are you relying on social media to convert followers to subscribers? 

Are you growing your email list year-round? 

Are you tracking how many leads you get each month?

How are you getting in front of new people? 


What lead magnets do you have in your business? 

Are they the right lead magnets? 

Are they attracting the right people? 

What would make someone give you their email? What would help them? 


It’s time to stop waiting for people to find YOU. Go out and find them! 
Join me for this episode as I share exactly how I started my second business from scratch and how you can put the lessons I learned to work for you as you start your subscription box business. 
Important Links: 
6 in 60 Workshop 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join Launch Your Box today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 08 Mar 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How I Built My 2nd Business From Scratch to Over $100K MRR in One Year</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>112</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Are you struggling to build your audience or find the right people for your offer? Do you have a plan in place to get some traction and start making progress toward starting and growing a successful, sustainable subscription box business? </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Are you struggling to build your audience or find the right people for your offer? Do you have a plan in place to get some traction and start making progress toward starting and growing a successful, sustainable subscription box business? 
Inside Launch Your Box, I work with thousands of subscription box owners. Many of them are starting their businesses from scratch. And so many of them come to me not knowing where or how to start. 
I know exactly how they feel. When I started my second business - Launch Your Box - I was starting from scratch. Sure, I had a successful product-based business, but this was a brand-new offer to a brand-new audience in a totally different industry. 
In the fall of 2019, I had a plan. I knew what the offer looked like, what I would deliver, what I would charge, all the things. What I didn’t have was customers or a following. I was starting from scratch. So I got to work. 

I DM-ed people who had reached out to me to ask questions about my subscription box business. 19 of those people became my beta group. 

I worked with my beta members for 2 months, seeing what worked and what could be improved to meet their needs better. 

I started my social media accounts and consistently produced content that created value. And yes, it grew very slowly. 

I created an eBook as my first lead magnet which became my first self-liquidating offer (SLO). Sales from that eBook funded paid ads designed to attract my ideal person. 

I added a freebie lead magnet. 

3-months later I opened cart again and tried out another paid lead magnet - Subscription Box Coaching Week. 


I had 1900 members when I didn’t even have 1900 followers on social media. What I did have was almost 15,000 people on my email list - and they’d gotten there because of 3 lead magnet funnels I created in the first year. 
How did I go from zero followers to 1900 members so quickly? 

I leveraged social media to build my email list to then build my monthly recurring revenue. 

I created lead magnets and offers that were niched down to attract exactly the right person for my offer. 

I knew it took money to make money and invested in paid ads. 

I placed the offer in front of my audience 30-45 days before my launch to keep it fresh in their minds. 

I nurtured my leads with content that served. 

I focused on what was working and went all in. 


What have you done to build your list before you launch? 

Are you relying on social media to convert followers to subscribers? 

Are you growing your email list year-round? 

Are you tracking how many leads you get each month?

How are you getting in front of new people? 


What lead magnets do you have in your business? 

Are they the right lead magnets? 

Are they attracting the right people? 

What would make someone give you their email? What would help them? 


It’s time to stop waiting for people to find YOU. Go out and find them! 
Join me for this episode as I share exactly how I started my second business from scratch and how you can put the lessons I learned to work for you as you start your subscription box business. 
Important Links: 
6 in 60 Workshop 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join Launch Your Box today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are you struggling to build your audience or find the right people for your offer? Do you have a plan in place to get some traction and start making progress toward starting and growing a successful, sustainable subscription box business? </p><p>Inside Launch Your Box, I work with thousands of subscription box owners. Many of them are starting their businesses from scratch. And so many of them come to me not knowing where or how to start. </p><p>I know exactly how they feel. When I started my second business - Launch Your Box - I was starting from scratch. Sure, I had a successful product-based business, but this was a brand-new offer to a brand-new audience in a totally different industry. </p><p>In the fall of 2019, I had a plan. I knew what the offer looked like, what I would deliver, what I would charge, all the things. What I didn’t have was customers or a following. I was starting from scratch. So I got to work. </p><ul>
<li>I DM-ed people who had reached out to me to ask questions about my subscription box business. 19 of those people became my beta group. </li>
<li>I worked with my beta members for 2 months, seeing what worked and what could be improved to meet their needs better. </li>
<li>I started my social media accounts and consistently produced content that created value. And yes, it grew very slowly. </li>
<li>I created an eBook as my first lead magnet which became my first self-liquidating offer (SLO). Sales from that eBook funded paid ads designed to attract my ideal person. </li>
<li>I added a freebie lead magnet. </li>
<li>3-months later I opened cart again and tried out another paid lead magnet - Subscription Box Coaching Week. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>I had 1900 members when I didn’t even have 1900 followers on social media. What I did have was almost 15,000 people on my email list - and they’d gotten there because of 3 lead magnet funnels I created in the first year. </p><p>How did I go from zero followers to 1900 members so quickly? </p><ul>
<li>I leveraged social media to build my email list to then build my monthly recurring revenue. </li>
<li>I created lead magnets and offers that were niched down to attract exactly the right person for my offer. </li>
<li>I knew it took money to make money and invested in paid ads. </li>
<li>I placed the offer in front of my audience 30-45 days before my launch to keep it fresh in their minds. </li>
<li>I nurtured my leads with content that served. </li>
<li>I focused on what was working and went all in. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>What have you done to build your list <em>before</em> you launch? </p><ul>
<li>Are you relying on social media to convert followers to subscribers? </li>
<li>Are you growing your email list year-round? </li>
<li>Are you tracking how many leads you get each month?</li>
<li>How are you getting in front of new people? </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>What lead magnets do you have in your business? </p><ul>
<li>Are they the <em>right</em> lead magnets? </li>
<li>Are they attracting the <em>right</em> people? </li>
<li>What would make someone give you their email? What would help them? </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>It’s time to stop waiting for people to find YOU. Go out and find them! </p><p>Join me for this episode as I share exactly how I started my second business from scratch and how you can put the lessons I learned to work for you as you start your subscription box business. </p><p>Important Links: </p><ul><li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e">6 in 60 Workshop </a></li></ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/secret-offer">Join Launch Your Box</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2614</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e5f8511a-bbe2-11ed-aa8e-5b8ec42b2052]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5089407222.mp3?updated=1699912883" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>111: Raising Prices and Achieving Long-Term Sustainability</title>
      <description>“It takes money to grow.” - Sarah Williams
Is it time to raise your prices? After all, costs are up on absolutely everything. Your costs are up - on products, packaging, shipping, and more. Your costs going up means your profit margins are going down. 
If you don’t raise your prices, you’ll keep chipping away at your profit margin - and your business won’t be sustainable long term. It takes money to grow your business. A lower profit margin means less money to invest back into your business which means less growth. 
I recently had to do something about increased shipping costs in my business. My “free” shipping was costing me more and more of my profit on every order. I had to make a change. I went from free shipping on everything to a flat rate of $6.99 or free shipping on orders over $100. 
I worried about what would happen. Would my customers not buy without free shipping? Would my revenues go down? No. Instead: 

My average order value increased by 38% - from $48 to $65. 

Last month saw a 74% increase in sales year over year. 

Not only are my customers still buying, they’re buying MORE to meet the free shipping threshold. 

When you decide it’s the right time to increase the price of your subscription, you have two options: 
Raise the price across the board for everyone. 

Understand and accept that you may have some attrition - but fewer subscribers at a higher price will make you more profitable in the long run. 

Run a full marketing campaign notifying subscribers the price is going up and when the increase is effective. 

Be transparent about the reasons for the increase. Your subscribers know the price of everything is going up. Make it clear that you want to be around to continue giving them great products in their subscription boxes.

Grandfather in your existing subscribers at their current price and increase for any new subscriber.

This makes for a GREAT launch campaign. “Get in now before prices go up.” 

Older subscribers at the lower rate will go away over time. 

You have to raise your prices as your costs rise. You can not sustain your business long term without raising your prices.
Join me for this episode as we talk about profit margins, what the increased cost of absolutely everything means for your business, and the right way to increase the price of your subscription box. 

What’s the profit margin on your subscription box? 
Text “budget” to 940-204-0023 and I’ll send you my box budget calculator. 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 01 Mar 2023 10:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Raising Prices and Achieving Long-Term Sustainability</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>111</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>“It takes money to grow.” - Sarah Williams Is it time to raise your prices? After all, costs are up on absolutely everything. Your costs are up - on products, packaging, shipping, and more. Your costs going up means your profit margins are going down. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“It takes money to grow.” - Sarah Williams
Is it time to raise your prices? After all, costs are up on absolutely everything. Your costs are up - on products, packaging, shipping, and more. Your costs going up means your profit margins are going down. 
If you don’t raise your prices, you’ll keep chipping away at your profit margin - and your business won’t be sustainable long term. It takes money to grow your business. A lower profit margin means less money to invest back into your business which means less growth. 
I recently had to do something about increased shipping costs in my business. My “free” shipping was costing me more and more of my profit on every order. I had to make a change. I went from free shipping on everything to a flat rate of $6.99 or free shipping on orders over $100. 
I worried about what would happen. Would my customers not buy without free shipping? Would my revenues go down? No. Instead: 

My average order value increased by 38% - from $48 to $65. 

Last month saw a 74% increase in sales year over year. 

Not only are my customers still buying, they’re buying MORE to meet the free shipping threshold. 

When you decide it’s the right time to increase the price of your subscription, you have two options: 
Raise the price across the board for everyone. 

Understand and accept that you may have some attrition - but fewer subscribers at a higher price will make you more profitable in the long run. 

Run a full marketing campaign notifying subscribers the price is going up and when the increase is effective. 

Be transparent about the reasons for the increase. Your subscribers know the price of everything is going up. Make it clear that you want to be around to continue giving them great products in their subscription boxes.

Grandfather in your existing subscribers at their current price and increase for any new subscriber.

This makes for a GREAT launch campaign. “Get in now before prices go up.” 

Older subscribers at the lower rate will go away over time. 

You have to raise your prices as your costs rise. You can not sustain your business long term without raising your prices.
Join me for this episode as we talk about profit margins, what the increased cost of absolutely everything means for your business, and the right way to increase the price of your subscription box. 

What’s the profit margin on your subscription box? 
Text “budget” to 940-204-0023 and I’ll send you my box budget calculator. 

Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“It takes money to grow.” - Sarah Williams</p><p>Is it time to raise your prices? After all, costs are up on absolutely everything. Your costs are up - on products, packaging, shipping, and more. Your costs going up means your profit margins are going down. </p><p>If you don’t raise your prices, you’ll keep chipping away at your profit margin - and your business won’t be sustainable long term. It takes money to grow your business. A lower profit margin means less money to invest back into your business which means less growth. </p><p>I recently had to do something about increased shipping costs in my business. My “free” shipping was costing me more and more of my profit on every order. I had to make a change. I went from free shipping on everything to a flat rate of $6.99 or free shipping on orders over $100. </p><p>I worried about what would happen. Would my customers not buy without free shipping? Would my revenues go down? No. Instead: </p><ul>
<li>My average order value increased by 38% - from $48 to $65. </li>
<li>Last month saw a 74% increase in sales year over year. </li>
<li>Not only are my customers still buying, they’re buying MORE to meet the free shipping threshold. </li>
</ul><p>When you decide it’s the right time to increase the price of your subscription, you have two options: </p><ol><li>Raise the price across the board for everyone. </li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Understand and accept that you may have some attrition - but fewer subscribers at a higher price will make you more profitable in the long run. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Run a full marketing campaign notifying subscribers the price is going up and when the increase is effective. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Be transparent about the reasons for the increase. Your subscribers know the price of everything is going up. Make it clear that you want to be around to continue giving them great products in their subscription boxes.</li>
</ul><ol><li>Grandfather in your existing subscribers at their current price and increase for any new subscriber.</li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">This makes for a GREAT launch campaign. “Get in now before prices go up.” </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Older subscribers at the lower rate will go away over time. </li>
</ul><p>You have to raise your prices as your costs rise. You can not sustain your business long term without raising your prices.</p><p>Join me for this episode as we talk about profit margins, what the increased cost of absolutely everything means for your business, and the right way to increase the price of your subscription box. </p><p><br></p><p>What’s the profit margin on your subscription box? </p><p><strong>Text “budget” to 940-204-0023</strong> and I’ll send you my box budget calculator. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1841</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[852a222c-b710-11ed-818d-73113716d6b5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4488660391.mp3?updated=1699912904" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>110: It's Not Too Late to Pivot Your Offer with Rustic Glitter</title>
      <description>Have you ever felt the pull to change what you’re offering? Sometimes, pivoting and offering something different to your audience results in success in the form of a growing, thriving subscription box. That’s exactly what happened with Launch Your Box member Joanne Jurica of Rustic Glitter. 
There are so many things I love about Joanne’s story. A former lash stylist, Joanne was forced to close her salon during the pandemic and lean on her hobby, Rustic Glitter, to bring in some income. Joanne had been personalizing items and making old things new again since 2017. Rustic Glitter helped her deal with the stress and challenges of a chronic illness as well as the pandemic. 
One day, Joanne was inspired to create DIY craft kits to sell. When she sold them all quickly just within her own neighborhood, Joanne realized this could be something - she started dreaming about a subscription box. Along the way, Joanne found me and joined Launch Your Box. She dove into the training and learned all she needed to know to launch her DIY Home Decor Box in September of 2020. 
After two years of The DIY Home Decor Box, Joanne started thinking about how she could offer a different, simpler subscription box. Something easier for her to produce and manage and something at a lower price point. She leaned into her love for tiered trays which are very much on trend. Joanne’s decision to pivot paid off. In only one year she has already surpassed the number of subscribers it took her two years to gain with her original box. And the new box is so much easier to fulfill.  
During this pivot, Joanne discovered something important. Something so many of my DIY and craft box subscription owners discover. You don’t have to give subscribers all the things. It’s okay - and in fact better - to keep things simple. Simple for you and simple for your subscribers. 
Joanne’s decision to pivot was based on personal life challenges and a feeling that she could do more and grow faster by going in a different direction. She shows up consistently on social media - including some super entertaining and engaging videos on TikTok - to connect with her audience and attract new followers. 
Join me for this episode as Joanne shares her subscription box journey, including a decision to pivot that has turned out better than she imagined. 

Find and follow Joanne: 

Rustic Glitter on Instagram


Rustic Glitter on Facebook 

Rustic Glitter Website

Rustic Glitter on TikTok


Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 22 Feb 2023 11:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>It's Not Too Late to Pivot Your Offer with Rustic Glitter</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>110</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:subtitle>Have you ever felt the pull to change what you’re offering? Sometimes, pivoting and offering something different to your audience results in success in the form of a growing, thriving subscription box. That’s exactly what happened with Launch Your Box member Joanne Jurica of Rustic Glitter. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you ever felt the pull to change what you’re offering? Sometimes, pivoting and offering something different to your audience results in success in the form of a growing, thriving subscription box. That’s exactly what happened with Launch Your Box member Joanne Jurica of Rustic Glitter. 
There are so many things I love about Joanne’s story. A former lash stylist, Joanne was forced to close her salon during the pandemic and lean on her hobby, Rustic Glitter, to bring in some income. Joanne had been personalizing items and making old things new again since 2017. Rustic Glitter helped her deal with the stress and challenges of a chronic illness as well as the pandemic. 
One day, Joanne was inspired to create DIY craft kits to sell. When she sold them all quickly just within her own neighborhood, Joanne realized this could be something - she started dreaming about a subscription box. Along the way, Joanne found me and joined Launch Your Box. She dove into the training and learned all she needed to know to launch her DIY Home Decor Box in September of 2020. 
After two years of The DIY Home Decor Box, Joanne started thinking about how she could offer a different, simpler subscription box. Something easier for her to produce and manage and something at a lower price point. She leaned into her love for tiered trays which are very much on trend. Joanne’s decision to pivot paid off. In only one year she has already surpassed the number of subscribers it took her two years to gain with her original box. And the new box is so much easier to fulfill.  
During this pivot, Joanne discovered something important. Something so many of my DIY and craft box subscription owners discover. You don’t have to give subscribers all the things. It’s okay - and in fact better - to keep things simple. Simple for you and simple for your subscribers. 
Joanne’s decision to pivot was based on personal life challenges and a feeling that she could do more and grow faster by going in a different direction. She shows up consistently on social media - including some super entertaining and engaging videos on TikTok - to connect with her audience and attract new followers. 
Join me for this episode as Joanne shares her subscription box journey, including a decision to pivot that has turned out better than she imagined. 

Find and follow Joanne: 

Rustic Glitter on Instagram


Rustic Glitter on Facebook 

Rustic Glitter Website

Rustic Glitter on TikTok


Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you ever felt the pull to change what you’re offering? Sometimes, pivoting and offering something different to your audience results in success in the form of a growing, thriving subscription box. That’s exactly what happened with Launch Your Box member Joanne Jurica of Rustic Glitter. </p><p>There are so many things I love about Joanne’s story. A former lash stylist, Joanne was forced to close her salon during the pandemic and lean on her hobby, Rustic Glitter, to bring in some income. Joanne had been personalizing items and making old things new again since 2017. Rustic Glitter helped her deal with the stress and challenges of a chronic illness as well as the pandemic. </p><p>One day, Joanne was inspired to create DIY craft kits to sell. When she sold them all quickly just within her own neighborhood, Joanne realized this could be something - she started dreaming about a subscription box. Along the way, Joanne found me and joined Launch Your Box. She dove into the training and learned all she needed to know to launch her DIY Home Decor Box in September of 2020. </p><p>After two years of The DIY Home Decor Box, Joanne started thinking about how she could offer a different, simpler subscription box. Something easier for her to produce and manage and something at a lower price point. She leaned into her love for tiered trays which are very much on trend. Joanne’s decision to pivot paid off. In only one year she has already surpassed the number of subscribers it took her two years to gain with her original box. And the new box is so much easier to fulfill.  </p><p>During this pivot, Joanne discovered something important. Something so many of my DIY and craft box subscription owners discover. You don’t have to give subscribers all the things. It’s okay - and in fact better - to keep things simple. Simple for you and simple for your subscribers. </p><p>Joanne’s decision to pivot was based on personal life challenges and a feeling that she could do more and grow faster by going in a different direction. She shows up consistently on social media - including some super entertaining and engaging videos on TikTok - to connect with her audience and attract new followers. </p><p>Join me for this episode as Joanne shares her subscription box journey, including a decision to pivot that has turned out better than she imagined. </p><p><br></p><p>Find and follow Joanne: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/rusticglittertx/">Rustic Glitter on Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/RusticGlitter">Rustic Glitter on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><a href="https://www.rusticglitter.com/">Rustic Glitter Website</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.tiktok.com/@rusticglitter">Rustic Glitter on TikTok</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1569</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[66453aee-b0c7-11ed-9143-7301748d9bef]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2659786341.mp3?updated=1699912898" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>109: 10 Ways to Build Your List - Every Month</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/109-10-ways-to-build-your-list-every-month</link>
      <description>What one thing can you do in your business every single day that would help you be the most successful? Work to build and grow your email list! 
If you’re not replenishing the pool of people you’re selling to, you won’t be able to grow your business the way you want to. Growing your email list gets new, fresh eyes on your stuff. It allows you to present your offer to new people. And that allows you to grow. 
One of my main goals for my business in 2023 is to double the size of my email list. I challenged the ladies in my Elevate Mastermind to make growing their lists one of their goals for 2023 and now I’m challenging you to do the same thing.  
List-building activities need to be at work in your business every day. I’m sharing ten different ways you can build your email list. And no, you don’t need to do all of them at once. 

Add a pop-up on your website - have a pop-up at work on your site at all times capturing email addresses. 

Create an opt-in on your website with a way to serve your audience - give them more information about something (box opening with a freebie or additional information like a style guide, a free printable to go with your home decor box, a checklist to go with a beach themed box, tips about caring for your pet for a pet box, etc.) Think about the industry you’re in and what you can provide to serve your audience. 

Run a giveaway - a great way to build your list when you’re new and as a quarterly list-building strategy for seasoned box owners. 

Post a lead magnet on social media and run ads to it - pulling people in and onto your list. (ebooks, checklists, gift with purchase, etc.)   

Add an email opt-in at checkout - capture people who buy from you but may not be on your list. 

Create a fun quiz that requires an email address to get results - make it something your audience will want to share!  

Offer a discount or free gift - use this carefully to prevent training people to only shop with you when there is a sale or a discount. 

Host an event or workshop - free or low-dollar offer. Works great for DIYers or crafters. 

Tease sneak peeks or exclusive behind the scenes content with opt-ins - early access gives feelings of fun and exclusivity. 

Get in front of new audiences - collaborate with other brands, businesses, and influences who have the same customer but sell different items for a joint giveaway or a way to serve each other’s audiences. 

Note: Make it clear to people that they will be receiving emails from you when they provide their email addresses. 
Pick one thing to work on right now. Get that going and then add in another strategy. The more of these you do, the more people you’ll reach and the more people you’ll add to your email list. 
Join me for this episode where I challenge you to grow your business by growing your email list this year and give you 10 simple ways to do it!  
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! 
 
Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 15 Feb 2023 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>10 Ways to Build Your List - Every Month</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>109</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c695224a-b0bf-11ed-b273-cffd52989bab/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>What one thing can you do in your business every single day that would help you be the most successful? Work to build and grow your email list!  If you’re not replenishing the pool of people you’re selling to, you won’t be able to grow your...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What one thing can you do in your business every single day that would help you be the most successful? Work to build and grow your email list! 
If you’re not replenishing the pool of people you’re selling to, you won’t be able to grow your business the way you want to. Growing your email list gets new, fresh eyes on your stuff. It allows you to present your offer to new people. And that allows you to grow. 
One of my main goals for my business in 2023 is to double the size of my email list. I challenged the ladies in my Elevate Mastermind to make growing their lists one of their goals for 2023 and now I’m challenging you to do the same thing.  
List-building activities need to be at work in your business every day. I’m sharing ten different ways you can build your email list. And no, you don’t need to do all of them at once. 

Add a pop-up on your website - have a pop-up at work on your site at all times capturing email addresses. 

Create an opt-in on your website with a way to serve your audience - give them more information about something (box opening with a freebie or additional information like a style guide, a free printable to go with your home decor box, a checklist to go with a beach themed box, tips about caring for your pet for a pet box, etc.) Think about the industry you’re in and what you can provide to serve your audience. 

Run a giveaway - a great way to build your list when you’re new and as a quarterly list-building strategy for seasoned box owners. 

Post a lead magnet on social media and run ads to it - pulling people in and onto your list. (ebooks, checklists, gift with purchase, etc.)   

Add an email opt-in at checkout - capture people who buy from you but may not be on your list. 

Create a fun quiz that requires an email address to get results - make it something your audience will want to share!  

Offer a discount or free gift - use this carefully to prevent training people to only shop with you when there is a sale or a discount. 

Host an event or workshop - free or low-dollar offer. Works great for DIYers or crafters. 

Tease sneak peeks or exclusive behind the scenes content with opt-ins - early access gives feelings of fun and exclusivity. 

Get in front of new audiences - collaborate with other brands, businesses, and influences who have the same customer but sell different items for a joint giveaway or a way to serve each other’s audiences. 

Note: Make it clear to people that they will be receiving emails from you when they provide their email addresses. 
Pick one thing to work on right now. Get that going and then add in another strategy. The more of these you do, the more people you’ll reach and the more people you’ll add to your email list. 
Join me for this episode where I challenge you to grow your business by growing your email list this year and give you 10 simple ways to do it!  
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. Join the waitlist today! 
 
Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What one thing can you do in your business every single day that would help you be the most successful? Work to build and grow your email list! </p><p>If you’re not replenishing the pool of people you’re selling to, you won’t be able to grow your business the way you want to. Growing your email list gets new, fresh eyes on your stuff. It allows you to present your offer to new people. And that allows you to grow. </p><p>One of my main goals for my business in 2023 is to double the size of my email list. I challenged the ladies in my Elevate Mastermind to make growing their lists one of their goals for 2023 and now I’m challenging you to do the same thing.  </p><p>List-building activities need to be at work in your business every day. I’m sharing ten different ways you can build your email list. And no, you don’t need to do all of them at once. </p><ol>
<li>Add a pop-up on your website - have a pop-up at work on your site at all times capturing email addresses. </li>
<li>Create an opt-in on your website with a way to serve your audience - give them more information about something (box opening with a freebie or additional information like a style guide, a free printable to go with your home decor box, a checklist to go with a beach themed box, tips about caring for your pet for a pet box, etc.) Think about the industry you’re in and what you can provide to serve your audience. </li>
<li>Run a giveaway - a great way to build your list when you’re new and as a quarterly list-building strategy for seasoned box owners. </li>
<li>Post a lead magnet on social media and run ads to it - pulling people in and onto your list. (ebooks, checklists, gift with purchase, etc.)   </li>
<li>Add an email opt-in at checkout - capture people who buy from you but may not be on your list. </li>
<li>Create a fun quiz that requires an email address to get results - make it something your audience will want to share!  </li>
<li>Offer a discount or free gift - use this carefully to prevent training people to only shop with you when there is a sale or a discount. </li>
<li>Host an event or workshop - free or low-dollar offer. Works great for DIYers or crafters. </li>
<li>Tease sneak peeks or exclusive behind the scenes content with opt-ins - early access gives feelings of fun and exclusivity. </li>
<li>Get in front of new audiences - collaborate with other brands, businesses, and influences who have the same customer but sell different items for a joint giveaway or a way to serve each other’s audiences. </li>
</ol><p>Note: Make it clear to people that they will be receiving emails from you when they provide their email addresses. </p><p>Pick one thing to work on right now. Get that going and then add in another strategy. The more of these you do, the more people you’ll reach and the more people you’ll add to your email list. </p><p>Join me for this episode where I challenge you to grow your business by growing your email list this year and give you 10 simple ways to do it!  </p><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box">Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p> </p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1762</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f7a5f6fb-3503-4fec-aa2b-758b678898e6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9383090800.mp3?updated=1699912562" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>108: 5 Emails Subscription Box Owners Can Send Every Month</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/108-5-emails-subscription-box-owners-can-send-every-month</link>
      <description>“Email marketing needs to be part of your audience building strategy.” - Sarah Williams
You know social media is an important part of audience building. You’re showing up consistently, creating engaging posts and reels, connecting with your followers. But… How often are you sending emails to your email list? 
Just as important as your social media (and maybe even more important) is your email list. You own your email list. Unlike your social media accounts, you can’t get locked out or hacked. Your email list won’t suddenly disappear. 
It’s time to treat your email list like the valuable asset it is and talk to the people on it. They’ve opted in, they’ve told you they want to learn more about you and what you offer. Give them what they want! 
You should be emailing your list at least once a week. But what should you put in those emails? 
Don’t let not knowing what to say in those emails get in the way of connecting with and nurturing your email list. Here are FIVE types of emails all subscription box owners can send to their lists: 
 

Monthly Unboxing - connect with subscribers, create excitement for them and FOMO for non-subscribers! 

Subscriber Shares - create excitement and FOMO when you share pictures, messages, and comments from subscribers telling you how much they loved this month’s box. 

 

5 Ways to Use Your Box - encourage subscribers to consume the contents of the box. So important!

Sneak Peek - get your subscribers excited about the next box and let non-subscribers see what they’re missing out on - more FOMO! 

 
Behind the Scenes - your audience LOVES getting a peek behind the scenes of your business! Take them along as you design or make products or even pack boxes. 
 
Choose one of these emails to send to your email list each week. I’ve given you five - that means most months, you’ll even have a spare. Put your email list to work for you - connect with your audience and nurture them. 
Join me for this episode where I talk to you about the importance of emailing your list once a week and answer the question every subscription box owner asks, “But what do I put in those weekly emails?” 
 
Resources from this episode: 
Grab my swipe files of ALL five types of emails  HERE! 
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 08 Feb 2023 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>5 Emails Subscription Box Owners Can Send Every Month</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>108</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c6afeb66-b0bf-11ed-b273-a7eade9dbd77/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“Email marketing needs to be part of your audience building strategy.” - Sarah Williams You know social media is an important part of audience building. You’re showing up consistently, creating engaging posts and reels, connecting with your...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Email marketing needs to be part of your audience building strategy.” - Sarah Williams
You know social media is an important part of audience building. You’re showing up consistently, creating engaging posts and reels, connecting with your followers. But… How often are you sending emails to your email list? 
Just as important as your social media (and maybe even more important) is your email list. You own your email list. Unlike your social media accounts, you can’t get locked out or hacked. Your email list won’t suddenly disappear. 
It’s time to treat your email list like the valuable asset it is and talk to the people on it. They’ve opted in, they’ve told you they want to learn more about you and what you offer. Give them what they want! 
You should be emailing your list at least once a week. But what should you put in those emails? 
Don’t let not knowing what to say in those emails get in the way of connecting with and nurturing your email list. Here are FIVE types of emails all subscription box owners can send to their lists: 
 

Monthly Unboxing - connect with subscribers, create excitement for them and FOMO for non-subscribers! 

Subscriber Shares - create excitement and FOMO when you share pictures, messages, and comments from subscribers telling you how much they loved this month’s box. 

 

5 Ways to Use Your Box - encourage subscribers to consume the contents of the box. So important!

Sneak Peek - get your subscribers excited about the next box and let non-subscribers see what they’re missing out on - more FOMO! 

 
Behind the Scenes - your audience LOVES getting a peek behind the scenes of your business! Take them along as you design or make products or even pack boxes. 
 
Choose one of these emails to send to your email list each week. I’ve given you five - that means most months, you’ll even have a spare. Put your email list to work for you - connect with your audience and nurture them. 
Join me for this episode where I talk to you about the importance of emailing your list once a week and answer the question every subscription box owner asks, “But what do I put in those weekly emails?” 
 
Resources from this episode: 
Grab my swipe files of ALL five types of emails  HERE! 
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“Email marketing needs to be part of your audience building strategy.” - Sarah Williams</p><p>You know social media is an important part of audience building. You’re showing up consistently, creating engaging posts and reels, connecting with your followers. But… How often are you sending emails to your email list? </p><p>Just as important as your social media (and maybe even more important) is your email list. You own your email list. Unlike your social media accounts, you can’t get locked out or hacked. Your email list won’t suddenly disappear. </p><p>It’s time to treat your email list like the valuable asset it is and talk to the people on it. They’ve opted in, they’ve told you they want to learn more about you and what you offer. Give them what they want! </p><p>You should be emailing your list at least once a week. But what should you put in those emails? </p><p>Don’t let not knowing what to say in those emails get in the way of connecting with and nurturing your email list. Here are FIVE types of emails all subscription box owners can send to their lists: </p><p> </p><ul>
<li>Monthly Unboxing - connect with subscribers, create excitement for them and FOMO for non-subscribers! </li>
<li>Subscriber Shares - create excitement and FOMO when you share pictures, messages, and comments from subscribers telling you how much they loved this month’s box. </li>
</ul><p> </p><ol>
<li>5 Ways to Use Your Box - encourage subscribers to consume the contents of the box. So important!</li>
<li>Sneak Peek - get your subscribers excited about the next box and let non-subscribers see what they’re missing out on - more FOMO! </li>
</ol><p> </p><ul><li>Behind the Scenes - your audience LOVES getting a peek behind the scenes of your business! Take them along as you design or make products or even pack boxes. </li></ul><p> </p><p>Choose one of these emails to send to your email list each week. I’ve given you five - that means most months, you’ll even have a spare. Put your email list to work for you - connect with your audience and nurture them. </p><p>Join me for this episode where I talk to you about the importance of emailing your list once a week and answer the question every subscription box owner asks, “But what do I put in those weekly emails?” </p><p> </p><p>Resources from this episode: </p><p>Grab my swipe files of ALL five types of emails <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/5-emails-for-subscription-box-owners"> HERE</a>! </p><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1929</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[60ec5497-0034-4b53-80d7-fcf908fcc079]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4581309111.mp3?updated=1699912574" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>107: Creating SEO Friendly Content for Your Subscription Box Business</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/107-creating-seo-friendly-content-for-your-subscription-box-business</link>
      <description>“SEO doesn’t have any fuel without content.” - Sarah Williams
How do you get your stuff in front of people right when they’re looking for it? The answer, in part, is SEO. I brought a special guest to the podcast to talk about how and why to create SEO content for our subscription box businesses. 
Crystal Waddell is an e-commerce seller and content creator. She’s also one of the hosts of The Smart and Simple SEO Show, a podcast that does its best to make SEO easy for online entrepreneurs to understand and implement. 
We discussed the importance of not just creating content, but creating good, relevant content. Content that serves your audience. 
Get clear on your answer to the question, “What do I want to be known for?” and then create content that allows you to be your own best advocate. Your goal is to create content for your ideal customer before they need you so that when they’re ready to buy, you’re the obvious choice. 
So what kind of content do you need to create in order to optimize SEO on your website? Blogs are a great way to establish your authority and serve your customer. But they’re not the only way. Other types of SEO friendly content include: 

YouTube Videos

How to Guides or Tutorials

Checklists

Customer Testimonials or Reviews

Product Descriptions

Image File Names

Remember, when it comes to SEO, every word counts. Make sure you’re using words that make it clear who you are, what you sell, and who you’re for! 
The smartest place to put your content is on your own website - after all, that’s where you want your audience to end up - followed by evergreen platforms like Pinterest. Did you know that Pinterest is my #2 source of traffic for my retail business? 
Join me for this episode where Crystal and I talk about how you can use content to drive SEO traffic to your website and she reveals which keyword planner is her favorite. 
Tools and Resources Crystal Mentioned: 
Surfer SEO
Find and follow Crystal: 
The Simple and Smart SEO Podcast
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 01 Feb 2023 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating SEO Friendly Content for Your Subscription Box Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>107</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c70c113e-b0bf-11ed-b273-9b6f5717b3c6/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“SEO doesn’t have any fuel without content.” - Sarah Williams How do you get your stuff in front of people right when they’re looking for it? The answer, in part, is SEO. I brought a special guest to the podcast to talk about how and why to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“SEO doesn’t have any fuel without content.” - Sarah Williams
How do you get your stuff in front of people right when they’re looking for it? The answer, in part, is SEO. I brought a special guest to the podcast to talk about how and why to create SEO content for our subscription box businesses. 
Crystal Waddell is an e-commerce seller and content creator. She’s also one of the hosts of The Smart and Simple SEO Show, a podcast that does its best to make SEO easy for online entrepreneurs to understand and implement. 
We discussed the importance of not just creating content, but creating good, relevant content. Content that serves your audience. 
Get clear on your answer to the question, “What do I want to be known for?” and then create content that allows you to be your own best advocate. Your goal is to create content for your ideal customer before they need you so that when they’re ready to buy, you’re the obvious choice. 
So what kind of content do you need to create in order to optimize SEO on your website? Blogs are a great way to establish your authority and serve your customer. But they’re not the only way. Other types of SEO friendly content include: 

YouTube Videos

How to Guides or Tutorials

Checklists

Customer Testimonials or Reviews

Product Descriptions

Image File Names

Remember, when it comes to SEO, every word counts. Make sure you’re using words that make it clear who you are, what you sell, and who you’re for! 
The smartest place to put your content is on your own website - after all, that’s where you want your audience to end up - followed by evergreen platforms like Pinterest. Did you know that Pinterest is my #2 source of traffic for my retail business? 
Join me for this episode where Crystal and I talk about how you can use content to drive SEO traffic to your website and she reveals which keyword planner is her favorite. 
Tools and Resources Crystal Mentioned: 
Surfer SEO
Find and follow Crystal: 
The Simple and Smart SEO Podcast
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“SEO doesn’t have any fuel without content.” - Sarah Williams</p><p>How do you get your stuff in front of people right when they’re looking for it? The answer, in part, is SEO. I brought a special guest to the podcast to talk about how and why to create SEO content for our subscription box businesses. </p><p>Crystal Waddell is an e-commerce seller and content creator. She’s also one of the hosts of The Smart and Simple SEO Show, a podcast that does its best to make SEO easy for online entrepreneurs to understand and implement. </p><p>We discussed the importance of not just creating content, but creating good, relevant content. Content that serves your audience. </p><p>Get clear on your answer to the question, “What do I want to be known for?” and then create content that allows you to be your own best advocate. Your goal is to create content for your ideal customer <em>before</em> they need you so that when they’re ready to buy, you’re the obvious choice. </p><p>So what kind of content do you need to create in order to optimize SEO on your website? Blogs are a great way to establish your authority and serve your customer. But they’re not the only way. Other types of SEO friendly content include: </p><ul>
<li>YouTube Videos</li>
<li>How to Guides or Tutorials</li>
<li>Checklists</li>
<li>Customer Testimonials or Reviews</li>
<li>Product Descriptions</li>
<li>Image File Names</li>
</ul><p>Remember, when it comes to SEO, every word counts. Make sure you’re using words that make it clear who you are, what you sell, and who you’re for! </p><p>The smartest place to put your content is on your own website - after all, that’s where you want your audience to end up - followed by evergreen platforms like Pinterest. Did you know that Pinterest is my #2 source of traffic for my retail business? </p><p>Join me for this episode where Crystal and I talk about how you can use content to drive SEO traffic to your website and she reveals which keyword planner is her favorite. </p><p>Tools and Resources Crystal Mentioned: </p><p><a href="https://surferseo.com/?fpr=crystal34">Surfer SEO</a></p><p>Find and follow Crystal: </p><ul><li><a href="https://www.simpleandsmartseo.com">The Simple and Smart SEO Podcast</a></li></ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1713</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[afb6fce0-80f7-489f-8047-16399157297f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4363829653.mp3?updated=1699912583" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>106: 7 Ways to Market Your Subscription Box Cost Effectively</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/106-7-ways-to-market-your-subscription-box-cost-effectively</link>
      <description>Do you think growing your subscription means spending tons of money on ads? It doesn’t need to be that way! There are so many low and even no-cost ways to market and grow your subscription box business.  
The bottom line? You can’t rely on just one marketing channel or strategy. You need to build a multi-channel marketing plan, layering one type of marketing on top of another. Don’t worry - building this plan doesn’t have to be time-consuming or costly. 
I’m sharing seven cost-effective ways to market your subscription box business. But I don’t want you to try to implement all of them at the same time! If you’re just getting started, choose one, get consistent with it and then layer on another. If you’re already doing one or more of these, choose another one to add to your marketing plan. 
 Leverage social media. 

These accounts are FREE. 

Figure out where your ideal customer is and start there. 

Have FUN with it. Get social - serve and engage with your audience. 

Partner with micro-influencers in your space. 

Offering affiliate commissions is super cost-effective - you don’t pay them unless they sell something for you. 

Influencer or affiliate marketing. 

Very inexpensive. 

Still a very effective way to reach your audience. 

How will you get people onto your email list? 

How will you market to them once they’re on your list? 

Email marketing. 

Create valuable content to attract your ideal person. 

Blogs, videos, eBooks, etc. 

Content marketing.
Word of mouth is so powerful! 
Customer reviews.
Where does your ideal customer go? Farmers Markets, expos, shopping events, etc. 
In person events. 

It’s not about the stuff - it’s about the people. 

A strong community creates raving fans - the kind that market your subscription for you!

Build an online community. 
Take one of these ideas and build it into your routine. Get comfortable and consistent with it. Then layer in another strategy. Continue to grow your audience, reach more of the right people, and ultimately gain new subscribers. 
You can’t rely on one marketing channel or strategy. And you don’t need to spend a lot of money on ads to market effectively. Join me for this episode as I take you through seven cost-effective ways to market your subscription box. 
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 25 Jan 2023 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title> 7 Ways to Market Your Subscription Box Cost Effectively</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>106</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c72696da-b0bf-11ed-b273-97f1893e3e77/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Do you think growing your subscription means spending tons of money on ads? It doesn’t need to be that way! There are so many low and even no-cost ways to market and grow your subscription box business.   The bottom line? You can’t rely...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Do you think growing your subscription means spending tons of money on ads? It doesn’t need to be that way! There are so many low and even no-cost ways to market and grow your subscription box business.  
The bottom line? You can’t rely on just one marketing channel or strategy. You need to build a multi-channel marketing plan, layering one type of marketing on top of another. Don’t worry - building this plan doesn’t have to be time-consuming or costly. 
I’m sharing seven cost-effective ways to market your subscription box business. But I don’t want you to try to implement all of them at the same time! If you’re just getting started, choose one, get consistent with it and then layer on another. If you’re already doing one or more of these, choose another one to add to your marketing plan. 
 Leverage social media. 

These accounts are FREE. 

Figure out where your ideal customer is and start there. 

Have FUN with it. Get social - serve and engage with your audience. 

Partner with micro-influencers in your space. 

Offering affiliate commissions is super cost-effective - you don’t pay them unless they sell something for you. 

Influencer or affiliate marketing. 

Very inexpensive. 

Still a very effective way to reach your audience. 

How will you get people onto your email list? 

How will you market to them once they’re on your list? 

Email marketing. 

Create valuable content to attract your ideal person. 

Blogs, videos, eBooks, etc. 

Content marketing.
Word of mouth is so powerful! 
Customer reviews.
Where does your ideal customer go? Farmers Markets, expos, shopping events, etc. 
In person events. 

It’s not about the stuff - it’s about the people. 

A strong community creates raving fans - the kind that market your subscription for you!

Build an online community. 
Take one of these ideas and build it into your routine. Get comfortable and consistent with it. Then layer in another strategy. Continue to grow your audience, reach more of the right people, and ultimately gain new subscribers. 
You can’t rely on one marketing channel or strategy. And you don’t need to spend a lot of money on ads to market effectively. Join me for this episode as I take you through seven cost-effective ways to market your subscription box. 
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Do you think growing your subscription means spending tons of money on ads? It doesn’t need to be that way! There are so many low and even no-cost ways to market and grow your subscription box business.  </p><p>The bottom line? You can’t rely on just one marketing channel or strategy. You need to build a multi-channel marketing plan, layering one type of marketing on top of another. Don’t worry - building this plan doesn’t have to be time-consuming or costly. </p><p>I’m sharing seven cost-effective ways to market your subscription box business. But I don’t want you to try to implement all of them at the same time! If you’re just getting started, choose one, get consistent with it and then layer on another. If you’re already doing one or more of these, choose another one to add to your marketing plan. </p><ol><li> Leverage social media. </li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">These accounts are FREE. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Figure out where your ideal customer is and start there. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Have FUN with it. Get social - serve and engage with your audience. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Partner with micro-influencers in your space. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Offering affiliate commissions is super cost-effective - you don’t pay them unless they sell something for you. </li>
</ul><ol><li>Influencer or affiliate marketing. </li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Very inexpensive. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Still a very effective way to reach your audience. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">How will you get people onto your email list? </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">How will you market to them once they’re on your list? </li>
</ul><ol><li>Email marketing. </li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Create valuable content to attract your ideal person. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Blogs, videos, eBooks, etc. </li>
</ul><ol><li>Content marketing.</li></ol><ul><li class="ql-indent-1">Word of mouth is so powerful! </li></ul><ol><li>Customer reviews.</li></ol><ul><li class="ql-indent-1">Where does your ideal customer go? Farmers Markets, expos, shopping events, etc. </li></ul><ol><li>In person events. </li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">It’s not about the stuff - it’s about the people. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">A strong community creates raving fans - the kind that market your subscription for you!</li>
</ul><ol><li>Build an online community. </li></ol><p>Take one of these ideas and build it into your routine. Get comfortable and consistent with it. Then layer in another strategy. Continue to grow your audience, reach more of the right people, and ultimately gain new subscribers. </p><p>You can’t rely on one marketing channel or strategy. And you don’t need to spend a lot of money on ads to market effectively. Join me for this episode as I take you through seven cost-effective ways to market your subscription box. </p><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1105</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[dfe28ddb-efb8-452f-8b3b-f4865d7ab11a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8438723177.mp3?updated=1699912630" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>105: Scaling Your Subscription Box Business with Cheryl Ham</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/105-scaling-your-subscription-box-business-with-cheryl-ham</link>
      <description>I have a special episode for you today! Cheryl Ham is a long-time member of Launch Your Box, an OG member of Scale Your Box, and the founder of the wildly successful Yarnable subscription box. She’s here today to catch us up on all that’s happened in her business since her last visit to the podcast almost two years ago. 
Cheryl’s business started as more of a hobby. She had a full-time career and a love for all things knitting and yarn, especially hand-dyed yarn. She became an independent yarn dyer with no formal training and no business training. Cheryl launched her subscription in 2019 but struggled to grow. Then she found and joined Launch Your Box. 
When Cheryl launched again, following the teachings inside Launch Your Box, she doubled the size of her business within days. And it just kept growing. It exploded, really. Cheryl’s next launch saw her gain 400 subscribers in only 24 hours. She blew past the 1,000 subscriber mark and ended that launch at 1,100 subscribers!  
Cheryl’s challenge quickly became how to manage the incredible growth of her business. How to scale in a way that was manageable. She needed to hire and she needed space - badly. But it took so much of her time and effort just to keep up with her subscriptions that she couldn’t seem to make the changes that needed to be made. This is right about the time Cheryl joined the beta version of my Scale Your Box course. She knew she needed help - and she knew where to go to get it! 
I’m happy and Cheryl’s happy to share that she did make those necessary changes. Cheryl now has a team of people working with her - and that team makes it possible for her to work only four days a week and to end those days by 2:30 in the afternoon. Oh, and they’re doing all this work in a new space. A space that allows them to be efficient. 
Cheryl shared the challenges and opportunities of 2021 and the very different challenges and opportunities of 2022. She and her family have moved into their dream house and are living their dream life, so much of which is thanks to Cheryl’s subscription box business. 
Cheryl credits Scale Your Box with helping her see which pieces of her business strategy were lacking, how to beef them up, and how all the moving parts need to work together as she scales! Cheryl is joining me again this year for another round of Scale Your Box and I can’t wait to see where she’s going to take her business next! 
Join me for this episode as Cheryl shares her journey, the ups and downs of amazing business growth, and why she’s coming back for another round of Scale Your Box. 
Catch the early parts of Cheryl’s story on  episode 16 of the Launch Your Box podcast. 
Find and follow Cheryl: 

Hypnotic Yarn on Instagram


Hypnotic Yarn on Facebook 

Hypnotic Yarn on YouTube

Hypnotic Yarn Website


Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 18 Jan 2023 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Scaling Your Subscription Box Business with Cheryl Ham</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>105</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c73c97a0-b0bf-11ed-b273-975d56761f2a/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>I have a special episode for you today! Cheryl Ham is a long-time member of Launch Your Box, an OG member of Scale Your Box, and the founder of the wildly successful Yarnable subscription box. She’s here today to catch us up on all that’s happened...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I have a special episode for you today! Cheryl Ham is a long-time member of Launch Your Box, an OG member of Scale Your Box, and the founder of the wildly successful Yarnable subscription box. She’s here today to catch us up on all that’s happened in her business since her last visit to the podcast almost two years ago. 
Cheryl’s business started as more of a hobby. She had a full-time career and a love for all things knitting and yarn, especially hand-dyed yarn. She became an independent yarn dyer with no formal training and no business training. Cheryl launched her subscription in 2019 but struggled to grow. Then she found and joined Launch Your Box. 
When Cheryl launched again, following the teachings inside Launch Your Box, she doubled the size of her business within days. And it just kept growing. It exploded, really. Cheryl’s next launch saw her gain 400 subscribers in only 24 hours. She blew past the 1,000 subscriber mark and ended that launch at 1,100 subscribers!  
Cheryl’s challenge quickly became how to manage the incredible growth of her business. How to scale in a way that was manageable. She needed to hire and she needed space - badly. But it took so much of her time and effort just to keep up with her subscriptions that she couldn’t seem to make the changes that needed to be made. This is right about the time Cheryl joined the beta version of my Scale Your Box course. She knew she needed help - and she knew where to go to get it! 
I’m happy and Cheryl’s happy to share that she did make those necessary changes. Cheryl now has a team of people working with her - and that team makes it possible for her to work only four days a week and to end those days by 2:30 in the afternoon. Oh, and they’re doing all this work in a new space. A space that allows them to be efficient. 
Cheryl shared the challenges and opportunities of 2021 and the very different challenges and opportunities of 2022. She and her family have moved into their dream house and are living their dream life, so much of which is thanks to Cheryl’s subscription box business. 
Cheryl credits Scale Your Box with helping her see which pieces of her business strategy were lacking, how to beef them up, and how all the moving parts need to work together as she scales! Cheryl is joining me again this year for another round of Scale Your Box and I can’t wait to see where she’s going to take her business next! 
Join me for this episode as Cheryl shares her journey, the ups and downs of amazing business growth, and why she’s coming back for another round of Scale Your Box. 
Catch the early parts of Cheryl’s story on  episode 16 of the Launch Your Box podcast. 
Find and follow Cheryl: 

Hypnotic Yarn on Instagram


Hypnotic Yarn on Facebook 

Hypnotic Yarn on YouTube

Hypnotic Yarn Website


Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I have a special episode for you today! Cheryl Ham is a long-time member of Launch Your Box, an OG member of Scale Your Box, and the founder of the wildly successful Yarnable subscription box. She’s here today to catch us up on all that’s happened in her business since her last visit to the podcast almost two years ago. </p><p>Cheryl’s business started as more of a hobby. She had a full-time career and a love for all things knitting and yarn, especially hand-dyed yarn. She became an independent yarn dyer with no formal training and no business training. Cheryl launched her subscription in 2019 but struggled to grow. Then she found and joined Launch Your Box. </p><p>When Cheryl launched again, following the teachings inside Launch Your Box, she doubled the size of her business within days. And it just kept growing. It exploded, really. Cheryl’s next launch saw her gain 400 subscribers in only 24 hours. She blew past the 1,000 subscriber mark and ended that launch at 1,100 subscribers!  </p><p>Cheryl’s challenge quickly became how to manage the incredible growth of her business. How to scale in a way that was manageable. She needed to hire and she needed space - badly. But it took so much of her time and effort just to keep up with her subscriptions that she couldn’t seem to make the changes that needed to be made. This is right about the time Cheryl joined the beta version of my Scale Your Box course. She knew she needed help - and she knew where to go to get it! </p><p>I’m happy and Cheryl’s happy to share that she did make those necessary changes. Cheryl now has a team of people working with her - and that team makes it possible for her to work only four days a week and to end those days by 2:30 in the afternoon. Oh, and they’re doing all this work in a new space. A space that allows them to be efficient. </p><p>Cheryl shared the challenges and opportunities of 2021 and the very different challenges and opportunities of 2022. She and her family have moved into their dream house and are living their dream life, so much of which is thanks to Cheryl’s subscription box business. </p><p>Cheryl credits Scale Your Box with helping her see which pieces of her business strategy were lacking, how to beef them up, and how all the moving parts need to work together as she scales! Cheryl is joining me again this year for another round of Scale Your Box and I can’t wait to see where she’s going to take her business next! </p><p>Join me for this episode as Cheryl shares her journey, the ups and downs of amazing business growth, and why she’s coming back for another round of Scale Your Box. </p><p>Catch the early parts of Cheryl’s story on <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-16"> episode 16</a> of the Launch Your Box podcast. </p><p>Find and follow Cheryl: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/hypnoticyarn/">Hypnotic Yarn on Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/HypnoticYarn">Hypnotic Yarn on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><a href="https://www.youtube.com/@HypnoticYarnHY">Hypnotic Yarn on YouTube</a></li>
<li><a href="https://hypnoticyarn.com/">Hypnotic Yarn Website</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2996</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5fabd4e9-c73d-4ca4-bab4-2915630eea78]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6461213003.mp3?updated=1699912644" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>104: Niching Down Your Ideal Customer Can Improve Your Visibility</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/104-niching-down-your-ideal-customer-can-improve-your-visibility</link>
      <description>“20% of your customer base generates 80% of your revenue.” - Sarah Williams
Identifying your ideal customer is not something you do once. It’s something you need to tweak and get clearer about in your business on a daily basis. In this episode, I’m talking about how to figure out who the 20% of your customers are who are responsible for 80% of your revenue and why you should focus all of your efforts on them. Oh… and one other thing. Stop trying to please everyone!  
When you try to please everyone, you dilute your focus. Instead of spending your time and energy on what you know works for your most loyal customers - the ones who buy from you every day - you spend time, energy, and money trying to satisfy one-off requests from customers who are not your ideal person. 
If you’re just getting started and even if you’ve been in business for a while, you might have an idea of who your ideal customer is, but you’re probably not sure. Start by asking yourself questions about your ideal customer and get as specific as possible with your answers. 

Who is your ideal customer? Start with the basics. 

Where does your ideal customer live? 

What are your ideal customer’s interests? 

What are your ideal customer’s challenges or pain points? 

Nail down the basics and then get more specific. Is your ideal customer “a mom” or “a mom of preschoolers who works outside the home and wants to provide quick, easy, and healthy meals to her family?” It is much easier for me to speak to “a mom” when I know who she is and what her pain points are! 
Once you get a good picture of who your ideal customer is, it’s time to talk about how to get them into your world and build the know-like-trust factor that makes them want to buy from you. Get to know your ideal customer and let them get to know you by:

Hanging out in common Facebook groups offering advice and engaging in conversations. 

Speak their language in your posts, videos, and emails. 

Target their interests in your social media advertising. 

Serve before you sell. This is SO important. Provide value without asking for money. 

This month inside Launch Your Box, we’re talking all about SEO and how it can help your subscription box business grow. The purpose of SEO is to help the right people find you online. The more we can niche down, the more completely we define who our ideal customer is, the better we can be at messaging, copy, and SEO. 
Join me for this episode as I talk about how and why niching down your ideal customer can improve your visibility and increase your revenue! 
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 11 Jan 2023 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Niching Down Your Ideal Customer Can Improve Your Visibility</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>104</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c7529cda-b0bf-11ed-b273-4b60641e3cd4/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“20% of your customer base generates 80% of your revenue.” - Sarah Williams Identifying your ideal customer is not something you do once. It’s something you need to tweak and get clearer about in your business on a daily basis. In this episode,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“20% of your customer base generates 80% of your revenue.” - Sarah Williams
Identifying your ideal customer is not something you do once. It’s something you need to tweak and get clearer about in your business on a daily basis. In this episode, I’m talking about how to figure out who the 20% of your customers are who are responsible for 80% of your revenue and why you should focus all of your efforts on them. Oh… and one other thing. Stop trying to please everyone!  
When you try to please everyone, you dilute your focus. Instead of spending your time and energy on what you know works for your most loyal customers - the ones who buy from you every day - you spend time, energy, and money trying to satisfy one-off requests from customers who are not your ideal person. 
If you’re just getting started and even if you’ve been in business for a while, you might have an idea of who your ideal customer is, but you’re probably not sure. Start by asking yourself questions about your ideal customer and get as specific as possible with your answers. 

Who is your ideal customer? Start with the basics. 

Where does your ideal customer live? 

What are your ideal customer’s interests? 

What are your ideal customer’s challenges or pain points? 

Nail down the basics and then get more specific. Is your ideal customer “a mom” or “a mom of preschoolers who works outside the home and wants to provide quick, easy, and healthy meals to her family?” It is much easier for me to speak to “a mom” when I know who she is and what her pain points are! 
Once you get a good picture of who your ideal customer is, it’s time to talk about how to get them into your world and build the know-like-trust factor that makes them want to buy from you. Get to know your ideal customer and let them get to know you by:

Hanging out in common Facebook groups offering advice and engaging in conversations. 

Speak their language in your posts, videos, and emails. 

Target their interests in your social media advertising. 

Serve before you sell. This is SO important. Provide value without asking for money. 

This month inside Launch Your Box, we’re talking all about SEO and how it can help your subscription box business grow. The purpose of SEO is to help the right people find you online. The more we can niche down, the more completely we define who our ideal customer is, the better we can be at messaging, copy, and SEO. 
Join me for this episode as I talk about how and why niching down your ideal customer can improve your visibility and increase your revenue! 
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><em>“20% of your customer base generates 80% of your revenue.”</em> - Sarah Williams</p><p>Identifying your ideal customer is not something you do once. It’s something you need to tweak and get clearer about in your business on a daily basis. In this episode, I’m talking about how to figure out who the 20% of your customers are who are responsible for 80% of your revenue and why you should focus all of your efforts on them. Oh… and one other thing. Stop trying to please everyone!  </p><p>When you try to please everyone, you dilute your focus. Instead of spending your time and energy on what you know works for your most loyal customers - the ones who buy from you every day - you spend time, energy, and money trying to satisfy one-off requests from customers who are not your ideal person. </p><p>If you’re just getting started and even if you’ve been in business for a while, you might have an idea of who your ideal customer is, but you’re probably not sure. Start by asking yourself questions about your ideal customer and get as specific as possible with your answers. </p><ol>
<li>Who is your ideal customer? Start with the basics. </li>
<li>Where does your ideal customer live? </li>
<li>What are your ideal customer’s interests? </li>
<li>What are your ideal customer’s challenges or pain points? </li>
</ol><p>Nail down the basics and then get more specific. Is your ideal customer “a mom” or “a mom of preschoolers who works outside the home and wants to provide quick, easy, and healthy meals to her family?” It is much easier for me to speak to “a mom” when I know who she is and what her pain points are! </p><p>Once you get a good picture of who your ideal customer is, it’s time to talk about how to get them into your world and build the know-like-trust factor that makes them want to buy from you. Get to know your ideal customer and let them get to know you by:</p><ul>
<li>Hanging out in common Facebook groups offering advice and engaging in conversations. </li>
<li>Speak their language in your posts, videos, and emails. </li>
<li>Target their interests in your social media advertising. </li>
<li>Serve before you sell. This is SO important. Provide value without asking for money. </li>
</ul><p>This month inside Launch Your Box, we’re talking all about SEO and how it can help your subscription box business grow. The purpose of SEO is to help the right people find you online. The more we can niche down, the more completely we define who our ideal customer is, the better we can be at messaging, copy, and SEO. </p><p>Join me for this episode as I talk about how and why niching down your ideal customer can improve your visibility and increase your revenue! </p><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1726</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ffeca0ac-438b-47a5-95f3-8a52227c640c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5305839668.mp3?updated=1699912639" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>103: From the Food Network to Starting a Subscription Box with The Cheerful Baker</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/103-from-the-food-network-to-starting-a-subscription-box-with-the-cheerful-baker</link>
      <description>I’ve got some star power for you on this episode of the Launch Your Box podcast! Lauren Jacobs, a.k.a The Cheerful Baker, is a member of Launch Your Box and the creator and curator of a successful cookie decorating subscription box. She’s also one of the stars of a recent episode of The Christmas Cookie Challenge on The Food Network!
There is so much to love about Lauren’s story and how she went from being a mom and art teacher who loved to bake cookies for her children’s classmates and friends to a full-time entrepreneur who designs and produces her own cookie cutters, an online and in-person cookie decorating instructor, and a successful subscription box owner. Oh, and there’s the whole competing on a cookie decorating competition on The Food Network thing, which is of course the holy grail of any cook or baker. 
I talk a lot about the importance of knowing your why, keeping your why in mind as you start, launch, and grow your subscription box business, and sharing your why with your audience. Lauren does all of that. Her why is part of what makes her story special and it will speak to the heart of any parent who has had a child who struggles in school. 
Lauren also shared how she used short videos to build and engage with her audience. She understood early the power video would have in helping her stand out from all the other cookie decorators on Instagram. By maintaining a strong focus on her why and the needs of her audience, Lauren’s subscription box business grew quickly and continues to grow. 
I wanted to know all the things about her Food Network experience. How she got chosen, behind the scenes secrets, and how being on the Food Network affected her business. You’ll be as fascinated as I was by how it all came to be - and you’ll laugh as hard as I did about what Lauren shared during her initial interview. 
Lauren’s plans for 2023 include continuing to grow her subscription - her goal is to double her current number of subscribers and I have no doubt she’ll do that and more! 
Join me for this episode as Lauren shares her inspirational journey from mom and art teacher to successful entrepreneur with a quick stop off at the Food Network!  
 
Find and follow Lauren: 

The Cheerful Baker on Instagram


The Cheerful Baker on Facebook 

The Cheerful Baker Website

 The Cheerful Baker on YouTube

 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today!

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 04 Jan 2023 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From the Food Network to Starting a Subscription Box with The Cheerful Baker</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>103</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c768c0be-b0bf-11ed-b273-d3aeedba5b37/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>I’ve got some star power for you on this episode of the Launch Your Box podcast! Lauren Jacobs, a.k.a The Cheerful Baker, is a member of Launch Your Box and the creator and curator of a successful cookie decorating subscription box. She’s also one...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I’ve got some star power for you on this episode of the Launch Your Box podcast! Lauren Jacobs, a.k.a The Cheerful Baker, is a member of Launch Your Box and the creator and curator of a successful cookie decorating subscription box. She’s also one of the stars of a recent episode of The Christmas Cookie Challenge on The Food Network!
There is so much to love about Lauren’s story and how she went from being a mom and art teacher who loved to bake cookies for her children’s classmates and friends to a full-time entrepreneur who designs and produces her own cookie cutters, an online and in-person cookie decorating instructor, and a successful subscription box owner. Oh, and there’s the whole competing on a cookie decorating competition on The Food Network thing, which is of course the holy grail of any cook or baker. 
I talk a lot about the importance of knowing your why, keeping your why in mind as you start, launch, and grow your subscription box business, and sharing your why with your audience. Lauren does all of that. Her why is part of what makes her story special and it will speak to the heart of any parent who has had a child who struggles in school. 
Lauren also shared how she used short videos to build and engage with her audience. She understood early the power video would have in helping her stand out from all the other cookie decorators on Instagram. By maintaining a strong focus on her why and the needs of her audience, Lauren’s subscription box business grew quickly and continues to grow. 
I wanted to know all the things about her Food Network experience. How she got chosen, behind the scenes secrets, and how being on the Food Network affected her business. You’ll be as fascinated as I was by how it all came to be - and you’ll laugh as hard as I did about what Lauren shared during her initial interview. 
Lauren’s plans for 2023 include continuing to grow her subscription - her goal is to double her current number of subscribers and I have no doubt she’ll do that and more! 
Join me for this episode as Lauren shares her inspirational journey from mom and art teacher to successful entrepreneur with a quick stop off at the Food Network!  
 
Find and follow Lauren: 

The Cheerful Baker on Instagram


The Cheerful Baker on Facebook 

The Cheerful Baker Website

 The Cheerful Baker on YouTube

 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today!

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’ve got some star power for you on this episode of the Launch Your Box podcast! Lauren Jacobs, a.k.a The Cheerful Baker, is a member of Launch Your Box and the creator and curator of a successful cookie decorating subscription box. She’s also one of the stars of a recent episode of The Christmas Cookie Challenge on The Food Network!</p><p>There is so much to love about Lauren’s story and how she went from being a mom and art teacher who loved to bake cookies for her children’s classmates and friends to a full-time entrepreneur who designs and produces her own cookie cutters, an online and in-person cookie decorating instructor, and a successful subscription box owner. Oh, and there’s the whole competing on a cookie decorating competition on The Food Network thing, which is of course the holy grail of any cook or baker. </p><p>I talk a lot about the importance of knowing your why, keeping your why in mind as you start, launch, and grow your subscription box business, and sharing your why with your audience. Lauren does all of that. Her why is part of what makes her story special and it will speak to the heart of any parent who has had a child who struggles in school. </p><p>Lauren also shared how she used short videos to build and engage with her audience. She understood early the power video would have in helping her stand out from all the other cookie decorators on Instagram. By maintaining a strong focus on her why and the needs of her audience, Lauren’s subscription box business grew quickly and continues to grow. </p><p>I wanted to know all the things about her Food Network experience. How she got chosen, behind the scenes secrets, and how being on the Food Network affected her business. You’ll be as fascinated as I was by how it all came to be - and you’ll laugh as hard as I did about what Lauren shared during her initial interview. </p><p>Lauren’s plans for 2023 include continuing to grow her subscription - her goal is to double her current number of subscribers and I have no doubt she’ll do that and more! </p><p>Join me for this episode as Lauren shares her inspirational journey from mom and art teacher to successful entrepreneur with a quick stop off at the Food Network!  </p><p> </p><p>Find and follow Lauren: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/thecheerfulbaker/">The Cheerful Baker on Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/cheerfulbaker">The Cheerful Baker on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><a href="https://cheerfulcutters.com/">The Cheerful Baker Website</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCLnM7BBnlL-uFdL1QHaF-2A"> The Cheerful Baker on YouTube</a></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today!</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2661</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a4ad7fa0-af35-4a9b-a115-a31e30bebd54]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2327598855.mp3?updated=1699912658" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>102: Sarah’s Strategies to 100 Subscribers and Beyond</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/102-sarahs-strategies-to-100-subscribers-and-beyond</link>
      <description>Have you launched your subscription box but found yourself struggling to grow? Launching your subscription box is a HUGE milestone. Celebrate that! The next HUGE milestone for so many of my members is reaching 100 subscribers. Some - those with large, engaged audiences - do this during their first launch. Most don’t. I didn’t. 
Growing your subscription box to 100 subscribers and beyond takes time. It’s important to give yourself grace and time to get there while still staying focused and holding yourself accountable.
Inside Launch Your Box, I walk my members through what it takes to get their subscription boxes launched. But the launch is not the end. There is more work to do to keep it going - and growing - each month. Which is why we talk about much more than just launching inside LYB. 

It’s constant curation. Keeping up with trends and what your subscribers want. 

It’s constant marketing. Getting yourself out there and in front of new people consistently. 

It’s constant retention. So many subscription box owners make the mistake of focusing only on the acquisition of new subscribers, losing sight of the subscribers they already have. 

Focusing on these three things should drive your business and create long-term recurring revenue. 
So, what got me to my first 100 subscribers and what should you do to get to yours? 

Don’t stop talking about your subscription box. 

You think everyone has seen it. They haven’t. 

You think you’re talking about it enough. You’re not. 

Inside the Launch Your Box Training Library - in the Marketing Module - you’ll find a Subscription Box Social Media resource with posting ideas for EVERY day of the month! 

Not an LYB member yet? Text LAUNCH to 940-204-0023 for a link to join! 

 
Engage. Consistently. 
 

Be social before and after the sale. 

Retention is a HUGE part of growth - make sure you’re engaging with your subscribers, letting them know how much you appreciate them. 

Your excitement is contagious. 

Create FOMO for those not signed up! 

Create connections with and for your subscribers. 

I don’t recommend private Facebook groups for our subscriptions - you lose a valuable opportunity to create FOMO. 

Create value - it’s not always about the stuff. 

What makes you different and unique? 

Why should someone buy from you and not a big box store? 

Curate the experience your subscribers are looking for - the experience they can’t get from big box stores or even big box subscriptions. 

Everyone can do these simple things to grow their subscriptions. Your launch is only the beginning.
When you’re ready to take your subscription box to the next level, when you’re ready to go deeper… you’re ready for my Scale Your Box course. There’s so much to scaling your box - so many things you can do to grow your business in a manageable, profitable way. 
Join me for this episode where I talk you through what it takes to get you to your first 100 subscribers and beyond!
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 28 Dec 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Sarah’s Strategies to 100 Subscribers and Beyond</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>102</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c77f6030-b0bf-11ed-b273-576db46ac73a/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Have you launched your subscription box but found yourself struggling to grow? Launching your subscription box is a HUGE milestone. Celebrate that! The next HUGE milestone for so many of my members is reaching 100 subscribers. Some - those with large,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you launched your subscription box but found yourself struggling to grow? Launching your subscription box is a HUGE milestone. Celebrate that! The next HUGE milestone for so many of my members is reaching 100 subscribers. Some - those with large, engaged audiences - do this during their first launch. Most don’t. I didn’t. 
Growing your subscription box to 100 subscribers and beyond takes time. It’s important to give yourself grace and time to get there while still staying focused and holding yourself accountable.
Inside Launch Your Box, I walk my members through what it takes to get their subscription boxes launched. But the launch is not the end. There is more work to do to keep it going - and growing - each month. Which is why we talk about much more than just launching inside LYB. 

It’s constant curation. Keeping up with trends and what your subscribers want. 

It’s constant marketing. Getting yourself out there and in front of new people consistently. 

It’s constant retention. So many subscription box owners make the mistake of focusing only on the acquisition of new subscribers, losing sight of the subscribers they already have. 

Focusing on these three things should drive your business and create long-term recurring revenue. 
So, what got me to my first 100 subscribers and what should you do to get to yours? 

Don’t stop talking about your subscription box. 

You think everyone has seen it. They haven’t. 

You think you’re talking about it enough. You’re not. 

Inside the Launch Your Box Training Library - in the Marketing Module - you’ll find a Subscription Box Social Media resource with posting ideas for EVERY day of the month! 

Not an LYB member yet? Text LAUNCH to 940-204-0023 for a link to join! 

 
Engage. Consistently. 
 

Be social before and after the sale. 

Retention is a HUGE part of growth - make sure you’re engaging with your subscribers, letting them know how much you appreciate them. 

Your excitement is contagious. 

Create FOMO for those not signed up! 

Create connections with and for your subscribers. 

I don’t recommend private Facebook groups for our subscriptions - you lose a valuable opportunity to create FOMO. 

Create value - it’s not always about the stuff. 

What makes you different and unique? 

Why should someone buy from you and not a big box store? 

Curate the experience your subscribers are looking for - the experience they can’t get from big box stores or even big box subscriptions. 

Everyone can do these simple things to grow their subscriptions. Your launch is only the beginning.
When you’re ready to take your subscription box to the next level, when you’re ready to go deeper… you’re ready for my Scale Your Box course. There’s so much to scaling your box - so many things you can do to grow your business in a manageable, profitable way. 
Join me for this episode where I talk you through what it takes to get you to your first 100 subscribers and beyond!
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
 Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you launched your subscription box but found yourself struggling to grow? Launching your subscription box is a HUGE milestone. Celebrate that! The next HUGE milestone for so many of my members is reaching 100 subscribers. Some - those with large, engaged audiences - do this during their first launch. Most don’t. I didn’t. </p><p>Growing your subscription box to 100 subscribers and beyond takes time. It’s important to give yourself grace and time to get there while still staying focused and holding yourself accountable.</p><p>Inside Launch Your Box, I walk my members through what it takes to get their subscription boxes launched. But the launch is not the end. There is more work to do to keep it going - and growing - each month. Which is why we talk about much more than just launching inside LYB. </p><ul>
<li>It’s constant curation. Keeping up with trends and what your subscribers want. </li>
<li>It’s constant marketing. Getting yourself out there and in front of new people consistently. </li>
<li>It’s constant retention. So many subscription box owners make the mistake of focusing only on the acquisition of new subscribers, losing sight of the subscribers they already have. </li>
</ul><p>Focusing on these three things should drive your business and create long-term recurring revenue. </p><p>So, what got me to my first 100 subscribers and what should you do to get to yours? </p><ul>
<li>Don’t stop talking about your subscription box. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">You think everyone has seen it. They haven’t. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">You think you’re talking about it enough. You’re not. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Inside the Launch Your Box Training Library - in the Marketing Module - you’ll find a Subscription Box Social Media resource with posting ideas for EVERY day of the month! </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Not an LYB member yet? Text LAUNCH to 940-204-0023 for a link to join! </li>
</ul><p> </p><ul><li>Engage. Consistently. </li></ul><p> </p><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Be social before and after the sale. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Retention is a HUGE part of growth - make sure you’re engaging with your subscribers, letting them know how much you appreciate them. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Your excitement is contagious. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Create FOMO for those not signed up! </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Create connections with and for your subscribers. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">I don’t recommend private Facebook groups for our subscriptions - you lose a valuable opportunity to create FOMO. </li>
<li>Create value - it’s not always about the stuff. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">What makes you different and unique? </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Why should someone buy from you and not a big box store? </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Curate the experience your subscribers are looking for - the experience they can’t get from big box stores or even big box subscriptions. </li>
</ul><p>Everyone can do these simple things to grow their subscriptions. Your launch is only the beginning.</p><p>When you’re ready to take your subscription box to the next level, when you’re ready to go deeper… you’re ready for my <a href="http://joinsyb.com">Scale Your Box</a> course. There’s so much to scaling your box - so many things you can do to grow your business in a manageable, profitable way. </p><p>Join me for this episode where I talk you through what it takes to get you to your first 100 subscribers and beyond!</p><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1287</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a3dfa7dc-2d9a-48eb-ac91-6b7cff5c6c61]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1565990221.mp3?updated=1699912683" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>101: 5 Reasons Why You Should Start a Subscription Box in 2023</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/101-5-reasons-why-you-should-start-a-subscription-box-in-2023</link>
      <description>Did you know the subscription box industry reached 22.7 Billion dollars in revenue at the end of 2021? And it’s expected to more than triple that number by 2027! Why am I telling you this? 
Because there IS room for you and your subscription box. If you’ve had your subscription idea for a while, dreaming but not yet doing, make 2023 the year you get it started. 
It’s time to stop sitting on the sidelines and start taking action. You CAN get your subscription box up and running this year. And in this episode, I give you five reasons you SHOULD start a subscription box in 2023. 
You don’t have to constantly sell. 

When I had a physical store, I didn't make any income if I didn’t open my shop and sell things. 

With a subscription, you sell to a subscriber one time and receive payment from them every month. 

Your subscribers will become your biggest fans and will buy most anything you sell. 

With a subscription box, you can create loyal, raving fans! 
This relieves the stress and pressure of buying products you may have to mark down later. 
The product you’re investing in is already sold. 

You get to LOVE what you do. You aren’t just selling stuff, you’re treating people to a carefully curated experience. 

Being passionate about your business helps you continue to show up. 

You get to create a box and subscriber experience you are passionate about. 
 
You get consistent revenue in your bank account. 
 
Each month, subscriber payments arrive in your bank account whether or not you show up and sell. 
Don’t put your subscription box idea on hold any longer. Learn from Debbie, Launch Your Box member and past guest on the podcast, who let fear hold her back for a long time. When she finally launched her subscription box, magic happened.  
It’s time to stop sitting on the sidelines. Join me for this episode and get ready to take action to get your subscription box up and running this year. 
 
Listen to Debbie’s story on  episode 22 of the Launch Your Box podcast. 
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
﻿ Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 21 Dec 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>5 Reasons Why You Should Start a Subscription Box in 2023</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>101</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c79569c0-b0bf-11ed-b273-1f8bbac278ff/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Did you know the subscription box industry reached 22.7 Billion dollars in revenue at the end of 2021? And it’s expected to more than triple that number by 2027! Why am I telling you this?  Because there IS room for you and your subscription...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Did you know the subscription box industry reached 22.7 Billion dollars in revenue at the end of 2021? And it’s expected to more than triple that number by 2027! Why am I telling you this? 
Because there IS room for you and your subscription box. If you’ve had your subscription idea for a while, dreaming but not yet doing, make 2023 the year you get it started. 
It’s time to stop sitting on the sidelines and start taking action. You CAN get your subscription box up and running this year. And in this episode, I give you five reasons you SHOULD start a subscription box in 2023. 
You don’t have to constantly sell. 

When I had a physical store, I didn't make any income if I didn’t open my shop and sell things. 

With a subscription, you sell to a subscriber one time and receive payment from them every month. 

Your subscribers will become your biggest fans and will buy most anything you sell. 

With a subscription box, you can create loyal, raving fans! 
This relieves the stress and pressure of buying products you may have to mark down later. 
The product you’re investing in is already sold. 

You get to LOVE what you do. You aren’t just selling stuff, you’re treating people to a carefully curated experience. 

Being passionate about your business helps you continue to show up. 

You get to create a box and subscriber experience you are passionate about. 
 
You get consistent revenue in your bank account. 
 
Each month, subscriber payments arrive in your bank account whether or not you show up and sell. 
Don’t put your subscription box idea on hold any longer. Learn from Debbie, Launch Your Box member and past guest on the podcast, who let fear hold her back for a long time. When she finally launched her subscription box, magic happened.  
It’s time to stop sitting on the sidelines. Join me for this episode and get ready to take action to get your subscription box up and running this year. 
 
Listen to Debbie’s story on  episode 22 of the Launch Your Box podcast. 
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
﻿ Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Did you know the subscription box industry reached 22.7 Billion dollars in revenue at the end of 2021? And it’s expected to more than triple that number by 2027! Why am I telling you this? </p><p>Because there IS room for you and your subscription box. If you’ve had your subscription idea for a while, dreaming but not yet doing, make 2023 the year you get it started. </p><p>It’s time to stop sitting on the sidelines and start taking action. You CAN get your subscription box up and running this year. And in this episode, I give you five reasons you SHOULD start a subscription box in 2023. </p><ol><li>You don’t have to constantly sell. </li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">When I had a physical store, I didn't make any income if I didn’t open my shop and sell things. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">With a subscription, you sell to a subscriber one time and receive payment from them every month. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Your subscribers will become your biggest fans and will buy most anything you sell. </li>
</ul><ol><li>With a subscription box, you can create loyal, raving fans! </li></ol><ul><li class="ql-indent-1">This relieves the stress and pressure of buying products you may have to mark down later. </li></ul><ol><li>The product you’re investing in is already sold. </li></ol><ul>
<li class="ql-indent-1">You get to LOVE what you do. You aren’t just selling stuff, you’re treating people to a carefully curated experience. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Being passionate about your business helps you continue to show up. </li>
</ul><ol><li>You get to create a box and subscriber experience you are passionate about. </li></ol><p> </p><ul><li>You get consistent revenue in your bank account. </li></ul><p> </p><ul><li>Each month, subscriber payments arrive in your bank account whether or not you show up and sell. </li></ul><p>Don’t put your subscription box idea on hold any longer. Learn from Debbie, Launch Your Box member and past guest on the podcast, who let fear hold her back for a long time. When she finally launched her subscription box, magic happened.  </p><p>It’s time to stop sitting on the sidelines. Join me for this episode and get ready to take action to get your subscription box up and running this year. </p><p> </p><p>Listen to Debbie’s story on <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-22"> episode 22 of the Launch Your Box podcast</a>. </p><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>﻿</strong> <strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1503</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[fc5035e9-ac97-4908-a394-e967f0d6c19b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1477805298.mp3?updated=1699912352" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>100: Year End Review with My Mastermind Ladies</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/100-year-end-review-with-my-mastermind-ladies</link>
      <description>Welcome to the 100th episode of the Launch Your Box podcast! 
I talk a lot about consistency on this podcast. And inside Launch Your Box. And on my social media accounts. It’s not because I don’t have anything else to talk about. If you’ve been around at all, you know I talk about all the things. But in so many of “the things,” consistency matters. 
I’ve gotten to 100 episodes by showing up every week. That’s right, in 100 episodes - nearly two full years, I’ve never missed a week. And showing up consistently has paid off. We’ve gone from a few hundred downloads a month when we started to tens of thousands of downloads every single month. Consistently getting in front of more people and growing my audience. 
Consistency matters. Be consistent in all that you do to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. From social media to email marketing to going LIVE, and more. Be consistent. 
To celebrate our 100th episode, I have a special treat for you. I brought on FIVE special guests - all members of my Mastermind - for a little year-end wrap-up. 
We’ve all had highs and lows this year. All of us. I have and each of these ladies has, too. They are all super successful subscription box business owners and they joined me to share their successes and challenges from 2022 and their plans and dreams for 2023. 
You’re going to LOVE learning more about each of these ladies and their businesses. I know I love every opportunity I have to talk with each of them and having them all together was such a treat! 
Join me for this special 100th episode to meet five of my Mastermind ladies and get a peek behind the scenes of their successful subscription box businesses, messy parts and all! 
 
Find and follow Aimee: 



The Snoozzze Box on Instagram






The Snoozzze Box on Facebook 



The Snoozzze Box Website



Find and follow Whitney &amp; Andrea: 



Cotton Chaos on Instagram






Cotton Chaos on Facebook 



Cotton Chaos Website



Find and follow Pam: 



From the Heart Art on Instagram






From the Heart Art on Facebook 



From the Heart Art Website



Find and follow Tracy: 



Miss Tracy Creates on Instagram






Miss Tracy Creates on Facebook 



Miss Tracy Creates Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 14 Dec 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Year End Review with My Mastermind Ladies</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>100</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c7abc576-b0bf-11ed-b273-837c9df63ecf/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome to the 100th episode of the Launch Your Box podcast!  I talk a lot about consistency on this podcast. And inside Launch Your Box. And on my social media accounts. It’s not because I don’t have anything else to talk about. If you’ve...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome to the 100th episode of the Launch Your Box podcast! 
I talk a lot about consistency on this podcast. And inside Launch Your Box. And on my social media accounts. It’s not because I don’t have anything else to talk about. If you’ve been around at all, you know I talk about all the things. But in so many of “the things,” consistency matters. 
I’ve gotten to 100 episodes by showing up every week. That’s right, in 100 episodes - nearly two full years, I’ve never missed a week. And showing up consistently has paid off. We’ve gone from a few hundred downloads a month when we started to tens of thousands of downloads every single month. Consistently getting in front of more people and growing my audience. 
Consistency matters. Be consistent in all that you do to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. From social media to email marketing to going LIVE, and more. Be consistent. 
To celebrate our 100th episode, I have a special treat for you. I brought on FIVE special guests - all members of my Mastermind - for a little year-end wrap-up. 
We’ve all had highs and lows this year. All of us. I have and each of these ladies has, too. They are all super successful subscription box business owners and they joined me to share their successes and challenges from 2022 and their plans and dreams for 2023. 
You’re going to LOVE learning more about each of these ladies and their businesses. I know I love every opportunity I have to talk with each of them and having them all together was such a treat! 
Join me for this special 100th episode to meet five of my Mastermind ladies and get a peek behind the scenes of their successful subscription box businesses, messy parts and all! 
 
Find and follow Aimee: 



The Snoozzze Box on Instagram






The Snoozzze Box on Facebook 



The Snoozzze Box Website



Find and follow Whitney &amp; Andrea: 



Cotton Chaos on Instagram






Cotton Chaos on Facebook 



Cotton Chaos Website



Find and follow Pam: 



From the Heart Art on Instagram






From the Heart Art on Facebook 



From the Heart Art Website



Find and follow Tracy: 



Miss Tracy Creates on Instagram






Miss Tracy Creates on Facebook 



Miss Tracy Creates Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome to the 100th episode of the Launch Your Box podcast! </p><p>I talk a lot about consistency on this podcast. And inside Launch Your Box. And on my social media accounts. It’s not because I don’t have anything else to talk about. If you’ve been around at all, you know I talk about all the things. But in so many of “the things,” consistency matters. </p><p>I’ve gotten to 100 episodes by showing up <em>every week</em>. That’s right, in 100 episodes - nearly two full years, I’ve never missed a week. And showing up consistently has paid off. We’ve gone from a few hundred downloads a month when we started to tens of thousands of downloads every single month. Consistently getting in front of more people and growing my audience. </p><p>Consistency matters. Be consistent in all that you do to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. From social media to email marketing to going LIVE, and more. Be consistent. </p><p>To celebrate our 100th episode, I have a special treat for you. I brought on FIVE special guests - all members of my Mastermind - for a little year-end wrap-up. </p><p>We’ve all had highs and lows this year. All of us. I have and each of these ladies has, too. They are all super successful subscription box business owners and they joined me to share their successes and challenges from 2022 and their plans and dreams for 2023. </p><p>You’re going to LOVE learning more about each of these ladies and their businesses. I know I love every opportunity I have to talk with each of them and having them all together was such a treat! </p><p>Join me for this special 100th episode to meet five of my Mastermind ladies and get a peek behind the scenes of their successful subscription box businesses, messy parts and all! </p><p> </p><p>Find and follow Aimee: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/thesnoozzzebox/">The Snoozzze Box on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/thesnoozzzebox">The Snoozzze Box on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://thesnoozzzebox.com/">The Snoozzze Box Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Find and follow Whitney &amp; Andrea: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/cottonchaostees/">Cotton Chaos on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/cottonchaos">Cotton Chaos on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://cottonchaos.com/">Cotton Chaos Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Find and follow Pam: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/fromtheheartart_al/">From the Heart Art on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/reminders.fromtheheart">From the Heart Art on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://fromtheheartart.com/">From the Heart Art Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Find and follow Tracy: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/misstracycreates/">Miss Tracy Creates on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/misstracycreates">Miss Tracy Creates on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.misstracycreates.com/">Miss Tracy Creates Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3774</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8938e7ff-33f5-4b06-ae8e-f6d529c9f4c5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7443966740.mp3?updated=1701784123" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>099: Creating a One-Thing of the Month Subscription</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/099-creating-a-one-thing-of-the-month-subscription</link>
      <description>Have you considered starting with a one-thing of the month subscription? You should. Why do I say that? Well, my one-thing of the month subscription is easier to manage and more profitable than my fully curated subscription box. And my one-thing of the month subscription has almost double the number of subscribers as my larger, more expensive box. 
When people start thinking about starting a subscription box, they think about a fully curated box. They dream about the experience they’ll provide their subscribers with all the little touches and a box filled with items that complement each other. 
But soon, overwhelm sets in. Creating that fully curated experience with all the little touches takes a LOT of work. And all that work and all that overwhelm can turn into not making progress. 
Instead of starting with a fully curated box, think about starting with one thing. There are several benefits to starting a one-thing of the month subscription. A one-thing of the month subscription: 



Has the lowest barrier to getting started.



Fewer vendors to work with.



Lower start-up funds.



Packaging that is simple and the same each month! 



Is easier to fulfill and ship. 



Has the potential for higher profit margins. 



Brainstorm what your one item could be by asking yourself:  



What is your best-selling item? 



What do people repeatedly buy? 



What do people constantly ask you for more of? 



Your one-thing of the month could be: 



Something fun - a no-frills way for subscribers to treat themselves. 



Something consumable - subscribers never run out!



So many Launch Your Box members have wildly successful one-thing of the month subscriptions. Some of the “one things” their happy subscribers receive include: 



T-shirts



Candles



Pizzelles



Nail polish



Earrings



Door hangers



Washi tape



Start brainstorming what you can turn into a one-thing of the month subscription and move one step closer to launching your subscription.  
How does a subscription that’s easier to manage and more profitable sound? Join me for this episode to learn more about why you should consider starting a one-thing of the month subscription. 
 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 07 Dec 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Creating a One-Thing of the Month Subscription</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>99</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c7c1c056-b0bf-11ed-b273-7739cd4a90c8/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Have you considered starting with a one-thing of the month subscription? You should. Why do I say that? Well, my one-thing of the month subscription is easier to manage and more profitable than my fully curated subscription box. And my one-thing of...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you considered starting with a one-thing of the month subscription? You should. Why do I say that? Well, my one-thing of the month subscription is easier to manage and more profitable than my fully curated subscription box. And my one-thing of the month subscription has almost double the number of subscribers as my larger, more expensive box. 
When people start thinking about starting a subscription box, they think about a fully curated box. They dream about the experience they’ll provide their subscribers with all the little touches and a box filled with items that complement each other. 
But soon, overwhelm sets in. Creating that fully curated experience with all the little touches takes a LOT of work. And all that work and all that overwhelm can turn into not making progress. 
Instead of starting with a fully curated box, think about starting with one thing. There are several benefits to starting a one-thing of the month subscription. A one-thing of the month subscription: 



Has the lowest barrier to getting started.



Fewer vendors to work with.



Lower start-up funds.



Packaging that is simple and the same each month! 



Is easier to fulfill and ship. 



Has the potential for higher profit margins. 



Brainstorm what your one item could be by asking yourself:  



What is your best-selling item? 



What do people repeatedly buy? 



What do people constantly ask you for more of? 



Your one-thing of the month could be: 



Something fun - a no-frills way for subscribers to treat themselves. 



Something consumable - subscribers never run out!



So many Launch Your Box members have wildly successful one-thing of the month subscriptions. Some of the “one things” their happy subscribers receive include: 



T-shirts



Candles



Pizzelles



Nail polish



Earrings



Door hangers



Washi tape



Start brainstorming what you can turn into a one-thing of the month subscription and move one step closer to launching your subscription.  
How does a subscription that’s easier to manage and more profitable sound? Join me for this episode to learn more about why you should consider starting a one-thing of the month subscription. 
 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you considered starting with a one-thing of the month subscription? You should. Why do I say that? Well, my one-thing of the month subscription is easier to manage <em>and</em> more profitable than my fully curated subscription box. And my one-thing of the month subscription has almost double the number of subscribers as my larger, more expensive box. </p><p>When people start thinking about starting a subscription box, they think about a fully curated box. They dream about the experience they’ll provide their subscribers with all the little touches and a box filled with items that complement each other. </p><p>But soon, overwhelm sets in. Creating that fully curated experience with all the little touches takes a LOT of work. And all that work and all that overwhelm can turn into not making progress. </p><p>Instead of starting with a fully curated box, think about starting with one thing. There are several benefits to starting a one-thing of the month subscription. A one-thing of the month subscription: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Has the lowest barrier to getting started.</li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Fewer vendors to work with.</li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Lower start-up funds.</li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Packaging that is simple and the same each month! </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Is easier to fulfill and ship. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Has the potential for higher profit margins. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Brainstorm what your one item could be by asking yourself:  </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>What is your best-selling item? </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>What do people repeatedly buy? </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>What do people constantly ask you for more of? </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Your one-thing of the month could be: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Something fun - a no-frills way for subscribers to treat themselves. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Something consumable - subscribers never run out!</li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>So many Launch Your Box members have wildly successful one-thing of the month subscriptions. Some of the “one things” their happy subscribers receive include: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>T-shirts</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Candles</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Pizzelles</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Nail polish</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Earrings</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Door hangers</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Washi tape</li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Start brainstorming what you can turn into a one-thing of the month subscription and move one step closer to launching your subscription.  </p><p>How does a subscription that’s easier to manage <em>and</em> more profitable sound? Join me for this episode to learn more about why you should consider starting a one-thing of the month subscription. </p><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1231</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[75847510-fea8-47d9-a76d-e0b67265f721]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4330370605.mp3?updated=1701784136" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>098: Using Mystery Boxes to Reduce Inventory Before Year End</title>
      <description>“Don’t bring that stale inventory into 2023!” - Sarah Williams 
Inventory is one of the biggest challenges product-based businesses face. Too much, not enough… and what happens if it doesn’t sell? Now, during this buying season, is the perfect time to liquidate any old or stale inventory you have sitting on your shelves. 
One of my favorite ways to move product and get old inventory off my shelves is by selling Mystery Boxes. They’re new, fresh, and fun for your customers and a GREAT way to reduce inventory without putting clearance tags all over everything. 
Whether you made a bad buy (been there), overbought for your subscription box (yep, been there, too), or you’ve just had a slower year than last year and need to move some product quickly, Mystery Boxes are a great strategy. 
The goal is to get your money back. Don’t focus on making a large profit or even a profit at all. Focus on getting the cash you spent on the items back in your bank account and getting space back on your shelves. 
The excitement of a Mystery Box is not knowing what’s inside! 



Mix items from past subscription boxes with items never in boxes. 



Make subscribers aware they might receive something they already have. 



These are not curated experiences like your subscription box. They are filled with items at a great value.



Create different price points. Choose different size boxes, fill them up, and price them. 



These Mystery Boxes won’t all be the same. If you have 20 of one item and 30 of another, you can still make 50 boxes. Just make sure the items you’re putting in the boxes have a similar size and value. 
Get excited about these Mystery Boxes and start teasing your audience about a week before you’ll start selling them. Go LIVE, let your audience see how excited you are, and show them one of the boxes and how FULL it is! Talk about the value! 
Do you have inventory you need to liquidate? It’s time to let go of old product and start fresh in the new year. Join me for this episode to learn how to create your own Mystery Boxes and start liquidating!
 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 30 Nov 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Using Mystery Boxes to Reduce Inventory Before Year End</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>98</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c7d85230-b0bf-11ed-b273-b765970978c6/image/9062c4bf25dab6a2c3e172a3410a9f5b.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“Don’t bring that stale inventory into 2023!” - Sarah Williams  Inventory is one of the biggest challenges product-based businesses face. Too much, not enough… and what happens if it doesn’t sell? Now, during this buying season, is the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Don’t bring that stale inventory into 2023!” - Sarah Williams 
Inventory is one of the biggest challenges product-based businesses face. Too much, not enough… and what happens if it doesn’t sell? Now, during this buying season, is the perfect time to liquidate any old or stale inventory you have sitting on your shelves. 
One of my favorite ways to move product and get old inventory off my shelves is by selling Mystery Boxes. They’re new, fresh, and fun for your customers and a GREAT way to reduce inventory without putting clearance tags all over everything. 
Whether you made a bad buy (been there), overbought for your subscription box (yep, been there, too), or you’ve just had a slower year than last year and need to move some product quickly, Mystery Boxes are a great strategy. 
The goal is to get your money back. Don’t focus on making a large profit or even a profit at all. Focus on getting the cash you spent on the items back in your bank account and getting space back on your shelves. 
The excitement of a Mystery Box is not knowing what’s inside! 



Mix items from past subscription boxes with items never in boxes. 



Make subscribers aware they might receive something they already have. 



These are not curated experiences like your subscription box. They are filled with items at a great value.



Create different price points. Choose different size boxes, fill them up, and price them. 



These Mystery Boxes won’t all be the same. If you have 20 of one item and 30 of another, you can still make 50 boxes. Just make sure the items you’re putting in the boxes have a similar size and value. 
Get excited about these Mystery Boxes and start teasing your audience about a week before you’ll start selling them. Go LIVE, let your audience see how excited you are, and show them one of the boxes and how FULL it is! Talk about the value! 
Do you have inventory you need to liquidate? It’s time to let go of old product and start fresh in the new year. Join me for this episode to learn how to create your own Mystery Boxes and start liquidating!
 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“Don’t bring that stale inventory into 2023!” - Sarah Williams </p><p>Inventory is one of the biggest challenges product-based businesses face. Too much, not enough… and what happens if it doesn’t sell? Now, during this buying season, is the perfect time to liquidate any old or stale inventory you have sitting on your shelves. </p><p>One of my favorite ways to move product and get old inventory off my shelves is by selling Mystery Boxes. They’re new, fresh, and fun for your customers and a GREAT way to reduce inventory without putting clearance tags all over everything. </p><p>Whether you made a bad buy (been there), overbought for your subscription box (yep, been there, too), or you’ve just had a slower year than last year and need to move some product quickly, Mystery Boxes are a great strategy. </p><p>The goal is to get your money back. Don’t focus on making a large profit or even a profit at all. Focus on getting the cash you spent on the items back in your bank account and getting space back on your shelves. </p><p>The excitement of a Mystery Box is not knowing what’s inside! </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Mix items from past subscription boxes with items never in boxes. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Make subscribers aware they might receive something they already have. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>These are not curated experiences like your subscription box. They are filled with items at a great value.</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Create different price points. Choose different size boxes, fill them up, and price them. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>These Mystery Boxes won’t all be the same. If you have 20 of one item and 30 of another, you can still make 50 boxes. Just make sure the items you’re putting in the boxes have a similar size and value. </p><p>Get excited about these Mystery Boxes and start teasing your audience about a week before you’ll start selling them. Go LIVE, let your audience see how excited you are, and show them one of the boxes and how FULL it is! Talk about the value! </p><p>Do you have inventory you need to liquidate? It’s time to let go of old product and start fresh in the new year. Join me for this episode to learn how to create your own Mystery Boxes and start liquidating!</p><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1395</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4f4cc736-9da4-444f-b3b6-2e240df77be7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4024056347.mp3?updated=1732678480" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>097: Busting Through Challenges and Doubling Her Subscription in the Last Six Months with The Literary Book Club</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/097-busting-through-challenges-doubling-her-subscription-in-the-past-6-months</link>
      <description>I’m so excited to have Katie Eney of The Literary Book Club back on the podcast. I invited her back so she could bring us up to date on the big things that have been happening in her subscription box businesses. 
Katie’s quarterly luxury box, The Literary Book Club, focuses on collectible editions of classic books and wrapped page-numbered gifts that accompany the books. She also sells one-time specialty boxes, especially for holidays like Christmas and Halloween. Katie provides a truly incredible experience to her subscribers! 
When we first talked, Katie had around 200 subscribers and had hit a point where she didn’t know if she could grow much more because she was doing it all on her own. I encouraged her to try to hire despite job market challenges in her area. That was seven months ago. 
Recently, Katie popped into the Launch Your Box group to celebrate hitting 500 subscribers! She more than doubled her subscriber numbers in only seven months! This incredible growth wasn’t due to just one thing. Katie is a learner - and she brings that learner’s mentality to all she does. She is an absolute sponge and takes in all the training I put out - inside Launch Your Box, on this podcast, and more - and then puts it to work in her business. 
In order to solve her challenges and grow her business, Katie: 



Hired two team members. 



Signed a lease on a space, getting her business out of her house. 



Focused on social media and generating more content. 



Used influencers to help with word of mouth marketing. 



Offered a one-time, summer box. 



Katie had a goal of hitting 400 subscribers in 2022. She met her goal - and then passed it, reaching 500 subscribers in October! Katie’s willingness to try a series of different things led to an overall increase in traffic to her business which led to growth not only in her subscription box but in one-time sales as well. 
Join me for this episode as Katie shares the moment she knew she either needed to scale or quit and what she did to grow her business and more than double her subscriber numbers in only seven months. 
 
Learn more about how Katie’s Literary Book Club got started in  episode 64 of the Launch Your Box podcast! 
 
Find and follow Katie: 



The Literary Book Club on Instagram






The Literary Book Club on Facebook 



The Literary Book Club Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 23 Nov 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Busting Through Challenges and Doubling Her Subscription in the Last Six Months with The Literary Book Club</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>97</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c7f12f26-b0bf-11ed-b273-a38869e73f2c/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>I’m so excited to have Katie Eney of The Literary Book Club back on the podcast. I invited her back so she could bring us up to date on the big things that have been happening in her subscription box businesses.  Katie’s quarterly luxury box,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I’m so excited to have Katie Eney of The Literary Book Club back on the podcast. I invited her back so she could bring us up to date on the big things that have been happening in her subscription box businesses. 
Katie’s quarterly luxury box, The Literary Book Club, focuses on collectible editions of classic books and wrapped page-numbered gifts that accompany the books. She also sells one-time specialty boxes, especially for holidays like Christmas and Halloween. Katie provides a truly incredible experience to her subscribers! 
When we first talked, Katie had around 200 subscribers and had hit a point where she didn’t know if she could grow much more because she was doing it all on her own. I encouraged her to try to hire despite job market challenges in her area. That was seven months ago. 
Recently, Katie popped into the Launch Your Box group to celebrate hitting 500 subscribers! She more than doubled her subscriber numbers in only seven months! This incredible growth wasn’t due to just one thing. Katie is a learner - and she brings that learner’s mentality to all she does. She is an absolute sponge and takes in all the training I put out - inside Launch Your Box, on this podcast, and more - and then puts it to work in her business. 
In order to solve her challenges and grow her business, Katie: 



Hired two team members. 



Signed a lease on a space, getting her business out of her house. 



Focused on social media and generating more content. 



Used influencers to help with word of mouth marketing. 



Offered a one-time, summer box. 



Katie had a goal of hitting 400 subscribers in 2022. She met her goal - and then passed it, reaching 500 subscribers in October! Katie’s willingness to try a series of different things led to an overall increase in traffic to her business which led to growth not only in her subscription box but in one-time sales as well. 
Join me for this episode as Katie shares the moment she knew she either needed to scale or quit and what she did to grow her business and more than double her subscriber numbers in only seven months. 
 
Learn more about how Katie’s Literary Book Club got started in  episode 64 of the Launch Your Box podcast! 
 
Find and follow Katie: 



The Literary Book Club on Instagram






The Literary Book Club on Facebook 



The Literary Book Club Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’m so excited to have Katie Eney of The Literary Book Club back on the podcast. I invited her back so she could bring us up to date on the big things that have been happening in her subscription box businesses. </p><p>Katie’s quarterly luxury box, The Literary Book Club, focuses on collectible editions of classic books and wrapped page-numbered gifts that accompany the books. She also sells one-time specialty boxes, especially for holidays like Christmas and Halloween. Katie provides a truly incredible experience to her subscribers! </p><p>When we first talked, Katie had around 200 subscribers and had hit a point where she didn’t know if she could grow much more because she was doing it all on her own. I encouraged her to try to hire despite job market challenges in her area. That was seven months ago. </p><p>Recently, Katie popped into the Launch Your Box group to celebrate hitting 500 subscribers! She more than doubled her subscriber numbers in only seven months! This incredible growth wasn’t due to just one thing. Katie is a learner - and she brings that learner’s mentality to all she does. She is an absolute sponge and takes in all the training I put out - inside Launch Your Box, on this podcast, and more - and then puts it to work in her business. </p><p>In order to solve her challenges and grow her business, Katie: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Hired two team members. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Signed a lease on a space, getting her business out of her house. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Focused on social media and generating more content. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Used influencers to help with word of mouth marketing. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Offered a one-time, summer box. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Katie had a goal of hitting 400 subscribers in 2022. She met her goal - and then passed it, reaching 500 subscribers in October! Katie’s willingness to try a series of different things led to an overall increase in traffic to her business which led to growth not only in her subscription box but in one-time sales as well. </p><p>Join me for this episode as Katie shares the moment she knew she either needed to scale or quit and what she did to grow her business and more than double her subscriber numbers in only seven months. </p><p> </p><p>Learn more about how Katie’s Literary Book Club got started in <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/its-more-than-just-a-subscription-box-ep-64"> episode 64 of the Launch Your Box podcast</a>! </p><p> </p><p>Find and follow Katie: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/theliterarybookclubbox/">The Literary Book Club on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/theliterarybookclub">The Literary Book Club on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.theliterarybookclub.com/">The Literary Book Club Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2168</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0a7b5469-0f52-486c-9921-b4a87f963e14]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7324758863.mp3?updated=1701784199" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>096: Changing Direction and Niching Down Generates 400 New Subscribers</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/096-changing-direction-and-niching-down-generates-400-new-subscribers</link>
      <description>I’m so excited to have Launch Your Box member Julie Harkin of the Pilot Wives Club on the podcast! Julie is an experienced, successful subscription box owner who decided to find out if something I say all the time is true, “The riches are in the niches.”   
Pilot Wives Club wasn’t Julie’s first subscription box. She had a tea towel subscription and 100 subscribers. The subscription was successful - her subscribers loved their towels (they are adorable!) and it was generating recurring revenue. But, it wasn’t growing. It seemed stuck at that 100-subscriber mark. Julie kept thinking about what I often say inside Launch Your Box. The riches are in the niches. Julie realized that as a pilot's wife, she was part of a specific niche. She wondered if that niche might be the answer.
Julie had started a Facebook Group for pilot wives nine years ago. The purpose of the group was simply to offer support and friendship. Over the years, she has served this group and built a community of more than 6,000 members. It was this group Julie decided to curate a subscription box for. She surveyed them and found the interest was there! 
Julie launched and sold out her initial 100 spots very quickly. She grew organically for several months before deciding to do a “real launch,” following the process I teach inside Launch Your Box. The result? 140 new subscribers in less than 5 days, bringing her to just under 400 total subscribers! 
By niching down and serving people whose needs and wants she understands, Julie has been able to quadruple the subscriber count of her tea towel subscription - in only nine months! 
Julie did so many things right in order to get to this level of success so quickly! 



She niched down, choosing a niche she deeply understood and was passionate about serving. 



She surveyed her ICA before she started planning her box. 



After initial success and organic, controlled growth, she planned a “real” launch, showed up, and followed the plan. 



Join me for this episode as Julie shares more about what happened when she decided to find out if the riches really are in the niches.  
 
Find and follow Julie: 



Pilot Wives Club on Instagram



Pilot Wives Club on Facebook 



Pilot Wives Club Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 16 Nov 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Changing Direction and Niching Down Generates 400 New Subscribers</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>96</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c80751f2-b0bf-11ed-b273-e74044d2e9f4/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>I’m so excited to have Launch Your Box member Julie Harkin of the Pilot Wives Club on the podcast! Julie is an experienced, successful subscription box owner who decided to find out if something I say all the time is true, “The riches are in the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I’m so excited to have Launch Your Box member Julie Harkin of the Pilot Wives Club on the podcast! Julie is an experienced, successful subscription box owner who decided to find out if something I say all the time is true, “The riches are in the niches.”   
Pilot Wives Club wasn’t Julie’s first subscription box. She had a tea towel subscription and 100 subscribers. The subscription was successful - her subscribers loved their towels (they are adorable!) and it was generating recurring revenue. But, it wasn’t growing. It seemed stuck at that 100-subscriber mark. Julie kept thinking about what I often say inside Launch Your Box. The riches are in the niches. Julie realized that as a pilot's wife, she was part of a specific niche. She wondered if that niche might be the answer.
Julie had started a Facebook Group for pilot wives nine years ago. The purpose of the group was simply to offer support and friendship. Over the years, she has served this group and built a community of more than 6,000 members. It was this group Julie decided to curate a subscription box for. She surveyed them and found the interest was there! 
Julie launched and sold out her initial 100 spots very quickly. She grew organically for several months before deciding to do a “real launch,” following the process I teach inside Launch Your Box. The result? 140 new subscribers in less than 5 days, bringing her to just under 400 total subscribers! 
By niching down and serving people whose needs and wants she understands, Julie has been able to quadruple the subscriber count of her tea towel subscription - in only nine months! 
Julie did so many things right in order to get to this level of success so quickly! 



She niched down, choosing a niche she deeply understood and was passionate about serving. 



She surveyed her ICA before she started planning her box. 



After initial success and organic, controlled growth, she planned a “real” launch, showed up, and followed the plan. 



Join me for this episode as Julie shares more about what happened when she decided to find out if the riches really are in the niches.  
 
Find and follow Julie: 



Pilot Wives Club on Instagram



Pilot Wives Club on Facebook 



Pilot Wives Club Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’m so excited to have Launch Your Box member Julie Harkin of the Pilot Wives Club on the podcast! Julie is an experienced, successful subscription box owner who decided to find out if something I say all the time is true, “The riches are in the niches.”   </p><p>Pilot Wives Club wasn’t Julie’s first subscription box. She had a tea towel subscription and 100 subscribers. The subscription was successful - her subscribers loved their towels (they are adorable!) and it was generating recurring revenue. But, it wasn’t growing. It seemed stuck at that 100-subscriber mark. Julie kept thinking about what I often say inside Launch Your Box. <em>The riches are in the niches.</em> Julie realized that as a pilot's wife, she was part of a specific niche. She wondered if that niche might be the answer.</p><p>Julie had started a Facebook Group for pilot wives nine years ago. The purpose of the group was simply to offer support and friendship. Over the years, she has served this group and built a community of more than 6,000 members. It was this group Julie decided to curate a subscription box for. She surveyed them and found the interest was there! </p><p>Julie launched and sold out her initial 100 spots very quickly. She grew organically for several months before deciding to do a “real launch,” following the process I teach inside Launch Your Box. The result? 140 new subscribers in less than 5 days, bringing her to just under 400 total subscribers! </p><p>By niching down and serving people whose needs and wants she understands, Julie has been able to quadruple the subscriber count of her tea towel subscription - in only nine months! </p><p>Julie did so many things right in order to get to this level of success so quickly! </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>She niched down, choosing a niche she deeply understood and was passionate about serving. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>She surveyed her ICA <em>before</em> she started planning her box. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>After initial success and organic, controlled growth, she planned a “real” launch, showed up, and followed the plan. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Join me for this episode as Julie shares more about what happened when she decided to find out if the riches really are in the niches.  </p><p> </p><p>Find and follow Julie: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/pilot_wives_club/">Pilot Wives Club on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/groups/464024147054248">Pilot Wives Club on Facebook </a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://pilotwivesclub.com/">Pilot Wives Club Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1566</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[751efd0f-9297-4991-a30e-4db8a3d24c2f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6501064095.mp3?updated=1701784201" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>095: Leveraging Email Marketing to Make the Most out of Q4</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/095-leveraging-email-marketing-to-make-the-most-out-of-q4</link>
      <description>“More emails equals more sales!” - Sarah Williams 

We’re more than halfway through the 4th quarter. For product sellers, it’s the busiest time of the year. It’s also our best chance to make some serious revenue. You’re probably feeling tired and maybe even overwhelmed. I’m tired, too. Rest when you can and then get to work. There are some things you can do now that will give your 4th quarter sales a major boost.

We create different types of email content during the first three quarters of the year. Email opt-ins with welcome sequences, weekly newsletters, and emails to share blog posts or podcast episodes. We’re serving our audience by providing value. 

The 4th quarter is different. During the 4th quarter, we SERVE our audiences by SELLING. We help them shop. Your customers want to shop — it’s your job to get your products in front of them. 

How can you leverage that email list you’ve spent all year building? 

Increase the frequency of your emails. 

If you’ve been emailing once a week, send two or three each week. If once a month, send at least one email a week. 

Bestseller of the week

Top three gifts for teens, moms, dog lovers, etc. 

New items of the week

Restock alerts 

Facebook LIVE recaps (where you’ve promoted a product)

Make sure all of your emails are product focused. Serve your customers by solving their “what to get” problem by sharing: 

Eliminate decision fatigue. 

Make it easy for them to buy. 

Don’t give your customers too many options. 

Who is this product for? 

Take an everyday item and make it giftable 

Show an image of it folded neatly with a bow around it

Show an image of the product peeking out of a box with a gift tag

Create gift sets or bundles

Focus each email on its giftability.

The key to success is not to overthink it. These emails should be short on copy and get right to the point. Include great images and a clear call to action. Follow up your email with social media posts to match and send a text to your text list! 
Join me for this episode as I share four simple ways you can leverage email marketing to bring more revenue into your business during the 4th quarter. More emails equals more sales. It’s time to get to work! 
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 09 Nov 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Leveraging Email Marketing to Make the Most out of Q4</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>95</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c81ddb52-b0bf-11ed-b273-a73532daf53c/image/9062c4bf25dab6a2c3e172a3410a9f5b.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“More emails equals more sales!” - Sarah Williams  We’re more than halfway through the 4th quarter. For product sellers, it’s the busiest time of the year. It’s also our best chance to make some serious revenue. You’re probably...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“More emails equals more sales!” - Sarah Williams 

We’re more than halfway through the 4th quarter. For product sellers, it’s the busiest time of the year. It’s also our best chance to make some serious revenue. You’re probably feeling tired and maybe even overwhelmed. I’m tired, too. Rest when you can and then get to work. There are some things you can do now that will give your 4th quarter sales a major boost.

We create different types of email content during the first three quarters of the year. Email opt-ins with welcome sequences, weekly newsletters, and emails to share blog posts or podcast episodes. We’re serving our audience by providing value. 

The 4th quarter is different. During the 4th quarter, we SERVE our audiences by SELLING. We help them shop. Your customers want to shop — it’s your job to get your products in front of them. 

How can you leverage that email list you’ve spent all year building? 

Increase the frequency of your emails. 

If you’ve been emailing once a week, send two or three each week. If once a month, send at least one email a week. 

Bestseller of the week

Top three gifts for teens, moms, dog lovers, etc. 

New items of the week

Restock alerts 

Facebook LIVE recaps (where you’ve promoted a product)

Make sure all of your emails are product focused. Serve your customers by solving their “what to get” problem by sharing: 

Eliminate decision fatigue. 

Make it easy for them to buy. 

Don’t give your customers too many options. 

Who is this product for? 

Take an everyday item and make it giftable 

Show an image of it folded neatly with a bow around it

Show an image of the product peeking out of a box with a gift tag

Create gift sets or bundles

Focus each email on its giftability.

The key to success is not to overthink it. These emails should be short on copy and get right to the point. Include great images and a clear call to action. Follow up your email with social media posts to match and send a text to your text list! 
Join me for this episode as I share four simple ways you can leverage email marketing to bring more revenue into your business during the 4th quarter. More emails equals more sales. It’s time to get to work! 
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“More emails equals more sales!” - Sarah Williams </p><p><br></p><p>We’re more than halfway through the 4th quarter. For product sellers, it’s the busiest time of the year. It’s also our best chance to make some serious revenue. You’re probably feeling tired and maybe even overwhelmed. I’m tired, too. Rest when you can and then get to work. There are some things you can do now that will give your 4th quarter sales a major boost.</p><p><br></p><p>We create different types of email content during the first three quarters of the year. Email opt-ins with welcome sequences, weekly newsletters, and emails to share blog posts or podcast episodes. We’re serving our audience by providing value. </p><p><br></p><p>The 4th quarter is different. During the 4th quarter, we SERVE our audiences by SELLING. We help them shop. Your customers want to shop — it’s your job to get your products in front of them. </p><p><br></p><p>How can you leverage that email list you’ve spent all year building? </p><ul>
<li>Increase the frequency of your emails. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">If you’ve been emailing once a week, send two or three each week. If once a month, send at least one email a week. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Bestseller of the week</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Top three gifts for teens, moms, dog lovers, etc. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">New items of the week</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Restock alerts </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Facebook LIVE recaps (where you’ve promoted a product)</li>
<li>Make sure all of your emails are product focused. Serve your customers by solving their “what to get” problem by sharing: </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Eliminate decision fatigue. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Make it easy for them to buy. </li>
<li>Don’t give your customers too many options. </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Who is this product for? </li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Take an everyday item and make it giftable </li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Show an image of it folded neatly with a bow around it</li>
<li class="ql-indent-2">Show an image of the product peeking out of a box with a gift tag</li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Create gift sets or bundles</li>
<li>Focus each email on its giftability.</li>
</ul><p>The key to success is not to overthink it. These emails should be short on copy and get right to the point. Include great images and a clear call to action. Follow up your email with social media posts to match and send a text to your text list! </p><p>Join me for this episode as I share four simple ways you can leverage email marketing to bring more revenue into your business during the 4th quarter. More emails equals more sales. It’s time to get to work! </p><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1127</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ea5ac46a-babe-4bd5-a7e5-51bdde7d30b8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1800528432.mp3?updated=1730235409" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>094: How I Generated $20k in Extra Revenue with a Holiday Gift Box</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/094-how-i-generated-20k-in-extra-revenue-with-a-holiday-gift-box</link>
      <description>Every year for the last five years I’ve sold a Holiday Gift Box. This year was no different. What was different was that my Holiday Gift Box sold out in only four days! And it brought $20,000 in extra revenue into my business. 
Should you offer a Holiday Gift Box to your audience? Yes! If you already have a subscription box, you should absolutely offer a Holiday Gift Box. And if you have an audience but haven’t launched your subscription box yet, you should also offer a Holiday Gift Box. 
Many members of Launch Your Box have used a Holiday Gift Box for proof of concept before launching. Members like Nicole who launched a one-time holiday box for guinea pig owners. When it was a HUGE hit, she knew she could launch her subscription box with confidence. She now has hundreds and hundreds of monthly subscribers and won a major subscription box industry award earlier this year. 
My process for launching a one-time Holiday Gift Box was simple and it started before I had any idea what I was going to put in the box: 



I set up a waitlist page in September.



I set up a waitlist in my text app in September. 



I built up excitement that my Holiday Gift Box was coming and drove people to the waitlist. 



LIVES



Social posts



One day before the launch I sent one email to the waitlist and one text to the text waitlist offering them first dibs. 



Launch day started with a LIVE during which I generated feelings of: 



Scarcity



Exclusivity



Urgency 



I started running ads on launch day. 



I sent one email to my entire email list. 



I sent one text to my entire text list. 



I posted twice on social media about the box. 



I changed my Facebook header. 



By the end of day one, I had sold over half the boxes. 



On day two, I resent the email to non openers and posted about the boxes on social media twice. 



By day three, I only had 100 boxes left. I sent a last chance email to any non openers who hadn’t purchased and posted on social media once. 



On day four - the last day of the launch - I mentioned the Holiday Gift Box on a LIVE and posted about it once. 



I sold out of all my Holiday Gift Boxes on day four! Oh, and I did all of this without having any product in hand. 
Join me for this episode as I share what a Holiday Gift Box can do for your business and walk you through my simple, four-day Holiday Gift Box launch plan. 
 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram




Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 02 Nov 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How I Generated $20k in Extra Revenue with a Holiday Gift Box</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>94</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c832cd78-b0bf-11ed-b273-b3bc2f68e510/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Every year for the last five years I’ve sold a Holiday Gift Box. This year was no different. What was different was that my Holiday Gift Box sold out in only four days! And it brought $20,000 in extra revenue into my business.  Should you offer...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Every year for the last five years I’ve sold a Holiday Gift Box. This year was no different. What was different was that my Holiday Gift Box sold out in only four days! And it brought $20,000 in extra revenue into my business. 
Should you offer a Holiday Gift Box to your audience? Yes! If you already have a subscription box, you should absolutely offer a Holiday Gift Box. And if you have an audience but haven’t launched your subscription box yet, you should also offer a Holiday Gift Box. 
Many members of Launch Your Box have used a Holiday Gift Box for proof of concept before launching. Members like Nicole who launched a one-time holiday box for guinea pig owners. When it was a HUGE hit, she knew she could launch her subscription box with confidence. She now has hundreds and hundreds of monthly subscribers and won a major subscription box industry award earlier this year. 
My process for launching a one-time Holiday Gift Box was simple and it started before I had any idea what I was going to put in the box: 



I set up a waitlist page in September.



I set up a waitlist in my text app in September. 



I built up excitement that my Holiday Gift Box was coming and drove people to the waitlist. 



LIVES



Social posts



One day before the launch I sent one email to the waitlist and one text to the text waitlist offering them first dibs. 



Launch day started with a LIVE during which I generated feelings of: 



Scarcity



Exclusivity



Urgency 



I started running ads on launch day. 



I sent one email to my entire email list. 



I sent one text to my entire text list. 



I posted twice on social media about the box. 



I changed my Facebook header. 



By the end of day one, I had sold over half the boxes. 



On day two, I resent the email to non openers and posted about the boxes on social media twice. 



By day three, I only had 100 boxes left. I sent a last chance email to any non openers who hadn’t purchased and posted on social media once. 



On day four - the last day of the launch - I mentioned the Holiday Gift Box on a LIVE and posted about it once. 



I sold out of all my Holiday Gift Boxes on day four! Oh, and I did all of this without having any product in hand. 
Join me for this episode as I share what a Holiday Gift Box can do for your business and walk you through my simple, four-day Holiday Gift Box launch plan. 
 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram




Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Every year for the last five years I’ve sold a Holiday Gift Box. This year was no different. What was different was that my Holiday Gift Box sold out in only four days! And it brought $20,000 in extra revenue into my business. </p><p>Should you offer a Holiday Gift Box to your audience? Yes! If you already have a subscription box, you should absolutely offer a Holiday Gift Box. And if you have an audience but haven’t launched your subscription box yet, you should also offer a Holiday Gift Box. </p><p>Many members of Launch Your Box have used a Holiday Gift Box for proof of concept before launching. Members like Nicole who launched a one-time holiday box for guinea pig owners. When it was a HUGE hit, she knew she could launch her subscription box with confidence. She now has hundreds and hundreds of monthly subscribers and won a major subscription box industry award earlier this year. </p><p>My process for launching a one-time Holiday Gift Box was simple and it started before I had any idea what I was going to put in the box: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>I set up a waitlist page in September.</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>I set up a waitlist in my text app in September. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>I built up excitement that my Holiday Gift Box was coming and drove people to the waitlist. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">LIVES</li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Social posts</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>One day before the launch I sent one email to the waitlist and one text to the text waitlist offering them first dibs. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Launch day started with a LIVE during which I generated feelings of: </li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Scarcity</li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Exclusivity</li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Urgency </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>I started running ads on launch day. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>I sent one email to my entire email list. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>I sent one text to my entire text list. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>I posted twice on social media about the box. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>I changed my Facebook header. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p><em>By the end of day one, I had sold over half the boxes.</em> </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>On day two, I resent the email to non openers and posted about the boxes on social media twice. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>By day three, I only had 100 boxes left. I sent a last chance email to any non openers who hadn’t purchased and posted on social media once. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>On day four - the last day of the launch - I mentioned the Holiday Gift Box on a LIVE and posted about it once. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>I sold out of all my Holiday Gift Boxes on day four! Oh, and I did all of this without having any product in hand. </p><p>Join me for this episode as I share what a Holiday Gift Box can do for your business and walk you through my simple, four-day Holiday Gift Box launch plan. </p><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1733</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7e838489-55a6-45a2-a4ee-f67023ac068f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4511006934.mp3?updated=1701784206" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>093: Crushing It on Instagram with One Simple Strategy with B Goods Lettering</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/093-crushing-it-on-instagram-with-one-simple-strategy-with-b-goods-lettering</link>
      <description>“Record everything!” - Betsy Goodman
I’m so excited to have Launch Your Box member Betsy Goodman of B Goods Lettering back on the podcast! Betsy was here just about a year ago when she was in the middle of launching her subscription box. A lot has changed since then and Betsy is here today to teach all of us - including me - about one simple thing she did to crush it on Instagram.  
Betsy started lettering in 2017. After attending a workshop and having her eyes opened to the possibilities of lettering, Betsy was hooked! She fell in love with all things lettering and started teaching in person and online lettering classes. 
Betsy loved the practical applications of lettering and decided to start teaching with an end product in mind instead of just practicing for the sake of practicing. She took this practical approach and turned it into a quarterly subscription box that teaches subscribers lettering while they create something they can use or gift. She launched The Lettering Box in the fall of 2021 with 18 subscribers. A year later, her subscription box has grown to 118 subscribers! 
I keep up with my students and check in on their social media from time to time. I did this with Betsy a while ago and was intrigued by what I saw. In a time where everyone is struggling with engagement and growing audiences on social media, Betsy was crushing it on Instagram. Her secret? Her content is exclusively videos. No static posts. None. 
Betsy’s videos are beautiful. The majority are very short. Many are simply snippets of her lettering or creating wax seals. Betsy’s face does not appear in her videos - instead, they are focused on what she is creating. Some of these videos get attention in the form of thousands of views and likes. Betsy has even had videos go viral. 
Don’t think all your videos need to be carefully curated. Betsy’s best advice is to record everything, even if you think it’s boring. Record yourself packing your boxes or making something. People LOVE getting a peek behind the scenes. 
After Betsy gave ME some tips to use in making videos for my own business, we talked about what’s next for her. We brainstormed and came up with some great ways to increase her revenue based on what her audience is asking for. 
Join me for this episode as Betsy shares how her video-exclusive strategy has allowed her to be so successful on Instagram and how you can apply her strategy to your own business. 
If you missed Betsy’s first time on the podcast,  listen to episode 39. 
 
Find and follow Betsy: 



B Goods Lettering on Instagram






B Goods Lettering on Facebook 



B Goods Lettering Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 26 Oct 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Crushing It on Instagram with One Simple Strategy with B Goods Lettering</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>93</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c8490e8a-b0bf-11ed-b273-1f315d51f509/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“Record everything!” - Betsy Goodman I’m so excited to have Launch Your Box member Betsy Goodman of B Goods Lettering back on the podcast! Betsy was here just about a year ago when she was in the middle of launching her subscription box. A lot...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Record everything!” - Betsy Goodman
I’m so excited to have Launch Your Box member Betsy Goodman of B Goods Lettering back on the podcast! Betsy was here just about a year ago when she was in the middle of launching her subscription box. A lot has changed since then and Betsy is here today to teach all of us - including me - about one simple thing she did to crush it on Instagram.  
Betsy started lettering in 2017. After attending a workshop and having her eyes opened to the possibilities of lettering, Betsy was hooked! She fell in love with all things lettering and started teaching in person and online lettering classes. 
Betsy loved the practical applications of lettering and decided to start teaching with an end product in mind instead of just practicing for the sake of practicing. She took this practical approach and turned it into a quarterly subscription box that teaches subscribers lettering while they create something they can use or gift. She launched The Lettering Box in the fall of 2021 with 18 subscribers. A year later, her subscription box has grown to 118 subscribers! 
I keep up with my students and check in on their social media from time to time. I did this with Betsy a while ago and was intrigued by what I saw. In a time where everyone is struggling with engagement and growing audiences on social media, Betsy was crushing it on Instagram. Her secret? Her content is exclusively videos. No static posts. None. 
Betsy’s videos are beautiful. The majority are very short. Many are simply snippets of her lettering or creating wax seals. Betsy’s face does not appear in her videos - instead, they are focused on what she is creating. Some of these videos get attention in the form of thousands of views and likes. Betsy has even had videos go viral. 
Don’t think all your videos need to be carefully curated. Betsy’s best advice is to record everything, even if you think it’s boring. Record yourself packing your boxes or making something. People LOVE getting a peek behind the scenes. 
After Betsy gave ME some tips to use in making videos for my own business, we talked about what’s next for her. We brainstormed and came up with some great ways to increase her revenue based on what her audience is asking for. 
Join me for this episode as Betsy shares how her video-exclusive strategy has allowed her to be so successful on Instagram and how you can apply her strategy to your own business. 
If you missed Betsy’s first time on the podcast,  listen to episode 39. 
 
Find and follow Betsy: 



B Goods Lettering on Instagram






B Goods Lettering on Facebook 



B Goods Lettering Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“Record everything!” - Betsy Goodman</p><p>I’m so excited to have Launch Your Box member Betsy Goodman of B Goods Lettering back on the podcast! Betsy was here just about a year ago when she was in the middle of launching her subscription box. A lot has changed since then and Betsy is here today to teach all of us - including me - about one simple thing she did to crush it on Instagram.  </p><p>Betsy started lettering in 2017. After attending a workshop and having her eyes opened to the possibilities of lettering, Betsy was hooked! She fell in love with all things lettering and started teaching in person and online lettering classes. </p><p>Betsy loved the practical applications of lettering and decided to start teaching with an end product in mind instead of just practicing for the sake of practicing. She took this practical approach and turned it into a quarterly subscription box that teaches subscribers lettering while they create something they can use or gift. She launched The Lettering Box in the fall of 2021 with 18 subscribers. A year later, her subscription box has grown to 118 subscribers! </p><p>I keep up with my students and check in on their social media from time to time. I did this with Betsy a while ago and was intrigued by what I saw. In a time where everyone is struggling with engagement and growing audiences on social media, Betsy was crushing it on Instagram. Her secret? Her content is exclusively videos. No static posts. None. </p><p>Betsy’s videos are beautiful. The majority are very short. Many are simply snippets of her lettering or creating wax seals. Betsy’s face does not appear in her videos - instead, they are focused on what she is creating. Some of these videos get attention in the form of thousands of views and likes. Betsy has even had videos go viral. </p><p>Don’t think all your videos need to be carefully curated. Betsy’s best advice is to record everything, even if you think it’s boring. Record yourself packing your boxes or making something. People LOVE getting a peek behind the scenes. </p><p>After Betsy gave ME some tips to use in making videos for my own business, we talked about what’s next for her. We brainstormed and came up with some great ways to increase her revenue based on what her audience is asking for. </p><p>Join me for this episode as Betsy shares how her video-exclusive strategy has allowed her to be so successful on Instagram and how you can apply her strategy to your own business. </p><p>If you missed Betsy’s first time on the podcast, <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-39"> listen to episode 39</a>. </p><p> </p><p>Find and follow Betsy: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/bgoods.lettering/">B Goods Lettering on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/bgoods.lettering">B Goods Lettering on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://bgoodslettering.com/">B Goods Lettering Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2285</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[68530152-5dc6-4408-8a4a-3d59beee7a7f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7244869629.mp3?updated=1701784226" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>092: One Change Doubled Their Subscription Income with Jane's Agenda</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/092-one-change-doubled-their-subscription-income-with-janes-agenda</link>
      <description>I’m so excited to have Launch Your Box member Jane Wild of Jane’s Agenda join me to share her subscription box journey and to talk about what she did to bust through when she hit a plateau with her subscription. 
Jane wasn’t always a subscription box owner or even an entrepreneur. In 2013, she found herself busier than ever with a demanding corporate job and a new baby. As Jane struggled to organize the different facets of her life, she was unable to find a planner that met her needs. She decided to create her own and Jane’s Agenda was born! 
For several years, Jane ran her business via an Etsy shop. The gorgeous - and highly functional - planner pages and planner accessories she designed sold very well. There were challenges - planners by their nature have a high sales season and low sales seasons. And then there was the pandemic.
When 2020 hit, people suddenly had nothing to plan. They were at home and all the “busy” that had filled their lives was canceled. Jane found herself needing to get creative about using planners in order to keep her business afloat. That’s when she decided to launch a subscription box. It was all about helping her customers love planning again. The items were beautiful and functional. They were things planners could use even without events and appointments to plan. 
Jane and her team had a goal of 50 subscribers for that first launch. Well, in an hour they hit 100 subscribers and quickly hit 250 total subscribers! They were amazed and quickly made the necessary changes to staff and processes to meet the demand. As Jane shares, the launch was NOT fancy - they launched simply and just got the thing out there. 
When Jane realized they were hitting a plateau with the subscription box, she and her team got creative. After listening to me talk about offering a lower-tier subscription, Jane decided to do just that. And what a difference it made! Making that ONE change resulted in doubling their monthly subscription income! And… Jane recently celebrated crossing the 500 subscriber mark! 
Join me for this episode as Jane takes us through her journey from selling planner pages on Etsy to managing a thriving online store and 500+ member subscription box business. 
 
Find and follow Jane: 



Jane’s Agenda on Instagram






Jane’s Agenda on Facebook 



Jane’s Agenda Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 19 Oct 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>One Change Doubled Their Subscription Income with Jane's Agenda</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>92</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c868bb5e-b0bf-11ed-b273-27975461fcb7/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>I’m so excited to have Launch Your Box member Jane Wild of Jane’s Agenda join me to share her subscription box journey and to talk about what she did to bust through when she hit a plateau with her subscription.  Jane wasn’t always a...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I’m so excited to have Launch Your Box member Jane Wild of Jane’s Agenda join me to share her subscription box journey and to talk about what she did to bust through when she hit a plateau with her subscription. 
Jane wasn’t always a subscription box owner or even an entrepreneur. In 2013, she found herself busier than ever with a demanding corporate job and a new baby. As Jane struggled to organize the different facets of her life, she was unable to find a planner that met her needs. She decided to create her own and Jane’s Agenda was born! 
For several years, Jane ran her business via an Etsy shop. The gorgeous - and highly functional - planner pages and planner accessories she designed sold very well. There were challenges - planners by their nature have a high sales season and low sales seasons. And then there was the pandemic.
When 2020 hit, people suddenly had nothing to plan. They were at home and all the “busy” that had filled their lives was canceled. Jane found herself needing to get creative about using planners in order to keep her business afloat. That’s when she decided to launch a subscription box. It was all about helping her customers love planning again. The items were beautiful and functional. They were things planners could use even without events and appointments to plan. 
Jane and her team had a goal of 50 subscribers for that first launch. Well, in an hour they hit 100 subscribers and quickly hit 250 total subscribers! They were amazed and quickly made the necessary changes to staff and processes to meet the demand. As Jane shares, the launch was NOT fancy - they launched simply and just got the thing out there. 
When Jane realized they were hitting a plateau with the subscription box, she and her team got creative. After listening to me talk about offering a lower-tier subscription, Jane decided to do just that. And what a difference it made! Making that ONE change resulted in doubling their monthly subscription income! And… Jane recently celebrated crossing the 500 subscriber mark! 
Join me for this episode as Jane takes us through her journey from selling planner pages on Etsy to managing a thriving online store and 500+ member subscription box business. 
 
Find and follow Jane: 



Jane’s Agenda on Instagram






Jane’s Agenda on Facebook 



Jane’s Agenda Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’m so excited to have Launch Your Box member Jane Wild of Jane’s Agenda join me to share her subscription box journey and to talk about what she did to bust through when she hit a plateau with her subscription. </p><p>Jane wasn’t always a subscription box owner or even an entrepreneur. In 2013, she found herself busier than ever with a demanding corporate job <em>and</em> a new baby. As Jane struggled to organize the different facets of her life, she was unable to find a planner that met her needs. She decided to create her own and Jane’s Agenda was born! </p><p>For several years, Jane ran her business via an Etsy shop. The gorgeous - and highly functional - planner pages and planner accessories she designed sold very well. There were challenges - planners by their nature have a high sales season and low sales seasons. And then there was the pandemic.</p><p>When 2020 hit, people suddenly had nothing to plan. They were at home and all the “busy” that had filled their lives was canceled. Jane found herself needing to get creative about using planners in order to keep her business afloat. That’s when she decided to launch a subscription box. It was all about helping her customers love planning again. The items were beautiful and functional. They were things planners could use even without events and appointments to plan. </p><p>Jane and her team had a goal of 50 subscribers for that first launch. Well, in an hour they hit 100 subscribers and quickly hit 250 total subscribers! They were amazed and quickly made the necessary changes to staff and processes to meet the demand. As Jane shares, the launch was NOT fancy - they launched simply and just got the thing out there. </p><p>When Jane realized they were hitting a plateau with the subscription box, she and her team got creative. After listening to me talk about offering a lower-tier subscription, Jane decided to do just that. And what a difference it made! Making that ONE change resulted in doubling their monthly subscription income! And… Jane recently celebrated crossing the 500 subscriber mark! </p><p>Join me for this episode as Jane takes us through her journey from selling planner pages on Etsy to managing a thriving online store and 500+ member subscription box business. </p><p> </p><p>Find and follow Jane: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/janesagenda/">Jane’s Agenda on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/janesagenda">Jane’s Agenda on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://janesagenda.com/">Jane’s Agenda Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1684</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c6273853-f653-4b3e-ab0e-490ad3bf7800]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9131289425.mp3?updated=1701784234" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>091: 50% Subscription Growth with One Live Launch w/ The Floral Project</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/091-50-subscription-growth-with-one-live-launch-w-the-floral-project</link>
      <description>I’m so excited to have Launch Your Box member Nicola Bird of The Floral Project join me all the way from the UK for today’s episode to share her subscription box journey and the story of her recent, wildly successful live launch. 
An entrepreneur for more than 20 years and a lifelong lover of flowers, Nicola started The Floral Project in order to bring cheer and connection during the pandemic to people who were alone and lonely. Her big vision for The Floral Project is a million posies of flowers given every year to people in local communities who need a smile. These are people who don't have regular visitors and may feel isolated or lonely. People who are unable to grow their own flowers or afford them.
I can’t wait for you to hear how Nicola jumped into Launch Your Box with both feet and smashed her live launch. Nicola almost didn’t join Launch Your Box because she had already launched her subscription box business. Once she realized I also teach people how to grow their existing subscription box businesses, Nicola joined and started consuming the content quickly. 
When it was time for her launch, Nicola followed the launch training inside Launch Your Box to a tee. And she was smart about every step of the process. Nicola not only produced all the social media and email content I recommend, she wrote and scheduled it ahead of time before she was in the midst of the stress and excitement of her launch. She went LIVE, she talked about the benefits of the subscription, and she spoke to her people in their language. 
The result? In ONE live launch, Nicola gained 232 subscribers, smashing her goal of 130 new subscribers. Nicola described herself as “gobsmacked” by the results. The truth? She did everything right. She did the work and did all the things. And now Nicola is excited to turn her energy toward nurturing her more than 700 members, loving on them and continuing to teach them how to impact the lives of others with the gorgeous flowers they’ll grow and give away!
Join me for this episode as Nicola walks us through each day of her live launch and what she did in the days leading up to her launch that led to growing her subscription by 50% in just five days! 
 
Find and follow Nicola: 



The Floral Project on Instagram



The Floral Project on Facebook 



The Floral Project Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Oct 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>50% Subscription Growth with One Live Launch w/ The Floral Project</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>91</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c8806222-b0bf-11ed-b273-0724d5f820fb/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>I’m so excited to have Launch Your Box member Nicola Bird of The Floral Project join me all the way from the UK for today’s episode to share her subscription box journey and the story of her recent, wildly successful live launch.  An...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I’m so excited to have Launch Your Box member Nicola Bird of The Floral Project join me all the way from the UK for today’s episode to share her subscription box journey and the story of her recent, wildly successful live launch. 
An entrepreneur for more than 20 years and a lifelong lover of flowers, Nicola started The Floral Project in order to bring cheer and connection during the pandemic to people who were alone and lonely. Her big vision for The Floral Project is a million posies of flowers given every year to people in local communities who need a smile. These are people who don't have regular visitors and may feel isolated or lonely. People who are unable to grow their own flowers or afford them.
I can’t wait for you to hear how Nicola jumped into Launch Your Box with both feet and smashed her live launch. Nicola almost didn’t join Launch Your Box because she had already launched her subscription box business. Once she realized I also teach people how to grow their existing subscription box businesses, Nicola joined and started consuming the content quickly. 
When it was time for her launch, Nicola followed the launch training inside Launch Your Box to a tee. And she was smart about every step of the process. Nicola not only produced all the social media and email content I recommend, she wrote and scheduled it ahead of time before she was in the midst of the stress and excitement of her launch. She went LIVE, she talked about the benefits of the subscription, and she spoke to her people in their language. 
The result? In ONE live launch, Nicola gained 232 subscribers, smashing her goal of 130 new subscribers. Nicola described herself as “gobsmacked” by the results. The truth? She did everything right. She did the work and did all the things. And now Nicola is excited to turn her energy toward nurturing her more than 700 members, loving on them and continuing to teach them how to impact the lives of others with the gorgeous flowers they’ll grow and give away!
Join me for this episode as Nicola walks us through each day of her live launch and what she did in the days leading up to her launch that led to growing her subscription by 50% in just five days! 
 
Find and follow Nicola: 



The Floral Project on Instagram



The Floral Project on Facebook 



The Floral Project Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’m so excited to have Launch Your Box member Nicola Bird of The Floral Project join me all the way from the UK for today’s episode to share her subscription box journey and the story of her recent, wildly successful live launch. </p><p>An entrepreneur for more than 20 years and a lifelong lover of flowers, Nicola started The Floral Project in order to bring cheer and connection during the pandemic to people who were alone and lonely. Her big vision for The Floral Project is a million posies of flowers given every year to people in local communities who need a smile. These are people who don't have regular visitors and may feel isolated or lonely. People who are unable to grow their own flowers or afford them.</p><p>I can’t wait for you to hear how Nicola jumped into Launch Your Box with both feet and smashed her live launch. Nicola almost didn’t join Launch Your Box because she had already launched her subscription box business. Once she realized I also teach people how to grow their existing subscription box businesses, Nicola joined and started consuming the content quickly. </p><p>When it was time for her launch, Nicola followed the launch training inside Launch Your Box to a tee. And she was smart about every step of the process. Nicola not only produced all the social media and email content I recommend, she wrote and scheduled it ahead of time <em>before</em> she was in the midst of the stress and excitement of her launch. She went LIVE, she talked about the benefits of the subscription, and she spoke to <em>her</em> people in <em>their</em> language. </p><p>The result? In ONE live launch, Nicola gained 232 subscribers, smashing her goal of 130 new subscribers. Nicola described herself as “gobsmacked” by the results. The truth? She did everything right. She did the work and did all the things. And now Nicola is excited to turn her energy toward nurturing her more than 700 members, loving on them and continuing to teach them how to impact the lives of others with the gorgeous flowers they’ll grow and give away!</p><p>Join me for this episode as Nicola walks us through each day of her live launch and what she did in the days leading up to her launch that led to growing her subscription by 50% in just five days! </p><p> </p><p>Find and follow Nicola: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/the.floral.project/">The Floral Project on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/the.floral.project">The Floral Project on Facebook </a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://thefloralproject.co.uk/">The Floral Project Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2582</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e5fe446c-6d55-4cc4-ac86-f7fa0e5babd2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9987359991.mp3?updated=1701784262" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>090: Free Shipping vs Charging for Shipping</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/090-free-shipping-vs-charging-for-shipping</link>
      <description>You’ve curated a beautiful subscription box. Your website is nearly ready. But there’s one decision holding you back from actually launching. And it’s all about shipping. Should you offer free shipping or charge for shipping? 
Of course, “free shipping” isn’t free. If you offer free shipping to your customers, you will adjust the prices of the items you sell to absorb those shipping costs and protect your profit margins. 
In this episode, I go deep on all things shipping. The truth is, there’s no easy answer to the free shipping or charging for shipping question. There is no one-size fits all strategy when it comes to shipping charges. There may even be more than one answer for your business. 
Think about your own buying behavior. What matters more to you when you’re shopping online? What matters to your customers? 



Shippo, a shipping software company, conducted a survey where they found:



49% of customers prefer to pay a lower price for items and pay for shipping. 



40% of customers want free shipping. 



11% of customers want their items fast and are willing to pay expedited shipping charges.  



Another report showed: 



People prefer paying for low-cost shipping when purchasing lower-priced items. 



93% of shoppers will add to their carts to reach a certain threshold to receive free shipping if it’s offered. 



For one-off online sales, offering free shipping once a customer reaches a purchase threshold is smart for a few reasons. 



It can increase your average order value. 



It incentivizes customers to order more items at once instead of placing multiple one-item orders, reducing your overall shipping charges. 



It allows for lower pricing of items because you don’t have to account for as much of the cost of shipping in the price of each item. 



Answering this question for your subscription box is more difficult. Do you only ship or do you offer local pickup as well? Does the perceived value of your subscription box allow you to include shipping in the cost of the box or would that make the price “too high?” Don’t be afraid to test options with your audience to help you make this decision. 
Join me for this episode as I talk about what you need to consider when deciding whether to charge for shipping or offer free shipping to your customers and why you may end up choosing one strategy for your one-off sales and the other for your subscription box. 
 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 05 Oct 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Free Shipping vs Charging for Shipping</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>90</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c89ab122-b0bf-11ed-b273-3716106274ad/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>You’ve curated a beautiful subscription box. Your website is nearly ready. But there’s one decision holding you back from actually launching. And it’s all about shipping. Should you offer free shipping or charge for shipping?  Of course,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>You’ve curated a beautiful subscription box. Your website is nearly ready. But there’s one decision holding you back from actually launching. And it’s all about shipping. Should you offer free shipping or charge for shipping? 
Of course, “free shipping” isn’t free. If you offer free shipping to your customers, you will adjust the prices of the items you sell to absorb those shipping costs and protect your profit margins. 
In this episode, I go deep on all things shipping. The truth is, there’s no easy answer to the free shipping or charging for shipping question. There is no one-size fits all strategy when it comes to shipping charges. There may even be more than one answer for your business. 
Think about your own buying behavior. What matters more to you when you’re shopping online? What matters to your customers? 



Shippo, a shipping software company, conducted a survey where they found:



49% of customers prefer to pay a lower price for items and pay for shipping. 



40% of customers want free shipping. 



11% of customers want their items fast and are willing to pay expedited shipping charges.  



Another report showed: 



People prefer paying for low-cost shipping when purchasing lower-priced items. 



93% of shoppers will add to their carts to reach a certain threshold to receive free shipping if it’s offered. 



For one-off online sales, offering free shipping once a customer reaches a purchase threshold is smart for a few reasons. 



It can increase your average order value. 



It incentivizes customers to order more items at once instead of placing multiple one-item orders, reducing your overall shipping charges. 



It allows for lower pricing of items because you don’t have to account for as much of the cost of shipping in the price of each item. 



Answering this question for your subscription box is more difficult. Do you only ship or do you offer local pickup as well? Does the perceived value of your subscription box allow you to include shipping in the cost of the box or would that make the price “too high?” Don’t be afraid to test options with your audience to help you make this decision. 
Join me for this episode as I talk about what you need to consider when deciding whether to charge for shipping or offer free shipping to your customers and why you may end up choosing one strategy for your one-off sales and the other for your subscription box. 
 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>You’ve curated a beautiful subscription box. Your website is nearly ready. But there’s one decision holding you back from actually launching. And it’s all about shipping. Should you offer free shipping or charge for shipping? </p><p>Of course, “free shipping” isn’t free. If you offer free shipping to your customers, you will adjust the prices of the items you sell to absorb those shipping costs and protect your profit margins. </p><p>In this episode, I go deep on all things shipping. The truth is, there’s no easy answer to the free shipping or charging for shipping question. There is no one-size fits all strategy when it comes to shipping charges. There may even be more than one answer for your business. </p><p>Think about your own buying behavior. What matters more to you when you’re shopping online? What matters to your customers? </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Shippo, a shipping software company, conducted a survey where they found:</li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">49% of customers prefer to pay a lower price for items and pay for shipping. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">40% of customers want free shipping. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">11% of customers want their items fast and are willing to pay expedited shipping charges.  </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Another report showed: </li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">People prefer paying for low-cost shipping when purchasing lower-priced items. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">93% of shoppers will add to their carts to reach a certain threshold to receive free shipping if it’s offered. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>For one-off online sales, offering free shipping once a customer reaches a purchase threshold is smart for a few reasons. </p><ol>
<li><br></li>
<li>It can increase your average order value. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>It incentivizes customers to order more items at once instead of placing multiple one-item orders, reducing your overall shipping charges. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>It allows for lower pricing of items because you don’t have to account for as much of the cost of shipping in the price of each item. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ol><p>Answering this question for your subscription box is more difficult. Do you only ship or do you offer local pickup as well? Does the perceived value of your subscription box allow you to include shipping in the cost of the box or would that make the price “too high?” Don’t be afraid to test options with your audience to help you make this decision. </p><p>Join me for this episode as I talk about what you need to consider when deciding whether to charge for shipping or offer free shipping to your customers and why you may end up choosing one strategy for your one-off sales and the other for your subscription box. </p><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1077</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5b43cafc-54c2-4f1e-b4fd-6b378758f4d4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2086948524.mp3?updated=1701784298" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>089: Managing Content Creation and Showing Up On Video with Dana Bowling</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/089-managing-content-creation-and-showing-up-on-video-with-dana-bowling</link>
      <description>I’m so excited to have Dana Bowling of Show Up on Video join me today to talk about practical strategies to create content in a way that is doable and effective as well as ways to conquer feelings around showing up on video. 
Dana brings her background as a casting director and acting coach to her current business where she helps ambitious entrepreneurs learn how to own being the face of their businesses. Dana is a speaker, a coach, and a podcast host. Her podcast, Show Up on Video, helps motivate business owners to create valuable content and share it with their audiences. As she likes to say, “It’s all content.” 
Content creation is all about showing up and serving your audience. Don’t be afraid of giving too much away. Serving your audience by sharing valuable content with them builds your authority and your know/like/trust factor. In other words, when they’re ready to buy, you’ve made yourself the obvious choice. 
Dana took me through her content creation framework which could work for any subscription box owner. This framework starts with brainstorming content ideas and puts you where you belong - at the center. 
Identify four content pillars. For example, if I used this framework, my pillars might be: 



Subscription boxes 



Crazy, busy mom life



Monograms



Behind the scenes 



Instead of focusing on the outcome, focus on the process 



Identify three content ideas for each pillar.



Face to camera



Time-lapse



Trending sound 



For each idea, come up with 1-2 ways you can talk about it.
Yes, one of those ways to talk about your content is face to camera. Dana knows just like I know that this causes anxiety in so many of you. So she has three great tips to make being on camera easier. 
Get more comfortable talking on camera when the purpose is not to create content. 



Send video messages to friends or customers. 



Create social media stories - they only last for 24 hours!



Hop on video chats with friends. 



Record without the intention to post. This takes the pressure off and sometimes you’ll surprise yourself by coming up with something good!  
Good lighting, hair, makeup, clothes you feel good in, even using a subtle filter. 
Do whatever makes you feel better about being on camera. 
Think about who you serve and how your content can help them have a better day. 
Remember that your audience is much more interested in and worried about themselves than about you! 
Join me for this episode as Dana shares valuable strategies for creating content and feeling more comfortable showing up on video. Don’t miss this chance to learn how to serve your audience and your business with your content. 
 
Find and follow Dana: 



Dana Bowling on Instagram






Show Up on Video Podcast  




Dana Bowling’s Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 28 Sep 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Managing Content Creation and Showing Up On Video with Dana Bowling</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>89</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c8b2034a-b0bf-11ed-b273-8390b7b8cc99/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>I’m so excited to have Dana Bowling of Show Up on Video join me today to talk about practical strategies to create content in a way that is doable and effective as well as ways to conquer feelings around showing up on video.  Dana brings her...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I’m so excited to have Dana Bowling of Show Up on Video join me today to talk about practical strategies to create content in a way that is doable and effective as well as ways to conquer feelings around showing up on video. 
Dana brings her background as a casting director and acting coach to her current business where she helps ambitious entrepreneurs learn how to own being the face of their businesses. Dana is a speaker, a coach, and a podcast host. Her podcast, Show Up on Video, helps motivate business owners to create valuable content and share it with their audiences. As she likes to say, “It’s all content.” 
Content creation is all about showing up and serving your audience. Don’t be afraid of giving too much away. Serving your audience by sharing valuable content with them builds your authority and your know/like/trust factor. In other words, when they’re ready to buy, you’ve made yourself the obvious choice. 
Dana took me through her content creation framework which could work for any subscription box owner. This framework starts with brainstorming content ideas and puts you where you belong - at the center. 
Identify four content pillars. For example, if I used this framework, my pillars might be: 



Subscription boxes 



Crazy, busy mom life



Monograms



Behind the scenes 



Instead of focusing on the outcome, focus on the process 



Identify three content ideas for each pillar.



Face to camera



Time-lapse



Trending sound 



For each idea, come up with 1-2 ways you can talk about it.
Yes, one of those ways to talk about your content is face to camera. Dana knows just like I know that this causes anxiety in so many of you. So she has three great tips to make being on camera easier. 
Get more comfortable talking on camera when the purpose is not to create content. 



Send video messages to friends or customers. 



Create social media stories - they only last for 24 hours!



Hop on video chats with friends. 



Record without the intention to post. This takes the pressure off and sometimes you’ll surprise yourself by coming up with something good!  
Good lighting, hair, makeup, clothes you feel good in, even using a subtle filter. 
Do whatever makes you feel better about being on camera. 
Think about who you serve and how your content can help them have a better day. 
Remember that your audience is much more interested in and worried about themselves than about you! 
Join me for this episode as Dana shares valuable strategies for creating content and feeling more comfortable showing up on video. Don’t miss this chance to learn how to serve your audience and your business with your content. 
 
Find and follow Dana: 



Dana Bowling on Instagram






Show Up on Video Podcast  




Dana Bowling’s Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’m so excited to have Dana Bowling of Show Up on Video join me today to talk about practical strategies to create content in a way that is doable <em>and</em> effective as well as ways to conquer feelings around showing up on video. </p><p>Dana brings her background as a casting director and acting coach to her current business where she helps ambitious entrepreneurs learn how to own being the face of their businesses. Dana is a speaker, a coach, and a podcast host. Her podcast, Show Up on Video, helps motivate business owners to create valuable content and share it with their audiences. As she likes to say, “It’s all content.” </p><p>Content creation is all about showing up and serving your audience. Don’t be afraid of giving too much away. Serving your audience by sharing valuable content with them builds your authority and your know/like/trust factor. In other words, when they’re ready to buy, you’ve made yourself the obvious choice. </p><p>Dana took me through her content creation framework which could work for any subscription box owner. This framework starts with brainstorming content ideas and puts you where you belong - at the center. </p><ol><li>Identify four content pillars. For example, if I used this framework, my pillars might be: </li></ol><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Subscription boxes </li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Crazy, busy mom life</li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Monograms</li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Behind the scenes </li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Instead of focusing on the outcome, focus on the process </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><ol><li>Identify three content ideas for <em>each</em> pillar.</li></ol><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Face to camera</li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Time-lapse</li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Trending sound </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><ol><li>For each idea, come up with 1-2 ways you can talk about it.</li></ol><p>Yes, one of those ways to talk about your content is face to camera. Dana knows just like I know that this causes anxiety in so many of you. So she has three great tips to make being on camera easier. </p><ol><li>Get more comfortable talking on camera when the purpose is not to create content. </li></ol><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Send video messages to friends or customers. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Create social media stories - they only last for 24 hours!</li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Hop on video chats with friends. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><ol><li>Record without the intention to post. This takes the pressure off and sometimes you’ll surprise yourself by coming up with something good!  </li></ol><ul><li class="ql-indent-1">Good lighting, hair, makeup, clothes you feel good in, even using a subtle filter. </li></ul><ol><li>Do whatever makes you feel better about being on camera. </li></ol><ul><li class="ql-indent-1">Think about who you serve and how your content can help them have a better day. </li></ul><ol><li>Remember that your audience is much more interested in and worried about themselves than about you! </li></ol><p>Join me for this episode as Dana shares valuable strategies for creating content and feeling more comfortable showing up on video. Don’t miss this chance to learn how to serve your audience and your business with your content. </p><p> </p><p>Find and follow Dana: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/thisisdanabowling/">Dana Bowling on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.danabowling.com/podcast">Show Up on Video Podcast</a> <a href="https://www.facebook.com/QueenOfMyCastleDesigns"> </a>
</li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.danabowling.com/">Dana Bowling’s Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2031</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5902e445-2ba3-4830-8e14-aa28d3e1b344]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6685289942.mp3?updated=1701784344" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>088: What a Mastermind Can Do for You and Your Business</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/088-what-a-mastermind-can-do-for-you-and-your-business</link>
      <description>Have you ever wondered what it would be like to sit around a table, geeking out about your business with other people who just “get it?” Have you dreamed of digging in and talking about the parts of being an entrepreneur that are hard? And the parts that are amazing? And all the in-between parts, too? It is incredibly valuable to spend time with like-minded people in person and get real - get personal even - about what it takes to keep growing as a business and as a business owner.
In this episode, I’m sharing what a Mastermind is and what it can do for you and your business. I wouldn’t be where I am today without being challenged, nurtured, and held accountable… and that’s what a Mastermind is all about.  
Masterminds can seem mysterious - like they’re an exclusive group of people getting together and having top secret conversations. But that’s not what they’re meant to be, and it’s certainly not what any Mastermind I’ve been involved with has been. Good Masterminds are about connection, accountability, implementation, scaling, and creating the life you want. All with like minded people and a facilitator you align with. 
I’ve been a part of Masterminds for five years. I’ve gotten so much from those experiences - and given so much to them as well. It’s important to realize that being an active participant in a Mastermind means you’re giving just as much as you’re getting. That’s where the connections and relationships are formed. Through sharing, encouraging, supporting, and challenging each other in a safe, supportive space. 
After being a part of Masterminds and guest teaching in Masterminds, it finally struck me that it was time for me to have my own Mastermind for my community. 
I started with a weekend. And it was incredible. We went to the beach (my official happy place) and spent two days going deep with 16 incredible subscription box owners. The weekend changed each of them and their businesses and it changed me, too. I went from wondering if a Mastermind was something I wanted to offer to deciding I was 100% in on creating a year-long Mastermind of my own - the Elevate Mastermind.
This Mastermind is for people in my community - people who have subscription boxes, memberships, or product based businesses. A Mastermind is not for someone just getting started. It might be for you if you’re ready to scale your business and dig into how to make that happen. 
Join me for this episode as I share my Mastermind experiences, my vision for my Elevate Mastermind, and how to know when you’re ready for a Mastermind. 
 
Email me if you're interested in applying for or learning more about my Elevate Mastermind at sarah@framedbysarah.com. Spots are going fast! 
 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 21 Sep 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What a Mastermind Can Do for You and Your Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>88</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c8cdc594-b0bf-11ed-b273-ef5326ffbfcd/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Have you ever wondered what it would be like to sit around a table, geeking out about your business with other people who just “get it?” Have you dreamed of digging in and talking about the parts of being an entrepreneur that are hard? And the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you ever wondered what it would be like to sit around a table, geeking out about your business with other people who just “get it?” Have you dreamed of digging in and talking about the parts of being an entrepreneur that are hard? And the parts that are amazing? And all the in-between parts, too? It is incredibly valuable to spend time with like-minded people in person and get real - get personal even - about what it takes to keep growing as a business and as a business owner.
In this episode, I’m sharing what a Mastermind is and what it can do for you and your business. I wouldn’t be where I am today without being challenged, nurtured, and held accountable… and that’s what a Mastermind is all about.  
Masterminds can seem mysterious - like they’re an exclusive group of people getting together and having top secret conversations. But that’s not what they’re meant to be, and it’s certainly not what any Mastermind I’ve been involved with has been. Good Masterminds are about connection, accountability, implementation, scaling, and creating the life you want. All with like minded people and a facilitator you align with. 
I’ve been a part of Masterminds for five years. I’ve gotten so much from those experiences - and given so much to them as well. It’s important to realize that being an active participant in a Mastermind means you’re giving just as much as you’re getting. That’s where the connections and relationships are formed. Through sharing, encouraging, supporting, and challenging each other in a safe, supportive space. 
After being a part of Masterminds and guest teaching in Masterminds, it finally struck me that it was time for me to have my own Mastermind for my community. 
I started with a weekend. And it was incredible. We went to the beach (my official happy place) and spent two days going deep with 16 incredible subscription box owners. The weekend changed each of them and their businesses and it changed me, too. I went from wondering if a Mastermind was something I wanted to offer to deciding I was 100% in on creating a year-long Mastermind of my own - the Elevate Mastermind.
This Mastermind is for people in my community - people who have subscription boxes, memberships, or product based businesses. A Mastermind is not for someone just getting started. It might be for you if you’re ready to scale your business and dig into how to make that happen. 
Join me for this episode as I share my Mastermind experiences, my vision for my Elevate Mastermind, and how to know when you’re ready for a Mastermind. 
 
Email me if you're interested in applying for or learning more about my Elevate Mastermind at sarah@framedbysarah.com. Spots are going fast! 
 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you ever wondered what it would be like to sit around a table, geeking out about your business with other people who just “get it?” Have you dreamed of digging in and talking about the parts of being an entrepreneur that are hard? And the parts that are amazing? And all the in-between parts, too? It is incredibly valuable to spend time with like-minded people <em>in person</em> and get real - get personal even - about what it takes to keep growing as a business and as a business owner.</p><p>In this episode, I’m sharing what a Mastermind is and what it can do for you and your business. I wouldn’t be where I am today without being challenged, nurtured, and held accountable… and that’s what a Mastermind is all about.  </p><p>Masterminds can seem mysterious - like they’re an exclusive group of people getting together and having top secret conversations. But that’s not what they’re meant to be, and it’s certainly not what any Mastermind I’ve been involved with has been. Good Masterminds are about connection, accountability, implementation, scaling, and creating the life you want. All with like minded people and a facilitator you align with. </p><p>I’ve been a part of Masterminds for five years. I’ve gotten so much from those experiences - and given so much to them as well. It’s important to realize that being an active participant in a Mastermind means you’re giving just as much as you’re getting. That’s where the connections and relationships are formed. Through sharing, encouraging, supporting, and challenging each other in a safe, supportive space. </p><p>After being a part of Masterminds and guest teaching in Masterminds, it finally struck me that it was time for me to have my own Mastermind for my community. </p><p>I started with a weekend. And it was incredible. We went to the beach (my official happy place) and spent two days going deep with 16 incredible subscription box owners. The weekend changed each of them and their businesses and it changed me, too. I went from wondering if a Mastermind was something I wanted to offer to deciding I was 100% in on creating a year-long Mastermind of my own - the Elevate Mastermind.</p><p>This Mastermind is for people in my community - people who have subscription boxes, memberships, or product based businesses. A Mastermind is not for someone just getting started. It might be for you if you’re ready to scale your business and dig into how to make that happen. </p><p>Join me for this episode as I share my Mastermind experiences, my vision for my Elevate Mastermind, and how to know when you’re ready for a Mastermind. </p><p> </p><p>Email me if you're interested in applying for or learning more about my Elevate Mastermind at <a href="mailto:sarah@framedbysarah.com">sarah@framedbysarah.com</a>. Spots are going fast! </p><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1552</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[89146685-4b38-402d-9420-7d07e14c8308]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4941885041.mp3?updated=1701784360" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>087: From Registered Nurse to Subscription Box Owner with Tiffany Hill</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/087-from-registered-nurse-to-subscription-box-owner-with-tiffany-hill</link>
      <description>“Hire the help.” - Tiffany Hill 
I’m so excited to have Launch Your Box member Tiffany Hill of Queen of My Castle Designs join me for today’s episode to share her journey from Registered Nurse to successful subscription box owner. 
A dedicated RN, Tiffany started painting door hangers as a hobby more than a decade ago. What started as something to satisfy her crafty side grew into a business that allowed her to work less hours as a nurse and spend more time at home with her husband and their three sons. Earlier this year, Tiffany made the decision to retire from nursing altogether and focus solely on her family and her business. Tiffany has two digital teaching subscriptions and an Etsy shop where she sells one-off products, but it was her monthly door hanger subscription that gave her the confidence and peace of mind to “retire” from nursing, and never look back. 
Handmade subscription boxes like Tiffany’s come with their own set of challenges. Planning for her launch, Tiffany decided to limit the number of subscribers to 30 because she wanted to make sure she didn’t outsell what she was capable of making. When those spots sold out in mere hours, Tiffany had not only launched strong, she had also created scarcity, exclusivity, and urgency. There were a lot more than 30 members of her audience who wanted to join her door hanger of the month subscription. 
Tiffany knew the only way she could grow and scale her business was by hiring help. She hired carefully and well, slowly building a small team who is as dedicated to producing quality products as she is. With careful planning and the help of her amazing team, Tiffany’s monthly subscription has grown steadily to where it is now at 175 subscribers. 
Join me for this episode as Tiffany shares what she learned as she grew her Door Hanger of the Month subscription and why growing and scaling a handmade business is not possible without building a team. 
 
Find and follow Tiffany: 



Queen of My Castle on Instagram



Queen of My Castle on Facebook 



Queen of My Castle Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 14 Sep 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From Registered Nurse to Subscription Box Owner with Tiffany Hill</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>87</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c8e43f22-b0bf-11ed-b273-c3bf3b8676c9/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“Hire the help.” - Tiffany Hill  I’m so excited to have Launch Your Box member Tiffany Hill of Queen of My Castle Designs join me for today’s episode to share her journey from Registered Nurse to successful subscription box owner.  A...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Hire the help.” - Tiffany Hill 
I’m so excited to have Launch Your Box member Tiffany Hill of Queen of My Castle Designs join me for today’s episode to share her journey from Registered Nurse to successful subscription box owner. 
A dedicated RN, Tiffany started painting door hangers as a hobby more than a decade ago. What started as something to satisfy her crafty side grew into a business that allowed her to work less hours as a nurse and spend more time at home with her husband and their three sons. Earlier this year, Tiffany made the decision to retire from nursing altogether and focus solely on her family and her business. Tiffany has two digital teaching subscriptions and an Etsy shop where she sells one-off products, but it was her monthly door hanger subscription that gave her the confidence and peace of mind to “retire” from nursing, and never look back. 
Handmade subscription boxes like Tiffany’s come with their own set of challenges. Planning for her launch, Tiffany decided to limit the number of subscribers to 30 because she wanted to make sure she didn’t outsell what she was capable of making. When those spots sold out in mere hours, Tiffany had not only launched strong, she had also created scarcity, exclusivity, and urgency. There were a lot more than 30 members of her audience who wanted to join her door hanger of the month subscription. 
Tiffany knew the only way she could grow and scale her business was by hiring help. She hired carefully and well, slowly building a small team who is as dedicated to producing quality products as she is. With careful planning and the help of her amazing team, Tiffany’s monthly subscription has grown steadily to where it is now at 175 subscribers. 
Join me for this episode as Tiffany shares what she learned as she grew her Door Hanger of the Month subscription and why growing and scaling a handmade business is not possible without building a team. 
 
Find and follow Tiffany: 



Queen of My Castle on Instagram



Queen of My Castle on Facebook 



Queen of My Castle Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“Hire the help.” - Tiffany Hill </p><p>I’m so excited to have Launch Your Box member Tiffany Hill of Queen of My Castle Designs join me for today’s episode to share her journey from Registered Nurse to successful subscription box owner. </p><p>A dedicated RN, Tiffany started painting door hangers as a hobby more than a decade ago. What started as something to satisfy her crafty side grew into a business that allowed her to work less hours as a nurse and spend more time at home with her husband and their three sons. Earlier this year, Tiffany made the decision to retire from nursing altogether and focus solely on her family and her business. Tiffany has two digital teaching subscriptions and an Etsy shop where she sells one-off products, but it was her monthly door hanger subscription that gave her the confidence and peace of mind to “retire” from nursing, and never look back. </p><p>Handmade subscription boxes like Tiffany’s come with their own set of challenges. Planning for her launch, Tiffany decided to limit the number of subscribers to 30 because she wanted to make sure she didn’t outsell what she was capable of making. When those spots sold out in mere hours, Tiffany had not only launched strong, she had also created scarcity, exclusivity, and urgency. There were a lot more than 30 members of her audience who wanted to join her door hanger of the month subscription. </p><p>Tiffany knew the only way she could grow and scale her business was by hiring help. She hired carefully and well, slowly building a small team who is as dedicated to producing quality products as she is. With careful planning and the help of her amazing team, Tiffany’s monthly subscription has grown steadily to where it is now at 175 subscribers. </p><p>Join me for this episode as Tiffany shares what she learned as she grew her Door Hanger of the Month subscription and why growing and scaling a handmade business is not possible without building a team. </p><p> </p><p>Find and follow Tiffany: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/queenofmycastledesigns/">Queen of My Castle on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/QueenOfMyCastleDesigns">Queen of My Castle on Facebook </a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="http://www.queenofmycastledesigns.com/">Queen of My Castle Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1764</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[dd29a3ba-5b63-4875-b816-20fd41a82481]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6050029172.mp3?updated=1701784398" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>086: One Year Later - An Update from a Past Guest One Year After Her Subscription Box Launch with Amanda Stucky</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/086-one-year-later-an-update-from-a-past-guest-one-year-after-her-subscription-box-launch-with-amanda-stucky</link>
      <description>Launch Your Box member Amanda Stucky of Mandy Lynn Plans joined me for today’s episode to catch us up on what’s been happening since her last visit almost exactly one year ago. You might remember Amanda from episode 33 where we talked about audience building and the incredible response she had to her launch despite having a small audience of only 600 people. Amanda has gone from strength to strength over this past year and continues to grow. 
Amanda’s early success was due in no small part to her dedication to serving her audience. She went deep into the planner niche, producing stickers and planner accessories for the specific planner she loves using, the Hobonichi. She found an audience of people just like her, connected with them, and sold them one-off products. Soon, they were begging her for a subscription box. That’s right, they asked her to add a subscription box to her business. Amanda continues to focus on the needs and wants of her audience, expanding her product lines and adding a one-thing-of-the-month box to her offerings. 
Another exciting development came when Amanda’s husband was able to quit his full-time job to work full-time in Mandy Lynn Plans. He brings tech skills that allow Amanda to produce more designs and a larger variety of designs quickly. This arrangement also means more family time with their young children. 
As a subscription box business grows, at some point every subscription box owner needs to hire. This can be a big hurdle, worrying about who to hire and what to have them do. Amanda was no different. When she did hire, she started with one part-time employee and slowly added to her team as needed. She learned lessons along the way that all subscription box owners can learn from: 



Start with one job/responsibility and let your team member (and you) get comfortable with that before adding more. 



Don’t worry about keeping them busy - you’ll find more than enough tasks they can help with. 



Hiring takes things off your plate that hinder your creativity. Adding team members allows for time and space to create which results in a better product. 



The first hire more than doubles what you can produce. 



Hiring team members, bringing her husband home to work in the business, maintaining her connection to her audience, and focusing on serving them have led to a year of significant growth in subscription numbers and one-time sales. I can’t wait to see what the next year brings! 
Join me for this episode as Amanda shares what happens in the year after the launch of a subscription box. She talks about serving her audience, giving them what they want, and how hiring team members has helped her business - and her creativity - grow. 
Important Links: 
 Launch Your Box Podcast Episode 33 - Small Audience, No Problem! How Amanda Built 100+ Subscribers from an Audience of 600
Find and follow Amanda: 



 Mandy Lynn Plans on YouTube



Mandy Lynn Plans on Instagram



Mandy Lynn Plans on Facebook 



Mandy Lynn Plan Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 07 Sep 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>One Year Later - An Update from a Past Guest One Year After Her Subscription Box Launch with Amanda Stucky</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>86</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c8f8fa3e-b0bf-11ed-b273-3387f1754916/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Launch Your Box member Amanda Stucky of Mandy Lynn Plans joined me for today’s episode to catch us up on what’s been happening since her last visit almost exactly one year ago. You might remember Amanda from episode 33 where we talked about...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Launch Your Box member Amanda Stucky of Mandy Lynn Plans joined me for today’s episode to catch us up on what’s been happening since her last visit almost exactly one year ago. You might remember Amanda from episode 33 where we talked about audience building and the incredible response she had to her launch despite having a small audience of only 600 people. Amanda has gone from strength to strength over this past year and continues to grow. 
Amanda’s early success was due in no small part to her dedication to serving her audience. She went deep into the planner niche, producing stickers and planner accessories for the specific planner she loves using, the Hobonichi. She found an audience of people just like her, connected with them, and sold them one-off products. Soon, they were begging her for a subscription box. That’s right, they asked her to add a subscription box to her business. Amanda continues to focus on the needs and wants of her audience, expanding her product lines and adding a one-thing-of-the-month box to her offerings. 
Another exciting development came when Amanda’s husband was able to quit his full-time job to work full-time in Mandy Lynn Plans. He brings tech skills that allow Amanda to produce more designs and a larger variety of designs quickly. This arrangement also means more family time with their young children. 
As a subscription box business grows, at some point every subscription box owner needs to hire. This can be a big hurdle, worrying about who to hire and what to have them do. Amanda was no different. When she did hire, she started with one part-time employee and slowly added to her team as needed. She learned lessons along the way that all subscription box owners can learn from: 



Start with one job/responsibility and let your team member (and you) get comfortable with that before adding more. 



Don’t worry about keeping them busy - you’ll find more than enough tasks they can help with. 



Hiring takes things off your plate that hinder your creativity. Adding team members allows for time and space to create which results in a better product. 



The first hire more than doubles what you can produce. 



Hiring team members, bringing her husband home to work in the business, maintaining her connection to her audience, and focusing on serving them have led to a year of significant growth in subscription numbers and one-time sales. I can’t wait to see what the next year brings! 
Join me for this episode as Amanda shares what happens in the year after the launch of a subscription box. She talks about serving her audience, giving them what they want, and how hiring team members has helped her business - and her creativity - grow. 
Important Links: 
 Launch Your Box Podcast Episode 33 - Small Audience, No Problem! How Amanda Built 100+ Subscribers from an Audience of 600
Find and follow Amanda: 



 Mandy Lynn Plans on YouTube



Mandy Lynn Plans on Instagram



Mandy Lynn Plans on Facebook 



Mandy Lynn Plan Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Launch Your Box member Amanda Stucky of Mandy Lynn Plans joined me for today’s episode to catch us up on what’s been happening since her last visit almost exactly one year ago. You might remember Amanda from episode 33 where we talked about audience building and the incredible response she had to her launch despite having a small audience of only 600 people. Amanda has gone from strength to strength over this past year and continues to grow. </p><p>Amanda’s early success was due in no small part to her dedication to serving her audience. She went deep into the planner niche, producing stickers and planner accessories for the specific planner she loves using, the Hobonichi. She found an audience of people just like her, connected with them, and sold them one-off products. Soon, they were begging her for a subscription box. That’s right, they <em>asked</em> her to add a subscription box to her business. Amanda continues to focus on the needs and wants of her audience, expanding her product lines and adding a one-thing-of-the-month box to her offerings. </p><p>Another exciting development came when Amanda’s husband was able to quit his full-time job to work full-time in Mandy Lynn Plans. He brings tech skills that allow Amanda to produce more designs and a larger variety of designs quickly. This arrangement also means more family time with their young children. </p><p>As a subscription box business grows, at some point every subscription box owner needs to hire. This can be a big hurdle, worrying about who to hire and what to have them do. Amanda was no different. When she did hire, she started with one part-time employee and slowly added to her team as needed. She learned lessons along the way that all subscription box owners can learn from: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Start with one job/responsibility and let your team member (and you) get comfortable with that before adding more. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Don’t worry about keeping them busy - you’ll find more than enough tasks they can help with. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Hiring takes things off your plate that hinder your creativity. Adding team members allows for time and space to create which results in a better product. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>The first hire more than doubles what you can produce. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Hiring team members, bringing her husband home to work in the business, maintaining her connection to her audience, and focusing on serving them have led to a year of significant growth in subscription numbers and one-time sales. I can’t wait to see what the next year brings! </p><p>Join me for this episode as Amanda shares what happens in the year after the launch of a subscription box. She talks about serving her audience, giving them what they want, and how hiring team members has helped her business - and her creativity - grow. </p><p>Important Links: </p><ul><li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-33"> Launch Your Box Podcast Episode 33 - Small Audience, No Problem! How Amanda Built 100+ Subscribers from an Audience of 600</a></li></ul><p>Find and follow Amanda: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCDi2GP6S-SjtJa4Kih9hxIw"> Mandy Lynn Plans on YouTube</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/mandylynnplans/">Mandy Lynn Plans on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/mandylynnplans">Mandy Lynn Plans on Facebook </a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://mandylynnplans.com/">Mandy Lynn Plan Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>﻿</strong><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1750</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e3e1a203-0dca-4716-9cea-242c934e3e9e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9432406707.mp3?updated=1701784409" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>085: Build an Audience with a Niche Specific Podcast</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/085-build-an-audience-with-a-niche-specific-podcast</link>
      <description>“If you’ve been thinking about starting a podcast, now is the perfect time.” - Sarah Heeter. 
My podcast editor, Sarah Heeter, joined me for today’s episode to talk about all things podcast. We talked about the benefits of podcasting and why starting a niche-specific podcast could be a valuable part of your audience-building strategy. Sarah knows a LOT about podcasts. After all, she helped me start this podcast and grow it to more than 200,000 downloads in 18 months and a ranking in the top 1.5% of podcasts globally. She’s also a member of Launch Your Box. 
If you’re wondering if podcasts can be a valuable part of an audience-building strategy for subscription box owners, the answer is yes! I mentioned I have more than 200,000 episode downloads in only 18 months. Compare that to my social media audience. It has taken me years to grow my Facebook and IG followers to a combined 20,000. And if you’re wondering if there’s room for another podcast - for your podcast - the answer is also yes. Studies show more than half of people over 12 listen to podcasts and, on average, each listens to 7 podcasts! 
There are several benefits to podcasts when it comes to connecting with your audience. 



Podcasts meet people where they are. They lend themselves to being interrupted - it’s easy to stop a podcast when needed and get right back to where you left off. 



Podcasts allow listeners to multitask. They listen while driving, cleaning, exercising, and more. 



A podcast mimics the intimacy of a phone call - you’re talking to your audience for 25-40 minutes per week. 



Unlike social media posts, reels, and videos, podcast episodes live forever! 



It can be daunting to think about what you would talk to your audience about each week. Many people worry they’ll run out of things to say. If you’re serving your niche, and know your audience well, that shouldn’t be a problem. Sarah suggests brainstorming a list of possible topics by asking yourself: 



What keeps my ideal customer up at night? 



What answers are they searching for on Google? 



What is their support system like? 



What is their value system? 



What are their highest priorities? 



Use what you learned about your ideal customer in my FREE 6 in 60 Workshop to help you get started. 
Join me for this episode as Sarah shares so much knowledge about why subscription box owners should consider starting a podcast, how to decide what to talk about, and why it’s very possible to DIY your podcast. 
Important Links: 
 6 in 60 Workshop
Find and follow Sarah Heeter: 



Sarah Heeter on Instagram



Sarah Heeter’s Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 31 Aug 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Build an Audience with a Niche Specific Podcast</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>85</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c90eab9a-b0bf-11ed-b273-0fdd77b6e2bc/image/9062c4bf25dab6a2c3e172a3410a9f5b.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“If you’ve been thinking about starting a podcast, now is the perfect time.” - Sarah Heeter.  My podcast editor, Sarah Heeter, joined me for today’s episode to talk about all things podcast. We talked about the benefits of podcasting and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“If you’ve been thinking about starting a podcast, now is the perfect time.” - Sarah Heeter. 
My podcast editor, Sarah Heeter, joined me for today’s episode to talk about all things podcast. We talked about the benefits of podcasting and why starting a niche-specific podcast could be a valuable part of your audience-building strategy. Sarah knows a LOT about podcasts. After all, she helped me start this podcast and grow it to more than 200,000 downloads in 18 months and a ranking in the top 1.5% of podcasts globally. She’s also a member of Launch Your Box. 
If you’re wondering if podcasts can be a valuable part of an audience-building strategy for subscription box owners, the answer is yes! I mentioned I have more than 200,000 episode downloads in only 18 months. Compare that to my social media audience. It has taken me years to grow my Facebook and IG followers to a combined 20,000. And if you’re wondering if there’s room for another podcast - for your podcast - the answer is also yes. Studies show more than half of people over 12 listen to podcasts and, on average, each listens to 7 podcasts! 
There are several benefits to podcasts when it comes to connecting with your audience. 



Podcasts meet people where they are. They lend themselves to being interrupted - it’s easy to stop a podcast when needed and get right back to where you left off. 



Podcasts allow listeners to multitask. They listen while driving, cleaning, exercising, and more. 



A podcast mimics the intimacy of a phone call - you’re talking to your audience for 25-40 minutes per week. 



Unlike social media posts, reels, and videos, podcast episodes live forever! 



It can be daunting to think about what you would talk to your audience about each week. Many people worry they’ll run out of things to say. If you’re serving your niche, and know your audience well, that shouldn’t be a problem. Sarah suggests brainstorming a list of possible topics by asking yourself: 



What keeps my ideal customer up at night? 



What answers are they searching for on Google? 



What is their support system like? 



What is their value system? 



What are their highest priorities? 



Use what you learned about your ideal customer in my FREE 6 in 60 Workshop to help you get started. 
Join me for this episode as Sarah shares so much knowledge about why subscription box owners should consider starting a podcast, how to decide what to talk about, and why it’s very possible to DIY your podcast. 
Important Links: 
 6 in 60 Workshop
Find and follow Sarah Heeter: 



Sarah Heeter on Instagram



Sarah Heeter’s Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“If you’ve been thinking about starting a podcast, now is the perfect time.” - Sarah Heeter. </p><p>My podcast editor, Sarah Heeter, joined me for today’s episode to talk about all things podcast. We talked about the benefits of podcasting and why starting a niche-specific podcast could be a valuable part of your audience-building strategy. Sarah knows a LOT about podcasts. After all, she helped me start this podcast and grow it to more than 200,000 downloads in 18 months <em>and</em> a ranking in the top 1.5% of podcasts globally. She’s also a member of Launch Your Box. </p><p>If you’re wondering if podcasts can be a valuable part of an audience-building strategy for subscription box owners, the answer is yes! I mentioned I have more than 200,000 episode downloads in only 18 months. Compare that to my social media audience. It has taken me years to grow my Facebook and IG followers to a combined 20,000. And if you’re wondering if there’s room for another podcast - for your podcast - the answer is also yes. Studies show more than half of people over 12 listen to podcasts and, on average, each listens to 7 podcasts! </p><p>There are several benefits to podcasts when it comes to connecting with your audience. </p><ol>
<li><br></li>
<li>Podcasts meet people where they are. They lend themselves to being interrupted - it’s easy to stop a podcast when needed and get right back to where you left off. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Podcasts allow listeners to multitask. They listen while driving, cleaning, exercising, and more. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>A podcast mimics the intimacy of a phone call - you’re talking to your audience for 25-40 minutes per week. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Unlike social media posts, reels, and videos, podcast episodes live forever! </li>
<li><br></li>
</ol><p>It can be daunting to think about what you would talk to your audience about each week. Many people worry they’ll run out of things to say. If you’re serving your niche, and know your audience well, that shouldn’t be a problem. Sarah suggests brainstorming a list of possible topics by asking yourself: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>What keeps my ideal customer up at night? </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>What answers are they searching for on Google? </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>What is their support system like? </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>What is their value system? </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>What are their highest priorities? </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Use what you learned about your ideal customer in my FREE 6 in 60 Workshop to help you get started. </p><p>Join me for this episode as Sarah shares so much knowledge about why subscription box owners should consider starting a podcast, how to decide what to talk about, and why it’s very possible to DIY your podcast. </p><p>Important Links: </p><ul><li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e"> 6 in 60 Workshop</a></li></ul><p>Find and follow Sarah Heeter: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="http://instagram.com/sarahkheeter">Sarah Heeter on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.podfoxmedia.com/book-now">Sarah Heeter’s Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2908</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[4d4b3bfb-9eca-4328-8802-bb8502e69fac]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7772306110.mp3?updated=1733866425" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>084: The Journey to 3200 Subscribers with Damon Oates of DecoExchange</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/084-the-journey-to-3200-subscribers-with-damon-oates-of-decoexchange</link>
      <description>“Listen to your people.” - Damon Oates 
Damon Oates of DecoExchange joined me for today’s episode. Damon serves people who make and sell decorative wreaths, so his customers are themselves businesspeople. Damon started a subscription box several years ago and hated it. He found it to be incredibly stressful and had difficulty planning the boxes and getting the needed supplies each month. That was before he met me! LOL   
Damon’s first subscription had as many as 900 subscribers, but he had let it dwindle down to just over 300 when he came into my world. After we talked about what he didn’t like about his subscription box, a few things became clear, the biggest of which was Damon and his business partner needed to learn how to plan. After joining Launch Your Box and gaining that knowledge and more, they decided to launch another subscription box with some changes. 
During the pre-launch period, Damon leaned into what he does best - building and engaging with his audience. He asked them what they wanted, which it turns out wasn’t what he thought they wanted or what he wanted to give them. But he listened. He also spent that time building a waitlist. By consistently posting, texting, and going LIVE with a CTA to join the waitlist, Damon grew a list of more than 3,000 people in less than two months. That waitlist currently has 14,000 people on it! 
The launch of the new subscription box resulted in 350 subscribers. That number continued to grow each month for the next 1 ½ years at which point there were 3,200 subscribers. They decided to hold steady at 3,200 for now and the only way to become a subscriber is to get on the waitlist and hope for someone to cancel. Damon has generated major FOMO by employing three things I teach every subscription box owner to create - scarcity, urgency, and exclusivity. 
Damon shared his advice for other subscription box owners whether you’re new to the game or looking to grow. 



Listen to your people and give them what they want. 



Start with 10-20 boxes or even a one-time box to try it out and see what works. 



Pick one social media platform, be consistent, and show up. (You’ll find Damon on Facebook!)



Pick your niche and go deep. 



Serve before you sell. 



Join me for this episode as Damon shares how he went from hoping his subscription box business would die off to nurturing an excited, vibrant community of more than 3,200 monthly subscribers with thousands more waiting to get in. 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Damon: 



DecoExchange on Facebook



 DecoExchange on Instagram



 DecoExchange Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Aug 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Journey to 3200 Subscribers with Damon Oates of DecoExchange</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>84</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c9251a9c-b0bf-11ed-b273-433beaedd1b7/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“Listen to your people.” - Damon Oates  Damon Oates of DecoExchange joined me for today’s episode. Damon serves people who make and sell decorative wreaths, so his customers are themselves businesspeople. Damon started a subscription box...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Listen to your people.” - Damon Oates 
Damon Oates of DecoExchange joined me for today’s episode. Damon serves people who make and sell decorative wreaths, so his customers are themselves businesspeople. Damon started a subscription box several years ago and hated it. He found it to be incredibly stressful and had difficulty planning the boxes and getting the needed supplies each month. That was before he met me! LOL   
Damon’s first subscription had as many as 900 subscribers, but he had let it dwindle down to just over 300 when he came into my world. After we talked about what he didn’t like about his subscription box, a few things became clear, the biggest of which was Damon and his business partner needed to learn how to plan. After joining Launch Your Box and gaining that knowledge and more, they decided to launch another subscription box with some changes. 
During the pre-launch period, Damon leaned into what he does best - building and engaging with his audience. He asked them what they wanted, which it turns out wasn’t what he thought they wanted or what he wanted to give them. But he listened. He also spent that time building a waitlist. By consistently posting, texting, and going LIVE with a CTA to join the waitlist, Damon grew a list of more than 3,000 people in less than two months. That waitlist currently has 14,000 people on it! 
The launch of the new subscription box resulted in 350 subscribers. That number continued to grow each month for the next 1 ½ years at which point there were 3,200 subscribers. They decided to hold steady at 3,200 for now and the only way to become a subscriber is to get on the waitlist and hope for someone to cancel. Damon has generated major FOMO by employing three things I teach every subscription box owner to create - scarcity, urgency, and exclusivity. 
Damon shared his advice for other subscription box owners whether you’re new to the game or looking to grow. 



Listen to your people and give them what they want. 



Start with 10-20 boxes or even a one-time box to try it out and see what works. 



Pick one social media platform, be consistent, and show up. (You’ll find Damon on Facebook!)



Pick your niche and go deep. 



Serve before you sell. 



Join me for this episode as Damon shares how he went from hoping his subscription box business would die off to nurturing an excited, vibrant community of more than 3,200 monthly subscribers with thousands more waiting to get in. 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Damon: 



DecoExchange on Facebook



 DecoExchange on Instagram



 DecoExchange Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“Listen to your people.” - Damon Oates </p><p>Damon Oates of DecoExchange joined me for today’s episode. Damon serves people who make and sell decorative wreaths, so his customers are themselves businesspeople. Damon started a subscription box several years ago and hated it. He found it to be incredibly stressful and had difficulty planning the boxes and getting the needed supplies each month. That was before he met me! LOL   </p><p>Damon’s first subscription had as many as 900 subscribers, but he had let it dwindle down to just over 300 when he came into my world. After we talked about what he didn’t like about his subscription box, a few things became clear, the biggest of which was Damon and his business partner needed to learn how to plan. After joining Launch Your Box and gaining that knowledge and more, they decided to launch another subscription box with some changes. </p><p>During the pre-launch period, Damon leaned into what he does best - building and engaging with his audience. He asked them what they wanted, which it turns out wasn’t what he thought they wanted or what he wanted to give them. But he listened. He also spent that time building a waitlist. By consistently posting, texting, and going LIVE with a CTA to join the waitlist, Damon grew a list of more than 3,000 people in less than two months. That waitlist currently has 14,000 people on it! </p><p>The launch of the new subscription box resulted in 350 subscribers. That number continued to grow each month for the next 1 ½ years at which point there were 3,200 subscribers. They decided to hold steady at 3,200 for now and the only way to become a subscriber is to get on the waitlist and hope for someone to cancel. Damon has generated major FOMO by employing three things I teach every subscription box owner to create - scarcity, urgency, and exclusivity. </p><p>Damon shared his advice for other subscription box owners whether you’re new to the game or looking to grow. </p><ol>
<li><br></li>
<li>Listen to your people and give them what they want. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Start with 10-20 boxes or even a one-time box to try it out and see what works. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Pick one social media platform, be consistent, and show up. (You’ll find Damon on Facebook!)</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Pick your niche and go deep. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Serve before you sell. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ol><p>Join me for this episode as Damon shares how he went from hoping his subscription box business would die off to nurturing an excited, vibrant community of more than 3,200 monthly subscribers with thousands more waiting to get in. </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Damon: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/decoexchange">DecoExchange on Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/DecoExchange/?fbclid=IwAR3x5tqLzrGbqtKyBHrfEefRlJutTY-IYJIIdc2bBP63Kh7UBNk9ccj55pM"> DecoExchange on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.decoexchange.com/?gclid=Cj0KCQjw0oyYBhDGARIsAMZEuMuPUC-h8qrhnoOMWPHuKqaRxnfUaFWiOxNQHSSB0ZDxxZsZuY0q7acaAngOEALw_wcB"> DecoExchange Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1667</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[79ca1783-cf08-46b0-bd05-d754982e6f40]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8857400526.mp3?updated=1701784425" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>083: Supersizing Your Audience with Video Views Ads</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/083-super-size-your-audience-with-video-ads</link>
      <description>“Social media is a place to find our people, gather them up, and then focus only on them.” - Susan Bradley. 
My biz bestie Susan Bradley of The Social Sales Girls joined me for today’s episode to talk all things video view ads. Susan shared how using video and supplementing the organic reach you get with video with some ad dollars is the fastest, most effective way to grow a great big, warm audience of people without spending a lot of money.  
Facebook and Instagram ads don’t work like they used to. Costs have gone up and the ROI has changed. The way you use Facebook and Instagram ads needs to change, too. Instead of running ads to directly sell, you need to run ads to collect people to retarget and nurture them. Then you’ll sell to them. 
Videos, especially short videos, are how we reach “non-followers,” those people who would be interested in what we offer but who aren’t yet part of our world. With video ads, you’re taking what’s already working for you on Instagram and Facebook and amplifying it by putting a few dollars a day of ad spend behind it. 
Join me for this episode as Susan shares so much valuable information about why and how to use video view ads to grow a warm audience and the two things you need to measure to determine if those ads are working. There has never been a better opportunity to find our people and Susan is here to show us how. 
Susan’s Ads Made Easy Coaching Week starts August 21st! Sign up  HERE. 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Susan: 



The Social Sales Girls on Instagram



The Social Sales Girls on Facebook



The Social Sales Girls Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 17 Aug 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Supersizing Your Audience with Video Views Ads</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>83</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c93a2c70-b0bf-11ed-b273-9fd9de04865b/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“Social media is a place to find our people, gather them up, and then focus only on them.” - Susan Bradley.  My biz bestie Susan Bradley of The Social Sales Girls joined me for today’s episode to talk all things video view ads. Susan shared...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Social media is a place to find our people, gather them up, and then focus only on them.” - Susan Bradley. 
My biz bestie Susan Bradley of The Social Sales Girls joined me for today’s episode to talk all things video view ads. Susan shared how using video and supplementing the organic reach you get with video with some ad dollars is the fastest, most effective way to grow a great big, warm audience of people without spending a lot of money.  
Facebook and Instagram ads don’t work like they used to. Costs have gone up and the ROI has changed. The way you use Facebook and Instagram ads needs to change, too. Instead of running ads to directly sell, you need to run ads to collect people to retarget and nurture them. Then you’ll sell to them. 
Videos, especially short videos, are how we reach “non-followers,” those people who would be interested in what we offer but who aren’t yet part of our world. With video ads, you’re taking what’s already working for you on Instagram and Facebook and amplifying it by putting a few dollars a day of ad spend behind it. 
Join me for this episode as Susan shares so much valuable information about why and how to use video view ads to grow a warm audience and the two things you need to measure to determine if those ads are working. There has never been a better opportunity to find our people and Susan is here to show us how. 
Susan’s Ads Made Easy Coaching Week starts August 21st! Sign up  HERE. 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Susan: 



The Social Sales Girls on Instagram



The Social Sales Girls on Facebook



The Social Sales Girls Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“Social media is a place to find our people, gather them up, and then focus only on them.” - Susan Bradley. </p><p>My biz bestie Susan Bradley of The Social Sales Girls joined me for today’s episode to talk all things video view ads. Susan shared how using video and supplementing the organic reach you get with video with some ad dollars is the fastest, most effective way to grow a great big, warm audience of people without spending a lot of money.  </p><p>Facebook and Instagram ads don’t work like they used to. Costs have gone up and the ROI has changed. The way you use Facebook and Instagram ads needs to change, too. Instead of running ads to directly sell, you need to run ads to collect people to retarget and nurture them. Then you’ll sell to them. </p><p>Videos, especially short videos, are how we reach “non-followers,” those people who would be interested in what we offer but who aren’t yet part of our world. With video ads, you’re taking what’s already working for you on Instagram and Facebook and amplifying it by putting a few dollars a day of ad spend behind it. </p><p>Join me for this episode as Susan shares so much valuable information about why and how to use video view ads to grow a warm audience and the two things you need to measure to determine if those ads are working. There has never been a better opportunity to find our people and Susan is here to show us how. </p><p>Susan’s Ads Made Easy Coaching Week starts August 21st! Sign up <a href="https://classroom.thesocialsalesgirls.com/a/2147488425/zgW6HoFL"> HERE</a>. </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Susan: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/socialsalesgirls/">The Social Sales Girls on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/thesocialsalesgirls">The Social Sales Girls on Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://thesocialsalesgirls.com/">The Social Sales Girls Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>﻿</strong><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2176</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ec00ac18-c20d-4305-a872-25b59f88f280]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8526632908.mp3?updated=1701784436" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>082: Generating Over $20K a Month with a Digital Subscription</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/082-generating-over-20k-a-month-with-a-digital-subscription</link>
      <description>“Lean into what your people are loving and asking for. And if there’s a digital option, go for it!” - Stacey Collins
Subscriptions aren’t always physical items showing up on your doorstep. Think Netflix, Disney +, or an online newspaper. After today’s episode, you’ll also think about Stacey Collins and her Printable Club. 
Stacey is a member of Launch Your Box and a self-proclaimed lover of all things decorating, crafting, and shopping. She has spent years building a wildly loyal audience through her blog and social media. Stacey is creative, energetic, and FUN! She’s also a very smart businesswoman. 
Stacey serves her audience. She served them for a long time before selling to them. When 2020 hit and we were all stuck at home, looking for things to do and people to connect with, Stacey went online and served her audience by crafting with them a LOT. She was coming up with new ideas for crafts to meet the demand and got the idea to craft using her custom-designed printables. Her audience LOVED it and asked for more. And more. And more. 
Stacey’s Printable Club was born. The first launch brought in 800 subscribers! And it has continued to grow. Now, two years in, Stacey has more than 2,000 monthly subscribers. And the best part - other than more than $20,000 in monthly recurring revenue - is this subscription requires no packing or shipping. It’s 100% digital. She’s not sending anything physical. Instead, her subscribers use digital items to create something physical. 
Stacey’s subscription came out of a desire to serve her audience by offering them what they wanted in a way that saved them money. 
Join me for this episode as we dive into digital subscriptions. We’ll talk about the ways they’re different from physical subscriptions and the ways they’re the same. You might even discover a digital subscription would work for your business! 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Stacey: 



Wilshire Collections on Instagram



Wilshire Collections on Facebook



Wilshire Collections Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 10 Aug 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Generating Over $20K a Month with a Digital Subscription</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>82</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c94f0348-b0bf-11ed-b273-5bdc7aa60154/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“Lean into what your people are loving and asking for. And if there’s a digital option, go for it!” - Stacey Collins Subscriptions aren’t always physical items showing up on your doorstep. Think Netflix, Disney +, or an online newspaper. After...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Lean into what your people are loving and asking for. And if there’s a digital option, go for it!” - Stacey Collins
Subscriptions aren’t always physical items showing up on your doorstep. Think Netflix, Disney +, or an online newspaper. After today’s episode, you’ll also think about Stacey Collins and her Printable Club. 
Stacey is a member of Launch Your Box and a self-proclaimed lover of all things decorating, crafting, and shopping. She has spent years building a wildly loyal audience through her blog and social media. Stacey is creative, energetic, and FUN! She’s also a very smart businesswoman. 
Stacey serves her audience. She served them for a long time before selling to them. When 2020 hit and we were all stuck at home, looking for things to do and people to connect with, Stacey went online and served her audience by crafting with them a LOT. She was coming up with new ideas for crafts to meet the demand and got the idea to craft using her custom-designed printables. Her audience LOVED it and asked for more. And more. And more. 
Stacey’s Printable Club was born. The first launch brought in 800 subscribers! And it has continued to grow. Now, two years in, Stacey has more than 2,000 monthly subscribers. And the best part - other than more than $20,000 in monthly recurring revenue - is this subscription requires no packing or shipping. It’s 100% digital. She’s not sending anything physical. Instead, her subscribers use digital items to create something physical. 
Stacey’s subscription came out of a desire to serve her audience by offering them what they wanted in a way that saved them money. 
Join me for this episode as we dive into digital subscriptions. We’ll talk about the ways they’re different from physical subscriptions and the ways they’re the same. You might even discover a digital subscription would work for your business! 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Stacey: 



Wilshire Collections on Instagram



Wilshire Collections on Facebook



Wilshire Collections Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“Lean into what your people are loving and asking for. And if there’s a digital option, go for it!” - Stacey Collins</p><p>Subscriptions aren’t always physical items showing up on your doorstep. Think Netflix, Disney +, or an online newspaper. After today’s episode, you’ll also think about Stacey Collins and her Printable Club. </p><p>Stacey is a member of Launch Your Box and a self-proclaimed lover of all things decorating, crafting, and shopping. She has spent years building a wildly loyal audience through her blog and social media. Stacey is creative, energetic, and FUN! She’s also a very smart businesswoman. </p><p>Stacey serves her audience. She served them for a long time before selling to them. When 2020 hit and we were all stuck at home, looking for things to do and people to connect with, Stacey went online and served her audience by crafting with them a LOT. She was coming up with new ideas for crafts to meet the demand and got the idea to craft using her custom-designed printables. Her audience LOVED it and asked for more. And more. And more. </p><p>Stacey’s Printable Club was born. The first launch brought in 800 subscribers! And it has continued to grow. Now, two years in, Stacey has more than 2,000 monthly subscribers. And the best part - other than more than $20,000 in monthly recurring revenue - is this subscription requires no packing or shipping. It’s 100% digital. She’s not sending anything physical. Instead, her subscribers use digital items to create something physical. </p><p>Stacey’s subscription came out of a desire to serve her audience by offering them what they wanted in a way that saved them money. </p><p>Join me for this episode as we dive into digital subscriptions. We’ll talk about the ways they’re different from physical subscriptions and the ways they’re the same. You might even discover a digital subscription would work for your business! </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Stacey: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/wilshire_collections/">Wilshire Collections on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/wilshirecollections">Wilshire Collections on Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://shopwilshirecollections.com/">Wilshire Collections Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>﻿</strong><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1246</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8a48c8a7-e6ed-4750-a8b3-1a207d265155]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4193467978.mp3?updated=1701784478" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>081: Running a Giveaway to Build Your List</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/081-running-a-giveaway-to-build-your-list</link>
      <description>Audience building should always be on your to-do list. Whether you already have a subscription box or you’re just getting started, consistently work to reach and engage new people. 
One audience building strategy I teach inside Launch Your Box is to run a giveaway on social media. I use a free, easy-to-use software called Kingsumo to run my giveaways a couple of times a year. My last giveaway added 1500 people to my email list!  
When you run a giveaway, follow four simple steps 
 

Determine your goal - why are you running a giveaway? 

To grow your following.

To build your email or text list.  

To gauge interest in your potential box. 

All of the above!

 

Determine your prize.

Your prize needs to be “worth it” - what would make you enter a contest? 

Consider offering a box or a 3-6 month subscription. 

 

Create your timeline.

Your giveaway should run for 7-14 days. 

Share, share, share!

Send an email to your list - remember, some of them may not follow you on social media yet. 

Social posts - videos, stories, etc. 

Keep talking about it throughout the 7-14 days to keep the excitement going. 


There are rules for running giveaways on social media. You need to be aware of these rules and follow them. 


The contest must be free to enter - it cannot be combined with a purchase. 

The winner must be chosen randomly. 

The winner must be announced publicly. 

You must state clearly (in posts and your contest rules) that your giveaway has no affiliation with the platform. 


Every week inside Launch Your Box, members are setting up and running giveaways. It’s one of the best things you can do to jump-start your audience building no matter where you are in your subscription box journey. 

Join me for this episode as I talk about why you should run a giveaway as part of your audience building strategy, the steps to follow to make it a success, and the important rules you need to follow! 

Important Links: 


 6 in 60 Workshop - Sarah’s Method for Curating 6 Subscription Boxes in 60 Minutes

Kingsumo


Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 03 Aug 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Running a Giveaway to Build Your List</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>81</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c96598f6-b0bf-11ed-b273-e7fc41fbb0c5/image/9062c4bf25dab6a2c3e172a3410a9f5b.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Audience building should always be on your to-do list. Whether you already have a subscription box or you’re just getting started, consistently work to reach and engage new people.  One audience building strategy I teach inside Launch Your Box...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Audience building should always be on your to-do list. Whether you already have a subscription box or you’re just getting started, consistently work to reach and engage new people. 
One audience building strategy I teach inside Launch Your Box is to run a giveaway on social media. I use a free, easy-to-use software called Kingsumo to run my giveaways a couple of times a year. My last giveaway added 1500 people to my email list!  
When you run a giveaway, follow four simple steps 
 

Determine your goal - why are you running a giveaway? 

To grow your following.

To build your email or text list.  

To gauge interest in your potential box. 

All of the above!

 

Determine your prize.

Your prize needs to be “worth it” - what would make you enter a contest? 

Consider offering a box or a 3-6 month subscription. 

 

Create your timeline.

Your giveaway should run for 7-14 days. 

Share, share, share!

Send an email to your list - remember, some of them may not follow you on social media yet. 

Social posts - videos, stories, etc. 

Keep talking about it throughout the 7-14 days to keep the excitement going. 


There are rules for running giveaways on social media. You need to be aware of these rules and follow them. 


The contest must be free to enter - it cannot be combined with a purchase. 

The winner must be chosen randomly. 

The winner must be announced publicly. 

You must state clearly (in posts and your contest rules) that your giveaway has no affiliation with the platform. 


Every week inside Launch Your Box, members are setting up and running giveaways. It’s one of the best things you can do to jump-start your audience building no matter where you are in your subscription box journey. 

Join me for this episode as I talk about why you should run a giveaway as part of your audience building strategy, the steps to follow to make it a success, and the important rules you need to follow! 

Important Links: 


 6 in 60 Workshop - Sarah’s Method for Curating 6 Subscription Boxes in 60 Minutes

Kingsumo


Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Audience building should always be on your to-do list. Whether you already have a subscription box or you’re just getting started, consistently work to reach and engage new people. </p><p>One audience building strategy I teach inside Launch Your Box is to run a giveaway on social media. I use a free, easy-to-use software called Kingsumo to run my giveaways a couple of times a year. My last giveaway added 1500 people to my email list!  </p><p>When you run a giveaway, follow four simple steps </p><p> </p><ul>
<li>Determine your goal - why are you running a giveaway? </li>
<li>To grow your following.</li>
<li>To build your email or text list.  </li>
<li>To gauge interest in your potential box. </li>
<li>All of the above!</li>
</ul><p> </p><ul>
<li>Determine your prize.</li>
<li>Your prize needs to be “worth it” - what would make you enter a contest? </li>
<li>Consider offering a box or a 3-6 month subscription. </li>
</ul><p> </p><ul>
<li>Create your timeline.</li>
<li>Your giveaway should run for 7-14 days. </li>
<li>Share, share, share!</li>
<li>Send an email to your list - remember, some of them may not follow you on social media yet. </li>
<li>Social posts - videos, stories, etc. </li>
<li>Keep talking about it throughout the 7-14 days to keep the excitement going. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>There are rules for running giveaways on social media. You need to be aware of these rules and follow them. </p><p><br></p><ul>
<li>The contest must be free to enter - it cannot be combined with a purchase. </li>
<li>The winner must be chosen randomly. </li>
<li>The winner must be announced publicly. </li>
<li>You must state clearly (in posts and your contest rules) that your giveaway has no affiliation with the platform. </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Every week inside Launch Your Box, members are setting up and running giveaways. It’s one of the best things you can do to jump-start your audience building no matter where you are in your subscription box journey. </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as I talk about why you should run a giveaway as part of your audience building strategy, the steps to follow to make it a success, and the important rules you need to follow! </p><p><br></p><p>Important Links: </p><ul>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e"> 6 in 60 Workshop</a> - Sarah’s Method for Curating 6 Subscription Boxes in 60 Minutes</li>
<li><a href="https://kingsumo.com/">Kingsumo</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1243</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[234eebf6-9cc5-4872-af9b-4b5456d810f8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4235542503.mp3?updated=1742276963" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>080: 30 Days to Launch</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/080-30-days-to-launch</link>
      <description>What if you were launching your subscription box in 30 days? 
Maybe you’re launching for the first time or you could be operating under a closed model and you’re launching to new subscribers. In order to be ready to launch - and for your audience to be ready for you to launch - there are five things you need to be doing or start doing right now. 
Before I go through those five things, I do want to say I’m recommending you launch in 30 days only if you’ve already spent time building an audience and you’ve got your tech figured out and in place. If not, you’ll need longer than 30 days. But if you’ve been audience building and you’ve got your tech ready to go, I want you to plan to launch in the next 30 days. 
Will it be perfect? No. Will it seem messy? Yes. Will putting it off make your launch more perfect or less messy when it finally does happen? No. Putting it off will simply delay you from taking the next step toward subscription box success. 
Back to those five things I want you to start doing right now: 
 



Set the date - be specific.



Email your list more frequently. 



 



Unboxings



Subscriber shares



Different ways to use items in your box



Sneak peeks for your upcoming launch 



Behind the scenes



Talk about your why



 



Increase video views.



Drive people to your waitlist and start emailing them right away. 



Generate leads with opt-ins.



 
The truth is you should be doing all of these things all year long in order to continuously feed the top of your funnel. So even if you’re not launching in 30 days, start focusing on these five areas now. That way, the next time you plan a launch - whether it’s your first or your fifth - you’ll be ready! 
Join me for this episode as I talk about why you should consider launching in the next 30 days and the five things you need to start doing right now to help make your launch a success. 
Important Links: 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 27 Jul 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>30 Days to Launch</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>80</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c97ab70e-b0bf-11ed-b273-d34e8ea3ba38/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>What if you were launching your subscription box in 30 days?  Maybe you’re launching for the first time or you could be operating under a closed model and you’re launching to new subscribers. In order to be ready to launch - and for your...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What if you were launching your subscription box in 30 days? 
Maybe you’re launching for the first time or you could be operating under a closed model and you’re launching to new subscribers. In order to be ready to launch - and for your audience to be ready for you to launch - there are five things you need to be doing or start doing right now. 
Before I go through those five things, I do want to say I’m recommending you launch in 30 days only if you’ve already spent time building an audience and you’ve got your tech figured out and in place. If not, you’ll need longer than 30 days. But if you’ve been audience building and you’ve got your tech ready to go, I want you to plan to launch in the next 30 days. 
Will it be perfect? No. Will it seem messy? Yes. Will putting it off make your launch more perfect or less messy when it finally does happen? No. Putting it off will simply delay you from taking the next step toward subscription box success. 
Back to those five things I want you to start doing right now: 
 



Set the date - be specific.



Email your list more frequently. 



 



Unboxings



Subscriber shares



Different ways to use items in your box



Sneak peeks for your upcoming launch 



Behind the scenes



Talk about your why



 



Increase video views.



Drive people to your waitlist and start emailing them right away. 



Generate leads with opt-ins.



 
The truth is you should be doing all of these things all year long in order to continuously feed the top of your funnel. So even if you’re not launching in 30 days, start focusing on these five areas now. That way, the next time you plan a launch - whether it’s your first or your fifth - you’ll be ready! 
Join me for this episode as I talk about why you should consider launching in the next 30 days and the five things you need to start doing right now to help make your launch a success. 
Important Links: 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What if you were launching your subscription box in 30 days? </p><p>Maybe you’re launching for the first time or you could be operating under a closed model and you’re launching to new subscribers. In order to be ready to launch - and for your audience to be ready for you to launch - there are five things you need to be doing or start doing right now. </p><p>Before I go through those five things, I do want to say I’m recommending you launch in 30 days only if you’ve already spent time building an audience and you’ve got your tech figured out and in place. If not, you’ll need longer than 30 days. But if you’ve been audience building and you’ve got your tech ready to go, I want you to plan to launch in the next 30 days. </p><p>Will it be perfect? No. Will it seem messy? Yes. Will putting it off make your launch more perfect or less messy when it finally does happen? No. Putting it off will simply delay you from taking the next step toward subscription box success. </p><p>Back to those five things I want you to start doing right now: </p><p> </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Set the date - be specific.</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Email your list more frequently. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Unboxings</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Subscriber shares</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Different ways to use items in your box</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Sneak peeks for your upcoming launch </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Behind the scenes</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Talk about your why</li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Increase video views.</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Drive people to your waitlist and start emailing them right away. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Generate leads with opt-ins.</li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>The truth is you should be doing all of these things all year long in order to continuously feed the top of your funnel. So even if you’re not launching in 30 days, start focusing on these five areas now. That way, the next time you plan a launch - whether it’s your first or your fifth - you’ll be ready! </p><p>Join me for this episode as I talk about why you should consider launching in the next 30 days and the five things you need to start doing right now to help make your launch a success. </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1218</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[5d64b1d0-549f-42f8-a4ac-9900875071fb]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9049401192.mp3?updated=1701784513" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>079: Give Yourself a Raise with a Subscription Box Side Hustle</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/079-give-yourself-a-raise-with-a-subscription-box-side-hustle</link>
      <description>What would an extra $1000 every month mean to you and your family?  
Inflation. Waiting for a raise that might not happen. So many people are looking for ways to earn extra income right now. Today I’m talking about how a subscription box side hustle could bring an extra $1000 a month to your family - with only 50 subscribers. 
A subscription box business can be a full-time business. But it doesn’t have to be. Many members of Launch Your Box have full-time, 9-5 style jobs and successful subscription box side hustles. They are nurse practitioners, teachers, certified registered nurse anesthetists, hair stylists, realtors, dentists, and more. They’re also subscription box owners who bring in additional income with their side hustles. 
You can, too! Let’s do the math. If you have 50 subscribers and make $20 of profit per box, that’s an extra $1000 going into your bank account every month. 
Of course, it’s going to take time and effort to get there. But following these six steps will have you well on your way to a successful subscription box side hustle. 
 
Identify what you like or have an interest in.
 



Make sure it’s something you’re good at or have expertise in. 



You have to be passionate about the subject matter or it won’t last! 



Don’t try to be like anyone else - YOU will set your subscription box apart.  



 
Ask yourself if there are other people around you with the same interest. 
 



That’s the audience you need to build! 



Where can you find more of those people? 



Where do they hang out online? 



 
Start a social media account(s) on the platforms where your people hang out.
 



Start sharing videos, posts, etc. 



Ask your friends to like your page and share it with their friends. 



Make sure you’re speaking the language of the person you are trying to attract. Messaging matters! 



 
Run a giveaway.
 



Use Kingsumo (it’s FREE!) 



The prize needs to be a box just like what you want to sell. 



Capture emails for those who enter your giveaway and start building your email list. 



 
Introduce the idea for the box to your audience.
 



Get their feedback and have them help you make decisions.  



You want their buy-in to validate your concept. 



Niche down if needed. 



 
Set a launch date and a goal. 
 



Create excitement and generate buzz. 



Get your new audience excited about the upcoming box! 



Engaging your audience is key at every stage of your subscription box journey, whether it’s your full-time gig or a side hustle. Continue to ask for feedback as you grow. Maintain an ongoing focus on audience building and keep serving your audience! 

Join me for this episode as I talk about why a subscription box side hustle might be right for you and the six steps you need to take in order to make yours a success. The kind of success that means significant additional income - every month! 
Important Links: 




 6 in 60 Workshop - Sarah’s Method for Curating 6 Subscription Boxes in 60 Minutes

Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 20 Jul 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Give Yourself a Raise with a Subscription Box Side Hustle</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>79</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c9945272-b0bf-11ed-b273-dfc1e5fa8efc/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>What would an extra $1000 every month mean to you and your family?   Inflation. Waiting for a raise that might not happen. So many people are looking for ways to earn extra income right now. Today I’m talking about how a subscription box...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What would an extra $1000 every month mean to you and your family?  
Inflation. Waiting for a raise that might not happen. So many people are looking for ways to earn extra income right now. Today I’m talking about how a subscription box side hustle could bring an extra $1000 a month to your family - with only 50 subscribers. 
A subscription box business can be a full-time business. But it doesn’t have to be. Many members of Launch Your Box have full-time, 9-5 style jobs and successful subscription box side hustles. They are nurse practitioners, teachers, certified registered nurse anesthetists, hair stylists, realtors, dentists, and more. They’re also subscription box owners who bring in additional income with their side hustles. 
You can, too! Let’s do the math. If you have 50 subscribers and make $20 of profit per box, that’s an extra $1000 going into your bank account every month. 
Of course, it’s going to take time and effort to get there. But following these six steps will have you well on your way to a successful subscription box side hustle. 
 
Identify what you like or have an interest in.
 



Make sure it’s something you’re good at or have expertise in. 



You have to be passionate about the subject matter or it won’t last! 



Don’t try to be like anyone else - YOU will set your subscription box apart.  



 
Ask yourself if there are other people around you with the same interest. 
 



That’s the audience you need to build! 



Where can you find more of those people? 



Where do they hang out online? 



 
Start a social media account(s) on the platforms where your people hang out.
 



Start sharing videos, posts, etc. 



Ask your friends to like your page and share it with their friends. 



Make sure you’re speaking the language of the person you are trying to attract. Messaging matters! 



 
Run a giveaway.
 



Use Kingsumo (it’s FREE!) 



The prize needs to be a box just like what you want to sell. 



Capture emails for those who enter your giveaway and start building your email list. 



 
Introduce the idea for the box to your audience.
 



Get their feedback and have them help you make decisions.  



You want their buy-in to validate your concept. 



Niche down if needed. 



 
Set a launch date and a goal. 
 



Create excitement and generate buzz. 



Get your new audience excited about the upcoming box! 



Engaging your audience is key at every stage of your subscription box journey, whether it’s your full-time gig or a side hustle. Continue to ask for feedback as you grow. Maintain an ongoing focus on audience building and keep serving your audience! 

Join me for this episode as I talk about why a subscription box side hustle might be right for you and the six steps you need to take in order to make yours a success. The kind of success that means significant additional income - every month! 
Important Links: 




 6 in 60 Workshop - Sarah’s Method for Curating 6 Subscription Boxes in 60 Minutes

Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What would an extra $1000 every month mean to you and your family?  </p><p>Inflation. Waiting for a raise that might not happen. So many people are looking for ways to earn extra income right now. Today I’m talking about how a subscription box side hustle could bring an extra $1000 a month to your family - with only 50 subscribers. </p><p>A subscription box business can be a full-time business. But it doesn’t have to be. Many members of Launch Your Box have full-time, 9-5 style jobs <em>and</em> successful subscription box side hustles. They are nurse practitioners, teachers, certified registered nurse anesthetists, hair stylists, realtors, dentists, and more. They’re also subscription box owners who bring in additional income with their side hustles. </p><p>You can, too! Let’s do the math. If you have 50 subscribers and make $20 of profit per box, that’s an extra $1000 going into your bank account <em>every month. </em></p><p>Of course, it’s going to take time and effort to get there. But following these six steps will have you well on your way to a successful subscription box side hustle. </p><p> </p><ul><li>Identify what you like or have an interest in.</li></ul><p> </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Make sure it’s something you’re good at or have expertise in. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>You have to be passionate about the subject matter or it won’t last! </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Don’t try to be like anyone else - YOU will set your subscription box apart.  </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><ul><li>Ask yourself if there are other people around you with the same interest. </li></ul><p> </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>That’s the audience you need to build! </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Where can you find more of those people? </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Where do they hang out online? </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><ul><li>Start a social media account(s) on the platforms where your people hang out.</li></ul><p> </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Start sharing videos, posts, etc. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Ask your friends to like your page and share it with their friends. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Make sure you’re speaking the language of the person you are trying to attract. Messaging matters! </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><ul><li>Run a giveaway.</li></ul><p> </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Use Kingsumo (it’s FREE!) </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>The prize needs to be a box just like what you want to sell. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Capture emails for those who enter your giveaway and start building your email list. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><ul><li>Introduce the idea for the box to your audience.</li></ul><p> </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Get their feedback and have them help you make decisions.  </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>You want their buy-in to validate your concept. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Niche down if needed. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><ul><li>Set a launch date and a goal. </li></ul><p> </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Create excitement and generate buzz. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Get your new audience excited about the upcoming box! </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Engaging your audience is key at every stage of your subscription box journey, whether it’s your full-time gig or a side hustle. Continue to ask for feedback as you grow. Maintain an ongoing focus on audience building and keep serving your audience! </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as I talk about why a subscription box side hustle might be right for you and the six steps you need to take in order to make yours a success. The kind of success that means significant additional income - every month! </p><p>Important Links: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e"> 6 in 60 Workshop</a> - Sarah’s Method for Curating 6 Subscription Boxes in 60 Minutes</li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>﻿</strong><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1338</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[aee0cd72-7f69-48cf-9208-5dc01aaa0a0d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1533441917.mp3?updated=1701784542" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>078: Is Your Business Recession Ready?</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/078-is-your-business-recession-ready</link>
      <description>In today’s episode, I’m talking about things you can do to make your subscription box business recession ready. 
While it’s not possible to “recession-proof” your business, it is possible to be recession ready. Now is not a time to panic. If we made it through a pandemic, we can make it through economic uncertainty. There are practical, actionable steps you can take to make managing this time less stressful. I walk you through seven of them in today’s episode. 



Get control of your inventory. It’s time to change your buying habits away from the panic buying we all practiced during the pandemic. I shifted my own buying behavior away from buying deep (fewer products in greater quantities) to buying wide (more products in lower quantities). 



Understand your cash flow. In order to build a long-term, sustainable business, you have to know and understand your numbers. Decreasing your inventory will increase your cash flow, but you still need to have products to sell. Understanding your rate of revenue vs. your rate of expenses allows you to make adjustments where necessary. 






Overhead



Software



Packaging &amp; shipping



Opportunities to buy in bulk 



Trim your expenses. Dig into your P&amp;L to identify your biggest expenses and any you don’t realize you’re even paying for. Look for areas where you can trim costs. 



Try a new platform. 



Use email and SMS marketing to get in their text messages and inboxes. 



Experiment with your posts/videos to make things new, fresh, and fun! 






Get in front of new people. Now is not the time to pull back on your marketing efforts. How are you serving your audience? Focus on organic, free ways to attract new people. 



Create additional revenue streams. If you don’t yet have a subscription box as part of your product-based business, start one. If you have a subscription box, consider what complementary products you can offer your customers? Don’t forget to consider digital products! 



Offer customization and convenience for a premium price. What can you offer those customers who want the ultimate experience and are willing to pay for it? 



 
Wow your customers. There is so much you can do that won’t cost you much at all. Make exceptional customer service the standard. Say thank you and show appreciation to your customers. Look for ways to surprise and delight your subscribers. 
 
Get my resource “10 Ways to Surprise &amp; Delight Your Subscribers” by texting SURPRISE to 940-204-0023. 
 
Don’t be afraid to serve and to sell during these uncertain economic times. Realize people want to buy what you have to offer. Now is the time to gain a deeper understanding of the financials of your business and make educated decisions. 
 
Join me for this episode as I talk about seven things you can start doing now to get your business recession ready. This is an episode to listen to with your notebook close by. You’re going to want to take a lot of notes! 
Important Links: 
10 Ways to Surprise &amp; Delight Your Subscribers - Text SURPRISE to 940-204-0023
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 


Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 13 Jul 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Is Your Business Recession Ready?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>78</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c9ab7312-b0bf-11ed-b273-9b5710b83af2/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>In today’s episode, I’m talking about things you can do to make your subscription box business recession ready.  While it’s not possible to “recession-proof” your business, it is possible to be recession ready. Now is not a time to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>In today’s episode, I’m talking about things you can do to make your subscription box business recession ready. 
While it’s not possible to “recession-proof” your business, it is possible to be recession ready. Now is not a time to panic. If we made it through a pandemic, we can make it through economic uncertainty. There are practical, actionable steps you can take to make managing this time less stressful. I walk you through seven of them in today’s episode. 



Get control of your inventory. It’s time to change your buying habits away from the panic buying we all practiced during the pandemic. I shifted my own buying behavior away from buying deep (fewer products in greater quantities) to buying wide (more products in lower quantities). 



Understand your cash flow. In order to build a long-term, sustainable business, you have to know and understand your numbers. Decreasing your inventory will increase your cash flow, but you still need to have products to sell. Understanding your rate of revenue vs. your rate of expenses allows you to make adjustments where necessary. 






Overhead



Software



Packaging &amp; shipping



Opportunities to buy in bulk 



Trim your expenses. Dig into your P&amp;L to identify your biggest expenses and any you don’t realize you’re even paying for. Look for areas where you can trim costs. 



Try a new platform. 



Use email and SMS marketing to get in their text messages and inboxes. 



Experiment with your posts/videos to make things new, fresh, and fun! 






Get in front of new people. Now is not the time to pull back on your marketing efforts. How are you serving your audience? Focus on organic, free ways to attract new people. 



Create additional revenue streams. If you don’t yet have a subscription box as part of your product-based business, start one. If you have a subscription box, consider what complementary products you can offer your customers? Don’t forget to consider digital products! 



Offer customization and convenience for a premium price. What can you offer those customers who want the ultimate experience and are willing to pay for it? 



 
Wow your customers. There is so much you can do that won’t cost you much at all. Make exceptional customer service the standard. Say thank you and show appreciation to your customers. Look for ways to surprise and delight your subscribers. 
 
Get my resource “10 Ways to Surprise &amp; Delight Your Subscribers” by texting SURPRISE to 940-204-0023. 
 
Don’t be afraid to serve and to sell during these uncertain economic times. Realize people want to buy what you have to offer. Now is the time to gain a deeper understanding of the financials of your business and make educated decisions. 
 
Join me for this episode as I talk about seven things you can start doing now to get your business recession ready. This is an episode to listen to with your notebook close by. You’re going to want to take a lot of notes! 
Important Links: 
10 Ways to Surprise &amp; Delight Your Subscribers - Text SURPRISE to 940-204-0023
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 


Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In today’s episode, I’m talking about things you can do to make your subscription box business recession ready. </p><p>While it’s not possible to “recession-proof” your business, it is possible to be recession ready. Now is not a time to panic. If we made it through a pandemic, we can make it through economic uncertainty. There are practical, actionable steps you can take to make managing this time less stressful. I walk you through seven of them in today’s episode. </p><ol>
<li><br></li>
<li>Get control of your inventory. It’s time to change your buying habits away from the panic buying we all practiced during the pandemic. I shifted my own buying behavior away from buying deep (fewer products in greater quantities) to buying wide (more products in lower quantities). </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Understand your cash flow. In order to build a long-term, sustainable business, you have to know and understand your numbers. Decreasing your inventory will increase your cash flow, but you still need to have products to sell. Understanding your rate of revenue vs. your rate of expenses allows you to make adjustments where necessary. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ol><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Overhead</li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Software</li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Packaging &amp; shipping</li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Opportunities to buy in bulk </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><ol><li>Trim your expenses. Dig into your P&amp;L to identify your biggest expenses and any you don’t realize you’re even paying for. Look for areas where you can trim costs. </li></ol><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Try a new platform. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Use email and SMS marketing to get in their text messages and inboxes. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Experiment with your posts/videos to make things new, fresh, and fun! </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><ol>
<li><br></li>
<li>Get in front of new people. Now is not the time to pull back on your marketing efforts. How are you serving your audience? Focus on organic, free ways to attract new people. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Create additional revenue streams. If you don’t yet have a subscription box as part of your product-based business, start one. If you have a subscription box, consider what complementary products you can offer your customers? Don’t forget to consider digital products! </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Offer customization and convenience for a premium price. What can you offer those customers who want the ultimate experience and are willing to pay for it? </li>
<li><br></li>
</ol><p> </p><ul><li>Wow your customers. There is so much you can do that won’t cost you much at all. Make exceptional customer service the standard. Say thank you and show appreciation to your customers. Look for ways to surprise and delight your subscribers. </li></ul><p> </p><ul><li>Get my resource “10 Ways to Surprise &amp; Delight Your Subscribers” by texting SURPRISE to 940-204-0023. </li></ul><p> </p><p>Don’t be afraid to serve and to sell during these uncertain economic times. Realize people want to buy what you have to offer. Now is the time to gain a deeper understanding of the financials of your business and make educated decisions. </p><p> </p><p>Join me for this episode as I talk about seven things you can start doing now to get your business recession ready. This is an episode to listen to with your notebook close by. You’re going to want to take a lot of notes! </p><p>Important Links: </p><ul><li>10 Ways to Surprise &amp; Delight Your Subscribers - Text SURPRISE to 940-204-0023</li></ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2059</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3a2e0ed4-794b-4834-b107-7a2029125cfb]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7500611580.mp3?updated=1701784557" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>077: Lean Into Your Best Selling Products and Create a One Thing of the Month Subscription</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/077-lean-into-your-best-selling-products-and-create-a-one-thing-of-the-month-subscription</link>
      <description>On today’s episode, I’m joined by Launch Your Box member and dog mom times eight, Rhonda Conces. 
Yes, I said eight! A true, dedicated lover of all things dog, Rhonda has eight pups of her own who help inspire her subscription box every month. 
Rhonda is the CEO and Founder of Monogramme No. 29. Her business was not initially focused on dogs. In fact, her first career was as a labor and delivery nurse. When an injury sidelined Rhonda, she turned to her love of crafting and soon found herself selling monogrammed items. Monogrammed pajamas became her best seller, especially with brides and bridal parties. 
When 2020 hit and the bridal industry shut down, Rhonda needed to pivot. She decided to focus on another customer favorite - personalized dog bandanas. Rhonda loved making them, her customers loved buying them, and their dogs looked too cute for words in them. Soon, Rhonda decided to offer her bandanas as a monthly subscription and Posh Puppies was born. 
Rhonda found and joined Launch Your Box a couple months after she launched her subscription and quickly soaked in as much knowledge as possible. She is a fantastic student and makes sure she does all the things in order to grow her business. 
Rhonda launched with 40 members in February of 2021 and now has 330 monthly subscribers! The recurring revenue her subscription brings into her business has changed her business and her life. So much is possible for Rhonda now, all because she leaned into one thing. 
Join me for this episode as Rhonda and I talk about why you should consider leaning into what your customers love and the many benefits of offering a one thing of the month subscription.
Important Links: 
Find and follow Tamara: 



Monogramme No. 29 on Instagram






Monogramme No. 29 on Facebook 



Monogramme No. 29 Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 06 Jul 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Lean Into Your Best Selling Products and Create a One Thing of the Month Subscription</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>77</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c9c1bdac-b0bf-11ed-b273-5f0176020f62/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>On today’s episode, I’m joined by Launch Your Box member and dog mom times eight, Rhonda Conces.  Yes, I said eight! A true, dedicated lover of all things dog, Rhonda has eight pups of her own who help inspire her subscription box every...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On today’s episode, I’m joined by Launch Your Box member and dog mom times eight, Rhonda Conces. 
Yes, I said eight! A true, dedicated lover of all things dog, Rhonda has eight pups of her own who help inspire her subscription box every month. 
Rhonda is the CEO and Founder of Monogramme No. 29. Her business was not initially focused on dogs. In fact, her first career was as a labor and delivery nurse. When an injury sidelined Rhonda, she turned to her love of crafting and soon found herself selling monogrammed items. Monogrammed pajamas became her best seller, especially with brides and bridal parties. 
When 2020 hit and the bridal industry shut down, Rhonda needed to pivot. She decided to focus on another customer favorite - personalized dog bandanas. Rhonda loved making them, her customers loved buying them, and their dogs looked too cute for words in them. Soon, Rhonda decided to offer her bandanas as a monthly subscription and Posh Puppies was born. 
Rhonda found and joined Launch Your Box a couple months after she launched her subscription and quickly soaked in as much knowledge as possible. She is a fantastic student and makes sure she does all the things in order to grow her business. 
Rhonda launched with 40 members in February of 2021 and now has 330 monthly subscribers! The recurring revenue her subscription brings into her business has changed her business and her life. So much is possible for Rhonda now, all because she leaned into one thing. 
Join me for this episode as Rhonda and I talk about why you should consider leaning into what your customers love and the many benefits of offering a one thing of the month subscription.
Important Links: 
Find and follow Tamara: 



Monogramme No. 29 on Instagram






Monogramme No. 29 on Facebook 



Monogramme No. 29 Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On today’s episode, I’m joined by Launch Your Box member and dog mom times eight, Rhonda Conces. </p><p>Yes, I said eight! A true, dedicated lover of all things dog, Rhonda has eight pups of her own who help inspire her subscription box every month. </p><p>Rhonda is the CEO and Founder of Monogramme No. 29. Her business was not initially focused on dogs. In fact, her first career was as a labor and delivery nurse. When an injury sidelined Rhonda, she turned to her love of crafting and soon found herself selling monogrammed items. Monogrammed pajamas became her best seller, especially with brides and bridal parties. </p><p>When 2020 hit and the bridal industry shut down, Rhonda needed to pivot. She decided to focus on another customer favorite - personalized dog bandanas. Rhonda loved making them, her customers loved buying them, and their dogs looked too cute for words in them. Soon, Rhonda decided to offer her bandanas as a monthly subscription and Posh Puppies was born. </p><p>Rhonda found and joined Launch Your Box a couple months after she launched her subscription and quickly soaked in as much knowledge as possible. She is a fantastic student and makes sure she does all the things in order to grow her business. </p><p>Rhonda launched with 40 members in February of 2021 and now has 330 monthly subscribers! The recurring revenue her subscription brings into her business has changed her business and her life. So much is possible for Rhonda now, all because she leaned into one thing. </p><p>Join me for this episode as Rhonda and I talk about why you should consider leaning into what <em>your</em> customers love and the many benefits of offering a one thing of the month subscription.</p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Tamara: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/monogramme29/">Monogramme No. 29 on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.facebook.com/monogramme29">Monogramme No. 29 on Facebook</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://monogramme29.com/">Monogramme No. 29 Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1730</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3c1461f8-fa5b-49bd-a767-5fc46d3cec5f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6567964025.mp3?updated=1701784597" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>076: From 0 to 200 Subscribers in 8 Days</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/076-episode-76</link>
      <description>On today’s episode, I’m joined by Tamara Bennett, one of my biz besties who also happens to be a member of Launch Your Box! 
Tamara is the founder and CEO of Southern A-Door-nments Decor where she teaches women how to paint door hangers. Her business has grown over the years thanks in no small part to Tamara’s dedication to creating connections with her audience. 
Tamara and I met at Stu McLaren’s Mastermind more than four years ago and hit it off right away. We talk all the time about all the things, including business. We had many discussions about her adding a subscription box to her business. So, when Tamara said she was joining Launch Your Box, I asked her why. She knew she could call me anytime to get answers to any questions she had. 
In true Tamara fashion, she had a ready answer. Because she knew me and my business so well, Tamara knew how much training was inside my membership. She also knew how amazing the Launch Your Box community is. Her reason for joining was simple - she didn’t want to miss out! 
Tamara is an excellent student who followed my instructions for having a successful launch to the letter. And it paid off. She launched her Big Box of Blanks and sold out all 200 spots in only 8 days! And she has plans to grow. 
Join me for this episode as Tamara and I talk about the importance of audience building and connecting with that audience, why Tamara was a very early adopter of Facebook Lives, and what she did to go from 0-200 subscribers in only eight days!
Important Links: 
Find and follow Tamara: 



 Southern A-Door-nments Decor on Tik Tok



Southern A-Door-nments Decor on Facebook



 Southern A-Door-nments Decor Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 29 Jun 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From 0 to 200 Subscribers in 8 Days</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>76</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c9d7df92-b0bf-11ed-b273-6f17f70ac35f/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>On today’s episode, I’m joined by Tamara Bennett, one of my biz besties who also happens to be a member of Launch Your Box!  Tamara is the founder and CEO of Southern A-Door-nments Decor where she teaches women how to paint door hangers. Her...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On today’s episode, I’m joined by Tamara Bennett, one of my biz besties who also happens to be a member of Launch Your Box! 
Tamara is the founder and CEO of Southern A-Door-nments Decor where she teaches women how to paint door hangers. Her business has grown over the years thanks in no small part to Tamara’s dedication to creating connections with her audience. 
Tamara and I met at Stu McLaren’s Mastermind more than four years ago and hit it off right away. We talk all the time about all the things, including business. We had many discussions about her adding a subscription box to her business. So, when Tamara said she was joining Launch Your Box, I asked her why. She knew she could call me anytime to get answers to any questions she had. 
In true Tamara fashion, she had a ready answer. Because she knew me and my business so well, Tamara knew how much training was inside my membership. She also knew how amazing the Launch Your Box community is. Her reason for joining was simple - she didn’t want to miss out! 
Tamara is an excellent student who followed my instructions for having a successful launch to the letter. And it paid off. She launched her Big Box of Blanks and sold out all 200 spots in only 8 days! And she has plans to grow. 
Join me for this episode as Tamara and I talk about the importance of audience building and connecting with that audience, why Tamara was a very early adopter of Facebook Lives, and what she did to go from 0-200 subscribers in only eight days!
Important Links: 
Find and follow Tamara: 



 Southern A-Door-nments Decor on Tik Tok



Southern A-Door-nments Decor on Facebook



 Southern A-Door-nments Decor Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On today’s episode, I’m joined by Tamara Bennett, one of my biz besties who also happens to be a member of Launch Your Box! </p><p>Tamara is the founder and CEO of Southern A-Door-nments Decor where she teaches women how to paint door hangers. Her business has grown over the years thanks in no small part to Tamara’s dedication to creating connections with her audience. </p><p>Tamara and I met at Stu McLaren’s Mastermind more than four years ago and hit it off right away. We talk all the time about all the things, including business. We had many discussions about her adding a subscription box to her business. So, when Tamara said she was joining Launch Your Box, I asked her why. She knew she could call me anytime to get answers to any questions she had. </p><p>In true Tamara fashion, she had a ready answer. Because she knew me and my business so well, Tamara knew how much training was inside my membership. She also knew how amazing the Launch Your Box community is. Her reason for joining was simple - she didn’t want to miss out! </p><p>Tamara is an excellent student who followed my instructions for having a successful launch to the letter. And it paid off. She launched her Big Box of Blanks and sold out all 200 spots in only 8 days! And she has plans to grow. </p><p>Join me for this episode as Tamara and I talk about the importance of audience building and connecting with that audience, why Tamara was a very early adopter of Facebook Lives, and what she did to go from 0-200 subscribers in only eight days!</p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Tamara: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.tiktok.com/@southernadoornmentsdecor?lang=en"> Southern A-Door-nments Decor on Tik Tok</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/southernadoornmentsdecor">Southern A-Door-nments Decor on Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.southernadoornmentsdecor.com/?gclid=CjwKCAjwquWVBhBrEiwAt1KmwqEE06V-sHF2a-6b-Cj1VFDdvh2Es7bfT_ZG8_acwLvYgW-QAcFCiRoCeJAQAvD_BwE"> Southern A-Door-nments Decor Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1971</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c24a45cd-5f51-4a98-bc18-1d4ee5c43410]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9870635395.mp3?updated=1701784629" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>075: Serving a Niched-Down Audience Reaps Over 1000 Subscribers in 2 Months</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/075-serving-a-niched-down-audience-reaps-over-1000-subscribers-in-2-months</link>
      <description>“When people are part of the process, they buy in.” - Britney Brown 
I’m so excited to introduce you to Britney Brown, Launch Your Box member and founder, CEO, and all the things of Imperfect Inspiration. Britney’s story and the incredible growth she’s seen in her company and her subscription box are actually perfectly inspirational! 
In 2020, Britney was a full-time photographer and mom of five. When the pandemic hit, the photography industry shut down. Britney turned to Tik Tok to document her life during this time and also to document her new ADHD diagnosis. During this time, by sharing her experience, she built a large following on Tik Tok. Over 700,000 followers large! 
Britney’s online business started with a planner she designed to meet the needs of ADHD humans like her. The planner was a HUGE success and led to additional products. That then led to a subscription box. As Britney put it, “It turns out people were into it.” 
“Into it” is a bit of an understatement. Britney launched and sold out 150 boxes almost immediately. She quickly figured out just how many boxes she could get products for and reopened for three days. Her first box shipped to 466 subscribers! The following month she opened to new subscribers again and closed with 1,111! She plans to open again to new subscribers in July and already has 8,000 people on her waitlist. 
What is the secret to Britney’s astonishing success? She listens to her audience. She built a community before she built her products. Britney believes in the absolute power of people feeling seen and heard. She carefully and intentionally built a community to let people know they are not the only one. Britney knows and truly understands that when people feel part of the process, they buy in. 
Join me for this episode as Britney and I talk about what it means to truly serve your audience and how you just might succeed beyond your wildest dreams by building a community first, one that feels seen and heard. 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Britney: 



Imperfect Inspiration on Tik Tok



Imperfect Inspiration on Facebook



Imperfect Inspiration Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 22 Jun 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Serving a Niched-Down Audience Reaps Over 1000 Subscribers in 2 Months</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>75</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/c9ef4e70-b0bf-11ed-b273-332d2cc2498e/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“When people are part of the process, they buy in.” - Britney Brown  I’m so excited to introduce you to Britney Brown, Launch Your Box member and founder, CEO, and all the things of Imperfect Inspiration. Britney’s story and the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“When people are part of the process, they buy in.” - Britney Brown 
I’m so excited to introduce you to Britney Brown, Launch Your Box member and founder, CEO, and all the things of Imperfect Inspiration. Britney’s story and the incredible growth she’s seen in her company and her subscription box are actually perfectly inspirational! 
In 2020, Britney was a full-time photographer and mom of five. When the pandemic hit, the photography industry shut down. Britney turned to Tik Tok to document her life during this time and also to document her new ADHD diagnosis. During this time, by sharing her experience, she built a large following on Tik Tok. Over 700,000 followers large! 
Britney’s online business started with a planner she designed to meet the needs of ADHD humans like her. The planner was a HUGE success and led to additional products. That then led to a subscription box. As Britney put it, “It turns out people were into it.” 
“Into it” is a bit of an understatement. Britney launched and sold out 150 boxes almost immediately. She quickly figured out just how many boxes she could get products for and reopened for three days. Her first box shipped to 466 subscribers! The following month she opened to new subscribers again and closed with 1,111! She plans to open again to new subscribers in July and already has 8,000 people on her waitlist. 
What is the secret to Britney’s astonishing success? She listens to her audience. She built a community before she built her products. Britney believes in the absolute power of people feeling seen and heard. She carefully and intentionally built a community to let people know they are not the only one. Britney knows and truly understands that when people feel part of the process, they buy in. 
Join me for this episode as Britney and I talk about what it means to truly serve your audience and how you just might succeed beyond your wildest dreams by building a community first, one that feels seen and heard. 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Britney: 



Imperfect Inspiration on Tik Tok



Imperfect Inspiration on Facebook



Imperfect Inspiration Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“When people are part of the process, they buy in.” - Britney Brown </p><p>I’m so excited to introduce you to Britney Brown, Launch Your Box member and founder, CEO, and all the things of Imperfect Inspiration. Britney’s story and the incredible growth she’s seen in her company <em>and</em> her subscription box are actually perfectly inspirational! </p><p>In 2020, Britney was a full-time photographer and mom of five. When the pandemic hit, the photography industry shut down. Britney turned to Tik Tok to document her life during this time and also to document her new ADHD diagnosis. During this time, by sharing her experience, she built a large following on Tik Tok. Over 700,000 followers large! </p><p>Britney’s online business started with a planner she designed to meet the needs of ADHD humans like her. The planner was a HUGE success and led to additional products. That then led to a subscription box. As Britney put it, “It turns out people were into it.” </p><p>“Into it” is a bit of an understatement. Britney launched and sold out 150 boxes almost immediately. She quickly figured out just how many boxes she could get products for and reopened for three days. Her first box shipped to 466 subscribers! The following month she opened to new subscribers again and closed with 1,111! She plans to open again to new subscribers in July and already has 8,000 people on her waitlist. </p><p>What is the secret to Britney’s astonishing success? She listens to her audience. She built a community before she built her products. Britney believes in the absolute power of people feeling seen and heard. She carefully and intentionally built a community to let people know they are not the only one. Britney knows and truly understands that when people feel part of the process, they buy in. </p><p>Join me for this episode as Britney and I talk about what it means to truly serve your audience and how you just might succeed beyond your wildest dreams by building a community first, one that feels seen and heard. </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Britney: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.tiktok.com/@imperfectinspiration">Imperfect Inspiration on Tik Tok</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/imperfectinspiration">Imperfect Inspiration on Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://imperfectinspiration.com/">Imperfect Inspiration Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2097</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3e094e23-f2b2-4f33-8b24-ea0932cc893d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4350003215.mp3?updated=1701784719" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>074: From 0 to 400 Subscribers: Turning One-Time Sales into Recurring Revenue</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/074-from-0-to-400-subscribers-turning-one-time-sales-into-recurring-revenue</link>
      <description>“Start with what you have and build up to what you want.” 
Welcome to my first on-location podcast episode! Launch Your Box member Rachel Duguay joined me live onstage at SubSummit, the first and only conference exclusively for the subscription box industry. 
Rachel and I met at last year’s SubSummit and she quickly became a member of Launch Your Box. At that time, Rachel and her husband’s business, MicroPuzzles, sold miniature puzzles as one-time purchases. 
In business since 2018, MicroPuzzles took off in 2020 when the entire world turned to puzzles as a way to pass the time together. MicroPuzzles are 4”x6” when complete and are adorably packaged in test tubes. Demand for their puzzles went through the roof and customers clamored for more designs. 
Rachel decided adding a subscription box to the business was the answer to giving her customers what they wanted. They launched what Rachel calls the 1.0 version and continued to improve and grow. A year later, they have 425 monthly subscribers and both she and her husband have turned a part-time side hustle into a full-time career. 
Rachel doesn’t just put MicroPuzzles in her own subscription boxes, she partners with other subscription box owners, too. Many members of Launch Your Box have featured Rachel’s tiny puzzles in their own subscription boxes, customized to their themes and their audiences! 
Part of Rachel’s success is due to her creative marketing, including an emphasis on product seeding. You’ll rarely find her without a stash of tiny puzzles on hand to use as “business cards.” She also does a fantastic job of building genuine connections with her audience which has contributed to her success. 
Join me for this episode as Rachel and I talk about the importance of doing something before it’s perfect, the rapid growth of her subscription box, and what led to a cross-country move that included getting the keys to a 3,000-square-foot warehouse. Find out, too, what makes Brian in shipping their most talked about employee.    
Important Links: 
Find and follow Rachel: 



MicroPuzzles on Facebook



MicroPuzzles on Instagram



MicroPuzzles Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 15 Jun 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From 0 to 400 Subscribers: Turning One-Time Sales into Recurring Revenue</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>74</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ca0745b6-b0bf-11ed-b273-2b18f2e2b7a6/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“Start with what you have and build up to what you want.”  Welcome to my first on-location podcast episode! Launch Your Box member Rachel Duguay joined me live onstage at SubSummit, the first and only conference exclusively for the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Start with what you have and build up to what you want.” 
Welcome to my first on-location podcast episode! Launch Your Box member Rachel Duguay joined me live onstage at SubSummit, the first and only conference exclusively for the subscription box industry. 
Rachel and I met at last year’s SubSummit and she quickly became a member of Launch Your Box. At that time, Rachel and her husband’s business, MicroPuzzles, sold miniature puzzles as one-time purchases. 
In business since 2018, MicroPuzzles took off in 2020 when the entire world turned to puzzles as a way to pass the time together. MicroPuzzles are 4”x6” when complete and are adorably packaged in test tubes. Demand for their puzzles went through the roof and customers clamored for more designs. 
Rachel decided adding a subscription box to the business was the answer to giving her customers what they wanted. They launched what Rachel calls the 1.0 version and continued to improve and grow. A year later, they have 425 monthly subscribers and both she and her husband have turned a part-time side hustle into a full-time career. 
Rachel doesn’t just put MicroPuzzles in her own subscription boxes, she partners with other subscription box owners, too. Many members of Launch Your Box have featured Rachel’s tiny puzzles in their own subscription boxes, customized to their themes and their audiences! 
Part of Rachel’s success is due to her creative marketing, including an emphasis on product seeding. You’ll rarely find her without a stash of tiny puzzles on hand to use as “business cards.” She also does a fantastic job of building genuine connections with her audience which has contributed to her success. 
Join me for this episode as Rachel and I talk about the importance of doing something before it’s perfect, the rapid growth of her subscription box, and what led to a cross-country move that included getting the keys to a 3,000-square-foot warehouse. Find out, too, what makes Brian in shipping their most talked about employee.    
Important Links: 
Find and follow Rachel: 



MicroPuzzles on Facebook



MicroPuzzles on Instagram



MicroPuzzles Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“Start with what you have and build up to what you want.” </p><p>Welcome to my first on-location podcast episode! Launch Your Box member Rachel Duguay joined me live onstage at SubSummit, the first and only conference exclusively for the subscription box industry. </p><p>Rachel and I met at last year’s SubSummit and she quickly became a member of Launch Your Box. At that time, Rachel and her husband’s business, MicroPuzzles, sold miniature puzzles as one-time purchases. </p><p>In business since 2018, MicroPuzzles took off in 2020 when the entire world turned to puzzles as a way to pass the time together. MicroPuzzles are 4”x6” when complete and are adorably packaged in test tubes. Demand for their puzzles went through the roof and customers clamored for more designs. </p><p>Rachel decided adding a subscription box to the business was the answer to giving her customers what they wanted. They launched what Rachel calls the 1.0 version and continued to improve and grow. A year later, they have 425 monthly subscribers and both she and her husband have turned a part-time side hustle into a full-time career. </p><p>Rachel doesn’t just put MicroPuzzles in her own subscription boxes, she partners with other subscription box owners, too. Many members of Launch Your Box have featured Rachel’s tiny puzzles in their own subscription boxes, customized to their themes and their audiences! </p><p>Part of Rachel’s success is due to her creative marketing, including an emphasis on product seeding. You’ll rarely find her without a stash of tiny puzzles on hand to use as “business cards.” She also does a fantastic job of building genuine connections with her audience which has contributed to her success. </p><p>Join me for this episode as Rachel and I talk about the importance of doing something <em>before</em> it’s perfect, the rapid growth of her subscription box, and what led to a cross-country move that included getting the keys to a 3,000-square-foot warehouse. Find out, too, what makes Brian in shipping their most talked about employee.    </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Rachel: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/micropuzzles">MicroPuzzles on Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/micropuzzles/">MicroPuzzles on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://micropuzzles.com/">MicroPuzzles Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1334</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0314eaea-86af-4c0c-b07f-59736a88ff0b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9742627735.mp3?updated=1701784780" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>073: Ask Sarah: How to Retain Subscribers in a World Where Costs are Rising with Beth Eaton of the Ruffled Daisy</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/073-ask-sarah-how-to-retain-subscribers-in-a-world-where-costs-are-rising-with-beth-eaton-of-the-ruffled-daisy</link>
      <description> 
Welcome to the last episode in my eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I’ve answered a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. 
This week Beth Eaton of The Ruffled Daisy is here to talk about something we’re all facing right now. How to retain subscribers in a world where costs are rising. 
Beth started her business 10 years ago selling completed home decor pieces. Soon, people wanted to learn how to make these pieces themselves and they wanted Beth to teach them. Beth started selling kits and building a community of crafters. She tried launching a subscription box a few years ago and it just didn’t stick with her community. When COVID struck and we all found ourselves at home, Beth tried again. This time her community was ready! She started with 23 subscribers and two years later has 330 monthly subscribers. 
Beth came to me with a question that a lot of my members have right now. With the challenges the world is facing right now and the increasing cost of absolutely everything, Beth wanted to know what she can do to retain her subscribers when her box isn’t seen as a need. 
The first question I asked Beth was about her retention rate. While she didn’t know the exact number (she was going to figure it out as soon as our interview ended), she did have valuable information. Beth knew the point in the life of their subscription at which many of her subscribers canceled. 
Knowing when you start to lose subscribers allows you to put some things in place to keep them on track. Beth and I talked about what she can do to recapture the sense of togetherness inside her community and help subscribers consume the contents of her box. 
We also talked about six important facets of the subscriber experience and identified some things Beth can do to make improvements. 



Reducing the length of time between payment and box in hand. 



Consistently communicating with subscribers. 



Having a cancellation survey in place and paying attention to the results. 



Getting personal - don’t just rely on automations. 



Focusing on customer service response time. 



Making customer reviews visible. 



Join me for this episode as Beth and I talk about the challenges subscription box owners face right now and the practical, actionable things she can do to improve her subscriber experience, retain more subscribers and continue to grow.   
Important Links: 
Find and follow Beth: 



The Ruffled Daisy on Facebook



The Ruffled Daisy on Instagram



The Ruffled Daisy Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today!

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 08 Jun 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Ask Sarah: How to Retain Subscribers in a World Where Costs are Rising with Beth Eaton of the Ruffled Daisy</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>73</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ca226a12-b0bf-11ed-b273-b39827d66e47/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>  Welcome to the last episode in my eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I’ve answered a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership.  This week Beth Eaton of The Ruffled Daisy is here to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary> 
Welcome to the last episode in my eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I’ve answered a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. 
This week Beth Eaton of The Ruffled Daisy is here to talk about something we’re all facing right now. How to retain subscribers in a world where costs are rising. 
Beth started her business 10 years ago selling completed home decor pieces. Soon, people wanted to learn how to make these pieces themselves and they wanted Beth to teach them. Beth started selling kits and building a community of crafters. She tried launching a subscription box a few years ago and it just didn’t stick with her community. When COVID struck and we all found ourselves at home, Beth tried again. This time her community was ready! She started with 23 subscribers and two years later has 330 monthly subscribers. 
Beth came to me with a question that a lot of my members have right now. With the challenges the world is facing right now and the increasing cost of absolutely everything, Beth wanted to know what she can do to retain her subscribers when her box isn’t seen as a need. 
The first question I asked Beth was about her retention rate. While she didn’t know the exact number (she was going to figure it out as soon as our interview ended), she did have valuable information. Beth knew the point in the life of their subscription at which many of her subscribers canceled. 
Knowing when you start to lose subscribers allows you to put some things in place to keep them on track. Beth and I talked about what she can do to recapture the sense of togetherness inside her community and help subscribers consume the contents of her box. 
We also talked about six important facets of the subscriber experience and identified some things Beth can do to make improvements. 



Reducing the length of time between payment and box in hand. 



Consistently communicating with subscribers. 



Having a cancellation survey in place and paying attention to the results. 



Getting personal - don’t just rely on automations. 



Focusing on customer service response time. 



Making customer reviews visible. 



Join me for this episode as Beth and I talk about the challenges subscription box owners face right now and the practical, actionable things she can do to improve her subscriber experience, retain more subscribers and continue to grow.   
Important Links: 
Find and follow Beth: 



The Ruffled Daisy on Facebook



The Ruffled Daisy on Instagram



The Ruffled Daisy Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today!

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p> </p><p>Welcome to the last episode in my eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I’ve answered a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. </p><p>This week Beth Eaton of The Ruffled Daisy is here to talk about something we’re all facing right now. How to retain subscribers in a world where costs are rising. </p><p>Beth started her business 10 years ago selling completed home decor pieces. Soon, people wanted to learn how to make these pieces themselves and they wanted Beth to teach them. Beth started selling kits and building a community of crafters. She tried launching a subscription box a few years ago and it just didn’t stick with her community. When COVID struck and we all found ourselves at home, Beth tried again. This time her community was ready! She started with 23 subscribers and two years later has 330 monthly subscribers. </p><p>Beth came to me with a question that a lot of my members have right now. With the challenges the world is facing right now and the increasing cost of absolutely everything, Beth wanted to know what she can do to retain her subscribers when her box isn’t seen as a need. </p><p>The first question I asked Beth was about her retention rate. While she didn’t know the exact number (she was going to figure it out as soon as our interview ended), she did have valuable information. Beth knew the point in the life of their subscription at which many of her subscribers canceled. </p><p>Knowing when you start to lose subscribers allows you to put some things in place to keep them on track. Beth and I talked about what she can do to recapture the sense of togetherness inside her community and help subscribers consume the contents of her box. </p><p>We also talked about six important facets of the subscriber experience and identified some things Beth can do to make improvements. </p><ol>
<li><br></li>
<li>Reducing the length of time between payment and box in hand. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Consistently communicating with subscribers. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Having a cancellation survey in place and paying attention to the results. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Getting personal - don’t just rely on automations. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Focusing on customer service response time. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Making customer reviews visible. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ol><p>Join me for this episode as Beth and I talk about the challenges subscription box owners face right now and the practical, actionable things she can do to improve her subscriber experience, retain more subscribers and continue to grow.   </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Beth: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/TheRuffledDaisy">The Ruffled Daisy on Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/theruffleddaisyks/">The Ruffled Daisy on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://theruffleddaisy.org/">The Ruffled Daisy Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today!</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1862</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0818cf6e-a33b-4915-b4eb-ca937fbbd1ba]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7941154238.mp3?updated=1701784823" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>072: Ask Sarah: How Do I Handle a Price Increase and Closing the Cart for My Subscriptions with Light of the Lamb</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/072-ask-sarah-how-do-i-handle-a-price-increase-and-closing-the-cart-for-my-subscriptions-with-light-of-the-lamb</link>
      <description>Welcome to episode seven of my eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I answer a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. 
This week Alivia Key of Light of the Lamb is here to talk about how to handle increasing the price of her subscription and whether it’s time to move from an open to a closed cart model.
Alivia has been a member of Launch Your Box for two years. During that time she has launched and grown two subscriptions - a monthly t-shirt subscription and a quarterly subscription box. 
Like all business owners right now, Alivia has seen her cost of goods sold increase significantly this year which means her subscriptions aren’t as profitable as they were. 
That increase in costs and decrease in profits led to Alivia bringing two related questions to me. The first is how to handle a price increase with her audience and the second is whether to move from an open to a closed subscription model. 
Alivia and I talked through the reasons for the price increase. I reminded her that in order to continue to serve her subscribers, her business needs to stay strong. And that means staying profitable. 
Moving to a closed cart is a perfect time to announce an upcoming price increase. 



It gives people a reason to BUY NOW! 



The upcoming price increase drives marketing for the closed cart - people need to get in now to be locked in at the current price. 



It creates urgency, scarcity, and FOMO! 



The next question is when and how to move to a closed cart. I recommended Alivia identify a two-week period when she can go all-in on the closed cart launch. Her social posts, LIVES, and emails need to stay focused on the launch. In her content, she needs to: 



Be transparent. Explain to her audience why she’s raising prices and closing her cart.   



Bring members onto her LIVES. Host “Girl Talk” and talk about why her subscription is more than just a t-shirt to them. 



Have fun with ads. Shake things up and get creative.



Send emails with links to her LIVES and explain the what and why behind the changes. 



During LIVES, show off past designs. 



Create a variety of ads and posts - some silly, some serious, some inspirational.  



I recommended Alivia go into full launch mode for two weeks instead of the usual 4-5 days. This is because she’s making a big change and needs to give her audience time to see what she’s posting and react to it. 
Join me for this episode as Alivia and I talk about making necessary changes to keep our businesses healthy and profitable. If you’re wondering how to handle a price increase or move to a closed cart subscription model, don’t miss this episode!  
Important Links: 
Find and follow Alivia: 



Light of the Lamb on Facebook



Light of the Lamb on Instagram



Light of the Lamb Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 01 Jun 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Ask Sarah: How Do I Handle a Price Increase and Closing the Cart for My Subscriptions with Light of the Lamb</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>72</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ca3ada84-b0bf-11ed-b273-1ff890a61436/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome to episode seven of my eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I answer a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership.  This week Alivia Key of Light of the Lamb is here to talk about how to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome to episode seven of my eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I answer a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. 
This week Alivia Key of Light of the Lamb is here to talk about how to handle increasing the price of her subscription and whether it’s time to move from an open to a closed cart model.
Alivia has been a member of Launch Your Box for two years. During that time she has launched and grown two subscriptions - a monthly t-shirt subscription and a quarterly subscription box. 
Like all business owners right now, Alivia has seen her cost of goods sold increase significantly this year which means her subscriptions aren’t as profitable as they were. 
That increase in costs and decrease in profits led to Alivia bringing two related questions to me. The first is how to handle a price increase with her audience and the second is whether to move from an open to a closed subscription model. 
Alivia and I talked through the reasons for the price increase. I reminded her that in order to continue to serve her subscribers, her business needs to stay strong. And that means staying profitable. 
Moving to a closed cart is a perfect time to announce an upcoming price increase. 



It gives people a reason to BUY NOW! 



The upcoming price increase drives marketing for the closed cart - people need to get in now to be locked in at the current price. 



It creates urgency, scarcity, and FOMO! 



The next question is when and how to move to a closed cart. I recommended Alivia identify a two-week period when she can go all-in on the closed cart launch. Her social posts, LIVES, and emails need to stay focused on the launch. In her content, she needs to: 



Be transparent. Explain to her audience why she’s raising prices and closing her cart.   



Bring members onto her LIVES. Host “Girl Talk” and talk about why her subscription is more than just a t-shirt to them. 



Have fun with ads. Shake things up and get creative.



Send emails with links to her LIVES and explain the what and why behind the changes. 



During LIVES, show off past designs. 



Create a variety of ads and posts - some silly, some serious, some inspirational.  



I recommended Alivia go into full launch mode for two weeks instead of the usual 4-5 days. This is because she’s making a big change and needs to give her audience time to see what she’s posting and react to it. 
Join me for this episode as Alivia and I talk about making necessary changes to keep our businesses healthy and profitable. If you’re wondering how to handle a price increase or move to a closed cart subscription model, don’t miss this episode!  
Important Links: 
Find and follow Alivia: 



Light of the Lamb on Facebook



Light of the Lamb on Instagram



Light of the Lamb Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome to episode seven of my eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I answer a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. </p><p>This week Alivia Key of Light of the Lamb is here to talk about how to handle increasing the price of her subscription and whether it’s time to move from an open to a closed cart model.</p><p>Alivia has been a member of Launch Your Box for two years. During that time she has launched and grown two subscriptions - a monthly t-shirt subscription and a quarterly subscription box. </p><p>Like all business owners right now, Alivia has seen her cost of goods sold increase significantly this year which means her subscriptions aren’t as profitable as they were. </p><p>That increase in costs and decrease in profits led to Alivia bringing two related questions to me. The first is how to handle a price increase with her audience and the second is whether to move from an open to a closed subscription model. </p><p>Alivia and I talked through the reasons for the price increase. I reminded her that in order to continue to serve her subscribers, her business needs to stay strong. And that means staying profitable. </p><p>Moving to a closed cart is a perfect time to announce an upcoming price increase. </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>It gives people a reason to BUY NOW! </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>The upcoming price increase drives marketing for the closed cart - people need to get in now to be locked in at the current price. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>It creates urgency, scarcity, and FOMO! </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>The next question is when and how to move to a closed cart. I recommended Alivia identify a two-week period when she can go all-in on the closed cart launch. Her social posts, LIVES, and emails need to stay focused on the launch. In her content, she needs to: </p><ol>
<li><br></li>
<li>Be transparent. Explain to her audience why she’s raising prices and closing her cart.   </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Bring members onto her LIVES. Host “Girl Talk” and talk about why her subscription is more than just a t-shirt to them. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Have fun with ads. Shake things up and get creative.</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Send emails with links to her LIVES and explain the what and why behind the changes. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>During LIVES, show off past designs. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Create a variety of ads and posts - some silly, some serious, some inspirational.  </li>
<li><br></li>
</ol><p>I recommended Alivia go into full launch mode for two weeks instead of the usual 4-5 days. This is because she’s making a big change and needs to give her audience time to see what she’s posting and react to it. </p><p>Join me for this episode as Alivia and I talk about making necessary changes to keep our businesses healthy and profitable. If you’re wondering how to handle a price increase or move to a closed cart subscription model, don’t miss this episode!  </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Alivia: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/shoplightofthelamb">Light of the Lamb on Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/shoplightofthelamb/">Light of the Lamb on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://shoplightofthelamb.com/">Light of the Lamb Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1999</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ece4f723-3fbe-4f6b-8655-12bb32ddc1b5]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7736299139.mp3?updated=1701784849" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>071: Ask Sarah: How Do I Introduce My Subscription Box to My Audience? with Holden Keepsakes</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/071-ask-sarah-how-do-i-introduce-my-subscription-box-to-my-audience-with-holden-keepsakes</link>
      <description>Welcome to episode six of my eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I answer a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. 
This week BreeAnna Holden of Holden Keepsakes is here to talk about how to introduce her subscription box to the audience she has built for her online product-based business. 
BreeAnna is an OG member of Launch Your Box. That means she has been inside my coaching membership for almost two years. But, she hasn’t launched her subscription box yet. She’s stuck. 
When she started her glitter tumbler business three years ago (and you HAVE to see the gorgeous tumblers she makes), BreeAnna was looking for a way to keep busy while her husband worked nights and to make a little extra income for her family. BreeAnna has dreamed of adding a subscription box for two years. She knows it will provide consistent, recurring revenue and allow her to plan her workload more effectively, allowing for more family time. 
So what’s standing in BreeAnna’s way? She has a great product that her customers love. As an OG member of Launch Your Box, she has learned all the things. She has seen so many others start, launch, and grow their own subscription boxes. So why hasn’t BreeAnna taken action on her subscription box dreams? Self-doubt, indecision, and social media. 
BreeAnna, like SO MANY women I talk to inside and outside my membership, struggles with self-doubt. She doubts herself and her ability to make this subscription box dream a reality. It’s important to realize that nearly everyone feels like this sometimes. I know I did. 
BreeAnna is also stuck, unable to decide what kind of box to offer her audience. She keeps going back and forth between a one item of the month box and a curated box. 
Social media engagement is a challenge for BreeAnna. She struggles to be consistent on social media and isn’t getting the engagement she needs. Without an actual box to share, she’s unsure how she should introduce the idea of a subscription box to her audience. 
BreeAnna and I talked through the things that have been holding her back. After talking through her mindset issues, I got practical and gave BreeAnna practical solutions to: 



Re-engage her audience.   



Plan six months' worth of boxes. 



Choose a launch date and create a pre-launch plan. 



Once we talked through everything and BreeAnna had a plan for moving forward, I could hear the lightness in her voice. She committed to a launch date of July 14th and has a plan to get there with an engaged, excited audience.  
Join me for this episode as BreeAnna and I talk about what holds so many of us back from taking action - self-doubt. I know you’ll relate to BreeAnna’s story and take away inspiration and practical advice to help you take action toward achieving your own subscription box dreams. 
Important Links: 
Find and follow BreeAnna: 



Holden Keepsakes on Facebook



Holden Keepsakes on Instagram



 Holden Keepsakes Etsy Shop



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 25 May 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Ask Sarah: How Do I Introduce My Subscription Box to My Audience? with Holden Keepsakes</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>71</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ca513ab8-b0bf-11ed-b273-0f76a21e0f31/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome to episode six of my eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I answer a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership.  This week BreeAnna Holden of Holden Keepsakes is here to talk about how to...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome to episode six of my eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I answer a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. 
This week BreeAnna Holden of Holden Keepsakes is here to talk about how to introduce her subscription box to the audience she has built for her online product-based business. 
BreeAnna is an OG member of Launch Your Box. That means she has been inside my coaching membership for almost two years. But, she hasn’t launched her subscription box yet. She’s stuck. 
When she started her glitter tumbler business three years ago (and you HAVE to see the gorgeous tumblers she makes), BreeAnna was looking for a way to keep busy while her husband worked nights and to make a little extra income for her family. BreeAnna has dreamed of adding a subscription box for two years. She knows it will provide consistent, recurring revenue and allow her to plan her workload more effectively, allowing for more family time. 
So what’s standing in BreeAnna’s way? She has a great product that her customers love. As an OG member of Launch Your Box, she has learned all the things. She has seen so many others start, launch, and grow their own subscription boxes. So why hasn’t BreeAnna taken action on her subscription box dreams? Self-doubt, indecision, and social media. 
BreeAnna, like SO MANY women I talk to inside and outside my membership, struggles with self-doubt. She doubts herself and her ability to make this subscription box dream a reality. It’s important to realize that nearly everyone feels like this sometimes. I know I did. 
BreeAnna is also stuck, unable to decide what kind of box to offer her audience. She keeps going back and forth between a one item of the month box and a curated box. 
Social media engagement is a challenge for BreeAnna. She struggles to be consistent on social media and isn’t getting the engagement she needs. Without an actual box to share, she’s unsure how she should introduce the idea of a subscription box to her audience. 
BreeAnna and I talked through the things that have been holding her back. After talking through her mindset issues, I got practical and gave BreeAnna practical solutions to: 



Re-engage her audience.   



Plan six months' worth of boxes. 



Choose a launch date and create a pre-launch plan. 



Once we talked through everything and BreeAnna had a plan for moving forward, I could hear the lightness in her voice. She committed to a launch date of July 14th and has a plan to get there with an engaged, excited audience.  
Join me for this episode as BreeAnna and I talk about what holds so many of us back from taking action - self-doubt. I know you’ll relate to BreeAnna’s story and take away inspiration and practical advice to help you take action toward achieving your own subscription box dreams. 
Important Links: 
Find and follow BreeAnna: 



Holden Keepsakes on Facebook



Holden Keepsakes on Instagram



 Holden Keepsakes Etsy Shop



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome to episode six of my eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I answer a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. </p><p>This week BreeAnna Holden of Holden Keepsakes is here to talk about how to introduce her subscription box to the audience she has built for her online product-based business. </p><p>BreeAnna is an OG member of Launch Your Box. That means she has been inside my coaching membership for almost two years. But, she hasn’t launched her subscription box yet. She’s stuck. </p><p>When she started her glitter tumbler business three years ago (and you HAVE to see the gorgeous tumblers she makes), BreeAnna was looking for a way to keep busy while her husband worked nights and to make a little extra income for her family. BreeAnna has dreamed of adding a subscription box for two years. She knows it will provide consistent, recurring revenue and allow her to plan her workload more effectively, allowing for more family time. </p><p>So what’s standing in BreeAnna’s way? She has a great product that her customers love. As an OG member of Launch Your Box, she has learned all the things. She has seen so many others start, launch, and grow their own subscription boxes. So why hasn’t BreeAnna taken action on her subscription box dreams? Self-doubt, indecision, and social media. </p><p>BreeAnna, like SO MANY women I talk to inside and outside my membership, struggles with self-doubt. She doubts herself and her ability to make this subscription box dream a reality. It’s important to realize that nearly everyone feels like this sometimes. I know I did. </p><p>BreeAnna is also stuck, unable to decide what kind of box to offer her audience. She keeps going back and forth between a one item of the month box and a curated box. </p><p>Social media engagement is a challenge for BreeAnna. She struggles to be consistent on social media and isn’t getting the engagement she needs. Without an actual box to share, she’s unsure how she should introduce the idea of a subscription box to her audience. </p><p>BreeAnna and I talked through the things that have been holding her back. After talking through her mindset issues, I got practical and gave BreeAnna practical solutions to: </p><ol>
<li><br></li>
<li>Re-engage her audience.   </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Plan six months' worth of boxes. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Choose a launch date and create a pre-launch plan. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ol><p>Once we talked through everything and BreeAnna had a plan for moving forward, I could hear the lightness in her voice. She committed to a launch date of July 14th and has a plan to get there with an engaged, excited audience.  </p><p>Join me for this episode as BreeAnna and I talk about what holds so many of us back from taking action - self-doubt. I know you’ll relate to BreeAnna’s story and take away inspiration and practical advice to help you take action toward achieving your own subscription box dreams. </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow BreeAnna: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/HoldenKeepsakes">Holden Keepsakes on Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/holdenkeepsakes/">Holden Keepsakes on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.etsy.com/shop/HoldenKeepsakes?fbclid=IwAR0aVQmcCS6oC0uTA8xaMwOCT5MayJv8-f4S1EqetgNggqklBTdOJZo4unM"> Holden Keepsakes Etsy Shop</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1750</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0f665d0f-c993-4281-a4bb-b7457cb4f023]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6327247733.mp3?updated=1701784870" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>070: Ask Sarah: How Do You Handle Variations and Personalization for Your Subscription Box? with Sunflower &amp; Scout</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/episode-070</link>
      <description>Welcome to episode five of my eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I answer a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. 
This week Maria Riebe of Sunflower &amp; Scout is here to talk about how to handle variations and personalization for her subscription box. 
Like so many entrepreneurs, the pandemic forced Maria to pivot. A true antique-lover, she had been producing an outdoor vintage market, Rustapalooza. She had experienced a great deal of success and national recognition for this show. Covid caused the cancellation of the show and, after a time, Maria’s heart started pointing her in a new direction. 
Maria is a member of an impassioned group of leather bag lovers - and they all love straps! So she decided to start an online shop focused specifically on bag straps and accessories. While setting up her online shop, Maria discovered Launch Your Box. She loved the idea of curating a monthly box for her customers that included a bag strap, as well as some kind of accessory, tee, or multiple items. 
Maria wants to include some type of personalized item in her subscription box but is stumped by the tech it would involve. With a launch date of August 1st, it’s time to figure out these details! 
Maria knows my team handles all kinds of variations and personalization - from six different sizes in my t-shirt subscriptions to the monogrammed items that go in the Monogram Box every month. 
We talked through the challenges involved and I told Maria what she needs to do in order to successfully manage variations and personalization.  



Be prepared to scale. Realize that what can be done with 50 subscribers will need to be done with 500 subscribers.  



Outsource personalization as you grow or hire in-house help. 



Put systems and processes in place to manage subscriber details.



Now that we talked through what Maria needs to get in place to feel comfortable offering variations and personalization to her future subscribers, she is moving toward that August 1st launch date with confidence. 
Join me for this episode as Maria and I talk about the systems and processes every subscription box owner needs to have in place, and why they are so important when your box includes variations and personalization. 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Maria: 




Sunflower &amp; Scout Website 

 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 18 May 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Ask Sarah: How Do You Handle Variations and Personalization for Your Subscription Box? with Sunflower &amp; Scout</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>70</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ca675ca8-b0bf-11ed-b273-4f23fa300a54/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome to episode five of my eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I answer a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership.  This week Maria Riebe of Sunflower &amp; Scout is here to talk about how...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome to episode five of my eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I answer a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. 
This week Maria Riebe of Sunflower &amp; Scout is here to talk about how to handle variations and personalization for her subscription box. 
Like so many entrepreneurs, the pandemic forced Maria to pivot. A true antique-lover, she had been producing an outdoor vintage market, Rustapalooza. She had experienced a great deal of success and national recognition for this show. Covid caused the cancellation of the show and, after a time, Maria’s heart started pointing her in a new direction. 
Maria is a member of an impassioned group of leather bag lovers - and they all love straps! So she decided to start an online shop focused specifically on bag straps and accessories. While setting up her online shop, Maria discovered Launch Your Box. She loved the idea of curating a monthly box for her customers that included a bag strap, as well as some kind of accessory, tee, or multiple items. 
Maria wants to include some type of personalized item in her subscription box but is stumped by the tech it would involve. With a launch date of August 1st, it’s time to figure out these details! 
Maria knows my team handles all kinds of variations and personalization - from six different sizes in my t-shirt subscriptions to the monogrammed items that go in the Monogram Box every month. 
We talked through the challenges involved and I told Maria what she needs to do in order to successfully manage variations and personalization.  



Be prepared to scale. Realize that what can be done with 50 subscribers will need to be done with 500 subscribers.  



Outsource personalization as you grow or hire in-house help. 



Put systems and processes in place to manage subscriber details.



Now that we talked through what Maria needs to get in place to feel comfortable offering variations and personalization to her future subscribers, she is moving toward that August 1st launch date with confidence. 
Join me for this episode as Maria and I talk about the systems and processes every subscription box owner needs to have in place, and why they are so important when your box includes variations and personalization. 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Maria: 




Sunflower &amp; Scout Website 

 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome to episode five of my eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I answer a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. </p><p>This week Maria Riebe of Sunflower &amp; Scout is here to talk about how to handle variations and personalization for her subscription box. </p><p>Like so many entrepreneurs, the pandemic forced Maria to pivot. A true antique-lover, she had been producing an outdoor vintage market, Rustapalooza. She had experienced a great deal of success and national recognition for this show. Covid caused the cancellation of the show and, after a time, Maria’s heart started pointing her in a new direction. </p><p>Maria is a member of an impassioned group of leather bag lovers - and they all love straps! So she decided to start an online shop focused specifically on bag straps and accessories. While setting up her online shop, Maria discovered Launch Your Box. She loved the idea of curating a monthly box for her customers that included a bag strap, as well as some kind of accessory, tee, or multiple items. </p><p>Maria wants to include some type of personalized item in her subscription box but is stumped by the tech it would involve. With a launch date of August 1st, it’s time to figure out these details! </p><p>Maria knows my team handles all kinds of variations and personalization - from six different sizes in my t-shirt subscriptions to the monogrammed items that go in the Monogram Box every month. </p><p>We talked through the challenges involved and I told Maria what she needs to do in order to successfully manage variations and personalization.  </p><ol>
<li><br></li>
<li>Be prepared to scale. Realize that what can be done with 50 subscribers will need to be done with 500 subscribers.  </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Outsource personalization as you grow or hire in-house help. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Put systems and processes in place to manage subscriber details.</li>
<li><br></li>
</ol><p>Now that we talked through what Maria needs to get in place to feel comfortable offering variations and personalization to her future subscribers, she is moving toward that August 1st launch date with confidence. </p><p>Join me for this episode as Maria and I talk about the systems and processes every subscription box owner needs to have in place, and why they are so important when your box includes variations and personalization. </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Maria: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="http://sunflowerandscout.com">Sunflower &amp; Scout Website</a> </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1776</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[306de875-941b-4986-8426-c56b03ec6983]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8728950814.mp3?updated=1701784878" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>069: Ask Sarah: How to Grow Your Subscription Past the Plateau - with Print Cut Craft</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/069-ask-sarah-how-to-grow-your-subscription-past-the-plateau-with-print-cut-craft</link>
      <description>Welcome to episode four of my eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I’ll be answering a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. 
This week Traci Gibson of Print Cut Craft and I tackled the question of how to grow a subscription past a plateau. 
Traci started her business ten years ago, selling printables and teaching classes at scrapbooking conferences. When she (and her family) got tired of all the weekend travel, Traci took her scrapbook kits online. She pivoted and her business evolved as she listened to what her customers wanted and served their needs. In 2020, Traci started teaching LIVE workshops online and selling craft kits to go with them. This has been a huge boost to her business and led to a membership where members craft with Traci each month using their Cricut machines and her svg files. 
Traci thought about starting a subscription box for a while. She joined Launch Your Box and watched and learned. When she decided to take action and launched her box, her membership was the perfect audience for her subscription, and it grew quickly. For a while. Then came the plateau. Traci’s growth slowed and then stopped. She has hit a plateau and reached out for my help to get past it.  
We talked through some possible reasons Traci’s subscription box growth has slowed and recommended some steps for Traci to take to jumpstart her growth. She needs to: 



Shake things up - make it new and fresh for her audience. 



Reduce churn by increasing retention and decreasing involuntary churn. 



Up the exclusivity factor of her subscription. 



Get in front of new audiences. 



With a clear plan and specific action steps to take, Traci feels confident her subscription will start to grow again. I can’t wait to hear about the growth she sees as a result of making these changes.   
Join me for this episode as Traci and I talk about something nearly every subscription owner experiences - hitting a plateau. A plateau is a reminder that we need to constantly be learning and growing as subscription box owners. And that sometimes we need to change what we’re doing in order to continue to grow. 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Traci: 



Print Cut Craft Boutique on Facebook



Print Cut Craft on Instagram






Print Cut Craft Website 



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today!

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 11 May 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Ask Sarah: How to Grow Your Subscription Past the Plateau - with Print Cut Craft</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>69</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ca7db764-b0bf-11ed-b273-ab39294fa5f1/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome to episode four of my eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I’ll be answering a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership.  This week Traci Gibson of Print Cut Craft and I tackled the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome to episode four of my eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I’ll be answering a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. 
This week Traci Gibson of Print Cut Craft and I tackled the question of how to grow a subscription past a plateau. 
Traci started her business ten years ago, selling printables and teaching classes at scrapbooking conferences. When she (and her family) got tired of all the weekend travel, Traci took her scrapbook kits online. She pivoted and her business evolved as she listened to what her customers wanted and served their needs. In 2020, Traci started teaching LIVE workshops online and selling craft kits to go with them. This has been a huge boost to her business and led to a membership where members craft with Traci each month using their Cricut machines and her svg files. 
Traci thought about starting a subscription box for a while. She joined Launch Your Box and watched and learned. When she decided to take action and launched her box, her membership was the perfect audience for her subscription, and it grew quickly. For a while. Then came the plateau. Traci’s growth slowed and then stopped. She has hit a plateau and reached out for my help to get past it.  
We talked through some possible reasons Traci’s subscription box growth has slowed and recommended some steps for Traci to take to jumpstart her growth. She needs to: 



Shake things up - make it new and fresh for her audience. 



Reduce churn by increasing retention and decreasing involuntary churn. 



Up the exclusivity factor of her subscription. 



Get in front of new audiences. 



With a clear plan and specific action steps to take, Traci feels confident her subscription will start to grow again. I can’t wait to hear about the growth she sees as a result of making these changes.   
Join me for this episode as Traci and I talk about something nearly every subscription owner experiences - hitting a plateau. A plateau is a reminder that we need to constantly be learning and growing as subscription box owners. And that sometimes we need to change what we’re doing in order to continue to grow. 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Traci: 



Print Cut Craft Boutique on Facebook



Print Cut Craft on Instagram






Print Cut Craft Website 



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today!

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome to episode four of my eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I’ll be answering a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. </p><p>This week Traci Gibson of Print Cut Craft and I tackled the question of how to grow a subscription past a plateau. </p><p>Traci started her business ten years ago, selling printables and teaching classes at scrapbooking conferences. When she (and her family) got tired of all the weekend travel, Traci took her scrapbook kits online. She pivoted and her business evolved as she listened to what her customers wanted and served their needs. In 2020, Traci started teaching LIVE workshops online and selling craft kits to go with them. This has been a huge boost to her business and led to a membership where members craft with Traci each month using their Cricut machines and her svg files. </p><p>Traci thought about starting a subscription box for a while. She joined Launch Your Box and watched and learned. When she decided to take action and launched her box, her membership was the perfect audience for her subscription, and it grew quickly. For a while. Then came the plateau. Traci’s growth slowed and then stopped. She has hit a plateau and reached out for my help to get past it.  </p><p>We talked through some possible reasons Traci’s subscription box growth has slowed and recommended some steps for Traci to take to jumpstart her growth. She needs to: </p><ol>
<li><br></li>
<li>Shake things up - make it new and fresh for her audience. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Reduce churn by increasing retention and decreasing involuntary churn. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Up the exclusivity factor of her subscription. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Get in front of new audiences. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ol><p>With a clear plan and specific action steps to take, Traci feels confident her subscription will start to grow again. I can’t wait to hear about the growth she sees as a result of making these changes.   </p><p>Join me for this episode as Traci and I talk about something nearly every subscription owner experiences - hitting a plateau. A plateau is a reminder that we need to constantly be learning and growing as subscription box owners. And that sometimes we need to change what we’re doing in order to continue to grow. </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Traci: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/printcutcraft">Print Cut Craft Boutique on Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/printcutcraft/">Print Cut Craft on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.printcutcraft.net/">Print Cut Craft Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today!</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1854</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cfd3245d-9c87-49e1-a275-d3b73537333f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6628572109.mp3?updated=1701785050" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>068: Ask Sarah: How to Get People to Engage on Social Media - with the Crafty Lady Boutique</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/068-ask-sarah-how-to-get-people-to-engage-on-social-media-with-the-crafty-lady-boutique</link>
      <description>Welcome to the third installment of my eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I’ll be answering a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. 
This week Lexie Haubert of The Crafty Lady Boutique and I tackled the question of how to get people to engage with her content on social media. 
Lexie’s online business came about when she was unable to find bridal party gifts she liked while planning her own wedding and instead created her own. When she received incredibly positive feedback about her creations, she decided to take them online. The result? Her Etsy store ranks in the top 1% of all bridal sellers in the world! In addition to one-time boxes and individual gifts, Lexie offers a monthly subscription box for brides who are planning a wedding. 
Like all wedding-related businesses, The Crafty Lady Boutique was greatly impacted by the pandemic. Things are on a definite upswing and Lexie is focusing her efforts on regaining and further growing her business. But the lack of social media engagement is holding her back. 
When someone is struggling to get engagement on social media, I am usually able to identify the cause easily. The problem might be: 



Lack of followers



Lack of consistency 



An issue with the quality of photos or videos



An issue with the product itself 



In Lexie’s case, NONE of these is the problem. She has a good number of followers. She has been posting consistently for the past several months. Her images and videos are GREAT. And her products? Well, let’s just say there’s a reason she’s in the top 1% of her category! 
So what is the issue? Why aren’t Lexie’s followers engaging with her content? 
No one is seeing her stuff. She’s not getting in front of the RIGHT people - brides. When people don’t engage with your content, it hurts the algorithm and even fewer people see it. Lexie needs to find more of the right people. She needs to find more brides. 
I asked more questions and came up with an action plan for Lexie that includes: 



Picking a day and time to go LIVE each week. 



Teasing something that’s coming up on the LIVE in a post and an email. 



Getting her friends to show up to her LIVES to ask questions that generate conversations. 



Boosting one post per week. 



Finding more brides by holding quarterly giveaways and getting active inside bridal groups.  



Serving her audience by creating content that establishes her as a wedding authority. 



With this new plan in place, Lexie knows what she needs to do to find new brides and attract more of the right people. And once they discover the great products she’s offering, the rest will take care of itself!  
Join me for this episode as Lexie and I dig deep into what really drives engagement on social media. It’s more than having pretty pictures of great products. Discover easy-to-implement strategies to attract the right followers and increase your engagement, too.  
Important Links: 
Find and follow Lexie: 



Crafty Lady Boutique on Facebook



Crafty Lady Boutique on Instagram






Crafty Lady Boutique Website 



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 04 May 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Ask Sarah: How to Get People to Engage on Social Media - with the Crafty Lady Boutique</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>68</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ca948bf6-b0bf-11ed-b273-636463dbb7d3/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Welcome to the third installment of my eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I’ll be answering a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership.  This week Lexie Haubert of The Crafty Lady Boutique...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Welcome to the third installment of my eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I’ll be answering a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. 
This week Lexie Haubert of The Crafty Lady Boutique and I tackled the question of how to get people to engage with her content on social media. 
Lexie’s online business came about when she was unable to find bridal party gifts she liked while planning her own wedding and instead created her own. When she received incredibly positive feedback about her creations, she decided to take them online. The result? Her Etsy store ranks in the top 1% of all bridal sellers in the world! In addition to one-time boxes and individual gifts, Lexie offers a monthly subscription box for brides who are planning a wedding. 
Like all wedding-related businesses, The Crafty Lady Boutique was greatly impacted by the pandemic. Things are on a definite upswing and Lexie is focusing her efforts on regaining and further growing her business. But the lack of social media engagement is holding her back. 
When someone is struggling to get engagement on social media, I am usually able to identify the cause easily. The problem might be: 



Lack of followers



Lack of consistency 



An issue with the quality of photos or videos



An issue with the product itself 



In Lexie’s case, NONE of these is the problem. She has a good number of followers. She has been posting consistently for the past several months. Her images and videos are GREAT. And her products? Well, let’s just say there’s a reason she’s in the top 1% of her category! 
So what is the issue? Why aren’t Lexie’s followers engaging with her content? 
No one is seeing her stuff. She’s not getting in front of the RIGHT people - brides. When people don’t engage with your content, it hurts the algorithm and even fewer people see it. Lexie needs to find more of the right people. She needs to find more brides. 
I asked more questions and came up with an action plan for Lexie that includes: 



Picking a day and time to go LIVE each week. 



Teasing something that’s coming up on the LIVE in a post and an email. 



Getting her friends to show up to her LIVES to ask questions that generate conversations. 



Boosting one post per week. 



Finding more brides by holding quarterly giveaways and getting active inside bridal groups.  



Serving her audience by creating content that establishes her as a wedding authority. 



With this new plan in place, Lexie knows what she needs to do to find new brides and attract more of the right people. And once they discover the great products she’s offering, the rest will take care of itself!  
Join me for this episode as Lexie and I dig deep into what really drives engagement on social media. It’s more than having pretty pictures of great products. Discover easy-to-implement strategies to attract the right followers and increase your engagement, too.  
Important Links: 
Find and follow Lexie: 



Crafty Lady Boutique on Facebook



Crafty Lady Boutique on Instagram






Crafty Lady Boutique Website 



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



 
Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Welcome to the third installment of my eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I’ll be answering a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. </p><p>This week Lexie Haubert of The Crafty Lady Boutique and I tackled the question of how to get people to engage with her content on social media. </p><p>Lexie’s online business came about when she was unable to find bridal party gifts she liked while planning her own wedding and instead created her own. When she received incredibly positive feedback about her creations, she decided to take them online. The result? Her Etsy store ranks in the top 1% of all bridal sellers in the world! In addition to one-time boxes and individual gifts, Lexie offers a monthly subscription box for brides who are planning a wedding. </p><p>Like all wedding-related businesses, The Crafty Lady Boutique was greatly impacted by the pandemic. Things are on a definite upswing and Lexie is focusing her efforts on regaining and further growing her business. But the lack of social media engagement is holding her back. </p><p>When someone is struggling to get engagement on social media, I am usually able to identify the cause easily. The problem might be: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Lack of followers</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Lack of consistency </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>An issue with the quality of photos or videos</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>An issue with the product itself </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>In Lexie’s case, NONE of these is the problem. She has a good number of followers. She has been posting consistently for the past several months. Her images and videos are GREAT. And her products? Well, let’s just say there’s a reason she’s in the top 1% of her category! </p><p>So what <em>is</em> the issue? Why aren’t Lexie’s followers engaging with her content? </p><p>No one is seeing her stuff. She’s not getting in front of the RIGHT people - brides. When people don’t engage with your content, it hurts the algorithm and even fewer people see it. Lexie needs to find more of the right people. She needs to find more brides. </p><p>I asked more questions and came up with an action plan for Lexie that includes: </p><ol>
<li><br></li>
<li>Picking a day and time to go LIVE each week. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Teasing something that’s coming up on the LIVE in a post and an email. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Getting her friends to show up to her LIVES to ask questions that generate conversations. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Boosting one post per week. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Finding more brides by holding quarterly giveaways and getting active inside bridal groups.  </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Serving her audience by creating content that establishes her as a wedding authority. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ol><p>With this new plan in place, Lexie knows what she needs to do to find new brides and attract more of the right people. And once they discover the great products she’s offering, the rest will take care of itself!  </p><p>Join me for this episode as Lexie and I dig deep into what really drives engagement on social media. It’s more than having pretty pictures of great products. Discover easy-to-implement strategies to attract the right followers and increase your engagement, too.  </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Lexie: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/CraftyLadyBoutique">Crafty Lady Boutique on Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/craftyladyboutique/">Crafty Lady Boutique on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://craftyladyboutique.com/">Crafty Lady Boutique Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1515</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1b79a995-c2ca-49d7-8304-9d73bd4c3d0c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8928432622.mp3?updated=1701785069" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>067: Ask Sarah: What's Holding Me Back from Starting My Subscription Box?</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/067-ask-sarah-whats-holding-me-back-from-starting-my-subscription-box</link>
      <description>“Messy Action is better than no action.” - Sarah Williams
Welcome to the second in my new eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I’ll be answering a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. 
This week’s question came from Gina Rich of Serendipity Lane. Gina’s question was simple. “Why am I stuck?” 
Gina had a brick-and-mortar scrapbooking and card-making business for 15 years. She still runs occasional classes and scrapbooking retreats out of the space, but moved the majority of her business online due to the pandemic. Gina offered one-time “Happy Boxes” as products and also had a small, very casual card “subscription” with about 20 subscribers. 
Gina found Launch Your Box and realized a card subscription box was what she wanted to do. She has a proven concept. She knows just what she wants to include and the experience she wants to provide her subscriber. But… she hasn’t launched. She’s not even close to launching yet. Why? What’s holding her back? 
Gina’s first issue is shared by SO MANY people who want to start subscription boxes. She wants everything to be perfect before she starts. 
The hard truth? Nothing will ever be perfect. And messy action is always better than no action. It’s time for Gina to give herself permission to not be perfect and commit to taking messy action. Every day.  
Gina is also stuck because she can’t decide how to price her box. She wants to provide value to her subscribers but finds it takes a lot of her time to fulfill the box she wants to offer. I took Gina through the research I did on similar boxes that are already on the market. We discussed whether the price she had in mind was a good one and brainstormed ideas to add value that won’t require more of her time. 
The last thing that has Gina stuck is social media. She’s not getting engagement because she’s not consistent. Gina needs to be consistent in order to build an audience to launch to! I gave her homework to complete and will be checking in 30 days from now.  
Join me for this episode as Gina and I talk through what’s holding her back and how she can get unstuck and start making progress toward launching her box. I know you’ll learn as much as she did from this interview.  
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Gina: 



Serendipity Lane on Facebook



Serendipity Lane Website 



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today!

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 27 Apr 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Ask Sarah: What's Holding Me Back from Starting My Subscription Box?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>67</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/caaa77a4-b0bf-11ed-b273-0b160bb253ff/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“Messy Action is better than no action.” - Sarah Williams Welcome to the second in my new eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I’ll be answering a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. ...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Messy Action is better than no action.” - Sarah Williams
Welcome to the second in my new eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I’ll be answering a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. 
This week’s question came from Gina Rich of Serendipity Lane. Gina’s question was simple. “Why am I stuck?” 
Gina had a brick-and-mortar scrapbooking and card-making business for 15 years. She still runs occasional classes and scrapbooking retreats out of the space, but moved the majority of her business online due to the pandemic. Gina offered one-time “Happy Boxes” as products and also had a small, very casual card “subscription” with about 20 subscribers. 
Gina found Launch Your Box and realized a card subscription box was what she wanted to do. She has a proven concept. She knows just what she wants to include and the experience she wants to provide her subscriber. But… she hasn’t launched. She’s not even close to launching yet. Why? What’s holding her back? 
Gina’s first issue is shared by SO MANY people who want to start subscription boxes. She wants everything to be perfect before she starts. 
The hard truth? Nothing will ever be perfect. And messy action is always better than no action. It’s time for Gina to give herself permission to not be perfect and commit to taking messy action. Every day.  
Gina is also stuck because she can’t decide how to price her box. She wants to provide value to her subscribers but finds it takes a lot of her time to fulfill the box she wants to offer. I took Gina through the research I did on similar boxes that are already on the market. We discussed whether the price she had in mind was a good one and brainstormed ideas to add value that won’t require more of her time. 
The last thing that has Gina stuck is social media. She’s not getting engagement because she’s not consistent. Gina needs to be consistent in order to build an audience to launch to! I gave her homework to complete and will be checking in 30 days from now.  
Join me for this episode as Gina and I talk through what’s holding her back and how she can get unstuck and start making progress toward launching her box. I know you’ll learn as much as she did from this interview.  
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Gina: 



Serendipity Lane on Facebook



Serendipity Lane Website 



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today!

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“Messy Action is better than no action.” - Sarah Williams</p><p>Welcome to the second in my new eight-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I’ll be answering a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. </p><p>This week’s question came from Gina Rich of Serendipity Lane. Gina’s question was simple. “Why am I stuck?” </p><p>Gina had a brick-and-mortar scrapbooking and card-making business for 15 years. She still runs occasional classes and scrapbooking retreats out of the space, but moved the majority of her business online due to the pandemic. Gina offered one-time “Happy Boxes” as products and also had a small, very casual card “subscription” with about 20 subscribers. </p><p>Gina found Launch Your Box and realized a card subscription box was what she wanted to do. She has a proven concept. She knows just what she wants to include and the experience she wants to provide her subscriber. But… she hasn’t launched. She’s not even close to launching yet. Why? What’s holding her back? </p><p>Gina’s first issue is shared by SO MANY people who want to start subscription boxes. She wants everything to be perfect before she starts. </p><p>The hard truth? Nothing will ever be perfect. And messy action is always better than no action. It’s time for Gina to give herself permission to not be perfect and commit to taking messy action. Every day.  </p><p>Gina is also stuck because she can’t decide how to price her box. She wants to provide value to her subscribers but finds it takes a lot of her time to fulfill the box she wants to offer. I took Gina through the research I did on similar boxes that are already on the market. We discussed whether the price she had in mind was a good one and brainstormed ideas to add value that won’t require more of her time. </p><p>The last thing that has Gina stuck is social media. She’s not getting engagement because she’s not consistent. Gina needs to be consistent in order to build an audience to launch to! I gave her homework to complete and will be checking in 30 days from now.  </p><p>Join me for this episode as Gina and I talk through what’s holding her back and how she can get unstuck and start making progress toward launching her box. I know you’ll learn as much as she did from this interview.  </p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Gina: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/enidserendipitylane">Serendipity Lane on Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="http://enidserendipitylane.com">Serendipity Lane Website </a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today!</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2072</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1a3e0bc9-336b-4149-a103-f55fd62da8fc]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3032794594.mp3?updated=1701785082" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>066: Ask Sarah: How Do You Balance Everything?</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/066-ask-sarah-how-do-you-balance-everything</link>
      <description>“How do you balance everything?”  
I’m kicking off a new six-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I’ll be answering a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. 
This week’s question came from Mar. And when Mar told me all about her business and the many different roles she plays in her life, I understood exactly where the question came from. 
Mar and her family run Windborne Farms where they raise bees, along with other animals and crops. Mar’s love for the bees turned into a side business when she discovered a passion for beeswax candles. And that passion grew further into a subscription box, the Bee Still Box. 
In addition to being a business owner, Mar is a beekeeper, farmer, partner, and homeschooling mom of young children. Her question to me was, “How do you balance everything?” 
The short answer - I don’t. None of us can. The idea that it’s possible for anyone, especially a woman, to keep the various parts of her life in balance is kind of ridiculous. But… there are things I’ve learned during my nine years as a business owner and five years as a subscription box owner that help me keep my life in better balance. Those are the things I shared with Mar - and with you. 
When it comes to the actual logistics of juggling the kid stuff and the house stuff and the business stuff and the self stuff, I learned that I need systems and I need help. Some of my strategies included: 



Hiring help - and recognizing it’s okay. 



Asking my family members for help and delegating some tasks. 



Scheduling time with friends and family. 



Taking breaks when I need them. 



Creating structure in my days, weeks, and months. 



Removing distractions. 



Join me for this episode as Mar shares her fascinating subscription box journey and we talk mom to mom and business owner to business owner about finding balance and juggling all the things.   
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Mar: 



Windborne Candles on Facebook



Windborne Candles on Instagram



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 20 Apr 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Ask Sarah: How Do You Balance Everything? </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>66</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cabff020-b0bf-11ed-b273-3352ecb7a0f7/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“How do you balance everything?”   I’m kicking off a new six-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I’ll be answering a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership.  This week’s question...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“How do you balance everything?”  
I’m kicking off a new six-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I’ll be answering a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. 
This week’s question came from Mar. And when Mar told me all about her business and the many different roles she plays in her life, I understood exactly where the question came from. 
Mar and her family run Windborne Farms where they raise bees, along with other animals and crops. Mar’s love for the bees turned into a side business when she discovered a passion for beeswax candles. And that passion grew further into a subscription box, the Bee Still Box. 
In addition to being a business owner, Mar is a beekeeper, farmer, partner, and homeschooling mom of young children. Her question to me was, “How do you balance everything?” 
The short answer - I don’t. None of us can. The idea that it’s possible for anyone, especially a woman, to keep the various parts of her life in balance is kind of ridiculous. But… there are things I’ve learned during my nine years as a business owner and five years as a subscription box owner that help me keep my life in better balance. Those are the things I shared with Mar - and with you. 
When it comes to the actual logistics of juggling the kid stuff and the house stuff and the business stuff and the self stuff, I learned that I need systems and I need help. Some of my strategies included: 



Hiring help - and recognizing it’s okay. 



Asking my family members for help and delegating some tasks. 



Scheduling time with friends and family. 



Taking breaks when I need them. 



Creating structure in my days, weeks, and months. 



Removing distractions. 



Join me for this episode as Mar shares her fascinating subscription box journey and we talk mom to mom and business owner to business owner about finding balance and juggling all the things.   
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Mar: 



Windborne Candles on Facebook



Windborne Candles on Instagram



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“How do you balance everything?”  </p><p>I’m kicking off a new six-part series on the podcast called, “Ask Sarah.” Each week, I’ll be answering a question from inside my Launch Your Box coaching membership. </p><p>This week’s question came from Mar. And when Mar told me all about her business and the many different roles she plays in her life, I understood exactly where the question came from. </p><p>Mar and her family run Windborne Farms where they raise bees, along with other animals and crops. Mar’s love for the bees turned into a side business when she discovered a passion for beeswax candles. And that passion grew further into a subscription box, the Bee Still Box. </p><p>In addition to being a business owner, Mar is a beekeeper, farmer, partner, and homeschooling mom of young children. Her question to me was, “How do you balance everything?” </p><p>The short answer - I don’t. None of us can. The idea that it’s possible for anyone, especially a woman, to keep the various parts of her life in balance is kind of ridiculous. But… there are things I’ve learned during my nine years as a business owner and five years as a subscription box owner that help me keep my life in <em>better</em> balance. Those are the things I shared with Mar - and with you. </p><p>When it comes to the actual logistics of juggling the kid stuff and the house stuff and the business stuff and the self stuff, I learned that I need systems and I need help. Some of my strategies included: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Hiring help - and recognizing it’s okay. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Asking my family members for help and delegating some tasks. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Scheduling time with friends and family. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Taking breaks when I need them. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Creating structure in my days, weeks, and months. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Removing distractions. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Join me for this episode as Mar shares her fascinating subscription box journey and we talk mom to mom and business owner to business owner about finding balance and juggling all the things.   </p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Mar: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/windbornefarms">Windborne Candles on Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/windbornefarms/">Windborne Candles on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2003</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ff1bf575-6c3e-41cd-aaee-b07ccc09e306]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6844199974.mp3?updated=1701785090" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>065: My 5-Year Journey as a Subscription Box Owner</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/065-my-5-year-journey-as-a-subscription-box-owner</link>
      <description>5 years. 60 boxes. Countless lessons learned. 
Earlier this year, I celebrated the five-year anniversary of the subscription box side of my business. That’s 60 boxes! 60 boxes I poured my heart into to create amazing experiences for my subscribers. 
The journey my business and I have been on over these five years has come with lots of failures (I like to call them lessons learned), wins, and personal growth. My business grew from five figures to six figures to where we are now - a multi-million dollar subscription box business with thousands of subscribers. 
As my team and I get ready to ship out our 61st curated box, I’m reflecting on what it took to get here. Year one was all about excitement and uncertainty as I decided to start something new. I was nervous and wondered if it would actually work. There were ups in the form of a successful launch and growth beyond what I’d hoped for several months in a row. There were downs, like when my growth stopped. It stayed static for a few months and when my numbers started moving again, they were going in the wrong direction. 
These years have been filled with learning and implementing that learning - over and over again. That learning and that implementation helped me discover what changes I needed to make to start growing again. And I did - I grew and grew to where I am now - 3000 subscribers strong. 
It can be easy to look at someone who is already succeeding at what you are trying to do and not see all that came before. But all that came before matters - it’s what leads to growth and success. 
Join me for this episode as I take you through the first five years of my subscription box business and the lessons I learned along the way. Lessons you can learn from and apply to your own subscription box business. I hope you’ll be inspired and encouraged by my journey!   
 
Important Links: 
 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 13 Apr 2022 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>065: My 5-Year Journey as a Subscription Box Owner</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>65</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cad5ebbe-b0bf-11ed-b273-f7652d976933/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>5 years. 60 boxes. Countless lessons learned.  Earlier this year, I celebrated the five-year anniversary of the subscription box side of my business. That’s 60 boxes! 60 boxes I poured my heart into to create amazing experiences for my...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>5 years. 60 boxes. Countless lessons learned. 
Earlier this year, I celebrated the five-year anniversary of the subscription box side of my business. That’s 60 boxes! 60 boxes I poured my heart into to create amazing experiences for my subscribers. 
The journey my business and I have been on over these five years has come with lots of failures (I like to call them lessons learned), wins, and personal growth. My business grew from five figures to six figures to where we are now - a multi-million dollar subscription box business with thousands of subscribers. 
As my team and I get ready to ship out our 61st curated box, I’m reflecting on what it took to get here. Year one was all about excitement and uncertainty as I decided to start something new. I was nervous and wondered if it would actually work. There were ups in the form of a successful launch and growth beyond what I’d hoped for several months in a row. There were downs, like when my growth stopped. It stayed static for a few months and when my numbers started moving again, they were going in the wrong direction. 
These years have been filled with learning and implementing that learning - over and over again. That learning and that implementation helped me discover what changes I needed to make to start growing again. And I did - I grew and grew to where I am now - 3000 subscribers strong. 
It can be easy to look at someone who is already succeeding at what you are trying to do and not see all that came before. But all that came before matters - it’s what leads to growth and success. 
Join me for this episode as I take you through the first five years of my subscription box business and the lessons I learned along the way. Lessons you can learn from and apply to your own subscription box business. I hope you’ll be inspired and encouraged by my journey!   
 
Important Links: 
 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>5 years. 60 boxes. Countless lessons learned. </p><p>Earlier this year, I celebrated the five-year anniversary of the subscription box side of my business. That’s 60 boxes! 60 boxes I poured my heart into to create amazing experiences for my subscribers. </p><p>The journey my business and I have been on over these five years has come with lots of failures (I like to call them lessons learned), wins, and personal growth. My business grew from five figures to six figures to where we are now - a multi-million dollar subscription box business with thousands of subscribers. </p><p>As my team and I get ready to ship out our 61st curated box, I’m reflecting on what it took to get here. Year one was all about excitement and uncertainty as I decided to start something new. I was nervous and wondered if it would actually work. There were ups in the form of a successful launch and growth beyond what I’d hoped for several months in a row. There were downs, like when my growth stopped. It stayed static for a few months and when my numbers started moving again, they were going in the wrong direction. </p><p>These years have been filled with learning and implementing that learning - over and over again. That learning and that implementation helped me discover what changes I needed to make to start growing again. And I did - I grew and grew to where I am now - 3000 subscribers strong. </p><p>It can be easy to look at someone who is already succeeding at what you are trying to do and not see all that came before. But all that came before matters - it’s what leads to growth and success. </p><p>Join me for this episode as I take you through the first five years of my subscription box business and the lessons I learned along the way. Lessons you can learn from and apply to your own subscription box business. I hope you’ll be inspired and encouraged by my journey!   </p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2481</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c7e1d622-b783-4864-953e-d9de3f565d91]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6679255683.mp3?updated=1701785105" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>064: It’s more than just a box - creating a curated experience with The Literary Book Club</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/064-katie-eney</link>
      <description>A subscription box is so much more than just “stuff in a box.” 
I teach this inside Launch Your Box every day. I’ve talked about it on this very podcast. And I LOVE watching subscription box owners take what they’ve learned and turn it into amazing experiences for their subscribers. 
I invited Katie onto the podcast to talk about her subscription box journey and what inspired her to curate a truly incredible experience for the book-loving subscribers of her Literary Book Club Box.   
The Literary Book Club Box is not Katie’s first subscription box. She came to Launch Your Box to learn how to launch a monthly box related to her eCommerce stationery and sticker business. Katie soaked up all the training, launched, and grew that subscription box to 100 subscribers. In other words, it was a success!  
But it wasn’t her passion. Books - classic books specifically - are Katie’s passion. Because she was curious and because she’s a self-proclaimed “book nerd,” Katie started ordering book subscription boxes. And every time one arrived, she was disappointed. Inside she would find a book and some “cheap junk” that kind of related to the book. Nothing about those boxes was special.
Katie knew she could do it better. A LOT better. And it turns out… Katie was right. She niched down to classic books - because like I always say, the riches are in the niches. Katie carefully selects the books for her boxes - beautifully bound, collectible-quality editions of classic books. 
But Katie doesn’t just send her subscribers a beautiful book. The book is just the beginning. Katie’s subscription box guides her subscribers through the actual reading of the book. She curates special “gifts” for her subscribers to open at certain points in the book. These gifts are beautifully packaged and make the reading of the book a true experience. 
Katie’s subscribers LOVE what she’s doing and her subscription box continues to grow. She currently has more than 230 subscribers anxiously waiting for their next box! 
Join me for this episode as Katie takes us through her subscription box journey, talking about turning a passion project into a successful business and why creating an incredible experience for your subscribers matters.   
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Katie: 



The Literary Book Club on Facebook



The Literary Book Club on Instagram






The Literary Book Club Website 



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 06 Apr 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>It’s more than just a box - creating a curated experience with The Literary Book Club</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>64</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/caed65fa-b0bf-11ed-b273-87d6a4017011/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>A subscription box is so much more than just “stuff in a box.”  I teach this inside Launch Your Box every day. I’ve talked about it on this very podcast. And I LOVE watching subscription box owners take what they’ve learned and turn it...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>A subscription box is so much more than just “stuff in a box.” 
I teach this inside Launch Your Box every day. I’ve talked about it on this very podcast. And I LOVE watching subscription box owners take what they’ve learned and turn it into amazing experiences for their subscribers. 
I invited Katie onto the podcast to talk about her subscription box journey and what inspired her to curate a truly incredible experience for the book-loving subscribers of her Literary Book Club Box.   
The Literary Book Club Box is not Katie’s first subscription box. She came to Launch Your Box to learn how to launch a monthly box related to her eCommerce stationery and sticker business. Katie soaked up all the training, launched, and grew that subscription box to 100 subscribers. In other words, it was a success!  
But it wasn’t her passion. Books - classic books specifically - are Katie’s passion. Because she was curious and because she’s a self-proclaimed “book nerd,” Katie started ordering book subscription boxes. And every time one arrived, she was disappointed. Inside she would find a book and some “cheap junk” that kind of related to the book. Nothing about those boxes was special.
Katie knew she could do it better. A LOT better. And it turns out… Katie was right. She niched down to classic books - because like I always say, the riches are in the niches. Katie carefully selects the books for her boxes - beautifully bound, collectible-quality editions of classic books. 
But Katie doesn’t just send her subscribers a beautiful book. The book is just the beginning. Katie’s subscription box guides her subscribers through the actual reading of the book. She curates special “gifts” for her subscribers to open at certain points in the book. These gifts are beautifully packaged and make the reading of the book a true experience. 
Katie’s subscribers LOVE what she’s doing and her subscription box continues to grow. She currently has more than 230 subscribers anxiously waiting for their next box! 
Join me for this episode as Katie takes us through her subscription box journey, talking about turning a passion project into a successful business and why creating an incredible experience for your subscribers matters.   
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Katie: 



The Literary Book Club on Facebook



The Literary Book Club on Instagram






The Literary Book Club Website 



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A subscription box is so much more than just “stuff in a box.” </p><p>I teach this inside Launch Your Box every day. I’ve talked about it on this very podcast. And I LOVE watching subscription box owners take what they’ve learned and turn it into amazing experiences for their subscribers. </p><p>I invited Katie onto the podcast to talk about her subscription box journey and what inspired her to curate a truly incredible experience for the book-loving subscribers of her Literary Book Club Box.   </p><p>The Literary Book Club Box is not Katie’s first subscription box. She came to Launch Your Box to learn how to launch a monthly box related to her eCommerce stationery and sticker business. Katie soaked up all the training, launched, and grew that subscription box to 100 subscribers. In other words, it was a success!  </p><p>But it wasn’t her passion. Books - classic books specifically - are Katie’s passion. Because she was curious and because she’s a self-proclaimed “book nerd,” Katie started ordering book subscription boxes. And every time one arrived, she was disappointed. Inside she would find a book and some “cheap junk” that kind of related to the book. Nothing about those boxes was special.</p><p>Katie knew she could do it better. A LOT better. And it turns out… Katie was right. She niched down to classic books - because like I always say, the riches are in the niches. Katie carefully selects the books for her boxes - beautifully bound, collectible-quality editions of classic books. </p><p>But Katie doesn’t just send her subscribers a beautiful book. The book is just the beginning. Katie’s subscription box guides her subscribers through the actual reading of the book. She curates special “gifts” for her subscribers to open at certain points in the book. These gifts are beautifully packaged and make the reading of the book a true experience. </p><p>Katie’s subscribers LOVE what she’s doing and her subscription box continues to grow. She currently has more than 230 subscribers anxiously waiting for their next box! </p><p>Join me for this episode as Katie takes us through her subscription box journey, talking about turning a passion project into a successful business and why creating an incredible experience for your subscribers matters.   </p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Katie: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/theliterarybookclub">The Literary Book Club on Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/theliterarybookclubbox/">The Literary Book Club on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.theliterarybookclub.com/">The Literary Book Club Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1638</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e4c2e79f-6b13-49a2-af07-a187d1b9a070]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8100114132.mp3?updated=1701785125" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>063: 4 Focus Areas to Start Your Subscription Box</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/063-getting-started-on-your-subscription-box-dreams</link>
      <description>“Whether you think you can, or you think you can't – you're right.” - Henry Ford.
 
You’ve dreamed about starting a subscription box and now you’re ready to take action and start making those dreams come true. So where should you start? 
 
It’s easy to get caught up in the fun parts - products and packaging. And you absolutely need those in place, but spending too much time designing custom boxes or sourcing products for future boxes takes time away from what you need to be doing right now. 
 
If you’re just getting started, make sure to go through my FREE 6 in 60 Workshop where you’ll curate six months' worth of boxes for your ideal customer. This workshop guides you through getting clear about who your ideal customer is and the type of experience you want to provide for them. 
 
Then it’s time to move on to the four areas where you need to focus your time and energy now.  
Audience building - soooo important. 



Start yesterday!



Serve before selling - Listen to episodes 33 and 45!!



Not easy, but necessary!



Create awareness of who you are and what you sell. 



Emails, texts, posts, stories, short videos, LIVES, paid Ads



Marketing



Website



Payment processor



Shipping software



CRM - email platform



Tech - you need four things in place. 



We tell ourselves we can’t do something more often than we tell ourselves we can. 



Believe in abundance. 



Embrace your imperfections. 



Operate with a glass-half-full mentality. 



Mindset - the MOST important!
 
Are you ready to get started on turning your subscription box dreams into reality? In today’s episode, I talk about the four areas you need to focus your time and energy FIRST. Now is the time to “think you can!” Come listen!
 
Important Links: 



 6 in 60 Workshop



 Launch Your Box Podcast Episode 33



 Launch Your Box Podcast Episode 45



Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 30 Mar 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>4 Focus Areas to Start Your Subscription Box</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>63</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cb03bb70-b0bf-11ed-b273-376c067bc363/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“Whether you think you can, or you think you can't – you're right.” - Henry Ford.   You’ve dreamed about starting a subscription box and now you’re ready to take action and start making those dreams come true. So where should you...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Whether you think you can, or you think you can't – you're right.” - Henry Ford.
 
You’ve dreamed about starting a subscription box and now you’re ready to take action and start making those dreams come true. So where should you start? 
 
It’s easy to get caught up in the fun parts - products and packaging. And you absolutely need those in place, but spending too much time designing custom boxes or sourcing products for future boxes takes time away from what you need to be doing right now. 
 
If you’re just getting started, make sure to go through my FREE 6 in 60 Workshop where you’ll curate six months' worth of boxes for your ideal customer. This workshop guides you through getting clear about who your ideal customer is and the type of experience you want to provide for them. 
 
Then it’s time to move on to the four areas where you need to focus your time and energy now.  
Audience building - soooo important. 



Start yesterday!



Serve before selling - Listen to episodes 33 and 45!!



Not easy, but necessary!



Create awareness of who you are and what you sell. 



Emails, texts, posts, stories, short videos, LIVES, paid Ads



Marketing



Website



Payment processor



Shipping software



CRM - email platform



Tech - you need four things in place. 



We tell ourselves we can’t do something more often than we tell ourselves we can. 



Believe in abundance. 



Embrace your imperfections. 



Operate with a glass-half-full mentality. 



Mindset - the MOST important!
 
Are you ready to get started on turning your subscription box dreams into reality? In today’s episode, I talk about the four areas you need to focus your time and energy FIRST. Now is the time to “think you can!” Come listen!
 
Important Links: 



 6 in 60 Workshop



 Launch Your Box Podcast Episode 33



 Launch Your Box Podcast Episode 45



Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“Whether you think you can, or you think you can't – you're right.” - Henry Ford.</p><p> </p><p>You’ve dreamed about starting a subscription box and now you’re ready to take action and start making those dreams come true. So where should you start? </p><p> </p><p>It’s easy to get caught up in the fun parts - products and packaging. And you absolutely need those in place, but spending too much time designing custom boxes or sourcing products for future boxes takes time away from what you need to be doing <em>right now. </em></p><p> </p><p>If you’re just getting started, make sure to go through my FREE 6 in 60 Workshop where you’ll curate six months' worth of boxes for your ideal customer. This workshop guides you through getting clear about who your ideal customer is and the type of experience you want to provide for them. </p><p> </p><p>Then it’s time to move on to the four areas where you need to focus your time and energy now.  </p><ol><li>Audience building - soooo important. </li></ol><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Start yesterday!</li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Serve before selling - Listen to episodes 33 and 45!!</li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Not easy, but necessary!</li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Create awareness of who you are and what you sell. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Emails, texts, posts, stories, short videos, LIVES, paid Ads</li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><ol><li>Marketing</li></ol><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Website</li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Payment processor</li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Shipping software</li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">CRM - email platform</li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><ol><li>Tech - you need four things in place. </li></ol><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">We tell ourselves we can’t do something more often than we tell ourselves we can. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Believe in abundance. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Embrace your imperfections. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Operate with a glass-half-full mentality. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><ol><li>Mindset - the MOST important!</li></ol><p> </p><p>Are you ready to get started on turning your subscription box dreams into reality? In today’s episode, I talk about the four areas you need to focus your time and energy FIRST. Now is the time to “think you can!” Come listen!</p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e"> 6 in 60 Workshop</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-33"> Launch Your Box Podcast Episode 33</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-45"> Launch Your Box Podcast Episode 45</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1529</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[49bde5d5-448b-43b5-b7eb-ad3a8ac32d45]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7133253860.mp3?updated=1701785141" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>062: Facebook Ads Won't Grow Your Subscription Box For You </title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/062-facebook-ads-wont-grow-your-subscription-box-for-you</link>
      <description>Your subscription box business isn’t growing like you want it to. You’re not gaining subscribers at the rate you’d planned for and hoped for and you’re not sure what to do. 
 
If you start looking around for advice, you’re likely to find people telling you the answer to your problem is Facebook Ads. I have a different opinion. 
 
Facebook Ads will NOT grow your subscription box for you. Yep, I said it. I know this might be an unpopular opinion, but it’s one I feel very strongly about. Let’s dig in and talk about why. 
 
It is rare in life that throwing money at a problem solves it. And it turns out, a subscription box business is a lot like life. 
 
Facebook Ads are ONE tool in your multi-channel marketing plan. They aren’t the main tool and shouldn’t be weighted more heavily than the rest of your tools. 
You have to have so many things dialed in with your business and your ideal customer BEFORE you start paying for Facebook Ads. If you don’t, you may bring people in by spending a lot of money on Facebook Ads, but they won’t stay. If you haven’t spent the time and effort building connections with your subscribers, building that incredibly important know/like/trust factor, they will not stay. They are not invested in you or in your business. 
 
Facebook Ads can be incredibly effective as PART of an overall marketing strategy – not as a standalone strategy. 
 
So, if it’s not Facebook Ads, what will make the biggest difference when it comes to growing your subscriber base? 



Clearly defining your niche: consider whether you can niche down further. 



Making sure your copy – all of it – is clear and conversational. 



Making sure you have an effective way to capture people once they get to your website: do you have a high converting pop-up or opt-in? 



 
I also want you to think about other organic ways to drive traffic and get new subscribers. This is traffic you do not have to pay for! 



Pinterest – start using this FREE search engine/social media platform that is my #2 source of traffic! 



Blog on your website – write posts regularly (monthly, biweekly, weekly).



YouTube



TikTok



 
Are you counting on Facebook Ads alone to grow your subscriber base? In today’s episode, I talk about the negative sides of putting all your eggs in the Facebook Ads basket and what you need to do instead. Want to grow your subscription box? Come listen!
 
Important Links: 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 23 Mar 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Facebook Ads Won't Grow Your Subscription Box For You </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>62</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cb1b12b6-b0bf-11ed-b273-175a257c4729/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Your subscription box business isn’t growing like you want it to. You’re not gaining subscribers at the rate you’d planned for and hoped for and you’re not sure what to do.    If you start looking around for advice, you’re likely...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Your subscription box business isn’t growing like you want it to. You’re not gaining subscribers at the rate you’d planned for and hoped for and you’re not sure what to do. 
 
If you start looking around for advice, you’re likely to find people telling you the answer to your problem is Facebook Ads. I have a different opinion. 
 
Facebook Ads will NOT grow your subscription box for you. Yep, I said it. I know this might be an unpopular opinion, but it’s one I feel very strongly about. Let’s dig in and talk about why. 
 
It is rare in life that throwing money at a problem solves it. And it turns out, a subscription box business is a lot like life. 
 
Facebook Ads are ONE tool in your multi-channel marketing plan. They aren’t the main tool and shouldn’t be weighted more heavily than the rest of your tools. 
You have to have so many things dialed in with your business and your ideal customer BEFORE you start paying for Facebook Ads. If you don’t, you may bring people in by spending a lot of money on Facebook Ads, but they won’t stay. If you haven’t spent the time and effort building connections with your subscribers, building that incredibly important know/like/trust factor, they will not stay. They are not invested in you or in your business. 
 
Facebook Ads can be incredibly effective as PART of an overall marketing strategy – not as a standalone strategy. 
 
So, if it’s not Facebook Ads, what will make the biggest difference when it comes to growing your subscriber base? 



Clearly defining your niche: consider whether you can niche down further. 



Making sure your copy – all of it – is clear and conversational. 



Making sure you have an effective way to capture people once they get to your website: do you have a high converting pop-up or opt-in? 



 
I also want you to think about other organic ways to drive traffic and get new subscribers. This is traffic you do not have to pay for! 



Pinterest – start using this FREE search engine/social media platform that is my #2 source of traffic! 



Blog on your website – write posts regularly (monthly, biweekly, weekly).



YouTube



TikTok



 
Are you counting on Facebook Ads alone to grow your subscriber base? In today’s episode, I talk about the negative sides of putting all your eggs in the Facebook Ads basket and what you need to do instead. Want to grow your subscription box? Come listen!
 
Important Links: 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Your subscription box business isn’t growing like you want it to. You’re not gaining subscribers at the rate you’d planned for and hoped for and you’re not sure what to do. </p><p> </p><p>If you start looking around for advice, you’re likely to find people telling you the answer to your problem is Facebook Ads. I have a different opinion. </p><p> </p><p>Facebook Ads will NOT grow your subscription box for you. Yep, I said it. I know this might be an unpopular opinion, but it’s one I feel very strongly about. Let’s dig in and talk about why. </p><p> </p><p>It is rare in life that throwing money at a problem solves it. And it turns out, a subscription box business is a lot like life. </p><p> </p><p>Facebook Ads are ONE tool in your multi-channel marketing plan. They aren’t the main tool and shouldn’t be weighted more heavily than the rest of your tools. </p><p>You have to have so many things dialed in with your business and your ideal customer BEFORE you start paying for Facebook Ads. If you don’t, you may bring people in by spending a lot of money on Facebook Ads, but they won’t stay. If you haven’t spent the time and effort building connections with your subscribers, building that incredibly important know/like/trust factor, they will not stay. They are not invested in you or in your business. </p><p> </p><p>Facebook Ads can be incredibly effective as PART of an overall marketing strategy – not as a standalone strategy. </p><p> </p><p>So, if it’s not Facebook Ads, what will make the biggest difference when it comes to growing your subscriber base? </p><ol>
<li><br></li>
<li>Clearly defining your niche: consider whether you can niche down further. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Making sure your copy – all of it – is clear and conversational. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Making sure you have an effective way to capture people once they get to your website: do you have a high converting pop-up or opt-in? </li>
<li><br></li>
</ol><p> </p><p>I also want you to think about other organic ways to drive traffic and get new subscribers. This is traffic you do not have to pay for! </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Pinterest – start using this FREE search engine/social media platform that is my #2 source of traffic! </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Blog on your website – write posts regularly (monthly, biweekly, weekly).</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>YouTube</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>TikTok</li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Are <em>you</em> counting on Facebook Ads alone to grow your subscriber base? In today’s episode, I talk about the negative sides of putting all your eggs in the Facebook Ads basket and what you need to do instead. Want to grow your subscription box? Come listen!</p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1129</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a0853bf2-8120-4ed6-81b1-ef77a1c1178b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8631650508.mp3?updated=1701785185" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>061: What Can a Fulfillment Center Do for My Subscription Box Business? with Lessgistics</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/061-what-can-a-fulfillment-center-do-for-my-subscription-box-business-with-lessgistics</link>
      <description>Imagine what you could do with the time you saved if someone else handled the fulfillment of your subscription box. 
As your subscription box business grows, you find yourself spending more and more time actually fulfilling those subscriptions. Packing and shipping the boxes takes time. Time you could be spending ON your business. Is there another option? 
Ryan Culver of Lessgistics joined me for today’s episode to answer that question. Ryan is a wealth of information and did an amazing job explaining what a fulfillment center is, the costs involved, and whether a fulfillment center could be the right choice for your subscription box business. 
Benefits of using a fulfillment center include:



Getting time back - allowing you to work on your business instead of in your business. 



Not being responsible for managing a team - the people packing your boxes are managed by the fulfillment center. 



Not having to be there when shipments arrive - the fulfillment center receives shipments from your vendors. 



Taking advantage of the fulfillment center’s access to deeply discounted shipping charges - the money you’ll save on shipping offsets the cost of fulfillment. 



Someone else does the actual packing! 



At Lessgistics, Ryan and his team work with subscription box owners as partners. A subscription box owner himself, Ryan understands the importance of providing your subscribers with a well-thought-out experience. He is dedicated to partnering and communicating closely with his subscription box owner clients. As he says, “You want someone you know and trust to touch your baby.”  
Ryan and I talked about the costs of renting your own warehouse space vs. using a fulfillment center and the pros and cons of each. He walked me through the costs involved and what factors you should consider when deciding if a fulfillment center is right for your subscription box business. 
Join me for this episode as Ryan guides us through the process of working with a fulfillment center and the surprising ways you can save money while letting someone else handle the packing and shipping each month!    
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Lessgistics: 



Lessgistics on Facebook



Lessgistics Website 



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 






 6 in 60 Workshop 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 16 Mar 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What Can a Fulfillment Center Do for My Subscription Box Business? with Lessgistics</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>61</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cb323e46-b0bf-11ed-b273-2b656d5ea2f7/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Imagine what you could do with the time you saved if someone else handled the fulfillment of your subscription box.  As your subscription box business grows, you find yourself spending more and more time actually fulfilling those subscriptions....</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Imagine what you could do with the time you saved if someone else handled the fulfillment of your subscription box. 
As your subscription box business grows, you find yourself spending more and more time actually fulfilling those subscriptions. Packing and shipping the boxes takes time. Time you could be spending ON your business. Is there another option? 
Ryan Culver of Lessgistics joined me for today’s episode to answer that question. Ryan is a wealth of information and did an amazing job explaining what a fulfillment center is, the costs involved, and whether a fulfillment center could be the right choice for your subscription box business. 
Benefits of using a fulfillment center include:



Getting time back - allowing you to work on your business instead of in your business. 



Not being responsible for managing a team - the people packing your boxes are managed by the fulfillment center. 



Not having to be there when shipments arrive - the fulfillment center receives shipments from your vendors. 



Taking advantage of the fulfillment center’s access to deeply discounted shipping charges - the money you’ll save on shipping offsets the cost of fulfillment. 



Someone else does the actual packing! 



At Lessgistics, Ryan and his team work with subscription box owners as partners. A subscription box owner himself, Ryan understands the importance of providing your subscribers with a well-thought-out experience. He is dedicated to partnering and communicating closely with his subscription box owner clients. As he says, “You want someone you know and trust to touch your baby.”  
Ryan and I talked about the costs of renting your own warehouse space vs. using a fulfillment center and the pros and cons of each. He walked me through the costs involved and what factors you should consider when deciding if a fulfillment center is right for your subscription box business. 
Join me for this episode as Ryan guides us through the process of working with a fulfillment center and the surprising ways you can save money while letting someone else handle the packing and shipping each month!    
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Lessgistics: 



Lessgistics on Facebook



Lessgistics Website 



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 






 6 in 60 Workshop 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Imagine what you could do with the time you saved if someone else handled the fulfillment of your subscription box. </p><p>As your subscription box business grows, you find yourself spending more and more time actually fulfilling those subscriptions. Packing and shipping the boxes takes time. Time you could be spending ON your business. Is there another option? </p><p>Ryan Culver of Lessgistics joined me for today’s episode to answer that question. Ryan is a wealth of information and did an amazing job explaining what a fulfillment center is, the costs involved, and whether a fulfillment center could be the right choice for your subscription box business. </p><p>Benefits of using a fulfillment center include:</p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Getting time back - allowing you to work <em>on</em> your business instead of <em>in</em> your business. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Not being responsible for managing a team - the people packing your boxes are managed by the fulfillment center. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Not having to be there when shipments arrive - the fulfillment center receives shipments from your vendors. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Taking advantage of the fulfillment center’s access to deeply discounted shipping charges - the money you’ll save on shipping offsets the cost of fulfillment. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Someone else does the actual packing! </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>At Lessgistics, Ryan and his team work with subscription box owners as partners. A subscription box owner himself, Ryan understands the importance of providing your subscribers with a well-thought-out experience. He is dedicated to partnering and communicating closely with his subscription box owner clients. As he says, “You want someone you know and trust to touch your baby.”  </p><p>Ryan and I talked about the costs of renting your own warehouse space vs. using a fulfillment center and the pros and cons of each. He walked me through the costs involved and what factors you should consider when deciding if a fulfillment center is right for your subscription box business. </p><p>Join me for this episode as Ryan guides us through the process of working with a fulfillment center and the surprising ways you can save money while letting someone else handle the packing and shipping each month!    </p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Lessgistics: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/lessgistics">Lessgistics on Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://lessgistics.com/">Lessgistics Website </a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e"> 6 in 60 Workshop</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1862</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[05570cc3-376d-471c-9353-0755ed11aeb7]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7598567964.mp3?updated=1701785193" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>060: Building an Audience: One Rhinestone at a Time with Stephanie Russell</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/060-building-an-audience-one-rhinestone-at-a-time-with-stephanie-russell</link>
      <description>It’s important to know yourself. To know what you love, what lights you up inside, what sets you apart. Ask Launch Your Box member Stephanie Russell of Bling Owl Creations what sets her apart and she’ll tell you… she’s extra! 
See, Stephanie was a pageant mom. She’s also a baseball mom. You may think those two roles don’t have much in common. You’d be wrong. Because Stephanie isn’t your average baseball mom. She’s extra. She brings the bling she LOVES so much to the ballfield… every practice and every game. 
It’s that love for bling AND baseball that led Stephanie to start a subscription box for baseball moms. Moms like her who want to show their love for their children and the sport they play with some seriously blinged-out baseball wear! 
Stephanie joined me for today’s episode to talk about her journey to launching and growing her subscription box. 
When I first met Stephanie inside my Coaching Week, her idea for a subscription box was broad. She knew her box would be for women and that it would be all about the bling. But she was hesitant to get more specific with her ideal customer. 
We talked through that hesitation. I asked Stephanie the same three questions I ask so many new subscription box owners. 



What are you known for? 



What are you experienced with? 



What do you love? 



The answers to those questions led Stephanie to realize that combining her loves for bling and being a baseball mom was the answer. That was her niche. And like I always say, the riches are in the niches. The fact that Stephanie realized success she didn’t even know was possible in the first year of having her subscription box proves just how true that is. 
Stephanie and I talked about some things she can do to continue to grow her business. We talked about Facebook Ads - narrowing down her targets and running a different kind of ad, and how writing a blog can provide nearly endless opportunities for generating content and organic traffic.  
Join me for this episode as Stephanie takes us through her subscription box journey. Get ready to find out what it takes to go from idea to launch to two successful, growing subscription boxes. And how much more fun everything can be when you add bling!    
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Stephanie: 



Bling Owl Creations on Facebook



Bling Owl Creations on Instagram






Bling Owl Creations Website 



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 






 6 in 60 Workshop 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 09 Mar 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Building an Audience: One Rhinestone at a Time with Stephanie Russell</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>60</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cb48e312-b0bf-11ed-b273-93bcd1f6e80c/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>It’s important to know yourself. To know what you love, what lights you up inside, what sets you apart. Ask Launch Your Box member Stephanie Russell of Bling Owl Creations what sets her apart and she’ll tell you… she’s extra!  See,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>It’s important to know yourself. To know what you love, what lights you up inside, what sets you apart. Ask Launch Your Box member Stephanie Russell of Bling Owl Creations what sets her apart and she’ll tell you… she’s extra! 
See, Stephanie was a pageant mom. She’s also a baseball mom. You may think those two roles don’t have much in common. You’d be wrong. Because Stephanie isn’t your average baseball mom. She’s extra. She brings the bling she LOVES so much to the ballfield… every practice and every game. 
It’s that love for bling AND baseball that led Stephanie to start a subscription box for baseball moms. Moms like her who want to show their love for their children and the sport they play with some seriously blinged-out baseball wear! 
Stephanie joined me for today’s episode to talk about her journey to launching and growing her subscription box. 
When I first met Stephanie inside my Coaching Week, her idea for a subscription box was broad. She knew her box would be for women and that it would be all about the bling. But she was hesitant to get more specific with her ideal customer. 
We talked through that hesitation. I asked Stephanie the same three questions I ask so many new subscription box owners. 



What are you known for? 



What are you experienced with? 



What do you love? 



The answers to those questions led Stephanie to realize that combining her loves for bling and being a baseball mom was the answer. That was her niche. And like I always say, the riches are in the niches. The fact that Stephanie realized success she didn’t even know was possible in the first year of having her subscription box proves just how true that is. 
Stephanie and I talked about some things she can do to continue to grow her business. We talked about Facebook Ads - narrowing down her targets and running a different kind of ad, and how writing a blog can provide nearly endless opportunities for generating content and organic traffic.  
Join me for this episode as Stephanie takes us through her subscription box journey. Get ready to find out what it takes to go from idea to launch to two successful, growing subscription boxes. And how much more fun everything can be when you add bling!    
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Stephanie: 



Bling Owl Creations on Facebook



Bling Owl Creations on Instagram






Bling Owl Creations Website 



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 






 6 in 60 Workshop 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>It’s important to know yourself. To know what you love, what lights you up inside, what sets you apart. Ask Launch Your Box member Stephanie Russell of Bling Owl Creations what sets her apart and she’ll tell you… she’s extra! </p><p>See, Stephanie was a pageant mom. She’s also a baseball mom. You may think those two roles don’t have much in common. You’d be wrong. Because Stephanie isn’t your average baseball mom. She’s extra. She brings the bling she LOVES so much to the ballfield… every practice and every game. </p><p>It’s that love for bling AND baseball that led Stephanie to start a subscription box for baseball moms. Moms like her who want to show their love for their children and the sport they play with some seriously blinged-out baseball wear! </p><p>Stephanie joined me for today’s episode to talk about her journey to launching and growing her subscription box. </p><p>When I first met Stephanie inside my Coaching Week, her idea for a subscription box was broad. She knew her box would be for women and that it would be all about the bling. But she was hesitant to get more specific with her ideal customer. </p><p>We talked through that hesitation. I asked Stephanie the same three questions I ask so many new subscription box owners. </p><ol>
<li><br></li>
<li>What are you known for? </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>What are you experienced with? </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>What do you love? </li>
<li><br></li>
</ol><p>The answers to those questions led Stephanie to realize that combining her loves for bling and being a baseball mom was the answer. That was her niche. And like I always say, the riches are in the niches. The fact that Stephanie realized success she didn’t even know was possible in the first year of having her subscription box proves just how true that is. </p><p>Stephanie and I talked about some things she can do to continue to grow her business. We talked about Facebook Ads - narrowing down her targets and running a different kind of ad, and how writing a blog can provide nearly endless opportunities for generating content and organic traffic.  </p><p>Join me for this episode as Stephanie takes us through her subscription box journey. Get ready to find out what it takes to go from idea to launch to two successful, growing subscription boxes. And how much more fun everything can be when you add bling!    </p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Stephanie: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/groups/blingowlvip">Bling Owl Creations on Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/blingowlcreations/">Bling Owl Creations on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://blingowlcreations.com/">Bling Owl Creations Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e"> 6 in 60 Workshop</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2258</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[16c7bfbf-1ba0-4138-9ea5-4e8377d9b6d4]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8903756790.mp3?updated=1701785202" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>059: Packed with Love: Turning a Bakery into a Subscription Box with Jonica's Bakery Box</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/059-packed-with-love-turning-a-bakery-into-a-subscription-box-with-jonicas-bakery-box</link>
      <description>Imagine a box of incredibly delicious baked goods arriving on your doorstep every month. Baked goods that are the stuff of dreams…
That’s the experience Jonica Thompson provides to her subscribers. Carefully curated, impeccably packed and shipped, and OMG so, so good baked goods! Jonica sent me one of her boxes for a recent Box Opening inside Launch Your Box and let’s just say my Warehouse team and I were in heaven. 
I invited Jonica to join me on the podcast to do more than just talk about mouthwatering baked goods. Rather, I wanted her to share her story and to be a source not only of inspiration but of information to you. We get a LOT of questions inside Launch Your Box about shipping perishable goods. 
Our interview ended up being even more fantastic than I thought it would be. Jonica shared the story of her bakery. Her current bakery is not her first attempt at starting a bakery business. And it’s not her second attempt. No, Jonica faced adversity, life challenges, and self-doubt. 
Jonica didn’t let setbacks put an end to her dreams. Instead, she kept baking and waited until the time was right. She has a thriving bakery business and now also has a growing subscription box. 
When it was time to add a subscription box to her business, Jonica knew she could provide an outstanding product and an outstanding experience. The one thing she didn’t know was how to pack and ship her products so they would arrive fresh and undamaged. 
Jonica did research. A LOT of research. And she conducted tests. The kind of tests where she shipped boxes around the country using various types of packing materials. 
The result? 
A subscription box that arrives on the doorsteps of her subscribers filled with fresh, undamaged, absolutely scrumptious baked goods. 
If you’ve ever thought about including perishable items in your subscription box or if you’ve found yourself needing to start over, this is a can’t-miss episode. 
Join me for this episode as Jonica takes us through her journey from self-doubt to thriving bakery and subscription box owner. Get ready to find out the answers to more questions than you’ve ever thought to ask about shipping perishable goods, and learn the value of research and testing, testing, testing when trying something new!    
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Jonica: 



Jonica’s Bakery on Facebook



Jonica’s Bakery on Instagram



Jonica’s Bakery Website 



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 02 Mar 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Packed with Love: Turning a Bakery into a Subscription Box with Jonica's Bakery Box</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>59</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cb5f3568-b0bf-11ed-b273-abc3546211d5/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Imagine a box of incredibly delicious baked goods arriving on your doorstep every month. Baked goods that are the stuff of dreams… That’s the experience Jonica Thompson provides to her subscribers. Carefully curated, impeccably packed and shipped,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Imagine a box of incredibly delicious baked goods arriving on your doorstep every month. Baked goods that are the stuff of dreams…
That’s the experience Jonica Thompson provides to her subscribers. Carefully curated, impeccably packed and shipped, and OMG so, so good baked goods! Jonica sent me one of her boxes for a recent Box Opening inside Launch Your Box and let’s just say my Warehouse team and I were in heaven. 
I invited Jonica to join me on the podcast to do more than just talk about mouthwatering baked goods. Rather, I wanted her to share her story and to be a source not only of inspiration but of information to you. We get a LOT of questions inside Launch Your Box about shipping perishable goods. 
Our interview ended up being even more fantastic than I thought it would be. Jonica shared the story of her bakery. Her current bakery is not her first attempt at starting a bakery business. And it’s not her second attempt. No, Jonica faced adversity, life challenges, and self-doubt. 
Jonica didn’t let setbacks put an end to her dreams. Instead, she kept baking and waited until the time was right. She has a thriving bakery business and now also has a growing subscription box. 
When it was time to add a subscription box to her business, Jonica knew she could provide an outstanding product and an outstanding experience. The one thing she didn’t know was how to pack and ship her products so they would arrive fresh and undamaged. 
Jonica did research. A LOT of research. And she conducted tests. The kind of tests where she shipped boxes around the country using various types of packing materials. 
The result? 
A subscription box that arrives on the doorsteps of her subscribers filled with fresh, undamaged, absolutely scrumptious baked goods. 
If you’ve ever thought about including perishable items in your subscription box or if you’ve found yourself needing to start over, this is a can’t-miss episode. 
Join me for this episode as Jonica takes us through her journey from self-doubt to thriving bakery and subscription box owner. Get ready to find out the answers to more questions than you’ve ever thought to ask about shipping perishable goods, and learn the value of research and testing, testing, testing when trying something new!    
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Jonica: 



Jonica’s Bakery on Facebook



Jonica’s Bakery on Instagram



Jonica’s Bakery Website 



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Imagine a box of incredibly delicious baked goods arriving on your doorstep every month. Baked goods that are the stuff of dreams…</p><p>That’s the experience Jonica Thompson provides to her subscribers. Carefully curated, impeccably packed and shipped, and OMG so, so good baked goods! Jonica sent me one of her boxes for a recent Box Opening inside Launch Your Box and let’s just say my Warehouse team and I were in heaven. </p><p>I invited Jonica to join me on the podcast to do more than just talk about mouthwatering baked goods. Rather, I wanted her to share her story and to be a source not only of inspiration but of information to you. We get a LOT of questions inside Launch Your Box about shipping perishable goods. </p><p>Our interview ended up being even more fantastic than I thought it would be. Jonica shared the story of her bakery. Her current bakery is not her first attempt at starting a bakery business. And it’s not her second attempt. No, Jonica faced adversity, life challenges, and self-doubt. </p><p>Jonica didn’t let setbacks put an end to her dreams. Instead, she kept baking and waited until the time was right. She has a thriving bakery business and now also has a growing subscription box. </p><p>When it was time to add a subscription box to her business, Jonica knew she could provide an outstanding product and an outstanding experience. The one thing she didn’t know was how to pack and ship her products so they would arrive fresh and undamaged. </p><p>Jonica did research. A LOT of research. And she conducted tests. The kind of tests where she shipped boxes around the country using various types of packing materials. </p><p>The result? </p><p>A subscription box that arrives on the doorsteps of her subscribers filled with fresh, undamaged, absolutely scrumptious baked goods. </p><p>If you’ve ever thought about including perishable items in your subscription box or if you’ve found yourself needing to start over, this is a can’t-miss episode. </p><p>Join me for this episode as Jonica takes us through her journey from self-doubt to thriving bakery and subscription box owner. Get ready to find out the answers to more questions than you’ve ever thought to ask about shipping perishable goods, and learn the value of research and testing, testing, testing when trying something new!    </p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Jonica: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/JonicasBakery">Jonica’s Bakery on Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/jonicasbakery/">Jonica’s Bakery on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://jonicasbakery.com/">Jonica’s Bakery Website </a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1691</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d4c4c9cc-d548-455a-9725-294727859b8d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6402731303.mp3?updated=1701785221" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>058: How a Blog Can Help My Subscription Box Business </title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/058-how-a-blog-can-help-my-subscription-box-business</link>
      <description>If you could create one piece of content that you could use at least six different ways, would you? 
 
This question came up inside my high-level membership, Scale Your Box. We had a mini-mastermind and dug into all the things subscription box owners face when scaling their subscription box businesses. Many members admitted to struggling with “what to say” when it came to creating content. 
 
My copywriter and I sat down with the group and talked about email marketing and the importance of nurturing your audience before and after they become subscribers. 
 
Then, the conversation turned to blogs. 
 
At first, my members were not excited about the idea of adding a blog to their websites or blogging regularly. But, when we started talking about how they could put one blog to work for them, they started listening. Pretty soon, heads were nodding and questions started coming quickly. 
 
A blog can act as what we call your “hero piece of content.” That means it’s the main piece. Once you have that written, it’s all about repurposing and pulling pieces out to be used in all kinds of different ways inside your marketing strategy. 
 
Here are six different pieces of content you can create from one hero piece of content: 



Emails



LIVES



Social media posts 



Pinterest pins



Podcast episodes



IG reels/TikTok videos



 
I challenged my members, and I challenge you, to start blogging if you haven’t. Start with one blog post a month. Once that’s going well, add a second.
 
Did you know a blog can help your subscription box business? In today’s episode, I walk you through creating a piece of hero content you can then repurpose in many different ways. Work smarter not harder at content creation and learn how to put your blog to work for you. Come listen!
 
Important Links: 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 23 Feb 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How a Blog Can Help My Subscription Box Business </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>58</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cb7ada98-b0bf-11ed-b273-6fe1d9ad288c/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>If you could create one piece of content that you could use at least six different ways, would you?    This question came up inside my high-level membership, Scale Your Box. We had a mini-mastermind and dug into all the things subscription...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>If you could create one piece of content that you could use at least six different ways, would you? 
 
This question came up inside my high-level membership, Scale Your Box. We had a mini-mastermind and dug into all the things subscription box owners face when scaling their subscription box businesses. Many members admitted to struggling with “what to say” when it came to creating content. 
 
My copywriter and I sat down with the group and talked about email marketing and the importance of nurturing your audience before and after they become subscribers. 
 
Then, the conversation turned to blogs. 
 
At first, my members were not excited about the idea of adding a blog to their websites or blogging regularly. But, when we started talking about how they could put one blog to work for them, they started listening. Pretty soon, heads were nodding and questions started coming quickly. 
 
A blog can act as what we call your “hero piece of content.” That means it’s the main piece. Once you have that written, it’s all about repurposing and pulling pieces out to be used in all kinds of different ways inside your marketing strategy. 
 
Here are six different pieces of content you can create from one hero piece of content: 



Emails



LIVES



Social media posts 



Pinterest pins



Podcast episodes



IG reels/TikTok videos



 
I challenged my members, and I challenge you, to start blogging if you haven’t. Start with one blog post a month. Once that’s going well, add a second.
 
Did you know a blog can help your subscription box business? In today’s episode, I walk you through creating a piece of hero content you can then repurpose in many different ways. Work smarter not harder at content creation and learn how to put your blog to work for you. Come listen!
 
Important Links: 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>If you could create one piece of content that you could use at least six different ways, would you? </p><p> </p><p>This question came up inside my high-level membership, Scale Your Box. We had a mini-mastermind and dug into all the things subscription box owners face when scaling their subscription box businesses. Many members admitted to struggling with “what to say” when it came to creating content. </p><p> </p><p>My copywriter and I sat down with the group and talked about email marketing and the importance of nurturing your audience before and after they become subscribers. </p><p> </p><p>Then, the conversation turned to blogs. </p><p> </p><p>At first, my members were not excited about the idea of adding a blog to their websites or blogging regularly. But, when we started talking about how they could put one blog to work for them, they started listening. Pretty soon, heads were nodding and questions started coming quickly. </p><p> </p><p>A blog can act as what we call your “hero piece of content.” That means it’s the main piece. Once you have that written, it’s all about repurposing and pulling pieces out to be used in all kinds of different ways inside your marketing strategy. </p><p> </p><p>Here are six different pieces of content you can create from one hero piece of content: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Emails</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>LIVES</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Social media posts </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Pinterest pins</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Podcast episodes</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>IG reels/TikTok videos</li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>I challenged my members, and I challenge you, to start blogging if you haven’t. Start with one blog post a month. Once that’s going well, add a second.</p><p> </p><p>Did you know a blog can help your subscription box business? In today’s episode, I walk you through creating a piece of hero content you can then repurpose in many different ways. Work smarter not harder at content creation and learn how to put your blog to work for you. Come listen!</p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1479</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[57c0ad0d-dbdd-4bdc-a417-17aa6d35a6cd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3116657474.mp3?updated=1701785233" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>057: Building a Subscription Box on Shopify with Nicole Jenney</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/057-building-a-subscription-box-with-nicole-jenney</link>
      <description>“Don’t let the tech stop you like it stopped me for a long time.” - Sarah 
I knew I wanted to start a subscription box. I dreamed about it every night. I planned out all the boxes, knowing exactly what I’d give my subscribers. And exactly how much they’d love it. Yet, it took me 18 months before I launched my subscription box. What held me back? The tech. 
Tech holds SO MANY of us back. It’s the number one stumbling block for members inside Launch Your Box. And I get it. But I want to help you get past that roadblock. The best way to do that? Knowledge! 
I brought Nicole onto the podcast today to talk to us about what you need from a tech standpoint to start your subscription box. Nicole is one of our tech gurus inside Launch Your Box. She does SUCH a great job breaking things down and making them simple. Today, Nicole is talking to us about Shopify. 
Shopify is an e-commerce platform specifically created for selling products online. Shopify is Nicole’s number one choice for new subscription box owners for three reasons. 

It allows you to have your own platform - this means it will work for you NOW, when you’re new, and LATER when you’ve grown and are ready to scale. 

Shopify is built for e-commerce. You don’t have to patch things together or design workarounds. Shopify is already set up to do what you need it to do. 

Shopify integrates with subscription boxes with easy-to-use apps. 

You will need to add an app to Shopify in order to run recurring payments. Nicole recommends Paywhirl. She raved about their customer service and new features that make it even easier to use. 
Shopify is a budget-friendly option at only $29/month and is truly user-friendly. Many members of Launch Your Box have successfully created their subscription box websites using Shopify. 
Because she believes in Shopify so strongly and is so dedicated to the members of Launch Your Box, Nicole developed a training course specifically for us called Shopify Simplified. This self-paced course guides you through everything you need to get the tech side of your subscription box up and running in only eight weeks. Note: you can - and people do - work through it faster! 
Nicole and I also talked briefly about two other pieces of tech to have in place. You need a CRM or customer relationship management system. We recommend Klaviyo - it is the BEST for managing email lists and maintaining connections with your audience. Klaviyo also now offers SMS which allows you to take full advantage of all the benefits of text marketing. And for shipping? It’s Shipstation all the way. They make it sooo easy. My shipping process is streamlined and efficient. With one push of a button, all my shipping labels print out.  
Join me for this episode as Nicole takes the fear and mystery out of tech. This is a part of your business that is too important not to pay attention to. And your subscription box dreams are too important to let tech slow you down or stop you from moving ahead. Nicole is here to help. Grab a notebook and get ready to learn!    
 
Important Links: 

Shopify Website

Paywhirl Subscriptions Website

 Klaviyo Website


Shipstation Website 

 
Find and follow Nicole: 

GPig Box on Facebook

GPig Box on Instagram


GPig Box Website 

Shopify Simplified Course

 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 16 Feb 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Building a Subscription Box on Shopify with Nicole Jenney </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>57</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cb9250c4-b0bf-11ed-b273-1b44a6a18d00/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“Don’t let the tech stop you like it stopped me for a long time.” - Sarah  I knew I wanted to start a subscription box. I dreamed about it every night. I planned out all the boxes, knowing exactly what I’d give my subscribers. And exactly...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Don’t let the tech stop you like it stopped me for a long time.” - Sarah 
I knew I wanted to start a subscription box. I dreamed about it every night. I planned out all the boxes, knowing exactly what I’d give my subscribers. And exactly how much they’d love it. Yet, it took me 18 months before I launched my subscription box. What held me back? The tech. 
Tech holds SO MANY of us back. It’s the number one stumbling block for members inside Launch Your Box. And I get it. But I want to help you get past that roadblock. The best way to do that? Knowledge! 
I brought Nicole onto the podcast today to talk to us about what you need from a tech standpoint to start your subscription box. Nicole is one of our tech gurus inside Launch Your Box. She does SUCH a great job breaking things down and making them simple. Today, Nicole is talking to us about Shopify. 
Shopify is an e-commerce platform specifically created for selling products online. Shopify is Nicole’s number one choice for new subscription box owners for three reasons. 

It allows you to have your own platform - this means it will work for you NOW, when you’re new, and LATER when you’ve grown and are ready to scale. 

Shopify is built for e-commerce. You don’t have to patch things together or design workarounds. Shopify is already set up to do what you need it to do. 

Shopify integrates with subscription boxes with easy-to-use apps. 

You will need to add an app to Shopify in order to run recurring payments. Nicole recommends Paywhirl. She raved about their customer service and new features that make it even easier to use. 
Shopify is a budget-friendly option at only $29/month and is truly user-friendly. Many members of Launch Your Box have successfully created their subscription box websites using Shopify. 
Because she believes in Shopify so strongly and is so dedicated to the members of Launch Your Box, Nicole developed a training course specifically for us called Shopify Simplified. This self-paced course guides you through everything you need to get the tech side of your subscription box up and running in only eight weeks. Note: you can - and people do - work through it faster! 
Nicole and I also talked briefly about two other pieces of tech to have in place. You need a CRM or customer relationship management system. We recommend Klaviyo - it is the BEST for managing email lists and maintaining connections with your audience. Klaviyo also now offers SMS which allows you to take full advantage of all the benefits of text marketing. And for shipping? It’s Shipstation all the way. They make it sooo easy. My shipping process is streamlined and efficient. With one push of a button, all my shipping labels print out.  
Join me for this episode as Nicole takes the fear and mystery out of tech. This is a part of your business that is too important not to pay attention to. And your subscription box dreams are too important to let tech slow you down or stop you from moving ahead. Nicole is here to help. Grab a notebook and get ready to learn!    
 
Important Links: 

Shopify Website

Paywhirl Subscriptions Website

 Klaviyo Website


Shipstation Website 

 
Find and follow Nicole: 

GPig Box on Facebook

GPig Box on Instagram


GPig Box Website 

Shopify Simplified Course

 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><em>“Don’t let the tech stop you like it stopped me for a long time.” - Sarah </em></p><p>I knew I wanted to start a subscription box. I dreamed about it every night. I planned out all the boxes, knowing exactly what I’d give my subscribers. And exactly how much they’d love it. Yet, it took me 18 months before I launched my subscription box. What held me back? The tech. </p><p>Tech holds SO MANY of us back. It’s the number one stumbling block for members inside Launch Your Box. And I get it. But I want to help you get past that roadblock. The best way to do that? Knowledge! </p><p>I brought Nicole onto the podcast today to talk to us about what you need from a tech standpoint to start your subscription box. Nicole is one of our tech gurus inside Launch Your Box. She does SUCH a great job breaking things down and making them simple. Today, Nicole is talking to us about Shopify. </p><p>Shopify is an e-commerce platform specifically created for selling products online. Shopify is Nicole’s number one choice for new subscription box owners for three reasons. </p><ol>
<li>It allows you to have your own platform - this means it will work for you NOW, when you’re new, and LATER when you’ve grown and are ready to scale. </li>
<li>Shopify is built for e-commerce. You don’t have to patch things together or design workarounds. Shopify is already set up to do what you need it to do. </li>
<li>Shopify integrates with subscription boxes with easy-to-use apps. </li>
</ol><p>You will need to add an app to Shopify in order to run recurring payments. Nicole recommends Paywhirl. She raved about their customer service and new features that make it even easier to use. </p><p>Shopify is a budget-friendly option at only $29/month and is truly user-friendly. Many members of Launch Your Box have successfully created their subscription box websites using Shopify. </p><p>Because she believes in Shopify so strongly and is so dedicated to the members of Launch Your Box, Nicole developed a training course specifically for us called <em>Shopify Simplified</em>. This self-paced course guides you through everything you need to get the tech side of your subscription box up and running in only eight weeks. <em>Note: you can - and people do - work through it faster! </em></p><p>Nicole and I also talked briefly about two other pieces of tech to have in place. You need a CRM or customer relationship management system. We recommend Klaviyo - it is the BEST for managing email lists and maintaining connections with your audience. Klaviyo also now offers SMS which allows you to take full advantage of all the benefits of text marketing. And for shipping? It’s Shipstation all the way. They make it sooo easy. My shipping process is streamlined and efficient. With one push of a button, all my shipping labels print out.  </p><p>Join me for this episode as Nicole takes the fear and mystery out of tech. This is a part of your business that is too important not to pay attention to. And your subscription box dreams are too important to let tech slow you down or stop you from moving ahead. Nicole is here to help. Grab a notebook and get ready to learn!    </p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.shopify.com/">Shopify Website</a></li>
<li><a href="https://apps.shopify.com/paywhirl">Paywhirl Subscriptions Website</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.klaviyo.com/features/ecommerce-marketing-automation?&amp;utm_source=google-search&amp;utm_medium=paid&amp;utm_campaign=7013o000002L2zGAAS&amp;utm_content=NA-Brand-Exact-KlaviyoMisspellings&amp;utm_keyword=klaviyo&amp;utm_matchtype=e&amp;gclid=Cj0KCQiAjJOQBhCkARIsAEKMtO3sAqX8FcrcznMCWIq_i8w-5kYbzywPo3PQHxg_rmvErWY6_ayk5eUaAkBuEALw_wcB&amp;gclsrc=aw.ds"> Klaviyo Website</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.shipstation.com/">Shipstation Website</a> </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Find and follow Nicole: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/gpigbox">GPig Box on Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/gpigbox/">GPig Box on Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://gpigbox.com/">GPig Box Website</a> </li>
<li><a href="https://nicolejenney.com/shopify/">Shopify Simplified Course</a></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1768</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[886d871b-2b18-4c09-a4b3-3c881187ed6f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2296074614.mp3?updated=1680654285" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>056: Are You Talking About Your Subscription Box Enough? </title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/056-are-you-talking-about-your-subscription-box-enough</link>
      <description>Every month, I go LIVE inside my coaching membership, Launch Your Box, to open members’ subscription boxes and provide feedback. Last month, I opened some incredible boxes. I was so impressed with the creativity and care these members put into curating an experience for their subscribers, just like I taught them. What I wasn’t impressed with was how low their subscriber numbers were. With boxes that good, their numbers should have been much higher. 
 
It was time to dig into what was holding them back. So I asked a question. And it got my members squirming. It wasn’t a difficult question, but it was an important one. 
 
I asked them to look back at the past month and count how many times they’d talked about their subscription boxes on social media. Then, I gave them a grade based on their responses. The bad news? Many of them failed! 
 
I know you may feel like you’re talking about your subscription box all the time, but I’m willing to bet you’re not talking about it enough. I want you to talk about it at least 2-3 times a week – 4-5 times a week is even better. 
 
Does that sound like too much? It’s not. Trust me. Does this mean you’re posting the same post or sharing the same picture or saying the same thing 4-5 times a week? Of course not! 
 
Here are five different posts you can create to generate excitement about your box: 



Sneak Peek



Picture of the box with all the items inside



Individual picture of each item by itself (3-5 pics)



Individual picture of each item in a lifestyle image (used in its natural setting, i.e. desk, kitchen, closet, etc)



Benefits of your product, what problem does it solve



 
And we’re just getting started. I want to see you posting style guides, reviews &amp; testimonials, behind the scenes (your audience will love the chance to see what goes into getting a subscription box out the door), and past boxes (hello, FOMO!). 
 
Then there’s video – short videos and going LIVE. It all needs to be part of your monthly marketing plan to get the word out about your subscription. 
 
Are you talking about your subscription box enough? Odds are you aren’t. But how much is enough? In today’s episode, I walk you through how much you should be posting about your box and give you lots of examples to get you started. Come listen!
 
Important Links: 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 09 Feb 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Are You Talking About Your Subscription Box Enough? </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>56</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cba920f6-b0bf-11ed-b273-0b008e533cfb/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Every month, I go LIVE inside my coaching membership, Launch Your Box, to open members’ subscription boxes and provide feedback. Last month, I opened some incredible boxes. I was so impressed with the creativity and care these members put into...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Every month, I go LIVE inside my coaching membership, Launch Your Box, to open members’ subscription boxes and provide feedback. Last month, I opened some incredible boxes. I was so impressed with the creativity and care these members put into curating an experience for their subscribers, just like I taught them. What I wasn’t impressed with was how low their subscriber numbers were. With boxes that good, their numbers should have been much higher. 
 
It was time to dig into what was holding them back. So I asked a question. And it got my members squirming. It wasn’t a difficult question, but it was an important one. 
 
I asked them to look back at the past month and count how many times they’d talked about their subscription boxes on social media. Then, I gave them a grade based on their responses. The bad news? Many of them failed! 
 
I know you may feel like you’re talking about your subscription box all the time, but I’m willing to bet you’re not talking about it enough. I want you to talk about it at least 2-3 times a week – 4-5 times a week is even better. 
 
Does that sound like too much? It’s not. Trust me. Does this mean you’re posting the same post or sharing the same picture or saying the same thing 4-5 times a week? Of course not! 
 
Here are five different posts you can create to generate excitement about your box: 



Sneak Peek



Picture of the box with all the items inside



Individual picture of each item by itself (3-5 pics)



Individual picture of each item in a lifestyle image (used in its natural setting, i.e. desk, kitchen, closet, etc)



Benefits of your product, what problem does it solve



 
And we’re just getting started. I want to see you posting style guides, reviews &amp; testimonials, behind the scenes (your audience will love the chance to see what goes into getting a subscription box out the door), and past boxes (hello, FOMO!). 
 
Then there’s video – short videos and going LIVE. It all needs to be part of your monthly marketing plan to get the word out about your subscription. 
 
Are you talking about your subscription box enough? Odds are you aren’t. But how much is enough? In today’s episode, I walk you through how much you should be posting about your box and give you lots of examples to get you started. Come listen!
 
Important Links: 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Every month, I go LIVE inside my coaching membership, Launch Your Box, to open members’ subscription boxes and provide feedback. Last month, I opened some incredible boxes. I was so impressed with the creativity and care these members put into curating an experience for their subscribers, just like I taught them. What I wasn’t impressed with was how low their subscriber numbers were. With boxes that good, their numbers should have been much higher. </p><p> </p><p>It was time to dig into what was holding them back. So I asked a question. And it got my members squirming. It wasn’t a difficult question, but it was an important one. </p><p> </p><p>I asked them to look back at the past month and count how many times they’d talked about their subscription boxes on social media. Then, I gave them a grade based on their responses. The bad news? Many of them failed! </p><p> </p><p>I know you may feel like you’re talking about your subscription box all the time, but I’m willing to bet you’re not talking about it enough. I want you to talk about it at least 2-3 times a week – 4-5 times a week is even better. </p><p> </p><p>Does that sound like too much? It’s not. Trust me. Does this mean you’re posting the same post or sharing the same picture or saying the same thing 4-5 times a week? Of course not! </p><p> </p><p>Here are five different posts you can create to generate excitement about your box: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Sneak Peek</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Picture of the box with all the items inside</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Individual picture of each item by itself (3-5 pics)</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Individual picture of each item in a lifestyle image (used in its natural setting, i.e. desk, kitchen, closet, etc)</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Benefits of your product, what problem does it solve</li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>And we’re just getting started. I want to see you posting style guides, reviews &amp; testimonials, behind the scenes (your audience will love the chance to see what goes into getting a subscription box out the door), and past boxes (hello, FOMO!). </p><p> </p><p>Then there’s video – short videos and going LIVE. It all needs to be part of your monthly marketing plan to get the word out about your subscription. </p><p> </p><p>Are <em>you</em> talking about your subscription box enough? Odds are you aren’t. But how much is enough? In today’s episode, I walk you through how much you should be posting about your box and give you lots of examples to get you started. Come listen!</p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1877</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0664768b-4512-489e-8ea5-d0e460f2848c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1907368785.mp3?updated=1701785378" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>055: Building a Profitable, Sustainable Business with Susan Bradley</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/055-building-a-profitable-sustainable-business-with-susan-bradley</link>
      <description>“Part-time work will get you part-time results.” 
There’s nothing quite like sitting and talking business with someone who just “gets it.” And just gets you. 
For this episode, I sat down with one of my biz besties, Susan Bradley. Susan is the founder of The Social Sales Girls as well as the past and current owner of successful online retail businesses. 
Susan and I are at different stages in our businesses right now and we talked about the issues, challenges, and feelings that come with each of those stages. My business is established after years of working in it and on it full-time. Susan is in the early stages of her newest business and is only able to devote part-time hours to its growth. 
We went deep. We got real. And we talked about five things we want all new entrepreneurs to know. Things you need to understand and get comfortable with in order to succeed.   



Manage your expectations.



It takes time to build a profitable, sustainable business. You have to give it time. 



Part-time work will give you part-time results. 



The hockey stick effect - there is a point where you’ll pass the curve to catch up. (Susan is Canadian - there had to be a hockey reference in there somewhere).  



Find a friend who understands. Trust us on this one. 



I always learn from my conversations with Susan. And I always laugh during them. I know you’ll learn from listening to us talk and I have a feeling you’ll get a laugh or two when we share our recent misadventures in California. 
This episode is for any entrepreneur, including subscription box owners, who is starting, launching, or growing a business. 
 
Find and follow Susan: 



The Social Sales Girls Podcast



The Social Sales Girls on Instagram



The Social Sales Girls on Facebook






The Social Sales Girls Website 



Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 02 Feb 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Building a Profitable, Sustainable Business with Susan Bradley</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>55</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cbc38e46-b0bf-11ed-b273-f3d7d40d3e81/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“Part-time work will get you part-time results.”  There’s nothing quite like sitting and talking business with someone who just “gets it.” And just gets you.  For this episode, I sat down with one of my biz besties, Susan Bradley....</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Part-time work will get you part-time results.” 
There’s nothing quite like sitting and talking business with someone who just “gets it.” And just gets you. 
For this episode, I sat down with one of my biz besties, Susan Bradley. Susan is the founder of The Social Sales Girls as well as the past and current owner of successful online retail businesses. 
Susan and I are at different stages in our businesses right now and we talked about the issues, challenges, and feelings that come with each of those stages. My business is established after years of working in it and on it full-time. Susan is in the early stages of her newest business and is only able to devote part-time hours to its growth. 
We went deep. We got real. And we talked about five things we want all new entrepreneurs to know. Things you need to understand and get comfortable with in order to succeed.   



Manage your expectations.



It takes time to build a profitable, sustainable business. You have to give it time. 



Part-time work will give you part-time results. 



The hockey stick effect - there is a point where you’ll pass the curve to catch up. (Susan is Canadian - there had to be a hockey reference in there somewhere).  



Find a friend who understands. Trust us on this one. 



I always learn from my conversations with Susan. And I always laugh during them. I know you’ll learn from listening to us talk and I have a feeling you’ll get a laugh or two when we share our recent misadventures in California. 
This episode is for any entrepreneur, including subscription box owners, who is starting, launching, or growing a business. 
 
Find and follow Susan: 



The Social Sales Girls Podcast



The Social Sales Girls on Instagram



The Social Sales Girls on Facebook






The Social Sales Girls Website 



Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><em>“Part-time work will get you part-time results.” </em></p><p>There’s nothing quite like sitting and talking business with someone who just “gets it.” And just gets you. </p><p>For this episode, I sat down with one of my biz besties, Susan Bradley. Susan is the founder of The Social Sales Girls as well as the past and current owner of successful online retail businesses. </p><p>Susan and I are at different stages in our businesses right now and we talked about the issues, challenges, and feelings that come with each of those stages. My business is established after years of working in it and on it full-time. Susan is in the early stages of her newest business and is only able to devote part-time hours to its growth. </p><p>We went deep. We got real. And we talked about five things we want all new entrepreneurs to know. Things you need to understand and get comfortable with in order to succeed.   </p><ol>
<li><br></li>
<li>Manage your expectations.</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>It takes time to build a profitable, sustainable business. You have to give it time. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Part-time work will give you part-time results. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>The hockey stick effect - there is a point where you’ll pass the curve to catch up. (Susan is Canadian - there had to be a hockey reference in there somewhere).  </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Find a friend who understands. Trust us on this one. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ol><p>I always learn from my conversations with Susan. And I always laugh during them. I know you’ll learn from listening to us talk and I have a feeling you’ll get a laugh or two when we share our recent misadventures in California. </p><p>This episode is for any entrepreneur, including subscription box owners, who is starting, launching, or growing a business. </p><p> </p><p>Find and follow Susan: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://thesocialsalesgirls.com/podcast/">The Social Sales Girls Podcast</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/socialsalesgirls/">The Social Sales Girls on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/thesocialsalesgirls">The Social Sales Girls on Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://thesocialsalesgirls.com/">The Social Sales Girls Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1806</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[617729d3-32c8-4706-b59e-95a66f9517a6]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2913607254.mp3?updated=1701785435" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>054: Sourcing Tips on Alibaba with Marissa Sayers</title>
      <description>“Stand tall and own your buying power.” 

Is this going to be the year you find new sources for products? Have you been curious about how to order products from overseas manufacturers? Are you wondering what Alibaba is and why so many subscription box owners use it to order products at great prices? 

If any of those sound like you, this episode is for you. Marissa Sayers joined me to take us through the process of ordering products through Alibaba. 

Marissa has a lot of experience sourcing products overseas and actually handles sourcing for my business. She does an incredible job because she is very detail-oriented and knows this process backward and forward.  

Marissa gave us a detailed outline of the steps of sourcing products directly from a manufacturer. 

Search Alibaba.com for products

Narrow your search 

Further filter your search based on delivery options (find out why you should ONLY accept DDP shipping)

Talk to several manufacturer representatives

Order samples (they cost more than you think they should)

Place order

Receive shipment 


Realize this process takes time. Plan for 90-120 days to work through it from start to finish. In other words - Alibaba is not for panic buying! 

It’s important to remember that at the same time you’re vetting a manufacturer, they are vetting you. Coming to them from a place of knowledge will give you confidence. 

Marissa also talked about how you can work with her if you need help sourcing products. She has limited spots available to work with her and gives priority to my people. Make sure you let her know if you’re a podcast listener or member of Launch Your Box.   

As a subscription box owner, you order large quantities of products every month. When you decide to step into this world of overseas sourcing, stand tall and own your buying power! 

Join me for this episode as Marissa takes us through her process of sourcing products through Alibaba, step by step. You’ll learn what to look for, what to ask for, and what to never, ever compromise on. If you’re ready to source products from overseas, this is a can’t-miss episode. Grab a notebook and pen - you’re going to take a LOT of notes.   
 
Learn how to bypass the middlemen and wholesalers by sourcing on Alibaba! 
﻿Sourcing Courses 101 &amp; 201 - https://marissa-sayers.mykajabi.com/a/2147542513/F2huURQN

Important Links: 

Alibaba Website

Ali Express Website

 
Find and follow Marissa: 

Marissa Mae Sayers on Facebook

Marissa Mae Sayers on Instagram

Sayers Imports Website


Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today!</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 26 Jan 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Sourcing Tips on Alibaba with Marissa Sayers</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>54</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cbd8be1a-b0bf-11ed-b273-33a261e2bfb0/image/9062c4bf25dab6a2c3e172a3410a9f5b.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“Stand tall and own your buying power.”  Is this going to be the year you find new sources for products? Have you been curious about how to order products from overseas manufacturers? Are you wondering what Alibaba is and why so many...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Stand tall and own your buying power.” 

Is this going to be the year you find new sources for products? Have you been curious about how to order products from overseas manufacturers? Are you wondering what Alibaba is and why so many subscription box owners use it to order products at great prices? 

If any of those sound like you, this episode is for you. Marissa Sayers joined me to take us through the process of ordering products through Alibaba. 

Marissa has a lot of experience sourcing products overseas and actually handles sourcing for my business. She does an incredible job because she is very detail-oriented and knows this process backward and forward.  

Marissa gave us a detailed outline of the steps of sourcing products directly from a manufacturer. 

Search Alibaba.com for products

Narrow your search 

Further filter your search based on delivery options (find out why you should ONLY accept DDP shipping)

Talk to several manufacturer representatives

Order samples (they cost more than you think they should)

Place order

Receive shipment 


Realize this process takes time. Plan for 90-120 days to work through it from start to finish. In other words - Alibaba is not for panic buying! 

It’s important to remember that at the same time you’re vetting a manufacturer, they are vetting you. Coming to them from a place of knowledge will give you confidence. 

Marissa also talked about how you can work with her if you need help sourcing products. She has limited spots available to work with her and gives priority to my people. Make sure you let her know if you’re a podcast listener or member of Launch Your Box.   

As a subscription box owner, you order large quantities of products every month. When you decide to step into this world of overseas sourcing, stand tall and own your buying power! 

Join me for this episode as Marissa takes us through her process of sourcing products through Alibaba, step by step. You’ll learn what to look for, what to ask for, and what to never, ever compromise on. If you’re ready to source products from overseas, this is a can’t-miss episode. Grab a notebook and pen - you’re going to take a LOT of notes.   
 
Learn how to bypass the middlemen and wholesalers by sourcing on Alibaba! 
﻿Sourcing Courses 101 &amp; 201 - https://marissa-sayers.mykajabi.com/a/2147542513/F2huURQN

Important Links: 

Alibaba Website

Ali Express Website

 
Find and follow Marissa: 

Marissa Mae Sayers on Facebook

Marissa Mae Sayers on Instagram

Sayers Imports Website


Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today!</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><em>“Stand tall and own your buying power.” </em></p><p><br></p><p>Is this going to be the year you find new sources for products? Have you been curious about how to order products from overseas manufacturers? Are you wondering what Alibaba is and why so many subscription box owners use it to order products at great prices? </p><p><br></p><p>If any of those sound like you, this episode is for you. Marissa Sayers joined me to take us through the process of ordering products through Alibaba. </p><p><br></p><p>Marissa has a lot of experience sourcing products overseas and actually handles sourcing for my business. She does an incredible job because she is very detail-oriented and knows this process backward and forward.  </p><p><br></p><p>Marissa gave us a detailed outline of the steps of sourcing products directly from a manufacturer. </p><ol>
<li>Search Alibaba.com for products</li>
<li>Narrow your search </li>
<li>Further filter your search based on delivery options (find out why you should ONLY accept DDP shipping)</li>
<li>Talk to several manufacturer representatives</li>
<li>Order samples (they cost more than you think they should)</li>
<li>Place order</li>
<li>Receive shipment </li>
</ol><p><br></p><p>Realize this process takes time. Plan for 90-120 days to work through it from start to finish. In other words - Alibaba is not for panic buying! </p><p><br></p><p>It’s important to remember that at the same time you’re vetting a manufacturer, they are vetting you. Coming to them from a place of knowledge will give you confidence. </p><p><br></p><p>Marissa also talked about how you can work with her if you need help sourcing products. She has limited spots available to work with her and gives priority to my people. Make sure you let her know if you’re a podcast listener or member of Launch Your Box.   </p><p><br></p><p>As a subscription box owner, you order large quantities of products every month. When you decide to step into this world of overseas sourcing, stand tall and own your buying power! </p><p><br></p><p>Join me for this episode as Marissa takes us through her process of sourcing products through Alibaba, step by step. You’ll learn what to look for, what to ask for, and what to never, ever compromise on. If you’re ready to source products from overseas, this is a can’t-miss episode. Grab a notebook and pen - you’re going to take a LOT of notes.   </p><p> </p><p><strong>Learn how to bypass the middlemen and wholesalers by sourcing on Alibaba! </strong></p><p>﻿Sourcing Courses 101 &amp; 201 - <a href="https://marissa-sayers.mykajabi.com/a/2147542513/F2huURQN">https://marissa-sayers.mykajabi.com/a/2147542513/F2huURQN</a></p><p><br></p><p>Important Links: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.alibaba.com/">Alibaba Website</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.aliexpress.com/">Ali Express Website</a></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Find and follow Marissa: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/marissa.m.sayers">Marissa Mae Sayers on Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/marissamaesayers/">Marissa Mae Sayers on Instagram</a></li>
<li><a href="http://www.sayersimports.com">Sayers Imports Website</a></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today!</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2195</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[bd2ef0a4-ecea-4376-a179-a998bc1ae963]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7334142102.mp3?updated=1731454380" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>053: It’s More Than Just a Box - Building a Thriving Community of Subscribers </title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/053-its-more-than-just-a-box-building-a-thriving-community-of-subscribers</link>
      <description>“This subscription has turned into so much more than a subscription to me.” - Jenny Hines
Jenny Hines designs gorgeous floral arrangements. Seriously beautiful bouquets anyone would love to give or receive. 
It turns out Jenny’s talent for creating supportive communities just might be even greater than her talent for creating eye-popping bouquets. 
Jenny took over the family floral business from her parents in 2018 and from the start, a subscription was something she wanted to do. She jumped right in and started the Celebration Subscription, where men chose three dates throughout the year to send flowers to their ladies and Jenny sent them on those dates. She describes that first experience in two words. Night Mare. Well, one word actually, but Jenny gives it enough weight to make it two! 
Jenny put the idea of a subscription on the back burner for a while. And then COVID hit and she found herself needing to pivot. Jenny jumped in with both feet, figuring out how to run a subscription business and managing the complexities of shipping flowers. 
A few months into her subscription business, Jenny found Launch Your Box and learned the way to greater growth was to move from an open to a closed subscription. 
Jenny now has 86 subscribers - busy moms who forget to do something special for themselves to celebrate the small wins and beauty in their everyday lives. 
But Jenny has so much more than a subscription. She has created a community of women who encourage each other, pray for each other, and walk through life together - the highs and the lows. It’s that community that is Jenny’s favorite part of her subscription box business.  
Join me for this episode as Jenny takes us through the ups and downs of her subscription box journey, the time the color purple almost caused her to throw in the towel, and how building a truly special community led to a $10,000 flower order AND a family vacation when one of her members couldn’t imagine having anyone else do the flowers for her wedding.   
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Jenny: 



The Flower Momma on Facebook



The Flower Momma on Instagram



The Flower Momma Website



 The Flower Momma Podcast



Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 19 Jan 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>It’s More Than Just a Box - Building a Thriving Community of Subscribers </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>53</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cbee8c2c-b0bf-11ed-b273-a721f71bda42/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“This subscription has turned into so much more than a subscription to me.” - Jenny Hines Jenny Hines designs gorgeous floral arrangements. Seriously beautiful bouquets anyone would love to give or receive.  It turns out Jenny’s talent for...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“This subscription has turned into so much more than a subscription to me.” - Jenny Hines
Jenny Hines designs gorgeous floral arrangements. Seriously beautiful bouquets anyone would love to give or receive. 
It turns out Jenny’s talent for creating supportive communities just might be even greater than her talent for creating eye-popping bouquets. 
Jenny took over the family floral business from her parents in 2018 and from the start, a subscription was something she wanted to do. She jumped right in and started the Celebration Subscription, where men chose three dates throughout the year to send flowers to their ladies and Jenny sent them on those dates. She describes that first experience in two words. Night Mare. Well, one word actually, but Jenny gives it enough weight to make it two! 
Jenny put the idea of a subscription on the back burner for a while. And then COVID hit and she found herself needing to pivot. Jenny jumped in with both feet, figuring out how to run a subscription business and managing the complexities of shipping flowers. 
A few months into her subscription business, Jenny found Launch Your Box and learned the way to greater growth was to move from an open to a closed subscription. 
Jenny now has 86 subscribers - busy moms who forget to do something special for themselves to celebrate the small wins and beauty in their everyday lives. 
But Jenny has so much more than a subscription. She has created a community of women who encourage each other, pray for each other, and walk through life together - the highs and the lows. It’s that community that is Jenny’s favorite part of her subscription box business.  
Join me for this episode as Jenny takes us through the ups and downs of her subscription box journey, the time the color purple almost caused her to throw in the towel, and how building a truly special community led to a $10,000 flower order AND a family vacation when one of her members couldn’t imagine having anyone else do the flowers for her wedding.   
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Jenny: 



The Flower Momma on Facebook



The Flower Momma on Instagram



The Flower Momma Website



 The Flower Momma Podcast



Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><em>“This subscription has turned into so much more than a subscription to me.”</em> - Jenny Hines</p><p>Jenny Hines designs gorgeous floral arrangements. Seriously beautiful bouquets anyone would love to give or receive. </p><p>It turns out Jenny’s talent for creating supportive communities just might be even greater than her talent for creating eye-popping bouquets. </p><p>Jenny took over the family floral business from her parents in 2018 and from the start, a subscription was something she wanted to do. She jumped right in and started the Celebration Subscription, where men chose three dates throughout the year to send flowers to their ladies and Jenny sent them on those dates. She describes that first experience in two words. Night Mare. Well, one word actually, but Jenny gives it enough weight to make it two! </p><p>Jenny put the idea of a subscription on the back burner for a while. And then COVID hit and she found herself needing to pivot. Jenny jumped in with both feet, figuring out how to run a subscription business and managing the complexities of shipping flowers. </p><p>A few months into her subscription business, Jenny found Launch Your Box and learned the way to greater growth was to move from an open to a closed subscription. </p><p>Jenny now has 86 subscribers - busy moms who forget to do something special for themselves to celebrate the small wins and beauty in their everyday lives. </p><p>But Jenny has so much more than a subscription. She has created a community of women who encourage each other, pray for each other, and walk through life together - the highs and the lows. It’s that community that is Jenny’s favorite part of her subscription box business.  </p><p>Join me for this episode as Jenny takes us through the ups and downs of her subscription box journey, the time the color purple almost caused her to throw in the towel, and how building a truly special community led to a $10,000 flower order AND a family vacation when one of her members couldn’t imagine having anyone else do the flowers for her wedding.   </p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Jenny: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/theflowermomma">The Flower Momma on Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/theflowermomma/?hl=en">The Flower Momma on Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.theflowermomma.com/">The Flower Momma Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/the-flower-momma-podcast-with-jenny-lee-hines/id1554519793"> The Flower Momma Podcast</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2730</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[65489f4e-3bde-4102-9c73-747ea9c5d15e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9940306953.mp3?updated=1701785418" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>052: It’s Time to Start Your Box!</title>
      <description>Let’s start this year with a better plan, a plan to help you move forward because… It’s Time to Start Your Subscription Box! 
 
Now is the time to get started the right way. 
 
See, it’s hard to take steps forward with starting your subscription box if you can’t visualize who that box is for - your ideal customer. And if you already have a subscription box and you’re struggling with marketing, gaining subscribers, or retaining the subscribers you do have, take a closer look at your ideal customer. 
 
I want you to describe your ideal customer in 3-5 words. 

Are they a man or a woman? 

Are they an adult or a child? 

How old are they? 

Where do they live? 

Do they belong to a certain profession or faith group? 

Do they have a specific hobby or love for something? 

 
Answering these questions allows you to visualize that person. My ideal customer for my monogram box is a “Southern Busy Mom.” Can you picture her? I can! I curate subscription boxes for her every month. 
 
Ask yourself what your ideal customer is thinking, feeling, and doing each month of the year. It’s this knowledge that will help you plan themes for your boxes before you ever start looking for products. 
 
Once you’re able to visualize your ideal customer, it’s time to decide what kind of box to create. You have choices: 

Monthly

Quarterly

Bimonthly

One Thing of the Month

 
There are pros and cons to each type of box. Monthly boxes are easier to market and bring in regular, recurring revenue. They are also a LOT more work. Quarterly boxes can make marketing challenging but give you time to catch your breath between boxes and may allow you to curate a more expensive, luxurious box. 
 
A “One Thing of the Month” box is a great place to start! You’re simply providing one item each month. I have members inside Launch Your Box who have been very successful with their “one things.” T-shirts, candles, beef jerky, washi tape, door hangers, and more.
 
Once you’ve decided who your ideal customer is and the type of box you’re going to offer, it’s time to curate some boxes! Join me for my FREE  6 in 60 Workshop where we’ll plan six months’ worth of subscription boxes in only an hour! 
 
Join me for this episode as I talk about how now IS the time to start your subscription box and go over the first TWO steps forward, helping you discover who your box is for and what kind of subscription box is the best choice for your business. 
Important Links: 
 6 in 60 Workshop
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Jan 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>It’s Time to Start Your Box!</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>52</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cc13dc98-b0bf-11ed-b273-a366abe44af7/image/9062c4bf25dab6a2c3e172a3410a9f5b.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Let’s start this year with a better plan, a plan to help you move forward because… It’s Time to Start Your Subscription Box!    Now is the time to get started the right way.    See, it’s hard to take steps forward with...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Let’s start this year with a better plan, a plan to help you move forward because… It’s Time to Start Your Subscription Box! 
 
Now is the time to get started the right way. 
 
See, it’s hard to take steps forward with starting your subscription box if you can’t visualize who that box is for - your ideal customer. And if you already have a subscription box and you’re struggling with marketing, gaining subscribers, or retaining the subscribers you do have, take a closer look at your ideal customer. 
 
I want you to describe your ideal customer in 3-5 words. 

Are they a man or a woman? 

Are they an adult or a child? 

How old are they? 

Where do they live? 

Do they belong to a certain profession or faith group? 

Do they have a specific hobby or love for something? 

 
Answering these questions allows you to visualize that person. My ideal customer for my monogram box is a “Southern Busy Mom.” Can you picture her? I can! I curate subscription boxes for her every month. 
 
Ask yourself what your ideal customer is thinking, feeling, and doing each month of the year. It’s this knowledge that will help you plan themes for your boxes before you ever start looking for products. 
 
Once you’re able to visualize your ideal customer, it’s time to decide what kind of box to create. You have choices: 

Monthly

Quarterly

Bimonthly

One Thing of the Month

 
There are pros and cons to each type of box. Monthly boxes are easier to market and bring in regular, recurring revenue. They are also a LOT more work. Quarterly boxes can make marketing challenging but give you time to catch your breath between boxes and may allow you to curate a more expensive, luxurious box. 
 
A “One Thing of the Month” box is a great place to start! You’re simply providing one item each month. I have members inside Launch Your Box who have been very successful with their “one things.” T-shirts, candles, beef jerky, washi tape, door hangers, and more.
 
Once you’ve decided who your ideal customer is and the type of box you’re going to offer, it’s time to curate some boxes! Join me for my FREE  6 in 60 Workshop where we’ll plan six months’ worth of subscription boxes in only an hour! 
 
Join me for this episode as I talk about how now IS the time to start your subscription box and go over the first TWO steps forward, helping you discover who your box is for and what kind of subscription box is the best choice for your business. 
Important Links: 
 6 in 60 Workshop
 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 

Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Let’s start this year with a better plan, a plan to help you move forward because… It’s Time to Start Your Subscription Box! </p><p> </p><p>Now is the time to get started the right way. </p><p> </p><p>See, it’s hard to take steps forward with starting your subscription box if you can’t visualize who that box is for - your ideal customer. And if you already have a subscription box and you’re struggling with marketing, gaining subscribers, or retaining the subscribers you do have, take a closer look at your ideal customer. </p><p> </p><p>I want you to describe your ideal customer in 3-5 words. </p><ul>
<li>Are they a man or a woman? </li>
<li>Are they an adult or a child? </li>
<li>How old are they? </li>
<li>Where do they live? </li>
<li>Do they belong to a certain profession or faith group? </li>
<li>Do they have a specific hobby or love for something? </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Answering these questions allows you to visualize that person. My ideal customer for my monogram box is a “Southern Busy Mom.” Can you picture her? I can! I curate subscription boxes for her every month. </p><p> </p><p>Ask yourself what your ideal customer is thinking, feeling, and doing each month of the year. It’s this knowledge that will help you plan themes for your boxes <em>before</em> you ever start looking for products. </p><p> </p><p>Once you’re able to visualize your ideal customer, it’s time to decide what kind of box to create. You have choices: </p><ul>
<li>Monthly</li>
<li>Quarterly</li>
<li>Bimonthly</li>
<li>One Thing of the Month</li>
</ul><p> </p><p>There are pros and cons to each type of box. Monthly boxes are easier to market and bring in regular, recurring revenue. They are also a LOT more work. Quarterly boxes can make marketing challenging but give you time to catch your breath between boxes and may allow you to curate a more expensive, luxurious box. </p><p> </p><p>A “One Thing of the Month” box is a great place to start! You’re simply providing one item each month. I have members inside Launch Your Box who have been very successful with their “one things.” T-shirts, candles, beef jerky, washi tape, door hangers, and more.</p><p> </p><p>Once you’ve decided who your ideal customer is and the type of box you’re going to offer, it’s time to curate some boxes! Join me for my FREE <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e"> 6 in 60 Workshop</a> where we’ll plan six months’ worth of subscription boxes in only an hour! </p><p> </p><p>Join me for this episode as I talk about how now IS the time to start your subscription box and go over the first TWO steps forward, helping you discover who your box is for and what kind of subscription box is the best choice for your business. </p><p>Important Links: </p><ul><li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e"> 6 in 60 Workshop</a></li></ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1753</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[16466be7-e619-4957-806e-b89bbd5a6318]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5005953446.mp3?updated=1715040175" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>051: 5 Ways to Reinvest In Your Business in the New Year</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/051-5-ways-to-reinvest-in-your-business-in-the-new-year</link>
      <description>I heard a twist on the old saying, “When life gives you lemons, make lemonade,” and thought it was perfect for subscription box business owners. It goes like this: 
 
When life gives you lemons, make lemonade. Then sell the lemonade. With the profits, buy more lemons and make more lemonade. Sell that, too. Then buy a bigger lemonade stand! 
 
Why am I talking about lemons and lemonade on today’s podcast episode? 
 
I’m not, actually. The point is, as a business owner, you need to reinvest in your business. This doesn’t have to mean spending thousands of dollars. It does mean making smart purchases that will allow you to grow your business.
 
Reinvest some of your holiday profits in one (or more) of these four areas: 



Marketing - Consider paid ads, an affiliate program, or paying an influencer or blogger to review or promote your subscription box. 



Technology - Is it time to upgrade your website? An improved customer experience will deliver a big ROI! 



People - Hire your first VA or in-person help. Get someone to help with social media posts or give a deserved raise to a current employee. 



Equipment - My Rollo printer saves me SO MUCH time and money! From an industrial printer to a t-shirt folder, any equipment purchase that helps you gain efficiency and save time delivers major ROI. 



 
Remember, we’re talking about reinvesting profits. After you’ve paid all your expenses AND paid yourself, take what’s left and invest it back into your business. A bonus? Any asset you buy also reduces the amount of tax you’ll pay! 
 
Join me for this episode as I talk about how reinvesting in your subscription box business makes the GROW stage in Start, Launch, and Grow your Subscription Box possible - and how using “subscription box math” helps you figure out how much to invest. 
Important Links: 
Links to Subscription Box Equipment: 



 Rollo Printer



 Industrial Printer



 T-shirt Folder 



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 05 Jan 2022 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>5 Ways to Reinvest In Your Business in the New Year</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>51</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cc294448-b0bf-11ed-b273-db862a94b999/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>I heard a twist on the old saying, “When life gives you lemons, make lemonade,” and thought it was perfect for subscription box business owners. It goes like this:    When life gives you lemons, make lemonade. Then sell the lemonade....</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I heard a twist on the old saying, “When life gives you lemons, make lemonade,” and thought it was perfect for subscription box business owners. It goes like this: 
 
When life gives you lemons, make lemonade. Then sell the lemonade. With the profits, buy more lemons and make more lemonade. Sell that, too. Then buy a bigger lemonade stand! 
 
Why am I talking about lemons and lemonade on today’s podcast episode? 
 
I’m not, actually. The point is, as a business owner, you need to reinvest in your business. This doesn’t have to mean spending thousands of dollars. It does mean making smart purchases that will allow you to grow your business.
 
Reinvest some of your holiday profits in one (or more) of these four areas: 



Marketing - Consider paid ads, an affiliate program, or paying an influencer or blogger to review or promote your subscription box. 



Technology - Is it time to upgrade your website? An improved customer experience will deliver a big ROI! 



People - Hire your first VA or in-person help. Get someone to help with social media posts or give a deserved raise to a current employee. 



Equipment - My Rollo printer saves me SO MUCH time and money! From an industrial printer to a t-shirt folder, any equipment purchase that helps you gain efficiency and save time delivers major ROI. 



 
Remember, we’re talking about reinvesting profits. After you’ve paid all your expenses AND paid yourself, take what’s left and invest it back into your business. A bonus? Any asset you buy also reduces the amount of tax you’ll pay! 
 
Join me for this episode as I talk about how reinvesting in your subscription box business makes the GROW stage in Start, Launch, and Grow your Subscription Box possible - and how using “subscription box math” helps you figure out how much to invest. 
Important Links: 
Links to Subscription Box Equipment: 



 Rollo Printer



 Industrial Printer



 T-shirt Folder 



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I heard a twist on the old saying, “When life gives you lemons, make lemonade,” and thought it was perfect for subscription box business owners. It goes like this: </p><p> </p><p>When life gives you lemons, make lemonade. Then sell the lemonade. With the profits, buy more lemons and make more lemonade. Sell that, too. Then buy a bigger lemonade stand! </p><p> </p><p>Why am I talking about lemons and lemonade on today’s podcast episode? </p><p> </p><p>I’m not, actually. The point is, as a business owner, you need to reinvest in your business. This doesn’t have to mean spending thousands of dollars. It does mean making smart purchases that will allow you to grow your business.</p><p> </p><p>Reinvest some of your holiday profits in one (or more) of these four areas: </p><ol>
<li><br></li>
<li>Marketing - Consider paid ads, an affiliate program, or paying an influencer or blogger to review or promote your subscription box. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Technology - Is it time to upgrade your website? An improved customer experience will deliver a big ROI! </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>People - Hire your first VA or in-person help. Get someone to help with social media posts or give a deserved raise to a current employee. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Equipment - My Rollo printer saves me SO MUCH time and money! From an industrial printer to a t-shirt folder, any equipment purchase that helps you gain efficiency and save time delivers major ROI. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ol><p> </p><p>Remember, we’re talking about reinvesting profits. After you’ve paid all your expenses AND paid yourself, take what’s left and invest it back into your business. A bonus? Any asset you buy also reduces the amount of tax you’ll pay! </p><p> </p><p>Join me for this episode as I talk about how reinvesting in your subscription box business makes the GROW stage in Start, Launch, and Grow your Subscription Box possible - and how using “subscription box math” helps you figure out how much to invest. </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Links to Subscription Box Equipment: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/B01MA3EYC5?ref=exp_framedbysarah_dp_vv_d"> Rollo Printer</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/B07RQB5WJW?ref=exp_framedbysarah_dp_vv_d"> Industrial Printer</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/B075ZSC4MV?ref=exp_framedbysarah_dp_vv_d"> T-shirt Folder </a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1016</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f5bb115b-0e54-46df-906c-0165977a0bcb]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8326191159.mp3?updated=1701785554" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>050: Never Stop Audience Building - Special 50th Episode</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/050-hottest-topic-of-the-year-is-audience-building</link>
      <description>“You can’t just put it out there and expect it to work.” - Pam Rogers 
 
This is a special episode. It’s our 50th episode and we’re celebrating reaching and passing 80,000 downloads! Thank you to all of you who’ve listened and shared - and special thanks for all your 5 Star Reviews! It means so much to me! 
 
I compiled the top ten episodes for the year and found something interesting. All ten of them had a common theme - audience building. 
 
Each of the top ten episodes - and so many others - shows us just how important audience building is. You can’t start your subscription box without an audience. And you can’t grow your subscription box business without continually growing your audience. 
 
On today’s episode, I revisit these top ten episodes and review 5 ways my guests built their audiences. 



Episode 3 - The Riches are in the Niches: Anne went specific when she created a subscription box for women dentists. She knew her ideal customer because she was her ideal customer. 



Episode 14 - 4 Ways to Build Your Audience: Tiffany ran a giveaway, posted on social media consistently, made connections, and partnered with an influencer to build her audience. 



Episode 31 - From an Audience of Zero to 100 Subscribers in 60 Days: Claudia posted consistently on Facebook and Instagram, created IG reels and stories, and added an early bird bonus. 



Episode 33 - Small Audience, No Problem! How Amanda Built 100+ Subscribers from an Audience of 600: Amanda went very specific and served her audience before she sold. 



Episode 38 - From Nurse Practitioner to Subscription Box Owner: Pam set up social media accounts, followed colleagues, and did some very creative in-person marketing when she attended a conference. 



 
Join me for this special episode as I revisit these top ten episodes and these wonderful subscription box owners. Each of these women shared her inspiring subscription box journey with us. Each of them also shared actionable tips and strategies - things they did to grow their audiences which in turn helped them grow their businesses. 
Important Links: 
Links to Top-Ten episodes: 






Episode 3 - The Riches are in the Niches - How one LYB Member Hit $10K Monthly with Her Subscription Box Business 



Episode 5 - Who Will Buy My Box and How Do I Find Them? - Subscription Box Strategies with Damon Oates



Episode 7 - Get Started Right Away with Fast and Messy Action



Episode 9 - Why am I Scared to Show Up Live? | Build an Audience for Your Subscription Box



Episode 14 - 4 Ways to Build Your Audience with Tiffany LeBaron



Episode 39 - Launch Tips with The Lettering Box



Episode 38 - From Nurse Practitioner to Subscription Box Owner



Episode 31 - From an Audience of Zero to 100 Subscribers in 60 Days



Episode 33 - Small Audience, No Problem! How Amanda Built 100+ Subscribers from an Audience of 600



Episode 42 - Consistency Pays Off with Jamie Shahan of CRNA Swag



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 29 Dec 2021 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Never Stop Audience Building - Special 50th Episode</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>50</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cc3e8b5a-b0bf-11ed-b273-4f8cfe68fe87/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“You can’t just put it out there and expect it to work.” - Pam Rogers    This is a special episode. It’s our 50th episode and we’re celebrating reaching and passing 80,000 downloads! Thank you to all of you who’ve listened and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“You can’t just put it out there and expect it to work.” - Pam Rogers 
 
This is a special episode. It’s our 50th episode and we’re celebrating reaching and passing 80,000 downloads! Thank you to all of you who’ve listened and shared - and special thanks for all your 5 Star Reviews! It means so much to me! 
 
I compiled the top ten episodes for the year and found something interesting. All ten of them had a common theme - audience building. 
 
Each of the top ten episodes - and so many others - shows us just how important audience building is. You can’t start your subscription box without an audience. And you can’t grow your subscription box business without continually growing your audience. 
 
On today’s episode, I revisit these top ten episodes and review 5 ways my guests built their audiences. 



Episode 3 - The Riches are in the Niches: Anne went specific when she created a subscription box for women dentists. She knew her ideal customer because she was her ideal customer. 



Episode 14 - 4 Ways to Build Your Audience: Tiffany ran a giveaway, posted on social media consistently, made connections, and partnered with an influencer to build her audience. 



Episode 31 - From an Audience of Zero to 100 Subscribers in 60 Days: Claudia posted consistently on Facebook and Instagram, created IG reels and stories, and added an early bird bonus. 



Episode 33 - Small Audience, No Problem! How Amanda Built 100+ Subscribers from an Audience of 600: Amanda went very specific and served her audience before she sold. 



Episode 38 - From Nurse Practitioner to Subscription Box Owner: Pam set up social media accounts, followed colleagues, and did some very creative in-person marketing when she attended a conference. 



 
Join me for this special episode as I revisit these top ten episodes and these wonderful subscription box owners. Each of these women shared her inspiring subscription box journey with us. Each of them also shared actionable tips and strategies - things they did to grow their audiences which in turn helped them grow their businesses. 
Important Links: 
Links to Top-Ten episodes: 






Episode 3 - The Riches are in the Niches - How one LYB Member Hit $10K Monthly with Her Subscription Box Business 



Episode 5 - Who Will Buy My Box and How Do I Find Them? - Subscription Box Strategies with Damon Oates



Episode 7 - Get Started Right Away with Fast and Messy Action



Episode 9 - Why am I Scared to Show Up Live? | Build an Audience for Your Subscription Box



Episode 14 - 4 Ways to Build Your Audience with Tiffany LeBaron



Episode 39 - Launch Tips with The Lettering Box



Episode 38 - From Nurse Practitioner to Subscription Box Owner



Episode 31 - From an Audience of Zero to 100 Subscribers in 60 Days



Episode 33 - Small Audience, No Problem! How Amanda Built 100+ Subscribers from an Audience of 600



Episode 42 - Consistency Pays Off with Jamie Shahan of CRNA Swag



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“You can’t just put it out there and expect it to work.” - Pam Rogers </p><p> </p><p>This is a special episode. It’s our 50th episode and we’re celebrating reaching and passing 80,000 downloads! Thank you to all of you who’ve listened and shared - and special thanks for all your 5 Star Reviews! It means so much to me! </p><p> </p><p>I compiled the top ten episodes for the year and found something interesting. All ten of them had a common theme - audience building. </p><p> </p><p>Each of the top ten episodes - and so many others - shows us just how important audience building is. You can’t start your subscription box without an audience. And you can’t grow your subscription box business without continually growing your audience. </p><p> </p><p>On today’s episode, I revisit these top ten episodes and review 5 ways my guests built their audiences. </p><ol>
<li><br></li>
<li>Episode 3 - The Riches are in the Niches: Anne went specific when she created a subscription box for women dentists. She knew her ideal customer because she <em>was</em> her ideal customer. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Episode 14 - 4 Ways to Build Your Audience: Tiffany ran a giveaway, posted on social media consistently, made connections, and partnered with an influencer to build her audience. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Episode 31 - From an Audience of Zero to 100 Subscribers in 60 Days: Claudia posted consistently on Facebook and Instagram, created IG reels and stories, and added an early bird bonus. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Episode 33 - Small Audience, No Problem! How Amanda Built 100+ Subscribers from an Audience of 600: Amanda went <em>very</em> specific and served her audience before she sold. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Episode 38 - From Nurse Practitioner to Subscription Box Owner: Pam set up social media accounts, followed colleagues, and did some very creative in-person marketing when she attended a conference. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ol><p> </p><p>Join me for this special episode as I revisit these top ten episodes and these wonderful subscription box owners. Each of these women shared her inspiring subscription box journey with us. Each of them also shared actionable tips and strategies - things they did to grow their audiences which in turn helped them grow their businesses. </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Links to Top-Ten episodes: </p><ol>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-3">Episode 3 - The Riches are in the Niches - How one LYB Member Hit $10K Monthly with Her Subscription Box Business</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-5">Episode 5 - Who Will Buy My Box and How Do I Find Them? - Subscription Box Strategies with Damon Oates</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-7">Episode 7 - Get Started Right Away with Fast and Messy Action</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-9">Episode 9 - Why am I Scared to Show Up Live? | Build an Audience for Your Subscription Box</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-14">Episode 14 - 4 Ways to Build Your Audience with Tiffany LeBaron</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-39">Episode 39 - Launch Tips with The Lettering Box</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-38">Episode 38 - From Nurse Practitioner to Subscription Box Owner</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-31">Episode 31 - From an Audience of Zero to 100 Subscribers in 60 Days</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-33">Episode 33 - Small Audience, No Problem! How Amanda Built 100+ Subscribers from an Audience of 600</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-42">Episode 42 - Consistency Pays Off with Jamie Shahan of CRNA Swag</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ol><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1815</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3148b610-07e2-48ba-9bb2-ca37a7c6e6a0]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2347522407.mp3?updated=1701785582" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>049: Subscription Box Predictions with Paul Chambers</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/049-subscription-box-predictions-with-paul-chambers</link>
      <description>I LOVE talking about all things subscription box. It’s what I do here on the podcast every week and all day every day inside my Launch Your Box membership. But today… today is special. 
 
Today I got to sit down and talk to my friend Paul Chambers, the co-founder and CEO of SUBTA, the Subscription Trade Association. Not only does Paul bring 20+ years of subscription box knowledge and experience with him, he’s also a super nice guy who just happens to be a big fan of Launch Your Box. 
 
I invited him to the podcast to share his predictions about what we can expect in the subscription box industry in 2022 as well as some subscription box best practices. 
 
Paul’s subscription box journey started when he became a partner in Gentlemen's Box, a monthly subscription that provided accessories for well-dressed, professional men who lacked the time to shop for themselves. Paul learned valuable lessons along the way, grew the subscription into an extremely successful business, and then sold it. 
 
It was during this time that Paul and his partners were seeking out knowledge and community within the subscription industry. To their surprise, they found there were no conferences or other large networking and learning opportunities. This led to the founding of the Subscription Trade Association (SUBTA) in 2017. 
 
Paul shared his predictions for 2022. He expects to see continued growth in subscriptions as the need that drove incredible growth in 2020 settles into new habits driven by consumers’ ongoing desire for convenience and accessibility. He also wants us to keep our eyes on new trends in tech. Rather than being intimidated by technology, Paul encourages small business owners to consider the possibilities and look for opportunities to expand subscribers’ experiences. 
 
For 2022 - and beyond - Paul encourages subscription box owners to: 



Add opt-in text messages as part of the customer journey.



Take advantage of Tik Tok’s popularity to market your subscription. 



Use new technology for churn, upselling, data, and more. 



Establish strategic partnerships. 



Use first-party data to better understand your consumers’ behavior. 



Optimize your content creation. 



Use your data to personalize your subscription offering. 



Give more power to your consumers when it comes to managing their subscriptions. 



Focus on retaining your current subscribers. 




We also talked expansion revenue and strategies to capitalize on current subscribers as a source of additional revenue. Your engaged audience has an appetite for more from you. Give it to them! 
Consider: 



 Creating limited edition or one-time boxes. 



Add an option to add complimentary pieces to a current subscription. 



Curate Mystery Boxes. 



 
In June of 2022, Sub Summit - the incredible conference put on by Paul and the rest of the SUBTA team - is coming to Disneyworld! I’ll be there along with so many of my Launch Your Box members. I’d love to see you there! Learn more and register HERE. 
 
There is so much to learn in this episode. Hear what works and what to expect from a true leader in the world of subscriptions. Grab a notebook and a pen and get ready to soak up what happens when two people who LOVE talking subscriptions share inside knowledge and tips that will help you continue to grow your own subscription box business. 
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Paul: 



SUBTA Website



Sub Summit Website



Facebook



Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 22 Dec 2021 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Subscription Box Predictions with Paul Chambers</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>49</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cc551442-b0bf-11ed-b273-eb7a57414f25/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>I LOVE talking about all things subscription box. It’s what I do here on the podcast every week and all day every day inside my Launch Your Box membership. But today… today is special.    Today I got to sit down and talk to my friend...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I LOVE talking about all things subscription box. It’s what I do here on the podcast every week and all day every day inside my Launch Your Box membership. But today… today is special. 
 
Today I got to sit down and talk to my friend Paul Chambers, the co-founder and CEO of SUBTA, the Subscription Trade Association. Not only does Paul bring 20+ years of subscription box knowledge and experience with him, he’s also a super nice guy who just happens to be a big fan of Launch Your Box. 
 
I invited him to the podcast to share his predictions about what we can expect in the subscription box industry in 2022 as well as some subscription box best practices. 
 
Paul’s subscription box journey started when he became a partner in Gentlemen's Box, a monthly subscription that provided accessories for well-dressed, professional men who lacked the time to shop for themselves. Paul learned valuable lessons along the way, grew the subscription into an extremely successful business, and then sold it. 
 
It was during this time that Paul and his partners were seeking out knowledge and community within the subscription industry. To their surprise, they found there were no conferences or other large networking and learning opportunities. This led to the founding of the Subscription Trade Association (SUBTA) in 2017. 
 
Paul shared his predictions for 2022. He expects to see continued growth in subscriptions as the need that drove incredible growth in 2020 settles into new habits driven by consumers’ ongoing desire for convenience and accessibility. He also wants us to keep our eyes on new trends in tech. Rather than being intimidated by technology, Paul encourages small business owners to consider the possibilities and look for opportunities to expand subscribers’ experiences. 
 
For 2022 - and beyond - Paul encourages subscription box owners to: 



Add opt-in text messages as part of the customer journey.



Take advantage of Tik Tok’s popularity to market your subscription. 



Use new technology for churn, upselling, data, and more. 



Establish strategic partnerships. 



Use first-party data to better understand your consumers’ behavior. 



Optimize your content creation. 



Use your data to personalize your subscription offering. 



Give more power to your consumers when it comes to managing their subscriptions. 



Focus on retaining your current subscribers. 




We also talked expansion revenue and strategies to capitalize on current subscribers as a source of additional revenue. Your engaged audience has an appetite for more from you. Give it to them! 
Consider: 



 Creating limited edition or one-time boxes. 



Add an option to add complimentary pieces to a current subscription. 



Curate Mystery Boxes. 



 
In June of 2022, Sub Summit - the incredible conference put on by Paul and the rest of the SUBTA team - is coming to Disneyworld! I’ll be there along with so many of my Launch Your Box members. I’d love to see you there! Learn more and register HERE. 
 
There is so much to learn in this episode. Hear what works and what to expect from a true leader in the world of subscriptions. Grab a notebook and a pen and get ready to soak up what happens when two people who LOVE talking subscriptions share inside knowledge and tips that will help you continue to grow your own subscription box business. 
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Paul: 



SUBTA Website



Sub Summit Website



Facebook



Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I LOVE talking about all things subscription box. It’s what I do here on the podcast every week and all day every day inside my Launch Your Box membership. But today… today is special. </p><p> </p><p>Today I got to sit down and talk to my friend Paul Chambers, the co-founder and CEO of SUBTA, the Subscription Trade Association. Not only does Paul bring 20+ years of subscription box knowledge and experience with him, he’s also a super nice guy who just happens to be a big fan of Launch Your Box. </p><p> </p><p>I invited him to the podcast to share his predictions about what we can expect in the subscription box industry in 2022 as well as some subscription box best practices. </p><p> </p><p>Paul’s subscription box journey started when he became a partner in Gentlemen's Box, a monthly subscription that provided accessories for well-dressed, professional men who lacked the time to shop for themselves. Paul learned valuable lessons along the way, grew the subscription into an extremely successful business, and then sold it. </p><p> </p><p>It was during this time that Paul and his partners were seeking out knowledge and community within the subscription industry. To their surprise, they found there were no conferences or other large networking and learning opportunities. This led to the founding of the Subscription Trade Association (SUBTA) in 2017. </p><p> </p><p>Paul shared his predictions for 2022. He expects to see continued growth in subscriptions as the need that drove incredible growth in 2020 settles into new habits driven by consumers’ ongoing desire for convenience and accessibility. He also wants us to keep our eyes on new trends in tech. Rather than being intimidated by technology, Paul encourages small business owners to consider the possibilities and look for opportunities to expand subscribers’ experiences. </p><p> </p><p>For 2022 - and beyond - Paul encourages subscription box owners to: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Add opt-in text messages as part of the customer journey.</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Take advantage of Tik Tok’s popularity to market your subscription. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Use new technology for churn, upselling, data, and more. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Establish strategic partnerships. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Use first-party data to better understand your consumers’ behavior. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Optimize your content creation. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Use your data to personalize your subscription offering. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Give more power to your consumers when it comes to managing their subscriptions. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Focus on retaining your current subscribers. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>We also talked expansion revenue and strategies to capitalize on current subscribers as a source of additional revenue. Your engaged audience has an appetite for more from you. Give it to them! </p><p>Consider: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li> Creating limited edition or one-time boxes. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Add an option to add complimentary pieces to a current subscription. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Curate Mystery Boxes. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>In June of 2022, Sub Summit - the incredible conference put on by Paul and the rest of the SUBTA team - is coming to Disneyworld! I’ll be there along with so many of my Launch Your Box members. I’d love to see you there! Learn more and register <a href="https://subsummit.com/">HERE</a>. </p><p> </p><p>There is so much to learn in this episode. Hear what works and what to expect from a true leader in the world of subscriptions. Grab a notebook and a pen and get ready to soak up what happens when two people who LOVE talking subscriptions share inside knowledge and tips that will help you continue to grow your own subscription box business. </p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Paul: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://subta.com/">SUBTA Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://subsummit.com/">Sub Summit Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/subscriptionsummit">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3670</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[18d5a2a3-eb87-46aa-af21-49a9d49bdeed]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5060128997.mp3?updated=1701785644" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>048: I Want to Start a Subscription Box Business - Where Do I Start?</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/048-i-want-to-start-a-subscription-box-business-where-do-i-start</link>
      <description>When you don’t know where to start, it’s easy to start in the wrong place. 
 
You have an idea. A dream. You want to start a subscription box. But you don’t know how. So you do what everyone does. You google. It. And you find out there are all kinds of people wanting to sell you all kinds of things to help you run your subscription box business. Software, packaging, marketing tools, and more. 
 
In the beginning, before you even get started, you don’t need any of those things. What you need is to Start The Right Way! 
 
If you’re just starting your subscription box journey, this episode is for you! Avoid the overwhelm and start where you need to start… the beginning. 
 
I call this first stage The Hopeful Entrepreneur because you’re full of hopes and dreams… and so many questions. There are things you need to do during this stage to start your subscription box journey off right. 
 



Complete the  6 in 60 Workshop (Post-It Note Challenge) - identify your ideal customer and plan out your first six boxes. 



Contact your local Small Business Adminstration Office - fulfill local requirements to legally set up your business. 



Establish social media pages for your business - focus audience building efforts on one platform to start. 



Secure a domain for your website - this will be your url. 



Explore options for your website - we recommend Shopify or WordPress/WooCommerce. 



 
Getting your subscription box business off the ground takes a lot of work. Following a step-by-step process helps you stay on track. 
 
Join me for this episode as I walk you through this first stage of your subscription box journey, sharing tips, strategies, and resources to help you get a strong start. Don’t miss my tips about naming your business - and your subscription box. It matters!   
Important Links: 



 Subscription Box Blueprint eBook 



 FREE 6 in 60 Workshop



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 15 Dec 2021 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>I Want to Start a Subscription Box Business - Where Do I Start?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>48</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cc6a3516-b0bf-11ed-b273-cf682fa2bca9/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>When you don’t know where to start, it’s easy to start in the wrong place.    You have an idea. A dream. You want to start a subscription box. But you don’t know how. So you do what everyone does. You google. It. And you find out there...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>When you don’t know where to start, it’s easy to start in the wrong place. 
 
You have an idea. A dream. You want to start a subscription box. But you don’t know how. So you do what everyone does. You google. It. And you find out there are all kinds of people wanting to sell you all kinds of things to help you run your subscription box business. Software, packaging, marketing tools, and more. 
 
In the beginning, before you even get started, you don’t need any of those things. What you need is to Start The Right Way! 
 
If you’re just starting your subscription box journey, this episode is for you! Avoid the overwhelm and start where you need to start… the beginning. 
 
I call this first stage The Hopeful Entrepreneur because you’re full of hopes and dreams… and so many questions. There are things you need to do during this stage to start your subscription box journey off right. 
 



Complete the  6 in 60 Workshop (Post-It Note Challenge) - identify your ideal customer and plan out your first six boxes. 



Contact your local Small Business Adminstration Office - fulfill local requirements to legally set up your business. 



Establish social media pages for your business - focus audience building efforts on one platform to start. 



Secure a domain for your website - this will be your url. 



Explore options for your website - we recommend Shopify or WordPress/WooCommerce. 



 
Getting your subscription box business off the ground takes a lot of work. Following a step-by-step process helps you stay on track. 
 
Join me for this episode as I walk you through this first stage of your subscription box journey, sharing tips, strategies, and resources to help you get a strong start. Don’t miss my tips about naming your business - and your subscription box. It matters!   
Important Links: 



 Subscription Box Blueprint eBook 



 FREE 6 in 60 Workshop



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><em>When you don’t know where to start, it’s easy to start in the wrong place. </em></p><p> </p><p>You have an idea. A dream. You want to start a subscription box. But you don’t know how. So you do what everyone does. You google. It. And you find out there are all kinds of people wanting to sell you all kinds of things to help you run your subscription box business. Software, packaging, marketing tools, and more. </p><p> </p><p>In the beginning, before you even get started, you don’t need any of those things. What you need is to Start The Right Way! </p><p> </p><p>If you’re just starting your subscription box journey, this episode is for you! Avoid the overwhelm and start where you need to start… the beginning. </p><p> </p><p>I call this first stage <em>The Hopeful Entrepreneur</em> because you’re full of hopes and dreams… and so many questions. There are things you need to do during this stage to start your subscription box journey off right. </p><p> </p><ol>
<li><br></li>
<li>Complete the <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e"> 6 in 60 Workshop</a> (Post-It Note Challenge) - identify your ideal customer and plan out your first six boxes. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Contact your local Small Business Adminstration Office - fulfill local requirements to legally set up your business. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Establish social media pages for your business - focus audience building efforts on one platform to start. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Secure a domain for your website - this will be your url. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Explore options for your website - we recommend Shopify or WordPress/WooCommerce. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ol><p> </p><p>Getting your subscription box business off the ground takes a lot of work. Following a step-by-step process helps you stay on track. </p><p> </p><p>Join me for this episode as I walk you through this first stage of your subscription box journey, sharing tips, strategies, and resources to help you get a strong start. Don’t miss my tips about naming your business - and your subscription box. It matters!   </p><p>Important Links: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/offers/V3xNYtb9/checkout"> Subscription Box Blueprint eBook </a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/sarahs-method-for-curating-6-boxes-in-60-minutes-e"> FREE 6 in 60 Workshop</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1617</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[65366edd-38cd-4c09-9cfd-2f0868515bfb]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6268033792.mp3?updated=1701785653" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>047: Too Many Offers Can Stop Your Growth - Lessons Learned from Becca from Isle Candle Co.</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/047-too-many-offers-can-stop-your-growth-lessons-learned-from-becca-from-isle-candle-co</link>
      <description>“When you try selling everything to everyone, you sell to no one.” 
 
Today I’m excited to introduce you to Becca Slye, Launch Your Box member and co-owner of Isle Candle Co. I hope Becca’s story inspires you to keep going even when things get hard and to see mistakes and challenges as opportunities for growth.  
 
Isle Candle Co. is a family business started by Becca’s parents. They sell specialized soy candles that transform into incredibly nourishing lotions as they burn. How cool, right? Becca’s parents operate a brick and mortar shop in a beach town in South Carolina, capitalizing on tourist traffic.   
 
Becca and her husband got involved in the family business and decided to develop an online presence as well as open a second brick and mortar in Virginia. As Becca noticed how many repeat customers they had, the idea for a subscription box was born.  
 
Becca’s subscription launched big. As in 135 subscribers big! For a first-time launch, that is an amazing number of subscribers! You’re probably thinking that, with a launch like that, they continued to grow their subscriber base quickly, right? 
 
That’s not what happened. 
 
In this episode, Becca and I get real about why, 15 months in, they’ve only added another 35 subscribers. Not exactly the growth they hoped for. 
 
There are reasons Isle Candle Co.’s subscription box hasn’t grown like they hoped it would. Reasons like too many offers, trying to be all things to all people, and going wider instead of deeper with their audience. 
 
We ALL make mistakes and face challenges in business. And what you’ll hear from Becca is clarity about what went wrong and determination to move forward. She got creative about selling inventory that didn’t fit with their goals moving forward and got really clear about their offer. Becca also talks about the importance of hiring help - staying in your zone of genius and letting others handle the rest.  
 
There is so much to learn from and be inspired by in this episode. Some business owners see mistakes and challenges as reasons to shut down or not move forward. Not Becca. She’s determined to find solutions to problems and continue to move forward and grow. I have no doubt that’s exactly what is going to happen! 
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Becca: 



Facebook



Instagram



Isle Candle Co.  Website




Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 08 Dec 2021 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Too Many Offers Can Stop Your Growth - Lessons Learned from Becca from Isle Candle Co.</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>47</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cc808618-b0bf-11ed-b273-c7cd6133bd05/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“When you try selling everything to everyone, you sell to no one.”    Today I’m excited to introduce you to Becca Slye, Launch Your Box member and co-owner of Isle Candle Co. I hope Becca’s story inspires you to keep going even when...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“When you try selling everything to everyone, you sell to no one.” 
 
Today I’m excited to introduce you to Becca Slye, Launch Your Box member and co-owner of Isle Candle Co. I hope Becca’s story inspires you to keep going even when things get hard and to see mistakes and challenges as opportunities for growth.  
 
Isle Candle Co. is a family business started by Becca’s parents. They sell specialized soy candles that transform into incredibly nourishing lotions as they burn. How cool, right? Becca’s parents operate a brick and mortar shop in a beach town in South Carolina, capitalizing on tourist traffic.   
 
Becca and her husband got involved in the family business and decided to develop an online presence as well as open a second brick and mortar in Virginia. As Becca noticed how many repeat customers they had, the idea for a subscription box was born.  
 
Becca’s subscription launched big. As in 135 subscribers big! For a first-time launch, that is an amazing number of subscribers! You’re probably thinking that, with a launch like that, they continued to grow their subscriber base quickly, right? 
 
That’s not what happened. 
 
In this episode, Becca and I get real about why, 15 months in, they’ve only added another 35 subscribers. Not exactly the growth they hoped for. 
 
There are reasons Isle Candle Co.’s subscription box hasn’t grown like they hoped it would. Reasons like too many offers, trying to be all things to all people, and going wider instead of deeper with their audience. 
 
We ALL make mistakes and face challenges in business. And what you’ll hear from Becca is clarity about what went wrong and determination to move forward. She got creative about selling inventory that didn’t fit with their goals moving forward and got really clear about their offer. Becca also talks about the importance of hiring help - staying in your zone of genius and letting others handle the rest.  
 
There is so much to learn from and be inspired by in this episode. Some business owners see mistakes and challenges as reasons to shut down or not move forward. Not Becca. She’s determined to find solutions to problems and continue to move forward and grow. I have no doubt that’s exactly what is going to happen! 
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Becca: 



Facebook



Instagram



Isle Candle Co.  Website




Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“When you try selling everything to everyone, you sell to no one.” </p><p> </p><p>Today I’m excited to introduce you to Becca Slye, Launch Your Box member and co-owner of Isle Candle Co. I hope Becca’s story inspires you to keep going even when things get hard and to see mistakes and challenges as opportunities for growth.  </p><p> </p><p>Isle Candle Co. is a family business started by Becca’s parents. They sell specialized soy candles that transform into incredibly nourishing lotions as they burn. How cool, right? Becca’s parents operate a brick and mortar shop in a beach town in South Carolina, capitalizing on tourist traffic.   </p><p> </p><p>Becca and her husband got involved in the family business and decided to develop an online presence as well as open a second brick and mortar in Virginia. As Becca noticed how many repeat customers they had, the idea for a subscription box was born.  </p><p> </p><p>Becca’s subscription launched big. As in 135 subscribers big! For a first-time launch, that is an amazing number of subscribers! You’re probably thinking that, with a launch like that, they continued to grow their subscriber base quickly, right? </p><p> </p><p>That’s not what happened. </p><p> </p><p>In this episode, Becca and I get real about why, 15 months in, they’ve only added another 35 subscribers. Not exactly the growth they hoped for. </p><p> </p><p>There are reasons Isle Candle Co.’s subscription box hasn’t grown like they hoped it would. Reasons like too many offers, trying to be all things to all people, and going wider instead of deeper with their audience. </p><p> </p><p>We ALL make mistakes and face challenges in business. And what you’ll hear from Becca is clarity about what went wrong and determination to move forward. She got creative about selling inventory that didn’t fit with their goals moving forward and got really clear about their offer. Becca also talks about the importance of hiring help - staying in your zone of genius and letting others handle the rest.  </p><p> </p><p>There is so much to learn from and be inspired by in this episode. Some business owners see mistakes and challenges as reasons to shut down or not move forward. Not Becca. She’s determined to find solutions to problems and continue to move forward and grow. I have no doubt that’s exactly what is going to happen! </p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Becca: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/IsleCandleCo">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/islecandleco/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Isle Candle Co. <a href="https://theisleco.com/?gclid=Cj0KCQiAnaeNBhCUARIsABEee8V5HYESF58ziXDa_6lDlphLN2Sexk54DYDL7Vx0cO7so8QnfDnCb1IaAjAdEALw_wcB"> Website</a>
</li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2784</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cf32dbfa-d26b-4a62-a92a-51925f74ea8f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3335708904.mp3?updated=1701785617" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>046: 3 Email Automations Every Subscription Box Owner Needs</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/046-3-email-automations-every-subscription-box-owner-needs</link>
      <description>What if I told you writing six simple emails once could bring ongoing revenue into your subscription box business? 
 
There are three email automations (also called flows or sequences)every subscription box owner needs to have in place. Write these once and they’ll work for you for a long time. 
 
If you’ve listened to my podcast, seen me on social media, or read my blog, you know I like to keep things simple but effective. That’s why I recommend that each automation needs to be only two emails. 
 
The three types of email automations you need are: 

Waitlist flow. 

New subscriber flow. 

Abandoned cart flow. 

 
Each email has a purpose. Each email contains a call to action. Each email needs to connect with your audience, engage them, and encourage them to take action. 
 
These email automations - plus the bonus automation I tell you more about in this episode - account for a full 5% of my monthly revenue. 5%! That’s a lot of revenue coming into my business that requires no work from me. I wrote the emails once and they keep working for me… month after month. 
 
Join me for this episode as I share more details about each of the three types of email automations you need to put in place right now. Learn what to put in each email and how to write subject lines that get noticed. 

Important Links: 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 01 Dec 2021 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>3 Email Automations Every Subscription Box Owner Needs</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>46</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cc95bcb8-b0bf-11ed-b273-cb25dc2bbd53/image/9062c4bf25dab6a2c3e172a3410a9f5b.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>What if I told you writing six simple emails once could bring ongoing revenue into your subscription box business?    There are three email automations (also called flows or sequences)every subscription box owner needs to have in place....</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>What if I told you writing six simple emails once could bring ongoing revenue into your subscription box business? 
 
There are three email automations (also called flows or sequences)every subscription box owner needs to have in place. Write these once and they’ll work for you for a long time. 
 
If you’ve listened to my podcast, seen me on social media, or read my blog, you know I like to keep things simple but effective. That’s why I recommend that each automation needs to be only two emails. 
 
The three types of email automations you need are: 

Waitlist flow. 

New subscriber flow. 

Abandoned cart flow. 

 
Each email has a purpose. Each email contains a call to action. Each email needs to connect with your audience, engage them, and encourage them to take action. 
 
These email automations - plus the bonus automation I tell you more about in this episode - account for a full 5% of my monthly revenue. 5%! That’s a lot of revenue coming into my business that requires no work from me. I wrote the emails once and they keep working for me… month after month. 
 
Join me for this episode as I share more details about each of the three types of email automations you need to put in place right now. Learn what to put in each email and how to write subject lines that get noticed. 

Important Links: 
Join me in all the places: 

Facebook

Instagram


 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 


Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What if I told you writing six simple emails once could bring ongoing revenue into your subscription box business? </p><p> </p><p>There are three email automations (also called flows or sequences)every subscription box owner needs to have in place. Write these once and they’ll work for you for a long time. </p><p> </p><p>If you’ve listened to my podcast, seen me on social media, or read my blog, you know I like to keep things simple but effective. That’s why I recommend that each automation needs to be only two emails. </p><p> </p><p>The three types of email automations you need are: </p><ol>
<li>Waitlist flow. </li>
<li>New subscriber flow. </li>
<li>Abandoned cart flow. </li>
</ol><p> </p><p>Each email has a purpose. Each email contains a call to action. Each email needs to connect with your audience, engage them, and encourage them to take action. </p><p> </p><p>These email automations - plus the bonus automation I tell you more about in this episode - account for a full 5% of my monthly revenue. 5%! That’s a lot of revenue coming into my business that requires no work from me. I wrote the emails once and they keep working for me… month after month. </p><p> </p><p>Join me for this episode as I share more details about each of the three types of email automations you need to put in place right now. Learn what to put in each email and how to write subject lines that get noticed. </p><p><br></p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
</ul><p><br></p><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1407</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[028cbb9e-fc21-4c9e-bbd5-e248d276b24a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4539282613.mp3?updated=1744139181" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>045: Journey from One Time Boxes to a Thriving Monthly Subscription</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/045-journey-from-one-time-boxes-to-a-thriving-monthly-subscription</link>
      <description>Have you ever wondered what would happen if you served your audience first? 
 
Today I’m excited to introduce you to Kristy Bottle, Scale Your Box member and owner of Kristy’s Craft Room. I hope Kristy’s story inspires you to get creative, serve your audience with a generous heart, and have the courage to take chances. 
 
Kristy is a dedicated crafter who decided to take the crafting parties she hosted in her home and move them online. The Kristy’s Craft Room page on Facebook was born and Kristy started crafting live a few times each week. Her audience grew quickly as she shared cute crafts, answered questions, and interacted with her audience.  
 
Kristy spent time getting to know her audience and serving them by sharing her love of crafts and giving them a place to connect. Soon they started asking her to sell kits containing the supplies for the projects she was working on. They wanted Kristy to sell to them. So she did. 
 
Kristy started with one-time boxes that her audience could purchase. Once she noticed the same people were buying multiple kits, the idea for a subscription was born. Despite not knowing how to do all the things, Kristy jumped in and had the courage to do it messy. She didn’t shy away from unfamiliar technology and used text message marketing to increase sales. 
 
The subscription grew quickly, selling out each time more slots were added. Kristy wanted to see how far this could go and knew she needed help to continue to grow. It was right about then that we met and Kristy became one of the first members of my Scale Your Box group, where subscription box owners who already have successful subscriptions learn how to take them to the next level. 
 
The Kristy’s Craft Box subscription has grown from just over 300 subscribers to more than 600 subscribers in the last four months! What she originally hoped would be a business that allowed her to quit her full-time job and spend more time with her family has grown into a business that supports her entire family. Kristy’s husband recently left his career to join the team full-time! 
 
There is so much to learn from and be inspired by in this episode. We talk about what can happen when you serve your audience first. Kristy also shares how important the connections made inside her community are to her members - and to her. The rapid growth of Kristy’s subscription business has been exciting to see - I know you’ll be inspired when you hear her tell her story. 
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Kristy: 



Facebook



Instagram



 Kristy’s Craft Room Website



Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Nov 2021 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Journey from One Time Boxes to a Thriving Monthly Subscription</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>45</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ccab698c-b0bf-11ed-b273-3f629d4af913/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Have you ever wondered what would happen if you served your audience first?    Today I’m excited to introduce you to Kristy Bottle, Scale Your Box member and owner of Kristy’s Craft Room. I hope Kristy’s story inspires you to get...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you ever wondered what would happen if you served your audience first? 
 
Today I’m excited to introduce you to Kristy Bottle, Scale Your Box member and owner of Kristy’s Craft Room. I hope Kristy’s story inspires you to get creative, serve your audience with a generous heart, and have the courage to take chances. 
 
Kristy is a dedicated crafter who decided to take the crafting parties she hosted in her home and move them online. The Kristy’s Craft Room page on Facebook was born and Kristy started crafting live a few times each week. Her audience grew quickly as she shared cute crafts, answered questions, and interacted with her audience.  
 
Kristy spent time getting to know her audience and serving them by sharing her love of crafts and giving them a place to connect. Soon they started asking her to sell kits containing the supplies for the projects she was working on. They wanted Kristy to sell to them. So she did. 
 
Kristy started with one-time boxes that her audience could purchase. Once she noticed the same people were buying multiple kits, the idea for a subscription was born. Despite not knowing how to do all the things, Kristy jumped in and had the courage to do it messy. She didn’t shy away from unfamiliar technology and used text message marketing to increase sales. 
 
The subscription grew quickly, selling out each time more slots were added. Kristy wanted to see how far this could go and knew she needed help to continue to grow. It was right about then that we met and Kristy became one of the first members of my Scale Your Box group, where subscription box owners who already have successful subscriptions learn how to take them to the next level. 
 
The Kristy’s Craft Box subscription has grown from just over 300 subscribers to more than 600 subscribers in the last four months! What she originally hoped would be a business that allowed her to quit her full-time job and spend more time with her family has grown into a business that supports her entire family. Kristy’s husband recently left his career to join the team full-time! 
 
There is so much to learn from and be inspired by in this episode. We talk about what can happen when you serve your audience first. Kristy also shares how important the connections made inside her community are to her members - and to her. The rapid growth of Kristy’s subscription business has been exciting to see - I know you’ll be inspired when you hear her tell her story. 
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Kristy: 



Facebook



Instagram



 Kristy’s Craft Room Website



Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you ever wondered what would happen if you served your audience first? </p><p> </p><p>Today I’m excited to introduce you to Kristy Bottle, Scale Your Box member and owner of Kristy’s Craft Room. I hope Kristy’s story inspires you to get creative, serve your audience with a generous heart, and have the courage to take chances. </p><p> </p><p>Kristy is a dedicated crafter who decided to take the crafting parties she hosted in her home and move them online. The Kristy’s Craft Room page on Facebook was born and Kristy started crafting live a few times each week. Her audience grew quickly as she shared cute crafts, answered questions, and interacted with her audience.  </p><p> </p><p>Kristy spent time getting to know her audience and serving them by sharing her love of crafts and giving them a place to connect. Soon they started asking her to sell kits containing the supplies for the projects she was working on. <em>They wanted Kristy to sell to them.</em> So she did. </p><p> </p><p>Kristy started with one-time boxes that her audience could purchase. Once she noticed the same people were buying multiple kits, the idea for a subscription was born. Despite not knowing how to do all the things, Kristy jumped in and had the courage to do it messy. She didn’t shy away from unfamiliar technology and used text message marketing to increase sales. </p><p> </p><p>The subscription grew quickly, selling out each time more slots were added. Kristy wanted to see how far this could go and knew she needed help to continue to grow. It was right about then that we met and Kristy became one of the first members of my Scale Your Box group, where subscription box owners who already have successful subscriptions learn how to take them to the next level. </p><p> </p><p>The Kristy’s Craft Box subscription has grown from just over 300 subscribers to more than 600 subscribers in the last four months! What she originally hoped would be a business that allowed her to quit her full-time job and spend more time with her family has grown into a business that supports her entire family. Kristy’s husband recently left his career to join the team full-time! </p><p> </p><p>There is so much to learn from and be inspired by in this episode. We talk about what can happen when you serve your audience first. Kristy also shares how important the connections made inside her community are to her members - and to her. The rapid growth of Kristy’s subscription business has been exciting to see - I know you’ll be inspired when you hear her tell her story. </p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Kristy: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/KristysCraftRoom">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/kristyscraftroom_official/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://kristyscraftroom.com/?fbclid=IwAR2Gp-BKRHNeJUzd0mq2lvX8AskxA5aVJN64v-ecU0NcaGGrTzooIavwdek"> Kristy’s Craft Room Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2146</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2bba2770-d2b4-4d05-ad95-e7eb235857c9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3038829049.mp3?updated=1701785733" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>044: How to Handle Supply Chain and Shipping Issues</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/044-how-to-handle-supply-chain-and-shipping-issues</link>
      <description>Do you think current supply chain issues only affect big corporations?
 
They don’t. All business owners are dealing with supply chain issues right now. And that includes subscription box owners. 
 
I’ve heard some subscription box owners going down the road of doom and gloom. Wondering if it’s time to just give up and throw in the towel. Um, no. It’s absolutely NOT time to give up. 
 
It is time to problem solve, to pivot, and to plan. 
 
If you are a subscription box owner, you WILL run into product supply problems at some point. And if you have a large subscriber base (300 or more), you still need to work with overseas manufacturers. 
 
When you run into an issue and something you’re planning to put into a future box simply isn’t going to get to you on time, it’s time to put your problem solving hat on and get to work. 
Let’s talk about five things you can do to gain control over product and shipping delays. 
 



Work further out on buying and sourcing goods. 



Fill your immediate needs with “Ready to Ship” items. Overseas manufacturers often have US warehouses full of goods available for purchase. 



Connect with makers and other small businesses who can supply you with what you need. 



Don’t wait too long! Problem solve shipping delays before they happen. Have backup plans for your backup plans and get in front of problems whenever possible. 



If subscription boxes are late, surprise and delight your subscribers. Thank them for their patience and understanding. 



 
The truth is, we don’t know when things are going to get better. As subscription box owners, we need to continue to get better at planning, pivoting, and problem solving. 
 
Join me for this episode as I share practical tips and strategies you need to put in place NOW to deal with shipping and product delays. I also take you through some of my recent shipping challenges and how I solved them. 
Important Links: 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 17 Nov 2021 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Handle Supply Chain and Shipping Issues</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>44</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ccc303c6-b0bf-11ed-b273-9faa0b795a00/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Do you think current supply chain issues only affect big corporations?   They don’t. All business owners are dealing with supply chain issues right now. And that includes subscription box owners.    I’ve heard some subscription box...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Do you think current supply chain issues only affect big corporations?
 
They don’t. All business owners are dealing with supply chain issues right now. And that includes subscription box owners. 
 
I’ve heard some subscription box owners going down the road of doom and gloom. Wondering if it’s time to just give up and throw in the towel. Um, no. It’s absolutely NOT time to give up. 
 
It is time to problem solve, to pivot, and to plan. 
 
If you are a subscription box owner, you WILL run into product supply problems at some point. And if you have a large subscriber base (300 or more), you still need to work with overseas manufacturers. 
 
When you run into an issue and something you’re planning to put into a future box simply isn’t going to get to you on time, it’s time to put your problem solving hat on and get to work. 
Let’s talk about five things you can do to gain control over product and shipping delays. 
 



Work further out on buying and sourcing goods. 



Fill your immediate needs with “Ready to Ship” items. Overseas manufacturers often have US warehouses full of goods available for purchase. 



Connect with makers and other small businesses who can supply you with what you need. 



Don’t wait too long! Problem solve shipping delays before they happen. Have backup plans for your backup plans and get in front of problems whenever possible. 



If subscription boxes are late, surprise and delight your subscribers. Thank them for their patience and understanding. 



 
The truth is, we don’t know when things are going to get better. As subscription box owners, we need to continue to get better at planning, pivoting, and problem solving. 
 
Join me for this episode as I share practical tips and strategies you need to put in place NOW to deal with shipping and product delays. I also take you through some of my recent shipping challenges and how I solved them. 
Important Links: 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Do you think current supply chain issues only affect big corporations?</p><p> </p><p>They don’t. All business owners are dealing with supply chain issues right now. And that includes subscription box owners. </p><p> </p><p>I’ve heard some subscription box owners going down the road of doom and gloom. Wondering if it’s time to just give up and throw in the towel. Um, no. It’s absolutely NOT time to give up. </p><p> </p><p>It is time to problem solve, to pivot, and to plan. </p><p> </p><p>If you are a subscription box owner, you WILL run into product supply problems at some point. And if you have a large subscriber base (300 or more), you still need to work with overseas manufacturers. </p><p> </p><p>When you run into an issue and something you’re planning to put into a future box simply isn’t going to get to you on time, it’s time to put your problem solving hat on and get to work. </p><p>Let’s talk about five things you <em>can</em> do to gain control over product and shipping delays. </p><p> </p><ol>
<li><br></li>
<li>Work further out on buying and sourcing goods. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Fill your immediate needs with “Ready to Ship” items. Overseas manufacturers often have US warehouses full of goods available for purchase. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Connect with makers and other small businesses who can supply you with what you need. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Don’t wait too long! Problem solve shipping delays before they happen. Have backup plans for your backup plans and get in front of problems whenever possible. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>If subscription boxes <em>are</em> late, surprise and delight your subscribers. Thank them for their patience and understanding. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ol><p> </p><p>The truth is, we don’t know when things are going to get better. As subscription box owners, we need to continue to get better at planning, pivoting, and problem solving. </p><p> </p><p>Join me for this episode as I share practical tips and strategies you need to put in place NOW to deal with shipping and product delays. I also take you through some of my recent shipping challenges and how I solved them. </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2087</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[941cdcad-513d-4438-b115-880b5e639741]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4068076978.mp3?updated=1701785744" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>043: Taking Your Side Hustle to a Full-time Gig</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/043-side-hustle</link>
      <description>Have you thought about taking your subscription box business from a side hustle to a full-time gig?
 
It’s absolutely possible. I did it and so have many members of Launch Your Box. 
 
But… 
 
Before you quit your full-time job or make any major changes to your business, you need to ask - and answer - some questions. And you need to get really comfortable with your financial details, business and personal. 
 
Take your time and get real about what your goals are. Are you currently working 40/50/60 hours a week and want to work less? Do you want to make more income than you have been? 
 
The truth is, you can get there. But you’ll need to make a plan and work that plan. Start by asking yourself these four questions: 


What is the income you need to replace? 

What is the survival income you need to cover your bare bones expenses every month? 

What portion of that survival income can be covered by someone else (spouse, parents, roommates)? 

What is the initial investment you’ll need for your business (products, supplies, packaging, tech)? 

 
Understand that your business will need to be profitable before you can pay yourself. That takes time. It took me 9 months before I was able to pay myself a regular paycheck. 8 ½ years later, I pay myself a very nice salary and also pay the salaries of more than 20 employees. 
 
Join me for this episode as I take you on my journey from tiny side hustle making $200 a month to where I am now, running two multi seven-figure businesses, answering those questions, knowing my numbers, and making careful decisions every step of the way.  
 
Important Links: 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 10 Nov 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Taking Your Side Hustle to a Full-time Gig</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>43</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ccdbc208-b0bf-11ed-b273-f361677bcb36/image/9062c4bf25dab6a2c3e172a3410a9f5b.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Have you thought about taking your subscription box business from a side hustle to a full-time gig?   It’s absolutely possible. I did it and so have many members of Launch Your Box.    But…    Before you quit your...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you thought about taking your subscription box business from a side hustle to a full-time gig?
 
It’s absolutely possible. I did it and so have many members of Launch Your Box. 
 
But… 
 
Before you quit your full-time job or make any major changes to your business, you need to ask - and answer - some questions. And you need to get really comfortable with your financial details, business and personal. 
 
Take your time and get real about what your goals are. Are you currently working 40/50/60 hours a week and want to work less? Do you want to make more income than you have been? 
 
The truth is, you can get there. But you’ll need to make a plan and work that plan. Start by asking yourself these four questions: 


What is the income you need to replace? 

What is the survival income you need to cover your bare bones expenses every month? 

What portion of that survival income can be covered by someone else (spouse, parents, roommates)? 

What is the initial investment you’ll need for your business (products, supplies, packaging, tech)? 

 
Understand that your business will need to be profitable before you can pay yourself. That takes time. It took me 9 months before I was able to pay myself a regular paycheck. 8 ½ years later, I pay myself a very nice salary and also pay the salaries of more than 20 employees. 
 
Join me for this episode as I take you on my journey from tiny side hustle making $200 a month to where I am now, running two multi seven-figure businesses, answering those questions, knowing my numbers, and making careful decisions every step of the way.  
 
Important Links: 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! </itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you thought about taking your subscription box business from a side hustle to a full-time gig?</p><p> </p><p>It’s absolutely possible. I did it and so have many members of Launch Your Box. </p><p> </p><p>But… </p><p> </p><p>Before you quit your full-time job or make any major changes to your business, you need to ask - and answer - some questions. And you need to get really comfortable with your financial details, business <em>and</em> personal. </p><p> </p><p>Take your time and get real about what your goals are. Are you currently working 40/50/60 hours a week and want to work less? Do you want to make more income than you have been? </p><p> </p><p>The truth is, you <em>can</em> get there. But you’ll need to make a plan and work that plan. Start by asking yourself these four questions: </p><p><br></p><ul>
<li>What is the income you need to replace? </li>
<li>What is the survival income you need to cover your bare bones expenses every month? </li>
<li>What portion of that survival income can be covered by someone else (spouse, parents, roommates)? </li>
<li>What is the initial investment you’ll need for your business (products, supplies, packaging, tech)? </li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Understand that your business will need to be profitable before you can pay yourself. That takes time. It took me 9 months before I was able to pay myself a regular paycheck. 8 ½ years later, I pay myself a very nice salary and also pay the salaries of more than 20 employees. </p><p> </p><p>Join me for this episode as I take you on my journey from tiny side hustle making $200 a month to where I am now, running two multi seven-figure businesses, answering those questions, knowing my numbers, and making careful decisions every step of the way.  </p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1600</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[81732da0-5c4e-4c5a-8d5c-ca831c1d2b8e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6319452154.mp3?updated=1735000758" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>042: Consistency Pays Off with Jamie Shahan of CRNA Swag</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/042-consistency-pays-off-with-jamie-shahan-of-crna-swag</link>
      <description>“Come up with a simple plan and work it!” 
 
I am so excited to bring you my interview with Jamie Shahan, Launch Your Box member and owner of CRNA Swag. Jamie’s subscription box journey shows us what is possible when a plan, consistent engagement, and the willingness to “just do it” come together.  
 
In addition to being a subscription box owner, Jamie is a wife, mother, proud grandmother, and a certified nurse practitioner anesthetist. In other words, she’s a busy woman! 
 
Jamie started thinking about what she would do when she retired a few years down the road. Her mind turned to crafts and she learned how to make wreaths. The plan? To sell these wreaths. Jamie’s plan hit a snag when it took seven months to earn her first sale. 
 
Unafraid of hard work, Jamie sought out coaches, masterminds, and all the things to figure out how to make her wreath business a success. 
 
Then she came to my Subscription Box Coaching Week this past March. Jamie came in wanting to learn how to turn her wreath dreams into a subscription box business. But during Coaching Week, Jamie was inspired by Anne Stuccio, another Launch Your Box member. Anne is a dentist whose subscribers are female dentists. Don’t miss Anne’s interview on the podcast (listen to her episode here). 
 
A lightbulb went off for Jamie. She realized her ideal customer for a subscription box was a female CRNA - just like her! Jamie joined Launch Your Box and was excited about starting a subscription box for hard-working female CRNAs who don’t take time for themselves.  
 
The only problem? The only audience Jamie had was for her wreath business, and those were not female CRNAs. So, Jamie started building an audience from scratch. 
 
She figured out where to find her ideal customer and started hanging out there with them and adding value. She slowly but steadily built connections and engagement. Jamie went through the Launch Your Box trainings, came up with a plan that fit into the time she had available, and followed that plan. 
 
Jamie launched her box in late September. At that time she had 131 followers. Her goal was to sell out her inventory of 50 boxes. 50 boxes with only 131 followers sounds impossible. It wasn’t. Jamie planned for a three-day launch, but was sold out by the afternoon of day one! She’s now hard at work planning her next quarterly box - and this time she plans to add another 50 subscribers. 
 
Jamie’s advice to anyone who wants to start a subscription box business is to come up with a plan, work that plan, and not be afraid to launch messy. 
 
There is so much to learn from and be inspired by in this episode. We talk about the benefits of identifying a niche and where to find your ideal customer. We also talk about what to do once you’ve found them and the importance of being consistent AND being willing to just do it.  
 
I know you’ll love hearing Jamie’s story! 
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Jamie: 



Facebook



Instagram



CRNA Swag Website



Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 03 Nov 2021 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Consistency Pays Off with Jamie Shahan of CRNA Swag</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>42</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ccf2564e-b0bf-11ed-b273-d3cd0f782632/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“Come up with a simple plan and work it!”    I am so excited to bring you my interview with Jamie Shahan, Launch Your Box member and owner of CRNA Swag. Jamie’s subscription box journey shows us what is possible when a plan, consistent...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“Come up with a simple plan and work it!” 
 
I am so excited to bring you my interview with Jamie Shahan, Launch Your Box member and owner of CRNA Swag. Jamie’s subscription box journey shows us what is possible when a plan, consistent engagement, and the willingness to “just do it” come together.  
 
In addition to being a subscription box owner, Jamie is a wife, mother, proud grandmother, and a certified nurse practitioner anesthetist. In other words, she’s a busy woman! 
 
Jamie started thinking about what she would do when she retired a few years down the road. Her mind turned to crafts and she learned how to make wreaths. The plan? To sell these wreaths. Jamie’s plan hit a snag when it took seven months to earn her first sale. 
 
Unafraid of hard work, Jamie sought out coaches, masterminds, and all the things to figure out how to make her wreath business a success. 
 
Then she came to my Subscription Box Coaching Week this past March. Jamie came in wanting to learn how to turn her wreath dreams into a subscription box business. But during Coaching Week, Jamie was inspired by Anne Stuccio, another Launch Your Box member. Anne is a dentist whose subscribers are female dentists. Don’t miss Anne’s interview on the podcast (listen to her episode here). 
 
A lightbulb went off for Jamie. She realized her ideal customer for a subscription box was a female CRNA - just like her! Jamie joined Launch Your Box and was excited about starting a subscription box for hard-working female CRNAs who don’t take time for themselves.  
 
The only problem? The only audience Jamie had was for her wreath business, and those were not female CRNAs. So, Jamie started building an audience from scratch. 
 
She figured out where to find her ideal customer and started hanging out there with them and adding value. She slowly but steadily built connections and engagement. Jamie went through the Launch Your Box trainings, came up with a plan that fit into the time she had available, and followed that plan. 
 
Jamie launched her box in late September. At that time she had 131 followers. Her goal was to sell out her inventory of 50 boxes. 50 boxes with only 131 followers sounds impossible. It wasn’t. Jamie planned for a three-day launch, but was sold out by the afternoon of day one! She’s now hard at work planning her next quarterly box - and this time she plans to add another 50 subscribers. 
 
Jamie’s advice to anyone who wants to start a subscription box business is to come up with a plan, work that plan, and not be afraid to launch messy. 
 
There is so much to learn from and be inspired by in this episode. We talk about the benefits of identifying a niche and where to find your ideal customer. We also talk about what to do once you’ve found them and the importance of being consistent AND being willing to just do it.  
 
I know you’ll love hearing Jamie’s story! 
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Jamie: 



Facebook



Instagram



CRNA Swag Website



Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“Come up with a simple plan and work it!” </p><p> </p><p>I am so excited to bring you my interview with Jamie Shahan, Launch Your Box member and owner of CRNA Swag. Jamie’s subscription box journey shows us what is possible when a plan, consistent engagement, and the willingness to “just do it” come together.  </p><p> </p><p>In addition to being a subscription box owner, Jamie is a wife, mother, proud grandmother, and a certified nurse practitioner anesthetist. In other words, she’s a busy woman! </p><p> </p><p>Jamie started thinking about what she would do when she retired a few years down the road. Her mind turned to crafts and she learned how to make wreaths. The plan? To sell these wreaths. Jamie’s plan hit a snag when it took seven months to earn her first sale. </p><p> </p><p>Unafraid of hard work, Jamie sought out coaches, masterminds, and all the things to figure out how to make her wreath business a success. </p><p> </p><p>Then she came to my Subscription Box Coaching Week this past March. Jamie came in wanting to learn how to turn her wreath dreams into a subscription box business. But during Coaching Week, Jamie was inspired by Anne Stuccio, another Launch Your Box member. Anne is a dentist whose subscribers are female dentists. Don’t miss Anne’s interview on the podcast (<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/episode-3">listen to her episode here</a>). </p><p> </p><p>A lightbulb went off for Jamie. She realized her ideal customer for a subscription box was a female CRNA - just like her! Jamie joined Launch Your Box and was excited about starting a subscription box for hard-working female CRNAs who don’t take time for themselves.  </p><p> </p><p>The only problem? The only audience Jamie had was for her wreath business, and those were not female CRNAs. So, Jamie started building an audience from scratch. </p><p> </p><p>She figured out where to find her ideal customer and started hanging out there with them and adding value. She slowly but steadily built connections and engagement. Jamie went through the Launch Your Box trainings, came up with a plan that fit into the time she had available, and followed that plan. </p><p> </p><p>Jamie launched her box in late September. At that time she had 131 followers. Her goal was to sell out her inventory of 50 boxes. 50 boxes with only 131 followers sounds impossible. It wasn’t. Jamie planned for a three-day launch, but was sold out by the afternoon of day one! She’s now hard at work planning her next quarterly box - and this time she plans to add another 50 subscribers. </p><p> </p><p>Jamie’s advice to anyone who wants to start a subscription box business is to come up with a plan, work that plan, and not be afraid to launch messy. </p><p> </p><p>There is so much to learn from and be inspired by in this episode. We talk about the benefits of identifying a niche and where to find your ideal customer. We also talk about what to do once you’ve found them and the importance of being consistent AND being willing to just do it.  </p><p> </p><p>I know you’ll love hearing Jamie’s story! </p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Jamie: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/CRNASwag">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/crnaswag/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://crnaswag.co/">CRNA Swag Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2324</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[9deb27a7-7d39-49c7-b2b4-de089eec588b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1627017378.mp3?updated=1701785761" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>041: From 50 to 580 subscribers with Cassandra Ross of ThreadCrate</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/041-from-50-to-580-subscribers-with-cassandra-ross-of-threadcrate</link>
      <description>“If you are waiting for the day you have everything perfect, you’ll never launch.” 
 
I am so excited to bring you my interview with Cassandra Ross, Launch Your Box member and owner of Thread Crate. Cassandra’s story is full of inspiration with a side of “just do it.” 
 
Cassandra always sewed as a hobby, getting most of her fabric and supplies from local fabric stores. When the pandemic hit and her local fabric stores had to close, Cassandra turned to online shopping. She got supplies from different vendors and quickly found herself with colors that didn’t quite match and trim pieces that didn’t quite fit. 
 
As Cassandra thought about how to solve her own sewing challenges, she realized she could solve the same problems for many people just like her. And Thread Crate was born. Cassandra’s subscription box provides sewers with everything they need to sew a garment each month, from pattern to fabric to thread and trim. All in one box. All specially selected to go together perfectly. 
 
It’s important to know that Cassandra started her subscription box business from scratch. As is, she didn’t have a business. She didn’t have a website. She didn’t have a social media presence or an existing audience of any kind. 
 
What she did have was an idea and the desire to make this work. Cassandra did something I tell anyone who wants to start a subscription box business to do - she saw a need and she filled it! 
 
Cassandra built her own website, created Facebook and Instagram accounts for her business, and got to work. She gathered email addresses via a pop-up on her website and started engaging with her audience as much as possible. 
 
When Cassandra launched, a handful of people subscribed very quickly. Then... crickets. Her launch continued, but she wasn’t getting more subscribers. So she looked at how she was communicating with them and realized she was missing something important. Something I talk about inside Launch Your Box all the time. 
 
Serve before you sell. 
 
You need to provide value to your audience. Allow them to get to know you and trust you. Show them you understand their problem and have a solution. Talk about the benefits of your box and how it will change their lives. 
 
Cassandra made some changes to her messages and ended her launch with 50 subscribers. Let’s be clear. Cassandra launched to a tiny audience. Tiny. And she ended up with 50 subscribers. That is HUGE. 
 
But she didn’t stop there. Cassandra’s business has grown and grown over the past year. She now has 580 subscribers! 
 
There is so much to learn from and be inspired by in this episode. We talk about getting brave and being willing to launch messy. We talk about learning from mistakes, listening to your customers, tweaking and pivoting in order to grow. Cassandra shares some challenges she’s faced along the way and we talk about continuing to scale her business and bringing in some help. 
 
I know you’ll love hearing Cassandra’s story! 
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Cassandra: 



Facebook



Instagram



Thread Crate Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 27 Oct 2021 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From 50 to 580 subscribers with Cassandra Ross of ThreadCrate</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cd104500-b0bf-11ed-b273-675f81d5dc1c/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“If you are waiting for the day you have everything perfect, you’ll never launch.”    I am so excited to bring you my interview with Cassandra Ross, Launch Your Box member and owner of Thread Crate. Cassandra’s story is full of...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“If you are waiting for the day you have everything perfect, you’ll never launch.” 
 
I am so excited to bring you my interview with Cassandra Ross, Launch Your Box member and owner of Thread Crate. Cassandra’s story is full of inspiration with a side of “just do it.” 
 
Cassandra always sewed as a hobby, getting most of her fabric and supplies from local fabric stores. When the pandemic hit and her local fabric stores had to close, Cassandra turned to online shopping. She got supplies from different vendors and quickly found herself with colors that didn’t quite match and trim pieces that didn’t quite fit. 
 
As Cassandra thought about how to solve her own sewing challenges, she realized she could solve the same problems for many people just like her. And Thread Crate was born. Cassandra’s subscription box provides sewers with everything they need to sew a garment each month, from pattern to fabric to thread and trim. All in one box. All specially selected to go together perfectly. 
 
It’s important to know that Cassandra started her subscription box business from scratch. As is, she didn’t have a business. She didn’t have a website. She didn’t have a social media presence or an existing audience of any kind. 
 
What she did have was an idea and the desire to make this work. Cassandra did something I tell anyone who wants to start a subscription box business to do - she saw a need and she filled it! 
 
Cassandra built her own website, created Facebook and Instagram accounts for her business, and got to work. She gathered email addresses via a pop-up on her website and started engaging with her audience as much as possible. 
 
When Cassandra launched, a handful of people subscribed very quickly. Then... crickets. Her launch continued, but she wasn’t getting more subscribers. So she looked at how she was communicating with them and realized she was missing something important. Something I talk about inside Launch Your Box all the time. 
 
Serve before you sell. 
 
You need to provide value to your audience. Allow them to get to know you and trust you. Show them you understand their problem and have a solution. Talk about the benefits of your box and how it will change their lives. 
 
Cassandra made some changes to her messages and ended her launch with 50 subscribers. Let’s be clear. Cassandra launched to a tiny audience. Tiny. And she ended up with 50 subscribers. That is HUGE. 
 
But she didn’t stop there. Cassandra’s business has grown and grown over the past year. She now has 580 subscribers! 
 
There is so much to learn from and be inspired by in this episode. We talk about getting brave and being willing to launch messy. We talk about learning from mistakes, listening to your customers, tweaking and pivoting in order to grow. Cassandra shares some challenges she’s faced along the way and we talk about continuing to scale her business and bringing in some help. 
 
I know you’ll love hearing Cassandra’s story! 
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Cassandra: 



Facebook



Instagram



Thread Crate Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>“If you are waiting for the day you have everything perfect, you’ll never launch.” </p><p> </p><p>I am so excited to bring you my interview with Cassandra Ross, Launch Your Box member and owner of Thread Crate. Cassandra’s story is full of inspiration with a side of “just do it.” </p><p> </p><p>Cassandra always sewed as a hobby, getting most of her fabric and supplies from local fabric stores. When the pandemic hit and her local fabric stores had to close, Cassandra turned to online shopping. She got supplies from different vendors and quickly found herself with colors that didn’t quite match and trim pieces that didn’t quite fit. </p><p> </p><p>As Cassandra thought about how to solve her own sewing challenges, she realized she could solve the same problems for many people just like her. And Thread Crate was born. Cassandra’s subscription box provides sewers with everything they need to sew a garment each month, from pattern to fabric to thread and trim. All in one box. All specially selected to go together perfectly. </p><p> </p><p>It’s important to know that Cassandra started her subscription box business from scratch. As is, she didn’t have a business. She didn’t have a website. She didn’t have a social media presence or an existing audience of any kind. </p><p> </p><p>What she did have was an idea and the desire to make this work. Cassandra did something I tell anyone who wants to start a subscription box business to do - she saw a need and she filled it! </p><p> </p><p>Cassandra built her own website, created Facebook and Instagram accounts for her business, and got to work. She gathered email addresses via a pop-up on her website and started engaging with her audience as much as possible. </p><p> </p><p>When Cassandra launched, a handful of people subscribed very quickly. Then... crickets. Her launch continued, but she wasn’t getting more subscribers. So she looked at how she was communicating with them and realized she was missing something important. Something I talk about inside Launch Your Box all the time. </p><p> </p><p>Serve before you sell. </p><p> </p><p>You need to provide value to your audience. Allow them to get to know you and trust you. Show them you understand their problem and have a solution. Talk about the benefits of your box and how it will change their lives. </p><p> </p><p>Cassandra made some changes to her messages and ended her launch with 50 subscribers. Let’s be clear. Cassandra launched to a tiny audience. Tiny. And she ended up with 50 subscribers. That is HUGE. </p><p> </p><p>But she didn’t stop there. Cassandra’s business has grown and grown over the past year. She now has 580 subscribers! </p><p> </p><p>There is so much to learn from and be inspired by in this episode. We talk about getting brave and being willing to launch messy. We talk about learning from mistakes, listening to your customers, tweaking and pivoting in order to grow. Cassandra shares some challenges she’s faced along the way and we talk about continuing to scale her business and bringing in some help. </p><p> </p><p>I know you’ll love hearing Cassandra’s story! </p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Cassandra: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/ThreadCrate">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/thread_crate/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://threadcrate.com/">Thread Crate Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1806</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e34127bb-cd8d-47e8-9ae9-c0139cfa8a29]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7325506694.mp3?updated=1701785769" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>040: A Week with Sarah</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/040-a-week-with-sarah</link>
      <description>Have you ever wondered what a typical week looks like for me?
 
I get that question a lot and truly, there is no such thing as typical. Every week brings its own set of challenges and surprises, but I have developed a schedule to help me meet one major goal. 
 
Leaving work by 3 PM. 
 
I have two teenagers. And in addition to driving them to all the places for all the things, I want to be home for them. They’re getting older and my years with them at home are growing short. So… I set up my weeks to give me the best chance at leaving every day by 3:00. 
 
Here’s a quick peek inside this week.  
 
Monday:



Caught up from the weekend



Responded to emails



Answered questions in groups



Warehouse team meeting - planned for the week



Planned Launch Your Box schedule



Reviewed content schedule



 
Tuesday (Got a lot done - yay!):



Teacher subscription box went out



Box prep for monogram subscription 



Started planning gift box launch 



Answered questions in groups



Worked on blog content



Ordered product 



 
Wednesday (half day):



Worked alone - creative time



Designed new teacher tee



Designed November tee



Self-care – got nails done! 



 
Thursday:



Continued monogramming t-shirts



Looked at subscription timelines – adjusted work schedules



Started organizing sizes and bagging t-shirt for subscriptions



 
Friday:



LIVES! – got my hair done 



Continued preparing to launch Coaching Week



Looked at hiring needs



 
Join me for this episode and walk with me through a week inside my subscription box business. You’ll come away with ideas about batching work, discovering your best time for deep work, and working with a team! 
 
Important Links: 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. The membership is open for a short time -  Join today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 20 Oct 2021 09:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>A Week with Sarah</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>40</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cd270330-b0bf-11ed-b273-4fdbe1b4dfd2/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Have you ever wondered what a typical week looks like for me?   I get that question a lot and truly, there is no such thing as typical. Every week brings its own set of challenges and surprises, but I have developed a schedule to help me meet one...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you ever wondered what a typical week looks like for me?
 
I get that question a lot and truly, there is no such thing as typical. Every week brings its own set of challenges and surprises, but I have developed a schedule to help me meet one major goal. 
 
Leaving work by 3 PM. 
 
I have two teenagers. And in addition to driving them to all the places for all the things, I want to be home for them. They’re getting older and my years with them at home are growing short. So… I set up my weeks to give me the best chance at leaving every day by 3:00. 
 
Here’s a quick peek inside this week.  
 
Monday:



Caught up from the weekend



Responded to emails



Answered questions in groups



Warehouse team meeting - planned for the week



Planned Launch Your Box schedule



Reviewed content schedule



 
Tuesday (Got a lot done - yay!):



Teacher subscription box went out



Box prep for monogram subscription 



Started planning gift box launch 



Answered questions in groups



Worked on blog content



Ordered product 



 
Wednesday (half day):



Worked alone - creative time



Designed new teacher tee



Designed November tee



Self-care – got nails done! 



 
Thursday:



Continued monogramming t-shirts



Looked at subscription timelines – adjusted work schedules



Started organizing sizes and bagging t-shirt for subscriptions



 
Friday:



LIVES! – got my hair done 



Continued preparing to launch Coaching Week



Looked at hiring needs



 
Join me for this episode and walk with me through a week inside my subscription box business. You’ll come away with ideas about batching work, discovering your best time for deep work, and working with a team! 
 
Important Links: 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






 Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. The membership is open for a short time -  Join today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you ever wondered what a typical week looks like for me?</p><p> </p><p>I get that question a lot and truly, there is no such thing as typical. Every week brings its own set of challenges and surprises, but I have developed a schedule to help me meet one major goal. </p><p> </p><p>Leaving work by 3 PM. </p><p> </p><p>I have two teenagers. And in addition to driving them to all the places for all the things, I want to be home for them. They’re getting older and my years with them at home are growing short. So… I set up my weeks to give me the best chance at leaving every day by 3:00. </p><p> </p><p>Here’s a quick peek inside this week.  </p><p> </p><p>Monday:</p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Caught up from the weekend</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Responded to emails</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Answered questions in groups</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Warehouse team meeting - planned for the week</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Planned Launch Your Box schedule</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Reviewed content schedule</li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Tuesday (Got a lot done - yay!):</p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Teacher subscription box went out</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Box prep for monogram subscription </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Started planning gift box launch </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Answered questions in groups</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Worked on blog content</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Ordered product </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Wednesday (half day):</p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Worked alone - creative time</li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Designed new teacher tee</li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Designed November tee</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Self-care – got nails done! </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Thursday:</p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Continued monogramming t-shirts</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Looked at subscription timelines – adjusted work schedules</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Started organizing sizes and bagging t-shirt for subscriptions</li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Friday:</p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>LIVES! – got my hair done </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Continued preparing to launch Coaching Week</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Looked at hiring needs</li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me for this episode and walk with me through a week inside my subscription box business. You’ll come away with ideas about batching work, discovering your best time for deep work, and working with a team! </p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. The membership is open for a short time - <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2178</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[2d3d0942-ae92-48d4-a603-754f1c20b389]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2826889426.mp3?updated=1701785922" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>039: Launch Tips with The Lettering Box</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/039-launch-tips-with-the-lettering-box</link>
      <description>Guest: Betsy Goodman - The Lettering Box
 
Have you ever wanted to sit in on a one-on-one subscription box coaching session? 
 
Well, you’re in luck. Today’s episode is an interview with Besty Goodman of B Goods Lettering - a Launch Your Box member who was in the middle of launching her subscription box when we talked. 
 
Betsy has an existing stationery and wax seal shop and also teaches hand lettering online and through local workshops. She got the idea for a subscription box last year, when she realized the ongoing practice her hand lettering students needed would be more fun if they had actual projects to complete instead of just the standard practice sheets. She tried a one-time Valentine box and it was a success. 
 
Betsy decided to start a subscription box, joined Launch Your Box, and made it happen. Three days into her launch, Betsy posted a question inside our private Launch Your Box Facebook group. She’d had 10 people subscribe so far and wanted to know how to keep the momentum going. I could have just answered her question inside the group. Instead, I invited her onto the podcast for an impromptu coaching session! 
 
Betsy was already doing a number of things right - she’d built up a waitlist that she continued to drive people to and had done a giveaway. She posted regularly on Instagram - driving people to her waitlist with posts teasing about her box. 
 
There was more Betsy could do, however. And that’s what I talked to her about. 
 
1 - Be visible. 
If you’re a subscription box owner, include the link to your business in your personal profile. Let the people in your life know about your business. They already know, like, and trust you. Chances are, some of them are your ideal customers, or have friends who are. 
 
2 - Ramp up how often you go LIVE.  
Betsy had done one Facebook Live. That’s not enough. I know it can be tough to go Live - it was for me at first. But it’s so important! 
 
3 - Share your story. 
Tell your audience why you started your business. Then share your customers’ stories - what your box means to them. 
 
4 - Show the product - make it personal. 
For Betsy, I suggested demonstrating her lettering skill during a Live. She can make it personal by lettering the names of the people who show up for the Live. This creates a feeling of inclusivity and FOMO for those catching the replay later. 
 
5 - Offer a sign-up bonus. 
Successful launches need to create three feelings in buyers: urgency, scarcity, and exclusivity. Offering a sign-up bonus with an expiration gives people a reason to sign up NOW! 
 
There is so much goodness in this episode. You're going to want to take notes as you listen - the things I coach Betsy on apply to any subscription box launch. 
 
I can’t wait to hear the results of Betsy’s launch and to watch her audience - and her subscribers - grow! 
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Betsy: 



Facebook



Instagram



B Goods Lettering Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today!

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 13 Oct 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Launch Tips with The Lettering Box</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>39</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cd3c95e2-b0bf-11ed-b273-db750e94bf32/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Guest: Betsy Goodman - The Lettering Box   Have you ever wanted to sit in on a one-on-one subscription box coaching session?    Well, you’re in luck. Today’s episode is an interview with Besty Goodman of B Goods Lettering - a Launch...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Guest: Betsy Goodman - The Lettering Box
 
Have you ever wanted to sit in on a one-on-one subscription box coaching session? 
 
Well, you’re in luck. Today’s episode is an interview with Besty Goodman of B Goods Lettering - a Launch Your Box member who was in the middle of launching her subscription box when we talked. 
 
Betsy has an existing stationery and wax seal shop and also teaches hand lettering online and through local workshops. She got the idea for a subscription box last year, when she realized the ongoing practice her hand lettering students needed would be more fun if they had actual projects to complete instead of just the standard practice sheets. She tried a one-time Valentine box and it was a success. 
 
Betsy decided to start a subscription box, joined Launch Your Box, and made it happen. Three days into her launch, Betsy posted a question inside our private Launch Your Box Facebook group. She’d had 10 people subscribe so far and wanted to know how to keep the momentum going. I could have just answered her question inside the group. Instead, I invited her onto the podcast for an impromptu coaching session! 
 
Betsy was already doing a number of things right - she’d built up a waitlist that she continued to drive people to and had done a giveaway. She posted regularly on Instagram - driving people to her waitlist with posts teasing about her box. 
 
There was more Betsy could do, however. And that’s what I talked to her about. 
 
1 - Be visible. 
If you’re a subscription box owner, include the link to your business in your personal profile. Let the people in your life know about your business. They already know, like, and trust you. Chances are, some of them are your ideal customers, or have friends who are. 
 
2 - Ramp up how often you go LIVE.  
Betsy had done one Facebook Live. That’s not enough. I know it can be tough to go Live - it was for me at first. But it’s so important! 
 
3 - Share your story. 
Tell your audience why you started your business. Then share your customers’ stories - what your box means to them. 
 
4 - Show the product - make it personal. 
For Betsy, I suggested demonstrating her lettering skill during a Live. She can make it personal by lettering the names of the people who show up for the Live. This creates a feeling of inclusivity and FOMO for those catching the replay later. 
 
5 - Offer a sign-up bonus. 
Successful launches need to create three feelings in buyers: urgency, scarcity, and exclusivity. Offering a sign-up bonus with an expiration gives people a reason to sign up NOW! 
 
There is so much goodness in this episode. You're going to want to take notes as you listen - the things I coach Betsy on apply to any subscription box launch. 
 
I can’t wait to hear the results of Betsy’s launch and to watch her audience - and her subscribers - grow! 
 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Betsy: 



Facebook



Instagram



B Goods Lettering Website



 
Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today!

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Guest: Betsy Goodman - The Lettering Box</p><p> </p><p>Have you ever wanted to sit in on a one-on-one subscription box coaching session? </p><p> </p><p>Well, you’re in luck. Today’s episode is an interview with Besty Goodman of B Goods Lettering - a Launch Your Box member who was in the middle of launching her subscription box when we talked. </p><p> </p><p>Betsy has an existing stationery and wax seal shop and also teaches hand lettering online and through local workshops. She got the idea for a subscription box last year, when she realized the ongoing practice her hand lettering students needed would be more fun if they had actual projects to complete instead of just the standard practice sheets. She tried a one-time Valentine box and it was a success. </p><p> </p><p>Betsy decided to start a subscription box, joined Launch Your Box, and made it happen. Three days into her launch, Betsy posted a question inside our private Launch Your Box Facebook group. She’d had 10 people subscribe so far and wanted to know how to keep the momentum going. I could have just answered her question inside the group. Instead, I invited her onto the podcast for an impromptu coaching session! </p><p> </p><p>Betsy was already doing a number of things right - she’d built up a waitlist that she continued to drive people to and had done a giveaway. She posted regularly on Instagram - driving people to her waitlist with posts teasing about her box. </p><p> </p><p>There was more Betsy could do, however. And that’s what I talked to her about. </p><p> </p><p>1 - Be visible. </p><p>If you’re a subscription box owner, include the link to your business in your personal profile. Let the people in your life know about your business. They already know, like, and trust you. Chances are, some of them are your ideal customers, or have friends who are. </p><p> </p><p>2 - Ramp up how often you go LIVE.  </p><p>Betsy had done one Facebook Live. That’s not enough. I know it can be tough to go Live - it was for me at first. But it’s so important! </p><p> </p><p>3 - Share your story. </p><p>Tell your audience why you started your business. Then share your customers’ stories - what your box means to them. </p><p> </p><p>4 - Show the product - make it personal. </p><p>For Betsy, I suggested demonstrating her lettering skill during a Live. She can make it personal by lettering the names of the people who show up for the Live. This creates a feeling of inclusivity and FOMO for those catching the replay later. </p><p> </p><p>5 - Offer a sign-up bonus. </p><p>Successful launches need to create three feelings in buyers: urgency, scarcity, and exclusivity. Offering a sign-up bonus with an expiration gives people a reason to sign up NOW! </p><p> </p><p>There is so much goodness in this episode. You're going to want to take notes as you listen - the things I coach Betsy on apply to any subscription box launch. </p><p> </p><p>I can’t wait to hear the results of Betsy’s launch and to watch her audience - and her subscribers - grow! </p><p> </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Betsy: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/bgoods.lettering">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/bgoods.lettering/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://bgoodslettering.com/">B Goods Lettering Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p> </p><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today!</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2340</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[cbae492d-5297-4baf-9297-836649b52e5b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7863114214.mp3?updated=1701785951" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>038: From Nurse Practitioner to Subscription Box Owner</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/038-from-nurse-practitioner-to-subscription-box-owner</link>
      <description>“You can’t just put it out there and it works.” - Pam Rodgers
Today’s episode is packed with so many golden nuggets!
I’m super excited to introduce you to a member of Launch Your Box! 
Pam Rodgers is a Nurse Practitioner, which means her full-time job is absolutely nuts right now. Pam decided her career in medicine wasn’t keeping her busy enough and turned a love for nail polish into a home-based business. 
As a child and again as a nursing student, Pam took her stress out on her fingernails. She found that by keeping her nails painted, she didn’t bite or pick at them. When Pam couldn’t find the unique colors she wanted, she started creating custom nail polish in her basement “lab.” Stella Chroma - her artisan nail lacquer and hand care company - was born. 
Pam introduced a nail polish subscription - the Monthly Mystery Subscription. Subscribers received an exclusive nail polish color each month. She started with 14 subscribers and realized she needed to do something in order to grow. 
Pam happened to learn about Launch Your Box right before we kicked off Coaching Week in March. She jumped into Coaching Week with both feet and joined Launch Your Box. 
Pam quickly grew her Monthly Mystery Subscription to 85 subscribers! But that’s not all. During Coaching Week, Pam was inspired to create another subscription. One that had nothing to do with nail polish. 
As a hard-working NP, Pam realized there were no subscription boxes just for her and her colleagues. There were boxes for nurses and boxes for doctors. But nothing for Nurse Practitioners. 
The idea for The Nurse Practitioner Subscription Box was born. There was only one problem. Pam had no audience. Yet. She quickly created a presence on all the channels and got to work. 
And when it came time to launch - Pam sold out her subscription in TWO HOURS!  
You are going to want to hear the creative ways Pam built her audience, connecting with people just like her. 
Important Links: 
JOIN COACHING WEEK - starts October 17th 
 
Find and follow Pam: 



The Nurse Practitioner Subscription Box Facebook



The Nurse Practitioner Subscription Box Instagram



The Nurse Practitioner Subscription Box Website



Stella Chroma Facebook



Stella Chroma Instagram






Stella Chroma Website 



 Stella Chroma Monthly Mystery Subscription 



Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 06 Oct 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From Nurse Practitioner to Subscription Box Owner </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>38</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cd52d58c-b0bf-11ed-b273-a7dea01b49d9/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>“You can’t just put it out there and it works.” - Pam Rodgers Today’s episode is packed with so many golden nuggets! I’m super excited to introduce you to a member of Launch Your Box!  Pam Rodgers is a Nurse Practitioner, which means...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>“You can’t just put it out there and it works.” - Pam Rodgers
Today’s episode is packed with so many golden nuggets!
I’m super excited to introduce you to a member of Launch Your Box! 
Pam Rodgers is a Nurse Practitioner, which means her full-time job is absolutely nuts right now. Pam decided her career in medicine wasn’t keeping her busy enough and turned a love for nail polish into a home-based business. 
As a child and again as a nursing student, Pam took her stress out on her fingernails. She found that by keeping her nails painted, she didn’t bite or pick at them. When Pam couldn’t find the unique colors she wanted, she started creating custom nail polish in her basement “lab.” Stella Chroma - her artisan nail lacquer and hand care company - was born. 
Pam introduced a nail polish subscription - the Monthly Mystery Subscription. Subscribers received an exclusive nail polish color each month. She started with 14 subscribers and realized she needed to do something in order to grow. 
Pam happened to learn about Launch Your Box right before we kicked off Coaching Week in March. She jumped into Coaching Week with both feet and joined Launch Your Box. 
Pam quickly grew her Monthly Mystery Subscription to 85 subscribers! But that’s not all. During Coaching Week, Pam was inspired to create another subscription. One that had nothing to do with nail polish. 
As a hard-working NP, Pam realized there were no subscription boxes just for her and her colleagues. There were boxes for nurses and boxes for doctors. But nothing for Nurse Practitioners. 
The idea for The Nurse Practitioner Subscription Box was born. There was only one problem. Pam had no audience. Yet. She quickly created a presence on all the channels and got to work. 
And when it came time to launch - Pam sold out her subscription in TWO HOURS!  
You are going to want to hear the creative ways Pam built her audience, connecting with people just like her. 
Important Links: 
JOIN COACHING WEEK - starts October 17th 
 
Find and follow Pam: 



The Nurse Practitioner Subscription Box Facebook



The Nurse Practitioner Subscription Box Instagram



The Nurse Practitioner Subscription Box Website



Stella Chroma Facebook



Stella Chroma Instagram






Stella Chroma Website 



 Stella Chroma Monthly Mystery Subscription 



Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><em>“You can’t just put it out there and it works.”</em> - Pam Rodgers</p><p>Today’s episode is packed with so many golden nuggets!</p><p>I’m super excited to introduce you to a member of Launch Your Box! </p><p>Pam Rodgers is a Nurse Practitioner, which means her full-time job is absolutely nuts right now. Pam decided her career in medicine wasn’t keeping her busy enough and turned a love for nail polish into a home-based business. </p><p>As a child and again as a nursing student, Pam took her stress out on her fingernails. She found that by keeping her nails painted, she didn’t bite or pick at them. When Pam couldn’t find the unique colors she wanted, she started creating custom nail polish in her basement “lab.” Stella Chroma - her artisan nail lacquer and hand care company - was born. </p><p>Pam introduced a nail polish subscription - the Monthly Mystery Subscription. Subscribers received an exclusive nail polish color each month. She started with 14 subscribers and realized she needed to do something in order to grow. </p><p>Pam happened to learn about Launch Your Box right before we kicked off Coaching Week in March. She jumped into Coaching Week with both feet and joined Launch Your Box. </p><p>Pam quickly grew her Monthly Mystery Subscription to 85 subscribers! But that’s not all. During Coaching Week, Pam was inspired to create another subscription. One that had nothing to do with nail polish. </p><p>As a hard-working NP, Pam realized there were no subscription boxes just for her and her colleagues. There were boxes for nurses and boxes for doctors. But nothing for Nurse Practitioners. </p><p>The idea for The Nurse Practitioner Subscription Box was born. There was only one problem. Pam had no audience. Yet. She quickly created a presence on all the channels and got to work. </p><p>And when it came time to launch - Pam sold out her subscription in TWO HOURS!  </p><p>You are going to want to hear the creative ways Pam built her audience, connecting with people just like her. </p><p>Important Links: </p><p><a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/coaching-week">JOIN COACHING WEEK</a> - starts October 17th </p><p> </p><p>Find and follow Pam: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/TheNPSubscriptionBox/">The Nurse Practitioner Subscription Box Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/thenpsubscriptionbox/">The Nurse Practitioner Subscription Box Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://thenursepractitionersubscriptionbox.com">The Nurse Practitioner Subscription Box Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/STELLACHROMA">Stella Chroma Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/stellachroma/">Stella Chroma Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.stellachroma.com/">Stella Chroma Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.stellachroma.com/products/monthly-mystery-subscription"> Stella Chroma Monthly Mystery Subscription </a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2529</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f661b4eb-ccd3-4c94-8201-c294a2c96427]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6238531335.mp3?updated=1701785961" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>037: Using Short Video to Build Your Audience</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/037-using-short-video-to-build-your-audience</link>
      <description>I talk a lot about the importance of audience building for subscription box owners. You have to build your audience in order to build your subscription box business. 
One of the best ways to build your audience is through the use of short videos you record and use on Instagram stories and reels or on Tik Tok. These videos can also be turned into Facebook video ads. All of which help you build your audience. 
Today, I’m thrilled to have one of my biz besties - and someone who does short videos better than just about anyone - on to share her knowledge with us. Tamara Bennett of Southern Adornments Decor is here! 
A lifelong crafter, Tamara turned in-home paint parties she hosted while her Marine husband was deployed into an incredible business where she teaches more than 1,000 women every month to paint online. 
Tamara started recording Instagram stories more than four years ago. She continues to share stories with her followers but also uses Instagram reels and Tik Tok to grow her audience and make new connections. 
Tamara explained the role each video types has in your audience building strategy: 



Use stories to engage with your current followers. You want to go deeper with these people who have already said, “Yes, I want to know more about you.” 



Take them behind the scenes. 



Show them the making of your product. 



Share details of your daily life with them. 



Use reels to gather new customers. Your goal is to reach out and build a bigger community. Put out content that will attract your ideal customer. 



Keep reels relatable - funny works!



Build a connection - give the viewer a “that’s just like my life” moment. 



Invite the viewer into your world. 



Tamara LOVES Tik Tok. And she’s really good at it. Tik Tok is a great way to get people to consume more of your video content quickly. Once a viewer likes one of your videos, they’re likely to consume more. The result? You’re able to build your Know-Like-Trust factor quickly. Tik Tok is great for: 



Behind the scenes



Packing a box



Product reveal



Answering audience questions on camera



Getting in on Tik Tok trends 



You don’t need special video or audio equipment to do short video well. Tamara uses her phone - that’s it. She shares hints and tips about how to record videos as well as how easy it is to edit videos inside Instagram and Tik Tok. 
Being on camera and going live can be intimidating. Short video is the perfect way to put yourself out there in a small way. 
Tamara reminds us that we are here to serve. These videos aren’t about us. They’re about the people they will help! 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Tamara: 



Facebook



 Instagram



Tik Tok



Southern Adornments Decor Website



Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 29 Sep 2021 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Using Short Video to Build Your Audience</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>37</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cd67f804-b0bf-11ed-b273-8bf0b8681de1/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>I talk a lot about the importance of audience building for subscription box owners. You have to build your audience in order to build your subscription box business.  One of the best ways to build your audience is through the use of short videos...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I talk a lot about the importance of audience building for subscription box owners. You have to build your audience in order to build your subscription box business. 
One of the best ways to build your audience is through the use of short videos you record and use on Instagram stories and reels or on Tik Tok. These videos can also be turned into Facebook video ads. All of which help you build your audience. 
Today, I’m thrilled to have one of my biz besties - and someone who does short videos better than just about anyone - on to share her knowledge with us. Tamara Bennett of Southern Adornments Decor is here! 
A lifelong crafter, Tamara turned in-home paint parties she hosted while her Marine husband was deployed into an incredible business where she teaches more than 1,000 women every month to paint online. 
Tamara started recording Instagram stories more than four years ago. She continues to share stories with her followers but also uses Instagram reels and Tik Tok to grow her audience and make new connections. 
Tamara explained the role each video types has in your audience building strategy: 



Use stories to engage with your current followers. You want to go deeper with these people who have already said, “Yes, I want to know more about you.” 



Take them behind the scenes. 



Show them the making of your product. 



Share details of your daily life with them. 



Use reels to gather new customers. Your goal is to reach out and build a bigger community. Put out content that will attract your ideal customer. 



Keep reels relatable - funny works!



Build a connection - give the viewer a “that’s just like my life” moment. 



Invite the viewer into your world. 



Tamara LOVES Tik Tok. And she’s really good at it. Tik Tok is a great way to get people to consume more of your video content quickly. Once a viewer likes one of your videos, they’re likely to consume more. The result? You’re able to build your Know-Like-Trust factor quickly. Tik Tok is great for: 



Behind the scenes



Packing a box



Product reveal



Answering audience questions on camera



Getting in on Tik Tok trends 



You don’t need special video or audio equipment to do short video well. Tamara uses her phone - that’s it. She shares hints and tips about how to record videos as well as how easy it is to edit videos inside Instagram and Tik Tok. 
Being on camera and going live can be intimidating. Short video is the perfect way to put yourself out there in a small way. 
Tamara reminds us that we are here to serve. These videos aren’t about us. They’re about the people they will help! 
Important Links: 
Find and follow Tamara: 



Facebook



 Instagram



Tik Tok



Southern Adornments Decor Website



Join me in all the places: 



Facebook



Instagram






Launch Your Box with Sarah Website 



Are you ready for  Launch Your Box? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business.  Join the waitlist today! 

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I talk a lot about the importance of audience building for subscription box owners. You have to build your audience in order to build your subscription box business. </p><p>One of the best ways to build your audience is through the use of short videos you record and use on Instagram stories and reels or on Tik Tok. These videos can also be turned into Facebook video ads. All of which help you build your audience. </p><p>Today, I’m thrilled to have one of my biz besties - and someone who does short videos better than just about anyone - on to share her knowledge with us. Tamara Bennett of Southern Adornments Decor is here! </p><p>A lifelong crafter, Tamara turned in-home paint parties she hosted while her Marine husband was deployed into an incredible business where she teaches more than 1,000 women every month to paint online. </p><p>Tamara started recording Instagram stories more than four years ago. She continues to share stories with her followers but also uses Instagram reels and Tik Tok to grow her audience and make new connections. </p><p>Tamara explained the role each video types has in your audience building strategy: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Use stories to engage with your current followers. You want to go deeper with these people who have already said, “Yes, I want to know more about you.” </li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Take them behind the scenes. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Show them the making of your product. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Share details of your daily life with them. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Use reels to gather new customers. Your goal is to reach out and build a bigger community. Put out content that will attract your ideal customer. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Keep reels relatable - funny works!</li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Build a connection - give the viewer a “that’s just like my life” moment. </li>
<li><br></li>
<li class="ql-indent-1">Invite the viewer into your world. </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Tamara LOVES Tik Tok. And she’s really good at it. Tik Tok is a great way to get people to consume more of your video content quickly. Once a viewer likes one of your videos, they’re likely to consume more. The result? You’re able to build your Know-Like-Trust factor quickly. Tik Tok is great for: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li>Behind the scenes</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Packing a box</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Product reveal</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Answering audience questions on camera</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Getting in on Tik Tok trends </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>You don’t need special video or audio equipment to do short video well. Tamara uses her phone - that’s it. She shares hints and tips about how to record videos as well as how easy it is to edit videos inside Instagram and Tik Tok. </p><p>Being on camera and going live can be intimidating. Short video is the perfect way to put yourself out there in a small way. </p><p>Tamara reminds us that we are here to serve. These videos aren’t about us. They’re about the people they will help! </p><p>Important Links: </p><p>Find and follow Tamara: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/southernadoornmentsdecor">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/southern_adoornments_decor/"> Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.tiktok.com/@southernadoornmentsdecor">Tik Tok</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.southernadoornmentsdecor.com/">Southern Adornments Decor Website</a></li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Join me in all the places: </p><ul>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.facebook.com/SubBoxwithSarah">Facebook</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><a href="https://www.instagram.com/howtostartasubbox/">Instagram</a></li>
<li><br></li>
<li><br></li>
<li>
<a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">Launch Your Box with Sarah Website</a> </li>
<li><br></li>
</ul><p>Are you ready for <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Launch Your Box</a>? Our complete training program walks you step by step through how to start, launch, and grow your subscription box business. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/launch-your-box"> Join the waitlist</a> today! </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2241</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[05236f89-cf73-4042-8e7e-c07de2248f8a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2160380047.mp3?updated=1701785991" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>036: 6 Ways to Keep a Subscriber</title>
      <description>We’re subscription box entrepreneurs, which means when we’re not creating a unique box experience for our audience, we’re building that audience of subscribers for our box! We spend so much time getting in front of our audience and gaining those subscribers, it kind of hurts every time we lose one of those subscribers for whatever reason.
 
But let me ask you a question: are you also putting as much time and effort into keeping those subscribers that are in danger of leaving? This week I’m going over six ways that I’ve used to retain those subscribers who need just a little more TLC to stay satisfied customers.
 
Keep Things Trendy or Seasonal: How often are you changing up your lineup of items offered in your box? For me, I’m always researching new trends and thinking ahead to what holidays or seasons are coming up to keep things fresh and exciting, and that excitement is going to keep your subscribers happy.
 
Ask you Subscribers what they want: Simply including your audience in the decision making process can make a huge difference. Sending out questionnaires, survey’s, or however you can directly get their input can create buy-in to the whole experience that they’ll want to see through to execution.
 
Engage with your Subscribers: Show them that they’re a part of something larger than themselves. If you have a private group for them or do like I do and have everyone on text, ask them for pictures of them enjoying your box that you can then put up in your public group. People love to feel included, so give them a truly great experience!
 
Create Added Value: We always want our subscribers to feel like the VIPs of our business. Create an environment of added value that will make them feel special. You can send out subscriber only emails or add personal coupons to their box for items in your store. I find that a personal touch reaching out to my customers goes a long way.
 
Offer a Lower-Priced tier in your Subscription Box: The number one reason people cancel their subscriptions is because of financial reasons. Offering a lower priced tier at the point of cancellation is one way you can try to address that pressure on your subscribers to try and retain them. Sometimes they’re happy just to have the option, and that way you can try to get them back to a full subscription when their situation changes for the better.
 
Billing and Follow Up: It’s not the sexiest or most fun thing to do, but you’d be surprised at how keeping track of any billing issues or missed payments can make a huge difference in managing subscriber turnover. Sometimes payments are missed because of card changes, or changes in addresses, or whatever the case may be, and sometimes your subscribers get so caught up in the day-to-day that they forget to fix those issues. Reminders and follow-up can eliminate so much of that.
 
Make sure to always keep an eye on your retention rate. If it starts to slip and fall below 80%, that’s an issue you need to address quickly before things get out of hand. There’s no better time to start repairing things than right away!
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.
 
Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 22 Sep 2021 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>6 Ways to Keep a Subscriber</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>36</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cd7cf11e-b0bf-11ed-b273-9f04ed5b94c6/image/9062c4bf25dab6a2c3e172a3410a9f5b.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We’re subscription box entrepreneurs, which means when we’re not creating a unique box experience for our audience, we’re building that audience of subscribers for our box! We spend so much time getting in front of our audience and gaining those...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’re subscription box entrepreneurs, which means when we’re not creating a unique box experience for our audience, we’re building that audience of subscribers for our box! We spend so much time getting in front of our audience and gaining those subscribers, it kind of hurts every time we lose one of those subscribers for whatever reason.
 
But let me ask you a question: are you also putting as much time and effort into keeping those subscribers that are in danger of leaving? This week I’m going over six ways that I’ve used to retain those subscribers who need just a little more TLC to stay satisfied customers.
 
Keep Things Trendy or Seasonal: How often are you changing up your lineup of items offered in your box? For me, I’m always researching new trends and thinking ahead to what holidays or seasons are coming up to keep things fresh and exciting, and that excitement is going to keep your subscribers happy.
 
Ask you Subscribers what they want: Simply including your audience in the decision making process can make a huge difference. Sending out questionnaires, survey’s, or however you can directly get their input can create buy-in to the whole experience that they’ll want to see through to execution.
 
Engage with your Subscribers: Show them that they’re a part of something larger than themselves. If you have a private group for them or do like I do and have everyone on text, ask them for pictures of them enjoying your box that you can then put up in your public group. People love to feel included, so give them a truly great experience!
 
Create Added Value: We always want our subscribers to feel like the VIPs of our business. Create an environment of added value that will make them feel special. You can send out subscriber only emails or add personal coupons to their box for items in your store. I find that a personal touch reaching out to my customers goes a long way.
 
Offer a Lower-Priced tier in your Subscription Box: The number one reason people cancel their subscriptions is because of financial reasons. Offering a lower priced tier at the point of cancellation is one way you can try to address that pressure on your subscribers to try and retain them. Sometimes they’re happy just to have the option, and that way you can try to get them back to a full subscription when their situation changes for the better.
 
Billing and Follow Up: It’s not the sexiest or most fun thing to do, but you’d be surprised at how keeping track of any billing issues or missed payments can make a huge difference in managing subscriber turnover. Sometimes payments are missed because of card changes, or changes in addresses, or whatever the case may be, and sometimes your subscribers get so caught up in the day-to-day that they forget to fix those issues. Reminders and follow-up can eliminate so much of that.
 
Make sure to always keep an eye on your retention rate. If it starts to slip and fall below 80%, that’s an issue you need to address quickly before things get out of hand. There’s no better time to start repairing things than right away!
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.
 
Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’re subscription box entrepreneurs, which means when we’re not creating a unique box experience for our audience, we’re building that audience of subscribers for our box! We spend so much time getting in front of our audience and gaining those subscribers, it kind of hurts every time we lose one of those subscribers for whatever reason.</p><p> </p><p>But let me ask you a question: are you also putting as much time and effort into keeping those subscribers that are in danger of leaving? This week I’m going over six ways that I’ve used to retain those subscribers who need just a little more TLC to stay satisfied customers.</p><p> </p><ol><li>Keep Things Trendy or Seasonal: How often are you changing up your lineup of items offered in your box? For me, I’m always researching new trends and thinking ahead to what holidays or seasons are coming up to keep things fresh and exciting, and that excitement is going to keep your subscribers happy.</li></ol><p> </p><ol><li>Ask you Subscribers what they want: Simply including your audience in the decision making process can make a huge difference. Sending out questionnaires, survey’s, or however you can directly get their input can create buy-in to the whole experience that they’ll want to see through to execution.</li></ol><p> </p><ol><li>Engage with your Subscribers: Show them that they’re a part of something larger than themselves. If you have a private group for them or do like I do and have everyone on text, ask them for pictures of them enjoying your box that you can then put up in your public group. People love to feel included, so give them a truly great experience!</li></ol><p> </p><ol><li>Create Added Value: We always want our subscribers to feel like the VIPs of our business. Create an environment of added value that will make them feel special. You can send out subscriber only emails or add personal coupons to their box for items in your store. I find that a personal touch reaching out to my customers goes a long way.</li></ol><p> </p><ol><li>Offer a Lower-Priced tier in your Subscription Box: The number one reason people cancel their subscriptions is because of financial reasons. Offering a lower priced tier at the point of cancellation is one way you can try to address that pressure on your subscribers to try and retain them. Sometimes they’re happy just to have the option, and that way you can try to get them back to a full subscription when their situation changes for the better.</li></ol><p> </p><ol><li>Billing and Follow Up: It’s not the sexiest or most fun thing to do, but you’d be surprised at how keeping track of any billing issues or missed payments can make a huge difference in managing subscriber turnover. Sometimes payments are missed because of card changes, or changes in addresses, or whatever the case may be, and sometimes your subscribers get so caught up in the day-to-day that they forget to fix those issues. Reminders and follow-up can eliminate so much of that.</li></ol><p> </p><p>Make sure to always keep an eye on your retention rate. If it starts to slip and fall below 80%, that’s an issue you need to address quickly before things get out of hand. There’s no better time to start repairing things than right away!</p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p> </p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1696</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[71ad47d3-8762-4671-bbfe-51b20639ecd3]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6452373449.mp3?updated=1701785998" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>035: We All Start from Scratch – How Donna Ended her First Launch with 65 Subscribers!</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/035-we-all-start-from-scratch-how-donna-ended-her-first-launch-with-65-subscribers</link>
      <description>Everyone starts somewhere in this subscription box business. Sometimes you start with an audience ready and waiting for your box (if you’re already online), and sometimes you must build your business and audience from nothing. That’s where Donna Prudhomme started with her Plan, Lead, Educate box, but with a little Launch-Your-Box knowhow and some hard work, she was able to build her launch base to 65 subscribers! This week she joins me to tell the story of her first launch and how she put aside her fears and worked toward her success.
 
The Top can be Lonely
 
Donna works in education, but not at the teacher level but at the leadership level. She saw all the different boxes that were geared toward teachers and realized that there wasn’t as much of a support system for those women in leadership positions. She found her ‘why:’ an area for opportunity and a community that needed some good old-fashioned TLC.
 
“I (tried) to find something for leaders and public-school education. I really want to hone in on public school education because we face different challenges. And I didn't really find anything. So, I said, well, I need to create something. I don't know what I'm going to create. I just need to create something.” – Donna
 
Get Out of Your Own Way and Do It
 
Building an audience and getting to launch is one of the least-sexy things that we do but I can’t stress how crucial doing the work is to have a successful launch. Donna realized this and put in the work necessary to get her to where she wanted to be with subscribers. We’ve talked about doing a giveaway to build up your email list, being active on multiple social media platforms, and most important, going live and getting in front of your audience.
 
“I said, I have to do this, let me just jump on Facebook Live. (I told myself) I just have to do it because I tried to stay away from it. But I felt like if I actually showed myself in front of my brand, that people will relate. And so, once I jump(ed) on Facebook Live, putting myself out there, I received so much positive feedback from other educators like, ‘Yes, thank you for doing this, oh, we need this.’ That actually drove my momentum.” – Donna
 
One last thought from Donna that I thought everyone needs to hear:
 
“Your box will not be for everyone, but it will be for someone so give yourself grace.”
 
You can find Donna and her Plan, Lead, Educate box at: https://planleadeducate.com/
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 15 Sep 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>We All Start from Scratch – How Donna Ended her First Launch with 65 Subscribers!</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>35</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cd937574-b0bf-11ed-b273-b74a28c49b4e/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Everyone starts somewhere in this subscription box business. Sometimes you start with an audience ready and waiting for your box (if you’re already online), and sometimes you must build your business and audience from nothing. That’s where Donna...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Everyone starts somewhere in this subscription box business. Sometimes you start with an audience ready and waiting for your box (if you’re already online), and sometimes you must build your business and audience from nothing. That’s where Donna Prudhomme started with her Plan, Lead, Educate box, but with a little Launch-Your-Box knowhow and some hard work, she was able to build her launch base to 65 subscribers! This week she joins me to tell the story of her first launch and how she put aside her fears and worked toward her success.
 
The Top can be Lonely
 
Donna works in education, but not at the teacher level but at the leadership level. She saw all the different boxes that were geared toward teachers and realized that there wasn’t as much of a support system for those women in leadership positions. She found her ‘why:’ an area for opportunity and a community that needed some good old-fashioned TLC.
 
“I (tried) to find something for leaders and public-school education. I really want to hone in on public school education because we face different challenges. And I didn't really find anything. So, I said, well, I need to create something. I don't know what I'm going to create. I just need to create something.” – Donna
 
Get Out of Your Own Way and Do It
 
Building an audience and getting to launch is one of the least-sexy things that we do but I can’t stress how crucial doing the work is to have a successful launch. Donna realized this and put in the work necessary to get her to where she wanted to be with subscribers. We’ve talked about doing a giveaway to build up your email list, being active on multiple social media platforms, and most important, going live and getting in front of your audience.
 
“I said, I have to do this, let me just jump on Facebook Live. (I told myself) I just have to do it because I tried to stay away from it. But I felt like if I actually showed myself in front of my brand, that people will relate. And so, once I jump(ed) on Facebook Live, putting myself out there, I received so much positive feedback from other educators like, ‘Yes, thank you for doing this, oh, we need this.’ That actually drove my momentum.” – Donna
 
One last thought from Donna that I thought everyone needs to hear:
 
“Your box will not be for everyone, but it will be for someone so give yourself grace.”
 
You can find Donna and her Plan, Lead, Educate box at: https://planleadeducate.com/
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Everyone starts somewhere in this subscription box business. Sometimes you start with an audience ready and waiting for your box (if you’re already online), and sometimes you must build your business and audience from nothing. That’s where Donna Prudhomme started with her Plan, Lead, Educate box, but with a little Launch-Your-Box knowhow and some hard work, she was able to build her launch base to 65 subscribers! This week she joins me to tell the story of her first launch and how she put aside her fears and worked toward her success.</p><p> </p><p>The Top can be Lonely</p><p> </p><p>Donna works in education, but not at the teacher level but at the leadership level. She saw all the different boxes that were geared toward teachers and realized that there wasn’t as much of a support system for those women in leadership positions. She found her ‘why:’ an area for opportunity and a community that needed some good old-fashioned TLC.</p><p> </p><p>“I (tried) to find something for leaders and public-school education. I really want to hone in on public school education because we face different challenges. And I didn't really find anything. So, I said, well, I need to create something. I don't know what I'm going to create. I just need to create something.” – Donna</p><p> </p><p>Get Out of Your Own Way and Do It</p><p> </p><p>Building an audience and getting to launch is one of the least-sexy things that we do but I can’t stress how crucial doing the work is to have a successful launch. Donna realized this and put in the work necessary to get her to where she wanted to be with subscribers. We’ve talked about doing a giveaway to build up your email list, being active on multiple social media platforms, and most important, going live and getting in front of your audience.</p><p> </p><p>“I said, I have to do this, let me just jump on Facebook Live. (I told myself) I just have to do it because I tried to stay away from it. But I felt like if I actually showed myself in front of my brand, that people will relate. And so, once I jump(ed) on Facebook Live, putting myself out there, I received so much positive feedback from other educators like, ‘Yes, thank you for doing this, oh, we need this.’ That actually drove my momentum.” – Donna</p><p> </p><p>One last thought from Donna that I thought everyone needs to hear:</p><p> </p><p>“Your box will not be for everyone, but it will be for someone so give yourself grace.”</p><p> </p><p>You can find Donna and her Plan, Lead, Educate box at: <a href="https://planleadeducate.com/">https://planleadeducate.com/</a></p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1529</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[f30728c9-cacf-4ca3-a4b3-ddd7952d301f]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4312218938.mp3?updated=1701786027" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>034: Maximize Your 4th Quarter Sales</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/034-maximize-your-4th-quarter-sales</link>
      <description>The Fourth Quarter is coming, and you know what that means: the busiest shopping days of the year. If you haven’t started preparing, now is a great time to start. This week’s podcast is all about maximizing your selling potential for the holiday and really using the audience and subscriber base that you’ve already built to do it. I’m going to give you five ways to use the resources that you have to give more gift options for your subscription box.
 
The Holiday Gift Box
This is not one of your regular subscription boxes, but a one-time box that your subscribers can buy either for someone else. A holiday box can be a great way to expand your subscription base by including ways for the person it was gifted to sign up to your regular service. These should be presold beginning in October or early November to pull in as many sales as you can as well as give you time to pull in as much inventory as need to get these shipped out.
 
New Subscriber Launch – Special Promotion
        This is another promotion that you’re going to want to do early in the October to November timeframe to pull in people who are still shopping for themselves before the end of the year. You want to start promoting this before the noise of the holidays drowns you out. This is meant to get your audience excited about your upcoming boxes and gives you a chance to offer some free gifts for subscription to snag some good subscriptions before the end of the year.
 
Gift Subscriptions
        This is one of the easiest things that you can do, and it’s one of my favorite things because it’s so easy! Gift subscriptions are a promotion I usually run around Black Friday and it’s the only time of year I offer either six month or 12-month subscription starting in January - you read that right! You can sell some subscriptions (with a free month for a 6-month subscription, or two for 12-months) and have the money up front as well as not having to move on it until the first of the year. This is great to have some piece of mind for the slow months after the holidays without having to move on them right away.
 
Curated Boxes
        Having excess inventory is the nature of the beast when you’re a subscription box owner. Time to put that inventory to use! You can mix and match those left-over items into new boxes for gift items for people looking for that extra gift set. Give these boxes new names and don’t be afraid to get creative but remember that you’re not building a brand-new box, but a specialized one from items that have come before.
 
Mystery Boxes
        What about the inventory from Christmas that was left over? Selling mystery boxes made up of that inventory is a great way to move it out to your audience. This isn’t about re-selling old boxes but using pieces from various boxes to create something new and exciting as a gift. It’s a great way to offer a clearance type item and send out whatever’s left after Christmas!
 
I don’t recommend doing all of these at once but putting together 2-3 options for the holidays can be a great way to really be efficient with your sales and generate that positive interest with your audience!
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 08 Sep 2021 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Maximize Your 4th Quarter Sales</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>34</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cdaaa58c-b0bf-11ed-b273-af6d36ad875f/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>The Fourth Quarter is coming, and you know what that means: the busiest shopping days of the year. If you haven’t started preparing, now is a great time to start. This week’s podcast is all about maximizing your selling potential for the holiday...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>The Fourth Quarter is coming, and you know what that means: the busiest shopping days of the year. If you haven’t started preparing, now is a great time to start. This week’s podcast is all about maximizing your selling potential for the holiday and really using the audience and subscriber base that you’ve already built to do it. I’m going to give you five ways to use the resources that you have to give more gift options for your subscription box.
 
The Holiday Gift Box
This is not one of your regular subscription boxes, but a one-time box that your subscribers can buy either for someone else. A holiday box can be a great way to expand your subscription base by including ways for the person it was gifted to sign up to your regular service. These should be presold beginning in October or early November to pull in as many sales as you can as well as give you time to pull in as much inventory as need to get these shipped out.
 
New Subscriber Launch – Special Promotion
        This is another promotion that you’re going to want to do early in the October to November timeframe to pull in people who are still shopping for themselves before the end of the year. You want to start promoting this before the noise of the holidays drowns you out. This is meant to get your audience excited about your upcoming boxes and gives you a chance to offer some free gifts for subscription to snag some good subscriptions before the end of the year.
 
Gift Subscriptions
        This is one of the easiest things that you can do, and it’s one of my favorite things because it’s so easy! Gift subscriptions are a promotion I usually run around Black Friday and it’s the only time of year I offer either six month or 12-month subscription starting in January - you read that right! You can sell some subscriptions (with a free month for a 6-month subscription, or two for 12-months) and have the money up front as well as not having to move on it until the first of the year. This is great to have some piece of mind for the slow months after the holidays without having to move on them right away.
 
Curated Boxes
        Having excess inventory is the nature of the beast when you’re a subscription box owner. Time to put that inventory to use! You can mix and match those left-over items into new boxes for gift items for people looking for that extra gift set. Give these boxes new names and don’t be afraid to get creative but remember that you’re not building a brand-new box, but a specialized one from items that have come before.
 
Mystery Boxes
        What about the inventory from Christmas that was left over? Selling mystery boxes made up of that inventory is a great way to move it out to your audience. This isn’t about re-selling old boxes but using pieces from various boxes to create something new and exciting as a gift. It’s a great way to offer a clearance type item and send out whatever’s left after Christmas!
 
I don’t recommend doing all of these at once but putting together 2-3 options for the holidays can be a great way to really be efficient with your sales and generate that positive interest with your audience!
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The Fourth Quarter is coming, and you know what that means: the busiest shopping days of the year. If you haven’t started preparing, now is a great time to start. This week’s podcast is all about maximizing your selling potential for the holiday and really using the audience and subscriber base that you’ve already built to do it. I’m going to give you five ways to use the resources that you have to give more gift options for your subscription box.</p><p> </p><ol><li>The Holiday Gift Box</li></ol><p>This is not one of your regular subscription boxes, but a one-time box that your subscribers can buy either for someone else. A holiday box can be a great way to expand your subscription base by including ways for the person it was gifted to sign up to your regular service. These should be presold beginning in October or early November to pull in as many sales as you can as well as give you time to pull in as much inventory as need to get these shipped out.</p><p> </p><ol><li>New Subscriber Launch – Special Promotion</li></ol><p>        This is another promotion that you’re going to want to do early in the October to November timeframe to pull in people who are still shopping for themselves before the end of the year. You want to start promoting this before the noise of the holidays drowns you out. This is meant to get your audience excited about your upcoming boxes and gives you a chance to offer some free gifts for subscription to snag some good subscriptions before the end of the year.</p><p> </p><ol><li>Gift Subscriptions</li></ol><p>        This is one of the easiest things that you can do, and it’s one of my favorite things because it’s so easy! Gift subscriptions are a promotion I usually run around Black Friday and it’s the only time of year I offer either six month or 12-month subscription starting in January - you read that right! You can sell some subscriptions (with a free month for a 6-month subscription, or two for 12-months) and have the money up front as well as not having to move on it until the first of the year. This is great to have some piece of mind for the slow months after the holidays without having to move on them right away.</p><p> </p><ol><li>Curated Boxes</li></ol><p>        Having excess inventory is the nature of the beast when you’re a subscription box owner. Time to put that inventory to use! You can mix and match those left-over items into new boxes for gift items for people looking for that extra gift set. Give these boxes new names and don’t be afraid to get creative but remember that you’re not building a brand-new box, but a specialized one from items that have come before.</p><p> </p><ol><li>Mystery Boxes</li></ol><p>        What about the inventory from Christmas that was left over? Selling mystery boxes made up of that inventory is a great way to move it out to your audience. This isn’t about re-selling old boxes but using pieces from various boxes to create something new and exciting as a gift. It’s a great way to offer a clearance type item and send out whatever’s left after Christmas!</p><p> </p><p>I don’t recommend doing all of these at once but putting together 2-3 options for the holidays can be a great way to really be efficient with your sales and generate that positive interest with your audience!</p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1665</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a03b1e56-5888-4dff-820c-c2040991d453]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5333248767.mp3?updated=1701786017" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>033: Small Audience, No Problem! How Amanda Built 100+ Subscribers from an Audience of 600</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/033-draft</link>
      <description>One of my favorite things that I’ve learned since starting the Launch Your Box group is how many unique kinds of subscription boxes are out there. This week I’m talking to Amanda Stucky, founder of the Mandy Lynn Plans Box, and her box is all about stickers made specially for Hobonichi Planners. What are Hobonichi Planners, you ask? That’s the same question I had coming into this week’s podcast, and Amanda was more than gracious enough to share with me what her niche was and how she started out the gate with 100 subscribers!
 
Riches are In the Niches
 
If you’re not in the know yet, Hobonichi Planners are a specific kind of planner from Japan that can be specialized by their owners in tons of different ways. Amanda is part of a community of creators who customize their planners and got her start on Youtube showing off her works. The seed of her subscripton box was born when she started modifying stickers to fit in her planner:
 
“I found this hobo Nietzsche, and I was watching all these planner videos of people using their stickers, but I couldn't find anybody using stickers and a Hobonichi cousin (planner). So, what I would do is I would take the stickers made for the Erin Condren (planner) and I would put them on my planner, and I would use an exacto-knife and a ruler and slice off the piece that I didn't like so it fit perfectly.”
 
This is exactly what I mean by “riches in the niches.” Amanda was able to build an audience of 600 followers, 100 of which have been subscribers to her M.L.P box from launch, just off of creating stickers for a certain kind of life planner! She has been so successful that her husband quit his job as an engineer to help her out!
 
“My husband has a lot of the behind-the-scenes work, and it means, first, that he won't have to work as many nights and weekends. He's been very involved with the business from the very beginning. And so, we're going to get our family time back. And that means a lot.”
 
Amanda and her family were able to change their lives over stickers! If that isn’t inspiration to get out there and start your own subscription box, well then I’ll just keep on bringing you more stories and tips and tricks every week anyway!
 
You can find Amanda and the Mandy Lynn Plans box at her Youtube channel at:  https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCDi2GP6S-SjtJa4Kih9hxIw or https://mandylynnplans.com/
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 01 Sep 2021 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Small Audience, No Problem! How Amanda Built 100+ Subscribers from an Audience of 600</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>33</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cdbf7f0c-b0bf-11ed-b273-37f12febf830/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>One of my favorite things that I’ve learned since starting the Launch Your Box group is how many unique kinds of subscription boxes are out there. This week I’m talking to Amanda Stucky, founder of the Mandy Lynn Plans Box, and her box is all...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>One of my favorite things that I’ve learned since starting the Launch Your Box group is how many unique kinds of subscription boxes are out there. This week I’m talking to Amanda Stucky, founder of the Mandy Lynn Plans Box, and her box is all about stickers made specially for Hobonichi Planners. What are Hobonichi Planners, you ask? That’s the same question I had coming into this week’s podcast, and Amanda was more than gracious enough to share with me what her niche was and how she started out the gate with 100 subscribers!
 
Riches are In the Niches
 
If you’re not in the know yet, Hobonichi Planners are a specific kind of planner from Japan that can be specialized by their owners in tons of different ways. Amanda is part of a community of creators who customize their planners and got her start on Youtube showing off her works. The seed of her subscripton box was born when she started modifying stickers to fit in her planner:
 
“I found this hobo Nietzsche, and I was watching all these planner videos of people using their stickers, but I couldn't find anybody using stickers and a Hobonichi cousin (planner). So, what I would do is I would take the stickers made for the Erin Condren (planner) and I would put them on my planner, and I would use an exacto-knife and a ruler and slice off the piece that I didn't like so it fit perfectly.”
 
This is exactly what I mean by “riches in the niches.” Amanda was able to build an audience of 600 followers, 100 of which have been subscribers to her M.L.P box from launch, just off of creating stickers for a certain kind of life planner! She has been so successful that her husband quit his job as an engineer to help her out!
 
“My husband has a lot of the behind-the-scenes work, and it means, first, that he won't have to work as many nights and weekends. He's been very involved with the business from the very beginning. And so, we're going to get our family time back. And that means a lot.”
 
Amanda and her family were able to change their lives over stickers! If that isn’t inspiration to get out there and start your own subscription box, well then I’ll just keep on bringing you more stories and tips and tricks every week anyway!
 
You can find Amanda and the Mandy Lynn Plans box at her Youtube channel at:  https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCDi2GP6S-SjtJa4Kih9hxIw or https://mandylynnplans.com/
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>One of my favorite things that I’ve learned since starting the Launch Your Box group is how many unique kinds of subscription boxes are out there. This week I’m talking to Amanda Stucky, founder of the Mandy Lynn Plans Box, and her box is all about stickers made specially for Hobonichi Planners. What are Hobonichi Planners, you ask? That’s the same question I had coming into this week’s podcast, and Amanda was more than gracious enough to share with me what her niche was and how she started out the gate with 100 subscribers!</p><p> </p><p>Riches are In the Niches</p><p> </p><p>If you’re not in the know yet, Hobonichi Planners are a specific kind of planner from Japan that can be specialized by their owners in tons of different ways. Amanda is part of a community of creators who customize their planners and got her start on Youtube showing off her works. The seed of her subscripton box was born when she started modifying stickers to fit in her planner:</p><p> </p><p>“I found this hobo Nietzsche, and I was watching all these planner videos of people using their stickers, but I couldn't find anybody using stickers and a Hobonichi cousin (planner). So, what I would do is I would take the stickers made for the Erin Condren (planner) and I would put them on my planner, and I would use an exacto-knife and a ruler and slice off the piece that I didn't like so it fit perfectly.”</p><p> </p><p>This is exactly what I mean by “riches in the niches.” Amanda was able to build an audience of 600 followers, 100 of which have been subscribers to her M.L.P box from launch, just off of creating stickers for a certain kind of life planner! She has been so successful that her husband quit his job as an engineer to help her out!</p><p> </p><p>“My husband has a lot of the behind-the-scenes work, and it means, first, that he won't have to work as many nights and weekends. He's been very involved with the business from the very beginning. And so, we're going to get our family time back. And that means a lot.”</p><p> </p><p>Amanda and her family were able to change their lives over stickers! If that isn’t inspiration to get out there and start your own subscription box, well then I’ll just keep on bringing you more stories and tips and tricks every week anyway!</p><p> </p><p>You can find Amanda and the Mandy Lynn Plans box at her Youtube channel at: <a href="https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCDi2GP6S-SjtJa4Kih9hxIw"> https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCDi2GP6S-SjtJa4Kih9hxIw</a> or <a href="https://mandylynnplans.com/">https://mandylynnplans.com/</a></p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1650</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[12a26f41-1199-48b6-a700-84c49963c037]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7899568009.mp3?updated=1701786075" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>032: How to Find Products for Your Subscription Box?</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/032-how-to-find-products-for-your-subscription-box</link>
      <description>You have an idea for a subscription box and you’re excited to start building it for your audience. But where are you going to get all the items you need for a price that doesn’t break the bank? Or maybe you’re already sending your box out, but you’ve increased your subscriber base to the point that you need to start thinking about ordering in bulk. That’s the subject of this week’s episode, where I’m going to show you that there’s more than one way to fill a box.
 
Where to Source
 
Deciding what supplier to go with is really what kind of scale you’re looking for as well as your need to diversify your supply chain. When you start to scale up, having more options is going to be better for your schedule as well as your piece of mind to make sure you’re getting what you need for each shipment. Here is a list of sources you can use to help keep you stocked and ready to ship:
 
Local Shops – The ability to support business owners in your own area is invaluable, especially when you’re starting out small.
 
Facebook Wholesale Groups – There’s likely going to be a Facebook Wholesale group for whatever you’re looking for. It’s a good idea to look around and see what you can find, and it’s easy to join when you do find a group that might work.
 
General Wholesale and Vendor Sites – These are sites that cater to buyers in need of wholesale and often carry many different brands. There is a need to prove that you are a business in need of wholesale, so take care to see what kind of requirements are needed to become a member of the site.
 
Markets or Trade Shows – These are scheduled events that happen across the country where hundreds of vendors come to connect with buyers. These are great to get hands on with companies looking to supply all kinds of businesses and are a great place to network with other businesses as well. Here are some resources for details on shows:
https://nynow.com/
https://dallasmarketcenter.com/
https://www.lasvegasmarket.com/
https://www.americasmart.com/
http://www.greatrep.com/TradeShows.aspx
 
White Label with a Private Lender – Partnering with a vendor to create custom products can be a huge way of getting unique products without having to do all of the sourcing and shipping yourself. Markets/Trade Shows are a great way to connect with vendors to partner with and start a white label line.
 
Global Marketplace – Sites like Alibaba or Indiamart are a great way to lower costs for items. However, since the items are coming from overseas, you’ll need to give them more lead time when ordering, and it can be affected by global bottlenecks, but they are a great place for sourcing.
 
Sourcing Services – Companies that specialize in sourcing supply for companies. These services can be great when you need a large volume of items as they can leverage their relationships with suppliers to get you what you need when you need it.
 
There are so many resources available to subscription box owners to get your products at scale for a price to keep you in business. Don’t be afraid to diversify, because you’ll find that once you have many sources for the items you need, it’s going to be much easier to keep you piece of mind and your business in the positive.
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 25 Aug 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Find Products for Your Subscription Box?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>32</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cdd694bc-b0bf-11ed-b273-373fcecffaaf/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>You have an idea for a subscription box and you’re excited to start building it for your audience. But where are you going to get all the items you need for a price that doesn’t break the bank? Or maybe you’re already sending your box out, but...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>You have an idea for a subscription box and you’re excited to start building it for your audience. But where are you going to get all the items you need for a price that doesn’t break the bank? Or maybe you’re already sending your box out, but you’ve increased your subscriber base to the point that you need to start thinking about ordering in bulk. That’s the subject of this week’s episode, where I’m going to show you that there’s more than one way to fill a box.
 
Where to Source
 
Deciding what supplier to go with is really what kind of scale you’re looking for as well as your need to diversify your supply chain. When you start to scale up, having more options is going to be better for your schedule as well as your piece of mind to make sure you’re getting what you need for each shipment. Here is a list of sources you can use to help keep you stocked and ready to ship:
 
Local Shops – The ability to support business owners in your own area is invaluable, especially when you’re starting out small.
 
Facebook Wholesale Groups – There’s likely going to be a Facebook Wholesale group for whatever you’re looking for. It’s a good idea to look around and see what you can find, and it’s easy to join when you do find a group that might work.
 
General Wholesale and Vendor Sites – These are sites that cater to buyers in need of wholesale and often carry many different brands. There is a need to prove that you are a business in need of wholesale, so take care to see what kind of requirements are needed to become a member of the site.
 
Markets or Trade Shows – These are scheduled events that happen across the country where hundreds of vendors come to connect with buyers. These are great to get hands on with companies looking to supply all kinds of businesses and are a great place to network with other businesses as well. Here are some resources for details on shows:
https://nynow.com/
https://dallasmarketcenter.com/
https://www.lasvegasmarket.com/
https://www.americasmart.com/
http://www.greatrep.com/TradeShows.aspx
 
White Label with a Private Lender – Partnering with a vendor to create custom products can be a huge way of getting unique products without having to do all of the sourcing and shipping yourself. Markets/Trade Shows are a great way to connect with vendors to partner with and start a white label line.
 
Global Marketplace – Sites like Alibaba or Indiamart are a great way to lower costs for items. However, since the items are coming from overseas, you’ll need to give them more lead time when ordering, and it can be affected by global bottlenecks, but they are a great place for sourcing.
 
Sourcing Services – Companies that specialize in sourcing supply for companies. These services can be great when you need a large volume of items as they can leverage their relationships with suppliers to get you what you need when you need it.
 
There are so many resources available to subscription box owners to get your products at scale for a price to keep you in business. Don’t be afraid to diversify, because you’ll find that once you have many sources for the items you need, it’s going to be much easier to keep you piece of mind and your business in the positive.
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>You have an idea for a subscription box and you’re excited to start building it for your audience. But where are you going to get all the items you need for a price that doesn’t break the bank? Or maybe you’re already sending your box out, but you’ve increased your subscriber base to the point that you need to start thinking about ordering in bulk. That’s the subject of this week’s episode, where I’m going to show you that there’s more than one way to fill a box.</p><p> </p><p>Where to Source</p><p> </p><p>Deciding what supplier to go with is really what kind of scale you’re looking for as well as your need to diversify your supply chain. When you start to scale up, having more options is going to be better for your schedule as well as your piece of mind to make sure you’re getting what you need for each shipment. Here is a list of sources you can use to help keep you stocked and ready to ship:</p><p> </p><ol><li>Local Shops – The ability to support business owners in your own area is invaluable, especially when you’re starting out small.</li></ol><p> </p><ol><li>Facebook Wholesale Groups – There’s likely going to be a Facebook Wholesale group for whatever you’re looking for. It’s a good idea to look around and see what you can find, and it’s easy to join when you do find a group that might work.</li></ol><p> </p><ol><li>General Wholesale and Vendor Sites – These are sites that cater to buyers in need of wholesale and often carry many different brands. There is a need to prove that you are a business in need of wholesale, so take care to see what kind of requirements are needed to become a member of the site.</li></ol><p> </p><ol><li>Markets or Trade Shows – These are scheduled events that happen across the country where hundreds of vendors come to connect with buyers. These are great to get hands on with companies looking to supply all kinds of businesses and are a great place to network with other businesses as well. Here are some resources for details on shows:</li></ol><p><a href="https://nynow.com/">https://nynow.com/</a></p><p><a href="https://dallasmarketcenter.com/">https://dallasmarketcenter.com/</a></p><p><a href="https://www.lasvegasmarket.com/">https://www.lasvegasmarket.com/</a></p><p><a href="https://www.americasmart.com/">https://www.americasmart.com/</a></p><p><a href="http://www.greatrep.com/TradeShows.aspx">http://www.greatrep.com/TradeShows.aspx</a></p><p> </p><ol><li>White Label with a Private Lender – Partnering with a vendor to create custom products can be a huge way of getting unique products without having to do all of the sourcing and shipping yourself. Markets/Trade Shows are a great way to connect with vendors to partner with and start a white label line.</li></ol><p> </p><ol><li>Global Marketplace – Sites like Alibaba or Indiamart are a great way to lower costs for items. However, since the items are coming from overseas, you’ll need to give them more lead time when ordering, and it can be affected by global bottlenecks, but they are a great place for sourcing.</li></ol><p> </p><ol><li>Sourcing Services – Companies that specialize in sourcing supply for companies. These services can be great when you need a large volume of items as they can leverage their relationships with suppliers to get you what you need when you need it.</li></ol><p> </p><p>There are so many resources available to subscription box owners to get your products at scale for a price to keep you in business. Don’t be afraid to diversify, because you’ll find that once you have many sources for the items you need, it’s going to be much easier to keep you piece of mind and your business in the positive.</p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1647</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[46463703-c800-4373-8728-a19acce61d1d]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8272428151.mp3?updated=1701786084" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>031: From an Audience of Zero to 100 Subscribers in 60 Days</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/031-from-an-audience-of-zero-to-100-subscribers-in-60-days</link>
      <description>This week I’m speaking with Claudia Ramos, founder of Shabbyboxes.com, about her unique story: how she went from having a box, to shutting it down, to launching a brand-new box and building to 100 subscribers in 60 days. How’s that for an attention getting headline! We talked about what she did to achieve this and how engaging with your audience is so important to building your subscriber base.
 
From Zero to Subscription Hero
 
Claudia had initially started off with another box related to her work as an independent designer with a crafting company. By the time she was informed by corporate that she wasn’t allowed to have a box associated with the company, she had already gotten a taste of the recurring revenue that a subscription box is known for.
 
“It was two months of ‘Wow, this money hit my bank on the first of the month.’ And I know that this can be something great. So, I had to pivot, and I had to do it quickly because I didn't want to lose that momentum.”
 
Claudia acted quickly. She already had an idea for a new box, one geared toward teachers, and since it was June she was on a timeline to build an audience for the box and release it at the start of the school year.
 
So, I started with brand new social media, Facebook, Instagram. I'm not very Instagram savvy, my primary social media platform is Facebook, and I'm very comfortable with it. I'm going to start from zero and I'm going to start posting. I listened to your podcast and your training about reels, and I started doing them, and I felt silly. I felt like, this isn't gonna work. But what they did, you know, one of my reels got over 10,000 views.”
 
She trusted in herself and her brand enough to know that the audience would come to her if she was active with it. She stepped out of her comfort zone and worked hard to build her audience in time for her launch and was able to end up with over 100 subscribers by the time school started. It’s all about getting in front of your audience and really showing them you and what you’re an expert in and building those enthusiastic fans that’s going to push you towards wild success.
 
You can find Claudia and her Tee(Cher) Box on Instagram at: https://www.instagram.com/teecherbox/
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.
 
Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 18 Aug 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From an Audience of Zero to 100 Subscribers in 60 Days</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>31</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cdec0ee6-b0bf-11ed-b273-1f992cc86144/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week I’m speaking with Claudia Ramos, founder of Shabbyboxes.com, about her unique story: how she went from having a box, to shutting it down, to launching a brand-new box and building to 100 subscribers in 60 days. How’s that for an...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>This week I’m speaking with Claudia Ramos, founder of Shabbyboxes.com, about her unique story: how she went from having a box, to shutting it down, to launching a brand-new box and building to 100 subscribers in 60 days. How’s that for an attention getting headline! We talked about what she did to achieve this and how engaging with your audience is so important to building your subscriber base.
 
From Zero to Subscription Hero
 
Claudia had initially started off with another box related to her work as an independent designer with a crafting company. By the time she was informed by corporate that she wasn’t allowed to have a box associated with the company, she had already gotten a taste of the recurring revenue that a subscription box is known for.
 
“It was two months of ‘Wow, this money hit my bank on the first of the month.’ And I know that this can be something great. So, I had to pivot, and I had to do it quickly because I didn't want to lose that momentum.”
 
Claudia acted quickly. She already had an idea for a new box, one geared toward teachers, and since it was June she was on a timeline to build an audience for the box and release it at the start of the school year.
 
So, I started with brand new social media, Facebook, Instagram. I'm not very Instagram savvy, my primary social media platform is Facebook, and I'm very comfortable with it. I'm going to start from zero and I'm going to start posting. I listened to your podcast and your training about reels, and I started doing them, and I felt silly. I felt like, this isn't gonna work. But what they did, you know, one of my reels got over 10,000 views.”
 
She trusted in herself and her brand enough to know that the audience would come to her if she was active with it. She stepped out of her comfort zone and worked hard to build her audience in time for her launch and was able to end up with over 100 subscribers by the time school started. It’s all about getting in front of your audience and really showing them you and what you’re an expert in and building those enthusiastic fans that’s going to push you towards wild success.
 
You can find Claudia and her Tee(Cher) Box on Instagram at: https://www.instagram.com/teecherbox/
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.
 
Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week I’m speaking with Claudia Ramos, founder of Shabbyboxes.com, about her unique story: how she went from having a box, to shutting it down, to launching a brand-new box and building to 100 subscribers in 60 days. How’s that for an attention getting headline! We talked about what she did to achieve this and how engaging with your audience is so important to building your subscriber base.</p><p> </p><p>From Zero to Subscription Hero</p><p> </p><p>Claudia had initially started off with another box related to her work as an independent designer with a crafting company. By the time she was informed by corporate that she wasn’t allowed to have a box associated with the company, she had already gotten a taste of the recurring revenue that a subscription box is known for.</p><p> </p><p>“It was two months of ‘Wow, this money hit my bank on the first of the month.’ And I know that this can be something great. So, I had to pivot, and I had to do it quickly because I didn't want to lose that momentum.”</p><p> </p><p>Claudia acted quickly. She already had an idea for a new box, one geared toward teachers, and since it was June she was on a timeline to build an audience for the box and release it at the start of the school year.</p><p> </p><p>So, I started with brand new social media, Facebook, Instagram. I'm not very Instagram savvy, my primary social media platform is Facebook, and I'm very comfortable with it. I'm going to start from zero and I'm going to start posting. I listened to your podcast and your training about reels, and I started doing them, and I felt silly. I felt like, this isn't gonna work. But what they did, you know, one of my reels got over 10,000 views.”</p><p> </p><p>She trusted in herself and her brand enough to know that the audience would come to her if she was active with it. She stepped out of her comfort zone and worked hard to build her audience in time for her launch and was able to end up with over 100 subscribers by the time school started. It’s all about getting in front of your audience and really showing them you and what you’re an expert in and building those enthusiastic fans that’s going to push you towards wild success.</p><p> </p><p>You can find Claudia and her Tee(Cher) Box on Instagram at: <a href="https://www.instagram.com/teecherbox/">https://www.instagram.com/teecherbox/</a></p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p> </p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1410</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[1a1ac430-a1fd-49fb-8980-1398314902fb]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1503124039.mp3?updated=1701786093" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>030: A Journey from Self Doubt to 1000 Subscribers</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/030-a-journey-from-self-doubt-to-1000-subscribers</link>
      <description>There is so much that can get in the way of our journey to success, but nothing stops us more than the doubt we put on ourselves. We all have pitfalls in our past and struggles in our present that threaten to make us think less of ourselves, especially when we’re trying to create something and share it with the world.
 
The truth is that all the parts of our past, the good and the bad, are just parts of the story that makes us unique and helps us to be successful, not only as entrepreneurs but also at living our lives to the fullest. That’s what Lo Hixson realized when she created her Passion &amp; Growth box and she’s my guest this week to tell her story from self-doubt to success!
 
Living Our Stories
 
Lo’s story begins right at her birth when she was born with a tumor on the right side of her face. She came from a place where from the very start, the world seemed like it was ready to box her in with doubts about herself and who she was. “So, from a very young age, I felt like that was my story. My story was written, I felt like before I could even talk like I was this baby who had this tumor who had surgery and had a deformity from a very young age.”
 
It took her a long time and many procedures to finally come to grip with this side of herself, and when she finally was ready to move on she threw herself into it. “That was kind of a line in the sand that I drew that I was like, enough is enough. I've personally been through a lot with this, I am ready to start accepting that, this is okay. It's a part of me, and I've been through a lot. And there's a new journey that has to start here.”
 
She became a nurse, to help others through the same thing she had struggled with but continued and came up with the idea for a subscription box based on empowerment and self-love to share what she had learned from her own story. “I said, I’m made for more. I don't know what that looks like yet, but I know that I'm put here to do more than what I've been doing. I have struggled with so much and all of us have our struggles and our trauma, and the things that are holding us back.”
 
Lo’s story is about overcoming the obstacles life can set in the way for us and rising above them to accomplish great things. Your story is what makes you unique and that’s why you’re the perfect person to bring something new into the world, to create your own business that shows off what beautiful thing that makes you one of a kind.
 
You can find Lo and her Passion &amp; Growth box at: https://passionandgrowth.com/ or on Instagram at https://www.instagram.com/passionandgrowth/
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.
 
Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 11 Aug 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>A Journey from Self Doubt to 1000 Subscribers</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ce00d128-b0bf-11ed-b273-877c1cceabb2/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>There is so much that can get in the way of our journey to success, but nothing stops us more than the doubt we put on ourselves. We all have pitfalls in our past and struggles in our present that threaten to make us think less of ourselves,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>There is so much that can get in the way of our journey to success, but nothing stops us more than the doubt we put on ourselves. We all have pitfalls in our past and struggles in our present that threaten to make us think less of ourselves, especially when we’re trying to create something and share it with the world.
 
The truth is that all the parts of our past, the good and the bad, are just parts of the story that makes us unique and helps us to be successful, not only as entrepreneurs but also at living our lives to the fullest. That’s what Lo Hixson realized when she created her Passion &amp; Growth box and she’s my guest this week to tell her story from self-doubt to success!
 
Living Our Stories
 
Lo’s story begins right at her birth when she was born with a tumor on the right side of her face. She came from a place where from the very start, the world seemed like it was ready to box her in with doubts about herself and who she was. “So, from a very young age, I felt like that was my story. My story was written, I felt like before I could even talk like I was this baby who had this tumor who had surgery and had a deformity from a very young age.”
 
It took her a long time and many procedures to finally come to grip with this side of herself, and when she finally was ready to move on she threw herself into it. “That was kind of a line in the sand that I drew that I was like, enough is enough. I've personally been through a lot with this, I am ready to start accepting that, this is okay. It's a part of me, and I've been through a lot. And there's a new journey that has to start here.”
 
She became a nurse, to help others through the same thing she had struggled with but continued and came up with the idea for a subscription box based on empowerment and self-love to share what she had learned from her own story. “I said, I’m made for more. I don't know what that looks like yet, but I know that I'm put here to do more than what I've been doing. I have struggled with so much and all of us have our struggles and our trauma, and the things that are holding us back.”
 
Lo’s story is about overcoming the obstacles life can set in the way for us and rising above them to accomplish great things. Your story is what makes you unique and that’s why you’re the perfect person to bring something new into the world, to create your own business that shows off what beautiful thing that makes you one of a kind.
 
You can find Lo and her Passion &amp; Growth box at: https://passionandgrowth.com/ or on Instagram at https://www.instagram.com/passionandgrowth/
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.
 
Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>There is so much that can get in the way of our journey to success, but nothing stops us more than the doubt we put on ourselves. We all have pitfalls in our past and struggles in our present that threaten to make us think less of ourselves, especially when we’re trying to create something and share it with the world.</p><p> </p><p>The truth is that all the parts of our past, the good and the bad, are just parts of the story that makes us unique and helps us to be successful, not only as entrepreneurs but also at living our lives to the fullest. That’s what Lo Hixson realized when she created her Passion &amp; Growth box and she’s my guest this week to tell her story from self-doubt to success!</p><p> </p><p>Living Our Stories</p><p> </p><p>Lo’s story begins right at her birth when she was born with a tumor on the right side of her face. She came from a place where from the very start, the world seemed like it was ready to box her in with doubts about herself and who she was. “So, from a very young age, I felt like that was my story. My story was written, I felt like before I could even talk like I was this baby who had this tumor who had surgery and had a deformity from a very young age.”</p><p> </p><p>It took her a long time and many procedures to finally come to grip with this side of herself, and when she finally was ready to move on she threw herself into it. “That was kind of a line in the sand that I drew that I was like, enough is enough. I've personally been through a lot with this, I am ready to start accepting that, this is okay. It's a part of me, and I've been through a lot. And there's a new journey that has to start here.”</p><p> </p><p>She became a nurse, to help others through the same thing she had struggled with but continued and came up with the idea for a subscription box based on empowerment and self-love to share what she had learned from her own story. “I said, I’m made for more. I don't know what that looks like yet, but I know that I'm put here to do more than what I've been doing. I have struggled with so much and all of us have our struggles and our trauma, and the things that are holding us back.”</p><p> </p><p>Lo’s story is about overcoming the obstacles life can set in the way for us and rising above them to accomplish great things. Your story is what makes you unique and that’s why you’re the perfect person to bring something new into the world, to create your own business that shows off what beautiful thing that makes you one of a kind.</p><p> </p><p>You can find Lo and her Passion &amp; Growth box at: <a href="https://passionandgrowth.com/">https://passionandgrowth.com/</a> or on Instagram at <a href="https://www.instagram.com/passionandgrowth/">https://www.instagram.com/passionandgrowth/</a></p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p> </p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>3350</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[b13b31a0-8619-47bd-9d87-036bcdae3c55]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8356031659.mp3?updated=1701786106" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>029: Maximize the Value of Your Small Audience</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/029-maximize-the-value-of-your-small-audience</link>
      <description>When you’re just starting out your business, one of the things you dream about is getting followers and growing your audience. We get so stuck on the idea that only way to be successful is to have a huge following, that we’re not maximizing the following that we already have. Success doesn’t come from having a bunch of followers that just look at your posts and don’t buy anything, it comes from having an engaged audience and from having the right audience and not just any audience.
 
When We are For Anyone, We’re for No One
 
I want to do all the things all the time. It comes from being a creative person, and I’m sure if you’re reading this you sometimes feel the same way! But this is a trap we can fall into that spreads us too thin to really make the impact that we want. We need to concentrate on what makes us unique and experts at what we do. Think about what drove you to start your subscription box in the first place, what it’s all about. That’s what people are showing up for, and the more engaged you can make the audience that you have, the more that audience will be worth to your business.
 
Develop your Audience into the Right Audience
 



Be Known for Something: What are you the expert at? What makes you happy?



Show Up: Get in front of your audience with training and Live sessions.



Serve Before You Sell: What value are you providing to your audience? Know what that is first.



You Don’t Have to be Extreme; you Just Need to be Consistent: Don’t try to do all the things! Pick a few that you are good at and can be consistent with.



Love on Your People! Help your audience feel seen and heard, and they’ll keep coming back.



 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 04 Aug 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Maximize the Value of Your Small Audience</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>29</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ce17246e-b0bf-11ed-b273-e3f8df29d902/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>When you’re just starting out your business, one of the things you dream about is getting followers and growing your audience. We get so stuck on the idea that only way to be successful is to have a huge following, that we’re not maximizing the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>When you’re just starting out your business, one of the things you dream about is getting followers and growing your audience. We get so stuck on the idea that only way to be successful is to have a huge following, that we’re not maximizing the following that we already have. Success doesn’t come from having a bunch of followers that just look at your posts and don’t buy anything, it comes from having an engaged audience and from having the right audience and not just any audience.
 
When We are For Anyone, We’re for No One
 
I want to do all the things all the time. It comes from being a creative person, and I’m sure if you’re reading this you sometimes feel the same way! But this is a trap we can fall into that spreads us too thin to really make the impact that we want. We need to concentrate on what makes us unique and experts at what we do. Think about what drove you to start your subscription box in the first place, what it’s all about. That’s what people are showing up for, and the more engaged you can make the audience that you have, the more that audience will be worth to your business.
 
Develop your Audience into the Right Audience
 



Be Known for Something: What are you the expert at? What makes you happy?



Show Up: Get in front of your audience with training and Live sessions.



Serve Before You Sell: What value are you providing to your audience? Know what that is first.



You Don’t Have to be Extreme; you Just Need to be Consistent: Don’t try to do all the things! Pick a few that you are good at and can be consistent with.



Love on Your People! Help your audience feel seen and heard, and they’ll keep coming back.



 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>When you’re just starting out your business, one of the things you dream about is getting followers and growing your audience. We get so stuck on the idea that only way to be successful is to have a huge following, that we’re not maximizing the following that we already have. Success doesn’t come from having a bunch of followers that just look at your posts and don’t buy anything, it comes from having an engaged audience and from having the right audience and not just any audience.</p><p> </p><p>When We are For Anyone, We’re for No One</p><p> </p><p>I want to do all the things all the time. It comes from being a creative person, and I’m sure if you’re reading this you sometimes feel the same way! But this is a trap we can fall into that spreads us too thin to really make the impact that we want. We need to concentrate on what makes us unique and experts at what we do. Think about what drove you to start your subscription box in the first place, what it’s all about. That’s what people are showing up for, and the more engaged you can make the audience that you have, the more that audience will be worth to your business.</p><p> </p><p>Develop your Audience into the Right Audience</p><p> </p><ol>
<li><br></li>
<li>Be Known for Something: What are you the expert at? What makes you happy?</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Show Up: Get in front of your audience with training and Live sessions.</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Serve Before You Sell: What value are you providing to your audience? Know what that is first.</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>You Don’t Have to be Extreme; you Just Need to be Consistent: Don’t try to do all the things! Pick a few that you are good at and can be consistent with.</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Love on Your People! Help your audience feel seen and heard, and they’ll keep coming back.</li>
<li><br></li>
</ol><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1568</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a2cd5812-af44-4fe6-9b48-5a1f1dea6b3b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8078810258.mp3?updated=1701786114" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>028: How My Subscription Boxes Got Ran Over – And I’m Not Mad About It!</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/028-how-my-subscription-boxes-got-ran-over-and-im-not-mad-about-it</link>
      <description>No matter how hard we try, no matter how much we think about and plan for every possibility, something is going to go wrong. Don’t worry! It happens to all of us at one point or another. Being a business owner means that you need to be ready for when the worst happens, because how you deal with that situation can mean the difference between really stretching those problem-solving skills and becoming completely derailed.
 
Don’t Let it Break You, Let it Make You
 
The truth is that things are going to happen that are out of your control. My story this week about my boxes being scattered all across the road is definitely one of those situations. Murphy’s law has a way of striking when you’re least expecting, so we as business owners need to be ready to pick up the pieces and move forward. The important thing to remember is that this is your business. You built it from the ground up, and nothing is going to keep you from being successful. But you’re not in this alone!
 
One thing I love about the group we have, all of us subscription box owners, is to be able to fall back on each other to help us through those times when the problems seem overwhelming. If you need help, don’t be afraid to ask for help. Take that time to breathe in and calm your nerves, because we all need that sometimes, but use it to right yourself and clear your head for the task in front of you. Don’t let the unexpected break you, let it make you and show you what you really are capable of.
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box group at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.
 
Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 28 Jul 2021 06:30:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How My Subscription Boxes Got Ran Over – And I’m Not Mad About It!</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>28</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ce2f1b64-b0bf-11ed-b273-8f24901ed5d6/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>No matter how hard we try, no matter how much we think about and plan for every possibility, something is going to go wrong. Don’t worry! It happens to all of us at one point or another. Being a business owner means that you need to be ready for...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>No matter how hard we try, no matter how much we think about and plan for every possibility, something is going to go wrong. Don’t worry! It happens to all of us at one point or another. Being a business owner means that you need to be ready for when the worst happens, because how you deal with that situation can mean the difference between really stretching those problem-solving skills and becoming completely derailed.
 
Don’t Let it Break You, Let it Make You
 
The truth is that things are going to happen that are out of your control. My story this week about my boxes being scattered all across the road is definitely one of those situations. Murphy’s law has a way of striking when you’re least expecting, so we as business owners need to be ready to pick up the pieces and move forward. The important thing to remember is that this is your business. You built it from the ground up, and nothing is going to keep you from being successful. But you’re not in this alone!
 
One thing I love about the group we have, all of us subscription box owners, is to be able to fall back on each other to help us through those times when the problems seem overwhelming. If you need help, don’t be afraid to ask for help. Take that time to breathe in and calm your nerves, because we all need that sometimes, but use it to right yourself and clear your head for the task in front of you. Don’t let the unexpected break you, let it make you and show you what you really are capable of.
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box group at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.
 
Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>No matter how hard we try, no matter how much we think about and plan for every possibility, something is going to go wrong. Don’t worry! It happens to all of us at one point or another. Being a business owner means that you need to be ready for when the worst happens, because how you deal with that situation can mean the difference between really stretching those problem-solving skills and becoming completely derailed.</p><p> </p><p>Don’t Let it Break You, Let it Make You</p><p> </p><p>The truth is that things are going to happen that are out of your control. My story this week about my boxes being scattered all across the road is definitely one of those situations. Murphy’s law has a way of striking when you’re least expecting, so we as business owners need to be ready to pick up the pieces and move forward. The important thing to remember is that this is your business. You built it from the ground up, and nothing is going to keep you from being successful. But you’re not in this alone!</p><p> </p><p>One thing I love about the group we have, all of us subscription box owners, is to be able to fall back on each other to help us through those times when the problems seem overwhelming. If you need help, don’t be afraid to ask for help. Take that time to breathe in and calm your nerves, because we all need that sometimes, but use it to right yourself and clear your head for the task in front of you. Don’t let the unexpected break you, let it make you and show you what you really are capable of.</p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box group at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p> </p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>965</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[04deca36-c60d-425b-b721-33969ba0c486]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7401518313.mp3?updated=1701786124" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>027: Inventor, Patent Holder, and Subscription Box Owner</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/027-inventor-patent-holder-and-subscription-box-owner</link>
      <description>Subscription Box owners come in all shapes and sizes, with all kinds of different products imaginable. The Creative Soul Box is no exception, with its owner Julianna “Jewel” Avelar not only curating a box with different jewel projects every month, but also creating and patenting the loom used to create the jewelry. She joined me this week to talk a little about her journey from working alongside creative people to developing her own creative business.
 
“The Mother of Invention”
 
Jewel herself learned how to use bead looms and worked in the crafting industry for years before coming up with the idea for the Jewel Loom. She went through the process of design, cataloging, and worked through the paperwork to properly copyright it, and was able to get it into crafting stores across the nation.
 
“I had all my ducks in a row, though. I had the CAD drawing that went to the patent attorney, and I knew I had to have a good patent attorney. So, I hired an attorney, and we went through all of his investigating, and he then said this is how I think we should approach this.”
 
Jewel started her journey thinking of a new way to do things that was more efficient. We talk frequently about being the expert in your field, someone who knows your product or craft inside and out. Coming up with a new way to do things is a surefire way of getting that credibility!
 
Expanding Her Line and Starting a Subscription Box
 
Jewel would go on to come up with further loom ideas, but also found that she could further engage with her audience by starting a subscription box. With the Creative Soul Box, she connects directly with her customer base and gives them new ideas on how to use her products. She’s also finding that the audience feedback has been so positive, and it’s that added boost that we as creative entrepreneurs can really affect the world around us and keep us positive through those highs and lows that life might throw at us.
 
“It's a blessing, and I'm so grateful. Every morning I wake up and see what people are creating on the Jewel Loom and I just flip out. It's super amazing to know that people take your product and express themselves with it, and I think that's just a huge gift. I don't take it for granted at all.”
 
You can find Julianna and her Creative Soul Box at: https://www.juliannaavelar.com/jewelloom
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.
 
Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 21 Jul 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Inventor, Patent Holder, and Subscription Box Owner</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>27</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ce4642d0-b0bf-11ed-b273-9fec481978b7/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Subscription Box owners come in all shapes and sizes, with all kinds of different products imaginable. The Creative Soul Box is no exception, with its owner Julianna “Jewel” Avelar not only curating a box with different jewel projects every month,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Subscription Box owners come in all shapes and sizes, with all kinds of different products imaginable. The Creative Soul Box is no exception, with its owner Julianna “Jewel” Avelar not only curating a box with different jewel projects every month, but also creating and patenting the loom used to create the jewelry. She joined me this week to talk a little about her journey from working alongside creative people to developing her own creative business.
 
“The Mother of Invention”
 
Jewel herself learned how to use bead looms and worked in the crafting industry for years before coming up with the idea for the Jewel Loom. She went through the process of design, cataloging, and worked through the paperwork to properly copyright it, and was able to get it into crafting stores across the nation.
 
“I had all my ducks in a row, though. I had the CAD drawing that went to the patent attorney, and I knew I had to have a good patent attorney. So, I hired an attorney, and we went through all of his investigating, and he then said this is how I think we should approach this.”
 
Jewel started her journey thinking of a new way to do things that was more efficient. We talk frequently about being the expert in your field, someone who knows your product or craft inside and out. Coming up with a new way to do things is a surefire way of getting that credibility!
 
Expanding Her Line and Starting a Subscription Box
 
Jewel would go on to come up with further loom ideas, but also found that she could further engage with her audience by starting a subscription box. With the Creative Soul Box, she connects directly with her customer base and gives them new ideas on how to use her products. She’s also finding that the audience feedback has been so positive, and it’s that added boost that we as creative entrepreneurs can really affect the world around us and keep us positive through those highs and lows that life might throw at us.
 
“It's a blessing, and I'm so grateful. Every morning I wake up and see what people are creating on the Jewel Loom and I just flip out. It's super amazing to know that people take your product and express themselves with it, and I think that's just a huge gift. I don't take it for granted at all.”
 
You can find Julianna and her Creative Soul Box at: https://www.juliannaavelar.com/jewelloom
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.
 
Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Subscription Box owners come in all shapes and sizes, with all kinds of different products imaginable. The Creative Soul Box is no exception, with its owner Julianna “Jewel” Avelar not only curating a box with different jewel projects every month, but also creating and patenting the loom used to create the jewelry. She joined me this week to talk a little about her journey from working alongside creative people to developing her own creative business.</p><p> </p><p>“The Mother of Invention”</p><p> </p><p>Jewel herself learned how to use bead looms and worked in the crafting industry for years before coming up with the idea for the Jewel Loom. She went through the process of design, cataloging, and worked through the paperwork to properly copyright it, and was able to get it into crafting stores across the nation.</p><p> </p><p>“I had all my ducks in a row, though. I had the CAD drawing that went to the patent attorney, and I knew I had to have a good patent attorney. So, I hired an attorney, and we went through all of his investigating, and he then said this is how I think we should approach this.”</p><p> </p><p>Jewel started her journey thinking of a new way to do things that was more efficient. We talk frequently about being the expert in your field, someone who knows your product or craft inside and out. Coming up with a new way to do things is a surefire way of getting that credibility!</p><p> </p><p>Expanding Her Line and Starting a Subscription Box</p><p> </p><p>Jewel would go on to come up with further loom ideas, but also found that she could further engage with her audience by starting a subscription box. With the Creative Soul Box, she connects directly with her customer base and gives them new ideas on how to use her products. She’s also finding that the audience feedback has been so positive, and it’s that added boost that we as creative entrepreneurs can really affect the world around us and keep us positive through those highs and lows that life might throw at us.</p><p> </p><p>“It's a blessing, and I'm so grateful. Every morning I wake up and see what people are creating on the Jewel Loom and I just flip out. It's super amazing to know that people take your product and express themselves with it, and I think that's just a huge gift. I don't take it for granted at all.”</p><p> </p><p>You can find Julianna and her Creative Soul Box at: <a href="https://www.juliannaavelar.com/jewelloom">https://www.juliannaavelar.com/jewelloom</a></p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p> </p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1894</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d22b30d2-a70b-4806-836e-b8d5d8ba8c8a]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6748421600.mp3?updated=1701786205" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>026: 5 Ways to Scale Your Subscription Box Business</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/026-5-ways-to-scale-your-subscription-box-business</link>
      <description>This episode: you’ve done it! You’ve come a long way since your first launch, and you’ve built the foundation of your business but now it feels like you’ve hit a plateau in growth. Well, let me first say Congratulations! Your business is a success, but now it’s time to smooth out the ragged edges of your business and scale up to the next level. Here are 5 things I’ve learned on how to scale your business and smooth things out.
 
Develop a Multi-Channel Marketing Plan
 
First things first: you have to keep growing your customer base, and the best way to do that is build a multi-channel marketing plan. You may have found success on one social media platform, but now it’s time to expand to all the others. Having a plan to expand your online presence platforms will help you reach new people who may not have heard of you if you were only advertising on Facebook or Instagram. You need to keep the top of your customer funnel full so you can keep working toward them becoming a subscriber.
 
Optimize your Inventory
 
Streamlining your inventory is so important. When you’re first starting out, you’re desperate to get your hands on enough inventory to send out. Now that you have established yourself, you need to work on a plan to get the most out of your inventory so it’s working for you and not against you. Leverage your buying power and work out the best deals with your vendors, things like net terms, or pay upon shipping. Take the time to work out the best plan for your particular situation.
 
Streamline Fulfillment
 
Depending on the complexity of your box, you may want to consider using a fulfillment center to handle your packing and shipping needs. I considered using fulfillment with my box, but ultimately decided that there was too much customization involved in my Monogram box and that I needed more control in my own space. So building that space so it’s efficient for what I need is so important to getting those boxes out to my subscribers.
 
Improve Retention Strategies
 
We are so concerned with getting new subscribers that sometimes we forget to keep the ones we already have. You’ve already invested so much to get them to be a subscriber, it’s only right to take care of that investment! Having someone on your team dedicated to retention can go a long way to improving your churn. Information is power in this regard, so knowing your retention rate is crucial to keeping it as high as possible. Click here to use my retention rate calculator.
 
Create Raving Fans!
 
One of the best ways to grow is by word of mouth. Having fans that are totally invested in you and your business will go out and advocate for you to their friends and family, and so on and so on. They are your cheerleaders, and they love being part of your community. Make sure you’re still engaging with them by doing your live sessions, growing those affiliates, and getting in front of your audience and connecting with them.
 
Growth is not something to be afraid of as long as we’re prepared for the next step! Making your business run efficiently will help you to keep loving what you’re doing and become an even greater success with your own business.
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.
 
Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 14 Jul 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>5 Ways to Scale Your Subscription Box Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ce5c85c2-b0bf-11ed-b273-d31c89e78bcc/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>This episode: you’ve done it! You’ve come a long way since your first launch, and you’ve built the foundation of your business but now it feels like you’ve hit a plateau in growth. Well, let me first say Congratulations! Your business is a...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>This episode: you’ve done it! You’ve come a long way since your first launch, and you’ve built the foundation of your business but now it feels like you’ve hit a plateau in growth. Well, let me first say Congratulations! Your business is a success, but now it’s time to smooth out the ragged edges of your business and scale up to the next level. Here are 5 things I’ve learned on how to scale your business and smooth things out.
 
Develop a Multi-Channel Marketing Plan
 
First things first: you have to keep growing your customer base, and the best way to do that is build a multi-channel marketing plan. You may have found success on one social media platform, but now it’s time to expand to all the others. Having a plan to expand your online presence platforms will help you reach new people who may not have heard of you if you were only advertising on Facebook or Instagram. You need to keep the top of your customer funnel full so you can keep working toward them becoming a subscriber.
 
Optimize your Inventory
 
Streamlining your inventory is so important. When you’re first starting out, you’re desperate to get your hands on enough inventory to send out. Now that you have established yourself, you need to work on a plan to get the most out of your inventory so it’s working for you and not against you. Leverage your buying power and work out the best deals with your vendors, things like net terms, or pay upon shipping. Take the time to work out the best plan for your particular situation.
 
Streamline Fulfillment
 
Depending on the complexity of your box, you may want to consider using a fulfillment center to handle your packing and shipping needs. I considered using fulfillment with my box, but ultimately decided that there was too much customization involved in my Monogram box and that I needed more control in my own space. So building that space so it’s efficient for what I need is so important to getting those boxes out to my subscribers.
 
Improve Retention Strategies
 
We are so concerned with getting new subscribers that sometimes we forget to keep the ones we already have. You’ve already invested so much to get them to be a subscriber, it’s only right to take care of that investment! Having someone on your team dedicated to retention can go a long way to improving your churn. Information is power in this regard, so knowing your retention rate is crucial to keeping it as high as possible. Click here to use my retention rate calculator.
 
Create Raving Fans!
 
One of the best ways to grow is by word of mouth. Having fans that are totally invested in you and your business will go out and advocate for you to their friends and family, and so on and so on. They are your cheerleaders, and they love being part of your community. Make sure you’re still engaging with them by doing your live sessions, growing those affiliates, and getting in front of your audience and connecting with them.
 
Growth is not something to be afraid of as long as we’re prepared for the next step! Making your business run efficiently will help you to keep loving what you’re doing and become an even greater success with your own business.
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.
 
Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This episode: you’ve done it! You’ve come a long way since your first launch, and you’ve built the foundation of your business but now it feels like you’ve hit a plateau in growth. Well, let me first say Congratulations! Your business is a success, but now it’s time to smooth out the ragged edges of your business and scale up to the next level. Here are 5 things I’ve learned on how to scale your business and smooth things out.</p><p> </p><ol><li>Develop a Multi-Channel Marketing Plan</li></ol><p> </p><p>First things first: you have to keep growing your customer base, and the best way to do that is build a multi-channel marketing plan. You may have found success on one social media platform, but now it’s time to expand to all the others. Having a plan to expand your online presence platforms will help you reach new people who may not have heard of you if you were only advertising on Facebook or Instagram. You need to keep the top of your customer funnel full so you can keep working toward them becoming a subscriber.</p><p> </p><ol><li>Optimize your Inventory</li></ol><p> </p><p>Streamlining your inventory is so important. When you’re first starting out, you’re desperate to get your hands on enough inventory to send out. Now that you have established yourself, you need to work on a plan to get the most out of your inventory so it’s working for you and not against you. Leverage your buying power and work out the best deals with your vendors, things like net terms, or pay upon shipping. Take the time to work out the best plan for your particular situation.</p><p> </p><ol><li>Streamline Fulfillment</li></ol><p> </p><p>Depending on the complexity of your box, you may want to consider using a fulfillment center to handle your packing and shipping needs. I considered using fulfillment with my box, but ultimately decided that there was too much customization involved in my Monogram box and that I needed more control in my own space. So building that space so it’s efficient for what I need is so important to getting those boxes out to my subscribers.</p><p> </p><ol><li>Improve Retention Strategies</li></ol><p> </p><p>We are so concerned with getting new subscribers that sometimes we forget to keep the ones we already have. You’ve already invested so much to get them to be a subscriber, it’s only right to take care of that investment! Having someone on your team dedicated to retention can go a long way to improving your churn. Information is power in this regard, so knowing your retention rate is crucial to keeping it as high as possible. <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/6-tips-to-navigate-cancellations-in-a-subscription-box-business%20">Click here to use my retention rate calculator.</a></p><p> </p><ol><li>Create Raving Fans!</li></ol><p> </p><p>One of the best ways to grow is by word of mouth. Having fans that are totally invested in you and your business will go out and advocate for you to their friends and family, and so on and so on. They are your cheerleaders, and they love being part of your community. Make sure you’re still engaging with them by doing your live sessions, growing those affiliates, and getting in front of your audience and connecting with them.</p><p> </p><p>Growth is not something to be afraid of as long as we’re prepared for the next step! Making your business run efficiently will help you to keep loving what you’re doing and become an even greater success with your own business.</p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review and drop me a line letting me know what your favorite episode is! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p> </p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1176</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e279db71-5be8-4307-bfa5-9305631728d2]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8313498305.mp3?updated=1701786217" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>025: How Sarah Revived a Dwindling Subscription</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/025-how-sarah-revived-a-dwindling-subscription</link>
      <description>One of the hardest lessons that we as business owners have had to learn from 2020, it’s that business can change drastically in no time at all. A product that may have seen steady sales before can suddenly turn into dwindling subscriptions. That’s the situation that Sarah, founder of the Redheaded Camel, found herself in with one of her subscriptions, and it left her thinking that maybe it was the end of that part of her business. But that doesn’t need to be the end of the story! We’re going to talk about some ways to bring back those former customers and have a successful (re)launch of your shrinking line.
 
(Re)Generate Interest
 
The sad fact is that cancellations can happen for a number of reasons, ranging from the customer no longer finds value in your product to the possibility that they see their subscription as something they can cut when money is tight. In that case, there is still opportunity to win back their business, but it’s going to take some work on your end to get them excited for your product again. In that case, it’s time to go all in again and put your energy into generating interest to get those big results.
 
Cancellations are warm leads. They’ve already seen the value of your product, so to get them back you need to remind them of why they subscribed in the first place. A great way to start is with a concentrated email campaign to your list. That’s what Sarah did when she saw her sales decline, and pushed those customers to her waitlist:
 
“If people cancel their membership, they might still be on our email list so they might still see something. We had been growing the email list for about two years and then about four weeks before we opened the clubs to the public, we decided to really start to push that waitlist again…I can tell you that our conversion rate for the waitlist was significantly higher than usual. I think part of that was because of the excitement that we were generating.”
 
Always remember to leave off with a call to action. My favorite is the early bird special to keep your product at top of mind and create that urgency to get on the waitlist early to get a good deal. Be creative!
 
Affiliate (where you can!)
 
Work your network if you can! If you know of another influencer who has an audience that likes similar products to yours, you can reach out and see if you can send over some product and possible affiliate with them. Sarah was able to pick up a significant amount of new subscribers this way:
 
“I contacted a couple of people who I knew their followers and their people on their social media, loved graphic tees, they were already in that market. So, I contacted them and said, can I send you a free shirt? And maybe you share it, I'll give you a code where you get a certain percentage of every single sale for the life of that subscription. I figured I'll ask and the worst they could do is say no. And they said yes!”
 
Don’t be afraid to try something new, but don’t try to do all the things at once. Email, early bird specials, affiliates, all of these are things you can keep trying to generate interest and keep those sales going!
 
You can find Sarah and her T-shirt club and Door hangers at https://www.theredheadedcamel.com/ and on social media at:
Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/TheRedheadedCamel
Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/theredheadedcamel/
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 07 Jul 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How Sarah Revived a Dwindling Subscription</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>25</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ce7326d8-b0bf-11ed-b273-1f6f163550f9/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>One of the hardest lessons that we as business owners have had to learn from 2020, it’s that business can change drastically in no time at all. A product that may have seen steady sales before can suddenly turn into dwindling subscriptions. That’s...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>One of the hardest lessons that we as business owners have had to learn from 2020, it’s that business can change drastically in no time at all. A product that may have seen steady sales before can suddenly turn into dwindling subscriptions. That’s the situation that Sarah, founder of the Redheaded Camel, found herself in with one of her subscriptions, and it left her thinking that maybe it was the end of that part of her business. But that doesn’t need to be the end of the story! We’re going to talk about some ways to bring back those former customers and have a successful (re)launch of your shrinking line.
 
(Re)Generate Interest
 
The sad fact is that cancellations can happen for a number of reasons, ranging from the customer no longer finds value in your product to the possibility that they see their subscription as something they can cut when money is tight. In that case, there is still opportunity to win back their business, but it’s going to take some work on your end to get them excited for your product again. In that case, it’s time to go all in again and put your energy into generating interest to get those big results.
 
Cancellations are warm leads. They’ve already seen the value of your product, so to get them back you need to remind them of why they subscribed in the first place. A great way to start is with a concentrated email campaign to your list. That’s what Sarah did when she saw her sales decline, and pushed those customers to her waitlist:
 
“If people cancel their membership, they might still be on our email list so they might still see something. We had been growing the email list for about two years and then about four weeks before we opened the clubs to the public, we decided to really start to push that waitlist again…I can tell you that our conversion rate for the waitlist was significantly higher than usual. I think part of that was because of the excitement that we were generating.”
 
Always remember to leave off with a call to action. My favorite is the early bird special to keep your product at top of mind and create that urgency to get on the waitlist early to get a good deal. Be creative!
 
Affiliate (where you can!)
 
Work your network if you can! If you know of another influencer who has an audience that likes similar products to yours, you can reach out and see if you can send over some product and possible affiliate with them. Sarah was able to pick up a significant amount of new subscribers this way:
 
“I contacted a couple of people who I knew their followers and their people on their social media, loved graphic tees, they were already in that market. So, I contacted them and said, can I send you a free shirt? And maybe you share it, I'll give you a code where you get a certain percentage of every single sale for the life of that subscription. I figured I'll ask and the worst they could do is say no. And they said yes!”
 
Don’t be afraid to try something new, but don’t try to do all the things at once. Email, early bird specials, affiliates, all of these are things you can keep trying to generate interest and keep those sales going!
 
You can find Sarah and her T-shirt club and Door hangers at https://www.theredheadedcamel.com/ and on social media at:
Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/TheRedheadedCamel
Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/theredheadedcamel/
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>One of the hardest lessons that we as business owners have had to learn from 2020, it’s that business can change drastically in no time at all. A product that may have seen steady sales before can suddenly turn into dwindling subscriptions. That’s the situation that Sarah, founder of the Redheaded Camel, found herself in with one of her subscriptions, and it left her thinking that maybe it was the end of that part of her business. But that doesn’t need to be the end of the story! We’re going to talk about some ways to bring back those former customers and have a successful (re)launch of your shrinking line.</p><p> </p><p>(Re)Generate Interest</p><p> </p><p>The sad fact is that cancellations can happen for a number of reasons, ranging from the customer no longer finds value in your product to the possibility that they see their subscription as something they can cut when money is tight. In that case, there is still opportunity to win back their business, but it’s going to take some work on your end to get them excited for your product again. In that case, it’s time to go all in again and put your energy into generating interest to get those big results.</p><p> </p><p>Cancellations are warm leads. They’ve already seen the value of your product, so to get them back you need to remind them of why they subscribed in the first place. A great way to start is with a concentrated email campaign to your list. That’s what Sarah did when she saw her sales decline, and pushed those customers to her waitlist:</p><p> </p><p>“If people cancel their membership, they might still be on our email list so they might still see something. We had been growing the email list for about two years and then about four weeks before we opened the clubs to the public, we decided to really start to push that waitlist again…I can tell you that our conversion rate for the waitlist was significantly higher than usual. I think part of that was because of the excitement that we were generating.”</p><p> </p><p>Always remember to leave off with a call to action. My favorite is the early bird special to keep your product at top of mind and create that urgency to get on the waitlist early to get a good deal. Be creative!</p><p> </p><p>Affiliate (where you can!)</p><p> </p><p>Work your network if you can! If you know of another influencer who has an audience that likes similar products to yours, you can reach out and see if you can send over some product and possible affiliate with them. Sarah was able to pick up a significant amount of new subscribers this way:</p><p> </p><p>“I contacted a couple of people who I knew their followers and their people on their social media, loved graphic tees, they were already in that market. So, I contacted them and said, can I send you a free shirt? And maybe you share it, I'll give you a code where you get a certain percentage of every single sale for the life of that subscription. I figured I'll ask and the worst they could do is say no. And they said yes!”</p><p> </p><p>Don’t be afraid to try something new, but don’t try to do all the things at once. Email, early bird specials, affiliates, all of these are things you can keep trying to generate interest and keep those sales going!</p><p> </p><p>You can find Sarah and her T-shirt club and Door hangers at <a href="https://www.theredheadedcamel.com/">https://www.theredheadedcamel.com/</a> and on social media at:</p><p>Facebook: <a href="https://www.facebook.com/TheRedheadedCamel">https://www.facebook.com/TheRedheadedCamel</a></p><p>Instagram: <a href="https://www.instagram.com/theredheadedcamel/">https://www.instagram.com/theredheadedcamel/</a></p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1702</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[e3480a99-5a06-4de4-aa00-7b4aa6d95908]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1331293987.mp3?updated=1701786225" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>024: What Can a Virtual Assistant do for my Subscription Box Business?</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/024-what-can-a-virtual-assistant-do-for-my-subscription-box-business</link>
      <description>We’re subscription box entrepreneurs, which means we’re motivated by success and ready to take on new challenges as they arise. But we don’t need to take on these challenges alone! Behind the scenes we can have a support system to help us stay on track and even expand without getting overwhelmed. This week we’re talking about how Virtual Assistants can help take on some of those tasks and next level your business.
 
Virtual Assistants
 
Virtual Assistants are independent contractors who work flex schedules and have a negotiated set of hours they would commit to working on tasks that you would need from them. Being independent contractors means that while you are hiring them to help you with your business, you’re only taking them on for a set number of hours or specific tasks rather than hiring a full-time employee which can be more flexible to your budget and specialized for what your business needs are.
 
3 Task Buckets: Admin, Creative, and Tech
 
VA’s are best used when you have certain tasks in mind for them, and some VAs specialize in certain tasks over others. I like to break what a VA can do for you into three task buckets: admin, creative, and tech. With Admin, you can find VAs to help you with customer service work such as answering service emails, especially cancellations like we spoke about in a previous podcast. They can also help with billing issues and bookkeeping, or really any of the nuts and bolts of running a successful business.
 
On the Creative side, this can entail the designing of those customer facing marketing materials. Graphic design VAs can help build graphics for social media, custom emails, newsletters, worksheets, or e-books and make them look good to reflect how you feel about your business to your customers. They can help you brainstorm to figure out those ideas that you might have a blind spot to and having a professional for the creative side of business can go a long way.
 
Tech focus tasks are a huge help getting you up to date on the latest and greatest tools available to entrepreneurs. Maintaining the back end of your website, integrating waitlists to email lists, optimizing website-plugins and making sure they’re working properly... these can be hair pulling to learn if you’re not tech savvy, so why not get help with it?
 
Where to find a VA
 
Finding the right VA for your needs takes a little bit of footwork but pays off huge. Finding Facebook groups for what tasks you might need are a good place to start as VAs are in those groups soliciting for work. As with hiring anyone, make sure you interview with the person to see if your values match up and be ready to take that leap if things work out. You can also try to find a VA through Emily Reagan’s portal on her website, which we spoke about on the episode. Good Luck!
 
Hiring a VA through Emily Reagan: https://emilyreaganpr.com/virtual-assistant/
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 30 Jun 2021 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>What Can a Virtual Assistant do for my Subscription Box Business?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>24</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ce8c5c84-b0bf-11ed-b273-476ce52991a2/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We’re subscription box entrepreneurs, which means we’re motivated by success and ready to take on new challenges as they arise. But we don’t need to take on these challenges alone! Behind the scenes we can have a support system to help us stay...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We’re subscription box entrepreneurs, which means we’re motivated by success and ready to take on new challenges as they arise. But we don’t need to take on these challenges alone! Behind the scenes we can have a support system to help us stay on track and even expand without getting overwhelmed. This week we’re talking about how Virtual Assistants can help take on some of those tasks and next level your business.
 
Virtual Assistants
 
Virtual Assistants are independent contractors who work flex schedules and have a negotiated set of hours they would commit to working on tasks that you would need from them. Being independent contractors means that while you are hiring them to help you with your business, you’re only taking them on for a set number of hours or specific tasks rather than hiring a full-time employee which can be more flexible to your budget and specialized for what your business needs are.
 
3 Task Buckets: Admin, Creative, and Tech
 
VA’s are best used when you have certain tasks in mind for them, and some VAs specialize in certain tasks over others. I like to break what a VA can do for you into three task buckets: admin, creative, and tech. With Admin, you can find VAs to help you with customer service work such as answering service emails, especially cancellations like we spoke about in a previous podcast. They can also help with billing issues and bookkeeping, or really any of the nuts and bolts of running a successful business.
 
On the Creative side, this can entail the designing of those customer facing marketing materials. Graphic design VAs can help build graphics for social media, custom emails, newsletters, worksheets, or e-books and make them look good to reflect how you feel about your business to your customers. They can help you brainstorm to figure out those ideas that you might have a blind spot to and having a professional for the creative side of business can go a long way.
 
Tech focus tasks are a huge help getting you up to date on the latest and greatest tools available to entrepreneurs. Maintaining the back end of your website, integrating waitlists to email lists, optimizing website-plugins and making sure they’re working properly... these can be hair pulling to learn if you’re not tech savvy, so why not get help with it?
 
Where to find a VA
 
Finding the right VA for your needs takes a little bit of footwork but pays off huge. Finding Facebook groups for what tasks you might need are a good place to start as VAs are in those groups soliciting for work. As with hiring anyone, make sure you interview with the person to see if your values match up and be ready to take that leap if things work out. You can also try to find a VA through Emily Reagan’s portal on her website, which we spoke about on the episode. Good Luck!
 
Hiring a VA through Emily Reagan: https://emilyreaganpr.com/virtual-assistant/
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We’re subscription box entrepreneurs, which means we’re motivated by success and ready to take on new challenges as they arise. But we don’t need to take on these challenges alone! Behind the scenes we can have a support system to help us stay on track and even expand without getting overwhelmed. This week we’re talking about how Virtual Assistants can help take on some of those tasks and next level your business.</p><p> </p><p>Virtual Assistants</p><p> </p><p>Virtual Assistants are independent contractors who work flex schedules and have a negotiated set of hours they would commit to working on tasks that you would need from them. Being independent contractors means that while you are hiring them to help you with your business, you’re only taking them on for a set number of hours or specific tasks rather than hiring a full-time employee which can be more flexible to your budget and specialized for what your business needs are.</p><p> </p><p>3 Task Buckets: Admin, Creative, and Tech</p><p> </p><p>VA’s are best used when you have certain tasks in mind for them, and some VAs specialize in certain tasks over others. I like to break what a VA can do for you into three task buckets: admin, creative, and tech. With Admin, you can find VAs to help you with customer service work such as answering service emails, especially cancellations like we spoke about in a previous podcast. They can also help with billing issues and bookkeeping, or really any of the nuts and bolts of running a successful business.</p><p> </p><p>On the Creative side, this can entail the designing of those customer facing marketing materials. Graphic design VAs can help build graphics for social media, custom emails, newsletters, worksheets, or e-books and make them look good to reflect how you feel about your business to your customers. They can help you brainstorm to figure out those ideas that you might have a blind spot to and having a professional for the creative side of business can go a long way.</p><p> </p><p>Tech focus tasks are a huge help getting you up to date on the latest and greatest tools available to entrepreneurs. Maintaining the back end of your website, integrating waitlists to email lists, optimizing website-plugins and making sure they’re working properly... these can be hair pulling to learn if you’re not tech savvy, so why not get help with it?</p><p> </p><p>Where to find a VA</p><p> </p><p>Finding the right VA for your needs takes a little bit of footwork but pays off huge. Finding Facebook groups for what tasks you might need are a good place to start as VAs are in those groups soliciting for work. As with hiring anyone, make sure you interview with the person to see if your values match up and be ready to take that leap if things work out. You can also try to find a VA through Emily Reagan’s portal on her website, which we spoke about on the episode. Good Luck!</p><p> </p><p>Hiring a VA through Emily Reagan: <a href="https://emilyreaganpr.com/virtual-assistant/">https://emilyreaganpr.com/virtual-assistant/</a></p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2630</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[73bfb8f8-d7c5-4449-934c-0510d9acf719]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7024730597.mp3?updated=1701786259" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>023: We All Need a Reset - How Alissa Started a Subscription Box While Working Full-Time</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/023-we-all-need-a-reset-how-alissa-started-a-subscription-box-while-working-full-time</link>
      <description>We all have our reasons for starting our own businesses. Maybe we want a steady source of income, or a creative outlet and connections with a like-minded audience or breaking away from the corporate lifestyle. But I think the thing that connects us all is a want to do something meaningful with our lives and make true those dreams we’ve had about the independence of running a business for ourselves.
 
“I made a vow that I would not walk out of 2020 the same way I walked into it.” - Alyssa
 
My guest this week is Alyssa Scuderi, founder of the WANTA Reset box for women, to talk about how owning her own business has been a dream of hers since she was a little girl. “I remember my brother and I being young in mom and dad's kitchen, and we're squeezing orange juice and talking about how we can turn it into a business. So, we were coming up with business names and strategizing our business, as much as young kids can strategize.”
 
Fast forward to 2020: a year that changed everything for everyone. Like many of us, Alyssa found herself working from home and with her kids full time. Without her work commute and a ‘rushed life’, she ended up with extra time on her hands that she wanted to use to its full potential. “I made a vow that I would not walk out of 2020 the same way I walked into it.” With support from her friends and family, she decided to start her own business and see where it took her!
 
As entrepreneurs, we have a drive to make a difference in our community and the world around us through our ingenuity and know-how. The year 2020 was hard on us all and shook up the status quo. Alyssa saw this as an opportunity to reset and re-calibrate not only herself but her community, to change things for the better and seize the opportunity to realize the dream she’s had since she was little of owning her own business and being her own boss. So now I challenge you: what’s holding you back from realizing your dreams and how can you come out of this year different than you came into it?
 
You can find Alyssa and the WANTA Reset Box at:
https://thewantabox.com/
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 23 Jun 2021 07:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>We All Need a Reset - How Alissa Started a Subscription Box While Working Full-Time</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>23</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cea44222-b0bf-11ed-b273-b79536461f0d/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>We all have our reasons for starting our own businesses. Maybe we want a steady source of income, or a creative outlet and connections with a like-minded audience or breaking away from the corporate lifestyle. But I think the thing that connects us...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>We all have our reasons for starting our own businesses. Maybe we want a steady source of income, or a creative outlet and connections with a like-minded audience or breaking away from the corporate lifestyle. But I think the thing that connects us all is a want to do something meaningful with our lives and make true those dreams we’ve had about the independence of running a business for ourselves.
 
“I made a vow that I would not walk out of 2020 the same way I walked into it.” - Alyssa
 
My guest this week is Alyssa Scuderi, founder of the WANTA Reset box for women, to talk about how owning her own business has been a dream of hers since she was a little girl. “I remember my brother and I being young in mom and dad's kitchen, and we're squeezing orange juice and talking about how we can turn it into a business. So, we were coming up with business names and strategizing our business, as much as young kids can strategize.”
 
Fast forward to 2020: a year that changed everything for everyone. Like many of us, Alyssa found herself working from home and with her kids full time. Without her work commute and a ‘rushed life’, she ended up with extra time on her hands that she wanted to use to its full potential. “I made a vow that I would not walk out of 2020 the same way I walked into it.” With support from her friends and family, she decided to start her own business and see where it took her!
 
As entrepreneurs, we have a drive to make a difference in our community and the world around us through our ingenuity and know-how. The year 2020 was hard on us all and shook up the status quo. Alyssa saw this as an opportunity to reset and re-calibrate not only herself but her community, to change things for the better and seize the opportunity to realize the dream she’s had since she was little of owning her own business and being her own boss. So now I challenge you: what’s holding you back from realizing your dreams and how can you come out of this year different than you came into it?
 
You can find Alyssa and the WANTA Reset Box at:
https://thewantabox.com/
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>We all have our reasons for starting our own businesses. Maybe we want a steady source of income, or a creative outlet and connections with a like-minded audience or breaking away from the corporate lifestyle. But I think the thing that connects us all is a want to do something meaningful with our lives and make true those dreams we’ve had about the independence of running a business for ourselves.</p><p> </p><p>“I made a vow that I would not walk out of 2020 the same way I walked into it.” - Alyssa</p><p> </p><p>My guest this week is Alyssa Scuderi, founder of the WANTA Reset box for women, to talk about how owning her own business has been a dream of hers since she was a little girl. “I remember my brother and I being young in mom and dad's kitchen, and we're squeezing orange juice and talking about how we can turn it into a business. So, we were coming up with business names and strategizing our business, as much as young kids can strategize.”</p><p> </p><p>Fast forward to 2020: a year that changed everything for everyone. Like many of us, Alyssa found herself working from home and with her kids full time. Without her work commute and a ‘rushed life’, she ended up with extra time on her hands that she wanted to use to its full potential. “I made a vow that I would not walk out of 2020 the same way I walked into it.” With support from her friends and family, she decided to start her own business and see where it took her!</p><p> </p><p>As entrepreneurs, we have a drive to make a difference in our community and the world around us through our ingenuity and know-how. The year 2020 was hard on us all and shook up the status quo. Alyssa saw this as an opportunity to reset and re-calibrate not only herself but her community, to change things for the better and seize the opportunity to realize the dream she’s had since she was little of owning her own business and being her own boss. So now I challenge you: what’s holding you back from realizing your dreams and how can you come out of this year different than you came into it?</p><p> </p><p>You can find Alyssa and the WANTA Reset Box at:</p><p><a href="https://thewantabox.com/">https://thewantabox.com/</a></p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2141</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8a406214-41e3-4bff-bf17-564ba706e8c9]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3976582745.mp3?updated=1701786276" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>022: Is FEAR Holding You Back?</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/022-is-fear-holding-you-back</link>
      <description>This week my guest is LYB OG Debbie Poole, founder of the Create Happy Box, and we’re talking about fear. Starting your own subscription box business is a risk and taking on risk means having to deal with fear. Fear is that thing deep inside all of us that all entrepreneurs will need to be able to deal with, because that fear follows you through your whole business. We need to be able to identify that fear and to know it for what it is so that we can deal with it and move forward.
 
Know Your Fears
 
When it comes to starting your new business, launching a subscription box, or moving on to the next step, we’re going to have our doubts dancing around our heads trying to stop us from progressing. It’s not only at the beginning of our launch, but all through the process:
 
-Fear of Failing
-Fear of Not being good enough
-Fear of Disappointing others
-Fear of Cancellations
-Fear of Being Successful and Growing
 
As you can see, fear can follow you all the way through your business cycle, and even make you afraid to succeed too much! But if we know what fears we may encounter, we can be ready for them.
 
The first and best way to overcome and beat this fear is to do the steps. Build your audience, do the live videos and become an expert in the skill your box is going to be about. Once you have your audience, make sure you’re listening to what they want. Debbie asked her audience what they wanted in a box, and they were ready to tell her. “I began asking my ride or die customers what they wanted, questions like what kind of projects, paints or no paints…all the questions.”
 
Remember, don’t try to be all the things! Your audience will tell you what they want and if you listen, you can build a box that will fly off the shelves. But you need to also remember that you’re not going to please everybody all the time. There will be cancellations, but if you keep developing your business, there will be growth to replace those cancellations.
 
It can be easy to let fear stop your progress, but it can also help you keep your focus if you know it for what it is. Follow the steps and do the work to build your audience, listen to them when they tell you what they want, and be ready for the future of your business and remember, don’t let anything hold you back!
 
You can find Debbie and the Create Happy Box at:
 https://www.paintandwood.com/pages/the-diy-tiered-tray-create-happy-box-waitlist
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.
 
Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 16 Jun 2021 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Is FEAR Holding You Back?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>22</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cebb0548-b0bf-11ed-b273-7bdfc9b2de08/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week my guest is LYB OG Debbie Poole, founder of the Create Happy Box, and we’re talking about fear. Starting your own subscription box business is a risk and taking on risk means having to deal with fear. Fear is that thing deep inside all of...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>This week my guest is LYB OG Debbie Poole, founder of the Create Happy Box, and we’re talking about fear. Starting your own subscription box business is a risk and taking on risk means having to deal with fear. Fear is that thing deep inside all of us that all entrepreneurs will need to be able to deal with, because that fear follows you through your whole business. We need to be able to identify that fear and to know it for what it is so that we can deal with it and move forward.
 
Know Your Fears
 
When it comes to starting your new business, launching a subscription box, or moving on to the next step, we’re going to have our doubts dancing around our heads trying to stop us from progressing. It’s not only at the beginning of our launch, but all through the process:
 
-Fear of Failing
-Fear of Not being good enough
-Fear of Disappointing others
-Fear of Cancellations
-Fear of Being Successful and Growing
 
As you can see, fear can follow you all the way through your business cycle, and even make you afraid to succeed too much! But if we know what fears we may encounter, we can be ready for them.
 
The first and best way to overcome and beat this fear is to do the steps. Build your audience, do the live videos and become an expert in the skill your box is going to be about. Once you have your audience, make sure you’re listening to what they want. Debbie asked her audience what they wanted in a box, and they were ready to tell her. “I began asking my ride or die customers what they wanted, questions like what kind of projects, paints or no paints…all the questions.”
 
Remember, don’t try to be all the things! Your audience will tell you what they want and if you listen, you can build a box that will fly off the shelves. But you need to also remember that you’re not going to please everybody all the time. There will be cancellations, but if you keep developing your business, there will be growth to replace those cancellations.
 
It can be easy to let fear stop your progress, but it can also help you keep your focus if you know it for what it is. Follow the steps and do the work to build your audience, listen to them when they tell you what they want, and be ready for the future of your business and remember, don’t let anything hold you back!
 
You can find Debbie and the Create Happy Box at:
 https://www.paintandwood.com/pages/the-diy-tiered-tray-create-happy-box-waitlist
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.
 
Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week my guest is LYB OG Debbie Poole, founder of the Create Happy Box, and we’re talking about fear. Starting your own subscription box business is a risk and taking on risk means having to deal with fear. Fear is that thing deep inside all of us that all entrepreneurs will need to be able to deal with, because that fear follows you through your whole business. We need to be able to identify that fear and to know it for what it is so that we can deal with it and move forward.</p><p> </p><p>Know Your Fears</p><p> </p><p>When it comes to starting your new business, launching a subscription box, or moving on to the next step, we’re going to have our doubts dancing around our heads trying to stop us from progressing. It’s not only at the beginning of our launch, but all through the process:</p><p> </p><p>-Fear of Failing</p><p>-Fear of Not being good enough</p><p>-Fear of Disappointing others</p><p>-Fear of Cancellations</p><p>-Fear of Being Successful and Growing</p><p> </p><p>As you can see, fear can follow you all the way through your business cycle, and even make you afraid to succeed too much! But if we know what fears we may encounter, we can be ready for them.</p><p> </p><p>The first and best way to overcome and beat this fear is to do the steps. Build your audience, do the live videos and become an expert in the skill your box is going to be about. Once you have your audience, make sure you’re listening to what they want. Debbie asked her audience what they wanted in a box, and they were ready to tell her. “I began asking my ride or die customers what they wanted, questions like what kind of projects, paints or no paints…all the questions.”</p><p> </p><p>Remember, don’t try to be all the things! Your audience will tell you what they want and if you listen, you can build a box that will fly off the shelves. But you need to also remember that you’re not going to please everybody all the time. There will be cancellations, but if you keep developing your business, there will be growth to replace those cancellations.</p><p> </p><p>It can be easy to let fear stop your progress, but it can also help you keep your focus if you know it for what it is. Follow the steps and do the work to build your audience, listen to them when they tell you what they want, and be ready for the future of your business and remember, don’t let anything hold you back!</p><p> </p><p>You can find Debbie and the Create Happy Box at:</p><p><a href="https://www.paintandwood.com/pages/the-diy-tiered-tray-create-happy-box-waitlist"> https://www.paintandwood.com/pages/the-diy-tiered-tray-create-happy-box-waitlist</a></p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p> </p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2196</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[bfdae852-2561-4993-8b8d-fd721996a68e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3237174184.mp3?updated=1701786288" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>021: Sarah’s Framework for a Live Unboxing</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/021-sarahs-framework-for-a-live-unboxing</link>
      <description>One of my favorite things that I get to do with my subscription box each month is a live unboxing video. It’s a super fun way to engage with your audience and show not only your subscribers but also potential subscribers what kind of products are coming in your box and why you personally selected them. It can be a great community event that everyone can be involved in through comments and questions.
 
If you’ve never done one before, hosting a live event can seem a little scary especially if you don’t know where to even begin. In today's episode, I’m going to share with you a step-by-step process on how to create an unboxing live event and take out the uncertainty so you can focus on having fun!
 
Prep Work:

Set a Date

Setting the Stage

Create a Hook

 
During the Video:

Encourage Engagement with your Audience

Tell the Story of Your Box

Show off Your Ultimate Box with all the things!

Call to Action

Conclude and Follow Up with Everyone

 
Follow these steps and remember to have fun with it! Remember, this is your chance to show off the box you’ve put so much time into and engage with your subscribers. This is what having a subscription box is all about, and the closer you are to your audience the better business you’ll have.
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 09 Jun 2021 06:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Sarah’s Framework for a Live Unboxing</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>21</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/ced11cac-b0bf-11ed-b273-6308f9bfc0a6/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>One of my favorite things that I get to do with my subscription box each month is a live unboxing video. It’s a super fun way to engage with your audience and show not only your subscribers but also potential subscribers what kind of products are...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>One of my favorite things that I get to do with my subscription box each month is a live unboxing video. It’s a super fun way to engage with your audience and show not only your subscribers but also potential subscribers what kind of products are coming in your box and why you personally selected them. It can be a great community event that everyone can be involved in through comments and questions.
 
If you’ve never done one before, hosting a live event can seem a little scary especially if you don’t know where to even begin. In today's episode, I’m going to share with you a step-by-step process on how to create an unboxing live event and take out the uncertainty so you can focus on having fun!
 
Prep Work:

Set a Date

Setting the Stage

Create a Hook

 
During the Video:

Encourage Engagement with your Audience

Tell the Story of Your Box

Show off Your Ultimate Box with all the things!

Call to Action

Conclude and Follow Up with Everyone

 
Follow these steps and remember to have fun with it! Remember, this is your chance to show off the box you’ve put so much time into and engage with your subscribers. This is what having a subscription box is all about, and the closer you are to your audience the better business you’ll have.
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>One of my favorite things that I get to do with my subscription box each month is a live unboxing video. It’s a super fun way to engage with your audience and show not only your subscribers but also <em>potential</em> subscribers what kind of products are coming in your box and why you personally selected them. It can be a great community event that everyone can be involved in through comments and questions.</p><p> </p><p>If you’ve never done one before, hosting a live event can seem a little scary especially if you don’t know where to even begin. In today's episode, I’m going to share with you a step-by-step process on how to create an unboxing live event and take out the uncertainty so you can focus on having fun!</p><p> </p><p>Prep Work:</p><ol>
<li>Set a Date</li>
<li>Setting the Stage</li>
<li>Create a Hook</li>
</ol><p> </p><p>During the Video:</p><ol>
<li>Encourage Engagement with your Audience</li>
<li>Tell the Story of Your Box</li>
<li>Show off Your Ultimate Box with all the things!</li>
<li>Call to Action</li>
<li>Conclude and Follow Up with Everyone</li>
</ol><p> </p><p>Follow these steps and remember to have fun with it! Remember, this is your chance to show off the box you’ve put so much time into and engage with your subscribers. This is what having a subscription box is all about, and the closer you are to your audience the better business you’ll have.</p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1262</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[eb330ee8-98ba-4659-bd50-199403f14352]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1371572194.mp3?updated=1680654875" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>020: Create Ads that Stop the Scroll</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/020-create-ads-that-stop-the-scroll</link>
      <description>A huge part of running a successful subscription box business is marketing yourself through effective online ads. Many of us turn to Facebook to run ads, but it can be frustrating to try and read through the data to see if those ads you paid for are actually working for you. On this week’s podcast joining me is my biz bestie Susan Bradley, owner of the Social Sales Girls, to help us figure out what works with ads and teach us that a successful ad doesn’t always equal a sale.
 
“You Need 3000 Web Visitors a Month to Get One Sale” - Susan
 
The whole point of running Facebook ads is not “run an ad, get a sale.” It’s to keep your brand and your business at the top of people’s minds and drive them to your store page. A successful ad is one that gets people to stop scrolling and read the copy that accompanies it and attracts them to click through and go to your store site.
 
There are three types of Ads that are the most important for product sellers, and each have a different role to play in attracting people to your product.
 
Engagement Ads: These ads are successful when they build your audience and extend your reach with a cold audience. These ads help spread the word of your brand with those audiences that will potentially like or share the ad because it has piqued their interest.
 
Conversion Ads: When you’re ready for people to take action on your product, like when your cart is open and you’re in the middle of building a sale, conversion ads should help drive those engaged customers to your site over and over and start looking at signing up for your list or start thinking hard about buying your product.
 
Lead Ads: This is when your customers are at their warmest, they know about you, they’ve seen the product, and they’ve signed up for your email list. You want to be sending them content that will engage them with your product and your site, and really help them make that last leap and make them part of your audience that’s ready to subscribe.
 
It’s important to remember that not all ads are created equally, and success is more than an ad for a sale! They each have a purpose in getting potential customers to your website and warming them up to becoming a return subscriber. Having a strategy behind your ad buys is going to give you that peace of mind you need about the future of your business, and keep your audience growing and your sales increasing.
 
Traffic Bootcamp Live with Susan Bradley
Get your ideal audience excited &amp; clicking on a budget that won’t break the bank.
Live Event Starts June 13th 
Sign up at:https://classroom.thesocialsalesgirls.com/a/2147488425/zgW6HoFL 
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 02 Jun 2021 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Create Ads that Stop the Scroll</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>20</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cee64fb4-b0bf-11ed-b273-c3516931dadc/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>A huge part of running a successful subscription box business is marketing yourself through effective online ads. Many of us turn to Facebook to run ads, but it can be frustrating to try and read through the data to see if those ads you paid for are...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>A huge part of running a successful subscription box business is marketing yourself through effective online ads. Many of us turn to Facebook to run ads, but it can be frustrating to try and read through the data to see if those ads you paid for are actually working for you. On this week’s podcast joining me is my biz bestie Susan Bradley, owner of the Social Sales Girls, to help us figure out what works with ads and teach us that a successful ad doesn’t always equal a sale.
 
“You Need 3000 Web Visitors a Month to Get One Sale” - Susan
 
The whole point of running Facebook ads is not “run an ad, get a sale.” It’s to keep your brand and your business at the top of people’s minds and drive them to your store page. A successful ad is one that gets people to stop scrolling and read the copy that accompanies it and attracts them to click through and go to your store site.
 
There are three types of Ads that are the most important for product sellers, and each have a different role to play in attracting people to your product.
 
Engagement Ads: These ads are successful when they build your audience and extend your reach with a cold audience. These ads help spread the word of your brand with those audiences that will potentially like or share the ad because it has piqued their interest.
 
Conversion Ads: When you’re ready for people to take action on your product, like when your cart is open and you’re in the middle of building a sale, conversion ads should help drive those engaged customers to your site over and over and start looking at signing up for your list or start thinking hard about buying your product.
 
Lead Ads: This is when your customers are at their warmest, they know about you, they’ve seen the product, and they’ve signed up for your email list. You want to be sending them content that will engage them with your product and your site, and really help them make that last leap and make them part of your audience that’s ready to subscribe.
 
It’s important to remember that not all ads are created equally, and success is more than an ad for a sale! They each have a purpose in getting potential customers to your website and warming them up to becoming a return subscriber. Having a strategy behind your ad buys is going to give you that peace of mind you need about the future of your business, and keep your audience growing and your sales increasing.
 
Traffic Bootcamp Live with Susan Bradley
Get your ideal audience excited &amp; clicking on a budget that won’t break the bank.
Live Event Starts June 13th 
Sign up at:https://classroom.thesocialsalesgirls.com/a/2147488425/zgW6HoFL 
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A huge part of running a successful subscription box business is marketing yourself through effective online ads. Many of us turn to Facebook to run ads, but it can be frustrating to try and read through the data to see if those ads you paid for are actually working for you. On this week’s podcast joining me is my biz bestie Susan Bradley, owner of the Social Sales Girls, to help us figure out what works with ads and teach us that a successful ad doesn’t always equal a sale.</p><p> </p><p>“You Need 3000 Web Visitors a Month to Get One Sale” - Susan</p><p> </p><p>The whole point of running Facebook ads is not “run an ad, get a sale.” It’s to keep your brand and your business at the top of people’s minds and drive them to your store page. A successful ad is one that gets people to stop scrolling and read the copy that accompanies it and attracts them to click through and go to your store site.</p><p> </p><p>There are three types of Ads that are the most important for product sellers, and each have a different role to play in attracting people to your product.</p><p> </p><ol><li>Engagement Ads: These ads are successful when they build your audience and extend your reach with a cold audience. These ads help spread the word of your brand with those audiences that will potentially like or share the ad because it has piqued their interest.</li></ol><p> </p><ol><li>Conversion Ads: When you’re ready for people to take action on your product, like when your cart is open and you’re in the middle of building a sale, conversion ads should help drive those engaged customers to your site over and over and start looking at signing up for your list or start thinking hard about buying your product.</li></ol><p> </p><ol><li>Lead Ads: This is when your customers are at their warmest, they know about you, they’ve seen the product, and they’ve signed up for your email list. You want to be sending them content that will engage them with your product and your site, and really help them make that last leap and make them part of your audience that’s ready to subscribe.</li></ol><p> </p><p>It’s important to remember that not all ads are created equally, and success is more than an ad for a sale! They each have a purpose in getting potential customers to your website and warming them up to becoming a return subscriber. Having a strategy behind your ad buys is going to give you that peace of mind you need about the future of your business, and keep your audience growing and your sales increasing.</p><p> </p><p><em>Traffic Bootcamp Live with Susan Bradley</em></p><p>Get your ideal audience excited &amp; clicking on a budget that won’t break the bank.</p><p><em>Live Event Starts June 13th </em></p><p>Sign up at:<a href="https://classroom.thesocialsalesgirls.com/a/2147488425/zgW6HoFL?fbclid=IwAR0SsnTXLpUUKmUPnHASrfv0IuOwzdNFZQJ6tL1eGLWRqtNIXVth0DJfKxg">https://classroom.thesocialsalesgirls.com/a/2147488425/zgW6HoFL</a> </p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2606</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[69cdef9e-646c-460e-b5b9-6852c4c5d1fa]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5211271619.mp3?updated=1701786751" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>019: 250 Subscribers in 2 Months with an “Ugly” Box</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/019-250-subscribers-in-2-months-with-an-ugly-box</link>
      <description>This week I’m joined by Amy Baughman, founder of the Power Serging Subscription Box, who was so kind to talk with me about her box and realizing that things don’t need to be perfect to launch. Sometimes we get into our own heads about when is the perfect time to launch, or that the box isn’t ready, or whatever reason you might come up with. With these things rolling around in our heads making us crazy, it might just be time to launch “ugly,” or to put yourself and your box out there and keep moving forward.
 
The Riches are In the Niches
 
Amy has been in business for 30 years and has been an expert in her industry for a long time. She saw a need in her community for Serger Machine education and materials and created her Power Serging box to help fill that need. “I did a little bit of research. There are tons of quilt quilting boxes out there or fabric boxes out there; even on the embroidery side, there's some powerful embroidery people out there that have a great online business that are now sending kits. And I thought, well, let's go where nobody else has gone.”
 
Amy identified a need and built a box around that need. She built an audience out of that and was able to leverage that into a waitlist that was eager to get started with her box. That’s an incredible amount of progress, but with that progress can come doubt on whether you’re really ready, or if there really is the demand out there that you think there is.
 
Perfection can be the Enemy of Progress
 
The need to have everything be perfect can almost be like a stop sign to the progress we’ve already made. It’s that drive for perfection that makes us the successful entrepreneurs we are, but the key is not to let it slow you down. Amy put herself out there not knowing how things might go and jumped from 150 subscribers in her first month to 250 in her second month. “I thought, well, let's just stick a landing page out there and see who wants to sign up. I thought it would just be my local people, but they posted to their Facebook groups, and all of a sudden, there was like 100 people, 120 people, 150 people.”
 
Remember, if you’ve done the legwork and built the audience, they’ll tell you what they’re interested in if you’re willing to listen. Even an “ugly” launch can be successful, so get moving on your own idea!
 
You can find Amy and the Power Serging Box at:
https://www.amybaughman.com/ and https://amysews.com/
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 26 May 2021 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>250 Subscribers in 2 Months with an “Ugly” Box</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>19</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cefaca70-b0bf-11ed-b273-c3299f978b71/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week I’m joined by Amy Baughman, founder of the Power Serging Subscription Box, who was so kind to talk with me about her box and realizing that things don’t need to be perfect to launch. Sometimes we get into our own heads about when is the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>This week I’m joined by Amy Baughman, founder of the Power Serging Subscription Box, who was so kind to talk with me about her box and realizing that things don’t need to be perfect to launch. Sometimes we get into our own heads about when is the perfect time to launch, or that the box isn’t ready, or whatever reason you might come up with. With these things rolling around in our heads making us crazy, it might just be time to launch “ugly,” or to put yourself and your box out there and keep moving forward.
 
The Riches are In the Niches
 
Amy has been in business for 30 years and has been an expert in her industry for a long time. She saw a need in her community for Serger Machine education and materials and created her Power Serging box to help fill that need. “I did a little bit of research. There are tons of quilt quilting boxes out there or fabric boxes out there; even on the embroidery side, there's some powerful embroidery people out there that have a great online business that are now sending kits. And I thought, well, let's go where nobody else has gone.”
 
Amy identified a need and built a box around that need. She built an audience out of that and was able to leverage that into a waitlist that was eager to get started with her box. That’s an incredible amount of progress, but with that progress can come doubt on whether you’re really ready, or if there really is the demand out there that you think there is.
 
Perfection can be the Enemy of Progress
 
The need to have everything be perfect can almost be like a stop sign to the progress we’ve already made. It’s that drive for perfection that makes us the successful entrepreneurs we are, but the key is not to let it slow you down. Amy put herself out there not knowing how things might go and jumped from 150 subscribers in her first month to 250 in her second month. “I thought, well, let's just stick a landing page out there and see who wants to sign up. I thought it would just be my local people, but they posted to their Facebook groups, and all of a sudden, there was like 100 people, 120 people, 150 people.”
 
Remember, if you’ve done the legwork and built the audience, they’ll tell you what they’re interested in if you’re willing to listen. Even an “ugly” launch can be successful, so get moving on your own idea!
 
You can find Amy and the Power Serging Box at:
https://www.amybaughman.com/ and https://amysews.com/
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week I’m joined by Amy Baughman, founder of the Power Serging Subscription Box, who was so kind to talk with me about her box and realizing that things don’t need to be perfect to launch. Sometimes we get into our own heads about when is the perfect time to launch, or that the box isn’t ready, or whatever reason you might come up with. With these things rolling around in our heads making us crazy, it might just be time to launch “ugly,” or to put yourself and your box out there and keep moving forward.</p><p> </p><p>The Riches are In the Niches</p><p> </p><p>Amy has been in business for 30 years and has been an expert in her industry for a long time. She saw a need in her community for Serger Machine education and materials and created her Power Serging box to help fill that need. “I did a little bit of research. There are tons of quilt quilting boxes out there or fabric boxes out there; even on the embroidery side, there's some powerful embroidery people out there that have a great online business that are now sending kits. And I thought, well, let's go where nobody else has gone.”</p><p> </p><p>Amy identified a need and built a box around that need. She built an audience out of that and was able to leverage that into a waitlist that was eager to get started with her box. That’s an incredible amount of progress, but with that progress can come doubt on whether you’re really ready, or if there really is the demand out there that you think there is.</p><p> </p><p>Perfection can be the Enemy of Progress</p><p> </p><p>The need to have everything be perfect can almost be like a stop sign to the progress we’ve already made. It’s that drive for perfection that makes us the successful entrepreneurs we are, but the key is not to let it slow you down. Amy put herself out there not knowing how things might go and jumped from 150 subscribers in her first month to 250 in her second month. “I thought, well, let's just stick a landing page out there and see who wants to sign up. I thought it would just be my local people, but they posted to their Facebook groups, and all of a sudden, there was like 100 people, 120 people, 150 people.”</p><p> </p><p>Remember, if you’ve done the legwork and built the audience, they’ll tell you what they’re interested in if you’re willing to listen. Even an “ugly” launch can be successful, so get moving on your own idea!</p><p> </p><p>You can find Amy and the Power Serging Box at:</p><p><a href="https://www.amybaughman.com/">https://www.amybaughman.com/</a> and <a href="https://amysews.com/">https://amysews.com/</a></p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1527</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a0dfd54c-2f90-4eb0-b1ec-41f62aabd411]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9956247863.mp3?updated=1701786419" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>018: Protecting Your Energy</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/018-protecting-your-energy</link>
      <description>When running your own business, it’s a guarantee that you’re going to get cancellations and negative feedback. Unfortunately, you can’t please all of the people all of the time, and some of those people are only more than willing to let you know how much they didn’t like your product, your service, or whatever might be on their mind at that moment. Managing these kinds of customer service issues can get inside your brain and make you doubt yourself and your business, sapping away the mental energy that you need to run your business successfully.
 
Looking for my Retention Rate Calculator? Access it here:  https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/6-tips-to-navigate-cancellations-in-a-subscription-box-business 
 
Managing Cancellations and Negative Feedback
 
As Business owners, it’s up to us to deal with things like cancellations and negative feedback professionally as well as take care of ourselves and our mental well-being. Here are some tips to managing negative feedback and protecting your energy to keep you positive:
 
Give it to Someone Else. If you’re at the point in your business where you have a VA or assistant you can delegate responses to, do so. Putting a buffer between yourself and those kinds of customer service issues can help keep it impersonal but professional.
 
Reset Yourself. If you feel that negativity getting to you mentally, step away from it physically. Take a walk, run a bath, do something that helps you disconnect from the stress of work. Sometimes we just need a moment away for our brain to reset and get us back to our best self.
 
Remember: It’s Not about You, It’s about Them. You never know what a person is dealing with, especially in these situations. They might feel they need to cancel because of any number of reasons, and for those negative comments that get sent your way, you might just be an easy target for them to vent frustration that they otherwise feel they can’t express. Use that perspective to try not to take these issues personally.
 
Keep Reminders of Positive Feedback Visible. Remember, for every negative review there are multiple satisfied customers who are excited to see what’s next. Keep those positive reviews where you can see them to help remind you about what’s important: delivering a VIP experience your subscribers appreciate.
 
Cancellations and negative feedback are a fact of life as a business owner, but they don’t need to be something that you dread getting. They always feel like there are more than there actually are, so keep focused on your growth, because that’s what’s going to make you successful. The reality is that if you are professional in your responses and positive in your outlook, there might be a good chance that those people might be return customers in the end.
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 19 May 2021 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Protecting Your Energy</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>18</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cf0f33de-b0bf-11ed-b273-0f24319770e1/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>When running your own business, it’s a guarantee that you’re going to get cancellations and negative feedback. Unfortunately, you can’t please all of the people all of the time, and some of those people are only more than willing to let you know...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>When running your own business, it’s a guarantee that you’re going to get cancellations and negative feedback. Unfortunately, you can’t please all of the people all of the time, and some of those people are only more than willing to let you know how much they didn’t like your product, your service, or whatever might be on their mind at that moment. Managing these kinds of customer service issues can get inside your brain and make you doubt yourself and your business, sapping away the mental energy that you need to run your business successfully.
 
Looking for my Retention Rate Calculator? Access it here:  https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/6-tips-to-navigate-cancellations-in-a-subscription-box-business 
 
Managing Cancellations and Negative Feedback
 
As Business owners, it’s up to us to deal with things like cancellations and negative feedback professionally as well as take care of ourselves and our mental well-being. Here are some tips to managing negative feedback and protecting your energy to keep you positive:
 
Give it to Someone Else. If you’re at the point in your business where you have a VA or assistant you can delegate responses to, do so. Putting a buffer between yourself and those kinds of customer service issues can help keep it impersonal but professional.
 
Reset Yourself. If you feel that negativity getting to you mentally, step away from it physically. Take a walk, run a bath, do something that helps you disconnect from the stress of work. Sometimes we just need a moment away for our brain to reset and get us back to our best self.
 
Remember: It’s Not about You, It’s about Them. You never know what a person is dealing with, especially in these situations. They might feel they need to cancel because of any number of reasons, and for those negative comments that get sent your way, you might just be an easy target for them to vent frustration that they otherwise feel they can’t express. Use that perspective to try not to take these issues personally.
 
Keep Reminders of Positive Feedback Visible. Remember, for every negative review there are multiple satisfied customers who are excited to see what’s next. Keep those positive reviews where you can see them to help remind you about what’s important: delivering a VIP experience your subscribers appreciate.
 
Cancellations and negative feedback are a fact of life as a business owner, but they don’t need to be something that you dread getting. They always feel like there are more than there actually are, so keep focused on your growth, because that’s what’s going to make you successful. The reality is that if you are professional in your responses and positive in your outlook, there might be a good chance that those people might be return customers in the end.
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>When running your own business, it’s a guarantee that you’re going to get cancellations and negative feedback. Unfortunately, you can’t please all of the people all of the time, and some of those people are only more than willing to let you know how much they didn’t like your product, your service, or whatever might be on their mind at that moment. Managing these kinds of customer service issues can get inside your brain and make you doubt yourself and your business, sapping away the mental energy that you need to run your business successfully.</p><p> </p><p>Looking for my Retention Rate Calculator? Access it here: <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/6-tips-to-navigate-cancellations-in-a-subscription-box-business"> https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/blog/6-tips-to-navigate-cancellations-in-a-subscription-box-business</a> </p><p> </p><p>Managing Cancellations and Negative Feedback</p><p> </p><p>As Business owners, it’s up to us to deal with things like cancellations and negative feedback professionally as well as take care of ourselves and our mental well-being. Here are some tips to managing negative feedback and protecting your energy to keep you positive:</p><p> </p><ol><li>Give it to Someone Else. If you’re at the point in your business where you have a VA or assistant you can delegate responses to, do so. Putting a buffer between yourself and those kinds of customer service issues can help keep it impersonal but professional.</li></ol><p> </p><ol><li>Reset Yourself. If you feel that negativity getting to you mentally, step away from it physically. Take a walk, run a bath, do something that helps you disconnect from the stress of work. Sometimes we just need a moment away for our brain to reset and get us back to our best self.</li></ol><p> </p><ol><li>Remember: It’s Not about You, It’s about Them. You never know what a person is dealing with, especially in these situations. They might feel they need to cancel because of any number of reasons, and for those negative comments that get sent your way, you might just be an easy target for them to vent frustration that they otherwise feel they can’t express. Use that perspective to try not to take these issues personally.</li></ol><p> </p><ol><li>Keep Reminders of Positive Feedback Visible. Remember, for every negative review there are multiple satisfied customers who are excited to see what’s next. Keep those positive reviews where you can see them to help remind you about what’s important: delivering a VIP experience your subscribers appreciate.</li></ol><p> </p><p>Cancellations and negative feedback are a fact of life as a business owner, but they don’t need to be something that you dread getting. They always feel like there are more than there actually are, so keep focused on your growth, because that’s what’s going to make you successful. The reality is that if you are professional in your responses and positive in your outlook, there might be a good chance that those people might be return customers in the end.</p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1234</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7ac9078b-623f-4b8c-a76d-ea65035f3ec0]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8024550517.mp3?updated=1701786812" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>017: Progress over Perfection – Creative Indulgence Box</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/017-progress-over-perfection-creative-indulgence-box</link>
      <description>Joining me on the podcast this week is Alexis with her Creative Indulgence Box to talk about the idea of progress over perfection. Have you heard the saying “you are your own worst critic?” When you’re building your first subscription box for launch, we want everything to be perfect. Part of the drive to create a box in the first place is to give your subscribers that VIP experience they’ve come to expect, and we want to make that experience as perfect as possible. But you shouldn’t let that drive for perfection stop you from launching in the first place!
 
Always Remember to Listen to Your Audience
 
One of the most important steps in starting a subscription box is generating interest and creating a subscriber base. You can’t send out a box if nobody knows about it! But once you’ve done this, you’ve curated an audience and are connecting with them and generating that interest, at that point it’s only a matter of letting them know that a box is on the way.
 
When Alexis was thinking about all the things she needed to do before she could launch her box, she was already engaging with her audience but still had doubts about how much interest there was for her box.
 
“I mentioned the subscription box here and there when I was live and in my membership group and just kind of like building the buzz, but not like any kind of commitment. I was nervous about the whole process.”
 
She knew she needed an extra push to get over that fear that not everything was perfect, so she put up the question to her audience: were they ready for her box? The response was overwhelmingly positive.
She created a text list to be informed of when the box would be available and told herself 30 responses would be an accomplishment. “We launched (the list) on April 8th and closed on April 12th at 142 members. I was blown away!”
 
Remember, there are always going to be challenges to getting your box out that make us doubt ourselves. The important thing to remember is to keep charging forward, problem solve those issues, keep the faith and focus on progress over perfection!
 
You can find Alexis and the Creative Indulgence box at:
Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/purposefulindulgence
Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/purposefulindulgence/
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 May 2021 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Progress over Perfection – Creative Indulgence Box</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>17</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cf243efa-b0bf-11ed-b273-03d5a358ec61/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Joining me on the podcast this week is Alexis with her Creative Indulgence Box to talk about the idea of progress over perfection. Have you heard the saying “you are your own worst critic?” When you’re building your first subscription box for...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Joining me on the podcast this week is Alexis with her Creative Indulgence Box to talk about the idea of progress over perfection. Have you heard the saying “you are your own worst critic?” When you’re building your first subscription box for launch, we want everything to be perfect. Part of the drive to create a box in the first place is to give your subscribers that VIP experience they’ve come to expect, and we want to make that experience as perfect as possible. But you shouldn’t let that drive for perfection stop you from launching in the first place!
 
Always Remember to Listen to Your Audience
 
One of the most important steps in starting a subscription box is generating interest and creating a subscriber base. You can’t send out a box if nobody knows about it! But once you’ve done this, you’ve curated an audience and are connecting with them and generating that interest, at that point it’s only a matter of letting them know that a box is on the way.
 
When Alexis was thinking about all the things she needed to do before she could launch her box, she was already engaging with her audience but still had doubts about how much interest there was for her box.
 
“I mentioned the subscription box here and there when I was live and in my membership group and just kind of like building the buzz, but not like any kind of commitment. I was nervous about the whole process.”
 
She knew she needed an extra push to get over that fear that not everything was perfect, so she put up the question to her audience: were they ready for her box? The response was overwhelmingly positive.
She created a text list to be informed of when the box would be available and told herself 30 responses would be an accomplishment. “We launched (the list) on April 8th and closed on April 12th at 142 members. I was blown away!”
 
Remember, there are always going to be challenges to getting your box out that make us doubt ourselves. The important thing to remember is to keep charging forward, problem solve those issues, keep the faith and focus on progress over perfection!
 
You can find Alexis and the Creative Indulgence box at:
Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/purposefulindulgence
Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/purposefulindulgence/
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Joining me on the podcast this week is Alexis with her Creative Indulgence Box to talk about the idea of progress over perfection. Have you heard the saying “you are your own worst critic?” When you’re building your first subscription box for launch, we want everything to be perfect. Part of the drive to create a box in the first place is to give your subscribers that VIP experience they’ve come to expect, and we want to make that experience as perfect as possible. But you shouldn’t let that drive for perfection stop you from launching in the first place!</p><p> </p><p>Always Remember to Listen to Your Audience</p><p> </p><p>One of the most important steps in starting a subscription box is generating interest and creating a subscriber base. You can’t send out a box if nobody knows about it! But once you’ve done this, you’ve curated an audience and are connecting with them and generating that interest, at that point it’s only a matter of letting them know that a box is on the way.</p><p> </p><p>When Alexis was thinking about all the things she needed to do before she could launch her box, she was already engaging with her audience but still had doubts about how much interest there was for her box.</p><p> </p><p>“I mentioned the subscription box here and there when I was live and in my membership group and just kind of like building the buzz, but not like any kind of commitment. I was nervous about the whole process.”</p><p> </p><p>She knew she needed an extra push to get over that fear that not everything was perfect, so she put up the question to her audience: were they ready for her box? The response was overwhelmingly positive.</p><p>She created a text list to be informed of when the box would be available and told herself 30 responses would be an accomplishment. “We launched (the list) on April 8th and closed on April 12th at 142 members. I was blown away!”</p><p> </p><p>Remember, there are always going to be challenges to getting your box out that make us doubt ourselves. The important thing to remember is to keep charging forward, problem solve those issues, keep the faith and focus on progress over perfection!</p><p> </p><p>You can find Alexis and the Creative Indulgence box at:</p><p>Facebook: <a href="https://www.facebook.com/purposefulindulgence">https://www.facebook.com/purposefulindulgence</a></p><p>Instagram: <a href="https://www.instagram.com/purposefulindulgence/">https://www.instagram.com/purposefulindulgence/</a></p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2380</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[7c3d9614-88e7-4c6e-a477-171496d67a19]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4796238856.mp3?updated=1701786816" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>016: Afraid of Having 700 Subscribers?</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/016-afraid-of-having-700-subscribers</link>
      <description>When you’re first starting out with your subscription box, you might feel like you’ll take all the subscribers you can get. But that feeling changes when you hit your first hundred and keeps growing. What might have worked for your business at 50 subscribers might not work at 250, let alone 700! Such tremendous and scary growth happened to Cheryl Ham, founder of yARnaBLE subscription box, who is my guest this week to talk about how to approach sudden growth and how to avoid getting overwhelmed by success.
 
Be Ready to be Caught Off Guard
 
Having rapid success may seem like a problem you would like to have but believe me when I say that even if you are happy when it happens, it can seem so overwhelming that you might want to try and stop the orders from coming in. That’s how Cheryl felt when more orders came in than she had prepared for, because she was afraid that she couldn’t maintain the type of service she wanted for her subscribers. “What I was really afraid of was letting my subscribers down. I was afraid I wasn’t going to be able to figure it out.”
 
When running your business, you’re going to run into situations like this from time to time. It could be a huge jump in subscribers, or it could be an item not being ready for a launch, or really any number of things! In these situations, it’s first important to stay calm and don’t stress yourself out. In her situation, Cheryl reached out to the Launch Your Box community and even chatted with me about what was happening. Seek out support where you can because we’re all ready to help!
 
Second, you’re going to have to stretch out those problem-solver muscles we’ve been talking about. The truth is that with success comes challenges, and the thing about challenges is that they’re only waiting for a creative solution. Be flexible with your operations, be ready to change things that aren’t working, and reach out to your community if you need that added support. And remember, communication with your subscribers is always a must!
 
“When things go wrong, and spoiler alert, that's probably a lot of the time! You know, it's never perfect, it's always a little bit messy, especially at the beginning. So, if you find people that want to go on the journey with you, it's the best thing you can do.” – Cheryl
 
You can find Cheryl and her yARNaBLE Box at https://www.instagram.com/hypnoticyarn/
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 05 May 2021 08:44:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Afraid of Having 700 Subscribers?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>16</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cf39fdf8-b0bf-11ed-b273-fba4834a5ca4/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>When you’re first starting out with your subscription box, you might feel like you’ll take all the subscribers you can get. But that feeling changes when you hit your first hundred and keeps growing. What might have worked for your business at 50...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>When you’re first starting out with your subscription box, you might feel like you’ll take all the subscribers you can get. But that feeling changes when you hit your first hundred and keeps growing. What might have worked for your business at 50 subscribers might not work at 250, let alone 700! Such tremendous and scary growth happened to Cheryl Ham, founder of yARnaBLE subscription box, who is my guest this week to talk about how to approach sudden growth and how to avoid getting overwhelmed by success.
 
Be Ready to be Caught Off Guard
 
Having rapid success may seem like a problem you would like to have but believe me when I say that even if you are happy when it happens, it can seem so overwhelming that you might want to try and stop the orders from coming in. That’s how Cheryl felt when more orders came in than she had prepared for, because she was afraid that she couldn’t maintain the type of service she wanted for her subscribers. “What I was really afraid of was letting my subscribers down. I was afraid I wasn’t going to be able to figure it out.”
 
When running your business, you’re going to run into situations like this from time to time. It could be a huge jump in subscribers, or it could be an item not being ready for a launch, or really any number of things! In these situations, it’s first important to stay calm and don’t stress yourself out. In her situation, Cheryl reached out to the Launch Your Box community and even chatted with me about what was happening. Seek out support where you can because we’re all ready to help!
 
Second, you’re going to have to stretch out those problem-solver muscles we’ve been talking about. The truth is that with success comes challenges, and the thing about challenges is that they’re only waiting for a creative solution. Be flexible with your operations, be ready to change things that aren’t working, and reach out to your community if you need that added support. And remember, communication with your subscribers is always a must!
 
“When things go wrong, and spoiler alert, that's probably a lot of the time! You know, it's never perfect, it's always a little bit messy, especially at the beginning. So, if you find people that want to go on the journey with you, it's the best thing you can do.” – Cheryl
 
You can find Cheryl and her yARNaBLE Box at https://www.instagram.com/hypnoticyarn/
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>When you’re first starting out with your subscription box, you might feel like you’ll take all the subscribers you can get. But that feeling changes when you hit your first hundred and keeps growing. What might have worked for your business at 50 subscribers might not work at 250, let alone 700! Such tremendous and scary growth happened to Cheryl Ham, founder of yARnaBLE subscription box, who is my guest this week to talk about how to approach sudden growth and how to avoid getting overwhelmed by success.</p><p> </p><p>Be Ready to be Caught Off Guard</p><p> </p><p>Having rapid success may seem like a problem you would like to have but believe me when I say that even if you are happy when it happens, it can seem so overwhelming that you might want to try and stop the orders from coming in. That’s how Cheryl felt when more orders came in than she had prepared for, because she was afraid that she couldn’t maintain the type of service she wanted for her subscribers. “What I was really afraid of was letting my subscribers down. I was afraid I wasn’t going to be able to figure it out.”</p><p> </p><p>When running your business, you’re going to run into situations like this from time to time. It could be a huge jump in subscribers, or it could be an item not being ready for a launch, or really any number of things! In these situations, it’s first important to stay calm and don’t stress yourself out. In her situation, Cheryl reached out to the Launch Your Box community and even chatted with me about what was happening. Seek out support where you can because we’re all ready to help!</p><p> </p><p>Second, you’re going to have to stretch out those problem-solver muscles we’ve been talking about. The truth is that with success comes challenges, and the thing about challenges is that they’re only waiting for a creative solution. Be flexible with your operations, be ready to change things that aren’t working, and reach out to your community if you need that added support. And remember, communication with your subscribers is always a must!</p><p> </p><p>“When things go wrong, and spoiler alert, that's probably a lot of the time! You know, it's never perfect, it's always a little bit messy, especially at the beginning. So, if you find people that want to go on the journey with you, it's the best thing you can do.” – Cheryl</p><p> </p><p>You can find Cheryl and her yARNaBLE Box at <a href="https://www.instagram.com/hypnoticyarn/">https://www.instagram.com/hypnoticyarn/</a></p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2069</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3dba8b91-6b1b-4f91-87a5-a93ddb0a5b09]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5644136703.mp3?updated=1701786842" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>015: 3 Ways to Help Reduce Product Issues</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/015-3-ways-to-help-reduce-product-issues</link>
      <description>One of the main concerns for us in the subscription box business is product supply. Who we’re getting it from and on what kind of timeline can create a huge amount of stress when things don’t go according to plan. Things have only gotten crazier with the global pandemic showing us how fragile our product pipeline really is.
 
Let’s face it: we’re a product driven business with very little wiggle room for shortages. More than likely, even if you do have your shipping schedule figured out you’ll be working with tight deadlines to keep. With everything that’s going on, how can we as subscription box founders have more control over our product supply to avoid those shortages? Here are 3 ways I’ve learned to help manage those product headaches.
 
Use Multiple Vendors
 
I want you to ask yourself: can I use multiple vendors for the products in my box so that you’re not relying on one company for your success? It may sound like extra work to seek out and build multiple relationships with vendors to create your box, but it’s more than worth it to avoid the heartache when one of those vendors can’t come through for you. I can almost guarantee that there will be a time when you’ve carefully curated a box but one of those unique items is either late or won’t be able to come in the quantities that you need. You’ll have to go into problem solving mode to reorganize that box, but sometimes that can lead to an even better outcome as long as you have the flexibility of not having to rely on just one vendor to complete your order.
 
Work on Multiple Boxes at a Time
 
One of the benefits of having a schedule and having regular subscribers to your box is that you know you’ll have orders coming in months down the line. This gives you the freedom to be proactive and build multiple boxes ahead of time, and having multiple boxes gives you more flexibility when a product is held up. Being able to switch boxes if you need to will give you much more freedom and peace of mind if and when a product that just can’t be replaced is held up for whatever reason.
 
Make Your Deadline Earlier Than You Actually Need
 
Finally, you won’t want to be creating your box right before it’s time to ship out. You should always have a deadline on when your boxes are built well in advance on the shipping date. There are a number of reasons why you would want to do this, but primarily because it will save you on having to delay a shipment because of a lack of product. For me, with the global pandemic slowing everything down, I try to have the deadline for all my product in on a box at least 30 days before I even think about shipping them. This saves me so much stress and gives me the breathing room to adapt to any problems that might happen.
 
Remember, it’s not if a problem is going to happen, it’s when, but when it does happen doesn’t mean it’s the end of the world! If you do have problems, remember to always be transparent with your subscribers. But having the right mindset will help you have the preparation needed to solve any problems that pop up. Multiple vendors, working on multiple boxes, and having early deadlines will help keep you on schedule and get those boxes out to your eager subscribers.
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.
 
Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 28 Apr 2021 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>3 Ways to Help Reduce Product Issues</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>15</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cf4fde02-b0bf-11ed-b273-036f37b95750/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>One of the main concerns for us in the subscription box business is product supply. Who we’re getting it from and on what kind of timeline can create a huge amount of stress when things don’t go according to plan. Things have only gotten crazier...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>One of the main concerns for us in the subscription box business is product supply. Who we’re getting it from and on what kind of timeline can create a huge amount of stress when things don’t go according to plan. Things have only gotten crazier with the global pandemic showing us how fragile our product pipeline really is.
 
Let’s face it: we’re a product driven business with very little wiggle room for shortages. More than likely, even if you do have your shipping schedule figured out you’ll be working with tight deadlines to keep. With everything that’s going on, how can we as subscription box founders have more control over our product supply to avoid those shortages? Here are 3 ways I’ve learned to help manage those product headaches.
 
Use Multiple Vendors
 
I want you to ask yourself: can I use multiple vendors for the products in my box so that you’re not relying on one company for your success? It may sound like extra work to seek out and build multiple relationships with vendors to create your box, but it’s more than worth it to avoid the heartache when one of those vendors can’t come through for you. I can almost guarantee that there will be a time when you’ve carefully curated a box but one of those unique items is either late or won’t be able to come in the quantities that you need. You’ll have to go into problem solving mode to reorganize that box, but sometimes that can lead to an even better outcome as long as you have the flexibility of not having to rely on just one vendor to complete your order.
 
Work on Multiple Boxes at a Time
 
One of the benefits of having a schedule and having regular subscribers to your box is that you know you’ll have orders coming in months down the line. This gives you the freedom to be proactive and build multiple boxes ahead of time, and having multiple boxes gives you more flexibility when a product is held up. Being able to switch boxes if you need to will give you much more freedom and peace of mind if and when a product that just can’t be replaced is held up for whatever reason.
 
Make Your Deadline Earlier Than You Actually Need
 
Finally, you won’t want to be creating your box right before it’s time to ship out. You should always have a deadline on when your boxes are built well in advance on the shipping date. There are a number of reasons why you would want to do this, but primarily because it will save you on having to delay a shipment because of a lack of product. For me, with the global pandemic slowing everything down, I try to have the deadline for all my product in on a box at least 30 days before I even think about shipping them. This saves me so much stress and gives me the breathing room to adapt to any problems that might happen.
 
Remember, it’s not if a problem is going to happen, it’s when, but when it does happen doesn’t mean it’s the end of the world! If you do have problems, remember to always be transparent with your subscribers. But having the right mindset will help you have the preparation needed to solve any problems that pop up. Multiple vendors, working on multiple boxes, and having early deadlines will help keep you on schedule and get those boxes out to your eager subscribers.
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.
 
Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams
Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>One of the main concerns for us in the subscription box business is product supply. Who we’re getting it from and on what kind of timeline can create a huge amount of stress when things don’t go according to plan. Things have only gotten crazier with the global pandemic showing us how fragile our product pipeline really is.</p><p> </p><p>Let’s face it: we’re a product driven business with very little wiggle room for shortages. More than likely, even if you do have your shipping schedule figured out you’ll be working with tight deadlines to keep. With everything that’s going on, how can we as subscription box founders have more control over our product supply to avoid those shortages? Here are 3 ways I’ve learned to help manage those product headaches.</p><p> </p><ol><li>Use Multiple Vendors</li></ol><p> </p><p>I want you to ask yourself: can I use multiple vendors for the products in my box so that you’re not relying on one company for your success? It may sound like extra work to seek out and build multiple relationships with vendors to create your box, but it’s more than worth it to avoid the heartache when one of those vendors can’t come through for you. I can almost guarantee that there will be a time when you’ve carefully curated a box but one of those unique items is either late or won’t be able to come in the quantities that you need. You’ll have to go into problem solving mode to reorganize that box, but sometimes that can lead to an even better outcome as long as you have the flexibility of not having to rely on just one vendor to complete your order.</p><p> </p><ol><li>Work on Multiple Boxes at a Time</li></ol><p> </p><p>One of the benefits of having a schedule and having regular subscribers to your box is that you know you’ll have orders coming in months down the line. This gives you the freedom to be proactive and build multiple boxes ahead of time, and having multiple boxes gives you more flexibility when a product is held up. Being able to switch boxes if you need to will give you much more freedom and peace of mind if and when a product that just can’t be replaced is held up for whatever reason.</p><p> </p><ol><li>Make Your Deadline Earlier Than You Actually Need</li></ol><p> </p><p>Finally, you won’t want to be creating your box right before it’s time to ship out. You should always have a deadline on when your boxes are built well in advance on the shipping date. There are a number of reasons why you would want to do this, but primarily because it will save you on having to delay a shipment because of a lack of product. For me, with the global pandemic slowing everything down, I try to have the deadline for all my product in on a box at least 30 days before I even think about shipping them. This saves me so much stress and gives me the breathing room to adapt to any problems that might happen.</p><p> </p><p>Remember, it’s not if a problem is going to happen, it’s when, but when it does happen doesn’t mean it’s the end of the world! If you do have problems, remember to always be transparent with your subscribers. But having the right mindset will help you have the preparation needed to solve any problems that pop up. Multiple vendors, working on multiple boxes, and having early deadlines will help keep you on schedule and get those boxes out to your eager subscribers.</p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p> </p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1243</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[77e59c1a-0ec8-410e-9b0e-d0ccece8ff79]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO5975198837.mp3?updated=1701786890" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>014: 4 Ways to Build Your Audience with Tiffany from Good Habit Box Co.</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/014-4-ways-to-build-your-audience-with-tiffany-from-good-habit-box-co</link>
      <description>You have the subscription box idea, now it’s time to build the audience who will actually subscribe to your box. Building an audience from the ground up can seem a little overwhelming. This week I’m speaking with Tiffany LeBaron Ray, founder of the Good Habit Box Co. with her good habits and practices she used to build her subscription audience from 6 at launch to 70 in a short amount of time!
 
When Tiffany decided to start the Good Habit Box, she was already having success with her other Etsy brands. But she realized that the audience that she had built for Etsy were not necessarily compatible with her new idea. This gave her the opportunity to try some new ways to build her audience, and she found 4 ways that helped her get to where she wanted to be quickly.
 
Have a Giveaway
 
After creating a Facebook and Instagram page, she decided to pay for some ads to promote her box and drive people to her pages. “The very first thing I did was I made a mockup of my box: this is what my box would look like.” With her mockup she advertised a giveaway contest for people who liked her social media pages. Giveaways like this can build upon themselves and help generate interest in places you might not be able to reach through your personal or friends and family reshares. The way Tiffany did it does have a price tag attached to it, so make sure if you’re going to go this route to look for the results that you want before spending more money.
 
Consistent Posting
 
It’s so important that when you start your new pages and start getting an audience you consistently post to your page’s multiple times per day. “I would post things that would help my target customers: someone that's motivated, that's inspired. I want to help someone that makes big goals and small goals; someone that cares about those things.” Tiffany posted at least 3 times a day to keep her engagement up and attract anyone who might want to like her pages and would reply to any comments that came her way.
 
Make Connections
 
Chances are there are lots of other people out there with products you can either use in the future or who have similar ideas or values to yours. Making connections with those people can pay off when you feature their products on your page, or they feature yours on their pages. “When I would post a picture of my box and all the pretty things in it, I would take the time and tag all of those shops, I tag them I give them a shout out. And what that's done is some of those small shops even some of the bigger companies have in turn reached out to me and given me a shout out on their page.”
 
Partner with an Influencer
 
A great way to reach an engaged audience is to partner with an Influencer for an unboxing. Finding an influencer who shares your values and caters to the same type of audience that you’re looking to build requires a little research and due diligence, but it can pay off in great ways. “I found this influencer on YouTube, and what caught my eye was that she would do these massive unboxings of boxes that she's never seen before. She also caught my eye because she was so friendly and had almost 100,000 followers on YouTube.” Tiffany sent her a box and a little while later she had people emailing her asking if she still had the box that she had sent to the influencer. She gained quite a few followers from that one box she sent out!
 
You can find Tiffany and her Good Habit Box at https://www.instagram.com/goodhabitbox/
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 21 Apr 2021 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>4 Ways to Build Your Audience with Tiffany from Good Habit Box Co.</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>14</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cf649734-b0bf-11ed-b273-0f15ec22ba3e/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>You have the subscription box idea, now it’s time to build the audience who will actually subscribe to your box. Building an audience from the ground up can seem a little overwhelming. This week I’m speaking with Tiffany LeBaron Ray, founder of...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>You have the subscription box idea, now it’s time to build the audience who will actually subscribe to your box. Building an audience from the ground up can seem a little overwhelming. This week I’m speaking with Tiffany LeBaron Ray, founder of the Good Habit Box Co. with her good habits and practices she used to build her subscription audience from 6 at launch to 70 in a short amount of time!
 
When Tiffany decided to start the Good Habit Box, she was already having success with her other Etsy brands. But she realized that the audience that she had built for Etsy were not necessarily compatible with her new idea. This gave her the opportunity to try some new ways to build her audience, and she found 4 ways that helped her get to where she wanted to be quickly.
 
Have a Giveaway
 
After creating a Facebook and Instagram page, she decided to pay for some ads to promote her box and drive people to her pages. “The very first thing I did was I made a mockup of my box: this is what my box would look like.” With her mockup she advertised a giveaway contest for people who liked her social media pages. Giveaways like this can build upon themselves and help generate interest in places you might not be able to reach through your personal or friends and family reshares. The way Tiffany did it does have a price tag attached to it, so make sure if you’re going to go this route to look for the results that you want before spending more money.
 
Consistent Posting
 
It’s so important that when you start your new pages and start getting an audience you consistently post to your page’s multiple times per day. “I would post things that would help my target customers: someone that's motivated, that's inspired. I want to help someone that makes big goals and small goals; someone that cares about those things.” Tiffany posted at least 3 times a day to keep her engagement up and attract anyone who might want to like her pages and would reply to any comments that came her way.
 
Make Connections
 
Chances are there are lots of other people out there with products you can either use in the future or who have similar ideas or values to yours. Making connections with those people can pay off when you feature their products on your page, or they feature yours on their pages. “When I would post a picture of my box and all the pretty things in it, I would take the time and tag all of those shops, I tag them I give them a shout out. And what that's done is some of those small shops even some of the bigger companies have in turn reached out to me and given me a shout out on their page.”
 
Partner with an Influencer
 
A great way to reach an engaged audience is to partner with an Influencer for an unboxing. Finding an influencer who shares your values and caters to the same type of audience that you’re looking to build requires a little research and due diligence, but it can pay off in great ways. “I found this influencer on YouTube, and what caught my eye was that she would do these massive unboxings of boxes that she's never seen before. She also caught my eye because she was so friendly and had almost 100,000 followers on YouTube.” Tiffany sent her a box and a little while later she had people emailing her asking if she still had the box that she had sent to the influencer. She gained quite a few followers from that one box she sent out!
 
You can find Tiffany and her Good Habit Box at https://www.instagram.com/goodhabitbox/
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>You have the subscription box idea, now it’s time to build the audience who will actually subscribe to your box. Building an audience from the ground up can seem a little overwhelming. This week I’m speaking with Tiffany LeBaron Ray, founder of the Good Habit Box Co. with her good habits and practices she used to build her subscription audience from 6 at launch to 70 in a short amount of time!</p><p> </p><p>When Tiffany decided to start the Good Habit Box, she was already having success with her other Etsy brands. But she realized that the audience that she had built for Etsy were not necessarily compatible with her new idea. This gave her the opportunity to try some new ways to build her audience, and she found 4 ways that helped her get to where she wanted to be quickly.</p><p> </p><ol><li>Have a Giveaway</li></ol><p> </p><p>After creating a Facebook and Instagram page, she decided to pay for some ads to promote her box and drive people to her pages. “The very first thing I did was I made a mockup of my box: this is what my box would look like.” With her mockup she advertised a giveaway contest for people who liked her social media pages. Giveaways like this can build upon themselves and help generate interest in places you might not be able to reach through your personal or friends and family reshares. The way Tiffany did it does have a price tag attached to it, so make sure if you’re going to go this route to look for the results that you want before spending more money.</p><p> </p><ol><li>Consistent Posting</li></ol><p> </p><p>It’s so important that when you start your new pages and start getting an audience you consistently post to your page’s multiple times per day. “I would post things that would help my target customers: someone that's motivated, that's inspired. I want to help someone that makes big goals and small goals; someone that cares about those things.” Tiffany posted at least 3 times a day to keep her engagement up and attract anyone who might want to like her pages and would reply to any comments that came her way.</p><p> </p><ol><li>Make Connections</li></ol><p> </p><p>Chances are there are lots of other people out there with products you can either use in the future or who have similar ideas or values to yours. Making connections with those people can pay off when you feature their products on your page, or they feature yours on their pages. “When I would post a picture of my box and all the pretty things in it, I would take the time and tag all of those shops, I tag them I give them a shout out. And what that's done is some of those small shops even some of the bigger companies have in turn reached out to me and given me a shout out on their page.”</p><p> </p><ol><li>Partner with an Influencer</li></ol><p> </p><p>A great way to reach an engaged audience is to partner with an Influencer for an unboxing. Finding an influencer who shares your values and caters to the same type of audience that you’re looking to build requires a little research and due diligence, but it can pay off in great ways. “I found this influencer on YouTube, and what caught my eye was that she would do these massive unboxings of boxes that she's never seen before. She also caught my eye because she was so friendly and had almost 100,000 followers on YouTube.” Tiffany sent her a box and a little while later she had people emailing her asking if she still had the box that she had sent to the influencer. She gained quite a few followers from that one box she sent out!</p><p> </p><p>You can find Tiffany and her Good Habit Box at <a href="https://www.instagram.com/goodhabitbox/">https://www.instagram.com/goodhabitbox/</a></p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1493</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[3f6db755-61ad-4aab-8124-88f2b0d516fc]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3685806275.mp3?updated=1701787072" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>013: A Passion for Animals Turns into 500 Monthly Subscribers</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/013-a-passion-for-animals-turns-into-500-monthly-subscribers</link>
      <description>I love the whole community of Launch Your Box for many reasons, but one of the things that makes it so special is how unique some of the subscription boxes can be. This week I’m speaking with Nicole Jenney, founder of the GPig Box, a subscription box for guinea pigs and their owners. Her story on how she came to create a box for Guinea Pigs is so fun and such a great example of how the opportunity to create a box to fill a need can really be found anywhere.
 
— Find Your Passion and Build the Audience —
 
When Nicole first had the idea for a box, she did her due diligence researching what was already out there and saw that there was an opening for gifts for both guinea pigs and their owners. But even after she started, she listened to her audience when they told her that they wanted more from the box than she initially started with.
 
“We got all this feedback that people want to double the stuff and they wanted more. So, we created a whole other box and another line for them, and that's been just as successful.” – Nicole
 
Remember, your audience will tell you what they want and what they’re willing to pay for. As long as you’re listening, you can find areas to expand into and really create that exclusive experience for them.
 
— Managing Growth —
 
The GPig box has seen amazing growth from just one box when they launched to 500 subscriptions in four months! Nichole has learned quite a bit from that growth in being able to fulfill each subscription in a timely manner. At the beginning, her focus was on having no waste product, which is a good habit to have. But it did create some scheduling problems for her when scheduling out when to send boxes to her members.
 
“We call this growing pain of small business, but it's a good problem to have. And I think we wouldn't do it any other way. But now to be able to adapt and change is most important and have an open mind of ‘maybe this isn't working anymore.’ But we have to stay proactive and stay ahead of it.” – Nicole
 
Growth is a good thing to have, but it can present new challenges that can get out of hand if they’re not managed. Figuring out what works for you and what’s manageable for your business is key to being able to maintain the high level of customer service that’s going to make you stand out.
 
You can find Nicole and the GPig Box at: https://gpigbox.com/
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 14 Apr 2021 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>A Passion for Animals Turns into 500 Monthly Subscribers</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>13</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cf7a88f0-b0bf-11ed-b273-5bcf6a9ec3d2/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>I love the whole community of Launch Your Box for many reasons, but one of the things that makes it so special is how unique some of the subscription boxes can be. This week I’m speaking with Nicole Jenney, founder of the GPig Box, a subscription...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>I love the whole community of Launch Your Box for many reasons, but one of the things that makes it so special is how unique some of the subscription boxes can be. This week I’m speaking with Nicole Jenney, founder of the GPig Box, a subscription box for guinea pigs and their owners. Her story on how she came to create a box for Guinea Pigs is so fun and such a great example of how the opportunity to create a box to fill a need can really be found anywhere.
 
— Find Your Passion and Build the Audience —
 
When Nicole first had the idea for a box, she did her due diligence researching what was already out there and saw that there was an opening for gifts for both guinea pigs and their owners. But even after she started, she listened to her audience when they told her that they wanted more from the box than she initially started with.
 
“We got all this feedback that people want to double the stuff and they wanted more. So, we created a whole other box and another line for them, and that's been just as successful.” – Nicole
 
Remember, your audience will tell you what they want and what they’re willing to pay for. As long as you’re listening, you can find areas to expand into and really create that exclusive experience for them.
 
— Managing Growth —
 
The GPig box has seen amazing growth from just one box when they launched to 500 subscriptions in four months! Nichole has learned quite a bit from that growth in being able to fulfill each subscription in a timely manner. At the beginning, her focus was on having no waste product, which is a good habit to have. But it did create some scheduling problems for her when scheduling out when to send boxes to her members.
 
“We call this growing pain of small business, but it's a good problem to have. And I think we wouldn't do it any other way. But now to be able to adapt and change is most important and have an open mind of ‘maybe this isn't working anymore.’ But we have to stay proactive and stay ahead of it.” – Nicole
 
Growth is a good thing to have, but it can present new challenges that can get out of hand if they’re not managed. Figuring out what works for you and what’s manageable for your business is key to being able to maintain the high level of customer service that’s going to make you stand out.
 
You can find Nicole and the GPig Box at: https://gpigbox.com/
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I love the whole community of Launch Your Box for many reasons, but one of the things that makes it so special is how unique some of the subscription boxes can be. This week I’m speaking with Nicole Jenney, founder of the GPig Box, a subscription box for guinea pigs and their owners. Her story on how she came to create a box for Guinea Pigs is so fun and such a great example of how the opportunity to create a box to fill a need can really be found anywhere.</p><p> </p><p>— Find Your Passion and Build the Audience —</p><p> </p><p>When Nicole first had the idea for a box, she did her due diligence researching what was already out there and saw that there was an opening for gifts for both guinea pigs and their owners. But even after she started, she listened to her audience when they told her that they wanted more from the box than she initially started with.</p><p> </p><p>“We got all this feedback that people want to double the stuff and they wanted more. So, we created a whole other box and another line for them, and that's been just as successful.” – Nicole</p><p> </p><p>Remember, your audience will tell you what they want and what they’re willing to pay for. As long as you’re listening, you can find areas to expand into and really create that exclusive experience for them.</p><p> </p><p>— Managing Growth —</p><p> </p><p>The GPig box has seen amazing growth from just one box when they launched to 500 subscriptions in four months! Nichole has learned quite a bit from that growth in being able to fulfill each subscription in a timely manner. At the beginning, her focus was on having no waste product, which is a good habit to have. But it did create some scheduling problems for her when scheduling out when to send boxes to her members.</p><p> </p><p>“We call this growing pain of small business, but it's a good problem to have. And I think we wouldn't do it any other way. But now to be able to adapt and change is most important and have an open mind of ‘maybe this isn't working anymore.’ But we have to stay proactive and stay ahead of it.” – Nicole</p><p> </p><p>Growth is a good thing to have, but it can present new challenges that can get out of hand if they’re not managed. Figuring out what works for you and what’s manageable for your business is key to being able to maintain the high level of customer service that’s going to make you stand out.</p><p> </p><p>You can find Nicole and the GPig Box at: <a href="https://gpigbox.com/">https://gpigbox.com/</a></p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1534</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[da2d4148-5426-4a0c-9f89-ac3fd1083ccc]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6300479687.mp3?updated=1701787105" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>012: How Do I Compete with Big Box Companies? | Launch Your Subscription Box with Sarah Williams</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/012-how-do-i-compete-with-big-box-companies-launch-your-subscription-box-with-sarah-williams</link>
      <description>Hey everybody! This week I’m going over a question that gets asked every time people start to think about launching their own subscription box: how do I compete against the big box companies? I asked myself this same question when I started my box and thinking through it is what pushed me to finally start my box. Let’s dive in!
 
— Quality over Quantity —
 
Comparing yourself to a big box company is like staring into a black hole. They have the money and the people to handle thousands of orders from thousands of people. But think back to our previous episodes: that’s not what your box was about in the first place! We’re in the business of creating an exclusive VIP experience for our audience. That’s what we’re good at, and that’s what makes us stand out.
 
Think about McDonalds food compared to your favorite local restaurant: chances are there’s no comparison in quality of food and experience in dining. Comparing yourself to a big company is a losing game, so stop doing it. If you need to, unfollow those accounts that make you feel less than because we’re in the business of building real-life connections that they don’t have. Comparison is the thief of dreams, so don’t give it that power.
 
— Get in the Right Mindset —
 



Stop Comparing Yourself. Opportunity is out there for your specialty box. Don’t let those other accounts stifle your spirit; if you need to, unfollow/hide/block those accounts that make you feel less than



Create an Experience for Your Audience. Your personal connection with your audience is your greatest asset. Remember, they’ll tell you what they want so you can give them that VIP experience.



Create Goals for yourself to remind you why you started. Crunch the numbers and figure out how many boxes you would need to send out to even out your expenses. Let your personal goals for your business remind you why you started in the first place.



 
Beginnings can be messy, but that’s ok! Every great thing has to start somewhere. The right time to start is right now. Get your mindset right and you’re on your way, one box at a time.
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 08 Apr 2021 07:08:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How Do I Compete with Big Box Companies? | Launch Your Subscription Box with Sarah Williams </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>12</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cf8f8340-b0bf-11ed-b273-7317344a0bc3/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Hey everybody! This week I’m going over a question that gets asked every time people start to think about launching their own subscription box: how do I compete against the big box companies? I asked myself this same question when I started my box...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Hey everybody! This week I’m going over a question that gets asked every time people start to think about launching their own subscription box: how do I compete against the big box companies? I asked myself this same question when I started my box and thinking through it is what pushed me to finally start my box. Let’s dive in!
 
— Quality over Quantity —
 
Comparing yourself to a big box company is like staring into a black hole. They have the money and the people to handle thousands of orders from thousands of people. But think back to our previous episodes: that’s not what your box was about in the first place! We’re in the business of creating an exclusive VIP experience for our audience. That’s what we’re good at, and that’s what makes us stand out.
 
Think about McDonalds food compared to your favorite local restaurant: chances are there’s no comparison in quality of food and experience in dining. Comparing yourself to a big company is a losing game, so stop doing it. If you need to, unfollow those accounts that make you feel less than because we’re in the business of building real-life connections that they don’t have. Comparison is the thief of dreams, so don’t give it that power.
 
— Get in the Right Mindset —
 



Stop Comparing Yourself. Opportunity is out there for your specialty box. Don’t let those other accounts stifle your spirit; if you need to, unfollow/hide/block those accounts that make you feel less than



Create an Experience for Your Audience. Your personal connection with your audience is your greatest asset. Remember, they’ll tell you what they want so you can give them that VIP experience.



Create Goals for yourself to remind you why you started. Crunch the numbers and figure out how many boxes you would need to send out to even out your expenses. Let your personal goals for your business remind you why you started in the first place.



 
Beginnings can be messy, but that’s ok! Every great thing has to start somewhere. The right time to start is right now. Get your mindset right and you’re on your way, one box at a time.
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Hey everybody! This week I’m going over a question that gets asked every time people start to think about launching their own subscription box: how do I compete against the big box companies? I asked myself this same question when I started my box and thinking through it is what pushed me to finally start my box. Let’s dive in!</p><p> </p><p>— Quality over Quantity —</p><p> </p><p>Comparing yourself to a big box company is like staring into a black hole. They have the money and the people to handle thousands of orders from thousands of people. But think back to our previous episodes: that’s not what your box was about in the first place! We’re in the business of creating an exclusive VIP experience for our audience. That’s what we’re good at, and that’s what makes us stand out.</p><p> </p><p>Think about McDonalds food compared to your favorite local restaurant: chances are there’s no comparison in quality of food and experience in dining. Comparing yourself to a big company is a losing game, so stop doing it. If you need to, unfollow those accounts that make you feel less than because we’re in the business of building real-life connections that they don’t have. Comparison is the thief of dreams, so don’t give it that power.</p><p> </p><p>— Get in the Right Mindset —</p><p> </p><ol>
<li><br></li>
<li>Stop Comparing Yourself. Opportunity is out there for your specialty box. Don’t let those other accounts stifle your spirit; if you need to, unfollow/hide/block those accounts that make you feel less than</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Create an Experience for Your Audience. Your personal connection with your audience is your greatest asset. Remember, they’ll tell you what they want so you can give them that VIP experience.</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Create Goals for yourself to remind you why you started. Crunch the numbers and figure out how many boxes you would need to send out to even out your expenses. Let your personal goals for your business remind you why you started in the first place.</li>
<li><br></li>
</ol><p> </p><p>Beginnings can be messy, but that’s ok! Every great thing has to start somewhere. The right time to start is right now. Get your mindset right and you’re on your way, one box at a time.</p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1419</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[657236c8-23d3-4e60-a25f-f792c6602ecc]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO8754104133.mp3?updated=1701787114" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>011: Over 1000 Subscribers in Less Than a Year with Miss Tracy Creates</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/tracy-pounds-of-miss-tracy-creates</link>
      <description>Coaching week just ended and I’m not trying to brag, but I think it went fantastic! For those of you who weren’t able to take part, we did so many interviews with current and former students that really showed how many different ways you can go about doing a subscription box and become successful. For this week’s podcast, I wanted to share with everyone one of my favorite interviews with one of my Launch Your Box members, Tracy from Miss Tracy Creates, whose box is a perfect example of finding “riches in the niches.”
 
— All for One, or One for All? —
 
When considering what to make your box about, you might want to put as many things as you can into it but as we’ve talked about before, this can sometimes water down what your box is actually about. Miss Tracy really nailed that with her box, The Napkin Club. Miss Tracy and her members use paper napkins to create all kinds of different crafts and decorations, and her box helps supply her members with those curated napkins.
 
Instead of her members going out and buying packs of specialized paper napkins that they might only want to use a few of, they trust Miss Tracy to send them the few they need for crafting as well as belonging to a group that helps them create different projects every month. She identified a need in her crafting community that she could fill, and now she’s approaching 1000 members for her specialized business.  
 
Miss Tracy and the Napkin Club are such a great example of how any idea can be turned into a business. There’s no limit of idea that I’ve found that, if thought about correctly, can’t be something that has tremendous opportunity. Think about how you can become the expert in your niche idea, and don’t be afraid to get creative, because the riches really are in the niches!
 
You can find Miss Tracy on Facebook at https://www.facebook.com/misstracycreates
And on Instagram at https://www.instagram.com/misstracycreates/
 
And as always, remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 31 Mar 2021 07:29:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Over 1000 Subscribers in Less Than a Year with Miss Tracy Creates</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>11</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cfa48704-b0bf-11ed-b273-ff8429400660/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Coaching week just ended and I’m not trying to brag, but I think it went fantastic! For those of you who weren’t able to take part, we did so many interviews with current and former students that really showed how many different ways you can go...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Coaching week just ended and I’m not trying to brag, but I think it went fantastic! For those of you who weren’t able to take part, we did so many interviews with current and former students that really showed how many different ways you can go about doing a subscription box and become successful. For this week’s podcast, I wanted to share with everyone one of my favorite interviews with one of my Launch Your Box members, Tracy from Miss Tracy Creates, whose box is a perfect example of finding “riches in the niches.”
 
— All for One, or One for All? —
 
When considering what to make your box about, you might want to put as many things as you can into it but as we’ve talked about before, this can sometimes water down what your box is actually about. Miss Tracy really nailed that with her box, The Napkin Club. Miss Tracy and her members use paper napkins to create all kinds of different crafts and decorations, and her box helps supply her members with those curated napkins.
 
Instead of her members going out and buying packs of specialized paper napkins that they might only want to use a few of, they trust Miss Tracy to send them the few they need for crafting as well as belonging to a group that helps them create different projects every month. She identified a need in her crafting community that she could fill, and now she’s approaching 1000 members for her specialized business.  
 
Miss Tracy and the Napkin Club are such a great example of how any idea can be turned into a business. There’s no limit of idea that I’ve found that, if thought about correctly, can’t be something that has tremendous opportunity. Think about how you can become the expert in your niche idea, and don’t be afraid to get creative, because the riches really are in the niches!
 
You can find Miss Tracy on Facebook at https://www.facebook.com/misstracycreates
And on Instagram at https://www.instagram.com/misstracycreates/
 
And as always, remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Coaching week just ended and I’m not trying to brag, but I think it went fantastic! For those of you who weren’t able to take part, we did so many interviews with current and former students that really showed how many different ways you can go about doing a subscription box and become successful. For this week’s podcast, I wanted to share with everyone one of my favorite interviews with one of my Launch Your Box members, Tracy from Miss Tracy Creates, whose box is a perfect example of finding “riches in the niches.”</p><p> </p><p>— All for One, or One for All? —</p><p> </p><p>When considering what to make your box about, you might want to put as many things as you can into it but as we’ve talked about before, this can sometimes water down what your box is actually about. Miss Tracy really nailed that with her box, The Napkin Club. Miss Tracy and her members use paper napkins to create all kinds of different crafts and decorations, and her box helps supply her members with those curated napkins.</p><p> </p><p>Instead of her members going out and buying packs of specialized paper napkins that they might only want to use a few of, they trust Miss Tracy to send them the few they need for crafting as well as belonging to a group that helps them create different projects every month. She identified a need in her crafting community that she could fill, and now she’s approaching 1000 members for her specialized business.  </p><p> </p><p>Miss Tracy and the Napkin Club are such a great example of how any idea can be turned into a business. There’s no limit of idea that I’ve found that, if thought about correctly, can’t be something that has tremendous opportunity. Think about how you can become the expert in your niche idea, and don’t be afraid to get creative, because the riches really are in the niches!</p><p> </p><p>You can find Miss Tracy on Facebook at <a href="https://www.facebook.com/misstracycreates">https://www.facebook.com/misstracycreates</a></p><p>And on Instagram at <a href="https://www.instagram.com/misstracycreates/">https://www.instagram.com/misstracycreates/</a></p><p> </p><p>And as always, remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>2566</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[275850f4-5558-43fe-ad56-0bb0aa18629b]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2374722726.mp3?updated=1701787134" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>010:From One-Time Boxes to Quarterly Subscriptions with Stacey Collins of Wilshire Collections</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/010-curate-demand-to-create-a-unique-subscription-box-experience-interview-with-stacey-collins-of-wilshire-collections</link>
      <description>This week I’m joined by Stacey Collins, owner of Wilshire Collections and founder of the Décor at your Door Seasonal Subscription box to talk about what release schedule works best for your box? Deciding how many boxes and how frequently you want to release them not only can help you manage your growth but can also fit into the VIP experience you want to create with your members.
 
— What Subscription Fits Your Box Idea? —
 
While we mostly talk about starting off on a monthly subscription schedule, it might not always be the best fit for your idea. Stacey started out sending the Décor at your Door box in one off sales per season to fit with what she was most well-known for: seasonal decoration. “So, I thought, let's try a Spring box, a Summer box, a Fall box, and a Christmas box. And I was selling those just as a one off not as a true subscription at that time.”
 
Keeping the same seasonal schedule when she did transition to a subscription allowed Stacey to maintain the same experience her members appreciated about her business. When considering what would be best for your idea, consider not only what you can reasonably take on, but also what might fit with the aesthetic of your business.
 
— Curate Demand to Create a Unique Experience —
 
The great thing about subscription boxes is how every part of them can be tailored to make a more exclusive experience for your members. Everything from the box, the packing, the wrapping, and everything inside can make for that VIP experience, and when the box arrives is no different. Remember to listen to what your customers love about your box, and don’t be afraid to try something new to make their experience memorable.
 
“I knew that my ladies wanted this. If you know that you have a good idea, that your customers want this, don't overthink it. Do it and you're going to figure out the rest.” - Stacey
 
You can find Stacey and her Décor at your Door box at https://www.wilshirecollections.com/.
Also, on Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/wilshirecollections
And Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/wilshire_collections/
 
And as always, remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Mar 2021 05:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>From One-Time Boxes to Quarterly Subscriptions with Stacey Collins of Wilshire Collections</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>10</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cfbb7fea-b0bf-11ed-b273-bb7ccd80c8da/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week I’m joined by Stacey Collins, owner of Wilshire Collections and founder of the Décor at your Door Seasonal Subscription box to talk about what release schedule works best for your box? Deciding how many boxes and how frequently you want...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>This week I’m joined by Stacey Collins, owner of Wilshire Collections and founder of the Décor at your Door Seasonal Subscription box to talk about what release schedule works best for your box? Deciding how many boxes and how frequently you want to release them not only can help you manage your growth but can also fit into the VIP experience you want to create with your members.
 
— What Subscription Fits Your Box Idea? —
 
While we mostly talk about starting off on a monthly subscription schedule, it might not always be the best fit for your idea. Stacey started out sending the Décor at your Door box in one off sales per season to fit with what she was most well-known for: seasonal decoration. “So, I thought, let's try a Spring box, a Summer box, a Fall box, and a Christmas box. And I was selling those just as a one off not as a true subscription at that time.”
 
Keeping the same seasonal schedule when she did transition to a subscription allowed Stacey to maintain the same experience her members appreciated about her business. When considering what would be best for your idea, consider not only what you can reasonably take on, but also what might fit with the aesthetic of your business.
 
— Curate Demand to Create a Unique Experience —
 
The great thing about subscription boxes is how every part of them can be tailored to make a more exclusive experience for your members. Everything from the box, the packing, the wrapping, and everything inside can make for that VIP experience, and when the box arrives is no different. Remember to listen to what your customers love about your box, and don’t be afraid to try something new to make their experience memorable.
 
“I knew that my ladies wanted this. If you know that you have a good idea, that your customers want this, don't overthink it. Do it and you're going to figure out the rest.” - Stacey
 
You can find Stacey and her Décor at your Door box at https://www.wilshirecollections.com/.
Also, on Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/wilshirecollections
And Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/wilshire_collections/
 
And as always, remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week I’m joined by Stacey Collins, owner of Wilshire Collections and founder of the Décor at your Door Seasonal Subscription box to talk about what release schedule works best for your box? Deciding how many boxes and how frequently you want to release them not only can help you manage your growth but can also fit into the VIP experience you want to create with your members.</p><p> </p><p>— What Subscription Fits Your Box Idea? —</p><p> </p><p>While we mostly talk about starting off on a monthly subscription schedule, it might not always be the best fit for your idea. Stacey started out sending the Décor at your Door box in one off sales per season to fit with what she was most well-known for: seasonal decoration. “So, I thought, let's try a Spring box, a Summer box, a Fall box, and a Christmas box. And I was selling those just as a one off not as a true subscription at that time.”</p><p> </p><p>Keeping the same seasonal schedule when she did transition to a subscription allowed Stacey to maintain the same experience her members appreciated about her business. When considering what would be best for your idea, consider not only what you can reasonably take on, but also what might fit with the aesthetic of your business.</p><p> </p><p>— Curate Demand to Create a Unique Experience —</p><p> </p><p>The great thing about subscription boxes is how every part of them can be tailored to make a more exclusive experience for your members. Everything from the box, the packing, the wrapping, and everything inside can make for that VIP experience, and when the box arrives is no different. Remember to listen to what your customers love about your box, and don’t be afraid to try something new to make their experience memorable.</p><p> </p><p>“I knew that my ladies wanted this. If you know that you have a good idea, that your customers want this, don't overthink it. Do it and you're going to figure out the rest.” - Stacey</p><p> </p><p>You can find Stacey and her Décor at your Door box at <a href="https://www.wilshirecollections.com/">https://www.wilshirecollections.com/</a>.</p><p>Also, on Facebook: <a href="https://www.facebook.com/wilshirecollections">https://www.facebook.com/wilshirecollections</a></p><p>And Instagram: <a href="https://www.instagram.com/wilshire_collections/">https://www.instagram.com/wilshire_collections/</a></p><p> </p><p>And as always, remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! You can also get on my waitlist for my subscription box course at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1186</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[8b6151bb-27ab-4d84-b298-c8ea801715b8]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO2759362698.mp3?updated=1701787147" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>009: Why am I Scared to Show Up Live? | Build an Audience for Your Subscription Box with Sarah Williams</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/episode-009</link>
      <description>Does the idea of pressing the button to go Live on social media make you sick to your stomach? Does the thought of being an influencer for your own business sound confusing and strange? This week’s podcast is all about how to overcome those feelings and use Live sessions to grow your subscription base.
 
People Need to Know You to Trust You
 
Social media allows us to reach people in a way never thought of before, and especially in the last year it’s become more and more important to people to be a part of something that they can be personal with. When you’re building your audience and signing up those subscribers to your box, you might find your numbers coming in waves until eventually it plateaus. That’s what I found when I tried to grow my subscriber base; people were following me but not signing up for the subscription commitment.
 
Going Live was the answer to getting more engagement with my page and my products. For most you, the idea of hosting a Live session on Facebook or Instagram may seem like something you’d much rather avoid because it’s embarrassing or because you don’t think you’re interesting enough. But the truth is in the numbers: without going Live and thereby creating a personal relationship with your audience, you’ll find growing your subscription base to be nearly impossible.
 
The Creating Connections Challenge
 
To help boost those engagement numbers, I want to pose a challenge to you: go to your Facebook Insights page and note your Post Reach and Engagements for the last 28 days. We’re going to use those numbers as a starting point. Next, schedule one Live session each week for the next 4 weeks. If you’re already doing Live sessions, I want you to do two.
 
Here are 5 strategies to help you get the most out of those Live sessions:
 



Do something for yourself to help boost your confidence. Get new clothes, style your hair, anything that will help you get in front of the camera.



Have some friends join you live session to help ask some important questions to get the conversation going, and to give you support while you’re Live.



Write out some talking points that you want to get across to your audience. Having an outline on what you want to talk about can keep you on task and keep you from floundering.



Engage with your audience. Whether it’s one person or a hundred, they’re there to be more personal with you because they like what you’re about.  



Set a time and a date for your live sessions and send it out so you’ll stick with it. Make it at a time and place when you are the most comfortable.



 
Before too long, going Live will be just another part of your business and who knows, it could end up being one of your favorite things to do with your audience. Have fun and keep with it!
 
Wondering if the subscription box is right for you? Join my $10 coaching week from March 21st through the 26th. I'm going to show you how to develop your idea into a plan. Sign up today at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.
 
And as always, remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review!

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 17 Mar 2021 06:22:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why am I Scared to Show Up Live? | Build an Audience for Your Subscription Box with Sarah Williams</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>9</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cfd07dfa-b0bf-11ed-b273-bfca44eb9efc/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Does the idea of pressing the button to go Live on social media make you sick to your stomach? Does the thought of being an influencer for your own business sound confusing and strange? This week’s podcast is all about how to overcome those feelings...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Does the idea of pressing the button to go Live on social media make you sick to your stomach? Does the thought of being an influencer for your own business sound confusing and strange? This week’s podcast is all about how to overcome those feelings and use Live sessions to grow your subscription base.
 
People Need to Know You to Trust You
 
Social media allows us to reach people in a way never thought of before, and especially in the last year it’s become more and more important to people to be a part of something that they can be personal with. When you’re building your audience and signing up those subscribers to your box, you might find your numbers coming in waves until eventually it plateaus. That’s what I found when I tried to grow my subscriber base; people were following me but not signing up for the subscription commitment.
 
Going Live was the answer to getting more engagement with my page and my products. For most you, the idea of hosting a Live session on Facebook or Instagram may seem like something you’d much rather avoid because it’s embarrassing or because you don’t think you’re interesting enough. But the truth is in the numbers: without going Live and thereby creating a personal relationship with your audience, you’ll find growing your subscription base to be nearly impossible.
 
The Creating Connections Challenge
 
To help boost those engagement numbers, I want to pose a challenge to you: go to your Facebook Insights page and note your Post Reach and Engagements for the last 28 days. We’re going to use those numbers as a starting point. Next, schedule one Live session each week for the next 4 weeks. If you’re already doing Live sessions, I want you to do two.
 
Here are 5 strategies to help you get the most out of those Live sessions:
 



Do something for yourself to help boost your confidence. Get new clothes, style your hair, anything that will help you get in front of the camera.



Have some friends join you live session to help ask some important questions to get the conversation going, and to give you support while you’re Live.



Write out some talking points that you want to get across to your audience. Having an outline on what you want to talk about can keep you on task and keep you from floundering.



Engage with your audience. Whether it’s one person or a hundred, they’re there to be more personal with you because they like what you’re about.  



Set a time and a date for your live sessions and send it out so you’ll stick with it. Make it at a time and place when you are the most comfortable.



 
Before too long, going Live will be just another part of your business and who knows, it could end up being one of your favorite things to do with your audience. Have fun and keep with it!
 
Wondering if the subscription box is right for you? Join my $10 coaching week from March 21st through the 26th. I'm going to show you how to develop your idea into a plan. Sign up today at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.
 
And as always, remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review!

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Does the idea of pressing the button to go Live on social media make you sick to your stomach? Does the thought of being an influencer for your own business sound confusing and strange? This week’s podcast is all about how to overcome those feelings and use Live sessions to grow your subscription base.</p><p> </p><p>People Need to Know You to Trust You</p><p> </p><p>Social media allows us to reach people in a way never thought of before, and especially in the last year it’s become more and more important to people to be a part of something that they can be personal with. When you’re building your audience and signing up those subscribers to your box, you might find your numbers coming in waves until eventually it plateaus. That’s what I found when I tried to grow my subscriber base; people were following me but not signing up for the subscription commitment.</p><p> </p><p>Going Live was the answer to getting more engagement with my page and my products. For most you, the idea of hosting a Live session on Facebook or Instagram may seem like something you’d much rather avoid because it’s embarrassing or because you don’t think you’re interesting enough. But the truth is in the numbers: without going Live and thereby creating a personal relationship with your audience, you’ll find growing your subscription base to be nearly impossible.</p><p> </p><p>The Creating Connections Challenge</p><p> </p><p>To help boost those engagement numbers, I want to pose a challenge to you: go to your Facebook Insights page and note your Post Reach and Engagements for the last 28 days. We’re going to use those numbers as a starting point. Next, schedule one Live session each week for the next 4 weeks. If you’re already doing Live sessions, I want you to do two.</p><p> </p><p>Here are 5 strategies to help you get the most out of those Live sessions:</p><p> </p><ol>
<li><br></li>
<li>Do something for yourself to help boost your confidence. Get new clothes, style your hair, anything that will help you get in front of the camera.</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Have some friends join you live session to help ask some important questions to get the conversation going, and to give you support while you’re Live.</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Write out some talking points that you want to get across to your audience. Having an outline on what you want to talk about can keep you on task and keep you from floundering.</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Engage with your audience. Whether it’s one person or a hundred, they’re there to be more personal with you because they like what you’re about.  </li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Set a time and a date for your live sessions and send it out so you’ll stick with it. Make it at a time and place when you are the most comfortable.</li>
<li><br></li>
</ol><p> </p><p>Before too long, going Live will be just another part of your business and who knows, it could end up being one of your favorite things to do with your audience. Have fun and keep with it!</p><p> </p><p>Wondering if the subscription box is right for you? Join my $10 coaching week from March 21st through the 26th. I'm going to show you how to develop your idea into a plan. Sign up today at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p> </p><p>And as always, remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review!</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1301</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[71ce560a-6db2-463a-986e-34d21444d232]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6347636553.mp3?updated=1701787258" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>008: Building an Audience and Recurring Revenue | Subscription Box Basics with Sarah Williams</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/008-building-an-audience-and-recurring-revenue-subscription-box-basics-with-sarah-williams</link>
      <description>Build your audience and they will come…
 
My guest this week is my friend Brooke Riley from the Re-Fabbed Boutique to talk about how building a solid online presence can give your subscription box the momentum it needs to keep having success month after month.
 
Brooke started Re-Fabbed Boutique from a blog she’s been running for six years now and has turned it into a place where her community could find more of the style items she showcased on her blog. She first had the idea of her subscription box, the Re-Fabulous Box, when we met at a mastermind a year ago. “I love a good thrifty find, but nobody could replicate what I had because it wasn’t available to them. So, the more questions I kept getting, the more I realized that there was a need in my community I could feel.”
 
Manage Demand with a Waitlist
 
Brooke took the ideas we talked about and started floating the idea of a monthly Re-Fabbed Box in her online community. From there, she was able to build interest and created a waitlist people could sign up for to build her launch off of. A Waitlist is a great way to see what kind of interest is among the community you’ve built as well as a way to set the number of boxes you launch with to an amount your comfortable with. It can also create demand for your box as an exclusive experience right from the outset.
 
Most importantly, having a waitlist that you can build off of can also offset retention losses. No matter how much we want it, we’re not going to be able to keep every customer month after month, and that’s just a fact of running a business. Having a waitlist can help you to replace those losses with a warmer customer while still providing a way for those lost customers to come back.
 
Remember, a huge benefit of starting a subscription box is that recurring revenue, money that is coming month to month that you can depend on. A waitlist is a great way of managing your demand to keep you in the positive without ups and downs in your sales numbers.
 
You can find Brooke and the Re-Fabulous Box at https://www.re-fabbedboutique.com/ and also on Facebook at https://www.facebook.com/refabbedboutique
 
Wondering if the subscription box is right for you? Join my $10 coaching week from March 21st through the 26th. I'm going to show you how to develop your idea into a plan. Sign up today at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.
 
And as always, remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review!

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 15 Mar 2021 07:44:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Building an Audience and Recurring Revenue | Subscription Box Basics with Sarah Williams</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>8</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cfe63e7e-b0bf-11ed-b273-efaba6d6642f/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Build your audience and they will come…   My guest this week is my friend Brooke Riley from the Re-Fabbed Boutique to talk about how building a solid online presence can give your subscription box the momentum it needs to keep having success...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Build your audience and they will come…
 
My guest this week is my friend Brooke Riley from the Re-Fabbed Boutique to talk about how building a solid online presence can give your subscription box the momentum it needs to keep having success month after month.
 
Brooke started Re-Fabbed Boutique from a blog she’s been running for six years now and has turned it into a place where her community could find more of the style items she showcased on her blog. She first had the idea of her subscription box, the Re-Fabulous Box, when we met at a mastermind a year ago. “I love a good thrifty find, but nobody could replicate what I had because it wasn’t available to them. So, the more questions I kept getting, the more I realized that there was a need in my community I could feel.”
 
Manage Demand with a Waitlist
 
Brooke took the ideas we talked about and started floating the idea of a monthly Re-Fabbed Box in her online community. From there, she was able to build interest and created a waitlist people could sign up for to build her launch off of. A Waitlist is a great way to see what kind of interest is among the community you’ve built as well as a way to set the number of boxes you launch with to an amount your comfortable with. It can also create demand for your box as an exclusive experience right from the outset.
 
Most importantly, having a waitlist that you can build off of can also offset retention losses. No matter how much we want it, we’re not going to be able to keep every customer month after month, and that’s just a fact of running a business. Having a waitlist can help you to replace those losses with a warmer customer while still providing a way for those lost customers to come back.
 
Remember, a huge benefit of starting a subscription box is that recurring revenue, money that is coming month to month that you can depend on. A waitlist is a great way of managing your demand to keep you in the positive without ups and downs in your sales numbers.
 
You can find Brooke and the Re-Fabulous Box at https://www.re-fabbedboutique.com/ and also on Facebook at https://www.facebook.com/refabbedboutique
 
Wondering if the subscription box is right for you? Join my $10 coaching week from March 21st through the 26th. I'm going to show you how to develop your idea into a plan. Sign up today at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.
 
And as always, remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review!

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Build your audience and they will come…</p><p> </p><p>My guest this week is my friend Brooke Riley from the Re-Fabbed Boutique to talk about how building a solid online presence can give your subscription box the momentum it needs to keep having success month after month.</p><p> </p><p>Brooke started Re-Fabbed Boutique from a blog she’s been running for six years now and has turned it into a place where her community could find more of the style items she showcased on her blog. She first had the idea of her subscription box, the Re-Fabulous Box, when we met at a mastermind a year ago. “I love a good thrifty find, but nobody could replicate what I had because it wasn’t available to them. So, the more questions I kept getting, the more I realized that there was a need in my community I could feel.”</p><p> </p><p>Manage Demand with a Waitlist</p><p> </p><p>Brooke took the ideas we talked about and started floating the idea of a monthly Re-Fabbed Box in her online community. From there, she was able to build interest and created a waitlist people could sign up for to build her launch off of. A Waitlist is a great way to see what kind of interest is among the community you’ve built as well as a way to set the number of boxes you launch with to an amount your comfortable with. It can also create demand for your box as an exclusive experience right from the outset.</p><p> </p><p>Most importantly, having a waitlist that you can build off of can also offset retention losses. No matter how much we want it, we’re not going to be able to keep every customer month after month, and that’s just a fact of running a business. Having a waitlist can help you to replace those losses with a warmer customer while still providing a way for those lost customers to come back.</p><p> </p><p>Remember, a huge benefit of starting a subscription box is that recurring revenue, money that is coming month to month that you can depend on. A waitlist is a great way of managing your demand to keep you in the positive without ups and downs in your sales numbers.</p><p> </p><p>You can find Brooke and the Re-Fabulous Box at <a href="https://www.re-fabbedboutique.com/">https://www.re-fabbedboutique.com/</a> and also on Facebook at <a href="https://www.facebook.com/refabbedboutique">https://www.facebook.com/refabbedboutique</a></p><p> </p><p>Wondering if the subscription box is right for you? Join my $10 coaching week from March 21st through the 26th. I'm going to show you how to develop your idea into a plan. Sign up today at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p> </p><p>And as always, remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review!</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1072</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[c0751892-44d3-40ce-a507-e5c003a76bbe]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO9758691544.mp3?updated=1701787264" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>007: Get Started Right Away with Fast and Messy Action | Launch your subscription box with Sarah Williams</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/007-get-started-right-away-with-fast-and-messy-action-launch-your-subscription-box-with-sarah-williams</link>
      <description>Have you been wondering when the best time is to finally start your subscription box? This week I’m joined by Molly Young, founder of the Blue Lotus Intentions box to talk about how she followed her heart and launched as soon as it was possible.
 
When working up to launching your box, you need to have the essentials down. You can’t launch without having an idea, curated items for your box, and most of all, subscribers to send your box to. But after that, when is the right time to launch? You might be asking how many subscribers you should hold out for, or if launching on a holiday would have the most impact.
 
From a One-Time idea to a Full Subscription
 
Molly had an idea for a box, but at first envisioned it as a one-time thing. It wasn’t until she signed up for my $10 Coaching Week that she was able to see that not only was a subscription box a better fit for her idea, but that it was possible at all. It turned out that $10 commitment was just the boost that she needed. She started reaching out to suppliers and ordering in bulk, ready to boost her own estimates for how many boxes she would start out with.
 
By the end of Coaching Week, she had her first orders on the way, built her website and already had a waitlist of members to send boxes to. For her first launch, she decided on a one-time shipment to get her box out before Christmas and when all was said and done, she sent out 50 boxes with a further 18 subscribed for a January box as well! As we speak, going into March she’s been steadily increasing her numbers to 40 subscribers for her Blue Lotus Intentions box.
 
Molly story shows that there’s more than one way to start your subscription box. Once she had the basics taken care of, she shipped it out and started prepping for the next one. She had the confidence to get started once she was ready, and the willingness to build on that first launch to start her business.
 
“I think these things that are in our hearts, sometimes fear gets in the way of that. Just jump in and go for it, before your mind realizes this may or may not be possible, the wheels are already in motion.” – Molly
 
If you have an idea you feel passionate about, the perfect time to get started is right now. Take that idea and run with it, and just keep telling yourself it’s go time!
 
You can connect with Molly and Blue Lotus Holistic Wellness at: https://www.bluelotusholisticwellness.com/
and also on Instagram and Facebook at:
https://www.instagram.com/bluelotusholisticwellness/
 https://www.facebook.com/BlueLotusHolisticWellnessLLC
 
Wondering if the subscription box is right for you? Join my $10 Coaching Week from March 21st through March 26th. I'm going to show you how to develop your idea into a plan. Sign up today at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.
 
And as always, remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 10 Mar 2021 06:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Get Started Right Away with Fast and Messy Action | Launch your subscription box with Sarah Williams</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>7</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/cffd42ea-b0bf-11ed-b273-5782e170ba57/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Have you been wondering when the best time is to finally start your subscription box? This week I’m joined by Molly Young, founder of the Blue Lotus Intentions box to talk about how she followed her heart and launched as soon as it was possible....</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Have you been wondering when the best time is to finally start your subscription box? This week I’m joined by Molly Young, founder of the Blue Lotus Intentions box to talk about how she followed her heart and launched as soon as it was possible.
 
When working up to launching your box, you need to have the essentials down. You can’t launch without having an idea, curated items for your box, and most of all, subscribers to send your box to. But after that, when is the right time to launch? You might be asking how many subscribers you should hold out for, or if launching on a holiday would have the most impact.
 
From a One-Time idea to a Full Subscription
 
Molly had an idea for a box, but at first envisioned it as a one-time thing. It wasn’t until she signed up for my $10 Coaching Week that she was able to see that not only was a subscription box a better fit for her idea, but that it was possible at all. It turned out that $10 commitment was just the boost that she needed. She started reaching out to suppliers and ordering in bulk, ready to boost her own estimates for how many boxes she would start out with.
 
By the end of Coaching Week, she had her first orders on the way, built her website and already had a waitlist of members to send boxes to. For her first launch, she decided on a one-time shipment to get her box out before Christmas and when all was said and done, she sent out 50 boxes with a further 18 subscribed for a January box as well! As we speak, going into March she’s been steadily increasing her numbers to 40 subscribers for her Blue Lotus Intentions box.
 
Molly story shows that there’s more than one way to start your subscription box. Once she had the basics taken care of, she shipped it out and started prepping for the next one. She had the confidence to get started once she was ready, and the willingness to build on that first launch to start her business.
 
“I think these things that are in our hearts, sometimes fear gets in the way of that. Just jump in and go for it, before your mind realizes this may or may not be possible, the wheels are already in motion.” – Molly
 
If you have an idea you feel passionate about, the perfect time to get started is right now. Take that idea and run with it, and just keep telling yourself it’s go time!
 
You can connect with Molly and Blue Lotus Holistic Wellness at: https://www.bluelotusholisticwellness.com/
and also on Instagram and Facebook at:
https://www.instagram.com/bluelotusholisticwellness/
 https://www.facebook.com/BlueLotusHolisticWellnessLLC
 
Wondering if the subscription box is right for you? Join my $10 Coaching Week from March 21st through March 26th. I'm going to show you how to develop your idea into a plan. Sign up today at https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/.
 
And as always, remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you been wondering when the best time is to finally start your subscription box? This week I’m joined by Molly Young, founder of the Blue Lotus Intentions box to talk about how she followed her heart and launched as soon as it was possible.</p><p> </p><p>When working up to launching your box, you need to have the essentials down. You can’t launch without having an idea, curated items for your box, and most of all, subscribers to send your box to. But after that, when is the right time to launch? You might be asking how many subscribers you should hold out for, or if launching on a holiday would have the most impact.</p><p> </p><p>From a One-Time idea to a Full Subscription</p><p> </p><p>Molly had an idea for a box, but at first envisioned it as a one-time thing. It wasn’t until she signed up for my $10 Coaching Week that she was able to see that not only was a subscription box a better fit for her idea, but that it was possible at all. It turned out that $10 commitment was just the boost that she needed. She started reaching out to suppliers and ordering in bulk, ready to boost her own estimates for how many boxes she would start out with.</p><p> </p><p>By the end of Coaching Week, she had her first orders on the way, built her website and already had a waitlist of members to send boxes to. For her first launch, she decided on a one-time shipment to get her box out before Christmas and when all was said and done, she sent out 50 boxes with a further 18 subscribed for a January box as well! As we speak, going into March she’s been steadily increasing her numbers to 40 subscribers for her Blue Lotus Intentions box.</p><p> </p><p>Molly story shows that there’s more than one way to start your subscription box. Once she had the basics taken care of, she shipped it out and started prepping for the next one. She had the confidence to get started once she was ready, and the willingness to build on that first launch to start her business.</p><p> </p><p>“I think these things that are in our hearts, sometimes fear gets in the way of that. Just jump in and go for it, before your mind realizes this may or may not be possible, the wheels are already in motion.” – Molly</p><p> </p><p>If you have an idea you feel passionate about, the perfect time to get started is right now. Take that idea and run with it, and just keep telling yourself it’s go time!</p><p> </p><p>You can connect with Molly and Blue Lotus Holistic Wellness at: <a href="https://www.bluelotusholisticwellness.com/">https://www.bluelotusholisticwellness.com/</a></p><p>and also on Instagram and Facebook at:</p><p><a href="https://www.instagram.com/bluelotusholisticwellness/">https://www.instagram.com/bluelotusholisticwellness/</a></p><p><a href="https://www.facebook.com/BlueLotusHolisticWellnessLLC"> https://www.facebook.com/BlueLotusHolisticWellnessLLC</a></p><p> </p><p>Wondering if the subscription box is right for you? Join my $10 Coaching Week from March 21st through March 26th. I'm going to show you how to develop your idea into a plan. Sign up today at <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a>.</p><p> </p><p>And as always, remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1184</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[d1fadbc5-9a75-4cb8-beb8-2bd819bfe1dd]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6189589658.mp3?updated=1701787268" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>006: Packaging is My Favorite | Subscription Box Tips with Sarah Williams</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/006-all-about-packaging-subscription-box-tips-with-sarah-williams</link>
      <description>You have an idea for a subscription box, you have the items that are going in it, but what is the box going to look like? When your members get your box in the mail, how the box looks is going to make just as much as an impression as the items you’ve curated inside of it. Your box is your message carried across the country, almost like a travelling billboard. Let’s explore a few ways you can make the most impression with your box right out the gate.
 
Custom Decorated Box vs Basic Box (with a twist)
 
If we had all the money we needed to get started, we could create a custom branded box on the first launch. But if you’re like me, the money that would be needed to create a custom box was better spent on what came inside the box for my members. I started with a plain brown craft box that I would stamp my logo on. A custom stamp can be very cost effective and is something that can be used over and over again with just a little bit of ink. Another idea is using custom tape to seal your box, something that you’re going to be doing anyway to send it out, so why not make it work for you!
 
Use those custom stamps, tapes, and stickers to dress up your box and make it unique to you. I do want you to remember, don’t go too overboard or else you could end up spending the same you would on a custom box, and if that’s the case you might as well spend the money on that. But with moderation, a little bit can go a long way.
 
Things to consider: Box Sizes and Quantities
 
The higher the quantity of box that you can order at a time, the better the price is going to be. Keep in mind too that from month to month, you’ll have different items going out, so different size boxes make more sense than one size. One size does not fit all: it’s very important to make your boxes feel full for your members, and if your items don’t fill up the box the more packing, you’ll have to use. There are also shipping costs that come into play if you’re sending a box that has open space inside, so smaller boxes not only work better for your product but can also save you money.
 
Maybe a box doesn’t make sense for what you’re sending out? Don’t be afraid to use poly mailers as well, which you can also dress up with stamps and tape. At the beginning, being cost effective is going to help with your success as much as anything else.
 
Up-level as you grow
 
Remember, we’re building a business and we’re in it for the long haul. At the beginning, you’ll do what you need to do to get off the ground and at the beginning a basic box makes the most sense. But commit yourself to up leveling your packaging as you grow. Set goals for yourself in number of subscriptions or revenue when you can start working on a custom box that can help you send your message across the country!
 
I can’t wait to see your custom packaging! Remember leave a comment and to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review!
 
You can also check out the show website for some helpful freebies at: https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/
 
Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 08 Mar 2021 06:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Packaging is My Favorite | Subscription Box Tips with Sarah Williams</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>6</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d0152e96-b0bf-11ed-b273-7bf3cc78f091/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>You have an idea for a subscription box, you have the items that are going in it, but what is the box going to look like? When your members get your box in the mail, how the box looks is going to make just as much as an impression as the items...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>You have an idea for a subscription box, you have the items that are going in it, but what is the box going to look like? When your members get your box in the mail, how the box looks is going to make just as much as an impression as the items you’ve curated inside of it. Your box is your message carried across the country, almost like a travelling billboard. Let’s explore a few ways you can make the most impression with your box right out the gate.
 
Custom Decorated Box vs Basic Box (with a twist)
 
If we had all the money we needed to get started, we could create a custom branded box on the first launch. But if you’re like me, the money that would be needed to create a custom box was better spent on what came inside the box for my members. I started with a plain brown craft box that I would stamp my logo on. A custom stamp can be very cost effective and is something that can be used over and over again with just a little bit of ink. Another idea is using custom tape to seal your box, something that you’re going to be doing anyway to send it out, so why not make it work for you!
 
Use those custom stamps, tapes, and stickers to dress up your box and make it unique to you. I do want you to remember, don’t go too overboard or else you could end up spending the same you would on a custom box, and if that’s the case you might as well spend the money on that. But with moderation, a little bit can go a long way.
 
Things to consider: Box Sizes and Quantities
 
The higher the quantity of box that you can order at a time, the better the price is going to be. Keep in mind too that from month to month, you’ll have different items going out, so different size boxes make more sense than one size. One size does not fit all: it’s very important to make your boxes feel full for your members, and if your items don’t fill up the box the more packing, you’ll have to use. There are also shipping costs that come into play if you’re sending a box that has open space inside, so smaller boxes not only work better for your product but can also save you money.
 
Maybe a box doesn’t make sense for what you’re sending out? Don’t be afraid to use poly mailers as well, which you can also dress up with stamps and tape. At the beginning, being cost effective is going to help with your success as much as anything else.
 
Up-level as you grow
 
Remember, we’re building a business and we’re in it for the long haul. At the beginning, you’ll do what you need to do to get off the ground and at the beginning a basic box makes the most sense. But commit yourself to up leveling your packaging as you grow. Set goals for yourself in number of subscriptions or revenue when you can start working on a custom box that can help you send your message across the country!
 
I can’t wait to see your custom packaging! Remember leave a comment and to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review!
 
You can also check out the show website for some helpful freebies at: https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/
 
Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>You have an idea for a subscription box, you have the items that are going in it, but what is the box going to look like? When your members get your box in the mail, how the box looks is going to make just as much as an impression as the items you’ve curated inside of it. Your box is your message carried across the country, almost like a travelling billboard. Let’s explore a few ways you can make the most impression with your box right out the gate.</p><p> </p><p>Custom Decorated Box vs Basic Box (with a twist)</p><p> </p><p>If we had all the money we needed to get started, we could create a custom branded box on the first launch. But if you’re like me, the money that would be needed to create a custom box was better spent on what came inside the box for my members. I started with a plain brown craft box that I would stamp my logo on. A custom stamp can be very cost effective and is something that can be used over and over again with just a little bit of ink. Another idea is using custom tape to seal your box, something that you’re going to be doing anyway to send it out, so why not make it work for you!</p><p> </p><p>Use those custom stamps, tapes, and stickers to dress up your box and make it unique to you. I do want you to remember, don’t go too overboard or else you could end up spending the same you would on a custom box, and if that’s the case you might as well spend the money on that. But with moderation, a little bit can go a long way.</p><p> </p><p>Things to consider: Box Sizes and Quantities</p><p> </p><p>The higher the quantity of box that you can order at a time, the better the price is going to be. Keep in mind too that from month to month, you’ll have different items going out, so different size boxes make more sense than one size. One size does not fit all: it’s very important to make your boxes feel full for your members, and if your items don’t fill up the box the more packing, you’ll have to use. There are also shipping costs that come into play if you’re sending a box that has open space inside, so smaller boxes not only work better for your product but can also save you money.</p><p> </p><p>Maybe a box doesn’t make sense for what you’re sending out? Don’t be afraid to use poly mailers as well, which you can also dress up with stamps and tape. At the beginning, being cost effective is going to help with your success as much as anything else.</p><p> </p><p>Up-level as you grow</p><p> </p><p>Remember, we’re building a business and we’re in it for the long haul. At the beginning, you’ll do what you need to do to get off the ground and at the beginning a basic box makes the most sense. But commit yourself to up leveling your packaging as you grow. Set goals for yourself in number of subscriptions or revenue when you can start working on a custom box that can help you send your message across the country!</p><p> </p><p>I can’t wait to see your custom packaging! Remember leave a comment and to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review!</p><p> </p><p>You can also check out the show website for some helpful freebies at: <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a></p><p> </p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1417</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0131bec2-efb5-4b12-a6c3-57307997421e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4801122659.mp3?updated=1701787274" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>005: How to Find Your Perfect Subscriber | Subscription Box Strategies with Damon Oates &amp; Sarah Williams</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/005-who-will-buy-my-box-and-how-do-i-find-them-subscription-box-strategies-with-damon-oates-sarah-williams</link>
      <description>This week I’m joined by Damon Oates, founder of Deco Exchange and the Maker’s University to help us answer a very important question: where do we find subscribers for our box, and how do we make sure they’re the perfect fit?
 
So you have a great idea for a box. Your head is swimming with all the possibilities you could dream up for your members, and then it hits you: who will be subscribing to your box? If you haven’t given it a lot of thought, you might fall into a common trap that Damon says people often think themselves into: “People always feel like they’re selling to someone just like themselves. They think, I would never buy that because I could just make it myself.” But the reality is that your ideal customer might not be anything like you other than sharing a common interest.
 
Think about the box that you want to build. What kind of person would want to buy your box? The more specific you are, the better you’ll be able to target your ideal subscriber. No matter who you come up with, chances are there’s already a wealth of data about that particular demographic that’s been collected. A great place to start is with trade magazines and their Buyers Demographic Data that’s sometimes available online. Another great place to find info about potential customers is at https://www.facebook.com/ads/audience-insights which can be very helpful to narrow down your perfect customer.
 
Build a Social Media Presence
 
Once you have your ideal customer down, it’s time to build a social media presence. What this means is that you’ll need to start creating content online regularly to build your audience. This is going to take some time! Start with a platform you love being on already and focus on that. It will be much easier to create content when you’re comfortable posting.
 
“You’re there to create a relationship with your audience, no matter if it’s one person or a thousand. Chat with them, make sure you see them and just give it all you can.” – Damon
 
Finally, remember to listen to your audience. They’ll tell you exactly what they’ll buy from you so that when you’re finally ready to launch your box, you’ll have a truly memorable VIP experience that will keep them coming back for more!
 
Damon’s 5 Things to Consider
 



Why do you want to do this?



What is the purpose of it?



What is the problem you want to serve?



Who can you serve it to? Who needs it, who’s asking for it?



Which platform do you love to play on?



 
You can find Damon’s mini-course Who is My Perfect Person Challenge link at:
 https://members.themakersuniversity.com/~access/a5c5326f/
 
You can also find more of Damon at Deco Exchange on Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/decoexchange
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! Let me know which episode is your favorite so far.
 
You can also check out the show website for some helpful freebies at: https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/
 
Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 03 Mar 2021 06:37:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How to Find Your Perfect Subscriber | Subscription Box Strategies with Damon Oates &amp; Sarah Williams</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>5</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d0305e5a-b0bf-11ed-b273-8faf5fc5bf10/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week I’m joined by Damon Oates, founder of Deco Exchange and the Maker’s University to help us answer a very important question: where do we find subscribers for our box, and how do we make sure they’re the perfect fit?   So you have a...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>This week I’m joined by Damon Oates, founder of Deco Exchange and the Maker’s University to help us answer a very important question: where do we find subscribers for our box, and how do we make sure they’re the perfect fit?
 
So you have a great idea for a box. Your head is swimming with all the possibilities you could dream up for your members, and then it hits you: who will be subscribing to your box? If you haven’t given it a lot of thought, you might fall into a common trap that Damon says people often think themselves into: “People always feel like they’re selling to someone just like themselves. They think, I would never buy that because I could just make it myself.” But the reality is that your ideal customer might not be anything like you other than sharing a common interest.
 
Think about the box that you want to build. What kind of person would want to buy your box? The more specific you are, the better you’ll be able to target your ideal subscriber. No matter who you come up with, chances are there’s already a wealth of data about that particular demographic that’s been collected. A great place to start is with trade magazines and their Buyers Demographic Data that’s sometimes available online. Another great place to find info about potential customers is at https://www.facebook.com/ads/audience-insights which can be very helpful to narrow down your perfect customer.
 
Build a Social Media Presence
 
Once you have your ideal customer down, it’s time to build a social media presence. What this means is that you’ll need to start creating content online regularly to build your audience. This is going to take some time! Start with a platform you love being on already and focus on that. It will be much easier to create content when you’re comfortable posting.
 
“You’re there to create a relationship with your audience, no matter if it’s one person or a thousand. Chat with them, make sure you see them and just give it all you can.” – Damon
 
Finally, remember to listen to your audience. They’ll tell you exactly what they’ll buy from you so that when you’re finally ready to launch your box, you’ll have a truly memorable VIP experience that will keep them coming back for more!
 
Damon’s 5 Things to Consider
 



Why do you want to do this?



What is the purpose of it?



What is the problem you want to serve?



Who can you serve it to? Who needs it, who’s asking for it?



Which platform do you love to play on?



 
You can find Damon’s mini-course Who is My Perfect Person Challenge link at:
 https://members.themakersuniversity.com/~access/a5c5326f/
 
You can also find more of Damon at Deco Exchange on Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/decoexchange
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! Let me know which episode is your favorite so far.
 
You can also check out the show website for some helpful freebies at: https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/
 
Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week I’m joined by Damon Oates, founder of Deco Exchange and the Maker’s University to help us answer a very important question: where do we find subscribers for our box, and how do we make sure they’re the perfect fit?</p><p> </p><p>So you have a great idea for a box. Your head is swimming with all the possibilities you could dream up for your members, and then it hits you: who will be subscribing to your box? If you haven’t given it a lot of thought, you might fall into a common trap that Damon says people often think themselves into: “People always feel like they’re selling to someone just like themselves. They think, I would never buy that because I could just make it myself.” But the reality is that your ideal customer might not be anything like you other than sharing a common interest.</p><p> </p><p>Think about the box that you want to build. What kind of person would want to buy your box? The more specific you are, the better you’ll be able to target your ideal subscriber. No matter who you come up with, chances are there’s already a wealth of data about that particular demographic that’s been collected. A great place to start is with trade magazines and their Buyers Demographic Data that’s sometimes available online. Another great place to find info about potential customers is at <a href="https://www.facebook.com/ads/audience-insights">https://www.facebook.com/ads/audience-insights</a> which can be very helpful to narrow down your perfect customer.</p><p> </p><p>Build a Social Media Presence</p><p> </p><p>Once you have your ideal customer down, it’s time to build a social media presence. What this means is that you’ll need to start creating content online regularly to build your audience. This is going to take some time! Start with a platform you love being on already and focus on that. It will be much easier to create content when you’re comfortable posting.</p><p> </p><p>“You’re there to create a relationship with your audience, no matter if it’s one person or a thousand. Chat with them, make sure you see them and just give it all you can.” – Damon</p><p> </p><p>Finally, remember to listen to your audience. They’ll tell you exactly what they’ll buy from you so that when you’re finally ready to launch your box, you’ll have a truly memorable VIP experience that will keep them coming back for more!</p><p> </p><p>Damon’s 5 Things to Consider</p><p> </p><ol>
<li><br></li>
<li>Why do you want to do this?</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>What is the purpose of it?</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>What is the problem you want to serve?</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Who can you serve it to? Who needs it, who’s asking for it?</li>
<li><br></li>
<li>Which platform do you love to play on?</li>
<li><br></li>
</ol><p> </p><p>You can find Damon’s mini-course Who is My Perfect Person Challenge link at:</p><p><a href="https://l.facebook.com/l.php?u=https%3A%2F%2Fmembers.themakersuniversity.com%2F~access%2Fa5c5326f%2F%3Ffbclid%3DIwAR2jyOW-wtdmdZaeKXNJbmHkpV_XXtXUdaXvD7dccI7efpcpHULioTnCK68&amp;h=AT1xfmPMhdpFzPiwNvx7QyYxnS0ax2SsBSQ8i_fFbQhs1E-956SP6qryBThBFvLjkdc1cLEzhBZeFQn6sNEk_tV28Mm7B9_zJp3r3ESrAJCAAXK4ypYGHwLSMqnsUFsMoI65zoMO9s7qBe6cTVh3oYID"> https://members.themakersuniversity.com/~access/a5c5326f/</a></p><p> </p><p>You can also find more of Damon at Deco Exchange on Facebook: <a href="https://www.facebook.com/decoexchange">https://www.facebook.com/decoexchange</a></p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review! Let me know which episode is your favorite so far.</p><p> </p><p>You can also check out the show website for some helpful freebies at: <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a></p><p> </p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1676</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[0aaabf1a-8af5-4484-a20b-c428dd26b1df]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO3468283678.mp3?updated=1701787282" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>004: How One Artist Added a Subscription Box to Her Online Membership with Kasey Hope about her Subscription Box Business</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/004-lessons-learned-by-doing-an-interview-with-kasey-hope-about-her-subscription-box-business</link>
      <description>Today I’m joined by my friend Kasey Hope with P’zazz Art Studio. Kasey started with Whatever Letter Lettering membership, where she taught courses on how to hand letter, but had the idea to upgrade that service with a subscription box. In her box, she sends art supplies, traceable hand lettering, and different materials that can be used with her membership. We spoke about what got her started, what she learned from her first launch and how her box has grown since she started.
 
Her box took her membership to the next level
 
Kasey already had her membership going with online classes when she noticed that some people would buy the membership and not use it. Instead of letting that ride, she thought of ways that she could increase engagement among her members. “We wanted to create a kind of experience around the membership, and the box was a tangible little something they could open.”
 
By creating a box to go along with her membership, she could give her regulars a VIP experience with items related to her classes. The convenience of getting catered supplies that they didn’t have to go out and buy created more of a community for her membership.
 
Kasey had never shipped before, but that didn’t stop her!
 
When she launched, Kasey had 167 members and she was thrilled. They put together the boxes (which ironically were large envelopes), gathered them up, and took them right into their local Post Office. “We had a local art studio; we did not ship products. So, we were like, I guess we take them to the post office!”
For hours, one by one, they labeled and shipped them out. This was a learning experience with a little bit of embarrassment involved, but the point is that it got done and sent out. “It was hard and crazy and embarrassing, but we got the packages out. We had to start somewhere.”
 
Her success has built upon itself
 
Today, Kasey is shipping thousands of boxes out to her members and her numbers keep on growing. When Covid hit, her brick-and-mortar studio took a huge hit but because of the success of her subscription box and recurring revenue that comes with it, they were able to whether the changes and thrive.
 
“If you’re thinking about it and you’re worried you don’t have all the pieces, just start! It can be sloppy; it can be small. You’re going to learn the lessons.” – Kasey Hope
 
You can find Kasey and the Whatever Letter Box at: https://www.pzazzonline.com/whatever-letter
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review!
 
You can also check out the show website for some helpful freebies at: https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/
 
Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 01 Mar 2021 06:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>How One Artist Added a Subscription Box to Her Online Membership with Kasey Hope about her Subscription Box Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>4</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d04b4d64-b0bf-11ed-b273-0b4f5ae1906e/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today I’m joined by my friend Kasey Hope with P’zazz Art Studio. Kasey started with Whatever Letter Lettering membership, where she taught courses on how to hand letter, but had the idea to upgrade that service with a subscription box. In her box,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Today I’m joined by my friend Kasey Hope with P’zazz Art Studio. Kasey started with Whatever Letter Lettering membership, where she taught courses on how to hand letter, but had the idea to upgrade that service with a subscription box. In her box, she sends art supplies, traceable hand lettering, and different materials that can be used with her membership. We spoke about what got her started, what she learned from her first launch and how her box has grown since she started.
 
Her box took her membership to the next level
 
Kasey already had her membership going with online classes when she noticed that some people would buy the membership and not use it. Instead of letting that ride, she thought of ways that she could increase engagement among her members. “We wanted to create a kind of experience around the membership, and the box was a tangible little something they could open.”
 
By creating a box to go along with her membership, she could give her regulars a VIP experience with items related to her classes. The convenience of getting catered supplies that they didn’t have to go out and buy created more of a community for her membership.
 
Kasey had never shipped before, but that didn’t stop her!
 
When she launched, Kasey had 167 members and she was thrilled. They put together the boxes (which ironically were large envelopes), gathered them up, and took them right into their local Post Office. “We had a local art studio; we did not ship products. So, we were like, I guess we take them to the post office!”
For hours, one by one, they labeled and shipped them out. This was a learning experience with a little bit of embarrassment involved, but the point is that it got done and sent out. “It was hard and crazy and embarrassing, but we got the packages out. We had to start somewhere.”
 
Her success has built upon itself
 
Today, Kasey is shipping thousands of boxes out to her members and her numbers keep on growing. When Covid hit, her brick-and-mortar studio took a huge hit but because of the success of her subscription box and recurring revenue that comes with it, they were able to whether the changes and thrive.
 
“If you’re thinking about it and you’re worried you don’t have all the pieces, just start! It can be sloppy; it can be small. You’re going to learn the lessons.” – Kasey Hope
 
You can find Kasey and the Whatever Letter Box at: https://www.pzazzonline.com/whatever-letter
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review!
 
You can also check out the show website for some helpful freebies at: https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/
 
Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I’m joined by my friend Kasey Hope with P’zazz Art Studio. Kasey started with Whatever Letter Lettering membership, where she taught courses on how to hand letter, but had the idea to upgrade that service with a subscription box. In her box, she sends art supplies, traceable hand lettering, and different materials that can be used with her membership. We spoke about what got her started, what she learned from her first launch and how her box has grown since she started.</p><p> </p><p>Her box took her membership to the next level</p><p> </p><p>Kasey already had her membership going with online classes when she noticed that some people would buy the membership and not use it. Instead of letting that ride, she thought of ways that she could increase engagement among her members. “We wanted to create a kind of experience around the membership, and the box was a tangible little something they could open.”</p><p> </p><p>By creating a box to go along with her membership, she could give her regulars a VIP experience with items related to her classes. The convenience of getting catered supplies that they didn’t have to go out and buy created more of a community for her membership.</p><p> </p><p>Kasey had never shipped before, but that didn’t stop her!</p><p> </p><p>When she launched, Kasey had 167 members and she was thrilled. They put together the boxes (which ironically were large envelopes), gathered them up, and took them right into their local Post Office. “We had a local art studio; we did not ship products. So, we were like, I guess we take them to the post office!”</p><p>For hours, one by one, they labeled and shipped them out. This was a learning experience with a little bit of embarrassment involved, but the point is that it got done and sent out. “It was hard and crazy and embarrassing, but we got the packages out. We had to start somewhere.”</p><p> </p><p>Her success has built upon itself</p><p> </p><p>Today, Kasey is shipping thousands of boxes out to her members and her numbers keep on growing. When Covid hit, her brick-and-mortar studio took a huge hit but because of the success of her subscription box and recurring revenue that comes with it, they were able to whether the changes and thrive.</p><p> </p><p>“If you’re thinking about it and you’re worried you don’t have all the pieces, just start! It can be sloppy; it can be small. You’re going to learn the lessons.” – Kasey Hope</p><p> </p><p>You can find Kasey and the Whatever Letter Box at: <a href="https://www.pzazzonline.com/whatever-letter">https://www.pzazzonline.com/whatever-letter</a></p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review!</p><p> </p><p>You can also check out the show website for some helpful freebies at: <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a></p><p> </p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1210</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[46eef10b-c98f-458a-aee7-e304165e5278]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1590055473.mp3?updated=1701787288" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>003: The Riches are in the Niches - How Anne Stuccio Hit $10K Months with Her Subscription Box Business</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/003-the-riches-are-in-the-niches-how-anne-stuccio-hit-10k-months-with-her-subscription-box-business</link>
      <description>On today’s podcast I’m joined by my friend and Launch Your Box member Anne Stuccio, creator of the Brighter Life for Dentists subscription box! We had a great conversation about what inspired her to start a box with zero e-commerce experience, and how her experience relates to some of the things we’ve discussed in our previous podcasts.
 
Riches in the Niches
 
Anne has been a practicing dentist for the last 20 years. In that time, she’s noticed that in her community of women dentists, after a certain point they’d start to feel burned out from putting others before themselves and weren’t enjoying being dentists like they had when they started out. Anne saw the opportunity to develop gift ideas to help reignite their passion and remind them what they loved about their profession in the first place. By targeting this specific niche, Anne could bring the most impact she could with her product and service.
 
“You have to have faith in yourself, and you have to have faith that you know your client, then deliver, deliver, deliver.” – Anne
 
Anne is able to build her list of clients by being able to relate to them personally. She combines that with some planning and information gathering and builds a product specially curated for her customers. As such, she was able to charge a premium price starting off! “It comes down to knowing your customers; I knew that if I put a higher price point and sourced products that were higher-end they would be well received and appreciated.”
 
Anne came up with an idea, a specific market that was being underserved, and created something special. She is a successful dentist and still had her doubts about trying something new! But with planning and the right strategy, she’s been able to grow her box business into something that has a bright and lucrative future!
 
You can follow Anne at: https://www.facebook.com/thebrighterlifefordentists
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review!
 
You can also check out the show website for some helpful freebies at: https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Feb 2021 07:04:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>The Riches are in the Niches - How Anne Stuccio Hit $10K Months with Her Subscription Box Business</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>3</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d0618868-b0bf-11ed-b273-c358b8204e53/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>On today’s podcast I’m joined by my friend and Launch Your Box member Anne Stuccio, creator of the Brighter Life for Dentists subscription box! We had a great conversation about what inspired her to start a box with zero e-commerce experience, and...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>On today’s podcast I’m joined by my friend and Launch Your Box member Anne Stuccio, creator of the Brighter Life for Dentists subscription box! We had a great conversation about what inspired her to start a box with zero e-commerce experience, and how her experience relates to some of the things we’ve discussed in our previous podcasts.
 
Riches in the Niches
 
Anne has been a practicing dentist for the last 20 years. In that time, she’s noticed that in her community of women dentists, after a certain point they’d start to feel burned out from putting others before themselves and weren’t enjoying being dentists like they had when they started out. Anne saw the opportunity to develop gift ideas to help reignite their passion and remind them what they loved about their profession in the first place. By targeting this specific niche, Anne could bring the most impact she could with her product and service.
 
“You have to have faith in yourself, and you have to have faith that you know your client, then deliver, deliver, deliver.” – Anne
 
Anne is able to build her list of clients by being able to relate to them personally. She combines that with some planning and information gathering and builds a product specially curated for her customers. As such, she was able to charge a premium price starting off! “It comes down to knowing your customers; I knew that if I put a higher price point and sourced products that were higher-end they would be well received and appreciated.”
 
Anne came up with an idea, a specific market that was being underserved, and created something special. She is a successful dentist and still had her doubts about trying something new! But with planning and the right strategy, she’s been able to grow her box business into something that has a bright and lucrative future!
 
You can follow Anne at: https://www.facebook.com/thebrighterlifefordentists
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review!
 
You can also check out the show website for some helpful freebies at: https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>On today’s podcast I’m joined by my friend and Launch Your Box member Anne Stuccio, creator of the Brighter Life for Dentists subscription box! We had a great conversation about what inspired her to start a box with zero e-commerce experience, and how her experience relates to some of the things we’ve discussed in our previous podcasts.</p><p> </p><p>Riches in the Niches</p><p> </p><p>Anne has been a practicing dentist for the last 20 years. In that time, she’s noticed that in her community of women dentists, after a certain point they’d start to feel burned out from putting others before themselves and weren’t enjoying being dentists like they had when they started out. Anne saw the opportunity to develop gift ideas to help reignite their passion and remind them what they loved about their profession in the first place. By targeting this specific niche, Anne could bring the most impact she could with her product and service.</p><p> </p><p>“You have to have faith in yourself, and you have to have faith that you know your client, then deliver, deliver, deliver.” – Anne</p><p> </p><p>Anne is able to build her list of clients by being able to relate to them personally. She combines that with some planning and information gathering and builds a product specially curated for her customers. As such, she was able to charge a premium price starting off! “It comes down to knowing your customers; I knew that if I put a higher price point and sourced products that were higher-end they would be well received and appreciated.”</p><p> </p><p>Anne came up with an idea, a specific market that was being underserved, and created something special. She is a successful dentist and still had her doubts about trying something new! But with planning and the right strategy, she’s been able to grow her box business into something that has a bright and lucrative future!</p><p> </p><p>You can follow Anne at: https://www.facebook.com/thebrighterlifefordentists</p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review!</p><p> </p><p>You can also check out the show website for some helpful freebies at: https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1591</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[01ac7e09-1b2a-4351-9382-0d186731a810]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO6346343655.mp3?updated=1701787293" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>002: Why Should I Start a Subscription Box?</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/002-top-5-reasons-to-start-a-subscription-box</link>
      <description>Why should I start a subscription box? This might be a question that you’ve been asking yourself and today I’m going to give you a few reasons why you should!
 
On the last episode, I talked about my journey to starting my subscription box, which was mainly for two reasons. Number one, I wanted to create a VIP experience for my regular customers and number two, I wanted to create financial stability in this roller-coaster world we call the e-commerce industry.
 
Those were my reasons, but what about you? What are some upsides and benefits that you might not have considered when thinking about if starting a box is for you? Well, here are my top 5 reasons why you should start a subscription box.
 
Subscription Boxes are Convenient, Trendy, and Fun
 
Research shows that households on average subscribe to at least three monthly or quarterly subscriptions. They do this so they can keep up with the latest trends and because it’s convenient to have them delivered instead of having to run out to the store.
 
Riches are in the Niches
 
Find your area of expertise and run with it. Having a targeted niche that you can excel in can make you the go-to expert in that area and help you develop a following that builds upon itself.
 
No investor? No problem!
 
You don’t need a lot of money to get started. If you’ve spent time developing your idea and building on pre-sales, you can use that to get your first launch out. The value you build is going to be in yourself and your idea, not in fancy boxes or rushed launches.
 
Two words: Recurring Revenue
 
Y’all, there is no better revenue than recurring revenue. A business built off of subscription means having steady revenue coming in every month. Having the peace of mind that steady revenue can build is invaluable.
 
The Product is already Sold!
 
With subscription boxes, there is no need to keep more inventory than you need. There’s no need to stress about what’s going to sell when buying inventory. The items you’ve chosen already have homes you’re sending them to!
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review!
 
You can also check out my website for some helpful freebies at: https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Feb 2021 06:10:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Why Should I Start a Subscription Box?</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>2</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d079f934-b0bf-11ed-b273-d7a7a3b0a1c1/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Why should I start a subscription box? This might be a question that you’ve been asking yourself and today I’m going to give you a few reasons why you should!   On the last episode, I talked about my journey to starting my subscription box,...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Why should I start a subscription box? This might be a question that you’ve been asking yourself and today I’m going to give you a few reasons why you should!
 
On the last episode, I talked about my journey to starting my subscription box, which was mainly for two reasons. Number one, I wanted to create a VIP experience for my regular customers and number two, I wanted to create financial stability in this roller-coaster world we call the e-commerce industry.
 
Those were my reasons, but what about you? What are some upsides and benefits that you might not have considered when thinking about if starting a box is for you? Well, here are my top 5 reasons why you should start a subscription box.
 
Subscription Boxes are Convenient, Trendy, and Fun
 
Research shows that households on average subscribe to at least three monthly or quarterly subscriptions. They do this so they can keep up with the latest trends and because it’s convenient to have them delivered instead of having to run out to the store.
 
Riches are in the Niches
 
Find your area of expertise and run with it. Having a targeted niche that you can excel in can make you the go-to expert in that area and help you develop a following that builds upon itself.
 
No investor? No problem!
 
You don’t need a lot of money to get started. If you’ve spent time developing your idea and building on pre-sales, you can use that to get your first launch out. The value you build is going to be in yourself and your idea, not in fancy boxes or rushed launches.
 
Two words: Recurring Revenue
 
Y’all, there is no better revenue than recurring revenue. A business built off of subscription means having steady revenue coming in every month. Having the peace of mind that steady revenue can build is invaluable.
 
The Product is already Sold!
 
With subscription boxes, there is no need to keep more inventory than you need. There’s no need to stress about what’s going to sell when buying inventory. The items you’ve chosen already have homes you’re sending them to!
 
Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review!
 
You can also check out my website for some helpful freebies at: https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Why should I start a subscription box? This might be a question that you’ve been asking yourself and today I’m going to give you a few reasons why you should!</p><p> </p><p>On the last episode, I talked about my journey to starting my subscription box, which was mainly for two reasons. Number one, I wanted to create a VIP experience for my regular customers and number two, I wanted to create financial stability in this roller-coaster world we call the e-commerce industry.</p><p> </p><p>Those were my reasons, but what about you? What are some upsides and benefits that you might not have considered when thinking about if starting a box is for you? Well, here are my top 5 reasons why you should start a subscription box.</p><p> </p><ol><li>Subscription Boxes are Convenient, Trendy, and Fun</li></ol><p> </p><p>Research shows that households on average subscribe to at least three monthly or quarterly subscriptions. They do this so they can keep up with the latest trends and because it’s convenient to have them delivered instead of having to run out to the store.</p><p> </p><ol><li>Riches are in the Niches</li></ol><p> </p><p>Find your area of expertise and run with it. Having a targeted niche that you can excel in can make you the go-to expert in that area and help you develop a following that builds upon itself.</p><p> </p><ol><li>No investor? No problem!</li></ol><p> </p><p>You don’t need a lot of money to get started. If you’ve spent time developing your idea and building on pre-sales, you can use that to get your first launch out. The value you build is going to be in yourself and your idea, not in fancy boxes or rushed launches.</p><p> </p><ol><li>Two words: Recurring Revenue</li></ol><p> </p><p>Y’all, there is no better revenue than recurring revenue. A business built off of subscription means having steady revenue coming in every month. Having the peace of mind that steady revenue can build is invaluable.</p><p> </p><ol><li>The Product is already Sold!</li></ol><p> </p><p>With subscription boxes, there is no need to keep more inventory than you need. There’s no need to stress about what’s going to sell when buying inventory. The items you’ve chosen already have homes you’re sending them to!</p><p> </p><p>Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review!</p><p> </p><p>You can also check out my website for some helpful freebies at: <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1140</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[a07b1960-4574-44ea-8009-2afb46cd8a64]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO7948874264.mp3?updated=1701787342" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>001: Sarah's Subscription Box Journey - How I Launched a Subscription Box, Built a Thriving Business, and Changed My Life</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/001-sarahs-story-how-i-launched-a-subscription-box-built-a-thriving-business-and-changed-my-life</link>
      <description>Launch Your Box Podcast Episode 1 Show Notes
 
Welcome to the first episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast! My name is Sarah Williams, founder of the Framed Monogram Box and new host of this podcast! I’m so excited to start sharing some of the things I’ve learned over the years and to help you learn some tips, tricks and strategies to help you get started on your own subscription box!
 
“The process doesn’t always start with a grand scale.”
 
All entrepreneurs have different stories of how they began their journey. When I started out, I left a corporate retail job to start my own retail space where I could have more freedom and opportunity to make success on my own. The one thing that is common, the thing that holds everyone back is fear: I was terrified of giving up my regular paycheck. I think that’s something we all fear!
 
“My mantra is: I’m not afraid of failing, I’m afraid of not trying.”
 
Ask yourself: what happens if I succeed? I set out to have a brick-and-mortar space that I could work out of. I didn’t even have an online store! Where I found my passion was with my regular customers and an idea of how I could create a VIP experience for them. Today, I ship thousands of subscription boxes to my customers across the country.
 
Being open to what it means to succeed can be just as important as taking that first step. What success means for you may not be what success means for everyone else. It takes putting yourself out there, doing it, and just keep getting better at it.
 
I can’t wait to share my story with all of you and ideas to help you get started on your own subscription box idea! Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review!
 
You can also check out the show website for some helpful freebies at: https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Feb 2021 06:00:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Sarah's Subscription Box Journey - How I Launched a Subscription Box, Built a Thriving Business, and Changed My Life</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:season>1</itunes:season>
      <itunes:episode>1</itunes:episode>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d08f8cae-b0bf-11ed-b273-effd2ef51bda/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>Launch Your Box Podcast Episode 1 Show Notes   Welcome to the first episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast! My name is Sarah Williams, founder of the Framed Monogram Box and new host of this podcast! I’m so excited to start sharing some of the...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>Launch Your Box Podcast Episode 1 Show Notes
 
Welcome to the first episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast! My name is Sarah Williams, founder of the Framed Monogram Box and new host of this podcast! I’m so excited to start sharing some of the things I’ve learned over the years and to help you learn some tips, tricks and strategies to help you get started on your own subscription box!
 
“The process doesn’t always start with a grand scale.”
 
All entrepreneurs have different stories of how they began their journey. When I started out, I left a corporate retail job to start my own retail space where I could have more freedom and opportunity to make success on my own. The one thing that is common, the thing that holds everyone back is fear: I was terrified of giving up my regular paycheck. I think that’s something we all fear!
 
“My mantra is: I’m not afraid of failing, I’m afraid of not trying.”
 
Ask yourself: what happens if I succeed? I set out to have a brick-and-mortar space that I could work out of. I didn’t even have an online store! Where I found my passion was with my regular customers and an idea of how I could create a VIP experience for them. Today, I ship thousands of subscription boxes to my customers across the country.
 
Being open to what it means to succeed can be just as important as taking that first step. What success means for you may not be what success means for everyone else. It takes putting yourself out there, doing it, and just keep getting better at it.
 
I can’t wait to share my story with all of you and ideas to help you get started on your own subscription box idea! Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review!
 
You can also check out the show website for some helpful freebies at: https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/

Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams

﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Launch Your Box Podcast Episode 1 Show Notes</p><p> </p><p>Welcome to the first episode of the Launch Your Box Podcast! My name is Sarah Williams, founder of the Framed Monogram Box and new host of this podcast! I’m so excited to start sharing some of the things I’ve learned over the years and to help you learn some tips, tricks and strategies to help you get started on your own subscription box!</p><p> </p><p>“The process doesn’t always start with a grand scale.”</p><p> </p><p>All entrepreneurs have different stories of how they began their journey. When I started out, I left a corporate retail job to start my own retail space where I could have more freedom and opportunity to make success on my own. The one thing that is common, the thing that holds everyone back is fear: I was terrified of giving up my regular paycheck. I think that’s something we all fear!</p><p> </p><p>“My mantra is: I’m not afraid of failing, I’m afraid of not trying.”</p><p> </p><p>Ask yourself: what happens if I succeed? I set out to have a brick-and-mortar space that I could work out of. I didn’t even have an online store! Where I found my passion was with my regular customers and an idea of how I could create a VIP experience for them. Today, I ship thousands of subscription boxes to my customers across the country.</p><p> </p><p>Being open to what it means to succeed can be just as important as taking that first step. What success means for you may not be what success means for everyone else. It takes putting yourself out there, doing it, and just keep getting better at it.</p><p> </p><p>I can’t wait to share my story with all of you and ideas to help you get started on your own subscription box idea! Remember to subscribe to the podcast on your favorite podcast provider, as well as leave a 5-star rating and a review!</p><p> </p><p>You can also check out the show website for some helpful freebies at: <a href="https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/">https://www.launchyourboxwithsarah.com/</a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Get 30 Days FREE when you switch to Subbly: </strong><a href="https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams"><strong>https://join.subbly.co/sarah-williams</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><strong>﻿Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>1157</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[fc9ec271-6b29-4f45-9e5a-46570845636c]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO1112582371.mp3?updated=1701787349" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Welcome to the Launch Your Box Podcast with Sarah Williams</title>
      <link>http://launchyourbox.libsyn.com/welcome-to-the-launch-your-box-podcast-with-sarah-williams</link>
      <description>5 years ago I had a dream to start a Subscription Box service full of goodies for women to treat themselves and nurture the importance of self care. It took me a full 18 months to make it happen! I was paralyzed by ‘all the things’ I had to figure out with no one to turn to for guidance.
That is why I created Launch Your Box!
Maybe you need some direction on how to begin, or you are ready to grow your subscriber base. Either way, it all starts with an idea that can turn into a constant reoccurring revenue, a raving fan base, and a business to love.
I will help you...
Take your first steps and know where to start. Figuring out the logistics: packing, shipping, boxes, oh my! Learn how to launch, from idea to sales. Scale that box to the next level, go big or go home!

Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 09 Feb 2021 19:45:00 -0000</pubDate>
      <itunes:title>Welcome to the Launch Your Box Podcast with Sarah Williams</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>trailer</itunes:episodeType>
      <itunes:author>Sarah Williams</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://megaphone.imgix.net/podcasts/d0a4588c-b0bf-11ed-b273-8f98eb310742/image/The_Launch_Your_Box_Podcast_with_Sarah_Williams_2.png?ixlib=rails-4.3.1&amp;max-w=3000&amp;max-h=3000&amp;fit=crop&amp;auto=format,compress"/>
      <itunes:subtitle>5 years ago I had a dream to start a Subscription Box service full of goodies for women to treat themselves and nurture the importance of self care. It took me a full 18 months to make it happen! I was paralyzed by ‘all the things’ I had to figure...</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:summary>5 years ago I had a dream to start a Subscription Box service full of goodies for women to treat themselves and nurture the importance of self care. It took me a full 18 months to make it happen! I was paralyzed by ‘all the things’ I had to figure out with no one to turn to for guidance.
That is why I created Launch Your Box!
Maybe you need some direction on how to begin, or you are ready to grow your subscriber base. Either way, it all starts with an idea that can turn into a constant reoccurring revenue, a raving fan base, and a business to love.
I will help you...
Take your first steps and know where to start. Figuring out the logistics: packing, shipping, boxes, oh my! Learn how to launch, from idea to sales. Scale that box to the next level, go big or go home!

Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at https://www.boxup.com/ to get 10% off your first order</itunes:summary>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>5 years ago I had a dream to start a Subscription Box service full of goodies for women to treat themselves and nurture the importance of self care. It took me a full 18 months to make it happen! I was paralyzed by ‘all the things’ I had to figure out with no one to turn to for guidance.</p><p>That is why I created Launch Your Box!</p><p>Maybe you need some direction on how to begin, or you are ready to grow your subscriber base. Either way, it all starts with an idea that can turn into a constant reoccurring revenue, a raving fan base, and a business to love.</p><p>I will help you...</p><p>Take your first steps and know where to start. Figuring out the logistics: packing, shipping, boxes, oh my! Learn how to launch, from idea to sales. Scale that box to the next level, go big or go home!</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Use code LAUNCHWELCOME at </strong><a href="https://www.boxup.com/"><strong>https://www.boxup.com/</strong></a><strong> to get 10% off your first order</strong></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <itunes:duration>188</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
      <guid isPermaLink="false"><![CDATA[ae0443b3-aa40-4121-8df8-488ce2ce4c7e]]></guid>
      <enclosure url="https://traffic.megaphone.fm/DMXPO4920584544.mp3?updated=1701787367" length="0" type="audio/mpeg"/>
    </item>
  </channel>
</rss>
